The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My WebLink AboutC2023-152 - 7/25/2023 - Approved DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 o� v "4 nP �a�° 1852 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement, for the Project awarded on July 25, 2023, is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner) and Weaver and Jacobs Constructors, Inc. (Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1—WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: Corpus Christi Fire Station 3 Proiect Number: 21085 ARTICLE 2—DESIGNER AND OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: Brown Reynolds Watford Architects 175 Century Square Dr,Suite 350 College Station,TX 77840 arotter@brwarch.com 2.02 The Owner's Authorized Representative for this Project is: Brett Van Hazel 4917 Holly Road Bldg.#5 Corpus Christi,TX 78411 brettvh@cctexas.com ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Work is required to be substantially completed within 365 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the Notice to Proceed and is to be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions within 395 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. B. Performance of the Work is required as shown in Paragraph 7.02 of the General Conditions. Agreement 005223-1 Corpus Christi Fire Station 3; Project Number 21085 Rev 12/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Milestones,and the dates for completion of each,are as defined in Section 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. 3.02 Liquidated Damages A. Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay(but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner$400 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner$400 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4. Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. 5. The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B. Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4—CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached BID FORM. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. Total Base Bid Price $ 10,223,414.00 ARTICLE 5—PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 17 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the OAR as provided in the General Conditions. Agreement 005223-2 Corpus Christi Fire Station 3; Project Number 21085 Rev 12/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A. The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. B. Progress payments equal to the full amount of the total earned value to date for completed Work minus the retainage listed below and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. 1. The standard retainage is 5 percent. C. Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.13, less the total of payments previously made and less set-offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions. D. At the Owner's option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR's estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6—INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. Invoices must comply with Article 17 of the General Conditions. 6.02 Except as specified in Article 5, the Owner is not obligated to pay interest on moneys not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A. The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. C. The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site-related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; Agreement 005223-3 Corpus Christi Fire Station 3; Project Number 21085 Rev 12/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; 3. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E. The Contractor has considered the: 1. Information known to Contractor, 2. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and 4. The Contract Documents. F. The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.D and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and 3. Contractor's safety precautions and programs. G. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H. The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. I. The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. J. The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents,and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. K. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. L. Contractor's entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractorthat without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. M. CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER'S INDEMNITEES IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARAGRAPH 7.14 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AND THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. Agreement 005223-4 Corpus Christi Fire Station 3; Project Number 21085 Rev 12/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 ARTICLE 8—ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability: The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice,the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor's records,books, correspondence, instructions,drawings, receipts,vouchers,memoranda,and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor's fee. The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. ARTICLE 9—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. Solicitation documents. 2. Specifications, forms, and documents listed in SECTION 00 0100 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 3. Drawings listed in the Sheet Index. 4. Addenda. 5. Exhibits to this Agreement: a. Contractor's Bid Form. b. Include Wastewater CD Exhibit if Project pertains to SSO CD work. C. List others as necessary. 6. Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. Agreement 005223-5 Corpus Christi Fire Station 3; Project Number 21085 Rev 12/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 ARTICLE 10—CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES ATTEST CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI DocuSigned by. DocuSigned by: 8/9/2023 8/9/2023 &A2Rbl 'a e try E�r�fids, P.E City Secretary Director of Engineering Services Res. 033114 AUTHORIZED 7/25/2023 APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: BY COUNCIL FJ DocuS igned by: DS (Q" 8/9/2023 Assistant ity Attorney ATTEST(IF CORPORATION) CONTRACTOR DocuSigned by: E i�M �Wbs 8/7/2023 880660155469405... (Seal Below) By: Brant Jacobs Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if Title: President person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President, Vice President, Chief Executive Officer, or Chief 301 Cooperative Way Financial Officer Address Cuero Texas 77954 City State Zip 361-277-9300 Phone Fax byjacobs@weaverandjacobs.com Email END OF SECTION Agreement 005223-6 Corpus Christi Fire Station 3; Project Number 21085 Rev 12/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 BID FORM Project Fire Station No. 3 Name: Project 21085 Number: Owner: City of Corpus Christi OAR: Brett Van Hazel Designer: BRW Architects By its signature below, Bidder accepts all of the terms and conditions of the Bid Acknowledgement, acknowledges receipt of all Addenda to the Bid and agrees, if this Bid is accepted,to enter into a Contract with the Owner and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for the Bid price. Bidder: Weaver and Jacobs Constructors,Inc. (full legal name of Bidder) Signature: (signature of person with authority to bind the Bidder) Name: Brant Jacobs (printed name of person signing Bid Form) Title: President (title of person signing Bid Form) Attest: (signature) State of Residency: Texas Federal Tx ID No. 26-0036919 Address for Notices: 301 Cooperative Way Cuero,TX 77954 Phone: 361-277-9300 Email: byjacobs@weaverandjacobs.com Bid Form Page 1 of 3 Fire Station No. 3; Project#21085 Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Report Created On:6/28/2023 8:08:51 PM BID TOTALS BASE BID Total Base Bid $9,866,400.00 Total $9,866,400.00 ALTERNATE 1 Total Alternate 1 $247,060.00 Total $247,060.00 ALTERNATE 2 Total Alternate 2 $89,954.00 Total $89,954.00 ALTERNATE 3 Total Alternate 3 $20,000.00 Total $20,000.00 Base Bid No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price Al Mobilization (Maximum 5%) LS 1 $175,000.00 $175,000.00 A2 Division 03-Concrete LS 1 $1,168,920.00 $1,168,920.00 A3 Division 04-Masonry LS 1 $666,985.00 $666,985.00 A4 Division 05-Metals LS 1 $873,975.00 $873,975.00 A5 Division 06-Wood and Plastic LS 1 $172,328.00 $172,328.00 A6 Division 07-Thermal &Moisture LS 1 $1,046,494.00 $1,046,494.00 Protection A7 Division 08-Openings LS 1 $1,137,993.00 $1,137,993.00 A8 Division 09-Finishes LS 1 $707,414.00 $707,414.00 A9 Division 10-Specialties LS 1 $176,147.00 $176,147.00 A10 Division 11 -Equipment LS 1 $21,213.00 $21,213.00 All Division 12-Furnishings LS 1 $13,203.00 $13,203.00 Al2 Division 14-Conveying Equipment LS 1 $115,500.00 $115,500.00 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Report Created On:6/28/2023 8:08:51 PM A13 Division 21 -Fire Suppression LS 1 $54,964.00 $54,964.00 A14 Division 22-Plumbing LS 1 $621,500.00 $621,500.00 A15 Division 23-Heating,Ventilating, &Air LS 1 $707,096.00 $707,096.00 Conditioning A16 Division 26-Electrical LS 1 $867,568.00 $867,568.00 A17 Division 27-Communications LS 1 $51,975.00 $51,975.00 A18 Division 28-Electronic Safety and LS 1 $114,138.00 $114,138.00 Security A19 Division 31 -Earthwork LS 1 $162,267.00 $162,267.00 A20 Division 32-Exterior Improvements LS 1 $100,945.00 $100,945.00 A21 Division 33-Utilities LS 1 $170,775.00 $170,775.00 B1 Bonds and Insurance LS 1 $240,000.00 $240,000.00 B2 Allowance for Unforseen Conditions LS 1 $500,000.00 $500,000.00 Subtotal: $9,866,400.00 Alternate 1 No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price C1 Generator with enclosure LS 1 $206,360.00 $206,360.00 C2 Generator concrete pad and screen wall LS 1 $22,000.00 $22,000.00 C3 Automatic Transfer Switch(ATS) LS 1 $18,700.00 $18,700.00 Subtotal: $247,060.00 Alternate 2 No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price D1 Security Fence with Gates LS 1 $89,954.00 $89,954.00 Subtotal: $89,954.00 Alternate 3 No. Description Unit Qty Unit Price Ext Price E1 Appliances LS 1 $20,000.00 $20,000.00 Subtotal: $20,000.00 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS FOR CONSTRUCTION OF FIRE STATION NO . 3 PROJECT NUMBER: 21085 (Bond 2020) R 18514 Brown Reynolds Watford Architects 175 Century Square Drive, Suite 350 College Station, TX 77840 979.694.1791 Record Drawing Number PBG-904 CONFORMED SET DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 000100 TABLE OF CONTENTS Note to Specifier: Verify that the Table of Contents includes all Specification Sections and Appendices that are part of the Contract Documents. Division/ Title Section Division 00 Preface Documents 00 00 00 Cover Sheet 000100 Table of Contents 000101 Seals Page (Optional) 000102 List of Drawings Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements 00 52 23 Agreement (Rev 12-2021) 00 72 00 General Conditions(Rev6-2021) 00 73 00 Supplementary Conditions(Rev4-2022) Division 01 General Requirements 011100 Summary of Work(Rev 10-2018) 01 23 10 Alternates and Allowances(Rev 5-2020) 01 29 01 Measurement and Basis for Payment (Rev5-2020) 01 33 01 Submittal Register(Rev 10-2018) 01 35 00 Special Procedures(Rev 10-2018) 01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls(Rev 8-2019) 01 57 00 Temporary Controls(Rev8-2019) PART T Technical Specifications 01 25 00 Substitution Procedures 01 26 00 Contract Modification Procedures 01 29 00 Payment Procedures 013100 Project Management and Coordination 01 32 00 Construction Progress Documentation 01 32 33 Photographic Documentation 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures 014000 Quality Requirements 014200 Reference Standards Table of Contents 000100-1 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT#21085 Rev 1/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Division/ Title Section 014339 Mockups 01 60 00 Product Requirements 01 73 00 Execution 01 74 19 Construction Waste Management 01 77 00 Closeout Procedures 0177 OOA Substantial Completion Checklist 01 78 23 Operations and Maintenance 01 78 39 Project Record Documents 01 79 00 Demonstration and Training 01 91 13 General Commissioning Requirements Fundamental Division 02 Existing Conditions 02 4100.10 Sidewalks Division 03 Concrete 031100 Concrete Formwork 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete 03 35 36 Polished Concrete Floor Finishing Division 04 Masonry 04 20 00 Unit Masonry Assemblies 04 72 00 Cast Stone Masonry Division 05 Metals 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 052100 Steel Joist Framing 05 22 00 Structural Steel Decking 05 40 00 Cold Formed Metal Framing 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 05 51 13 Metal Pan Stairs 05 52 00 Handrails and Railings Table of Contents 000100-2 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT#21085 Rev 1/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Division/ Title Section Division 06 Wood, Plastic,and Composites 06 16 00 Sheathing 06 40 23 Interior Architectural Woodwork 066140 Quartz Countertops and Fabrications Division 07 Thermal and Moisture Protection 07 11 13 Bituminous Dampproofing 07 13 26 Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing 072100 Thermal Insulation 07 26 00 Vapor Barrier Membrane 07 27 13 Modified Bituminous Sheet Air Barrier 07 27 19 Plastic Film Air Barrier 07 40 00 Metal Roof 07 42 13.1 Metal Wall Panels 1 07 42 13.2 Metal Wall Panels 2 07 46 46 Mineral-Fiber Cement Soffit 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 077100 Roof Specialties 07 72 00 Roof Accessories 078100 Applied Fireproofing 07 84 13 Penetration Firestopping 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 07 95 00 Expansion Control Division 08 Doors and Windows 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 14 16 Flush Wood Doors 08 31 13 Access Doors and Panels 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 08 35 13 Electric Operated Four-Fold Doors 08 41 13 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 08 42 13 Wind and Impact Resistant Aluminum Framing System 08 45 13 Translucent Wall Assemblies Table of Contents 000100-3 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT#21085 Rev 1/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Division/ Title Section 085100 Metal Windows 087100 Door Hardware 08 80 00 Glazing 08 90 00 Louvers and Vents Division 09 Finishes 092100 Gypsum Board Assemblies 09 22 16 Non-Structural Metal Framing 09 30 13 Ceramic Tiling 095100 Acoustical Ceilings 09 65 13 Resilient Base and Accessories 09 65 19 Luxury Vinyl Tile (LVT) 09 65 66 Athletic Rubber Flooring 098100 Acoustic Insulation 09 84 00 Acoustical Room Components 099100 Painting Division 10 Specialties 10 14 00 Signage 10 26 13 Wall and Corner Protection 10 28 13 Toilet Accessories 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties 10S143 Turnout Gear Lockers 10 56 23 Stainless Steel Shelving 10 73 16 Prefabricated Aluminum Canopies 10 75 00 Flagpoles Division 11 Equipment 113100 Residential Appliances Division 12 Furnishings 12 24 01 Manual Roller Shades Table of Contents 000100-4 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT#21085 Rev 1/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Division/ Title Section Division 14 Conveying Equipment 14 24 20 Hydraulic Elevator Division 21 Fire Suppression 210000 Fire Protection General 21 30 00 Electric Fire Pump and Accessories Division 22 Plumbing 22 00 00 Plumbing General 22 08 00 Commissioning of Plumbing 22 16 00 Natural Gas Piping System 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures Division 23 Heating,Ventilating,and Air Conditioning(HVAC) 23 00 00 HVAC General 23 05 93 Testing Adjusting and Balancing 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation 23 08 00 Commissioning of HVAC Systems 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping, Insulation and Accessories 233100 Ductwork and Accessories 23 34 00 Unitary Exhaust, Supply Fans and Ventilators 23 34 01 High Volume Low Speed Ceiling Fans 23 37 00 Louvers, Grilles, Registers and Diffusers 23 72 13 100%OA Air-To-Air Energy Recovery Equipment 23 81 27 Split System (Electric Cooling, Gas Heating) 23 81 29 Variable Refrigerant Flow HVAC Systems 23 82 39 Electric Unit Heaters 23 82 39.19 Electric Wall Heaters Division 26 Electrical 26 00 00 Electrical General 26 05 19 Conductors 26 05 26 Grounding Table of Contents 000100-5 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT#21085 Rev 1/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Division/ Title Section 26 05 30 Firestopping for Electrical Systems 26 05 33 Conduit and Raceways 26 05 34 Outlet Boxes and Junction Boxes 26 05 35 Low Voltage Backboards & Enclosures 26 08 00 Commissioning of Electrical 26 09 23 Occupancy Sensors 26 24 16 Panelboards 26 27 26 Wiring Devices 26 28 16 Disconnect Switches 26 28 18 Enclosed Circuit Breakers 26 32 13 Emergency Standby Generator System 264100 Lightning Protection 26 43 13 Surge Protective Devices (Spd) 26 5100 265100 Lighting Division 27 Communications 27 00 00 Communications 27 05 10 Firestop for Comm Systems 27 05 26 Ground & Bond for Comm Systems 27 05 28 Pathways for Comm Systems 27 05 43 Underground Ducts & Raceways for Comm Systems 27 05 53 Ident For Comm Systems 27 08 00 Commissioning of Comm 27 11 13 Comm Entrance Protection 27 11 16 Comm Cabinets, Racks, Enclosures 27 11 19 Comm Termination Blocks& Patch Panels 27 11 23 Comm Cable Manage & Ladder Rack 27 11 26 Comm Rack Mounted Power Protection & Power Strips 27 15 13 Comm Copper Horizontal Cabling 27 15 23 Comm Optical Fiber Horizontal Cabling 27 15 33 Comm Coaxial Horizontal Cabling 27 15 43 Comm Faceplates & Connectors 27 16 19 Comm Patch Cords &Station Cords Table of Contents 000100-6 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT#21085 Rev 1/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Division/ Title Section 27 21 33 Wireless Access Points 27 41 13 Multi-Zone Audio 27 70 10 Surge Protective Devices Division 28 Electronic Safety and Security 28 00 00 Electronic Security 28 07 00 IP Video Surveillance System 28 13 00 Access Control System 28 16 00 Intrusion Detection 28 31 11 Fire Alarm System (Addressable) Division 31 Earthwork 31 10 00 Site Clearing 31 12 00.12 Removing of Existing Concrete 31 22 00 Earthwork 31 22 13 Site Grading 3123 13.10 Site and Parking Lot Excavation and Backfill 3123 16.16 Structural Excavation and Backfill 31 23 23 Site Excavation and Fill 31 23 23.23 Compacted Embankment 31 23 23.10 Pipe Trench Excavation and Backfill 31 25 00 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan 31 25 53 Soil Erosion and Sediment Control 31 31 16 Termite Treatment 31 32 13 Lime Soil Stabilization 31 32 23 Water and Lime Pressure Injection 31 63 29 Drilled Concrete Piers and Shafts Division 32 Exterior Improvements 32 11 33.13 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 32 13 13 Concrete Paving 32 16 00.10 Removal and Replacing Sidewalks 32 16 13.20 Concrete Block Curb Table of Contents 000100-7 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT#21085 Rev 1/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Division/ Title Section 32 16 23 Concrete Sidewalk and Concrete Driveway 32 16 33.10 Concrete Driveway 32 17 23 Pavement Markings 32 31 19 Decorative Metal Fences and Gates 32 31 29 Wood Fencing 32 35 13 Screens and Louvers 32 84 00 Planting Irrigation 32 90 00 Landscaping 32 92 00 Turf and Grasses Division 33 Utilities 33 05 05.10 Installation Of Water Pipe 33 05 05.10 Installation of PVC Sewer Pipe 33 05 05.31 Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure System 33 05 19 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings (Water Lines) 33 05 31.16 Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Fittings (C900 &C905) 33 05 39.41 Reinforced Concrete Pipe 33 05 76 Sanitary Sewer Manholes (Fiberglass) 33 06 00 Utility Services 33 14 19.13 Fire Hydrants 33 14 18 Backflow Preventer 33 14 19.1 Gate Valves for Portable Water Lines 33 31 11 Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Fittings for Sewer Lines (SDR 26) Appendix Testing Reports 1 Geotechnical Report END OF SECTION Table of Contents 000100-8 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT#21085 Rev 1/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 0001 01 SEALS PAGE A. ARCHITECT: IT Brown Reynolds Watford Architects, Inc. Ray Holliday, AIA, ASLA, APA, LI, Principal 175 Century Square Drive,Suite 350 (P 18831% College Station,TX 77840 979.694.1791 F OF 05/02/2023 -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ovt CIVIL ENGINEER: "" w ''` ►�, Urban Engineering >"fNODE,A ° iJ�BA° 2725 Swantner Drive ' . M Corpus Christi,TX 78404 l�-any. UrCrO�i 361.854.3101 -------------------------------------------------------------------- -------- OF re 11 °°° STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: Gessner Engineering, LLC * ° Nikolas A. Gomes, P.E. °� Via. °° . 401 West 261" Street,Suite 3 t°®« °« .. N°°J.. . Bryan,TX 77803 f -0%° 1 41 17 4 ° 979.680.$$40 ° �'��°° /CENBt l�� 0 A� MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL/PLUMBING ENGINEER: Jordan &Skala Engineers j •'« Christopher Claudet, P.E., LEED AP 10375 Richmond Avenue,Suite 300 "«««««««««««Y. � Houston,TX 77042 RISTOPHER J. CLAUDET.. 2$1.617.3200 /� 104587 .,«�/Cd:M'S �«*- 0*00 END OF SECTION Fire Station No. 3 Project Number 21085 1 of 1 0001 01 Rev 1/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 0 x855 00 52 23 AGREEMENT This Agreement, for the Project awarded on [insert Award Date], is between the City of Corpus Christi (Owner) and (Contractor). Owner and Contractor agree as follows: ARTICLE 1—WORK 1.01 Contractor shall complete all Work as specified or indicated in the Contract Documents. The Work is generally described as: Corpus Christi Fire Station 3 Proiect Number: 21085 ARTICLE 2—DESIGNER AND OWNER'S AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE 2.01 The Project has been designed by: Brown Reynolds Watford Architects 175 Century Square Dr,Suite 350 College Station,TX 77840 arotter@brwarch.com 2.02 The Owner's Authorized Representative for this Project is: Brett Van Hazel 4917 Holly Road Bldg.#5 Corpus Christi,TX 78411 brettvh@cctexas.com ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT TIMES 3.01 Contract Times A. The Work is required to be substantially completed within 365 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run as provided in the Notice to Proceed and is to be completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions within 395 days after the date when the Contract Times commence to run. B. Performance of the Work is required as shown in Paragraph 7.02 of the General Conditions. Agreement 005223- 1 Corpus Christi Fire Station 3; Project Number 21085 Rev 12/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Milestones,and the dates for completion of each,are as defined in Section 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. 3.02 Liquidated Damages A. Owner and Contractor recognize that time limits for specified Milestones, Substantial Completion, and completion and readiness for Final Payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. Owner and Contractor recognize that the Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified in Paragraph 3.01 and as adjusted in accordance with Paragraph 11.05 of the General Conditions. Owner and Contractor also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof,Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty): 1. Substantial Completion: Contractor shall pay Owner$400 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for Substantial Completion until the Work is substantially complete. 2. Completion of the Remaining Work: Contractor agrees to pay Owner$400 for each day that expires after the time specified in Paragraph 3.01 for completion and readiness for final payment until the Work is completed and ready for final payment in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions. 3. Liquidated damages for failing to timely attain Substantial Completion and Final Completion are not additive and will not be imposed concurrently. 4. Milestones: Contractor agrees to pay Owner liquidated damages as stipulated in SECTION 0135 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES for failure to meet Milestone completions. 5. The Owner will determine whether the Work has been completed within the Contract Times. B. Owner is not required to only assess liquidated damages, and Owner may elect to pursue its actual damages resulting from the failure of Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 4—CONTRACT PRICE 4.01 Owner will pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents at the unit prices shown in the attached BID FORM. Unit prices have been computed in accordance with Paragraph 15.03 of the General Conditions. Contractor acknowledges that estimated quantities are not guaranteed, and were solely for the purpose of comparing Bids, and final payment for all unit price items will be based on actual quantities, determined as provided in the Contract Documents. Total Base Bid Price $ ARTICLE 5—PAYMENT PROCEDURES 5.01 Submit Applications for Payment in accordance with Article 17 of the General Conditions. Applications for Payment will be processed by the OAR as provided in the General Conditions. Agreement 005223-2 Corpus Christi Fire Station 3; Project Number 21085 Rev 12/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 5.02 Progress Payments; Retainage: A. The Owner will make progress payments on or about the 25th day of each month during performance of the Work. Payment is based on Work completed in accordance with the Schedule of Values established as provided in the General Conditions. B. Progress payments equal to the full amount of the total earned value to date for completed Work minus the retainage listed below and properly stored materials will be made prior to Substantial Completion. 1. The standard retainage is 5 percent. C. Payment will be made for the amount determined per Paragraph 5.02.13, less the total of payments previously made and less set-offs determined in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions. D. At the Owner's option, Owner may pay Contractor 100 percent of the Work completed, less amounts withheld in accordance with Paragraph 17.01 of the General Conditions and less 200 percent of OAR's estimate of the value of Work to be completed or corrected to reach Substantial Completion. Owner may, at its sole discretion, elect to hold retainage in the amounts set forth above for progress payments prior to Substantial Completion if Owner has concerns with the ability of the Contractor to complete the remaining Work in accordance with the Contract Documents or within the time frame established by this Agreement. Release or reduction in retainage is contingent upon and consent of surety to the reduction in retainage. 5.03 Owner will pay the remainder of the Contract Price as recommended by OAR in accordance with Paragraph 17.16 of the General Conditions upon Final Completion and acceptance of the Work. ARTICLE 6—INTEREST ON OVERDUE PAYMENTS AND RETAINAGE 6.01 The Owner is not obligated to pay interest on overdue payments except as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2251. Invoices must comply with Article 17 of the General Conditions. 6.02 Except as specified in Article 5, the Owner is not obligated to pay interest on moneys not paid except as provided in Texas Government Code Chapter 2252. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIONS 7.01 The Contractor makes the following representations: A. The Contractor has examined and carefully studied the Contract Documents and the other related data identified in the Bidding Documents. B. The Contractor has visited the Site and become familiar with and is satisfied as to the general, local, and Site conditions that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. C. The Contractor is familiar with Laws and Regulations that may affect cost, progress, and performance of the Work. D. The Contractor has carefully studied the following Site-related reports and drawings as identified in the Supplementary Conditions: 1. Geotechnical Data Reports regarding subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; Agreement 005223-3 Corpus Christi Fire Station 3; Project Number 21085 Rev 12/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site; 3. Underground Facilities referenced in reports and drawings; 4. Reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions, if any, at or adjacent to the Site; and 5. Technical Data related to each of these reports and drawings. E. The Contractor has considered the: 1. Information known to Contractor; 2. Information commonly known to contractors doing business in the locality of the Site; 3. Information and observations obtained from visits to the Site; and 4. The Contract Documents. F. The Contractor has considered the items identified in Paragraphs 7.01.D and 7.01.E with respect to the effect of such information, observations, and documents on: 1. The cost, progress, and performance of the Work; 2. The means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor; and 3. Contractor's safety precautions and programs. G. Based on the information and observations referred to in the preceding paragraphs, Contractor agrees that no further examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, or data are necessary for the performance of the Work at the Contract Price, within the Contract Times, and in accordance with the other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. H. The Contractor is aware of the general nature of Work to be performed by Owner and others at the Site that relates to the Work as indicated in the Contract Documents. I. The Contractor has correlated the information known to the Contractor, information and observations obtained from visits to the Site, reports and drawings identified in the Contract Documents, and all additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, studies, and data with the Contract Documents. J. The Contractor has given the OAR written notice of all conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that the Contractor has discovered in the Contract Documents,and the written resolution provided by the OAR is acceptable to the Contractor. K. The Contract Documents are generally sufficient to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions for performance and furnishing of the Work. L. Contractor's entry into this Contract constitutes an incontrovertible representation by Contractorthat without exception all prices in the Agreement are premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents. M. CONTRACTOR SHALL INDEMNIFY, DEFEND AND HOLD HARMLESS THE OWNER'S INDEMNITEES IN ACCORDANCE WITH PARAGRAPH 7.14 OF THE GENERAL CONDITIONS AND THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. Agreement 005223-4 Corpus Christi Fire Station 3; Project Number 21085 Rev 12/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 ARTICLE 8—ACCOUNTING RECORDS 8.01 Accounting Record Availability: The Contractor shall keep such full and detailed accounts of materials incorporated and labor and equipment utilized for the Work consistent with the requirements of Paragraph 15.01 of the General Conditions and as may be necessary for proper financial management under this Agreement. Subject to prior written notice,the Owner shall be afforded reasonable access during normal business hours to all of the Contractor's records,books, correspondence, instructions,drawings, receipts,vouchers, memoranda,and similar data relating to the Cost of the Work and the Contractor's fee. The Contractor shall preserve all such documents for a period of 3 years after the final payment by the Owner. ARTICLE 9—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.01 Contents: A. The Contract Documents consist of the following: 1. Solicitation documents. 2. Specifications, forms, and documents listed in SECTION 00 0100 TABLE OF CONTENTS. 3. Drawings listed in the Sheet Index. 4. Addenda. 5. Exhibits to this Agreement: a. Contractor's Bid Form. b. Include Wastewater CD Exhibit if Project pertains to SSO CD work. C. List others as necessary. 6. Documentation required by the Contract Documents and submitted by Contractor prior to Notice of Award. B. There are no Contract Documents other than those listed above in this Article. C. The Contract Documents may only be amended, modified, or supplemented as provided in Article 11 of the General Conditions. ARTICLE 10—CONTRACT DOCUMENT SIGNATURES ATTEST CITY OF CORPUS CHRISTI Rebecca Huerta Jeffrey Edmonds, P.E City Secretary Director of Engineering Services AUTHORIZED APPROVED AS TO LEGAL FORM: BY COUNCIL FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 /AgIee[Tie nL 005223-5 Corpus Christi Fire Station 3; Project Number 21085 Rev 12/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Assistant City Attorney ATTEST(IF CORPORATION) CONTRACTOR (Seal Below) By: Note: Attach copy of authorization to sign if Title: person signing for CONTRACTOR is not President Vice President, Chief Executive Officer, or Chief Financial Officer Address City State Zip Phone Fax EMail END OF SECTION Agreement 005223-6 Corpus Christi Fire Station 3; Project Number 21085 Rev 12/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents Page Article 1—Definitions and Terminology .....................................................................................................10 1.01 Defined Terms.............................................................................................................................10 1.02 Terminology................................................................................................................................15 Article2—Preliminary Matters...................................................................................................................16 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance.............................................................................16 2.02 Copies of Documents..................................................................................................................16 2.03 Project Management System......................................................................................................16 2.04 Before Starting Construction ......................................................................................................17 2.05 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives................................17 Article 3—Contract Documents: Intent, Requirements, Reuse.................................................................17 3.01 Intent...........................................................................................................................................17 3.02 Reference Standards...................................................................................................................18 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies......................................................................................19 3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents.................................................................................20 3.05 Reuse of Documents...................................................................................................................20 Article 4—Commencement and Progress of the Work..............................................................................20 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed.............................................................20 4.02 Starting the Work........................................................................................................................20 4.03 Progress Schedule.......................................................................................................................21 4.04 Delays in Contractor's Progress..................................................................................................21 Article 5—Availability of Lands; Subsurface and Physical Conditions; Hazardous Environmental Conditions...................................................................................................................................................22 5.01 Availability of Lands....................................................................................................................22 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas........................................................................................................22 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions............................................................................................23 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions...............................................................................24 5.05 Underground Facilities................................................................................................................25 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site .............................................................................26 Article 6—Bonds and Insurance .................................................................................................................28 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds..................................................................................28 General Conditions 007200-1 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 6.02 Licensed Sureties ........................................................................................................................29 6.03 Required Minimum Insurance Coverage....................................................................................29 6.04 General Insurance Provisions......................................................................................................29 6.05 Contractor's Insurance................................................................................................................30 6.06 Property Insurance......................................................................................................................33 6.07 Waiver of Rights..........................................................................................................................34 6.08 Owner's Insurance for Project....................................................................................................34 6.09 Acceptable Evidence of Insurance..............................................................................................35 6.10 Certificate of Insurance...............................................................................................................35 6.11 Insurance Policies........................................................................................................................35 6.12 Continuing Evidence of Coverage...............................................................................................35 6.13 Notices Regarding Insurance ......................................................................................................35 6.14 Texas Workers' Compensation Insurance Required Notice .......................................................36 Article 7-Contractor's Responsibilities.....................................................................................................38 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence..............................................................................................38 7.02 Labor; Working Hours.................................................................................................................38 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment ...........................................................................................39 7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others....................................................................39 7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties...........................................................................................................40 7.06 Permits........................................................................................................................................41 7.07 Taxes...........................................................................................................................................41 7.08 Laws and Regulations..................................................................................................................41 7.09 Safety and Protection .................................................................................................................42 7.10 Safety Representative.................................................................................................................43 7.11 Hazard Communication Programs..............................................................................................43 7.12 Emergencies................................................................................................................................43 7.13 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee .........................................................................43 7.14 INDEMNIFICATION......................................................................................................................44 7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services................................................................................45 Article 8-Other Work at the Site...............................................................................................................46 8.01 Other Work.................................................................................................................................46 8.02 Coordination ...............................................................................................................................47 8.03 Legal Relationships......................................................................................................................47 General Conditions 007200-2 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Article 9—Owner's and OPT's Responsibilities...........................................................................................48 9.01 Communications to Contractor ..................................................................................................48 9.02 Replacement of Owner's Project Team Members......................................................................48 9.03 Furnish Data................................................................................................................................48 9.04 Pay When Due.............................................................................................................................48 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests...................................................................................48 9.06 Insurance.....................................................................................................................................48 9.07 Modifications..............................................................................................................................48 9.08 Inspections,Tests, and Approvals...............................................................................................48 9.09 Limitations on OPT's Responsibilities .........................................................................................48 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition......................................................................49 9.11 Compliance with Safety Program................................................................................................49 Article 10—OAR's and Designer's Status During Construction ..................................................................49 10.01 Owner's Representative..........................................................................................................49 10.02 Visits to Site.............................................................................................................................49 10.03 Resident Project Representatives...........................................................................................49 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work........................................................................................................49 10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments.........................................................................50 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work...................50 10.07 Limitations on OAR's and Designer's Authority and Responsibilities.....................................50 Article 11—Amending the Contract Documents; Changes in the Work ....................................................50 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents.......................................................50 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work................................................................................51 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work........................................................................................51 11.04 Change of Contract Price ........................................................................................................52 11.05 Change of Contract Times.......................................................................................................52 11.06 Change Proposals....................................................................................................................52 11.07 Execution of Change Orders ...................................................................................................53 11.08 Notice to Surety......................................................................................................................54 Article 12—Change Management ..............................................................................................................54 12.01 Requests for Change Proposal................................................................................................54 12.02 Change Proposals....................................................................................................................54 12.03 Designer Will Evaluate Request for Modification...................................................................55 General Conditions 007200-3 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 12.04 Substitutions...........................................................................................................................55 Article13—Claims.......................................................................................................................................56 13.01 Claims......................................................................................................................................56 13.02 Claims Process.........................................................................................................................57 Article 14—Prevailing Wage Rate Requirements.......................................................................................58 14.01 Payment of Prevailing Wage Rates.........................................................................................58 14.02 Records....................................................................................................................................58 14.03 Liability; Penalty; Criminal Offense.........................................................................................59 14.04 Prevailing Wage Rates.............................................................................................................59 Article 15—Cost of the Work; Allowances; Unit Price Work......................................................................59 15.01 Cost of the Work.....................................................................................................................59 15.02 Allowances..............................................................................................................................63 15.03 Unit Price Work.......................................................................................................................63 15.04 Contingencies..........................................................................................................................64 Article 16—Tests and Inspections; Correction, Removal, or Acceptance of Defective Work....................65 16.01 Access to Work........................................................................................................................65 16.02 Tests, Inspections and Approvals............................................................................................65 16.03 Defective Work .......................................................................................................................65 16.04 Acceptance of Defective Work................................................................................................66 16.05 Uncovering Work....................................................................................................................66 16.06 Owner May Stop the Work.....................................................................................................67 16.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work.......................................................................................67 Article 17—Payments to Contractor; Set-Offs; Completion; Correction Period........................................67 17.01 Progress Payments..................................................................................................................67 17.02 Application for Payment.........................................................................................................69 17.03 Schedule of Values..................................................................................................................71 17.04 Schedule of Anticipated Payments and Earned Value............................................................72 17.05 Basis for Payments..................................................................................................................73 17.06 Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment.......................................................................73 17.07 Retainage and Set-Offs ...........................................................................................................74 17.08 Procedures for Submitting an Application for Payment.........................................................74 17.09 Responsibility of Owner's Authorized Representative...........................................................75 17.10 Contractor's Warranty of Title................................................................................................76 General Conditions 007200-4 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 17.11 Substantial Completion...........................................................................................................76 17.12 Partial Utilization.....................................................................................................................77 17.13 Final Inspection.......................................................................................................................77 17.14 Final Application for Payment.................................................................................................77 17.15 Final Payment..........................................................................................................................78 17.16 Waiver of Claims.....................................................................................................................78 17.17 Correction Period....................................................................................................................78 Article 18-Suspension of Work and Termination.....................................................................................79 18.01 Owner May Suspend Work.....................................................................................................79 18.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause............................................................................................79 18.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience................................................................................80 Article 19-Project Management...............................................................................................................81 19.01 Work Included.........................................................................................................................81 19.02 Quality Assurance ...................................................................................................................81 19.03 Document Submittal...............................................................................................................81 19.04 Required Permits ....................................................................................................................81 19.05 Safety Requirements...............................................................................................................82 19.06 Access to the Site....................................................................................................................82 19.07 Contractor's Use of Site..........................................................................................................82 19.08 Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities........................................................................83 19.09 Pre-Construction Exploratory Excavations..............................................................................83 19.10 Disruption of Services/Continued Operations........................................................................84 19.11 Field Measurements ...............................................................................................................84 19.12 Reference Data and Control Points.........................................................................................84 19.13 Delivery and Storage...............................................................................................................85 19.14 Cleaning During Construction.................................................................................................86 19.15 Maintenance of Roads, Driveways, and Access......................................................................86 19.16 Area Access and Traffic Control..............................................................................................87 19.17 Overhead Electrical Wires.......................................................................................................87 19.18 Blasting....................................................................................................................................87 19.19 Archeological Requirements...................................................................................................87 19.20 Endangered Species Resources...............................................................................................88 19.21 Cooperation with Public Agencies..........................................................................................88 General Conditions 007200-5 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Article 20—Project Coordination................................................................................................................88 20.01 Work Included.........................................................................................................................88 20.02 Document Submittal...............................................................................................................88 20.03 Communication During Project...............................................................................................89 20.04 Project Meetings.....................................................................................................................89 20.05 Requests for Information........................................................................................................91 20.06 Decision and Action Item Log..................................................................................................91 20.07 Notification By Contractor......................................................................................................92 20.08 Record Documents..................................................................................................................92 Article 21—Quality Management...............................................................................................................94 21.01 Contractor's Responsibilities ..................................................................................................94 21.02 Quality Management Activities by OPT..................................................................................95 21.03 Contractor's Use of OPT's Test Reports..................................................................................96 21.04 Documentation .......................................................................................................................96 21.05 Standards................................................................................................................................97 21.06 Delivery and Storage...............................................................................................................97 21.07 Verification Testing for Corrected Defects..............................................................................97 21.08 Test Reports............................................................................................................................97 21.09 Defective Work .......................................................................................................................98 21.10 Limitation of Authority of Testing Laboratory........................................................................98 21.11 Quality Control Plan................................................................................................................98 21.12 Implement Contractor's Quality Control Plan ......................................................................100 Article 22—Final Resolution of Disputes..................................................................................................101 22.01 Senior Level Negotiations .....................................................................................................101 22.02 Mediation..............................................................................................................................101 Article 23—Minority/MBE/DBE Participation Policy................................................................................102 23.01 Policy.....................................................................................................................................102 23.02 Definitions.............................................................................................................................102 23.03 Goals......................................................................................................................................103 23.04 Compliance............................................................................................................................104 Article 24—Document Management........................................................................................................104 24.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................104 24.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................104 General Conditions 007200-6 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 24.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................104 24.04 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................105 24.05 Document Numbering ..........................................................................................................105 24.06 Document Requirements......................................................................................................106 Article25—Shop Drawings.......................................................................................................................107 25.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................107 25.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................107 25.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................107 25.04 Shop Drawing Requirements ................................................................................................109 25.05 Special Certifications and Reports........................................................................................109 25.06 Warranties and Guarantees..................................................................................................110 25.07 Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures....................................................................................110 25.08 Sample and Mockup Submittal Procedures..........................................................................112 25.09 Equal Non Specified Products...............................................................................................113 25.10 Requests for Deviation..........................................................................................................113 25.11 Designer Responsibilities......................................................................................................114 25.12 Resubmission Requirements.................................................................................................116 Article26—Record Data ...........................................................................................................................117 26.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................117 26.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................117 26.03 Contractor's Responsibilities ................................................................................................117 26.04 Record Data Requirements...................................................................................................118 26.05 Special Certifications and Reports........................................................................................118 26.06 Warranties and Guarantees..................................................................................................119 26.07 Record Data Submittal Procedures.......................................................................................119 26.08 Designer's Responsibilities....................................................................................................120 Article 27—Construction Progress Schedule............................................................................................121 27.01 Requirements........................................................................................................................121 27.02 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................121 27.03 Schedule Requirements........................................................................................................121 27.04 Schedule Revisions................................................................................................................123 27.05 Float Time..............................................................................................................................123 Article 28—Video and Photographic documentation ..............................................................................124 General Conditions 007200-7 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 28.01 Work Included.......................................................................................................................124 28.02 Quality Assurance .................................................................................................................124 28.03 Document Submittal.............................................................................................................124 28.04 Photographs..........................................................................................................................125 28.05 Video Recording....................................................................................................................125 Article 29-Execution and Closeout.........................................................................................................125 29.01 Substantial Completion.........................................................................................................125 29.02 Final Inspections....................................................................................................................126 29.03 Reinspection Fees .................................................................................................................126 29.04 Closeout Documents Submittal ............................................................................................127 29.05 Transfer of Utilities ...............................................................................................................127 29.06 Warranties, Bonds and Service Agreements.........................................................................127 Article30-Miscellaneous........................................................................................................................128 30.01 Computation of Times...........................................................................................................128 30.02 Owner's Right to Audit Contractor's Records.......................................................................128 30.03 Independent Contractor.......................................................................................................129 30.04 Cumulative Remedies ...........................................................................................................129 30.05 Limitation of Damages..........................................................................................................129 30.06 No Waiver.............................................................................................................................129 30.07 Severability............................................................................................................................129 30.08 Survival of Obligations ..........................................................................................................130 30.09 No Third Party Beneficiaries .................................................................................................130 30.10 Assignment of Contract.........................................................................................................130 30.11 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity........................................................................................130 30.12 Controlling Law.....................................................................................................................130 30.13 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue...................................................................................130 30.14 Waiver of Trial by Jury...........................................................................................................130 30.15 Attorney Fees........................................................................................................................130 30.16 Compliance with Laws...........................................................................................................131 30.17 Enforcement..........................................................................................................................131 30.18 Subject to Appropriation.......................................................................................................131 30.19 Contract Sum.........................................................................................................................131 30.20 Contractor's Guarantee as Additional Remedy....................................................................131 General Conditions 007200-8 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 30.21 Notices. .................................................................................................................................131 General Conditions 007200-9 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY 1.01 Defined Terms A. Terms with initial capital letters, including the term's singular and plural forms, have the meanings indicated in this paragraph wherever used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents. In addition to the terms specifically defined, terms with initial capital letters in the Contract Documents may include references to identified articles and paragraphs, and the titles of other documents or forms. 1. Addenda - Documents issued prior to the receipt of Bids which clarify or modify the Bidding Requirements or the proposed Contract Documents. 2. Agreement - The document executed between Owner and Contractor covering the Work. 3. Alternative Dispute Resolution -The process by which a disputed Claim may be settled as an alternative to litigation, if Owner and Contractor cannot reach an agreement between themselves. 4. Application for Payment - The forms used by Contractor to request payments from Owner and the supporting documentation required by the Contract Documents. 5. Award Date—The date the City Council of the City of Corpus Christi (City)authorizes the City Manager or designee to execute the Contract on behalf of the City. 6. Bid —The documents submitted by a Bidder to establish the proposed Contract Price and Contract Times and provide other information and certifications as required by the Bidding Documents. 7. Bidding Documents — The solicitation documents, the proposed Contract Documents and Addenda. 8. Bidder—An individual or entity that submits a Bid to Owner. 9. Bonds - Performance Bond, Payment Bond, Maintenance Bond, and other Surety instruments executed by Surety. When in singular form, refers to individual instrument. 10. Change Order-A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract,which modifies the Work, Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract. 11. Change Proposal - A document submitted by Contractor in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents: a. Requesting an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times; b. Contesting an initial decision concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; c. Challenging a set-off against payment due; or d. Seeking a Modification with respect to the terms of the Contract. 12. City Engineer - The Corpus Christi City Engineer and/or designee as identified at the preconstruction conference or in the Notice to Proceed. General Conditions 007200-10 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 13. Claim - A demand or assertion by Owner or Contractor submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. A demand for money or services by an entity other than the Owner or Contractor is not a Claim. Claims must be initiated by written notice, signed and sworn to be an authorized corporate officer, verifying the truth and accuracy of the Claim. 14. Constituent of Concern - Asbestos, petroleum, radioactive materials, polychlorinated biphenyls (PCBs), hazardous wastes, and substances, products, wastes, or other materials that are or become listed, regulated, or addressed pursuant to: a. The Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation and Liability Act, 42 U.S.C. §§9601 et seq. ("CERCLA"); b. The Hazardous Materials Transportation Act, 49 U.S.C. §§5101 et seq.; c. The Resource Conservation and Recovery Act,42 U.S.C. §§6901 et seq. ("RCRA"); d. The Toxic Substances Control Act, 15 U.S.C. §§2601 et seq.; e. The Clean Water Act, 33 U.S.C. §§1251 et seq.; f. The Clean Air Act, 42 U.S.C. §§7401 et seq.; or g. Any other Laws or Regulations regulating, relating to, or imposing liability or standards of conduct concerning hazardous,toxic, or dangerous waste, substance, or material. 15. Contract -The entire integrated set of documents concerning the Work and describing the relationship between the Owner and Contractor. 16. Contract Amendment-A document issued on or after the Effective Date of the Contract and signed by Owner and Contractor which: a. Authorizes new phases of the Work and establishes the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work; or b. Modifies the terms and conditions of the Contract but does not make changes in the Work. 17. Contract Documents - Those items designated as Contract Documents in the Agreement. 18. Contract Price - The monetary amount stated in the Agreement and as adjusted by Modifications, and increases or decreases in unit price quantities, if any,that Owner has agreed to pay Contractor for completion of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 19. Contract Times-The number of days or the dates by which Contractor must: a. Achieve specified Milestones; b. Achieve Substantial Completion; and c. Complete the Work. 20. Contractor-The individual or entity with which Owner has contracted for performance of the Work. General Conditions 007200-11 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 21. Contractor's Team - Contractor and Subcontractors, Suppliers, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to perform part of the Work or anyone for whose acts they may be liable. 22. Cost of the Work -The sum of costs incurred for the proper performance of the Work as allowed by Article 15. 23. Defective - When applied to Work, refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty, or deficient in that it: a. Does not conform to the Contract Documents; b. Does not meet the requirements of applicable inspections, reference standards, tests, or approvals referred to in the Contract Documents; or c. Has been damaged or stolen prior to OAR's recommendation of final payment unless responsibility for the protection of the Work has been assumed by Owner at Substantial Completion 24. Designer - The individuals or entity named as Designer in the Agreement and the subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by Designer to provide design or other technical services to the Owner. Designer has responsibility for engineering or architectural design and technical issues related to the Contract Documents. Designers are Licensed Professional Engineers, Registered Architects or Registered Landscape Architects qualified to practice their profession in the State of Texas. 25. Drawings - The part of the Contract that graphically shows the scope, extent, and character of the Work. Shop Drawings and other Contractor documents are not Drawings. 26. Effective Date of the Contract -The date indicated in the Agreement on which the City Manager or designee has signed the Contract. 27. Field Order-A document issued by OAR or Designer requiring changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times. 28. Hazardous Environmental Condition - The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site in quantities or circumstances that may present a danger to persons or property exposed to Constituents of Concern. The presence of Constituents of Concern at the Site necessary for the execution of the Work or to be incorporated in the Work is not a Hazardous Environmental Condition provided these Constituents of Concern are controlled and contained pursuant to industry practices, Laws and Regulations, and the requirements of the Contract. 29. Indemnified Costs-All costs, losses,damages,and legal or other dispute resolution costs resulting from claims or demands against Owner. These costs include fees for engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals. 30. Laws and Regulations; Laws or Regulations-Applicable laws,statutes, rules, regulations, ordinances,codes,and orders of governmental bodies,agencies,authorities,and courts having jurisdiction over the Project. 31. Liens - Charges, security interests, or encumbrances upon Contract related funds, real property, or personal property. General Conditions 007200-12 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 32. Milestone-A principal event in the performance of the Work that Contractor is required by Contract to complete by a specified date or within a specified period of time. 33. Modification - Change made to the Contract Documents by one of the following methods: a. Contract Amendment; b. Change Order; c. Field Order; or d. Work Change Directive. 34. Notice of Award-The notice of Owner's intent to enter into a contract with the Selected Bidder. 35. Notice to Proceed - A notice to Contractor of the Contract Times and the date Work is to begin. 36. Owner-The City of Corpus Christi (City), a Texas home-rule municipal corporation and political subdivision organized under the laws of the State of Texas, acting by and through its duly authorized City Manager and designee, the City Engineer (the Director of Engineering Services), and the City's officers, employees, agents, or representatives, authorized to administer design and construction of the Project. 37. Owner's Authorized Representative or OAR -The individual or entity named as OAR in the Agreement and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals, or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide construction management services to the Owner. The OAR may be an employee of the Owner. 38. Owner's Project Team or OPT - The Owner, Owner's Authorized Representative, Resident Project Representative, Designer, and the consultants, subconsultants, individuals or entities directly or indirectly employed or retained by them to provide services to the Owner. 39. Partial Occupancy or Use - Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which it is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. 40. Progress Schedule -A schedule prepared and maintained by Contractor, describing the sequence and duration of the activities comprising the Contractor's plan to accomplish the Work within the Contract Times. The Progress Schedule must be a Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule. 41. Project - The total undertaking to be accomplished for Owner under the Contract Documents. 42. Project Manual — That portion of the Contract Documents that may include the following: introductory information,solicitation requirements and responses, proposal, Contract forms and General and Supplementary Conditions, General Requirements, Specification, Drawings, Project Safety Manual and Addenda. 43. Resident Project Representative or RPR-The authorized representative of OPT assigned to assist OAR at the Site. As used herein, the term Resident Project Representative includes assistants and field staff of the OAR. General Conditions 007200-13 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 44. Samples - Physical examples of materials, equipment, or workmanship representing some portion of the Work that are used to establish the standards for that portion of the Work. 45. Schedule of Documents-A schedule of required documents, prepared and maintained by Contractor. 46. Schedule of Values - A schedule, prepared and maintained by Contractor, allocating portions of the Contract Price to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for Contractor's Applications for Payment. 47. Shop Drawings - All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, and other data or information that are specifically prepared or assembled and submitted by Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work. Shop Drawings,whether approved or not, are not Drawings and are not Contract Documents. 48. Site - Lands or areas indicated in the Contract Documents as being furnished by Owner upon which the Work is to be performed. The Site includes rights-of-way, easements, and other lands furnished by Owner which are designated for use by the Contractor. 49. Specifications -The part of the Contract that describes the requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards, and workmanship as applied to the Work, and certain administrative requirements and procedural matters applicable to the Work. 50. Subcontractor-An individual or entity having a direct contract with Contractor or with other Subcontractors or Suppliers for the performance of a part of the Work. 51. Substantial Completion - The point where the Work or a specified part of the Work is sufficiently complete to be used for its intended purpose in accordance with the Contract Documents. 52. Supplementary Conditions -The part of the Contract that amends or supplements the General Conditions. 53. Supplier - A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, materialman, or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with Subcontractors or other Suppliers to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work. 54. Technical Data-Those items expressly identified as Technical Data in the Supplementary Conditions with respect to either: a. Subsurface conditions at the Site; b. Physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; or C. Hazardous Environmental Conditions at the Site. 55. Underground Facilities - All underground pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires, manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels, other similar facilities or appurtenances, and encasements containing these facilities which are used to convey electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, fiber optic transmissions, cable television, water, wastewater, storm water, other liquids or chemicals, or traffic or other control systems. 56. Unit Price Work-Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. General Conditions 007200-14 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 57. Work - The construction of the Project or its component parts as required by the Contract Documents. 58. Work Change Directive -A directive issued to Contractor on or after the Effective Date of the Contract ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work. The Work Change Directive serves as a memorandum of understanding regarding the directive until a Change Order can be issued. 1.02 Terminology A. The words and terms discussed in this Paragraph 1.02 are not defined, but when used in the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents, have the indicated meaning. B. It is understood that the cost for performing Work is included in the Contract Price and no additional compensation is to be paid by Owner unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. Expressions including or similar to "at no additional cost to Owner," "at Contractor's expense,"or similar words mean that the Contractor is to perform or provide specified operation of Work without an increase in the Contract Price. C. The terms"day"or"calendar day' mean a calendar day of 24 hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. D. The meaning and intent of certain terms or adjectives are described as follows: 1. The terms "as allowed," "as approved," "as ordered," "as directed," or similar terms in the Contract Documents indicate an exercise of professional judgment by the OPT. 2. Adjectives including or similar to "reasonable," "suitable," "acceptable," "proper," "satisfactory," or similar adjectives are used to describe a determination of OPT regarding the Work. 3. Any exercise of professional judgment by the OPT will be made solely to evaluate the Work for general compliance with the Contract Documents unless there is a specific statement in the Contract Documents indicating otherwise. 4. The use of these or similar terms or adjectives does not assign a duty or give OPT authority to supervise or direct the performance of the Work, or assign a duty or give authority to the OPT to undertake responsibilities contrary to the provisions of Articles 9 or 10 or other provisions of the Contract Documents. E. The use of the words "furnish," "install," "perform," and "provide" have the following meanings when used in connection with services, materials, or equipment: 1. Furnish means to supply and deliver the specified services, materials, or equipment to the Site or other specified location ready for use or installation. 2. Install means to complete construction or assembly of the specified services, materials, or equipment so they are ready for their intended use. 3. Perform or provide means to furnish and install specified services, materials, or equipment, complete and ready for their intended use. 4. Perform or provide the specified services, materials, or equipment complete and ready for intended use if the Contract Documents require specific services, materials, or General Conditions 007200-15 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 equipment, but do not expressly use the words "furnish," "install," "perform," or "provide." F. Contract Documents are written in modified brief style: 1. Requirements apply to all Work of the same kind, class, and type even though the word "all" is not stated. 2. Simple imperative sentence structure is used which places a verb as the first word in the sentence. It is understood that the words "furnish," "install," "perform," "provide," or similar words include the meaning of the phrase "The Contractor shall..." before these words. 3. Unless specifically stated that action is to be taken by the OPT or others, it is understood that the action described is a requirement of the Contractor. G. Words or phrases that have a well-known technical or construction industry or trade meaning are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with this recognized meaning unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. H. Written documents are required where reference is made to notices, reports, approvals, consents, documents, statements, instructions, opinions or other types of communications required by the Contract Documents. Approval and consent documents must be received by Contractor prior to the action or decision for which approval or consent is given. These may be made in printed or electronic format through the OPT's project management information system or other electronic media as required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. I. Giving notice as required by the Contract Documents may be by printed or electronic media using a method that requires acknowledgment of the receipt of that notice. ARTICLE 2—PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.01 Delivery of Bonds and Evidence of Insurance A. Provide required Bonds with the executed Agreement. B. Provide evidence of insurance required by the Contract Documents with the executed Agreement. 2.02 Copies of Documents A. OPT is to furnish one fully executed Agreement (either electronic or printed) and one copy of the executed Contract Documents in electronic portable document format (PDF). This document is the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents. 2.03 Project Management System A. Owner shall administer its design and construction management through an internet-based project management system known as e-Builder. B. Contractor shall conduct all communication through and perform all project-related functions utilizing this project management system. This includes all correspondence, FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-16 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 submittals, requests for information, payment requests and processing, contract amendments, change orders, delivery orders and other administrative activities. C. Owner shall administer the software and provide training to Contractor's Team. 2.04 Before Starting Construction A. Provide the following preliminary documents in accordance with the Contract Documents within 10 days after the Effective Date of the Contract: 1. Progress Schedule,which must be a Critical Path Method (CPM) Schedule; 2. Schedule of Documents; and 3. Schedule of Values and projected cash flow information. 2.05 Preconstruction Conference; Designation of Authorized Representatives A. Attend the preconstruction conference as required by the Contract Documents. B. Designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Contractor. These individuals must have the authority to transmit and receive information, render decisions relative to the Contract, and otherwise act on behalf of the Contractor. C. Owner is to designate the specific individuals authorized to act as representatives of the Owner and the limits of their authority with regard to acting on behalf of the Owner. ARTICLE 3—CONTRACT DOCUMENTS: INTENT, REQUIREMENTS, REUSE 3.01 Intent A. Requirements of components of the Contract Documents are as binding as if required by all Contract Documents. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete Project. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OPT. 1. The Contract requirements described in the General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions apply to Work regardless of where it is described in the Contract Documents, unless specifically noted otherwise. 2. In offering a Bid for this Project and in entering into this Contract,Contractor represents: a. Contractor has studied the Contract Documents, the Work, the Site, local conditions, Laws and Regulations, and other conditions that may affect the Work; b. Contractor has studied the Technical Data and other information referred to in the Contract Documents and has or will make additional surveys and investigations as deemed necessary for the performance of the Work; c. Contractor has correlated these studies and observations with the requirements of the Contract Documents; and d. Contractor has taken all of this information into consideration in developing the Contract Price offered and that the Contract Price offered provides full compensation for providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. General Conditions 007200-17 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. Organization of the Contract Documents is not intended to control or lessen the responsibility of the Contractor when dividing Work among Subcontractors or Suppliers, or to establish the extent of Work to be performed by trades, Subcontractors, or Suppliers. Specifications or details do not need to be indicated or specified in each Specification or Drawing. Items shown in the Contract Documents are applicable regardless of their location in the Contract Documents. 4. Standard paragraph titles and other identifications of subject matter in the Specifications are intended to aid in locating and recognizing various requirements of the Specifications. Titles do not define, limit, or otherwise restrict Specification text. S. Provide the labor, documentation, services, materials, or equipment that may be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or trade usage as being required to produce the indicated result, whether specifically called for in the Contract Documents or not. Include these related costs in the offered Contract Price. B. Provide equipment that is functionally complete as described in the Contract Documents. The Drawings and Specifications do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the installation of products purchased by the Owner or Contractor. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the Designer through the OAR. C. Comply with the most stringent requirements where compliance with two or more standards is specified and they establish different or conflicting requirements for the Work, unless the Contract Documents indicate otherwise. D. Provide materials and equipment comparable in quality to similar materials and equipment incorporated in the Project or as required to meet the minimum requirements of the application if the materials and equipment are shown in the Drawings but are not included in the Specifications. E. The Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents governs if there is a discrepancy between the Project Record Copy of the Contract Documents and subsequent electronic or digital versions of the Contract Documents, including printed copies derived from these electronic or digital versions. F. The Contract supersedes all prior written or oral negotiations, representations, and agreements. The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The Contract Documents may be modified only by a Modification. G. Request clarification from OAR for a decision before proceeding if Contractor is not clear on the meaning of the Contract Documents. OAR is to issue clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents in accordance with the Contract Documents. 3.02 Reference Standards A. Standard Specifications, Codes, Laws and Regulations: 1. Reference in the Contract Documents to standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes of technical societies, organizations, or associations, or to Laws or Regulations,whether specific or implied, are those in effect at the time Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. General Conditions 007200-18 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. No provision of referenced standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier changes the duties or responsibilities of OPT or Contractor from those described in the Contract Documents or assigns a duty to or gives authority to the OPT to supervise or direct the performance of the Work or undertake responsibilities inconsistent with the Contract Documents. 3. The provisions of the Contract Documents take precedence over standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, codes, or instructions of a Supplier unless specifically stated otherwise in the Contract Documents. B. Comply with applicable construction industry standards, whether referenced or not. 1. Standards referenced in the Contract Documents govern over standards not referenced but recognized as applicable in the construction industry. 2. Comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents if they produce a higher quality of Work than the applicable construction industry standards. 3. Designer determines whether a code or standard is applicable, which of several are applicable, or if the Contract Documents produce a higher quality of Work. C. Make copies of reference standards available if requested by OAR. 3.03 Reporting and Resolving Discrepancies A. Reporting Discrepancies: 1. Carefully study the Drawings and verify pertinent figures and dimensions with respect to actual field measurements before undertaking the Work. Immediately report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies that Contractor discovers or has actual knowledge of to the OAR. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01. 2. The exactness of existing grades, elevations, dimensions or locations given on any Drawings issued by Designer, or the work installed by other contractors, is not guaranteed by Owner. Contractor shall,therefore, satisfy itself as to the accuracy of all grades, elevations, dimensions and locations. Any errors due to Contractor's failure to verify at the site all such grades, elevations, dimensions or locations relating to such existing or other work shall be rectified by Contractor without any additional cost to Owner. 3. Immediately notify the OAR of conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents or discrepancies between the Contract Documents and: a. Applicable Laws or Regulations; b. Actual field conditions; c. Standard specifications, manuals, reference standards, or codes; or d. Instructions of Suppliers. 4. Do not proceed with affected Work until the conflict, error, ambiguity, or discrepancy is resolved by a clarification or interpretation from the OAR or by a Modification to the General Conditions 007200-19 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Contract Documents issued pursuant to Paragraph 11.01, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. 5. Contractor is liable to the OPT for failure to report conflicts, errors, ambiguities, or discrepancies in the Contract Documents of which Contractor has actual knowledge. 6. Contractor is deemed to have included the most expensive item, system, procedure, etc. in the Contract Price if a conflict, error,ambiguity, or discrepancy in components of the Contract Documents was known, but not reported prior to submitting the Bid or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. 3.04 Interpretation of the Contract Documents A. Submit questions concerning the non-technical or contractual/administrative requirements of the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to provide an interpretation of the Contract Documents regarding these questions and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B. Submit questions regarding the design of the Project described in the Contract Documents to the OAR immediately after those questions arise. OAR is to request an interpretation of the Contract Documents from the Designer. Designer is to respond to these questions by providing an interpretation of the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C. OPT may initiate a Modification to the Contract Documents through the OAR if a response to the question indicates that a change in the Contract Documents is required. Contractor may appeal Designer's or OAR's interpretation by submitting a Change Proposal. 3.05 Reuse of Documents A. Contractor's Team has no rights to the Contract Documents and may not use the Contract Documents, or copies or electronic media editions of the Contract Documents, other than for the construction of this Project. This provision survives final payment or termination of the Contract. B. Contractor is allowed to retain a copy of the Contract Documents for record purposes, unless specifically prohibited by the Owner for security reasons. Surrender paper and digital copies of the Contract Documents and other related documents and remove these documents from computer equipment or storage devices as a condition of final payment if the Owner so directs. ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK 4.01 Commencement of Contract Times; Notice to Proceed A. The Contract Times commence to run on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. 4.02 Starting the Work A. Begin performing the Work on the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Do not begin Work prior to having the insurance required in Article 6 in force or before the date indicated in the Notice to Proceed. General Conditions 007200-20 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 4.03 Progress Schedule A. Construct the Work in accordance with the Progress Schedule established in accordance with the Contract Documents. 1. Adjust the Progress Schedule as required to accurately reflect actual progress on the Work. 2. Submit proposed adjustments in the Progress Schedule that change the Contract Times in accordance with the requirements of Article 11. B. Continue performing Work and adhere to the Progress Schedule during disputes or disagreements with Owner. Do not delay or postpone Work pending resolution of disputes or disagreements, or during an appeal process. 4.04 Delays in Contractor's Progress A. No Damages for Delay: Contractor shall receive no compensation for delays or hindrances to the Work,except in the case of direct interference with means and methods by the Owner. In no event shall the Contractor be entitled to any compensation or recovery of any special damages in connection with any delays, including without limitation: consequential damages, lost opportunity costs, impact damages, or other similar damages. Owner's exercise of any of its rights or remedies under the Contract Documents (including without limitation ordering changes in the Work, or directing suspension, rescheduling, or correction of the Work), regardless of the extent or frequency of Owner's exercise of such rights or remedies, shall not be construed as active interference in the Contractor's performance of the Work. An extension of Contract Time, to the extent permitted, shall be the sole remedy of the Contractor for any acknowledged delays.Contractor agrees that the extension of time provides an equitable adjustment. B. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delays, disruptions, or interference caused by or within the control of Contractor's Team. C. No time extensions are allowed for weather conditions, other than those listed in Paragraph 4.04.D, for Projects using calendar days or a fixed date to establish the Contract Time. Contractor is to include the cost associated with weather related delays in the Contract Price and assumes the risks associated with delays related to weather conditions. D. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Times if Contractor's performance or progress is delayed,disrupted or interfered with by unanticipated causes not the fault of and beyond the control of OPT or Contractor. These adjustments in Contract Times are the Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for the delays, disruption, and interference described in this paragraph. These unanticipated causes may include: 1. Severe and unavoidable natural catastrophes e.g. fires, floods, hurricanes, epidemics, and earthquakes; 2. Acts or failures to act of utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site; 3. Acts of war or terrorism; and 4. Rain days in excess of the number specified in a calendar year. General Conditions 007200-21 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. Delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the following are governed by Article 5: 1. The existence of a differing subsurface or physical condition; 2. An Underground Facility not shown or not indicated with reasonable accuracy by the Contract Documents; and 3. Hazardous Environmental Conditions. F. Article 8 governs delays, disruption, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work resulting from the performance of certain other work at or adjacent to the Site. G. Notify the OAR immediately of a potential delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times within 30 days of the commencement of the delaying, disrupting, or interfering event. Claims for adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Times that do not comply with Article 13 are waived. H. Contractor is only entitled to an adjustment of the Contract Times for specific delays, disruptions, and interference to the performance or progress of the Work that can be demonstrated to directly impact the ability of the Contractor to complete the Work within the Contract Times. No adjustments in Contract Times are allowed for delays on components of the Work which were or could have been completed without impacting the Contract Times. I. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times for delay, disruption, or interference caused by or within the control of the Owner if this delay is concurrent with a delay, disruption, or interference attributable to or within the control of the Contractor's Team. ARTICLE 5—AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS 5.01 Availability of Lands A. Owner is to furnish the Site and inform the Contractor of encumbrances or restrictions known to Owner related to use of the Site with which Contractor must comply in performing the Work. B. Provide for additional lands and access Contractor requires for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment, other than those identified in the Contract Documents. Provide documentation of authority to use these additional lands to OAR before using them. 5.02 Use of Site and Other Areas A. Limitation on Use of Site and Other Areas: 1. Confine construction equipment, temporary construction facilities, the storage of materials and equipment,and the operations of workers to the Site,adjacent areas that Owner or Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or agreements, and other adjacent areas as permitted by Laws and Regulations. Assume General Conditions 007200-22 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 full responsibility for damage or injuries which result from the performance of the Work or from other actions or conduct of the Contractor's Team, including: a. Damage to the Site; b. Damage to adjacent areas used for Contractor's Team's operations; C. Damage to other adjacent land or areas; and d. Injuries and losses sustained by the owners or occupants of these lands or areas. 2. Take the following action if a damage or injury claim is made by the owner or occupant of adjacent land or area because of the performance of the Work, or because of other actions or conduct of the Contractor's Team: a. Take immediate corrective or remedial action as required by Paragraph 7.09; and b. Attempt to settle the claim through negotiations with the owner or occupant, or otherwise resolve the claim by mediation or other dispute resolution proceeding or at law. 5.03 Subsurface and Physical Conditions A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports known to OPT of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at or adjacent to the Site; 2. Those drawings known to OPT of physical conditions related to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site, except Underground Facilities; and 3. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B. Data contained in boring logs, recorded measurements of subsurface water levels, and the results of tests performed on materials described in geotechnical data reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data, unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. C. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for this reliance on Technical Data,Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner with respect to: 1. The completeness of reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including aspects of the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor, or Contractor's safety precautions and programs; 2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3. Contractor's interpretation of or conclusions drawn from Technical Data or other data, interpretations, opinions, or information. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-23 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 5.04 Differing Subsurface or Physical Conditions A. Notify OAR immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, after becoming aware of a subsurface or physical condition that is uncovered or revealed at the Site, and before further disturbing the subsurface or physical conditions or performing any related Work that: 1. Establishes that the Technical Data on which Contractor is entitled to rely as provided in Paragraph 5.03 is materially inaccurate; 2. Requires a change in the Drawings or Specifications; 3. Differs materially from that shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; or 4. Is of an unusual nature and differs materially from conditions ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the character provided for in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb or perform Work related to this subsurface or physical condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12, until permission to do so is issued by OAR. B. OAR is to notify the OPT after receiving notice of a differing subsurface or physical condition from the Contractor. Designer is to: 1. Promptly review the subsurface or physical condition; 2. Determine the necessity of OPT's obtaining additional exploration or tests with respect to the subsurface or physical condition; 3. Determine if the subsurface or physical condition falls within one or more of the differing Site condition categories in Paragraph 5.04.A; 4. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor's resumption of Work in connection with the subsurface or physical condition in question; 5. Determine the need for changes in the Drawings or Specifications; and 6. Advise OPT of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. C. OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. D. Possible Contract Price and Contract Times Adjustments: 1. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times to the extent that a differing subsurface or physical condition causes a change in Contractor's cost or time to perform the Work provided the condition falls within one or more of the categories described in Paragraph 5.04.A. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. General Conditions 007200-24 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a subsurface or physical condition if: a. Contractor knew of the existence of the subsurface or physical condition at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; b. The existence of the subsurface or physical condition could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or c. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.04.A. 3. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal no later than 30 days after OAR's issuance of the OPT's statement to Contractor regarding the subsurface or physical condition in question. 4. A Change Order is to be issued by the OAR if Owner and Contractor agree that Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times and agree to the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times. 5.05 Underground Facilities A. The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site is based on information and data furnished to OPT by the owners of these Underground Facilities or by others. OPT is not responsible for the accuracy or completeness of information or data provided by others that OPT makes available to Contractor. The Contractor is responsible for: 1. Investigating and field-verifying the location of underground facilities before beginning Work; 2. Reviewing and checking available information and data regarding existing Underground Facilities at the Site; 3. Complying with Laws and Regulations related to locating Underground Facilities before beginning Work; 4. Locating Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents; 5. Coordinating the Work with the owners, including Owner, of Underground Facilities during construction; and 6. The safety and protection of existing Underground Facilities at or adjacent to the Site and repairing damage resulting from the Work. B. Notify the OAR and the owner of the Underground Facility immediately, but in no event later than 3 days, if an Underground Facility is uncovered or revealed at the Site that was not shown in the Contract Documents or was not shown with reasonable accuracy in the Contract Documents. Do not further disturb conditions or perform Work affected by this discovery, except in the event of an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12. General Conditions 007200-25 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. The Designer is to take the following action after receiving notice from the OAR: 1. Promptly review the Underground Facility and conclude whether the Underground Facility was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy; 2. Prepare recommendations to OPT regarding the Contractor's resumption of Work in connection with this Underground Facility; 3. Determine the extent to which a change is required in the Drawings or Specifications to document the consequences of the existence or location of the Underground Facility; and 4. Advise OAR of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations and provide revised Drawings and Specifications if required. D. OAR is to issue a statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility in question and recommend action as appropriate after review of Designer's findings, conclusions, and recommendations. E. Contractor is entitled to an equitable adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times as provided in Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 to the extent that the existing Underground Facility at the Site that was not shown or indicated in the Contract Documents or was not shown or indicated with reasonable accuracy. Any adjustment in Contract Price for Work that is paid for on a unit price basis is subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. F. Contractor is not entitled an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to an existing Underground Facility at the Site if: 1. Contractor knew of the existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site at the time Contractor made an offer to Owner with respect to Contract Price and Contract Times; 2. The existence of the existing Underground Facility at the Site could have been discovered or revealed as a result of examinations, investigations, explorations, tests, or studies of the Site and contiguous areas expressly required by the Bidding Requirements or Contract Documents prior to when Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price; or 3. Contractor failed to give notice as required by Paragraph 5.05.B. G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal regarding its entitlement to or the amount or extent of adjustments in the Contract Price or Contract Times no later than 30 days after OAR's issuance of OPT's statement to Contractor regarding the Underground Facility. 5.06 Hazardous Environmental Conditions at Site A. The Supplementary Conditions identify: 1. Those reports and drawings known to OPT relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site; and 2. Technical Data contained in these reports and drawings. B. Contractor may rely upon the accuracy of the Technical Data contained in reports and drawings relating to Hazardous Environmental Conditions identified in the Supplementary General Conditions 007200-26 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Conditions, but these reports and drawings are not Contract Documents. Except for the reliance on expressly identified Technical Data,Contractor may not rely upon or make claims against Owner's Indemnitees with respect to: 1. The completeness of these reports and drawings for Contractor's purposes, including aspects of the means, methods,techniques, sequences and procedures of construction to be employed by Contractor or Contractor's safety precautions and programs related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions; 2. Other data, interpretations, opinions, and information contained in these reports or shown or indicated in the drawings; or 3. Any Contractor interpretation of or conclusion drawn from Technical Data or other data, interpretations, opinions or information. C. The results of tests performed on materials described in environmental reports specifically prepared for the Project and made available to Contractor are defined as Technical Data unless Technical Data has been defined more specifically in the Supplementary Conditions. D. Contractor is not responsible for removing or remediating Hazardous Environmental Conditions encountered, uncovered or revealed at the Site unless this removal or remediation is expressly identified in the Contract Documents to be within the scope of the Work. E. Contractor is responsible for controlling, containing, and duly removing and remediating Constituents of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor's Team and paying associated costs. 1. Owner may remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition and impose a set-off against payments to Contractor for associated costs if Contractor's Team creates a Hazardous Environmental Condition,and Contractor does not take acceptable action to remove and remediate the Hazardous Environmental Condition. 2. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to Hazardous Environmental Conditions are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. F. Immediately notify the OAR and take the following action if Contractor uncovers or reveals a Hazardous Environmental Condition at the Site or adjacent areas used by the Contractor's Team that was not created by the Contractor's Team: 1. Secure or otherwise isolate this condition; 2. Stop Work in affected areas or connected with the condition, except in an emergency as required by Paragraph 7.12; and 3. Do not resume Work in connection with the Hazardous Environmental Condition or in affected areas until after OPT has obtained required permits and OAR sends notice to the Contractor: a. Specifying that this condition and affected areas are or have been rendered safe for the resumption of Work; or b. Specifying special conditions under which Work may be resumed safely. General Conditions 007200-27 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 4. Owner may order the portion of the Work that is in the area affected by the Hazardous Environmental Condition to be deleted from the Work following the procedures in Article 11 if Contractor does not agree to: a. Resume the Work based on a reasonable belief it is unsafe; or b. Resume the Work under the special conditions provided by the OAR. 5. Owner may have this deleted portion of the Work performed by Owner's own forces or others in accordance with Article 8. G. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may impose a set-off if an agreement is not reached within 10 days of OAR's notice regarding the resumption of Work as to whether Contractor is entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times or on the amount or extent of adjustments resulting from this Work stoppage or special conditions under which Contractor agrees to resume Work. H. The provisions of Paragraphs 5.03, 5.04, and 5.05 do not apply to the presence of Constituents of Concern or a Hazardous Environmental Condition uncovered or revealed at the Site. ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE 6.01 Performance, Payment, and Other Bonds A. Furnish Performance and Payment Bonds, each in an amount equal to the Contract Price, as security for the faithful performance and payment of Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. These Bonds are to remain in effect until 1 year after the date of final payment. Furnish other Bonds as required by the Contract Documents. B. Bonds furnished by the Contractor must meet the requirements of Texas Insurance Code Chapter 3503, Texas Government Code Chapter 2253, and all other applicable Laws and Regulations. C. Notify OAR immediately if the surety on Bonds furnished by Contractor: 1. Is declared bankrupt, or becomes insolvent; 2. Has its right to do business in Texas terminated; or 3. Ceases to meet the requirements of Paragraph 6.02. Provide a Bond and surety which comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.02 within 20 days after the event giving rise to this notification. D. Contractor is to use amounts paid by Owner to Contractor under the Contract for the performance of the Contract and to satisfy claims against the Payment Bond. E. Notify the OAR of claims filed against the Payment Bond. Notify the claimant and OAR of undisputed amounts and the basis for challenging disputed amounts when a claimant has satisfied the conditions prescribed by Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. Promptly pay undisputed amount. F. Owner is not liable for payment of costs or expenses of claimants under the Payment Bond. Owner has no obligations to pay, give notice or take other action to claimants under the Payment Bond. General Conditions 007200-28 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 G. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner's termination rights under Article 18 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain required Bonds. H. OPT will provide a copy of the Payment Bond to Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other persons or entities claiming to have furnished labor or materials used in the performance of the Work that request this information in accordance with Texas Government Code Chapter 2253. 6.02 Licensed Sureties A. Provide Bonds in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents from sureties named in the list of"Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Financial Management Service, Surety Bond Branch, U.S. Department of the Treasury. B. Provide Bonds required by the Contract Documents from surety companies that are duly licensed or authorized to provide bonds in the State of Texas. 6.03 Required Minimum Insurance Coverage A. Obtain and maintain insurance as required in this Article and in the Supplementary Conditions. B. Deliver evidence of insurance in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions to the Owner to demonstrate that Contractor has obtained and is maintaining the policies, coverages, and endorsements required by the Contract. Provide copies of these certificates to each named insured and additional insured as identified in the Supplementary Conditions or otherwise. 6.04 General Insurance Provisions A. Provide insurance coverages and limits meeting the requirements for insurance in accordance with this Article 6 and the Supplementary Conditions. B. Provide endorsements to the policies as outlined in this Article. C. Obtain insurance from companies that are duly licensed or authorized in the State of Texas to issue insurance policies for the required limits and coverages. Provide insurance from companies that have an A.M. Best rating of A-VIII or better. D. Furnish copies of endorsements and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles upon request by OPT or any named insured or additional insured. Contractor may block out (redact) any confidential premium or pricing information contained in any endorsement furnished under this Contract. E. The name and number of the Project must be referenced on the certificate of insurance. F. OPT's failure to demand such certificates or other evidence of the Contractor's full compliance with the insurance requirements or failure to identify a deficiency in compliance from the evidence provided is not a waiver of the Contractor's obligation to obtain and maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. G. Notify the Owner if the Contractor fails to purchase or maintain the insurance required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall not be allowed to perform any Work on the General Conditions 007200-29 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Project until the required insurance policies are in effect. A Certificate of Liability Insurance shall be submitted to the OPT. H. Owner may exclude the Contractor from the Site and exercise Owner's termination rights under Article 18 if Contractor fails to obtain or maintain the required insurance. I. Owner does not represent that the insurance coverage and limits established in this Contract are adequate to protect Contractor or Contractor's interests. J. The required insurance and insurance limits do not limit the Contractor's liability under the indemnities granted to Owner in the Contract Documents. K. Provide for an endorsement that the "other insurance" clause shall not apply to the OPT where the OPT is an additional insured shown on the policy. Contractor's insurance is primary and non-contributory with respect to any insurance or self-insurance carried by the OPT for liability arising out of operations under this Contract. L. Include the Owner and list the other members of the OPT and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds on all policies with the exception of the workers' compensation policy and Contractor's professional liability policy. 6.05 Contractor's Insurance A. Purchase and maintain workers' compensation and employer's liability insurance for: 1. Claims under workers' compensation, disability benefits, and other similar employee benefit acts. Obtain workers' compensation coverage through a licensed insurance company in accordance with Texas law and written on a policy and endorsements approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. Provide insurance in amounts to meet all workers' compensation obligations. Provide an "All Other States" endorsement if Contractor is not domiciled in Texas and policy is not written in accordance with Texas Department of Insurance rules. 2. Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees. 3. United States Longshoreman and Harbor Workers' Compensation Act and Jones Act coverage (if applicable). 4. Foreign voluntary worker compensation (if applicable). B. Purchase and maintain commercial general liability insurance covering all operations by or on behalf of Contractor. The expected coverage is that which would be included in a commercially available ISO Commercial General Liability policy and should provide coverage on an occurrence basis, against: 1. Claims for damages because of bodily injury,sickness or disease,or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; 2. Claims for damages insured by reasonably available personal injury liability coverage which are sustained; 3. By any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor; and General Conditions 007200-30 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 4. Claims for damages,other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including any resulting loss of use. C. Provide Contractor's commercial general liability policy that is written on a 1996 (or later) ISO commercial general liability form (occurrence form) and include the following coverages and endorsements: 1. Products and completed operations coverage as required in this Article and the Supplementary Conditions. Insurance is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. Furnish evidence of the continuation of this insurance at final payment and again each year for 3 years after final payment to Owner and each named insured or additional insured. a. If required by the Supplementary Conditions, provide and maintain Installation Floater insurance for property under the care, custody, or control of Contractor. Provide Installation Floater insurance that is a broad form or "All Peril" policy providing coverage for all materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work. 1) Provide coverage under the Contractor's Installation Floater that includes: a) Faulty or Defective workmanship, materials, maintenance, or construction; b) Cost to remove Defective or damaged Work from the Site or to protect it from loss or damage; c) Cost to cleanup and remove pollutants; d) Coverage for testing and startup; e) Any loss to property while in transit; f) Any loss at the Site; g) Any loss while in storage, both on and off the Site; and h) Any loss to temporary Project Works if their value is included in the Contract Price. 2) Coverage cannot be contingent on an external cause or risk or limited to property for which the Contractor is legally liable. Provide limits of insurance adequate to cover the value of the installation. Pay any deductible carried under this coverage and assume responsibility for claims on materials, supplies, machinery, fixtures, and equipment which will be incorporated into the Work while in transit or in storage. 2. Blanket contractual liability coverage for Contractor's contractual indemnity obligations in Paragraph 7.14, and all other contractual indemnity obligations of Contractor in the Contract Documents. Industry standard ISO Contractual Liability coverage will meet this obligation. 3. Broad form property damage coverage. 4. Severability of interest. 5. Underground explosion and collapse coverage. General Conditions 007200-31 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 6. Personal injury coverage. 7. Endorsement CG 2032, "Additional Insured - Engineers, Architects or Surveyors Not Engaged by the Named Insured" or its equivalent. D. Purchase and maintain automobile liability insurance against claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. E. For Projects with a Contract Value that exceeds$5,000,000, purchase and maintain umbrella or excess liability insurance written over the underlying employer's liability, commercial general liability, and automobile liability insurance described in the paragraphs above. Provide coverage that is at least as broad as all underlying policies. Provide a policy that provides first-dollar liability coverage as needed. F. Provide Contractor's commercial general liability and automobile liability policies that: 1. Are written on an occurrence basis; 2. Include the individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds; 3. Include coverage for Owner as defined in Article 1; and 4. Provide primary coverage for all claims covered by the policies, including those arising from both ongoing and completed operations. G. Purchase and maintain insurance coverage for third-party injury and property damage claims, including clean-up costs that result from Hazardous Environmental Conditions which result from Contractor's operations and completed operations. Provide Contractor's pollution liability insurance that includes long-term environmental impacts for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants and is not limited to sudden and accidental discharge. The completed operations coverage is to remain in effect for 3 years after final payment. The policy must name OPT and any other individuals and entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions as additional insureds. H. Purchase and maintain applicable professional liability insurance, or have Subcontractors and Suppliers do so, if Contractor or any Subcontractor or Supplier will provide or furnish professional services under this Contract. I. The policies of insurance required by this Article must: 1. Include at least the specific coverages and be written for not less than the limits of liability provided in this Article or the Supplementary Conditions or required by Laws or Regulations,whichever is greater. 2. Contain a provision that coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed until at least 30 days prior written notice has been given to Contractor, Owner, and all named insureds and additional insureds. 3. Remain in effect at all times when Contractor is performing Work or is at the Site to conduct tasks arising from the Contract Documents. 4. Be appropriate for the Work being performed and provide protection from claims resulting from the Contractor's performance of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether performed by Contractor, General Conditions 007200-32 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Subcontractor, Supplier, anyone directly or indirectly employed or retained by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable. J. The coverage requirements for specific policies of insurance must be met directly by those policies and may not rely on excess or umbrella insurance provided in other policies to meet the coverage requirement. 6.06 Property Insurance A. Purchase and maintain builder's risk insurance in the amount of the full replacement cost of the Project. This policy is subject to the deductible amounts requirements in this Article and the Supplementary Conditions or those required by Laws and Regulations and must comply with the requirements of Paragraph 6.09. This insurance shall: 1. Include the OPT,Contractor,and all Subcontractors,and any other individuals or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, as named insureds. 2. Be written on a builder's risk "all risk" policy form that includes insurance for physical loss or damage to the Work, temporary buildings, falsework, and materials and equipment in transit, and insures against at least the following perils or causes of loss: fire; lightning; windstorm; riot; civil commotion; terrorism; vehicle impact; aircraft; smoke; theft; vandalism and malicious mischief; mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; flood; collapse; explosion; debris removal; demolition occasioned by enforcement of Laws and Regulations; water damage (other than that caused by flood); and such other perils or causes of loss as may be specifically required by this Section. If insurance against mechanical breakdown, boiler explosion, and artificially generated electric current; earthquake; volcanic activity, and other earth movement; or flood, are not commercially available under builder's risk, by endorsement or otherwise, this insurance may be provided through other insurance policies acceptable to Owner and Contractor. 3. Cover expenses incurred in the repair or replacement of any insured property. 4. Cover materials and equipment in transit or stored prior to being incorporated in the Work. 5. Cover Owner-furnished or assigned property. 6. Allow for partial utilization of the Work by Owner. 7. Allow for the waiver of the insurer's subrogation rights as set forth below. 8. Provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils or causes of loss covered. 9. Not include a co-insurance clause. 10. Include a broad exception for ensuing losses from physical damage or loss with respect to any Defective workmanship, design, or materials exclusions. 11. Include testing and startup. 12. Be maintained in effect until the Work as a whole is complete, unless otherwise agreed to in writing by Owner and Contractor. General Conditions 007200-33 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Evidence of insurance provided must contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled or materially changed or renewal refused until at least 30 days' prior written notice has been given to Owner and Contractor and to each named insured. C. Pay for costs not covered by the policy deductible. D. Notify builder's risk insurance provider if Owner will occupy or use a portion or portions of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of all the Work. Maintain the builder's risk insurance in effect during this Partial Occupancy or Use. E. Contractor may purchase other special insurance to be included in or to supplement the builder's risk or property insurance policies provided under this Article and the Supplementary Conditions. F. Contractor, Subcontractors, or employees of the Contractor or a Subcontractor owning property items, such as tools, construction equipment, or other personal property not expressly covered in the insurance required by the Contract Documents are responsible for providing their own insurance. 6.07 Waiver of Rights A. Insurance shall include a waiver of subrogation in favor of the additional insureds identified in the Supplementary Conditions. B. All policies purchased in accordance with this Article are to contain provisions to the effect that the insurers have no rights of recovery against OPT, named insureds or additional insureds in the event of a payment for loss or damage. Contractor and insurers waive all rights against the Owner's Indemnities for losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by these policies and any other applicable property insurance. None of these waivers extend to the rights Contractor has to the proceeds of insurance as trustee. C. Contractor is responsible for assuring that agreements with Subcontractors contain provisions that the Subcontractor waive all rights against Owner,Contractor, named insureds and additional insureds, and the officers, directors, members, partners, employees, agents, consultants, and subcontractors of each and any of them,for all losses and damages created by or resulting from any of the perils or causes of loss covered by builder's risk insurance and other property insurance. 6.08 Owner's Insurance for Project A. Owner is not responsible for purchasing and maintaining any insurance to protect the interest of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or others in the Work. The stated limits of insurance required are minimum only. Determine the limits that are adequate. These limits may be basic policy limits or any combination of basic limits and umbrella limits. In any event, Contractor is fully responsible for all losses arising out of, resulting from, or connected with operations under this Contract whether or not these losses are covered by insurance. The acceptance of evidence of insurance bythe OPT, named insureds,or additional insureds does not release the Contractor from compliance with the insurance requirements of the Contract Documents. General Conditions 007200-34 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 6.09 Acceptable Evidence of Insurance A. Provide evidence of insurance acceptable to the Owner with the executed Contract Documents. Provide the following as evidence of insurance: 1. Certificates of Insurance on an acceptable form; 2. Riders or endorsements to policies; and 3. Policy limits and deductibles. B. Provide a list of"Additional Insureds" for each policy. C. Provide evidence that waivers of subrogation are provided on all applicable policies. D. Provide evidence of requirements for 30 days' notice before cancellation or any material change in the policy's terms and conditions, limits of coverage, or change in deductible amount. 6.10 Certificate of Insurance A. Submit Certificates of Insurance meeting the following requirements: 1. Form has been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101; or 2. Form is a standard form deemed approved by the Department under Texas Insurance Code §1811.101. 3. No requirements of this Contract may be interpreted as requiring the issuance of a certificate of insurance on a certificate of insurance form that has not first been filed with and approved by the Texas Department of Insurance. B. Include the name of the Project in the description of operations box on the certificate of insurance. 6.11 Insurance Policies A. If requested by the Owner, make available for viewing a copy of insurance policies, declaration pages and endorsements, and documentation of applicable self-insured retentions and deductibles. B. Contractor may block out (redact) any proprietary information or confidential premium pricing information contained in any policy or endorsement furnished under this Contract. 6.12 Continuing Evidence of Coverage A. Provide updated, revised, or new evidence of insurance in accordance this Article and the Supplementary Conditions prior to the expiration of existing policies. B. Provide evidence of continuation of insurance coverage at final payment and for the following 3 years. 6.13 Notices Regarding Insurance A. Notices regarding insurance are to be sent to the Owner at the following address: General Conditions 007200-35 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 City of Corpus Christi— Engineering Attn: Construction Contract Admin. P.O. Box 9277 Corpus Christi,TX 78469-9277 B. Submit questions regarding insurance requirements to the Construction Contract Administrator by calling 361-826-3530. 6.14 Texas Workers' Compensation Insurance Required Notice A. Definitions: 1. Certificate of coverage ("certificate") -A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self-insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC- 81, TWCC-82, TWCC-83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the Project. 2. Duration of the Project-includes the time from the beginning of the Work on the Project until the Contractor's/person's Work on the Project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. 3. Persons providing services on the Project ("Subcontractor" in §406.096) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the Project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner-operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the Project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the Project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. B. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the Contractor providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project. C. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the Contract. D. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project,the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period,file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. E. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: 1. A certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the Project; and General Conditions 007200-36 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. No later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project. F. The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter. G. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery,within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known,of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project. H. The Contractor shall post on each Project Site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the Project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. I. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project,to: 1. Provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements,which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project; 2. Provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning Work on the Project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the Project,for the duration of the Project; 3. Provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 4. Obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: a. A certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning Work on the Project; and b. A new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the Project; 5. Retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the Project and for one year thereafter; 6. Notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the Project; and 7. Contractually require each person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by this section, with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. J. By signing this Contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the Project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the Project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of General Conditions 007200-37 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self-insured, with the commission's Division of Self-Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. K. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the Contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 7.01 Supervision and Superintendence A. Supervise, inspect, and direct the performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor is solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction. B. Provide a competent resident superintendent acceptable to the OPT. The resident superintendent or acceptable qualified assistant is to be present at all times when Work is being done. Do not replace this resident superintendent except under extraordinary circumstances. Provide a replacement resident superintendent equally competent to the previous resident superintendent if replacement is required. Notify the Owner prior to replacing the resident superintendent and obtain Owner's consent to the change in superintendent. 7.02 Labor; Working Hours A. Provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey and lay out the Work and perform Work to complete the Project. Maintain good discipline and order at the Site. B. Perform Work at the Site during regular working hours except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent to the Site and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. Regular working hours are between sunrise and sundown Monday through Saturday unless other times are specifically authorized in writing by OAR. C. Do not perform Work on a Sunday or legal holiday without OAR's consent. The following legal holidays are observed by the Owner: Holiday Date Observed New Year's Day January 1 Martin Luther King Jr Day Third Monday in January Memorial Day Last Monday in May Independence Day July 4 Labor Day First Monday in September Thanksgiving Day Fourth Thursday in November General Conditions 007200-38 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Holiday Date Observed Friday after Thanksgiving Friday after Thanksgiving Christmas Day December 25 D. If a legal holiday falls on a Saturday, it will be observed the preceding Friday. If a legal holiday falls on a Sunday, it will be observed the following Monday. E. Pay additional cost incurred by Owner for services of the OAR or RPR to observe Work constructed outside of regular working hours. OAR will issue a Set-off in the Application for Payment for this cost per Paragraph 17.01.13 7.03 Services, Materials, and Equipment A. Provide services, materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and other facilities and incidentals necessary for the performance, testing, start-up, and completion of the Work, whether or not these items are specifically called for in the Contract Documents. B. Provide new materials and equipment to be incorporated into the Work. Provide special warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents. Provide satisfactory evidence, including reports of required tests, as to the source, kind, and quality of materials and equipment as required by the Contract Documents or as requested by the OAR. C. Store, apply, install, connect, erect, protect, use, clean, and condition materials and equipment in accordance with instructions of the applicable Supplier, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. 7.04 Concerning Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Others A. Contractor may retain Subcontractors and Suppliers for the performance of parts of the Work. All Subcontractors and Suppliers must be acceptable to Owner. B. Contractor must retain specific Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities for the performance of designated parts of the Work if required to do so by the Contract Documents. C. Submit a list of proposed Subcontractors and Suppliers to OAR prior to entering into binding subcontracts or purchase orders. These proposed Subcontractors or Suppliers are deemed acceptable to Owner unless Owner raises a substantive, reasonable objection within 30 days after receiving this list. Under no circumstances shall any Subcontractor debarred under Chapter 41 of The Code of Ordinances, City of Corpus Christi, be deemed acceptable to Owner. D. Contractor is not required to retain Subcontractors,Suppliers, or other individuals or entities to furnish or perform part of the Work after the Effective Date of the Contract if Contractor has reasonable objection. E. Owner may require the replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities retained by the Contractor. Provide an acceptable replacement for the rejected Subcontractor, Supplier, or other individual or entity. Owner also may require Contractor to retain specific replacements, subject to Contractor's reasonable objections. General Conditions 007200-39 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 F. Contractor may be entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Times with respect to a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entities required by Owner. The Contractor is not entitled to an adjustment in Contract Price or Contract Time with respect to replacement of any individual deemed unsuitable by the OPT. Notify OAR immediately if a replacement of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other entity increases the Contract Price or Contract Times. Initiate a Change Proposal for the adjustment within 10 days of Owner's notice to replace a Subcontractor,Supplier,or other entity retained by Contractor to perform part of the Work. Do not make the replacement until the change in Contract Price or Contract Times has been accepted by the Owner if Change Proposal is to be submitted. G. Owner's initial acceptance of Subcontractors, Suppliers, or other individuals or entities, or their replacements, does not constitute a waiver of the obligation of the Contractor to complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. H. Maintain a current and complete list of Subcontractors and Suppliers that are to perform or furnish part of the Work. I. Contractor is fully responsible for the acts and omissions of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. J. Contractor is solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work. K. Require Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other individuals or entities performing or furnishing Work to communicate with OPT through Contractor. L. Contracts between the Contractor and their Subcontractors or Suppliers may specifically bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. Contractor is responsible for meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents if they choose to not bind the Subcontractors or Suppliers to applicable terms or conditions of the Contract Documents. 1. All Subcontractors employed on this Project must be required to obtain Workers' Compensation Insurance. 2. Proof of this insurance will be required prior to the start of any Work. M. OPT may furnish information about amounts paid to Contractor for Work provided by Subcontractors or Suppliers to the entity providing the Work. N. Nothing in the Contract Documents: 1. Creates a contractual relationship between members of the OPT and members of the Contractor's Team. 2. Creates an obligation on the part of the Owner to pay or to see to the payment of money due members of the Contractor's Team, except as may be required by Laws and Regulations. 7.05 Patent Fees and Royalties A. Pay license fees, royalties, and costs incident to the use of inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the performance of the Work, or to incorporate these inventions, designs, processes, products, or devices which are patented or copyrighted by others in the Work. The Contract Documents identify inventions, General Conditions 007200-40 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 designs, processes, products, or devices OPT knows are patented or copyrighted by others or that its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of a license fee or royalty to others. Contractor is to include the cost associated with the use of patented or copyrighted products or processes, whether specified or selected by the Contractor, in the Contract Price. B. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to infringement of patent rights and copyrights are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. 7.06 Permits A. Obtain and pay for construction permits and licenses. OPT is to assist Contractor in obtaining permits and licenses when required to do so by applicable Laws and Regulations. Pay governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work which are applicable at the time the Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. This Project is not exempt from City permits and fees unless expressly stated otherwise. 7.07 Taxes A. Contractor is responsible for all taxes and duties arising out of the Work. The Owner generally qualifies as a tax exempt agency as defined by the statutes of the State of Texas and is usually not subject to any city or state sales or use taxes, however certain items such as rented equipment may be taxable even though Owner is a tax-exempt agency. Contractor is responsible for including in the Contract Price any applicable sales and use taxes and is responsible for complying with all applicable statutes and rulings of the State Comptroller. Pay sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations. B. The Owner is exempt from the Federal Transportation and Excise Tax. Contractor must comply with all federal regulations governing the exemptions. C. Products incorporated into the Work are exempt from state sales tax according to the provisions of Subchapter H, Chapter 151, of the Texas Tax Code. D. Contractor may not include any amounts for sales, use, or similar taxes for which the Owner is exempt in the Contract Price or any proposed Change Order or Application for Payment. E. Obtain tax exemption certificates or other documentation necessary to establish Owner's exemption from such taxes. 7.08 Laws and Regulations A. Give required notices and comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with Laws or Regulations except where expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations. B. Pay costs resulting from actions taken by Contractor that are contrary to Laws or Regulations. Contractor is not responsible for determining that the design aspects of the Work described in the Contract Documents is in accordance with Laws and Regulations. This does not relieve Contractor of its obligations under Paragraph 3.03. General Conditions 007200-41 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Owner or Contractor may give notice to the other party of changes in Laws or Regulations that may affect the cost or time of performance of the Work, including: 1. Changes in Laws or Regulations affecting procurement of permits; and 2. Sales, use, value-added, consumption, and other similar taxes which come into effect after Contractor's Bid is submitted or when Contractor negotiates the Contract Price. D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal or Owner may initiate a Claim within 30 days of this notice if Owner and Contractor are unable to agree on entitlement to or on the amount or extent of adjustments in Contract Price or Contract Times resulting from these changes. 7.09 Safety and Protection A. Contractor is solely responsible for initiating,maintaining,and supervising safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. This responsibility does not relieve Subcontractors of their responsibility for the safety of persons or property in the performance of their work, nor for compliance with applicable safety Laws and Regulations. B. Take necessary precautions for the safety of persons on the Site or who may be affected by the Work, and provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury, or loss to: 1. Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated in the Work, whether stored on or off Site; and 2. Other property at or adjacent to the Site, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, other work in progress, utilities, and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation, or replacement in the course of construction. C. Comply with applicable Laws and Regulations relating to the safety and protection of persons or property. Erect and maintain necessary safeguards for safety and protection. Notify Owner; the owners of adjacent property, Underground Facilities, and other utilities; and other contractors and utility owners performing work at or adjacent to the Site when prosecution of the Work may affect them. Cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation, and replacement of their property or work in progress. 1. Comply with requirements of Underground Facility Damage Prevention and Safety Act, Texas Utilities Code Chapter 251. 2. Comply with all applicable safety rules and regulations of the Federal Occupational Health and Safety Act of 1970 and subsequent amendments (OSHA). D. Remedy damage, injury, or loss to property referred to in Paragraph 7.09.B caused by Contractor's Team. Pay remediation costs unless the damage or loss is: 1. Attributable to the fault of the Contract Documents; 2. Attributable to acts or omissions of OPT; or 3. Not attributable to the actions or failure to act of the Contractor's Team. E. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site continues until Work is completed and resumes whenever Contractor's Team returns to the Site to fulfill warranty or correction obligations or to conduct other tasks. General Conditions 007200-42 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 F. Comply with the applicable requirements of the Owner's safety program if required to do so in the Supplementary Conditions. A copy of the Owner's safety program will be provided in the Bidding Documents. 7.10 Safety Representative A. Provide a qualified and experienced safety representative at the Site whose duties and responsibilities are the prevention of accidents and maintaining and supervising safety programs. 7.11 Hazard Communication Programs A. Coordinate the exchange of material safety data sheets or other hazard communication information required to be made available or exchanged between or among employers at the Site in accordance with Laws or Regulations. 7.12 Emergencies A. Act to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss in emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at or adjacent to the Site. Notify OAR immediately if Contractor believes that significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused or are required as a result of this need to act. A Modification is to be issued by OAR if OPT determines that the incident giving rise to the emergency action was not the responsibility of the Contractor and that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to this emergency. 7.13 Contractor's General Warranty and Guarantee A. Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner that Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents and is not Defective. Owner is entitled to rely on Contractor's warranty and guarantee. Assume and bear responsibility for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents. B. This Contractor's warranty and guarantee excludes defects or damage caused by improper maintenance or operation, abuse, or modification by OPT; or normal wear and tear under normal usage. C. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete Work in accordance with the Contract Documents is absolute. None of the following constitute an acceptance of Defective Work or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: 1. Observations by OPT; 2. Recommendation by OAR to pay or payment by Owner of progress or final payments; 3. The issuance of a Certificate of Substantial Completion; 4. Use or occupancy of part of the Work by Owner; 5. Review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample; 6. Inspections,tests, or approvals by others; or General Conditions 007200-43 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 7. Correction of Defective Work by Owner. D. The Contract Documents may require the Contractor to accept the assignment of a contract between the Owner and a contractor or supplier. The specific warranties, guarantees, and correction obligations contained in an assigned contract govern with respect to Contractor's performance obligations to Owner for the Work described in an assigned contract. 7.14 INDEMNIFICATION A. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorney's fees or dispute resolution costs, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work and/or failure to comply with the terms and conditions of the contract, violations of Laws or Regulations, or bodily injury, death or destruction of tangible property caused by the acts, omissions or negligence of the Contractor's Team, regardless of whether such claim, damage, loss or expense is alleged to be caused in part by an Owner hereunder, subject to the Owner's defenses and liability limits under the Texas Tort Claims Act. However, nothing herein shall be construed to require Contractor to indemnify an Owner against a claim, loss, damage or expense caused by the sole negligence of an Owner. B. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against Indemnified Costs, arising out of or relating to: (i) the failure to control, contain, or remove a Constituent of Concern brought to the Site by Contractor's Team or a Hazardous Environmental Condition created by Contractor's Team, (ii) Contractor's Team's action or inaction related to damages, delays, disruptions or interference with the work of Owner's employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site, or (iii) the correction of Defective Work. Nothing in this paragraph obligates the Contractor to indemnify the Owner from the consequences of the Owner's sole negligence. c. To the fullest extent permitted by law, Contractor shall indemnify, defend, and hold harmless the Owner from and against Indemnified Costs resulting from infringement on patent rights or copyrights by Contractor's Team. General Conditions 007200-44 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 D. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 are not limited by the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for members of the Contractor's Team or other individuals or entities under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts, or other employee benefit acts in claims against Owner by an employee or the survivor or personal representative of employee of Contractor's Team. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 shall not be deemed to be released,waived or modified in any respect by reason of any surety or insurance provided by Contractor. E. The indemnification obligations of this Paragraph 7.14 do not extend to the liability of Designer arising out of the preparation of the Contract Documents or giving directions or instructions, or failing to give them, to the extent they are obligated to do so if that is the primary cause of the injury or damage. F. Notify the other party within 10 days if Owner or Contractor receives notice of any claim or circumstances that could give rise to an indemnified loss. The notice must include the following: 1. A description of the indemnification event in reasonable detail; 2. The basis on which indemnification may be due; and 3. The anticipated amount of the indemnified loss. This notice does not stop or prevent Owner from later asserting a different basis for indemnification or a different amount of indemnified loss than that indicated in the initial notice. Owner does not waive any rights to indemnification except to the extent that Contractor is prejudiced, suffers loss, or incurs expense because of the delay if Owner does not provide this notice within the 10-day period. G. Defense of Indemnification Claims: 1. Assume the defense of the claim with counsel chosen by the Contractor and pay related costs, unless Owner decides otherwise. Contractor's counsel must be acceptable to Owner. Control the defense and any negotiations to settle the claim. Advise Owner as to its defense of the claim within 10 days after being notified of the indemnification request. Owner may assume and control the defense if Contractor does not assume the defense. Pay all defense expenses of the Owner as an indemnified loss. 2. Owner may retain separate counsel to participate in, but not control, the defense and any settlement negotiations if Contractor defends the claim. Contractor may not settle the claim without the consent or agreement of Owner. Contractor may settle the claim with Owner's consent and agreement unless it: a. Would result in injunctive relief or other equitable remedies or otherwise require Owner to comply with restrictions or limitations that adversely affect Owner; b. Would require Owner to pay amounts that Contractor does not fund in full; or c. Would not result in Owner's full and complete release from all liability to the plaintiffs or claimants who are parties to or otherwise bound by the settlement. 7.15 Delegation of Professional Design Services A. Contractor is not required to provide professional design services unless these services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless these General Conditions 007200-45 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 services are required to carry out Contractor's responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures. Contractor is not required to provide professional services in violation of applicable Laws and Regulations. B. The Contract Documents specify performance and design criteria related to systems, materials or equipment if professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials, or equipment are specifically required of Contractor. These services or certifications must be provided by the licensed Texas Professional Engineer or Registered Architect who prepares, signs, and seals drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings, and other documents. C. OPT is entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy, and completeness of the services, certifications, or approvals performed by Contractor's design professionals, provided OPT has specified to Contractor the performance and design criteria that these services must satisfy. D. Pursuant to this Paragraph 7.15, Designer's review and approval of design calculations and design drawings is only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with the performance and design criteria given and the design concepts expressed in the Contract Documents. Designer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and other documents is only for the purpose stated in the Contract Documents. E. Contractor is not responsible for the adequacy of the performance or design criteria specified by OPT. Advise OPT if the performance or design criteria are known or considered likely to be inadequate or otherwise deficient. ARTICLE 8—OTHER WORK AT THE SITE 8.01 Other Work A. Owner may arrange for other work at or adjacent to the Site which is not part of the Contractor's Work. This other work may be performed by Owner's employees or through other contractors. Utility owners may perform work on their utilities and facilities at or adjacent to the Site. Include costs associated with coordinating with entities performing other work or associated with connecting to this other work in the Contract Price if this other work is shown in the Contract Documents. B. OPT is to notify Contractor of other work prior to starting the work and provide any knowledge they have regarding the start of utility work at or adjacent to the Site to Contractor. C. Provide other contractors: 1. Proper and safe access to the Site; 2. Reasonable opportunity for the introduction and storage of materials and equipment; and 3. Reasonable opportunity to execute their work. D. Provide cutting, fitting, and patching of the Work required to properly connect or integrate with other work. Do not endanger the work of others by cutting, excavating, or otherwise altering the work of others without the consent of OAR and the others whose work will be affected. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnUMU115 007200-46 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. Inspect the work of others and immediately notify OAR if the proper execution of part of Contractor's Work depends upon work performed by others and this work has not been performed or is unsuitable for the proper execution of Contractor's Work. Contractor's failure to notify the OAR constitutes an acceptance of this other work as acceptable for integration with Contractor's Work. This acceptance does not apply to latent defects or deficiencies in the work of others. F. Take adequate measures to prevent damages, delays, disruptions, or interference with the work of Owner, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.02 Coordination A. Owner has sole authority and responsibility for coordination of this other work unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The Owner is to identify the entity with authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities of the various contractors, the limitations of their authority, and the work to be coordinated prior to the start of other work at or adjacent to the Site. 8.03 Legal Relationships A. Contractor may be entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times if, while performing other work at or adjacent to the Site for Owner, the OPT or other contractor retained by the City: 1. Damages the Work or property of Contractor's Team; 2. Delays, disrupts, or interferes with the execution of the Work; or 3. Increases the scope or cost of performing the Work through their actions or inaction. B. Notify the OAR immediately of the event leading to a potential Change Proposal so corrective action can be taken. Submit the Change Proposal within 30 days of the event if corrective action has not adequately mitigated the impact of the actions or inactions of others. Information regarding this other work in the Contract Documents is used to determine if the Contractor is entitled to a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Changes in Contract Price require that Contractor assign rights against the other contractor to Owner with respect to the damage, delay, disruption, or interference that is the subject of the adjustment. Changes in Contract Times require that the time extension is essential to Contractor's ability to complete the Work within the Contract Times. C. Take prompt corrective action if Contractor's Team damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of Owner's employees, other contractors, or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site or agree to compensate other contractors or utility owners for correcting the damage. Promptly attempt to settle claims with other contractors or utility owners if Contractor damages, delays, disrupts, or interferes with the work of other contractors or utility owners performing other work at or adjacent to the Site. D. Owner may impose a set-off against payments due to Contractor and assign the Owner's contractual rights against Contractor with respect to the breach of the obligations described in this Paragraph 8.03 to other contractors if damages, delays, disruptions, or interference occur. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-47 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to damages, delays,disruptions, and interference with other work at the Site are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. ARTICLE 9—OWNER'S AND OPT'S RESPONSIBILITIES 9.01 Communications to Contractor A. OPT issues communications to Contractor through OAR except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 9.02 Replacement of Owner's Project Team Members A. Owner may replace members of the OPT at its discretion. 9.03 Furnish Data A. OPT is to furnish the data required of OPT under the Contract Documents. 9.04 Pay When Due A. Owner is to make payments to Contractor when due as described in Article 17. 9.05 Lands and Easements; Reports and Tests A. Owner's duties with respect to providing lands and easements are described in Paragraph 5.01. OPT will make copies of reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions and drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site available to Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 5.03. 9.06 Insurance A. Owner's responsibilities with respect to purchasing and maintaining insurance are described in Article 6. 9.07 Modifications A. Owner's responsibilities with respect to Modifications are described in Article 11. 9.08 Inspections,Tests, and Approvals A. OPT's responsibility with respect to certain inspections,tests, and approvals are described in Paragraph 16.02. 9.09 Limitations on OPT's Responsibilities A. The OPT does not supervise, direct, or have control or authority over, and is not responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or related safety precautions and programs, or for failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the performance of the Work. OPT is not responsible for Contractor's failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-48 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 9.10 Undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Condition A. OPT's responsibility for undisclosed Hazardous Environmental Conditions is described in Paragraph 5.06. 9.11 Compliance with Safety Program A. Contractor is to inform the OPT of its safety programs and OPT is to comply with the specific applicable requirements of this program. 9.12 Plans and Specifications A. Owner does not warrant the plans and specification. ARTICLE 10—OAR'S AND DESIGNER'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 10.01 Owner's Representative A. OAR is Owner's representative. The duties and responsibilities and the limitations of authority of OAR as Owner's representative are described in the Contract Documents. 10.02 Visits to Site A. Designer is to make periodic visits to the Site to observe the progress and quality of the Work. Designer is to determine, in general, if the Work is proceeding in accordance with the Contract Documents based on observations made during these visits. Designer is not required to make exhaustive or continuous inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. Designer is to inform the OPT of issues or concerns and OAR is to work with Contractor to address these issues or concerns. Designer's visits and observations are subject to the limitations on Designer's authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. B. OAR is to observe the Work to check the quality and quantity of Work, implement Owner's quality assurance program, and administer the Contract as Owner's representative as described in the Contract Documents. OAR's visits and observations are subject to the limitations on OAR's authority and responsibility described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.03 Resident Project Representatives A. Resident Project Representatives assist OAR in observing the progress and quality of the Work at the Site. The limitations on Resident Project Representatives' authority and responsibility are described in Paragraphs 9.09 and 10.07. 10.04 Rejecting Defective Work A. OPT has the authority to reject Work in accordance with Article 16. OAR is to issue a Defective Work Notice to Contractor and document when Defective Work has been corrected or accepted in accordance with Article 16. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnUMU115 007200-49 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 10.05 Shop Drawings, Modifications and Payments A. Designer's authority related to Shop Drawings and Samples are described in the Contract Documents. B. Designer's authority related to design calculations and design drawings submitted in response to a delegation of professional design services are described in Paragraph 7.15. C. OAR and Designer's authority related to Modifications is described in Article 11. D. OAR's authority related to Applications for Payment is described in Articles 15 and 17. 10.06 Decisions on Requirements of Contract Documents and Acceptability of Work A. OAR is to render decisions regarding non-technical or contractual / administrative requirements of the Contract Documents and will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. B. Designer is to render decisions regarding the conformance of the Work to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Designer will render a decision to either correct the Defective Work or accept the Work under the provisions of Paragraph 16.04 if Work does not conform to the Contract Documents. OAR will coordinate the response of the OPT to Contractor. C. Contractor may appeal Designer's decision by submitting a Change Proposal if Contractor does not agree with the Designer's decision. 10.07 Limitations on OAR's and Designer's Authority and Responsibilities A. OPT is not responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor's Team. No actions or failure to act, or decisions made in good faith to exercise or not exercise the authority or responsibility available under the Contract Documents creates a duty in contract, tort, or otherwise of the OPT to the Contractor or members of the Contractor's Team. ARTICLE 11—AMENDING THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS;CHANGES IN THE WORK 11.01 Amending and Supplementing the Contract Documents A. The Contract Documents may be modified by a Contract Amendment, Change Order, Work Change Directive, or Field Order. 1. Contract Amendment: Owner and Contractor may modify the terms and conditions of the Contract Documents without the recommendation of the Designer using a Contract Amendment. A Contract Amendment may be used for: a. Changes that do not involve: 1) The performance or acceptability of the Work; 2) The design as described in the Drawings, Specifications, or otherwise; or 3) Other engineering, architectural or technical matters. b. Authorizing new phases of the Work and establishing the Contract Price, Contract Times, or terms and conditions of the Contract for the new phase of Work when using phased construction or purchasing Goods and Special Services to be incorporated into the Project. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnUMU115 007200-50 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Change Order: All changes to the Contract Documents that include a change in the Contract Price or the Contract Times for previously authorized Work, or changes to the Work requiring Designer's approval must be made by a Change Order. A Change Order may also be used to establish modifications of the Contract Documents that do not affect the Contract Price or Contract Times. 3. Work Change Directive: A Work Change Directive does not change the Contract Price or the Contract Times, but is evidence that the parties expect that the modifications ordered or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations on the Contract Price and Contract Times. If negotiations under the terms of the Contract Documents governing adjustments, expressly including Paragraphs 11.04 and 11.05 are unsuccessful, Contractor must submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment of the Contract Price or the Contract Times no later than 30 days after the completion of the Work set out in the Work Change Directive. 4. Field Order: Designer may require minor changes in the Work that do not change the Contract Price or Contract Times using a Field Order. OAR may issue a Field Order for non-technical, administrative issues. Submit a Change Proposal if Contractor believes that a Field Order justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times before proceeding with the Work described in the Field Order. B. Perform added or revised Work under the applicable provisions of the Contract Documents for the same or similar Work unless different Drawings, Specifications or directions are provided in the Modification. 11.02 Owner-Authorized Changes in the Work A. Owner may order additions, deletions,or revisions in the Work at any time as recommended by the Designer to the extent the change: 1. Involves the design as described in the Contract Documents; 2. Involves acceptance of the Work; or 3. Involves other engineering, architectural or technical matters. B. These changes may be authorized by a Modification. Proceed with the Work involved or, in the case of a deletion in the Work, immediately cease construction activities with respect to the deleted Work upon receipt of the Modification. Nothing in this paragraph obligates the Contractor to undertake Work that Contractor reasonably concludes cannot be performed in a manner consistent with Contractor's safety obligations under the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations. 11.03 Unauthorized Changes in the Work A. Contractor is not entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times with respect to Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents, except in the case of an emergency as provided in Paragraph 7.12, or in the case of uncovering Work as provided in Paragraph 16.05. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-51 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Contractor is responsible for costs and time delays associated with variations from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless the variations are specifically approved by Change Order. 11.04 Change of Contract Price A. The Contract Price for authorized Work can only be changed by a Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment of Contract Price must comply with the provisions of Article 13. B. An adjustment in the Contract Price is to be determined as follows: 1. By applying unit prices to the quantities of the items involved, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03, where the Work involved is covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; 2. By a mutually agreed lump sum where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents; or 3. Payment on the basis of the Cost of the Work determined as provided in Paragraph 15.01 plus a Contractor's fee for overhead and profit determined as provided in Paragraph 15.05 when the Work involved is not covered by unit prices in the Contract Documents and the parties do not reach a mutual agreement to a lump sum. C. The original Contract Price may not be increased by more than 25 percent or the limit set out in Texas Local Government Code 252.048 or its successor statute, whichever is greater. Owner may decrease the Work by up to 25 percent of the Contract Price. 11.05 Change of Contract Times A. The Contract Times for authorized Work can only be changed by Change Order. Any Change Proposal for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Paragraph 11.06. Any Claim for an adjustment in the Contract Times must comply with the provisions of Article 13. B. An adjustment of the Contract Times is subject to the limitations described in Paragraph 4.04. 11.06 Change Proposals A. Submit a Change Proposal in accordance with Article 12 to the OAR to: 1. Request an adjustment in the Contract Price or Contract Times; 2. Appeal an initial decision by OPT concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or relating to the acceptability of the Work under the Contract Documents; 3. Contest a set-off against payment due; or 4. Seek other relief under the Contract Documents. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-52 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Notify the OAR within 3 days if a Change Proposal is to be submitted. Submit each Change Proposal to OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal. 11.07 Execution of Change Orders A. Owner and Contractor are to execute Change Orders covering: 1. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, which are agreed to by Owner and Contractor, including undisputed sums or amount of time for Work actually performed in accordance with a Work Change Directive; 2. Changes in Contract Price resulting from Owner set-offs unless the set-off has been successfully challenged by Contractor; 3. Changes in the Work which are: a. Ordered by Owner pursuant to Paragraph 11.02.A, b. Required because Defective Work was accepted under Paragraph 16.04 or Owner's correction of Defective Work under Paragraph 16.07, or c. Agreed to by the Owner and Contractor; and 4. Changes in the Contract Price or Contract Times, or other changes under Paragraph 11.06 or Article 13. B. Acceptance of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes a full accord and satisfaction for any and all claims and costs of any kind, whether direct or indirect, including but not limited to impact, delay or acceleration damages arising from the subject matter of the Change Order. Each Change Order must be specific and final as to prices and extensions of time, with no reservations or other provisions allowing for future additional money or time as a result of the particular changes identified and fully compensated in the Change Order. The execution of a Change Order by Contractor constitutes conclusive evidence of Contractor's agreement to the ordered changes in the Work. This Contract, as amended, forever releases any claim against Owner for additional time or compensation for matters relating to or arising out of or resulting from the Work included within or affected by the executed Change Order. This release applies to claims related to the cumulative impact of all Change Orders and to any claim related to the effect of a change on unchanged Work. C. All Change Orders require approval by either the City Council or Owner by administrative action. The approval process requires a minimum of 45 days after submission in final form with all supporting data. Receipt of Contractor's submission by Owner constitutes neither acceptance nor approval of a Change Order, nor a warranty that the Change Order will be authorized by City Council or administrative action. The time required for the approval process may not be considered a delay and no extensions to the Contract Times or increase in the Contract Price will be considered or granted as a result of the process. Contractor may proceed with Work if a Work Change Directive is issued. D. If the Contractor refuses to execute a Change Order that is required to be executed under the terms of this Paragraph 11.07, the Change Order is deemed to be in full force as if executed by Contractor. Contractor may file a Claim for payment and/or time, pursuant to Article 13. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-53 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 11.08 Notice to Surety A. Notify the surety of Modifications affecting the general scope of the Work, changes in the provisions of the Contract Documents,or changes in Contract Price or Contract Times. Adjust the amount of each Bond when Modifications change the Contract Price. ARTICLE 12—CHANGE MANAGEMENT 12.01 Requests for Change Proposal A. Designer will initiate Modifications by issuing a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP). 1. Designer will prepare a description of proposed Modifications. 2. Designer will issue the Request for a Change Proposal form to Contractor. A number will be assigned to the Request for a Change Proposal when issued. 3. Return a Change Proposal in accordance with Paragraph 12.02 to the Designer for evaluation by the OPT. 12.02 Change Proposals A. Submit a Change Proposal (CP) to the Designer for Contractor initiated changes in the Contract Documents or in response to a Request for Change Proposal. A Change Proposal must be submitted to the OAR no later than 30 days after the event initiating the Change Proposal. 1. Use the Change Proposal form provided. 2. Assign a number to the Change Proposal when issued. 3. Include with the Change Proposal: a. A complete description of the proposed Modification if Contractor initiated or proposed changes to the OPT's description of the proposed Modification. b. The reason the Modification is requested, if not in response to a Request for a Change Proposal. c. A detailed breakdown of the cost of the change if the Modification requires a change in Contract Price. The itemized breakdown is to include: 1) List of materials and equipment to be installed; 2) Man hours for classification; 3) Equipment used in construction; 4) Consumable supplies,fuels, and materials; 5) Royalties and patent fees; 6) Bonds and insurance; 7) Overhead and profit; 8) Field office costs; and 9) Other items of cost. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnUMU115 007200-54 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 d. Provide the level of detail outlined in the paragraph above for each Subcontractor or Supplier actually performing the Work if Work is to be provided by a Subcontractor or Supplier. Indicate appropriate Contractor mark-ups for Work provided through Subcontractors and Suppliers. Provide the level of detail outline in the paragraph above for self-performed Work. e. Submit Change Proposals that comply with Article 15 for Cost of Work. f. Provide a revised schedule. Show the effect of the change on the Project Schedule and the Contract Times. B. Submit a Change Proposal to the OAR to request a Field Order. C. A Change Proposal is required for all substitutions or deviations from the Contract Documents. D. Request changes to products in accordance with Article 25. 12.03 Designer Will Evaluate Request for Modification A. OAR is to advise OPT regarding the Change Proposal. OPT is to review each Change Proposal and Contractor's supporting data, and within 30 days after receipt of the documents, direct the OAR to either approve or deny the Change Proposal in whole or in part. OAR is to issue a Change Order for an approved Change Proposal. The Contractor may deem the Change Proposal to be denied if OAR does not take action on the Change Proposal within 30 days and start the time for appeal of the denial under Article 13. 1. Change Orders and Contract Amendments will be sent to the Contractor for execution with a copy to the Owner recommending approval. A Work Change Directive may be issued if Work needs to progress before the Change Order or Contract Amendment can be authorized by the Owner. 2. Work Change Directives, Change Orders, and Contract Amendments can only be approved by the Owner. a. Work performed on the Change Proposal prior to receiving a Work Change Directive or approval of the Change Order or Contract Amendment is performed at the Contractor's risk. b. No payment will be made for Work on Change Orders or Contract Amendments until approved by the Owner. B. The Contractor may be informed that the Request for a Change Proposal is not approved and construction is to proceed in accordance with the Contract Documents. 12.04 Substitutions A. The products of the listed Suppliers are to be furnished where Specifications list several manufacturers but do not specifically list "or equal" or "or approved equal" products. Use of any products other than those specifically listed is a substitution. Follow these procedures for a substitution. B. Substitutions are defined as any product that the Contractor proposes to provide for the Project in lieu of the specified product. Submit a Change Proposal per Paragraph 12.02 along with a Shop Drawing as required by Article 25 to request approval of a substitution. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-55 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Prove that the product is acceptable as a substitute. It is not the Designer's responsibility to prove the product is not acceptable as a substitute. 1. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is acceptable to meet the intent of the Contract Documents requirements. 2. Make a direct comparison with the specified Suppliers published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the documents submitted. 3. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed substitute product is final. D. Provide a written certification that, in making the substitution request,the Contractor: 1. Has determined that the substituted product will perform in substantially the same manner and result in the same ability to meet the specified performance as the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds for the substituted product as specified or as would be provided by the manufacturer of the specified product. 3. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the substituted product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. 4. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. E. Pay for review of substitutions in accordance with Article 25. ARTICLE 13—CLAIMS 13.01 Claims A. Follow the Claims process described in this Article for the following disputes between Owner and Contractor: 1. Seeking an adjustment of Contract Price or Contract Times; 2. Contesting an initial decision by OAR concerning the requirements of the Contract Documents or the acceptability of Work under the Contract Documents; 3. Appealing OAR's decision regarding a Change Proposal; 4. Seeking resolution of a contractual issue that OAR has declined to address; or 5. Seeking other relief with respect to the terms of the Contract. B. Contractor shall be entitled to an extension of Contract Time for delays or disruptions due to unusually severe weather in excess of weather normally experienced at the job site, as determined from climatological data set forth by the National Weather Service and which affects the Project's critical path. Contractor shall bear the entire economic risk of all weather delays and disruptions. Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in the Contract Price by reason of such delays or disruptions. Upon Contractor reaching Substantial Completion, Owner and Contractor shall look back at the entire duration of the calendar day Project and review the totality of what Contractor claims were unusually severe weather disruptions. If the Project was delayed or disrupted due to unusually severe weather in FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-56 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 excess of weather normally experienced over the entire duration of the Project, Contractor may make a Claim for an extension of the Contract Time for delays or disruptions due to unusually severe weather in excess of weather normally experienced at the job site, as determined from climatological data set forth by the National Weather Service and which affects the Project's critical path. Any time extension granted shall be non-compensatory. 13.02 Claims Process A. Claims must be initiated by written notice. Notice must conspicuously state that it is a notice of a Claim in the subject line or first sentence. Notice must also list the date of first occurrence of the claimed event. B. Except for Claims resulting from unusually severe weather, notice of a Claim by Contractor must be in writing and delivered to the Owner, Designer and the OAR within 14 days after the start of the event giving rise to the Claim. Failure by Contractor to submit written notice of a Claim within 14 days shall constitute a waiver of such Claim. C. Submit the complete Claim with supporting documentation to Owner no later than 60 days after the start of the event giving rise to the Claim (unless Designer allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of such Claim). The Claim must be signed and sworn to by Contractor, certifying that the Claim is made in good faith, that the supporting data is accurate and complete, and that to the best of Contractor's knowledge and belief,the relief requested accurately reflects the full compensation to which Contractor is entitled. Failure by Contractor to submit the Claim within 60 days shall constitute a waiver of such Claim. D. Any Claims by Contractor that are not brought within 90 days following the termination of the Contract are waived and shall be automatically deemed denied. E. Claims by Owner must be submitted by written notice to Contractor. F. The responsibility to substantiate a Claim rests with the entity making the Claim. Claims must contain sufficient detail to allow the other party to fully review the Claim. 1. Claims seeking an adjustment of Contract Price must include the Contractor's job cost report. Provide additional documentation as requested by OAR or Designer. 2. Claims seeking an adjustment of Contract Time must include a Time Impact Analysis and native schedule files in Primavera or MS Project digital format. Provide additional documentation as requested by OAR or Designer. G. Claims by Contractor against Owner and Claims by Owner against Contractor, including those alleging an error or omission by Designer but excluding those arising under Section 7.12,shall be referred initially to Designer for consideration and recommendation. H. Designer will review a Claim by Contractor within 30 days of receipt of the Claim and take one or more of the following actions: 1. Request additional supporting data from the party who made the Claim; 2. Issue a recommendation; 3. Suggest a compromise; or FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-57 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 4. Advise the parties that Designer is not able to make a recommendation due to insufficient information or a conflict of interest. I. If the Designer does not take any action, the Claim shall be deemed denied 30 days after receipt of the Claim. J. Following receipt of Designer's initial recommendation regarding a Claim,the Contractor and the Owner shall seek to resolve the Claim through the exchange of information and direct negotiations. If no agreement is reached within 90 days, the Claim shall be deemed denied. The Owner and Contractor may extend the time for resolving the Claim by mutual agreement. Notify OAR of any actions taken on a Claim. K. If the entity receiving a Claim approves the Claim in whole or in part or denies it in whole or in part, this action is final and binding unless the other entity invokes the procedure described in Article 22 for final resolution of disputes by filing a notice of appeal within 30 days after this action. L. If the Owner and Contractor reach a mutual agreement regarding a Claim, the results of the agreement or action on the Claim will be incorporated in a Change Order by the OAR to the extent they affect the Contract Documents, the Contract Price, or the Contract Times. M. Both parties shall continue to perform all obligations under the Agreement during the pendency of any dispute or disagreement relating to this Agreement, unless performance would be impracticable or impossible under the circumstances. N. Any failure of Contractor to comply with any of the foregoing conditions precedent with regard to any such Claim shall constitute a waiver of any entitlement to submit or pursue such Claim. O. Receipt and review of a Claim by City shall not be construed as a waiver of any defenses to the Claim available to the City under the Contract Documents or at law. ARTICLE 14—PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS 14.01 Payment of Prevailing Wage Rates A. Contractor and any Subcontractors employed on this Project shall pay not less than the rates established by the Owner as required by Texas Government Code Chapter 2258. B. Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to pay Davis-Bacon Wage Rates. C. Contractor and its Subcontractors are required to pay laborers and mechanics an overtime rate of not less than one and one-half times the basic rate for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in a given workweek. 14.02 Records A. In accordance with Tex. Gov't Code§2258.024,the Contractor and its Subcontractors, if any, shall keep a record showing: 1. The name and occupation of each worker employed by the Contractor or Subcontractor in the construction of the Work; and 2. The actual per diem wages paid to each worker. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-58 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. The record shall be open at all reasonable hours to inspection by the officers and agents of the Owner. 14.03 Liability; Penalty; Criminal Offense A. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.003 — Liability: An officer, agent, or employee of the Owner is not liable in a civil action for any act or omission implementing or enforcing Chapter 2258 unless the action was made in bad faith. B. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.023(b)— Penalty: Any Contractor or Subcontractor who violates the requirements of Chapter 2258,shall pay to the Owner,on whose behalf the Contract is made, $60 for each worker employed on each calendar day or part of the day that the worker is paid less than the wage rates stipulated in the Contract. C. Tex. Gov't Code §2258.058—Criminal Offense: 1. An officer, agent, or representative of the Owner commits an offense if the person willfully violates or does not comply with a provision of Chapter 2258. 2. Any Contractor or Subcontractor, or an agent or representative of the Contractor or Subcontractor, commits an offense if the person violates Tex. Gov't Code §2258.024. 3. An offense is punishable by: a. A fine not to exceed $500; b. Confinement in jail for a term not to exceed 6 months; or c. Both a fine and confinement. 14.04 Prevailing Wage Rates A. Use the Prevailing Wage Rates specified in the Supplementary Conditions. ARTICLE 15—COST OF THE WORK;ALLOWANCES; UNIT PRICE WORK 15.01 Cost of the Work A. The Cost of the Work is the sum of costs described in this Paragraph 15.01, except those excluded in Paragraph 15.01.D, necessary for the proper performance of the Work. The provisions of this Paragraph 15.01 are used for two distinct purposes: 1. To determine Cost of the Work when Cost of the Work is a component of the Contract Price under cost-plus,time-and-materials, or other cost-based terms; or 2. To determine the value of a Change Order, Change Proposal, Claim, set-off, or other adjustment in Contract Price. B. Contractor is entitled only to those additional or incremental costs required because of the change in the Work or because of the event giving rise to the adjustment when the value of the adjustment is determined on the basis of the Cost of the Work. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-59 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Costs included in the Cost of the Work may not exceed the prevailing costs in the proximate area of the Site for similar work unless agreed to by the Owner. Cost of the Work includes only the following items: 1. Payroll costs for Contractor's employees performing the Work, including one foreman per crew, and other required and agreed upon personnel for the time they are employed on the Work. Employees are to be paid according to wage rates for job classifications as agreed to by Owner. Where the Cost of the Work is being used under provisions of Paragraph 15.01.A.2, rates paid for this Work are to be the same as paid for Contract Work as established by certified payroll. Payroll costs may include: a. Actual costs paid for salaries and wages; b. Actual cost paid for fringe benefits, which may include: 1) Social security contributions, 2) Unemployment, 3) Excise and payroll taxes, 4) Workers' compensation, 5) Health and retirement benefits, 6) Bonuses, and 7) Paid time off for sick leave,vacations, and holidays; and c. Actual cost of additional compensation paid for performing Work outside of regular working hours, on Sunday or legal holidays, to the extent authorized by Owner. 2. Cost of materials and equipment furnished and incorporated in the Work, including transportation and storage costs and required Suppliers'field services. Contractor may retain cash discounts unless Owner provided funds to the Contractor for early payment of these materials and equipment. Cash discounts are to be credited to Owner if the Owner provides funds for early payment. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, refunds, and returns from sale of surplus materials and equipment and reduce the Cost of the Work by these amounts. 3. Payments made by Contractor to Subcontractors for Work performed by Subcontractors. Obtain competitive bids from Subcontractors acceptable to Owner unless Owner agrees to use Subcontractors proposed by the Contractor. Bids are to be opened in the presence of the OAR and other designated members for the OPT. Provide copies of bids to the OAR to use in determining,with the OPT,which bids are acceptable. The Subcontractor's Cost of the Work and fee are determined in the same manner as Contractor's Cost of the Work and fee as provided in this Paragraph 15.01 if the subcontract provides that the Subcontractor is to be paid on the basis of Cost of the Work plus a fee. 4. Supplemental costs including the following: a. The proportion of necessary transportation, travel, and subsistence expenses of Contractor's employees incurred in discharge of duties connected with the Work; b. Costs of materials, supplies, equipment, machinery, appliances, office, and temporary facilities at the Site including transportation and maintenance costs; FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-60 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 c. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers consumed in the performance of the Work. Costs of hand tools not owned by the workers which are used but not consumed in the performance of the Work and which remain the property of Contractor, less their market value when Work is completed; d. For Contractor-and Subcontractor-owned machinery,trucks, power tools or other equipment, use the FHWA rental rates found in the Rental Rate Blue Book ("Blue Book") multiplied by the regional adjustment factor and the rate adjustment factor to establish hourly rates. Use the rates in effect for each section of the Blue Book at the time of use. Payment will be made for the actual hours used in the Work. 1) Standby costs will be paid at SO% of the FHWA rental rates found in the Blue Book if Contractor is directed by Owner in writing to standby. Standby costs will not be allowed during periods when the equipment would otherwise have been idle. For a six-day work week, no more than eight hours per a 24-hour day, no more than 48 hours per week and no more than 208 hours per month shall be paid of standby time. Operating costs shall not be charged by Contractor. e. Rental of construction equipment, including the costs of transporting, loading, unloading, assembling, dismantling, and removing construction equipment, whether rented from Contractor or others, in accordance with rental agreements approved by Owner. Costs for rental of equipment will not be paid when the equipment is no longer necessary for the Work. Justify idle time for equipment by demonstrating that it was necessary to keep equipment on Site for related future Work; 1) The hourly rate shall be determined by dividing the actual invoice cost by the actual number of hours the equipment is involved in the Work. Owner reserves the right to limit the hourly rate to comparable Blue Book rates. 2) If Contractor is directed to standby in writing by Owner, standby costs will be paid at the invoice daily rate excluding operating costs, which includes fuel, lubricants, repairs and servicing. f. Applicable sales, consumer, use, and other similar taxes related to the Work for which the Owner is not exempt, and which Contractor pays consistent with Laws and Regulations; g. Deposits lost for causes other than negligence of Contractor's Team; h. Royalty payments and fees for permits and licenses; i. Cost of additional utilities,fuel, and sanitary facilities at the Site; j. Minor expense items directly required by the Work; and k. Premiums for Bonds and insurance required by the Contract Documents. D. The Cost of the Work does not include the following items: 1. Payroll costs and other compensation of Contractor's officers, executives, principals of partnerships and sole proprietorships, general managers, safety managers, superintendents, engineers, architects, estimators, attorneys, auditors, accountants, purchasing and contracting agents, expediters, clerks, and other personnel employed FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-61 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 by Contractor, whether at the Site or in Contractor's principal or branch office, for general administration of the Work and not specifically included in the agreed upon schedule of job classifications referred to in Paragraph 15.01.C.1 or specifically covered by Paragraph 15.01.C.4. These administrative costs are covered by the Contractor's fee. 2. Office expenses other than Contractor's office at the Site. 3. Any part of Contractor's capital expenses, including interest on Contractor's capital employed for the Work and charges against Contractor for delinquent payments. 4. Costs due to the actions of Contractor's Team for the correction of Defective Work, disposal of materials or equipment that do not comply with Specifications, and correcting damage to property. 5. Losses, damages, and related expenses caused by damage to the Work or sustained by Contractor in connection with the performance of the Work. Contractor is entitled to recover costs if covered by insurance provided in accordance with Article 6. Such losses may include settlements made with the approval of Owner. Do not include these losses, damages, and expenses in the Cost of the Work when determining Contractor's fee. 6. Any Indemnified Cost paid with regard to Contractor's indemnification of Owner. 7. Other overhead or general expense costs and the costs of items not described in Paragraphs 15.01.C. E. The Contractor's fee for profit and overhead is determined as follows: 1. In accordance with the Agreement when the Work is performed on a cost-plus basis; 2. A mutually acceptable fixed fee; or 3. A fee based on the following percentages of the various portions of the Cost of the Work: a. The Contractor's fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs 15.01.C.1, 15.01.C.2 and 15.01.C.4; b. The Contractor's fee is 5 percent for costs incurred under Paragraph 15.01.C.3; C. Fees are to be determined as follows where one or more tiers of subcontracts are used: 1) The Subcontractor's fee is 15 percent for costs incurred under Paragraphs 15.01.C.1 and 15.01.C.2 for the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work at whatever tier; 2) The Subcontractor's fee is 5 percent for costs incurred under Paragraph 15.01.C.4 for the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work at whatever tier; and 3) The Contractor and Subcontractors of a tier higher than that of the Subcontractor that actually performs the Work are to be allowed a fee of 5 percent of the fee plus underlying costs incurred by the next lower tier Subcontractor. d. No fee is payable on the basis of costs itemized under Paragraph 15.01.D; FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-62 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 e. Five percent of the net decrease in the cost is to be deducted for changes which result in a net decrease in Contract Price; and 4. The adjustment in Contractor's fee is based on the net change in accordance with Paragraphs 15.05.13.1 through 15.05.13.5, inclusive when both additions and credits are involved in any one change. F. Establish and maintain records in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices and submit these records, including an itemized cost breakdown together with supporting data, in a form and at intervals acceptable to OAR whenever the Cost of the Work is to be determined pursuant to this Paragraph 15.01. 15.02 Allowances A. Include allowances specified in the Contract Documents in the Contract Price and provide Work covered by the allowance as authorized by the Owner through the OAR. B. Contractor agrees that: 1. The cash allowance is used to compensate the Contractor for the cost of furnishing materials and equipment for the Work covered by the allowance item in the Contract Documents. Cost may include applicable taxes. Make provisions for trade discounts, rebates, and refunds and reduce the allowance costs by these amounts. 2. Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the Site, labor, installation, overhead, profit, and other expenses contemplated for the cash allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances; and 3. Costs for cash allowances and installation costs as described in Paragraphs 15.02.13.1 and 15.02.13.2 above are included in the Contract Price. C. OAR will issue a Change Order to adjust the Contract Price by the difference between the allowance amount and the actual amount paid by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance. The Change Order will be issued at the time costs are incurred by Contractor for Work covered by the allowance and this Work is included on the Application for Payment. 15.03 Unit Price Work A. The initial Contract Price for Unit Price Work is equal to the sum of the unit price line items in the Agreement. Each unit price line item amount is equal to the product of the unit price for each line item times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Contract. B. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparing Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Payments to Contractor for Unit Price Work are to be based on actual quantities measured for Work in place. C. Each unit price is deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. D. OAR is to determine the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor to be incorporated into each Application for Payment. OAR's decision on actual quantities is final and binding, subject to the provisions of Paragraph 15.03.E. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-63 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal,or Owner may file a Claim,seeking an adjustment in the Contract Price within 30 days of OAR's decision under Paragraph 15.03.D, if: 1. The total cost of a particular item of Unit Price Work amounts to 20 percent or more of the total Contract Price and the variation in the quantity of that particular item of Unit Price Work performed by the Contractor differs by more than 20 percent from the estimated quantity of an item indicated in the Contract; 2. There is no corresponding adjustment with respect to other items of Work; and 3. Contractor believes it has incurred additional expense as a result of this condition or Owner believes that the quantity variation entitles Owner to an adjustment in the Contract Price. 15.04 Contingencies A. Contingency funds may be included in the Contract Price to pay for Work not defined specifically by the Contract Documents that is essential to the completion of the Project. Contingency funds will be as described in the Contract. B. The contingency funds may be used for costs incurred by the Contractor provided these costs are approved by the Owner. Costs are to be determined and documented in accordance with Paragraph 15.01. The contingency funds are not to be used for the following items: 1. Cost overruns due to changes in material costs after the Contract Price is established, unless specific price escalation provisions are made in the Contract. 2. Rework required to correct Defective Work. 3. Inefficiencies in completing the Work due to the Contractor's selected means, methods, sequences, or procedures of construction. 4. Work Contractor failed to include in the Contract Price. 5. Changes required by changes in Laws and Regulations enacted after the Contract Price is established. 6. Any Work that does not constitute a change in Scope in the Work included in the Contract Price. C. OAR is to issue a Change Order for approved expenditures from contingency funds. When the Change Order is issued, the costs are to be added to the Application for Payment. Contractor is to maintain a tabulation showing the contingency amount, adjustments to the contingency amount, and amounts remaining as the Project progresses. D. Any contingency amounts that are not included in a Change Order are retained bythe Owner. A Change Order will be issued to deduct unused contingency amounts from the Contract Price prior to Final Payment. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-64 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 ARTICLE 16—TESTS AND INSPECTIONS;CORRECTION,REMOVAL,OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 16.01 Access to Work A. Provide safe access to the Site and the Work for the observation, inspection, and testing of the Work in progress. Contractor can require compliance with Contractor's safety procedures and programs as part of providing safe access. 16.02 Tests, Inspections and Approvals A. OPT may retain and pay for the services of an independent inspector, testing laboratory, or other qualified individual or entity to perform inspections. Notify OAR when the Work is ready for required inspections and tests. Provide adequate notice to allow for coordination with entities providing inspection or testing as determined by the OAR. Cooperate with inspection and testing personnel and assist with providing access for required inspections, tests, and handling test specimens or Samples. B. Arrange for and facilitate inspections, tests, and approvals required by Laws or Regulations of governmental entities having jurisdiction that require Work to be inspected, tested, or approved by an employee or other representative of that entity. Pay associated costs and furnish OAR with the required certificates of inspection or approval. C. Arrange, obtain, and pay for inspections and tests required: 1. By the Contract Documents, unless the Contract Documents expressly allocate responsibility for a specific inspection or test to OPT; 2. To attain OPT's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work; 3. By manufacturers of equipment furnished under the Contract Documents; 4. For testing, adjusting, and balancing of mechanical, electrical, and other equipment to be incorporated into the Work; 5. For acceptance of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation in the Work,- 6. ork;6. For re-inspecting or retesting Defective Work, including any associated costs incurred by the testing laboratory for cancelled tests or standby time; and 7. For retesting due to failed tests. D. Provide independent inspectors, testing laboratories, or other qualified individuals or entities acceptable to OPT to provide these inspections and tests. 16.03 Defective Work A. It is Contractor's obligation to ensure that the Work is not Defective. B. OPT has the authority to determine whether Work is Defective and to reject Defective Work. C. OAR is to notify Contractor of Defective Work of which OPT has actual knowledge. D. Promptly correct Defective Work. E. Take no action that would void or otherwise impair Owner's special warranties or guarantees when correcting Defective Work. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-65 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 F. Pay claims, costs, losses,and damages arising out of or relating to Defective Work, including: 1. Costs for correction, removal, and replacement of Defective Work; 2. Cost of the inspection and testing related to correction of Defective Work; 3. Fines levied against Owner by governmental authorities because of Defective Work; and 4. Costs of repair or replacement of work of others resulting from Defective Work. 16.04 Acceptance of Defective Work A. Owner may elect to accept Defective Work instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of Defective Work provided: 1. This acceptance occurs prior to final payment; 2. Designer confirms that the Defective Work is in general accordance with the design intent and applicable engineering or architectural principles; and 3. Designer confirms that acceptance of the Defective Work does not endanger public health or safety. B. Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 17 for costs associated with OPT's evaluation of Defective Work to determine if it can be accepted and to determine the diminished value of the Work. Owner may impose a reasonable set-off against payments due under Article 17 if the parties are unable to agree as to the decrease in the Contract Price to compensate Owner for the diminished value of Defective Work accepted. OAR is to issue a Modification for acceptance of the Defective Work prior to final payment. Pay an appropriate amount to Owner if the acceptance of Defective Work occurs after final payment. 16.05 Uncovering Work A. OPT has the authority to require inspection or testing of the Work,whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. B. Work that is covered prior to approval of the OAR must be uncovered for OPT's observation if requested by OAR. Pay for uncovering Work and its subsequent restoration unless Contractor has given OAR timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the Work and OAR fails to act with reasonable promptness in response to this notice. C. Provide necessary labor, material, and equipment and uncover, expose, or otherwise make available the portion of the Work suspected of being Defective for observation, inspection, or testing if OPT considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Designer or inspected or tested by others as directed by the OAR. 1. Pay for claims, costs, losses, and damages associated with uncovering, exposing, observing, inspecting, and testing if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. Pay costs for correction of Defective Work. Pay for reconstruction, repair, or replacement of work of others resulting from the Defective Work if it is found that the uncovered Work is Defective. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-66 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 16.06 Owner May Stop the Work A. Owner may order Contractor to stop the Work if: 1. The Work is Defective; 2. Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; or 3. Contractor performs Work that may fail to conform to the Contract Documents when completed. This stop work order is to remain in effect until the reason for the stop work order has been eliminated. Owner's right to stop the Work does not create a duty to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor's Team or surety. 16.07 Owner May Correct Defective Work A. Owner may remedy deficiencies in the Work after 7 days' notice to Contractor if: 1. Contractor fails to correct Defective Work, or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by OPT; 2. Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; or 3. Contractor fails to comply with other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. Owner may: 1. Exclude Contractor from the Site; 2. Take possession of the Work and suspend Contractor's services related to the Work; and 3. Incorporate stored materials and equipment in the Work. C. Allow OPT access to the Site and off-Site storage areas to enable Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07. D. All claims, costs, losses, and damages incurred or sustained by Owner in exercising the rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07 are to be charged against Contractor as a set-off against payments due under Article 17. These claims, costs, losses, and damages include costs of repair and the cost of replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal, or replacement of Contractor's Defective Work. E. Contractor is not allowed an extension of the Contract Times because of delays in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise of the Owner's rights and remedies under this Paragraph 16.07. ARTICLE 17—PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR;SET-OFFS;COMPLETION; CORRECTION PERIOD 17.01 Progress Payments A. Progress payment requests are to be submitted to the OAR on the Application for Payment form provided by the OAR following procedures in this Article 17. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-67 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Progress payments for lump sum Work are to be paid on the basis of the earned value to date at the amounts shown in the Schedule of Values submitted as required by Paragraph 17.03. Final payment will be for the total lump sum amount. 2. Progress payments for Unit Price Work are based on the number of units completed as determined under the provisions of Paragraph 15.03. 3. Progress payments for Work to be paid on the basis of the Cost of the Work per Paragraphs 15.01, 15.02 and 15.04 are to be paid for Work completed by Contractor during the pay period. B. Reduction in Payment by Owner: 1. Owner is entitled to impose a set-off against payment based on the following: a. Claims made against Owner or costs, losses,or damages incurred by Owner related to: 1) Contractor's conduct in the performance of the Work, including, but not limited to, workplace injuries, non-compliance with Laws and Regulations, or patent infringement; or 2) Contractor's failure to take reasonable and customary measures to avoid damage, delay, disruption, and interference with other work at or adjacent to the Site, including but not limited to, workplace injuries, property damage, and non-compliance with Laws and Regulations. b. Owner has been required to remove or remediate a Hazardous Environmental Condition for which Contractor is responsible; c. Work is Defective, or completed Work has been damaged by Contractor's Team, requiring correction or replacement; d. Owner has been required to correct Defective Work or complete Work in accordance with Paragraph 16.07; e. The Contract Price has been reduced by Change Orders; f. Events have occurred that would constitute a default by Contractor justifying a termination for cause; g. Liquidated damages have accrued as a result of Contractor's failure to achieve Milestones, Substantial Completion, or completion of the Work; h. Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of these Liens; i. Failure to submit up-to-date record documents as required by the Contract Documents; j. Failure to submit monthly Progress Schedule updates or revised schedules as requested by the OAR; k. Failure to provide Project photographs required by the Contract Documents; I. Failure to provide Certified Payroll required by the Contract Documents; FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnUMU115 007200-68 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 m. Compensation for OPT for overtime charges of OAR or RPR, third review of documents, review of substitutions, re-inspection fees, inspections or designs related to correction of Defective Work, or other services identified as requiring payment by the Contractor; n. Costs for tests performed by the Owner to verify that Work previously tested and found to be Defective has been corrected; o. OPT has actual knowledge of the occurrence of events that would constitute a default by Contractor and therefore justify termination for cause under the Contract Documents with associated cost impacts; p. Other items entitling Owner to a set-off against the amount recommended; or q. Payment would result in an over-payment of the Contract Price. 2. Compensation for services of OPT staff is to be at the rates established by negotiations between OPT and Contractor. 3. OAR is to notify Contractor stating the amount and the reasons for an imposed set-off. The Owner is to pay the Contractor amounts remaining after deduction of the set-off. Owner is to pay the set-off amount agreed to by Owner and Contractor if Contractor remedies the reasons for the set-off. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal contesting the set-off. C. Delayed Payments: 1. No money shall be paid by Owner upon any claim, debt, demand, or account whatsoever, to any person, firm, or corporation who is in arrears to Owner for taxes; and Owner shall be entitled to counterclaim and automatically offset against any such debt, claim, demand,or account in the amount of taxes so in arrears and no assignment or transfer of such debt, claim, demand, or account after said taxes are due, shall affect the right of Owner to offset said taxes, and associated penalties and interest if applicable, against the same. 2. No payment will be made for Work authorized by a Work Change Directive until the Work Change Directive is incorporated into a Change Order. Payment can be included in an Application for payment when the Change Order is approved. D. The Owner is to pay the amount of payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 17.02 Application for Payment A. Submit Applications for Payment for completed Work and for materials and equipment in accordance with the Supplementary Conditions, the Agreement, and this Article 17. The Contract Price is to include costs for: 1. Providing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents; 2. Installing Owner furnished equipment and materials; 3. Providing Work for Alternates and Allowances; 4. Commissioning, start-up,training and initial maintenance and operation; 5. Acceptance testing in manufacturer's facilities or on Site; FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-69 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 6. All home office overhead costs and expenses, including profit made directly or indirectly for the Project; 7. Project management, Contract administration, field office, and field operations staff, including supervision, clerical support, and technology system support; 8. Professional services including design fees, legal fees, and other professional services; 9. Bonds and insurance; 10. Permits, licenses, patent fees, and royalties; 11. Taxes; 12. Providing all documents and Samples required by the Contract Documents; 13. Facilities and equipment at the Site including: a. Field offices, office furnishings, and all related office supplies, software, and equipment, b. Storage facilities for Contractor's use, storage facilities for stored materials and equipment, including spare parts storage, c. Shops, physical plant, construction equipment, small tools, vehicles, technology and telecommunications equipment, d. Safety equipment and facilities to provide safe access and working conditions for workers and for others working at the Site, e. Temporary facilities for power and communications, f. Potable water and sanitation facilities, and g. Mobilization and demobilization for all of these facilities and equipment; 14. Products, materials, and equipment stored at the Site or other suitable location; 15. Products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project; 16. Temporary facilities for managing water, including facilities for pumping, storage, and treatment as required for construction and protection of the environment; 17. Temporary facilities for managing environment conditions and Constituents of Concern; 18. Temporary facilities such as sheeting, shoring, bracing, formwork, embankments, storage facilities, working areas, and other facilities required for construction of the Project; 19. Temporary and permanent facilities for protection of all overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 20. Temporary and permanent facilities for removal, relocation, or replacement of any overhead, surface, or underground structures or features; 21. Products, materials, and equipment consumed during the construction of the Project; 22. Contractor labor and supervision to complete the Project, including that provided through Subcontractors or Suppliers; FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-70 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 23. Correcting Defective Work during the Contract Times, during the Correction Period, or as required to meet any warranty provision of the Contract Documents; 24. Risk associated with weather and environmental conditions, start-up, and initial operation of facilities including equipment, processes, and systems; 25. Contractor's safety programs, including management, administration, and training; 26. Maintenance of facilities, including equipment, processes, and systems until operation is transferred to Owner; 27. Providing warranties, extended or special warranties, or extended service agreements; 28. Cleanup and disposal of any and all surplus materials; and 29. Demobilization of all physical,temporary facilities not incorporated into the Project. B. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price. C. Provide written approval of the surety company providing Bonds for the Schedule of Values, Application for Payment form, and method of payment prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. Payment will not be made without this approval. D. OAR may withhold processing Applications for Payment if any of the following processes or documentation are not up to date: 1. Record Documents per Article 20. 2. Progress Schedule per Article 27. 3. Project photographs per Article 28. 4. Documentation required to comply with Owner's Minority / MBE / DBE Participation Policy. 5. Documentation required to substantiate any approved Project deviation, including overruns of Designer's estimated quantity. 6. Documentation required by funding agency, if applicable. 17.03 Schedule of Values A. Submit a detailed Schedule of Values for the Work at least 10 days prior to submitting the first Application for Payment. B. Submit the Schedule of Values in the form attached to the Application for Payment - Tabulation of Earned Value of Original Contract Performed. C. Do not submit an Application for Payment until the Schedule of Values has been approved by the OAR. D. If unit prices are included in the Contract, use each unit price line item in the Contract as a unit price line item in the Schedule of Values. E. Divide lump sum line items, including Subcontractor and Supplier amounts in the Schedule of Values into smaller components to allow more accurate determination of the earned value for each item. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-71 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Provide adequate detail to allow a more accurate determination of the earned value expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each item. 2. Line items may not exceed $50,000.00, unless they are for products, materials or equipment permanently incorporated into the Project that cannot be subdivided into units or subassemblies. 3. Lump sum items may be divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value. a. The estimated number of units times the cost per unit must equal the lump sum amount for that line item. b. Contractor will receive payment for the lump sum for the line item, regardless of the number of units installed, unless an adjustment is made by Change Order. 4. Include Contractor's overhead and profit in each line item in proportion to the value of the line item to the Contract Price. 5. Include the cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the Contract Price for each item. 6. These line items may be used to establish the value of Work to be added or deleted from the Project. 7. The sum of all values listed in the schedule must equal the total Contract Price. F. Subdivide each line item in the Schedule of Values into two payment components. The first component is the direct cost for products, materials, and equipment permanently incorporated into the Project. The second component is all other costs associated with the item in the Contract. The sum of the two components must equal the value of the line item in the Schedule of Values. G. Where a percentage of the line value is allowed for a specified stage of completion,show the value for each stage of completion as a component of that line item cost. 17.04 Schedule of Anticipated Payments and Earned Value A. Submit a schedule of the anticipated Application for Payments showing the application numbers, submission dates, and the anticipated amount to be requested. Incorporate retainage into the development of this schedule of anticipated payments. B. Submit a tabulation of the anticipated Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to create a graphic (curve) representation of the anticipated progress on the Project each month. Adjust this table and curve to incorporate Modifications. Use this curve to compare actual progress on the Project each month by comparing the anticipated cumulative Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials to the actual Total Earned Value of Fees, Work, and Materials each month. Use the comparison of values to determine performance on budget and schedule. C. Update the Schedule of Payments as necessary to provide a reasonably accurate indication of the funds required to make payments each month to the Contractor for Work performed. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-72 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 17.05 Basis for Payments A. Lump Sum Contracts: 1. Payment will be made for the earned value of Work completed during the payment period expressed as a percentage of Work completed for each line item during the payment period per the Contract Documents. 2. Payment amount is the value of Work completed per the Contract Documents multiplied by the percentage of Work completed. 3. Payment for lump sum items divided into an estimated number of units to determine earned value per Paragraph 17.03 will be made for the measured number of units. 4. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 17.06. B. Unit Price Contracts: 1. Payment will be made for the actual quantity of Work completed during the payment period and for materials and equipment stored during the payment period per the Contract Documents. a. Payment amount is the Work quantity measured per the Contract Documents multiplied by the unit prices for that line item in the Contract. b. Payment for stored materials and equipment will be made per Paragraph 17.06. 2. Measure the Work described in the Contract for payment. Payment will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. 17.06 Payment for Stored Materials and Equipment A. Store materials and equipment properly at the Site. 1. Payment will be made for the invoice amount less the specified retainage. 2. Payment for materials and equipment shown in the Application for Payment and attachments will be made for the invoice amount,up to the value shown in the Schedule of Values for that line item. Costs for material and equipment in excess of the value shown in the Schedule of Values may not be added to other line items. 3. Payment will be made in full for the value shown in the line item for products and materials if invoices for materials and equipment are less than the amount shown in the line item and it can be demonstrated that no additional materials or equipment are required to complete Work described in that item. 4. Provide invoices at the time materials are included on the Application for Payment and attachments. Include invoice numbers so that a comparison can be made between invoices and amounts included on the Application for Payment and attachments. B. Provide a bill of sale, invoice, or other documentation warranting that Owner has received the materials and equipment free and clear of Liens. Provide documentation of payment for FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-73 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 materials and equipment with the next Application for Payment. Adjust payment to the amount actually paid if this differs from the invoice amount. Remove items from the tabulation of materials and equipment if this documentation is not provided. Payment will not be made for material and equipment without documentation of payment. C. Contractors can be paid for non-perishable materials on hand stored at the site, provided that invoices are furnished to the City for verification of the material value, and that Contractor provides documents, satisfactory to the City,that show that the material supplier has been paid for the materials delivered to the work site. D. Provide evidence that the materials and equipment are covered by appropriate property insurance or other arrangements to protect Owner's interest. E. The Work covered by progress payments becomes the property of the Owner at the time of payment. The Contractor's obligations with regard to proper care and maintenance, insurance, and other requirements are not changed by this transfer of ownership until accepted in accordance with the General Conditions. F. Payment for materials and equipment does not constitute acceptance of the product. 17.07 Retainage and Set-Offs A. Retainage will be withheld from each Application for Payment per the Agreement. Retainage will be released per the General Conditions. B. Reduce payments for set-offs per the General Conditions. Include the appropriate attachment to the Application for Payment. 17.08 Procedures for Submitting an Application for Payment A. Submit a draft Application for Payment to the OAR each month at least 20 days before the date established in the Contract for Owner to make progress payments. Do not submit Applications for Payment more often than monthly. Review the draft Application for Payment with the OAR to determine concurrence with: 1. The earned value for each lump sum item including the value of properly stored and documented materials and equipment for each item in the original Contract. 2. The quantity of Work completed for each unit price item. 3. Set-offs included in the Application for Payment. 4. Values requested for materials and equipment consistent with invoices for materials and equipment. B. Submit Applications for Payment monthly through the OAR after agreement has been reached on the draft Application for Payment. 1. Number each application sequentially and include the dates for the application period. 2. Show the total amounts for earned value of original Contract performed, earned value for Work on approved Contract Amendments and Change Orders, retainage, and set- offs. Show total amounts that correspond to totals indicated on the attached tabulation for each. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-74 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. Include Attachment A to show the earned value on each line item in the Schedule of Values for Work shown in the original Contract. 4. Include Attachment B to show the earned value on line items for approved Change Orders. Add items to Attachment B as Change Orders are approved. Change Orders must be approved before payment can be made on Change Order items. 5. Include Attachment Cto document set-offs required per the Contract Documents. Show each set-off as it is applied. Show a corresponding line item to reduce the set-off amount if a payment held by a set-off is released for payment. 6. Include Attachment D to allow tracking of invoices used to support amounts requested as materials in Attachments A and B. Enter materials to show the amount of the invoice assigned to each item in Attachment A or B if an invoice includes materials used on several line items. 7. Complete the certification stating that all Work, including materials and equipment, covered by this Application for Payment have been completed or delivered and stored in accordance with the Contract Documents,that all amounts have been paid for Work, materials, and equipment for which previous payments have been made by the Owner, and that the current payment amount shown in this Application for Payment is now due. C. Submit attachments in Portable Document Format (PDF): 1. Generate attachments to the Application for Payment using the Excel spreadsheet provided. 2. Submit PDF documents with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. 17.09 Responsibility of Owner's Authorized Representative A. OAR will review draft Application for Payment with Contractor to reach an agreement on the values that will be recommended for payment by the OAR. B. OAR will review Application for Payment submitted by Contractor to determine that the Application for Payment has been properly submitted and is in accordance with the agreed to draft Application for Payment. C. OAR is to either recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner or notify the Contractor of the OPT's reasons for not recommending payment. Contractor may make necessary corrections and resubmit the Application for Payment if it is not recommended within 10 days after receipt of the notice. OAR will review resubmitted Application for Payment and reject or recommend payment of the Application for Payment to Owner as appropriate. D. OAR's recommendation of the Application for Payment constitutes a representation by OPT that based on their experience and the information available: 1. The Work has progressed to the point indicated; 2. The quality of the Work is generally in accordance with the Contract Documents; and 3. Requirements prerequisite to payment have been met. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-75 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. This representation is subject to: 1. Further evaluation of the Work as a functioning whole; 2. The results of subsequent tests called for in the Contract Documents; or 3. Any other qualifications stated in the recommendation. F. OPT does not represent by recommending payment: 1. Inspections made to check the quality or the quantity of the Work as it has been performed have been exhaustive, extended to every aspect of the Work in progress, or involved detailed inspections of the Work; or 2. Other matters or issues between the parties that might entitle Contractor to additional compensation or entitle Owner to withhold payment to Contractor may or may not exist. G. Neither OPT's review of Contractor's Work for the purposes of recommending payments nor OAR's recommendation of payment imposes responsibility on OPT: 1. To supervise, direct, or control the Work; 2. For the means, methods, techniques, sequences, or procedures of construction, or safety precautions and programs; 3. For Contractor's failure to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to Contractor's performance of the Work; 4. To make examinations to ascertain how or for what purposes Contractor has used the monies paid on account of the Contract Price; or 5. To determine that title to the Work, materials, or equipment has passed to Owner free and clear of Liens. 17.10 Contractor's Warranty of Title A. Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to the Work, materials, and equipment furnished under the Contract is to pass to Owner free and clear of Liens, title defects, and patent, licensing, copyright, or royalty obligations no later than 7 days after the time of payment by Owner of the Application for Payment which includes these items. 17.11 Substantial Completion A. Notify OAR when Contractor considers the entire Work substantially complete and request a Certificate of Substantial Completion. B. OPT is to inspect the Work within 30 days after Contractor's notification to determine if the Work is substantially complete. OAR, within 120 days after receipt of Contractor's notification, is to either issue the Certificate of Substantial Completion which sets the date of Substantial Completion or notify Contractor of the reasons the Project is not considered to be substantially complete. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-76 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. The OPT and Contractor are to meet to discuss Owner's use or occupancy of the Work following Substantial Completion. Items to be discussed at this meeting include: 1. Review of insurance policies with respect to the end of the Contractor's coverage, and confirm the transition to coverage of the Work under a permanent property insurance policy held by Owner; 2. Owner's assumption of responsibility for security, operation, protection of the Work, maintenance, and utilities upon Owner's use or occupancy of the Work; 3. Contractor's obligations for operations and maintenance during performance and acceptance testing; 4. Contractor's access to the Site to complete punch list items; and 5. Procedures for correction of Defective Work during the 1-year correction period. 17.12 Partial Utilization A. Owner may use or occupy substantially completed parts of the Work which are specifically identified in the Contract Documents, or which OPT and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work prior to Substantial Completion of the Work. Owner must be able to use that part of the Work for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work. Contractor and OPT are to follow the procedures of Paragraph 17.11 for this part of the Work. B. No use or occupancy or separate operation of part of the Work may occur prior to compliance with the requirements of Article 6. 17.13 Final Inspection A. OPT is to make a final inspection upon notice from Contractor that the entire Work or portion to be accepted is complete. OAR is to notify Contractor of Work determined to be incomplete or Defective. Immediately take corrective measures to complete the Work and correct Defective Work. 17.14 Final Application for Payment A. Include adjustments to the Contract Price in the final Application for Payment for: 1. Approved Change Orders and Contract Amendments, 2. Allowances not previously adjusted by Change Order, 3. Deductions for Defective Work that has been accepted by the Owner, 4. Penalties and bonuses, 5. Deductions for liquidated damages, 6. Deduction for all final set-offs, and 7. Other adjustments if needed. B. OAR will prepare a final Change Order reflecting the approved adjustments to the Contract Price which have not been covered by previously approved Change Orders and if necessary reconcile estimate unit price quantities with actual quantities. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-77 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 17.15 Final Payment A. Make final Application for Payment after completing required corrections identified during the final inspection and delivering items and documents required by the Contract Documents. Provide the following with the final Application for Payment: 1. Consent of Surety to Final Payment acknowledging unsettled disputes; and 2. Certification of Payment of Debts and Claims or Certification of Release of Liens or furnish receipts or releases in full from Subcontractors and Suppliers. B. OAR is to either recommend payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner if OPT is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled or notify the Contractor of the OPT's reasons for not recommending final payment. C. The Work is complete, subject to surviving obligations, when it is ready for final payment as established by the OAR's recommendation of payment of the final Application for Payment to Owner and the issuance of a Certificate of Final Completion. D. The Owner is to pay the amount of final payment recommended by the OAR within 30 days after receipt of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation from the OAR. 17.16 Waiver of Claims A. The making of final payment does not constitute a waiver by Owner of claims or rights against Contractor. Owner expressly reserves claims and rights arising from: 1. Unsettled Liens or claims for non-payment; 2. Defective Work appearing after final inspection; 3. Contractor's failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of specified special guarantees; or 4. Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents. B. Contractor waives claims and rights against Owner by accepting final payment with the exception of those Claims made in accordance with the provisions of Article 22 and specifically noted in the Certificate of Final Completion. 17.17 Correction Period A. Promptly correct Defective Work without cost to Owner for 1 year after the date of Substantial Completion or, in the event of a latent defect, within 1 year after discovery thereof by City. B. Promptly correct damages to the Site or adjacent areas that Contractor has arranged to use through construction easements or other agreements. Promptly correct damages to Work or the work of others. Make corrections without cost to Owner. C. Owner may have the Defective Work and damages described in Paragraphs 17.17.A and 17.17.13 corrected if Contractor does not comply with the terms of OAR's instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-78 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 D. Contractor's obligation to indemnify Owner for claims arising out of or related to the correction of Defective Work are as set forth in Paragraph 7.14. E. The correction period starts to run from the date when a specific item of equipment or system is placed in continuous beneficial use by Owner before Substantial Completion of Work if so provided in the Specifications or if accepted for beneficial use by the Owner. F. Contractor's obligations under this Paragraph 17.17 are in addition to other obligations or warranties. The provisions of this Paragraph 17.17 are not a substitute for, or a waiver of, the provisions of applicable statutes of limitation or repose. ARTICLE 18—SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 18.01 Owner May Suspend Work A. Owner may suspend the Work or a portion of the Work for a period of not more than 90 consecutive days, at any time and without cause, by notice to Contractor. This notice fixes the date on which Contractor is to resume Work. Contractor is entitled to adjustments in the Contract Price and Contract Times directly attributable to this suspension only if efforts are made to mitigate the cost impacts of the suspension. Meet with the Owner within 10 days of the notice of suspension to discuss specific strategies to reduce or eliminate the cost of delays. Submit a Change Proposal seeking an adjustment no later than 30 days after the date fixed for resumption of Work. 18.02 Owner May Terminate for Cause A. The occurrence of one or more of the following events constitutes a default by Contractor and justifies termination for cause: 1. Contractor's persistent failure to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, including failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment; 2. Failure to adhere to the Progress Schedule; 3. Failure of the Contractor to provide a satisfactory replacement Bond or insurance in the event either is lost or canceled; 4. Failure of Contractor to maintain financial solvency to adequately complete the Project as indicated by one or more of the following: a. A petition of bankruptcy is filed by or against Contractor, b. Contractor is adjudged as bankrupt or insolvent, c. Contractor or surety makes a general assignment for the benefit of creditors, d. A receiver is appointed for the benefit of Contractor's creditors, or e. A receiver is appointed on account of Contractor's insolvency; 5. Contractor's disregard of Laws or Regulations of public bodies having jurisdiction; 6. Contractor's repeated disregard of the authority of OPT; 7. Contractor's failure to prosecute the work with diligence; or FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-79 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 8. Contractor's other material breach of the contract. B. Contractor and surety must provide adequate assurance of future performance in accordance with the Contract Documents that is satisfactory to Owner if Contractor is believed to be in financial distress due to the existence of one or more of the indicators listed in Paragraph 18.02.A.4. Owner may terminate Contractor's performance under this Contract if Contractor and surety fail to provide adequate documentation satisfactory to Owner within 10 days of OAR's request for this information. C. Owner may declare Contractor to be in default, give notice to Contractor and surety that Contractor's performance under the Contract is terminated, and enforce the rights available to Owner under the Performance Bond after giving Contractor and surety 10 days' notice that one or more of the events identified in Paragraph 18.02.A has occurred. D. Owner may exclude Contractor from the Site, take possession of the Work, incorporate the materials and equipment stored and complete the Work as Owner may deem expedient if Owner has terminated Contractor's performance under the Contract for cause. E. Owner may elect not to proceed with termination of Contractor's performance under the Contract under this Paragraph 18.02 if Contractor begins to cure the cause for termination within 7 days of receipt of notice of intent to terminate. F. Contractor is not entitled to receive further payments until the Work is completed if Owner proceeds as provided in this Paragraph 18.02. The amount of the Contract Price remaining is to be paid to the Contractor if the unpaid balance exceeds the cost to complete the Work. The cost to complete the Work may include related claims, costs, losses, damages, and the fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys, and other professionals retained by Owner. Pay the difference to Owner if the cost to complete the Work including related claims, costs, losses, and damages exceeds the unpaid balance of the Contract Price. Owner is not required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed when exercising its rights or remedies under this paragraph. G. Termination of Contractor's performance does not affect the rights or remedies of Owner against Contractor or against surety under the Payment Bond or Performance Bond. Owner does not release Contractor from liability by paying or retaining money due Contractor. H. In the event the Owner terminates the contract for cause, and it is later determined that cause for termination was lacking, the termination will be deemed a termination without cause under Paragraph 18.03. 18.03 Owner May Terminate For Convenience A. Owner may terminate the Contract without cause after giving 7 days' notice to Contractor of the effective date of termination. Contractor is to be paid for the following if Owner terminates for convenience: 1. Work completed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination; 2. Actual costs sustained prior to the effective date of termination for Work in progress, plus a fee calculated in accordance with Paragraph 15.05; and 3. Reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination, including costs incurred to prepare a termination for convenience cost proposal. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-80 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. No payment is payable to Contractor for loss of anticipated overhead, profits or revenue, or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from this termination. ARTICLE 19— PROJECT MANAGEMENT 19.01 Work Included A. Furnish resources required to complete the Project with an acceptable standard of quality within the Contract Times. B. Construct Project in accordance with current safety practices. C. Manage Site to allow access to Site and control construction operations. D. Construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. E. Provide temporary controls for pollutions, management of water and management of excess earth. 19.02 Quality Assurance A. Employ competent workmen,skilled in the occupation for which they are employed. Provide Work meeting quality requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Remove Defective Work from the Site immediately unless provisions have been made and approved by the OPT to allow repair of the product at the Site. Clearly mark Work as Defective until it is removed or allowable repairs have been completed. 19.03 Document Submittal A. Provide documents in accordance with Article 24. 1. Provide copies of Supplier's printed storage instructions prior to furnishing materials or products and installation instructions prior to beginning the installation. 2. Incorporate field notes,sketches, recordings,and computations made by the Contractor in Record Data. 19.04 Required Permits A. Obtain building permits for the Project from the local authorities having jurisdiction. Pay building permit fees and include this cost in the Contract Price. B. Obtain environmental permits required for construction at the Site. C. Provide required permits for transporting heavy or oversized loads. D. Provide other permits required to conduct any part of the Work. E. Arrange for inspections and certification by agencies having jurisdiction over the Work. F. Make arrangements with private utility companies and pay for fees associated with obtaining services, or for inspection fees. G. Retain copies of permits and licenses at the Site and observe and comply with all regulations and conditions of the permit or license. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-81 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 19.05 Safety Requirements A. Manage safety to protect the safety and welfare of persons at the Site. B. Provide safe access to move through the Site. Provide protective devices to warn and protect from hazards at the Site. C. Provide safe access for those performing tests and inspections. D. Comply with latest provisions of the Occupational Health and Safety Administration and other Laws and Regulation. E. Cooperate with accident investigations. Provide two copies of all reports,including insurance company reports, prepared concerning accidents, injury, or death related to the Project to the OAR as Record Data per Article 26. 19.06 Access to the Site A. Maintain access to the facilities at all times. Do not obstruct roads, pedestrian walks, or access to the various buildings, structures, stairways, or entrances. Provide safe access for normal operations during construction. B. Provide adequate and safe access for inspections. Leave ladders, bridges, scaffolding, and protective equipment in place until inspections have been completed. Construct additional safe access if required for inspections. C. Use roadways for construction traffic only with written approval of the appropriate representatives of each entity. Obtain written approval to use roads to deliver heavy or oversized loads to the Site. Furnish copies of the written approvals to the Owner as Record Data per Article 26. 19.07 Contractor's Use of Site A. Limit the use of Site for Work and storage to those areas designated on the Drawings or approved by the OAR. Coordinate the use of the premises with the OAR. B. Provide security at the Site as necessary to protect against vandalism and loss by theft. C. Do not permit alcoholic beverages or illegal substances on the Site. Do not allow persons under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances to enter or remain on the Site at any time. Persons on Site under the influence of alcoholic beverages or illegal substances will be permanently prohibited from returning to the Site. Criminal or civil penalties may also apply. D. Park construction equipment in designated areas only and provide spill control measures. E. Park employees'vehicles in designated areas only. F. Obtain written permission of the Owner before entering privately-owned land outside of the Owner's property, rights-of-way, or easements. G. Do not allow the use of audio devices, obnoxious, vulgar or abusive language, or sexual harassment in any form. These actions will cause immediate and permanent removal of the offender from the premises. Criminal or civil penalties may apply. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnUMU115 007200-82 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 H. Require Workers to wear clothing that is inoffensive and meets safety requirements. Do not allow sleeveless shirts, shorts, exceedingly torn, ripped, or soiled clothing to be worn on the Project. I. Do not allow firearms or weapons of any sort to be brought on to the Site under any conditions. No exception is to be made for persons with concealed handgun permits. Remove any firearms or weapons and the person possessing these firearms or weapons immediately from the Site. 19.08 Protection of Existing Structures and Utilities A. Examine the Site and review the available information concerning the Site. Locate utilities, streets, driveways, fences, drainage structures, sidewalks, curbs, and gutters. Verify the elevations of the structures adjacent to excavations. Report any discrepancies from information in the Contract Documents to the OAR before beginning construction. B. Determine if existing structures, poles, piping, or other utilities at excavations will require relocation or replacement. Prepare a Plan of Action and coordinate Work with local utility companies and others for the relocation or replacement. C. Protect buildings, utilities, street surfaces, driveways, sidewalks, curb and gutter, fences, wells, drainage structures, piping, valves, manholes, electrical conduits, and other systems or structures unless they are shown to be replaced or relocated on the Drawings. Restore damaged items to the satisfaction of the OPT and utility owner. D. Carefully support and protect all structures and/or utilities so that there will be no failure or settlement where excavation or demolition endangers adjacent structures and utilities. Do not take existing utilities out of service unless required by the Contract Documents or approved by the OAR. Notify and cooperate with the utility owner if it is necessary to move services, poles, guy wires, pipelines, or other obstructions. E. Protect existing trees and landscaping at the Site. 1. Identify trees that may be removed during construction with OPT. 2. Mark trees to be removed with paint. 3. Protect trees to remain from damage by wrapping trunks with 2 x 4 timbers around the perimeter, securely wired in place, where machinery must operate around existing trees. Protect branches and limbs from damage by equipment. 4. Protect root zone from compaction. 19.09 Pre-Construction Exploratory Excavations A. Excavate and expose existing pipelines that cross within 20 feet of Project pipelines prior to any Work. Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point the existing pipeline may potentially conflict with the Work. B. Excavate and expose existing parallel pipelines at 300 feet intervals (maximum) for existing pipelines which are within 10 feet of Project pipelines. Survey the line to determine its exact vertical and horizontal location at each point where the line is excavated and exposed. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-83 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Prepare a Plan of Action indicating the owner of pipelines excavated and surveyed and all pertinent survey data, including the station where lines cross or conflicts may exist and the distance to the pavement centerline and elevations of the top of existing pipelines. D. Do not perform Work on the Project until all exploratory excavations have been completed and the Plan of Action has been approved by the OAR. E. Unless specifically indicated otherwise in the Bid Form, no separate payment will be made for pre-construction exploratory excavations. Include the cost for pre-construction exploratory excavations in the unit price for the pipe construction or other applicable feature. When necessary, pavement repairs associated with exploratory excavations that are beyond the limits of the new pavement will be paid for at the unit prices for pavement repair when an item is included in the Bid Form. When an item for pavement repair is not included in the Bid Form, the cost should be included in the unit price for the pipe construction or other applicable feature. 19.10 Disruption of Services/Continued Operations A. Existing facilities are to continue in service as usual during the construction unless noted otherwise. Owner of utilities must be able to operate and maintain the facilities. Keep disruptions to existing utilities, piping, process piping, or electrical services to a minimum. 1. Do not restrict access to critical valves or operators. 2. Limit operations to the minimum amount of space needed to complete the specified Work. 3. Maintain storm sewers and sanitary sewers in service at all times. Provide temporary service around the construction or otherwise construct the structure in a manner that the flow is not restricted. B. Provide a Plan of Action if facilities must be taken out of operation. 19.11 Field Measurements A. Perform complete field measurements prior to purchasing products or beginning construction for products required to fit existing conditions. B. Verify property lines, control lines, grades, and levels indicated on the Drawings. C. Check Shop Drawings and indicate the actual dimensions available where products are to be installed. D. Include field measurements in Record Data as required in Article 26. 19.12 Reference Data and Control Points A. The OPT will provide the following control points: 1. Base line or grid reference points for horizontal control. 2. Benchmarks for vertical control. B. Locate and protect control points prior to starting the Work and preserve permanent reference points during construction. Designated control points may be on an existing structure or monument. Do not change or relocate points without prior approval of the OAR. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-84 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Notify OAR when the reference point is lost, destroyed, or requires relocation. Replace Project control points on the basis of the original survey. C. Provide complete engineering layout of the Work needed for construction. 1. Provide competent personnel. Provide equipment including accurate surveying instruments, stakes, platforms,tools, and materials. 2. Provide surveying with accuracy meeting the requirements established for Category 5 Construction Surveying as established in the Manual of Practice of Land Surveying in Texas published by the Texas Society of Professional Surveyors, latest revision. 3. Record Data and measurements per standards. 19.13 Delivery and Storage A. Deliver products and materials to the Site in time to prevent delays in construction. B. Deliver packaged products to Site in original undamaged containers with identifying labels attached. Open cartons as necessary to check for damage and to verify invoices. Reseal cartons and store properly until used. Leave products in packages or other containers until installed. C. Assume full responsibility for the protection and safekeeping of products stored at the Site. D. Store products at locations acceptable to the OAR and to allow Owner access to maintain and operate existing facilities. E. Store products in accordance with the Supplier's storage instructions immediately upon delivery. Leave seals and labels intact. F. Provide additional storage areas as needed for construction. Store products subject to damage by elements in substantial weather-tight enclosures or storage sheds. Provide and maintain storage sheds as required for the protection of products. Provide temperature, humidity control, and ventilation within the ranges stated in the Supplier's instructions. Remove storage facilities at the completion of the Project. G. Protect the pipe interior. Keep all foreign materials such as dirt, debris, animals, or other objects out of the pipe during the Work. Cap or plug ends of installed pipe in an approved manner when pipe is not being installed. Clean or wash out pipe sections that become contaminated before continuing with installation. Take precautions to prevent the pipe from floating or moving out of the proper position during or after laying operations. Immediately correct any pipe that moves from its correct position. H. Provide adequate exterior storage for products that may be stored out-of-doors. 1. Provide substantial platforms, blocking, or skids to support materials and products above ground which has been sloped to provide drainage. Protect products from soiling or staining. 2. Cover products subject to discoloration or deterioration from exposure to the elements, with impervious sheet materials. Provide ventilation to prevent condensation below covering. 3. Store loose, granular materials on clean, solid surfaces, or on rigid sheet materials, to prevent mixing with foreign matter. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-85 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 4. Provide surface drainage to prevent erosion and ponding of water. 5. Prevent mixing of refuse or chemically injurious materials or liquids with stored materials. 6. Pipes and conduits stored outdoors are to have open ends sealed to prevent the entrance of dirt, moisture, and other injurious materials. Protect PVC pipe from ultraviolet light exposure. 7. Store light weight products to prevent wind damage. I. Maintain storage facilities. Inspect stored products on a weekly basis and after periods of severe weather to verify that: 1. Storage facilities continue to meet specified requirements; 2. Supplier's required environmental conditions are continually maintained; and 3. Products that can be damaged by exposure to the elements are not adversely affected. J. Replace any stored item damaged by inadequate protection or environmental controls. K. Payment may be withheld for any products not properly stored. 19.14 Cleaning During Construction A. Provide positive methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations and provide positive means to prevent air-borne dust from disbursing into the atmosphere. Control dust and dirt from demolition, cutting, and patching operations. B. Clean the Project as Work progresses and dispose of waste materials, keeping the Site free from accumulations of waste or rubbish. Provide containers on Site for waste collection. Do not allow waste materials or debris to blow around or off of the Site. Control dust from waste materials. Transport waste materials with as few handlings as possible. C. Comply with Laws and Regulations. Do not burn or bury waste materials. Remove waste materials, rubbish and debris from the Site and legally dispose of these at public or private disposal facilities. D. Provide a final cleaning to thoroughly clean the entire Site and make ready for acceptance. 1. Remove construction debris, boxes, and trash from the Site. 2. Remove construction storage sheds and field offices. 3. Restore grade to match surrounding condition and remove excess dirt. 4. Sweep all drives and parking lots clean of dirt and debris. Use water trucks or hose down paved site to like new appearance. 19.15 Maintenance of Roads, Driveways, and Access A. Maintain roads and streets in a manner that is suitable for safe operations of public vehicles during all phases of construction unless the Owner approves a street closing. Do not close public roads overnight. B. Submit a Notification by Contractor for Owner's approval of a street closing. The request shall state: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-86 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. The reason for closing the street. 2. How long the street will remain closed. 3. Procedures to be taken to maintain the flow of traffic. C. Construct temporary detours, including by-pass roads around construction,with adequately clear width to maintain the free flow of traffic at all times. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the detour and excavations. Maintain barricades, signs, and safety features around the Work in accordance with all provisions of the latest edition of the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD). D. Assume responsibility for any damage resulting from construction along roads or drives. 19.16 Area Access and Traffic Control A. Provide traffic control measures to assure a safe condition and to provide a minimum of inconvenience to motorists and the public. Provide all-weather access to all residents and businesses at all times during construction. Provide temporary driveways and/or roads of approved material during wet weather. Maintain a stockpile of suitable material on the Site to meet the demands of inclement weather. B. Schedule operations to minimize adverse impact on the accessibility of adjoining properties. Sequence construction to build driveways in half widths, construct temporary ramps, or any other measure required to maintain access to adjoining properties. C. Comply with the Owner's Uniform Barricading Standards and Practices. Copies of this document are available through the Owner's Traffic Engineering Department. Secure required permits from the Owner's Traffic Engineering Department. 19.17 Overhead Electrical Wires A. Comply with OSHA safety requirements regarding construction equipment working beneath overhead electrical wires. Prevent and pay for repairs for damage to existing overhead electrical wires or facilities. B. Provide for adequate safety with regard to overhead lines whether overhead lines are or are not shown in the Contract Documents. 19.18 Blasting A. Blasting is not allowed for any purpose. 19.19 Archeological Requirements A. Cease operations immediately and contact the Owner for instructions if historical or archaeological artifacts are found during construction. B. Conduct all construction activities to avoid adverse impact on the Sites where significant historical or archaeological artifacts are found or identified as an area where other artifacts could be found. 1. Obtain details for Working in these areas. 2. Maintain confidentiality regarding the Site. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-87 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. Adhere to the requirements of the Texas Historical Commission. 4. Notify the OAR and the Texas Historical Commission. C. Do not disturb archaeological sites. 1. Obtain the services of a qualified archaeological specialist to instruct construction personnel on how to identify and protect archaeological finds on an emergency basis. 2. Coordinate activities to permit archaeological work to take place within the area. a. Attempt to archaeologically clear areas needed for construction as soon as possible. b. Provide a determination of priority for such areas. D. Assume responsibility for any unauthorized destruction that might result to such Sites by construction personnel, and pay all penalties assessed by the State or Federal agencies for non-compliance with these requirements. E. Contract Times will be modified to compensate for delays caused by such archaeological finds. No additional compensation will be paid for delays. 19.20 Endangered Species Resources A. Do not perform any activity that is likely to jeopardize the continued existence of a threatened or endangered species as listed or proposed for listing under the Federal Endangered Species Act (ESA), and/or the State of Texas Parks and Wildlife Code on Endangered Species, or to destroy or adversely modify the habitat of such species. B. Cease Work immediately in the area of the encounter and notify the OAR if a threatened or endangered species is encountered during construction. OPT will implement actions in accordance with the ESA and applicable State statutes. Resume construction in the area of the encounter when authorized to do so by the OAR. 19.21 Cooperation with Public Agencies A. Cooperate with all public and private agencies with facilities operating within the limits of the Project. B. Provide a 48-hour notice to any applicable agency when work is anticipated to proceed in the vicinity of any facility by using Texas 811 at 811 and the Lone Star Notification Company at 1-800-669-8344. ARTICLE 20—PROJECT COORDINATION 20.01 Work Included A. Administer Contract requirements to construct the Project. Provide documentation per the requirements of this Section. Provide information as requested by the OPT. 20.02 Document Submittal A. Provide documents in accordance with Article 24. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-88 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Use the forms provided for Contract administration, applications for payment, document submittals, documentation of test results, equipment installation and documentation, and Project closeout. A digital copy of the required forms will be provided to the Contractor before or at the pre-construction conference. 20.03 Communication During Project A. The OAR is to be the first point of contact for all parties on matters concerning this Project. B. The OAR will coordinate correspondence concerning: 1. Documents, including Applications for Payment. 2. Clarification and interpretation of the Contract Documents. 3. Contract Modifications. 4. Observation of Work and testing. 5. Claims. C. The OAR will normally communicate only with the Contractor. Any required communication with Subcontractors or Suppliers will only be with the direct involvement of the Contractor. D. Direct written communications to the OAR at the address indicated at the pre-construction conference. Include the following with communications as a minimum: 1. Name of the Owner. 2. Project name. 3. Contract title. 4. Project number. 5. Date. 6. A reference statement. 20.04 Project Meetings A. Pre-Construction Conference: 1. Attend a pre-construction conference. 2. The location of the conference will be determined by the OAR. 3. The time of the meeting will be determined by the OAR but will be after the Notice of Award is issued and not later than 15 days after the Notice to Proceed is issued. 4. The OPT, Contractor's project manager and superintendent, representatives of utility companies, and representatives from major Subcontractors and Suppliers may attend the conference. 5. Provide and be prepared to discuss: a. Preliminary construction schedule per Article 27. b. Schedule of Values and anticipated Schedule of Payments per Article 17. C. List of Subcontractors and Suppliers. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-89 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 d. Contractor's organizational chart as it relates to this Project. e. Letter indicating the agents of authority for the Contractor and the limit of that authority with respect to the execution of legal documents,Contract Modifications, and payment requests. B. Progress Meetings: 1. Attend meetings with the OAR and Owner. a. Meet on a monthly basis or as requested by the OAR to discuss the Project. b. Meet at the Site or other location as designated by the OAR. c. Contractor's superintendent and other key personnel are to attend the meeting. Other individuals may be requested to attend to discuss specific matters. d. Notify the OAR of any specific items to be discussed a minimum of 1 week prior to the meeting. 2. Provide information as requested by the OAR or Owner concerning this Project. Prepare to discuss: a. Status of overall Project schedule. b. Contractor's detailed schedule for the next month. c. Anticipated delivery dates for equipment. d. Coordination with the Owner. e. Status of documents. f. Information or clarification of the Contract Documents. g. Claims and proposed Modifications to the Contract. h. Field observations, problems, or conflicts. i. Maintenance of quality standards. 3. OAR will prepare minutes of meetings. Review the minutes of the meeting and notify the OAR of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in the minutes of the following meeting or as an attachment to the minutes. C. Pre-Submittal and Pre-Installation Meetings: 1. Conduct pre-submittal and pre-installation meetings as required in the individual technical Specifications or as determined necessary by the OAR (for example, instrumentation, roofing, concrete mix design, etc.). 2. Set the time and location of the meetings when ready to proceed with the associated Work. Submit a Notification by Contractor in accordance with Paragraph 20.07 for the meeting 2 weeks before the meeting. OPT must approve of the proposed time and location. 3. Attend the meeting and require the participation of appropriate Subcontractors and Suppliers in the meeting. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-90 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 4. Prepare minutes of the meeting and submit to the OPT for review. OPT will review the minutes of the meeting and notify the Contractor of any discrepancies within 10 days of the date of the meeting memorandum. The minutes will not be corrected after the 10 days have expired. Corrections will be reflected in a revised set of meeting minutes. 20.05 Requests for Information A. Submit Request for Information (RFI) to the OAR to obtain additional information or clarification of the Contract Documents. 1. Submit a separate RFI for each item on the form provided. 2. Attach adequate information to permit a written response without further clarification. OAR will return requests that do not have adequate information to the Contractor for additional information. Contractor is responsible for all delays resulting from multiple document submittals due to inadequate information. 3. A response will be made when adequate information is provided. Response will be made on the RFI form or in attached information. B. Response to an RFI is given to provide additional information, interpretation, or clarification of the requirements of the Contract Documents, and does not modify the Contract Documents. C. Designer will initiate a Request for a Change Proposal (RCP) per Article 12 if the RFI indicates that a Contract Modification is required. D. Use the Project Issues Log to document decisions made at meetings and actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 20.06. E. Use the Action Item Log to document assignments for actions to be taken in accordance with Paragraph 20.06. 20.06 Decision and Action Item Log A. OAR will maintain a Project Decision Log to document key decisions made at meetings, telephone conversation or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report any discrepancies to the OAR for correction or discussion at the next monthly meeting. B. OAR will maintain an Action Item log in conjunction with the Project Decision Log to track assignments made at meetings, telephone conversation, or Site visits using the format provided: 1. Review the Action Item Log prior to each regular meeting. 2. Report actions taken subsequent to the previous progress meeting on items in the log assigned to the Contractor or through the Contractor to a Subcontractor or Supplier to the OAR. Report on status of progress 1 week prior to each progress meeting established in Paragraph 20.04 to allow OAR to update the log prior to the Progress meetings. 3. Be prepared to discuss the status at each meeting. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-91 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Decisions or action items in the log that require a change in the Contract Documents will have the preparation of a Modification as an action item if appropriate. The Contract Documents can only be changed by a Modification. 20.07 Notification By Contractor A. Notify the OAR of: 1. Need for testing. 2. Intent to work outside regular working hours. 3. Request to shut down facilities or utilities. 4. Proposed utility connections. 5. Required observation by OAR, Designer, or inspection agencies prior to covering Work. 6. Training. B. Provide notification a minimum of 2 weeks in advance in order to allow OPT time to respond appropriately to the notification. C. Use "Notification by Contractor" form provided. 20.08 Record Documents A. Maintain at the Site one complete set of printed Record Documents including: 1. Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Modifications. 5. Record Data and approved Shop Drawings. 6. Construction photographs. 7. Test Reports. 8. Clarifications and other information provided in Request for Information responses. 9. Reference standards. B. Store printed Record Documents and Samples in the Contractor's field office. 1. Record Documents are to remain separate from documents used for construction. 2. Provide files and racks for the storage of Record Documents. 3. Provide a secure storage space for the storage of Samples. 4. Maintain Record Documents in clean, dry, legible conditions, and in good order. 5. Make Record Documents and Samples available at all times for inspection by the OPT. C. Maintain a digital record of Specifications and Addenda to identify products provided in PDF format. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-92 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number,and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. D. Maintain a digital record of Drawings in PDF format. 1. Reference the Record Data number, Shop Drawings number,and O&M manual number for each product and item of equipment furnished or installed. 2. Reference Modifications by type and number for all changes. 3. Record information as construction is being performed. Do not conceal any Work until the required information is recorded. 4. Mark Drawings to record actual construction, including the following: a. Depths of various elements of the foundation in relation to finished first floor datum or the top of walls. b. Horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances constructed and existing utilities encountered during construction. C. Location of utilities and appurtenances concealed in the Work. Refer measurements to permanent structures on the surface. Include the following equipment: 1) Piping. 2) Ductwork. 3) Equipment and control devices requiring periodic maintenance or repair. 4) Valves, unions,traps, and tanks. 5) Services entrance. 6) Feeders. 7) Outlets. d. Changes of dimension and detail. e. Changes by Modifications. f. Information in Request for Information or included in the Project Issues Log. g. Details not on the original Drawings. Include field verified dimensions and clarifications, interpretations, and additional information issued in response to RFIs. 5. Mark Drawings with the following colors: a. Highlight references to other documents, including Modifications in blue; b. Highlight mark ups for new or revised Work(lines added) in yellow; C. Highlight items deleted or not installed (lines to be removed) in red; and d. Highlight items constructed per the Contract Documents in green. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-93 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 6. Submit Record Documents to Designer for review and acceptance 30 days prior to Final Completion of the Project. E. Applications for Payment will not be recommended for payment if Record Documents are found to be incomplete or not in order. Final payment will not be recommended without complete Record Documents. ARTICLE 21—QUALITY MANAGEMENT 21.01 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Review the OPT's Quality Management Program and prepare and submit the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. B. Implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan to control the quality of the Work and verify that the Work meets the standards of quality established in the Contract Documents. 1. Inspect products to be incorporated into the Project. Ensure that Suppliers have adequate quality control systems to ensure that products that comply with the Contract Documents are provided. 2. Integrate quality control measures into construction activities to produce Work which meets quality expectations of the Contract Documents. Inspect the Work of the Contractor, Subcontractors, and Suppliers. Correct Defective Work. 3. Provide and pay for the services of an approved professional materials testing laboratory acceptable to the OPT to provide testing that demonstrates that products proposed in Shop Drawings and Record Data for the Project fully comply with the Contract Documents. 4. Provide facilities, equipment, and Samples required for quality control inspections and tests: a. Give the OAR adequate notice before proceeding with Work that would interfere with inspections or testing; b. Notify the OAR and testing laboratories prior to the time that testing is required, providing adequate lead time to allow arrangements for inspections or testing to be made; C. Do not proceed with any Work that would impact the ability to correct defects or Work that would require subsequent removal to correct defects until testing services have been performed and results of tests indicate that the Work is acceptable; d. Cooperate fully with the performance of sampling, inspection, and testing; e. Provide personnel to assist with sampling or to assist in making inspections and field tests; f. Obtain and handle Samples for testing at the Site or at the production source of the product to be tested; g. Provide adequate quantities of representative products to be tested to the laboratory at the designated locations; FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-94 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 h. Provide facilities required to store and cure test Samples; i. Provide calibrated scales and measuring devices for the OPT's use in performing inspections and testing; j. Provide adequate lighting to allow OPT observations; and k. Make Contract Documents available to testing agencies when requested. 5. Provide safe access for all inspection and testing activities, including those to be conducted as part of the OPT's Quality Management Program. 6. Document Defective Work through Certified Test Reports and Defective Work Notices. Document that corrective actions have been taken to correct any defects and that corrected Work is in compliance with the Contract Documents. 7. Apply quality control measures to documentation provided for the Project. 8. Implement countermeasures to prevent future Defective Work. C. Perform tests as indicated in this and other Sections of the Specifications. Technical Specifications govern if any testing and inspection requirements of this Section conflict with the testing and inspection requirements of the technical Specifications. D. All verification testing is to be observed by the OAR or designated representative. E. Send test reports to the OAR and the Designer. F. Provide an update on quality control activities at monthly progress meetings. G. Owner will withhold payment for Defective Work, or Work that has not been tested or inspected in accordance with the Contractor's Quality Control Plan,the OPT's Quality Control Program, or the Contract Documents. H. Owner will withhold payment for additional testing fees incurred due to Contractor noncompliance with OPT's Quality Control Program, including retesting fees, standby time, cancellation charges, and trip fees for retesting or cancellations. I. Work performed that is connected or adjacent to Defective Work or Work that would have to be removed to correct Defective Work is also considered to be Defective. Contractor is responsible for all cost with replacing any acceptable Work that must be removed or might be damaged by corrective actions. 21.02 Quality Management Activities by OPT A. OPT will perform its own quality assurance tests independent of the Contractor's Quality Control Program. Assist the OPT and testing organizations in performing quality assurance activities per Paragraph 21.01. B. Quality assurance testing performed by the OPT will be paid for by the Owner, except for verification testing required per Paragraph 21.07. C. Quality assurance activities of the OPT, through their own forces or through contracts with consultants and materials testing laboratories are for the purpose of monitoring the results of the Contractor's Work to see that it is in compliance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. Quality assurance activities or non-performance of quality assurance activities by the OPT do not: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-95 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility to provide Work or furnish products that conform with the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for providing adequate quality control measures; 3. Relieve the Contractor of its responsibility for damage to or loss of Work or products before OPT's acceptance; 4. Constitute or imply OPT's acceptance; and 5. Affect the continuing rights of the Owner after OPT's acceptance of the completed Work. D. Work is subject to OPT's quality assurance observations or testing at any time. Products which have been tested or inspected and approved by OPT at a supply source or staging area may be inspected or tested again by the OPT before, during or after incorporation into the Work and rejected if products do not comply with the Contract Documents. 21.03 Contractor's Use of OPT's Test Reports A. OPT has prepared a Quality Management Plan that describes, in general, the OPT's anticipated quality assurance testing program for this Project. This testing program will be made available to Bidders during the bidding phase. This plan outlines only the testing in general terms and may not reflect actual testing. Actual testing will depend on the Contractors means, methods and procedures of construction which will not be known until the Contractor begins Work and submits their own Quality Control Plan for review. There is no guarantee that all testing will be performed. B. Contractor will receive copies of all test reports documenting OPT's quality assurance activities. Contractor is entitled to rely on the accuracy of these test results and use these as part of their quality control efforts. C. Contractor is to determine additional testing or inspections that may be required to implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. Include cost for additional testing and inspections required to meet Contractors quality control obligations, including the cost for correcting Defective Work in the Contract Price. D. Contractor may submit a Change Proposal if OPT's quality assurance testing program deviates significantly from the OPT's Quality Management Plan, and Contractor can demonstrate that additional cost was incurred to implement the Contractor's Quality Control Plan resulting from these deviations. 21.04 Documentation A. Provide documentation which includes: 1. Contractor's Quality Management Plan that establishes the methods of assuring compliance with the Contract Documents. Submit this plan as a Shop Drawings per Article 25. 2. A Statement of Qualification for any proposed testing laboratories that includes a list of the engineers and technical staff that will provide testing services on the Project, descriptions of the qualifications of these individuals, list of tests that can be performed, FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-96 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 equipment used with date of last certification, and a list of recent projects for which testing has been performed with references for those projects. 3. Provide Certified Test Reports for products to be incorporated into the Project. Provide reports to indicate that proposed products comply with the Contract Documents or indicate that proposed products do not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports as part of a Shop Drawings submitted per Article 25. 4. Provide Certified Test Reports for inspection and testing required in this Section and in other Specification Sections. Provide reports to indicate that Work complies with the Contract Documents or indicate that Work does not comply with the Contract Documents and why it does not comply. Submit these test reports on forms provided per Article 24. 21.05 Standards A. Provide testing laboratories that comply with the American Council of Independent Laboratories (ACIL) "Recommended Requirements for Independent Laboratory Qualifications." B. Perform testing per recognized test procedures as listed in the various Sections of the Specifications, standards of the State Department of Highways and Public Transportation, American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM), or other testing associations. Perform tests in accordance with published procedures for testing issued by these organizations. 21.06 Delivery and Storage A. Handle and protect test specimens of products and construction materials at the Site in accordance with recognized test procedures. Provide facilities for storing, curing, and processing test specimens as required by test standard to maintain the integrity of Samples. 21.07 Verification Testing for Corrected Defects A. Provide verification testing on Work performed to correct Defective Work to demonstrate that the Work is now in compliance with the Contract Documents. Document that Defective Work has been corrected and verify that the OAR closes the item in the Defective Work Register. B. Pay for verification testing. OPT may perform verification testing as part of their Quality Management Program and impose a Set-off to recover the cost for this testing. C. Conduct the same tests or inspections used to determine that the original Work was Defective. Different tests or methods may be used if approved by the OPT. 21.08 Test Reports A. Certified Test Reports are to be prepared for all tests. 1. Tests performed by testing laboratories may be submitted on their standard test report forms if acceptable to the OPT. These reports must include the following: a. Name of the Owner, Project title and number and Contractor; FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-97 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 b. Name of the laboratory, address, and telephone number; C. Name and signature of the laboratory personnel performing the test; d. Description of the product being sampled or tested; e. Date and time of sampling, inspection, and testing; f. Date the report was issued; g. Description of the test performed; h. Weather conditions and temperature at time of test or sampling; i. Location at the Site or structure where the sample was taken; j. Standard or test procedure used in making the test; k. A description of the results of the test; I. Statement of compliance or non-compliance with the Contract Documents; and m. Interpretations of test results, if appropriate. 2. Submit reports on tests performed by Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers on the forms provided by the OAR. 3. OPT will prepare test reports on test performed by the OPT. B. Send test report to Designer within 24 hours of completing the test. Flag tests reports with results that do not comply with Contract Documents for immediate attention. C. Payment for Work may be withheld until test reports indicate that the Work is not Defective. 21.09 Defective Work A. Immediately correct any Defective Work or notify the OAR why the Work is not to be corrected immediately and when corrective action will be completed. B. No payment will be made for Defective Work. Remove Work from the Application for Payment if Work paid for on a previous Application for Payment is found to be Defective. 21.10 Limitation of Authority of Testing Laboratory A. The testing laboratory representatives are limited to providing testing services and interpreting the results of the test performed. B. The testing laboratory is not authorized to: 1. Alter the requirements of the Contract Documents; 2. Accept or reject any portion of the Work; 3. Perform any of the duties of the Contractor; or 4. Direct or stop the Work. 21.11 Quality Control Plan A. Submit the Contractor's Quality Control Plan for approval as a Shop Drawing per Article 25. Use Contractor's Quality Control Plan Checklist provided to review the document before FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-98 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 submitting and include a copy of the completed checklist with the Contractor's Quality Control Plan. Do not begin Work until the Contractor's Quality Control Plan is approved. Submit an interim plan covering only the portion of Work to be performed if the Contractor plans to begin Work prior to submitting the Contractor's Quality Control Plan for the Project. Do not begin Work on other parts of the Project until the Contractor's Quality Control Plan is approved or another interim plan covering the additional Work to be started is approved. B. Provide a Contractor's Quality Control Plan that incorporates construction operations at both the Site and production Work at remote locations and includes Work by Subcontractors and Suppliers. The Contractor's Quality Control Plan is to include: 1. A description of the quality control organization, including an organization chart showing lines of authority to control the quality of Work; 2. Documentation describing name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and level of authority of the Quality Control Manager; 3. The name, qualifications (in resume format), duties, responsibilities, and authorities of other persons assigned a quality control function; 4. Procedures for scheduling, reviewing, certifying, and managing documentation, including documentation provided by Subcontractors and Suppliers; 5. Control,verification, and acceptance testing procedures for each specific test. Include: a. Name of tests to be performed, b. Specification paragraph requiring test, C. Parameters of Work to be tested, d. Test frequency, e. Persons responsible for each test, and f. Applicable industry testing standards and laboratory facilities to be used for the test; 6. Integrate the OPT quality assurance testing into the Contractor's Quality Control Plan, specifically identifying the tests or inspections in Paragraph 21.11.13.5 that will be provided by the OPT as part of their Quality Management Program; 7. Procedures for tracking and documenting quality management efforts. 8. Procedures for tracking Defective Work from initial identification through acceptable corrective action. Indicate how documentation of the verification process for deficiencies will be made. 9. Reporting procedures which incorporate the use of forms provided by the OAR. 10. The name of the proposed testing laboratories along with documentation of qualifications per Paragraph 21.04. C. The Quality Control Manager must have authority to reject Defective Work and redirect the efforts of the Contractor's Team to prevent or correct Defective Work. D. Notify the Designer of any changes to the Contractor's Quality Control Plan or quality control personnel. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-99 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. Meet with the OPT 7 days after Contractor's Quality Control Plan is submitted and before start of construction to discuss the Contractor's Quality Control Plan and expedite its approval. 21.12 Implement Contractor's Quality Control Plan A. Perform quality control observations and testing as required in each Section of the Specifications and where indicated on the Drawings. B. Include the following phases for each definable Work task. A definable Work task is one which is separate and distinct from other tasks, has separate control requirements, may be provided by different trades or disciplines, or may be Work by the same trade in a different environment. 1. Planning Phase: Perform the following before beginning each definable Work task: a. Review the Contract Drawings. b. Review documents and determine that they are complete in accordance with the Contract Documents. c. Check to assure that all materials and/or equipment have been tested, submitted, and approved. d. Examine the work area to assure that all required preliminary Work has been completed and complies with the Contract Documents. e. Examine required materials, equipment, and Sample Work to assure that they are on hand, conform to Shop Drawings and Record Data, and are properly stored. f. Review requirements for quality control inspection and testing. g. Discuss procedures for controlling quality of the Work. Document construction tolerances and workmanship standards for the Work task. h. Check that the portion of the plan for the Work to be performed incorporates document review comments. i. Discuss results of planning phase with the OAR. Conduct a meeting attended by the Quality Control Manager, the OAR, superintendent, other quality control personnel as applicable, and the foreman responsible for the Work task. Instruct applicable workers as to the acceptable level of workmanship required in order to meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Document the results of the preparatory phase actions by separate meeting minutes prepared by the Quality Control Manager and attached to the quality control report. j. Do not move to the next phase unless results of investigations required for the planning phase indicate that requirements have been met. 2. Work Phase: Complete this phase after the Planning Phase: a. Notify the OAR at least 24 hours in advance of beginning the Work and discuss the review of the planning effort to indicate that requirements have been met. b. Check the Work to ensure that it is in full compliance with the Contract Documents. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-100 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 c. Verify adequacy of controls to ensure full compliance with Contract Documents. Verify required control inspection and testing is performed. d. Verify that established levels of workmanship meet acceptable workmanship standards. Compare with required Sample panels as appropriate. e. Repeat the Work phase for each new crew to work on-site, or any time acceptable specified quality standards are not being met. 3. Follow-up Phase: Perform daily checks to assure control activities, including control testing, are providing continued compliance with contract requirements: a. Make checks daily and record observations in the quality control documentation. b. Conduct follow-up checks and correct all deficiencies prior to the start of additional Work tasks that may be affected by the Defective Work. Do not build upon nor conceal Defective Work. c. Conduct a review of the Work with the OPT one month prior to the expiration of the correction period. Correct defects as noted during the review. C. Conduct additional planning and Work phases if: 1. The quality of on-going Work is unacceptable; 2. Changes are made in applicable quality control staff, on-site production supervision or crews; 3. Work on a task is resumed after a substantial period of inactivity; or 4. Other quality problems develop. ARTICLE 22—FINAL RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES 22.01 Senior Level Negotiations A. Each party is required to continue to perform its obligations under the Contract pending the final resolution of any dispute arising out of or relating to the Contract, unless it would be impossible or impracticable under the circumstances then present. B. All negotiations pursuant to Article 22 are confidential and shall be treated as compromise and settlement negotiations for purposes of applicable rules of evidence. C. Before invoking mediation, Owner and Contractor agree that they first shall try to resolve any dispute arising out of or related to this Contract through discussions directly between those senior management representatives within their respective organizations who have overall managerial responsibility for similar projects. Both Owner and Contractor agree that this step shall be a condition precedent to use of any other alternative dispute resolution process. If the parties' senior management representatives cannot resolve the dispute within 45 calendar days after a party delivers a written notice of such dispute to the other, then the parties shall proceed with mediation. 22.02 Mediation A. In the event that Owner and/or Contractor contend that the other has committed a material breach of the Contract or the parties cannot reach a resolution of a claim or dispute pursuant FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-101 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 to Article 13, as a condition precedent to filing a lawsuit,either party shall request mediation of the dispute with the following requirements: 1. The request for mediation shall be in writing and shall request that the mediation commence not less than 30 calendar days or more than 90 calendar days following the date of the request, except upon agreement of the parties. 2. In the event Owner and Contractor are unable to agree to a date for the mediation or to the identity of the mediator within 30 calendar days following the date of the request for mediation, all conditions precedent shall be deemed to have occurred. 3. Owner and Contractor are to each pay one-half of the mediator's fees and costs.Venue for any mediation or lawsuit filed under this Contract shall be in Nueces County,Texas. Any agreement reached in mediation shall be enforceable as a settlement in any court having jurisdiction thereof. 4. Nothing in this Contract shall be construed as consent to a lawsuit. No provision of the Contract shall waive any immunity or defense. ARTICLE 23—MINORITY/MBE/DBE PARTICIPATION POLICY 23.01 Policy A. It is the policy of the City of Corpus Christi that maximum opportunity is afforded minorities, women, low income persons and Minority/Disadvantaged Business Enterprises (M/DBE) to participate in the performance of contracts awarded by the City of Corpus Christi in support of Equal Employment Opportunity goals and objectives. In accordance with such policy,the City has established goals, as stated herein, both for minority and female participation by trade and for Minority Business Enterprise. 23.02 Definitions A. Prime Contractor: Any person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture as herein provided which has been awarded a City contract. B. Subcontractor: Any named person, firm, partnership, corporation, association, or joint venture herein identified as providing work, labor, services, supplies, equipment, materials, or any combination of the foregoing under contract with a prime contractor on a City contract. C. Minority/Disadvantaged Business Enterprise: A business enterprise that is owned and controlled by one or more minority person(s) or socially and economically disadvantaged individual(s). Minority/Disadvantaged person(s) must collectively own, operate and/or actively manage, and share in payments from such an enterprise in the manner hereinafter set forth: 1. Owned: a. For a sole proprietorship to be deemed a minority business enterprise, it must be owned by a minority person. b. For an enterprise doing business as a partnership, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the partnership property must be owned by one or more minority person(s). FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-102 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. For an enterprise doing business as a corporation, at least 51 percent of the assets or interest in the corporate shares must be owned by one or more minority person(s). 2. Controlled: a. The primary power, direct or indirect,to manage a business enterprise rests with a minority person(s). 3. Share in Payments: a. Minority partners, proprietors, or stockholders of the business enterprise must be entitled to receive 51 percent or more of the total profits, bonuses, dividends, interest payments, commissions, consulting fees, rents, procurement, and subcontract payments, and any other monetary distribution paid by the business enterprise. D. Minority: Minority persons include Blacks, Mexican-Americans and other persons of Hispanic origin, American Indians, Alaskan Natives, and Asians or Pacific Islanders. For the purposes of this policy,women are also considered as minorities. E. Socially and economically disadvantaged individual: Any individual who is a citizen (or lawfully admitted permanent resident) of the United States and who has been subjected to racial or ethnic prejudice or cultural bias within American society because of his or her identity as a member of a group and without regard to his or her individual qualities.The social disadvantage must stem from circumstances beyond the individual's control. F. Female Owned Business Enterprise: A sole proprietorship that is owned and controlled by a woman,a partnership at least 51 percent of whose assets or partnership interests are owned by one or more women, or a corporation at least 51 percent of whose assets or interests in the corporate shares are owned by one or more women. G. Joint Venture: A joint venture means an association of two or more persons, partnerships, corporations, or any combination thereof, founded to carry on a single business activity which is limited in scope and direction. The degree to which a joint venture may satisfy the stated MBE goal cannot exceed the proportionate interest of the MBE as a member of the joint venture in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. For example,a joint venture which is to perform 50 percent of the Work itself and in which a minority joint venture partner has a 50 percent interest, shall be deemed equivalent to having minority participation in 25 percent of the Work. Minority members of the joint venture must have financial, managerial, or technical skills in the Work to be performed by the joint venture. 23.03 Goals A. The goals for participation by minorities and Minority Business Enterprises expressed in percentage terms for the Contractor's aggregate work force on all construction Work for the Contract award shall be 1. Minority participation goal is 45%. 2. Minority Business Enterprise participation goal is 15%. B. These goals are applicable to all the construction work (regardless of federal participation) performed in the Contract, including approved Change Orders. The hours of minority FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-103 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 employment must be substantially uniform throughout the length of the Contract and in each trade. The transfer of minority employees from Contractor to Contractor or from project to project for the sole purpose of meeting the Contractor's percentage is prohibited. 23.04 Compliance A. Upon completion of the Project, a final breakdown of MBE participation, substantiated by copies of paid invoices, shall be submitted by the Contractor to the City Engineer. B. Make bi-weekly payroll submittals to the City Engineer. The Contractor is to indicate the percent of minority and female participation, by trade, which has been utilized on the Project. Along with the request for final payment on the Project,the Contractor will indicate, in writing, the overall participation in these areas which have been achieved. The City Engineer may withhold monthly or final payments to the Contractor for failure to submit bi- weekly payrolls in a timely fashion or to submit overall participation information as required. ARTICLE 24—DOCUMENT MANAGEMENT 24.01 Work Included A. Submit documentation as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. 24.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Documents not meeting these criteria will be returned without review. 24.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Review documents prior to submitting. Make certifications as required by the Contract Documents and as indicated on forms provided. B. Provide a Schedule of Documents to list the documents that are to be submitted, the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that documents must be returned to comply with the Project schedule. Use the form provided for this list. C. Incorporate the dates for processing documents into the Progress Schedule required by Article 27. 1. Provide documents in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of documents when preparing the Progress Schedule. Assume a 14 day review cycle for each document unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents or agreed to by Designer and Contractor. 3. Schedule submittal of documents to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for processing documents so construction of the Project is not delayed. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-104 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 24.04 Document Submittal A. Submit documents through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested with a completed Document Transmittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable, enter NA in the space provided. 2. The Document Transmittal form is to be the first page in the document submitted. 3. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the document. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 24.05 Document Numbering A. Assign a number to the documents originated to allow tracking of the documents during the review process. 1. Assign the number consisting of a prefix, a sequence number, and a letter suffix. Prefixes shall be as follows: Prefix Description Originator AP Application for Payment Contractor CO Change Order OAR CP Change Proposal Contractor CTR Certified Test Report Contractor FO Field Order OAR NBC Notification by Contractor Contractor PD Photographic Documentation Contractor FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-105 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Prefix Description Originator RCP Request for a Change Proposal OAR RD Record Data Contractor RFI Request for Information Contractor SD Shop Drawing Contractor SCH Schedule of Progress Contractor 2. Issue sequence numbers in chronological order for each type of document. 3. Issue numbers for resubmittals that have the same number as the original document followed by an alphabetical suffix indicating the number of times the same document has been sent to the Designer for processing. For example: SD 025 A represents Shop Drawing number 25 and the letter "A" designates that this is the second time this document has been sent for review. 4. Clearly note the document number on each page or sheet of the document. 5. Correct assignment of numbers is essential since different document types are processed in different ways. B. Include reference to the Drawing number and/or Specification Section, detail designation, schedule, or location that corresponds with the data on the document transmittal forms. Other identification may also be required, such as layout drawings or schedules to allow the reviewer to determine where a particular product is to be used. 24.06 Document Requirements A. Furnish documents as indicated below or in individual Specification Sections. Submit documents per the procedures described in the Contract Documents. B. Submit documents per the Specification Section shown in the following table: Document Type Section Application for Payment Article 17 Change Proposal Article 12 Certified Test Report Article 25 for approval of product Article 21 to demonstrate compliance Notification by Contractor Article 20 Photographic Documentation Article 28 Progress Schedules Article 27 Record Data Article 26 Request for Information Article 20 Shop Drawing Article 25 Schedule of Values Article 17 Substitutions Article 12 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-106 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Document Type Section Suppliers and Subcontractors Articles 20 and 26 ARTICLE 25—SHOP DRAWINGS 25.01 Work Included A. Shop Drawings are required for those products that cannot adequately be described in the Contract Documents to allow fabrication, erection, or installation of the product without additional detailed information from the Supplier. B. Submit Shop Drawings as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Provide detailed information for the products proposed for the Project regarding their fabrication, installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Allow the Designer to advise the Owner if products proposed for the Project by the Contractor conform, in general,to the design concepts of the Contract Documents. C. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Shop Drawings, Samples, or mockups. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. 25.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Shop Drawings not meeting these criteria will be rejected. B. Demonstrate that the proposed products are in full and complete compliance with the design criteria and requirements of the Contract Documents or will be if deviations requested per Paragraph 25.10 are approved. C. Furnish and install products that fully comply with the information included in the document submittal. 25.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Provide Shop Drawings as required by Paragraph 25.03 of the Supplementary Conditions. B. Include Shop Drawings in the Schedule of Documents required by Article 24 to indicate the Shop Drawings to be submitted,the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C. Incorporate the dates for processing Shop Drawings into the Progress Schedule required by Article 27. 1. Submit Shop Drawings in accordance with the schedule so construction of the Project is not delayed. 2. Allow a reasonable time for the review of Shop Drawings when preparing the Progress Schedule. Include time for making revisions to the Shop Drawings and resubmitting the Shop Drawing for a least a second review. Assume a 14-day review cycle for each time FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-107 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 a Shop Drawing is submitted for review unless a longer period of time is indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Schedule document submittals to provide all information for interrelated Work at one time. 4. Allow adequate time for ordering, fabricating, delivering, and installing product so construction of the Project is not delayed. D. Complete the following before submitting a Shop Drawing or Sample: 1. Prepare Shop Drawing Review and coordinate the Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials,catalog numbers, and similar information with respect to Shop Drawings and Samples; 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. E. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Shop Drawings; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Shop Drawing have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Shop Drawings are complete for their intended purpose; and 5. Conflicts between the Shop Drawings related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. F. Review Shop Drawings prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Shop Drawings have been reviewed by the Contractor and are in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Shop Drawings except for deviations specifically brought to the Designer's attention on an attached Shop Drawing Deviation Request form in accordance with Paragraph 25.09. G. Fabrication or installation of any products prior to the approval of Shop Drawings is done at the Contractor's risk. Defective products may be rejected at the Owner's option. H. Payment will not be made for products for which Shop Drawings or Samples are required until these are approved by the Designer. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-108 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 25.04 Shop Drawing Requirements A. Provide adequate information in Shop Drawings and Samples so Designer can: 1. Assist the Owner in selecting colors,textures, or other aesthetic features. 2. Compare the proposed features of the product with the specified features and advise Owner that the product does, in general, conform to the Contract Documents. 3. Compare the performance features of the proposed product with those specified and advise the Owner that the product does, in general,conform to the performance criteria specified in the Contract Documents. 4. Review required certifications, guarantees, warranties, and service agreements for compliance with the Contract Documents. B. Include a complete description of the product to be furnished, including: 1. Type, dimensions, size, arrangement, and operational characteristics of the product; 2. Weights,gauges,materials of construction,external connections,anchors,and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt, or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. C. Submit Shop Drawings that require coordination with other Shop Drawings at the same time. Shop Drawings requiring coordination with other Shop Drawings will be rejected until a complete package is submitted. 25.05 Special Certifications and Reports A. Provide all required certifications with the Shop Drawings as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Shop Drawing. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Shop Drawing. 2. Certification of Local Field Service (CLS): A certified letter stating that field service is available from a factory or supplier approved service organization located within a 300 mile radius of the Site. List names, addresses, and telephone numbers of approved service organizations on or attach it to the certificate. 3. Certification of Adequacy of Design (CAD): A certified letter from the manufacturer of the equipment stating that they have designed the equipment to be structurally stable FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-109 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 and to withstand all imposed loads without deformation, failure, or adverse effects to the performance and operational requirements of the unit. The letter shall state that mechanical and electrical equipment is adequately sized to be fully operational for the conditions specified or normally encountered by the product's intended use. 25.06 Warranties and Guarantees A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Shop Drawing. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1-year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required by Specification Sections. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with Article 29. 25.07 Shop Drawing Submittal Procedures A. Submit Shop Drawings through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Shop Drawing submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable,enter NA in the space provided. The Shop Drawing submittal form is to be the first document in the file submitted. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format(PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Shop Drawing. Submit Samples and color charts per Paragraph 25.08.A. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-110 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. Submit each specific product or class of material separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Shop Drawings for more than one product in the same Shop Drawing. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Shop Drawings. a. Use terms and symbols in Shop Drawings consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Shop Drawings. c. Provide a legend for symbols used on Shop Drawings. 6. Mark Shop Drawings to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, C. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated, and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Use the following conventions to markup Shop Drawings for review: 1. Make comments and corrections in the color blue. Add explanatory comments to the markup. 2. Highlight items in black that are not being furnished when the Supplier's standard drawings or information sheets are provided so that only the products to be provided are in their original color. 3. Make comments in the color yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4. Make comments in the color orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. 5. Mark dimensions with the prefix FD to indicate field verified dimensions on the Shop Drawings. C. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of"or equal" products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. D. Designate a Shop Drawing as requiring priority treatment in the comment section of the Shop Drawing submittal form to place the review of the Shop Drawing ahead of other Shop Drawings previously delivered. Shop Drawings are typically reviewed in the order received, unless Contractor requests that a different priority be assigned. Priority Shop Drawings will FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-111 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 be reviewed before other Shop Drawings for this Project already received but not yet reviewed. Use of this priority designation for Shop Drawings may delay the review of Shop Drawings previously submitted, pushing the processing of Shop Drawings beyond the 14-day target. Contractor is responsible for delays resulting from the use of the priority designation status on Shop Drawings. E. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 25.03. 25.08 Sample and Mockup Submittal Procedures A. Submit color charts and Samples for every product requiring color, texture, or finish selection. 1. Submit color charts and Samples only after Shop Drawings for the products have been approved. 2. Deliver all color charts and Samples at one time. 3. Provide Samples of adequate size to clearly illustrate the functional characteristics of the product, with integrally related parts and attachment devices. 4. Indicate the full range of color, texture, and patterns. 5. Deliver color charts and Samples to the field office and store for the duration of the Project 6. Notify the Designer that color charts and Samples have been delivered for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. 7. Submit color charts and Samples not less than 30 days prior to when these products are to be ordered or released for fabrication to comply with the Project schedule. 8. Remove Samples that have been rejected. Submit new Samples following the same process as for the initial Sample until Samples are approved. 9. Dispose of Samples when related Work has been completed and approved and disposal is approved by the Designer. At Owner's option, Samples will become the property of the Owner. B. Construct mockups for comparison with the Work being performed. 1. Construct mockups from the actual products to be used in construction per detailed Specification Sections. 2. Construct mockups of the size and in the area indicated in the Contract Documents. 3. Construct mockups complete with texture and finish to represent the finished product. 4. Notify the Designer that mockups have been constructed and are ready for approval using the Notification by Contractor form. Allow 2 weeks for OPT to approve of the mockup before beginning the Work represented by the mockup. 5. Remove mockups that have been rejected. Construct new mockups following the same process as for the initial mockup until mockup is approved. 6. Protect mockups until Work has been completed and accepted by the OPT. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-112 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 7. Dispose of mockups when related Work has been completed and disposal is approved by the Designer. 25.09 Equal Non Specified Products A. Contractor may submit other manufacturers' products that are in full compliance with the Specification where Specifications list one or more manufacturers followed by the phase "or equal" or"or approved equal." 1. Submit a Shop Drawing as required by this article to document that the proposed product is equal or superior to the specified product. 2. Prove that the product is equal. It is not the OPT's responsibility to prove the product is not equal. a. Indicate on a point by point basis for each specified feature that the product is equal to the Contract Document requirements. b. Make a direct comparison with the specified manufacturer's published data sheets and available information. Provide this printed material with the Shop Drawing. c. The decision of the Designer regarding the acceptability of the proposed product is final. 3. Provide a typewritten certification that, in furnishing the proposed product as an equal, the Contractor: a. Has thoroughly examined the proposed product and has determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to the product specified. b. Has determined that the product will perform in the same manner and result in the same process as the specified product. c. Will provide the same warranties and/or bonds as for the product specified. d. Will assume all responsibility to coordinate any modifications that may be necessary to incorporate the product into the construction and will waive all claims for additional Work which may be necessary to incorporate the product into the Project which may subsequently become apparent. e. Will maintain the same time schedule as for the specified product. 25.10 Requests for Deviation A. Submit requests for deviation from the Contract Documents for any product that does not fully comply with the Contract Documents. B. Submit requests for deviation using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form provided. Identify each deviation request as a separate item. Include all requested deviations that must be approved as a group together and identify them as a single item. C. Include a description of why the deviation is required and the impact on Contract Price or Contract Times. Include the amount of any cost savings to the Owner for deviations that result in a reduction in cost. D. Submit as a Change Proposal prior to submitting the Shop Drawing if the deviation will result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnuiuUns 007200-113 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. A Modification must be issued by the Designer for approval of a deviation. Approval of a requested Shop Drawing deviation by the Designer on the Shop Drawings Deviation Request form indicates approval of the requested deviation only on its technical merits as generally conforming to the Contract Documents. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. 25.11 Designer Responsibilities A. Shop Drawings will be received by the Designer. Designer will log the documents and review per this Article for general conformance with the Contract Documents. 1. Designer's review and approval will be only to determine if the products described in the Shop Drawing or Sample will, after installation or incorporation into the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. 2. Designer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences,or procedures of construction or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. 3. Designer's review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. B. Comments will be made on items called to the attention of the Designer for review and comment. Any marks made by the Designer do not constitute a blanket review of the document submittal or relieve the Contractor from responsibility for errors or deviations from the Contract requirements. 1. Designer will respond to Contractor's markups by either making markups directly in the Shop Drawings file using the color green or by attaching a Document Review Comments form with review comments. 2. Shop Drawings that are reviewed will be returned with one or more of the following status designations: a. Approved: Shop Drawing is found to be acceptable as submitted. b. Approved as Noted: Shop Drawing is Approved so long as corrections or notations made by Designer are incorporated into the Show Drawing. C. Not Approved: Shop Drawing or products described are not acceptable. 3. Shop Drawing will also be designated for one of the following actions: a. Final distribution: Shop Drawing is acceptable without further action and has been filed as a record document. b. Shop Drawing not required: A Shop Drawing was not required by the Contract Documents. Resubmit the document per Article 26. c. Cancelled: This action indicates that for some reason, the Shop Drawing is to be removed from consideration and all efforts regarding the processing of that document are to cease. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-114 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 d. Revise and resubmit: Shop Drawing has deviations from the Contract Documents, significant errors, or is inadequate and must be revised and resubmitted for subsequent review. e. Resubmit with corrections made: Shop Drawing is "Approved as Noted," but has significant markups. Make correction and notations to provide a revised document with markup incorporated into the original document so that no markups are required. f. Returned without review due to excessive deficiencies: Document does not meet the requirement of the Specifications for presentation or content to the point where continuing to review the document would be counterproductive to the review process or clearly does not meet the requirements of the Contract Documents. Revise the Shop Drawing to comply with the requirements of this Section and resubmit. g. Actions a through c will close out the Shop Drawing review process and no further action is required as a Shop Drawing. Actions d through f require follow up action to close out the review process. 4. Drawings with a significant or substantial number of markings by the Contractor may be marked "Approved as Noted" and "Resubmit with corrections made." These drawings are to be revised to provide a clean record of the Shop Drawing. Proceed with ordering products as the documents are revised. 5. Dimensions or other data that does not appear to conform to the Contract Documents will be marked as "At Variance With" (AVW) the Contract Documents or other information provided. The Contractor is to make revisions as appropriate to comply with the Contract Documents. C. Bring deviations to the Shop Drawings to the attention of the Designer for approval by using the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Use a single line for each requested deviation so the Status and Action for each deviation can be determined for that requested deviation. If approval or rejection of a requested deviation will impact other requested deviations, then all related deviations should be included in that requested deviation line so the status and action can be determined on the requested deviation as a whole. D. Requested deviations will be reviewed as possible Modification to the Contract Documents. 1. A Requested deviation will be rejected as "Not Approved" if the requested deviation is unacceptable. Contractor is to revise and resubmit the Shop Drawing with corrections for approval. 2. A Field Order will be issued by the Designer for deviations approved by the Designer if the requested deviation is acceptable and if the requested deviation will not result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Requested deviations from the Contract Documents may only be approved by Field Order. 3. A requested deviation will be rejected if the requested deviation is acceptable but the requested deviation will or should result in a change in Contract Price or Contract Times. Submit any requested deviation that requires a change in Contract Price or Contract Times as a Change Proposal for approval prior to resubmitting the Shop Drawing. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-115 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. Contractor is to resubmit the Shop Drawing until it is acceptable and marked Approved or Approved as Noted and is assigned an action per Paragraph 25.11 that indicates that the Shop Drawing process is closed. F. Information that is submitted as a Shop Drawings that should be submitted as Record Data or other type of document, or is not required may be returned without review, or may be deleted. No further action is required and the Shop Drawing process for this document will be closed. 25.12 Resubmission Requirements A. Make all corrections or changes in the documents required by the Designer and resubmit to the Designer until approved. 1. Revise initial drawings or data and resubmit as specified for the original document. 2. Highlight or cloud in green those revisions which have been made in response to the previous reviews by the Designer. This will include changes previously highlighted or clouded in yellow to direct attention to Designer to items requiring selections or decisions by the Designer or highlighted or clouded in orange for a requested deviation from the Contract Documents. 3. Highlight and cloud new items in yellow where selections or decisions by the Designer are required, but such selections do not constitute a deviation from the Contract Documents. Add explanatory comments to the markup to indicate the action to be taken by the Designer. 4. Highlight and cloud new items in orange that are deviation requests. Include the deviation request number on the Shop Drawing that corresponds to the deviation request on the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. Numbering for these new items is to start with the next number following the last Shop Drawing deviation requested. Include explanatory comments in the Shop Drawing Deviation Request form. B. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. 1. Excessive review of Shop Drawings is defined as any review required after the original review has been made and the first resubmittal has been checked to see that corrections have been made. 2. Review of Shop Drawings or Samples will be an additional service requiring payment by the Contractor if the Contractor submits a substitution for a product for which a Shop Drawing or Sample has previously been approved, unless the need for such change is beyond the control of Contractor. 3. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed in SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. 4. A Set-off will be included in each Application for Payment to pay costs for the additional review to the Owner on a monthly basis. The Set-off will be based on invoices submitted to Owner for these services. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnUMU115 007200-116 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 5. Need for more than one resubmission or any other delay of obtaining Designer's review of Shop Drawings will not entitle the Contractor to an adjustment in Contract Price or an extension of Contract Times. ARTICLE 26—RECORD DATA 26.01 Work Included A. Submit Record Data as required by the Contract Documents and as reasonably requested by the OPT. Provide Record Data for all products unless a Shop Drawing is required for the same item. B. Submit Record Data to provide documents that allow the Owner to: 1. Record the products incorporated into the Project for the Owner; 2. Review detailed information about the products regarding their fabrication,installation, commissioning, and testing; and 3. Provide replacement or repair of the products at some future date. C. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the receipt or cursory review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by Change Order or Field Order. D. Provide various reports or other documents that Contract Documents require for record purposes. 26.02 Quality Assurance A. Submit legible, accurate, and complete documents presented in a clear, easily understood manner. Record Data not meeting these criteria will be rejected. 26.03 Contractor's Responsibilities A. Submit Record Data in accordance with SECTION 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS. B. Include Record Data in the Schedule of Documents required by Article 24 to indicate the Record Data to be submitted,the dates on which documents are to be sent to the Designer for review, and proposed dates that the product will be incorporated into the Project. C. Complete the following before submitting Record Data: 1. Prepare Record Data and coordinate with Shop Drawings or Samples, other Record Data, and with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents; 2. Determine and verify specified performance and design criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers, and similar information; 3. Determine and verify the suitability of materials and equipment offered with respect to the indicated application, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly, and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work; and 4. Determine and verify information relative to Contractor's responsibilities for means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures of construction, and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-117 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 D. Determine and verify: 1. Accurate field measurements, quantities, and dimensions are shown on the Record Data; 2. Location of existing structures, utilities, and equipment related to the Record Data have been shown and conflicts between the products existing structures, utilities, and equipment have been identified; 3. Conflicts that impact the installation of the products have been brought to the attention of the OPT through the Designer; 4. Record Data are complete for their intended purpose; and 5. Conflicts between the Record Data related to the various Subcontractors and Suppliers have been resolved. E. Review Record Data prior to submitting to the Designer. Certify that all Record Data has been reviewed by the Contractor and is in strict conformance with the Contract Documents as modified by Addenda, Change Order, Field Order, or Contract Amendment when submitting Record Data. 26.04 Record Data Requirements A. Include a complete description of the material or equipment to be furnished, including: 1. Type,dimensions,size,arrangement,model number,and operational parameters of the components; 2. Weights,gauges,materials of construction,external connections,anchors,and supports required; 3. All applicable standards such as ASTM or Federal specification numbers; 4. Fabrication and installation drawings, setting diagrams, manufacturing instructions, templates, patterns, and coordination drawings; 5. Mix designs for concrete, asphalt or other materials proportioned for the Project; and 6. Complete and accurate field measurements for products which must fit existing conditions. Indicate on the document submittal that the measurements represent actual dimensions obtained at the Site. 26.05 Special Certifications and Reports A. Provide all required certifications with the Record Data as specified in the individual Specification Sections: 1. Certified Test Reports (CTR): A report prepared by an approved testing agency giving results of tests performed on products to indicate their compliance with the Specifications. This report is to demonstrate that the product when installed will meet the requirements and is part of the Record Data. Field tests may be performed by the Owner to determine that in place materials or products meet the same quality as indicated in the CTR submitted as part of the Record Data. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-118 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 26.06 Warranties and Guarantees A. Provide all required warranties, guarantees, and related documents with the Record Data. The effective date of warranties and guarantees will be the date of acceptance of the Work by the Owner. B. Identify all Extended Warranties, defined as any guarantee of performance for the product or system beyond the 1 year correction period described in the General Conditions. Issue the warranty certificate in the name of the Owner. Provide a Warranty Bond for Extended Warranties if required. C. Provide a copy of all warranties in a separate document in accordance with Article 29. 26.07 Record Data Submittal Procedures A. Submit Record Data through the Designer. Send all documents in digital format for processing. 1. Provide all information requested in the Record Data submittal form. Do not leave any blanks incomplete. If information is not applicable,enter NA in the space provided. The Record Data submittal form is to be the first document in the file. 2. Submit all documents in Portable Document Format (PDF). a. Create PDF documents from native format files unless files are only available from scanned documents. b. Rotate pages so that the top of each document appears at the top of the monitor screen when opened in PDF viewing software. c. Submit PDF document with adequate resolution to allow documents to be printed in a format equivalent to the document original. Documents are to be scalable to allow printing on standard 8-1/2 x 11 or 11 x 17 paper. d. Submit color PDF documents where color is required to interpret the Record Data. e. Create or convert documents to allow text to be selected for comments or searched using text search features. Run scanned documents through Optical Character Recognition (OCR) software if necessary. f. Flatten markups in documents to prevent markups made by Contractor from being moved or deleted. Flatten documents to allow markup recovery. g. Use software to reduce file size using default settings except the option for "Drop Metadata." Uncheck the "Drop Metadata" box when reducing file size. h. Add footers to each document with the Project name. 3. Submit each specific product, class of material, or product separately so these can be tracked and processed independently. Do not submit Record Data for more than one system in the same Record Data. 4. Submit items specified in different Specification Sections separately unless they are part of an integrated system. 5. Define abbreviations and symbols used in Record Data. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-119 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 a. Use terms and symbols in Record Data consistent with the Contract Drawings. b. Provide a list of abbreviations and their meaning as used in the Record Data. C. Provide a legend for symbols used on Record Data. 6. Mark Record Data to reference: a. Related Specification Sections, b. Drawing number and detail designation, c. Product designation or name, d. Schedule references, e. System into which the product is incorporated, and f. Location where the product is incorporated into the Project. B. Submit a Change Proposal per Article 12 to request modifications to the Contract Documents, including those for approval of"or equal" products when specifically allowed by the Contract Documents or as a substitution for specified products or procedures. Deviations from the Contract Documents can only be approved by a Modification. C. Complete the certification required by Paragraph 26.03. 26.08 Designer's Responsibilities A. Record Data will be received by the Designer, logged, and provided to Owner as the Project record. 1. Record Data may be reviewed to see that the information provided is adequate for the purpose intended. Record Data not meeting the requirements of Paragraph 26.02 may be rejected as unacceptable. 2. Record Data is not reviewed for compliance with the Contract Documents. Comments may be returned if deviations from the Contract Documents are noted during the cursory review performed to see that the information is adequate. 3. Contractor's responsibility for full compliance with the Contract Documents is not relieved by the review of Record Data. Contract modifications can only be approved by a Modification. B. Designer may take the following action in processing Record Data: 1. File Record Data as received if the cursory review indicates that the document meets the requirements of Paragraph 26.02. Document will be given the status of "Filed as Received" and no further action is required on that Record Data. 2. Reject the Record Data for one of the following reasons: a. The document submittal requirements of the Contract Documents indicate that the document submitted as Record Data should have been submitted as a Shop Drawing. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Submit Shop Drawing." No further action is required on this document as Record Data and the Record Data process will be closed. Resubmit the document as a Shop Drawing per Article 25. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-120 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 b. The cursory review indicates that the document does not meet the requirements of Paragraph 26.02. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Revise and Resubmit." Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked "Filed as Received." When Record Data is filed, no further action is required, and the Record Data process will be closed. c. The Record Data is not required by the Contract Documents nor is the Record Data applicable to the Project. The Record Data will be marked "Rejected" and "Cancel -Not Required." No further action is required,and the Record Data process will be closed. C. Contractor is to resubmit the Record Data until it is acceptable and marked "Filed as Received." ARTICLE 27—CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE 27.01 Requirements A. Prepare and submit a Progress Schedule for the Work and update the schedule on a monthly basis for the duration of the Project. B. Provide schedule in adequate detail to allow Owner to monitor progress and to relate document processing to sequential activities of the Work. C. Incorporate and specifically designate the dates of anticipated submission of documents and the dates when documents must be returned to the Contractor into the schedule. D. Assume complete responsibility for maintaining the progress of the Work per the schedule submitted. E. Schedule Work based upon a six day work week. 27.02 Document Submittal A. Submit Progress Schedules in accordance with Article 24. B. Submit a preliminary schedule within 10 days after the Notice of Award. The schedule is to be available at the pre-construction conference. C. Submit a detailed schedule at least 10 days prior to the first payment request. D. Submit Progress Schedule updates monthly with Applications for Payment to indicate the progress made on the Project to that date. Failure to submit the schedule may cause delay in the review and approval of Applications for Payment. 27.03 Schedule Requirements A. Schedule is to be in adequate detail to: 1. Assure adequate planning, scheduling, and reporting during the execution of the Work; 2. Assure the coordination of the Work of the Contractor and the various Subcontractors and Suppliers; 3. Assist in monitoring the progress of the Work; and FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnUMU115 007200-121 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 4. Assist in evaluating proposed changes to the Contract Times and Project schedule. B. Provide personnel with 5 years' minimum experience in scheduling construction work comparable to this Project. Prepare the schedule using acceptable scheduling software. C. Provide the schedule in the form of a computer generated critical path schedule which includes Work to be performed on the Project. It is intended that the schedule accomplish the following: 1. Give early warning of delays in time for correction. 2. Provide detailed plans for the execution of the Work in the form of future activities and events in sequential relationships. 3. Establish relationships of significant planned Work activities and provide a logical sequence for planned Work activities. 4. Provide continuous current status information. 5. Allow analysis of the Contractor's program for the completion of the Project. 6. Permit schedules to be revised when the existing schedule is not achievable. 7. Log the progress of the Work as it actually occurs. D. Prepare a time scaled CPM arrow or precedence diagram to indicate each activity and its start and stop dates. 1. Develop Milestone dates and Project completion dates to conform to time constraints, sequencing requirements and Contract completion date. 2. Use calendar day durations while accounting for holidays and weather conditions in the projection of the duration of each activity. 3. Clearly indicate the critical path for Work to complete the Project. E. Provide a time scaled horizontal bar chart which indicates graphically the Work scheduled at any time during the Project. The chart is to indicate: 1. Complete sequence of construction by activity; 2. Identification of the activity by structure, location, and type of Work; 3. Chronological order of the start of each item of Work; 4. The activity start and stop dates; 5. The activity duration; 6. Successor and predecessor relationships for each activity; 7. A clearly indicated single critical path; and 8. Projected percentage of completion, based on dollar value of the Work included in each activity as of the first day of each month. F. Provide a schedule incorporating the Schedule of Documents provided in accordance with Article 24 indicating: 1. Specific date each document is to be delivered to the Designer. 2. Specific date each document must be received in order to meet the proposed schedule. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-122 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. Allow a reasonable time to review documents, taking into consideration the size and complexity of the document, other documents being processed, and other factors that may affect review time. 4. Allow time for re-submission of each document. Contractor is responsible for delays associated with additional time required to review incomplete or erroneous documents and for time lost when documents are submitted for products that do not meet Specification requirements. 27.04 Schedule Revisions A. Revise the schedule if it appears that the schedule no longer represents the actual progress of the Work. 1. Submit a written report if the schedule indicates that the Project is more than 30 days behind schedule. The report is to include: a. Number of days behind schedule; b. Narrative description of the steps to be taken to bring the Project back on schedule; and c. Anticipated time required to bring the Project back on schedule. 2. Submit a revised schedule indicating the action that the Contractor proposes to take to bring the Project back on schedule. B. Revise the schedule to indicate any adjustments in Contract Times approved by Modification. 1. Include a revised schedule with Change Proposals if a change in Contract Times is requested. 2. OPT will deem any Change Proposal that does not have a revised schedule and request for a change in Contract Times as having no impact on the ability of the Contractor to complete the Project within the Contract Times. C. Updating the Project schedule to reflect actual progress is not considered a revision to the Project schedule. D. Applications for Payment may not be recommended for payment without a revised schedule and if required, the report indicating the Contractor's plan for bringing the Project back on schedule. 27.OS Float Time A. Define float time as the amount of time between the earliest start date and the latest start date of a chain of activities on the construction schedule. B. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either the Contractor or Owner. C. Where several subsystems each have a critical path, the subsystem with the longest time of completion is the critical path and float time is to be assigned to other subsystems. D. Contract Times cannot be changed by the submission of a schedule. Contract Times can only be modified by a Change Order or Contract Amendment. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-123 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. Schedule completion date must be the same as the Contract completion date. Time between the end of construction and the Contract completion date is float time. ARTICLE 28—VIDEO AND PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 28.01 Work Included A. Provide a video recording of the Site prior to the beginning of construction. 1. Record the condition of all existing facilities in or abutting the construction area (right- of-way)including but not limited to streets,curb and gutter, utilities,driveways,fencing, landscaping, etc. 2. Record after construction staking is complete but prior to any clearing. 3. Provide one copy of the recording, dated and labeled to the OAR before the start of construction. Provide additional recording as directed by the OAR if the recording provided is not considered suitable for the purpose of recording pre-existing conditions. B. Furnish an adequate number of photographs of the Site to clearly depict the completed Project. 1. Provide a minimum of ten different views. 2. Photograph a panoramic view of the entire Site. 3. Photograph all significant areas of completed construction. 4. Completion photographs are not to be taken until all construction trailers, excess materials, trash, and debris have been removed. 5. Employ a professional photographer approved by the OAR to photograph the Project. 6. Provide one aerial photograph of the Site from an angle and height to include the entire Site while providing adequate detail. C. All photographs, video recordings, and a digital copy of this media are to become the property of the Owner. Photographs or recordings may not be used for publication,or public or private display without the written consent of the Owner. 28.02 Quality Assurance A. Provide clear photographs and recordings taken with proper exposure. View photographs and recordings in the field and take new photographs or recordings immediately if photos of an adequate print quality cannot be produced or video quality is not adequate. Provide photographs with adequate quality and resolution to permit enlargements. 28.03 Document Submittal A. Submit photographic documentation as Record Data in accordance with Article 24. B. Submit two DVDs of the video recording as Record Data in accordance with Article 24. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnUMU115 007200-124 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 28.04 Photographs A. Provide photographs in digital format with a minimum resolution of 1280 x 960, accomplished without a digital zoom. B. Take photographs at locations acceptable to the OAR. C. Provide two color prints of each photograph and a digital copy on a DVD of each photograph taken. D. Identify each print on back with: 1. Project name. 2. Date,time, location, and orientation of the exposure. 3. Description of the subject of photograph. E. Submit photographs in clear plastic sheets designed for photographs. Place only one photograph in each sheet to allow the description on the back to be read without removing the photograph. F. Final photographs are to include two 8-by-10-inch glossy color prints for each of ten photographs selected by the OAR. These photographs are in addition to normal prints. 28.05 Video Recording A. Provide digital format on DVD that can be played with Windows Media Player in common format in full screen mode. B. Identify Project on video by audio or visual means. C. Video file size should not exceed 400 MB. D. Video resolution shall be 1080p. E. The quality of the video must be sufficient to determine the existing conditions of the construction area. Camera panning must be performed while at rest, do not pan the camera while walking or driving. Camera pans should be performed at intervals sufficient to clearly view the entire construction area. F. DVD shall be labeled with construction stationing and stationing should be called out, voice recorded, in the video. G. The entire construction area recording shall be submitted at once. Sections submitted separately will not be accepted. H. Pipeline projects should be recorded linearly from beginning to end. ARTICLE 29—EXECUTION AND CLOSEOUT 29.01 Substantial Completion A. Notify the OAR that the Work or a designated portion of the Work is substantially complete per the General Conditions. Include a list of the items remaining to be completed or corrected before the Project will be considered to be complete. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-125 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. OPT will visit the Site to observe the Work within 30 days after notification is received to determine the status of the Project. C. OAR will notify the Contractor, within 120 days after notification, that the Work is either substantially complete or that additional Work must be performed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 1. OAR will notify the Contractor of items that must be completed before the Project will be considered substantially complete. 2. Correct the noted deficiencies in the Work. 3. Notify the OAR when the items of Work in the OAR's notice have been completed. 4. OPT will revisit the Site and repeat the process. 5. OAR will issue a Certificate of Substantial Completion to the Contractor when the OPT considers the Project to be substantially complete. The Certificate will include a tentative list of items to be corrected before Final Payment will be recommended. 6. Review the list and notify the OAR of any objections to items on the list within 10 days after receiving the Certificate of Substantial Completion. 29.02 Final Inspections A. Notify the OAR when: 1. Work has been completed in compliance with the Contract Documents; 2. Equipment and systems have been tested per Contract Documents and are fully operational; 3. Final Operations and Maintenance Manuals have been provided to the Owner and all operator training has been completed; 4. Specified spare parts and special tools have been provided; and 5. Work is complete and ready for final inspection. B. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and ready for Final Payment within 30 days after the notice is received. C. Designer will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. D. Take immediate steps to correct Defective Work. Notify the Designer when Defective Work has been corrected. OPT will visit the Site to determine if the Project is complete and the Work is acceptable. OAR will notify the Contractor that the Project is complete or will notify the Contractor that Work is Defective. E. Submit the Request for Final Payment with the closeout documents described in Paragraph 29.04 if notified that the Project is complete, and the Work is acceptable. 29.03 Reinspection Fees A. Owner may impose a Set-off against the Application for Payment in accordance with the General Conditions to compensate the OPT for additional visits to the Project if additional Work is required. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-126 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 29.04 Closeout Documents Submittal A. Record Documents per Article 20. B. Warranties and bonds. C. Equipment installation reports on equipment. D. Shop Drawings, Record Data, and other documents as required by the Contract Documents. E. Evidence of continuing insurance and bond coverage as required by the Contract Documents. F. Final Photographs per Article 28. 29.05 Transfer of Utilities A. If applicable to the Project,transfer utilities to the Owner when the Certificate of Substantial Completion has been issued and the Work has been occupied by the Owner. B. Submit final meter readings for utilities and similar data as of the date the Owner occupied the Work. 29.06 Warranties, Bonds and Service Agreements A. Provide warranties, bonds, and service agreements required by the Contract Documents. B. The date for the start of warranties, bonds, and service agreements is established per the Contract Documents. C. Compile warranties, bonds, and service agreements and review these documents for compliance with the Contract Documents. 1. Provide a log of all equipment covered under the 1-year correction period specified in the Contract Documents and all products for which special or extended warranties or guarantees are provided. Index the log by Specification Section number on forms provided. Include items 2.e through 2.g below in the tabulation. 2. Provide a copy of specific warranties or guarantees under a tab indexed to the log. Each document is to include: a. A description of the product or Work item; b. The firm name with the name of the principal, address, and telephone number; c. Signature of the respective Supplier or Subcontractor to acknowledge existence of the warranty obligation for extended warranties and service agreements; d. Scope of warranty, bond, or service agreement; e. Indicate the start date for the correction period specified in the Contract Documents for each product and the date on which the specified correction period expires. f. Indicate the start date for extended warranties for each product and the date on which the specified extended warranties period expires. g. Start date, warranty or guarantee period, and expiration date for each warranty, bond, and service agreement; FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-127 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 h. Procedures to be followed in the event of a failure; and i. Specific instances that might invalidate the warranty or bond. D. Submit digital copies of the documents to the Designer for review. E. Submit warranties, bonds, and service agreements within 10 days after equipment or components are placed in service. ARTICLE 30—MISCELLANEOUS 30.01 Computation of Times A. Exclude the first day and include the last day when determining dates for a period of time referred to in the Contract Documents by days. The last day of this period is to be omitted from the determination if it falls on a Sunday or a legal holiday. B. All references and conditions for a Calendar Day Contract in the Contract Documents apply for a Fixed Date Contract. A Fixed Date Contract is one in which the calendar dates for reaching Substantial Completion and/or final completion are specified in lieu of identifying the number of days involved. 30.02 Owner's Right to Audit Contractor's Records A. By execution of the Contract, Contractor grants Owner the right to audit, examine, inspect and/or copy, at Owner's election at all reasonable times during the term of this Contract and for a period of four (4) years following the completion or termination of the Work, all of Contractor's written and electronically stored records and billings relating to the performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. The audit, examination or inspection may be performed by an Owner designee,which may include its internal auditors or an outside representative engaged by Owner. Contractor agrees to retain its records for a minimum of four(4)years following termination of the Contract, unless there is an ongoing dispute under the Contract,then, such retention period must extend until final resolution of the dispute. As used in these General Conditions, "Contractor written and electronically stored records" include any and all information, materials and data of every kind and character generated as a result of the work under this Contract. Examples of Contractor written and electronically stored records include, but are not limited to:accounting data and reports, billings, books, general ledgers, cost ledgers, invoices, production sheets, documents, correspondence, meeting notes, subscriptions, agreements, purchase orders, leases, contracts, commitments, arrangements, notes, daily diaries, reports, drawings, receipts, vouchers, memoranda, time sheets, payroll records, policies, procedures, Subcontractor agreements, Supplier agreements, rental equipment proposals, federal and state tax filings for any issue in question, along with any and all other agreements, sources of information and matters that may, in Owner's sole judgment, have any bearing on or pertain to any matters, rights, duties or obligations under or covered by any Contract Documents. B. Owner agrees to exercise the right to audit, examine or inspect Contractor's records only during regular business hours. Contractor agrees to allow Owner and/or Owner's designee access to all of the Contractor's Records, Contractor's facilities, and current or former employees of Contractor, deemed necessary by Owner or its designee(s), to perform such audit, inspection or examination. Contractor also agrees to provide adequate and FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-128 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 appropriate work space necessary for Owner or its designees to conduct such audits, inspections or examinations. C. Contractor must include this Paragraph 30.02 in any Subcontractor, supplier or vendor contract. 30.03 Independent Contractor A. Contractor is to perform its duties under this Contract as an independent contractor. The Contractor's Team and their personnel are not considered to be employees or agents of the Owner. Nothing in this Contract is to be interpreted as granting Contractor's Team the right or authority to make commitments for the Owner. This Contract does not constitute or create a joint venture, partnership or formal business organization of any kind. 30.04 Cumulative Remedies A. The duties and obligations imposed by these General Conditions and the rights and remedies available to the Owner or Contractor by these General Conditions are in addition to, and are not a limitation of,the rights and remedies which are otherwise imposed or available by: 1. Laws or Regulations; 2. Special warranties or guarantees; or 3. Other provisions of the Contract Documents. B. The provisions of this Paragraph 30.04 are as effective as if repeated specifically in the Contract Documents in connection with each particular duty, obligation, right and remedy to which they apply. 30.05 Limitation of Damages A. Owner is not liable to Contractor for claims, costs, losses or damages sustained by Contractor's Team associated with other projects or anticipated projects. B. Contractor waives claims for consequential damages, incidental or special damages arising out of or relating to this Contract, whether the damages are claimed in contract, tort or on any other basis. 30.06 No Waiver A. The failure of Owner or Contractor to enforce any provision of this Contract does not constitute a waiver of that provision or affect the enforceability of that provision or the remainder of this Contract. 30.07 Severability A. If a court of competent jurisdiction renders a part of this Contract invalid or unenforceable, that part is to be severed and the remainder of this Contract continues in full force. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-129 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 30.08 Survival of Obligations A. Representations, indemnifications, warranties, guarantees and continuing obligations required by the Contract Documents survive completion and acceptance of the Work or termination of the Contract. 30.09 No Third Party Beneficiaries A. Nothing in this Contract can be construed to create rights in any entity other than the Owner and Contractor. Neither the Owner nor Contractor intends to create third party beneficiaries by entering into this Contract. 30.10 Assignment of Contract A. This Contract may not be assigned in whole or in part by the Contractor without the prior written consent of the Owner. 30.11 No Waiver of Sovereign Immunity A. The Owner has not waived its sovereign immunity by entering into and performing its obligations under this Contract. B. This Contract is to perform a governmental function solely for the public benefit. 30.12 Controlling Law A. This Contract is governed by the laws of the State of Texas without regard to its conflicts of laws. Venue for legal proceedings lies exclusively in Nueces County, Texas. Cases must be filed and tried in Nueces County and cannot be removed from Nueces County,Texas. 30.13 Conditions Precedent to Right to Sue A. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary,Contractor will have at least 90 days to give notice of a claim for damages as a condition precedent to the right to sue on the Contract, subject to the contractual Claims and Alternative Dispute Resolution processes set forth herein. 30.14 Waiver of Trial by Jury A. Owner and Contractor agree that they have knowingly waived and do hereby waive the right to trial by jury and have instead agreed, in the event of any litigation arising out of or connected to this Contract, to proceed with a trial before the court, unless both parties subsequently agree otherwise in writing. 30.15 Attorney Fees A. The Parties expressly agree that, in the event of litigation, all parties waive rights to payment of attorneys' fees that otherwise might be recoverable, pursuant to the Texas Civil Practice and Remedies Code Chapter 38, Texas Local Government Code §271.153, the Prompt Payment Act, common law or any other provision for payment of attorney's fees. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-130 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 30.16 Compliance with Laws A. Comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990 as amended (ADA) and Texas Architectural Barriers Act and all regulations relating to either statute. B. No qualified person shall on the basis of race, color, religion, national origin, gender, age or disability be excluded from participation in, be denied the benefits of, or be subjected to discrimination under any program or activity which receives or benefits from federal financial assistance. C. Comply with all applicable federal, state and city laws, rules and regulations. D. Each applicable provision and clause required by law to be inserted into the Contract shall be deemed to be enacted herein,and the Contract shall be read and enforced as though each were physically included herein. 30.17 Enforcement A. The City Manager or designee and the City Attorney or designee are fully authorized and will have the right to enforce all legal rights and obligations under the Contract without further authorization from City Council. 30.18 Subject to Appropriation A. Funds are appropriated by the Owner on a yearly basis. If for any reason, funds are not appropriated in any given year,the Owner may direct immediate suspension or termination of the Contract with no additional liability to the Owner. If the Contractor is terminated or suspended and the Owner requests remobilization at a later date, the Contractor may request payment for reasonable demobilization/remobilization costs. Such costs shall be addressed through a Change Order to the Contract. Under no circumstances may a provision or obligation under this Contract be interpreted as contrary to this paragraph. 30.19 Contract Sum A. The Contract Sum is stated in the Contract and, including authorized adjustments,is the total maximum not-to-exceed amount payable by Owner to Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. Contractor accepts and agrees that all payments pursuant to this Contract are subject to the availability and appropriation of funds by the Corpus Christi City Council. If funds are not available and/or appropriated,this Contract shall immediately be terminated with no liability to any party to this Contract. 30.20 Contractor's Guarantee as Additional Remedy A. The Contractor's guarantee is a separate and additional remedy available to benefit the Owner. Neither the guarantee nor the expiration of the guarantee period will operate to reduce, release or relinquish any rights or remedies available to the Owner for any claims or causes of action against the Contractor or any other individual or entity. 30.21 Notices. A. Any notice required to be given to Owner under any provision in this Contract must include a copy to OAR by mail or e-mail. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wHUMU115 007200-131 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 30.22 Public Information A. The requirements of Subchapter J, Chapter 552, Government Code, may apply to this contract, and Contractor agrees that the contract can be terminated if Contractor knowingly or intentionally fails to comply with a requirement of that subchapter. END OF SECTION FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 uenerai wnaiuUns 007200-132 Corpus Christi Standards Rev 6/2021 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 00 73 00 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS These Supplementary Conditions amend or supplement SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS and other provisions of the Contract Documents. All provisions not amended or supplemented in these Supplementary Conditions remain in effect. The terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions. Additional terms used in these Supplementary Conditions have the meanings stated below. ARTICLE 1—DEFINITIONS AND TERMINOLOGY SC-1.01 DEFINED TERMS A. The members of the OPT as defined in Paragraph 1.01.A.41 consists of the following organizations: Brett Van Hazel 4917 Holly Road, Bldg. 5 City of Corpus Christi,Texas 78411 B. Paragraph 1.01.A.54"Substantial Completion" is more specifically defined for this Project as: 1. Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion is sufficiently complete with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. ARTICLE 4—COMMENCEMENT AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK SC-4.04 DELAYS IN CONTRACTOR'S PROGRESS A. The allocation for delays in the Contractor's progress for rain days as set forth in General Conditions Paragraph 4.04.D are to be determined as follows: 1. Include rain days in developing the schedule for construction. Schedule construction so that the Work will be completed within the Contract Times assuming that these rain days will occur. Incorporate residual impacts following rain days such as limited access to and within the Site, inability to work due to wet or muddy Site conditions, delays in delivery of equipment and materials, and other impacts related to rain days when developing the schedule for construction. Include all costs associated with these rain days and residual impacts in the Contract Price. 2. A rain day is defined as any day in which the amount of rain measured by the National Weather Services at the Power Street Stormwater Pump Station is 0.50 inch or greater. Records indicate the following average number of rain days for each month: Month Day Month Days January 3 July 3 February 3 August 4 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 -)uppiernenLary wnaiuuns 007300- 1 Fire Station No. 3; Project#21085 Rev 4/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 March 2 September 7 April 3 October 4 May 4 November 3 June 4 December 3 3. A total of 43 rain days have been set for this Project. An extension of time due to rain days will be considered only after 43 rain days have been exceeded in a calendar year and the OAR has determined that a detrimental impact to the construction schedule resulted from the excessive rainfall. Rain days are to be incorporated into the schedule and unused rain days will be considered float time which may be consumed by the Owner or Contractor in delay claims. ARTICLE 5 — AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS SC-5.03 SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS A. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.03.A which describe subsurface and physical conditions. 1. Geotechnical Reports include the following: Geotechnical Engineering Study by Gessner Engineering dated June 28, 2022 2. Drawings of physical conditions relating to existing surface or subsurface structures at the Site (except Underground Facilities) include the following: Geotechnical Engineering Study, Published by Gessner Engineering,June 28,2022 1) All information presented with regard to material type and general location. 2) Drawings are based on recommendations from the Geotechnical Report. Contractors shall defer to Record Drawings by Civil and Structural Engineers of Record. SC-5.06 HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS AT SITE A. This Supplementary Condition identifies documents referenced in General Conditions Paragraph 5.06 which describe Hazardous Environmental Conditions that have been identified at or adjacent to the Site. No reports of explorations or tests for Hazardous Environmental Conditions at or contiguous to the Site are known to Owner. ARTICLE 6—BONDS AND INSURANCE SC-6.03 REQUIRED MINIMUM INSURANCE COVERAGE FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 -)uPPiernenLary wnaiuuns 007300-2 Fire Station No. 3; Project#21085 Rev 4/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE AMOUNTS Provide the insurance coverage for at least the following amounts unless greater amounts are required by Laws and Regulations: Type of Insurance Minimum Insurance Coverage Commercial General Liability including 1. Commercial Form 2. Premises—Completed Operations 3. Explosions and Collapse Hazard 4. Underground Hazard 5. Products/Completed Operations Hazard $1,000,000 Per Occurrence 6. Contractual Liability $2,000,000 Aggregate 7. Broad Form Property Damage 8. Independent Contractors 9. Personal &Advertising Injury Business Automobile Liability-Owned, Non- $1,000,000 Combined Single Limit Owned, Rented and Leased Workers' Compensation Statutory Employer's Liability $500,000/500,000/500,000 Excess Liability/Umbrella Liability $1,000,000 Per Occurrence Required if Contract Price>$5,000,000 Contractor's Pollution Liability / $1,000,000 Per Claim Environmental Impairment Coverage Not limited to sudden and accidental 0Required ❑ Not Required discharge. To include long-term environmental impact for the disposal of pollutants/contaminants. Required if excavation>3 ft Builder's Risk(All Perils including Collapse) Equal to Full Replacement Cost of Structure and Contents Required for vertical structures and bridges 11 Required ❑ Not Required Installation Floater Equal to Contract Price Required if installing city-owned equipment ❑ Required Not Required ARTICLE 7—CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES SC-7.02 LABOR; WORKING HOURS FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 �uppiernenrary wnaiuuns 007300-3 Fire Station No. 3; Project#21085 Rev 4/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Perform Work at the Site during regular working hours except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of person or the Work or property at the Site or adjacent to the Site and except as otherwise stated in the Contract Documents. Regular working hours are between sun-up and sun-down unless other times are specifically authorized in writing by OAR. SC-7.04 CONCERNING SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS,AND OTHERS A. Add the following sentence to the end of Paragraph 7.04.A: "The Contractor's goal is to perform at least thirty percent (30%) of the Work, measured as a percentage of the Contract Price, using its own employees." ARTICLE 14—PREVAILING WAGE RATE REQUIREMENTS SC-14.04 PREVAILING WAGE RATES A. The minimum rates for various labor classifications as established by the Owner are shown below: http://www.wdol.gov/wdol/scafiles/davisbacon/TX Wage Determination Construction Type Project Type (WD) No TX288 Building Building Construction Projects (does not include single family homes or apartments up to and including 4 stories) ARTICLE 19—PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION SC-19.21 COOPERATION WITH PUBLIC AGENCIES C. For the Contractor's convenience, the following telephone numbers are listed: Public Agencies/Contacts Phone Number City Engineer 361-826-3500 BRW Architects 979-694-1791 Traffic Engineering 361-826-3547 Police Department 361-882-2600 361-826-1800 (361-826-1818 after Water/Wastewater/Stormwater hours) Gas Department 361-885-6900 (361-885-6942 after hours) Parks& Recreation Department 361-826-3461 Street Department 361-826-1875 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 -)uppiernenLary wnaiuuns 007300-4 Fire Station No. 3; Project#21085 Rev 4/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Public Agencies/Contacts Phone Number City Street Div.for Traffic Signals 361-826-1610 Solid Waste & Brush 361-826-1973 IT Department (City Fiber) 361-826-1956 AEP 1-877-373-4858 AT&T 361-881-2511 (1-800-824-4424 after hours) Grande Communications 1-866-247-2633 Spectrum Communications 1-800-892-4357 Crown Castle Communications 1-888-632-0931 (Network Operations Center) Centu ryl-i n k 361-208-0730 Windstream 1-800-600-5050 Regional Transportation Authority 361-289-2712 Port of Corpus Christi Authority Engr. 361-882-5633 TxDOT Area Office 361-808-2500 Corpus Christi ISD 361-695-7200 ARTICLE 25—SHOP DRAWINGS SC-25.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Provide Shop Drawings for the following items: Specification Section Shop Drawing Description 03 10 01 Concrete Paving Formwork 031100 Concrete Formwork 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete 04 47 00 Manufactured Stone 04 81 00 Unit Masonry Assemblies 05 12 00 Structural Steel Framing 052100 Steel Joist Framing 05 22 00 Structural Steel Decking 05 40 00 Cold Formed Metal Framing 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 05 51 13 Metal Pan Stairs 06 40 23 Interior Architectural Woodwork FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 �uppiernenLary wnaiuuns 007300-5 Fire Station No. 3; Project#21085 Rev 4/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Specification Section Shop Drawing Description 066140 Quartz Countertops 07 40 00 Metal Roof and Wall Panels 07 42 13 Metal Wall Panels 081100 Metal Doors and Frames 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 08 14 16 Wood Doors 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 08 35 13 Electric Operated Four-Fold Doors 08 41 13 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 08 42 13 Wind and Impact Resistant Aluminum Framing System 08 45 13 Translucent Wall Assemblies 08 51 0 Metal Windows 08 90 00 Louvers and Vents 10 14 00 Signage 10 82 23 Architectural Screen Wall 14 24 20 Hydraulic Elevator 210000 Fire Protection General 22 00 00 Plumbing General 23 00 00 HVAC General 26 00 00 Electrical General 27 00 00 Communications 28 00 00 Electronic Security 32 31 19 Ornamental Metal Fences and Gates 32 31 29 Wood Fencing 32 84 00 Planting Irrigation Note:Contractor shall reference each specification section for specific submittal requirements for each section. SC-25.12 RESUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS B. Pay for excessive review of Shop Drawings. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 �uppiernenLary wnaiuuns 007300-6 Fire Station No. 3; Project#21085 Rev 4/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Cost for additional review time will be billed to the Owner by the Designer for the actual hours required for the review of Shop Drawings by Designer and in accordance with the rates listed below: BILLING RATES The hourly billing rates for services of the Architect and the Architect's consultants, if any, are set forth below.The rates shall be adjusted in accordance with the Architect's and Architect's consultants' normal review practices. • Site Principal/ Engineer $240.00/hour • Sr. Project Manager/Engineer $185.00/hour • Project Manager/Engineer $170.00/hour • Project Architect/ Engineer $150.00/hour • Architect/Engineer $125.00/hour • Intern Architect I / Engineer $105.00/hour • Intern Architect II / Engineer $85.00/hour • Admin $70.00/hour ARTICLE 26—RECORD DATA SC-26.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Submit Record Data for the following items: 1. Reference Specification Section 01 78 39 "Project Record Documents" in Technical Specifications. SC-30.21 Notices. B. Strict compliance is required for all notice provisions in this Contract. END OF SECTION FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 -)uppiernenrary wnaiuuns 007300-7 Fire Station No. 3; Project#21085 Rev 4/2022 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 00 74 00 SPECIAL CONDITIONS FOR ARPA PROJECTS Coronavirus State and Local Fiscal Recovery Funds (SLFRF) Authorized by the American Rescue Plan Act (ARPA) TABLE OF CONTENTS Section No. Title FR-F01 Access to Records FR-F02 Breach of Contract FR-F03 Byrd Anti-Lobbying Amendment FR-F04 Clean Air Act and the Federal Water Pollution Control Act FR-F05 Contracting with Small, Minority and Women's Businesses FR-F06 Contract Work hours and Safety Standards Act FR-F07 Debarment and Suspension FR-F08 Prohibition on certain telecommunication services FR-F09 Equal Employment Opportunity FR-F10 Procurement of Recovered Materials FR-F11 Program Fraud and False or Fraudulent Statements or Related Acts END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS FIRE STATION NO. 3;'PROJECT #21085 007400- 1 MAY 2, 2023 Rev 7/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS: FR-F01 ACCESS TO RECORDS Access to Records. The following access to records requirements apply to this contract: (1) The Contractor agrees to provide the City, the federal awarding agency, Inspectors General, the Comptroller General of the United States, or any of their authorized representatives access to any books, documents, papers, and records of the Contractor which are directly pertinent to this contract for the purposes of making audits, examinations, excerpts, and transcriptions. (2) The Contractor agrees to permit any of the foregoing parties to reproduce by any means whatsoever or to copy excerpts and transcriptions as reasonably needed. (3) The Contractor agrees to provide the federal awarding agency or authorized representatives access to construction or other work sites pertaining to the work being completed under the contract. Reference: 2 CFR § 200.336 FIRE STATION NO. 3;'PR6JECf#21085 007400-2 MAY 2, 2023 Rev 7/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS: FR-F02 BREACH OF CONTRACT Any violation or breach of terms of this Contract on the part of the Contractor or its subcontractors may result in the suspension or termination of this Contract or such other action that may be necessary to enforce the rights of the parties of this agreement. City will provide Contractor written notice that describes the nature of the breach and corrective actions the Contractor must undertake in order to avoid termination of the Contract. City reserves the right to withhold payments to Contractor until such time the Contractor corrects the breach or the City elects to terminate the Contract. The City's notice will identify a specific date by which the Contractor must correct the breach. City may proceed with termination of the Contract if the Contractor fails to correct the breach by deadline indicated in the City's notice. The duties and obligations imposed by the Contract documents and the rights and remedies available thereunder are in addition to, and not a limitation of, any duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law. Reference: 2 CFR § 200 Appendix II(A) FIRE STATION NO. 3;'PR6JECf#21085 007400- 3 MAY 2, 2023 Rev 7/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS: FR-F03 BYRD ANTI-LOBBYING AMENDMENT Contractors who apply or bid for an award of $100,000 or more shall file the required certification. Each tier certifies to the tier above that it will not and has not used Federal appropriated funds to pay any person or organization for influencing or attempting to influence an officer or employee of any agency, a member of Congress, officer or employee of Congress, or an employee of a member of Congress in connection with obtaining any Federal contract, grant, or any other award covered by 31 U.S.C. § 1352. Each tier shall also disclose any lobbying with non-Federal funds that takes place in connection with obtaining any Federal award. Such disclosures are forwarded from tier to tier up to the recipient. Reference: 31 U.S.C. § 1352 (as amended) FIRE STATION NO. 3;'PR6JECf#21085 007400-4 MAY 2, 2023 Rev 7/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS: FR-F04 CLEAN AIR ACT AND THE FEDERAL WATER POLLUTION CONTROL ACT A. Clean Air Act. (1) The Contractor agrees to comply with all applicable standards, orders or regulations issued pursuant to the Clean Air Act, as amended, 42 U.S.C. §7401 et seq. (2) The Contractor agrees to report each violation to the City and understands and agrees that the City will, in turn, report each violation as required to assure notification to the Federal Emergency Management Agency, and the appropriate Environmental Protection Agency Regional Office. (3) The Contractor agrees to include these requirements in each subcontract exceeding $150,000 financed in whole or in part with Federal assistance provided by FEMA. B. Federal Water Pollution Control Act. (1) The Contractor agrees to comply with all applicable standards, orders or regulations issued pursuant to the Federal Water Pollution Control Act, as amended, 33 U.S.C. §1251 et seq. (2) The Contractor agrees to report each violation to the City and understands and agrees that the City will, in turn, report each violation as required to assure notification to the Federal Emergency Management Agency, and the appropriate Environmental Protection Agency Regional Office. (3) The Contractor agrees to include these requirements in each subcontract exceeding $150,000 financed in whole or in part with Federal assistance provided by FEMA. Reference: 2 CFR § 200, Appendix II¶ (G) FIRE STATION NO. 3;'PR6JECf#21085 007400- 5 MAY 2, 2023 Rev 7/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS: FR-F05 Contracting with Small, Minority and Women's Businesses Contractor must take affirmative steps to assure that minority businesses, women's business enterprises and labor surplus area firms are used when possible. Affirmative steps must include: (1) Placing qualified small and minority businesses and women's business enterprises on solicitation lists. (2) Assuring that small and minority businesses, and women's business enterprises are solicited whenever they are potential sources. (3) Dividing total requirements, when economically feasible, into smaller tasks or quantities to permit maximum participation by small and minority businesses, and women's business enterprises. (4) Establishing delivery schedules, where the requirement permits, which encourage participation by small and minority businesses, and women's business enterprises. (5) Using the services and assistance, as appropriate, of such organizations as the Small Business Administration and the Minority Business Development Agency of the Department of Commerce. Reference: 2 CFR § 200.321 FIRE STATION NO. 3;'PR6JECf#21085 007400- 6 MAY 2, 2023 Rev 7/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS: FR-F06 CONTRACT WORK HOURS AND SAFETY STANDARDS ACT (1) Overtime requirements. No Contractor or subcontractor contracting for any part of the contract work which may require or involve the employment of laborers or mechanics shall require or permit any such laborer or mechanic in any workweek in which he or she is employed on such work to work in excess of forty hours in such workweek unless such laborer or mechanic receives compensation at a rate not less than one and one-half times the basic rate of pay for all hours worked in excess of forty hours in such workweek. (2) Violation; liability for unpaid wages; liquidated damages. In the event of any violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (1) of this section the Contractor and any subcontractor responsible therefor shall be liable for the unpaid wages. In addition, such Contractor and subcontractor shall be liable to the United States (in the case of work done under contract for the District of Columbia or a territory, to such District or to such territory), for liquidated damages. Such liquidated damages shall be computed with respect to each individual laborer or mechanic, including watchmen and guards, employed in violation of the clause set forth in paragraph (1) of this section, in the sum of$10 for each calendar day on which such individual was required or permitted to work in excess of the standard workweek of forty hours without payment of the overtime wages required by the clause set forth in paragraph (1) of this section. (3) Withholding for unpaid wages and liquidated damages. The City shall upon its own action or upon written request of an authorized representative of the Department of Labor withhold or cause to be withheld, from any moneys payable on account of work performed by the Contractor or subcontractor under any such contract or any other Federal contract with the same prime Contractor, or any other federally- assisted contract subject to the Contract Work Hours and Safety Standards Act, which is held by the same prime Contractor, such sums as may be determined to be necessary to satisfy any liabilities of such Contractor or subcontractor for unpaid wages and liquidated damages as provided in the clause set forth in paragraph (2) of this section. (4) Subcontracts. The Contractor or subcontractor shall insert in any subcontracts the clauses set forth in paragraph (1) through (4) of this section and also a clause requiring the subcontractors to include these clauses in any lower tier subcontracts. The prime Contractor shall be responsible for compliance by any subcontractor or lower tier subcontractor with the clauses set forth in paragraphs (1) through (4) of this section. Reference: 29 CFR § 5.5(b) FIRE STATION NO. 3;'PR6JECf#21085 007400- 7 MAY 2, 2023 Rev 7/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS: FR-F07 DEBARMENT AND SUSPENSION (1) This contract is a covered transaction for purposes of 2 C.F.R. pt. 180 and 2 C.F.R. pt. 3000. As such the Contractor is required to verify that none of the Contractor, its principals (defined at 2 C.F.R. § 180.995), or its affiliates (defined at 2 C.F.R. § 180.905) are excluded (defined at 2 C.F.R. § 180.940) or disqualified (defined at 2 C.F.R. § 180.935). (2) The Contractor must comply with 2 C.F.R. pt. 180, subpart C and 2 C.F.R. pt. 3000, subpart C and must include a requirement to comply with these regulations in any lower tier covered transaction it enters into. (3) This certification is a material representation of fact relied upon by (insert name of subrecipient). If it is later determined that the Contractor did not comply with 2 C.F.R. pt. 180, subpart C and 2 C.F.R. pt. 3000, subpart C, in addition to remedies available to (name of state agency serving as recipient and name of subrecipient), the Federal Government may pursue available remedies, including but not limited to suspension and/or debarment. (4) The bidder or proposer agrees to comply with the requirements of 2 C.F.R. pt. 180, subpart C and 2 C.F.R. pt. 3000, subpart C while this offer is valid and throughout the period of any contract that may arise from this offer. The bidder or proposer further agrees to include a provision requiring such compliance in its lower tier covered transactions. Reference: 2 CFR part 180, 2 CFR part 3000 FIRE STATION NO. 3;'PR6JECf#21085 007400- 8 MAY 2, 2023 Rev 7/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS: FR-F08 PROHIBITION ON CERTAIN TELECOMMUNICATIONS AND VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SERVICES OR EQUIPMENT (a) Recipients and subrecipients are prohibited from obligating or expending loan or grant funds to: (1) Procure or obtain; (2) Extend or renew a contract to procure or obtain; or (3) Enter into a contract (or extend or renew a contract) to procure or obtain equipment, services, or systems that uses covered telecommunications equipment or services as a substantial or essential component of any system, or as critical technology as part of any system. As described in Public Law 115-232, section 889, covered telecommunications equipment is telecommunications equipment produced by Huawei Technologies Company or ZTE Corporation (or any subsidiary or affiliate of such entities). (i) For the purpose of public safety, security of government facilities, physical security surveillance of critical infrastructure, and other national security purposes, video surveillance and telecommunications equipment produced by Hytera Communications Corporation, Hangzhou Hikvision Digital Technology Company, or Dahua Technology Company (or any subsidiary or affiliate of such entities). (ii) Telecommunications or video surveillance services provided by such entities or using such equipment. (iii) Telecommunications or video surveillance equipment or services produced or provided by an entity that the Secretary of Defense, in consultation with the Director of the National Intelligence or the Director of the Federal Bureau of Investigation, reasonably believes to be an entity owned or controlled by, or otherwise connected to, the government of a covered foreign country. (b) In implementing the prohibition under Public Law 115-232, section 889, subsection (f), paragraph (1), heads of executive agencies administering loan, grant, or subsidy programs shall prioritize available funding and technical support to assist affected businesses, institutions and organizations as is reasonably necessary for those affected entities to transition from covered communications equipment and services, to procure replacement equipment and services, and to ensure that communications service to users and customers is sustained. Reference: 2 CFR § 200, Appendix IIT (J) FIRE STATION NO. 3;'PR6JECf#21085 007400- 9 MAY 2, 2023 Rev 7/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS: FR-F09 EQUAL EMPLOYMENT OPPORTUNITY During the performance of this contract, the contractor agrees as follows: (1) The contractor will not discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, color, religion, sex or national origin. The contractor will take affirmative action to ensure that applicants are employed, and that employees are treated during employment without regard to their race, color, religion, sex or national origin. Such action shall include, but not be limited to the following: employment, upgrading, demotion or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; layoff or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The contractor agrees to post in conspicuous places, available to employees and applicants for employment, notices to be provided setting forth the provisions of this nondiscrimination clause. (2) The contractor will, in all solicitation or advertisements for employees place by or on behalf of the contractor, state that all qualified applicants will receive considerations for employment without regard to race, color, religion, sex or national origin. (3) The contractor will send to each labor union or representative of workers with which it has a collective bargaining agreement or other contract or understanding, a notice to be provided advising the said labor union or workers' representatives of the contractor's commitments under this section, and shall post copies of the notice in conspicuous places available to employees and applicants for employment. (4) The contractor will comply with all provisions of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and of the rules, regulations and relevant orders of the Secretary of Labor. (5) The contractor will furnish all information and reports required by Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and by rules, regulations and orders of the Secretary of labor, or pursuant thereto, and will permit access to its books, records and accounts by the administering agency and the Secretary of Labor for purposes of investigation to ascertain compliance with such rules, regulations and order. (6) In the event of the contractor's noncompliance with the nondiscrimination clauses of this contract or with any of the said rules, regulations or orders, this contract may be canceled, terminated or suspended in whole or in part, and the contractor may be declared ineligible for further Government contracts or federally assisted FIRE STATION NO. 3;'PR6JECf #21085 007400- 10 MAY 2, 2023 Rev 7/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 construction contracts in accordance with procedures authorized in Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, and such other sanctions as may be imposed and remedies invoked as provided in Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, or by rule, regulation or order of the Secretary of Labor, or as otherwise provided by law. (7) The contractor will include all portions of this section FR-F11 in every subcontract or purchase order unless exempted by rules, regulations or orders of the Secretary of Labor issued pursuant to section 2014 of Executive Order 11246 of September 24, 1965, so that such provisions will be binding upon each subcontractor or vendor. The contractor will take such action with respect to any subcontract or purchase order as the administering agency may direct as a means of enforcing such provisions, including sanctions for noncompliance; provided, however, that in the event a contractor becomes involved in, or is threatened with, litigation with a subcontractor or vendor as a result of such direction by the administering agency, the contractor may request the United States to enter into such litigation to protect the interests of the United States. Reference: 41 CFR part 60-1.4(b) FIRE STATION NO. 3;'PR6JECf#21085 007400- 11 MAY 2, 2023 Rev 7/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS: FR-F10 PROCUREMENT OF RECOVERED MATERIALS (1) In the performance of this contract, the Contractor shall make maximum use of products containing recovered materials that are EPA- designated items unless the product cannot be acquired (i) Competitively within a timeframe providing for compliance with the contract performance schedule; (ii) Meeting contract performance requirements; or (iii) At a reasonable price. (2) Information about this requirement, along with the list of EPA-designate items, is available at EPA's Comprehensive Procurement Guidelines web site, https://www.epa.gov/smm/comprehensive-procurement-guideline-cpg-program. Reference: 2 CFR § 200.322 and 40 CFR part 247 FIRE STATION NO. 3;'PR6JECf#21085 007400- 12 MAY 2, 2023 Rev 7/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 FEDERAL REQUIREMENTS: FR-F11 PROGRAM FRAUD AND FALSE OR FRAUDULENT STATEMENTS RE RELATED ACTS The Contractor acknowledges that 31 U.S.C. Chap. 38 (Administrative Remedies for False Claims and Statements) applies to the Contractor's actions pertaining to this contract. Reference: 31 U.S.C. Chap. 38 FIRE STATION NO. 3;'PR6JECf#21085 007400- 13 MAY 2, 2023 Rev 7/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 011100 SUMMARY OF WORK 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Construct Work as described in the Contract Documents. 1. Provide the materials, equipment, and incidentals required to make the Project completely and fully useable. 2. Provide the labor, equipment, tools, and consumable supplies required for a complete Project. 3. The Contract Documents do not indicate or describe all of the Work required to complete the Project. Additional details required for the correct installation of selected products are to be provided by the Contractor and coordinated with the OAR. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Work is described in general, non-inclusive terms as: 1. Fire Station 3 will have the capacity to house 12 fire fighters with full living quarters and has 4 pull-through apparatus bays, a community room,weight room, report writing watch office,training mezzanine, and support space. The site includes 5 public parking spaces, with 2 being accessible, 21 employee parking spaces, sidewalks, and a designated screened trash receptacle area. To support the building, there will be a generator(purchased and installed by the owners) located off of the back apparatus bay driveway. 1.03 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS A. The following items of work are not included in this Contract, but may impact construction scheduling and completion: 1. Construction upgrades to South Brownlee Boulevard. B. In the case of a disagreement between the above list and those specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the Contractor is to base his Proposal on the most expensive listing. C. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction and testing of the items listed above. 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. 1.04 WORK BY OWNER A. The Owner plans to perform the following items of work which are not included in this Contract, but may impact the construction scheduling and completion: 1. None. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 -urnrnary of VVVrK 011100- 1 Fire Station No. 3; Project#21085 Rev 10/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Completion of the Work described in this Contract may impact the construction of the items listed above. 1. Coordinate construction activities through the OAR. 2. Pay claims for damages which result from the late completion of the Project or any specified Milestones. C. Owner will provide normal operation and maintenance of the existing facilities during construction, unless otherwise stated. 1.05 CONSTRUCTION OF UTILITIES A. Pay for temporary power, including but not limited to construction cost, meter connection fees, and permits. 1.06 USE PRIOR TO FINAL COMPLETION A. Owner has the right to use or operate any portion of the Project that is ready for use after notifying the Contractor of its intent to do so. B. The execution of Bonds is understood to indicate the consent of the surety to these provisions for use of the Project. C. Provide an endorsement from the insurance carrier permitting use of Project during the remaining period of construction. D. Conduct operations to insure the least inconvenience to the Owner and general public. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 -urnrnary of VVVrK 011100-2 Fire Station No. 3; Project#21085 Rev 10/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 01 23 10 ALTERNATES AND ALLOWANCES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 REQUIREMENTS A. Alternates: 1. This Section describes each alternate by number and describes the basic changes to be incorporated into the Work when this alternate is made a part of the Work in the Agreement. 2. Drawings and Specifications will outline the extent of Work to be included in the alternate Contract Price. 3. Coordinate related Work and modify surrounding Work as required to properly integrate the Work under each alternate,and provide a complete and functional Project as required by the Contract Documents. 4. Bids for alternates may be accepted or rejected at the option of the Owner. 5. Owner may incorporate these alternates in the Contract when executed, or may issue a Change Order to incorporate these alternates within 120 days at the prices offered in the Bid, unless noted otherwise. A Request for a Change Proposal may be issued after 120 days or other designated time period to negotiate a new price for incorporating the Work into the Project. B. The Bid Items described as"Allowances" have been set as noted in Section 00 30 01 Bid Form and shall be included in the Total Base Bid of the Bid Form for each Bidder. These Allowances may be used at the Owner's discretion in the event that unforeseen conditions or conflicts are encountered during construction that warrants the use of the Allowance funds. If the use of Allowance funds becomes necessary, the OAR will provide written authorization at a cost negotiated between Owner and Contractor, using unit prices in the Bid Form when applicable. No work is to be performed under the Allowance items without written authorization from the OAR. There is no guarantee that any of these funds will need to be used during the course of the Work. 1.02 DOCUMENT SUBMITTALS A. Provide documents for materials furnished as part of the alternate in accordance with Article 24 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.03 DESCRIPTION OF ALTERNATES A. Add Alternate 1: Generator with enclosure,generator pad and screen, and ATS to be added to scope of work. B. Add Alternate 2: Security fence and manual gates with empty conduit and pull strings (for future power operator) to be added to scope of work. C. Add Alternate 3: Microwave,washers and dryers, and refrigerators to be added to scope of work. Power,water, and gas shall be included in base bid. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 /A1Le111aLes ana Hnowances 012310- 1 Fire Station No. 3; Project#21085 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1.04 DESCRIPTION OF ALLOWANCES A. Allowance A—Bonds and Insurance 1. Payment shall include all bonds and insurance required under the Contract Documents. 2. Payment for bonds and insurance will be based on the receipt of documentation of actual costs. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of unique insurance as required and obtained specifically for the Project, not including the routine and general company insurance policies that are maintained for the course of conducting normal business operations. Contractor will be reimbursed for the actual cost of project specific bonds and insurance, not to exceed the bid amount for verifiable costs of Project specific bonds and insurance incurred by the Contractor. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 rAirernaWs ana Hnowances 012310-2 Fire Station No. 3; Project#21085 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 01 29 01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON LUMP SUM ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents for lump sum payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that lump sum item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each lump sum item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the lump sum price. B. Measurement for progress payments will be made on the basis of the earned value for each item shown as a percentage of the cost for the lump sum item as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. Payment at Final Completion will be equal to the total lump sum amount for that item. 1.02 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENTS ON UNIT PRICE ITEMS A. Include all cost for completing the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents in unit price payment items. Include all direct cost for the Work associated with that unit price item and a proportionate amount for the indirect costs as described in Article 17 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS for each unit price item. Include cost not specifically set forth as an individual payment item but required to provide a complete and functional system in the unit price. B. Measurement for payments will be made only for the actual measured and/or computed length, area, solid contents, number, and weight, unless other provisions are made in the Contract Documents. Payment on a unit price basis will not be made for Work outside finished dimensions shown in the Contract Documents. Include cost for waste, overages, and tolerances in the unit price for that line item. Measurement will be as indicated for each unit price item. 1.03 MEASUREMENT AND BASIS FOR PAYMENT FOR BASE BID ITEMS A. Bid Item A-1—Mobilization (Maximum 5%): 1. Include the following costs in this Bid item: a. Transportation and setup for equipment; b. Transportation and/or erection of all field offices, sheds, and storage facilities; c. Salaries for preparation of documents required before the first Application for Payment; d. Salaries for field personnel assigned to the Project related to the mobilization of the Project; e. Demobilization; and f. Mobilization may not exceed 5 percent of the total Contract Price. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 ivieasurernenr anu naris iur rayrnenr 012901- 1 Fire Station No. 3; Project#21085 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Measurement for payment will be made per lump sum on the following basis: When at least 5% of the adjusted contract amount for construction is earned, 75% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. Upon substantial completion of all work under this Contract and removal of all equipment and materials from the Project site, the remaining 25% of the mobilization lump sum bid amount will be eligible for payment, minus retainage. B. Other Bid Items 1. The basis of measurement and payment for other Bid Items shall be as described in the applicable Specification Sections, Construction Drawings. Payment will be based on list of Schedule of Values submitted by Contractor. Payment will be determined on the percentage of the work complete during the payment period. This shall be approved by the Owner and Architect. Refer to Specification Section 0129 00 "Payment Procedures" in Technical Specifications for more details. 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 ivieasurernenr anu naris iur rayrnenr 012901-2 Fire Station No. 3; Project#21085 Rev 5/2020 DocuSign Envelope ID:FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-ESDA6D32F4D6 0133 01 Submittal Register W/No Division 03 Concrete 03 11 00 Concrete Formwork 1.07 Shop Drawing None None 03 11 00 Concrete Formwork 1.07 Record Data None None 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement 1.03 Shop Drawing None None 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement 1.03 Record Data None None 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete 1.04 Shop Drawing None None 03 30 00 Cast-In-Place Concrete 1.04 Record Data None None 03 35 36 Polished Concrete Floor Finishing 1.04 Record Data Sample O&M Manual Division 04 Masonry 04 72 00 Cast Stone Masonry 1.03 Shop Drawing Mockup None 04 72 00 Cast Stone Masonry 1.03 Record Data Sample O&M Manual 04 81 00 Unit Masonry Assemblies 1.04 Shop Drawing Mockup None 04 81 00 Unit Masonry Assemblies 1.04 Record Data Sample 0&M Manual Division 05 Metals 05 1200 Structural Steel Framing Shop Drawing None None 05 1200 Structural Steel Framing Record Data None None 05 21 00 Steel Joist Framing Shop Drawing 05 21 00 Steel Joist Framing Record Data 05 22 00 Structural Steel Decking Shop Drawing 05 2200 Structural Steel Decking Record Data 05 40 00 Cold Formed Metal Framing 1.05-1.06 Shop Drawing None None 05 40 00 Cold Formed Metal Framing 1.05-1.06 Record Data None None 05 50 00 Metal Fabrications 1.05 Shop Drawing None None 05 51 13 Metal Pan Stairs 1.04-1.05 Shop Drawing None None 05 51 13 Metal Pan Stairs 1.04-1.05 Record Data None None 05 51 33 Aluminum Access Ladder 1.07 Shop Drawing None None 05 52 00 Handrails and Railings 1.05 Shop Drawing None None 05 52 00 Handrails and Railings 1.05 Record Data None None Division 06 Wood,Plastic,and Coposites 06 16 00 Sheathing 1.03-1.04 Record Data Mockup None 06 40 23 Interior Architectural Woodwork 1.05-1.06 Shop Drawing Sample None 06 40 23 Interior Architectural Woodwork 1.05-1.06 Record Data Sample None 06 61 40 Quartz Countertops and Fabrications 1.05 Record Data Sample 0&M Manual Division 07 Thermal and Loisture Protection 07 11 13 Bituminous Dampproofing 1.03 Record Data Mockup 0&M Manual 07 13 26 Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing 1.03 Shop Drawing None None •FIRE STATION NO.3;PROJECT#21085 1.03 Record Data Mockup 0&M Manual (MAY 2,2023 1.05 Record Data Sample None 07 26 00 Ivapor Barrier Membrane 1.05 Record Data Sample None 07 27 13 Modified Bituminous Sheet Air Barrier 1.05-1.06 Shop Drawing Mockup None 07 27 13 Modified Bituminous Sheet Air Barrier 1.05-1.06 Record Data Mockup None 07 27 19 Plastic Film Air Barrier 1.04 Record Data Mockup 0&M Manual 07 27 26 Fluid-Applied Membrane Weather Barrier 1.05 Record Data None None 07 40 00 Metal Roof and Wall Panels 1.06 Shop Drawing None None 07 40 00 Metal Roof Panels 1.06 Record Data Sample 0&M Manual 07 42 13 Metal Wall Panels 1.06 Shop Drawing None None Submittal Register 01 33 01-1 Fire Station No.3;Project#21085 10/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID:FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-ESDA6D32F4D6 07 42 13 Metal Wall Panels 1.06 Record Data Sample 0&M Manual 07 46 46 Mineral-Fiber Cement Soffit 1.03 Record Data Sample 0&M Manual 07 46 46 Mineral-Fiber Cement Soffit 1.03 Shop Drawing None None 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 1.05 Shop Drawing None None 07 62 00 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 1.05 Record Data Sample 0&M Manual 07 71 00 Roof Specialties 1.04-1.06 Shop Drawing None None 07 71 00 Roof Specialties 1.04-1.06 Record Data Sample 0&M Manual 07 72 00 Roof Accessories 1.04 Record Data None 0&M Manual 07 84 13 Penetration Firestopping 1.05 Record Data None C&M Manual 07 92 00 Joint Sealants 1.04 Record Data Sample C&M Manual 07 95 00 Expansion Control 1.02 Shop Drawing Sample C&M Manual Division 08 Doors and Windows 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 1.04 Shop Drawing Sample 0&M Manual 08 11 13 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames 1.04 Record Data None O&M Manual 08 14 16 Wood Doors 1,03-1.04 Shop Drawing Sample None 08 14 16 Wood Doors 1.03-1.04 Record Data None None 0831 13 Access Doors and Panels 1.03 Shop Drawing None None 0831 13 Access Doors and Panels 1.03 Record Data None None 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 1.04 Shop Drawing None 0&M Manual 08 33 23 Overhead Coiling Doors 1.04 Record Data None 0&M Manual 0835 13 Electric Operated Four-Fold Doors 1.04 Shop Drawing None 0&M Manual 0835 13 Electric Operated Four-Fold Doors 1.04 Record Data Sample 0&M Manual 08 41 13 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 1.04-1.06 Shop Drawing Sample 0&M Manual 0841 13 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts 1.04-1.06 Record Data Sample 0&M Manual 08 42 13 Wind and Impact Resistant Alum. Framing System 1.03-1.05 Shop Drawing Sample 0&M Manual 08 42 13 Wind and Impact Resistant Alum. Framing System 1.03-1.05 Record Data Sample 0&M Manual 08 45 13 Translucent Wall Assemblies 1.5 Shop Drawing Sample 0&M Manual 08 45 13 Translucent Wall Assemblies 1.5 Record Data Sample 0&M Manual 08 51 00 Metal Windows 1.05 Shop Drawing Sample None 08 51 00 Metal Windows 1.05 Record Data Sample None 08 71 00 Door Hardware 1.5 Record Data None 0&M Manual 08 80 00 Glazing 1.05-1.06 Shop Drawing Sample None 08 80 00 Glazing 1.05-1.06 Record Data Sample None 08 90 00 Louvers and Vents 1.04 Shop Drawing None None 08 90 00 Louvers and Vents 1.04 Record Data None None Division 09 Finishes 09 21 00 Gypsum Board Assemblies 1.03 Record Data Sample None 0c)2 STATION NO 3SPROJ ir;flECT M t;;l riming 1.03-1.04 Record Data None None FIR1085 (MAY 2,2023 1.06-1.07 Record Data Sample None 09 51 00 Acoustical Ceilings 1.04 Record Data Sample None 09 65 13 Resilient Base and Accessories 1.05 Record Data Sample None 09 65 19 Luxury Vinyl Tile(LVT) 1.04 Shop Drawing Sample 0&M Manual 09 65 19 Luxury Vinyl Tile(LVT) 1.04 Record Data Sample 0&M Manual 09 65 66 Athletic Rubber Flooring 1.04 Shop Drawing Sample 0&M Manual 09 65 66 Athletic Rubber Flooring 1.04 Record Data Sample 0&M Manual 09 81 00 Acoustic Insulation 1.05 Record Data Sample None 09 84 00 Acoustical Room Components 1.05 Record Data Sample 0&M Manual Submittal Register 01 33 01-2 Fire Station No.3;Project#21085 10/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID:FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-ESDA6D32F4D6 0133 01 Submittal Register M/No 09 91 00 Painting 1.04 Record Data Sample None Division 10 Specialties 10 14 00 Signage 1.03 Shop Drawing Sample None 10 14 00 Signage 1.03 Record Data Sample None 10 26 13 Wall and Corner Protection 1.04 Shop Drawing Sample None 10 26 13 Wall and Corner Protection 1.04 Record Data Sample None 10 28 13 Toilet Accessories 1.05 Record Data None None 10 44 00 Fire Protection Specialties 1.04 Record Data None None 10 51 43 Turnout Gear Lockers 1.04 Shop Drawing None None 10 51 43 Turnout Gear Lockers 1.04 Record Data None None 10 56 23 Stainless Steel Sheving 1.04 Shop Drawing None None 10 56 23 Stainless Steel Sheving 1.04 Record Data None None 10 73 16 Prefabricated Aluminum Canopies 1.04 Shop Drawing None None 10 73 16 Prefabricated Aluminum Canopies 1.04 Record Data None None 10 75 00 Flagpoles 1.03 Shop Drawing None None 10 75 00 Flagpoles 1.03 Record Data None None Division 11 Equipment 11 31 00 Residential Appliances 1.05 Shop Drawing None 0&M Manual 11 31 00 Residential Appliances 1.05 Record Data None 0&M Manual Division 12 Furnishings 12 24 00 Manual Roller Shades 1.04 Shop Drawing Sample None 12 24 00 Manual Roller Shades 1.04 Record Data Sample None Division 14 Conveying Equipment 14 24 20 Hydraulic Elevator 1.04 Shop Drawing None 0&M Manual 14 24 20 Hydraulic Elevator 1.04 Record Data None 0&M Manual Division 21 Fire Suppression 210000 Fire Protection General Shop Drawing None 0&M Manual 210000 Fire Protection General Record Data None 0&M Manual Division 22 Plumbing 22 00 00 Plumbing General Record Data None O&M Manual 22 08 00 Commissioning of Plumbing Record Data O&M Manual 22 16 00 Natural Gas Piping System Record Data 0&M Manual 22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures Record Data None 0&M Manual 22 15 19 Air Compressors Record Data None 0&M Manual Division 23 Heating,Ventilating,and Air Conditioning(HVAC) 23 00 00 HVAC General Record Data None 0&M Manual 23 05 63 Coatings For HVAC Equipment Record Data None 0&M Manual 23 05 80 HVAC Coil Anti-Corrosion Coating Record Data None 0&M Manual 23 05 93 Testing Adjusting and Balancing Record Data None 0&M Manual 23 07 00 HVAC Insulation Record Data None 0&M Manual 23 08 00 Commissioning of HVAC Systems Record Data None 0&M Manual 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping, Insulation and Accessories Record Data None 0&M Manual Submittal Register 01 33 01-3 Fire Station No.3;Project#21085 10/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID:FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-ESDA6D32F4D6 23 31 00 Ductwork and Accessories Record Data None 0&M Manual 23 34 00 Unitary Exhaust,Supply Fans and Ventilators Record Data None 0&M Manual 23 34 01 High Volume Low Speed Ceiling Fans Record Data None 0&M Manual 23 35 16 Engine Exhaust Removal System Record Data None 0&M Manual 23 37 00 Louvers,Grilles,Registers and Diffusers Record Data None 0&M Manual 23 55 23 Low Intensity Gas-Fired Radiant Heaters Record Data None 0&M Manual 23 72 13 100%OA Air-To-Air Energy Recovery Equipment Record Data None 0&M Manual 23 81 27 Split System(Electric Cooling,Gas Heating) Record Data None O&M Manual 23 81 29 Variable Refrigerant Flow HVAC Systems Record Data None O&M Manual 23 82 39 Electric Unit Heaters Record Data None O&M Manual 23 82 39.19 Electric Wall Heaters Record Data None O&M Manual Division 26 Electrical 26 00 00 Electrical General Record Data None O&M Manual 26 05 19 Conductors Record Data None O&M Manual 26 05 26 Grounding Record Data None 0&M Manual 26 05 30 Firestopping for Electrical Systems Record Data None 0&M Manual 26 05 33 Conduit and Raceways Record Data None 0&M Manual 26 05 34 Outlet Boxes and Junction Boxes Record Data None 0&M Manual 26 05 35 Low Voltage Backboards&Enclosures Record Data None 0&M Manual 26 08 00 Commissioning of Electrical Record Data None 0&M Manual 26 09 23 Occupancy Sensors Record Data None 0&M Manual 26 24 16 Panelboards Record Data None 0&M Manual 26 27 26 Wiring Devices Record Data None 0&M Manual 26 28 16 Disconnect Switches Record Data None 0&M Manual 26 28 18 Enclosed Circuit Breakers Record Data None 0&M Manual 26 32 13 Emergency Standby Generator System Record Data None 0&M Manual 26 41 00 Lightning Protection Record Data None O&M Manual 26 43 13 Surge Protective Devices(Spd) 26 5100 Record Data Mockup O&M Manual 26 51 00 Lighting Shop Drawing None O&M Manual 26 51 00 Lighting Record Data None O&M Manual Division 27 Communications 27 00 00 Communications Record Data None O&M Manual 27 05 10 Firestop for Comm Systems Record Data None O&M Manual 27 05 26 Ground&Bond for Comm Systems Record Data None O&M Manual 27 05 28 Pathways for Comm Systems Record Data None O&M Manual Record Data None 0&M Manual 27 05 43 Underground Ducts&Raceways for Comm Systems 27 05 53 Ident For Comm Systems Record Data None 0&M Manual 27 08 00 Commissioning of Comm Record Data None 0&M Manual 27 11 13 Comm Entrance Protection Record Data None 0&M Manual 27 11 16 Comm Cabinets,Racks, Enclosures Record Data None 0&M Manual 27 11 19 Comm Termination Blocks&Patch Panels Record Data None 0&M Manual 27 11 23 Comm Cable Manage&Ladder Rack Record Data None 0&M Manual Comm Rack Mounted Power Protection&Power Record Data None 0&M Manual 27 11 26 Strips 27 11 90 Structured Media Enclosures Record Data None O&M Manual ,271S13 Comm Copper Horizontal Cabling Record Data None 0&M Manual 27 15 23 IComm Optical Fiber Horizontal Cabling Record Data None O&M Manual Submittal Register 01 33 01-4 Fire Station No.3;Project#21085 10/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID:FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-ESDA6D32F4D6 0133 01 Submittal Register M/No 27 15 33 Comm Coaxial Horizontal Cabling Record Data None 0&M Manual 27 15 43 Comm Faceplates&Connectors Record Data None 0&M Manual 27 16 19 Comm Patch Cords&Station Cords Record Data None 0&M Manual 27 21 33 Wireless Access Points Record Data None 0&M Manual 27 41 13 Multi-Zone Audio Record Data None 0&M Manual 27 70 10 Surge Protective Devices Record Data None 0&M Manual Division 28 Electronic Safety and Security 28 00 00 Electronic Security Record Data None 0&M Manual 28 07 00 IP Video Surveillance System Record Data None 0&M Manual 28 16 00 Intrusion Detection Record Data None 0&M Manual 28 31 11 Fire Alarm System(Addressable) Record Data None 0&M Manual Division 31 Earthwork 31 10 00 Site Clearing - None None None 31 22 00 Earthwork 1.05 None Sample None 31 22 13 Site Grading 31 23 00 Excavation and Fill 1.03 Record Data None 0&M Manual 31 23 23 Compacted Embankment 31 23 23.10 Pipe Trench Excavation and Backfill 31 25 00 Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan - None None None 31 25 53 Soil Erosion and Sediment Control 1.04 Record Data None 0&M Manual 31 31 16 Termite Treatment 1.04 Record Data None 0&M Manual 31 32 13 Lime Soil Stabilization 1.05 Record Data None None 31 32 23 Water and Lime Pressure Injection 1.06 Record Data None None 31 63 29 Drilled Piers - None None None Division 32 Exterior Improvements 32 16 33 Concrete Driveway 32 11 33.13 Portland Cement Concrete Pavement 32 1313 Concrete Paving 1.03 Record Data None None 32 14 00 Unit Paving 32 1613.20 Concrete Block Curb 32 16 23 Concrete Sidewalk and Concrete Driveway 32 16 32.10 Sidewalk 32 17 00 Pavement Specialties 32 31 19 Decorative Metal Fences and Gates 1.06 Shop Drawing None O&M Manual 32 31 19 Decorative Metal Fences and Gates 1.06 Record Data None 0&M Manual 32 31 29 Wood Fencing 1.03 Record Data None None 32 35 13 Screens and Louvers 1.05 Shop Drawing None 0&M Manual 32 35 13 Screens and Louvers 1.05 Record Data None 0&M Manual 32 84 00 Planting Irrigation 1.03 Record Data None 0&M Manual 32 90 00 Landscaping 1.05-1.07 Record Data Sample 0&M Manual 32 92 00 Turf and Grasses 1.04-1.05 Record Data None 0&M Manual 32 92 19 Landscape Seeding 1.05 Record Data None 0&M Manual 32 93 00 Plants 1.06-1.07 Record Data Sample 0&M Manual Division 33 Utilities 33 05 05.10 Installation Of Water Pipe 33 05 05.31 Hydrostatic Testing of Pressure System Submittal Register 01 33 01-5 Fire Station No.3;Project#21085 10/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID:FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-ESDA6D32F4D6 33 05 31.16 Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Fittings(C900&C905) 33 05 39.41 Reinforced Concrete Pipe 33 05 76 Sanitary Sewer Manholes(Fiberglass) 33 06 00 Utility Services 1.04 Shop Drawing None None 33 06 00 Utility Services 1.04 Record Data None None 33 31 11 Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe and Fittings for Sewer Lines (SDR 26) ***NOTE: REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS FOR THE SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS FOR EACH SPECIFICATION SECTION. Submittal Register 01 33 01-6 Fire Station No.3;Project#21085 10/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 PLAN OF ACTION A. Submit a written plan of action for approval for shutting down essential services. These include: 1. Electrical power, 2. Control power, 3. Pipelines or wastewater systems, 4. Communications equipment, and 5. Other designated functions. B. Describe the following in the plan of action: 1. Scheduled dates for construction; 2. Work to be performed; 3. Utilities, piping, or services affected; 4. Length of time the service or utility will be disturbed; 5. Procedures to be used to carry out the Work; 6. Plan of Action to handle emergencies; 7. List of manpower, equipment, and ancillary supplies; 8. Backups for key pieces of equipment and key personnel; 9. Contingency plan that will be used if the original schedule cannot be met; and C. Submit plan 2 weeks prior to beginning the Work. 1.02 CRITICAL OPERATIONS A. The Owner has identified critical operations that must not be out of service longer than the designated maximum time out of service and/or must be performed only during the designated times. These have been identified in the table below: 1. There are no critical operations that will be done on this project site until the project is complete. The land is currently not being used. 2. Contractor shall work with the City of Corpus Christi on any roads that may temporarily need to be blocked or redirected for any type of construction or delivery. 1.03 OWNER ASSISTANCE A. The Owner will assist the Contractor in getting electrical, water, gas, communication service to the future building. Contractor shall coordinate as necessary per the construction documents. Special Procedures 013500- 1 Fire Station No. 3; Project#21085 Rev 10/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2.00 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 3.00 EXECUTION (NOT USED) END OF SECTION Special Procedures 013500-2 Fire Station No. 3; Project#21085 Rev 10/2018 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 01 50 00 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide temporary facilities, including OPT's field office and the Contractor's field offices, storage sheds, and temporary utilities needed to complete the Work. B. Install and maintain temporary Project identification signs. Provide temporary on-site informational signs to identify key elements of the construction facilities. Do not allow other signs to be displayed. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide a total electrical heating and cooling system for the OPT's field office capable of maintaining the following conditions: 1. Heating: Minimum 75 degrees ID temp at 10 degrees ambient. 2. Cooling: Minimum 75 degrees ID temp at 105 degrees ambient. 3. Relative humidity: 48 to 54 percent. B. Inspect and test each service before placing temporary utilities in use. Arrange for all required inspections and tests by regulatory agencies, and obtain required certifications and permits for use. 1.03 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Arrange transportation, loading, and handling of temporary buildings and sheds. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Locate buildings and sheds at the Site as indicated or as approved by the OPT. B. Prepare the Site by removing trees, brush, or debris and performing demolition or grubbing needed to clear a space adequate for the structures. C. Pay for the utilities used by temporary facilities during construction. D. Provide each temporary service and facility ready for use at each location when the service or facility is first needed to avoid delay in the performance of the Work. Provide OPT's field office complete and ready for occupancy and use within 7 days of the Notice to Proceed. E. Maintain, expand as required, and modify temporary services and facilities as needed throughout the progress of the Work. F. Remove services and facilities when approved by the OAR. G. Operate temporary facilities in a safe and efficient manner. 1. Restrict loads on temporary services or facilities to within their designed or designated capacities. 2. Provide sanitary conditions. Prevent public nuisance or hazardous conditions from developing or existing at the Site. Temporary Facilities and Controls 015000- 1 Fire Station No. 3; Project#21085 Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. Prevent freezing of pipes,flooding, or the contamination of water. 4. Maintain Site security and protection of the facilities. 1.05 OPTIONS A. Construction offices may be prefabricated buildings on skids or mobile trailers. B. Storage sheds may be prefabricated buildings on skids or truck trailers. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 TEMPORARY FIELD OFFICES A. The Contractor must furnish the OPT with a field office at the Site. The field office must contain at least 120 square feet of useable space. The field office must be air-conditioned and heated and must be furnished with an inclined table that measures at least 30 inches by 60 inches and two chairs. The Contractor shall move the field office on the Site as required by the OAR. There is no separate pay item for the field office. B. Furnish a field office of adequate size for Contractor's use. Provide conference room space for a minimum of 10 people. C. Other trades may provide their own offices only when space is available at the Site, and the OPT agrees to its size, condition, and location. D. No monthly partial payments will be processed until OPT's field office facilities are completed and approved. 2.02 TEMPORARY STORAGE BUILDINGS A. Furnish storage buildings of adequate size to store any materials or equipment delivered to the Site that might be affected by weather. 2.03 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Provide sanitary facilities at the Site from the commencement of the Project until Project conclusion. Maintain these facilities in a clean and sanitary condition at all times, and comply with the requirements of the local health authority. On large sites, provide portable toilets at such locations that no point in the Site shall be more than 600 feet from a toilet. B. Use these sanitary facilities. Do not use restrooms within existing or Owner-occupied buildings. 2.04 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Provide heating devices needed to protect buildings during construction. Provide fuel needed to operate the heating devices and attend the heating devices at all times they are in operation, including overnight operations. Temporary Facilities and Controls 015000-2 Fire Station No. 3; Project#21085 Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2.05 TEMPORARY UTILITIES A. Provide the temporary utilities for administration, construction, testing, disinfection, and start-up of the Work, including electrical power, water, and telephone. Pay all costs associated with furnishing temporary utilities. 1. Provide a source of temporary electrical power of adequate size for construction procedures. a. Use existing power systems where spare capacity is available. Provide temporary power connections that do not adversely affect the existing power supply. Submit connections to the OAR for approval prior to installation. b. Provide electrical pole and service connections that comply with Laws and Regulations and the requirements of the power company. 2. Provide telephone service to the Site and install telephones inside the Contractor's and the OPT's field office. 2.06 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION A. Provide temporary water. Potable water may be purchased from the Owner by obtaining a water meter from the Owner and transporting water from a water hydrant. Non-potable water may be used for hydraulic testing of non-potable basins or pipelines. Include the cost of water in the Contract Price. B. Contractor must comply with the City of Corpus Christi's Water Conservation and Drought Contingency Plan as amended (the "Plan"). This includes implementing water conservation measures established for changing conditions. The City Engineer will provide a copy of the Plan to Contractor at the pre-construction meeting. The Contractor will keep a copy of the Plan on the Site throughout construction. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 LOCATION OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Locate temporary facilities in areas approved by the OAR. Construct and install signs at locations approved by the OAR. Install informational signs so they are clearly visible. 3.02 PROJECT IDENTIFICATION AND SIGNS A. The Owner will furnish two Project signs to be installed by the Contractor. The signs must be installed before construction begins and will be maintained throughout the Project period by the Contractor. The locations of the signs will be determined in the field by the OAR. 3.03 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide temporary lighting inside buildings once buildings are weatherproof. B. Provide lighting that is adequate to perform Work within any space. Temporary lights may be removed once the permanent lighting is in service. Temporary Facilities and Controls 015000-3 Fire Station No. 3; Project#21085 Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Provide portable flood lights at any time that Work will be performed outside the structure at night. Provide adequate lighting at any location Work is being performed. 3.04 DRINKING WATER A. Provide all field offices with potable water. Provide a dispenser and cooling apparatus if bottled drinking water is provided. B. Pay for water services and maintain daily. 3.05 CONSTRUCTION FENCE A. Install and maintain a construction fence around the Site and off-site storage yards. Fence must be a minimum 6 feet high chain link construction unless shown otherwise. Provide gates with padlocks. 3.06 REMOVAL OF TEMPORARY FACILITIES A. Remove temporary buildings, sheds, and utilities at the conclusion of the Project and restore the Site to original condition or finished in accordance with the Drawings. B. Remove informational signs upon completion of construction. C. Remove Project identification signs, framing, supports, and foundations upon completion of the Project. 3.07 MAINTENANCE AND JANITORIAL SERVICE A. Provide janitorial service (sweeping/mopping) for the OPT's field office on a weekly basis or as requested. Empty trash receptacles daily or as needed. B. Maintain signs and supports in a neat, clean condition. Repair damage to structures, framings, or signs. C. Repair any damage to Work caused by placement or removal of temporary signage. D. Service, maintain, and replace, if necessary, the OPT's field office computer equipment throughout the Project as required by the OPT including replacement cartridges for all office equipment. END OF SECTION Temporary Facilities and Controls 015000-4 Fire Station No. 3; Project#21085 Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 01 57 00 TEMPORARY CONTROLS 1.00 GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to construct temporary facilities to provide and maintain control over environmental conditions at the Site. Remove temporary facilities when no longer needed. B. Construct temporary impounding works, channels, diversions, furnishing and operation of pumps, installing piping and fittings, and other construction for control of conditions at the Site. Remove temporary controls at the end of the Project. C. Provide a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) as required by Texas Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (TPDES) General Permit No. TXR150000 for stormwater discharges from construction activities as applicable to the nature and size of the Project. Comply with all requirements of the Texas Commission on Environmental Quality(TCEQ)and Laws and Regulations. File required legal notices and obtain required permits prior to beginning any construction activity. D. Provide labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals necessary to prevent stormwater pollution for the duration of the Project. Provide and maintain erosion and sediment control structures as required to preventive sediment and other pollutants from the Site from entering any stormwater system including open channels. Remove pollution control structures when no longer required to prevent stormwater pollution. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construct and maintain temporary controls with adequate workmanship using durable materials to provide effective environmental management systems meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents and Laws and Regulations. Use materials that require minimal maintenance to prevent disruption of construction activities while providing adequate protection of the environment. B. Periodically inspect systems to determine that they are meeting the requirements of the Contract Documents. 1.03 DOCUMENT SUBMITTAL A. Provide documents requiring approval by the OPT as Shop Drawings in accordance with Article 25 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. B. Provide copies of notices, records, and reports required by the Contract Documents or Laws and Regulations as Record Data in accordance with Article 26 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 1.04 STANDARDS A. Provide a SWPPP that complies with all requirements of TPDES General Permit No. TXR150000 and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. Temporary Controls 015700- 1 Fire Station No. 3; Project#21085 Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Perform Work to comply with the City of Corpus Christi Code of Ordinances, Part III, Chapter 14, Article X - titled "STORM WATER QUALITY MANAGEMENT PLANS" and any other applicable Laws and Regulations. 1.05 PERMITS A. As applicable, submit the following to the TCEQ and the Operator of any Municipal Separate Storm Sewer System (MS4) receiving stormwater discharges from the Site: 1. Notice of Intent (NOI) at least 48 hours prior to beginning construction activity. Construction activity may commence 24 hours after the submittal of an electronic NOI. 2. Notice of Change (NOC) letter when relevant facts or incorrect information was submitted in the NOI, or if relevant information in the NOI changes during the course of construction activity. 3. Notice of Termination (NOT) when the construction Project has been completed and stabilized. B. Post a copy of the NOI at the Site in a location where it is readily available for viewing by the general public and as required by Laws and Regulations prior to starting construction activities and maintain the posting until completion of the construction activities. C. Maintain copies of a schedule of major construction activities, inspection reports, and revision documentation with the SWPPP. 1.06 STORMWATER POLLUTION CONTROL A. Comply with the current requirements of TPDES General Permit No.TXR150000 as set forth by the TCEQ for the duration of the Project as applicable to the nature of the work and the total disturbed area: 1. Develop a SWPPP meeting all requirements of the TPDES General Permit. 2. Submit of a Notice of Intent to the TCEQ. 3. Develop and implement appropriate Best Management Practices as established by local agencies of jurisdiction. 4. Provide all monitoring and/or sampling required for reporting to the TCEQ. 5. Submit reports to the TCEQ as required as a condition of the TPDES General Permit. 6. Submit copies of the reports to the Designer as Record Data in accordance with Article 26 of SECTION 00 72 00 GENERAL CONDITIONS. 7. Retain copies of these documents at the Site at all times for review and inspection by the OPT or regulatory agencies. Post a copy of the permit as required by Laws and Regulations. 8. Assume sole responsibility for implementing, updating, and modifying the TPDES General Permit per Laws and Regulations for the SWPPP and Best Management Practices. B. Use forms required by the TCEQ to file the Notice of Intent. Submit the Notice of Intent at least 2 days prior to the start of construction. Develop the SWPPP prior to submitting the Temporary Controls 015700-2 Fire Station No. 3; Project#21085 Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Notice of Intent. Provide draft copies of the Notice of Intent,SWPPP,and any other pertinent TCEQ submittal documents to Owner for review prior to submittal to the TCEQ. C. Return any property disturbed by construction activities to either specified conditions or pre- construction conditions as set forth in the Contract Documents. Provide an overall erosion and sedimentation control system that will protect all undisturbed areas and soil stockpiles/spoil areas. Implement appropriate Best Management Practices and techniques to control erosion and sedimentation and maintain these practices and techniques in effective operating condition during construction. Permanently stabilize exposed soil and fill as soon as practical during the Work. D. Assume sole responsibility for the means, methods, techniques, sequences, and procedures for furnishing, installing, and maintaining erosion and sedimentation control structures and procedures and overall compliance with the TPDES General Permit. Modify the system as required to effectively control erosion and sediment. E. Retain copies of reports required by the TPDES General Permit for 3 years from date of Final Completion. 1.07 POLLUTION CONTROL A. Prevent the contamination of soil, water, or atmosphere by the discharge of noxious substances from construction operations. Provide adequate measures to prevent the creation of noxious air-borne pollutants. Prevent dispersal of pollutants into the atmosphere. Do not dump or otherwise discharge noxious or harmful fluids into drains or sewers, nor allow noxious liquids to contaminate public waterways in any manner. B. Provide equipment and personnel and perform emergency measures necessary to contain any spillage. 1. Contain chemicals in protective areas and do not dump on soil. Dispose of such materials at off-site locations in an acceptable manner. 2. Excavate contaminated soil and dispose at an off-site location if contamination of the soil does occur. Fill resulting excavations with suitable backfill and compact to the density of the surrounding undisturbed soil. 3. Provide documentation to the Owner which states the nature and strength of the contaminant, method of disposal, and the location of the disposal site. 4. Comply with Laws and Regulations regarding the disposal of pollutants. C. Groundwater or run-off water which has come into contact with noxious chemicals, sludge, or sludge-contaminated soil is considered contaminated. Contaminated water must not be allowed to enter streams or water courses, leave the Site in a non-contained form, or enter non-contaminated areas of the Site. 1. Pump contaminated water to holding ponds constructed by the Contractor for this purpose, or discharge to areas on the interior of the Site, as designated by the OAR. 2. Construct temporary earthen dikes or take other precautions and measures as required to contain the contaminated water and pump to a designated storage area. 3. Wash any equipment used for handling contaminated water or soil within contaminated areas three times with uncontaminated water prior to using such equipment in an Temporary Controls 015700-3 Fire Station No. 3; Project#21085 Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 uncontaminated area. Dispose of wash water used to wash such equipment as contaminated water. 1.08 EARTH CONTROL A. Remove excess soil, spoil materials, and other earth not required for backfill at the time of generation. Control stockpiled materials to eliminate interference with Contractor and Owner's operations. B. Dispose of excess earth off the Site. Provide written approval from the property owner for soils deposited on private property. Obtain approval of the Owner if this disposal impacts the use of Site or other easements. 1.09 OZONE ADVISORY DAYS A. Do not conduct roofing, priming, or hot-mix paving operations, except for repairs, on days the City Engineer has notified Contractor that an ozone advisory is in effect. An extension of time will be allowed for each day for which priming or hot mix paving was scheduled, crews were prepared to perform this Work and the City Engineer issued ozone alert prevents this Work. Contractor will be compensated at the unit price indicated in the Bid for each day for which an extension of time was granted due to an ozone alert. 1.10 MANAGEMENT OF WATER A. Manage water resulting from rains or ground water at the Site. Maintain trenches and excavations free of water at all times. B. Lower the water table in the construction area by acceptable means if necessary to maintain a dry and workable condition at all times. Provide drains, sumps, casings, well points, and other water control devices as necessary to remove excess water. C. Provide continuous operation of water management actions. Maintain standby equipment to provide proper and continuous operation for water management. D. Ensure that water drainage does not damage adjacent property. Divert water into the same natural watercourse in which its headwaters are located, or other natural stream or waterway as approved by the Owner. Assume responsibility for the discharge of water from the Site. E. Remove the temporary construction and restore the Site in a manner acceptable to the OAR and to match surrounding material at the conclusion of the Work. 1.11 DEWATERING A. This item is considered subsidiary for all dewatering methods other than "well pointing" to the appropriate bid items as described in the Bid Form where dewatering is needed to keep the excavation dry, as approved by the Designer, and shall include all costs to provide a dry foundation for the proposed improvements. B. Storm water that enters an excavation can be pumped out as long as care is taken to minimize solids and mud entering the pump suction and flow is pumped to a location that allows for sheet flow prior to entering a storm water drainage ditch or storm water inlet. Temporary Controls 015700-4 Fire Station No. 3; Project#21085 Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. An alternative to sheet flow is to pump storm water to an area where ponding occurs naturally without leaving the designated work area or by a manmade berm(s) prior to entering the storm water system. Sheet flow and ponding is to allow solids screening and/or settling prior to entering a storm water conduit or inlet. D. Storm water or groundwater shall not be discharged to private property without permission. It is the intent that Contractor discharges groundwater primarily into the existing storm water system, provided that the quality of groundwater is equal to or better than the receiving stream,the Corpus Christi Bay. E. Testing of groundwater quality is to be performed by the Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, prior to commencing discharge and shall be retested by the Contractor, at the Contractor's expense, a minimum of once a week. Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner on all testing. Tests will also be performed as each new area of construction is started. F. Another option for disposal of groundwater by Contractor would include pumping to the nearest wastewater system. If discharging to temporary holding tanks and trucking to a wastewater or wastewater plant, the costs for these operations shall be negotiated. Other groundwater disposal alternatives or solutions may be approved by the Designer on a case by case basis. G. Prior to pumping groundwater from a trench to the wastewater system the Contractor shall contact Wastewater Pre-treatment Coordinator at 826-1817 to obtain a "no cost" permit from the Owner's Waste Water Department. Contractor will pay for any water quality testing or water analysis cost required. The permit will require an estimate of groundwater flow. Groundwater flow can be estimated by boring a hole or excavating a short trench then record water level shortly after completion, allow to sit overnight, record water level again, pump hole or trench dry to a holding tank or vacuum truck then record how long it takes to fill to original level and overnight level. 1.12 DISPOSAL OF CONTAMINATED GROUNDWATER (NOT APPLICABLE) 1.13 DISPOSAL OF HIGHLY CHLORINATED WATER A. Dispose of water used for testing, disinfection, and line flushing. Comply with Owner's requirements and Laws and Regulation regarding the disposal of contaminated water, including water with levels of chlorine,which exceed the permissible limits for discharge into wetlands or environmentally sensitive areas. Comply with the requirements of all regulatory agencies in the disposal of all water used in the Project. Include a description and details for disposal of this water in a Plan of Action per SECTION 01 35 00 SPECIAL PROCEDURES. Do not use the Owner's wastewater system for disposal of contaminated water. 1.14 WINDSTORM CERTIFICATION A. All affected materials and installation shall comply with Texas Department of Insurance Requirements for windstorm resistant construction for design wind speed as required by the current version of the International Building Code (IBC). When applicable, Owner shall be responsible for contracting with a licensed structural engineer in the State of Texas to perform all inspections and provide documentation for windstorm certification to the Texas Board of Insurance. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing all necessary design/assembly documentation for all new windows, doors, louvers, etc. to the windstorm Temporary Controls 015700-5 Fire Station No. 3; Project#21085 Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 engineer/inspectors required to conform with the requirements of the Texas Department of Insurance. 2.00 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide materials that comply with Laws and Regulations. 3.00 EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTING, MAINTAINING AND REMOVING TEMPORARY CONTROLS A. Construct temporary controls in accordance with Laws and Regulations. B. Maintain controls in accordance with regulatory requirements where applicable, or in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. C. Remove temporary controls when no longer required, but before the Project is complete. Correct any damage or pollution that occurs as the result of removing controls while they are still required. END OF SECTION Temporary Controls 015700-6 Fire Station No. 3; Project#21085 Rev 8/2019 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 01 25 00 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Section-Allowances for products selected under an allowance. 2. Division 01 Section-Alternates for products selected under an alternate. 3. Division 01 Section - Product Requirements for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers. 4. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements and limitations for substitutions. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. 1. Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability of required warranty terms. a. Contractor's failure to consider and confinn lead time, or to order materials, in time to avoid construction schedule impact, does not constitute a substitution for cause. 2. Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles. 1. Substitution Request Foran: Use form acceptable to Architect. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as applicable: a. Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided, if applicable. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution. c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirements indicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified. d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 25 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 e. Samples,where applicable or requested. f. Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested. g. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and naives and addresses of architects and owners. h. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated. i. Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project. j. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery. k. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. 1. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with related materials, and is appropriate for applications indicated. in. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results. 3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later. a. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect's Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work. b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers. 1.06 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change, but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals. I. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 2500 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 b. Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified product provided Ifor achieving LEED prerequisites and credits]. c. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. d. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. e. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. f. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. g. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. i. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. B. Substitutions for Convenience: Not allowed. C. Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 30 days after the Notice of Award. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect, and most likely will be rejected without further review unless substantial benefit to the Owner is identified. I. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: a. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations. b. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. c. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated results. d. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. e. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule. f. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. g. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. h. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. i. Requested substitution provides specified warranty. j. If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible with other products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved. PART 3 -EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 01 25 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 2500 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 01 26 00 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Section- Unit Prices for administrative requirements for using unit prices. 2. Division 01 Section - Substitution Procedures for administrative procedures for handling requests for substitutions made after the Contract award. 1.03 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions." 1.04 PROPOSAL REQUESTS A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 20 days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs,with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. e. Quotation Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests. B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 26 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time. 6. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified. 7. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests. 1.05 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS A. Allowance Adjustment: See Division 01 Section "Allowances" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of allowances. B. Unit-Price Adjustment: See Division 01 Section "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured scope of unit-price work. 1.06 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701. 1.07 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 01 26 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 2600 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 01 29 00 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Section - Allowances for procedural requirements governing the handling and processing of allowances. 2. Division 01 Section - Unit Prices for administrative requirements governing the use of unit prices. 3. Division 01 Section- Contract Modification Procedures for administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract. 4. Division 01 Section - Construction Progress Documentation for administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment. 1.04 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following: a. Submittal schedule. b. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule. c. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. 2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. 3. Subschedules for Phased Work: Where the Work is separated into phases requiring separately phased payments, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with each phase of payment. 4. Subschedules for Separate Elements of Work: Where the Contractor's construction schedule defines separate elements of the Work, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with each element. 5. Subschedules for Separate Design Contracts: Where the Owner has retained design professionals under separate contracts who will each provide certification of payment requests,provide subschedules showing values coordinated with the scope of each design services contract as described in Division 01 Section- Summary. B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 2900-1 MAY 2, 2023 PAYMENT PROCEDURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values: a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal. 2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: a. Related Specification Section or Division. b. Description of the Work. c. Name of subcontractor. d. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. e. Name of supplier. f. Change Orders (numbers)that affect value. g. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one- hundredth percent, adjusted to total 100 percent. 1) Labor. 2) Materials. 3) Equipment. 4. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum. a. Include separate line items under principal subcontracts for Project closeout requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the Contract Sum and subcontract amount. 5. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 6. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored,but not yet installed. a. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, include evidence of insurance. 7. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work. 8. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities. 9. Purchase Contracts: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each purchase contract. Show line-item value of purchase contract. Indicate owner payments or deposits, if any, and balance to be paid by Contractor. 10. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item. a. Temporary facilities and other major overhead cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option. 11. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. 1.05 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 2900-2 MAY 2, 2023 PAYMENT PROCEDURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner. 1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements. B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement. C. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to Architect by the first week of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month. 1. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review by Architect. D. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment. E. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms provided by Owner for Applications for Payment. Sample copies are included in Project Manual. F. Application for Payment Forms: Use forms acceptable to Architect and Owner for Applications for Payment. Submit forms for approval with initial submittal of schedule of values. G. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action. 1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made. 2. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment. 3. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application. 4. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration. H. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. 1. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to payment, for stored materials. 2. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials. 3. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following: a. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applications for Payment. b. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment. c. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 2900-3 MAY 2, 2023 PAYMENT PROCEDURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 I.Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required. 1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application. 2. If approved by Owner, submit electronic transmission of Pay Application, in lieu of paper copies. J.Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner. K. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens from subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previous application. 1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item. 2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien. 5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms, acceptable to Owner. L. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. LEED submittal for project materials cost data. 4. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 5. Combined Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final) incorporating Work of multiple contracts,with indication of acceptance of schedule by each Contractor. 6. Products list(preliminary if not final). 7. LEED action plans. 8. Schedule of unit prices. 9. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 10. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 11. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 12. Copies of building permits. 13. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 14. Initial progress report. 15. Report of preconstruction conference. 16. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 17. Performance and payment bonds. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 2900-4 MAY 2, 2023 PAYMENT PROCEDURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 18. Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance. M. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. 1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum. 2. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work. N. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited,to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes,fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 9. Final liquidated damages settlement statement. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 01 29 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 2900-5 MAY 2, 2023 PAYMENT PROCEDURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 01 31 00 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. General coordination procedures. 2. Conservation. 3. Correlation of Documents. 4. Coordination drawings. 5. Requests for Information(RFIs). 6. Project Web site. 7. Project meetings. 8. Electrical Box. Walk. B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor. C. Related Requirements: I. Division 01 Section - Multiple Contract Summary for a description of the division of work among separate contracts and responsibility for coordination activities not in this Section. 2. Division 01 Section- Construction Progress Documentation for preparing and submitting Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Division 01 Section - Execution for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 4. Division 01 Section- Closeout Procedures for coordinating closeout of the Contract. 5. Division 01 Section - General Commissioning Requirements for coordinating the Work with Owner's Commissioning Authority. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products. 2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract. B. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home, office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 31 00-1 MAY 2, 2023 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 1. Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times. 1.05 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Coordination: Each contractor shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Each contractor shall coordinate its operations with operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation. 2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair. 3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. C. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings. 1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required. D. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include,but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems. E. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste. 1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner's property. 1.06 CORRELATION OF DOCUMENTS FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 31 00-2 MAY 2, 2023 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Any discrepancy in the documents shall be interpreted to include the most restrictive or costly solution. In case of discrepancy either in figures or Drawings or Specifications, the matter must be promptly submitted by the Contractor to the Architect, who will promptly make a determination in writing. Any adjustment by the Contractor without such a determination by the Architect will be at the Contractor's own risk and expense. The Architect will furnish, as necessary, additional detailed Drawings and information for clarification. B. If a document discrepancy is identified prior to bidding, the Architect is to be notified so a written clarification may be issued. C. Any survey drawing documents included herein are for convenience of the Contractor and Owner. The Architect assumes no responsibility as to their completeness or accuracy. D. Anything mentioned in the Specifications and not shown on the Drawings, or shown on the Drawings and not mentioned in the Specifications, is of like effect as if shown or mentioned in both. E. On any of the Drawings in which a portion of the work is detailed or drawn out and the remainder is shown in outline, the parts detailed or drawn out will apply also to all other like portions of the work. F. When the word "similar" appears on Drawings, it has a general meaning and must not be interpreted as meaning identical. All details must be worked out in relation to their location and connection with other parts of the work. G. Refer to Architectural Drawings for verification of locations, sizes and dimensions. 1.07 COORDINATION DRAWINGS A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity. 1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components. b. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to the coordination drawings by multiple contractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of conflicts between installed components before submitting for review. c. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil,mechanical, and electrical systems. d. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of components during the life of the installation. e. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls. f. Indicate required installation sequences. g. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 31 00-3 MAY 2, 2023 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows: 1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section drawings where required to adequately represent the Work. 2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures and other components. 3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment. 4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines. 5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items. 6. Refer to Division 23 Section- Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods and Division 26 Section - Basic Electrical Materials and Methods for specific Coordination Drawing requirements for mechanical and electrical installations. 7. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Work to be shown shall include, but not be limited to the following: a. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation,bracing, flanges, and support systems. b. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment. c. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork. 8. Electrical Work: Work to be shown shall include,but not be limited to the following: a. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger. b. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-alarm locations. c. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor control center locations. d. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines. 9. Fire-Protection System: Work to be shown shall include, but not be limited to the following: a. Locations of standpipes,mains piping,branch lines,pipe drops, and sprinkler heads. 10. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architect determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or arc otherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor,who shall make changes as directed and resubmit. 11. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to requirements in Division 01 Section- Submittal Procedures. 12. Staff Names: Submit a list of principal staff assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site with the bid proposal. Within 15 days of starting construction operations, identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home and office telephone numbers. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as standbys in the absence of individuals assigned to Project. 13. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each temporary telephone FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 31 00-4 MAY 2, 2023 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Coordination of Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following requirements: 1. File Preparation Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as original Drawings. 2. File Preparation Format: DWG Version 2020, operating in Microsoft Windows operating system. 3. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using Portable Data File(PDF)format. 4. Architect may consent to furnish Contractor with one set of digital data files of certain drawings for use in preparing coordination digital data files, subject to Contractor's acceptance of Architect's terms. Architect's consultants may or may not agree to provide digital data files, or may have additional terms for release of their files. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data files as they relate to Drawings. b. Digital Data Software Program: Drawings are available in AutoCad, Revit, and PDF file format, latest version. c. Contractor shall sign a data licensing agreement form in a format acceptable to Architect, as a pre-condition for release of Architect's files. 1.08 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFI'S) A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified. 1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response. 2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors. B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number,numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. a. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches. C. RFI Forms: AIA Document G716 or Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptable to Architect. 1. Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 31 00-5 MAY 2, 2023 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow seven (7) working days for Architect's response for each RFL RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. e. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. f. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. g. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information. 3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 01 Section- Contract Modification Procedures. a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response. E. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log monthly. Include the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. F. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response. 1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 2. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 1.09 PROJECT MEETINGS A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect,within four days of the meeting. B. Preconstruction Conference: Architect will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. 1. Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 31 00-6 MAY 2, 2023 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Lines of communications. f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. g. Procedures for RFIs. h. Procedures for testing and inspecting. i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. j. Distribution of the Contract Documents. k. Submittal procedures. 1. Preparation of record documents. in. Use of the premises. n. Work restrictions. o. Working hours. p. Owner's occupancy requirements. q. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. r. Procedures for moisture and mold control. s. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. t. Construction waste management and recycling. u. Parking availability. v. Office,work, and storage areas. w. Equipment deliveries and priorities. x. First aid. y. Security. z. Progress cleaning. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction. 1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect, and Owner's Commissioning Authority of scheduled meeting dates. 2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following: a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. c. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility requirements. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 31 00-7 MAY 2, 2023 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 k. Time schedules. 1. Weather limitations. in. Manufacturer's written instructions. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel. 3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information. 5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date. D. Project Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than [90] <Insert number>days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion. 1. Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout. 2. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the meeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the following: a. Preparation of record documents. b. Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspection for acceptance. c. Submittal of written warranties. d. Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data. e. Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts. f. Requirements for demonstration and training. g. Preparation of Contractor's punch list. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for final payment. i. Submittal procedures. j. Coordination of separate contracts. k. Owner's partial occupancy requirements. 1. Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment. in. Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls. 4. Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes. E. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings with Owner, Architect, and Contractor, at monthly intervals (OAC Meetings): FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 31 00-8 MAY 2, 2023 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests. 2. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 3. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. 1) Review schedule for next period. b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Resolution of BIM component conflicts. 4) Status of submittals. 5) Deliveries. 6) Off-site fabrication. 7) Access. 8) Site utilization. 9) Temporary facilities and controls. 10) Progress cleaning. 11) Quality and work standards. 12) Status of correction of deficient items. 13) Field observations. 14) Review recording of changes on record field set. 15) Safety 16) Work hours 17) Status of RFIs. 18) Status of proposal requests. 19) Pending changes. 20) Status of Change Orders. 21) Pending claims and disputes. 22) Documentation of information for payment requests. 4. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting. F. Coordination Meetings: Conduct Project coordination meetings at an as-needed basis intervals. Project coordination meetings are in addition to specific meetings held for other purposes, such as progress meetings and preinstallation conferences. I. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meetings shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 31 00-9 MAY 2, 2023 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of the previous coordination meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project. a. Combined Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last coordination meeting. Determine whether each contract is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to combined Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time. b. Schedule Updating: Revise combined Contractor's construction schedule after each coordination meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with report of each meeting. c. Review present and future needs of each contractor present, including the following: 1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Resolution of BIM component conflicts. 4) Status of submittals. 5) Deliveries. 6) Off-site fabrication. 7) Access. 8) Site utilization. 9) Temporary facilities and controls. 10) Work hours. 11) Hazards and risks. 12) Progress cleaning. 13) Quality and work standards. 14) Change Orders. 3. Reporting: Record meeting results and distribute copies to everyone in attendance and to others affected by decisions or actions resulting from each meeting. 1.10 ELECTRICAL BOXES COORDINATION REVIEW A. The purpose of the electrical box coordination review is to provide Owner's personnel a final review and confirmation of exact box locations to avoid conflicts with Owner's operational requirements, and conflicts with other wall mounted items whether or not such items are indicated in the Drawings and Specifications. After installing the large majority or all wall boxes in and on walls, and prior to installing conduit and wiring or interior wall board, Contractor shall review all wall box locations with Owner's designated personnel to confirm box locations and to allow to make corrections before such corrections become more difficult or costly. B. Schedule and conduct a coordination review of all floor boxes and all wall-mounted electrical boxes including electrical power, lighting switches and controls, HVAC and other equipment and systems wall mounted controls, and other electrical systems. Electrical systems is intended to be comprehensive of wall box locations for all electrical systems, which includes but is not limited to: Data, Phone, Audio-Visual, Access Control and Security, Door Bell / Buzzer, Electric generator monitor, apparatus bay door controls components, commercial range hood, radio, fire alarm, station alerting systems and other controls interfacing with the station alerting system. 1. The Owner's personnel shall include a designated representative and additional Owner's project management personnel as designated by the owner. The Architect's attendance is not required; however the Architect shall be notified of the scheduled review walk at or prior to the previous project review(OAC)meeting FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 31 00-10 MAY 2, 2023 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Owner and Contractor shall jointly review the location of each box. Contractor shall either note the use of each box or shall have personnel included in the review walk who are able to identify the use of each box upon Owner inquiry. Contractor shall have a set of current construction documents ready at hand for review. Any boxes not yet installed shall be visibly marked as to their locations and uses. 3. Contractor shall take notes and indicate on existing construction where possible (by tape marks or similar),the desired locations of boxes not yet installed or that may be requested to be relocated. 4. Contractor shall account in Owner's presence the number of boxes required to be relocated that are not due to Contractor error, and shall make necessary notes to ensure that all boxes indicated for relocation will be accurately relocated as required. a. Boxes that are found to be incorrectly located per Construction Documents shall be properly relocated without additional cost to Owner. b. Boxes that are found to be correctly located per Construction Documents,but that are determined not to be in the most preferred location, may be requested by Owner to be relocated at additional cost. c. Boxes that were not located or otherwise identified as to location at the coordination review for Owner's confirmation, and that are subsequently found to be installed in incorrect locations, shall be relocated as required by Owner at Contractor's expense including any cost for patching walls. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 -EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 01 3100 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 31 00-11 MAY 2, 2023 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 01 32 00 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Startup construction schedule. 2. Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Submittals schedule 4. Construction schedule updating reports. 5. Daily construction reports. 6. Material location reports. 7. Site condition reports. 8. As-Built documentation. 9. Special reports. 10. Construction photographs. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Section-Payment Procedures for submitting the Schedule of Values. 2. Division 01 Section - Project Management and Coordination for submitting and distributing meeting and conference minutes. 3. Division 01 Section- Submittal Procedures for submitting schedules and reports. 4. Division 01 Section - Quality Requirements for submitting a schedule of tests and inspections. 5. Division 01 Section - Closeout Procedures for submitting photographic negatives as Project Record Documents at Project closeout. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources. 1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times. 2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network. B. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for the completion of an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum unless otherwise approved by Architect. C. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project. D. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float. E. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 3200-1 MAY 2, 2023 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 F. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Float time [belongs to Owner] is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date. 2. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. 3. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date. G. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for the completion of an activity as scheduled. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Forinat for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format: 1. Working electronic copy of schedule file,where indicated. 2. PDF electronic file. B. Startup construction schedule. 1. Approval of cost-loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of schedule of values for cost-loaded activities. C. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities. D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period. 1. Submit a working electronic copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals. Include type of schedule (initial or updated) and date on label. E. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource loading, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days. I. Activity Report: List of all activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 2. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for all activities, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known. 3. Total Float Report: List of all activities sorted in ascending order of total float. 4. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from the Notice to Proceed until most recent Application for Payment. F. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment. G. Construction Photographs: Submit two prints of each photographic view with Application for Payment. I. Format: 4 x 6 smooth-surface prints on single-weight commercial-grade paper, enclosed in clear plastic sleeves that are punched for standard 3-ring binder. 2. Identification: On back of each print, provide an applied label or rubber-stamped impression with the following information: a. Name of Project. b. Name and address of photographer. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date photograph was taken. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 3200-2 MAY 2, 2023 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction. 3. Submit a complete set of photographs on CD as a Project Record Document. Identify date photographs were taken. H. Qualification Data: For firins and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format: 1. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category(action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. J.Daily Construction Reports: Submit at monthly intervals. K. Material Location Reports: Submit at monthly intervals. L. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions. M. Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and reporting, with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of Architect's request. B. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section - Project Management and Coordination. Review methods and procedures related to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule, including,but not limited to, the following: 1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports. 2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. 3. Discuss constraints, including interim milestones. 4. Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products. 5. Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts. 6. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 7. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 8. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting agencies. 9. Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures including commissioning activities. 10. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 11. Review procedures for updating schedule. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors. B. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, submittal schedule,progress reports,payment requests, and other required schedules and reports. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 3200-3 MAY 2, 2023 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence. C. Auxiliary Services: Cooperate with photographer and provide auxiliary services requested, including access to Project site and use of temporary facilities including temporary lighting. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. 1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with preliminary bar-chart schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. a. At Contractor's option, show submittals on the Preliminary Construction Schedule, instead of tabulating them separately. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2.02 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for Notice of Award the Notice to Proceed to date of final completion. 1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date,unless specifically authorized by Change Order. B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following: 1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect. 2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals,purchasing, fabrication, and delivery. 3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 01 Section - Submittal Procedures in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule. 4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing. 5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion. 6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion. C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected. 1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 3200-4 MAY 2, 2023 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 4. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 01 Section - Summary. Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 5. Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Division 01 Section - Summary. Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date. 6. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. c. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. f. Provisions for future construction. g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control. 7. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work, including,but not limited to,the following: a. Subcontract awards. b. Submittals. c. Purchases. d. Mockups. e. Fabrication. f. Sample testing. g. Deliveries. h. Installation. i. Tests and inspections. j. Adjusting. k. Curing. 8. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities to provide for the following: a. Structural completion. b. Temporary enclosure and space conditioning. c. Permanent space enclosure. d. Completion of mechanical installation. e. Completion of electrical installation. f. Substantial Completion. D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to,the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion. E. Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual costs. On the line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned and actual dates used for preparation of payment requests. 1. See Division 01 Section - Payment Procedures for cost reporting and payment procedures. F. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues: 1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Rejected or unretumed submittals. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 3200-5 MAY 2, 2023 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time. G. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is [14] <Insert number> or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crew sizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished. H. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules. 2.03 STARTUP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Bar-Chart Schedule: Submit startup, horizontal, bar-chart-type construction schedule within 10 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. 2.04 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART) A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-chart- type, Contractor's construction schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Base schedule on the startup construction schedule and additional information received since the start of Project. B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. 1. For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar. 2.05 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE) A. General: Prepare network diagrams using AON(activity-on-node) format. B. Startup Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. Outline significant construction activities for the first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities. C. CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work. 1. Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use no later than 60 days after date established for the Notice to Proceed. a. Failure to include any work item required for perforinance of this Contract shall not excuse Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless of Architect's approval of the schedule. 2. Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors' personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information. 3. Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress. Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates. 4. Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days and holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the Contract Time. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 3200-6 MAY 2, 2023 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 D. CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using the startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths. 1. Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities: a. Preparation and processing of submittals. b. Mobilization and demobilization. c. Purchase of materials. d. Delivery. e. Fabrication. f. Utility interruptions. g. Installation. h. Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities. i. Testing and commissioning. j. Punch list and final completion. k. Activities occurring following final completion. 2. Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates. Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates. 3. Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network. Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce the CPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time. 4. Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with most float near the edges. a. Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path. 5. Cost- and Resource-Loading of CPM Schedule: Assign cost to construction activities on the CPM schedule. Do not assign costs to submittal activities. Obtain Architect's approval prior to assigning costs to fabrication and delivery activities. Assign costs under main subcontracts for testing and commissioning activities, operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project record documents, and demonstration and training (if applicable),in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract Sum. a. Each activity cost shall reflect an appropriate value subject to approval by Architect. b. Total cost assigned to activities shall equal the total Contract Sum. E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule. F. Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating straight "early start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity. 2. Description of activity. 3. Main events of activity. 4. Immediate preceding and succeeding activities. 5. Early and late start dates. 6. Early and late finish dates. 7. Activity duration in workdays. 8. Total float or slack time. 9. Average size of workforce. 10. Dollar value of activity(coordinated with the schedule of values). FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 3200-7 MAY 2, 2023 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 G. Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing the following: 1. Identification of activities that have changed. 2. Changes in early and late start dates. 3. Changes in early and late finish dates. 4. Changes in activity durations in workdays. 5. Changes in the critical path. 6. Changes in total float or slack time. 7. Changes in the Contract Time. H. Value Summaries: Prepare two cumulative value lists, sorted by finish dates. 1. In first list, tabulate activity number, early finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value. 2. In second list, tabulate activity number, late finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value. 3. In subsequent issues of both lists, substitute actual finish dates for activities completed as of list date. 4. Prepare list for ease of comparison with payment requests; coordinate timing with progress meetings. a. In both value summary lists, tabulate "actual percent complete" and "cumulative value completed" with total at bottom. b. Submit value summary printouts one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 2.06 REPORTS A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site: 1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. List of separate contractors at Project site. 3. Approximate count of personnel at Project site. 4. Equipment at Project site. 5. Material deliveries. 6. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow. 7. Accidents. 8. Meetings and significant decisions. 9. Unusual events (see special reports). 10. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 11. Meter readings and similar recordings. 12. Emergency procedures. 13. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 14. Change Orders received and implemented. 15. Construction Change Directives received and implemented. 16. Services connected and disconnected. 17. Equipment or system tests and startups. 18. Partial completions and occupancies. 19. Substantial Completions authorized. B. Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals,prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materials delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plus items recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials or items of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. Indicate the following categories for stored materials: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 3200-8 MAY 2, 2023 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage. 2. Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed. 3. Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage. C. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents,prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 2.07 AS-BUILT DOCUMENTATION A. Contractor shall record changes to the Construction Documents where the constructed work deviates from that which is shown. This "As-Built" documentation shall be recorded in "Red" on a dedicated field set at the trailer. 2.08 SPECIAL REPORTS A. General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day(s) of an occurrence. Distribute copies of report to parties affected by the occurrence. A. Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site, whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events, persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similar pertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable. Events include,but are not limited to: 1. Safety/injury events. 2. Security/theft/law enforcement events. 3. Events involving news media coverage. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE A. Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using CPM scheduling. 1. In-House Option: Owner may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if Contractor employs skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques. Submit qualifications. 2. Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to Project progress, alleged delays, and time impact. B. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses,indicate final completion percentage for each activity. C. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility. 1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 3200-9 MAY 2, 2023 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. Format: digital,4 x 6 prints. B. Date Stamp: Unless otherwise indicated, date and time stamp each photograph as it is being taken so stamp is integral to photograph. C. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take twelve color photographs of Project site and surrounding properties from different vantage points, as directed by Architect. Show existing conditions adjacent to property. D. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take twelve color photographs monthly, coinciding with cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Photographer shall select vantage points to best show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. 1. Field Office Prints: Retain one set of prints of periodic photographs in field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify photographs the same as for those submitted to Architect. 2. Provide two (2) sets of photographs to Architect with each Application for Payment. E. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take twelve color photographs after date of Substantial Completion for submission as Project Record Documents. Architect will direct photographer for desired vantage points. END OF SECTION 01 32 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 3200-10 MAY 2, 2023 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 01 32 33 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Preconstruction photographs. 2. Periodic construction photographs. 3. Final completion construction photographs. 4. Preconstruction video recordings. 5. Periodic construction video recordings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Section-Unit Prices for procedures for unit prices for extra photographs. 2. Division 01 Section- Submittal Procedures for submitting photographic documentation. 3. Division 01 Section- Closeout Procedures for submitting photographic documentation as project record documents at Project closeout. 4. Division 01 Section - Demonstration and Training for submitting video recordings of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. 5. Division 02 Section - Structure Demolition for photographic documentation before building demolition operations commence. 6. Division 02 Section - Selective Structure Demolition for photographic documentation before selective demolition operations commence. 7. Division 31 Section - Site Clearing for photographic documentation before site clearing operations commence. 1.03 ALLOWANCES A. Costs: Photographic documentation services are included under the cash allowance for construction photographic services established in Division 01 Section-Allowances. 1.04 UNIT PRICES A. Basis for Bids: Base number of construction photographs on average of 20 photographs per week over the duration of Project. 1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Digital Photographs: Submit image files within three days of taking photographs. 1. Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 8 megapixels. 2. Format: Minimum 3200 by 2400 pixels, in unaltered original files, with same aspect ratio as the sensor, uncropped, date and time stamped, in folder named by date of photograph, accompanied by key plan file. 3. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file metadata tag: a. Name of Project. b. Name and contact information for photographer. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date photograph was taken. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 32 33-1 MAY 2, 2023 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction. g. Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan. B. Video Recordings: Submit video recordings within seven days of recording. 1. Submit video recordings by posting to Web-based photographic documentation service provider's Web site. 2. Identification: With each submittal,provide the following information: a. Name of Project. b. Name and address of photographer. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date video recording was recorded. f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction. g. Weather conditions at time of recording. 3. Transcript: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper, punched and bound in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered binders. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include a cover sheet with same label information as corresponding video recording. Include name of Project and date of video recording on each page. C. Web-Based Photographic Documentation: Submit time-lapse sequence video recordings simultaneously with recording. 1. Submit time-lapse sequence video recordings by posting to Web-based photographic documentation service provider's Web site. 2. Identification: For each recording,provide the following information: a. Name of Project. b. Name and contact information for photographer. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Date(s) and time(s)video recording was recorded. f. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevation or story of construction. g. Weather conditions at time of recording. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Photographer Qualifications: An individual who has been regularly engaged as a professional photographer of construction projects for not less than three years. B. Web-Based Photographic Documentation Service Provider: A firm specializing in providing photographic equipment, Web-based software, and related services for construction projects, with record of providing satisfactory services similar to those required for Project. 1.07 USAGE RIGHTS A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited reproduction of photographic documentation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA A. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size of 8 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 3200 by 2400 pixels. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 32 33-2 MAY 2, 2023 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Digital Video Recordings: Provide high-resolution, digital video disc in format acceptable to Architect. 2.02 WEB-BASED PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION A. Project Camera: Provide fixed exterior camera installation, mounted to provide unobstructed view of construction site from location approved by Architect. 1. Provide one fixed-location camera(s), with the following characteristics: a. Static view or remotely controllable view with mouse-click user navigation for horizontal pan, vertical tile, and optical zoom of 500 percent minimum. b. Capable of producing minimum 3.0 megapixel pictures. c. Provide power supply, active high-speed data connection to service provider's network, and static public IP address for each camera. B. Wireless Hand-Held Camera: Provide portable camera system capable of producing images complying with requirements in this Section, with wireless transmission to service provider's network enabling a live image stream viewable by multiple parties. 1. Provide battery charger, spare battery pack, base station hub, and base station connections in a number and distribution adequate to enable wireless camera operation throughout Project site. 2. Provide power supply, active high-speed data connection to service provider's network, and static public IP address at base station hub. Provide power supply, conduit, and data wiring between base station hub and base station connections. C. Web-Based Image Access: Password-protected access for Project team administered by Contractor,providing current image access and archival image access by date and time, with images downloadable to viewer's device. 1. Provide public viewer open access to most recent project camera image. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS A. Photographer: Engage a qualified photographer to take construction photographs. B. General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearly show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted. 1. Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic location. C. Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration,manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software. 1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image. 2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those submitted to Architect. D. Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take photographs of Project site and surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantage points, as directed by Architect. I. Flag construction limits before taking construction photographs. 2. Take 20 photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the Work. 3. Take 20 photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to accurately record physical conditions at start of construction. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 32 33-3 MAY 2, 2023 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 4. Take additional photographs as required to record settlement or cracking of adjacent structures,pavements, and improvements. E. Periodic Construction Photographs: Take 20 photographs monthly, coinciding with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. F. Architect-Directed Construction Photographs: From time to time, Architect will instruct photographer about number and frequency of photographs and general directions on vantage points. Select actual vantage points and take photographs to show the status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. G. Time-Lapse Sequence Construction Photographs: Take 20 photographs as indicated, to show status of construction and progress since last photographs were taken. 1. Frequency: Take photographs monthly, coinciding with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. 2. Vantage Points: Following suggestions by Architect and Contractor, photographer to select vantage points. During each of the following construction phases, take not less than two of the required shots from same vantage point each time to create a time-lapse sequence as follows: a. Commencement of the Work,through completion of subgrade construction. b. Above-grade structural framing. c. Exterior building enclosure. d. Interior Work,through date of Substantial Completion. H. Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take 20 color photographs after date of Substantial Completion for submission as project record documents. Architect will inform photographer of desired vantage points. 1. Do not include date stamp. I.Additional Photographs: Architect may request photographs in addition to periodic photographs specified. Additional photographs will be paid for by Change Order and are not included in the Contract Sum. 1. Three days'notice will be given,where feasible. 2. In emergency situations,take additional photographs within 24 hours of request. 3. Circumstances that could require additional photographs include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Special events planned at Project site. b. Immediate follow-up when on-site events result in construction damage or losses. c. Photographs to be taken at fabrication locations away from Project site. These photographs are not subject to unit prices or unit-cost allowances. d. Substantial Completion of a major phase or component of the Work. e. Extra record photographs at time of final acceptance. f. Owner's request for special publicity photographs. 3.02 CONSTRUCTION VIDEO RECORDINGS A. Video Recording Photographer: Engage a qualified videographer to record construction video recordings. B. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording unless otherwise necessary to show area of construction. Display continuous running time and date. At start of each video recording, record weather conditions from local newspaper or television and the actual temperature reading at Project site. C. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by video recording is recorded. Include description of items being viewed, recent events, and planned activities. At each change in FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 32 33-4 MAY 2, 2023 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 location, describe vantage point, location, direction(by compass point), and elevation or story of construction. 1. Confirm date and time at beginning and end of recording. 2. Begin each video recording with name of Project, Contractor's name, videographer's name, and Project location. D. Transcript: Provide a typewritten transcript of the narration. Display images and running time captured from video recording opposite the corresponding narration segment. E. Preconstruction Video Recording: Before starting construction, record video recording of Project site and surrounding properties from different vantage points, as directed by Architect. 1. Flag construction limits before recording construction video recordings. 2. Show existing conditions adjacent to Project site before starting the Work. 3. Show existing buildings either on or adjoining Project site to accurately record physical conditions at the start of construction. 4. Show protection efforts by Contractor. F. Periodic Construction Video Recordings: Record video recording monthly, coinciding with the cutoff date associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction and progress since last video recordings were recorded. Minimum recording time shall be [30] <Insert number>minutes(s). G. Time-Lapse Sequence Construction Video Recordings: Record video recording to show status of construction and progress. 1. Frequency: During each of the following construction phases, set up video recorder to automatically record one frame of video recording every five minutes, from same vantage point each time,to create a time-lapse sequence of 30 minutes in length as follows: a. Commencement of the Work,through completion of subgrade construction. b. Above-grade structural framing. c. Exterior building enclosure. 2. Timer: Provide timer to automatically start and stop video recorder so recording occurs only during daylight construction work hours. 3. Vantage Points: Following suggestions by Architect and Contractor, photographer shall select vantage points. 3.03 WEB-BASED CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION A. Live Streaming Construction Site Images: Provide Web-accessible image of current site image from fixed or viewer-controlled location camera(s), updated at 15 minute intervals during daytime operation. B. Time-Lapse Sequence Construction Site Recordings: Provide video recording from a fixed- location camera to show status of construction and progress. 1. Frequency: Record one frame of video recording every 15 minutes, from same vantage point each time, to create a time-lapse sequence of construction activities. 2. Timer: Provide timer to automatically start and stop video recorder so recording occurs only during daylight construction work hours. C. Maintain cameras and Web-based access in good working order according to Web-based construction photographic documentation service provider's written instructions until final completion. Provide for service of cameras and related networking devices and software. END OF SECTION 01 32 33 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 32 33-5 MAY 2, 2023 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 01 33 00 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings,Product Data, Samples, and other submittals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Section - Payment Procedures for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule of values. 2. Division 01 Section- Project Management and Coordination for submitting Coordination Drawings. 3. Division 01 Section- Construction Progress Documentation for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's construction schedule. 4. Division 01 Section - Operation and Maintenance Data for submitting operation and maintenance manuals. 5. Division 01 Section- Project Record Documents for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 6. Division 01 Section - Closeout Procedures for submitting warranties Project Record Documents and operation and maintenance manuals. 7. Division 01 Section - Demonstration and Training for submitting video recordings of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect's responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals." B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals." C. File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from another computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is a portion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are able to access files. D. Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used for representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layout document format. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 3300-1 MAY 2, 2023 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabrication. 3. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction schedule. a. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals. 4. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format: a. Scheduled date for first submittal. b. Specification Section number and title. c. Submittal category: Action; informational. d. Name of subcontractor. e. Description of the Work covered. f. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval. g. Scheduled date of fabrication. h. Scheduled dates for purchasing. i. Scheduled dates for installation. j. Activity or event number. 1.05 SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will may be provided by Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals. 1. Architect may furnish Contractor specifically requested digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use in preparing Shop Drawings. a. Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital data drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings. b. Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in AutoCad or Revit. c. Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of an Agreement acceptable to Architect, as a prerequisite for Architect providing electronic files. Architect's consultants may require additional agreements as condition for release of their electronic files. 1) Contractor shall bind all parties receiving or using these files to the same agreements. 2) [AIA Document C106,Digital Data Licensing Agreement] 3) <Insert conditions on which digital data drawing files will made available>. d. The following digital data files may be furnished for each appropriate discipline: 1) Site plan. 2) Architectural floor plans. 3) Drawings specifically requested by Contractor and agreed to be provided by the Architect and Architect's consultants. B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity. 2. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule. 3. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 3300-2 MAY 2, 2023 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 4. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received. C. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals. 1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. 2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal. 3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal. 4. Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal. 5. Concurrent Review of Submittals: Where two or more submittals require concurrent review, Architect retains the right to hold submittals until all submittals required for concurrent review are received. Architect will notify Contractor of necessity for concurrent submittals after a submittal is received in absence of other related submittals required for concurrent review. The date of receipt of the last submittal required for concurrent review will be considered the date for the start of Architect's review time. a. Examples of submittals for concurrent review include but are not limited to: Roofing and related flashing, accessories, and waterproofing installed by roofer; doors, door frames, and hardware submittals; and window or glazing systems and glass. 6. Submittals received after 2pm will be logged as the next day. D. Transmittals for Submittals: Assemble each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will return without review or discard any submittals received from sources other than the Contractor. Package each submittal individually. Do not group different specification sections together in one submittal. Provide transmittal form including the following information: 1. Submittal number unique identifier, including revision identifier, and with identification of submittal contents as follows: a. Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 061000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 061000.0l.A), or next sequential letter. b. Name of Specification Section, with brief description of submittal contents for sections requiring multiple submittals. 2. Overall sequence number each submittal starting with number 1 for the first submittal transmitted to the Architect, 2 for the second and so forth, indicating the chronological submission of each submittal. 3. Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings. Indicate Contractor's completed review prior to submitting to Architect. 4. Include the following information for processing and recording: a. Project name. b. Date of submission to Architect. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 3300-3 MAY 2, 2023 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 e. Additionally, indicate names of the following, as applicable, including indication of the entity that prepared each submittal: 1) Name of subcontractor. 2) Name of supplier/vendor. 3) Name of manufacturer. f. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. g. Location(s)where product is to be installed, as appropriate. It. Remarks and other necessary identification. i. Signature of transmitter. E. Paper Submittals: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification. 1. Number of Copies: Provide paper submittals with a minimum of 2 copies for submittals for Architect's review, with an additional copy for each of Architect's consultants that will also review each submittal. Architect, and each of Architect's consultants involved in review, will retain one copy each for their records, and return additional copies with annotations. a. Submit additional copies if Contractor requires more than one paper copy returned for Contractor's use. When shop drawings are required to be annotated by Contractor for as-built conditions and submitted as record drawings, include a copy dedicated for this purpose. b. Submit additional copies as required by each other concurrent reviewer, as applicable, in addition to specified number of copies to Architect. 2. Additional Paper Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal. F. Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed .pdf format file, or .pdf files within a .zip file where multiple files cannot be avoided, incorporating submittal requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form. Name file according to Submittal number and contents identification. 2. Architect, and Architect's consultants as applicable, will return electronic submittal with annotations containing their comments as applicable. 3. Architect retains right to require a paper submittal for shop drawings or other complex submittals that may require substantial notation to be marked on submittal sheets or drawings, at Architect's discretion. G. Options: Circle or highlight options to be provided on product data and specification sheets. Identify options requiring selection by Architect with red colored boxes or text. H. Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor's letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architect on previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal. I.Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 3300-4 MAY 2, 2023 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 4. The architect will review the first and a second revised submittal at no cost to the contractor. Additional submittals needed to obtain approval will required time reimbursement from the contractor at the Project Architect's standard rate for additional hours spent due to third and subsequent resubmittals of the same product or system. J.Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms. K. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Organization: All required submittals for a specification section must be transmitted together complete as one submittal transmittal. Partial transmittals will not be accepted for review. B. Contractor's responsibilities: 1. Contractor shall thoroughly check shop drawings, project data and samples for compliance with Contract Documents and list variances prior to submission. 2. Contractor represents by approving and submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data and samples that he has or will coordinate and verify dimensions, all materials, field measurements, field construction criteria, catalog numbers and similar data with requirements of work and of Contract Documents prior to submitting. 3. Submittals shall bear Contractor's stamp and initials certifying that they have been checked. Submittals without stamp& initials shall be returned un-reviewed. 4. Contractor's responsibility for deviations or errors and omissions in submittals is not relieved by Architect/ Engineer review of submittals, unless Architect/ Engineer gives specific written acceptance of specific deviations. 5. Do not proceed with purchasing, fabrication or delivery of work which requires submittals until return of submittals with Architect/Engineer stamp and initials or signature evidencing final review and approval of submittals. 6. Contractor is responsible for dimensions at job site, quantities, coordinating component parts and trades to effect unified construction and implement construction techniques, safety of incremental units, and satisfactory performance of work in accordance with Contract Documents. 7. Delays caused by failure of Contractor to check shop drawings and to stamp with this approval shall be Contractor's responsibility. 8. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of work to avoid delays. 9. No extension of time shall be allowed because of failure to properly coordinate and sequence submittals. C. General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections. 1. Submit electronic submittals via email or FTP as PDF format electronic files. a. Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronic Project record document file. 2. Action Submittals: Submit paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect and his consultants involved in review of each submittal will retain one copy each; and will annotate and return additional copies to Contractor. 3. Informational Submittals: Submit electronic copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 3300-5 MAY 2, 2023 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 4. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. a. Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates and certifications where indicated. b. Provide a notarized statement on original paper copy certificates and certifications where indicated. D. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment. 1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings,not as Product Data. 2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Standard color charts. d. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards. e. Testing by recognized testing agency. f. Application of testing agency labels and seals. g. Notation of coordination requirements. h. Availability and delivery time information. 4. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: a. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. b. Printed performance curves. c. Operational range diagrams. d. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings. 5. Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples. E. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 x 11 inches,but no larger than 30 x 42 inches . 3. Submit Shop Drawings in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. 1) Architect retains the right, at Architect's sole discretion, to require paper copies for submittals that may require extensive annotation on submittal sheets, and for oversize sheets or other conditions that may be difficult to review in electronic format. In each case, Architect and Architect's consultants involved in review will retain one copy each and return the remainder of copies with annotations. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 3300-6 MAY 2, 2023 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 F. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed. 1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package. 2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following: a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of applicable Specification Section. e. Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item. 3. For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identification information for record. 4. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality- control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set. a. Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specification Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use. b. Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, are the property of Contractor. 5. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available. a. Number of Samples: Unless otherwise indicated, submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return submittal with options selected. b. Selector sheets printed by Contractor, and website information, are not acceptable samples for selection. Submit Manufacturer's selector sheets and samples with accurate color and texture representation as applicable. 6. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection. a. Number of Samples: Unless otherwise indicated, submit two sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample sets; remainder will be returned. 1) Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to be demonstrated. 2) If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that show approximate limits of variations. G. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 3300-7 MAY 2, 2023 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space. 5. Submit product schedule in the following format: a. PDF electronic file. 2.02 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections. 1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. 3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section - Quality Requirements, B. Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section-Project Management and Coordination. C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section- Construction Progress Documentation. D. Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section-Payment Procedures. E. Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section-Quality Requirements. F. Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section- Closeout Procedures. G. Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Division 01 Section - Operation and Maintenance Data. H. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information of architects and owners, and other information specified. L Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification and Procedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified. J.Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. K. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required. L. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. M. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 3300-8 MAY 2, 2023 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 N. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. O. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. P. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the following information: 1. Name of evaluation organization. 2. Date of evaluation. 3. Time period when report is in effect. 4. Product and manufacturers'names. 5. Description of product. 6. Test procedures and results. 7. Limitations of use. Q. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents. R. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. S. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. T. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers. 2.03 DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. B. Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other required submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file copy of certificate, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional. 1. Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 3300-9 MAY 2, 2023 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW A. Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect. B. Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Division 01 Section- Closeout Procedures. C. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents. 3.02 ARCHITECT'S ACTION A. Action Submittals: 1. Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisions required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action, as follows: a. No exceptions taken. b. Make corrections as noted. c. Revise and resubmit. d. Rejected. e. Other. 2. Submittals or items stamped "No exceptions taken" indicates that Architect does not require resubmittal, and may include comments such as Architect's selection of options. 3. Submittals or items stamped "Make corrections as noted" indicates that Architect does not require resubmittal if the annotated corrections are made. However, items or submittals with this action noted may require resubmittal if: a. Contractor believes indicated corrections are not correct responses, and requires subsequent review. Resubmittal should indicate Contractor's reasons for concern and additional supporting information as applicable. b. Contractor believes a resubmittal is required to address or confirm additional questions through subsequent review, related to items not considered by the original submittal or that were brought to light by Architect's previous review comments. 4. Revise and resubmit items or submittals stamped "revise and resubmit" and "rejected", to address all comments requiring resubmittal and the reasons for rejection. 5. When "Other" action is indicated, Architect will provide additional comment describing the subsequent action required. 6. Submittals may be stamped with more than one action regarding portions of the submittal, and may note that only portions of the original submittal are required to be resubmitted. B. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party. C. Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals has received prior approval from Architect. D. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 3300-10 MAY 2, 2023 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. END OF SECTION 01 33 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 33 00-1 1 MAY 2, 2023 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 01 40 00 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control. B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 1. Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may also cover production of standard products. 2. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements. 3. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section-Allowances for testing and inspecting allowances. 2. Division 1 Section - Construction Progress Documentation for developing a schedule of required tests and inspections. 3. Division 1 Section - Cutting and Patching for repair and restoration of construction disturbed by testing and inspecting activities. 4. Divisions 2 -48 Sections for additional specific test and inspection requirements. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and ensure that proposed construction complies with requirements. B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections,procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that completed construction complies with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect. C. Mockups: Full-size, physical example assemblies to illustrate finishes and materials. Mockups are used to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination,testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. D. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency. E. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 40 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1.04 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a design professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products and systems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated. 1. If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perforin services or certification required, submit a written request for additional information to Architect. 1.05 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal,to Architect for a decision before proceeding. B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Copies of Regulations: Obtain copies of the following regulations and retain at Project site to be available for reference by parties who have a reasonable need: 1. Texas Accessibility Standards. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings,Product Data, and other required submittals, submit a statement, signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services. C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy of written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems: 1. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the designated seismic system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect. 2. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force- resisting system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect. D. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Description of test and inspection. 3. Identification of applicable standards. 4. Identification of test and inspection methods. 5. Number of tests and inspections required. 6. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 40 00 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 7. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service. E. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Ambient conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting. F. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases,jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. B. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project. C. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that is similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. F. Specialists: Certain sections of the Specifications require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated. 1. Requirement for specialists shall not supersede building codes and similar regulations governing the Work, nor interfere with local trade-union jurisdictional settlements and similar conventions. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 40 00 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated in accordance with ASTM E329, as documented by ASTM E 548, and that specializes in types of tests and inspections to be performed. 1. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. H. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: 1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed,unless otherwise indicated. 1.09 QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner Responsibilities: The Owner will hire and pay for tests and inspections, unless explicitly assigned to Contractor. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not. 1. Contractor shall engage and pay for Mechanical HVAC systems testing adjusting and balancing services. Refer to Division 23 for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing specifications. 2. Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services. 3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged by Owner and a description of the types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform. 4. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor. B. Contractor Responsibilities: Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services. a. Contractor shall not employ the same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner. 2. Notify testing agencies, Engineer & Architect at least 72 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed. 3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report,in duplicate, of each quality-control service. 4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility. 5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct. C. Special Tests and Inspections: Engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 40 00 - A MAY 2, 2023 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Testing agency will notify Architect, and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Testing agency will submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Testing agency will submit a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies. 4. Testing agency will interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. 5. Testing agency will retest and re-inspect corrected work. D. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing. E. Retesting/Reinspections: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspections, for construction that revised or replaced Work that failed to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents. F. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections. 1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services. 2. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements. 3. Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to recipients on the distribution list as established by Architect, or in the absence of that,through Contractor. 4. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase requirements of the Contract Documents or approve or accept any portion of the Work. 5. Do not perform any duties of Contractor. G. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following: 1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field-curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site. H. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting. 1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities. L Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality- control services required by the Contract Documents. Submit schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 40 00 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required. PART 2-PRODUCTS Not used. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EARTHWORK AND TESTING A. Inspect and approve subgrade prior to placing material. B. Perform relative compaction testing determined as outlined in ASTM D-1557. C. Perform moisture density test for each soil type determined as outlined in ASTM D-698. D. Field density tests shall be made at all fill areas at backfill and at existing subgrade; no less than two tests per lift. E. Filling and Backfilling: 1. The Contractor shall make available to the laboratory, adequate samples of each fill and backfill material from the proposed sources of supply not less than 10 days prior to the start of the work. 2. The Laboratory shall analyze the samples as required to provide a soil description and to determine compliance with the quality requirements. a. Test for liquid limit in accordance with ASTM D423. b. Test for plastic limit of soils and plasticity index of soils in accordance with ASTM D424. c. Test for moisture density relations of soil in accordance with ASTM D698. 3. Furnish a report for each individual test and state whether sample conforms to the specified requirements or reasons for nonconformance. 4. Inspect and approve subgrade prior to placement of fill material. 5. Make in-place compaction tests for moisture content, moisture-density relationship, and density of fill materials. 6. Perform not less than two compaction tests for each 3,000 SF of surface for each layer of fill under the building and not less than two compaction tests for each 5,000 SF of surface for each layer of fill or undisturbed earth on areas of site to be covered by paving walks or traffic approaches. 3.02 DRILLED PIER INSPECTION A. The Contractor shall pay for services by a qualified soils laboratory to provide inspection of pier drilling operations as follows: 1. Qualified soils personnel on site for pier drilling operation inspection. 2. The laboratory representative shall remain on the site until the Contractor can properly identify the bearing formations with accuracy and without assistance from the laboratory. 3. Should any unusual conditions be encountered during drilling operations, the laboratory shall be contacted immediately so that additional inspection can be provided. 4. The lab report shall: a. Identify each pier drilled; b. The date and time of drilling and concrete placement; c. Verify pier and bell diameters; d. Depth of pier from surface; e. Depth of bearing stratum from surface; f. Required and actual penetration; g. Depth from top of concrete; h. Condition at bottom; FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 40 00 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 i. Diameter and length of casing; J. Reinforcing used. B. The Contractor shall allow for a minimum of 2 days notice to be given the laboratory for the inspection work. 3.03 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Reinforcing Bar Inspection: Inspect reinforcing bar placement including size, number, configuration,locations, clearances, and related criteria. B. Reinforcing: Inspect all reinforcing steel prior to placement of concrete for compliance with the Contract Documents and the approved shop drawings. All instances of noncompliance shall be immediately brought to the attention of the Contractor. If uncorrected by the contractor, they shall be listed in the report. 1. Observe and report the following: number and size of bars; bending; splicing; clearance to forms; clearance between bars; rust, from oil or other contamination; fabrication and installation of embedded metal assemblies, including visual inspection of all welds. C. Inspector shall have a minimum of three years experience inspecting reinforcing steel in projects of similar size. 3.04 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Materials and operations shall be tested and inspected as work progresses. Failure to detect defective work shall not prevent rejection when defect is discovered, nor shall it obligate the Architect for final acceptance. B. Testing agencies shall meet the requirements of"Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete and Steel in Construction",ASTM E-329-70. C. The following review and testing services shall be performed by the designated laboratory: 1. The testing laboratory shall review the submitted mix designs for conformance with "Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete"ACI 318-95. 2. Secure composite samples in accordance with "Method of Sampling Fresh Concrete" ASTM C172, Current Edition. 3. Mold and cure five specimens from each sample in accordance with "Method of Making and Curing Concrete Compression and Flexural Specimens in the Field", ASTM C31, Current Edition. 4. Test specimens in accordance with "Method of Test for Compressive Strength of Molded Concrete Cylinders", ASTM C39, Current Edition. Two specimens shall be tested at 28 days for acceptance and two shall be tested at 7 days for information. The remaining cylinder shall be tested as directed. 5. Make one strength test for each 100 cubic yards or fraction thereof, of each mix design or concrete placed in any one day. 6. Determine slump for each strength test and whenever consistency of concrete appears to vary, using "Method of Test for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete" ASTM C143, Current Edition and air content of normal weight or light weight concrete sample for each strength test. 7. Determine temperature of concrete sample for each strength test. 8. Other testing services needed or required shall be paid by the Contractor. 9. Inspect and control the concrete mixing and loading of transit-mix trucks at the plant at the start of each day's mixing. Check mixing from mixers before mix begins to set and within time limits set forth in ASTM C94. Prevailing conditions shall be compared to the criteria indicated on the appropriate design mix (temperature, moisture, condition of aggregates, etc.). FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 40 00 -7 MAY 2, 2023 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 D. Any significant deviance shall be immediately reported to the Architect and the design I. laboratory and corresponding adjustments to the mix made before any materials are discharged. 2. Control the addition of water to the concrete at the job site and the length of time the concrete is allowed to remain in the truck during the pour. 3. Specimens for pumped concrete shall be taken at the discharge and of pumping equipment. 4. Certify each delivery ticket indicating class of concrete delivered(or poured), amount of water added and the time at which the cement and aggregate was discharged into the truck, and the time at which the concrete was discharged from the truck. E. Provide and maintain for the use of the testing agency adequate facilities for proper curing of concrete test specimens on the project site in accordance with "Methods of Making and Curing Concrete Compression and Flexural Specimens in the Field" ASTM C31, Current Edition.Evaluation and Acceptance: 1. The strength level of the concrete will be considered satisfactory if 90% of the strength test results and the averages of all sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified strength and no individual test result is below specified strength by more than 500 psi. 2. Completed concrete work will be accepted when the requirements of"Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings" ACI 301-84, Chapter 18 have been complied with. 3. In any case, where the average strength of the laboratory control cylinders, as shown by the tests for any portion of the structure, falls below the minimum ultimate compressive strength hereinbefore specified, the Architect shall have the right to require the Contractor to provide improved curing conditions of temperature and moisture to secure the required strength. Also, if the average strength of the laboratory control cylinders should fall so low as to cause the portions of the structure to which the respective unsatisfactory test reports apply to be in question by the Architect, the Contractor shall follow the core procedure set forth in the current edition of ASTM Designation C42. If the results of the core tests indicate, in the opinion of the Architect, that the strength of the structure is inadequate, such replacement, load testing, or strengthening as may be ordered by the Architect shall be provided by the Contractor without cost to the Owner. 4. The testing laboratory shall control field adjustments made to concrete mixes to compensate for field conditions and report same. 5. Wherever the testing laboratory recognizes a trend of decreasing quality in the concrete due to changing reasons, conditions of curing or other cause; this shall be brought to the attention of the Architect, along with a recommendation for corrective action to be taken before the materials fall below the requirements of these Specifications. F. Reports: In addition, the testing laboratory shall make one copy of the reports to the concrete supplier. 3.05 LIGHTWEIGHT STRUCTURAL CONCRETE A. Unit weight of lightweight structural concrete: 1. Make two test specimens for each 50 cubic yards of lightweight concrete placed. 2. For each test specimen, determine freshly mixed unit weight and air dry unit weight of lightweight concrete. 3. Test in accordance with ASTM C567. 3.06 MASONRY MORTAR AND GROUTS A. Check mix designs for mortar and grouts. Make tests of mortar and grout to approval for use at project site. Perform four (4) tests in accordance with ASTM C39 for each twenty-five (25) cubic yards of mortar. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 4000 - 8 MAY 2, 2023 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Submit an additional copy of the laboratory reports to the steel supplier. C. Compressive Test for Grout: 1. Secure composite samples of grout at the job site in accordance with ASTM C172. 2. Mold and cure three, 3" diameter by 6" tall cylinders form each sample in accordance with ASTM C31. Supervise the curing protection provided by the contractor for the test specimens in the field and transportation to the laboratory. The test cylinders shall be stored in the field 24 hours and then moved to the laboratory and cured in accordance with ASTM C31. 3. Test specimens in accordance with ASTM C39. Two test specimens shall be tested at 28 days for acceptance and one shall be tested at seven days for information. 4. Make one strength test(three cylinders) for each five cubic yards of grout placed,but not less than one strength test for each 5000 square feet of wall area. 3.07 INSPECTING STRUCTURAL STEEL A. Field Inspection I. Proper erection of all pieces. 2. Proper installation of all bolts, including checking the calibration of impact wrenches used with high strength bolts. 3. Plumbness of structure and proper bracing. 4. Ultrasonic inspection of all full penetration welds. 5. Record and measure camber of beams upon arrival and before erection with compliance with the specified camber. Measure beam lying flat with web in the horizontal position. Members outside the specified camber tolerance shall be returned to the shop. B. Qualification of Welders: Before assigning any welder to work covered by this section of the Specifications, the fabricator shall provide the Testing Laboratory with certification that each of the the welders to be employed on the project has passed qualification tests within the last year using procedures covered in the American Welding Society Standard D1.0-63. C. The contractor shall be responsible for furnishing fabrication and erection inspection and testing of all welds in accordance with AWS D1.1, Chapter 6. Submit records of inspections and tests to the Owner's testing laboratory for their review. D. Inspection of shop and field welding shall be "verification inspection" in accordance with Section 6 of AWS D1.1 and as follows: 1. Visually inspect the welding of all shop fabricated members and note the location of all cover plates, connectors, bearing stiffeners, splices, and fillet welds for proper return around ends and check for seams, folds, and delamination. 2. Ultrasonically test all full penetration welds in accordance with ASTM E164. 3. Root passes shall be thoroughly be inspected for cracks. All cracks shall be gouged out and rewelded to two inches beyond each end of the crack. 4. Mark all welds requiring repairs and make reinspections. 5. The Testing Laboratory inspector shall advise the Owner and Architect of any shop and/or field conditions which, in his opinion, may require further tests and examination. Such further tests shall be performed as authorized by the Owner and Architect. 6. The Owner reserves the right to use ultrasonic or radiographic inspection to verify the adequacy of all welds. Testing procedures and acceptance criteria shall be as specified in AWS D1.1. E. Inspection of bolted construction shall be in accordance with AISC "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings" and as follows: 1. All bolts shall be visually inspected to ensure that the plies have been brought into "snug" contact. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 40 00 - 9 MAY 2, 2023 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. High strength bolts shall be inspected in accordance with Section 9 of the AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts." Bolts are to be fully torqued as required by the AISC specification. 3. For all high strength bolts, the inspector shall observe the required jobsite testing and calibration, and shall confirm that the procedure to be used provides the required tension. 3.08 INSPECTION OF OPEN WEB STEEL JOIST A. Inspect all joists upon arrival to the jobsite for conformance with the specified fabrication requirements. Check welded connections between web and chords, splices, and straightness of members. B. Inspect installation of joists at the jobsite. Check connections to supporting members, chord extensions, number of rows of bridging, and bridging connections for conformance to the Contract Documents and the shop drawings. C. Check welder's certificates for field welding procedures. 3.09 INSPECTION OF METAL DECK A. Field Inspection shall consist of the following: 1. Check types, gauges and finishes for conformance with the Contract Documents and shop drawings. 2. Examination of proper erection of all metal deck, fastenings, reinforcing of holes, miscellaneous deck supports,hanger tabs, shear studs, and deck closures. 3. Check welder's certificates. 4. Visual inspection of all welds. 3.10 INSPECTION OF COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING A. Field Inspection shall consist of the following: 1. Check types, gauges and finishes for conformance with the Contract Documents and shop drawings. 2. Examination of proper erection of all framing, fastenings, connections and miscellaneous supports. 3. Check welder's certificates. 4. Visual inspection of all field and shop welds. 3.11 REPAIR AND PROTECTION A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes. 1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections of these Specifications. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas in a manner that eliminates evidence of patching. 2. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for Division 1 Section - Cutting and Patching. B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities. C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services. END OF SECTION 01 40 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 40 00 - 10 MAY 2, 2023 QUALITY REQUIREMENTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 01 42 00 - REFERENCE STANDARDS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract. B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract. C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and"permitted"have the same meaning as "directed." D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and"specified" have the same meaning as "indicated." E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work. F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations. G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations. H. "Provide": Furnish and install,complete and ready for the intended use. I."Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built. Refer to Division 01 "Work Restrictions". 1.03 INDUSTRY STANDARDS A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference. B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated. C. Conflicting Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different,but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. 1. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 42 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 REFERENCE STANDARDS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding. D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents. 1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source. 1.04 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. 1. Where abbreviations and acronyms used in Specifications or other Contract Documents are not listed, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books' "National Trade&Professional Associations of the United States." AABC Associated Air Balance Council (202)737-0202 www.aabc.com AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association (847)303-5664 www.aamanet.org AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation (202)624-5800 Officials www.transportation.org AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (919)549-8141 www.aatcc.org ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association (202)367-1155 www.americanbearings.org ACI American Concrete Institute (248) 848-3700 (Formerly: ACT International) www.concrete.org ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association (972)506-7216 www.concrete-pipe.org AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies,Inc. (The) (205)257-2530 www.aeic.org AF&PA American Forest&Paper Association (800) 878-8878 www.afandpa.org (202)463-2700 AGA American Gas Association (202) 824-7000 www.aga.org AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers (202) 872-5955 www.aham.org AHRI Air-Conditioning,Heating,and Refrigeration Institute(The) (703)524-8800 www.ahrinet.org AI Asphalt Institute (859)288-4960 www.asphaltinstitute.org AIA American Institute of Architects(The) (800)242-3837 www.aia.org (202)626-7300 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction (800)644-2400 www.aisc.org (312)670-2400 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute (202)452-7100 www.steel.org AITC American Institute of Timber Construction (303)792-9559 www.aitc-glulam.org FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 42 00 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 REFERENCE STANDARDS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International,Inc. (847)394-0150 www.amca.org ANSI American National Standards Institute (202)293-8020 www.ansi.org AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts,Inc. (607)256-3313 www.aosaseed.com APA APA-The Engineered Wood Association (253)565-6600 www.apawood.org APA Architectural Precast Association (239)454-6989 www.archprecast.org API American Petroleum Institute (202)682-8000 www.api.org ARI Air-Conditioning&Refrigeration Institute (See AHRI) ARI American Refrigeration Institute (See AHRI) ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association (202)207-0917 www.asphaltroofing.org ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers (800)548-2723 www.asce.org (703)295-6300 ASCE/SEI American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute (See ASCE) ASHRAE American Society of Heating,Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning (800)527-4723 Engineers www.ashrae.org (404)636-8400 ASME ASME International (800) 843-2763 (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) (973) 882-1170 www.asme.org ASSE American Society of Safety Engineers(The) (847)699-2929 www.asse.org ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering (440) 835-3040 www.asse-plumbing.org ASTM ASTM International (610) 832-9500 (American Society for Testing and Materials International) www.asti,n.org ATIS Alliance for Telecommunications Industry Solutions (202)628-6380 www.atis.org AWEA American Wind Energy Association (202)383-2500 www.awea.org AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute (571)323-3636 www.awinet.org AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada (403)453-7387 www.awmac.com AWPA American Wood Protection Association (205)733-4077 (Formerly: American Wood-Preservers'Association) www.awpa.com AWS American Welding Society (800)443-9353 www.aws.org (305)443-9353 AWWA American Water Works Association (800)926-7337 www.awwa.org (303)794-7711 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (212)297-2122 www.buildershardware.com BIA Brick Industry Association(The) (703)620-0010 www.gobrick.com BICSI BICSI,Inc. (800)242-7405 www.bicsi.org (813)979-1991 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 42 00 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 REFERENCE STANDARDS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 BIFMA BIFMA International (616)285-3963 (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association) www.bifma.com BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee (866)342-4772 www.bissc.org BWF Badminton World Federation 60 3 9283 7155 (Formerly: International Badminton Federation) www.bwfbadminton.org CDA Copper Development Association (800)232-3282 www.copper.org (212)251-7200 CEA Consumer Electronics Association (866) 858-1555 www.ce.org (703)907-7600 CFFA Chemical Fabrics&Film Association,Inc. (216)241-7333 www.chemicalfabricsandfflm.com CFSEI Cold-Formed Steel Engineers Institute (866)465-4732 www.cfsei.org (202)263-4488 CGA Compressed Gas Association (703)788-2700 xvww.cganet.com CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association (888) 881-2462 www.cellulose.org (937)222-2462 CISCA Ceilings&Interior Systems Construction Association (630)584-1919 www.cisca.org CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (404)622-0073 www.cispi.org CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute (301)596-2583 www.chaitilinkinfo.org CPA Composite Panel Association (703)724-1128 www.pbmd£com CRI Carpet and Rug Institute(The) (706)278-3176 www.carpet-rug.org CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council (866)465-2523 www.coolroofs.org (510)485-7175 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (800)328-6306 www.crsi.org (847)517-1200 CSA CSA International (866)797-4272 (Formerly: IAS-International Approval Services) (416)747-4000 www.csa-intemational.org CSI Construction Specifications Institute(The) (800)689-2900 www.esinet.org (703)684-0300 CSSB Cedar Shake& Shingle Bureau (604) 820-7700 www.cedarbureau.org CTT Cooling Technology Institute (281)583-4087 (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) www.cti.org CWC Composite Wood Council (See CPA) DASMA Door and Access Systems Manufacturers Association (216)241-7333 www.dasma.com DHI Door and Hardware Institute (703)222-2010 -,vww.dhi.org ECA Electronic Components Association (703)907-8024 w\vw.ec-central.org ECAMA Electronic Components Assemblies&Materials Association (See ECA) ETA Electronic Industries Alliance (See TIA) FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 42 00 - A MAY 2, 2023 REFERENCE STANDARDS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association (800)294-3462 www.eima.com (703)538-1616 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association,Inc. (914)332-0040 www.ejma.org ESD ESD Association (315)339-6937 (Electrostatic Discharge Association) www.esda.org ESTA Entertainment Services and Technology Association (See PLASA) EVO Efficiency Valuation Organization (415)367-3643 www.evo-world.org 44 20 88 167 857 FM Approvals FM Approvals LLC (781)762-4300 www.fmglobal.com FM Global FM Global (401)275-3000 (Formerly: FMG-FM Global) www.fmglobal.com FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal&Air Conditioning Contractors (407)671-3772 Association,Inc. www.floridaroo£com FSA Fluid Sealing Association (610)971-4850 www.fluidsealing.com FSC Forest Stewardship Council U.S. (612)353-4511 www.fscus.org GA Gypsum Association (301)277-8686 www.gypsum.org GANA Glass Association of North America (785)271-0208 www.glasswebsite.com GS Green Seal (202) 872-6400 www.greenseal.org HI Hydraulic Institute (973)267-9700 www.pumps.org HI/GAMA Hydronics Institute/Gas Appliance Manufacturers Association (See AHRI) HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (See NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood&Veneer Association (703)435-2900 www.hpva.org HPW H.P.White Laboratory,Inc. (410) 838-6550 www.hpwhite.com IAPSC International Association of Professional Security Consultants (415)536-0288 www.iapse.org TAS International Approval Services (See CSA) TCBO International Conference of Building Officials (See ICC) ICC International Code Council (888)422-7233 www.iccsafe.org (202)370-1800 ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association,Inc. (770) 830-0369 -,vww.icea.net ICPA International Cast Polymer Alliance (703)525-0511 -,vww.icpa-hq.org ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute,Inc. (847) 827-0830 www.icri.org IEC International Electrotechnical Commission 41 22 919 02 11 www.iec.ch IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers,Inc. (The) (212)419-7900 www.ieee.org FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 42 00 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 REFERENCE STANDARDS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 IES Illuminating Engineering Society (212)248-5000 (Formerly: Illuminating Engineering Society of North America) www.ies.org IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (See IES) IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology (847)981-0100 www.iest.org IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance (613)233-1510 www.igmaonline.org IGSHPA International Ground Source Heat Pump Association (405)744-5175 www.igshpa.okstate.edu Intertek Intertek Group (800)967-5352 (Formerly: ETL SEMCO;Intertek Testing Service NA) www.intertek.com ISA International Society of Automation(The) (919)549-8411 (Formerly: Instrumentation, Systems,and Automation Society) -,vww.isa.org ISAS Instrumentation, Systems, and Automation Society(The) (See ISA) ISFA International Surface Fabricators Association (877)464-7732 (Formerly: International Solid Surface Fabricators Association) (801)341-7360 www.isfanow.org ISO International Organization for Standardization 4122 749 01 11 www.iso.org ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association (See ISFA) ITU International Telecommunication Union 4122 730 51 11 www.itu.int/home KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association (703)264-1690 www.kcma.org LMA Laminating Materials Association (See CPA) LPI Lightning Protection Institute (800)488-6864 www.lightning.org MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association (216)241-7333 www.mbma.com MCA Metal Construction Association (847)375-4718 www.metalconstruction.org MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association,Inc. (888)480-9138 www.mapletloor.org MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association,Inc. (312)644-6610 www.metaltramingmfg.org MHIA Material Handling Industry of America (800)345-1815 www.mhia.org (704)676-1190 MIA Marble Institute of America (440)250-9222 www.marble-institute.com MMPA Moulding&Millwork Producers Association (800)550-7889 (Formerly: Wood Moulding&Millwork Producers Association) (530)661-9591 Nvww.wmmpa.com MPI Master Painters Institute (888)674-8937 www.paintinfo.com (604)298-7578 MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings (703)281-6613 Industry Inc. www.mss-hq.org NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (630)942-6591 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 42 00 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 REFERENCE STANDARDS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 www.naamm.org NACE NACE International (800)797-6223 (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) (281)228-6200 www.nace.org NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association (202)737-2926 www.nadca.com NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association (703)684-0084 www.naima.org NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association,Inc. (800)557-2848 www.nbgga.com NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association(The) (317)917-6222 www.ncaa.org NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association (703)713-1900 www.ncma.org NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau (301)977-3698 -,vww.nebb.org NECA National Electrical Contractors Association (301)657-3110 Nvww.necanet.org NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association (207) 829-6901 www.nelma.org NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association (703) 841-3200 www.nema.org NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association (888)300-6382 www.netaworld.org (269)488-6382 NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations (317)972-6900 Nvww.nfhs.org NFPA NFPA (800)344-3555 (National Fire Protection Association) (617)770-3000 www.nfpa.org NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council (301)589-1776 www.nfrc.org NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association (800)933-0318 www.nhia.com (901)377-1818 NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority (604)524-2393 www.nlga.org NOFMA National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association (See NWFA) NOMMA National Ornamental&Miscellaneous Metals Association (888)516-8585 www.nomma.org NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association (800)323-9545 www.nrca.net (847)299-9070 NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association (888) 846-7622 www.nrmca.org (301)587-1400 NSF NSF International (800)673-6275 (National Sanitation Foundation International) (734)769-8010 www.nsf.org NSPE National Society of Professional Engineers (703)684-2800 Nvww.nspe.org NSSGA National Stone, Sand&Gravel Association (800)342-1415 www.nssga.org (703)525-8788 NTMA National Terrazzo&Mosaic Association,Inc. (The) (800)323-9736 www.ntma.com NWFA National Wood Flooring Association (800)422-4556 www.nwfa.org (636)519-9663 PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute (312)786-0300 www.pci.org PDI Plumbing&Drainage Institute (800)589-8956 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 A200 -7 MAY 2, 2023 REFERENCE STANDARDS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 www.pdionline.org (978)557-0720 PLASA PLASA (212)244-1505 (Formerly: ESTA-Entertainment Services and Technology Association) www.plasa.org RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections www.boltcouncil.org RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute (706) 882-3833 www.rfci.com RIS Redwood Inspection Service (925)935-1499 www.redwoodinspection.com SAE SAE International (877)606-7323 (Society of Automotive Engineers) (724)776-4841 www.sae.org SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International,Inc. (See ICC) SCTE Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers (800)542-5040 www.scte.org (610)363-6888 SDI Steel Deck Institute (847)458-4647 xvww.sdi.org SDI Steel Door Institute (440) 899-0010 www.steeldoor.org SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association (877)294-5424 www.sefalabs.com (516)294-5424 SEl/ASCE Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers (See ASCE) SIA Security Industry Association (866) 817-8888 www.siaonline.org (703)683-2075 SJI Steel Joist Institute (843)293-1995 www.steeljoist.org SMA Screen Manufacturers Association (773)636-0672 www.smainfo.org SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'National Association (703) 803-2980 www.smacna.org SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers (914)761-1100 www.smpte.org SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (800)523-6154 www.sprayfoam.org SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (850)434-2611 www.spib.org SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry (781)647-7026 www.spri.org SRCC Solar Rating and Certification Corporation (321)638-1537 www.solar-rating.org SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America (800)982-0355 www.ssina.com (202)342-8630 SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings (877)281-7772 www.sspc.org (412)281-2331 STI Steel Tank Institute (847)438-8265 -,vww.steeltank.coni SWI Steel Window Institute (216)241-7333 www.steelwindows.com SWPA Submersible Wastewater Pump Association (847)681-1868 www.swpa.org TCA Tilt-Up Concrete Association (3l 9) 895-6911 www.tilt-up.org FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 42 00 - 8 MAY 2, 2023 REFERENCE STANDARDS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 TCA Tile Council of America(See TCNA) TCNA Tile Council of North America,Inc. (864)646-8453 (Formerly: Tile Council of America) www.tilcusa.com TEMA Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association,Inc. (914)332-0040 www.terra.org TIA Telecommunications Industry Association (703)907-7700 (Formerly: TIA/EIA-Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance) www.tiaontine.org TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance (See TIA) TMS The Masonry Society (303)939-9700 www.masonrysociety.org TPI Truss Plate Institute (703)683-1010 www.tpinst.org TPI Turfgrass Producers International (800)405-8873 wwwAiAgrasssod.org (847)649-5555 TRI Tile Roofing Institute (312)670-4177 www.tileroofrng.org UBC Uniform Building Code (See ICC) UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (877) 854-3577 www.ul.com UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association (972)243-3902 www.uni-bell.org USAV USA Volleyball (888)786-5539 www.usavolleyball.org (719)228-6800 USGBC U.S. Green Building Council (800)795-1747 www.usgbc.org USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology,Inc. (800)938-7488 www.usitt.org (315)463-6463 WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association (800)424-2869 www.wastec.org (202)244-4700 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau (800)283-1486 www.welib.org (503)639-0651 WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (212)297-2122 www.wcmanet.org WDMA Window&Door Manufacturers Association (800)223-2301 www.wdma.com (312)321-6802 WT Woodwork Institute (916)372-9943 (Formerly: WIC-Woodwork Institute of California) www.wicnet.org WMMPA Wood Moulding&Millwork Producers Association (See MMPA) WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association (800)725-0333 www.wsrca.com (650)938-5441 WWPA Western Wood Products Association (503)224-3930 -vvww.wwpa.org B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. DIN Demsches Institut fdr Normung e.V. 49 30 2601-0 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 42 00 - 9 MAY 2, 2023 REFERENCE STANDARDS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 www.din.de IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials (909)472-4100 www.iapmo.org ICC International Code Council (888)422-7233 www.iccsafe.org ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service,LLC (800)423-6587 www.icc-es.org (562)699-0543 C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. COE Army Corps of Engineers (202)761-0011 www.usace.army.mil CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission (800)638-2772 www.cpsc.gov (301)504-7923 DOC Department of Commerce (301)975-4040 National Institute of Standards and Technology www.nist.gov DOD Department of Defense (215)697-2664 http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil DOE Department of Energy (202)586-9220 www.energy.gov EPA Environmental Protection Agency (202)272-0167 www.epa.gov FAA Federal Aviation Administration (866) 835-5322 www.faa.gov FG Federal Government Publications (202)512-1800 www.gpo.gov GSA General Sei vices Administration (800)488-3111 www.gsa.gov (202)619-8925 HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development (202)708-1112 www.hud.gov LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory (510)486-4000 Environmental Energy Technologies Division http://eetd.lbl.gov OSHA Occupational Safety&Health Administration (800)321-6742 www.osha.gov TRB Transportation Research Board (202)334-2934 National Cooperative Highway Research Program www.trb.org USDA Department of Agriculture (202)720-2791 Rural Utilities Service www.usda.gov USDJ Department of Justice (202)307-0703 Office of Justice Programs National Institute of Justice 'kv-,vw.ojp.usdoj.gov USP U.S.Pharmacopeia (800)227-8772 www.usp.org (301) 881-0666 USPS United States Postal Service (202)268-2000 www.usps.com D. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 42 00 - 10 MAY 2, 2023 REFERENCE STANDARDS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. ABA/ Architectural Barriers Act (800) 872-2253 ADA/ Americans with Disabilities Act ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines Administered by the United States Access Board http://www.access-board.gov/ CFR Code of Federal Regulations (866)512-1800 Available from Government Printing Office (202)512-1800 www.gpo.gov/fdsys DOD Department of Defense (215)697-2664 Military Specifications and Standards Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification (215)697-2664 Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point http://dodssp.daps.dla.mil Available from Defense Standardization Program www.dsp.dla.mil Available from General Services Administration (800)488-3111 www.gsa.gov (202)619-8925 Available from National Institute of Building Sciences/Whole Building (202)289-7800 Design Guide www.wbdg.org/ccb MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards (See DOD) TAS Texas Accessibility Standards (512)539 5669 Administered by the Texas Department of Licensing and Registration http://www.tdlr.texas.gov/ab/ab.htm UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards (800) 872-2253 Administered by the United States Access Board http://www.access-board.gov/guidelines-and-standardsibuildings-and- sites/about-the-aba-standards/ufas USAB United States Access Board (800) 872-2253 www.access-board.gov (202)272-0080 USATBCB U.S. Architectural &Transportation Barriers Compliance Board (See USAB) E. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents. CBHF State of California (800)952-5210 Department of Consumer Affairs (916)574-2041 Bureau of Electronic Appliance and Repair,Home Furnishings and Thermal Insulation www.bearhfti.ca.gov CCR California Code of Regulations (916)323-6225 Office of Administrative Law California Title 24 Energy Code www.calregs.com CDHS California Department of Health Care Services FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 42 00 - 11 MAY 2, 2023 REFERENCE STANDARDS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 (Formerly: California Department of Health Services) (See CCR) CDPH California Department of Public Health Indoor Air Quality Program www.cal-iaq.org CPUC California Public Utilities Commission (800) 848-5580 www.cpuc.ca.gov (415)703-2782 SCAQMD South Coast Air Quality Management District (909)396-2000 www.aqmd.gov TCEQ Texas Commission on Environmental Quality (512)239-1000 http://www.tceq.state.tx.us/ TDLR Texas Department of Licensing and Registration (800) 803-9202 http://www.tdlr.texas.gov/index.htm TFS Texas Forest Service Forest Resource Development and Sustainable Forestry (979)458-6606 http://txforestservice.tamu.edu TxDOT Texas Department of Transportation (800)558-9368 www.txdot.gov PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 -EXECUTION(Not Used) END OF SECTION 01 42 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 42 00 - 12 MAY 2, 2023 REFERENCE STANDARDS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 01 43 39 - MOCKUPS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. General requirements for mockups specified in other technical Sections. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged. B. Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from the building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and subassemblies. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Mockup Shop Drawings: For integrated exterior wall and roofing mockups and integrated mockups of interior assemblies and finishes 1. Provide plans, sections, and elevations, indicating materials and size of mockup construction. 2. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components. 3. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions. 1.04 MOCKUPS A. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work: I. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect 7 days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be employed during the construction at Project. 4. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. a. Allow 7 days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup. 6. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 7. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated. B. Mockup Pre-Installation Conference: Before beginning mock-up construction and installation, conduct conference with manufacturer's representatives, fabricators, installers, Architect, FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 01 43 39 - 1 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MOCKUPS MAY 2, 2023 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Owner and other interested parties to review procedures, schedules, and coordination of curtain wall installation with other elements of Work. C. Approved Mockups: 1. Maintain approved in-place mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. a. Approved mock-up assemblies built in-place may remain as part of final Work. 2. Maintain approved stand-alone mockup; do not disassemble or dispose of until so directed by Architect. a. Demolish and remove stand-alone mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated. D. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 1. Approved mock-up assemblies built in-place may remain as part of final Work. 2. Demolish and remove mock-ups when directed,unless otherwise indicated. 3. Mock-up shall remain on site and shall not be removed, disassembled, or disposed of until so directed by Architect. 1.05 MOCKUP TESTING A. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements, comply with requirements specified in individual technical Sections and with the following: 1. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. 2. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project. 3. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. 4. When testing is complete,remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups; do not reuse products on Project. 5. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. 6. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 7. Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups to adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements. 8. Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform same tasks for Project. 9. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. 10. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups; do not reuse products on Project. B. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect,through Construction Manager, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents. C. Representatives of Architect's office and representatives of Owner's office will be present to observe preparation for testing and testing procedures. 1. Notify Architect in advance of testing. D. Testing of Mockups: Conduct tests in accordance with test procedures specified in individual specification Sections. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 01 4339 - 2 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MOCKUPS MAY 2, 2023 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 PART 2-PRODUCTS Not Used. PART 3 -MOCKUP SCHEDULE 3.01 INTEGRATED EXTERIOR WALL MOCKUP A. General: Construct integrated exterior mockup according to approved Mockup Shop Drawings. Coordinate installation of exterior envelope materials and products for which mockups are required in individual Specification Sections, along with other supporting materials. B. Mockup Shop Drawings and Mockup Pre-Installation Conference: As specified herein. C. Size: As indicated on approved Mockup Shop Drawings, and as follows: 1. Width: 8'-0" wide,minimum. 2. Height: Minimum truncated height required to include all elements of full-height wall. D. Scope: Construct integrated mockup of partial exterior wall and roofing systems as indicated on the drawings and/or as specified. Mockup to include but not limited to the following wall assembly elements: 1. Back-Up Structure: Light-gage steel and Masonry back-up wall, including the following: a. Fiberglass-faced gypsum sheathing b. Continuous air barrier, tie-in to other components. C. Insulation d. Through-wall flashing and weeps. 2. Masonry Veneer: Including the following: a. Face brick veneer,pigmented mortar joints, bond pattern. b. Sealant joints C. Cast stone sill 3. Glazed Opening: Including the following: a. Aluminum curtain wall framing, anchors and flashing. b. Glass and glazing materials. C. Sealant joints d. Field-Testing: For air and water infiltration, in accordance with Division 01 requirements. 3.02 OTHER MOCKUPS A. In addition to previous items, construct field (project site) mock-ups and samples for review where indicated in individual Specifications Sections. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Installation: Construct mock-ups for Architect's visual examination, for quality control, and performance of required testing. Use materials, fabrication and installation methods identical with those indicated for Work. Simulate surrounding conditions as closely as possible. 1. Construct mockups for Architect's visual examination, for quality control and quality of installation. a. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. b. Build mockups of size indicated in Drawings. C. Use materials, fabrication and installation methods identical with those indicated for Work. d. Simulate surrounding conditions as closely as possible. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 4339 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 MOCKUPS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be employed during the construction at Project. 3. Install mockups under manufacturer's direct supervision employing workmen who will be used during actual erection at job site. END OF SECTION 0143 39 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 4339 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 MOCKUPS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION01 60 00 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following administrative and procedural requirements: selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties;product substitutions; and comparable products. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section-Allowances for products selected under an allowance. 2. Division 1 Section-Alternates for products selected as an alternate. 3. Division 1 Section- Substitutions for products selected as a substitute. 4. Division 1 Section-References for applicable industry standards for products specified. 5. Division 1 Section- Closeout Procedures for submitting warranties for contract closeout. 6. Divisions 2 - 48 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent. 1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature,that is current as of date of the Contract Documents. 2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products. 3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product. B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor. C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in- service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers. D. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. E. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 6000-1 MAY 2, 2023 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product List: Submit a list, in tabular form, showing specified products. Include generic names of products required. Include manufacturer's name and proprietary product names for each product. 1. Coordinate product list with Contractor's Construction Schedule and the Submittals Schedule. 2. Form: Tabulate information for each product under the following column headings: a. Specification Section number and title. b. Generic name used in the Contract Documents. c. Proprietary name,model number, and similar designations. d. Manufacturer's name and address. e. Supplier's name and address. f. Installer's name and address. g. Projected delivery date or time span of delivery period. h. Identification of items that require early submittal approval for scheduled delivery date. 3. Initial Submittal: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of initial product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. a. At Contractor's option, initial submittal may be limited to product selections and designations that must be established early in Contract period. 4. Completed List: Within 30 days after date of commencement of the Work, submit 3 copies of completed product list. Include a written explanation for omissions of data and for variations from Contract requirements. 5. Architect's Action: Architect will respond in writing to Contractor within 15 working days of receipt of completed product list if there are objections to the list. Architect's response will include a list of unacceptable product selections and a brief explanation of reasons for this action. Architect's response, or lack of response, does not constitute a waiver of requirement that products comply with the Contract Documents. B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section- Submittal Procedures. Show compliance with requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors. 2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible products,Architect will determine which products shall be used. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss,including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 6000-2 MAY 2, 2023 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing,unpacking,protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected. 5. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 6. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 7. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 8. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation and concealment. 9. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 10. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 11. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner. 1.07 PRODUCT WARRANTIES A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents. 1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner. 2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner. B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification,ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution. 1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed. 2. Refer to Divisions 2 through 48 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties. C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section- Closeout Procedures. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged, and unless otherwise indicated,that are new at time of installation. 1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect. 2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 6000-3 MAY 2, 2023 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish"salient characteristics" of products. 7. Or Equal: Where products are specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal", "or approved equal", "or approved," or "acceptable substitution", comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. B. Product Selection Procedures: Procedures for product selection include the following: I. Product: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Product" name a single product and manufacturer,provide the product named. a. Substitutions may be considered,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturer" or "Source" name single manufacturers or sources, provide a product by the manufacturer or from the source named that complies with requirements. a. Substitutions may be considered,unless otherwise indicated. 3. Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled"Products" introduce a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. a. Substitutions may be considered,unless otherwise indicated. 4. Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Manufacturers" introduce a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. a. Substitutions may be considered, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Available Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Available Products" introduce a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed or another product that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Available Manufacturers" introduce a list of manufacturers' names,provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed or another manufacturer that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 7. Product Options: Where Specification paragraphs titled "Product Options" indicate that size,profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide either the specific product or system indicated or a comparable product or system by another manufacturer. Comply with provisions in "Product Substitutions" Article. 8. Basis-of-Design Products: Where Specification paragraphs or subparagraphs titled "Basis-of-Design Products" are included and also introduce or refer to a list of manufacturers' names, provide either the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. a. Substitutions may be considered,unless otherwise indicated. 9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product (and manufacturer) that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches satisfactorily. a. If no product available within specified category matches satisfactorily and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions of the Contract Documents on "substitutions" for selection of a matching product. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 6000-4 MAY 2, 2023 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product (and manufacturer)that complies with other specified requirements. a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items. b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items. 11. Allowances: Refer to individual Specification Sections and "Allowance" provisions in Division 1 for allowances that control product selection and for procedures required for processing such selections. 2.02 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements: I. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. 2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability,visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated. 3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners,if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. PART 3 -EXECUTION Not Used. END OF SECTION 01 60 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 6000-5 MAY 2, 2023 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 01 73 00 - EXECUTION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to,the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 6. Progress cleaning. 7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction. 9. Correction of the Work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Section- Summary for limits on use of Project site. 2. Division 01 Section- Submittal Procedures for submitting surveys. 3. Division 01 Section - Cutting and Patching for cutting and patching necessary for installation or performance of other components of the work. 4. Division 01 Section - Closeout Procedures for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning. 5. Division 02 Section - Selective Structure Demolition for demolition and removal of selected portions of the building. 6. Division 07 Section - Penetration Firestopping for patching penetrations in fire-rated construction. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work. B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation of other work. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For land surveyor. B. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements. C. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information: 1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching. 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance and other significant visual elements. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 7300-1 MAY 2, 2023 EXECUTION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform patching work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time permanent services and systems will be disrupted. a. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during interruption of permanent services and systems. D. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal. E. Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor. F. Final Property Survey: Submit 5 copies showing the Work performed and record survey data. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land- surveying services of the kind indicated. B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements. I. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore,brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection 2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following: a. Primary operational systems and equipment. b. Fire separation assemblies. c. Air or smoke barriers. d. Fire-suppression systems. e. Mechanical systems piping and ducts. f. Control systems. g. Communication systems. h. Fire detection and alarm systems. i. Conveying systems. J. Electrical wiring systems. k. Operating systems of special construction. 3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following: a. Water,moisture, or vapor barriers. b. Membranes and flashings. c. Exterior curtain-wall construction. d. Sprayed fire-resistive material. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 7300-2 MAY 2, 2023 EXECUTION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 e. Equipment supports. f. Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment. g. Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems. 4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner. C. Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. 1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and procedures, use products for patching that comply with requirements in Division 01 sustainable design requirements Section. B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used,use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. 3. In the event of any inconsistency or conflict,between existing conditions and the bidding documents, immediate notice of such inconsistency or conflict shall be given to the Architect. Do not undertake any phase of the work affected by such inconsistency or conflict,pending the issuance of instructions by the Architect. B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 7300-3 MAY 2, 2023 EXECUTION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections,include the following: 1. Description of the Work. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner not less than five days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission. C. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. D. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. E. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Division 01 Section-Project Management and Coordination. 3.03 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered,notify Architect promptly. B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices. I. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. 2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions. 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 7300-4 MAY 2, 2023 EXECUTION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by authorities having jurisdiction. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations. D. Elevations of existing grades, floors, tops of walls, parapets, beams and locations of existing columns, walls and the like are based on survey documents or on drawings of the existing building furnished by the Owner. The Architect assumes no responsibility for the accuracy of the information on existing drawings. It is the intent of the Contract Drawings to integrate new work with existing improvements and for the Contractor to verify actual conditions. E. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. F. Subcontractors shall verify with the General Contractor the exact field location of all rough-in dimensions,taking into account location of walls,partitions and equipment. Special attention should be paid to clearances as required for compliance with American's with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines (ADAAG) in the state having jurisdiction, including any applicable revisions. Any cost in relocation of items due to that subcontractor's error, will be borne by him at no additional cost to the Owner. G. Where equipment involving more than one subcontractor is installed at a common location and no specific location has been determined, it is the Contractor's responsibility to check with the Architect for the actual rough-in dimensions for such equipment. If for some reason the rough-in has not been checked and a subcontractor has installed his equipment, remaining subcontractors shall align their equipment as closely as possible to the installed equipment. Alignment shall mean centered vertically, equally space and centered horizontally. This alignment applies to bells, alarms, thermostats, switches, handles, access panels, etc. Any items not installed in alignment shall be relocated by the Contractor at his own expense with damaged surfaces properly repaired. H. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect. 3.04 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners. B. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations. 1. Do not change or relocate existing benchmarks or control points without prior written approval of Architect. Report lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks or control points promptly. Report the need to relocate permanent benchmarks or control points to Architect before proceeding. 2. Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements on the original survey control points. C. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 7300-5 MAY 2, 2023 EXECUTION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary reference points sufficient to locate the Work. 3. Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its original condition. D. Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework. E. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey. 1. Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance and bearing from a site corner to a legal point. 2. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey." 3.05 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inch in occupied spaces and 90 inch in unoccupied spaces. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated. C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations. F. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements. H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 7300-6 MAY 2, 2023 EXECUTION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. I.Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. J.Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous. 3.06 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition. B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties. C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut. D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations. E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Division 01 Section- Summary. F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimize interruption to occupied areas. G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 31 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations. 4. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 5. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete. H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections,where applicable. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 73 00-7 MAY 2, 2023 EXECUTION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition. 3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance. a. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces. 4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance. 5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure. I.Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils,putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces. 3.07 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction personnel. 1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. 3.08 PROGRESS CLEANING A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F. 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. a. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored. 4. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently. B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris. C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 7300-8 MAY 2, 2023 EXECUTION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate. D. Installed Work: Deep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces. E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space. F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways. Comply with waste disposal requirements in Division 01 Section- Construction Waste Management and Disposal. H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion. I.Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects. J.Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. 3.09 STARTING AND ADJUSTING A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with requirements in Division 01 Section- General Commissioning Requirements. B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section -Quality Requirements. 3.10 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity. C. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division I Section-Cutting and Patching. 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. D. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 7300-9 MAY 2, 2023 EXECUTION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. F. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. G. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. END OF SECTION 01 73 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 7300-10 MAY 2, 2023 EXECUTION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 01 74 19 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following: 1. Salvaging nonhazardous construction waste. 2. Recycling nonhazardous construction waste. 3. Disposing of nonhazardous construction waste. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section - Summary of Multiple Contracts for coordination of responsibilities for waste management. 2. Division 1 Section - Temporary Facilities and Controls for environmental-protection measures during construction. 3. Division 1 Section - Selective Demolition for disposition of waste resulting from partial demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements. 4. Division 2 Section - Building Demolition for disposition of waste resulting from demolition of buildings, structures, and site improvements. 5. Division 2 Section- Site Clearing for disposition of waste resulting from site clearing and removal of above- and below-grade improvements. 6. Division 4 Section - Unit Masonry Assemblies for disposal requirements for masonry waste. 7. Division 4 Section- Stone Veneer Assemblies for disposal requirements for excess stone and stone waste. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting from construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging. B. Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selective demolition operations. C. Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, or deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse. E. Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility. F. Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into the Work. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 74 19 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1.04 PERFORMANCE GOALS A. Texas CHPS MW2.0 and 2.1.1: Recycle, reuse, and/or salvage at least 50% (by weight) of non-hazardous construction and demolition waste, not including land clearing and associated debris. B. Develop waste management plan that results in end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 50 percent by weight of total non-hazardous construction and demolition waste generated by the Work. C. General: Develop waste management plan that results in end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 50 percent by weight of total waste generated by the Work. D. Salvage/Recycle Goals: Owner's goal is to salvage and recycle as much nonhazardous construction waste as possible including the following materials: E. Salvage/Recycle Goals: Owner's goal is to salvage and recycle as much nonhazardous construction waste as possible. Owner has established minimum goals for the following materials: 1. Demolition Waste: a. Asphaltic concrete paving. b. Concrete. c. Concrete reinforcing steel. d. Brick. e. Concrete masonry units. f. Wood studs. g. Wood joists. h. Plywood and oriented strand board. i. Wood paneling. j. Wood trim. k. Structural and miscellaneous steel. 1. Rough hardware. in. Roofing. n. Insulation. o. Doors and frames. p. Door hardware. q. Windows. r. Glazing. s. Metal studs. t. Gypsum board. u. Acoustical tile and panels. v. Carpet. w. Carpet pad. x. Demountable partitions. y. Equipment. z. Cabinets. aa. Plumbing fixtures. bb. Piping. cc. Supports and hangers. dd. Valves. cc. Sprinklers. ff. Mechanical equipment. gg. Refrigerants. hh. Electrical conduit. ii. Copper wiring. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 74 19 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 jj• Lighting fixtures. kk. Lamps. 11. Ballasts. mm. Electrical devices. nn. Switchgear and panelboards. oo. Transformers. 2. Construction Waste: a. Site-clearing waste. b. Masonry and CMU. c. Lumber. d. Wood sheet materials. e. Wood trim. f. Metals. g. Roofing. h. Insulation. i. Carpet and pad. j. Gypsum board. k. Piping. 1. Electrical conduit. in. Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated above, salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging materials: 1) Paper. 2) Cardboard. 3) Boxes. 4) Plastic sheet and film. 5) Polystyrene packaging. 6) Wood crates. 7) Plastic pails. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Waste Management Plan: Submit 2 copies of plan within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed. B. Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste by recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets,receipts, and invoices. C. Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills and incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Waste Management Coordinator Qualifications: LEED Accredited Professional by U.S. Green Building Council. Waste management coordinator may also serve as LEED coordinator. B. Refrigerant Recovery Technician Qualifications: Certified by EPA-approved certification program. C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division I Section -Project Management and Coordination. Review methods and procedures related to waste management including,but not limited to,the following: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 74 19 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of Waste Management Coordinator. 2. Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its disposition. 3. Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of containers and bins needed to avoid delays. 4. Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal facilities. 5. Review waste management requirements for each trade. 1.07 WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN A. General: Develop plan consisting of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Indicate quantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan. B. Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of construction waste generated by the Work. Include estimated quantities and assumptions for estimates. C. Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, or disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type of waste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures. I. Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this Project, describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the Work. 2. Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 3. Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 4. Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers. 5. Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of Include name, address, and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility. 6. Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location on Project site where materials separation will be located. D. Cost/Revenue Analysis: Indicate total cost of waste disposal as if there was no waste management plan and net additional cost or net savings resulting from implementing waste management plan. Include the following: 1. Total quantity of waste. 2. Estimated cost of disposal (cost per unit). Include hauling and tipping fees and cost of collection containers for each type of waste. 3. Total cost of disposal(with no waste management). 4. Revenue from salvaged materials. 5. Revenue from recycled materials. 6. Savings in hauling and tipping fees by donating materials. 7. Savings in hauling and tipping fees that are avoided. 8. Handling and transportation costs. Include cost of collection containers for each type of waste. 9. Net additional cost or net savings from waste management plan. E. Forms: Prepare waste management plan on forms included at end of Part 3. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Used) FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 74 19 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 PLAN IMPLEMENTATION A. General: Implement waste management plan as approved by Owner. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage, transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entire duration of the Contract. 1. Comply with Division 1 Section - Temporary Facilities and Controls for operation, termination, and removal requirements. B. Waste Management Coordinator: Engage a waste management coordinator to be responsible for implementing, monitoring, and reporting status of waste management work plan. Coordinator shall be present at Project site full time for duration of Project. C. Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, as appropriate for the Work occurring at Project site. 1. Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal return. 2. Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan procedures and locations established for salvage,recycling, and disposal. D. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities. 1. Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be salvaged, recycled,reused, donated, and sold. 2. Comply with Division 1 Section - Temporary Facilities and Controls for controlling dust and dirt, environmental protection, and noise control. 3.02 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers. B. Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recycling waste materials shall accrue to Contractor. C. Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuse facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, and other substances deleterious to the recycling process. D. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical. 1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until they are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin. a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found. 2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees. 4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. 5. Remove recyclable waste off Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or processor. 3.03 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE A. Packaging: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 74 19 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location. 2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. 4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood. B. Site-Clearing Wastes: Chip brush, branches, and trees at landfill facility. 1. Comply with requirements in Division 32 Section - Exterior Plants for use of chipped organic waste as organic mulch. C. Wood Materials: 1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces. 2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood. a. Comply with requirements in Division 32 Section - Exterior Plants. for use of clean sawdust as organic mulch. D. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location. 1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding. a. Comply with requirements in Division 32 Section - Exterior Plants. for use of clean ground gypsum board as inorganic soil amendment. 3.04 DISPOSAL OF WASTE A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged,recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of thein in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials. C. Burning: Burning of waste materials is permitted only at designated areas on Owner's property, provided required permits are obtained. Provide full-time monitoring for burning materials until fires are extinguished. D. Disposal: Transport waste materials and dispose of at designated spoil areas on Owner's property. E. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them. END OF SECTION 01 74 19 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 74 19 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 01 77 00 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to,the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 - Substantial Completion Readiness Checklist. 2. Division 01 Section - Photographic Documentation for submitting final completion construction photographic documentation. 3. Division 01 Section- Execution Requirements for progress cleaning of Project site. 4. Division 01 Section - Operation and Maintenance Data for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 5. Division 01 Section- Project Record Documents for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data. 6. Division 01 Section - Demonstration and Training for requirements for instructing Owner's personnel. 7. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.03 QUALITY CONTROL A. Closeout Conference: Schedule and conduct a closeout conference, to be held one to three months prior to the anticipated date of substantial completion. Required attendees include Contractor's on-site personnel and Project Manager, Architect, and designated Owner's representative(s). Discuss any items that could impede progress to scheduled date of substantial completion, closeout procedures, and the following: 1. Any pending or anticipated time extension requests that may affect the projected date of Substantial Completion. 2. Progress or scheduled progress of Contractor's preparation of project record documents. 3. Current status of Contractor's As-Built documents, and plans to address any deficiencies. 4. Required Owner training, and process for scheduling training with Owner's staff. 5. Required submittals to Architect prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion,including the Substantial Completion Readiness Checklist. 6. Requirements for testing and balancing and for submitting Test / Adjust / Balance reports. 7. Commissioning. 8. Maximum time allowed between Substantial and Final Completion, and Contractor's plan to ensure that all incomplete work is completed on schedule. 9. Written action plans required to address deficiencies (if any). FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 7700 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Contractor shall record Closeout Conference minutes,including all Contractor's action items, and distribute to attendees within one week. Contractor shall attach plans to address deficiencies for any items identified in the Closeout Conference that require a written action plan. 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For cleaning agents. B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion. C. Substantial Completion Readiness Checklist form: Fully filled out, submitted prior to or concurrent with requesting a date for substantial completion. See attached form. D. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction. B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage. C. Field Report: For pest control inspection. 1.06 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections. 1.07 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete. B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. I. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 2. Submit a fully filled out Substantial Completion Readiness Checklist (see attachment to this specification Section). 3. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys,property surveys, and similar final record information. 4. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Divisions 02 through 33 Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents. 5. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Divisions 02 through 33 Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable. a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's signature for receipt of submittals. 6. Submit test/adjust/balance records. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 7700 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 7. Submit sustainable design submittals required in Division 01 sustainable design requirements Section and in individual Division 02 through 33 Sections. 8. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. C. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Review the Substantial Completion Readiness Checklist form (attached). Address habitual punch list items to the extent possible and note remaining items in Contractor's List of Incomplete Items. Ensure that other items indicated on the Checklist can or will be complete by the required dates and note any deficiencies on the checklist form prior to submitting it to Architect. 2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions. 4. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 5. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 6. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Division 01 Section-Demonstration and Training. 7. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 8. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders. 9. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements. 10. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 11. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects. D. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect,that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion. 1.08 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 01 Section - Payment Procedures. 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 7700 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 1.09 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST) A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction. 1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. 3. Include the following information at the top of each page: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Contractor. e. Page number. 4. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: a. MS Excel electronic file. Architect will return annotated file. b. PDF electronic file. Architect will return annotated file. 1.10 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty. B. Partial Occupancy: Submit properly executed warranties within 15 days of completion of designated portions of the Work that are completed and occupied or used by Owner during construction period by separate agreement with Contractor. C. Organize entire collection of approved warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual, with tabs between CSI division sections; i.e.; group all Division-7 building components under one tab, group all Division-8 components under another tab, etc.. Utilize CSI specification sections 2 through 33 for each division tab. Provide three copies of each Final Warranty binder. 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper. 2. Provide title page, Contractor's general One-Year Warranty (corrective period) with agreed upon date and signature of authorized representative, table of contents, and subcontractor list at the beginning of each binder. 3. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer. 4. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 7700 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 5. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document. D. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals. Such copies shall be identical to the warranties included in the warranty binders, but may be photocopies including for warranties that require wet signatures for the original actuated copies. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 FINAL CLEANING A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations. B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances. b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits. c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts,trenches, equipment vaults,manholes, attics, and similar spaces. h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 7700 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 k. Remove labels that are not permanent. 1. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. in. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from water exposure. n. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. o. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction or that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection. 1) Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01. Provide written report on completion of cleaning. p. Clean light fixtures,lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy. C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Division 01 Section - Temporary Facilities and Controls. Prepare written report. D. Construction Waste Disposal: Comply with waste disposal requirements in Division 01 Section- Construction Waste Management and Disposal. 3.02 REPAIR OF THE WORK A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion. B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials. 2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration. a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification. 3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity. 4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures. END OF SECTION 01 77 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 7700 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 01 77 OOA - SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION READINESS CHECKLIST When requesting Architect's Inspection for Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall submit the fol- lowing checklist and shall provide not less than 7 working days advance notice to the Architect and Own- er (unless otherwise mutually agreed). Fill out form completely, including comments indicating reasons for incomplete items and anticipated completion as applicable. Architect will provide an editable version of this form upon request. The Architect will not schedule an Inspection for Substantial Completion with- out first receiving this completed form from the Contractor. Deficiencies in one or more items does not necessarily indicate that the project is not ready for inspection. However, incomplete items that preclude Owner's beneficial occupancy, or that constitute a lack of readiness for inspection, either individually or in aggregate, are grounds for the Architect to deny scheduling of the inspection. All deficiencies shall be reflected in Contractor's punch list. The Architect's inspection for substantial completion shall not be scheduled on a day when fire alarm testing or other extremely noisy construction activities are scheduled. Item Y N N/A Documents /Actions Required Contractor's Punch List (and Habitual Punch List Items Checked) Submit Contractor's Punch List., noting all remaining work items with date sched- uled for completion or correction. Contractor shall update and submit Ire-submit 1 list as applicable minimum of'2 days and maximum of 5 days prior to the requested date,for Architect's Inspection, noting items contractor has corrected and that are still pending. Additionally, Contractor shall field verify the following habitual check-list items in preparing the Contractor's Punch List, and indicate that they have been verified by the checklist below.- Comments: elow:Comments: Confirm there are no outstanding items on the Contractor's Punch List that would adversely affect the Owner's beneficial occupancy. Comments: Confirm that all outstanding items on Contractor's Punch List can be completed, and are scheduled for completion,within a maximum of 30 calendar days,or other duration as allowed by the Contract Documents or mutually agreed between Con- tractor,Architect,and Owner. Comments: The area of the Facility included in the Contractor's Work has been,or will be by the requested date,completely cleaned and ready for Architect's Inspection. Comments: Temporary Facilities have been removed,or will be removed,by requested date of inspection (except for any items otherwise mutually agreed to remain atter the date of Owner's beneficial occupancy). Comments: All paving sealants installed,and zip strips removed where applicable. Comments: All millwork/cabinets checked that all hardware is installed. Doors,drawers and moving parts checked for smooth operation through full range of motion. Hinges adjusted for alignment of adjacent doors. Comments: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT ##21085 01 77 OOA- 1 MAY 2, 2023 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION READINESS CHECKLIST DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Remove loose fasteners and debris from roofs,parking lot,and site. Comments: All door and window hardware installed by Contractor checked for missing items. Comments: All operable windows checked for smooth operation through full range of move- ment. Locking devices all aligned and properly engage. Screens installed where applicable. Comments: All door silencers in place. Soiled/painted silencers replaced with new. Comments: All doors/hardware installed by Contractor checked for proper operation. This includes but is not limited to: Proper latching and locking operation, doors not binding on hinges or in doorframes, closers and pivots adjusted to self-close and latch, and to operate in compliance with Texas Accessibility Standards, hold- opens verified adjusted for operation and release, hold-open function in closers tested where applicable,flush bolts throw fully into frames and floors, and proper operation of electronic hardware. Contractor's.final submission of Contractor's punch list prior to Inspection shall include any observed deficiencies. Comments: All overhead doors and other mechanically operated doors,thoroughly checked for proper adjustment and operation of all control functions,binding in tracks,and any other deficiencies. Corrections made as required. Comments: Check all ceiling tile for nicks, stains,and other damage, and replace with new as required. Check new ceiling grid for warp and damage and repair as required. Ver- ify all tile is seated in the grid. Comments: All interior finishes work complete and ready for Architect's inspection(other than minor touch-up). Comments: All interior signage installed and accounted for. Comments: All equipment and appliances installed by Contractor tested for proper adjustment and operation. Comments: All pipes labeled as required by Contract Documents. Comments: All exposed pipe penetrations checked for sealants(fire sealant where applicable), and escutcheons,as required by Contract Documents. Comments: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 77 OOA- 2 MAY 2, 2023 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION READINESS CHECKLIST DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Remove all faucet aerators,flush lines of dirt,sand, and debris,and reinstall aera- tors. Test all faucet handles for correct hot and cold line connection/control. Comments: Water closets and urinal fixtures tested for proper flush operation. Comments: HVAC is functioning and humidity control is acceptable. Comments: Fans operating correctly including their controls. Comments: HVAC Filters to be replaced just prior to substantial completion with new filters. Comments: HVAC ducts checked for construction dust and debris contamination and cleaned as applicable in compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents. Comments: Electrical panels/schedules completely filled out and labeled,in compliance with Contract Documents. And other devices and circuits labeled where required by Contract Documents Comments: Check all open electrical boxes have cover plates and screws,and painted where applicable. Comments: Test all power outlets and switches. Comments: Test all data outlets(if installed by this Contract Comments: Verify water heaters are installed with proper disconnects. [Boilers have passed State inspection.] Comments: All lighting and lighting control systems have been tested for proper operation. Vacancy and occupancy sensors adjusted to proper duration and tested for sensitivi- ty. Debug/repair as required. Replace burned out or inoperable lamps/modules as require by Contract Documents. Comments: All landscaping,turf,and irrigation(or temporary irrigation as applicable)has been or will be installed/seeded by the requested date for Architect's inspection. (Except as otherwise agreed or otherwise required due to planting season.Note any pendinginstallation on Contractor's punch list. Comments: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 77 OOA- 3 MAY 2, 2023 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION READINESS CHECKLIST DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Final Inspections All required final inspections have or will be passed by date of substantial comple- tion(local and State). 2 Or, if any will be remaining the status will not affect Owner's beneficial occupancy and has been agreed to be acceptable by Owner. Comments: Certificate of Occupancy A Certificate of Occupancy has been or will be issued by the requested date for inspection. 3 Or if not, a Temporary Certificate of Occupancy has been issued, and any out- standing items will not affect beneficial occupancv and are scheduled for correc- tion,and final inspection within 30 days or less. Comments: Owner Notification Owner has been notified by Contractor with adequate time of pending changeover 4 in utilities,insurance, and building and site security,in accordance with the Con- tract Documents. Comments: Extra Materials All extra materials,attic stock,and maintenance tools required by the construction documents to be provided by Contractor have been delivered to Owner(submit transmittals indicating each item,quantities and receipt). 5 Any outstanding extra materials not yet delivered are acceptable to Owner for ben- eficial occupancy and are noted in Contractor's punch list, with anticipated deliv- ery dates. Comments: Final Keying Final key cores and keys as applicable to project scope have or will be installed,or have been delivered Owner's installer,in time for the requested date of substantial 6 completion. This includes all keys for any locking cabinets,lockers,toilet accesso- ries, etc. as applicable. Comments: Security and Access Control Applicable intrusion detection, security camera, access control,gate operators,and similar systems required for access and security are or will be operational in time 7 for requested date for substantial completion. (Where these systems are not the installed as part of this contract, Contractor has made due effort to coordinate with Owner's separate contract or vendor for timely completion). Comments: Owner Training All Owner training required by the Contract Documents has been scheduled with Owner, or Owner Training Conference has been conducted and Owner has agreed 8 that any training that will not be performed by the date of substantial completion is acceptable to occur later for the purpose of achieving beneficial occupancy. Comments: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 77 OOA- 4 MAY 2, 2023 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION READINESS CHECKLIST DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Testing Adjusting and Balancing Report A copy of the initial HVAC TAB report has been submitted to the Architect. Indi- cate in comments anticipated schedule for final and opposite season TAB reports. 9 Anv deficiencies in the initial report are included in Contractor's punch list, and corrections and re-testing scheduled within the allowable duration for-Final Com- letion. Comments: Commissioning Commissioning required by the Contract Documents has begun(and if required by Contract Documents will be complete)by the requested date of inspection. 10 Confirm coordination with Commissioning Agent. Submit most recent commission- ing report to Architect, and include noted deficiencies in Contractor's punch list. Comments: Record Drawings To the best of Contractor's knowledge,annotations on record drawings are up to 11 date. Preliminary review copy of marked up Record Drawings has been or will be submitted to Architect for review prior to the requested date for inspection. Comments: Operations and Maintenance Manuals Preliminary review copy of O&M binders has been or will be submitted to Archi- 12 tect for review prior to the requested date for inspection. Comments: Record Submittals/Product Data Preliminary review copy of project Record Submittals(if required)has been or will 13 be submitted to Architect for review prior to the requested date for inspection. Comments: Warranties Binder Preliminary review copy of warranties binder has been or will be submitted to Ar- 14 chitect for review prior to the requested date for inspection. Comments: Roofing Manufacturer's Warranty Inspection Rooting manufacturer's inspection has been performed and Roof Warranty has been achieved by requested date for inspection. 15 Or if warranty is not achieved, onlv minor corrections remain to achieve warranty, and submit Manu acturer's de icienev list/report with Contractor's punch list. Comments: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 77 OOA- 5 MAY 2, 2023 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION READINESS CHECKLIST DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Owner's Separate Contracts Coordination Confirm Contractor has performed required scheduling and other coordination with Owner's separate contract work as necessary to be ready for beneficial occupancy upon the requested date of Substantial Completion. This may include,but is not 17 necessarily limited to, such things as [structured cabling and telecommunica- tions,][A/V and 1T equipment,][radio equipment,][fire station alerting sys- tem, and FF&E delivery and installation . Comments: Indoor Air Quality Program If required by Contract Documents,indoor air quality testing has been performed and passed. Or if allowed in lieu of testing,building flush-out has or will be per- formed by the requested date for substantial completion to the extent that flush out 18 is required to precede occupancy; and filters will be replaced promptly as required. ff testing has been performed and failed, note corrective action and schedule for re- testing as a licable on Contractor's punch list. Comments: END OF SECTION O1 77 OOA FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 77 OOA- 6 MAY 2, 2023 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION READINESS CHECKLIST DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 01 78 23 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Product maintenance manuals. 5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Section - Multiple Contract Summary for coordinating operation and maintenance manuals covering the Work of multiple contracts. 2. Division 01 Section - Submittal Procedures for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. 3. Division 01 Section - General Commissioning Requirements for verification and compilation of data into operation and maintenance manuals. 4. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction. B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section. 1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable. 2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions. B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format: 1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect. a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory. b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals. 2. Two paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect will return one copy. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 7823-1 MAY 2, 2023 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect and Commissioning Authority will comment on whether general scope and content of manual are acceptable. D. Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect and Commissioning Authority will return copy with comments. 1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's and Commissioning Authority's comments. Submit three Final copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's and Commissioning Authority's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include a section in the directory for each of the following: 1. List of documents. 2. List of systems. 3. List of equipment. 4. Table of contents. B. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. C. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. D. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual. E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems." 2.02 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Subcontractor list 4. Manual contents. B. Title Page: Include the following information: I. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. 7. Name and contact information for Architect. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 7823-2 MAY 2, 2023 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 8. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority. 9. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems contained in the manuals. 10. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals. C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set. D. Subcontractor List: Organize subcontractor list by CSI specification section, as listed in the Project Manual table of contents. Provide contact name, street address (no P.O. Box numbers) and contact phone and fax number. If changes were made during the course of the project, utilize final contract company for each component of the work. List all contractors used on project, even if subcontracted to a different subcontractor, i.e; if earthwork subcontractor is contracted by the paving subcontractor, list both subcontractors. E. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder. F. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required. 1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size. 2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file. G. Manuals,Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy,bound and labeled volumes. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, [loose-leaf] [post-type] binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-I I-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, subject matter of contents, and indicate Specification Section number on bottom of spine. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. 2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual. 3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 7823-3 MAY 2, 2023 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 4. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-1 l-inch white bond paper. 5. Drawings: Attach reinforced,punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations. 2.03 EMERGENCY MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures. B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem,piece of equipment, and component: 1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill. C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties. D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures. 2.04 OPERATION MANUALS A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates. B. Descriptions: Include the following: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 7823-4 MAY 2, 2023 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures. D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed. E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification. 2.05 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below. B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color,pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions. E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 7823-5 MAY 2, 2023 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 F. Bonds: Include copies of bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims. 2.06 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below. B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable. C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal,replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts. D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal,repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available. E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment. 1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance. F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services. G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 MANUAL PREPARATION A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 7823-6 MAY 2, 2023 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated. C. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product,material, and finish incorporated into the Work. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's operating personnel. E. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable. 1. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. F. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation. 1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Division 01 Section - Project Record Documents. G. Comply with Division 01 Section - Closeout Procedures for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation. END OF SECTION 01 78 23 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 7823-7 MAY 2, 2023 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 01 78 39 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 01 Section - Multiple Contract Summary for coordinating project record documents covering the Work of multiple contracts. 2. Division 01 Section- Execution for final property survey. 3. Division 01 Section- Closeout Procedures for general closeout procedures. 4. Division 01 Section - Operation and Maintenance Data for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 5. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for project record documents of the Work in those Sections. 1.03 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit one set of marked-up record prints. 2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows: a. Initial Submittal: 1) Submit one paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints. 2) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints and one of file prints. 3) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. b. Final Submittal: 1) Submit one paper-copy set(s) of marked-up record prints. 2) Submit record digital data files and three set(s) of record digital data file plots. 3) Plot each drawing file, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. B. Record Specifications: Submit annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications. C. Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal. 1. Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual. D. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record- keeping requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal. Unless more stringent requirements are called for in other related specifications, include the following: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 78 39-1 MAY 2, 2023 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. (2) copies of irrigation system laminated zone map and scanned electronic file in PDF or JPEG format. 2. Electronic copy of Contractor's meeting minutes, and of A/E's field reports. 3. Electronic copy of Addenda. 4. Electronic copy of Architect's Supplemental Instructions. 5. Electronic copy of Change Orders, Contingency Expenditures, Change Directives, and similar contract modifications. 6. Electronic copy of Requests For Information. 7. Electronic copy of transmittals for extra and maintenance materials, signed by Owner's representatives who received them. 8. Attendance sign-in lists for training sessions. E. Reports: Submit written report indicating items incorporated into project record documents concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed conditions, field changes,product selections, and other notations incorporated. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued. I. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints. a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. b. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. c. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. d. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations. e. Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation. 2. Content: Types of items requiring marking include,but are not limited to, the following: a. Dimensional changes to Drawings. b. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. c. Depths of foundations below first floor. d. Locations and depths of underground utilities. e. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. f. Revisions to electrical circuitry. g. Actual equipment locations. h. Duct size and routing. i. Locations of concealed internal utilities. J. Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive. k. Changes made following Architect's written orders. 1. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. in. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. n. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically. 3. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints. 4. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location. 5. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 7839-2 MAY 2, 2023 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 6. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification,where applicable. B. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1. Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the original Contract Drawings. 2. Format: DWG, Version,Microsoft Windows operating system. 3. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file. 4. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete,redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 5. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution. 6. Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for use in recording information. a. See Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures" for requirements related to use of Architect's digital data files. b. Architect will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate layers. C. Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing record Drawings where Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to show actual installation. 1. New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an alternate, substitution, or other modification. 2. Consult Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared record Drawings into record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying,binding, and submitting. D. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file. 3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file. 4. Identification: As follows: a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor. 2.02 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected. 3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 7839-3 MAY 2, 2023 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 4. For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data. 5. Note related Change Orders and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file. 2.03 RECORD PRODUCT DATA A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal. 1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. 2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation. 3. Note related Change Orders and record Drawings where applicable. B. Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic tile. 1. Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of record Product Data. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each,ready for continued use and reference. B. Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file. 1. Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project. B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours. END OF SECTION 01 78 39 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 7839-4 MAY 2, 2023 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 01 79 00 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, including the following: 1. Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. 3. Demonstration and training video recordings. B. Related Requirements: 1. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for demonstration and training for products in those Sections. C. Allowances: Furnish demonstration and training instruction time under the Demonstration and Training Allowance as specified in Division 01 Section "Allowances." D. Unit Price for Instruction Time: Length of instruction time will be measured by actual time spent performing demonstration and training in required location. No payinent will be made for time spent assembling educational materials, setting up, or cleaning up. See requirements in Division 01 Section"Unit Prices." 1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module. 1. Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and training video recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live instructional module. B. Qualification Data: For facilitator. C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time. D. Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation of performance-based test. 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Demonstration and Training Video Recordings: Submit two copies within seven days of end of each training module. 1. Identification: On each copy,provide an applied label with the following information: a. Name of Project. b. Name and address of videographer. c. Name of Architect. d. Name of Construction Manager. e. Name of Contractor. f. Date of video recording. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT ##21085 01 7900-1 MAY 2, 2023 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Transcript: Prepared and bound in format matching operation and maintenance manuals. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include a cover sheet with same label information as the corresponding video recording. Include name of Project and date of video recording on each page. 3. Transcript: Prepared in PDF electronic format. Include a cover sheet with same label information as the corresponding video recording and a table of contents with links to corresponding training components. Include name of Project and date of video recording on each page. 4. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Owner's use prepared and bound in format matching operation and maintenance manuals or in PDF electronic file format on compact disc. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance. B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures and training. C. Videographer Qualifications: A professional videographer who is experienced photographing demonstration and training events similar to those required. D. Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to demonstration and training including,but not limited to,the following: 1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction. 2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials, instructors'personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays. 3. Review required content of instruction. 4. For instruction that must occur outside,review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable. 1.06 COORDINATION A. Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimize disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel. B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content. C. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed and approved by Architect. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections. B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT ##21085 01 7900-2 MAY 2, 2023 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 For each module, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component: I. Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following: a. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. c. Operating standards. d. Regulatory requirements. e. Equipment function. f. Operating characteristics. g. Limiting conditions. h. Performance curves. 2. Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a. Emergency manuals. b. Operations manuals. c. Maintenance manuals. d. Project record documents. e. Identification systems. f. Warranties and bonds. g. Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments. 3. Emergencies: Include the following,as applicable: a. Instructions on meaning of warnings,trouble indications, and error messages. b. Instructions on stopping. c. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. d. Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits. e. Sequences for electric or electronic systems. f. Special operating instructions and procedures. 4. Operations: Include the following, as applicable: a. Startup procedures. b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Control sequences. f. Safety procedures. g. Instructions on stopping. h. Normal shutdown instructions. i. Operating procedures for emergencies. j. Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. k. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 1. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. in. Special operating instructions and procedures. 5. Adjustments: Include the following: a. Alignments. b. Checking adjustments. c. Noise and vibration adjustments. d. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 6. Troubleshooting: Include the following: a. Diagnostic instructions. b. Test and inspection procedures. 7. Maintenance: Include the following: a. Inspection procedures. b. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. c. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT ##21085 01 7900-3 MAY 2, 2023 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 d. Procedures for routine cleaning e. Procedures for preventive maintenance. f. Procedures for routine maintenance. g. Instruction on use of special tools. 8. Repairs: Include the following: a. Diagnosis instructions. b. Repair instructions. c. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. d. Instructions for identifying parts and components. e. Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Division 01 Section"Operations and Maintenance Data." B. Set up instructional equipment at instruction location. 3.02 INSTRUCTION A. Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants, instruction times, and location. B. Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. Architect will furnish an instructor to describe basis of system design, operational requirements, criteria, and regulatory requirements. 2. Owner will furnish an instructor to describe Owner's operational philosophy. 3. Owner will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants. C. Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonal operation,provide similar instruction at start of each season. 1. Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days'advance notice. D. Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals. E. Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery of module by use of an oral performance-based test. F. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use. 3.03 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS A. General: Engage a qualified commercial videographer to record demonstration and training video recordings. Record each training module separately. Include classroom instructions and demonstrations,board diagrams, and other visual aids,but not student practice. 1. At beginning of each training module, record each chart containing learning objective and lesson outline. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT ##21085 01 7900-4 MAY 2, 2023 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Video: Provide minimum 640 x 480 video resolution converted to format file type acceptable to Owner, on electronic media. I. Electronic Media: Read-only format compact disc acceptable to Owner, with commercial-grade graphic label. 2. File Hierarchy: Organize folder structure and file locations according to project manual table of contents. Provide complete screen-based menu. 3. File Names: Utilize file names based upon name of equipment generally described in video segment, as identified in Project specifications. 4. Contractor and Installer Contact File: Using appropriate software, create a file for inclusion on the Equipment Demonstration and Training DVD that describes the following for each Contractor involved on the Project, arranged according to Project table of contents: a. Name of Contractor/Installer. b. Business address. c. Business phone number. d. Point of contact. e. E-mail address. C. Recording: Mount camera on tripod before starting recording, unless otherwise necessary to adequately cover area of demonstration and training. Display continuous running time. 1. Film training session(s)in segments not to exceed 15 minutes. a. Produce segments to present a single significant piece of equipment per segment. b. Organize segments with multiple pieces of equipment to follow order of Project Manual table of contents. c. Where a training session on a particular piece of equipment exceeds 15 minutes, stop filming and pause training session. Begin training session again upon commencement of new filming segment. D. Light Levels: Verify light levels are adequate to properly light equipment. Verify equipment markings are clearly visible prior to recording. 1. Furnish additional portable lighting as required. E. Narration: Describe scenes on video recording by [audio narration by microphone while] [dubbing audio narration off-site after] video recording is recorded. Include description of items being viewed. F. Transcript: Provide a transcript of the narration. Display images and running time captured from videotape opposite the corresponding narration segment. G. Preproduced Video Recordings: Provide video recordings used as a component of training modules in same format as recordings of live training. END OF SECTION 01 79 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT ##21085 01 7900-5 MAY 2, 2023 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 01 91 13 - GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Section includes general requirements that apply to implementation of commissioning without regard to specific systems, assemblies, or components. B. Commissioning is systematic processes to provide documented confirmation that building systems perform according to the criteria set forth in the design intent and satisfy the owner's operational needs. The commissioning process shall encompass and coordinate the traditionally separate functions of system documentation, equipment startup, control system calibration, testing and balancing, performance testing and training. Commissioning, including Functional Tests, O&M documentation review, and training, is to occur after startup and initial checkout and be completed before Substantial Completion. C. Commissioning during the construction phase is intended to achieve the following specific objectives according to the Contract Documents: 1. Verify that applicable equipment and systems are installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations, construction documents and to industry accepted minimum standards and that they receive adequate operational checkout by installing contractors. Startup reports and Prefunctional Checklists executed by Contractor are utilized to achieve this. 2. Verify and document proper start-up and functional performance of equipment and systems and in addition, note any deficiencies. Functional Tests executed by Contractor and witnessed by the Commissioning Authority are utilized to achieve this. 3. Verify that O&M documentation submitted to owner/left on site is complete. 4. Verify that the Owner's operating personnel are adequately trained. D. The commissioning process does not take away from or reduce the responsibility of the system designers or installing contractors to provide a finished and fully functioning product. E. Abbreviations. The following are common abbreviations used in the Specifications and in the Commissioning Plan. Definitions are found in Section 1.03. A/E- Architect and design engineers GC- General contractor(prime) CxA- Commissioning authority MC- Mechanical contractor CC- Controls contractor OR- Owner's Representative CM- Construction Manager PC- Prefunctional checklist Cx- Commissioning PM- Project manager(of the Owner) Cx Plan- Commissioning Plan document Subs- Subcontractors to General EC- Electrical contractor TAB- Test and balance contractor FT- Functional performance test FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 01 91 13-1 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 General Commissioning Requirements MAY 2, 2023 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 F. Related Sections 1. Division 22 Section "Commissioning of Plumbing" for commissioning process activities for plumbing systems, assemblies, equipment, and components. 2. Division 23 Section "Commissioning of HVAC" for commissioning process activities for HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and components. 3. Division 26 Section "Commissioning of Electrical Systems" for commissioning process activities for electrical systems, assemblies, equipment, and components. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. OPR and BoD documentation are included by reference for information only. C. ASHRAE Guideline 0-2005. ASHRAE Guideline 1.1-2007. D. Building Commissioning Association checklists. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Acceptance Phase: Phase of construction after startup and initial checkout when functional performance tests, O&M documentation review and training occurs. B. Approval: Acceptance that a piece of equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning in the tested modes according to the Contract Documents. C. Architect/Engineer (AXh The prime consultant (architect) and sub-consultants who comprise the design team, generally the HVAC mechanical designer/engineer and the electrical designer/engineer. D. Basis of Design (BOD): A document that records concepts, calculations, decisions, and product selections used to meet the OPR and to satisfy applicable regulatory requirements, standards, and guidelines. The document includes both narrative descriptions and lists of individual items that support the design process. E. Commissioning Authority (CxA): An independent agent, not otherwise associated with the A/E team members or the Contractor, hired by the Owner. The CxA directs and coordinates the day-to-day commissioning activities. The CxA does not take an oversight role like the CM. The CxA is part of the Construction Manager(CM) team or shall report directly to the CM. F. Commissioning Plan Cx Plank A document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of resources, and documentation requirements of the commissioning process. G. Commissioning Process: A quality-focused process for enhancing the delivery of a project. The process focuses upon verifying and documenting that the facility and its FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 91 13-2 MAY 2, 2023 General Commissioning Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 systems and assemblies identified herein are planned, designed, installed, tested, operated, and maintained to meet the Owners Project Requirements. H. Datalogging, Monitoring flows, currents, status, pressures, etc. of equipment using stand-alone dataloggers separate from the control system. L Deferred Functional Tests: FTs that are performed later, after substantial completion, due to partial occupancy, equipment, seasonal requirements, design or other site conditions that disallow the test from being performed. J. Deficiency: A condition in the installation or function of a component, piece of equipment or system that is not in compliance with the Contract Documents (that is, does not perform properly or is not complying with the design intent). K. Design Intent: A dynamic document that provides the explanation of the ideas, concepts and criteria that are considered to be very important to the owner. It is initially the outcome of the programming and conceptual design phases. L. Design Narrative or Design Documentation: Sections of either the Design Intent or Basis of Design. M. Factory Testing Testing of equipment on-site or at the factory by factory personnel with an Owner's representative present. N. Functional Performance Test (FT) Test of the dynamic function and operation of equipment and systems using manual (direct observation) or monitoring methods. Functional testing is the dynamic testing of systems (rather than just components) under full operation (e.g., the chiller pump is tested interactively with the chiller functions to see if the pump ramps up and down to maintain the differential pressure setpoint). Systems are tested under various modes, such as during low cooling or heating loads, high loads, component failures, unoccupied, varying outside air temperatures, fire alarm, power failure, etc. The systems are run through all the control system's sequences of operation and components are verified to be responding as the sequences state. Traditional air or water test and balancing (TAB) is not functional testing, in the commissioning sense of the word. TAB's primary work is setting up the system flows and pressures as specified, while functional testing is verifying that which has already been set up. The commissioning authority develops the functional test procedures in a sequential written form, coordinates, oversees and documents the actual testing, which is usually performed by the installing contractor or vendor. FTs are performed after prefunctional checklists and startup are complete. O. General Contractor (GC. The prime contractor for this project. Generally refers to all the GC's subcontractors as well. Also referred to as the Contractor,in some contexts. P. Indirect Indicators: Indicators of a response or condition, such as a reading from a control system screen reporting a damper to be 100% closed. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 91 13-3 MAY 2, 2023 General Commissioning Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Q. Manual Test: Using hand-held instruments, immediate control system readouts or direct observation to verify performance (contrasted to analyzing monitored data taken over time to make the "observation"). R. Monitoring: The recording of parameters (flow, current, status, pressure, etc.) of equipment operation using dataloggers or the trending capabilities of control systems. S. Non-Compliance: See Deficiency. T. Non-Conformance: See Deficiency. U. Over-written Value: Writing over a sensor value in the control system to see the response of a system (e.g., changing the outside air temperature value from 50F to 75F to verify economizer operation). See also "Simulated Signal." V. Owner's Project Requirements (OPR): A document that details the functional requirements of a project and the expectations of how it will be used and operated. These include Project goals, measurable performance criteria, cost considerations, benchmarks, success criteria, and supporting information. W. Prefunctional Checklist (PC: A list of items to inspect and elementary component tests to conduct to verify proper installation of equipment, provided by the CxA to the Sub. Prefunctional checklists are primarily static inspections and procedures to prepare the equipment or system for initial operation (e.g., belt tension, oil levels OK, labels affixed, gages in place, sensors calibrated, etc.). However, some prefunctional checklist items entail simple testing of the function of a component, a piece of equipment or system (such as measuring the voltage imbalance on a three phase pump motor of a chiller system). The word prefunctional refers to before functional testing. Prefunctional checklists augment and are combined with the manufacturer's start-up checklist. Even without a commissioning process, contractors typically perform some, if not many, of the prefunctional checklist items a commissioning authority will recommend. However, few contractors document in writing the execution of these checklist items. Therefore, for most equipment, the contractors execute the checklists on their own. The commissioning authority only requires that the procedures be documented in writing, and does not witness much of the prefunctional checklisting, except for larger or more critical pieces of equipment. X. SamplinL. Functionally testing only a fraction of the total number of identical or near identical pieces of equipment. Y. Seasonal Performance Tests: FT that are deferred until the system(s) will experience conditions closer to their design conditions. Z. Simulated Condition: Condition that is created for the purpose of testing the response of a system (e.g., applying a hair blower to a space sensor to see the response in a VAV box). FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 91 13-4 MAY 2, 2023 General Commissioning Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 AA. Simulated Signal: Disconnecting a sensor and using a signal generator to send an amperage, resistance or pressure to the transducer and DDC system to simulate a sensor value. BB. Systems, Subsystems,Equipment, and Components: Where these terms are used together or separately, they shall mean "as-built" systems, subsystems, equipment, and components. CC. Startup: The initial starting or activating of dynamic equipment, including executing prefunctional checklists. DD. Subcontractor (Subs): The subcontractors to the GC who provide and install building components and systems. EE. Test Procedures: The step-by-step process which must be executed to fulfill the test requirements. The test procedures are developed by the CxA. FF. Test Requirements: Requirements specifying what modes and functions, etc. shall be tested. The test requirements are not the detailed test procedures. The test requirements are specified in the Contract Documents. GG. Trending: Monitoring using the building control system. HH. Vendor: Supplier of equipment. II. Warranty Period: Warranty period for entire project, including equipment components. Warranty begins at Substantial Completion and extends for at least one year, unless specifically noted otherwise in the Contract Documents and accepted submittals. 1.04 COORDINATION A. Commissioning Team. The members of the commissioning team consist of the Commissioning authority (CxA), the Owner's Representative (OR), the designated representative of the owner's Construction Management firm (CM), the General Contractor (GC or Contractor), the architect and design engineers (particularly the mechanical engineer), the Mechanical Contractor (MC), the Electrical Contractor (EC), the TAB representative, the Controls Contractor(CC), any other installing subcontractors or suppliers of equipment. If known, the Owner's building or plant operator/engineer is also a member of the commissioning team. B. Management. The CxA is hired by the Owner directly. The CxA directs and coordinates the commissioning activities and the reports to the OR. All members work together to fulfill their contracted responsibilities and meet the objectives of the Contract Documents. C. Scheduling. The CxA will work with the CM and GC according to established protocols to schedule the commissioning activities. The CxA will provide sufficient notice to the CM and GC for scheduling commissioning activities. The GC will integrate all commissioning activities into the master schedule. All parties will address scheduling FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 91 13-5 MAY 2, 2023 General Commissioning Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 problems and make necessary notifications in a timely manner in order to expedite the commissioning process. D. The CxA will provide the initial schedule of primary commissioning events at the commissioning scoping meeting. The Commissioning Plan Construction Phase provides a format for this schedule. As construction progresses more detailed schedules are developed by the CxA. 1.05 COMMISSIONING PROCESS A. Commissioning Plan. The Commissioning Plan, provided as part of the bid documents, is binding on the Contractor. The commissioning plan provides guidance in the execution of the commissioning process. Just after the initial commissioning scoping meeting the CxA will update the plan which is then considered the"final"plan,though it will continue to evolve and expand as the project progresses. The Specifications will take precedence over the Commissioning Plan. B. Commissioning Process. The following narrative provides a brief overview of the typical commissioning tasks during construction and the general order in which they occur. 1. Commissioning during construction begins with a scoping meeting conducted by the CxA where the commissioning process is reviewed with the commissioning team members. 2. Additional meetings will be required throughout construction, scheduled by the CxA with necessary parties attending, to plan, scope, coordinate, schedule future activities and resolve problems. 3. Equipment documentation is submitted to the CxA during normal submittals, including detailed start-up procedures. The CxA reviews for LEED/Cx Specific items. 4. The CxA works with the Subs in developing startup plans and startup documentation formats, including providing the Subs with prefunctional checklists to be completed, during the startup process. 5. In general, the checkout and performance verification proceeds from simple to complex; from component level to equipment to systems and intersystem levels with prefunctional checklists being completed before functional testing. 6. The Subs, under their own direction, execute and document the prefunctional checklists and perform startup and initial checkout for all equipment and systems. The CxA documents that the checklists and startup were completed according to the approved plans. This may include the CxA witnessing start-up of selected equipment. 7. The CxA develops specific equipment and system functional performance test procedures. The Subs review the procedures. 8. The procedures are executed by the Subs,under the direction of, and documented by the CxA. 9. Items of non-compliance in material, installation or setup are corrected at the Sub's expense and the system retested. 10. Commissioning is completed before Substantial Completion. 11. Deferred testing is conducted, as specified or required. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 91 13-6 MAY 2, 2023 General Commissioning Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1.06 COMMISSIONING TEAM A. Members Appointed by Contractor(s): Individuals, each having the authority to act on behalf of the entity he or she represents, explicitly organized to implement the commissioning process through coordinated action. The commissioning team shall consist of, but not be limited to, the Construction Manager (CM) and representatives of the Contractor, including Project superintendent and subcontractors, installers, suppliers, and specialists deemed appropriate by the CxA. B. Members Appointed by Owner 1. CxA: The designated person, company, or entity that plans, schedules, and coordinates the commissioning team to implement the commissioning process. Owner will engage the CxA under a separate contract. 2. Representatives of the facility user and operation and maintenance personnel. 3. The Owners Representative. 4. Architect and engineering design professionals. 1.07 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. The owner shall participate in and perform commissioning process activities, including, but not limited to the following: 1. Provide the OPR documentation to the CxA and Contractor for information and use. 2. Assign operation and maintenance personnel and schedule them to participate in commissioning team activities. 3. Provide the BoD documentation, prepared by Design Team and approved by Owner, to the CxA and Contractor for use in developing the commissioning plan, systems manual, and operation and maintenance training plan. 4. Follow the Commissioning Plan. 5. Attend commissioning scoping meetings and additional meetings as necessary. 1.08 ADDITIONAL OWNER OR OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES (If Applicable) A. The Owner's or designated owners Representative shall represent the Owner during the commissioning process activities,including,but not limited to the following: 1. Manage the contract of the A/E, CxA, CM and Contractor. 2. Arrange for facility operating and maintenance personnel to attend various field commissioning activities and field training sessions according to the Commissioning Plan— Construction Phase. 3. Provide final approval for the completion of the commissioning work. 4. Ensure that any seasonal or deferred testing and any deficiency issues are addressed. 5. Follow the Commissioning Plan. 6. Attend commissioning scoping meetings and additional meetings as necessary. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 91 13-7 MAY 2, 2023 General Commissioning Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 7. Will advise the Commissioning Authority of any changes to the building's use or occupancy. 1.09 ARCHITECT/ENGINEERS (AE) RESPONSIBILITIES A. The AE shall participate in and perform commissioning process activities including, but not limited to,the following: 1. Attend the commissioning scoping meeting and selected commissioning team meetings. 2. Perform normal submittal review, construction observation, as-built drawing preparation, O&M manual preparation, etc., as contracted. 3. Provide any design narrative and sequence documentation requested by the CxA. The designers shall assist (along with the contractors) in clarifying the operation and control of commissioned equipment in areas where the specifications, control drawings or equipment documentation is not sufficient for writing detailed testing procedures. 4. Coordinate resolution of system deficiencies identified during commissioning, according to the contract documents. 5. Prepare and submit final as-built design intent documentation for inclusion in the O&M manuals. Review and approve the O&M manuals. 6. Coordinate resolution of design non-conformance and design deficiencies identified during warranty-period commissioning. 7. Participate in the resolution of non-compliance, non-conformance and design deficiencies identified during commissioning during warranty-period commissioning. 1.10 CONSTRUCTION MANAGER'S (CM) or GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S (GC) RESPONSIBILITIES A. The construction manager shall participate in and perform commissioning process activities including,but not limited to the following: 1. Facilitate the coordination of the commissioning work by the CxA, and, with the GC and CxA, ensure that commissioning activities are being scheduled into the master schedule. 2. Review and approve the final Commissioning Plan—Construction Phase. 3. Attend a commissioning scoping meeting and other commissioning team meetings. 4. Perform the normal review of Contractor submittals. 5. Furnish a copy of all construction documents, addenda, requests for information, change orders and approved submittals and shop drawings related to commissioned equipment to the CxA. 6. Review and approve the functional performance test procedures submitted by the CxA,prior to testing. 7. Review commissioning progress and deficiency reports. 8. Coordinate the resolution of non-compliance and design deficiencies identified in all phases of commissioning. 9. Follow the Commissioning Plan. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 91 13-8 MAY 2, 2023 General Commissioning Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 10. Attend commissioning scoping meetings and additional meetings as necessary and ensure all relevant sub-contractors, installers, suppliers, and manufacturer's representatives attend. 11. Shall verify completeness of the building envelope, perimeter and interior items, which effect proper operation, and control of equipment and systems. 12. Will schedule, coordinate participation and cooperation of all subcontractors required for the commissioning process. 13. Shall develop a schedule for the following activities, and provide the Commissioning Authority no less than(7) seven working days' notice prior to all duct air leakage tests, piping hydrostatic pressure tests, startups of equipment/systems listed in the Systems to be commissioned paragraph of this section, and air and water balancing. 1.11 GENERAL CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor shall assign representatives with expertise and authority to act on its behalf and shall schedule them to participate in and perform commissioning process activities including,but not limited to, the following: 1. Evaluate performance deficiencies identified in test reports and, in collaboration with entity responsible for system and equipment installation, recommend corrective action. 2. Cooperate with the CxA for resolution of issues recorded in the Issues Log. 3. Attend commissioning team meetings as requested. 4. Integrate and coordinate commissioning process activities with construction schedule. 5. Review commissioning progress and deficiency reports. 6. Review and accept construction checklists provided by the CxA. 7. Complete paper or electronic construction checklists as Work is completed and provide to the CxA. 8. Review and accept commissioning process test procedures provided by the Commissioning Authority. 9. Complete commissioning process test procedures. 10. Include the cost of commissioning in the total contract price. 11. Coordinate the training of Owner personnel and provide the times and dates of training to the CxA. 12. Execute seasonal or deferred functional performance testing verified by the CxA to facilitate the Cx process. 13. Provide a list of final settings, setpoints, ranges, schedules, and / or trend logs required by the CxA. 14. Follow the Commissioning Plan. 15. Attend commissioning scoping meetings and additional meetings as necessary. 16. Perform and document all testing calibration and balancing as required, in conjunction with applicable sub-contractors. 17. Collect data for equipment and systems preventative maintenance. 18. Provide records of required code authority inspections, documentation sign-offs, etc. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 91 13-9 MAY 2, 2023 General Commissioning Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 19. Provide all requested shop drawings and submittal data, including installation guides, detailed start-up procedures, O+M manuals, certifications and specific responsibilities of the Owner to keep warranties in force. 1.12 SUB-CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Contractor shall assign representatives with expertise and authority to act on its behalf and shall schedule them to participate in and perform commissioning process activities including,but not limited to,the following: I. Provide all requested shop drawings and submittal data, including installation guides, detailed start-up procedures, O+M Manuals, certifications and specific responsibilities of the Owner to keep warranties in force. 2. Assist in equipment testing per agreements with General Contractor. 3. Include all special tools and instruments (only available from vendor, specific to a piece of equipment) required for testing equipment according to these Contract Documents in the base bid price to the Contractor. 4. Provide information requested by CxA regarding equipment sequence of operation and testing procedures. 5. Review test procedures for equipment installed by factory representatives. 6. Follow the Commissioning Plan. 7. Attend commissioning scoping meetings and additional meetings as necessary. 8. Prefer and document all Testing, Calibration, and Balancing as required, in conjunction with General Contractor. 9. Will be responsible for providing labor, material equipment, etc., required within the scope of their specialty to facilitate the commissioning process. 10. Shall assist the General Contractor/Construction Manager in the development of the master schedule as relates to commissioning, Testing and Balance tasks and milestones. 11. The Contractor shall provide all materials, services, and labor required to perform the pre-commissioning checks and functional performance tests and to correct all deficiencies. 12. Compile and provide As-Built Documents. 1.13 EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS RESPONSIBILITIES A. The equipment suppliers shall assign representatives with expertise and authority to act on its behalf and shall schedule them to participate in and perforin commissioning process activities including,but not limited to,the following: 1. Provide all requested submittal data, including detailed start-up procedures and specific responsibilities of the Owner to keep warranties in force. 2. Assist in equipment testing per agreements with Subs. 3. Include all special tools and instruments (only available from vendor, specific to a piece of equipment) required for testing equipment according to these Contract Documents in the base bid price to the Contractor. 4. Through the contractors they supply products to, analyze specified products and verify that the designer has specified the newest most updated equipment reasonable for this project's scope and budget. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 91 13-10 MAY 2, 2023 General Commissioning Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 5. Provide information requested by CxA regarding equipment sequence of operation and testing procedures. 6. Review test procedures for equipment installed by factory representatives. 7. Follow the Commissioning Plan. 8. Attend commissioning scoping meetings and additional meetings as necessary. 1.14 CxA'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. The CxA is not responsible for design concept, design criteria, compliance with codes, design or general construction scheduling, cost estimating, or construction management. The CxA may assist with problem-solving non-conformance or deficiencies, but ultimately that responsibility resides with the general contractor and the A/E. The primary role of the CxA is to develop and coordinate the execution of a testing plan, observe and document performance—that systems are functioning in accordance with the documented design intent and in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Contractors will provide all tools or the use of tools to start, check-out and functionally test equipment and systems. 1. Review OPR and BOD. 2. Coordinates and directs the commissioning activities using consistent protocols and forms, centralized documentation, clear and regular communications and consultations with all necessary parties, frequently updated timelines and schedules and technical expertise. 3. Coordinate the commissioning work and, with the GC and/or CM, ensure that commissioning activities are being scheduled into the master schedule. 4. Revise, as necessary,the Commissioning Plan—Construction Phase. 5. Plan and conduct a commissioning scoping meeting and other commissioning meetings. 6. Request and review additional information required to perform commissioning tasks, including submittals (as needed), O&M materials (as needed), contractor start-up and checkout procedures to comply with BOD and OPR. 7. Before startup, gather and review the current control sequences and interlocks and work with contractors and design engineers until sufficient clarity has been obtained,in writing,to be able to write detailed testing procedures. 8. Write and distribute prefunctional tests and checklists. 9. Develop a start-up and initial systems checkout plan with Subs. 10. Perform site visits, as necessary, to observe component and system installations. Attends selected planning and job-site meetings to obtain information on construction progress. Review construction meeting minutes for revisions/substitutions relating to the commissioning process. Assist in resolving any discrepancies. 11. Verify the HVAC piping test and flushing procedure, sufficient to be confident that proper procedures were followed. Document this testing and include the documentation in the final Commissioning Plan. Notify owner's representative of any deficiencies in results or procedures. 12. Verify the ductwork testing and cleaning procedures, sufficient to be confident that proper procedures were followed. Document this testing and include the documentation in the final Commissioning Plan. Notify owner's representative of any deficiencies in results or procedures. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 91 13-11 MAY 2, 2023 General Commissioning Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 13. Approve prefunctional tests and checklist completion by reviewing prefunctional checklist reports and by selected site observation and spot checking. 14. Approve systems startup by reviewing start-up reports and by selected site observation. 15. Review TAB execution plan,provided by others. 16. Review all Testing, Calibration, and Balancing,performed by others. 17. Approve air and water systems by reviewing completed reports. 18. With necessary assistance and review from installing contractors, write the functional performance test procedures for equipment and systems. Submit to CM for review, and for approval if required. 19. Coordinate, witness, and verify and approve manual functional performance tests performed by installing contractors, . Coordinate retesting as necessary until satisfactory performance is achieved. 20. Maintain a master deficiency and resolution log and a separate testing record. Provide the CM with written progress reports and test results with recommended actions. 21. Review equipment warranties to ensure that the Owner's responsibilities are clearly defined. 22. Provide a final commissioning report. 23. Coordinate and supervise required seasonal or deferred testing and deficiency corrections. 1.15 SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED A. Observations shall be conducted to ensure compliance with the project specifications and manufacturer's installation instructions. These observations shall include, but not be limited to the following building systems and activities: 1. Air handling, distribution, and ventilation systems. 2. Heating systems. 3. Cooling systems. 4. Lighting systems. 5. Hydronic systems. 6. Piping. 7. Controls. 8. Building automation systems. 9. Plumbing systems,Domestic hot water. 10. On-site equipment storage. 11. Indoor air quality methods and procedures. 12. Select electrical systems if related to the LEED equipment/systems as defined in 1.04.A. 13. Verify and document testing, pressure testing, leakage testing, flushing, and cleaning. 14. Refrigeration equipment. 15. On-site renewable energy systems. B. Refer to the Commission Plan for specific systems to be commissioned. PART 2-PRODUCTS FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 91 13-12 MAY 2, 2023 General Commissioning Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2.01 SUBCONTRACTOR AND GENERAL CONTRACTOR TEST EQUIPMENT A. All standard testing equipment required to perform startup and initial checkout, required functional performance testing and deficiency remediation shall be provided by the Division contractor for the equipment being tested. For example, the mechanical contractor of Division 23 shall ultimately be responsible for all standard testing equipment for the HVAC system and controls system in Division 23, except for equipment specific to and used by TAB in their commissioning responsibilities. Unless otherwise noted, testing equipment will not become property of the owner. B. Special equipment, tools and instruments (only available from vendor, specific to a piece of equipment) required for testing equipment, according to these Contract Documents shall be included in the base bid price to the Contractor and left on site. C. All testing equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system performance with the tolerances specified in the Specifications. If not otherwise noted, the following minimum requirements apply: Temperature sensors and digital thermometers shall have a certified calibration within the past year to an accuracy of 0.5°F and a resolution of+ or - 0.1°F. Pressure sensors shall have an accuracy of+ or - 2.0% of the value range being measured (not full range of meter) and have been calibrated within the last year. All equipment shall be calibrated according to the manufacturer's recommended intervals and when dropped or damaged. Calibration tags shall be affixed or certificates readily available. D. Dataloggers: Independent equipment and software for monitoring flows, currents, status, pressures, etc. of equipment. Dataloggers required to for Functional Tests will be provided by the installing contractor and will not become the property of Owner. E. Refer to Section 01 91 13, Part 3.05 E for details regarding equipment that may be required to simulate required test conditions. 2.02 SUBMITTALS A. The construction manager shall provide the following: 1. Provide a list of commissioning team members who will represent the Contractor in the pre-commissioning checks and functional performance testing, at least two (2)weeks prior to the start of pre-commissioning checks. 2. Test schedule: Provide schedule for pre-commissioning checks, at least two (2) weeks prior to the start of pre-commissioning. 3. Test Procedures: Provide detailed procedures for pre-commissioning checks, at least four(4)weeks prior to the start of pre-commissioning checks. 4. Test Reports: Provide completed pre-commissioning checklists organized by system and by subsystems and submitted as one package. The results of failed tests shall be included along with a description of the corrective active taken. 5. Submit required preventative maintenance equipment data sheets to the commissioning Authority within 120 days of equipment approval by the design Architect. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 91 13-13 MAY 2, 2023 General Commissioning Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 6. Submit Operations and Maintenance data for systems and equipment being commissioned under this specification, as specified elsewhere and as applicable in accordance with ASHRAE Guideline 4-2008. Operations and Maintenance data shall be submitted 2 weeks prior to the beginning of Field Installation Verification work. 7. Deliver the required extra materials to a location designated by the Owner no later that 2 weeks prior to the start of the Functional Performance Test phase. 8. Submit the final Testing and Balance report for review and approval to the Commissioning Authority and the Architect within 1 week of completion of work and at least two (2) full working days prior to the commencement of Functional Performance Test. 9. Provide startup plans and reports. B. The CxA shall provide the following: 1. Commissioning Plan. 2. Prefunctional Checklists. 3. Functional Checklists. 4. Review of applicable submittals and shop drawings. 5. Final Cx Report. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 MEETINGS A. Scoping Meeting. The CxA will schedule, plan and conduct a commissioning scoping meeting with the entire commissioning team in attendance. Meeting minutes will be distributed to all parties by the CxA. Information gathered from this meeting will allow the CxA to revise the Commissioning Plan to its "final" version, which will also be distributed to all parties. B. Miscellaneous Meetings. Other meetings will be planned and conducted by the CxA as construction progresses. These meetings will cover coordination, deficiency resolution and planning issues with particular Subs. The CxA will plan these meetings and will minimize unnecessary time being spent by Subs. 3.02 REPORTING A. The CxA will provide all reports to the CM and the OR. Standard forms are provided and referenced in the Commissioning Plan. B. The CxA will regularly communicate with all members of the commissioning team, keeping them apprised of commissioning progress and scheduling changes through memos,progress reports, etc. C. Testing or review approvals and non-conformance and deficiency reports are made regularly with the review and testing as described in later sections. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 91 13-14 MAY 2, 2023 General Commissioning Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 D. A final summary report by the CxA will be provided to the CM and OR, focusing on evaluating commissioning process issues and identifying areas where the process could be improved. All acquired documentation, logs, minutes, reports, deficiency lists, communications, findings, unresolved issues, etc., will be compiled in appendices and provided with the summary report. Prefunctional checklists, functional tests and monitoring reports will not be part of the final report, but will be stored in the Commissioning Record in the O&M manuals. 3.03 START-UP,PREFUNCTIONAL CHECKLISTS AND INITIAL CHECKOUT A. The following procedures apply to all equipment to be commissioned, according to Section 1.13, Systems to be Commissioned. Some systems that are not comprised so much of actual dynamic machinery, e.g., electrical system power quality, may have very simplified PCs and startup. B. General. Prefunctional checklists are important to ensure that the equipment and systems are hooked up and operational. It ensures that functional performance testing (in-depth system checkout) may proceed without unnecessary delays. Each piece of equipment receives full prefunctional checkout. No samplingstrategies trategies are used. The prefunctional testing for a given system must be successfully completed prior to formal functional performance testing of equipment or subsystems of the given system. C. Start-up and Initial Checkout Plan. The CxA shall assist the commissioning team members responsible for startup of any equipment in developing detailed start-up plans for all equipment. The primary role of the CxA in this process is to ensure that there is written documentation that each of the manufacturer-recommended procedures have been completed. Parties responsible for prefunctional checklists and startup are identified in the commissioning scoping meeting and in the checklist forms. Parties responsible for executing functional performance tests are identified in the testing requirements in Sections 23 08 00 and 26 08 00. 1. The CxA adapts, if necessary, the representative prefunctional checklists and procedures. These checklists indicate required procedures to be executed as part of startup and initial checkout of the systems and the party responsible for their execution. 2. These checklists and tests are provided by the CxA to the Contractor. The Contractor determines which trade is responsible for executing and documenting each of the line item tasks and notes that trade on the form. Each form will have more than one trade responsible for its execution. 3. The subcontractor responsible for the purchase of the equipment develops the full start-up plan by combining (or adding to) the CxA's checklists with the manufacturer's detailed start-up and checkout procedures from the O&M manual and the normally used field checkout sheets. The plan will include checklists and procedures with specific boxes or lines for recording and documenting the checking and inspections of each procedure and a summary statement with a signature block at the end of the plan. The full start-up plan could consist of something as simple as: a. The CxA's prefunctional checklists. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 91 13-15 MAY 2, 2023 General Commissioning Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 b. The manufacturer's standard written start-up procedures copied from the installation manuals with check boxes by each procedure and a signature block added by hand at the end. C. The manufacturer's normally used field checkout sheets. 4. The subcontractor submits the full startup plan to the CxA for review and approval. 5. The CxA reviews and approves the procedures and the format for documenting them, noting any procedures that need to be added. 6. The full start-up procedures and the approval form may be provided to the CM for review and approval, depending on management protocol. 7. No sampling of identical products is allowed. D. Sensor and Actuator Calibration. 1. All field-installed temperature, relative humidity, CO, CO2 and pressure sensors and gages, and all actuators (dampers and valves) on all equipment shall be calibrated using the methods described below. Alternate methods may be used, if approved by the Owner before-hand. All test instruments shall have had a certified calibration within the last 12 months. Sensors installed in the unit at the factory with calibration certification provided need not be field calibrated. 2. All procedures used shall be fully documented on the prefunctional checklists or other suitable forms, clearly referencing the procedures followed and written documentation of initial, intermediate and final results. 3. Sensor Calibration Methods. a. All Sensors. Verify that all sensor locations are appropriate and away from causes of erratic operation. Verify that sensors with shielded cable, are grounded only at one end. For sensor pairs that are used to determine a temperature or pressure difference, make sure they are reading within 0.2°F of each other for temperature and within a tolerance equal to 2% of the reading, of each other, for pressure. Tolerances for critical applications may be tighter. b. Sensors Without Transmitters--Standard Application. Make a reading with a calibrated test instrument within 6 inches of the site sensor. Verify that the sensor reading (via the permanent thermostat or gage) is within the tolerances in the table below of the instrument-measured value. Tolerances, Standard Applications Required Required Sensor Tolerance Sensor Tolerance (+/- Cooling coil, chilled and Flow rates,water 4% of design condenser water temps OAF Relative humidity 4% of design AHU wet bulb or dew point 2.OF Combustion flue temps 5.017 Heating coil and boiler water 1.5F Oxygen or CO2 monitor 0.1 %pts temp Outside air, space air, duct air OAF CO monitor 0.01 %pts temps Watthour,voltage&amperage 1% of design Natural gas and oil flow rate 1% of design FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 91 13-16 MAY 2, 2023 General Commissioning Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Pressures, air,water and gas 3% of design Steam flow rate 3% of design Flow rates, air 10% of design Barometric pressure 0.1 in. of Hg 4. Valve and Damper Stroke Setup and Check. a. Set pumps or fans to normal operating mode. Command valve or damper closed, visually verify that valve or damper is closed and adjust output zero signal as required. Command valve or damper open, verify position is full open and adjust output signal as required. Command valve or damper to a few intermediate positions. If actual valve or damper position doesn't reasonably correspond, replace actuator or add pilot positioner. 5. Closure for cooling coil valves (NC): Set cooling setpoint 20°F above room temperature. Observe the valve close. Remove control air or power from the valve and verify that the valve stem and actuator position do not change. Restore to normal. Set cooling setpoint to 20°F below room temperature. Observe valve open. E. Execution of Prefunctional Checklists and Startup. 1. Four weeks prior to startup, the Subs and vendors schedule startup and checkout with the CM, GC and CxA. The performance of the prefunctional checklists, startup and checkout are directed and executed by the Sub or vendor. When checking off prefunctional checklists, signatures may be required of other Subs for verification of completion of their work. 2. The CxA shall verify the procedures for each piece of primary equipment, unless there are multiple units, (in which case a sampling strategy may be used as approved by the CM). In no case will the number of units verified be less than four on any one building, nor less than 20% of the total number of identical or very similar units. 3. For lower-level components of equipment, (e.g., fan-coil units, sensors, controllers), the CxA shall observe a sampling of the prefunctional and start-up procedures. The sampling procedures are identified in the commissioning plan. 4. The Subs and vendors shall execute startup and provide the CxA with a signed and dated copy of the completed start-up and prefunctional tests and checklists. 5. Only individuals that have direct knowledge and witnessed that a line item task on the prefunctional checklist was actually performed shall initial or check that item off. It is not acceptable for witnessing supervisors to fill out these forms. F. Deficiencies,Non-Conformance and Approval in Checklists and Startup. 1. The Subs shall clearly list any outstanding items of the initial start-up and prefunctional procedures that were not completed successfully, at the bottom of the procedures form or on an attached sheet. The procedures form and any outstanding deficiencies are provided to the CxA within two days of test completion. 2. The CxA reviews the report and submits either a non-compliance report or an approval form to the Sub or CM. The CxA shall work with the Subs and vendors to correct and retest deficiencies or uncompleted items. The CxA will involve the CM and others as necessary. The installing Subs or vendors shall correct all areas that are deficient or incomplete in the checklists and tests in a timely FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 91 13-17 MAY 2, 2023 General Commissioning Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 manner, and shall notify the CxA as soon as outstanding items have been corrected and resubmit an updated start-up report and a Statement of Correction on the original non-compliance report. When satisfactorily completed, the CxA recommends approval of the execution of the checklists and startup of each system to the CM using a standard form. 3. Items left incomplete, which later cause deficiencies or delays during functional testing may result in back charges to the responsible party. Refer to Part 3.06 herein for details. 3.04 PHASED COMMISSIONING A. The project requires TAB, startup and performance testing to be executed in phases. Phasing shall be coordinated with the owner/CM, CxA, and A/E and be reflected in the overall project schedule and commissioning schedule by the contractor. Final performance testing of all systems will be as required by the phasing plan. TAB tests shall be completed prior to system performance testing. The performance testing of the "systems as a whole"will be performed before final turnover of the entire project. 3.05 FUNCTIONAL PERFORMANCE TESTING A. This sub-section applies to all commissioning functional testing for all divisions. B. The general list of equipment to be commissioned is found in the commissioning plan. C. The parties responsible to execute each test are listed with each test in the commissioning plan. D. Objectives and Scope. The objective of functional performance testing is to demonstrate that each system is operating according to the documented design intent and Contract Documents. Functional testing facilitates bringing the systems from a state of substantial completion to full dynamic operation. Additionally, during the testing process, areas of deficient performance are identified and corrected, improving the operation and functioning of the systems. 1. In general, each system should be operated through all modes of operation (occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, cool-down, part- and full-load)where there is a specified system response. Verifying each sequence in the sequences of operation is required. Proper responses to such modes and conditions as power failure, freeze condition, low oil pressure, no flow, equipment failure, etc. shall also be tested. Specific modes required in this project are given are based on the contract document requirements. 2. Development of Test Procedures. Before test procedures are written, the CxA shall obtain all requested documentation and a current list of change orders affecting equipment or systems, program code, control sequences and parameters. Using the testing parameters and requirements in Sections 23 08 00 and 26 08 00 the CxA shall develop specific test procedures and forms to verify and document proper operation of each piece of equipment and system. Each Sub or vendor responsible to execute a test, shall provide limited assistance to the CxA in developing the procedures review(answering questions about equipment, FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 91 13-18 MAY 2, 2023 General Commissioning Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 operation, sequences, etc.). Prior to execution, the CxA shall provide a copy of the test procedures to the Sub(s) who shall review the tests for feasibility, safety, equipment and warranty protection. The CxA may submit the tests to the A/E for review, if requested. 3. The CxA shall review owner-contracted, factory testing or required owner acceptance tests which the CxA is not responsible to oversee, including documentation format, and shall determine what further testing or format changes may be required to comply with the Specifications. Redundancy of testing shall be minimized. 4. The purpose of any given specific test is to verify and document compliance with the stated criteria of acceptance given on the test form. 5. Representative test formats and examples (not designed for this facility) are found in the appendices to Divisions 22, 23, and 26. The test procedure forms developed by the CxA shall include (but not be limited to) the following information: a. System and equipment or component name(s) b. Equipment location and ID number C. Unique test ID number, and reference to unique prefunctional checklist and start-up documentation ID numbers for the piece of equipment d. Date e. Project name f. Participating parties g. A copy of the specification section describing the test requirements h. A copy of the specific sequence of operations or other specified parameters being verified i. Formulas used in any calculations j. Required pre-test field measurements k. Instructions for setting up the test. 1. Special cautions, alarm limits, etc. in. Specific step-by-step procedures to execute the test, in a clear, sequential and repeatable format n. Acceptance criteria of proper performance with a Yes/No check box to allow for clearly marking whether or not proper performance of each part of the test was achieved. o. A section for comments P. Signatures and date block for the CxA E. Test Methods. 1. Functional performance testing and verification may be achieved by manual testing (persons manipulate the equipment and observe performance) or by monitoring the performance and analyzing the results using the control system's trend log capabilities or by stand-alone dataloggers. Sections 23 99 51 and 26 99 51 specify which methods shall be used for each test. The CxA may substitute specified methods or require an additional method to be executed, other than what was specified, with the approval of the CM. This may require a change order and adjustment in charge to the Owner. The CxA will determine which method is most appropriate for tests that do not have a method specified. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 91 13-19 MAY 2, 2023 General Commissioning Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Simulated Conditions. Simulating conditions (not by an overwritten value) shall be allowed, though timing the testing to experience actual conditions is encouraged wherever practical. 3. Overwritten Values. Overwriting sensor values to simulate a condition, such as overwriting the outside air temperature reading in a control system to be something other than it really is, shall be allowed, but shall be used with caution and avoided when possible. Such testing methods often can only test a part of a system, as the interactions and responses of other systems will be erroneous or not applicable. Simulating a condition is preferable. e.g., for the above case, by heating the outside air sensor with a hair blower rather than overwriting the value or by altering the appropriate setpoint to see the desired response. Before simulating conditions or overwriting values, sensors, transducers and devices shall have been calibrated. 4. Simulated Signals. Using a signal generator which creates a simulated signal to test and calibrate transducers and DDC constants is generally recommended over using the sensor to act as the signal generator via simulated conditions or overwritten values. 5. Altering Setpoints. Rather than overwriting sensor values, and when simulating conditions is difficult, altering setpoints to test a sequence is acceptable. For example, to see the AC compressor lockout work at an outside air temperature below 55F, when the outside air temperature is above 55F, temporarily change the lockout setpoint to be 2F above the current outside air temperature. 6. Indirect Indicators. Relying on indirect indicators for responses or performance shall be allowed only after visually and directly verifying and documenting, over the range of the tested parameters, that the indirect readings through the control system represent actual conditions and responses. Much of this verification is completed during prefunctional testing. 7. Setup. Each function and test shall be performed under conditions that simulate actual conditions as close as is practically possible. The Sub executing the test shall provide all necessary materials, system modifications, etc. to produce the necessary flows, pressures, temperatures, etc. necessary to execute the test according to the specified conditions. At completion of the test, the Sub shall return all affected building equipment and systems, due to these temporary modifications,to their pre-test condition. 8. Sampling. Multiple identical pieces of non-life-safety or otherwise non-critical equipment may be functionally tested using a sampling strategy. Significant application differences and significant sequence of operation differences in otherwise identical equipment invalidates their common identity. A small size or capacity difference, alone, does not constitute a difference. The specific recommended sampling rates are specified with each type of equipment in the Sampling Procedures document. It is noted that no sampling by Subs is allowed in prefunctional checklist execution. Sampling is not allowed for major equipment or life safety equipment. a. A common sampling strategy referenced in the Specifications as the "xx% Samplingyy% Failure Rule" is defined by the following example. xx = the percent of the group of identical equipment to be included in each sample. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 91 13-20 MAY 2, 2023 General Commissioning Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 yy –the percent of the sample that if failing, will require another sample to be tested. b. The example below describes a 20% Sampling-10%Failure Rule. 1) Randomly test at least 20% (xx) of each group of identical equipment. In no case test less than three units in each group. This 20%, or three, constitute the "first sample." 2) If 10% (yy) of the units in the first sample fail the functional performance tests, test another 20% of the group (the second sample). 3) If 10% of the units in the second sample fail, test all remaining units in the whole group. 4) If at any point, frequent failures are occurring and testing is becoming more troubleshooting than verification, the CxA may stop the testing and require the responsible Sub to perform and document a checkout of the remaining units, prior to continuing with functionally testing the remaining units. F. Coordination and Scheduling. The Subs shall provide sufficient notice to the CxA regarding their completion schedule for the prefunctional checklists and startup of all equipment and systems. The CxA will schedule functional tests through the CM, GC and affected Subs. The CxA shall direct, witness and document the functional testing of all equipment and systems. The Subs shall execute the tests. 1. In general, functional testing is conducted after prefunctional testing and startup has been satisfactorily completed. The control system is sufficiently tested and approved by the CxA before it is used for TAB or to verify performance of other components or systems. The air balancing and water balancing is completed and debugged before functional testing of air-related or water-related equipment or systems. Testing proceeds from components to subsystems to systems. When the proper performance of all interacting individual systems has been achieved, the interface or coordinated responses between systems is checked. G. Test Equipment. Refer to Section 01 91 13,Part 2 for test equipment requirements. H. Problem Solving. The CxA will recommend solutions to problems found, however the burden of responsibility to solve, correct and retest problems is with the GC, Subs and A/E. 3.06 DOCUMENTATION,NON-CONFORMANCE AND APPROVAL OF TESTS A. Documentation. The CM or Subs shall verify and document (including the date) the results of all functional performance tests using the specific procedural forms developed for that purpose. Prior to testing, these forms are provided to the CM for review and approval and to the Subs for review. The CxA will include the filled out forms in final Commissioning Report. B. Non-Conformance. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 91 13-21 MAY 2, 2023 General Commissioning Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. The CM or Subs will record the results of the functional test on the procedure or test form. All deficiencies or non-conformance issues shall be noted and reported to the CM on a standard non-compliance form. 2. Corrections of minor deficiencies identified may be made during the tests at the discretion of the CxA. In such cases the deficiency and resolution will be documented on the procedure form. 3. Every effort will be made to expedite the testing process and minimize unnecessary delays, while not compromising the integrity of the procedures. However, the CxA will not be pressured into overlooking deficient work or loosening acceptance criteria to satisfy scheduling or cost issues, unless there is an overriding reason to do so at the request of the CM. 4. As tests progress and a deficiency is identified,the CxA discusses the issue with the executing contractor. a. When there is no dispute on the deficiency and the Sub accepts responsibility to correct it: 1) The CxA documents the deficiency and the Sub's response and intentions and they go on to another test or sequence. After the day's work, the CxA submits the non-compliance reports to the CM for signature, if required. A copy is provided to the Sub and CxA. The Sub corrects the deficiency, signs and dates the statement of correction at the bottom of the non-compliance form certifying that the equipment is ready to be retested and sends it back to the CxA. 2) The CxA reschedules the test and the test is repeated. b. If there is a dispute about a deficiency, regarding whether it is a deficiency or who is responsible: 1) The deficiency shall be documented on the non-compliance form with the Sub's response and a copy given to the CM and to the Sub representative assumed to be responsible. 2) Resolutions are made at the lowest management level possible. Other parties are brought into the discussions as needed. Final interpretive authority is with the A/E. Final acceptance authority is with the Project Manager. 3) The CxA documents the resolution process. 4) Once the interpretation and resolution have been decided, the appropriate party corrects the deficiency, signs the statement of correction on the non-compliance form and provides it to the CxA. The CxA reschedules the test and the test is repeated until satisfactory performance is achieved. 5. Cost of Retesting. a. The cost for the Sub to retest a prefunctional or functional test,if they are responsible for the deficiency, shall be theirs. If they are not responsible, any cost recovery for retesting costs shall be negotiated with the GC. b. For a deficiency identified, not related to any prefunctional checklist or start-up fault, the following shall apply: The CxA and CM will direct the retesting of the equipment once at no "charge" to the GC for their time. However, the CxA's and CM's time for a second retest will be charged to the GC,who may choose to recover costs from the responsible Sub. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 91 13-22 MAY 2, 2023 General Commissioning Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. The time for the CxA and CM to direct any retesting required because a specific prefunctional checklist or start-up test item, reported to have been successfully completed, but determined during functional testing to be faulty, will be backcharged to the GC, who may choose to recover costs from the party responsible for executing the faulty prefunctional test. d. Refer to the sampling section of Section 01 91 13, Part 3.05 for requirements for testing and retesting identical equipment. 6. The Contractor shall respond in writing to the CxA and CM at least as often as commissioning meetings are being scheduled concerning the status of each apparent outstanding discrepancy identified during commissioning. Discussion shall cover explanations of any disagreements and proposals for their resolution. 7. The CxA retains the original non-conformance forms until the end of the project. 8. Any required retesting by any contractor shall not be considered a justified reason for a claim of delay or for a time extension by the prime contractor. C. Failure Due to Manufacturer Defect. If 10%, or three, whichever is greater, of identical pieces (size alone does not constitute a difference) of equipment fail to perform to the Contract Documents (mechanically or substantively) due to manufacturing defect, not allowing it to meet its submitted performance spec, all identical units may be considered unacceptable by the CM or OR. In such case, the Contractor shall provide the Owner with the following: 1. Within one week of notification from the CM or OR, the Contractor or manufacturer's representative shall examine all other identical units making a record of the findings. The findings shall be provided to the CM or OR within two weeks of the original notice. 2. Within two weeks of the original notification, the Contractor or manufacturer shall provide a signed and dated, written explanation of the problem, cause of failures, etc. and all proposed solutions which shall include full equipment submittals. The proposed solutions shall not significantly exceed the specification requirements of the original installation. 3. The CM or OR will determine whether a replacement of all identical units or a repair is acceptable. 4. Two examples of the proposed solution will be installed by the Contractor and the CM will be allowed to test the installations for up to one week, upon which the CM or OR will decide whether to accept the solution. 5. Upon acceptance, the Contractor and/or manufacturer shall replace or repair all identical items, at their expense and extend the warranty accordingly, if the original equipment warranty had begun. The replacement/repair work shall proceed with reasonable speed beginning within one week from when parts can be obtained. D. Verification of Corrective Action Completed (by CxA): The CxA shall review the corrective actions performed by the applicable contractor and enter the resolution into the Corrective Action Log. E. Approval. The CxA notes each satisfactorily demonstrated function on the test form. Formal approval of the functional test is made later after review by the CxA and by the FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 91 13-23 MAY 2, 2023 General Commissioning Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 CM, if necessary. The CxA recommends acceptance of each test to the CM using a standard form. The CM gives final approval on each test using the same form, providing a signed copy to the CxA and the Contractor. 3.07 DEFERRED TESTING A. Unforeseen Deferred Tests. If any check or test cannot be completed due to the building structure, required occupancy condition or other deficiency, execution of checklists and functional testing may be delayed upon approval of the OR. These tests will be conducted in the same manner as the seasonal tests as soon as possible. Services of necessary parties will be negotiated. 3.08 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL A. The CM shall be responsible for training coordination and scheduling and ultimately for ensuring that training is completed. B. The CM shall be responsible for overseeing and approving the content and adequacy of the training of Owner personnel for commissioned equipment. 1. The CM shall interview the facility manager and lead engineer to determine the special needs and areas where training will be most valuable. The Owner and CM shall decide how rigorous the training should be for each piece of commissioned equipment. The CM shall communicate the results to the Subs and vendors who have training responsibilities. 2. Each Sub and vendor responsible for training will submit a written training plan to the CM for review and approval prior to training. The plan will cover the following elements: a. Equipment(included in training) b. Intended audience C. Location of training d. Objectives e. Subjects covered (description, duration of discussion, special methods, etc.) f. Duration of training on each subject g. Instructor for each subject h. Methods (classroom lecture, video, site walk-through, actual operational demonstrations,written handouts, etc.) i. Instructor and qualifications j. For the primary HVAC equipment, the Controls Contractor (if applicable) shall provide a short discussion of the control of the equipment during the mechanical or electrical training conducted by others. 3. The CM develops an overall training plan and coordinates and schedules, with the GC, the overall training for the commissioned systems. The CM develops criteria for determining that the training was satisfactorily completed, including attending some of the training, etc. The CxA recommends approval of the training to the CM using a standard form. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 91 13-24 MAY 2, 2023 General Commissioning Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.09 WRITTEN WORK PRODUCTS A. The commissioning process generates a number of written work products described in various parts of the Specifications. The Commissioning Plan Construction Phase, lists all the formal written work products, describes briefly their contents, who is responsible to create them, their due dates, who receives and approves them and the location of the specification to create them. In summary,the written products are: Product Developed BX 1. Final commissioning plan CxA 2. Cx meeting minutes CxA 3. Commissioning schedules CxA with GC and CM 4. Equipment documentation submittals Subs 5. Sequence clarifications Subs and A/E as needed 6. Prefunctional checklists CxA 7. Startup and initial checkout plan Subs and CxA(compilation of existing documents) 8. Startup and initial checkout forms Subs filled out 9. Progress Reports GC, CM, Subs 10. Final TAB report TAB 11. Issues log (deficiencies) CxA 12. Commissioning Progress Record CxA 13. Deficiency reports CxA 14. Functional test forms CxA 15. Filled out functional tests CxA 16. O&M manuals Subs 17. Commissioning record book CxA 18. Overall training plan CM 19. Specific training agendas Subs 20. Final commissioning report CxA 21. Misc. approvals CxA B. The Commissioning Authority shall provide the final commissioning report (one (1) electronic copy suitable for printing/copying). The organization, layout, and content shall be as submitted and approved with the initial commissioning plan shall contain as a minimum the following information. 1. Cover sheet with following information: a. Date. b. Project and address. C. Architect. d. Engineer. e. General Contractor. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 91 13-25 MAY 2, 2023 General Commissioning Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 f. Commissioning Authority(name, address, e-mail, fax&phone number). 2. Preliminary anticipated index to include the following: a. Final updated Commissioning Plan. b. Name, address,phone, fax, e-mail for commissioning team members. C. Completed copies of: 1) Executive Summary Report. 2) Corrective Action Report. 3. Completed Field installation Verification Operational Performance Test & Functional Performance Test forms. 4. Copies of Request for Information a. Copies of inspection and construction observation reports. b. Copy of equipment and system certification form with listing of equipment and systems commissioned. C. Copies of completed component test forms. Example: Hydrostatic and duct air leak test forms. C. Progress reports shall be distributed to keep all parties informed of the commissioning process. Progress reports shall include: 1. Activities since the last report. 2. Description of changes to the commissioning schedule, Commissioning Plan, and design; along with their effect on the OPR and BOD. 3. Listing of equipment and systems not passing verification inspections, functional performance tests, or acceptance tests. 4. Follow-up all of all items listed in the previous reports that required action. 5. Critical items that will occur in the next reporting period. D. Operations and maintenance manuals shall be organized into permanently labeled binders by the Mechanical, Electrical, and Plumbing sub-contractors with indexing tab section dividers and a table of contents. The organization, layout, and content shall be as defined in this section of the specifications. Manual content shall include, but not be limited to the following data. 1. Detailed description of each system and each of its components. 2. Wiring and control diagrams, with data to explain detailed operation and control of each component. 3. Control sequences describing start-up, all modes of operation, and shutdown. 4. Installation instructions. 5. Maintenance and overhaul instructions. 6. Lubricating schedule including type, grade, temperature, and frequency range. 7. Corrected shop drawings. 8. Product information identifying all performance curves, rating data features, and options on all installed equipment. 9. Copies of approved certifications and laboratory test reports. 10. Copies of warranties. 11. Test procedures. 12. Parts list, including source of supply and recommended spare parts. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 91 13-26 MAY 2, 2023 General Commissioning Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 13. Name, address, and 24-hour telephone number of each subcontractor who installed equipment and systems and local representative for each type of equipment for each system. 14. Other pertinent data applicable to the operation and maintenance of particular systems or equipment and/or other data specified in technical sections of the specification. 15. Uninterruptable power supplies, including a list of equipment and design kW load on each. 16. Emergency power generation, including a list of equipment and design kW load on each. 17. The documentation during the construction phase shall be updated to match the equipment supplied on the project. 18. Procedures for starting, operation, and shutdown for every system, including all required emergency instructions and safety precautions. 19. Appropriate information gathered during the construction phase shall be added to the Operations and Maintenance Manual, including commissioning records. END OF SECTION O1 91 13 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 01 91 13-27 MAY 2, 2023 General Commissioning Requirements DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 03 11 00 - CONCRETE FORMWORK PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 REFERENCED DOCUMENTS A. The Drawings, Division 01 Specifications, and General Provisions and General and Supplemental Conditions of the Contract apply to work of this Section. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Design, fabrication, erection, and stripping of formwork for cast-in-place concrete including shoring, reshoring, falsework, bracing, proprietary forming systems, prefabricated forms, void forms, permanent metal forms, bulkheads, keys, blockouts, sleeves, pockets, and accessories. Erection shall include installation in formwork of items furnished by other trades. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 01 Section - Quality Requirements for Testing Laboratory Services. B. Division 03 Section - Reinforcing Steel. C. Division 03 Section - Cast in Place Concrete. D. Division 03 Section - Architectural Concrete. E. Division 32 Section - Portland Cement Concrete Paving. 1.04 REFERENCES A. The latest adopted edition of all standards referenced in this section shall apply, unless noted otherwise: 1. ACI 117 - Standard Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials. 2. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings. 3. ACI 347R - Guide to Formwork for Concrete. 4. ACI SP-4 - Formwork for Concrete. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Construct and erect concrete formwork in accordance with ACI 1 17, 301 and 347R. B. Forms,shores, reshores,falsework, bracing, and other temporary supports shall be designed by the Contractor to support all loads imposed during construction including weight of construction equipment, live loads, and lateral loads due to wind and imbalance or discontinuity of building components. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining when temporary supports and bracing may be safely removed, but in no case shall the curing time before form removal be less than specified herein. 1.06 TOLERANCES A. Construct formwork to provide completed concrete surfaces complying with the following tolerances: 1. Vertical alignment: a. Lines, surfaces and arises less than 100 feet in height - 1 inch. b. Outside corner of exposed corner columns and control joints in concrete exposed to view less than 100 feet in height - 1/2 inch. 2. Lateral alignment: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 03 11 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 CONCRETE FORMWORK DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 a. Members - 1 inch. b. Centerline of openings 12 inches or smaller and edge location of larger openings in slabs - 1/2 inch. c. Sawcuts, joints, and weakened plane embedments in slabs - 3/4 inch. 3. Level alignment: a. Elevation of slabs-on-grade - 3/4 inch. b. Elevation of top surfaces of formed slabs before removal of shores - 3/4 inch. c. Elevation of formed surfaces before removal of shores - 3/4 inch. d. Lintels, sills, parapets, horizontal grooves, and other lines exposed to view - 1/2 inch. 4. Cross-sectional dimensions: Overall dimensions of beams, joists, and columns and thickness of walls and slabs. a. 12 inch dimension or less - plus 3/8 inch to minus 1/4 inch. b. Greater than 12 inch to 3 foot dimension - plus 1/2 inch to minus 3/8 inch. c. Greater than 3 foot dimension - plus 1 inch to minus 3/4 inch. 5. Relative alignment: a. Stairs: 1) Difference in height between adjacent risers - 1/8 inch. 2) Difference in width between adjacent treads - 1/4 inch. 3) Maximum difference in height between risers in a flight of stairs - 3/8 inch. 4) Maximum difference in width between treads in a flight of stairs - 3/8 inch. b. Vertical alignment of outside corner of exposed corner columns and control joint grooves in concrete exposed to view - 1/4 inch in 10 feet. c. All other conditions - 3/8 inch in 10 feet. d. Offsets between pieces of formwork facing material: 1) Class A - Architecturally or prominently exposed surfaces - 1/8 inch gradual or abrupt. 2) Class B - Surfaces to receive plaster or stucco - 1/4 inch gradual or abrupt. 3) Class C - Exposed surfaces in generally unfinished spaces- VA inch abrupt, 1/2 inch gradual. 4) Class D - Concealed surfaces - 1 inch gradual or abrupt. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. See Division 01 Section - Submittal Procedures for submittal procedures. B. Submittals for Review: 1. Shop drawings for fabrication and erection of forms for concrete surfaces architecturally exposed to view. Show general construction of forms including jointing and special formed joints or reveals, location and pattern of form tie placement, inserts and anchorages, and other items which visually affect exposed concrete. 2. Samples of chamfer strips, form liners, form ties, and other items which visually affect exposed concrete. C. Submittals for Information: 1. Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instruction for proprietary materials used in exposed concrete work including form liners, release agents,form systems,ties, and accessories. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver form materials in manufacturer's packaging with installation instructions. B. Store off ground in ventilated and protected area to prevent deterioration from moisture or damage. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 03 11 00 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 CONCRETE FORMWORK DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 FORM MATERIALS A. Forms for Unexposed Concrete: 1. Construct formwork of plywood, lumber,metal, or other acceptable material. Lumber shall be dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. B. Formed Voids under Grade Beams: Corrugated fiberboard box forms, in size indicated on drawings and rated to sustain a load exceeding the total weight of fresh concrete placed over the voids in addition to anticipated construction loads and as manufactured by; 1. VoidForm Products, Inc. 2. approved equal C. Forms for Exposed Concrete: 1. Construct formwork with plywood,metal,or other panel type materials designed to provide continuous straight and smooth as-cast surfaces with minimum number of joints. Joints shall be made tight and shall be backed so that edges of adjoining formwork remain flush. Joints shall be vertical or horizontal, unless noted otherwise. 2. Wood forms shall be constructed of 3/4 inch,APA B-B Plyform,Class 1,Exterior conforming to PS-1. Panels shall be mill oiled and all edges shall be sealed. D. Forms for Architecturally Exposed Concrete: 1. Construct formwork with plywood,metal,or other panel type materials designed to provide continuous straight and smooth as-cast surfaces with minimum number of joints. Joints shall be made tight and shall be backed so that edges of adjoining formwork shall remain flush and true. Joints shall be vertical or horizontal, unless noted otherwise. 2. Forms shall be constructed from one of the following: a. Plywood: 3/4 inch, APA High Density Overlay (HDO), Exterior conforming to PS-1. All edges shall be sealed. b. Plastic Faced Plywood: 3/4 inch,APA A-C, Class 1, Exterior conforming to PS-1 faced with high density polyethylene or PVC sheet. All edges shall be sealed. c. Steel: 3/16 inch smooth blue mill plate steel, well matched, tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to tolerances and appearance of finished surfaces. All joints shall be welded full and ground smooth and flush with surrounding surfaces. d. Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic Forms: Matched,tight fitting, stiffened to support weight of concrete without deflection detrimental to structural tolerances and appearance of finished concrete surface. E. Cylindrical Forms: 1. Forms to be used at exposed columns, light pole bases and other exposed cylindrical concrete locations,shall be constructed from one of the following: a. Paper or Fiber Tubes: Standard ((Seamless)) plastic-lined units furnished full length without splices. b. Steel: Thickness and sufficient backing to prevent bulges and warps. Provide units to minimize joints. Seal and finish joints so joints are not visible in finished concrete. Units shall be free of bends, dents, holes, and rust. c. Glass Fiber Reinforced Plastic Forms: Thickness and sufficient backing to prevent bulges and warps. Provide units to minimize joints. Seal and finish joints so joints are not visible in finished concrete. Units shall be free of bends, dents, and holes. 2.02 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 03 11 00 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 CONCRETE FORMWORK DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Form Ties: Removable or snap-off metal of adjustable length; cone type; one inch break back dimension;free of defects that will leave holes larger than one inch diameter in concrete surface. B. Form Release Agent: Colorless material which will not stain concrete, absorb moisture,or impair natural bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete. C. Rustications, Bevels and Chamfers: Steel, polyvinyl chloride, or milled and sealed wood of size and shape shown on the Drawings. D. Protection Board: For use over void forms under structural slabs. Hard-pressed cellulose fiber board, 1/4 inch minimum thickness, or "SureCover Board", as manufactured by VoidForm Products, Inc. E. Sleeves and Blockouts: Formed with galvanized metal,galvanized pipe, polyvinyl chloride pipe, fiber tubes, or wood. F. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, and Anchorages: Sized as required; of strength and character to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 FORM CONSTRUCTION A. General: Construct forms to the sizes, shapes, lines and dimensions shown on the Drawings. Provide for openings, offsets, keyways, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blockouts, bulkheads, anchorages, inserts, and other features as required. Form all openings in concrete slabs as required for the vertical passage of ducts, pipes,conduits,etc.. The design and engineering of the formwork,as well as its construction,shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. Adequately shore all concrete members to safely support all loads and lateral pressures outlined in "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork" (ACI 347) without distortion, excessive deflection or other damage. B. Construction forms shall be provided for any and all items of concrete work required for or in connection with the satisfactory completion of the project, whether each such item is specifically shown or referred to or not. C. Fabricate formwork for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Form removal shall be accomplished as a hand operation, with due care to avoid damage to any finished concrete work or any reinforcing passing through forms being removed. D. Kerf wood inserts as required for ease of removal. E. Provide temporary ports in formwork to facilitate cleaning and inspection. Locate openings at bottom of forms to allow flushing water to drain. Close ports with tight fitting panels, flush with inside face of forms, neatly fitted so that joints will not be apparent in exposed concrete surfaces. F. Fit forms placed for successive concrete placements for continuous surfaces, to accurate alignment, and within allowable tolerances. G. Minimize form joints. Symmetrically align joints and make watertight to prevent leakage of mortar. Should construction joints prove to be absolutely unavoidable, locate such joints within the middle third of spans or as detailed on the drawings. Make no additional construction joints under any circumstances without the written approval of the Architect. Provide appropriate keys in all construction joints, whether horizontal or vertical. H. Form intersecting planes to provide true corners with edge grain of plywood not exposed as form for concrete. I. Erect,support,brace,and maintain falsework to safely support all applied loads until such loads can be supported by the concrete structure. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 03 11 00 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 CONCRETE FORMWORK DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 J. Construct formwork to cambers shown or specified on the Drawings to allow for structural deflection of the hardened concrete. Provide additional elevation or camber in formwork as required for anticipated formwork deflections due to weight and pressures of concrete and construction loads. K. Forms for Exposed Concrete: 1. Drill forms from the contact face to the outside to suit form ties used. Do not splinter forms by driving ties through improperly prepared holes. 2. Provide sharp, clean corners at intersecting planes without visible edges or offsets. Back joints with extra studs or girts if required to maintain corners. 3. Provide extra studs, girts, walers, and bracing to prevent bowing of forms. 4. Form shapes, recesses and projections with smooth finish materials, and install in forms with sealed joints. 5. Locate form ties in level horizontal rows, plumbed vertically, and in symmetrical arrangements, unless noted otherwise. 6. Special care shall be given to formwork, ties, bracing, etc. for any concrete surface to be left exposed to permanent view. Waves, bulges, form marks, staining, joint marks or irregularities shall be considered unacceptable. L. Corner Treatment: Form exposed corners of beams, walls and columns with chamfered edges, unless noted or shown otherwise. 1. Form chamfers with 3/4 inch by 3/4 inch strips, unless noted otherwise. 2. Unexposed corners may be formed square or chamfered. M. Foundation Elements: The sides of all below grade portions of beams, pier caps, walls, and columns shall be formed straight and to the lines and grades specified. 3.02 APPLICATION OF FORM RELEASE AGENT A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Apply prior to placing reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items. B. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces are scheduled to receive subsequent finishes which may be affected by agent. Soak contact surfaces of untreated forms with clean water. Keep surfaces wet prior to placing concrete. 3.03 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS A. Provide formed openings where required for work embedded in or passing through concrete. In case of conflict with reinforcing steel or structural embeds,consult Architect before placement. B. Coordinate work of other Sections in forming and setting openings, slots, recesses, chases, sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts. C. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb. Ensure items are not disturbed during concrete placement. 3.04 FORM REMOVAL A. Formwork not supporting concrete, such as side forms for beams, walls, and columns, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 degrees Fahrenheit (10 degrees Celsius) for 12 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form removal, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. B. Formwork supporting conventionally reinforced concrete shall not be removed until concrete has attained 85 percent of its specified 28 day compressive strength as established by tests of field FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 03 11 00 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 CONCRETE FORMWORK DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 cured cylinders. In the absence of cylinder tests,supporting formwork shall remain in place until the concrete has cured at a temperature of at least 50 degrees Fahrenheit(10 degrees Celsius) for the minimum cumulative time periods given in ACI 347,Section 3.7.2.3.When the surrounding air temperature is below 50 degrees Fahrenheit (10 degrees Celsius), that time period shall be added to the minimum listed time period. Formwork for two-way conventionally reinforced slabs shall remain in place for at least the minimum cumulative time periods specified for one-way slabs of the same maximum span. C. Minimum cumulative curing times may be reduced by the use of high-early strength cement or forming systems which allow form removal without disturbing shores, but only after the Contractor has demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Architect that the early removal of forms will not cause excessive sag, distortion or damage to the concrete elements. D. Wood forms shall be completely removed. Provide temporary openings if required. E. Provide adequate methods of curing and thermal protection of exposed concrete if forms are removed prior to completion of specified curing time. F. Areas required to support construction loads in excess of 20 psf shall be reshored to properly distribute construction loading. Construction loads up to the rated live load capacity may be placed on unshored construction provided the concrete has attained the specified 28 day compressive strength. G. Obtaining concrete compressive strength tests for the purposes of form removal shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. 3.05 SHORES AND RESHORES FOR MULTILEVEL STRUCTURES A. Comply with ACI 347 and these specifications regarding shoring and reshoring. B. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for proper shoring and reshoring. C. Extend shores or reshores from ground to top level in structure three stories or less in height, unless noted otherwise. D. In crawl spaces or basements, shores or reshores shall extend to mud pads seated firmly on the soil or to on-grade construction. E. All levels of reshores may be removed after formwork for the uppermost floor has been removed in accordance with these specifications. 3.06 REUSE OF FORMS A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused. Damaged forming material shall not be replaced and shall not be used in construction. B. Apply form release agent to concrete contact surfaces prior to each reuse of the forms. 3.07 CLEANING A. Upon completion of work of this section, remove related debris from job site. END OF SECTION 03 11 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 03 11 00 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 CONCRETE FORMWORK DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 03 20 00 - CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Includes furnishing all materials, equipment, transportation and facilities and performing all labor necessary for the following: 1. Prepare shop drawings of reinforcing steel. 2. Furnish and place reinforcing steel. 3. Fabrication and installation of embedded metal assemblies. B. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Division 01 Section - Summary of Work,apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other Documents. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section - Quality Requirements. 2. Division 03 Section - Concrete Formwork. 3. Division 03 Section - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 4. Division 03 Section - Tilt-Up Concrete. 5. Division 31 Section -"Drilled Piers. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 Section - Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop and installation drawings of reinforcement and embedded metal assemblies for review by the Engineer. Reproduce the bar bending diagram, the beam, slab and joist notes and cast-in-place concrete notes that concern the proper placing of reinforcing and submit it with each set of shop drawings for field use. Use same bar marks on bar bending diagrams as used on the beam,and slab schedule. Use same beam,and wall marks as Contract Documents. C. Mill Test Reports: Deliver certified copies, evidencing compliance with all requirements of these specifications to the Engineer with all deliveries of reinforcing steel. D. Submit copies of laboratory inspection reports as follows: 1. Steel Supplier - 1 Copy 2. General Contractor - 1 Copy 3. Owner - 1 Copy 4. Architect - 1 Copy 5. Structural Engineer - 1 Copy 1.04 LABORATORY TESTING AND INSPECTION A. Inspect welding of deformed bar anchors at the beginning of each period of production for size, length and quality. Re-inspect corrected welds. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 03 20 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Reinforcing: inspect all reinforcing steel prior to placement of concrete for compliance with the Contract Documents and the approved shop drawings. All instances of noncompliance shall be immediately brought to the attention of the Contractor. If uncorrected by the contractor, they shall be listed in the report. 1. Observe and report the following: number and size of bars; bending; splicing; clearance to forms; clearance between bars; rust, form oil or other contamination; fabrication and installation of embedded metal assemblies, including visual inspection of all welds. C. Inspector shall have a minimum of three years of experience inspecting reinforcing steel in projects of similar size. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Reinforcing: All of domestic manufacturers. 1. Bars: New deformed billet steel,ASTM A-615,grade 60. 2. Reinforcing bars to be welded: ASTM A706; Bars shall have a carbon content not exceeding 0.30%and a manganese content not exceeding 0.60%. Provide certified copies of the ladle analysis for each lot of bars to be welded. 3. Welded Wire Fabric: "Specification for Steel Welded Wire Fabric" (ASTM A185) with yield strength Fy=60,000 psi. 4. Epoxy coated reinforcing bars: Not used B. Fiber reinforcing: Not Used C. Concrete accessories including bar supports, chairs, spacers, etc.: Cold-drawn wire and fabricated in accordance with the requirements of Chapter Seven of the ACI Standard 315 with heights as required. D. Bar supports for concrete resting on earth: Precast concrete briquettes having tie wires embedded therein, or individual high chairs No. HCP with welded plates on bottom as manufactured by Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. Provide bar supports,hot-dipped galvanized after fabrication, where concrete will be exposed including ceilings of flat slabs. E. Bar supports for reinforcing placed over carton forms to be of type to prevent puncturing the carton form. 2.02 METAL ANCHORAGE & CONFINEMENT ASSEMBLIES A. Steel bars, plates, angles and miscellaneous steel: ASTM A36 B. Welded Deformed Bar Anchors: Welded by full-fusion process; "Nelson" Anchors Type D2L or approved equal conforming to ASTM A496 and AWS D1.1 C. Headed Stud Anchors: Headed Studs welded by full fusion process as furnished by Nelson Stud Welding Company or approved equal,conforming to AWS D1.1 Section 7,Type A. D. Bolts: Conform to ASTM F1554 with regular hexagon nuts and carbon steel washers. E. Straps: Conform to ASTM A245 or A284. F. Welding Electrodes: ASTM Designation A233, Series E70 - AWS 5.5. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate reinforcing steel in compliance with the CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice". B. All bar splices shall be a minimum of Class "A" lap unless specified otherwise on drawings. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 032000 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Shop-fabricate reinforcing bars to conform to the required shapes and dimensions, with fabrication tolerances complying with ACI 315. In case of fabricating errors,do not re-bend or straighten reinforcement in a manner that will injure or weaken the material. D. Deliver all reinforcement to the project site bundled, tagged and marked. Use metal tags indicating bar size, lengths, and other information corresponding to markings shown on placement diagrams. E. Reinforcing with any of the following defects will not be permitted in the work: Bar lengths, depths, and bends exceeding the specified fabrication tolerances, bends or kinks not indicated on drawings or final shop drawings, bars with reduced cross-section due to excessive rusting or other cause. 2.04 COATING A. Rust inhibitor for field application to metal accessories shall be Hi-Build Epoxoline manufactured by the TNEMEC Co., Kansas City,Missouri or approved equal. B. Hot dip galvanizing shall conform to ASTM A123. C. Cold Galvanizing Compound for field repair of galvanizing shall be "ZRC Cold Galvanizing Compound" by ZRC Chemical Products Company, Quincy, Massachusetts,or approved equal. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 MATERIAL STORAGE A. Stack reinforcing steel in tiers. Exercise care to maintain all reinforcement free of dirt, mud, paint, rust, etc. 3.02 GENERAL A. Place reinforcing steel of the sizes, shapes, lengths, spacing and other dimensions where shown on the drawings. Details of reinforcing shall conform to the ACI Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete (ACI 318-14). 3.03 MARKING A. Mark bars plainly. Limit bundles to 1 size and 1 length and tag each bundle with metal tags. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean reinforcement thoroughly of rust, mill scale, dirt, oil or other coatings which might tend to reduce the bonding to the concrete. 3.05 BENDING A. Bend bars cold. Heating of reinforcement, or handling by makeshift methods, will not be permitted and bars having kinks or bends not required will be rejected. 3.06 PLACING A. Comply with the specified codes and standards, and the Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars",for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports, and as herein specified. B. Place reinforcement accurately, securely saddle tie at every other intersection with No. 18 gauge black annealed wire, and rigidly hold in place during the placing of the concrete by means of metal chairs or spacers. C. Hold bars in position and to proper clearance of concrete surface by spacers, chairs, or other necessary supports with the following tolerances: 1. Top bars in slabs and beams: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 032000 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 a. Members 8" deep or less:± 3/8" b. Members more than 8" but not over 2' deep: + 1/2" c. Members more than 2':± 3/4" 2. Lengthwise of members: + 2" 3. Concrete cover to formed surfaces: + 1/4" 4. Minimum spacing between bars: + 1/4" 3.07 CONCRETE PROTECTION A. Minimum protection for reinforcing steel shall be as follows: 1. Concrete cast against and permanently exposed to earth: 3" 2. Concrete exposed to earth or weather or cast in place against a vapor retarder a. #6 thru #18 bars: 2" b. #5 bars and smaller: 1 1/2" 3. Concrete not exposed to weather or in contact with the ground: a. Slabs,walls, joists with #14 & #18 bars: 1 1/2" b. Slabs,walls, joists with #11 bars and smaller: 3/a" c. Beam and column primary reinforcement,ties,stirrups, and spirals: 1 1/2" 3.08 EMBEDDED METAL ASSEMBLIES A. Fabricate and assemble structural steel items in the shop. Shearing, flame cutting,and chipping shall be done carefully and accurately. Holes shall be cut, drilled, or punched at right angles to the surface of the metal and shall not be made or enlarged by burning. Welded construction shall conform to the AISC Specifications for the Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings and AWS D1.1. Welding shall be done by AWS certified welders. B. Welding of deformed bar anchors and headed stud anchors shall be done by full-fusion process equal to that of Nelson Stud Welding Company. END OF SECTION 03 20 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 032000 - 4 MAY, 2, 2023 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 03 30 00 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cast-in-place(CIP)concrete in building frame elements,walls,foundations,foundation walls, slabs-on-ground, and mechanical equipment pads. 2. Finishing of concrete floor slabs and toppings. Concrete liquid surface treatment, sealer, and slip-resistant coatings. 3. Mix Designs 4. Expansion and contraction, control joints in CIP concrete. 5. Concrete curing and protection. 6. Non-shrink grout including installation and forming. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 03 Section - Concrete Forms and Accessories. 2. Division 03 Section - Concrete Reinforcement. 3. Division 03 Section - Polished Concrete Floor Finishing,for additional requirements for slabs to receive polished finish. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO) 1. AASHTO M182 B. American Concrete Institute (ACI): 1. ACI 121 R, "Quality Assurance Systems for Concrete Construction." 2. ACI 301, "Specification for Structure /Concrete." 3. ACI 302.1 R, "Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction." 4. ACI 304.2-R, "Placing Concrete by Pumping Methods." 5. ACI 305, "Hot Weather Concreting." 6. ACI 306, "Cold Weather Concreting." 7. ACI 315, "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Concrete Structures." 8. ACI 347, "Recommended Practice for Concrete Formwork." 9. ACI 503.2,"Standard Specification for Bonding Plastic Concrete to Hardened Concrete with a Multi-Component Epoxy Adhesive." 10. ACI SP-15, "Field Reference Manual" which includes ACI 301 "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings" and reference standards specified therein. 11. ACI 318-08, "Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete." C. American Welding Society (AWS) 1. AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code Reinforcing." D. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). 1. ASTM A615, "Specification for Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement." 2. ASTM C33, "Specification for Concrete Aggregates." 3. ASTM C39, "Test Method for Compressive Strength of Cylindrical Concrete Specimens." 4. ASTM C94, "Specification for Ready-Mixed Concrete." FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 03 30 00 - 1 MAY, 2, 2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 5. ASTM C1 14, "Test Method for Chemical Analysis of Hydraulic Cement." 6. ASTM C1 38, "Test Method for Unit Weight, Yield, and Air Content of Concrete." 7. ASTM C143, "Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement." 8. ASTM C150, "Specification for Portland Cement." 9. ASTM C156, "Test Method for Water Retention by Concrete Curing Materials." 10. ASTM C171, "Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete." 11. ASTM C173, "Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method." 12. ASTM C227, "Test Method for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Cement-Aggregate Combinations." 13. ASTM C231, "Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method." 14. ASTM C260, "Specification for Air Entraining Admixtures for Concrete." 15. ASTM C309,"Specification for Liquid Membrane-Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete." 16. ASTM C31 1,"Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Fly Ash or Natural Pozzolans for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland-Cement Concrete." 17. ASTM C387, "Specification for Packaged, Dry, Combined Materials for Mortars and Concrete." 18. ASTM C494, "Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete." 19. ASTM C618, "Specification for Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Portland Cement Concrete." 20. ASTM C685, "Specification for Concrete Made by Volumetric Batching and Continuous Mixing. 21. ASTM C989, "Specification for Ground Iron Blast-Furnace Slag for Use in Concrete and Mortars." 22. ASTM El 54, "Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Slabs, On Walls, or as Ground Cover." 23. ASTM El 155, "Test Method for Determining Floor Flatness and Levelness Using The F- Number System." 24. ASTM D2240, "Standard Test Method for Rubber Property-Durometer Hardness." E. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI), 1. CRSI "Manual of Standard Practice." 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Manufacturers' literature containing product and installation specifications and details. 2. Where Manufacturer's specifications, recommendations, and/or directions are required by this specification,include Manufacturer's specifications,recommendations,and/or directions. B. Shop Drawings: All shop drawings and calculations must bear the seal and signature of an engineer registered in the jurisdiction where project is being constructed. 1. Cast-in-place concrete shown on structural drawings, prepared under the supervision of a registered Professional Engineer, including: a. Rebar placing drawings (ACI 315-99, Detailing Manual SP-66-80 or CRSI MSP-2-81 "Manual of Standard Practice): Show bar sizes, spacing, locations, and quantities of reinforcing and wire fabric and supporting and spacing accessories. Provide steel order lists including bending and cutting details for all reinforcement shown on the structural design drawings. Provide plans showing beam and pier marks associated with schedules. b. Form construction details, including jointing, special formed joints or reveals, location and pattern of form tie placement, and other items that affect exposed concrete visually. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 033000 - 2 MAY, 2, 2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 c. Calculations for any formwork,shoring and/or reshoring. 2. Slab Construction Joint Layout: Unless all concrete control and expansion joints in paving are specifically indicated in Drawings, submit complete joint layout indicating proposed construction joint locations to comply with spacing requirements. a. Location of joints is subject to approval of Architect and Structural Engineer. 3. Concrete Paving Joint Layout: Unless all concrete control and expansion joints in paving are specifically indicated in Drawings, submit complete joint layout indicating proposed construction joint locations to comply with spacing requirements. a. Location of joints is subject to approval of Architect and Civil Engineer. C. Concrete design mixes: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. D. Informational Submittals: 1. Test Reports: Submit the following reports directly to Architect from Testing Laboratory, with copy to Contractor. Prepare reports in conformance with Division 01 Section - Quality Requirements: a. Submit laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test, including certified copy of results of aggregate tested by ASTM C227. 2. Certificates: Manufacturer's certificate that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 3. Qualification Documentation: Submit documentation of experience indicating compliance with specified qualification requirements. 4. Failure by the contractor to submit the shop drawings, test reports and/or mix designs required above shall release the architect and the engineer from any liabilities due to the negligence on the part of the contractor to comply with the construction documents. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified with minimum 5 years documented experience. 2. Installer: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience. 3. Testing Agency: An independent agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. 4. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS DIA. B. Pre-Installation Meetings: Convene a pre-installation meeting at least one week prior to commencing Work of this Section. Require attendance of parties directly affecting Work of this Section. 1. Review conditions of operations, procedures and coordination with related Work. 2. Agenda shall include the following, as applicable to project scope: a. Tour, inspect, and discuss conditions of concrete work. b. Review concrete testing and their requirements. c. Review required submittals, both completed and yet to be completed. d. Review Drawings. e. Review tolerances and slab flatness requirements. f. Review any special conditions. g. Review requirements for concrete finishes. h. Approve proposed equipment. i. Review and finalize construction schedule related to concrete work and verify availability of materials, personnel,equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 033000 - 3 MAY, 2, 2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 j. Review required inspections, testing, certifying, and material usage accounting procedures. k. Review weather and forecasted weather conditions, and procedures for coping with unfavorable conditions. I. Review safety precautions relating to concrete work operations. m. Environmental procedures. 3. General Contractor shall record minutes to include decisions made, action items, and other important points of discussion. Contractor shall distribute minutes to meeting participants, Architect, and other affected parties within 3 business days of the meeting. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Transport, handle, store, and protect Products in accordance with Manufacturers' and Division 01 requirements. B. Deliver materials in unopened containers with labels identifying contents. C. Store powdered materials in dry area and in manner to prevent damage. Protect liquid materials from freezing. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform pre-construction testing on concrete mixtures. Contractor shall coordinate construction and testing activities with testing agency as required. B. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 de C) for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301. 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride,salt,or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs. C. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows: 1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 de C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractors option. 2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water,soft spots, or dry areas. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, manufacturers offering Products which may be incorporated in the Work include the following: 1. Applied Concrete Technology, Incorporated, Grayslake, IL (800) 228-6694. 2. The Euclid Chemical Company, Cleveland, OH (800) 321-7628. 3. Fortifiber Corporation, Reno, NV (800) 773-4777. 4. ChemREX Inc, Shakopee, MN (800) 433-9517. 5. Master Builders Construction Products,Cleveland, OH (800) 227-3350. 6. Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, NJ (201) 933-8800, (800) 933-7452. 7. WR Meadows, Hampshire, IL (800) 342-5976. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 033000 - 4 MAY, 2, 2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 8. Reef Industries, Houston, TX (800) 231-2077. 9. STEGO Industries LLC, San Juan Capistrange, CA (877) 464-7834. 10. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc., Omaha, NE (402) 453-6600. 11. Curecrete Chemical Company, Inc., Springville, UT (801) 489-5663. 12. Midwest Floor Care Inc., Lincoln, NE (402) 477-2701. B. Division 01 Section - Product Requirements: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions: Permitted. 2.02 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C150 - Type I, gray, unless otherwise approved. 1. Assume full responsibility for the quality and soundness of cement. Cement is to be of one type and from the same mill; it is to be of uniform color for all concrete with permanently exposed concrete finishes. B. Requirements for concrete to receive densifier / hardener (but not polished): Comply with the most stringent requirements specified herein, or in structural notes, including: 1. Limit fly ash and slag as a replacement for portland cement, as indicated for application. 2. Limit use of curing compounds as indicated. 3. Do not use incompatible admixtures. C. Requirements for concrete to receive polished finish: Refer to Division 03, Section "Polished Concrete Floor Finishing", and notes in Structural Drawings as applicable, for additional information and requirements for concrete to receive polished finish. The most stringent requirements shall apply, including but not limited to the following: 1. Air entrainment is not allowed in concrete to receive polished finish. 2. Chemical admixtures, curing compounds, and other topical applications shall be used with concrete to receive polished ONLY IF they are chemically compatible with the polishing products and process and are specifically approved by the Architect and by the polishing system Manufacturer. a. Concrete to be polished shall be only wet cured with potable water, unless otherwise approved by Architect. 3. Protection Requirements; Refer to Division 3,Section "Polished Concrete Floor Finishing." D. Admixtures: The following admixtures are permitted when approved in writing prior to use or are required as specified herein and shall be used in strict accordance with the manufacturer's specifications or recommendations: E. Calcium chloride: Conform to ACI 301. The chloride ion level shall not exceed 0.3 percent. F. Air-entraining admixtures: ASTM C260 shall be used to achieve the specified air content in all permanently exposed exterior concrete. For steel trowel interior slab finish, do not use air entrainment admixtures and total air entrainment must not exceed 3%. For steel trowel exterior slab finish,comply with ACI 318 and ACI 302. 1. Euclid: AEA-92 or Air Mix 200. G. Water-reducing admixtures: Conform to ASTM C494,Type A,containing not more chloride ions than allowed in paragraph C., above. 1. Euclid: Eucon WR series or Eucon MR. H. Water-reducing/accelerating admixtures: Conform to ASTM C494, Type C or E having long- term test results showing non-rusting on metal deck and reinforcing steel. 1. Euclid: Accelguard series. I. Water-reducing/retarding admixtures: Conform to ASTM C494, Type D containing not more than 1 percent chloride ions. 1. Euclid: Eucon Retarder series. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 033000 - 5 MAY, 2, 2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 J. High-range/water-reducing (HRWR) admixtures: Conform to ASTM C494, Type F or G super plasticizers containing 1 percent maximum chloride ions may be used with low slump (3 inches maximum) concrete to produce flowable concrete (up to 8 inches slump) with early strength gain and 28-day strengths equal to reference concrete. HRWR admixture may be used providing not more than 60 minutes is allowed from addition of admixture to final placement of concrete. HRWR admixture shall be used in concrete with a maximum water/ cement ratio of 0.50 or less and is suggested in the following: 1. In pumped concrete. 2. In concrete topping slabs 3. In lieu of the specified water-reducing admixture (Type A) where confinement of placing due to heavy reinforcement or narrow space requires flowable concrete. 4. Where more than 30 minutes is required between the addition of admixtures to final placement of the concrete, a combination of water-reducing, set controlling admixtures (ASTM C494, Types A, D, & E) as in Master Builders Company "Synergized Performance System" may be used. a. Euclid: Eucon 37 or Eucon 537. K. Fly ash or granulated blast furnace slag shall be used as a substitute for 25 percent of Portland cement, except where limited by other applications, including the following: L. Certification: Certification of the above requirements is required from the admixture manufacturer prior to mix design review and approval by the Architect. Upon request by the Architect, a qualified representative is to be provided to assure proper use of admixtures. Use of admixtures,other than listed above will be permitted only when approved. M. Aggregates: 1. Normal-weight concrete - ASTM C33. For slabs, also conform to combined aggregate grading recommendations of ACI 302 and ACI 302.1 R,unless otherwise permitted. 2. All concrete exposed to the weather shall conform to the limits of deleterious substances and physical properties of Table 3,ASTM C 33. 3. Local aggregates: Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C33 but which have been shown by special test or actual service to produce concrete of adequate strength and durability may be used when acceptable to the Architect. 4. Maximum size of coarse aggregates: ACI 301. 5. Abrasive aggregates non-slip finishes: Fused aluminum oxide grits, or crushed emery, as abrasive for non-slip finish with emery aggregate containing not less that 40 percent aluminum oxide and not less than 25 percent ferric oxide. Use material that is factory- graded, packaged, rustproof, non- glazing, and unaffected by freezing, moisture, and cleaning materials. N. Water: Clean and not detrimental to concrete; drinkable. 2.03 FINISHING MATERIALS A. Cement Floor Leveling Compound: Camp's "Latex Mix" (Liquid Felt up to 1/8" over 1/8" mix with Portland Cement and Sand), as distributed by the Tichenor Company, Dallas, Texas or approved equal. Floor leveling compound may only be used where floor will not be exposed. 2.04 GROUT /MORTARS A. Cement grout: Conform to ASTM C387 "Dry packaged mixtures" or: 1. Mix at the site, in composition of one volume of Portland cement to 2-1/2 volumes of fine aggregate. 2. Mix the materials dry; then add sufficient water to make the mixture flow under its own weight. 3. Submittals: The following laboratory test results shall be submitted to show compliance with the requirements of this specification: FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 033000 - 6 MAY, 2, 2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 a. Initial setting time: 8 hours maximum b. Vertical shrinkage: 0 c. Compressive strength: 5000 psi 7 days d. Compressive strength: 7000 psi 28 days 4. Field service: When required by the Architect, provide a qualified concrete technician employed by the Grout Manufacturer to assist in the initial grouting operations. a. Euclid: NS Grout or Hi Flow Grout or E3 Grout series. b. Sika: Sika Grout #212. 2.05 CURING MATERIALS A. Method of curing shall be approved by the finish flooring applicator where finishes are indicated. B. Wet Cure Blanket: Waterproof covering,for curing exposed finish concrete floors,shall be non- staining, reinforced with fibers, and conforming to the requirements of the current edition of ASTM C171-03, ASTM C171-97a, and AASHTO M171-00, standard specifications for sheet material for curing concrete slabs. McTech Group, Inc.; "UltraCure NCF", Loganville, GA (866) 913-8363, or comparable product by another Manufacturer. C. Curing Compounds: 1. For Slabs not scheduled for Chemical Hardener: Clear Bond as made by Guardian Chemical Co., Acri-Seal as made by Toch Bros., Dress and Seal as made by L & M Construction Chemicals, MasterKure as made by Sonneborn, or Res-X Cure by Burke Concrete Accessories. 2. For Slabs to be Chemically Hardened: Do not use film-forming curing compounds. Where curing compound is required, a non-film-forming curing compound chemically compatible with the hardener may be used, if first approved by the chemical hardener Manufacturer Dissipating liquid membrane-forming compounds for curing concrete; Conform to ASTM C309, Type 1. Curing compound shall be compatible with floor sealer or finish used. Low VOC.At polished concrete finishes,use of curing compounds is not allowed unless specifically approved by the Architect and polishing system Manufacturer. a. Euclid: VOX Kurex DR series; waterborne products. b. W.R. Meadows: 1 100 series. c. L&M Construction Chemicals: Cure R. d. Division 01 Section - Product Requirements: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions: Permitted. D. Evaporation retarder: "MasterKure ER 50" by BASF or equal; spray applied liquid film for hot weather finishing. 1. Do not use evaporation retarder at slabs to be densified, unless specifically approved for compatibility by the densifier manufacturer. E. Water: Potable. 2.06 SEALERS AND DENSIFIER / HARDENERS A. Exterior Sealers: applied to horizontal concrete surfaces permanently exposed to salts, deicer chemicals and moisture,including parking decks. The manufacturer shall provide a 5-year labor and materials Warranty on performance of the sealer. Sealer shall be compatible with the curing compound used. 1. Euclid: Eucoguard or Diamond Clear or Super Diamond Clear. 2. ChemREX: Hydrozo Clear 40. 3. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Floor Sealing Compound: "Master Seal 330" by Master Builders, Cleveland,Ohio or approved equal. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 033000 - 7 MAY, 2, 2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Concrete Densifier / Sealer for Interior Concrete: Coordinate requirements of hardener/densifier products with concrete mix designs and chemical admixtures and curing methods. These products are chemically reactive with the free lime in concrete and performance and appearance will be adversely affected by chemicals that react with lime or that impede the ability of the hardener/densifier to react. Do not use chemical admixtures or curing compounds unless specifically approved in writing. 1. Exposed concrete floor slabs, not indicated for polished finish or with light broom finish: Two- or Multiple-Coat, spray-applied, hardener/densifier. Chemical reactive magnesium fluorosilicate formulation with chemical resistant properties to alkali, acids, oils and salts, and does not substantially change appearance of concrete surfaces. Provide one of the following or approved equal product by another Manufacturer: a. BASF; "MasterKure HD 300 WB". b. Euclid Chemical Co; "Surf-Hard". 2. Exposed concrete floor slabs with smooth troweled finish: One coat flood-applied, hardener/densifier. Chemical reactive silicate / siliconate formulation that enhances sheen level of troweled concrete and is designed to mainatin or increase sheen level over time with normal wear. Provide one of the following or approved equal product by another Manufacturer: a. CureCrete Chemical Company; "Ashford Formula",www.ashfordformula.com. b. Dayton Superior; "Sure-Hard Densifier JI 7",www.daytonchemicaI.com. c. Euclid Chemical Company; "Euco Diamond Hard",www.euclidchemical.com. d. L&M Construction Chemicals: "Seal Hard", www.lmmc.com. 3. Refer to Division 03 "Polished Concrete Floor Finishing" for floor polishing system. 2.07 JOINTS AND EMBEDDED ITEMS: A. Construction and Contraction Joints: Comply with ACI 301 and recommendations of ACI 302.1 R. Sealant shall be two-part semi- rigid epoxy, and shall have minimum Shore A Hardness of 80 when measured with ASTM D2240. A product that complies with these requirements is "Euco 700", as manufactured by The Euclid Company, Cleveland, OH (800) 321-7628. B. Isolation Joints: Fillers shall consist of 1/8 inch width strips of neoprene, synthetic rubber, or approved substitute, extending the full depth of the slab. Sealant shall be two-part elastomeric type, polyurethane base. 2.08 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Expansion Joint Material: Preformed expansion joint material conforming to ASTM D-1751. B. Drilled Anchor Bolts: Shall be "Titen HD" bolts as manufactured by Simpson Strong-Tie.; "Kwik HUS-EZ", by Hilti Fastening Systems; or approved equal. C. Rust Inhibitor: For field application to metal accessories shall be Hi-Build Epoxoline manufactured by the Tnemec Co., Inc., Kansas City,Missouri or approved equal. D. Epoxy for Patching: Shall be a two-component polymer modified cementitious system equal to Sikatop series as manufactured by Sika Chemical Corp., Lyndhurst, New Jersey or approved equal. Sikatop product selected shall be appropriate for intended repair and shall be approved by Architect. E. Accessories: AC315 Galvanized chairs,stools,spacers,etc. shall be by Superior Manufacturing Co.,or equal. F. Waterstop: Preformed flexible PVC CRD-C-572-74. waterstop for embedding in concrete to prevent passage of fluids through joints. Factory-fabricate corners, intersections and directional changes. Acceptable manufacturers include: 1. Sika Corporation 2. W. R. Meadows 3. Or approved equal. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 033000 - 8 MAY, 2, 2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2.09 VAPOR RETARDER A. Provide cover over prepared soil, below aggregate base material at slabs-on-ground and over void forms unless otherwise noted on the plans. Use only materials which are resistant to decay when coated in accordance with ASTM E154. B. Reference Section 07 26 00. Vapor Barrier Membrane. 2.10 PROPORTIONING A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. If laboratory trial batch method is used, use an independent testing facility acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs. The testing facility shall not be the same as used for field quality control testing and inspection unless otherwise acceptable to Architect. B. Submit written reports to the testing laboratory of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of work. Do not begin concrete production until mixes have been reviewed and approved. Include the following information for each concrete mix design: 1. Method used to determine the proposed mix design. 2. Gradation of fine and coarse aggregates, plus combined aggregate gradation for slabs, ACI 302. 3. Proportions of all ingredients including all admixtures added either at the time of batching or at the job site. 4. Water-cement ratio. 5. Slump,ASTM C143. 6. Certification of the chloride content of individual admixtures and of the mixes as proposed. 7. Air Content: ASTM C173 (Volumetric Method). 8. Unit weight of concrete, ASTM C138. 9. Strength at 4, 7, and 28 days,ASTM C39. 10. Method of recording batch proportions. 11. Substantiating test reports. C. Concrete types and strengths: Minimum 28 Day Compressive Strength shall be per design requirements but not less than: 1. Slabs on ground, walls, drilled piers: 3,000 psi. 2. Slabs on void forms: 4,000 psi 3. Normal or Lightweight concrete on metal deck: 3,000 psi. 4. All concrete exposed to weather shall be air entrained (ASTM C260). 5. All concrete shall be normal weight unless noted otherwise. Also,see general and specific notes on structural drawings. D. Weights: All concrete shall be normal-weight concrete unless otherwise designated on the structural drawings. E. Durability: Conform to ACI 301. 1. All concrete exposed to potentially destructive weathering, such as freezing and thawing, or to de-icer chemicals is to be air-entrained,4.5% ± 1.5%, six sacks cement/cu. yd. min., 4" max. slump. 2. Water-cement ratio: For concrete subject to freezing and thawing or deicer chemicals,the water-cement ratio shall not exceed 0.53 by weight including any water added to meet specified slump in accordance with the requirements of ASTM C94 unless otherwise noted. F. Slump: Conform to ACI 301. 1. 4 '/2 inch maximum for consolidation by vibration 2. 5 inch maximum for consolidation by other methods 3. 8 inch maximum for flowable concrete. Concrete containing HRWR admixture (super plasticizer): 3 inch maximum before addition of HRWR FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 033000 - 9 MAY, 2, 2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 4. Where field conditions require slump to exceed that specified above, the increased slump shall be obtained by the use of a superplasticizer only, and the Contractor shall obtain written approval from the Architect who may require an adjustment to the mix. G. Production of concrete: Conform to ACI 301: 1. Ready-mixed concrete: a. Ready-mixed concrete shall be batched, mixed, and transported in accordance with ASTM C94. b. All concrete shall be proportioned conforming to the approved mix designs and of the materials contained in those approved mixes. A certified copy of the design weights for each mix shall be kept at the producing plant for each class of concrete used on the project. c. Plant equipment and facilities are to conform to the "Check List for Certification of Ready -Mixed Concrete Production Facilities" of the National Ready-Mixed Concrete Association and have NRMCA or approved certification within the past year. 2. All other concrete: Conform to ACI 301 3. Concrete produced by on-site volumetric batching and continuous mixing if approved shall conform to ASTM C685. 4. Use of accelerating admixtures in cold weather and retarding admixtures in hot weather shall not relax placement requirements specified herein. 5. Admixtures:ACI 301.All concrete placed at ambient temperatures below 50°F is to contain an approved accelerator. All concrete placed at ambient temperatures above 80°F is to contain an approved retarder. All concrete required to be air-entrained is to contain an approved air-entraining admixture. When improved workability, pumpability, lower water-cement ratio,or high ultimate and/or early strength is required,the HRWR admixture (super plasticizer) may be used. 6. Ensure air content for slabs with steel trowel finish is less than 3%. The concrete shall be of such consistency and composition that it can be worked readily into the corners and angles of the forms and around reinforcement without permitting materials to segregate or free water to collect on the surfaces. Within the limiting requirements, adjust the consistency of the concrete as may be necessary to produce mixtures which will be placeable with reasonable methods of placing and compacting. Maintain on the job at all times adequate extra cement to be used at rate of 1/2 sack cement per cubic yard concrete for each 2" slump increase for corrections due to wetness desired or obtained. No water shall be added to concrete except under the direct awareness of the project inspector. 7. Adjustments to concrete mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials,job conditions,weather,test results,or other circumstances warrant at no additional cost to Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted and accepted before using in work. 2.11 FORMWORK A. Division 03 Section - Concrete Forms and Accessories 2.12 REINFORCING MATERIALS A. Division 03 Section - Concrete Reinforcement PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Division 01 Section - Execution Requirements: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 03 30 00 - 10 MAY, 2, 2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required, and ready to receive Work. C. Report in writing to Architect prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.02 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Install all cast-in-place concrete work in accordance with ACI 301 except as herein specified. 3.03 INSTALLATION - FORMWORK A. Division 03 Section - Concrete Forms and Accessories B. Construction and Contraction Joints: Conform to ACI 301 and recommendations of ACI 302.1 R. 3.04 REINFORCEMENT A. Placement: Division 03 Section - Concrete Reinforcement 3.05 CONCRETE (CONVEYING AND DEPOSITING) A. Placement: Conform to ACI 301: 1. Maintain concrete cover around reinforcing as specified herein and ACI 301. 2. Pumping concrete: ACI 304.2-R. 3. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306.1 "Standard Specifications for Cold-Weather Concreting" and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures. 4. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. a. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. b. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise accepted in mix designs. 5. Hot-Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete complying with ACI 305R "Standard Specification for Hot-Weather Concreting" and as specified. a. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of placement to below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractors option. b. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. c. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas. d. Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, as acceptable to Architect. B. Protection of cast concrete: Conform to ACI 301. C. Where the use of synthetic fibers is specified, fibers shall be added at a rate of 5.0 million fibers per cubic yard. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 03 30 00 - 11 MAY, 2, 2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 D. Repair of surface defects: ACI 301. 1. Inspect concrete surfaces immediately upon removal of forms. Patch imperfections as needed or as directed by the Architect. 2. Modify or replace concrete not conforming to required thickness, lines, details, and elevations. 3. Repair or replace concrete with excessive honeycombing and other defects due to improper placement. Do not patch, fill, touch-up, repair, or replace exposed concrete except upon express direction of Architect for each individual area. 4. Tie holes shall be filled solid with patching mortar. 3.06 FINISHING A. Finishing of formed surfaces: ACI 301: 1. Tops of forms: a. Strike concrete smooth at tops of forms. b. Float to texture comparable to formed surfaces. 2. Formed surfaces: a. Permanently exposed surfaces and surfaces to be painted: ACI 301 - "Smooth Form Finish" with the fins ground smooth and air holes or honeycomb filled with mortar. b. Surfaces in unfinished areas unexposed to public view: ACI 301- "Rough Form Finish". B. Slabs: Minimum slab surface tolerance must satisfy ACI 301 and ACI 302.1 R as measured in accordance with ASTM E1 155. 1. Slabs-on- ground: a. Preparation of sub-grade: Compact stone base aggregate to thickness indicated on drawings. Roll poof stone screenings topping to provide smooth hard surface on which to place slab. Surface should not show footprints or truck tracks when driven over. b. Place floor slabs-on- ground by "strip cast" method. Contraction joints where shown on drawings shall be saw-cut (as soon as slab has set enough to allow working on but not before it has set enough to prevent raveling) 1/4 of the depth of slab thickness. It is recommended to use a SOFF-CUT saw and blades (between 1 to 4 hours after finish typically with 1 inch minimum depth) for all contraction joints as per manufacturer recommendations. c. For exposed slabs, install semi-rigid epoxy sealant in construction and contraction joints after slab has fully dried. d. Separate slabs-on- ground from vertical surfaces with 1/2 inch-thick joint filler. Extend joint filler from bottom of slab to within 1/8 inch of finished slab surface. e. Allowable tolerance for slab on grade surfaces, measured in accordance with ACI 117 and ASTM E1 155, shall meet or exceed an overall value of FF35/FI25, with minimum local value of FF24/FL17. 2. Suspended Floor Slab: a. Minimum surface tolerances: FF25 & FL20 overall FF20 & FL15 local. C. Float Finish: 1. Locations: All concrete surfaces under mud-set tile or pavers. 2. Finishing: After concrete has stiffened sufficiently and bleed water has evaporated, the surface shall be wood floated to produce a uniform texture with no coarse aggregate visible. Apply sufficient pressure to bring the moisture to the surface. D. Trowel Finish: 1. Locations: All concrete surfaces under: a. Thin set tile b. Carpets c. Vinyl floor tile d. Exposed concrete FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 03 30 00 - 12 MAY, 2, 2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 e. Typical unless noted otherwise 2. Troweling: Steel trowel not less than two passes. Begin troweling with power trowel as soon as little or no cement sticks to the blades. Dusting with dry cement or aggregate to stiffen mix or absorb moisture is not allowed. The concrete shall then be hand troweled or machine troweled to produce a smooth impervious surface for the purpose of burnishing. E. Broom Finish: 1. Locations: Exterior stairs, ramps,walks and other locations where noted on the drawings. 2. Finishing: Same method as specified for trowel finish, except after initial troweling brush concrete surfaces with a soft brush or broom to texture as specified by the architect. F. Power Machine Finishing: In place of hand finishing, the Contractor may use a power machine approved by the Architect for finishing the concrete surfaces for finishing the concrete surfaces. However, the preparation of concrete surfaces for finishing by machine shall be, in general, as hereinbefore required for hand finishing. G. Non-slip Finish: Apply abrasive aggregate at the rate of 25 lbs. per 100 SF per manufacturer's instructions in areas specified. 3.07 CURING AND PROTECTION A. Protect all freshly placed concrete from washing by rain, flowing water, etc. Do not allow concrete to dry out from the time it is deposited in the forms until the expiration of the curing period hereinafter specified. The methods of curing shall be as specified in the following paragraphs, unless otherwise authorized by the Architects. B. Concrete surfaces, not otherwise specified, shall be cured by being kept wet with clean water for a period of not less than seven (7) days after placing. Each day the forms are left in place and kept wet enough to prevent the opening of joints in the forms and the drying out of the concrete, will be counted as one (1) day of curing. C. In lieu of the wetting specified above, the Contractor may, use a non-bituminous liquid sealing and curing compound to seal the moisture in the concrete. Such material shall not, however, be applied to surfaces which are to receive further concrete, mortar, resilient tile or liquid vinyl coating. Curing liquid, if used, shall be applied in conformity with the recommendations of the manufacturer of the material approved for use, and to sufficient extent to effectively hold the moisture in the concrete. The use of such material shall not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of protecting all floor slabs, platforms, and steps whenever any scaffolding, shoring, form work, masonry, concrete or other work is being done over or above finished concrete slabs. D. Permanently exposed concrete floors shall be cured by covering the entire surface, as soon as practical after finishing,with waterproof paper,laid with four-inch (4") lapped joints. The joints shall be covered with gummed tape or be glued with waterproof glue. Such covering shall remain in place until completion of the building, except on surfaces where ceramic tile is to be applied, in which cases the covering shall be removed after a period of seven (7) days has elapsed after the placing and finishing of the concrete. Tears in paper shall be repaired. E. Imperfect or damaged work, or any material damaged or determined to be defective before final completion and acceptance of the entire job, shall be satisfactorily replaced at the Contractor's expense, and in conformity with all of the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications. Removal and replacement of concrete work shall be done in such manner as not to impair the appearance or strength of the structure in any way. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 03 30 00 - 13 MAY, 2, 2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 F. Cleaning: Upon completion of the work, all forms, equipment, protective coverings and any rubbish resulting therefrom shall be removed from the premises. Finished concrete surfaces shall be left in a clean condition, satisfactory to the Owner. After sweeping with an ordinary broom and removing all mortar, concrete droppings, loose dirt, mud, etc., wash all concrete floors and platforms with soapsuds and scrub with a stiff fiber brush. Mop up the suds and flush the surfaces with clean water. Provide adequate measures during scrubbing, mopping, and flushing operations to keep excessive or injurious amounts of water off resilient tile floors. Any damage to such floors shall be promptly, effectively and satisfactorily repaired. 3.08 PATCHING AND REPAIR A. Comply with ACI 301 and ACI 503.2 for standard specifications for bonding plastic concrete to hardened concrete with a multiple component epoxy adhesive. B. Remove honeycomb voids,cracks,and irregularities. Where repair is required,cut back defects not less than 1/2" with square edges,brush out,drench with water and fill with concrete of same mix from which coarse aggregate is removed. When cut-outs have been filled, trowel surface smooth, remove excess grout and after set,grind slightly to uniform color and appearance using neat Portland Cement applied with a power grinder wheel. 3.09 GROUTING A. After steel columns have been installed and leveled,grout the space between the bottom of the plate and concrete, using cement grout completely filling the space and forming solid bearing for the column base plate. 3.10 EVALUATION AND ACCEPTANCE OF CONCRETE A. Comply with ACI 301. 3.11 ACCEPTANCE OF STRUCTURE A. Comply with ACI 301. 3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE A. Curbs: Provide monolithic finish to interior surface of curbs by stripping forms while concrete is still green and steel-troweling surfaces to a hard, dense finish with corners, intersections, and terminations slightly rounded. B. Equipment bases and foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment with template at correct elevations,complying with certified diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Materials and operations shall be tested and inspected as work progresses. Failure to detect defective work shall not prevent rejection when defect is discovered, nor shall it obligate the Architect for final acceptance. B. Testing agencies shall meet the requirements of "Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete and Steel in Construction" ASTM E 329. C. The following testing services shall be performed by the testing laboratory: 1. Secure concrete samples in accordance with "Method of Sampling Fresh Concrete" ASTM C 172-. 2. Mold and cure four specimens from each sample in accordance with "Method of Making and Curing Concrete Compression and Flexural Specimens in the Field" ASTM C31 -. The FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 03 30 00 - 14 MAY, 2, 2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 cylinders shall be stored in the field for 24 hours and then transported to the laboratory to be cured. 3. Test specimens in accordance with "Method for Test for Compressive Strength of Molded Concrete Cylinders" ASTM C39-. Two specimens shall be tested at 28 days for acceptance and one shall be tested at 7 days for information. One specimen shall be held for future testing, if required. 4. Make one strength test (four cylinders) for each 100 cu. yd. or fraction thereof,of each mix design of concrete placed in any one day. 5. Determine total air content of air entrained normal weight concrete for each strength test in accordance with ACI 231. 6. Report test results in writing to the Architect and Structural Engineer on the same day that tests are made. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of contractor, name of concrete type and class,location of concrete batch in the structure,design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials; compressive breaking strength and type of break for both 7-day test and 28-day tests, air content. 7. Determine slump for each strength test and whenever consistency of concrete appears to vary, using "Method of Test for Slump of Portland Cement Concrete" ASTM C143. 8. Determine temperature of concrete sample for each strength test. D. Additional Tests: The testing service will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained. Test to determine adequacy of concrete will be by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C42. Contractor shall pay for such test conducted, and any other additional testing as may be required, when unacceptable concrete is verified. E. Monitor the addition of water at the jobsite and the length of time concrete is allowed to remain in the truck before placement. F. Testing non-shrink grout: Make one strength test for every 10 baseplates grouted. G. The Contractor shall provide and pay for the necessary testing services of the following: 1. Qualification of proposed materials and the establishment of mix designs in accordance with "Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete" ACI 318. 2. Other testing services needed or required by the Contractor. H. To facilitate testing and inspection,the contractor shall: 1. Furnish necessary labor to assist testing agency in obtaining and handling samples at the job site. 2. Advise the testing agency in advance of operations to allow for the assignment of testing personnel and testing. 3. Provide and maintain for the use of the testing agency adequate facilities for proper curing of concrete test specimens on the project site in accordance with "Methods of Making and Curing Concrete Compression and Flexural Specimens in the Field" ASTM C31. I. Evaluation and acceptance: 1. The strength level of the concrete will be considered satisfactory if the averages of all sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified strength and no individual test result (average of two cylinders) is below specified strength by more than 500 psi. 2. Completed concrete work will be accepted when the requirements of "Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings" ACI 301,Chapter 18 have been complied with. 3. In any case, where the average strength of the laboratory control cylinders, as shown by the tests for any portion of the structure, falls below the minimum specified ultimate compressive strength, the Architect shall have the right to require the Contractor to provide improved curing conditions of temperature and moisture to secure the required strength. Also,if the average strength of the laboratory control cylinder should fall so low as to cause the portions of the structure to which the respective unsatisfactory test reports apply to be FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 03 30 00 - 15 MAY, 2, 2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 in question by the Architect, the Contractor shall follow the core procedure set forth in the current edition of ASTM C42. If the results of the core tests indicate, in the opinion of the Architects,that the strength of the structure is inadequate,such replacement, load testing,or strengthening as may be ordered by the Architects shall be provided by the Contractor without cost to the Owner. J. Reports: The testing laboratory shall make reports to the following: Concrete supplier - 1 copy Contractor - 1 copy Owner - 1 copy Architect - 1 copy Structural Engineer - 1 copy 1. Reports shall be made and distributed immediately after the respective tests or inspections are made. 2. Where reports indicate deviations from the Contract Documents, they shall also include a determination of the probable cause of the deviation and where applicable, a recommendation for corrective action. 3. Wherever the testing laboratory recognizes a trend of decreasing quality in the concrete due to changing reasons, conditions of curing or other cause; this shall be brought to the attention of the Architect, along with a recommendation for corrective action to be taken before the materials fall below the requirements of these Specifications. K. Authority & Responsibilities of the Testing Laboratory 1. The laboratory representative shall immediately notify the Architect and the Contractor of any deviance from Specifications and approved design mixes observed at the mixing plant or the job site. 2. If, in the opinion of the laboratory representative,the deviance observed will be probable cause for subsequent rejection of the material,he shall so inform the Contractor and Architect so that a timely decision as to whether or not to continue operations can be made. 3. Subsequent to on-the-spot verbal notification, the laboratory shall file a written report of any deficiencies or deviance noted including a summary of conversations and decisions made and action taken at the time in accordance with Paragraph 1. 4. The testing laboratory shall control field adjustments made to concrete mixes to compensate for field conditions and report same in accordance with Paragraph H. END OF SECTION 03 30 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 03 30 00 - 16 MAY, 2, 2023 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 03 35 36 - POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Products and procedures for placement, finishing, and polishing cast-in-place concrete floors, to be installed by a Manufacturer Certified Applicator. 1. Interior polished concrete floors. 2. Joint sealants for polished concrete floors. 3. Requirements for placing and curing polished concrete floor slabs. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 03, Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete", and other Sections related to floor slab placement and finishing. 2. Division 09, Section"Painting", for application of hardener/densifier at unpolished sealed concrete floors in mechanical and similar spaces. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM C 779 - Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Horizontal Concrete Surfaces. B. ASTM C 1028 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method; 1996. C. ASTM G23-96 - Standard Practice for Operating Light - Exposure Apparatus (Carbon-Arc Type)with and without Water Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials. D. ASTM C805 - Standard Test Method for Rebound Number of Hardened Concrete. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's technical literature for each product indicated, specified, or required. Include manufacturer's technical data, application instructions, and recommendations. B. Samples for Initial Selections: 1. Manufacturer's color card for concrete dyes. C. Samples for Verification: Submit 12 inch square samples of polished finish in each color, texture, and pattern specified; include not less than 3 in each sample set showing limits of variations expected for each color, texture, and pattern specified. Resubmit samples until approved. D. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Certification. a. ANSI/NFSI,Ph. 2" "High Traction" Certified 2. Applicator's Qualifications. 3. Field Quality Control Reports: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 03 35 36 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 a. Submit Manufacturer's field quality control reports / recommendations for field visits as described by Field Quality Control article. E. Closeout Submittals: Maintenance Data: For inclusion in operation and maintenance manual required by Division 01. Include manufacturer's instructions for maintenance of installed work, including methods and frequency recommended for maintaining optimum condition under anticipated use. Include precautions against cleaning products and methods which may be detrimental to polished finishes and performance. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Quality Assurance: Submit manufacturer's certification that products comply with specified requirements and are suitable for intended application. B. Applicator's Qualifications: 1. Supervision: Maintain competent supervisor who is at Project during times specified Work is in progress, and, who is experienced in installing systems similar to type and scope required for Project. 2. Manufacturer's Certification: Provide letter of certification from sealer/hardener manufacturer stating that the applicator is a certified applicator of the Manufacturer's polishing system and is fainiliar with proper procedures and installation requirements required by the manufacturer for diamond polishing. 3. Experience: Company with not less than 5 years continuous experience under the current name in performing specified work similar in design,products, and extent to scope of this Project; with a record of successful in-service performance; and with sufficient production capability, facilities, and personnel to produce required Work. 4. Upon request, submit list of a minimum of 5 completed projects of comparable or greater size and complexity to this Work. Include for each project: a. Project name and location. b. Name and contact information for Owner. C. Name and contact information of General Contractor(if applicable). d. Name and contact information of Architect. e. Name of Polished Concrete Floor Finish manufacturer. f. Approximate square footage of densified diamond polishing system installed. g. Date of completion. C. Concrete Producer Qualifications: Firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with following requirements for production facilities and equipment: 1. ASTM C 94. 2. NRMCA's Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities. D. Field Mock-up for Aesthetic Purposes: Before performing work of this Section, provide as many field samples as required to verify selections made under submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects of polished finish. Approval does not constitute approval of deviations from Contract Documents, unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. Provide additional mockups for repair conditions noticed on the floor slabs to be polished. 1. Polish 100 ft square floor area for each polished finish type. a. When there is an appropriate area available, and if approved by Architect, mock- ups may be constructed on areas of floor slab not scheduled for polished concrete floor finish, provided that the mock-ups will be concealed by other flooring systems as scheduled, and the mock-up will not adversely affect the installation or performance of the scheduled flooring system for that area. Confirm available locations for such mock-ups prior to pouring slabs to be polished, with Architect and with installer(s) of other flooring system(s). Otherwise, provide temporary FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 033536 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 minimum size 10'x10'x4" thick concrete pads for mock-ups, poured at same time and of same material as the concrete floor slabs to be polished. b. When there is an appropriate area available, and if approved by Architect, mock- ups for repair procedures may be constructed on areas of floor slab not scheduled for polished concrete floor finish,provided that the mock-ups will be concealed by other flooring systems as scheduled, and the mock-up will not adversely affect the installation or performance of the scheduled flooring system for that area. If the slab exhibits cracks of a similar nature to cracks existing in the temporary mockup slab,then perform crack repair mockups on the temporary slab. 2. Use the same personnel,including supervisors,which will perform the Work. 3. Install products and materials according to specified requirements and same installation procedures to be used in installation of the Work. 4. Work shall be representative of those to be expected for the Work. 5. Show maximum variation that will be expected to exist in the completed Work. a. If there is cracking evident in floor slabs to be polished at time of polishing mock- ups, include crack repair examples in the initial mockups. b. Provide mockups for all surface imperfections or surface damage repairs evident in the slab as directed by Architect, at the time that such conditions are observed to exist. It is the intent of these specifications that all surface imperfections in all areas of polished concrete floor finish will be patched as part of the base scope of the work, whether or not the surface imperfections are caused by non-conforming work. Architect shall have discretion to determine which types of surface imperfections will or will not be patched based on results of mockup reviews. 6. Approval is for the following aesthetic qualities: a. Compliance with approved submittals. b. Uniformity or intended effect of exposed aggregate. C. Uniformity of sheen. 7. Obtain Architect's approval before starting work on Project. 8. Maintain field mock-ups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging completed Work. 9. Do not demolish, alter, or remove field mock-ups until acceptable to Owner and Architect. 10. When directed, demolish and remove field mock-ups from Project. E. Pre-Installation Conference: Prior to placing concrete for areas scheduled for polished concrete floor finish, conduct conference at Project to comply with requirements of applicable Division 01 Sections. 1. Required Attendees: a. Owner's representative. b. Architect. C. General Contractor, including superintendent for this project. d. Concrete Floor Polishing System Certified Applicator, including the supervisor for this project. e. Concrete Floor Polishing System Manufacturer's field representative. 2. Minimum Agenda: Floor Polishing System Applicator, and other related trades as applicable, shall demonstrate understanding of work required by reviewing and discussing procedures for,but not limited to,following: a. Discuss and evaluate compliance with Contract Documents, including substrate conditions, surface preparations, sequence of installation and other preparatory Work performed by other installers. b. Review approved submittals. C. Review installation procedures,including,but not limited to: 1) Environmental requirements. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 033536 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2) Concrete finishing. 3) Curing methods. 4) Surface preparation. 5) Construction Joints 6) Repair Procedures. 7) Field quality control procedures and requirements. 8) Cleaning. 9) Protection of polished concrete. 10) Coordination with other work. 11) Maintenance. 3. Minutes: General Contractor shall record discussions, including decisions and agreements reached, and furnish copy of minutes to each party attending. F. Field Quality Control Conferences: Should deficiencies or complications arise requiring a field quality control conference with the Polishing System Manufacturer's Representative, conduct a field quality control conference with adequate notice to same attendees as the Pre-Installation Conference. 1. Tour mock-ups and representative areas of required work. Discuss and evaluate corrective actions required for compliance with Contract Documents, including substrate conditions, surface preparations, sequence of installation and other repair or preparatory Work performed by polishing system Applicator or other trades. 2. Manufacturer's field representative shall prepare and issue report to attendees noting decisions made, and follow-up actions and corrective actions required. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original, factory sealed, unopened, new containers bearing manufacturer's name and label intact and legible. B. Store materials in protected and well-ventilated area at temperatures between 40° and 90° degrees F., unless otherwise required by manufacturer. Keep containers sealed until ready for use. Do not use materials beyond manufacturer's shelf-life limits. Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or contamination. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Damage and Stain Prevention: Take precautions to prevent damage and staining of concrete surfaces to be polished. 1. Prohibit following over concrete surfaces to be polished: a. Vehicle parking. b. Pipe cutting operations. C. Ferrous metals storage. d. No eating or drinking activities on the slab. 2. Protect concrete surfaces to be polished from following: a. Petroleum, oil,hydraulic fluid, or other liquid dripping from equipment. b. Acids and acidic detergents. C. Painting activities. d. Diaper all hydraulic lifts and power equipment. UNDER PROTECTION e. Do not store steel or materials on concrete to receive Polished Concrete Floor Finish. B. Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for substrate temperature, ambient temperature, moisture, ventilation, and other conditions affecting polishing operations. 1.08 WARRANTY FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 033536 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Sealer/Hardener: Manufacturer's Standard Ten (10) year material warranty and Certified Applicator's Ten(10)year labor warranty for Sealer/Hardener, Jointly signed. 1.09 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. At end of project, provide Owner with five gallons of RetroPlate's CreteClean Plus, or Manufacturer's recommended cleaning product, and latest published Maintenance brochure for proper maintenance. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER AND PRODUCTS A. Basis of Design: Contract Documents are based on products as manufactured by Curecrete dba Advanced Floor Products, (800) 998-5664, www.retroplatesystem.com, to establish a standard of quality. Other available products and installation processes having equivalent characteristics and quality control may be considered, provided deviations are minor and does not change concept expressed in Contract Documents as judged by Architect. 1. Penetrating Concrete Sealer / Hardener: Curecrete dba Advanced Floor Products, Springville, UT. 2. Polish Stain Guard, water based copolymer for forced burnishing application: RetroPlate "RetroGuard", or Floor Polishing System Manufacturer's approved equal product. a. At Apparatus Bay, use penetrating stainguard formulated for oil repellencey; Retro-Pel or approved equal product. 3. Joint Sealant: Curecrete, Springville,UT. 4. Contact: Rhonda Clinton,PSI Permanent Surfaces, 214-522-4047. 2.02 2.02 2.02 CERTIFIED APPLICATOR A. A. Subject to requirements,provide one of the following: 1. All the Marbles, Inc., 7700 Renwick, Suite 4A,Houston, TX 77081. Contact: Jerry S. Maltz, 713-825-7093,jermarbleman@aol.com 2. Concrete floor finishes, 17024 Benton City,Von Ormy, TX 78073. Contact: David Stanton,210-563-0168, david@concreteff.com 2.03 PENETRATING CONCRETE SEALER/HARDENER A. "RetroPlate 99 Polishing System", or approved equal. Formulated to seal, dustproof, increase abrasion resistance and develop polished appearance to concrete surfaces to which it is applied. 1. Description: Clear liquid form of sodium silicate to permanently seal, dustproof and harden concrete surfaces and provide abrasion resistance by penetrating into concrete pores and chemically reacting. Chemically relies on an internal reaction, leaving no surface film or residue to densify pores. Products containing silicanates, magnesium florasilicates, or potassium silicates will not be acceptable and will not be approved. Products must conform and meet minimum performance characteristics as described herein. 2. Performance Criteria: a. Abrasion resistance: ASTM C779 - Up to 400%increase in abrasion resistance. b. Impact Strength: ASTM C805—21%increase impact strength. C. Ultra Violet Light and Water Spray: ASTM G23-81 — No adverse effect to ultra violet and water spray. d. Coefficient of Friction: ASTM C1028 — Meet or exceed OSHA and ADA recommendations. e. Reflectivity: IG—310 Gloss Reader Checker—up to 30%increase in reflectivity. f. Densification: Achieve waterproofing, hardening, dustproofing, and abrasion resistance of the concrete surfaces while imparting specified sheen. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 033536 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 g. h. ANSI/NFSI, Ph. 2 "High Traction" Certified; testing for slip co-efficiency as a minimum floor safety standard. B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative available to make site visits. 2.04 SYSTEM SCHEDULE A. Polished Concrete 1, Apparatus Bay— RetroPlate 99 Polishing System applied to natural Gray Concrete. Spiff coats: 2 coats of Retro Guard. 1. Level of Grinding: Class A, Surface Grind/Cream Finish. 2. Sheen: Level II Satin Sheen 3. Color: Natural polished concrete. 2.05 JOINT SEALANT , SPALL,AND CRACK REPAIR A. Crack Repair and Joint Sealant products must meet specification requirements for compatibility with Diamond Polished Concrete Floor Finish System as recommended by manufacturer of concrete sealer/hardener. The following products named are for RetroPlate system and to set quality standard. B. Joint Filler/ Sealer: Polishing system Manufacturer's recommended self-leveling elastomer joint filler, "CreteFill Pro Series 85" as manufactured by Curecrete of Springville, Utah, or approved equal. 1. ASTM D-2240, Shore A hardness. 2. Rated for heavy vehicle traffic. 3. Resistant to petrochemicals. 4. Remains flexible, including in cold temperatures. 5. Color: Standard Gray at natural(un-dyed)polished concrete. C. Spall and Crack Repair for concrete patching: Polishing system Manufacturer's recommended high strength, hybrid urethane repair material, "CreteFill Crack Repair" and "CreteFill Spall Repair", as manufactured by Curecrete of Springville,Utah, or approved equal. 1. Can be color-matched to adjacent concrete. 2. Other type products may be considered if they are demonstrated by mockup to produce superior results. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. General: Accessories required for application of Colored Concrete Dye and Diamond Polishing System: Provide in accordance with floor finish system Manufacturer's instructions, including thinners. B. Neutralizing Agent: 1. Trisodium Phosphate. 2. Ammonia. C. Water: Potable. D. Protective Covers: Use protective membrane and cover boards approved by Concrete Floor Polishing System Manufacturer. Do not use coverings that are impermeable or would trap moisture in or on the slab surface. 1. Protective Membrane: a. Liquid-Protection Membrane: Primer-adhered, protective membrane coating: Water Vapor Permeable, breathable membrane system. Liquid primer/adhesive designed to release from smooth concrete floor for polished floor applications without staining or leaving a residue. "Skudo MT" by Skudo USA or approved equal. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 033536 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 b. Sheet Protection Membrane: Water Vapor Permeable,breathable membrane. 1) Provide seam and perimeter tapes of type as recommended by Manufacturer. Adhesives integral to or used as part of the membrane protection system shall be designed to release from the slab without staining or leaving a residue. Other tapes shall not be applied to the concrete slab. C. Kraft Paper: Non-marking construction Kraft Paper, with tape for seams as required. 2. Membrane Cover Board a. Plywood: Nominal 1/2" non-treated plywood. 1) Replace as required due to warp or damage by the elements. b. Install double-layer of plywood, 1/2" over 3/4", with staggered joints and screwed together with screws that are not long enough to penetrate through the lower layer of plywood. 1) Cut edges of plywood exposed to heavy construction traffic at an angle in order to trip hazard and to facilitate rolling traffic. C. Hardboard: 1/4" thickness, with duct tape or other approved tape at joints. Masonite or hardboard shall never be laid directly over concrete surface and tape shall not be applied directly to concrete surfaces]. 2.07 MIXING AND TINTING A. Do not thin sealer/hardener. B. Do not use material beyond manufacturer's recommended pot life. 2.08 POLISHING EQUIPMENT A. Field Grinding and Polishing Equipment: 1. Variable speed, 3 or 4 head counter-rotating, walk-behind machine with not less than 600 lbs of down pressure on grinding or polishing pads. 2. Dust extraction equipment with flow rate suitable for dust generated, with pre-separator and squeegee attachments. 3. Wet vac system to remove slurry and grinding residue for wet grind. B. Edge Grinding and Polishing Equipment: Hand-Tool or single head walk-behind machines which produces same results, without noticeable differences, as field grinding and polishing equipment. C. Burnishing Equipment: Single head high speed walk-behind machines; minimum of 2,600 rpm's. D. Grinding Pad Discs: Metal bonded discs with embedded industrial grade diamonds of varying grits fabricated for mounting on equipment. E. Polishing Pad Discs: Resin bonded discs with embedded industrial grade diamonds of varying grits fabricated for mounting on equipment. F. Burnishing Pads: A-pads or Twister pads coated with embedded industrial grade diamonds for use with burnishing equipment. 2.09 CONCRETE MIX DESIGN A. Material Quality Standards: Mix designs for each type and strength of concrete used for floors will be prepared as specified in appropriate Division 03 Section,with following qualifications: 1. Slump Limit: 4 inches,plus or minus 1 inch. 2. Maximum Water-Cement Ration: 0.45. 3. Air Content: None permitted. 4. Admixtures: Calcium chloride based compounds not permitted. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 033536 - 7 MAY 2, 2023 POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 5. Replacement for Portland cement with fly ash or slag: None permitted 6. 4,000psi concrete 7. Non-reactive aggregates PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Refer to Protection article for protection requirements. B. Acceptance of Surfaces and Conditions: Examine substrates to be polished for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify General Contractor of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. Proceed only when unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner complying with Contract Documents. Starting Work within a particular area will be construed as acceptance of surface conditions. C. Where surface cracking or other conditions requiring repairs are observed, provide additional mock-ups to review results of each proposed repair process. D. Substrate limitations: 1. Allow new concrete to cure a minimum of 21 days before starting initial grind. 2. Allow new concrete to cure a minimum 45 days at 75 degrees prior to application of Polished Concrete Floor Finish. All new concrete to receive Colored Concrete Dye colors must be cured with curing methods as recommended by Manufacturer of Polished Concrete Floor System. Verify compatibility prior to application of curing. 3. Verify that sub-floor surfaces are smooth and flat within tolerances specified in Section 03300 and are ready to receive Polished Concrete Floor Finish. Verify that the concrete floor is a minimum Flatness of 40 and Levelness of 35. 4. Apply Polished Concrete Floor Finish minimum 15 days prior to installation of baseboard, equipment and prior to substantial completion. 5. Notify Architect or Owner's Representative of any pre-existing conditions upon removal of floor coverings, if any unforeseen problems occur prior to proceeding with Polished Concrete Floor Finish. Once work has commenced, the Applicator accepts full responsibility of the outcome of the floor. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION OF CONCRETE FLOORS A. General: 1. Remove curing, sealing and coating agents, floor coverings, mastic, oil, breaking compound residue, any surface contaminants, wax and grease by mechanically or chemically removing; to remove all surface contaminants and to assure penetration of product into surface. Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of trisodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water. All concrete surfaces receiving Polished Concrete Finish shall be properly neutralized prior to applying densifier to prevent cross contamination and whiting. 2. Remove dust and loose material by brushing, sweeping, vacuuming, and blowing with high pressure air. 3. Remove paint residue with solvent/stripper provided the stripper does not have an acidic pH. 4. Remove tire marks or any residue that will affect the appearance of the floor. Do not seal in any contaminants. 5. Power scrub and rinse entire floor surface to thoroughly rinse and remove all soap residue or contaminants. Squeegee dry. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 033536 - 8 MAY 2, 2023 POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Ensure surfaces are clean, dry, and free of oil, grease, dirt, dust, visible staining and all other foreign contaminants. C. Allow concrete time to cure before beginning initial grinding of slab, 21 days minimum and as recommended by polishing manufacturer. D. Protect surrounding and adjacent surfaces in manner recommended by Polished Concrete Floor Finish manufacturer. Do Not contaminant or Damage equipment, furniture or adjacent, surrounding surfaces with equipment, Concrete [Dye stain,] [Acid Stain] or Sealer/Hardener. Any damage that occurs as a result of poor workmanship shall be replaced and/or repaired by the Certified Applicator and installers. E. Apply concrete [dye] [and] [acid stain] in the correct sequence with Polishing Manufacturer's latest Installation instructions. F. Begin initial grinding while the concrete slab is wide open, prior to wall Acid Stain and the building is dried in. Coordinate general contractor and with other trades. Aggregate exposure shall be kept to a minimum unless specified and Mock-Up is otherwise authorized and approved by Architect or Owner's Representative. Grind and take floor up to 400 Grit using wet grinding methods except for upper level installations. Above the First Floor shall be a DRY grind and polish. Complete Polished Concrete Floor Finish installation at the end of the project, nearing completion. Polish concrete floor surfaces with power disc machine; sequence with coarse grit to fine abrasive recommended by the Polished Concrete Floor Manufacturer's guidelines to complete the specified aggregate exposure and level of sheen as specified and scheduled herein. Utilize manufacturer's recommended equipment and polishing diamonds for installation of specified floor system using Manufacturer's seven step diamond polishing process. All slurry residue shall be completely removed leaving behind a clean, non-whiting surface. Apply concrete dye in the correct sequence with Manufacturer's installation instructions. G. Leave tops of stair indicators and ramps in Level I (100 grit) finish. Surfaces shall be rough textured. All interior exposed concrete surfaces to receive Polished Concrete Floor Finish shall have RetroGuard spiff coats, or Manufacturer's equivalent. H. Fill joints and use joint filler, spall and crack repair materials in strict accordance with manufacturer's guidelines. Install and coordinate in proper sequence with polishing system specified herein. L Treating Surface Imperfections: 1. Prepare and clean patch areas according to Repair Material and Polishing System Manufacturers' instructions. 2. Mix patching compound and grout material with dust created by grinding operations to match color of adjacent concrete surface (or other color match process as recommended by repair materials Manufacturer and approved by polishing system Manufacturer and Architect). 3. Fill surface imperfections including, but not limited to, holes, surface damage, all cracks including small and surface micro cracks, air holes, pop-outs, spalls, and other voids. Perform work to match results of approved repair mock-ups. 4. Work compound and treatment until color differences between concrete surface and filled surface imperfections are not noticeable. J. Grout and Repair Grinding: 1. Repair and grind concrete surfaces in proper sequence according to Polishing System Manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Use grinding equipment and appropriate grit grinding pads, matching floor polishing system or otherwise in accordance with Polishing System Manufacturer's recommendations. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 033536 - 9 MAY 2, 2023 POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. While applying fresh grout material prior to final polishing, grind concrete in direction perpendicular to initial grinding as required to remove scratches and leave consistent pattern ready for final polish grinding. 4. Vacuum floor using squeegee vacuum attachment. K. Grind protrusions flush with surface. Patch voids, holes and cracks with recommended spall and crack repair patching compound that is compatible with sealer/hardener, concrete dye and Polished Concrete Floor Finish as specified herein. 3.03 CONCRETE POLISHING APPLICATION A. Initial Grinding: Polished Concrete Floor Finishes shall be taken up to a 400 grit prior to the walls being installed while the slab is wide open and dried in, coordinate with the General Contractor and other trades. Grind concrete to specified aggregate exposure imparting uniform scratch pattern in concrete. Vacuum floor using squeegee vacuum attachment. 1. Surface grind / Class A Cement Fines, Cream finish: Minimal grind to achieve polish level,producing cream finish with minimal aggregate exposed. 2. Medium Grind / Class B Fine Aggregates, Salt and Pepper Finish: Medium grind to achieve even level of aggregate exposure across the floor surface, producing a mix of cream and aggregate exposure to salt and pepper effect as approved by mockup review. 3. Deep grind/ Class C Course, large exposed aggregate: Deep grind to achieve even level of exposure of larger aggregate across the floor surface, to desired effect as approved by mockup review. B. General: I. Apply sealer/hardener and colored concrete dye with application equipment and polishing diamonds as recommended by Polished Concrete Floor Finish manufacturer for each system scheduled herein. 2. Manufacturer's Certified Applicator to install specified polishing system in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommended polishing grits for each intended sequence to achieve the Polishing System, and specified level of sheen. Manufacturer's same Certified Applicator shall install concrete dye when used in conjunction with the Polishing System. 3. Contact Manufacturer's Technical Director or Owner's Representative with any questions. 4. Comply with recommendations of product manufactured for drying time between succeeding coats. 5. Polished floors where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat, to ensure a finish coat free of other defects due to insufficient sealing or dying. 6. Remove Polished Concrete Floor Finish defects due to poor workmanship, visible and unacceptable to Manufacturer's Representative, Architect or Owner's Representative and RE-install to achieve satisfactory results. 7. Make edges of Polished Concrete Floor Finishes adjoining other materials clean and sharp. Detail the edges located at the base of the wall, around corners, adjacent surfaces, and all horizontal floor surfaces to match Polished Concrete Floor Finishes to provide a uniform finish to include Polished Concrete Floor Finish, color and sheen per the Approved Mock-Up.. 8. Do Not Apply Tape to Polished Concrete Finish as this will damage or etch surface and the entire system will have to be Re-Done. 9. Begin grinding and polishing with Polished Concrete Floor Finishes Manufacturer's recommended coarse diamond grit in uniform manner and proceed to next level of polishing diamond grit sequence to complete the Polishing System to match Approved Mock-Up for Aggregate exposure,Polished Concrete Floor Finish, Color, and Sheen. 10. Complete all work in accordance with the Contract Documents. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 03 35 36 - 10 MAY 2, 2023 POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Completely clean and buff residue as recommended by Polishing System Manufacturer's representative before proceeding with liquid densifier. Contact Manufacturer's Technical Director if any questions arise before proceeding with the next step. Check surfaces to determine that the Colored Concrete is adhering, is unifonn, neutralized and consistent in color before proceeding with Sealer/Hardener. D. First Coat: liquid Sealer/Hardener applied at approximately 200 SF per gallon applied to new and existing cured concrete. Applied and used in conjunction with Polished Concrete Floor Finishes. Applied in strict accordance with Manufacturer's latest published instructions for each intended floor finish and surface. If whiting occurs,remove and Repeat steps. E. Polishing Steps: 1. Polish to provide indicated level of sheen and finish. a. Level 1 Flat Sheen: 100 grit and as required to achieve uniform sheen to match approved mock-up. b. Level 2 Satin Sheen: 400 grit and as required to achieve uniform sheen to match approved mock-up. C. Level 3 Polished Sheen: 800 grit and as required to achieve uniform sheen to match approved mock-up. d. Level 4 Highly Polished Sheen: 1500 - 3000 grit as required to achieve highest gloss,mirror-like sheen,to match approved mockup. 2. Thin and apply as recommended by Manufacturer and apply 2 coats of RetroGuard, or Polishing System Manufacturer's equal product, allowing adequate curing time between coats. Exception: Apply RetroPel as specified herein for Apparatus Bays. 3. Burnish each coat, with high speed propane burnisher capable of 2,600 rpm's, equipped with manufacturer's recommended Crete Heat burnishing pads. A-Pads or Twister Pads shall be used to complete Polished Concrete Floor Finish using appropriate grit for each intended level of sheen specified herein. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Manufacturer's representative to be available to provide technical assistance and guidance for surface preparation and application of floor finish system when assistance is requested. (Refer to Quality Assurance article in Part 1 of these specifications). 1. Pre-Construction Conference. 2. Field Visits as may be requested by Polishing System Applicator. 3. Quality Control Conferences to address specific issues encountered, should a conference be deemed necessary by Manufacturer's Representative, Applicator, General Contractor, Architect, or Owner's Representative. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect concrete floors to be polished before initial grinding as indicated in the paragraphs below and until final polishing operations, as required to prevent grease, oil, and other contaminants that would adversely affect floor polishing results. Do not allow lifts, wheeled vehicles, or other equipment that could leak oil or other chemicals, over slabs to be polished without protection in place. After initial grinding immediately install floor protection membrane [and cover board] indicated below to protect the slab during construction activities adjacent and above polished slabs. Final grinding and polishing should not begin until other construction activities, including painting and other finishes, adjacent and above polished slabs have been completed. If construction activities will continue in the polished concrete slab areas after final grinding and polishing reinstall protection membranes and cover board protections. 1. Install approved membrane floor protection covering continuously over concrete area to be polished according to Manufacturer's installation instructions as soon as possible after FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 03 35 36 - 11 MAY 2, 2023 POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 initial grinding operations are complete but not sooner than 21 days after concrete pour, or longer where recommended by membrane protection product manufacturer or polishing system Manufacturer. a. In the event that the project schedule does not allow membrane installation before proceeding with other work over the slab, temporarily install untreated plywood over taped kraft paper, or other approved temporary protection measure until application of protection membrane. 2. Install protection board continuously over membrane floor protection as soon as possible after protection membrane is installed. Remove and replace warped material upon building dry-in and when protection board becomes warped to the point that construction traffic over warped boards may damage protection membrane or the concrete slab. 3. Where Kraft paper is installed as a protective membrane over concrete slab, tape all joints.. Install hardboard boards over Kraft paper. 4. Diaper lifts and equipment to prevent oil,gas, and contaminants from staining slab. 5. Do not use red pencil for laying out walls in areas of polished slab, or other markings that can stain the slab or leave visible lines. (Blue is generally acceptable, confirm acceptable marking materials with Manufacturer). 6. Do not use tape or other adhesive attachments to secure floor protection to unfinished concrete slab unless Concrete Floor Polishing System Manufacturer and Installer approve use of the specific tape or products to be used. 7. Should the protective membrane be inadvertently damaged, inspect for damage or spills that may have contaminated the slab. If evidence of spills are observed, immediately clean the slab as recommended by Manufacturer for best results. Install Kraft paper with taped joints over protection membrane and concrete slab in the area of damage, and replace protection boards. 8. After floor polishing operations are complete, if there is any construction activity continuing over polished floors that poses a risk of physical damage then those areas should be protected with a minimum of masonite or hardboard taped together at the edges. 9. Maintain and modify protective covers as may be required throughout construction until removed for final polishing operations. B. Take care to avoid physical damage to floor slab from construction operations such as dropped tools or other heavy equipment. C. Do not allow pipe cutting, storage of steel, or sharp objects, and other materials to come into direct contact with slab that will cause discoloration or staining to slab. 1. Where pipe cutting over slab is unavoidable, provide plywood and other protection as required to prevent damage and staining of concrete surface. D. General Contractor and Applicator shall prohibit traffic on Polished Concrete Finish (stained or non-stained) at times and durations according to Manufacturer's instructions. In each instance, Applicator shall confirm readiness of floor, including protection in place when required, before traffic is allowed to resume. 1. Provide "Wet Paint" signs as required to protect newly-polished and sealed finishes. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their work, after completion of polishing operations. Barricade areas to protect Concrete Floor Polishing System (stained or non-stained) until properly cured for traffic according to Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 2. Protect and Cover Concrete Floor Polishing System (stained or non-stained) with materials that are recommended by Manufacturer during construction to protect from damage and debris. Do not apply Tape to the Polished Concrete finish at any time. Protect with a breathable covering such as non-marking Kraft paper or equal as recommended by the Manufacturer. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 03 35 36 - 12 MAY 2, 2023 POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. Protect and Cover only after Concrete Floor Polishing System (stained or non-stained) has fully cured and is ready to be covered. E. Take extra precautions to protect Polished Concrete Floor Finish at any stage of the installation to produce the best possible results. F. Protect finished Work with protective coverings, from subsequent construction activities posing risk of damage to finished floor. 1. Where construction operations that could cause physical damage to polished floors will occur after polishing operations, install protection board over kraft paper that is adequate to protect against damage from dropped tools, lifts, equipment, and other applicable hazards. 3.06 REPAIRS A. Refinish all work which has become damaged or defaced during the course of construction and leave all finishing in clean, neat, and perfect condition, acceptable to the Owner's Representative. Repair or replace all damaged materials directly attributable to work under this Section. 3.07 CLEANING AND ACCEPTANCE A. Clean floor, and adjacent surfaces as required, prior to inspection using Manufacturer's recommended cleaners and methods. I. Touch-up and restore finish where damaged. 2. Remove spilled, splashed or splattered finish material from all surfaces, as required. 3. Do not mar surface finish or item being cleaned. Make necessary repairs to damaged surfaces caused by cleaning operation or installation of Polished Concrete Finish. 4. Leave storage space clean and in good condition required for equivalent spaces in project. 5. During progress of work, remove from project daily all discarded materials, rubbish, containers, etc. 6. Do not permit the use of water or cleaning agents at any time on completed Polished Concrete Floor Finish until said period of time is acceptable to Manufacturer's Representative and surfaces have cured for a minimum of seven(7) days, or longer where recommended by Manufacturer. 7. Contact Polished Concrete Floor Finish Manufacturer's Representative for detailed instructions. B. Final acceptance of Polished Concrete Floor Finish and Sealer shall be based upon inspection by the Architect and Owner's Representative. Polished Concrete Floor Finish and Sealer falling below specified and/or scheduled finish and approved Mock-up shall be re-done as required without additional expense to the Owner. C. Remove temporary mockup slabs after acceptance. END OF SECTION 03 35 36 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 03 35 36 - 13 MAY 2, 2023 POLISHED CONCRETE FLOOR FINISHING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 04 20 00 - UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: 1. Concrete masonry units (CMU's). 2. Face brick. 3. Mortar and grout. 4. Reinforcing steel. 5. Masonry joint reinforcement. 6. Ties and anchors. 7. Embedded flashing. 8. Miscellaneous masonry accessories. 9. Masonry-cell insulation. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 07 Section - Fluid Applied Membrane Air Barriers for membranes applied to exterior face of gypsum sheathing at exterior masonry cavity walls. 2. Division 07 Section—Water and Vapor barriers. 3. Division 07 Section-Flashing and Sheet Metal for exposed sheet metal flashing. 4. Division 07 Section-Firestopping for firestopping at openings in masonry walls. 5. Division 07 Section - Joint Sealants for sealing control and expansion joints in unit masonry. 6. Division 07 Section-Building Insulation for cavity wall insulation. C. Products furnished, but not installed,under this Section include the following: 1. Dovetail slots for masonry anchors, installed under Division 03 Section - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 2. Anchor sections of adjustable masonry anchors for connecting to structural frame, installed under Division 05 Section- Structural Steel. D. Products installed,but not furnished,under this Section include the following: 1. Steel lintels and shelf angles for unit masonry, furnished under Division 05 Section - Metal Fabrications. 2. Manufactured reglets in masonry joints for metal flashing, furnished under Division 07 Section- Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 3. Cast-stone trim in unit masonry. 4. Cavity wall insulation 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. CMU(s): Concrete masonry unit(s). B. Reinforced Masonry: Masonry containing horizontal reinforcing and vertical steel reinforcing in grouted cells. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 04 20 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. MCAA: Masonry Contractors Association of America 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: For the following: 1. Masonry Units: Show sizes,profiles, coursing, and locations of special shapes. 2. Reinforcing Steel: Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show elevations of reinforced walls. 3. Fabricated Flashing: Detail corner units, end-dam units, and other special applications. C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of the following: 1. Face brick,in the form of straps of five or more bricks. 2. Concrete Masonry Units: full size soap or block sample for each color and finish other than standard CMU. 3. Pigmented and colored-aggregate mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project. Label Samples to indicate types and amounts of pigments used. 4. Weep holes/vents. 5. Accessories embedded in masonry. D. List of Materials Used in Constructing Mockups: List generic product names together with manufacturers, manufacturers' product names, model numbers, lot numbers, batch numbers, source of supply, and other information as required to identify materials used. Include mix proportions for mortar and grout and source of aggregates. 1. Submittal is for information only. Neither receipt of list nor approval of mockup constitutes approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless such deviations are specifically brought to the attention of Architect and approved in writing. E. Qualification Data: For testing agency. F. Installer Qualifications: Submit evidence of contractor state license, MCAA company certification and personnel training and experience in constructing masonry structures of similar nature to this project, with a minimum of 5 years of on the job successful construction experience. List project superintendent for masonry work's, experience, training and certifications. G. Material Certificates: Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards. Provide for each type and size of the following: 1. Masonry units. a. Include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. b. For bricks, include size-variation data verifying that actual range of sizes falls within specified tolerances. c. For exposed brick, include material test report for efflorescence according to ASTM C 67. d. For masonry units used in structural masonry, include data and calculations establishing average net-area compressive strength of units. 2. Cementitious materials. Include brand,type, and name of manufacturer. 3. Preblended, dry mortar mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 4. Grout mixes. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 5. Reinforcing bars. 6. Joint reinforcement. 7. Anchors,ties, and metal accessories. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 042000 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 H. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients. 1. Include test reports,per ASTM C 780, for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. 2. Include test reports, per ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement. I.Cold-Weather Procedures: Detailed description of methods, materials, and equipment to be used to comply with cold-weather requirements. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency qualified according to ASTM C 1093 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. B. Applicator's Qualifications: 1. Supervision: Maintain competent supervisor who is at Project during times specified Work is in progress, and, who is experienced in installing systems similar to type and scope required for Project. 2. Experience: Company licensed in the State where the work will be performed and a MCAA certified company in good standing with not less than 5 years continuous experience under the current name in performing specified work similar in design, products, and extent to scope of this Project; with a record of successful in-service performance; and with sufficient production capability, facilities, and personnel to produce required Work. 3. Upon request, submit list of a minimum of 5 completed projects of comparable or greater size and complexity to this Work. Include for each project: a. Project name and location. b. Name and contact information for Owner. c. Name and contact information of General Contractor(if applicable). d. Name and contact information of Architect. e. Date of completion. C. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics,through one source from a single manufacturer for each product required. D. Fabrication of Acoustical Concrete Masonry Units: Carefully controlled use of the molds shall be employed so all units have one end of the cavities tightly closed. Slots and edges shall be straight and clean. Where units with metal inserts or fibrous or laminated fillers are called for, filler elements as supplied by the The Proudfoot Company shall be installed in the cavities of the blocks at the block plant. The filler shall be of specially fabricated incombustible fibrous material, cut accurately to size and installed as recommended. The fillers shall have metal septa laminated to one side of the fibrous material and shall be installed with the septa facing away from the slots. Where units with bare metal septa are called for, the bare (without fibrous material) metal septa shall be fabricated of 28 gauge, galvanized steel, furnished by the Proudfoot Company and installed in each cavity in the recommended manner at the block plant. E. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients for each type exposed unpainted masonry of a uniforin quality, including color, from a single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. F. Preconstruction Testing Service: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perforin preconstruction testing indicated below. Payment for these services will be made by Owner. Retesting of materials that fail to meet specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 042000 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Prism Test: For each type of construction required,per ASTM C 1314. G. Mockups: Build free standing pre-construction mockup to verify selections made under Sample submittals, demonstrate understanding of the complete wall construction, demonstrate typical construction and waterproofing details, demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup as shown on drawings, including face and backup wythes, fenestrations, flashings and accessories.. Comply with requirements in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements" for mockups. a. Prior to product installation a field-constructed mock-up shall be provided under the provisions of Division 1 Section - Submittals, Product Data, Samples and Mock-ups, to verify details & tie-ins, and to demonstrate the required quality of materials and installation. b. Construct a typical exterior wall section, incorporating back-up wall, cladding, window and sill, insulation, flashing and any other critical junctions (roof, foundation, etc.) as detailed in Drawings at typical wall locations as located by Architect. c. Locate mockups as directed by Architect. d. Build mockups as indicated in Drawings. 1) Show typical components, attachments to building structure, and methods of installation. e. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting installation. f. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. g. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. h. Demolish and remove mockups when directed. H. Sample Panels: Build up to three sample panels to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section- Quality Requirements for mockups. 1. Build sample panels for each type of exposed unit masonry construction at in sizes approximately 84 inches by 60 inches high by full thickness. 2. Protect approved sample panels from the elements with weather-resistant membrane. 3. Approval of sample panels is for color, texture, and blending of masonry units; relationship of mortar and sealant colors to masonry unit colors; tooling of joints; aesthetic qualities of workmanship; and other material and construction qualities specifically approved by Architect in writing. a. Approval of sample panels does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in sample panels unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. I.Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section-Project Management and Coordination. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store masonry units on elevated platforms in a dry location. If units are not stored in an enclosed location, cover tops and sides of stacks with waterproof sheeting, securely tied. if units become wet, do not install until they are dry. B. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 042000 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 D. Deliver preblended, dry mortar mix in moisture-resistant containers designed for lifting and emptying into dispensing silo. Store preblended, dry mortar mix in delivery containers on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location or in a metal dispensing silo with weatherproof cover. E. Store masonry accessories, including metal items, to prevent corrosion and accumulation of dirt and oil. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Protection of Masonry: During construction, cover tops of walls, projections, and sills with waterproof sheeting at end of each day's work. Cover partially completed masonry when construction is not in progress. 1. Extend cover a minimum of 24 inches down both sides and hold cover securely in place. 2. Where 1 wythe of multiwythe masonry walls is completed in advance of other wythes, secure cover a minimum of 24 inches down face next to unconstructed wythe and hold cover in place. B. Do not apply uniform floor or roof loads for at least 12 hours and concentrated loads for at least 3 days after building masonry walls or columns. C. Stain Prevention: Prevent grout, mortar, and soil from staining the face of masonry to be left exposed or painted. Immediately remove grout, mortar, and soil that come in contact with such masonry. I. Protect base of walls from rain-splashed mud and from mortar splatter by spreading coverings on ground and over wall surface. 2. Protect sills,ledges, and projections from mortar droppings. 3. Protect surfaces of window and door frames, as well as similar products with painted and integral finishes, from mortar droppings. 4. Turn scaffold boards near the wall on edge at the end of each day to prevent rain from splashing mortar and dirt onto completed masonry. D. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will remain so until masonry has dried, but not less than 7 days after completing cleaning. E. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Source Limitations for Masonry Units: Obtain exposed masonry units of a uniform texture and color, or a uniform blend within the ranges accepted for these characteristics, from single source from single manufacturer for each product required. B. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color for exposed masonry, from single manufacturer for each cementitious component and from single source or producer for each aggregate. Toutering at home 2.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide structural unit masonry that develops indicated net-area compressive strengths at 28 days. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 042000 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Determine net-area compressive strength of masonry from average net-area compressive strengths of masonry units and mortar types (unit-strength method) according to TMS 602/AC1530.1/ASCE 6. 2.03 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to exceed tolerances and to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not uses units where such defects, including dimensions that vary from specified dimensions by more than stated tolerances, will be exposed in the completed Work or will impair the quality of completed masonry. B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for fire-resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2.04 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMU'S) A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 1. Provide special shapes for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, partial height wall caps,bonding, and other special conditions. 2. Provide custom shapes for all outside corners that are not 90 degrees. 3. Provide bullnose units at all exposed interior outside corners, including corners of door and window openings, of finished CMU walls. a. Bullnoses may be site-tooled for standard and burnished block provided mockups for site tooling and finishing are approved by Architect. b. Provide square-edged units for other outside corners,unless otherwise indicated. B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 1900 psi. 2. Weight Classification: Normal weight,unless otherwise indicated. 3. Size(Width): Manufactured to dimensions 3/8 inch less than nominal dimensions. 4. Exposed Faces: Provide color and texture matching the range represented by Architect's sample. 2.05 MASONRY LINTELS A. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam concrete masonry units with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. Cure precast lintels before handling and installing. Temporarily support built-in-place lintels until cured. 2.06 BRICK A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: 1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished. 2. Provide special shapes for applications where stretcher units cannot accommodate special conditions,including those at corners,movement joints,bond beams, sashes, and lintels. 3. Provide special shapes for applications requiring brick of size, form, color, and texture on exposed surfaces that cannot be produced by sawing. 4. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view. 5. Provide custom shapes at all outside,non-ninety degree corners. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 042000 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Face Brick: ASTM C 216, Grade MW or SW,Type FBS. 1. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of 3000 psi. 2. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in.per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. 3. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not effloresced." 4. Application: Use where brick is exposed, pattern as indicated on the drawings, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide Interstate Brick or approved equal, Provided by: Upchurch Kimbrough Company, Contact: Holly Harris 9713-957- 1520 a. Blend 1: 1) Size: Norman 3 5/8"(W)x 2 1/4"(H)x 115/8"(L) 2) Color: Black Opal. 2.07 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color cement with pigments as required to produce mortar color indicated: 1. As selected by Architect from full range of available colors. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: a. Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors. b. Lanxess Corporation; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments. c. Solomon Colors, Inc.; SGS Mortar Colors. D. Water-Repellent Admixture: Liquid water-repellent mortar admixture intended for use with CMUs only, containing integral water repellent by same manufacturer. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: a. ACM Chemistries, Inc.; RainBloc for Mortar. b. BASF; MasterPel 240 Mortar Admixture. c. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Dry-Block Mortar Admixture. E. Workability Additive (Face Brick only): "A" Marble Dust by Armco Steel Corp., 90/200 Mineral Filler by Limestone Products. F. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. 2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. G. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404. H. Tuck Pointing Grout for Resin Faced block (Astra-Glaze): Epoxy Mortar and Grout Mix, meeting ANSI 118.3, and resistant to swimming pool water chemicals: Pro-Spec Bonsal B- 7000, mixed with BONSAL Polymer Modified Sanded Tile Grout, and with thickener additive as recommended by grout Manufacturer; or equal as acceptable to glazed CMU block Manufacturer and approved by Architect. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 042000 - 7 MAY 2, 2023 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2.08 REINFORCEMENT A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60. B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M. 1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Stainless Steel Type 304. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: 0.187-inch diameter. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: 0.148-inch diameter. 5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: 0.187-inch diameter. 6. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches o.c. 7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet,with prefabricated corner and tee units. C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods,unless otherwise noted in Structural Drawings or Specifications. D. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry: 1. Adjustable (two-piece) type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at each face shell of backing wythe unless otherwise noted in Structural Drawings or specifications, and with separate adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye connections having a maximum adjustment of 1-1/4 inches. Size ties to extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. 2. Available products: a. Dur-O-Wall; Truss design DA3700 Dur-O-Eye. b. Wire-Bond; Series 900 Level Hook and Eye Truss. E. Use reinforcing ladders one size smaller than nominal block size, or as directed by Manufacturer, at helmholtz resonator acoustical blocks. 2.09 TIES AND ANCHORS A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in subsequent paragraphs that are made from materials that comply with subparagraphs below,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Stainless Steel, Type 316,ASTM A167. B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches parallel to face of veneer. C. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structure: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 1. Connector Section for Concrete: Dovetail tabs for inserting into dovetail slots in concrete and attached to tie section; formed from 0.053-inch- thick, steel sheet, galvanized after fabrication. D. Adjustable Masonry-Veneer Anchors at metal studs 1. General: Provide anchors that allow vertical adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall, for attachment over sheathing to wood or metal studs, and as follows: a. Structural Performance Characteristics: Capable of withstanding a 100-lbf load in both tension and compression without defonning or developing play in excess of 0.05 inch. 2. Masonry Anchors for Uncoursed or Random Coarsed Stone Masonry at CMU Back-up: Galvanized ties that are bent in the form of triangular loops designed to be attached to masonry joint reinforcement with vertical wires passing through ties and through eyes projecting from masonry joint reinforcement. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 042000 - 8 MAY 2, 2023 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 a. System provides for vertical adjustment for stone pattern indicated in Division 04, Section"Stone Masonry". b. Available Products: 1) Hohmann& Barnard,Inc,; HVR-295 V. 2) Wire Bond; Stone Tab Ladder. 3. Screw-Attached, Masonry-Veneer Anchors: Units consisting of a wire tie and a metal anchor section. a. Anchor Section: Rib-stiffened, sheet metal plate with screw holes top and bottom, and having slotted holes for inserting vertical legs of wire tie specially formed to fit anchor section. b. Fabricate sheet metal anchor sections and other sheet metal parts from 0.067-inch- thick, Stainless Steel, Type 304,ASTM A580/ASTM 580M. c. Wire Ties: Triangular-, rectangular-, or T-shaped wire ties fabricated from 0.188- inch-diameter, Stainless Steel, Type 304,ASTM A580/ASTM 580M. d. Available Products: Basis of Design Products are: 1) For Coursed Masonry: Hohmann&Barnard, Inc. a) X-Seal Anchor b) HB-213-2X Anchor c) Provide with membrane flashing tape at air barrier, provided and installed under Division 07 "Air Barrier" Section(s), or : Hohmann & Barnard, Inc. X-Seal Tape may be substituted if allowed by air barrier manufacturer. 4. Stainless-Steel Drill Screws for Steel Studs: Proprietary fastener consisting of carbon- steel drill point and 300 Series stainless-steel shank, complying with ASTM C 954 except manufactured with hex washer head and neoprene washer, No. 10 diameter by length required to penetrate steel stud flange with not less than three exposed threads. a. Available Products: 1) Dayton Superior Corporation,Dur-O-Wal Division; Stainless Steel SX Fastener. 2) ITW Buildex; Scots long life Teks. 2.10 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Flexible Flashing (Copper Composite): For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use the following,unless otherwise indicated: 1. Copper-Laminated Flashing: ASTM B370, CDA Alloy 110, 3-oz./sq. ft. copper core laminated polymer fabric on both sides with non-asphaltic adhesive. Extend flashing past face of brick and trim flush after inspection. a. Product: 1) York Manufacturing, Inc.;York Copper Fabric Flashing, "Multi-Flash 500". 2) STS Coatings, Inc.; Wall Guardian Copper TWF 3) Wire-Bond, Inc.; Copper Seal 2. Copper Laminated Flashing shall not be used for any flashings that will be exposed to view in the completed work. Refer to Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for material type(s) for embedded flashings that are exposed to view or partially exposed to view. General Contractor shall coordinate responsibility to provide and install other flashing types. B. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates. 1. One part 100%solids,solvent-free formulated silyl-terminated polyether (STPE),ASTM C920-11, Type S,Grade NS,Class 50,York"Universeal US100" or equivalent. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 042000 - 9 MAY 2, 2023 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Termination bars: Provide stainless steel termination bars in cavity walls where copper flashing will be installed with termination bars to concrete block backup and with waterproof sealant to protect top side of terminations refer to Division 07 section on"Sealant". 1. Do not use termination bars at face of sheathing unless specifically detailed otherwise in the Drawings. Through-wall flashings at stud construction shall extend through and turn up behind exterior sheathing and ci insulation. Air barrier system materials (per Division 07 Air Barrier Sections) shall lap over and down the face of the through-wall flashings. 2. Termination Bars for Flexible Flashing: #304 Stainless steel sheet 0.090 inch by 3/4 inches minimum with a 3/16 inch minimum sealant flange at top, 8 inch oc pre-punched bolt holes minimum. 3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. OMG Roofing Products b. Hohmann& Barnard, Inc. (T1 with Foam-Tite option) c. Wire-Bond. 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; of width and thickness indicated; formulated from neoprene. B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated. C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type 1(No. 15 asphalt felt). D. Weep/Vent Products: 1. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard. a. Available Products: 1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Maze weep vent. 2) Dayton Superior Corporation,Dur-O-Wal Division; Cell Vents. 3) Heckmann Building Products Inc.;No. 85 Cell Vent. 4) Hohmann& Barnard, Inc.; Quadro-Vent. 5) Wire-Bond; Cell Vent. E. Cavity Drainage Material: Free-draining mesh, made from polymer strands that will not degrade within the wall cavity. 1. Provide one of the following configurations: a. Strips, full-depth of cavity and 10 inches high, with dovetail shaped notches 7 inches deep that prevent mesh from being clogged with mortar droppings. b. Strips, not less than 1-1/2 inches thick and 10 inches high, with dimpled surface designed to catch mortar droppings and prevent weep holes from being clogged with mortar. 2. Available Products: a. Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Break II. b. Dayton Superior Corporation,Dur-O-Wal Division; Polytite MortarStop. c. Mortar Net USA, Ltd.; Mortar Net. F. Reinforcing Bar Positioners: Wire units designed to fit into mortar bed joints spanning masonry unit cells with loops for holding reinforcing bars in center of cells. Units are formed FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 04 20 00 - 10 MAY 2, 2023 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 from 0.142-inch steel wire,hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. Provide units with either two loops or four loops as needed for number of bars indicated. 1. Available Products: a. Dayton Superior Corporation,Dur-O-Wal Division; D/A 810,D/A 812 or D/A 817. b. Heckmann Building Products Inc.;No. 376 Rebar Positioner. c. Hohmann& Barnard, Inc.; #RB or#RB-Twin Rebar Positioner. d. Wire-Bond; O-Ring or Double O-Ring Rebar Positioner. 2. In event of conflict with reinforcing bar positions required in Structural Drawings, provide type indicated in Structural Drawings. 2.12 MASONRY-CELL INSULATION A. Cellular plastic foam insulation comprised of spray-dried polymeric resin and a foaming catalyst concentrate which are combined with water and then injected, along with compressed air, into the wall cavity by the installer. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide CoreFoam as manufactured by cfiFOAM, Inc, or approved equal: 1. ASTM E-84 Surface Burning Characteristics a. Flame Spread 25 or less. b. Smoke Generated less than 450. c. Thickness 3.5 inches (maximum test thickness) d. Flammability Classifications: Class A 2. R-value 4.0-5.0 (hr ft2 °F in)/BTU; 4.92 per inch at 25 °F. 3. Density upon final curing: 0.5-1.0 lb/ft'. 4. Install in all cells of exterior walls between conditioned space and building exterior, except for grouted cells. a. At acoustical block, provide block with grout shields behind the acoustical fill material. B. Molded-Polystyrene Insulation Units: Rigid, cellular thermal insulation formed by the expansion of polystyrene-resin beads or granules in a closed mold to comply with ASTM C 578, Type 1. Provide total a R-value of 7.6. Provide specially shaped units designed for installing in cores of masonry units. 1. Available Products: a. Concrete Block Insulating Systems; Korfil. b. Shelter Enterprises Inc.; Omni Core. 2.13 MASONRY CLEANERS A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned. The use of muriatic acid is prohibited. 1. Available Manufacturers: a. Diedrich Technologies,Inc. b. EaCo Chem,Inc. c. ProSoCo,Inc. 2. Do not use materials or methods that can damage masonry finishes. Use only manufacturer's approved products and methods. 2.14 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders,water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures,unless otherwise indicated. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 04 20 00 - 11 MAY 2, 2023 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Limit cementitious materials in mortar to portland cement and lime. 3. Limit cementitious materials in mortar for exterior masonry to portland cement and lime. 4. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view,regardless of weather conditions,to ensure that mortar color is consistent. B. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Property Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated or needed to provide required compressive strength of masonry. 1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth,use Type S. 2. For reinforced masonry,use Type S. 3. For mortar parge coats,use Type S. 4. For exterior, above-grade, load-bearing and non-load-bearing walls and parapet walls; for interior load-bearing walls; for interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not indicated,use Type N. 5. Incorporate water repellent admixture in mortar for CMU exterior walls only. 6. Use workability additive for brick masonry. C. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476. 1. Use grout of type indicated or,if not otherwise indicated, of type(fine or coarse)that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height. 2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M. 2.15 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform source quality-control testing indicated below: 1. Payment for these services will be made by Owner. 2. Retesting of materials failing to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. B. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit furnished,per ASTM C 67. C. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit furnished,per ASTM C 140. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. For the record,prepare written report, endorsed by Installer,listing conditions detrimental to performance of work. 2. Verify that foundations are within tolerances specified. 3. Verify that reinforcing dowels are properly placed. B. Before installation, examine rough-in and built-in construction for piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 COORDINATION A. Contractor is responsible to coordinate between trades prior to concrete slab pours to avoid conflicts with CMU wall construction,including but not limited to the following: 1. Positions, sizes, and other requirements for locating all reinforcing coming up through slab. Unless otherwise noted in Structural Drawings, post-installation with epoxy FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 04 20 00 - 12 MAY 2, 2023 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 anchors is not an equivalent method of installation. Any request to substitute post- installed anchors in masonry construction should be pre-approved by Contractor via RFI to the Structural Engineer of record, and the Structural Engineer may reject requests for such substitution. 2. Coordinate all conduits and pipes as shown on MEP drawings for concealed installation to greatest extent possible. 3. Reinforced/grouted cells will not be in conflict with electrical conduits,plumbing pipes, or other items built into CMU cells. This includes the quantity, sizes, and locations to comply with all notes, specific location details, and typical details, as indicated in the Structural Drawings. a. A large number of conduits in a line could cause non-compliance with Structural requirements, either for the CMU wall, or in the concrete slab. In areas where many conduits are required for electrical items, request clarification from Architect and Structural Engineer as to allowable routings of conduits to avoid adverse impact on the structural system. 4. Storm Shelters: Confirm that perimeter walls of the impact-resisting structure of the Storm Shelter complies with the following: a. No conduits, pipes, or other similar construction is allowed inside the cells of 8" CMU. b. At 12" CMU, Where conduits or pipes are indicated in Drawings to be located inside CMU wall construction, locate them inside the cells of CMU subject to the following requirements: 1) No pipe or conduit larger than 1" shall be located in any CMU cell of the impact- resisting structure of the Storm Shelter. 2) Only one pipe or conduit is allowed inside each CMU cell, and all pipe or conduit shall be located tight to the interior wall face of the CMU cell. 3) Only one recessed wall box is allowed per CMU cell, and all recessed boxes shall be located on the interior side of CMU only. 4) Additionally, locate pipe and conduit such that it will not interfere with required cell reinforcing. c. Any electrical devices indicated in conflict with a. and b. above must have electrical wiring routed to the device(s) within surface mounted raceway. Obtain approval of Architect for routing to minimize visual clutter, including minimizing the number of bends in exposed raceways. d. Coordinate specific structural requirements indicated in Structural Drawings and notes for CMU at storm shelter construction, which likely differs from other areas of CMU. Such differences may include, but are not limited to, such things as: 1) Fully grouted cells throughout 2) More stringent requirements for cell or bond beam reinforcement 3) More stringent requirements for size or spacing of horizontal joint reinforcing. 4) No allowance for use of post-installed anchors, even if other CMU walls are allowed to use post-installed anchors, including by approved substitution requests unless storm shelter CMU is specifically approved by such requests. 5) No pipe, conduit or other penetration greater than 2" diameter is allowed through the impact-resisting structure without providing impact baffling. e. In event of apparent conflicts,notify Architect to confirm the proper resolution. 5. Confirm sill sealer gaskets are installed where studs meet concrete slabs, prior to beginning veneer installation. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 04 20 00 - 13 MAY 2, 2023 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Thickness: Build cavity and composite walls and other masonry construction to full thickness shown. Build single-wythe walls to actual widths of masonry units, using units of widths indicated. B. Build chases and recesses to accommodate items specified in this and other Sections. C. Leave openings for equipment to be installed before completing masonry. After installing equipment, complete masonry to match the construction immediately adjacent to opening. D. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed. Do not install any cut units at corner conditions. E. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. 1. Mix units from several pallets or cubes as they are placed. F. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying. Do not wet CMU. G. Comply with construction tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 and with the following: 1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 2. For vertical alignment of exposed head joints, do not vaiy from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 3. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. 4. For exposed bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch, with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch. Do not vary from bed joint thickness of adjacent courses by more than 1/8 inch. 5. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch. Do not vary from adjacent bed joint and head-joint thicknesses by more than 1/8 inch. 6. For faces of adjacent exposed masonry units, do not vary from flush alignment by more than 1/16 inch except due to warpage of masonry units within tolerances specified for warpage of units. 7. For exposed bed joints and head joints of stacked bond, do not vary from a straight line by more than 1/16 inch from one masonry unit to the next. H. Sound Absorbing Concrete Unit Masonry: Units shall be kept dry and installed by the General Contractor or Masonry Contractor using only mechanics skilled in the laying of masonry blocks. All necessary cutting on the job site shall be performed with power tools in such a manner as to provide straight and true edges. No chipped or broken blocks shall be used. Acoustical masonry shall be laid in running or stack bond with the open ends of the cavities facing downward and shall be seated in a full horizontal bed of mortar. The slots shall be exposed to the area where the sound absorption is desired as indicated on the plans. Care shall be taken to ensure that the slots are kept free of mortar or debris above the mortar joint. Lines shall be straight and true and the worlananship shall otherwise conform to all requirements of the General Specifications for masonry work. 1. Ensure grout shields are installed in block cells to be grouted or to receive insulating foam fill behind the acoustical material. 3.04 LAYING MASONRY WALLS FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 04 20 00 - 14 MAY 2, 2023 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. C. Lay concealed masonry with all units in a wythe in running bond or bonded by lapping not less than 4-inches. Bond and interlock each course of each wythe at corners. Do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs. D. Stopping and Resuming Work: Stop work by racking back units in each course from those in course below; do not tooth. When resuming work, clean masonry surfaces that are to receive mortar, remove loose masonry units and mortar, and wet brick if required before laying fresh masonry. E. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. Install pipes and conduit as shown on MEP drawings, and conceal within masonry cells all locations. Alert Architect to conflicts before installation. F. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar,unless otherwise indicated. G. Where built-in items are to be embedded in cores of hollow masonry units, place a layer of metal lath,wire mesh, or plastic mesh in the joint below and rod mortar or grout into core. H. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels,posts, and similar items,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Fill all cores of CMU at storm shelter impact-resisting perimeter walls, and any other locations so indicated in Structural Drawings. I.Build non-load-bearing interior partitions full height of story to underside of solid floor or roof structure above,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Install compressible filler in joint between top of partition and underside of structure above. 2. Fasten partition top anchors to structure above and build into top of partition. Grout cells of CMUs solidly around plastic tubes of anchors and push tubes down into grout to provide 1/2-inch clearance between end of anchor rod and end of tube. Space anchors 48 inches o.c.,unless otherwise indicated. 3. Wedge non-load-bearing partitions against structure above with small pieces of tile, slate, or metal. Fill joint with mortar after dead-load deflection of structure above approaches final position. 4. At fire-rated partitions, treat joint between top of partition and underside of structure above to comply with Division 07 Section-Fire-Resistive Joint Systems. 3.05 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow brick and concrete masonry units as follows: 1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings where cells are not grouted. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 04 20 00 - 15 MAY 2, 2023 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. C. Mortar joints to be tooled(concave), except special joints as detailed. D. Epoxy Grouted Joints at Resin Faced (Astra-Glaze) Block: All exposed joints at resin faced side of block. I. General: The glazed facing shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C744 when viewed from a distance of five(5)feet at right angles to the wall with normal lighting. 2. Rake back mortar to minimum depth of 1/4" (maximum 1/2" depth). 3. Clean mortar in compliance with block Manufacturer's recommendations, prior to complete setting of the mortar. 4. Install grout joints in compliance with block and grout Manufacturers' instructions and as follows: a. Mix approved water and pool chemical resistant grout per Manufacturer's recommendations. Do not add water to mix. b. Tuck point joints with approved water and pool chemical resistant grout. Apply with mortar gun or other approved method. DO NOT FLOAT grout across the surface of the block, as this can result in staining or difficult to clean haze or smears. c. Neatly tool grout joints to concave shape. Immediately remove excess grout, smears, and spills from surfaces of resin faced block. 5. Keep the face of faced block clean during installation and as work progresses. Do not allow excess mortar and grout lumps or smears to harden on the glazed surfaces. Remove mortar and grout with non-abrasive cloth and methods as approved by Manufacturer. 3.06 CAVITY WALLS A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using one of the following methods: 1. Individual Metal Ties: Provide ties as shown installed in horizontal joints, but not less than one metal tie for 1.77 sq. ft. of wall area spaced not to exceed 16 inches o.c. horizontally and 16 inches o.c. vertically. Stagger ties in alternate courses. Provide additional ties within 12 inches of openings and space not more than 36 inches apart around perimeter of openings. At intersecting and abutting walls,provide ties at no more than 24 inches o.c. vertically. a. Where bed joints of wythes do not align,use adjustable (two-piece) type ties. b. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use adjustable (two-piece) type ties to allow for differential movement regardless of whether bed joints align. 2. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints. a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement extending across both wythes. b. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable (two-piece) type reinforcement. c. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use adjustable (two-piece) type reinforcement to allow for differential movement regardless of whether bed joints align. B. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into cavity. C. Coat cavity face of backup wythe to comply with Division 07 Section - Bituminous Dampproofing. Where indicated on drawings. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 04 20 00 - 16 MAY 2, 2023 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 D. Installing Cavity Wall Insulation: Place small dabs of adhesive, spaced approximately 12 inches o.c. both ways, on inside face of insulation boards, or attach with plastic fasteners designed for this purpose. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other confining obstructions in cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units firmly against inside wythe of masonry or other construction as shown. 1. Fill cracks and open gaps in insulation with crack sealer compatible with insulation and masonry. E. Membrane Dampproofing: Re: Division 07 3.07 MASONRY-FOAM CELL INSULATION A. Site Verification: Install after block mortar is adequately cured and do not install when there is water in the cells or block is wet. Install when temperature of wall assembly and other environmental requirements of Manufacturer are met. B. Install foam cell insulation in masonry unit cells per Manufacturer's instructions. Install insulation after laying units and before installing exterior continuous insulation, finishes, or brick veneer. Install from top and/or exterior side and patch all core holes. Install foam before applying dampproofing, or patch dampproofing after patching core holes. C. Field Quality Control: 1. Testing a. Verify insulation density by random sampling of foam. b. Fill a 12xl2xl2 box with foam. c. Foam weight should be 2 '/2- 31/4 lb. 2. Inspection and Correction: Owner and Architect reserve the right to require verification and correction of proper installation as follows: a. Owner shall engage an IR technician who is "BlockWallScanIR" certified to perform and interpret infrared scans of all insulated masonry walls. Should any deficiencies be discovered, the Installer shall be responsible to pay all costs for the testing and verification. b. Installer shall correct any portion of the foam installation found not to be in compliance with manufacturer's requirements, at no additional cost to Owner. D. Install molded-polystyrene insulation units into masonry unit cells before laying units. 3.08 CONCRETE MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches. 1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls, and at storm shelter perimeter walls forming the impact-resistant shell of the Storm Shelter. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches above and below wall openings and extending 12 inches beyond openings. a. Reinforcement above is in addition to continuous reinforcement. B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints,unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units. D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units. E. Cut and bend reinforcing units as directed by manufacturer for continuity at corners, returns, offsets, column fireproofing,pipe enclosures, and other special conditions. 3.09 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 04 20 00 - 17 MAY 2, 2023 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Anchor masonry veneers to wall framing or concrete and masonry backup with masonry- veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: 1. Fasten screw-attached anchors through sheathing to wall framing and to concrete and masonry backup with metal fasteners of type indicated. Use two fasteners unless anchor design only uses one fastener. 2. Insert slip-in anchors in metal studs as sheathing is installed. Provide one anchor at each stud in each horizontal joint between sheathing boards. 3. Embed tie sections in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2 inches of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of insulation. 4. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down. 5. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches o.c. vertically and 16 inches o.c. horizontally, with not less than 1 anchor for each 2 sq. ft. of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 8 inches, around perimeter. 6. Provide self-seating tape to seal around shaft of screw and legs of anchor at the point of penetration. Unless otherwise indicated in Division 07 "Air Barrier" sections, tape may be applied at each anchor or in continuous vertical strips, however continuous strips are highly recommended where exterior insulation will visually obscure the tape locations at the air barrier. 3.10 CONTROL AND EXPANSION JOINTS A. General: Install control and expansion joint materials in unit masonry as masonry progresses. Do not allow materials to span control and expansion joints without provision to allow for in- plane wall or partition movement. B. Form control joints in concrete masonry as follows using one of the following methods: 1. Fit bond-breaker strips into hollow contour in ends of concrete masonry units on one side of control joint. Fill resultant core with grout and rake out joints in exposed faces for application of sealant. 2. Install preformed control-joint gaskets designed to fit standard sash block. 3. Install interlocking units designed for control joints. Install bond-breaker strips at joint. Keep head joints free and clear of mortar or rake out joint for application of sealant. 4. Install temporary foam-plastic filler in head joints and remove filler when unit masonry is complete for application of sealant. C. Form expansion joints in brick made from clay or shale as follows: 1. Build incompressible joint fillers where indicated. 2. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less than 3/8 inch for installation of sealant and backer rod specified in Division 07 Section - Joint Sealants. D. Location of expansion joints: 1. At long walls no greater than 25 feet maximum. 2. At offsets in walls. 3. Near corners (10 ft. maximum). 4. At intersections of walls. 5. Where short runs of masonry intersect long runs of masonry. 6. Where materials of different coefficients of thermal expansion are joined. E. Form open joint full depth of brick wythe and of width indicated, but not less Provide horizontal, pressure-relieving joints by inserting a compressible filler of width required for installing sealant and backer rod specified in Division 07 Section- Joint Sealants,but not less than 3/8 inch. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 04 20 00 - 18 MAY 2, 2023 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Locate horizontal,pressure-relieving joints beneath shelf angles supporting masonry. 3.11 LINTELS A. Install steel lintels where indicated. B. Provide masonry lintels where shown and where openings of more than 12 inches for brick- size units and 24 inches for block-size units are shown without structural steel or other supporting lintels. C. Provide minimum bearing of 8 inches at each jamb,unless otherwise indicated. 3.12 FLASHING,WEEPS, CAVITY DRAINAGE,AND VENTS A. General: Install embedded flashing and weeps in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install vents at T-0" on center at top of masonry walls shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated. Embed flashing in manufacturer's recommended sealant. Seal lap joints as recommended by manufacturer. B. Install flashing as follows,unless otherwise indicated: 1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer. 2. At multi-wythe masonry walls, including cavity walls, extend flashing through outer wythe, across air space behind veneer, behind ci insulation and turned up face of bituminous coated masonry inner wythe a minimum of 8 inches. Secure to the inner wythe with continuous termination bar. Seal top of termination bar and install ci insulation over flashing. 3. At stud-framed walls with masonry-veneer walls, extend flashing through veneer, across air space behind veneer, up face of sheathing at least 8 inches, through sheathing and up back of sheathing a minimum of 4 inches. Install ci insulation and water/vapor barrier over flashing. 4. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches at ends, turn up and fold not less than 2 inches to create a folded end dam,per manufacturers recommendations & literature. 5. Cut flexible flashing off flush with face of wall after masonry wall construction is completed and reviewed by architect. C. Install reglets and nailers for flashing and other related construction where they are shown to be built into masonry. D. Install weeps in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows: 1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weeps. 2. Form weeps above flashing under brick sills. 3. Space weeps 24 inches o.c.,unless otherwise indicated. E. Place cavity drainage material in cavities to comply with configuration requirements for cavity drainage material in Part 2 "Miscellaneous Masonry Accessories" Article. At a minimum, place Mortar Net to a height equal to the height of the first course, but not less than 8 inches. Place immediately above the top of flashings embedded in the wall, as masonry construction progresses,to catch mortar droppings and to maintain drainage. F. Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use specified weep/vent products to form vents. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 04 20 00 - 19 MAY 2, 2023 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. Install through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking. G. Install sill sealer at sill plate per manufacturer's written instructions. 3.13 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction. 1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry. 2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other temporary loads that may be placed on them during construction. B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure. 1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement,including minimum grout space and maximum pour height. 2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches. 3.14 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense. B. Inspections: Special inspections according to Level B in TMS 402/ACI 530/ASCE 5. 1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site- prepared mortar. 2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes, and locations of reinforcement. 3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout. C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests. D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. of wall area or portion thereof. E. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C67 for compressive strength. F. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C140 for compressive strength. G. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test(Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C780. H. Mortar Test(Property Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C780. Test mortar for mortar air content and compressive strength. I.Grout Test(Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C1019. J. Prism Test: For each type of construction provided, according to ASTM C1314 at 28 days. 3.15 REPAIRING, POINTING,AND CLEANING FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 042000 - 20 MAY 2, 2023 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Remove and replace masonry units that are loose, chipped, broken, stained, or otherwise damaged or that do not match adjoining units. Install new units to match adjoining units; install in fresh mortar,pointed to eliminate evidence of replacement. B. Pointing: During the tooling of joints, enlarge voids and holes, except weep holes, and completely fill with mortar. Point up joints, including corners, openings, and adjacent construction, to provide a neat, uniform appearance. Prepare joints for sealant application, where indicated. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of masonry. 3. Protect adjacent stone and nonmasonry surfaces from contact with cleaner by covering them with liquid strippable masking agent or polyethylene film and waterproof masking tape. 4. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. 5. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. 6. Where required clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 7. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. 3.16 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL A. Salvageable Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, excess masonry materials are Contractor's property. At completion of unit masonry work,remove from Project site. B. Waste Disposal as Fill Material: Dispose of clean masonry waste, including excess or soil- contaminated sand,waste mortar, and broken masonry units, by crushing and mixing with fill material as fill is placed. 1. Crush masonry waste to less than 4 inches in each dimension. 2. Mix masonry waste with at least two parts of specified till material for each part of masonry waste. Fill material is specified in Division 31 Section- Earthwork. 3. Do not dispose of masonry waste as fill within 18 inches of finished grade. END OF SECTION 04 20 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 042000 - 21 MAY 2, 2023 UNIT MASONRY ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 04 72 00 - CAST STONE MASONRY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. This specification covers all labor, materials and services incidental to and including the furnishing and setting of all Cast Stone as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. 2. The Manufacturer shall be responsible for all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for, and incidental to,providing all Cast Stone covered by this Specification. 3. The Setting Contractor shall unload, receipt for, protect, store and set all Cast Stone covered by this Specification and shall provide and install all anchors for same. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 04 Section-Unit Masonry Assemblies,for miscellaneous masonry accessories. 2. Division 05 Section - Cold-Formed Metal Framing, for steel stud frames supporting dimension stone cladding. 3. Division 07 Section - Fluid Applied Membrane Air Barriers, for membranes applied to exterior face of exterior sheathing at exterior masonry cavity walls. 4. Division 07 Section- Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim, for exposed sheet metal flashing. 5. Division 07 Section-Firestopping,for firestopping at openings in masonry walls. 6. Division 07 Section - Joint Sealants, for sealing control and expansion joints in unit masonry. 7. Division 07 Section- Thermal Insulation,for cavity wall insulation. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1. For cast stone units, include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for cast stone units. Include dimensions, details of reinforcement and anchorages if any, and indication of finished faces. Tie cast stone locations to building gridlines for verification of dimensions. 1. Include building elevations showing layout of units and locations of joints and anchors. 2. Show locations and details of flashing at a scale no less than 3 inches per 12 inches. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For colored mortar. D. Samples for Verification: 1. For each color and texture of cast stone required, 10 inches square in size. 2. For colored mortar. Make Samples using same sand and mortar ingredients to be used on Project. Label Samples to indicated types and amounts of pigments used. E. Full-Size Samples: For each color,texture, and shape of cast stone unit required. 1. Make available for Architect's review at Project site. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 04 72 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 CAST STONE MASONRY DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Manufacturer shall have been a recognized and reputable Cast Stone manufacturer for a minimum of five years continuous operation, and shall have adequate experience, facilities and capacity to furnish the quality, sizes and quantity of Cast Stone required without delaying the progress of the work. The Manufacturer's products shall have been previously used and exposed to the weather with satisfactory results. B. Standards: Comply with the requirements of the Cast Stone Institute's Technical Manual and the project specifications. Where a conflict may occur,the contract documents shall prevail. C. All Cast Stone used in this work shall be manufactured by cast stone manufacturer and shall have minimum compressive strength of 6500 lbs.per square inch and absorption of no greater than 6%when tested in accordance with the requirements of this Specification. D. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. E. Source Limitations for Cast Stone: Obtain cast stone units through single source from single manufacturer. F. Source Limitations for Mortar Materials: Obtain mortar ingredients of a uniform quality, including color, from one manufacturer for each cementitious component and from one source or producer for each aggregate. G. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Coordinate delivery of cast stone with unit masonry work to avoid delaying the Work and to minimize the need for on-site storage. B. Pack,handle, and ship cast stone units in suitable packs or pallets. 1. Lift with wide-belt slings; do not use wire rope or ropes that might cause staining. Move cast stone units,if required,using dollies with wood supports. 2. Store cast stone units on wood skids or pallets with nonstaining, waterproof covers, securely tied. Arrange to distribute weight evenly and to prevent damage to units. Ventilate under covers to prevent condensation. C. Store cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. Do not use cementitious materials that have become damp. D. Store mortar aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination can be avoided. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements in AC1530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. 1. Cold-Weather Cleaning: Use liquid cleaning methods only when air temperature is 40 deg F and above and will remain so until cast stone has dried, but no fewer than seven days after completing cleaning. B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 CAST STONE MATERIALS FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 047200 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 CAST STONE MASONRY DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. General: Comply with ASTM C 1364 and the following: B. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or Type Ill, containing not more than 0.60 percent total alkali when tested according to ASTM C 114. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce cast stone color indicated. C. Coarse Aggregates: Granite, quartz, or limestone complying with ASTM C 33; gradation and colors as needed to produce required cast stone textures and colors. D. Fine Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone complying with ASTM C 33, gradation and colors as needed to produce required cast stone textures and colors. E. Color Pigment: ASTM C 979, synthetic mineral-oxide pigments or colored water-reducing admixtures; color stable, free of carbon black, nonfading, and resistant to lime and other alkalis. F. Admixtures: Use only admixtures specified or approved in writing by Architect. 1. Do not use admixtures that contain more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride. 2. Use only admixtures that are certified by manufacturer to be compatible with cement and other admixtures used. 3. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. Add to mixes for units exposed to the exterior at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in an air content of 4 to 6 percent, except do not add to zero-slump concrete mixes. G. Reinforcement: Deformed steel bars complying with ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60. Use galvanized or epoxy-coated reinforcement when covered with less than 1-1/2 inches of cast stone material. 1. Epoxy Coating: ASTM A 775/A 775M. 2. Galvanized Coating: ASTM A 767/A 767M. H. Embedded Anchors and Other Inserts: Fabricated from stainless steel complying with ASTM A 240/A 240M,ASTM A 276, or ASTM A 666, Type 304. 2.02 CAST STONE UNITS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the one of the following or equal: 1. AHI Supply, LP, 2800 North Gordon, Alvin, Texas 77511, (281) 331-0088 Fax (281) 331-9813, Email: arhoden@ahi-supply.com, URL: www.ahi-supply.com. 2. Stone Castle Industries Inc., 3615 Almeda Genoa, Houston, Texas 77047, (713) 440- 6224 Fax(713) 440-6228,URL: www.stonecastleine.com. B. Regional Materials: Cast stone units shall be manufactured within 500 miles of Project site from aggregates and cement that have been extracted, harvested, or recovered, as well as manufactured,within 500 miles of Project site. C. Provide cast stone units complying with ASTM C 1364 using either the vibrant dry tamp method. 1. Provide units that are resistant to freezing and thawing as determined by laboratory testing according to ASTM C 666/C 666M,Procedure A, as modified by ASTM C 1364. D. Fabricate units with sharp arris and accurately reproduced details, with indicated texture on all exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 1. Slope exposed horizontal surfaces 1:12 to drain unless otherwise indicated. 2. Provide raised fillets at backs of sills and at ends indicated to be built into jambs. 3. Provide drips on projecting elements unless otherwise indicated. E. Fabrication Tolerances: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 047200 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 CAST STONE MASONRY DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Variation in Cross Section: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/8 inch. 2. Variation in Length: Do not vary from indicated dimensions by more than 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch,whichever is greater,but in no case by more than 1/4 inch. 3. Warp, Bow, and Twist: Not to exceed 1/360 of the length of unit or 1/8 inch, whichever is greater. 4. Location of Grooves,False Joints, Holes, Anchorages, and Similar Features: Do not vary from indicated position by more than 1/8 inch on formed surfaces of units and 3/8 inch on unformed surfaces. F. Cure units as follows: 1. Cure units in enclosed moist curing room at 95 to 100 percent relative humidity and temperature of 100 deg F for 12 hours or 70 deg F for 16 hours. 2. Keep units damp and continue curing to comply with one of the following: a. No fewer than five days at mean daily temperature of 70 deg F or above. b. No fewer than six days at mean daily temperature of 60 deg F or above. c. No fewer than seven days at mean daily temperature of 50 deg F or above. d. No fewer than eight days at mean daily temperature of 45 deg F or above. G. Acid etch units after curing to remove cement film from surfaces to be exposed to view. H. Colors and Textures: Black or Dark Gray to match brick. Architect to approve final color from manufacturers full color selection. 2.03 MORTAR MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Provide natural color or white cement as required to produce mortar color indicated. B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S. C. Mortar Pigments: Natural and synthetic iron oxides and chromium oxides, compounded for use in mortar mixes and complying with ASTM C 979. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: 1) Davis Colors; True Tone Mortar Colors. 2) Lanxess Corporation; Bayferrox Iron Oxide Pigments. 3) Solomon Colors,Inc.; SGS Mortar Colors. D. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144. 1. For mortar that is exposed to view, use washed aggregate consisting of natural sand or crushed stone. 2. For joints less than 1/4 inch thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 sieve. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Anchors: Type and size indicated, fabricated from Type 316 stainless steel complying with ASTM A167. B. Dowels: 1/2-inch- diameter, round bars, fabricated from Type 316 stainless steel complying with ASTM A167. 2.05 MORTAR MIXES A. Comply with requirements in Division 04 Section-Unit Masonry for mortar mixes. 1. Use masonry cement mortar unless otherwise indicated. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 047200 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 CAST STONE MASONRY DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 SETTING CAST STONE IN MORTAR A. Set cast stone as indicated on Drawings. Set units accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. 1. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure units in place. 2. Coordinate installation of cast stone with installation of flashing specified in other Sections. B. Wet joint surfaces thoroughly before applying mortar or setting in mortar. C. Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints unless otherwise indicated. 1. Set units with joints 1/4 to 3/8 inch wide unless otherwise indicated. 2. Build anchors and ties into mortar joints as units are set. 3. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots with mortar. 4. Fill collar joints solid as units are set. 5. Build concealed flashing into mortar joints as units are set. 6. Keep head joints in coping and other units with exposed horizontal surfaces open to receive sealant. 7. Keep joints at shelf angles open to receive sealant. D. Rake out joints for pointing with mortar to depths of not less than 3/4 inch. Rake joints to uniform depths with square bottoms and clean sides. Scrub faces of units to remove excess mortar as joints are raked. E. Point mortar joints by placing and compacting mortar in layers not greater than 3/8 inch. Compact each layer thoroughly and allow it to become thumbprint hard before applying next layer. F. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated. G. Provide sealant joints at copings and other horizontal surfaces, at expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints, and at locations indicated. 1. Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. 2. Build in compressible foam-plastic joint fillers where indicated. 3. Form joint of width indicated,but not less than 3/8 inch. 4. Prime cast stone surfaces to receive sealant and install compressible backer rod in joints before applying sealant unless otherwise indicated. 5. Prepare and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable requirements in Division 07 Section-Joint Sealants. 3.03 SETTING ANCHORED CAST STONE WITH SEALANT-FILLED JOINTS A. Set cast stone as indicated on Drawings. Set units accurately in locations indicated with edges and faces aligned according to established relationships and indicated tolerances. 1. Install anchors, supports, fasteners, and other attachments indicated or necessary to secure units in place. 2. Shim and adjust anchors, supports, and accessories to set cast stone in locations indicated with uniforn joints. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 047200 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 CAST STONE MASONRY DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Keep cavities open where unfilled space is indicated between back of cast stone units and backup wall; do not fill cavities with mortar or grout. C. Fill anchor holes with sealant. 1. Where dowel holes occur at pressure-relieving joints, provide compressible material at ends of dowels. D. Set cast stone supported on clip or continuous angles on resilient setting shims. Use material of thickness required to maintain uniform joint widths. Hold shims back from face of cast stone a distance at least equal to width of joint. E. Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials. Remove temporary shims and spacers from joints after anchors and supports are secured in place and cast stone units are anchored. Do not begin sealant installation until temporary shims and spacers are removed. 1. Form open joint of width indicated,but not less than 3/8 inch. F. Prime cast stone surfaces to receive sealant and install compressible backer rod in joints before applying sealant unless otherwise indicated. G. Prepare and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable requirements in Division 07 Section-Joint Sealants. 3.04 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet, 1/4 inch in 20 feet, or 1/2 inch maximum. C. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches or one- fourth of nominal joint width,whichever is less. D. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Do not vary from flush alignment with adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units by more than 1/16 inch, except where variation is due to warpage of units within tolerances specified. 3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching approved Samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect. B. Replace units in a manner that results in cast stone matching approved Samples, complying with other requirements, and showing no evidence of replacement. C. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean cast stone as work progresses. 1. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. 2. Remove excess sealant immediately, including spills, smears, and spatter. D. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed cast stone as follows: 1. Remove large mortar particles by hand with wooden paddles and nonmetallic scrape hoes or chisels. 2. Test cleaning methods on sample; leave one sample uncleaned for comparison purposes. Obtain Architect's approval of sample cleaning before proceeding with cleaning of cast stone. 3. Clean cast stone by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. END OF SECTION 04 72 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 047200 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 CAST STONE MASONRY DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 05 12 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Standard Form of Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: This section covers furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and services in connection with the furnishing, fabrication and erection of all structural steel work complete including: 1. Steel Columns 2. Steel Beams 3. Shelf Angles 4. Bolts 5. Angle Frames Around Openings 6. Laboratory Control 7. Leveling Plates and anchor plates not cast in concrete or masonry. 8. Shop Painting B. Include all supplementary parts and members necessary to complete the structural steel frame, regardless of whether all such parts are definitely shown or specified, and furnish all such bolts, gussets, plates, etc. as may be required for proper assembly of all items. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements." 2. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications." 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Structural Steel: Elements of the structural frame indicated on Drawings and as described in AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." B. Seismic-Load-Resisting System: Elements of structural-steel frame designated as"SLRS"or along grid lines designated as "SLRS" on Drawings, including columns, beams, and braces and their connections. C. Heavy Sections: Rolled and built-up sections as follows: 1. Shapes included in ASTM A 6/A 6M with flanges thicker than 1-1/2 inches. 2. Welded built-up members with plates thicker than 2 inches. 3. Column base plates thicker than 2 inches. D. Protected Zone: Structural members or portions of structural members indicated as "Protected Zone" on Drawings. Connections of structural and nonstructural elements to protected zones are limited. E. Demand Critical Welds:Those welds,the failure of which would result in significant degradation of the strength and stiffness of the Seismic-Load-Resisting System and which are indicated as "Demand Critical" or "Seismic Critical" on Drawings. 1.04 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 05 12 00 - 1 MAY, 2, 2023 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Coordinate installation of anchorage items to be embedded in or attached to other construction without delaying the Work. Provide setting diagrams, sheet metal templates, instructions, and directions for installation. 1.05 DESIGN A. Structural Performance: Engineer structural steel connections not specifically detailed by the Contract Documents to withstand design loadings indicated. Beam connections shall be standard AISC double angle unless shown otherwise. B. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a fabricator who utilizes a qualified professional engineer to prepare calculations, supervise Shop Drawings, and select other structural data for structural steel connections. 1. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally authorized to practice in the jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for projects with structural steel framing that are similar to that indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. C. Substitutions: Substitutions of sections or modifications of details, or both, and the reasons therefore, shall be submitted with the shop drawings for approval. Approved substitutions, modifications, and necessary changes in related portions of the work shall be coordinated by the fabricator and shall be accomplished at no additional cost to the Owner. D. Responsibility for Errors: The fabricator shall be responsible for all errors of detailing, fabrications, and for the correct fitting of the structural members. E. Templates: Templates shall be furnished by the fabricator with instructions for the setting of anchor bolts. 1.06 CODES A. American Institute of Steel Construction: 1. Specification for Structural Steel Buildings with commentary (AISC Manual of Steel Construction 1511 Edition). 2. Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges, 2016. 3. Specification for Structural Joints using High Strength Bolts, December 31, 2009. B. American Welding Society: 1. Structural Welding Code-Steel. AWS D1.1. C. Industrial Fasteners Institute: 1. Handbook on Bolt, Nut and Rivet Standards. D. Steel Structure Painting Council: 1. Painting Manual, Volume 1, Good Painting Practice. 2. Painting Manual,Volume 2, Systems and Specifications. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Division 01 Section "Submittal Procedures",unless otherwise indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Submit detailed shop and installation drawings,including design calculations for connections of the structural steel,to the Engineer for review. Steel for which such drawings have FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 05 1200 - 2 MAY, 2, 2023 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 not yet been reviewed shall not be fabricated. Such review will cover the general conformance of design. The omissions from the shop and installation drawings of any materials shown on the Specifications shall not relieve the contractor of the responsibility of furnishing and installing such materials, even though such drawings may have been returned and reviewed. C. Shop Drawings detailing fabrication of structural steel components: 1. Include and indicate details of cuts,connections, splices,camber, holes, and other pertinent data. 2. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols, distinguishing between shop and field welds, and show size, length, and type of each weld. Show backing bars that are to be removed and supplemental fillet welds where backing bars are to remain. 3. Indicate type,size,and length of bolts,distinguishing between shop and field bolts. Identify high-strength bolted slip-critical, direct-tension, or tensioned shear/bearing connections. 4. Shop drawings shall be drawn at 1/8" = V-0" minimum for plans and 3/a" = V-0" minimum for sections. Contract drawings shall not be reproduced in whole or in part. Contract drawings modified into shop drawings will be returned without review. 5. Each sheet of the shop drawings shall bear the review stamp of the Contractor indicating the drawings have been reviewed and is approved. Shop drawings not bearing the Contractor's stamp will be returned without review. D. Welding Procedure Specifications (WPSs) and Procedure Qualification Records (PQRs): Provide according to AWS D1.1/D1.1 M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for each welded joint qualified by testing, including the following: 1. Power source (constant current or constant voltage). 2. Electrode manufacturer and trade name,for demand critical welds. E. Certified mill test reports, evidencing conformity with the requirements of the A.S.T.M. and A.I.S.C. Specifications, shall be submitted to the Architect, Structural Engineer, and Contractor for their respective records. Mill test reports will not be returned or approved. F. Failure by the contractor to submit the shop drawings and test reports required above shall release the Architect and the Engineer from any liabilities due to the negligence on the part of the Contractor to comply with the construction documents. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. 1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed. B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact. 1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers. 2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F 1 852 fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL GRADES A. Steel Tubes: ASTM A500, Grade B. B. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53 Type E or S Grade B or ASTM A 501 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 05 1200 - 3 MAY, 2, 2023 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. W-Shapes:ASTM A 992, Grade 50 D. All other structural steel shapes: ASTM A 36 2.02 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS A. Bolts: Anchor bolts and erection bolts shall have minimum conformance to ASTM F1554 (grade as noted on plans) and to the requirements for heavy hexagon bolts and nuts of ASA Standards B18.2.1 and B18.2.2. B. High Strength Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A325X with the thread excluded from the shear plane. Bethlehem "Load Indicator Bolts" or LeJeune "Tension Control Fasteners" complete with mating nut and washer and J&M Turner load-indicator washers may be used. C. Washers: Circular washers shall be flat and smooth,and shall conform to requirements of Type A washers in ASA Standard B27.2. Beveled washers for American standard beams and channels shall be square or rectangular, shall taper in thickness, and shall be smooth. Washers for use with high strength bolts shall be hardened. D. Adhesive Anchors: Injectable adhesive for the installation of threaded anchors rods into concrete. Rods shall be ASTM A36 U.N.O. Adhesive shall be Hilti- HIT HY 200 or Simpson Acrylic-tie or approved equal. E. Clevises and Turnbuckles: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1035. 2.03 WELDING ELECTRODES A. Shall conform to the requirements of the Specifications of the American Institute of Steel Construction. Use E70 electrodes. 2.04 COATINGS A. Paint: Shall conform to the requirements of Federal Specification TT-P-86 Type I of II, SSPC Paint 4-64T or Federal Specification TT-P-636C primer coating,synthetic, rust inhibiting primer. Tnemic series "1009" gray primer, or approved equal. Tnemec Paint Company, North Kansas City,Missouri. B. Zinc-Coating: When galvanizing steel is required,the zinc-coating shall conform to ASTM Al 23 . Zinc-coating for threaded products shall conform to ASTM Al 53. C. Cold galvanizing compound shall be "ZRC Cold Galvanizing Compound" as manufactured by ZRC Chemical Products, Quincy,Massachusetts. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. General: Except as modified herein, fabrication shall be in accordance with the applicable Specifications and Standards of the American Institute of Steel Construction. Workmanship shall FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 05 1200 - 4 MAY, 2, 2023 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 be equal to standard commercial practice in modern structural shops. Portions of the work exposed to view shall be finished neatly. Structural material, either plain or fabricated, shall be stored above the ground on platforms,skids, or other supports. Material shall be kept free from dirt, grease, and other foreign matter, and shall be protected as far as practical from corrosion. All material shall be clean and straight. If straightening or flattening is necessary, it shall be done by a process in a manner that will not damage the material. Finished members shall be free from undue twists, bends, warping distortion, and other irregularities. Holes shall not be made or enlarged by burning. Shearing, flame cutting, and chipping shall be done carefully and accurately. Splicing structural steel members shall not be permitted. 1. Compression joints, depending upon contact bearing, shall have the bearing surfaces machined to a common plane after the members are completed. 2. Protective Painting: One (1) coat of approved primer shall be applied to all exposed surfaces of all structural steel members except those surfaces requiring field welding,to be encased in concrete, to be galvanized, to be spray fireproofed and the top flanges of beams to support metal deck. All metal surfaces to be painted shall be cleaned of all loose mill scale, dirt, rust, etc. by the use of steel scrapers,wire brushes,sandblast or other means approved by the Architect. Oil and grease shall be removed with naphtha and the metal surfaces shall be dry when paint is applied. Paint shall not be applied during damp weather, or when the temperature is at or below freezing. Any damage to the shop coat of paint and welded areas where shop paint was omitted shall be field painted with shop paint to the satisfaction of the Architect. Steel work specified to have no shop paint shall, after fabrication, be cleaned of oil or grease by solvent cleaners and be cleaned of dirt, and other foreign material by thorough sweeping with a fiber brush. Apply shop paint to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. 3. Bolted Construction: Holes for bolted construction shall be fabricated as specified for bolted construction. Bolt holes shall be at right angles to the member. The slope of bolted parts in contact with the bolt head shall not exceed 1:20 with respect to a plane normal to the bolt axis. Where the surface of a bolted part has a slope of more than 1:20,a beveled washer shall be used to compensate for the lack of parallelism. Bolt holes shall have a nominal diameter not greater than one-sixteenth (1/16) inch in excess of the nominal, bolt diameter. 4. Common Bolts: The bolts shall be of such length that they will extend entirely through the nuts,with the beveled end outside the nut. Bolt heads and nuts shall be drawn tight against the work with a suitable wrench not less than fifteen (15) inches long. Threads shall be excluded from shear plane 5. Baseplates: Oversize anchor bolt holes in baseplates to facilitate erection as follows: a. Bolts 3/4" to 1" in diameter: 5/16" oversize b. Bolts 1" to 2" in diameter: 1/2" oversize Use oversize nut or plate washers under nut at all oversized holes in baseplates. Washers must be large enough to cover hole.Washer thickness shall be at least 1/8 of bolt diameter. 6. Camber: Provide camber in members indicated on the drawings. Specified camber applies at the jobsite, just prior to erection,lying flat so that the member weight has no effect.Take necessary precautions to prevent or compensate for camber loss during shipment.Measured camber in members up to 50'-0" long shall be within a tolerance of minus 1/2"to plus zero from the specified camber. Members with field measure camber outside the specified camber shall be returned to the shop. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 05 1200 - 5 MAY, 2, 2023 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 7. Galvanizing:the following members shall be hot dip galvanized: masonry shelf angles, and any steel members exposed to weather, and where noted on drawings. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify, with certified steel erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements. 1. Prepare a certified survey of existing conditions. Include bearing surfaces, anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.03 ERECTION A. General: Except as modified herein, erection shall be in accordance with the applicable Specifications and Standards of the A.I.S.C. Manual of Steel Construction. Where parts cannot be assembled or fitted properly as a result of errors in fabrication or of deformation due to handling or transportation, such condition shall be reported immediately to the testing laboratory for approval of the method of correction obtained. The straightening of plates and angles or other shapes shall be done by approved methods. Bent or damaged heat-treated parts will be rejected. Steel work shall be drained properly; pockets in structures exposed to the weather shall be filled with an approved waterproof material. The erector will be responsible for shrinkage and distortion of all butt welds. Loose joints will be corrected by cutting with a hand guided torch if necessary. B. Assembly: 1. Temporary bracing shall be used wherever necessary to support all loads to which the structure may be subjected, including equipment and operation thereof and piles of materials. Such bracing shall be left in place as long as required for safety. The various members forming parts of a completed frame or structure after being assembled shall be aligned and adjusted accurately before being fastened. Splicing of compression members shall be done after the abutting surfaces have been brought into contact. 2. Bearing surfaces and surfaces which will be in permanent contact shall be cleaned before the members are assembled. Bearing plates shall be set in exact position and shall have a full and even bearing upon the concrete. As erection progresses, the work shall be bolted or welded sufficiently to take care of all dead load, wind, and erection stresses. Splices will be permitted only where indicated. All erection bolts used in welded construction may be tightened securely and left in place; if removed,the holes shall be filled with plug welds. C. Field bolting shall be in accordance with the requirements specified for shop fabrication. Unfair holes shall be corrected by reaming. Where the surface of a bolted part has a slope of more than 1:20,a beveled washer shall be used to compensate for the lack of parallelism. Bolt heads and nuts shall be drawn tight against the work with a suitable wrench not less than fifteen (15) inches long. Bolt heads shall be tapped with a hammer while the nut is being tightened. D. Bolts to be "snug-tight" unless noted otherwise, and shall be tightened a few impacts of an impact wrench or the full effort of a man using a ordinary spud wrench, bringing the plies into contact. Field welding shall be as specified for shop fabrication of welded construction. Any shop paint on surfaces adjacent to joints to be field welded shall be wire brushed to reduce the paint film to a minimum. Slag shall be removed from all completed welds. E. Field repair of zinc-coatings with cold galvanizing compound per manufacturer's specifications. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 05 1200 - 6 MAY, 2, 2023 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 F. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint and paint exposed areas with same material used for shop painting. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils. G. Setting baseplates: Set baseplates on shims or other adjustment devices. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Cut off protruding wedges or shims. Grout under baseplates in accordance with Division 3: Section Cast-in-Place Concrete. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. An independent testing laboratory shall perform inspection and testing services specified in this section. B. Shop Inspection 1. Visual inspection of all shop welding. 2. Ultrasonic inspection of all full penetration welds. 3. Examination of galvanizing. 4. Examination of shop painting. C. Field Inspection 1. Proper erection of all pieces. 2. Proper installation of all bolts, including checking the calibration of impact wrenches used with high strength bolts. 3. Plumbness of structure and proper bracing. 4. Ultrasonic inspection of all full penetration welds. 5. Record and measure camber of beams upon arrival and before erection for compliance with the specified camber. Measure beam lying flat with web in the horizontal position. Members outside the specified camber tolerance shall be returned to the shop and replaced with members meeting the specified camber tolerance. D. Qualification of Welders: Before assigning any welder to work covered by this section of the Specifications, the fabricator shall provide the Testing Laboratory with certification that each of the welders to be employed on the project has passed qualification tests within the last year using procedures covered in the American Welding Society Standard D1.0-63. E. The contractor shall be responsible for furnishing fabrication and erection inspection and testing of all welds in accordance with AWS D1.1, Chapter 6. Submit records of inspections and tests to the testing laboratory for their review. F. Inspection of shop and field welding shall be "verification inspection" in accordance with Section 6 of AWS D1.1 and as follows: 1. Visually inspect the welding of all shop fabricated members and note the location of all cover plates,connectors,bearing stiffeners,splices,and fillet welds for proper return around ends and check for seams,folds, and delaminations. 2. Ultrasonically test all full penetration welds in accordance with ASTM E164. 3. Root passes shall be thoroughly inspected for cracks. All cracks shall be gouged out and rewelded to two inches beyond each end of the crack. 4. Mark all welds requiring repairs and make reinspections. 5. The Testing Laboratory inspector shall advise the Owner and Architect of any shop and/or field conditions which, in his opinion, may require further tests and examination. Such further tests shall be performed as authorized by the Owner and Architect. 6. The Owner reserves the right to use ultrasonic or radiographic inspection to verify the adequacy of all welds. Testing procedures and acceptance criteria shall be as specified in AWS D1.1. G. Inspection of bolted construction shall be in accordance with AISC "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings" and as follows: FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 05 1200 - 7 MAY, 2, 2023 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. All bolts shall be visually inspected to ensure that the plies have been brought into "snug" contact. 2. High strength bolts shall be inspected in accordance with Section 9 of the AISC "Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325X or A490X Thread Excluded Bolts." 3. For all high strength bolts, unless specifically noted on the Drawings to require only "snug- tight" installation, the inspector shall observe the required jobsite testing and calibration, and shall confirm that the procedure to be used provides the required tension. END OF SECTION 051200 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 05 1200 - 8 MAY, 2, 2023 STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 05 22 00 - STRUCTURAL STEEL DECKING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED WORK A. Drawings and general provisions of the Standard Form of Construction Agreement, including General and Special Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Roof deck. 2. Noncomposite floor deck B. Related Requirements 1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" 2. Division 03 Section "Lightweight Insulating Concrete" 3. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing" 4. Division 05 Section "Long Span Composite Acoustical Roof Deck" 5. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel deck assembly is to meet or exceed the requirements of Class 1-90 securement. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling. B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members." 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Bowman B. Bac-Fab C. Merco D. Roll Form E. Vulcraft F. Wheeling 2.03 MATERIALS FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 05 22 00 - 1 MAY, 2, 2023 STRUCTURAL STEEL DECKING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Steel Deck: Reference plans B. Fasteners: Reference plans C. Refer to the Structural Drawings to confirm all steel deck materials and types required for this project. 2.04 ROOF DECK A. Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, and with the following: 1. Prime-Painted Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 40 minimum, shop primed with manufacturers standard baked-on, rust-inhibitive primer. a. Color: Manufacturer's Standard. 2. Deck Profile: As indicated. 3. Profile Depth: As indicated. 4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness; Deck Unit/Bottom Plate: As indicated. 5. Span Condition: As indicated. 6. Side Laps: Overlapped or interlocking seam at Contractor's option 2.05 NONCOMPOSITE FORM DECK A. Noncomposite Form Deck: Fabricate ribbed-steel sheet noncomposite form-deck panels to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Noncomposite Steel Form Deck," in SDI Publication No. 31, with the minimum section properties indicated 1. Span Condition: As indicated. 2. Side Laps: Overlapped or interlocking seam at Contractors option. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. General: Provide manufacturers standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated. Fasteners below pertain to typical roof and noncomposite metal decking. Fasteners shall be provided as specified on the drawings. B. Mechanical Fasteners:Corrosion-resistant,low-velocity,power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws. C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel screws, No. 10 minimum diameter. D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized,closed-cell,synthetic rubber. E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, not less than 0.0359-inch design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application. F. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi, of same material and finish as deck, and of thickness and profile indicated. G. Column Closures, End Closures, Z-Closures, and Cover Plates: Steel sheet, of same material, finish, and thickness as deck unless otherwise indicated. PART 3- EXECUTION FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 052200 - 2 MAY, 2, 2023 STRUCTURAL STEEL DECKING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. B. Install temporary shoring before placing deck panels if required to meet deflection limitations. C. Locate deck bundles to prevent overloading of supporting members. D. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks. E. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection. F. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck. G. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work. H. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. 3.03 ROOF-DECK INSTALLATION A. Fasten roof-deck panels to steel supporting members as specified on the drawings. Contractors option to substitute frame fasteners for arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated or arc seam welds with an equal perimeter that is not less than 1-1/2 inches long,and as follows: 1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch, nominal. 2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge and interior ribs of deck units with a minimum of two welds per deck unit at each support.Space welds 9 inches apart in the field of roof and 6 inches apart in roof corners and perimeter, based on roof-area definitions in FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-28. 3. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of one-half of the span or 24 inches, and as follows: 1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 12 diameter or larger,carbon-steel screws. 2. Mechanically clinch or button punch. 3. Fasten with a minimum of 1-1/2-inch-long welds. C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches, with end joints as follows: 1. End Joints: Lapped 2 inches minimum. D. Flexible Closure Strips: Install flexible closure strips over partitions, walls, and where indicated. Install with adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure complete closure. 3.04 FLOOR-DECK INSTALLATION A. Fasten floor-deck panels to steel supporting members by arc spot (puddle) welds of the surface diameter indicated and as follows: FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 052200 - 3 MAY, 2, 2023 STRUCTURAL STEEL DECKING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Weld Diameter: 5/8 inch, nominal. 2. Weld Spacing: Weld edge ribs of panels at each support. Space additional welds an average of 12 inches apart. 3. Weld Spacing: Space and locate welds as indicated. 4. Weld Washers: Install weld washers at each weld location. B. Side-Lap and Perimeter Edge Fastening: Fasten side laps and perimeter edges of panels between supports, at intervals not exceeding the lesser of one-half of the span or 36 inches, and as follows: 1. Mechanically fasten with self-drilling, No. 12 diameter or larger, carbon-steel screws. 2. Mechanically clinch or button punch. 3. Fasten with a minimum of 1-1/2-inch-long welds. C. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inch, with end joints as follows: 1. End Joints: Lapped D. Pour Stops and Girder Fillers: Weld steel sheet pour stops and girder fillers to supporting structure according to SDI recommendations unless otherwise indicated. E. Floor-Deck Closures: Weld steel sheet column closures, cell closures, and Z-closures to deck, according to SDI recommendations, to provide tight-fitting closures at open ends of ribs and sides of deck. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Field welds will be subject to inspection. C. Prepare test and inspection reports. 3.06 PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780/A 780M and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both surfaces of prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint. 1. Apply repair paint,of same color as adjacent shop-primed deck,to bottom surfaces of deck exposed to view. 2. Wire brushing, cleaning, and repair painting of bottom deck surfaces are included in Section 0991 13 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting." C. Repair Painting: Wire brushing,cleaning,and repair painting of rust spots,welds,and abraded areas of both deck surfaces are included in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting." END OF SECTION 052200 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 052200 - 4 MAY, 2, 2023 STRUCTURAL STEEL DECKING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 05 40 00 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Load-bearing cold-formed metal framing. 2. Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing. 3. Cold Formed Ceiling Joist Framing. 4. Cold Formed Roof Rafter Framing. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Section - Metal Fabrications. 2. Division 05 Section - Cold Formed Metal Trusses. 3. Division 06 Section - Rough Carpentry for subflooring, wall sheathing, or roof sheathing using wood-based structural-use panels, particleboard, fibrous-felted board, and foam- plastic sheathing. 4. Division 06 Section - Sheathing, for exterior wall sheathings. 5. Division 07 Section - Thermal Insulation. 6. Division 07,Air and Weather Barrier Section(s). 7. Division 09 Section - Gypsum Board Assemblies for interior non-load-bearing metal-stud framing and ceiling-suspension assemblies, and exterior gypsum sheathing. 8. Division 09 Section - Gypsum Board Shaft-Wall Assemblies for interior non-load-bearing, metal-stud-framed, shaft-wall assemblies. 9. Division 09 Section - Metal Support Systems,for ceiling and soffit suspension assemblies. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Minimum Uncoated Steel Thickness: Minimum uncoated thickness of cold-formed framing delivered to the Project site shall be not less than 95 percent of the thickness used in the cold- formed framing design. Lesser thicknesses shall be permitted at bends due to cold forming. B. Producer: Entity that produces steel sheet coil fabricated into cold-formed members. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer,as defined in Division 01,Section "Quality Requirements," to design cold-formed steel framing. B. Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed metal framing capable of withstanding design loads within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Where stud gauges are noted in Drawings, such gauges are minimum allowed gauges. Provide gauges per delegated design, or noted gauges, whichever is greater. 2. Design Loads: As indicated on drawings. 3. Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand design loads without deflections greater than the following: a. Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Curtain-Wall Framing: 1) Metal panel finish: Horizontal deflection of 1/360 of the wall height. 2) Masonry veneer or plaster/stucco finish: Horizontal deflection of 1/600 of the wall height. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 05 40 00 - 1 MAY, 2, 2023 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 4. Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members without damage or overstressing,sheathing failure,connection failure,undue strain on fasteners and anchors,or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambient temperature change of 120 deg F. 5. Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances, and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows: a. Upward and downward movement of 1/240 of the span. C. Design exterior non-load-bearing curtain-wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard for contribution of sheathing materials. 1.05 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of cold-formed metal framing product and accessory indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings prepared by cold-formed metal framing manufacturer or other delegated design engineer. 1. Show layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed metal framing; fabrication; and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners. 2. Show reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging, splices, accessories,connection details, and attachment to adjoining Work. 3. For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data and detailed shop drawings signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer registered in the state responsible for their preparation, and where project is located. 1.06 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer or test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements. B. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. C. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. D. Product Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating that each of the following complies with requirements, based on comprehensive testing of current products: 1. Expansion anchors. 2. Power-actuated anchors. 3. Mechanical fasteners. 4. Vertical deflection clips. 5. Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories. E. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of cold-formed metal framing's compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Third party evaluation report for products reviewed to local building code or its model code and AISI S100. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 054000 - 2 MAY, 2, 2023 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Engineering Responsibility: Engage a qualified professional engineer to prepare design calculations, Shop Drawings, and other structural data. B. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of cold-formed metal framing that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent. C. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed cold-formed metal framing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. D. Mill certificates signed by steel sheet producer or test reports from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheet complies with requirements, including uncoated steel thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, total elongation, chemical requirements, and galvanized-coating thickness. E. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency,acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. F. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel;' and AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel." G. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where metal framing is part of a fire-resistance-rated assembly, provide framing identical to that of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119, and displaying a classification label from, a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by GA File Numbers in GA-600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual," or by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another testing and inspecting agency. H. AISI Specifications: Comply with AISI's "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" or "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members" and the following for calculating structural characteristics of cold-formed metal framing. 1. CCFSS Technical Bulletin: "AISI Specification Provisions for Screw Connections." I. Coordinate with insulation installer, if other than cold formed metal framing installer, to pack stud packs headers and similar construction that will not be accessible after erection, with batt insulation. Should Contractor fail to coordinate installation of batt thermal insulation,Contractor shall be responsible to foam insulate all such cavities at no additional cost to Owner, prior to applying interior sheathing. J. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section - Project Management and Coordination. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling, and as required in AISI/s "Code of Standard Practice". B. Store cold-formed metal framing, protect with a waterproof covering, and ventilate to avoid condensation, and as required in AISI/s "Code of Standard Practice". PART 2- PRODUCTS FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 054000 - 3 MAY, 2, 2023 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering cold- formed metal framing that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Allied Building Products, Inc. 2. AIISteel Products, Inc. 3. California Expanded Metal Products Co. 4. California Metal Systems, Inc. 5. Clark-Dietrich Building Systems. 6. Consolidated Fabricators Corp. 7. MarinoWare; Div. of Ware Industries, Inc. 8. Scafco Corp. 9. Steel Construction Systems. 10. Steel Developers, LLC. 11. Steeler, Inc. 12. Super Stud Building Products, Inc. 13. United Metal Products, Inc. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of pre- consumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows: 1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G60 Galvanized finish. C. Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection and Drift Clips: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, A 653/A 653M, structural steel,zinc coated, of grade and coating as follows: 1. Grade: As required by structural performance. 2. Coating: G90. 2.03 LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING A. General: Provide greater than minimum gauge and dimensions if and where indicated in the Drawings, and where required by Engineer's cold formed metal framing design as indicated in shop drawings. B. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch. (16 ga.) 2. Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches,typical minimum or as noted on drawings 3. Section Properties: As required by design criteria. C. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, with straight flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch. (16 ga.) 2. Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches. D. Z-Shaped and C-Shaped or JI-Shaped Furring: With non-slotted web, face flange of 1-114 inches,wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch,and depth required to fit insulation,or insulation and air space, as indicated in Drawings. 1. Minimum Nominal Thickness: 0.025 inch. 2. Provide C-Shape or J-Shape furring at perimeter of openings as required to attach window systems and framing, and where indicated in Drawings. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 05 40 00 - 4 MAY, 2, 2023 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. Steel Box or Back-to-Back Headers: Manufacturer's standard C-shapes used to form header beams, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch. (16 ga.) 2. Flange Width: 2 inches or as noted on drawings 3. Section Properties: As required by design criteria. F. Steel Double-L Headers: Manufacturer's standard L-shapes used to form header beams,of web depths indicated, and as follows: 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch. (16 ga.) 2. Top Flange Width: 2 inches or as noted on drawings 3. Section Properties: As required by design criteria. 2.04 NONLOAD-BEARING EXTERIOR WALL FRAMING A. Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, with stiffened flanges, complying with ASTM C 955, and as follows: 1. Minimum uncoated steel thickness: .0538 inch (16 ga.) 2. Flange width: 1-5/8 inches. 3. Provide greater than minimum dimensions where indicated in the Drawings, and where required by Engineer's cold formed metal framing design as indicated in shop drawings. B. Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched,with straight flanges,complying with ASTM C 955 of manufacturers standard flange width and minimum thickness matching steel stud. 1. Where curved applications are indicated in Drawings,provide custom pre-curved tracks,or segmented track capable of producing a smooth arc to indicated radiuses. C. Slotted Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg (Min. 3"), U-shaped steel track; punched with vertical slots in both legs. Studs should be positively attached to deep-leg track using vertical slots while allowing +/- 1" free vertical movement. Legs designed to support horizontal and lateral loads and transfer them to the primary structure. D. Z-Shaped Furring Channels: With slotted or non-slotted web, face flange of 1-1/4", and wall attachment flange of 7/8". Minimum 20 gauge galvanized steel[, or heavier where required by weight of and deflection limits for attached finish systems]. Size: 2" to fit insulation thicknesses. 1. Provide J or C shaped track and channels to frame around openings where required and where indicated in Drawings for fire rated construction and / or for screw attachment or support of windows. 16 gauge non-slotted where required to prevent flame spread at cavity wall construction. E. Z-Shaped Furring: With non-slotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated. 1. Nominal Thickness: 0.025 inch. F. Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass clips,capable of accommodating 1" of upward and downward vertical displacement of primary structure, without imposing vertical load on the wall framing. 2.05 FRAMING ACCESSORIES A. Fabricate steel-framing accessories of the same material and finish used for framing members, with a minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi. B. Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated, as follows: 1. Supplementary framing. 2. Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking. 3. Web stiffeners. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 054000 - 5 MAY, 2, 2023 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 4. End clips. 5. Foundation clips. 6. Gusset plates. 7. Stud kickers, knee braces, and girts. 8. Joist hangers and end closures. 9. Hole reinforcing plates. 10. Backer plates. 2.06 ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS A. Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M,zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123. B. Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 5 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. C. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated,fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials,with capability to sustain,without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified independent testing agency. D. Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-threading steel drill screws. 1. Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere. E. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards. 2.07 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780. B. Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150, Type I; and clean, natural sand, ASTM C 404. Mix at ratio of 1 part cement to 2-1/2 parts sand, by volume,with minimum water required for placement and hydration. C. Nonmetallic,Nonshrink Grout: Premixed,nonmetallic,noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands, portland cement, shrinkage-compensating agents, and plasticizing and water-reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, with fluid consistency and 30-minute working time. D. Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, nonleaching. E. Sealer Gaskets: 5-12"x 3/8"closed cell foam and adhesive backed peel and stick membrane, equal to Protecto Wrap (800-759-9727) "Triple Guard Energy Sill Sealer." Provide at all exterior metal studs in contact with floor slab. 2.08 SHEATHING A. Sheathing: Comply with requirements in Division 09 Section - Gypsum Board Assemblies. 2.09 FABRICATION A. Fabricate cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written recommendations and requirements in this Section. 1. Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates. 2. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 3. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 054000 - 6 MAY, 2, 2023 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads. 4. Fasten other materials to cold-formed metal framing by welding, bolting,or screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings. B. Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses. Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion. C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 2. Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed metal framing assembly to a maximum out-of- square tolerance of 1/8 inch. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Grout bearing surfaces uniform and level to ensure full contact of bearing flanges or track webs on supporting concrete or masonry construction. B. Install sealer gaskets per manufacturer's instructions to isolate the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and the top of foundation wall or slab at exterior wall stud locations, with self adhesive legs of T-shaped membrane adhered to face of sheathing and to vertical face of concrete slab or foundation. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Cold-formed metal framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled. B. Install cold-formed metal framing according to ASTM C 1007 and AISI S200 "North American Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - General Provisions", unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure. 1. Bolt or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush,even,true-to- line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels not exceeding 1/16 inch. D. Install cold-formed metal framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connections securely fastened, according to manufacturer's written recommendations and requirements in this Section. 1. Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut. 2. Fasten cold-formed metal framing members by welding or screw fastening, as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted. a. Comply with AWS D1.3 requirements and procedures for welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 054000 - 7 MAY, 2, 2023 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 b. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetrating joined members by not less than three exposed screw threads. E. Install framing members in one-piece lengths, unless splice connections are indicated for track or tension members. F. Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity to those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entire integrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured. G. Do not bridge building expansion and control joints with cold-formed metal framing. Independently frame both sides of joints. H. Install insulation in built-up exterior framing members, such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion of framing work. I. Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's standard punched openings. J. Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed metal framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows: 1. Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishing materials. 3.04 EXTERIOR WALL FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners,clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, fasteners, and stud girts,to provide a complete and stable exterior wall-framing system. B. Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supporting structure as indicated. C. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom track, unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows: 1. Stud Spacing: As indicated or required by design. D. Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for non-plumb walls or warped surfaces and similar requirements. E. Frame wall openings with not less than a double stud at each jamb of frame as indicated on Shop Drawings. Fasten jamb members together to uniformly distribute loads. F. Install runner tracks and jack studs above and below wall openings. Anchor tracks to jamb studs with clip angles or by welding, and space jack studs same as full-height wall studs. G. At load bearing walls, align floor and roof framing over studs. Where framing cannot be aligned, continuously reinforce track to transfer loads. Squarely seat studs against top and bottom tracks with gap not exceeding 1/8 inch between the end of wall framing member and the web of track. Fasten both flanges of studs to top and bottom tracks. H. Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads while providing lateral support. 1. Install single deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure. 2. Connect vertical deflection clips to bypassing studs and anchor to primary building structure. I. Install horizontal bridging in exterior wall studs,spaced in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not more than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection. 1. Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 054000 - 8 MAY, 2, 2023 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Bridging: Combination of flat, taut,steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flanges and secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges. J. Install Z-shaped furring in exterior insulation plane where indicated and as required to support exterior finish materials. Install C or J shaped furring around perimeter of building openings as required to support edges of finish materials, and where required to provide for attachment of windows, and at other locations as indicated in Drawings. K. Install supplementary framing, blocking, and bracing in stud framing indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services, casework, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar work requiring attachment to framing. L. Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including supplementary framing, web stiffeners, clip angles, continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall- framing system. M. 3.05 EXTERIOR FURRING INSTALLATION A. Installation of furring at continuous insulation 1. Erect furring vertically to hold insulation specified in Division 07,Section"Thermal Insulation" in place. Z-shaped furring members spaced to match stud spacing 2. Erect furring horizontally <at insert locations / description> to hold insulation specified in Division 07, Section "Thermal Insulation" in place. Z-shaped furring members spaced 24 inches maximum o.c. 3. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. 4. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel.At interior corners,space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit. 5. At window and door openings, provide C or J shaped perimeter furring or tracks where required for fastening window framing. 6. At jambs and heads of openings in fire rated cavity walls, install 16 gauge C or J shaped perimeter framing or tracks of solid profile without cut-outs, where detailed in Drawings and where required for flame spread prevention into cavity. Framing sized to fill space from face of sheathing to back side of loose lintel,masonry veneer,or other non-combustible finish material. B. Furring Channels for metal panels: Refer to Division 07 Section "Metal Wall Panels". 3.06 SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. General: Install sheathing to comply with Division 09 Section - Gypsum Board. 1. Coordinate framing installation with sheathing, flashing, waterproofing or air barrier, and sealants installation. B. Air-Infiltration Barrier Application: 1. Refer to Division 07 Section - Plastic Film Air Barrier. 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 054000 - 9 MAY, 2, 2023 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality- control testing. B. Field and shop welds will be subject to inspection and testing. C. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect. D. Remove and replace Work that does not comply with specified requirements. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. 3.08 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installed cold-formed metal framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Touchup Painting: Wire brush, clean, and paint scarred areas, welds, and rust spots on fabricated and installed prime-painted, cold-formed metal framing. Paint framing surfaces with same type of shop paint used on adjacent surfaces. C. Protect paper-surfaced gypsum sheathing that will be exposed to weather for more than 30 days by covering exposed exterior surface of sheathing with a securely fastened air-infiltration barrier. Apply covering immediately after sheathing is installed. D. Protect cutouts, corners, and joints in sheathing by filling with a flexible sealant or by applying tape recommended by sheathing manufacturer at time sheathing is applied. E. Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer that ensure cold-formed metal framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 05 40 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 05 40 00 - 10 MAY, 2, 2023 COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 05 50 00 - METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. General: Furnish all labor, supervision, materials, tools, equipment, appliances and services necessary for the fabrication, delivery and installation of all miscellaneous metal items. All work shall be as shown or indicated on the drawings and as specified in this section. B. Scope of Work: 1. Embedded angles and plates 2. Guardrails, Handrails, and Handrail Brackets 3. Stair Treads and Nosings 4. Ladders 5. Expansion Joint Covers 6. Steel Countertop Supports 7. Steel Equipment Supports 8. Metal Gratings 9. Steel Plate Covers for Sidewalk Culverts 10. Pipe Guards 11. Downspout Protection 12. Pipe Bollards 13. Steel Gate Frames and metal infill panels 14. Miscellaneous metal work and related items. 15. Shop Priming and Finishing of Metal Fabrications C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 03 Section- Concrete. 2. Division 04 Section-Unit Masonry. 3. Division 05 Section-Metal Pan Stairs. 4. Division 05 Section-Aluminum Ships Ladder. 5. Division 06 Section - Rough Carpentry, for concealed blocking for attachment of metal fabrications. 6. Division 07 Section - Roof Accessories, for roof hatches and ladder safety devices attached to fabricated ladders. 7. Division 08 Section-Access Doors and Panels, for metal floor hatches. 8. Division 09 Section-Painting. 9. Division 09 Section- Special Coatings. 10. Division 11 [, 23] and other Sections for equipment requiring miscellaneous steel support structure. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 05 50 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 METAL FABRICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Delegated Design: Design ladders,platforms, alternating tread devices,miscellaneous supports, and railings, including engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Design Criteria: 1. Ladders and stairs designed to withstand live loading conditions of 100 lb. per square feet. 2. Handrails, Guardrails, or other protective enclosures shall be designed to withstand stresses to which they would be normally subjected, and to support a load of 50 lb per linear foot applied perpendicular at the top of the rail or guard, and to withstand a load of 200 lbs. applied in any direction at any point on the top of the rail or guard without deflection. 3. Connections other than those already listed shall be designed to safely support design load (dead load plus live load) of not less than 100 psi without exceeding working stresses permitted for materials. 4. Design ladders to include platforms and safety cages where shown in Drawings and where required by local code and authorities having jurisdiction. 5. Miscellaneous countertop supports designed to safely support a load of 200 lb per linear foot of countertop applied at the outside edge, as well as any additional requirements as specified in Division 06 Section-Architectural Woodwork. 6. Miscellaneous equipment supports per local code requirements, equipment Manufacturers' requirements and as specified herein. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Steel stairs in accordance with latest NAAMM Standards and AISC. B. Welding shall conform to American Welding Society's Standard Code for Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction. Welding shall be continuous along entire area of contact, except where tack welding is specifically shown or specified. Grind all exposed welds. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings based on the Contract Documents shall be submitted to the Architect for review prior to ordering of materials. B. Failure by the contractor to submit shop drawings, test reports, etc. required above shall release the Architect and the Engineer from any liabilities due to the negligence on the part of the contractor to comply with the construction documents. C. Approval will cover size and arrangement of members, character of construction, but not dimensions. D. Contractor shall verify actual dimensions at the construction site. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Comply with the following standards, as pertinent: 1. Steel plates, shapes, and bars: ASTM A36; 2. Steel plates to be bent or cold-formed: ASTM A283; grade C; 3. Steel tubing(hot-formed,welded, or seamless): ASTM A500; grade B; 4. Steel bars and bar-size shapes: ASTM A306; grade 65, or ASTM A36; 5. Cold-finished steel bars: ASTM A1081 6. Cold-rolled carbon steel sheets: ASTM A336; 7. Galvanized carbon steel sheets: ASTM A526, with G90 zinc coating in accordance with ASTM A525; FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 055000 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 METAL FABRICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 8. Stainless steel sheets: AISI type 302 or 304,24 ga. with number 4 finish; 9. Gray iron castings: ASTM A48, class 10; 10. Malleable iron castings: ASTM A47; 11. Steel pipe: ASTM A53, grade A, schedule 40,black finish unless otherwise noted; 12. Concrete inserts: a. Threaded or wedge-type galvanized ferrous castings of malleable iron complying with ASTM A27. b. Provide required bolts, shims, and washers, hot-dip galvanized in accordance with ASTM A153. 13. Bolts and nuts: Provide hexagon-head regular type complying with ASTM A307, grade A. 14. Lag bolts: Provide square-head type complying with Fed Spec FF-B-561; 15. Machine screws: Provide cadmium plated steel type complying with Fed Spec FF-S-111. B. Castings shall be made from the best grade of soft pig iron cast in stove place molding sand to a uniform thickness. Castings shall be free of defects impairing strength or appearance. C. Accessories: Provide all anchors bolts, anchor straps,hangers and other related fittings, fastener and accessories required for proper and secure installation of all miscellaneous metal. Fasteners for exterior use shall be zinc coated. Generally, the sizes, shapes and spacing of items are shown or specified; where not shown or specified, accessories shall be adequate for the required services, subject to approval. 2.02 ITEMS TO BE PROVIDED A. Lintel Angles and Bent Plates: Galvanized steel in sizes indicated on Drawings. Extend loose lintel angles 8" on each side of opening. B. Steel Pipe Guardrails: 1-1/4" Standard galvanized steel pipe as detailed in Drawings. Hot- dipped galvanized steel at all exterior railings. 1. Except where specifically detailed otherwise, railings in new concrete shall be mounted to cast-in galvanized steel sleeves. Field painted (refer to Division 09 — "High Performance Coatings"). 2. At removeable sections of guardrail, extend galvanized pipe sleeve up 2" above concrete slab and provide set screws. Tap drill sleeve and removeable guardrail legs to match set screw and provide secure attachment. Fabricate removable sections of railing in not greater than 6' wide sections. 3. At mezzanine guardrails, concrete edge should have a steel plate or bent plate edge extending '/2" above concrete floor level, to inhibit small items being kicked off the mezzanine, below the low rail of the guardrails. Refer to Structural and Architectural Drawings and coordinate as required. C. Steel Pipe Hand Railings: 1-1/4" Standard steel pipe fabricated with welded and round smooth connections as illustrated on Drawings or as required. Hot-dipped, galvanized steel pipe at all exterior handrailings, galvanize railings after fabrication. All railings to have closed ends. 1. Where railings do not return to post or to a vertical or horizontal surface, provide domed ends. 2. Except where specifically detailed otherwise, railings in new concrete shall be mounted to cast-in galvanized steel sleeves. 3. Heavy Duty Handrail Brackets: [Model 386, as manufactured by Julius Blum & Co] [Universal Weld Bracket 1980, as manufactured by The Wagner Companies] [Model RB14030 wall mount bracket as manufactured by The Wagner Companies]. Galvanized at exterior application. 4. Handrail Brackets: [1-1/2" wide x 1/4" thick steel bent plate handrail brackets] [steel handrail brackets as detailed in Drawingsi, galvanized at exterior application. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 055000 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 METAL FABRICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 5. Provide any other attachments to new and existing construction as required to comply with design loading criteria. D. Lobby Handrail: 1 1/2" diameter clear anodized aluminum railing with 5 1/4" radiused corners shall be"Wesrail" by Moultrie Manufacturing Company(800/ 841-8674). E. Aluminum Hand Railings: 1-1/2" Diameter extruded 6063-T-52 with clear anodized satin finish as manufactured by Julius Blum& Co. or approved equal. F. Aluminum Hand Rail Wall Brackets: Cast aluminum with clear anodized satin finish shall be Julius Blum& Co. No. 376 or approved equal. G. Steel Pan Stair: Welded steel pan construction with steel channel stringers, pipe columns, hanging rods, and angle framing. Concrete fill per Division 03 Section- Concrete. H. Stair Nosings: 4" deep x 5/16" thick, cast metal safety tread nosings with cast-in aluminum oxide grit surface and concealed integral anchors on 10" centers for casting into concrete. Provide with protective tape to be removed at substantial completion. 1. Interior Metal Pan Stairs: Full width of stairs, equal to Ferragrit 101 SP, plain surface, as manufactured by Wooster Products, or approved equal. 2. Exterior Cast Concrete Stairs: Full width minus 3" on each side of stairs, anti-corrosive metal equal to Aluinagrit 101, cross-hatched surface, as manufactured by Wooster Products, or approved equal. I. Metal Ships Ladder: Provide metal ship's ladder where indicated. Fabricate of open-type construction with channel or plate stringers, pipe and tube railings, and bar grate treads, unless otherwise indicated. Provide brackets and fittings for installation. Fabricate ships' ladders, including treads and railings from steel. Galvanize ships' ladders, including treads, railings, brackets, and fasteners. Construct as follows: 1. Angle: 50 to 60-degrees from horizontal. Angle must not exceed 60-degrees. 2. Stringer: C12 x 20.7 steel stringer. 3. Treads: Serrated Bar Grate with diamond-pattern front lip. 4. Tread Attachment: Weld treads to stringers, and secure with (2) 1/4" round-head bolts each side. 5. Slab Attachment: Attach base plates to slab with 3/8" x 5" expansion anchors. Provide non-shrink grout between slab and base plate. 6. Ladder Handrail: 1-1/4" standard steel pipe,welded to stringer at 4'-0" O.C. J. Steel Ladder: Fabricate elevator pit access ladders to configurations per manas indicated on drawings and as follows: 1. Provide 3-3/8" x 1/2" plate stringers with 3/4" diameter solid steel rod rungs shouldered and welded to stringers. 2. Rungs spaced not over 12" apart. Distance from centerline of rungs to walls or obstructions not less than 6". 3. Stringers secured to wall by 1/4" x 3" x 7" bent steel plate brackets bolted to wall with 3/8" diameter toggle bolts. Brackets secured to wall at 24" O.C. turned inward. 4. Exterior ladders shall be galvanized. 5. Steel Safety Cage at Ladder: 2" x 3/8" Verticals at 6" o.c., welded to 5" x 3/8" hoops at 4'-0" o.c., horizontally. 6. Ladder Fall Protection System: Fall Protection Standard 29 CFR 1910, including(but not limited to) OSHA 1910.23. BOD Fixed Ladder Fall Protection System 2000 Climb-Rite by SafeRack, 219 Safety Avenue, Andrews SC 29510, 866-761-7225 or approved equal. Provide [2] personal safety harness and all attachment accessories required for complete fall protection system. K. Aluminum Ladders: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 055000 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 METAL FABRICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Basis of Design Products: Design for access ladders are based on O'Keefe's Inc. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the named products or approved equal products by another manufacturer. a. Heavy Duty Vertical Ladder [at Roof Hatch]: O'Keefe's Model 501. b. Heavy Duty Vertical Low Parapet Roof Access Ladder (With platform at parapet, and ladder return at higher roof): O'Keefe's Model 503. C. Heavy Duty Vertical Low Parapet Roof Access Ladder (No platform, no return): O'Keefe's Model 503A. d. Heavy Duty Ladder with Safety Cage [at Roof Hatch]: Provide at ladders 19'-6" or taller. O'Keefe's Model 531. e. O'Keefe rail and harness fall arrest system with two personal harness and all connections and accessories for complete fall arrest system. f. Heavy Duty [Mechanical Mezzanine] Access Ships Ladder: 170 degree maximum rise angle, O'Keefe's Model 520] [60 degree rise angle, O'Keefe's Model 520A]. 1) Ladder Width: [24"] <insert width>. 2) [Provide 42" tall, 1-1/2" standard steel pipe guardrail around open sides of the mezzanine floor opening.] g. Heavy Duty Roof Access Ships Ladder: 170 degree maximum rise angle, O'Keefe's Model 523] [60 degree rise angle, O'Keefe's Model 523A]. h. Heavy Duty [Over-Parapet] Roof Access Ships Ladder with platform and return: O'Keefe's Model 522. [Set on roof equipment curbs, with attachment penetrations through vertical faces of cap. Refer to Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for equipment curbs.] 2. Space siderails of ladders min. 16 inches apart [and siderails of ships ladders min 24 inches apart] unless otherwise indicated. 3. Siderails: Continuous extruded-aluminum tubes, not less than 2-1/2 inches deep, 3/4 inch wide, and 1/8 inch thick. 4. Rungs: Extruded-aluminum tubes, not less than 1-1/4 inch deep and rated for 1500 lb, with anti-slip serrated, ribbed, or abrasive tread surfaces. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; fasten by welding or with stainless-steel fasteners or brackets and aluminum rivets. 5. Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. vertically, with welded or bolted aluminum brackets. 6. Finish: Mill Aluminum 7. Safety Ladder-Up Extension Post: Refer to Division 07, Section"Roof Accessories." L. Expansion Joint Covers: Extruded aluminum anchored to wall, floor and ceiling per manufacturer's instructions. Expansion joint covers shall be as follows, or approved equal: 1. Interior Ceiling to Wall: Balco/Metaline#AC-15. 2. Interior Wall to Wall: Balco/Metaline#GP-10. 3. Interior Floor to Floor: Balco/Metaline 4NBS-10. 4. Interior Ceiling to Ceiling: Balco/Metaline#AC-10. M. Countertop Support Frames: Provide welded steel support frame for wide countertops Section- Architectural Woodwork. Provide steel tube posts located inside adjacent wall framing, with steel tube, channel, or angle horizontal beneath countertop as indicated in Drawings. Steel sizes indicated in Drawings are minimum sizes allowed; provide larger sizes where required to meet performance criteria and delegated design. The depth of the horizontal member must be designed to fit concealed behind the front vertical side of the countertop. Design connection to floor slab to support indicated loading and to fit within wall framing dimensions. Pre-drill for screw attachment / connection of countertop underlayment as directed by millwork fabricator/ installer.without intermediate supports as indicated in Drawings, and as indicated in Division 6, FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 055000 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 METAL FABRICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 N. Locker Room Bench Bracket: 3" x 3" x 1/4" steel tube with mounting bracket. Provide (1)per Y-0" of bench,to withstand 100 pounds of force per linear foot of bench. O. Miscellaneous Equipment Supports: Field verify all dimensions and provide miscellaneous steel support structure for wall and ceiling mounted equipment as follows: 1. For ceiling mounted projector mounts, and locations and items as specifically detailed or other items called for in the Drawings or other Sections requiring miscellaneous steel supports for complete installation. 2. For large [ceiling fans] [and] [chandeliers] as indicated in Drawings. 3. Where not specifically detailed, design and provide supports as required for all other equipment to be provided or installed under this contract. 4. All supports shall comply with requirements of the equipment Manufacturer(s) for support structure and shall provide adequate strength and secure attachment to building structure, braced against lateral movement. P. Metal Gratings: 1. Cast Iron Grating at Trench Drains: Re: Division 125 Section - Plumbing] [and] 133 Section-Utilities]. 2. Metal Grating at <insert use or locations>: 1" x 3/16" steel bearing bar at 1-3/16" on center with cross members welded at 2" on center equal to McNichols Co. No. GW-100- 2. Grate at treads shall be galvanized. 3. Metal Gratings at [Parking Garage] [Ventilation Shaft] [Areaway]: Hot Dipped Galvanized, 1-1/2" x 1/8" steel bearing bar at 1-3/16" on center with cross members welded at 4" on center, equal to McNichols Co. GW series. a. Width: [24"] <insert width>per section typical, and overall width as required to fit opening. b. Orient bearing bars to span in short span direction. C. Bar banded ends on each section to prevent wracking. 4. At gratings in walk surfaces, orient grating so that short dimension of openings are perpendicular to the path of travel, and in compliance with Texas Accessibility Standards. Q. Sidewalk Culvert: 3/8" galvanized checker plate sidewalk culvert cover with countersunk screws. R. Sidewalk Trench Cover&Frame: Standard support frame and bolted down solid checkered top of Gray Iron, Class 35 shall be Neenah Foundry Co., "Light Duty" Series#R-4991 with Type D skid resistant top, or approved equal by Barry Pattern & Foundry, Campbell, or McKinley Iron Works, in sizes as shown on drawings. S. Pipe Guards: 1. Fabricate from 1/4" bent steel plate, in shapes as indicated on drawings. Or where not indicated, bent to fit flat against the wall or column at both ends and to fit around pipe with 2 inch clearance between the pipe and pipe guard. Drill each end for two or more 3/4 inch anchor bolts, spaced 24" on center 2. Height and locations: [As indicated in Drawings] [from xx" to xx" above floor at exposed vertical [PVC and copper] pipes [other than the sprinkler riser] that are located inside the Apparatus Bay]. 3. Finish: [galvanized] [shop primed,field painted]. T. Downspout Protections: 1. Downspout Protection Guards: a. 1/4" Bent steel plate, galvanized, as indicated on drawings. b. Galvanized steel pipe, sized to match largest downspout size. 2. Downspout Boots: Equal to Barry Pattern and Foundry, B-[25] [26] series. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 055000 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 METAL FABRICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 a. Cast Iron Downspout Boot (for discharge to splash block): Sized to match downspouts, with top of boot mounted 3'-0" above finish floor. Provide concrete splash blocks under Division 07. b. Cast Iron Downspout Boot (for discharge to below grade pipe): Sized to match downspouts, with removable cleanout port, top of boots mounted 3'4" above finish floor. Coordinate overall lengths of boots with grading plan for below grade connection to drain pipes. C. Cast Iron Finish: [Rust inhibitive primer for field painting][Powder Coated]. U. Pipe Bollards: 1. 6" Diameter [galvanized] schedule 40 steel pipe with concrete fill. Mound concrete at top of bollard to shed water. a. Size: T-0" in length, recessed 3'-0" below-grade. 4'-0" height above grade, unless otherwise indicated in Drawings. b. Paint: Refer to Division 09, Section "Painting". Colors: safety yellow, or as selected by Architect. 2. 10" Diameter galvanized schedule 40 steel pipe with concrete fill and Stainless Steel cover as detailed. a. Size: 5'-0" in length, recessed 3'-0"below-grade. 2'-0" height above grade, unless otherwise indicated in Drawings. b. Prime and Paint: Refer to Division 09, Section "High Performance Coatings" for base galvanized steel bollard finish before installing stainless steel cover. Colors: as selected by Architect. V. Cast Iron Wheel Guards: Type WG7 as manufactured by McKinley Iron Works, or approved equal. Provide with 2" diameter x 1/4"plate bolt hole cap plates. W. Vehicular Barriers: 1. Steel Pipe Vehicular Barrier: 6" welded steel pipe barrier, with vertical support pipes at [6'-0"] <insert spacing> on center, embedded 3'-0" deep in concrete footings, and as detailed in Drawings. a. Height: Top of horizontal pipe at [18"] [24"] <insert height> above vehicular pavement surface. b. Finish: I Galvanized]I Shop Primed,field painted][Powder Coated]. 2. Cable Barrier Parking Garage Guard System: 1/2 inch diameter, 7-strand, zinc-coated steel wire ropes, with wire rope fittings for tightening wire rope. a. 11 horizontal cables design, at 4" on center vertically. b. Height: Top cable at 42" to 44" above adjacent grade or paved surface. C. Designed for vehicle containment. X. Steel Gate: Tube frame with steel tube horizontals and verticals as detailed on drawings. Provide gate frames with truss rods [and 8"x8"xl/4" triangular welded gusset plates at corners on back side of gate]. Tap drill where required for cladding and hardware installation. 1. Hardware: As shown in Drawings, and as specified in Division 32, "Chain Link Fencing and Gates". 2. Gate Hardware: As shown in Drawings, and as follows: a. Hinges: Heavy Duty gate hinges, structurally capable of supporting gate leaf and allow opening and closing without binding. Non-lift-off type hinge design shall be offset and permit gate to swing at least 120°. Provide three hinges for each leaf. b. Latch: Extra Heavy Duty slide bolt latch with keep, lockable with padlock. [(Padlock provided by Owner).] 3. Cane Bolts: Provide heavy duty cane bolt for each leaf 4. Perforated Metal Panel: As manufactured by McNichols Co., or approved equal. a. Material: <Insert gauge>, [Galvanized Steel] [Plain Steel] [Aluminum] [Stainless Steel] [Copper]. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 055000 - 7 MAY 2, 2023 METAL FABRICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 b. Hole shape and pattern: [Round, Straight line] [Round, 45 degree staggered] [Round, 60 degree staggered] [Square, straight line] [Square, staggered] [Square-end] [Slotted, Straight line] [Slotted, side staggered] [Slotted, end staggered] [Hexagon, honeycomb pattern]. C. Perf Size: <insert size of each hole>. d. Perf Centers: <Insert perf spacing dimension>. e. Open Area: <Insert percentage>. f. Attachment to Gate Frame: [Welded] [Through-bolted] [Riveted]. 5. Wood Pickets: Refer to [Division 32] [Landscaping Drawings] for wood fencing / picket material. a. Attachment to Gate Frame: [Black zinc coated] <insert type> carriage through- bolts centered in each slat at top of bottom of frame. Nuts and washers on interior side of gate. 6. Finish for gate frame [and metal panel]: [galvanized] [1 coat shop primer for field painting] [powder coated]. 7. Pre-drill frame as required for attachment of facing material(s)indicated in Drawings. Y. Fire Station Fabrications: 1. Visual Safety Chain at Mezzanine Loading Door<insert door number(s)>. This door is intended only for loading for loading of bulky materials or equipment by lift from the apparatus bay. The safety chain is an additional visual safety to help prevent accidental fall to app bay floor. Provide 1-1/2" or 2" safety yellow polyethylene chain with D-ring eyes and carabiner clips at each jamb. a. D-Ring Attachment: Welded to door frame, or lag bolted to blocking in stud wall or expansion anchor to CMU wall construction. Mount at jambs at 48" or slightly lower so that the entire length of the chain hangs between 42" to 48" above the mezzanine floor when it is in place across the door opening. 2. Safety Chain at Mezzanine Loading Door <insert door number(s)>: This door is intended only for loading for loading of bulky materials or equipment by lift from the apparatus bay. The safety chain is an additional visual safety to help prevent accidental fall to app bay floor. Provide D-ring eyes at each jamb and a chain with a slide bolt snap, carabiner clip, or threaded quick link at both ends. Chain shall be a minimum of 2/0 galvanized chain with at least a 250 lb load rating, and the chain assembly and attachment shall be capable of safely resisting a 200 lb load applied in any direction. Mount at jambs at 48" or slightly lower so that the entire length of the chain hangs between 42" to 48" above the mezzanine floor when it is in place across the door opening. a. D-Ring Attachment: Welded to door frame, or lag bolted to blocking in stud wall or expansion anchor to CMU wall construction. 3. Steel Pipe Mezzanine Safety Gate: Provide safety gate at the loading doors opening from the [mechanical] [and] [storage] mezzanine to the apparatus bay below. Provide 1-1/4" standard steel pipe fabricated with perimeter frame with rounded corners and [one horizontal middle rail] [infill as indicated on Drawings] <insert infill description>.. Fabricate gate with posts at each jamb, attached to structure below and to door jambs, with gate leaf designed to swing into the mezzanine between the open double hollow metal door leafs. a. Finish: [Galvanized] [Field painted per Division 09 — [Painting] ["High Performance Coatings"]] <insert finish>. b. Hinges: Provide two non-lift-off type barrel hinges for each gate leaf, with sufficient strength to resist guard rail loading criteria. Hinges shall allow a minimum of 120 degree swing. C. Latch: Provide latch mechanism at strike side of gate. Latch shall be operable from a standing position on the mezzanine side of the gate, and of self-engaging type when the gate is swung to closed position. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 055000 - 8 MAY 2, 2023 METAL FABRICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 d. Attachments of hinge and latch shall be capable of resisting design loads and shall not come open when guard rail design loads are applied to the top rail of the safety gate. 1) Attachment to gate, and adjacent railing (as applicable): Welded or mechanically fastened, capable of resisting design loads. 2) Attachment to adjacent wall (as applicable): lag bolt to blocking in stud wall or expansion anchor to CMU wall construction. 4. Eyebolt Rope Anchors at [Apparatus Bay] [Training Mezzanine] <insert location>: Provide forged throughbolt stainless steel, 3/4" diameter, 12"1 <insert size per FD direction> eye dimension, shoulder eyebolt anchors. a. Lengths: As required for attachment details and conditions indicated. b. Attachment to W-Flange Beams: Bolt securely through drilled hole in center of beam flange. C. Attachment to Steel Joists: Coordinate load and detail of supports with joint fabricator. d. Attachment to CMU wall: Through-bolted through fully grouted CMU cells, with nuts and washers at both sides,refer to detail in Drawings. e. Provide stainless steel washers and nuts as required for complete installation. f. Attachment to floor slab: Refer to detail(s) in Drawings. 5. Roof Safety Tie Back Anchors: Hot dipped galvanized roof anchor/tieback assembly with complete anchorage system configured for roof structural elements shown, designed by the manufacturer to withstand loading indicated: Anchors engineered and tested to comply with current OSHA regulations and ANSI/IWCA 1-14.1 safety standard for fall arrest and suspended maintenance. a. HSS tube filled with SM-FOM molded urethane insulation. b. Steel Reinforcement under slab per drawings and as required. C. Minimum loading requirements: 1) 5,000 lb. Ultimate load. 2) 2,000 lb. Test load. 3) 1,000 lb. allowable load. d. Confirm number of anchors and placement with manufacturer. e. Locations as indicated on the drawings and coordinated with the owner. f. Basis of Design: Summit Model: SM-5 as manufactured by Summit Anchor Company, Inc. 6. Manhole cover at storage mezzanine (for training purposes): Provide manhole frame and cover for casting into slab with top of manhole frame and cover flush with adjacent floor slab. Manhole cover shall be gasketed and have a latch or bolt-down cover as a safety provision. Manhole frame shall be cast in slab type as approved by Architect to suit conditions. Provide and install 30" diameter solid plastic pipe from underside of manhole cover through slab to 2" below bottom of steel joists /structure below deck,pipe securely supported and braced from structure below slab as details in Drawings. Provide miscellaneous steel and hardware as required for support and attachment. Grind or sand any welds and sharp edges smooth as required for safe passage through the manhole and 30"pipe. a. Clear Opening: Nominally 30" b. Lid: Approximately 32" diameter,heavy duty, solid cover,with gasket, either with a latch or countersunk flush bolt down. C. Model: <Insert mfr name and manhole cover model number and options>. Z. Miscellaneous Steel Shapes: Channels, angles, plates, tubing, connections and bolts provided where shown and detailed on drawings. Exterior imbed plates, support angles, and other miscellaneous exterior steel shall be hot-dip galvanized. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 055000 - 9 MAY 2, 2023 METAL FABRICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2.03 SHOP PAINTING A. All Iron and Steel Work: Unless otherwise specified, power tool clean all surfaces to remove mill scale. Work shall receive a shop coat of paint before leaving the factory or being exposed to the weather. Aluminum work contacting dissimilar metals shall receive a protective coating preventing galvanic action. B. Shop Paint: Shop paint shall be Fabricator's standard, fast curing, lead free, "universal" primer, compatible with finish paint system indicated and for capability to provide sound foundation for field applied topcoats. C. Aluminum surfaces to be in direct contact with concrete and masonry shall be shop coated with zinc chromate primer. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 FABRICATION A. Contractor shall secure and be responsible for all field measurements required for the proper and accurate fabrication and installation of the items included under this section; field alterations will not be permitted except upon specific authorization of the Architect. B. All work shall be assembled in the most substantial manner and reinforced where necessary with structural shapes, using concealed screws, bolts or similar fastenings. Make welds of adequate strength and durability,jointing tight, clean and smooth, flush and in true plane with base metals. C. All screws or rivets shall be countersunk, unless otherwise noted. Provide lock washers for all bolts. D. All steel to which wood blocking is connected shall be properly punched for anchoring blocking. E. Exposed steel shapes with marred surfaces shall be ground or draw-filled to a fine grain finish, as approved before applying shop coat of paint. F. Assembled work shall be completely constructed in the shop, accurately finished and the pieces match-marked for erection. Form exterior joints to exclude water, grind connections in exposed pieces smooth and polish. G. The Contractor shall do all drilling, cutting, tapping and fitting of work to accommodate other work coming in contact with it, and shall furnish all taps, bolts and other fittings in connection therewith. H. Except where otherwise noted, fastening to concrete, solid masonry or hollow masonry shall be with expansion bolts or anchors. Fastening to wood plugs will not be permitted. Toggle bolts may be used only when approved by the Architect. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. All work included in this Contract shall be installed by the Contractor at the proper time and as rapidly as the progress of the adjacent and connecting work will permit. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true to line, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels. C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to fonn hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 05 50 00 - 10 MAY 2, 2023 METAL FABRICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. E. Field Welding: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. 5. Touch-up shop prime coats. F. Immediately after erection, clean the field welds,bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop priming. Paint the exposed areas with same material used for shop priming. G. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of aluminum that will come into contact with grout, concrete,masonry,wood, or dissimilar metals with the following: 1. Cast Aluminum: Heavy coat of bituminous paint. 2. Extruded Aluminum: Two coats of clear lacquer. 3.03 INSTALLATION, SPECIFIC ITEMS A. Miscellaneous Framing and Supports: 1. General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, including manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings. 2. Anchor supports securely to and rigidly brace from building structure. B. Nosings and Treads: 1. Center nosings on tread widths unless otherwise indicated. 2. For nosings embedded in concrete steps or curbs, align nosings flush with riser faces and level with tread surfaces. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, install nosings as wide as possible, equal length on each step, and with ends of nosings installed in line at each stair. C. Pipe Guards: Provide pipe guards at exposed vertical pipes in parking garage where not protected by curbs or other barriers. Install by bolting to wall or column with expansion anchors. Provide minimum of four 3/4 inch bolts at each pipe guard, or more where required to secure and support guards. Mount pipe guards with top edge 1261 1481 <insert dimension> inches above driving surface. D. Cast-Iron Wheel Guards 1. Securely anchor wheel guards to concrete or masonry construction as detailed in Drawings and to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Tack weld cover plates over fastener holes. Touch up priming, and paint as specified. E. Metal Pipe Bollards: 1. Anchor bollards in concrete. Fill annular space around bollard solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout; mixed and placed to comply with grout manufacturer's written instructions. Slope grout up approximately 1/8 inch toward bollard for positive drainage away from bollard base. 2. Fill bollards solidly with concrete,mounding top surface to shed water. 3. Paint bollards color(s) as approved by architect. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 05 50 00 - 11 MAY 2, 2023 METAL FABRICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 F. Parking Garage Cable Barrier System: Anchor to concrete substrates per design engineer's instructions. Coordinate all anchorages prior to concrete forming. G. Steel Gates: 1. Install gates square and plumb. Adjust tension on truss rod as required, after gate cladding is installed. 2. Install with all gate hardware as detailed in Drawings, or where not detailed with same hardware as specified for chain link gates in Division 32, ["Chain Link Fencing and Gates"] ["Ornamental Metal Fencing and Gates"]. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA I for touching up shop-painted surfaces. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M. END OF SECTION 05 50 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 05 50 00 - 12 MAY 2, 2023 METAL FABRICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 05 51 13 - METAL PAN STAIRS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Preassembled steel stairs with concrete-filled treads. 2. Ornamental steel stairs to receive precast terrazzo treads and risers. 3. Steel Tube and Pipe Railings. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 03 Section - Cast-in-Place Concrete for concrete fill for stair treads and platforms. 2. Division 05 Section-Metal Fabrications for metal nosings and railings. 3. Division 05 Section-Fabricated Metal Spiral Stairs. 4. Division 05 Section-Decorative Metal Railings for ornamental metal railings. 5. Division 06 Section-Rough Carpentry for wood blocking for anchoring railings. 6. Division 09 Section - Portland Cement Terrazzo Flooring for terrazzo treads and landings. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design metal stairs, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer,using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Uniform Load: 100 lbUsq. ft. 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in. 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in addition to loads specified above. 5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/360 or 1/4 inch, whichever is less. C. Structural Performance of Railings: Railings shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated. 1. Handrails and Top Rails of Guards: a. Uniform load of 50 lbf/ft. applied in any direction. b. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied in any direction. c. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 2. Infill of Guards: a. Concentrated load of 200 lbf applied horizontally on an area of I sq. ft. b. Infill load and other loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. D. Seismic Performance: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Component Importance Factor is 1.5. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0551 13 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 METAL PAN STAIRS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For metal stairs, components, and miscellaneous materials. B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For products involving selection of color,texture, or design. D. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified professional engineer. B. Welding certificates. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. B. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," for class of stair designated,unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Preassembled Stairs: Commercial class. 2. Ornamental Stairs: Architectural class. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code- Steel." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code- Sheet Steel." 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation. C. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they will not encroach on required stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 METALS, GENERAL A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks,roller marks,rolled trade names, or blemishes. 2.02 FERROUS METALS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513,type 5 (mandrel drawn). FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0551 13 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 METAL PAN STAIRS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 D. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M,rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D. E. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated. F. Uncoated, Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 30,unless another grade is required by design loads. G. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 33,unless another grade is required by design loads. 2.03 ABRASIVE NOSINGS A. Cast-Metal Units: Cast aluminum, with an integral abrasive, as-cast finish consisting of aluminum oxide, silicon carbide, or a combination of both. Fabricate units in lengths necessary to accurately fit openings or conditions. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. American Safety Tread Co., Inc. b. Balco Inc. c. Barry Pattern&Foundry Co.,Inc. d. Granite State Casting Co. e. Safe-T-Metal Company,Inc. f. Wooster Products Inc. 2. Configuration: Cross-hatched units, 4 inches wide without lip. B. Provide integral anchors for embedding units in concrete. C. Apply clear lacquer to concealed surfaces of extruded units set into concrete. 2.04 FASTENERS A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required. 1. Design all fasteners to occur where they will be concealed in the finished work to the greatest extent possible. 2. No exposed fasteners shall occur on top side of landings and risers 2.05 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. B. Shop Primers: Provide primers compatible with finish coats specified in Division 09 painting Sections. C. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat. D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it. E. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section- Cast- in-Place Concrete for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28- day compressive strength of 3000 psi unless otherwise indicated. 2.06 FABRICATION, GENERAL FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0551 13 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 METAL PAN STAIRS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, railings, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure. 1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces. 3. Fabricate treads and platforms of exterior stairs so finished walking surfaces slope to drain. B. Preassembled Stairs: Assemble stairs in shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. C. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces. D. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work. E. Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges. F. Weld connections to comply with the following: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated. 5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing, and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. 6. Ornamental Stair: At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 welds: no evidence of a welded join. 7. Preassembled Stair: At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. G. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) screws or bolts unless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous. H. Fabricate joints that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. 2.07 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS A. Stair Framing: 1. Fabricate stringers of steel channels or tubes,unless otherwise indicated on Drawings. a. Provide closures for exposed ends of stringers. 2. Construct platforms of steel channel or tube headers and miscellaneous framing members as needed to comply with perforinance requirements and as indicated on Drawings. 3. Weld stringers to headers; weld framing members to stringers and headers. 4. Where stairs are enclosed by gypsum board assemblies, provide hanger rods or struts to support landings from floor construction above or below. Locate hanger rods and struts where they will not encroach on required stair width and will be within the fire- resistance-rated stair enclosure. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0551 13 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 METAL PAN STAIRS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 5. Where masonry walls support metal stairs, provide temporary supporting struts designed for erecting steel stair components before installing masonry. B. Metal-Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than 0.067 inch. 1. Steel Sheet: Uncoated hot-rolled steel sheet unless otherwise indicated. 2. Steel Sheet: Galvanized-steel sheet at exterior stairs and,where indicated. 3. Attach risers and subtreads to stringers with brackets made of steel angles or bars. Weld brackets to stringers and attach metal pans to brackets by welding,riveting, or bolting. 4. Shape metal pans to coordinate risers with specified nosings. 2.08 STAIR RAILINGS A. Comply with applicable requirements in Division 05 Section-Metal Fabrications. 1. Rails may be bent at corners, rail returns, and wall returns, instead of using prefabricated fittings. 2. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated. B. Form changes in direction of railings as follows, as detailed and by flush bends. C. Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces of components. D. Provide wall returns at ends of wall-mounted handrails unless otherwise indicated. Close ends of returns. E. Brackets, Flanges, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide wall brackets, end closures, flanges, miscellaneous fittings, and anchors for interconnecting components and for attaching to other work. Furnish inserts and other anchorage devices for connecting to concrete or masonry work. 1. Connect posts to stair framing by direct welding unless otherwise indicated. F. Fillers: Provide fillers made from steel plate, or other suitably crush-resistant material,where needed to transfer wall bracket loads through wall finishes to structural supports. Size fillers to suit wall finish thicknesses and to produce adequate bearing area to prevent bracket rotation and overstressing of substrate. 2.09 FINISHES A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Finish metal stairs after assembly. Exposed metal at stairs shall be a finished with corrosion resistant finish. Concrete shall be a light broom finish at all stair treads. C. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products. 1. Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion. 2. Fill vent and drain holes that will be exposed in finished Work,unless indicated to remain as weep holes,by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth. D. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with minimum requirements indicated below for SSPC surface preparation specifications and environmental exposure conditions of installed products: 1. Exterior Stairs: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning." FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0551 13 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 METAL PAN STAIRS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Interior Stairs: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." 3. Preassembled Interior Stairs (SSPC Zone IA): SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning." E. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting. 1. Stripe paint corners, crevices,bolts,welds, and sharp edges. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where necessary for securing metal stairs to in-place construction. Include threaded fasteners for concrete and masonry inserts,through-bolts, lag bolts, and other connectors. B. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack. C. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete unless otherwise indicated. D. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction. E. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections. F. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface. G. Place and finish concrete fill for treads and platforms to comply with Division 03 Section - Cast-in-Place Concrete." 1. Install abrasive nosings with anchors fully embedded in concrete. Nosings shall be full width of tread.. H. Install precast concrete treads with adhesive supplied by manufacturer. 3.02 INSTALLING RAILINGS A. Adjust railing systems before anchoring to ensure matching alignment at abutting joints. Space posts at spacing indicated or,if not indicated, as required by design loads. Plumb posts in each direction. Secure posts and rail ends to building construction as follows: 1. Anchor posts to steel by welding directly to steel supporting members. 2. Anchor handrail ends to concrete and masonry with steel round flanges welded to rail ends and anchored with postinstalled anchors and bolts. B. Attach handrails to wall with wall brackets. Provide bracket with 1-1/2-inch clearance from inside face of handrail to finished wall surface. Locate brackets as indicated or, if not FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0551 13 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 METAL PAN STAIRS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 indicated, at spacing required to support structural loads. Secure wall brackets to building construction as required to comply with performance requirements and as follows: 1. For concrete and solid masonry anchorage, use drilled-in expansion shields and hanger or lag bolts. 2. For wood stud partitions, use hanger or lag bolts set into studs or wood backing between studs. Coordinate with carpentry work to locate backing members. 3. For steel-framed gypsum board assemblies: fasten brackets directly to steel framing or concealed steel reinforcements using self-tapping screws. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces. 1. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness. B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780. END OF SECTION 05 51 13 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0551 13 - 7 MAY 2, 2023 METAL PAN STAIRS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 05 52 00 - HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Permanent warning line system(Perma-line) B. Modular railing system. (Kwik-Rail) C. Pipe fittings. (Kwik-Fit) D. Accessories. (Safety Strip) 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Division 3 Section—Cast-In-Place Concrete B. Division 3 Section—Cast-In-Place Architectural Concrete C. Division 5 Section-Metal Fabrications D. Division 5 Section-Metal Stairs E. Division 5 Section—Decorative Metal Railings 1.04 REFERENCES A. Occupational Safety& Health Administration(OSHA):: 1. 29 CFR 1910.23 - Guarding Floor and Wall Openings and Holes 2. 29 CFR 1910.27 -Fixed Ladders 3. 29 CFR 1926.500- Scope,Application,And Definitions Applicable to this Subpart. 4. 29 CFR 1926.501 -Duty to Have Fall Protection. 5. 29 CFR 1926.502 -Fall Protection Systems Criteria and Practices. 6. 29 CFR 1926.503 - Training Requirements. 7. Warning Line Interpretations dated May 12, 2000, November 15, 2002, and January 3, 2005. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 0130 00 -Administrative Requirements. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including: I. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods. C. Shop Drawings: Drawings showing plans, elevations, sections and details of components. D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 05 50 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 METAL FABRICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. Verification Samples: For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square,representing actual product, color, and patterns 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the job site in good condition and adequately protected against damage as handrails are a finished product. B. Inspect rail sections for damage before signing the receipt from the trucking company. Truck driver must note damaged goods on the bill of lading if damaged product is found. C. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Where handrails and railings are indicated to fit to other construction, check actual dimensions of other construction by accurate field measurements before fabrication. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Warranty: Provide manufacture's two (2)year warranty. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturer: BlueWater Mfg., Inc., which is located at: 4064 Peavey Rd.; Chaska, MN 55318; Toll Free Tel: 866-933-2935; Tel: 952-448-2935; Fax: 952-448-3685; Email: request info (info@bluewater-mfg.com); Web: www.bluewater-mfg.com B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of Section 01 60 00 -Product Requirements. 2.02 SYSTEMS A. Permanent Warning Line System: Provide non-penetrating, permanent, highly visible warning line system for roof edge fall protection. System shall not be used as a motion stopping device. 1. Approved Product: Perma-Line 2. Standards: Warning line system shall meet or exceed the requirements in OSHA Standards-29 CFR 1926.502(f)(2). 2.03 FITTINGS A. Pipe Fittings: 1. Approved Product: Kwik-Fit 2. Type: Provide fittings required for a complete operational system that meets OSHA requirements. 3. Material,Fitting Types 26,27 and 90: Weldable cast steel,in accordance with BS 3100. 4. Fitting,Inside Diameter: a. 1.73 inch(44 mm) 5. Hardware: Stainless steel set screws, in accordance with BS 970 Grade 420. Each set screw shall support axial load of 900 kg when tightened to torque of 40Nm. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Safety/Caution Signage: Cushioned foam strip with self adhesive backing; UL- rated for indoor/outdoor use. 1. Approved Product: Safety Strip. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 055000 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 METAL FABRICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Thickness: 3/8 inch(9.5 mm). 3. Length: 36 inches (914 mm). 4. Width: 4 inches (102 mm). 5. Color: Safety Yellow. 2.05 FINISHES A. Finish: Factory finished powder coat paint. B. Color: Match Architect's sample. 2.06 FABRICATION A. Assemble components with joints tightly fitted and secured. Accurately form components to suit installation. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up,repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 05 52 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 055000 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 METAL FABRICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 06 16 00 - SHEATHING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Wall sheathing. 2. Roof sheathing. 3. Composite nail base insulated roof sheathing. 4. Sheathing joint and penetration treatment. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 06 Section - Rough Carpentry for plywood backing panels and wood floor decking and underlayments. 2. Division 07 Section-Air Barriers for water-resistive barrier applied over wall sheathing. 3. Division 07 Section-Metal Wall and Roof Panels. 4. Division 07 Sections for roofing types over roof sheathing. 5. Division 07 Section- Sheet Metal and Flashing. 6. Division 09 Section—Gypsum Board Assemblies 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials and dimensions and include construction and application details. 1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Indicate type of preservative used and net amount of preservative retained. 2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated plywood complies with requirements. Include physical properties of treated materials. 3. For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated plywood both before and after exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency according to ASTM D 5516. 4. For products receiving a waterborne treatment,include statement that moisture content of treated materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site. 5. Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For following products, from ICC-ES: 1. Preservative-treated wood panel products. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood panel products. 3. Foam-plastic sheathing. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 06 1600-1 MAY 2, 2023 SHEATHING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer of air-barrier and water-resistant glass-mat gypsum sheathing. 1. Installer shall be licensed by ABAA according to ABAA's Quality Assurance Program and shall employ ABAA-certified installers and supervisors on Project. B. Mock-up: Build pre-construction mockup detailed on the drawings to verify selections made under Submittals, to verify details & tie-ins, and to demonstrate typical construction and waterproofing details, and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Prior to product installation a field-constructed mock-up shall be provided under the provisions of Division 1 Section- Submittals, Product Data, Samples and Mock-ups. 2. Construct a typical exterior wall section, incorporating back-up wall, cladding, window and sill, insulation, flashing and any other critical junctions (roof, foundation, etc.) as detailed in Drawings. 3. Locate mockups as directed by Architect. 4. Build mockups as indicated in Drawings. a. Show typical components, attachments to building structure, and methods of installation. 5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting installation. 6. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 7. Maintain approved mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 8. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. 9. Demolish and remove mockups when directed. C. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire- retardant-treated material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performs inspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the material tested. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Design roof sheathing fastener patterns to requirements as specified for roofing, wind pressures as indicated in Structural Drawings, and requirements of local codes and authorities having jurisdiction,whichever is most stringent. 2.02 WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 06 1600-2 MAY 2, 2023 SHEATHING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Emissions: Products shall meet the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." B. Certified Wood: For the following wood products, provide materials produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship": 1. Plywood. 2. Oriented strand board. C. Plywood: Either DOC PS I or DOC PS 2,unless otherwise indicated. D. Oriented Strand Board: DOC PS 2. E. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified, but not less than thickness indicated in Drawings. 1. Refer to structural Drawings and specifications for requirements where sheathing acts as a shear wall or roof diaphragm. F. Factory mark panels to indicate compliance with applicable standard. G. Certified Wood, MW 5.1: Not less than 50 percent (by cost) of wood-based materials shall be produced from wood obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship." I. Wood-based materials include,but are not limited to, the following materials when made from wood, engineered wood products, or wood-based panel products: a. Plywood. b. Oriented strand board. c. Particleboard underlayment. d. Hardboard underlayment. 2.03 PRESERVATIVE-TREATED WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS A. Preservative Treatments by Pressure Process: AWPA U I for uses indicated; and as follows: 1. Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. 2. At treated materials in contact with metal, use only non-corrosive type preservatives or provide separation between metal surfaces and materials treated with corrosive chemicals. B. Mark plywood with appropriate classification marking of an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. C. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings and plywood in contact with masonry or concrete or used with roofing, flashing,vapor barriers, and waterproofing. 2.04 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED WOOD PANEL PRODUCTS A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire- test-response characteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by a qualified testing agency. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test. 1. Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 06 1600-3 MAY 2, 2023 SHEATHING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-retardant-treated plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated. 3. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated. 4. Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber plywood shall be tested according ASTM D 5516 and design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6305. 5. Where treated items are exposed on exterior or to high humidity or are to have a transparent finish in the form of a stain or sealer, provide materials which show no change in fire-hazard classification when subjected to standard rain test (UL 790 or ASTM B2898). 6. Use fire-retardant treatment which will not bleed through or adversely affect type of finish indicated and which does not require brush treatment of field made end cuts to maintain fire-hazard classification. C. Kiln-dry material after treatment to maximum moisture content of 15 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. D. Identify fire-retardant-treated plywood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency. E. Application: Treat all plywood not specified or shown to receive preservative treatment. 2.05 WALL SHEATHING A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: 1. Nominal Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch, and not less than 3/4 inch at back side of parapet framing above roof. Additionally, comply with minimum thicknesses indicated in structural Drawings. B. Oriented-Strand-Board Wall Sheathing: 1. Nominal Thickness: as indicated in Drawings. C. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C 1396, 1/2" thick, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: a. American Gypsum, Exterior Soffit Board b. CertainTeed Corporation; Exterior Soffit Board c. G-P Gypsum Corporation; Toughrock Soffit Board d. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Exterior Soffit Board e. United States Gypsum Co.; Exterior Soffit Board D. Cementitious Backer Units at exterior tile application: ASTM C 1325, Type A. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to, the following: a. C-Cure; C-Cure Board 990. b. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. c. FinPan,Inc.; Util-A-Crete Concrete Backer Board. d. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board. 2. Thickness: 1/2 inch. E. Extruded-Polystyrene-Foam Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 578, Type IV, in manufacturer's standard lengths and widths with tongue-and-groove or shiplap long edges as standard with manufacturer. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 06 1600-4 MAY 2, 2023 SHEATHING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Dow Chemical Company(The). c. Owens Corning. d. Pactiv, Inc. 2. Thickness: As indicated in Drawings,with R-value of 5 per inch of thickness. F. Foil-Faced, Polyisocyanurate-Foam Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1289, Type 1 or Type 11, Class 2, rigid, cellular, Polyisocyanurate thermal insulation. Foam-plastic core and facings shall have a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested individually. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Atlas Roofing Corporation. b. Dow Chemical Company(The). c. Rmax, Inc. 2. Thickness: As indicated in Drawings. 2.06 ROOF SHEATHING A. Plywood Roof Sheathing: Exterior, Exposure 1 sheathing. 1. Span Rating: Not less than what drawings indicate. 2. Nominal Thickness: Not less than indicated on drawings. 2.07 FASTENERS A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture. 1. Unless otherwise noted, for fasteners at ACQ or corrosive treated wood,provide stainless steel fasteners, or fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M. B. Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667. C. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272. D. Wood Screws: ASME B 18.6.1. E. Screws for Fastening Wood Structural Panels to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except with wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened. 1. For wall and roof sheathing panels, provide screws with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. F. Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing to be attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. 1. For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch thick, use screws that comply with ASTM C 1002. 2. For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick, use screws that comply with ASTM C 954. G. Screws for Fastening Vented, Insulated Nail Base Sheathing to Roof Deck: Steel drill screws, in type and length recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 06 1600-5 MAY 2, 2023 SHEATHING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 sheathing to be attached, with organic-polymer or other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according to ASTM B 117. Provide washers or plates if recommended by sheathing manufacturer. 1. Size fasteners to meet the minimum penetration into decking required. In areas of roof deck exposed to view from below, do not use fasteners that are long enough to penetrate the lower flutes of the metal roof decking. 2.08 SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS A. Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834, compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing and recommended by tape and sheathing manufacturers for use with glass-fiber sheathing tape and for covering exposed fasteners. 1. Sheathing Tape: Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, minimum 2 inches wide, 10 by 10 or 10 by 20 threads/inch, of type recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers for use with silicone emulsion sealant in sealing joints in glass-mat gypsum sheathing and with a history of successful in-service use. B. Sheathing Tape for Foam-Plastic Sheathing: Pressure-sensitive plastic tape recommended by sheathing manufacturer for sealing joints and penetrations in sheathing. C. Refer to Division 7 Section(s) for joint treatment requirements for liquid applied air barrier membranes. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not span between fewer than three support members. B. Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work. Unless otherwise indicated, fit tightly against abutting construction, except provide a 3/8" setback where non- load-bearing construction abuts structural elements. C. Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following: 1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code." D. Use common wire nails for attaching sheathing to wood framing unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections. Install fasteners without splitting wood. E. Coordinate sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through the completed assembly. F. Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structural support elements. G. Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when precipitation is forecast. 3.02 GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Fasten gypsum sheathing to wood framing with screws. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 06 1600-6 MAY 2, 2023 SHEATHING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws. 3. Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements. 4. Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain moisture,to prevent wicking. B. Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing,but do not cut into facing. C. Horizontal Installation: Abut ends of boards over centers of studs, and stagger end joints of adjacent boards not less than one stud spacing. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each steel stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards. 2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, boards may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed. D. Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges of each board with those of adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each stud. 1. Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and ends of boards. 2. For sheathing under stucco cladding, boards may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing is installed. E. Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete installation of sill sealer gaskets by adhering upward leg of tee-shaped gaskets to face of sheathing. 2. Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient amount of sealant to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal other penetrations and openings. 3. Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply and trowel silicone emulsion sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposed fasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings. 3.03 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNIT INSTALLATION A. Install panels and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. 3.04 FOAM-PLASTIC SHEATHING INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. B. Foam-Plastic Wall Sheathing: Install vapor-relief strips or equivalent for permitting escape of moisture vapor that otherwise would be trapped in stud cavity behind sheathing. C. Apply sheathing tape to joints between foam-plastic sheathing panels and at items penetrating sheathing. Apply at upstanding flashing to overlap both flashing and sheathing. END OF SECTION 06 16 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 06 1600-7 MAY 2, 2023 SHEATHING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 06 40 23 - INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior standing and running trim. 2. Interior frames and jambs. 3. Stairwork and rails. 4. Interior ornamental work. 5. Wood cabinets. 6. Plastic-laminate cabinets. 7. Plastic-laminate countertops. 8. Solid surface Quartz countertops. 9. Laminated-plastic laboratory tops. 10. Closet and utility wood shelving. 11. Shop finishing of interior woodwork. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section - Rough Carpentry for wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips required for installing woodwork and concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. 2. Division 06 Section - Finish Carpentry for interior carpentry exposed to view that is not specified in this Section. 3. Division 06 Section- Quartz Countertops for manufactured stone countertops. 4. Division 07 Section - Joint Sealants for sealing around architectural woodwork and countertops. 5. Division 09 Section-Painting for field finishing of architectural woodwork. 6. Division 09 Section- Resilient Base and Accessories for rubber base installed at cabinet base boards. 7. Division 10 Section for metal shelving and storage. S. Division 11 Section - Residential Appliances for appliances installed in millwork and under countertops. 9. Division 11 Section - Food Preparation Equipment for stainless steel cabinets and countertops. 10. Division 22 Sections for plumbing fixtures and fittings. 11. Division 26 Sections for electrical devices installed in architectural woodwork. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Interior architectural woodwork includes wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing woodwork items unless concealed within other construction before woodwork installation. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 06 40 23-1 MAY 2, 2023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Transparent Finish: Wood finish with exposed grain, including both stained and unstained finishes in colors as selected by Architect,with clear or translucent protective finish coat(s). C. Opaque Finish: Coating finish systems that completely obscure the wood grain. D. Rough carriages for stairs are a part of interior architectural woodwork. Platform framing, headers,partition framing, and other rough framing associated with stair work are specified in Division 06 Section-Rough Carpentry. 1.04 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of training, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to support loads imposed by installed and fully loaded cabinets. B. For appliances, equipment, electrical/plumbing fixtures and utilities attached to or adjacent prior to installation of cabinets. to millwork, coordinate required clearances and rough openings,prior to fabrication and 1. Prior to fabrication of millwork, Contractor to verify that appliance doors, handles, and controls do not conflict with doors and drawers of adjacent millwork, and adjust millwork dimensions or provide filler strips as required to allow full 90° opening of all doors, and full opening of drawers. Coordinate prior to utility rough in where solution involves changing the location of appliances. 1.05 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including cabinet hardware and accessories and handrail brackets. 1. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. B. Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details, attachment devices, and other components. 1. Show details at not less than 1-1/2" scale. Submittal format shall be 30" x 42" sheets. 2. Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and reinforcement specified in other Sections. 3. Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for plumbing fixtures and faucets installed in architectural woodwork. 4. Show arrangement of splashes at countertops. 5. Apply WI-certified compliance label to first page of Shop Drawings. C. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. Shop-applied transparent finishes. 2. Shop-applied opaque finishes. 3. Plastic laminates. 4. PVC edge material. 5. Thermoset decorative panels. 6. Solid-surfacing materials. D. Samples for Verification: 1. Lumber with or for transparent finish, not less than 50 sq. in. for each species and cut, finished on 1 side and 1 edge. 2. Veneer leaves representative of and selected from flitches to be used for transparent- finished woodwork. 3. Veneer-faced panel products with or for transparent finish, 8 by 10 inches, for each species and cut. Include at least one face-veneer seam and finish as specified. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 06 40 23-2 MAY 2, 2023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 4. Lumber and panel products with shop-applied finish, 50 sq. in. for lumber and 6 by 8 inches for panels,for each finish system and color,with exposed surface finished. 5. Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finish with 1 sample applied to core material. 6. Solid-surfacing materials, 6 inches square. 7. Corner pieces as follows: a. Cabinet-front frame joints between stiles and rails, as well as exposed end pieces, 18 inches high by 18 inches wide by 6 inches deep. b. Miter joints for standing trim. 8. Exposed cabinet hardware and accessories, one unit for each type and finish. 1.06 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials and Fabrication, General: 1. Provide Custom Grade for painted finish woodwork, per AWI standards. Casework and Cabinetry shall be of reveal overlay design, unless otherwise specified or indicated on drawings. 2. Casework shall minimally meet AWI Section 400A standards for transparent finished custom grade casework. 3. All dimensions, substrates, etc. shall be verified in the field by the Contractor. 4. Use maximum length material for all trim,base, etc. 5. Scribe and fit all cabinets and casework tightly to adjoining construction unless otherwise indicated. B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance. 1. Fabricator shall have had at least 5 years experience in projects of similar scope. C. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products. D. Source Limitations: Engage a qualified woodworking firm to assume undivided responsibility for production of interior architectural woodwork with sequence-matched wood veneers. E. Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the Architectural Woodwork Standards for grades of interior architectural woodwork indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and other requirements. F. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where fire-retardant materials or products are indicated, provide materials and products with specified fire-test-response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by UL, ITS, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency in the form of separable paper label or, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, imprint on surfaces of materials that will be concealed from view after installation. G. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 06 40 23-3 MAY 2, 2023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section-Project Management and Coordination. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver woodwork until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have been completed in installation areas. If woodwork must be stored in other than installation areas, store only in areas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in"Project Conditions" Article. 1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period. B. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install woodwork until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F and maintaining relative humidity within typical design operating range for the facility, during the remainder of the construction period. C. Field Measurements: Where woodwork is indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support woodwork by field measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 2. Established Dimensions: Where field measurements cannot be made without delaying the Work, establish dimensions and proceed with fabricating woodwork without field measurements. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction to ensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate sizes and locations of training, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that interior architectural woodwork can be supported and installed as indicated. B. For appliances and equipment attached to or adjacent to millwork, coordinate required clearances and rough openings,prior to fabrication and prior to installation of cabinets. 1. Prior to fabrication of millwork, Contractor to verify that appliance doors, handles, and controls do not conflict with doors and drawers of adjacent millwork, and adjust millwork dimensions or provide filler strips as required to allow full 90° opening of all doors, and full opening of drawers. Coordinate prior to utility rough in where solution involves changing the location of appliances. C. Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in Division 08 Section - Door Hardware (Scheduled by Describing Products) to fabricator of architectural woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication with hardware requirements. 1.11 WARRANTIES A. Quartz countertop manufacturer's standard 10-year warranty against material defects. 1.12 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide additional shelf brackets for adjustable cabinet shelves, minimum of one additional bracket per cabinet section with adjustable shelves, in manufacturer's unopened packages. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 06 40 23-4 MAY 2, 2023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials that comply with requirements of AWI's quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified,unless otherwise indicated. B. Wood Products: Comply with the following: 1. All lumber shall be kiln dried to a moisture content of 4-1/2 percent. Kiln dried lumber shall be tempered for not less than four weeks before using. 2. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD. 3. Softwood Plywood for Laminate finish: DOC PS 1, at semi-exposed surfaces unless noted otherwise. 4. Medium Density Overlay Plywood (MDO): APA PSI-09, Exterior Grade B-B, MDO plywood. 5. Medium Density Fiberboard Combination Core Plywood: Panels constructed of veneer core plywood inner plies with phenolic-bonded MDF crossbands with PureBond® formaldehyde-free technology; Classic Core as manufactured by Columbia Forest Products, or approved equal. a. Panels made of particle board, MDF, Plywood, and combination core with lumber core instead of plywood core are not acceptable substitutions for the combination core panels as specified. C. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or,if not indicated, as required by woodwork quality standard. 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering high-pressure decorative laminates that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 2. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide high-pressure decorative laminates as scheduled in the drawings. 2.02 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS A. General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirements in this Article that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and with fire- test-response characteristics specified. 1. Do not use treated materials that do not comply with requirements of referenced woodworking standard or that are warped, discolored, or otherwise defective. 2. Use fire-retardant-treatment formulations that do not bleed through or otherwise adversely affect finishes. Do not use colorants to distinguish treated materials from untreated materials. 3. Identify fire-retardant-treated materials with appropriate classification marking of UL, U.S. Testing, Timber Products Inspection, or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Comply with performance requirements of AWPA C20 (lumber) and AWPA C27 (plywood). Use the following treatment type: 1. Exterior Type: Organic-resin-based formulation thermally set in wood by kiln drying. 2. Interior Type A: Low-hygroscopic formulation. 3. Mill lumber after treatment within limits set for wood removal that do not affect listed fire-test-response characteristics, using a woodworking plant certified by testing and inspecting agency. 4. Mill lumber before treatment and implement special procedures during treatment and drying processes that prevent lumber from warping and developing discolorations from FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 06 40 23-5 MAY 2, 2023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 drying sticks or other causes, marring, and other defects affecting appearance of treated woodwork. 5. Kiln-dry materials before and after treatment to levels required for untreated materials. C. Fire-Retardant Fiberboard: Medium-density fiberboard panels complying with ANSI A208.2, made from softwood fibers, synthetic resins, and fire-retardant chemicals mixed together at time of panel manufacture to achieve flame-spread index of 25 or less and smoke- developed index of 200 or less per ASTM E 84. 2.03 CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES A. General: 1. All hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets provided and installed by cabinet fabricator. 2. Finish for Exposed Cabinet Hardware as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's available finishes. 3. Finish for Concealed Cabinet Hardware (Typical unless otherwise noted): as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's available finishes. 4. Provide all screws, fasteners, and miscellaneous hardware and attachments as required for complete installation. B. Hinges: 1. Butt Hinges: 2-3/4-inch, 5-knuckle steel hinges made from 0.095-inch-thick metal. a. Provide hinges designed for thick doors where thick or hollow core doors are detailed in Drawings. 2. Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of opening, soft-closing. a. Provide four(4)hinges per leaf at tall cabinet doors. b. Provide hinges designed for thick doors, where thick or hollow core doors are detailed in Drawings. c. At combination core plywood, provide hinges with screws of the optimal length to make best advantage of screw pulling strength of the plywood core, regardless of whether the optimal screw length comes standard with the hinges. 3. Continuous Hinges at tall cabinet doors. 4. Scissor Hinge for Sink-Front Panel: Equal to Knape and Vogt SH-1-S/P. a. Coordinate with electrical contractor for installation of electrical switch for disposer, to be located behind sink panel inside of cabinet,to the left side of the kitchen sink. 5. Top-mounted book-return flap hinge: C. Cabinet Pulls: 1. Wire Pulls (in EMS Storage and Decon): Back mounted, solid metal, corrosion resistant, 5 inches long, 2-1/2 inches deep, and 5/16 inch in diameter. a. Finish: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color selections. 2. Bar Pulls (in Kitchen, Lobby, Community Room, Bathrooms, and Sleeping Rooms): Satin stainless steel bar pulls, 6 11/16 inches long, minimum of 3/8 inch in diameter and 1-1/4 inches deep, equal to Mockett DP128 Series. a. Finish: Matte Black D. Door and Drawer Locks: Each room of cabinets shall be keyed separately, unless otherwise noted. Verify keying with Owner prior to ordering locks. Provide 2 keys per lock unless otherwise noted. 1. Disc Tumbler Cam Locks: As manufactured by CompX National, or equal. Cam configuration to suit applications. 2. Deadbolt Locks: Back mounted disc tumbler deadbolt lock, as manufactured by CompX National, or equal. Size cylinder depths as required to suite applications. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 06 40 23-6 MAY 2, 2023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. Provide heavy duty spring loaded elbow catches at one leaf of each pair of locking double doors, equal to Epco Epc-1018-N. 4. Key each wardrobe and personal storage cabinet separately. E. Catches (At non-locking doors): No catches (European style hinges hold doors in closed position). F. Adjustable Shelf Pilasters and Supports in Cabinets: Four Flush-mounted 23 gauge high strength steel, zinc finish pilaster standards adjustable to 1/2" increments, equal to Knape and Vogt Series 244. 1. Provide an additional surface mounted Pilaster at all shelves wider than 36", at the middle back of shelf, equal to Knape and Vogt Series 233. 2. Provide longest possible standards to fit full height of cabinets, using manufacturer's standard lengths. 3. Provide square, self-adhesive flat top clear rubber pads at glass shelves. 4. Provide all installation hardware, and support brackets equal to Knape and Vogt 237 series, as required for complete installation. Provide additional support brackets as specified in Part 1 of these specifications. G. Adjustable Shelf Rests (for pre-drilled holes at cabinet side supports): 1. 1/4" diameter metal flat top shelf rests, equal to Knape and Vogt 331 series. Mortise bottom side of shelves to match shelf rest shape to prevent sliding. 2. 1/4" diameter plastic type with shelf retention clip for 3/4" thick shelves, equal to Knape and Vogt 339 series. 3. Provide additional shelf rests as specified in Part 1 of these specifications. H. Drawer Slides: Zinc-plated steel drawer slides with steel ball bearings and as follows: 1. Box Drawer Slides (for drawers less than 7" deep): Side mounted; full-extension type; Medium duty, 100 lb rated. a. Typical Box Drawer Slides equal to Knape and Vogt 8400 series. b. Kitchen/Breakroom: Soft closing slides equal to Fulterer 5001.ECD series. 2. File Drawer and Deep Storage Drawer Slides: Side mounted full-extension type; Heavy duty ball bearing, 200 lb rated. a. Typical File Drawer Slides equal to Knape and Vogt 8800 series. b. Kitchen/Breakroom: Soft closing slides equal to Fulterer FR 5210.ECD series. 3. Trash Bin Slides: Soft Closing pull-out trash slide system with white trash bin equal to: a. Knape and Vogt USC 12-1-50-WH for single trash bin units. b. Knape and Vogt USC-18-2-50-WH for double trash bin units. 1.Grommets for Cable Passage through Countertops: 2-inch OD, black,molded-plastic grommets and matching plastic caps with slot for wire passage. 1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "SG series" by Doug Mockett& Company, Inc. J.Coat Rod: Heavy Duty 1-1/4" round, chrome finish, metal rod with similar finish and material escutcheons at each end with countersunk holes for attachment to inside of cabinet. Installed with U-shape brackets on one or both sides as required to allow rods to be removed and replaced. 1. At handicap accessible wardrobe cabinets, provide a second set of brackets. Install the rod and both sets of brackets with U-shape bracket on one or both sides as required so that the rod may be removed and installed at either height without removing brackets. Provide one such extra set of brackets in one cabinet in each officer bedroom suite, and at 5% of all wardrobe lockers in the fire fighter bed rooms. K. Coat Hooks: 1. Coat and hat double hook for mounting in wardrobe cabinets: Equal to Ives 572. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 06 40 23-7 MAY 2, 2023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Top Mounted, double wardrobe hook for mounting in cubbies: Equal to Ives 580. 3. Side Mounted, single wardrobe hook for mounting in cubbies: Equal to Ives 581. 4. Side Mounted, double wardrobe hook for mounting in cubbies: Equal to Ives 582. L. Cabinet Signage: 1. Provide one stainless steel number plate for each wardrobe cabinet door in sleeping rooms. Verify number with owners. M. Adjustable Storage Shelving on Standards: 1. Single slotted single standard duty metal standards and brackets with anochrome finish shall be Knape and Vogt No. E80 and E180, or approved equal. 2. Single slotted heavy duty standards and brackets with anochrome finish shall be Knape and Vogt No. E83 and E183, or approved equal. 3. Double slotted heavy-duty standards and brackets with anochrome finish shall be Knape and Vogt No. E 8 5 and E185, or approved equal. 4. Shelves shall be 3/4" painted hardwood plywood unless otherwise noted. 5. Attach shelves to brackets with screws. N. Cantilever Countertop support brackets: Provide brackets as manufactured by A & M Hardware, or approved equal: 1. Concealed cantilever brackets: V wide, style "C", sized to countertop depth(s) as indicated in Drawings. 2. Surface mounted cantilever brackets: Equal to A&M Hardware 1/8" steel "Workstation Brackets", sized to shelf or countertop depth(s) as indicated in Drawings. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer's available colors. O. Floating Countertop support brackets: 1/2" steel brackets, sizes as required for cantilever dimensions as indicated in Drawings and spacing as required by load ratings required by counter weight, equal to brackets as manufactured by Centerline Brackets (www.countertopbracket.com): 1. Brackets for floating countertop: "Floating Wall Mount Support Brackets", for mounting to studs inside wall. 2. L-Brackets for cantilevering off a wall: "Front Mounting PLUS Brackets". 3. Brackets for cantilevered countertops on top of wood stud wall: a. "Standard Granite Brackets" or "Standard Plus Granite Brackets" as required by loading, for lag bolt into top and/or side of wall conditions, for countertops up to 24" cantilever. b. "Forward L Granite Brackets" for lag bolt into top and back side of wall conditions for countertops over 24" deep. c. "Center-Levered Bar Support" for double-sided cantilevered tops from a center knee wall. 4. Provide additional 2x wood blocking in wall as required for stud stiffening and attachment. 5. Space brackets as required to meet load ratings, and not further apart than span capability of the countertop or shelf construction being supported. P. Casters: Heavy duty 3" rubber caster on steel mounting for bolting to bottom of coat storage/cubicles cabinet. Allow 8 per cabinet. Q. Eggcrate Lens and Grid for Lighted Display Cabinets: Plastic parabolic louver with 1 1/2" x 1 1/2" x 1" parabolic cubes injection molded translucent acrylic set in standard white ceiling grid and "T"bar suspension system. Lens equal to A.L.P. Lighting and Ceiling Products,Inc. 1. Installation to allow grid to be removed for re-lamping light fixtures. R. Stand-off mountings for tempered glass panels: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 06 40 23-8 MAY 2, 2023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Nominal 7/8" x 7/8" diameter, stainless steel stand-off equal to Sagatsune Pointfix 7061 VA, or equal. 2. Nominal 3/4" x 1-1/2" diameter, stainless steel, flush-mounted stand-off equal to Sagatsune Pointfix 7000VA, or equal. Countersink glass holes as required. 3. Nominal 5/16" x 19/32" diameter satin aluminum stand-off equal to Sagatsune Pointfix 7144EIEV1, or equal. 4. Space stand-offs as shown in Drawings, but not further apart than recommended by stand-off manufacturer for the application and glass thickness indicated. 5. Provide Owner with one set of wrenches or other special tools required to remove and replace glass. S. Silencers: 1/16" flat top clear rubber, self-adhesive pads. Install two per cabinet drawer or door. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Softwood or hardwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. B. Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to less than 15 percent moisture content. C. Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts on inside face of exterior walls and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Provide toothed-steel or lead expansion sleeves for drilled-in-place anchors. 1. Conceal all anchors, or otherwise locate as indicated in Drawings and approved by Architect. D. Handrail Brackets: Sized to provide minimum of 1-1/2-inch clearance between handrail and wall. Refer to Division 5, Section- Metal Fabrications. E. Adhesives, General: Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde. F. Low-Emitting Materials: Adhesives shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." G. VOC Limits for Installation Adhesives: Installation adhesives shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Wood Glues: 30 g/L. 2. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. 3. Contact Adhesive: 250 g/L. H. Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Contact cement. 1. Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive. 2.05 LOUVERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Air Louvers Inc. 2. L&L Louvers, Inc. B. Metal Louvers: 1. Blade Type: Vision-proof,inverted V. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 06 40 23-9 MAY 2, 2023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Metal and Finish: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, with baked-enamel or powder-coated finish. 3. Width: Provide custom width to match millwork door thickness. 2.06 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Interior Woodwork Grade: Unless otherwise indicated, provide [Custom][Premium]-grade interior woodwork complying with referenced quality standard. B. Solid Stock Standing and Running Trim 1. Species for Transparent Finish: Match species and grain of adjacent panels for transparent finish unless otherwise indicated. 2. Species for Opaque Finish: Any closed grain hardwood. 3. Backout or groove backs of flat trim members and kerf backs of other wide, flat members, except for members with ends exposed in finished work. C. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for wood moisture content in relation to ambient relative humidity during fabrication and in installation areas. D. Sand fire-retardant-treated wood lightly to remove raised grain on exposed surfaces before fabrication. E. Cabinet Construction 1. Exposed Ends: Not less than 3/4" thick combination core plywood, connected to stile with pressure-glued tongue and plow joint and supplemented by special fasteners. a. Ends at openings below countertops without adjacent base cabinet: 4" wide panel with 3/4" thick MDF (or 3/4" combination core MDF/plywood if screws are attached) on each side, and 3/4" cap at exposed end. Finished to match adjacent millwork. 4" dimension is to assist in rubber base wrapping around without puckering. b. Provide finished backs, sides, and similar surfaces to match other exposed faces wherever exposed in the final work, and whether or not these exposed conditions are specifically indicated in the Drawings. Modify typical details as may be required to provide finished back, side and other panels that are not exposed in the typical conditions for each piece of millwork. Panel construction of such exposed panels shall be not less than that for other exposed panels. 2. Semi-Exposed Panel Ends: Not less than 3/4"thick combination core plywood. 3. Unexposed Ends: Not less than 1/2" thick plywood attached to front frame in same manner as exposed ends. 4. Door and Drawer Faces: 3/4" thick combination core plywood. 5. Back, Top and Bottom Rails: Not less than 3/4" x 3" solid lumber machined to interlock with end panels, and grooved to receive top and bottom panels with back rails secured under pressure with glue and fastening devices. 6. Shelving: Not less than 3/4" thick hardwood plywood with lumber core banded on front with 3/4" x 1-1/4"hardwood. 7. Bottoms: Not less than 3/4" thick plywood fully supported into gains in end panels and grooves in front frame and back bottom rails. 8. Back Panels: Not less than 1/4" thick, 5-ply veneer core plywood, glued and fastened to machined rear edge of end panels and to top and bottom rails. a. At exposed back panels, provide panels equal to those for exposed end panels and exposed surfaces shall match adjacent cabinet body finish. 9. Toe Boards: Not less than 3/8" attached between end panels and extended from bottom panel to floor. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 06 40 23-10 MAY 2, 2023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 10. Corner Blocks: Wood blocks glued and fastened in each of four top corners to maintain cabinet squareness and rigidity. 11. Casework Doors: 3/4 inch thick hardwood veneer combination core plywood with 1/4" hardwood banded edges. At full height cabinet doors (larger than standard base cabinets),use 1" thick combination core. 12. Top of Cabinet Finishes: a. Tops of cabinets visible from a mezzanine or floor level above, or lower than 5'-9" above floor level, are considered exposed surfaces, to receive matching finish to other exposed surfaces. b. Tops of cabinets other than those above are considered semi-exposed surfaces. 1) For stained wood veneer cabinets, semi-exposed tops shall be sanded smooth and sealed with 2 coats clear sealer. 2) For plastic laminate and painted cabinets, provide finish matching that called for semi-exposed surfaces. Color to use for these surfaces may vary from that used at cabinet interiors, confirm with Architect. 3) Exposed finishes are also acceptable as long as consistently applied within any room or space. F. Drawer Construction 1. Drawer Body: Not less than 7/16" plywood sub-front, back and sides, fully dovetailed and glued at all four corners with fronts fastened to sub-front with mounting screws from interior of body. 2. Drawer Bottoms: Not less than 1/4" thick 5-ply veneer core plywood glued into and fully supported by grooves in all four sides of drawer body. G. Wall cabinets 1. Valances: Provide continuous valance across each run of cabinets, with minimum number of joints required in each run. Locate joints to be hidden with doors in closed position. a. Set valance back slightly from face of cabinet frame to avoid contact with doors. b. Unless otherwise indicated, provide nominal 2" valance measured from top side of the bottom shelf to bottom of valance at typical cabinets and nominal 3" valance where below cabinet lighting is indicated. 2. Doors: Fabricate doors to extend to 1/8" below bottom of valances, to allow for adjustment and hide the sight line of valances with doors in closed position. 3. Exposed side panels: Extend down to match bottom of valance. 4. Finishes at Tops and Bottoms: a. Exposed Finishes: Bottoms of cabinets 5'-9" and higher, and tops of cabinets 5'-9" and lower, above floor level are considered exposed surfaces to receive finish matching other exposed surfaces. b. Semi-Exposed Surfaces: Bottoms of cabinets 2'-0" to 5'-9" above floor level and tops of cabinets 5'-9" or higher above floor level are considered semi-exposed surfaces 1) At stained wood veneer cabinets, sand smooth and seal. 2) At plastic laminate and painted cabinets provide matching finish to other semi- exposed surfaces. Color may vary from finish used at cabinet interiors, confirm with Architect. c. Exposed finishes are also acceptable as long as consistently applied within any room or space. H. Ventilation and Louvers: Provide ventilation for Audio Visual (A/V) equipment cabinets in Dayroom, Fitness Room, and any other locations as indicated in Drawings. Coordinate with AN and other equipment installers as applicable for open area required for ventilation and any other requirements. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 06 40 23-1 1 MAY 2, 2023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Provide intake air through the bottom panel of the cabinet, outside of the base at the toe kick. Provide slots in the base panel 1-1/2" to 2" wide,with edge banded interior faces of the cut-outs. Do not make any one slot long enough to compromise the strength of the base panel to the extent that the panel may crush in the middle. 2. Where AN or other equipment installer will provide an exhaust fan with trim kit, coordinate cutout size with AN installer, located high on the side panel of the cabinet. 3. Where AN or other equipment installer will not provide an exhaust fan, and where high exhaust is through the cabinet door, provide a stained hardwood louver in the door face, of size to provide acceptable ventilation to equipment installer. a. Species and color: To match flush wood doors, or other color as approved by Architect through finish sample submittals. I.Laminate Countertops and Splashes: Constructed from one continuous sheet of laminated plastic without intermediate joints, to the greatest extent possible. Provide cut-outs for sinks and other accessories, cut-out radiuses at least for 1/8 inch with edges filed smooth and free of crazes. J.Exposed surfaces shall be machine-sanded to an even, smooth surface, nails set, ready for finishing. All woodwork shall be dry, clean and smooth before any finishing materials are applied. All nail holes, cuts, cracks and other defects shall be treated so as to render them unnoticeable. K. Fabricate woodwork to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated. Ease edges to radius indicated for the following: 1. Corners of Cabinets and Edges of Solid-Wood (Lumber) Members 3/4 Inch Thick or Less: 1/16 inch. 2. Edges of Rails and Similar Members More Than 3/4 Inch Thick: 1/8 inch. L. Complete fabrication, including assembly, finishing, and hardware application, to maximum extent possible before shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing,trimming, and fitting. 1. Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trial fitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against field measurements indicated on Shop Drawings before disassembling for shipment. Verify cabinet doors and drawers operate freely at inside cabinet corners. M. Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, plumbing fixtures, electrical work, and similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produce accurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs. 1. Seal edges of openings in countertops with a coat of varnish. 2. Coordinate with actual appliances and equipment to be mounted to cabinets and under countertops, whether such equipment is provided by Contractor or by Owner, and verify unobstructed operation of equipment and of cabinet doors and drawers. N. Countertops and Splashes: 1. Units fabricated and designed to with-stand a 200 lb. per sq. ft. loading condition without the use of vertical supports. Fabricator shall indicate on shop drawings any special locations for stud supports as required for attachment of countertops. 2. Provide welded steel tube support frames to support countertops at wide spans between base cabinets, walls, or other countertop supports. Conceal steel tubes in adjacent wall, countertop, and cabinet construction to maximum extent possible unless specifically FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 06 40 23-1 2 MAY 2, 2023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 detailed otherwise. Refer to Division 5, Section - Metal Fabrications for general requirements. Provide steel supports as follows: a. Where specifically detailed in Drawings. b. Where required to achieve loading criteria specified. 3. Junction between countertops and non-integral splashes caulked with clear silicone sealant providing a tight sanitary joint. Junction between splash, countertop or any casework and wall shall be caulked with silicone sealant of color to match wall or adjacent construction. 4. Splash of same construction and countertop, to dimensions indicated on drawings. Provide side splashes at all walls and tall cabinets adjacent to countertops. O. Install glass to comply with applicable requirements in Division 08 Section - Glazing and in GANA's "Glazing Manual." For glass in wood frames, secure glass with removable stops. 2.07 PLASTIC-LAMINATE CABINETS A. Grade: Custom. B. AWI Type of Cabinet Construction: Flush overlay. C. Reveal Dimension: As indicated in Drawings. D. Panel Products for Exposed Surfaces: 1. Doors and Drawer Fronts: Combination Core. 2. Other Surfaces: Medium Density Fiberboard,unless otherwise indicated. E. Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces: Exposed portions of cabinets include all surfaces, including edges, visible when doors and drawers are closed. Visible surfaces in open cabinets and shelving units are also to be considered exposed surfaces. All exposed surfaces to receive high-pressure decorative laminate complying with laminate grade requirements of the specified cabinet grade. 1. Tops of cabinets visible from a mezzanine or floor level above are considered exposed surfaces. F. Materials for Semi-exposed Surfaces: Semi-exposed portions of cabinets include surfaces behind opaque doors and drawer fronts including shelves, dividers, interior faces of cabinet ends, backs, tops and bottoms, and drawer sides, backs and bottoms. Also, included are underside bottoms of cabinets over T-0" from floor and tops 5'-9" or more above floor. 1. Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate. a. Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: Edge banding, matching laminate in color, pattern, and finish, with 3/4"xl-1/2"plastic laminate finished stiffener at front side of shelf. b. At surfaces with screw attachment for hinges, use plywood or combination core plywood unless otherwise noted or approved by Architect. 2. Drawer Sides and Backs: Solid-hardwood lumber. 3. Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood. G. Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic Laminate Surfaces: Provide melamine balancing sheet. H. Laminate Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As scheduled in Drawings. 2.08 PLASTIC-LAMINATE COUNTERTOPS A. High-Pressure Decorative Laminate Grade HGS. B. Colors,Patterns, and Finishes: As scheduled in Drawings. C. Edge Treatment: 1. Material: Same as laminate cladding on horizontal surfaces. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 06 40 23-13 MAY 2, 2023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Shape: Square edge. D. Core Material at splashes: Constructed of phenolic 45 lb. high-density particle board cores conforming to ANSI A208.1 - 1989, 2M-1. E. Core Material at countertops: 1. Countertops without sinks: Medium density particle board. 2. Use fire retardant treated material at fire retardant treated cabinets. F. Backer Sheet: Provide melamine balancing sheet on underside of countertop substrate. 2.09 QUARTZ SOLID SURFACE COUNTERTOPS A. Solid-Surfacing-Material Thickness: 3/4 inch,with 3/4" splashes at countertops. B. Edge Profiles: 1. Countertops: Single layer with 1" projected edge. Profiles shall be square with 1/8" rounded edges. C. Wood Underlayment Material(where required for support by surface material): 1. Core Material at countertops: Medium-density fiberboard. 2. Core Material at countertops with sinks: Exterior-grade MDO plywood. D. Colors,Patterns, and Finishes: As indicated in Drawings. E. Accessories: 1. Adhesive: Highest quality type as recommended by Quartz manufacturer. 2. Joint Sealer: As recommended by Quartz manufacturer. F. Fabricate tops in one piece,unless otherwise indicated. Comply with solid-surfacing-material manufacturer's written recommendations for adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing. 1. Fabricate tops with shop-applied edges of materials and configuration indicated in Drawings. 2. Fabricate with hairline joints. 3. Cut holes for sinks and accessories as required. 2.10 CLOSET AND UTILITY SHELVING A. Shelf Material: 3/4-inch thermoset decorative panel with edge banding. 2.11 SHOP FINISHING A. Grade: Provide finishes of same grades as items to be finished. B. General: Finish architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Defer only final touchup, cleaning, and polishing until after installation. C. General: Shop finish transparent-finished interior architectural woodwork at fabrication shop as specified in this Section. Refer to Division 09 painting Sections for finishing opaque- finished architectural woodwork. D. Finishing Materials: Products shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." E. Preparation for Finishing: Comply with referenced quality standard for sanding, filling countersunk fasteners, sealing concealed surfaces, and similar preparations for finishing architectural woodwork, as applicable to each unit of work. 1. Backpriming: Apply one coat of sealer or primer, compatible with finish coats, to concealed surfaces of woodwork. Apply two coats to back of paneling and to end-grain surfaces. Concealed surfaces of plastic-laminate-clad woodwork do not require backpriming when surfaced with balancing sheet. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 06 40 23-14 MAY 2, 2023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 F. Transparent Finish: Treatment in first subparagraph below helps prevent blotchiness with wiping stains;it is optional with AWI. 1. Wash Coat for Stained Finish: Apply wash-coat sealer to woodwork made from closed- grain wood before staining and finishing. 2. Staining: None required. System in subparagraph below are durable,repairable,and good general-purpose fine finish. If finish other than conversion varnish is desired,go back to Arcom and verify the desired finish system. 3. AWI Finish System: Conversion varnish. Retain one of three options in subparagraph below; coordinate with effect and finish system selected. Numerical values for gloss ratings are those published in AWI standard. Flat sheen is generally only with oil finish,which is below durability BRW would normally specify. Refer to AWI quality standard for sheens available for each finish system. 4. Sheen: Semi-gloss, 46-60 gloss units measured on 60-degree gloss meter per ASTM D 523. G. Opaque Finish: All woodwork to have paint finish shall be primed at the shop with one coat of approved primer paint, compatible with finish system specified. Refer to Division 9, Section-Painting for field painting of interior woodwork. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION A. Coordinate fully with work of related trades for piping, conduit, outlets, switches, plumbing fixtures, equipment, appliances, and other items installed into or adjacent to millwork cabinets, as required to avoid conflicts. Contractor shall make adjustments to millwork or other construction, at no additional cost to Owner, that may be required due to Contractor's failure to coordinate between trades. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Before installation, condition woodwork to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas. B. Before installing architectural woodwork, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required, including removal of packing materials and backpriming. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Grade: Install woodwork to comply with requirements for the same grade specified in Part 2 for fabrication of type of woodwork involved. B. Assemble woodwork and complete fabrication at Project site to comply with requirements for fabrication in Part 2, to extent that it was not completed in the shop. C. Install woodwork level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level and plumb (including tops)to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches. D. Scribe and cut woodwork to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts. E. Fire-Retardant-Treated Wood: Handle, store, and install fire-retardant-treated wood to comply with chemical treatment manufacturer's written instructions, including those for adhesives used to install woodwork. F. Anchor woodwork to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as required for complete installation. Where exposed fastening is unavoidable, use fine finishing nails, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork and matching final finish if transparent finish is indicated. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 06 40 23-15 MAY 2, 2023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 G. Standing and Running Trim: Install with minimum number of joints possible, using full- length pieces (from maximum length of lumber available) to greatest extent possible. Do not use pieces less than 60 inches long, except where shorter single-length pieces are necessary. Scarf running joints and stagger in adjacent and related members. 1. At trim for transparent finish, fill gaps, if any, between wall and exposed edges of trim and base boards with plastic wood filler, sand smooth, and finish same as wood. 2. At trim for opaque finish, neatly caulk gaps, if any, between trim and wall and paint to match adjacent finish. 3. Install standing and running trim with no more variation from a straight line than 1/8 inch in 96 inches. H. Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned. Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation. Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated. 1. Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 2. Maintain veneer sequence matching of cabinets with transparent finish. 3. Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, at ends and not more than 16 inches o.c. with No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wall finish. I.Countertops: Anchor securely by screwing through corner blocks of base cabinets or other supports into underside of countertop. 1. Align adjacent solid-surfacing-material countertops and form seams to comply with manufacturer's written recommendations using adhesive in color to match countertop. Carefully dress joints smooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface. 2. Install countertops with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight line. 3. Secure backsplashes to tops with concealed metal brackets at 16 inches o.c. and to walls with adhesive. 4. Caulk space between backsplash and wall with sealant specified in Division 07 Section - Joint Sealants. J.Touch up finishing work specified in this Section after installation of woodwork. Fill nail holes with matching filler where exposed. K. Refer to Division 09 Sections for final finishing of installed architectural woodwork not indicated to be shop finished. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Repair damaged and defective woodwork, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; where not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance. B. Clean,lubricate, and adjust hardware. C. Clean woodwork on exposed and semi-exposed surfaces. Touch up shop-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas. END OF SECTION 06 40 23 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 06 40 23-16 MAY 2, 2023 INTERIOR ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 06 61 40 - QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS AND FABRICATIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Quartz countertops. 2. Quartz fabrications. 3. Setting materials and accessories. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 06 Section-Rough Carpentry. 2. Division 06 Section-Architectural Woodwork. 3. Division 07 Section-Joint sealers. 4. Division 09 Section- Gypsum Board. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American National Standards Institute(ANSI): 1. A108.5 - Installation of Ceramic Tile with Dry-Set Portland Cement Mortar or Latex Portland Cement Mortar. 2. Al 18.4 -Latex-Portland Cement Mortar. B. ASTM International (ASTM: 1. C97 - Standard Test Methods for Absorption and Bulk Specific Gravity of Dimension Stone. 2. C99 - Standard Test Method for Modulus of Rupture of Dimension Stone. 3. C170 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Dimension Stone. 4. C241 - Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Stone Subjected to Foot Traffic. 5. C482 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Ceramic Tile to Portland Cement. 6. C484 - Standard Test Method for Thermal Shock Resistance of Glazed Ceramic Tile. 7. C531 - Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes. 8. C648 - Standard Test Method for Breaking Strength of Ceramic Tile. 9. C650 - Standard Test Method for Resistance of Ceramic Tile to Chemical Substances. 10. C672/C672M - Standard Test Method for Scaling Resistance of Concrete Surfaces Exposed to Deicing Chemicals. 11. C880 - Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength of Dimension Stone. 12. C1026 - Standard Test Method for Measuring the Resistance of Ceramic Tile to Freeze- Thaw Cycling. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0661 40 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS AND FABRICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 13. C1028 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Static Coefficient of Friction of Ceramic Tile and Other Like Surfaces by the Horizontal Dynamometer Pull-Meter Method. 14. E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator and Installer Qualifications: Minimum 2 years documented experience in work of this Section. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Include countertop layout, dimensions, materials, finishes, cutouts, and attachments. B. Samples: 1. Manufacturer's standard size quartz samples in specified color. 2. Standard sealant colors for selection by architect. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's 10 year warranty against defects in materials and workmanship. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Quartz Sheet: 1. Product: As scheduled on Drawings, or approved equal. 2. Composition: Quartz aggregate,resin, and color pigments formed into flat slabs. 3. Color: As indicated on drawings. 4. Thickness: 3/4 nominal. 5. Physical characteristics: a. Static coefficient of friction: 1.02 dry, 0.51 wet, tested to ASTM C1028. b. Water absorption: Maximum 0.03 percent, tested to ASTM C97. c. Compressive strength: Minimum 29,000 psi, tested to ASTM C170. d. Bond strength: Minimum 210 psi,tested to ASTM C482. e. Modulus of rupture: Minimum 6300 psi,tested to ASTM C99. f. Flexural strength: Minimum 5800 psi,tested to ASTM C880. g. Breaking strength: Minimum 480 lbf, tested to ASTM C648. h. Stain resistance: Not affected by 10 percent hydrochloric acid or 10 percent KOH, tested to ASTM C650. i. Thermal shock resistance: Pass 5 cycles,tested to ASTM C484. j. Abrasive index: 65-Ha=25,tested to ASTM C241. k. Thermal expansion: 1.670 x 10`in/m/deg F,tested to ASTM C531. 1. Deicing resistance: Rating of 0,tested to ASTM C672/C672M. in. Freeze/thaw resistance: 0 tiles at 15 cycles,tested to ASTM C1026. n. Flame spread rating: Class 1,tested to ASTM E84. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: Type recommended by quartz manufacturer. B. Joint Sealer: 1. Latisil Tile and Stone Sealant by Laticretet'International,Inc. 2. Color: To be selected by Architect from manufacturer's full color range. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0661 40 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS AND FABRICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2.03 FABRICATION A. Cut quartz panels accurately to required shapes and dimensions. B. Micro-chamfer exposed edges. C. Fabricate with hairline joints. Minimize joint lines. D. Cut holes for sinks faucets. E. Edge Style: micro-chamfer. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces to receive countertops; remove loose and foreign matter that could interfere with adhesion. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0661 40 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS AND FABRICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install countertops in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved Shop Drawings. B. Adhere countertops to supports with continuous beads of adhesive. C. Set plumb and level. Align adjacent pieces in same plane. D. Install with hairline joints. E. Fill joints between countertops and adjacent construction with joint sealer; finish smooth and flush. 3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Maximum variation from level and plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet, non-cumulative. B. Maximum variation in plane between adjacent pieces at joint: Plus or minus 1/16 inch. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean countertops in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed countertops with non-staining sheet coverings. END OF SECTION 06 6140 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0661 40 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 QUARTZ COUNTERTOPS AND FABRICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 07 11 13 - BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Cold-applied, emulsified-asphalt dampproofing. a. At masonry backup for veneer masonry cavity walls. b. At grade beams below grade,with drainage course to french drain. c. At retaining walls,with free draining aggregate and french drain. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 04 Section- Unit Masonry Assemblies. 2. Division 07 Section Self Adhering Sheet Waterproofing, for waterproofing system at building grade beams and walls below grade. 3. Division 07 Sections for other waterproofing, air barrier, and weather barrier systems. 4. Division 07 Section- Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 5. Division 31 and 33 Sections for filter fabric, free draining aggregate and french drains. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with application only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit dampproofing to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions. B. Ventilation: Provide adequate ventilation during application of dampproofing in enclosed spaces. Maintain ventilation until dampproofing has cured. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Source Limitations: Obtain primary dampproofing materials and primers from single source from single manufacturer. Provide protection course molded-sheet drainage panels and auxiliary materials recommended in writing by manufacturer of primary materials. B. VOC Content: Products shall comply with VOC content limits of authorities having jurisdiction unless otherwise required. 2.02 COLD-APPLIED,EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0711 13-1 MAY 2, 2023 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. BASF Construction Chemicals- Building Systems; Sonneborn Brand Products. 2. ChemMasters, Inc. 3. Euclid Chemical Company(The); an RPM company. 4. Henry Company. 5. Karnak Corporation. 6. Koppers Inc. 7. Malarkey Roofing Products. 8. Meadows,W. R.,Inc. B. Basis of Design shall be a heavy bodied, non-sag coating with short fibers for application with Fibered Brush, Roller or Spray, in compliance with ASTM D-1227, Type 11, Class 1, equal to BASF's "MasterSeal 615". 2.03 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended in writing by dampproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with bituminous dampproofing. B. Emulsified-Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 1227, Type 111, Class 1, except diluted with water as recommended in writing by manufacturer. C. Asphalt-Coated Glass Fabric: ASTM D 1668, Type 1. D. Patching Compound: Asbestos-free fibered mastic of type recommended in writing by dampproofing manufacturer. E. Protection Course at grade beams below grade: ASTM D 6506, 1/8-inch- thick, semirigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral-reinforced-asphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt-saturated fibrous liners. F. Protection Course at retaining walls: Smooth-surfaced roll roofing complying with ASTM D 6380, Class S, Type 111. 2.04 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS A. Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Comply with Division 33 Section- Subdrainage. B. Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Composite subsurface drainage panel consisting of a 40% post-industrial recycled polypropylene drainage core of fused, entangled filaments, with a geocomposite fabric facing bonded to one side with an opening size not exceeding No. 70 sieve, and a vertical flow rate of 9 to 22 gpm per ft. Provide termination bar and sheet metal flashing cap for panels installed with top edge above grade. The Basis of Design product shall be "Enkadrain 3611R", as manufactured by Colband Inc., Enka, NC (800) 365-7391. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for surface smoothness, surface moisture, and other conditions affecting performance of bituminous dampproofing work. B. Proceed with application only after substrate construction and penetrating work have been completed and unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Mask or otherwise protect adjoining exposed surfaces from being stained, spotted, or coated with dampproofing. Prevent dampproofing materials from entering and clogging weep holes and drains. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 07 11 13-2 MAY 2, 2023 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to the dampproofing work; fill voids, seal joints, and remove bond breakers if any, as recommended in writing by prime material manufacturer. C. Apply patching compound to patch and fill tie holes, honeycombs, reveals, and other imperfections. 3.03 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for dampproofing application, cure time between coats, and drying time before backfilling unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Apply dampproofing to provide continuous plane of protection. 2. Apply additional coats if recommended in writing by manufacturer or to achieve a smooth surface and uninterrupted coverage. B. Where dampproofing footings and foundation walls, apply from finished-grade line to bottom of grade beam 1. At footings, extend over top of footing and down a minimum of 6 inches over outside face of footing. 2. Extend dampproofing 12 inches onto intersecting walls and footings, but do not extend onto surfaces exposed to view when Project is completed. 3. Install flashings and corner protection stripping at internal and external corners, changes in plane, construction joints, cracks, and where shown as "reinforced," by embedding an 8-inch- wide strip of asphalt-coated glass fabric in a heavy coat of dampproofing. Dampproofing coat for embedding fabric is in addition to other coats required. C. Where dampproofing exterior face of inner wythe of exterior masonry cavity walls, lap dampproofing at least 1 inch onto flashing, and 1/4 inch onto masonry reinforcement, veneer ties, and other items that penetrate inner wythe. 1. Extend dampproofing over outer face of structural members and concrete slabs that interrupt inner wythe. 2. Lap dampproofing at least 1/2 inch onto shelf angles supporting veneer. 3. At metal flashings installed with termination bar to exterior face of masonry, strip in bituminous felts. Lap felts at least 2" over metal flashing and continuously seal top of felt strip to masonry with dampproofing. D. Where dampproofing of cavity walls adjoins other dampproofing or air barrier or weather barrier materials, coordinate with adjacent material installer to provide continuous weatherproofing barrier and to avoid incompatible materials coming in contact with each other. Take care not to apply or spill dampproofing on surfaces to receive incompatible weatherization membranes. 3.04 COLD-APPLIED,EMULSIFIED-ASPHALT DAMPPROOFING A. Concrete Foundations: Apply one fibered brush or spray coat at not less than 3 gal./100 sq. ft. or one trowel coat at not less than 4 gal./100 sq. ft. B. Unexposed Face of Masonry Retaining Walls: Apply primer as recommended by manufacturer for substrates indicated, and one brush or spray coat at not less than 1.25 gal./100 sq. ft. C. Concrete and Masonry Backup for Veneer Assemblies: Apply primer as recommended by manufacturer for substrates indicated, and one brush or spray coat at not less than 1 gal./100 sq. ft. 3.05 INSTALLATION OF PROTECTION COURSE FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0711 13-3 MAY 2, 2023 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Where indicated, install protection course over completed-and-cured dampproofing. Comply with dampproofing-material and protection-course manufacturers' written instructions for attaching protection course. 1. Install protection course within 24 hours of installation of dampproofing (while coating is tacky)to ensure adhesion. 3.06 INSTALLATION OF MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesives or other methods that do not penetrate dampproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction. 1. Install protection course before installing drainage panels. B. Where indicated to extend above grade, install top edge of drainage panel with mechanically attached termination bar and prefinished sheet metal flashing cap. 3.07 CLEANING A. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended in writing by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07 11 13 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0711 13-4 MAY 2, 2023 BITUMINOUS DAMPPROOFING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 07 13 26 - SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Modified bituminous sheet waterproofing. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 07 Sections for coordination with other waterproofing, air barrier, and weather barrier systems. 2. Division 07 Section- Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 3. Division 07 Section - Expansion Control for expansion-joint assemblies that interface with self adhering sheet waterproofing. 4. Division 31 and 33 Sections for filter fabric, free draining aggregate and french drains. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing. 2. Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing and details of substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by waterproofing manufacturer. B. Pre-Construction Mockups: Build free standing pre-construction mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, demonstrate understanding of the complete wall construction, demonstrate typical construction and waterproofing details, demonstrate aesthetic effects, and to set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockups as shown on drawings, including face and backup wythes, fenestrations, flashings and accessories.. Comply with requirements in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements" for mockups. a. Prior to product installation a field-constructed mock-up shall be provided under the provisions of Division 1 Section - Submittals, Product Data, Samples and Mock-ups, to verify details & tie-ins, and to demonstrate the required quality of materials and installation. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 07 1326-1 MAY 2, 2023 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 b. Construct a typical exterior wall section, incorporating back-up wall, cladding, window and sill, insulation, flashing and any other critical junctions (roof, foundation, etc.) as detailed in Drawings.. c. Locate mockups as directed by Architect. d. Build mockups as indicated in Drawings. 1) Show typical components, attachments to building structure, and methods of installation. e. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting installation. f. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. g. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 2. Demolish and remove mockups when directed. C. Building Sample: Build construction sample to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to set quality standards for installation. I. Build for each typical waterproofing installation including accessories to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, corner treatment, and protection. a. Size: 100 sq. ft. in area. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate. 1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow,rain,fog, or mist. B. Maintain adequate ventilation during preparation and application of waterproofing materials. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Source Limitations for Waterproofing System: Obtain waterproofing materials, protection course, and molded-sheet drainage panels from single source from single manufacturer. 2.02 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING A. Modified Bituminous Sheet: Minimum 60-mil nominal thickness, self-adhering sheet consisting of 56 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated on one side to a 4-mil- thick, polyethylene-film reinforcement, and with release liner on adhesive side. I. Products: Basis of Design product is "Bituthene 4000", as manufactured by W. R. Grace, Cambridge, MA (800) 444-6459. Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW MiraDRl 860/861. b. CETCO Building Materials Group, a subsidiary of AMCOL International Corp.; Envirosheet. c. Henry Company; Blueskin WP 100/200. d. Meadows,W. R.,Inc.; SealTight Mel-Rol. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 07 1326-2 MAY 2, 2023 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 e. Polyguard Products,Inc.; Polyguard 650. f. Protecto Wrap Company;PW 100/60. g. Tamko Building Products, Inc.; TW-60. 2. Physical Properties: a. Tensile Strength, Membrane: 250 psi minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C,modified. b. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C,modified. c. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F; ASTM D 1970. d. Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 1/8-inch movement; ASTM C 836. e. Puncture Resistance: 40 lbf minimum; ASTM E 154. f. Water Absorption: 0.2 percent weight-gain maximum after 48-hour immersion at 70 deg F; ASTM D 570. g. Water Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perms maximum; ASTM E 96/E 96M, Water Method. h. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 200 feet minimum; ASTM D 5385. 3. Sheet Strips: Self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt strips of same material and thickness as sheet waterproofing. 2.03 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing. 1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Asphalt-Coated Glass Fabric: ASTM D 1668, Type 1. 1. Primer: Liquid primer recommended for substrate by sheet-waterproofing material manufacturer,promoting adhesion of Bituthene membrane, equal to Bituthene Primer B2. C. Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two-component liquid, cold fluid applied, of trowel grade or low viscosity. D. Substrate Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity, two-component,modified asphalt coating. E. 4"PVC pipe(perforated). F. Filter fabric. G. Termination Bar: Provide flat extended 1" aluminum termination bar, with Rubber grominetted fasteners, at 8" o.c. to terminate top of waterproofing membrane. Equal to Tru- Fast TB-90. 2.04 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS A. Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Comply with Division 33 Section- Subdrainage. B. Nonwoven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Composite subsurface drainage panel consisting of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core; with a nonwoven, needle-punched geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 70 sieve laminated to one side of the core and a polymeric film bonded to the other side; and with a vertical flow rate of 9 to 15 gpm per ft., equal to Grace Construction Hydroduct 220. Provide termination bars and sheet metal flashing cap for panels installed with top edge above grade. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the waterproofing. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 07 1326-3 MAY 2, 2023 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer. 2. Verify that substrate is visibly dry and within the moisture limits recommended in writing by manufacturer. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean,prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application. B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction. C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete. D. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids. E. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258, 1. Install sheet strips of width according to manufacturer's written instructions and center over treated construction and contraction joints and cracks exceeding a width of 1/16 inch. F. Bridge and cover isolation joints and expansion joints with overlapping sheet strips of widths according to manufacturer's written instructions. G. Corners: Prepare,prime, and treat inside and outside corners according to ASTM D 6135. 1. Install membrane strips centered over vertical inside corners. Install 3/4-inch fillets of liquid membrane on horizontal inside corners and as follows: a. At footing-to-wall intersections, extend liquid membrane in each direction from corner or install membrane strip centered over corner. H. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to ASTM D 6135. 3.03 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET-WATERPROOFING APPLICATION A. Install modified bituminous sheets according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in ASTM D 6135. B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. C. Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch-minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams, and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation. 1. When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg F, install self- adhering, modified bituminous sheets produced for low-temperature application. Do not use low-temperature sheets if ambient or substrate temperature is higher than 60 deg F. 2. Extend sheet at least 4" above grade,minimum. D. Apply continuous sheets over already-installed sheet strips, bridging substrate cracks, construction, and contraction joints. E. Seal edges of sheet-waterproofing terminations with mastic. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 07 1326-4 MAY 2, 2023 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 F. Install sheet-waterproofing and auxiliary materials to tie into adjacent waterproofing, air barrier, and weather barrier systems. Install over perforated drain pipe at base of beam or wall. Coordinate with other systems to ensure continuous weather proof barrier with no incompatible materials in contact with each other. G. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in all directions. 3.04 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE-PANEL INSTALLATION A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels the same day as installing sheet waterproofing membrane, with geotextile facing away from wall or deck substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesives or other methods that do not penetrate waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction. B. Where indicated to extend above grade, install top edge of drainage panel with mechanically attached termination bar and prefinished sheet metal flashing cap, in colors as selected by Architect to match adjacent wall finishes. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Engage a site representative qualified by waterproofing membrane manufacturer to inspect substrate conditions, surface preparation, membrane application, flashings, protection, and drainage components, and to furnish daily reports to Architect. 3.06 PROTECTION,REPAIR,AND CLEANING A. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates,reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings. C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction. END OF SECTION 07 13 26 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 07 1326-5 MAY 2, 2023 SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 07 21 00 - THERMAL INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide all building insulation as shown on the drawings and as herein specified. B. Med Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 04 Section—Masonry sections, for coordination in marking centerlines of studs on the face of exterior continuous insulation for subsequent installation of ties and anchors. 2. Division 04 Section- Unit Masonry Assemblies,for foamed insulation in CMU cells. 3. Division 05 Section-Architectural Metal Decking. 4. Division 05 Section - Cold Formed Metal Framing, for coordination with framing for packing cavities with Batt insulation and for installation of thermal envelope continuous insulation. 5. Division 06 Section- Sheathing. 6. Division 07 Section- Sprayed Foam Thermal Insulation. 7. Division 07 Section-Air Barriers. 8. Division 07 Section-Fire Safing, for mineral fiber insulation used for fire containment or for fire rated construction. 9. Division 09 Section- Gypsum Board Assemblies. 10. Division 09 Section-Acoustic Insulation. 11. Division 21 and 23 Sections, for piping and mechanical ductwork insulation. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design Criteria: 1. Thermal Resistance: R-Value designations indicated in accordance with ASTM C-518 is the thermal resistance of the insulation only. 2. Fire Resistance: Material shall have a Class B fire rating less than 75 as tested by ASTM E-84. B. Paper faced batt insulation shall not be used. Foil-faced insulation shall not be used except as specifically prescribed herein. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original packages, clearly marked with brand name, type and R-Value. B. Store materials in area protected from weather, moisture and damage, remove any damaged materials from the site. 1.05 SUBMITTALS FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0721 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 THERMAL INSULATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Samples of materials and complete product literature (with documented R-Values) submitted for approval to the Architect prior to ordering materials. B. Provide Dew Point Analysis to confirm insulation thickness and location of weather barrier for particular building site(inside or outside face of insulation). PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, Manufacturer's offering Products which may be incorporated into the work include the following: 1. CertainTeed Corporation, Valley Forge,PA. (215) 341-7000. 2. Owens-Corning Fiberglass Corporation, Toledo, OH. (419) 248-8000. 3. Schuller International, Insulation Division, Denver, CO. (800) 654-3103. 4. Johns Manville, Denver, CO. 5. Knauf Insulation, Shelbyville,IN. 6. Dow Chemical Company,Midland,MI. 7. ROXUL, Inc.,Milton, Ontario B. Division 01 Section - Product Requirements: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions: Permitted. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Glass Fiber Batt Insulation: Unfaced with flame spread of 25 minutes in compliance with ASTM C665, Type 1, Class A and ASTM 136. 1. Provide at 6" stud construction in exterior walls and between conditioned and unconditioned spaces, unless otherwise noted: Nominal 6-1/4" thick batt insulation with an R-value of 19. 2. Provide at 3-5/8" stud construction in exterior walls and between conditioned and unconditioned spaces, unless otherwise noted: Nominal 3-1/2" thick batt insulation with an R-value of 13. B. Continuous Insulation at exterior cavity wall Construction, and between Apparatus Bay and conditioned spaces: Semi-rigid mineral wool insulation board that is water repellent and meets ASTM C612,IVA. Thermafiber RainBarrier 45 Insulation, or approved equal. 1. R-Value: 4.3 per inch of thickness. Thickness(es) as noted on Drawings. 2. Facing: Unfaced. 3. Density: 4.5 pounds per cubic foot. 4. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame Spread 0, Smoke Developed 0. 5. Moisture Resistance: Absorbs less than 0.03% by volume, ASTM C 1104. 6. Non-Corrosive,ASTM C 665. C. Continuous Insulation at exterior cavity at dry joint rain screen exterior finishes: High density, semi-rigid mineral wool insulation board that is water repellent and meets ASTM C612, IVA. Thermafiber RainBarrier HD Insulation, or approved equal. 1. R-Value: 4.3 per inch of thickness. Thickness(es) as noted on Drawings. 2. Facing: Unfaced. 3. Density: 6.0 pounds per cubic foot. 4. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame Spread 0, Smoke Developed 0. 5. Moisture Resistance: Absorbs less than 0.03%by volume, ASTM C 1104. 6. Non-Corrosive,ASTM C 665. 7. Color: Standard. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0721 00 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 THERMAL INSULATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 D. Insulation at underside of mezzanine floor deck between conditioned and unconditioned or tempered spaces: Semi-rigid mineral wool insulation board that is water repellent C612, Type IA, IB, ll, Ill, IVA. Thermafiber "VersaBoard 40", or approved equal and meets ASTM 1. Thickness: 3". 2. R-Value: 12.9. 3. Facing: Matte white. E. Batt Insulation above Ceilings where noted: Nominal 3-1/2" thick batt insulation with an R- Value of 13, unfaced. Material equivalent to U.S. Gypsum M-S Blankets. Insulation shall comply with ASTM C 665-84, Type II, Class C. 2.03 AUXILIARY INSULATING MATERIALS A. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates indicated without damaging insulation and substrates. Adhesive shall be compatible with air barrier membrane. B. Provide insulation fasteners as recommended by manufacturer for substrates and conditions indicated. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND COORDINATION A. Examine areas receiving insulation work to insure work of preceding trades is completed. Check surfaces to see that they are uniform in place, free from mortar droppings, grease, oil or other debris which would affect proper insulation. Application constitutes acceptance of substrate conditions. B. Coordinate marking centerline of studs on exterior face of continuous insulation as required for insulation installation and for subsequent fastener installation by other trades. 3.02 GENERAL INSTALLATION A. Prepare surfaces using methods recommended by manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time to ice,rain, and snow. C. Insulation installed in accordance with current printed recommendations of insulation manufacturer as specified. D. Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located within insulated exterior walls, coordinate location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping. E. Install batt insulation without visible voids, gaps or separations. Place insulation in Cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. Cut and trim insulation neatly to fit spaces without laps,bulges or folds. Use batts free of rips and tears. 1. Coordinate with light gauge metal stud installer to pack batt insulation in light gauge metal construction as it is being constructed,that will be inaccessible to install batts when completed(headers, stud packs, etc). Use mineral batts where insulation may get wet or be exposed to weather prior to closing the building envelope. F. Fit insulation tight within spaces and tight to and behind mechanical and electrical wiring. G. Mineral Fiber Semi-Rigid Board Continuous Insulation: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0721 00 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 THERMAL INSULATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Continuous insulation at exterior walls shall be adhered or attached in place per manufacturer's recommendations for the substrates and conditions indicated. Use of friction fit only between furring channels is not an acceptable installation. a. Construction adhesive must be recommended by its manufacturer for use with the continuous insulation board and compatible with air barrier membrane or dampproofing mastic with which it will come in contact. b. Mechanical fasteners installation shall be coordinated with air barrier manufacturer's requirements for fastener penetrations through the air barrier, as applicable. 2. Fit courses of insulation with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press units firmly against substrates indicated. 3. Press units firmly against sheathing, or other substrates. Stagger joints. Make insulation continuous.Fill all voids. 4. Coordinate placement of insulation with location of masonry veneer anchors, metal Zee furring, and similar construction. 5. Cut and fit insulation tight to protrusions or interruptions to insulation plane. H. Extruded Polystyrene(XPS) Continuous Insulation: 1. Cavity insulation board at exterior walls shall be adhered to exterior surface of concrete with continuous application of recommended mastic at locations indicated on drawings. 2. Cavity insulation board at exterior walls shall be adhered to exterior surface of exterior gypsum sheathing as follows: a. Place construction adhesive pads spaced approximately 24 inches o.c. both ways on inside face of insulation board, or as recommended by the adhesive manufacturer. Construction adhesive must be recommended by its manufacturer for use with polystyrene rigid board insulation and compatible with air barrier membrane. 3. Fit courses of insulation between with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press units firmly against substrates indicated. 4. Install boards horizontally. 5. Press units firmly against exterior sheathing, concrete block back-up or concrete wall surfaces. Stagger joints. Make insulation continuous. Fill all voids. 6. Provide joint tape at all butt joints. 7. Coordinate placement of insulation with location of masonry veneer anchors. 8. Cut and fit insulation tight to protrusions or interruptions to insulation plane. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION A. Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's written instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanical anchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units. B. Install batt insulation in cavities formed by framing members according to the following requirements: 1. Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one length is required to fill cavity,provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends. 2. Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of insulation and adjoining framing members. 3. For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs. 4. Fill roof expansion joints with batt insulation to equal or greater R-value of insulation at roof surface. C. Install board insulation on concrete substrates by adhesively attached, spindle-type insulation anchors as follows: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0721 00 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 THERMAL INSULATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Fasten insulation anchors to concrete substrates with insulation anchor adhesive according to anchor manufacturer's written instructions. Space anchors according to insulation manufacturer's written instructions for insulation type, thickness, and application indicated. 2. Apply insulation standoffs to each spindle to create cavity width indicated between concrete substrate and insulation. 3. After adhesive has dried, install board insulation by pressing insulation into position over spindles and securing it tightly in place with insulation-retaining washers, taking care not to compress insulation below indicated thickness. 4. Where insulation will not be covered by other building materials, apply capped washers to tips of spindles. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Comply with requirements of Authorities having jurisdiction for inspection of installation of insulation, and with requirements of commissioning agent. Notify respective parties and schedule required inspections prior to closing walls or cavities containing thermal insulation. 3.05 CLEANING A. Comply with requirements of Division 01, Section "Construction Waste Management". END OF SECTION 07 2100 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0721 00 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 THERMAL INSULATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 07 26 00 - VAPOR BARRIER MEMBRANE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section includes: 1. Vapor barrier film beneath slabs on grade and slabs on void forms. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 03 Section- Cast-in-Place Concrete. 2. Division 31 Section-Earthwork. 1.03 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation with scheduled concrete pours to avoid delays. Make provision for installation of work by other trades. 1.04 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM E 1745-17 Standard Specification for Plastic Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. 2. ASTM E 154- 08 Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth Under Concrete Slabs, on Walls, or as Ground Cover. 3. ASTM F 1249-06 (2011) Standard Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission Rate Through Plastic Film and Sheeting Using a Modulated Infrared Sensor. 4. ASTM D 882-10 Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting. 5. ASTM D 1709-09 Standard Test Methods for Impact Resistance of Plastic Film by the Free-Falling Dart Method. 6. ASTM E 1643-18a Selection, Design, Installation, and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. B. American Concrete Institute(ACI): 1. ACI 302.2R-06 Guide for Concrete Slabs that Receive Moisture-Sensitive Flooring Materials. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 Section- Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. B. Quality Control/Assurance: 1. Summary of test results as per paragraph 8.3 of ASTM E 1745. 2. Manufacturer's literature. 3. Manufacturer's installation instructions for placement, seaming and penetration repair. C. Provide 12" x 12" samples of vapor barrier material and samples of tape for joints. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 07 26 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 VAPOR BARRIER MEMBRANE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, manufacturer's offering Products which may be incorporated in the Work include the following: 1. Basis of Design: Stego Industries LLC (281) 367-0040 www.stegoindustries.com. B. Division 01 Section - Product Requirements: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions: Not Permitted 2.02 MATERIALS A. Membrane Film: 1. Qualities: a. Maintain a permeance of less than 0.01 Perms [grains/(ft' • hr • inHg)], as tested in accordance ASTM E-154, with mandatory conditioning tests, per ASTM E1745 Section 7.1 (7.1.1-7.1.5). b. Strength: ASTM E 1745 Class A. c. Thickness: 15mils minimum, in accordance with ACI 302.2R-06. d. Provide third party documentation that all testing was performed on a single production roll per ASTM E1745 Section 8.1. 2. Available products: a. Basis of Design: Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier(15 mil)by Stego Industries. 3. At crawl space application, use manufacturer's minimum 15 mil thickness crawl space rated product. B. Accessories: 1. Seams Tape: Stego Tape by Stego Industries LLC, or membrane manufacturer's standard tape for applications indicated. 2. Penetration Repair: Stego Mastic and Stego Tape by Stego Industries LLC, or membrane manufacturer's standard product for applications indicated. 3. Perimeter / Edge Seal: Crete Claw, Stego Tack Tape and Stego Term Bar by Stego Industries LLC, or membrane manufacturer's standard product for applications indicated. 4. For crawl space installation, use pins, adhesives, double sided mounting tape,termination bars, and caulking as recommended by membrane manufacturer for the applications indicated. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Do not proceed until fill is level and without voids, and plumbing and electrical rough-ins are complete. 3.02 INSTALLATION -GENERAL A. Install Vapor Barrier in accordance with ASTM E 1643-11: 1. Unroll vapor barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the concrete placement and face laps away from the expected direction of the placement whenever possible. 2. Extend vapor barrier over footings and grade beams to a distance acceptable to the structural engineer or stop at impediments such as dowels and waterstops. 3. Seal vapor barrier to slab perimeter/edge using Stego Crete Claw and remove dirt, debris, and inud from Crete Claw prior to concrete placement. 4. Alternate: Seal vapor barrier to footing/grade beam with double sided tape, ternination bar, or both. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 072600 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 VAPOR BARRIER MEMBRANE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 5. Overlap joints 6 inches and seal with manufacturer's tape. 6. Apply tape/Crete Claw to a clean and dry vapor barrier. 7. Seal all penetrations (including pipes)per manufacturer's instructions. 8. No penetration of the vapor barrier is allowed except for reinforcing steel and permanent utilities. 9. Repair damaged areas by cutting patches of vapor barrier, overlapping damaged area 6 inches and taping all sides with tape. B. Vapor Barrier over void boxes: 1. Cartons for slabs shall have protective cover board with Stego 15 mil and Stego Crete- Claw Tape. 2. Stego Crete-Claw Tape Instructions: Overlap seams a minimum of 6 inches. Seal all seams in Stego Wrap using Crete-Claw Tape. 3. Install Crete-Claw Tape on the entire perimeter of the Stego Wrap Installation. 4. Install additional Crete-Claw Tape if required. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Protect completed membrane from damage. Prior to pouring concrete, inspect membrane for punctures or damage and repair as required. 1. At crawl space applications, inspect membrane for damage prior to substantial completion. Repair damaged areas per membrane manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 07 26 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 072600 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 VAPOR BARRIER MEMBRANE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 07 27 13 - MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET AIR BARRIERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. The work of this section includes, but is not limited to,the following: 1. Materials and installation methods for self-adhering, vapor-retarding, modified bituminous sheet air barriers located in the non-accessible part of the wall applied to the following surfaces: a. Exterior face of exterior sheathing of masonry veneer cavity walls in locations above adjacent roof surfaces and as shown in Drawings. b. Exterior face of exterior sheathing of exterior metal panel walls in locations above adjacent roof surfaces and as shown in Drawings. c. Flashing membranes for sealing adjacent air and weather barrier system(s), as required to provide a continuous weather-tight installation. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 04 Section - Unit Masonry" for embedded flashings and masonry ties and anchors. 2. Division 05 Section- Cold Formed Metal Framing" for exterior gypsum sheathing. 3. Division 06 Section-Rough Carpentry. 4. Division 06 Section- Sheathing. 5. Division 07 Section-Metal Wall Panels. 6. Division 07 Section-Metal Plate Wall Panels. 7. Division 07 Section-Building Insulation for foam-plastic board insulation. 8. Division 07 Section-Flashing and Sheet Metal for sheet metal flashings. 9. Division 07 Section-Joint Sealants for joint-sealant materials and installation. 10. Division 09 Section- Gypsum Board Assemblies for exterior gypsum sheathing. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. ABAA: Air Barrier Association of America. B. Air Barrier Assembly: The collection of air barrier materials and auxiliary materials applied to an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air movement through the wall. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide an air and vapor barrier system to perform as a continuous vapor-retarding air barrier, and to act as a liquid water drainage plane flashed to discharge any incidental condensation or water penetration. Air barriers shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and sealing of substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 07 27 13 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET AIR BARRIERS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Air Barrier Assembly Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.004 cfm/ft2 under a pressure differential of 0.3 in. water. (1.57 ps£) (equal to 0.02L/s/m2 @ 75 Pa.). C. Temperature: Provide "High Temperature" (HT)rated product. 1.05 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, installation instructions, use limitations and substrate preparation recommendations for each applicable substrate. B. Shop drawings showing locations and extent of air and vapor barrier system including details for terminations flashings, penetrations,window and door openings and treatment of substrate joints and cracks. 1. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of the complete building air barrier or weather barrier system. C. Written documentation demonstrating installers' qualifications under the"Quality Assurance" article including reference projects of a similar scope. D. Samples: Submit representative samples of the following for approval: 1. Self-Adhered Air Barrier Membrane 2. Self-Adhered Transition Membrane 1.06 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Written documentation demonstrating installers' qualifications under the "Quality Assurance" article including reference projects of a similar scope. B. Product Certificates: For air barriers, certifying compatibility of air barrier and accessory materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with air barrier; signed by product manufacturer. C. Warranty: Submit a sample Warranty identifying the terms and conditions. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Air and vapor barrier systems shall be manufactured and marketed by a firm with a minimum of 20 years experience in the production and sales of waterproofing and air barrier products. Manufacturers proposed for use, but not named in these specifications shall submit evidence of ability to meet all requirements specified, and include a list of projects of similar design and complexity completed within the past five years. B. Installer: The installer shall demonstrate qualifications to perform the work of this Section by submitting the following: 1. List of at least three (3)projects contracted within the past five(5)years of similar scope and complexity to this project carried out by the firm and site supervisor. 2. Installer must show evidence of adequate equipment and trained field personnel to successfully complete the project in a timely manner. C. Materials: Self-adhered air and vapor barrier material shall be 40 mil (.004 in) comprising 36 mil (.0036 in.) rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to 4 mil (.0004 in.) cross-laminated polyethylene film, rated for high temperature installation (HT). For each type of material required for the work of this section, provide primary materials that are the products of one manufacturer. D. Pre-Installation Conference: A pre-installation conference shall be held prior to commencement of field operations to establish procedures to maintain optimum working conditions and to coordinate this work with related and adjacent work. Agenda for meeting shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Review of submittals. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 072713 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET AIR BARRIERS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Review of surface preparation,minimum curing period and installation procedures. 3. Review of special details and flashings, including connection details with other air and weather barrier systems. 4. Sequence of construction,responsibilities and schedule for subsequent operations. 5. Review of mock-up requirements. 6. Review of inspection,testing,protection and repair procedures. E. Mock-up: 1. Prior to installation of the air and vapor barrier system a field-constructed mock-up shall be provided under the provisions of Division 1 Section - Submittals, Product Data, Samples and Mock-ups, to verify details & tie-ins, and to demonstrate the required quality of materials and installation. 2. Construct a typical exterior wall section, 8 feet long and 8 feet wide, incorporating back- up wall, cladding, window and doorframe and sill, insulation, flashing and any other critical junction(roof,foundation, etc). 3. Allow 24 hours for inspection and testing of mock-up before proceeding with air and vapor barrier work. 4. Approved mock-up may remain as part of the work, if it is exposed to UV rays less than 30 days. F. Inspection and Testing: Cooperate and coordinate with the Owner's inspection and testing agency. Do not cover any installed air and vapor barrier membrane until it has been inspected,tested and approved. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials and products in labeled packages. Store and handle in strict compliance with manufacturer's instructions, recommendations and material safety data sheets. Protect from damage from sunlight, weather, excessive temperatures and construction operations. Remove damaged material from the site and dispose of in accordance with applicable regulations. B. Do not double-stack pallets of membrane components. Provide cover on top and all sides, allowing for adequate ventilation. C. Protect membrane components from freezing and extreme heat. D. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays,but minimize on-site storage. 1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by air barrier manufacturer. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect performance of air barrier. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist. Barrier must be covered with exterior material within 30 days of installation or be replaced. B. Coordinate air barrier installation to avoid excessive exposure to ultraviolet rays and other damage. Barrier must be covered with exterior material or protected in accordance with Manufacturer's requirements within Manufacturer's exposure time limitations or be replaced. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 SELF-ADHERED AIR BARRIER MEMBRANE A. Description: Min. 1 mm (.040 in) thick membrane comprised of 0.9 mm (0.036 in) of self- adhesive rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to 0.1 mm (.004 in) of cross-laminated, high- density polyethylene film. Membrane shall be interleaved with disposable silicone-coated release paper until installed. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 072713 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET AIR BARRIERS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Minimum Performance Requirements: Property Test Method Typical Value Thickness ASTM D 3767 Method A 1.0 mm 0.040 in. nominal Air Permeance at 75Pa (0.3 in.water) ASTM E 2178 <0.001 L/(s.m2) Differential Pressure <0.0002 CfM/ft'-) Assembly Air Permeance at 75Pa(0.3 ASTM E 2357 <0.004 L/s*m2 in.water)Differential Pressure <0.0008 CfM/ft2) Water Vapor Permeance ASTM E 96,Method B Less than 2.9 ng/Pa.s.m' (0.05 Perms) Water Absorption: - ASTM D 570 Max. 0.1%by weight Puncture Resistance ASTM E 154 178 N(40 lbs.) Tear Resistance Initiation-ASTM D 1004 Min. 58 N(7.0 lbs.)M.D. Propagation Min. 40 N(4.0 lbs.)M.D. -ASTM D1938 Lap Adhesion at-4°C(25°F) ASTM D 1876 880 N/m(5.0 lbs./in.)of width Low Temperature Flexibility ASTM D 1970 Unaffected to-43°C (-45°F) Tensile Strength ASTM D 412,Die C Min. 2.7 MPa(400 psi) Modified Elongation,Ultimate Failure of ASTM D 412-Die C Min. 200% Rubberized Asphalt C. Air barrier applied to wall at veneer cavity walls behind metal panels and at all walls above adjacent lower roofs: Basis of Design Product: Grace Construction Products: Perm-A- Barrier'High Temperature (HT) Wall Membrane. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named product, or approved equal system by another manufacturer. 1. For In-Service Temperatures up to at least 180 degree F,including accessories. D. Air barrier applied behind Dark Colored metal wall panel, and similar materials prone to reach high temperatures due to solar heat gain: Basis of Design Product: Grace Construction Products: Ice and Water Shield High Temperature (HT). Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the named product, or approved equal system by another manufacturer. 1. For In-Service Temperatures up to at least 240 degree F,including accessories. E. Substitutions: Permitted, with proof of equal performance characteristics. Submit comparison data for basis of design and proposed alternate products, and manufacturer's certification of equal performance characteristics. 2.02 TRANSITION MEMBRANE A. Description: Min. 1 mm(.040 in/40 mil)thick membrane comprised of 0.9 mm(0.036 in) of self-adhesive rubberized asphalt integrally bonded to 0.1 mm (.004 in) of cross-laminated, high-density polyethylene film. Membrane shall be interleaved with disposable silicone- coated release paper until installed. B. Performance Requirements: 1. Water Vapor Transmission: ASTM E 96,Method B: 2.9 ng/m2sPa(0.05 perms)max. 2. Air Permeance at 75Pa (0.3 in. water) pressure difference: 0.0006 L/(s.m') (0.00012 efm/ft2)max. 3. Puncture Resistance: ASTM E 154: 178 N (40 lbs.)min. 4. Lap Adhesion at-4°C (25°F),ASTM D 1876: 880 N/m(5.0 lbs./in.) of width min. 5. Low Temperature Flexibility,ASTM D 1970: Unaffected to -43°C (45°17). 6. Tensile Strength,ASTM D 412, Die C Modified: min. 2.7 MPa(400 psi) 7. Elongation, Ultimate Failure of Rubberized Asphalt,ASTM D 412 Die C: min. 200% FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 072713 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET AIR BARRIERS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Materials: 1. Perm-A-Barrier High Temperature Detail Membrane manufactured by Grace Construction Products, or approved equal by other approved air barrier manufacturer. a. In-Service Temperature Range: Meet or exceed the requirements for self-adhered membrane. 2.03 AIR&VAPOR BARRIER ACCESSORIES A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by air barrier manufacturer for intended use and compatible with air barrier membrane. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Termination Bar: Air barrier manufacturer's recommended termination bar for applications indicated. C. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Air barrier manufacturer's glass-fiber-mesh tape. D. Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Sealant: 1- or 2-component, foamed-in-place,polyurethane foam sealant, 1.5 to 2.0 lb/cu. ft density; flame spread index of 25 or less according to ASTM E 162; with primer and noncorrosive substrate cleaner recommended by foam sealant manufacturer. E. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, single-component, neutral-curing silicone; Class 100/50 (low- modulus), Grade NS, Use NT related to exposure, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, Use O. Comply with Division 07 Section-Joint Sealants. F. Primer: Water-based primer which imparts an aggressive, high tack finish on the treated substrate I. Flash Point: No flash to boiling point 2. Solvent Type: Water 3. VOC Content: Not to exceed 10 g/l 4. Application Temperature: -4°C (25°F) and above 5. Freezing point (as packaged): -7°C (21°F) 6. Product: Perm-A-Barrier WB Primer manufactured by Grace Construction Products, or equal by other approved air barrier manufacturer. G. Sealant: Two-part, elastomeric, trowel grade material designed for use with self-adhered membranes and tapes. 10 g/l max. VOC Content. 1. Product: Bituthene12 Liquid Membrane manufactured by Grace Construction Products, or equal by other approved air barrier manufacturer. H. Optional Primers: 1. Description: High tack water based primer. 10 g/1 max. VOC content. a. Product: Perm-A-Barrier Liquid Part B manufactured by Grace Construction Products, or equal by other approved air barrier manufacturer. 2. Description: High tack low VOC solvent based primer. <200 g/1 max. VOC content. a. Product: Bituthene Primer B2 LVC manufactured by Grace Construction Products, or equal by other approved air barrier manufacturer. 3. Description: High tack solvent based primer. 440 g/1 max. VOC content. a. Product: Bituthene Primer B2 manufactured by Grace Construction Products, or equal by other approved air barrier manufacturer. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 072713 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET AIR BARRIERS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other contaminants. 2. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for air barrier application. B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction. C. Prepare, fill,prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258. 1. Fill and treat joints according to membrane manufacturer's recommendations for each substrate indicated, and per manufacturer's recommendations to prevent excessive outward building pressures from being exerted on the membrane. 2. Install modified bituminous strips and center over treated construction and contraction joints and cracks exceeding a width of 1/16 inch. 3. Prime substrates according to membrane manufacturer's requirements for each substrate material indicated. D. Bridge and cover isolation joints, expansion joints, and discontinuous deck-to-wall and deck- to-deck joints with overlapping modified bituminous strips. E. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another. F. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to another with stainless-steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous support for air barrier. G. Exterior sheathing panels: Ensure that the boards are sufficiently stabilized with corners and edges fastened with appropriate screws in accordance with exterior sheathing manufacturer's written instructions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Refer to membrane manufacturer's literature for recommendations on installation B. Apply air barrier membrane to achieve a continuous air barrier according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions. C. Application of Self-Adhered Air Barrier Membrane 1. Install air & vapor barrier to dry surfaces at air and surface temperatures of 407 and above in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, at locations indicated on Construction Documents. 2. Prime substrate to receive air barrier membrane as required per manufacturers written instructions. 3. Precut pieces of air& vapor barrier into easily handled lengths. 4. Remove silicone-coated release paper and position membrane carefully before placing length horizontally against the surface. 5. Begin installation at the base of the wall placing top edge of membrane immediately below any masonry reinforcement or ties protruding from substrate. 6. When properly positioned, place against surface by pressing firmly into place. Roll membrane with extension-handled countertop roller immediately after placement. 7. Overlap horizontally adjacent pieces 50 min(2 in.) and roll seams. 8. Subsequent sheets of membrane applied above shall be positioned immediately below masonry reinforcement or ties. Bottom edge shall be slit to fit around reinforcing wires or FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 072713 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET AIR BARRIERS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 ties, and membrane shall overlap the membrane sheet below by 50 mm (2 in.). Roll firmly into place. 9. Seal around masonry reinforcing or ties and all penetrations with termination mastic. 10. Continue the membrane into all openings in the wall, such as doors, windows, etc., and terminate at points that will prevent visibility from interior. 11. Coordinate the installation of air & vapor barrier with roof installer to ensure continuity of membrane with rooftop air&vapor membrane. 12. At end of each working day seal top edge of air & vapor barrier to substrate with termination mastic. 13. Do not allow the rubberized asphalt surface of the air& vapor barrier membrane to come in contact with polysulfide sealants, creosote,uncured coal tar products or EPDM. 14. Do not expose air&vapor barrier membrane to sunlight for more than thirty days prior to enclosure. 15. Inspect installation prior to enclosing and repair punctures, damaged areas and inadequately lapped seams with a patch of the membrane sized to extend 150 mm (6 in.) in all directions from the perimeter of the affected area. D. Application of Transition Membrane 1. Prime substrate to receive transition membrane as required per manufacturers written instructions. 2. Apply transition membrane with a minimum overlap of 751mm(3 in.) onto each surface at all beams, columns and joints as indicated in detail drawings. 3. Tie in to window and door frames, spandrel panels, roof and floor intersections and changes in substrate. 4. Use pre-cut, easily handled lengths for each location. 5. Remove silicone-coated release paper and position membrane flashing carefully before placing it against the surface. 6. When properly positioned, place against surface by pressing firmly into place by hand roller. 7. Overlap adjacent pieces 50 mm(2 in.) and roll all seams with a hand roller. 8. Seal top edge of flashing with termination mastic. 9. When transition flashing is pre-installed prior to application of Fluid Applied Membrane, apply transition flashing as above. Spray or trowel a continuous uniform film of Fluid Membrane at min. 60 mils (1.5 mm or .060 in.) dry film thickness using multiple, overlapping passes, with a minimum overlap of 75 mm (3 in.) onto transition flashing. For sill condition, spray or trowel Fluid Membrane onto pre-installed sill flashing and onto horizontal section of sill. E. Termination Bars: Install termination bars as applicable according to manufacturer's recommendations. Install termination bars where recommended by the manufacturer, and where specifically detailed in the Drawings. 3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Remove any masking materials after installation. Clean any stains on materials that would be exposed in the completed work using procedures as recommended by the manufacturer of affected construction. B. Protect the air barrier from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. Repair damage according to manufacturer's instructions. C. Wall Membranes are not suitable for permanent exposure and should be protected from the effects of sunlight. Maximum sun exposure is limited to 30 days. Schedule work to ensure that the Wall Membrane system is covered as soon as possible after installation. Protect the Wall Membrane system from damage during subsequent operations. if the Wall Membrane FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 072713 - 7 MAY 2, 2023 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET AIR BARRIERS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 system cannot be covered within 30 days after installation, apply temporary W protection such as dark plastic sheet or tarpaulins. END OF SECTION 07 27 13 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 072713 - 8 MAY 2, 2023 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET AIR BARRIERS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 07 27 19 - PLASTIC FILM AIR BARRIER PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Air and moisture barrier building wrap, at brick veneer cavity wall and where detailed in drawings. 2. It is the intent of these specifications that the weatherization system be continuous and sealed to adjacent weatherization systems, roof deck, and other adjacent construction, as required to prevent air leakage around joints, penetrations, and the perimeter of the air barrier system. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 04 Sections, for coordination of membrane flashing tape type to be used at masonry ties and anchors. 2. Division 05 Section-Light Gauge Metal Framing. 3. Division 07 Section-Bituminous Damp-Proofing. 4. Division 07, other "Air Barrier" or "Weather Barrier" Sections, for coordination of materials and details at junctures of different weatherization systems. 5. Division 07 Section- Self Adhering Sheet Damp-Proofing. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. ASTM E 1677, Type I air retarder; with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450 respectively,when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84. B. ASTM D882; Test method for tensile properties of thin plastic sheeting. C. Water Vapor Permeance: Not less than 350 g/sq. in in 24 hours (20 perms)per ASTM E 96. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for each type of product specified. 1. Submit manufacturer's standard product literature. B. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: 1. Certificates: Manufacturer's certificate or test data that Products meet or exceed specified requirements. 2. Qualification Documentation: Submit documentation of experience indicating compliance with specified qualification requirements. 3. Submit manufacturer's written installation instructions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 07 27 19 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 PLASTIC FILM AIR BARRIER DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified with minimum 5 years documented experience. 2. Installer: Company specializing in performing the Work of this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience. B. Source Limitations: Provide all commercial grade materials. Provide all materials from a single manufacturer, or as recommended by the air barrier manufacturer for use with their system. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original,unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label. B. Store and protect materials during construction keeping dry and away from open flame or sparks in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. 1.07 SCHEDULING AND COORDINATION A. Review requirements for sequencing of installation of weather barrier assembly with installation of windows, doors, louvers and flashings to provide a weather-tight barrier assembly. B. Schedule installation of air-barrier materials and exterior cladding within nine months of weather barrier assembly installation, or manufacturer's requirement, whichever is more stringent. C. Coordinate with other air barrier and waterproofing systems specified. Provide membrane flashing and other joint materials as required for compatible joint conditions with adjacent systems, and to provide a continuous weatherization system. D. Coordinate with decking installation to ensure foam, rubber, or other type closures as may be required by other Sections are installed where such installation is required by sequencing to be installed prior to covering with air barrier system. Where this air barrier system extends to underside of deck, it shall be sealed to deck using membrane flashing, sealant, or other material acceptable to the air barrier system manufacturer. E. Coordinate requirements for penetrations of masonry and other finish systems. At masonry ties, provide flashing membrane tape under the work of this section unless confirmed that another flashing membrane provided under Division 04 is acceptable. Refer to Division 04, Section"Unit Masonry Assemblies". PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with project requirements, manufacturers offering Products which may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to the following: 1. DuPont Tyvek Stucco Wrap, for use behind EIFS and portland-cement based plaster systems. 2. DuPont Tyvek Drain Wrap, for use behind wood or cement siding cladding systems. 3. DuPont Tyvek Commercial Wrap - D, for use with above claddings above 4 stories, for enhanced drainage behind cladding systems. 4. DuPont Tyvek Commercial Wrap, for use behind brick-veneer masonry, metal, stone, or synthetic stone veneer cladding systems. 2.02 ACCESSORIES FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 072719 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 PLASTIC FILM AIR BARRIER DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Seam Tape: Minimum 3 inch wide, pressure sensitive tape with approved adhesive, as recommended by the air-moisture barrier manufacturer for commercial applications. B. Building Wrap Fasteners: Plastic disk fastener-caps with screws, of type and spacing as approved by weather barrier manufacturer for application to substrate. No staples allowed. C. Building Wrap Sealants: Acrylic or polyurethane sealant as approved by air-barrier manufacturer for applications indicated. Refer to Division 07 Section - Sealants for compliance with exterior-grade sealants. D. Adhesives: Use only adhesives recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. E. Primers: Provide primer to assist in adhesion between substrate and flashing, as recommended by flashing manufacturer. F. Membrane Flashings: Provide self adhering membrane flashings as indicated in Part 3 of these specifications, and as recommended by air-barrier manufacturer for applicable flashing conditions, opening types, and masonry veneer ties and anchors. 1. Basis of Design Products: a. Flashing for flashing straight edges where membrane does not need to warp or turn corners: Tyvek"Straightflash". b. Flexible Flashing for all other conditions: Tyvek"Flexwrap". PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required by manufacturer, dry, free of loose materials, and ready to receive air-barrier installation. B. General Contractor shall coordinate sequencing of all flashings installation, and verify that flashings required to be installed prior to air barrier installation are installed per requirements of the contract documents. C. By beginning installation, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the Owner. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove existing air and weather barriers, flashings, carrier or protective films and similar materials that would impede adhesion from substrates indicated to receive elasticized flexible flashing tape. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation in compliance with air-barrier manufacturer's recommendations. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install weather barrier over exterior face of exterior wall substrate in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. B. Install air barrier sheets and assembly materials to form a seal with adjacent construction and to maintain a continuous air barrier. 1. Seals to adjacent materials are not acceptable to be installed using seam tape. Seam tape is for seaming the air barrier membrane to itself only. Use membrane flashing tapes, sealants or other appropriate materials according to the Air Barrier system Manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Junctures with other air barrier or weatherization systems shall be coordinated to provide a continuous weatherization system across the joint. Contractor shall confirm acceptable details for installation with both weatherization systems in each case. (In most cases, this FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 072719 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 PLASTIC FILM AIR BARRIER DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 involves installing a continuous strip of membrane flashing tape at the juncture of the two systems to provide a seal and to separate chemically incompatible materials). C. Connect and seal building sheet air barrier membrane continuously to exterior window and door openings, construction transitions and other penetrations in exterior wall openings using self-adhering flexible flashing. 1. Apply self-adhering flexible flashing so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over adjacent substrates. D. Openings and Penetrations: Provide straight and flexible flashings for openings as required to provide weather-tight barrier. Where indicated by Manufacturer's installation instructions, apply compatible sealants to seal air barrier to penetrations. All penetrations shall be sealed impervious to free flow of air. E. Install lapped components to direct water to exterior of building. 1. Install weather barrier in a horizontal manner starting at the lower portion of the wall surface with subsequent layers installed in a shingling manner to overlap lower layers. Maintain weather barrier plumb and level. F. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in air barrier. Slit and flatten all fish- mouths and blisters. Patch with air barrier sheet extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in all directions shingled in proper lapped condition to direct water to exterior cavity. G. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier membrane that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and reapply air barrier components. H. Install weather barrier prior to installation of windows and doors. I.Start weather barrier installation at a building corner, leaving 6-12 inches of weather barrier extended beyond comer to overlap. J.Sill Plate Interface: Extend lower edge of weather barrier over sill plate interface 3-6 inches. Secure to foundation with elastomeric sealant as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer. K. Window and Door Openings: Except for openings taller than the width of a roll of air barrier, generally extend weather barrier completely over openings and seam tape, prior to cutting and preparing openings to receive membrane flashing application as specified in paragraphs below. L. Overlap weather barrier according to Manufacturer's installation instructions and the following: 1. Exterior corners: minimum 12 inches. 2. Seams: minimum 6 inches. M. Weather Barrier Attachment: 1. Attach weather barrier to studs through exterior sheathing. Secure using weather barrier manufacturer recommended fasteners of type indicated, space 12 -18 inches vertically on center along stud line, and 24 inch on center,maximum horizontally. N. Apply membrane flashing to weather barrier membrane as recommended by manufacturer prior to the installation of cladding anchors. O. Seal face of wall to storefront jamb with flashing membrane. Turn to exterior and lap 3". 3.04 SEAMING A. General: Seam tape is for sealing the air barrier membrane to itself at seams, and not for sealing to adjacent materials, flashing, window and louver openings, etc. Do not use seam tape as a substitute for membrane flashing tape in any application. Use membrane flashing FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 072719 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 PLASTIC FILM AIR BARRIER DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 tape and not seam tape for repairs where so required by manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Seal seams of weather barrier with seam tape at all vertical and horizontal overlapping seams. C. Seal any tears or cuts. 3.05 OPENING PREPARATION (FOR USE WITH NON-FLANGED WINDOWS,DOOR AND LOUVER FRAMES) A. Flush cut weather barrier at edge of sheathing around full perimeter of opening. B. Cut a head flap at 45-degree angle in the weather barrier at window head to expose 8 inches of sheathing. Temporarily secure weather barrier flap away from sheathing with tape. 3.06 FLASHING(FOR USE WITH NON-FLANGED WINDOWS) A. Cut sill flashing membrane a minimum of 12 inches longer than width of sill rough opening. Apply primer as required by manufacturer. B. Cover horizontal sill by aligning sill flashing membrane edge with inside edge of sill. Adhere to rough opening across sill and up jambs a minimum of 6 inches. Secure flashing tightly into corners by working in along the sill before adhering up the jambs. C. Fan sill flashing membrane at bottom corners onto face of wall. Firmly press in place. Mechanically fasten fanned edges. D. Apply 9-inch wide strips of flashing membrane at jambs. Align flashing membrane with interior edge of jamb framing. Start flashing membrane at head of opening and lap sill flashing membrane down to the sill. I. Where there is a metal sill pan or subsill flashing, extend the jamb membrane flashing into the pan, ensuring there are no discontinuities in the membrane flashing. Where a discontinuity is unavailable, seal with an additional strip of flexible membrane flashing, or with a fluid applied flashing if approved by Manufacturer for use with their air barrier system. E. Spray-apply primer to top 6 inches of jambs and exposed sheathing. F. Install sill flashing membrane at opening head using same installation procedures used at sill. Overlap jamb flashing membrane a minimum of 2 inches. G. Coordinate flashing with window, door, and louver installation. H. On exterior, install backer-rod in joint between window door or louver frame and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant at jambs and head, leaving sill unsealed. Apply sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193. I.Position weather barrier head flap across head flashing. Adhere using flashing membrane or type as recommended by weather barrier manufacturer over the 45-degree seams. J.Tape top of window in accordance with weather barrier manufacturer's recommendations. K. Seal interior side of opening as required. L. Where jambs in cavity wall construction are detailed with stainless steel flashings, seal flashings to wall with self-adhering membrane flashings. 3.07 OPENING PREPARATION (FOR USE WITH FLANGED WINDOWS) A. Cut weather barrier in a modified "I-cut" pattern., per manufacturer's recommendations and instructions. 1. Cut weather barrier horizontally along the bottom of the header. 2. Cut weather barrier vertically 2/3 of the way down from top center of window opening. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 072719 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 PLASTIC FILM AIR BARRIER DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. Cut weather barrier diagonally from bottom of center vertical cut to the left and right corners of the opening. 4. Fold side and bottom weather barrier flaps into window opening and fasten. B. Cut a head flap at 45-degree angle in the weather barrier at window head to expose 8 inches of sheathing. Temporarily secure weather barrier flap away from sheathing with tape. 3.08 FLASHING(FOR USE WITH FLANGED WINDOWS) A. Cut sill flashing membrane a minimum of 12 inches longer than width of sill rough opening. B. Cover horizontal sill by aligning sill flashing membrane edge with inside edge of sill. Adhere to rough opening across sill and up jambs a minimum of 6 inches. Secure flashing tightly into corners by working in along the sill before adhering up the jambs. C. Fan sill flashing membrane at bottom corners onto face of wall. Firmly press in place. Mechanically fasten fanned edges. D. On exterior, apply continuous bead of sealant to wall or backside of window mounting flange across jambs and head. Do not apply sealant across sill. E. Install window according to manufacturer's instructions. F. Apply 4-inch wide strips of flashing membrane at jambs overlapping entire mounting flange. Extend jamb flashing 1-inch above top of rough opening and below bottom edge of sill flashing. G. Apply 4-inch wide strip of flashing membrane at the window head flashing overlapping the mounting flange. Head flashing membrane should extend beyond outside edges of both jamb flashings. H. Position weather barrier head flap across head flashing. Adhere using 4-inch wide flashing membrane over the 45-degree seams. 1.Tape head flap in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. J.On interior, install backer rod in joint between frame of window and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant around entire window to create air seal. Apply sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions and ASTM C 1193. 3.09 PROTECTION A. Protect air barrier system from sparks, open flames and damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as required by manufacturer. Remove and replace air barrier exposed to these conditions for more than 180 days. B. Protect air barrier from contact with solvents, coatings,mastic or sealants not approved by air barrier manufacturer C. Inspect for damage just prior to installation of exterior finish materials and promptly repair damaged conditions. END OF SECTION 07 27 19 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 072719 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 PLASTIC FILM AIR BARRIER DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 07 40 00 - METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Work includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for fabrication and installation and/or replacement of metal wall panels, aluminum battens and metal patches as shown on drawings and as herein specified. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Section- Cold Formed Metal Framing 2. Division 05 Section-Metal Fabrications 3. Division 06 Section- Sheathing 4. Division 07 Section- Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 5. Division 07 Section-Roof Specialties. 6. Division 07 Section-Roof Accessories. 7. Division 07 Section-Joint Sealers. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. References in these specifications to standards, test methods and codes, are implied to mean the latest edition of each such standard adopted. The following is an abbreviated list of associations, institutions, and societies which may be used as references throughout these specifications. 1. ASTM -American Society for Testing and Materials,Philadelphia,PA. 2. FM -Factory Mutual Engineering and Research,Norwood, MA. 3. NRCA-National Roofing Contractors Association,Rosemont,IL. 4. OSHA-Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Washington,DC. 5. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Chantilly,VA 6. UL-Underwriters Laboratories,Northbook. IL 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator and erector shall demonstrate experience of a minimum of five years of related industry experience. B. Design Criteria: Engineering panels for structural properties in accordance with the latest edition of the American Iron and Steel Institute "Cold Formed Steel Design Manual", using "effective width" concepts. C. Metal Shapes Design Criteria: Conform to latest edition of Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association(SMACNA). D. Preliminary Roofing Conference: Before starting roof construction, conduct conference at Project site. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 07 40 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Review structural loading limitations of deck and structural members during and after roofing. 2. Review flashings including all penetration details, special details, drainage, penetrations, equipment curbs, and condition of other construction that affect metal panels. 3. Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests and inspections if applicable. 4. Review temporary protection requirements for metal panel systems during and after installation. 5. Review procedures for repair of metal panels damaged after installation. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. General: Provide metal roof panel system meeting performance requirements as determined by application of specified tests by a qualified testing facility on manufacturer's standard assemblies. B. Testing Requirements: The roof system shall be tested in compliance with local code requirements and as follows: 1. Wind Resistance: The system shall be tested to comply with FM4474. Through-fastened roof panel systems tested in compliance with UL 580 or UL 1897. Standing seam attached systems tested in compliance with UL 580 or ASTM E 1592. 2. Physical Weathering Properties: The system shall be tested to demonstrate physical integrity over the working life of the roof based upon 2,000 hours of exposure to accelerated weathering tests conducted in accordance with ASTM G152,ASTM G154, or ASTM G155. a. Corrosion Resistance: Metal panels shall have corrosion resistance in accordance with local code requirements for the materials indicated. 3. Impact Resistance: The system shall be tested to resist impact damage based on the results of tests conducted in accordance with ASTM D3746, ASTM D4272, CGSB 37- GP-52M, or the "Resistance to Foot Traffic Test" in Section 5.5 of FM 4470. 4. Fire Classification: The system shall be identified and listed for the fire class as required by local code by an approved testing agency, tested in compliance with ASTM E 108 or UL 790. C. Structural Performance: Provide roof panels systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads,based on testing according to ASTM E 1592: 1. Wind Loads: As required by code and indicated wind rating, whichever is greater. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Deflection Limits: As indicated on Drawings. D. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof panel assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift-resistance class indicated. 1. Uplift Rating: UL 90. E. Air Infiltration, ASTM E 1680: Maximum 0.25 cfm/sq. ft. at static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. F. Water Penetration Static Pressure, ASTM E 1646: No uncontrolled water penetration at a static pressure of 12 lbf/sq. ft. G. Thermal Performance: Solar Reflectance Index shell be not less than 29 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980 based on tested 3-year aged solar reflectance and thermal emittance. H. FM Global Listing: Provide metal roof panels and component materials that comply with requirements in FM Global 4471 as part of a panel roofing system and that are listed in FM FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 074000 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Global's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Global markings. 1. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class IA- 153. I.Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change(Range): 120 deg F ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces. J.Jobsite Safety: Execute all operations and provide a safe work environment in accordance with OSHA standards and regulations. 1. Follow all industry, code, fire prevention guidelines and requirements for storage of materials, staging areas,roof access, and application means and methods. K. Roofing panel system must meet uplift requirements to withstand wind pressure based on a 153 MPH ultimate design speed for category IV buildings as specified by engineer. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Product data and shop drawings based on the Contract Documents and field conditions of each metal panel type,profile and trim configuration to be replaced and/or installed. B. Samples: 1. Submit six inch long samples of each metal wall component and trim. 2. Submit samples of each type of sealant. C. Shop drawings showing profile and gauge of sheets, location and type of fasteners, location, gauges, shape and method of attachment of all trim, location and type of sealants, and any other details as may be required for a weathertight installation. Indicate field and factory applied sealant. D. Informational Submittal: Letter from Manufacturer stating acceptance of proposed underlayment for use with their products and for specified special warranty. 1.07 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Panels should be stored on edge in a clean dry place. One end should be slightly elevated to allow moisture to run off rather than accumulate on the faces. B. Panels with strippable plastic film must not be stored in the open, exposed to the sun. C. Stack pre-formed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion and to provide ventilation. D. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration or staining. E. In handling prefinished panels, lift up panels and do not slide panels when un-stacking. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS AND COORDINATION A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. B. Coordinate sizes and locations of roof curbs, equipment supports, and other roof penetrations with actual equipment to be provided. C. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.09 WARRANTY FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 074000 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Provide manufacturer's standard twenty (20) year warranty stating architectural fluorocarbon finish will be: 1. Free of fading of color change in excess of 6 NBS units as measured per ASTM D 2244- 68; 2. Will not chalk in excess of numerical rating of 7 when measured in accordance with standard procedures specified in ASTM D 659-74; 3. Will not peel, crack, chip, or de-laminate. B. Furnish written warranty signed by applicator for two year period from date of substantial completion of building covering repairs required to maintain roof and flashings in watertight conditions. C. Special Weathertightness Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace metal roof panel assemblies that fail to remain weathertight, including leaks,within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Post-consumer recycled content plus one-half of pre- consumer recycled content not less than 25 percent. B. Energy Performance: Provide roof panels that are listed on the EPA/DOE's ENERGY STAR "Roof Product List" for [low] [steep]-slope roof products. C. Solar Reflectance Index: Provide roof panels with an aged Solar Reflectance Index of not less than 0.61 when tested according to CRRC-1. D. Solar Reflectance Index: Not less than 73 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980. E. Metal Roofing Panels: 0.032 thick, 16" x 2" smooth face,interlocking, Aluminum panel with concealed fastening system and high-grade hot melt elastomeric sealant to seal adjoining panel legs. Fascia and gutter shall be pre-formed, custom design as shown on drawings, fabricated of same material as panel. Panel shall be MBCI "BattenLok HS", with Signature 300 (Kynar 500) "Cool Roof' 70%PVDF flouropolymer resin coating in color as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standard range, or approved equal. Minimum .25 Solar Reflectance (SR) on steep-slope roofs. Minimum .65 SRI for low-slope roof(2:12 or less). Berridge "Zee-Lock" standing seam metal roofing panels, or Centurion Industries "A-Lert KR Roof System" shall be acceptable products. 1. Manufacturer's Standard: Provide continuous vents at ridges and at high side of roofs to vertical walls. F. Metal Soffit Panels: 0.032 thick, 12" W x V flush face, interlocking, aluminum panel with concealed fastening system and high grade hot melt elastomeric sealant to seat the adjoining panel legs, anchored to galvanized steel furring sub-girt at 12" o.c. Panel shall be MBCI "Artisan I", No. L-12, Kynar 500 finish (soffit use only) and color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range, or approved equal. For use exposed to direct sunlight (such as vertical applications),panel shall have Signature 300 (Kynar 500) "Cool Roof' 70% PVDF flouropolymer resin coating in color as selected by Architect. Minimum .25 Solar Reflectance (SR) on steep-slope roofs. Minimum .65 SR for low-slope roof(2:12 or less). Berridge "FW-12 Metal Soffit Panels", or Centurion Industries "AL-12 Flat Soffit Panels" shall be acceptable products. G. Battens/Snap Covers: Commercial quality, .125" extruded snap cover and receiver of 6063- T5 aluminum alloy with clear anodized finish in profiles and sizes as detailed on drawings to match existing battens in proximity of work(field verify). FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 074000 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 H. Aluminum Trim: Miscellaneous extruded and formed aluminum components shall match profiles of existing trim and/or as detailed on drawings. 1.Closures: Pre-molded neoprene and/or sheet metal shaped to fit the panel contour. J.Anchoring Devices: Provide spacers, fasteners, clips, angles and other devices necessary to install metal panels. K. Accessory Materials: 1. Panel Fasteners: Galvanized steel with washers where required. 2. Aluminum Trim Fasteners: Exposed fasteners shall be aluminum or stainless steel. Unexposed fasteners may be cadmium or zinc plated steel in accordance with ASTM A164-55 and 165-55. Steel anchors shall be properly insulated from aluminum. 3. Sealant: Color-coordinated, primerless silicone or high grade, non-drying butyl as recommended by panel manufacturer. Do not use sealant containing asphalt. L. Filler: Non-solvent epoxy polyamide sealer shall be Tnemec's 62-1400, "Seam Sealer". M. Roofing Underlayment: Spun bonded polypropylene, with embedded breathable film and a bonded polypropylene random-fiber mat designed for ventilating and sound deadening under metal roofing. Delta-Trela underlayment as distributed by Corsella-Dorken Products, Inc. (888)433-5824,www.deltatrela.com, or equal. 1. Sealing Tape and Flashing Membranes: a. Single-Sided Tape: Manufacturer's tape for sealing edges at overlaps, penetrations and to seal tears: Delta-Multi-Band, or equal. b. Membrane Seal: Manufacturer's adhesive membrane for sealing inner and outer connections to structural details and roof penetrations, and to repair tear damage. Delta-Flexx-Band, or equal. 2. Rubberized Caulking Adhesive: Manufacturer's permanently elastic adhesive for sealing underlayment at overlaps, equal to Delta-Than. 3. Fasteners: Manufacturer's gasketed sealing roofing nails, equal to Delta-Sealing Nails. N. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Underlayment: Provide self-adhering, cold-applied, sheet underlayment, a minimum of 30 mils thick, consisting of slip-resistant, polyethylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 300 deg F per ASTM D 1970. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F per ASTM D 1970. 3. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements and approval of roofing panel Manufacturer,provide one of the following, or other approved comparable product. Product provided must be acceptable to roofing panel Manufacturer for use with their products and specified warranty. Coordinate details for interface of underlayment provided with other air barrier and dampproofing systems as indicated in other Division 07 Sections. Acceptable products may include the following:: a. Carlisle WIP Products, a division of Carlisle Construction Materials; 40 mil, WIP 300HT. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.; 40 mil Grace Ice and Water Shield HT, or 30 mil Grace Ultra. c. Polyglass a MAPEI Company, 60 mil. Polystick MTS O. Roof Curbs: Curbs in metal panel shall be fabricated from same material as roof panels, with bottom of skirt profiled to match roof panel profiles and with welded top box and integral full-length cricket. Fabricate curb subframing of 0.060-inch- nominal thickness, angle-, C-, or Z-shaped steel sheet. Fabricate curb and subframing to withstand indicated loads of size and height indicated. Finish roof curbs to match metal roof panels. Insulate roof curb with 1- FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 074000 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 inch- thick, rigid insulation. Coordinate requirements with Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories", and other trades as required. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION AND INSPECTION A. Coordinate with other trades,prior to rough-in and penetrations, exact locations for roughing- in of components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels. Pipe and other small penetrations shall not be located in roof panel seams. Large equipment shall be located to avoid valleys and damming conditions to the maximum extent possible. Examine and confirm these locations again before installation to avoid conflicts. 1. Provide metal roof panel crickets at roof curbs that do not fit entirely between the seams of a single roof panel with at least 2" to the seam on both sides. Coordinate size of crickets with actual equipment and curbs to be provided. Coordinate height of curbs as required for crickets prior to ordering curbs. 2. Contractor is responsible to relocate pipe and similar penetrations as required to avoid seams, and to relocate curbs and larger equipment as required to avoid dams or other ponding conditions. Contractor shall not be due additional compensation to relocate items and make other corrections as required due to failure of Contractor to coordinate between trades. B. Fabricator and erector are responsible for inspecting existing conditions to verify general conditions, panel profiles and panel attachments and examine all parts of existing building affecting the installation of his work. 1. Examine solid roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal roof panel manufacturer. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.03 SELF-ADHERING UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Apply primer if required by manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation. Apply underlayment, wrinkle free, in shingle fashion to shed water, and with end laps of not less than 6 inches and staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 4 inches. Roll laps with roller. Extend underlayment into gutter troughs. Cover underlayment within 14 days or Manufacturer's maximum exposure time,whichever is less. 1. Apply over the entire roof surface 2. Apply under ventilated underlayment, over roof areas indicated below: a. At roof perimeter for a distance up from eaves of 24 inches minimum beyond the interior wall line. b. Valleys, from lowest point to highest point, for a distance on each side of 18 inches. Overlap ends of sheets not less than 6 inches. c. Rake edges for a distance of 18 inches. d. Hips and ridges for a distance on each side of 12 inches. e. Roof-to-wall intersections for a distance from wall of 18. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 074000 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 f. Around dormers, chimneys, skylights, and other penetrating elements for a distance from element of 18 inches. 3.04 VENTILATED UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Install underlayment per underlayment manufacturer's written instructions, textured side up, fully supported, and to ensure continuous unobstructed ventilation and drainage path from soffit or edge flashing to high roof vents. B. Install horizontally from eaves upward. Lap underlayment 6" at horizontal laps and 8" at end laps and as recommended by Manufacturer. Seal laps with rubberized caulking adhesive as recommended by Manufacturer to prevent leakage. C. Install roofing with spacers at low end gutters and edge flashing for proper ventilation. Seal underlayment at perimeter of roof areas with self-adhering flashing membrane. Dress underlayment into gutters. D. Notify Architect to review underlayment installation prior to installing roof panels. Protect membrane from damage, and repair or replace any damaged underlayment, including any chemical spills on underlayment, per Manufacturer's written instructions. Install roofing panels as soon as practical after underlayment installation and do not exceed Manufacturer's recommended length of time for exposure of underlayment to ultra-violet light. E. Remove any mud, dirt, or similar debris from underlayment with water scrub per Manufacturer's instructions prior to roof panel installation. 3.05 PANEL INSTALLATION A. Panels indicated on drawings as damaged and therefore to be replaced shall be field cut in workmanlike manner to appropriate lengths for installation. B. Install metal panels, fasteners, trim and related sealants in accordance with approved shop drawings and as may be required for a weathertight installation. C. Remove all strippable coatings and provide a dry wipe-down cleaning of the panels as they are erected. 1. Comply with Manufacturer's installation instructions for cleaning. Do not use cleaners or methods that will affect the weathering of panels intended to weather or patina, unless otherwise indicated for pre-patina treatment. D. Install panels to interlock with adjoining panels in order to prevent water penetration and air leakage per industry standards. E. Fasten panels to substrate with concealed fasteners per manufacturer's recommendations. F. Panels shall be installed plumb and true in proper alignment with existing lines of panels. G. Lap Sealing: Seal side and end laps of metal panels per Manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions. 3.06 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Dissimilar Materials: Isolate aluminum surfaces from contrasting steel or other ferrous metals using EC-1202 tape or zinc chromate paint. B. Closures: Furnish and install closures where missing at all ends of existing horizontal siding abutting window framing, door frames, storefront, adjoining walls, etc. where panel profile is exposed to view. Closure shall be installed using proper adhesive and fit flush with edge of panel. Caulk perimeter of closure. Coordinate installation with paint preparation and painting. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 074000 - 7 MAY 2, 2023 METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Battens: Attach receiver to substrate using zinc or cadmium plated steel fasteners insulated from aluminum. Snap batten in place to align with existing battens as shown on drawings. D. Trim: Install aluminum trim using specified fasteners at location shown on drawings. E. Vinyl weatherseal: Required for watertightness warranty on aluminum panels. 3.07 PROTECTION AND REPAIR A. If applicable, remove factory protective plastic coatings at time as recommended by roofing Manufacturer. Do not allow protective coatings to melt onto roof panel surfaces. 1. For metal surfaces intended to weather or patina, wear gloves and take precautions to avoid spills, oil from hands and skin, etc. that can leave marks or cause uneven weathering of panel surfaces. Require the same of other trades working on or near panel surfaces after installation. B. Protect panels from damage during remainder of construction period. Upon determination of responsibility, repair or replace damaged metal panels and trim to the satisfaction of the Architect and/or Owner. 3.08 REPAIR OF METAL PANELS & SIDING A. Damaged or rusting panels/siding shall be patched with sheet metal and caulked as required, or as detailed on the drawings. Dented panels/siding or panels/siding with small penetrations (less than 5/8" diameter) shall receive filler. Prepare substrate and apply filler according to manufacturer's instructions to adhere to surface and achieve a smooth, blended surface for receiving paint. END OF SECTION 07 40 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 074000 - 8 MAY 2, 2023 METAL ROOF AND WALL PANELS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 07 42 13.1 - METAL WALL PANELS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Work includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for fabrication and installation of metal wall and soffit panels as shown on drawings and as herein specified. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Section- Cold Formed Metal Framing, for sub-girts and support framing. 2. Division 06 Section- Sheathing. 3. Division 07 Section- Modified Bituminous Sheet Air Barrier, for air barrier behind metal wall panels. 4. Division 07 Section - 'Roofing" Sections, and "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim", for coordination of air barrier and terminations between metal wall panels, and roofing and parapet copings. 5. Division 07 Section-Metal Wall Panels, for other wall panel systems. 6. Division 07 Section-Joint Sealers. 7. Division 09 Section - Metal Support Systems & Gypsum Board Assemblies, for support system for metal soffit panels. 8. Division 09 Section-Painting. 9. Division 10 Section-Prefabricated Metal Canopies. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. References in these specifications to standards, test methods and codes, are implied to mean the latest edition of each such standard adopted. The following is an abbreviated list of associations, institutions, and societies which may be used as references throughout these specifications. 1. ASTM -American Society for Testing and Materials,Philadelphia,PA. 2. FM -Factory Mutual Engineering and Research,Norwood, MA. 3. NRCA-National Roofing Contractors Association,Rosemont,IL. 4. OSHA-Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Washington,DC. 5. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Chantilly, VA 6. UL- Underwriters Laboratories, Northbook. 1L 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator and erector shall demonstrate experience of a minimum of five years of related industry experience. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0742 13.1 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 METAL WALL AND SOFFIT PANELS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Design Criteria: Engineering panels for structural properties in accordance with the latest edition of the American Iron and Steel Institute "Cold Formed Steel Design Manual", using "effective width" concepts. C. Metal Shapes Design Criteria: Conform to latest edition of Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association(SMACNA). D. Preliminary Roofing Conference: Before starting roof construction, conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to roof construction and sheet metal wall panels including all penetration and termination details at back side of parapets. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT'S A. Maternal Conripartibility: At panels adjacent to roofing, provide rrnateriak that are compatible with adjacent rooting materials under conditions of service and application required, as glen onstrated by membrane roofing nmanufaa.cta,u-er Erased on testing and field experience. B. Testing Requirements: The roof system shall be tested in compliance with local code requirements and as follows: 1. Wind Resistance: The system shall be tested to comply wind resistance forces per local code requirements. 2. Physical Weathering Properties: Metal panels shall have corrosion resistance in accordance with local code requirements for the materials indicated. 3. Fire Classification: The system shall be identified and listed for the fire class as required by local code by an approved testing agency, tested in compliance with ASTM E 108 or UL 790. 4. TDI Certified. C. Structural Performance: Provide roof panels systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads,based on testing according to ASTM E 1592: 1. Wind Loads: As required by code and indicated wind rating, whichever is greater. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings,where applicable. 3. Deflection Limits: For wind loads,no greater than 1/240. 4. FM Global Listing: Provide metal panels and component materials that comply with requirements in FM Global 4471 as part of a panel roofing system and that are listed in FM Global's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Global markings. 5. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class IA- 153 6. Hail Resistance: SH. D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change(Range): 120 deg F ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces. E. Jobsite Safety: Execute all operations and provide a safe work environment in accordance with OSHA standards and regulations. 1. Follow all industry, code, fire prevention guidelines and requirements for storage of materials, staging areas,roof access, and application means and methods. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Product data and shop drawings based on the Contract Documents and field conditions of each metal panel type,profile and trim configuration to be installed. B. Samples: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0742 13.1 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 METAL WALL AND SOFFIT PANELS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Submit samples for each metal wall finish. 2. Submit samples of each type and color of sealant. C. Shop drawings showing profile and gauge of sheets, location and type of fasteners, location, gauges, shape and method of attachment of all trim, location and type of sealants, and any other details as may be required for a weathertight installation. Indicate field and factory applied sealant. D. Informational Submittal: Letter from Manufacturer stating acceptance of proposed underlayment for use with their products,including anticipated service temperatures. 1.07 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Panels should be stored on edge in a clean dry place. One end should be slightly elevated to allow moisture to run off rather than accumulate on the faces. B. Panels with strippable plastic film must not be stored in the open, exposed to the sun. C. Stack pre-formed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion and to provide ventilation. D. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration or staining. E. In handling prefinished panels, lift up panels and do not slide panels when un-stacking. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS AND COORDINATION A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. B. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of canopies and soffit supports, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard twenty (20) year warranty stating architectural fluorocarbon finish will be: 1. Free of fading of color change in excess of 6 NBS units as measured per ASTM D 2244- 68; 2. Will not chalk in excess of numerical rating of 7 when measured in accordance with standard procedures specified in ASTM D 659-74; 3. Will not peel, crack, chip, or de-laminate. B. Furnish written warranty signed by applicator for two year period from date of substantial completion of building covering repairs at back side of parapets as required to maintain parapets,roof and flashings in watertight conditions. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Metal Wall Panels: formed aluminum wall panels. The wall panels have 16" of coverage. The wall panels have a 7/8" rib height. The wall panels are manufactured from 0.032" thick 3105 H14 aluminum. with concealed fastening system and high grade hot melt elastomeric sealant to seat the adjoining panel legs, anchored to 16 gauge galvanized steel furring sub- girts at 24" o.c. Panel shall be Berridge "HR-16 Aluminum Wall Panels Installed over Steel Girts", or approved equal. 1. Location as indicated on drawings. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0742 13.1 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 METAL WALL AND SOFFIT PANELS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Finish at soffits: Kynar 500 finish(soffit use only) and color approved by Architect from manufacturer's standard color options. 3. Finish at parapet walls: For use exposed to direct sunlight (such as vertical applications), panel shall have Signature 300 (Kynar 500) "Cool Roof' 70%PVDF fluoropolymer resin coating in color as selected by Architect. Minimum .25 Solar Reflectance Index(SRI). B. Aluminum Trim: Miscellaneous extruded and formed aluminum components shall match profiles of existing trim and/or as detailed on drawings. C. Closures: Pre-molded neoprene and/or sheet metal shaped to fit the panel contour. Provide prefinished metal vent screeds at perimeter of soffit panels as indicated in Drawings. D. Anchoring Devices: Provide spacers, fasteners, clips, angles and other devices necessary to install metal panels. E. Accessory Materials: 1. Sub-girts and support framing: Provide 16 gauge stainless steel subgirts and support framing of size and configuration as detailed in Manufacturer's TDI approved installation instruction and as necessary for complete TDI approved installation. 2. Subgirts and support framing shall be type 316 stainless steel meeting ASTM A167. 3. Panel Fasteners: Galvanized steel with washers where required. 4. Aluminum Trim Fasteners: Exposed fasteners shall be aluminum or stainless steel. Unexposed fasteners may be cadmium or zinc plated steel in accordance with ASTM A164-55 and 165-55. Steel anchors shall be properly insulated from aluminum. 5. Sealant: Color-coordinated, primerless silicone or high grade, non-drying butyl as recommended by panel manufacturer. Do not use sealant containing asphalt. F. Filler: Non-solvent epoxy polyamide sealer shall be Tnemec's 62-1400, "Seam Sealer". G. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Underlayment: Provide in accordance with Division 07, Section "Modified Bituminous Sheet Air Barrier", and panel manufacturer's recommendations for anticipated in-service temperatures. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 180 deg F or 240 deg F where higher temperature resistance is indicated by panel manufacturer,per ASTM D 1970. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F per ASTM D 1970. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION AND INSPECTION A. Coordinate with other trades,prior to rough-in and penetrations, exact locations for roughing- in of components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels. Conduit, pipe and other small penetrations shall not be located in panel seams. Examine and confirm these locations again before installation to avoid conflicts. 1. Contractor is responsible to relocate pipe and similar penetrations as required to avoid seams. Contractor shall not be due additional compensation to relocate items and make other corrections as required due to failure of Contractor to coordinate between trades. B. Fabricator and erector are responsible for inspecting existing conditions to verify general conditions, panel profiles and panel attachments and examine all parts of existing building affecting the installation of his work. 1. Examine sheathing and substrates to ensure they are properly supported, braced, and anchored; and are within flatness tolerances required by metal panel manufacturer. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0742 13.1 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 METAL WALL AND SOFFIT PANELS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.02 PREPARATION A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.03 PANEL INSTALLATION A. Install metal panels, fasteners, trim and related sealants in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, approved shop drawings, and code requirements, and as may be required for a weathertight installation. B. Remove all strippable coatings and provide a dry wipe-down cleaning of the panels as they are erected. 1. Comply with Manufacturer's installation instructions for cleaning. C. Install panels to interlock with adjoining panels in order to prevent water penetration and air leakage per industry standards. D. Panels shall be installed plumb and true in proper alignment. E. Lap Sealing: Seal side and end laps of metal panels per Manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions. 3.04 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Dissimilar Materials: Isolate aluminum surfaces from contrasting steel or other ferrous metals using EC-1202 tape or zinc chromate paint. B. Closures: Furnish and install closure trim profiles abutting adjacent materials, adjoining walls, etc. as required to close off cavities and where panel profile would otherwise be exposed to view. Closure shall be installed using proper adhesive and fit flush with edge of panel. Seal perimeter of closure. Coordinate installation with adjacent material installers, and painting as applicable. C. Trim: Install trim using specified fasteners at locations shown on Drawings, or where not indicated at equal spacing as required by installation instructions and wind loading and other structural requirements. 3.05 PROTECTION AND REPAIR A. If applicable, remove factory protective plastic coatings at time as recommended by roofing Manufacturer. Do not allow protective coatings to melt onto roof panel surfaces. 1. For metal surfaces intended to weather or patina, wear gloves and take precautions to avoid spills, oil from hands and skin, etc. that can leave marks or cause uneven weathering of panel surfaces. Require the same of other trades working on or near panel surfaces after installation. B. Protect panels from damage during remainder of construction period. Upon determination of responsibility, repair or replace damaged metal panels and trim to the satisfaction of the Architect and/or Owner. 3.06 REPAIR OF METAL PANELS & SIDING A. Panels damaged by construction operations that cannot be repaired to satisfaction of the Architect shall be replaced. END OF SECTION 07 42 13 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0742 13.1 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 METAL WALL AND SOFFIT PANELS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 07 42 13.2 - METAL WALL AND SOFFIT PANELS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Work includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary for fabrication and installation of metal wall and soffit panels as shown on drawings and as herein specified. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Section- Cold Formed Metal Framing. 2. Division 06 Section- Sheathing. 3. Division 07 Section- Modified Bituminous Sheet Air Barrier, for air barrier behind metal wall panels. 4. Division 07 Section - 'Roofing" Sections, and "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim", for coordination of air barrier and terminations between metal wall panels, and roofing and parapet copings. 5. Division 07 Section-Metal Wall Panels, for other wall panel systems. 6. Division 07 Section-Joint Sealers. 7. Division 09 Section-Metal Support Systems,for support system for metal soffit panels. 8. Division 09 Section-Painting. 9. Division 10 Section-Prefabricated Metal Canopies. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. References in these specifications to standards, test methods and codes, are implied to mean the latest edition of each such standard adopted. The following is an abbreviated list of associations, institutions, and societies which may be used as references throughout these specifications. 1. ASTM -American Society for Testing and Materials,Philadelphia,PA. 2. FM -Factory Mutual Engineering and Research,Norwood, MA. 3. NRCA-National Roofing Contractors Association,Rosemont,IL. 4. OSHA-Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Washington,DC. 5. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Chantilly,VA 6. UL- Underwriters Laboratories, Northbook. 1L 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator and erector shall demonstrate experience of a minimum of five years of related industry experience. B. Design Criteria: Engineering panels for structural properties in accordance with the latest edition of the American Iron and Steel Institute "Cold Formed Steel Design Manual", using "effective width" concepts. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0742 13.2 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 METAL WALL AND SOFFIT PANELS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Metal Shapes Design Criteria: Conform to latest edition of Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association(SMACNA). D. Preliminary Roofing Conference: Before starting roof construction, conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review methods and procedures related to roof construction and sheet metal wall panels including all penetration and termination details at back side of parapets. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Material Compatibility: At panels adjacent to roofing, provide rnaterriak that are conipatiNe with adjacent rooting materials i.rrnder conditions of service and application regi.6red., as demonstrated by membrane roofing rrnani, acturer based on testing and held experience. B. Testing Requirements: The roof system shall be tested in compliance with local code requirements and as follows: 1. Wind Resistance: The system shall be tested to comply wind resistance forces per local code requirements. 2. Physical Weathering Properties: Metal panels shall have corrosion resistance in accordance with local code requirements for the materials indicated. 3. Fire Classification: The system shall be identified and listed for the fire class as required by local code by an approved testing agency, tested in compliance with ASTM E 108 or UL 790. 4. TDI Certified. C. Structural Performance: Provide roof panels systems capable of withstanding the effects of the following loads,based on testing according to ASTM E 1592: 1. Wind Loads: As required by code and indicated wind rating, whichever is greater. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings,where applicable. 3. Deflection Limits: For wind loads,no greater than 1/240. 4. FM Global Listing: Provide metal panels and component materials that comply with requirements in FM Global 4471 as part of a panel roofing system and that are listed in FM Global's "Approval Guide" for Class 1 or noncombustible construction, as applicable. Identify materials with FM Global markings. 5. Fire/Windstorm Classification: Class IA- 153. 6. Hail Resistance: SH. D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change(Range): 120 deg F ambient; 180 deg F material surfaces. E. Jobsite Safety: Execute all operations and provide a safe work environment in accordance with OSHA standards and regulations. 1. Follow all industry, code, fire prevention guidelines and requirements for storage of materials, staging areas,roof access, and application means and methods. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Product data and shop drawings based on the Contract Documents and field conditions of each metal panel type,profile and trim configuration to be installed. B. Samples: 1. Submit samples for each metal wall finish. 2. Submit samples of each type and color of sealant. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0742 13.2 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 METAL WALL AND SOFFIT PANELS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Shop drawings showing profile and gauge of sheets, location and type of fasteners, location, gauges, shape and method of attachment of all trim, location and type of sealants, and any other details as may be required for a weathertight installation. Indicate field and factory applied sealant. D. Informational Submittal: Letter from Manufacturer stating acceptance of proposed underlayment for use with their products,including anticipated service temperatures. 1.07 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Panels should be stored on edge in a clean dry place. One end should be slightly elevated to allow moisture to run off rather than accumulate on the faces. B. Panels with strippable plastic film must not be stored in the open, exposed to the sun. C. Stack pre-formed and prefinished material to prevent twisting, bending, or abrasion and to provide ventilation. D. Prevent contact with materials during storage which may cause discoloration or staining. E. In handling prefinished panels, lift up panels and do not slide panels when un-stacking. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS AND COORDINATION A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit assembly of metal panels to be performed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. B. Coordinate metal panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, construction of canopies and soffit supports, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's standard twenty (20) year warranty stating architectural fluorocarbon finish will be: 1. Free of fading of color change in excess of 6 NBS units as measured per ASTM D 2244- 68; 2. Will not chalk in excess of numerical rating of 7 when measured in accordance with standard procedures specified in ASTM D 659-74; 3. Will not peel, crack, chip, or de-laminate. B. Furnish written warranty signed by applicator for two year period from date of substantial completion of building covering repairs at back side of parapets as required to maintain parapets,roof and flashings in watertight conditions. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Basis of Design: Centria Intercept Entyre 1. CENTRIA Architectural Systems; Moon Township, PA 15108-2944. Tel: (800)759- 7474. Tel: (412)299-8000. Fax: (412)299-8317. Email: info e CENTRIA.com. Web: www.CENTRIA.com. 2. Acceptable alternates pending their product : a. Dri-Design Painted Aluminum Panels b. C1adLok Modular Panel System"CladLok Flat Panel" c. Peterson Aluminum Corporation"Modular AL" B. Modular Metal Panels: Factory-formed, aluminum-faced panels fabricated from 0.60" thick aluminum coil coated sheet. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0742 13.2 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 METAL WALL AND SOFFIT PANELS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Panel Depth: 1-3/8"(35mm). 2. Panel Flatness: Maximum allowable distortion: 1/32 inch in 24 inches (0.813 mm in 610 mm) in any direction. Panel lines,breaks, and angles shall be sharp and true, and surfaces shall be free from warp or buckle. 3. Clips: Manufacturer's standard clips as required to meet performance requirements. 4. Panel Joints: 3/4"(19mm) 5. Panel Sizes: As indicated on drawings. C. Sheet Surface: Smooth. D. Finish: Centria Versacor Elite AM - Fluoropolymer Two-Coat Corrosion and Abrasion Resistant System. 1. 2.0 mil barrier coat primer with 0.8 mil. 70 percent PVDF fluoropolymer color coat that includes aluminum metal flakes,with a 0.5 mil PVDF clear topcoat. 2. Color: Custom colors as shown on drawings. E. Aluminum Trim: Miscellaneous extruded and formed aluminum components shall match profiles of existing trim and/or as detailed on drawings. F. Closures: Pre-molded neoprene and/or sheet metal shaped to fit the panel contour. Provide prefinished metal vent screeds at perimeter of soffit panels as indicated in Drawings. G. Anchoring Devices: Provide spacers, fasteners, clips, angles and other devices necessary to install metal panels. H. Accessory Materials: 1. Sub-girts and support framing: Provide 16 gauge stainless steel subgirts and support framing of size and configuration as detailed in Manufacturer's TDI approved installation instruction and as necessary for complete TDI approved installation. 2. Subgirts and support framing shall be type 316 stainless steel meeting ASTM A167. 3. Panel Fasteners: Galvanized steel with washers where required. 4. Aluminum Trim Fasteners: Exposed fasteners shall be aluminum or stainless steel. Unexposed fasteners may be cadmium or zinc plated steel in accordance with ASTM A164-55 and 165-55. Steel anchors shall be properly insulated from aluminum. 5. Sealant: Color-coordinated, primerless silicone or high grade, non-drying butyl as recommended by panel manufacturer. Do not use sealant containing asphalt. 1.Filler: Non-solvent epoxy polyamide sealer shall be Tnemec's 62-1400, "Seam Sealer". J.Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Underlayment: Provide in accordance with Division 07, Section "Modified Bituminous Sheet Air Barrier", and panel manufacturer's recommendations for anticipated in-service temperatures. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. 1. Thermal Stability: Stable after testing at 180 deg F, or 240 deg F where higher temperature resistance is indicated by panel manufacturer,per ASTM D 1970. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Passes after testing at minus 20 deg F per ASTM D 1970. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION AND INSPECTION A. Coordinate with other trades,prior to rough-in and penetrations, exact locations for roughing- in of components and systems penetrating metal panels to verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal panels. Conduit, pipe and other small penetrations shall not be located in panel seams. Examine and confirm these locations again before installation to avoid conflicts. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0742 13.2 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 METAL WALL AND SOFFIT PANELS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Contractor is responsible to relocate pipe and similar penetrations as required to avoid seams. Contractor shall not be due additional compensation to relocate items and make other corrections as required due to failure of Contractor to coordinate between trades. B. Fabricator and erector are responsible for inspecting existing conditions to verify general conditions, panel profiles and panel attachments and examine all parts of existing building affecting the installation of his work. 1. Examine sheathing and substrates to ensure they are properly supported, braced, and anchored; and are within flatness tolerances required by metal panel manufacturer. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members and anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal panel manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.03 PANEL INSTALLATION A. Install metal panels, fasteners, trim and related sealants in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, approved shop drawings, and code requirements, and as may be required for a weathertight installation. B. Remove all strippable coatings and provide a dry wipe-down cleaning of the panels as they are erected. 1. Comply with Manufacturer's installation instructions for cleaning. C. Install panels to interlock with adjoining panels in order to prevent water penetration and air leakage per industry standards. D. Panels shall be installed plumb and true in proper alignment. E. Lap Sealing: Seal side and end laps of [replacements metal panels per Manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions. 3.04 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. Dissimilar Materials: Isolate aluminum surfaces from contrasting steel or other ferrous metals using EC-1202 tape or zinc chromate paint. B. Closures: Furnish and install closure trim profiles abutting adjacent materials, adjoining walls, etc. as required to close off cavities and where panel profile would otherwise be exposed to view. Closure shall be installed using proper adhesive and fit flush with edge of panel. Seal perimeter of closure. Coordinate installation with adjacent material installers, and painting as applicable. C. Trim: Install trim using specified fasteners at locations shown on Drawings, or where not indicated at equal spacing as required by installation instructions and wind loading and other structural requirements. 3.05 PROTECTION AND REPAIR A. If applicable, remove factory protective plastic coatings at time as recommended by roofing Manufacturer. Do not allow protective coatings to melt onto roof panel surfaces. 1. For metal surfaces intended to weather or patina, wear gloves and take precautions to avoid spills, oil from hands and skin, etc. that can leave marks or cause uneven weathering of panel surfaces. Require the same of other trades working on or near panel surfaces after installation. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0742 13.2 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 METAL WALL AND SOFFIT PANELS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Protect panels from damage during remainder of construction period. Upon determination of responsibility, repair or replace damaged metal panels and trim to the satisfaction of the Architect and/or Owner. 3.06 REPAIR OF METAL PANELS & SIDING A. Panels damaged by construction operations that cannot be repaired to satisfaction of the Architect shall be replaced. END OF SECTION 07 42 13 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0742 13.2 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 METAL WALL AND SOFFIT PANELS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 07 46 46 - MINERAL-FIBER CEMENT SOFFIT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes Pre-Stained&Paint-Grade for the following: 1. Fiber-cement siding and accessories. 2. Fiber-cement panels and accessories. 3. Fiber-cement trim. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 06 Section-Rough Carpentry. 2. Division 06 Section- Finish Carpentry for wood and wood-based sidings and for exterior trim. 3. Division 07 Section- Sheathing. 4. Division 07 Section- Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim for flashing, gutters, and other sheet metal work. 5. Division 07 Section-Joint Sealers. 6. Division 07 Section- Weather Resistant Barrier for building wrap application. 7. Division 07 Section-Flexible Flashing for door and window flashing. 8. Division 09 Section-Painting. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including material descriptions, available colors, dimensions and available finishes&patterns B. Samples for Verification: For each type, color,texture, and pattern required. 1. 12-inch- long-by-actual-width Sample of siding. C. Maintenance Data: For each type of product indicated. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type, color, texture, and pattern of siding and soffit, including related accessories,through one source from a single manufacturer. B. Mockup: Build mockup to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Build mockup approximately 48 inches long by 60 inches high. Include outside corner on one end of mockup and inside corner on other end. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store materials in a dry,well-ventilated,weathertight place. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 07 46 46 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 MINERAL-FIBER CEMENT SIDING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with siding installation only if substrate is completely dry and if existing and forecasted weather conditions permit siding to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1.07 SEQUENCING A. Coordinate installation with flashings and other adjoining construction to ensure proper sequencing. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace siding that does not comply with requirements or that fails within specified Warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, cracking, deforming, fading or otherwise deteriorating beyond normal weathering. 1. Warranty Period: 25 years, from date of Substantial Completion. 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish full lengths of soffit and trim in a quantity equal to 2 percent of amount installed. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, manufacturer's offering Products which may be incorporated in the Work include the following: 1. CerainTeed Corporation, (800) 233-8990 2. James Hardie Building Products, (800) 9-HARDIE. B. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each siding, accessories and soffit is based on HardiePlank HZ10 lap siding by James Hardie Building Products, Inc., which is located at: 26300 La Alameda Suite 400 ; Mission Viejo, CA 92691; Toll Free Tel: 866-274-3464; Tel: 949-367-4980; Fax: 949-367-4981; Email: request info (info @jameshardie.com); Web: www.jameshardiepros.com. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or a comparable product by one of the other manufacturers specified: 2.02 SOFFIT A. Fiber-Cement Soffit: Panels made from fiber-cement board that does not contain asbestos fibers; complies with ASTM C 1186, Type A, Grade II; is classified as noncombustible when tested according to ASTM E 136; and has a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: a. Woodtone—Rustic Series 1) Color—Sand Castle 2) Substrate: Allura'/4" Soffit Panel(12"x12'-0") b. James Hardie, Inc. soffit panels or a comparable product as approved by Architect. 2. Pattern: 12-inch-wide sheets with smooth texture or width as required at porches typical. 3. Ventilation: Provide perforated soffit. 4. Factory Priming: Manufacturer's standard acrylic primer. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Fiber-Cement Accessories: Provide trim and other items as recommended by manufacturer for building configuration. Sizes as required, or as indicated on the drawings. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 074646 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 MINERAL-FIBER CEMENT SIDING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Texture: Wood grain. 2. Finish: Manufacturer's standard primer. B. Decorative Accessories: Provide the following types of decorative accessories as indicated: 1. Corner boards. 2. Door and window casings. 3. Fasciae. 4. Moldings and trim. C. Colors for Decorative Accessories: Match adjacent siding. D. Flashing: Provide aluminum flashing complying with Division 07 Section - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim at window and door heads and where indicated. 1. Finish for Aluminum Flashing: Factory-prime coating. E. Elastomeric Joint Sealant: Single-component urethane joint sealant complying with requirements in Division 07 Section- Joint Sealants for Use NT (nontraffic) and for Uses M, G,A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O joint substrates. F. Fasteners: 1. For fastening to wood, use siding nails of sufficient length to penetrate a minimum of 1 inch into substrate. 2. For fastening aluminum, use aluminum fasteners. Where fasteners will be exposed to view,use prefinished aluminum fasteners in color to match item being fastened. 3. For fastening fiber-cement siding,use hot-dip galvanized fasteners. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of siding. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with siding manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply. Center nails in elongated nailing slots without binding siding to allow for thermal movement. Overlap joints to shed water away from direction of prevailing wind. B. Fiber Cement Siding: 1. Blind nail to sheathing. 2. Locate splices at least 12 inches away from window and door openings. Splices shall not align on adjacent members. 3. Wind Resistance: Where a specified level of wind resistance is required, lap siding shall be installed to framing members and secured with fasteners, as described in Table No. 2 of National Evaluation Service Report No.NER-405. 4. Surface nailing at splices may be required by Architect. 3.04 FINISHING A. Pre-stained Finish as shown on the documents. B. Painted Finish as shown on the documents. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 074646 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 MINERAL-FIBER CEMENT SIDING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.05 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective siding materials and replace with new materials complying with specified requirements. B. Clean finished surfaces according to siding manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction. END OF SECTION 07 46 46 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 074646 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 MINERAL-FIBER CEMENT SIDING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 07 62 00 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide all metal flashing and sheet metal work, as shown on the drawings and as herein specified. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 04 Section-Unit Masonry for through-wall flashing. 2. Division 06 Section-Rough Carpentry for blocking,nailers, etc. 3. Division 07 Section- Shingles. 4. Division 07 Section-Joint Sealers. 5. Division 07 Section-Painting. 6. Division 07 Section-Roofing for flashing membranes. 7. Division 07 Section - Metal Roof Panels for sheet metal flashing and trim integral with metal roof panels. 8. Division 07 Section - Metal Wall Panels for sheet metal flashing and trim integral with metal wall panels. 9. Division 07 Section - Sheet Metal Roofing for custom-formed sheet metal flashing and trim integral with sheet metal roofing. 10. Division 07 Section- Roof Specialties for manufactured roof specialties not part of sheet metal flashing and trim. 11. Division 07 Section - Roof Accessories for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, roof hatches,vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units. 12. Division 07 Section - Expansion Control for manufactured sheet metal expansion joint covers. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS AND QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle,leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with the latest edition of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Sheet Metal Standard for Copper: Comply with CDA's "Copper in Architecture Handbook." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. C. Fabricated copings and roof edge flashings: Roof edge flashings shall be designed without exposed fasteners,including at the inside face of copings, and as follows: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 07 62 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof edge flashing assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift-resistance class indicated. a. Uplift Rating: UL 90, 2. FM Approvals Listing: Design, fabricate and install copings and roof edge flashings that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" and approved for windstorm classification, Class 1-90 or greater where required by local codes or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever requirement is most stringent. Identify materials with name of fabricator and design approved by FM Approvals. 3. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Fabricated copings and roof edge flashings for low slope roofs shall be designed and installed for wind loads in accordance with IBC Chapter 16, including local code amendments as applicable, and tested for resistance in accordance with Test Methods RE-1, RE-2 and RE-3 of ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1. a. Roof edge products shall be UL Classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or other building code approved 3' party verification of compliance with the ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1 Wind Design Standard. D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. Account for temperature change of 120 deg F ambient, 180 deg F material surfaces. E. Installer: Engage an experienced installer who has completed similar work of a comparable scale with a record of successful performance. 1.04 GUARANTEE A. Sheet metal applicator and General Contractor shall personally guarantee sheet metal work for a period of Two-Years after acceptance of the building by the Owner against any defects or water leaks. Guarantee shall include all labor and materials necessary to correct any defects or water leaks upon notice from the Owner. B. Furnish manufacturer's standard 20 year warranty stating architectural fluorocarbon finish will be: 1. Free of fading of color change in excess of 6 NBS units as measured per ASTM D 2244- 68; 2. Will not chalk in excess of numerical rating of 7 when measured in accordance with standard procedures specified in ASTM D 659-74; 3. Will not peel, crack, chip, or de-laminate. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Division 01 Section- Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. B. Submit shop drawings for review and approval prior to ordering of materials and fabrication of the required shapes and metal flashings. Submittal for the coping system is required. C. Failure by the contractor to submit shop drawings required above shall release the Architect from any liabilities due to the negligence on the part of the Contractor to comply with the construction documents. D. Samples: Submit samples of sheet metal flashings, trim, copings, accessory items, and prefinished items of profiles, gauge and finish to be used. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 076200 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Sheet metal for receivers and counter-flashings: 24 gauge or as noted on drawings galvanized sheet steel bent to required shapes. B. Sheet metal for downspouts, leader boxes, scuppers, eave flashing, copings, gravel stops, gutters, drip edges and similar exposed items shall be 20 gauge hot-dip galvanized sheet steel. Bend to required shapes. C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240 / A240M or ASTM A 666, type 304, dead soft, fully annealed. Provide sheet in 18 gauge thickness for jamb flashing. D. Lead: Weight 4 lbs. per square foot. E. Solder: ASTM D32, Alloy gauge 58, 50% tin, 50%lead.2.01C F. Gutter, Downspout and Fascia at Canopies and Metal Roofing: 24 Gauge galvanized steel with Kynar 500 coating. Provide 1" straps at 30" o.c. and bracket hangers at 30" o.c. Gutter to be color as selected by Architect. G. Shop-Fabricated Scupper: Fabricate from 24 Gauge galvanized steel with Kynar 500 finish. Formed one-piece through wall scupper flashing with flange extending at least 4" in all directions from scupper and at least 4" onto roof surface (4" beyond roof cants at overflow scuppers). Basis of Design construction shall be patterned on a scupper as manufactured by Hickman Edge Systems or approved equal. Provide with prefinished Kynar snap-on face trim in color as selected by the Architect. H. Shop-Fabricated Coping System: Minimum of 24 Gauge galvanized steel pre-formed, prefinished cap installed over drainable 20 gauge galvanized steel perforated cleat, 12" wide at 60" centers. Increase minimum gauges of cap and cleats, and decrease cleat spacing as required to meet specified standards and performance criteria. Cleat secured with nails into P.T. wood blocking. Internal supports and concealed splice plates. Basis of Design construction shall be patterned on the Hickman Edge Systems "PermaSnap Premier" Coping System. Cap shall receive Kynar coating in color to be selected by the Architect. Provide continuous welded pre-formed corners and intersections. 1. Coping: Fabricated from minimum 24 gauge galvanized, prefinished steel unless otherwise noted. 2. Coping Corners and Intersections: Mitered,preformed and continuously welded. 3. Cleats: Fabricated from same material as coping. 4. Splice Plates: Concealed, of the same material and finish as coping. 5. Finish for Galvanized Steel: Kynar coating in colors as selected by Architect. 1.Shop-Fabricated Fascia: 22 Gauge galvanized steel pre-formed fascia installed over roofing membrane. Basis of Design construction shall be as profiled on the drawings, or shall be patterned after Hickman Edge Systems "Extruded TerminEdge EX MB", or approved equal. 1. Fascia Cover: Fabricated from 22 Gauge galvanized steel, prefinished unless otherwise noted. 2. Corners: Mitered,preformed and continuously welded. 3. Splice Plates: Concealed, of same material,finish, and shape as fascia cover. 4. Finish for Galvanized Steel: Kynar coating in colors as selected by Architect. J.One-Piece Gravel Stops: One-piece,metal gravel stop in section lengths not exceeding 12 feet, with a horizontal flange and vertical leg, terminating in a drip edge, and concealed splice plates of same material, finish, and shape as gravel stop. Provide matching corner units. Basis of Design construction shall be as profiled on the drawings, or shall be patterned after Hickman Edge Systems "Safeguard NP Gravel Stop", or approved equal. 1. Fabricate from minimum 24 gauge galvanized steel,unless noted otherwise. 2. Corners: Mitered, preformed and continuously welded. 3. Accessories: Fascia extenders with continuous hold-down cleats, as applicable. 4. Finish for Galvanized Steel: Kynar coating in colors as selected by Architect. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 076200 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 K. Finish for Galvanized Steel: Kynar coating in colors as selected by Architect. L. Nails for Sheet Metal Work: 10 Gauge galvanized ring type steel of sufficient length to adequately secure sheet metal work. M. Precast Concrete Splashblock: 12" x 24"; provide one per downspout. N. Aluminum Trim Fasteners: Exposed fasteners shall be aluminum or stainless steel. Unexposed fasteners may be cadmium or zinc plated steel in accordance with ASTM A164- 55 and 165-55. Steel anchors shall be properly insulated from aluminum. O. Roof Penetration Flashing: Lead coated copper 16 oz./SF. Roof Penetration Flashing: Lead coated copper 16 oz. /SF. P. Through-Wall,Door/Window Sill and Head Flashings: 1. Where embedded in masonry (not exposed to view): 3 oz. copper composite Multi-Flash 500 by York or approved equal. See Division 4 section "Unit Masonry". 2. Where exposed to view: Prefinished 24 gauge galvanized steel with PVDF coating in color(s) as selected by Architect. Provide with drip edges hemmed 1/2" on underside. Q. Metal Jamb Flashing: Provide 18 gauge [stainless steel] [prefinished metal], with hemmed edge. R. Reglets: Equal to Fry CO, original metal reglet. S. Counter Flashing. "Springlock Flashing"by Fry Reglet. T. Sheet Metal Fasteners: Galvanized steel with washers where required. U. Hooded Pans with Pourable Sealant: As detailed in drawings, constructed of 20 gauge galvanized sheet steel, riveted and soldered watertight. Provide hooded pans at all new pipe, conduit, refrigerant line and other similar through-roof penetrations as necessary where power/condensate do not penetrate within RTU roof curbs. Bed flanges with plastic cement (Fed. Spec. SS-C-153, Type 11) on top of roofing. Caulk around penetrations. Fill pans with roofing granules to 1" from top, and fill to the top with pourable sealant. Mold sealant to cone shape sloping to outside. 1. Provide pans of adequate sizes for penetrations as indicated in Drawings,including space between penetrations within the same hooded pan. 2.02 FABRICATION A. All exposed edges shall be hemmed 1/2" on underside. 2.03 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. General: Comply with Aluminum Association's (AA) "Designation System for Aluminum Finishes: for finish designations and application recommendations. B. High-Performance Organic Coating Finish: AA-C12C42R1x (Chemical Finish: cleaned with inhibited chemicals; Chemical Finish: acid chromate-fluoride-phosphate conversion coating; Organic Coating; as specified below). Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturer's instructions. 1. Fluoropolymer 2-Coat Coating system: Manufacturer's standard 2-coat, thermo cured system composed of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidene fluoride resin by weight; complying with AAMA 605.2. a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of choices for color and gloss. PART 3 -EXECUTION FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 076200 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.01 INSPECTION OF SURFACES A. Applicator responsible for inspecting substrates upon which sheet metal materials are to be placed for any defects or conditions that would impair finished installation. Application constitutes acceptance of the substrate. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Details shown are design details, fabrication techniques, and methods as per SMACNA recommendations. B. Proper and adequate provisions shall be made in fabrication, installing and fastening sheet metal work for expansion and contraction of metal and other materials entering into the work so that pulling, splitting, opening of joints, warpage or other failure of the work shall be prevented. Expansion joints in sheet metal placed not farther than 40 feet apart. Dissimilar metal surfaces contacting one another,protected by bituminous coating to prevent galvanic or corrosive action from occurring. C. Counter flashing constructed in lengths not exceeding 10 feet and installed in receiver so that flashing lays tightly against base flashing and overlaps base flashings a minimum of 4 inches. Joints between sections shall be tight and lay flat. Metal at corners continuous. Bent, crimped or warped sections are not permitted. 1. Coordinate counterflashings with roofing installation of termination bars at top edge of roofing base flashings. D. Coping constructed in lengths not exceeding 10 feet. Joints between sections shall be tight and lay flat over splice plates. Coping shall be fastened with continuous clips both sides over 45 mil neoprene sheet. Bent, crimped or warped sections are not permitted. Metal at corners shall be soldered. E. Metal gravel stop set over roofing in a bed of roofing cement troweled in place and secured by nailing 3" o.c. staggered and clipped to continuous galvanized cleat nailed on minimum of 3" centers. After setting gravel stops, strip in 2-ply roof flashing felts in roofing cement from peak of gravel stop to 6" past edge of flange into roof surface. F. Install hooded sealant filled pans at equipment supports, pipes, conduits and other items penetrating roof or at items resting on roof without integral curbs and base flashing. Bed flanges with plastic cement(Fed. Spec. SS-C-153, Type II) on top of roofing. Caulk around penetrations. Fill pans to V from top with roofing granules. Fill top inch of pans with pourable sealant and mold to cone shape sloping to outside. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: unless otherwise indicated, install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Anchor units of Work securely in place by method indicated, providing for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible, and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps,joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weatherproof. 1. All complete work shall be water and weathertight. Joints, cuts, miters, splices or other installation means made as neat as possible. Fastenings as inconspicuous as possible. B. Install exposed sheet metal Work that is without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and that is true to line and levels indicate, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and weather-resistant performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 076200 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed sheet metal work. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions in Work cannot be used or would not be sufficiently weatherproof and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less that 1 inch deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within joints). D. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pretin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except where pretinned surface would show in finished Work. 1. Do not solder the following metals: a. Aluminum. 2. Pretinning is not required for the following metals: a. Lead-coated copper. 3. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. E. Copings: Install with concealed splice plates, preformed corners, and positive drainage (inward slope) on top surface. No exposed fasteners through copings allowed. F. Sealed Joints: Form no expansion, but movable,joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant to comply with SMACNA standards. Fill joint with sealant and form metal to completely conceal sealant. 1. Use joint adhesive for nonmoving joints specified not to be soldered. G. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams in aluminum with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength. H. Separations: Separate metal from noncompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating concealed surfaces, at locations of contact, with asphalt mastic or other perinanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Underlayment: Where installing stainless steel or aluminum directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a slip sheet of red-rosin paper and a course of polyethylene underlayment. 2. Bed flanges of Work in a thick coat of roofing cement where required for waterproof performance. L Roof-drainage System: Install drainage items fabricated from sheet metal, with straps, adhesives, and anchors recommended by SMACNA'S Manual or the item manufacturer, to drain roof in the most efficient manner. Coordinate roof-drain flashing installation with roof- drainage system installation. Coordinate flashing and sheet metal items for steep-sloped roofs with roofing installation. J.Roof-Penetration Flashing; Coordinate roof-penetration flashing installation with roofing and installation of items penetrating roof. Install flashing as follows: 1. Turn lead flashing down inside vent piping, being careful not to block vent piping with flashing. 2. Seal and clamp flashing to pipes penetrating roof, other than lead flashing on vent piping. K. Splash Pans: Install where downspouts discharge on low-sloped roofs, unless otherwise shown. Set in roof cement or sealant compatible with roofing. L. Precast Concrete Splash Blocks: Install where downspouts discharge on grade unless otherwise shown. 3.04 FLASHING& COUNTERFLASHING REQUIREMENTS FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 076200 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Joints in thm-wall flashings and counterflashings shall be lapped 4" minimum with laps bedded in sealant. B. Head and sill flashings shall not have joints and shall have sides turned up (edge dams) with all corners folded, not cut and shall extend 9" minimum beyond both sides of opening. C. Head, sill and thm-wall flashings shall be set in a bead of sealant applied under the exterior edge of the flashing and on top of the masonry or lintel angle on which the flashing rests. D. Penetrations in thm-wall flashing are not permitted. Vents in thm-wall flashing shall be completely flashed and water tight. E. Metal reglets shall have a bead of sealant installed to complete system with counterflashing. F. All thru-wall flashing shall extend through and up the interior face of exterior gypsum sheathing, as applicable. G. Install metal jamb flashing, in material as noted, over adjacent air barrier system at jambs of curtainwall and other locations as shown on the drawings, as required to close openings to cavity wall. Mechanically attach with stainless steel fasteners and seal metal flashing to wall / air barrier with self adhering membrane flashing as specified in Division 07 Section - Modified Bituminous Sheet Air Barriers. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces, removing substances that might cause corrosion of metal or deterioration of finishes. END OF SECTION 07 62 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 076200 - 7 MAY 2, 2023 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 07 71 00 - ROOF SPECIALTIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Pre-Manufactured Coping Systems. 2. Pre-Manufactured Roof-edge drainage systems. 3. Reglets and counterflashings. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 06 Section-Rough Carpentry for wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 2. Division 07 Section - SBS-Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing for roof edge flashing system. 3. Division 07 Section-Flashing and Sheet Metal for custom and site-fabricated sheet metal copings, flashing and trim. 4. Division 07 Section - Roof Accessories for set-on-type curbs, equipment supports, roof hatches,vents, and other manufactured roof accessory units. 5. Division 07 Section - Joint Sealants for field-applied sealants between roof specialties and adjacent materials. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. References in these specifications to standards, test methods and codes, are implied to mean the latest edition of each such standard adopted. The following is an abbreviated list of associations, institutions, and societies which may be used as references throughout these specifications. 1. ASTM -American Society for Testing and Materials,Philadelphia,PA. 2. FM -Factory Mutual Engineering and Research,Norwood, MA. 3. NRCA-National Roofing Contractors Association,Rosemont,IL. 4. OSHA-Occupational Safety and Health Administration, Washington,DC. 5. SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Chantilly,VA 6. UL- Underwriters Laboratories, Northbrook. IL 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS AND QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle,leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0771 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 ROOF SPECIALTIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, Installer, and installers whose work interfaces with or affects roof specialties including installers of roofing materials and accessories. 2. Examine substrate conditions for compliance with requirements, including flatness and attachment to structural members. 3. Review special roof details, roof drainage, and condition of other construction that will affect roof specialties. C. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with the latest edition of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. 1. Sheet Metal Standard for Copper: Comply with CDA's "Copper in Architecture Handbook." Conform to dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated. D. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide metal roof edge flashing assemblies that comply with UL 580 for wind-uplift-resistance class indicated. 1. Uplift Rating: As specified on drawings. E. FM Approvals Listing: Manufacture and install copings and roof edge flashings that are listed in FM Approvals' "RoofNav" and approved for windstorm classification, Class 1A-153, or greater where required by local codes or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever requirement is most stringent. Identify materials with name of fabricator and design approved by FM Approvals. F. SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufactured copings and roof edge flashings for low slope roofs shall be designed and installed for wind loads in accordance with IBC Chapter 16, including local code amendments as applicable, and tested for resistance in accordance with Test Methods RE-1, RE-2 and RE-3 of ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1. 1. Roof edge products shall be UL Classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. or other building code approved 3' party verification of compliance with the ANSI/SPRI/FM 4435/ES-1 Wind Design Standard. G. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes to prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. Account for temperature change of 120 deg F ambient, 180 deg F material surfaces. H. Installer: Engage an experienced installer who has completed similar work of a comparable scale with a record of successful performance. 1.05 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: For roof specialties. Include plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, keyed details, and attachments to other work. Distinguish between plant- and field- assembled work. Include the following: 1. Details for expansion and contraction; locations of expansion joints, including direction of expansion and contraction. 2. Pattern of seams and layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. 3. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. 4. Details of special conditions. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of roof specialty indicated with factory-applied color finishes. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0771 00 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 ROOF SPECIALTIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 D. Samples for Verification: For copings, roof-edge flashings, reglets and counterflashings made from 12-inch lengths of full-size components including fasteners, cover joints, accessories, and attachments. 1.06 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency,for copings and roof-edge flashings. B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For roofing specialties to include in maintenance manuals. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Coping System: Special Performance/ 20-Year Warranty: Manufacturer shall guarantee that a coping system up to 32" wide,when installed per manufacturer's instructions,will not blow off, leak, or cause membrane failure, even in wind conditions up to 110 mph, or the manufacturer shall at their option repair or replace their materials. B. Furnish manufacturer's standard 20 year warranty stating architectural fluorocarbon finish will be: 1. Free of fading of color change in excess of 6 NBS units as measured per ASTM D 2244- 68; 2. Will not chalk in excess of numerical rating of 7 when measured in accordance with standard procedures specified in ASTM D 659-74; 3. Will not peel, crack, chip, or de-laminate. C. Furnish written warranty signed by applicator for two year period from date of substantial completion of building covering repairs required to maintain roof and flashings in watertight conditions. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Do not store roof specialties in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store roof specialties away from uncured concrete and masonry. B. Protect strippable protective covering on roof specialties from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to extent necessary for the period of roof specialties installation. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 EXPOSED METALS A. Zinc-Coated(Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation with factory applied Kynar 500/Hylar 500 finish. 2.02 CONCEALED METALS A. Zinc-Coated(Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation with factory applied Kynar 500/Hylar 500 finish. 2.03 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS A. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of slip- resisting polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by underlayment manufacturer. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0771 00 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 ROOF SPECIALTIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F. 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: a. Carlisle Coatings& Waterproofing; CCW WIP 300HT. b. Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace& Co.; Ultra. c. Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT. d. Owens Corning; WeatherLock Metal High Temperature Underlayment. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation. B. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended fasteners, suitable for application and designed to meet performance requirements. Furnish the following unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Penetrating Fasteners: Gasketed screws with hex washer heads matching color of sheet metal. Material shall be Type 316 stainless steel meeting ASTM A167. C. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant of type, grade, class, and use classifications required by roofing-specialty manufacturer for each application. D. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187. E. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application. 2.05 COPINGS A. Copings: Manufactured coping system consisting of formed-metal coping cap in section lengths not exceeding 10 feet, concealed anchorage; corner units, end cap units, and concealed splice plates with same finish as coping caps. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 2. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Hickman Edge Systems, "Permasnap-2" or "Permasnap-2 Plus" as recommended by manufacturer for specified performance criteria, or approved equal by another manufacturer. 3. Coping-Cap Material: Zinc-Coated Galvanized steel, minimum of 22 gauge or greater where required by coping size or performance criteria, G90 with factory applied Kynar 500/Hylar 500 finish. a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Corners: Factory pre-formed,mitered and continuously welded. 5. Splice Plates: Concealed, of same material&finish as coping. 6. Special Fabrications: Two-way sloped coping cap. 7. Coping-Cap Attachment Method: Face leg hooked to continuous cleat with snap-on back leg fastener exposed, fabricated from coping-cap material. 8. Cleats are minimum of 20ga. galvanized steel. Chairs are metal in the same color and finish as the coping cap. Fabricated to the wall width required between 6" and 32". 9. Provide thicker gauges of cap and cleats than the minimum gauges as required to meet referenced standards and performance criteria. Contractor is responsible to determine where thicker gauges are required and include in their bid. 2.06 ROOF-EDGE FLASHING AND DRAINAGE SYSTEMS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products as pre- manufactured by Hickman Edge Systems. B. Gutters: "Wind Resistant Gutter", or approved equal. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0771 00 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 ROOF SPECIALTIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Gravel Stop / Edge Flashings: "Safeguard Gravel Stop", or "Safeguard NP" (no exposed fasteners). D. Splash Pans: Fabricate from the following exposed metal: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick. 2.07 REGLETS AND COUNTERFLASHINGS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Fry Reglet Corporation or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Hickman Edge Systems, 2. MM Systems Corporation. B. Reglets: Manufactured units formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, from the following exposed metal: I. Galvanized steel (24 ga.) G90 with factory applied Kynar 500/Hylar 500 finish. 2. Corners: Factory mitered and mechanically clinched and sealed watertight. 3. Surface-Mounted Type: Provide reglets with slotted holes for fastening to substrate,with neoprene or other suitable weatherproofing washers, and with channel for sealant at top edge. 4. Masonry Type, Embedded: Provide reglets with offset top flange for embedment in masonry mortar joint. C. Counterflashings: Manufactured units of heights to overlap top edges of base flashings by 4 inches and in lengths not exceeding 10 feet designed to snap into reglets and compress against base flashings with joints lapped, from the following exposed metal: 1. Galvanized steel (24 ga.) G90 with factory applied Kynar 500/Hylar 500 finish. a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. D. Accessories: 1. Flexible-Flashing Retainer: Provide resilient plastic or rubber accessory to secure flexible flashing in reglet where clearance does not permit use of standard metal counterflashing or where reglet is provided separate from metal counterflashing. 2. Counterflashing Wind-Restraint Clips: Provide clips to be installed before counterflashing to prevent wind uplift of counterflashing lower edge. 2.08 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. B. Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,temporary protective covering before shipping. C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Examine walls,roof edges, and parapets for suitable conditions for roof specialties. C. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0771 00 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 ROOF SPECIALTIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.02 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION A. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install wrinkle free. Apply primer if required by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water. Overlap edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days. 1. Install under all copings from back to front face of blocking. Provide termination bar and counterflashing where required for transition from modified bitumen base flashings. At ends of copings meeting rise walls, extend underlayment 8" up face of wall and to front and back of canopy,below the coping rise wall formed flashing. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Install roof specialties according to manufacturer's written instructions. Anchor roof specialties securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete roof-specialty systems. 1. Install roof specialties level, plumb, true to line and elevation; with limited oil-canning and without warping,jogs in alignment, buckling, or tool marks. 2. Provide unifonn,neat seams with minimum exposure of solder and sealant. 3. Install roof specialties to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before manufacture. 4. Torch cutting of roof specialties is not permitted. B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Coat concealed side of stainless-steel roof specialties with bituminous coating where in contact with wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of self-adhering, high-temperature sheet underlayment. 3. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of roof specialties for waterproof performance. C. Expansion Provisions: Allow for thermal expansion of exposed roof specialties. 1. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 18 inches of corners or intersections unless otherwise shown on Drawings. 2. When ambient temperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1 recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance. E. Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by roofing-specialty manufacturer. F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. Place sealant to be completely concealed in joint. Do not install sealants at temperatures below 40 deg F. G. Splash Pans: Install where downspouts discharge on low-slope roofs. Set in elastomeric sealant. 3.04 COPING INSTALLATION A. Install cleats, anchor plates, and other anchoring and attachment accessories and devices with concealed fasteners. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0771 00 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 ROOF SPECIALTIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Coping constructed in lengths not exceeding 10 feet. Joints between sections shall be tight and lay flat over splice plates. Coping shall be fastened with continuous cleats both sides over self-healing underlayment sheet. Bent, crimped or warped sections are not permitted. Metal at corners shall be standing seam and soldered at exterior-facing leg. Intersections and special conditions shall be fully formed, welded watertight, and post-finished to closely match pre-finished coping color and sheen as approved by Architect. C. Anchor copings to meet performance requirements. 1. The first cleat/chair set should be installed with the center line of the cleat set to the miter leg length (see chart on front page) and 24" (300mm) from the end of a wall. Install cleats/chairs sets at all corners and ends first, then work along the wall to the center locating sets every 60" on center for walls less than 17" and 40" on center for walls 17" - 32". Adjust the cleat location in the middle of a run to fit a short coping length. This procedure will provide a symmetrical appearance of the installed coping. Install metal gutter chair/concealed joint covers at joint locations. Hook coping face leg over the cleat face (front) leg and swing over the top. Snap the roof side (back) leg by pressing firmly down on the back edge directly over the cleat chair sets. Leave a 1/4" gap at each joint for thermal movement. Anchor shall be placed per manufacturer's required spacing that meets performance requirements. 3.05 ROOF-EDGE DRAINAGE-SYSTEM INSTALLATION A. General: Install components to produce a complete roof-edge drainage system according to manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof-edge drainage system. B. Metal gravel stop set over roofing in a bed of roofing cement troweled in place and secured by nailing 3" o.c. staggered and clipped to continuous galvanized cleat nailed on minimum of 3" centers. After setting gravel stops, strip in 2-ply roof flashing felts in roofing cement from peak of gravel stop to 6" past edge of flange into roof surface. C. Gutters: Join and seal gutter lengths. Allow for thermal expansion. Attach gutters to finnly anchored gutter supports spaced not more than 12 inches apart. Attach ends with rivets and solder to make watertight. Slope to downspouts. 1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated but not exceeding 50 feet apart. Install expansion joint caps. 2. Install continuous on roof blocking with stainless steel fasteners. D. Downspouts: Join sections with manufacturer's standard telescoping joints. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls and 1 inch away from walls; locate fasteners at top and bottom and at 3 per 10 feet. 1. Provide elbows at base of downspout to direct water away from building. 3.06 REGLET AND COUNTERFLASHING INSTALLATION A. General: Coordinate installation of reglets and counterflashings with installation of base flashings. B. Embedded Reglets: See Division 04 Section - Unit Masonry Assemblies for installation of reglets. C. Surface-Mounted Reglets: Install reglets to receive flashings where flashing without embedded reglets is indicated on Drawings. Install at height so that inserted counterflashings overlap 4 inches over top edge of base flashings. D. Counterflashings: Insert counterflashings into reglets or other indicated receivers; ensure that counterflashings overlap 4 inches over top edge of base flashings. Lap counterflashing joints FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0771 00 - 7 MAY 2, 2023 ROOF SPECIALTIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 a minimum of 4 inches and bed with elastomeric sealant. Fit counterflashings tightly to base flashings. 3.07 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering. B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants. C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as roof specialties are installed. On completion of installation, clean finished surfaces including removing unused fasteners, metal filings, pop rivet stems, and pieces of flashing. Maintain roof specialties in a clean condition during construction. D. Replace roof specialties that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures. END OF SECTION 07 7100 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0771 00 - 8 MAY 2, 2023 ROOF SPECIALTIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 07 72 00 - ROOF ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide roof accessories including roof hatch, pre-fabricated roof curbs, pipe pedestals, pipe portals and other items as indicated on the drawings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Section-Metal Deck. 2. Division 05 Section-Metal Fabrications, for coordination with roof access ladders. 3. Division 06 Section-Rough Carpentry, for wood blocking. 4. Division 07 Section-Roofing Section(s). 5. Division 07 Section- Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 6. Division 07 Section-Roof Specialties. 7. Division 07 Section- Sealants. 8. Division 22 Sections for Plumbing. 9. Division 23 Sections for Mechanical. 10. Division 26 Sections Electrical. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with "NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for installation of units. 1.04 SUBMITTAL A. Submit manufacturer technical product data and rough-in diagrams, details. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY A. Deliver products in manufacturers original unopened packages, clearly marked with brand name and model number. B. Store materials on clean, raised platforms with weather protective covering when stored outdoors. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall guarantee against defects in material and workmanship for a period of five years. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Any equipment curb heights indicated in Drawings are minimum curb heights required in general. Taller curbs may be required for minimum height above adjacent roofing for roof warranty, including tapered insulation and crickets. All curbs shall be tall enough to accommodate minimum curb height, or minimum heights above roof as indicated in FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 07 72 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 ROOF ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Drawings, or minimum 8" above highest adjacent roof surface, whichever is greatest. Coordinate with roofing installer to confirm total curb heights required. B. Do not install materials during inclement weather or when air temperature may fall below 40° F, including wind chill. C. Do not install materials over damp,frozen or otherwise unsuitable surface. PART2-PRODUCT 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, manufacturer's offering Products which may be incorporated in the Work include the following: 1. BILCO Company, New Haven, CT, (203) 934-6363 2. Custom Curb, Incorporated, Chattanooga, TN (800)262-6669. 3. Kentuckiana Curb Company,Louisville,KY (800) 382-2872. 4. The Pate Company, Broadview, IL (800)243-3018. 5. Thybar Corporation,Addison, IL (708) 543-5300. B. Division 01 Section - Product Requirements: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions: Permitted. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Pipe Pedestals: Freestanding pipe stand made of UV stabilized polycarbonate with nylon roller for piping up to 4". Miro Industries "Miro TPC" or equal. B. Pipe Pedestals: Freestanding pipe stand made of UV stabilized polycarbonate for piping up to 4" and pipe strap. Stackable pedestal shall allow horizontal and vertical adjustment. Unit shall be Miro Industries "Pillow Block Pipestands", Model 3-R, or approved equal. C. Pipe Seal: One piece spun aluminum base with full five inch sloped-roof surface flange, graduated step PVC boot and adjustable stainless steel clamps equal to Pate "Pipe Seal", size as required by pipe. D. Exhaust / Intake Vent Jacks for steep slope roofs: Formed 24 gauge galvanized steel vent jack with bird screen and damper, and with integral base for flashing into metal roofing, equal to Greenheck "RJ" series vent jacks. Size to ducts as indicated in Mechanical drawings. Color: As selected by Architect. E. Pipe Seal Boots for Metal Roof. Gasketed pipe boot with flexible aluminum base plate and integral graduated silicone pipe seal. Silicone seals shall be UV and ozone resistant and rated for high temperature resistance (tested to minimum 225°F continuous exposure). Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Aztek Washer Company "Master Flash", Marco Industries "Roof Boots", or approved equal. 1. Type and configuration to suit roof pitch. 2. Sizes: Sized to pipe penetrations. 3. Color: Light Gray. 4. Hardware: Provide with adjustable metal clamp for clamping top of graduated boot to pipe, and Manufacturer's recommended base fasteners for the conditions and substrates as indicated. F. Grease Guard at Kitchen Exhaust Fans: G29 Grease GuardR Rooftop Defense and Filtration System as manufactured by Dawg, Inc., or approved equal. G. Accessories: 1. Fasteners: Manufacturer's recommended gasketed fasteners for substrates and conditions indicated. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 077200 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 ROOF ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Pipe Umbrellas: Provide one piece pipe umbrellas where indicated in Drawings. Sizes to match penetrations indicated. 3. Sealants: As recommended by Manufacturer for conditions and substrates indicated. Where sealants may be visible in completed work, sealant colors shall match roofing or adjacent materials as selected by Architect from available standard colors. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Curb Cap Flashings: All curb cap flashings without exception shall be one piece galvanized steel construction with no rivets or sealant joints, and with pre-punched holes on vertical surface for mechanical fastener attachment to curbs. Except for equipment support curbs required to be a level mounting surface, top side of curb cap flashings shall have slight slope to drain away from penetrations on all sides. Penetration openings shall be fabricated to dimensions of penetrating items and shall turn up integral with flashing cap at least one inch, with a turned out lip for applying sealant,unless otherwise approved by Architect. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION A. Coordinate between trades as required to ensure waterproof installation acceptable to roofing installer and Manufacturer. 1. Ensure roof curbs meet minimum height requirements above adjacent roofing, including insulation thickness,tapered insulation, and crickets. 2. Coordinate with roofing Installer's tapered insulation shop drawings to ensure curbs, pipes, vent caps, and other potential obstructions to flow of water will not occur within one foot horizontal of roofing valleys. 3. Verify and coordinate actual roof slopes as required for level top of curbs. 4. Coordinate installation of roofing membrane pads under all support pedestals. B. Coordinate between roofing, mechanical,plumbing and other trades as required to ensure that duct and pipe penetrations occur in the middle of roof panels and not at standing seams between panels. Locate ducts and offset pipes below roof deck penetrations as required to avoid roofing seams. 3.02 INSPECTION A. Examine areas to receive roof accessories to insure work of preceding trades is completed. Check surfaces to see that they are uniform in place, free from grease, oil or other debris which would affect proper installation. Application constitutes acceptance of substrate conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Accessories installed in accordance with current printed recommendations of Manufacturer and to roofing manufacturer's requirements. B. Coordinate installation of accessories with roof and flashing installations. Provide weathertight installation. C. Accessories secured in place to withstand wind loads in accordance with the local building codes. D. Fasteners, General: All fasteners shall be installed straight and to make proper seal at gaskets. No fasteners of any sort are allowed through top side of curb cap flashings. All fasteners in flashing caps shall be through vertical sides only. No fasteners of any sort are allowed through roofing membranes or materials unless specifically approved in writing by roofing installer and manufacturer, and approved by Architect. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 077200 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 ROOF ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.04 ROOF PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Do not allow pipe cutting operations directly over roofing. if unavoidable,provide temporary roof protection acceptable to roofing installer. B. Do not place or store items directly on roof that are heavy, have sharp corners, or might otherwise compromise the roofing membrane integrity. Provide temporary pads,plywood, or other protection as acceptable to roofing installer. C. Check roof at the end of each day's work that fasteners are used above the roof and remove any excess or dropped fasteners and other hardware from roof. Notify General Contractor and roofing installer of any potential penetrations of the roofing due to loose fasteners in order to evaluate and make repairs as necessary. END OF SECTION 07 72 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 077200 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 ROOF ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 07 81 00 - APPLIED FIREPROOFING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and related items required for the complete installation of Fireproofing work as indicated by the Contract Documents. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 03 Section- Concrete. 2. Division 05 Section- Structural Steel. 3. Division 07 Section-Intumescent Mastic Fireproofing. 4. Division 09 Section-Intumescent Painting. 1.03 STANDARDS A. Meet requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of Standards listed. 1. Underwriters'Laboratories 2. American Society for Testing and Materials. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Applicator: 1. Licensed by manufacturer of fireproofing material. 2. Experienced in performing application of materials on two projects with similar quantities of sprayed fireproofing materials. B. Requirements of regulatory agencies: 1. Building code requirements of the municipality for fire resistance ratings of areas to receive sprayed fireproofing materials. 2. Underwriters'Laboratories,Inc.: Fire Hazard Classification. C. Testing: 1. Fire resistant rating of assemblies-ASTM E-119. 2. Flame spread rating for materials-ASTM E-84. 3. Bond strength of assemblies - ASTM E-736, tested to provide minimum. Bond strength 20 times weight of fireproofing materials. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Test Reports 1. Submit copies of fire test reports of sprayed fireproofing application to substrate materials required. 2. Submit certified test reports of acceptable testing agencies which perform testing in accordance with ASTM E-119 and E-84. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0781 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 APPLIED FIREPROOFING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit EQ 4.2: For paints and coatings, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit EQ 4: For paints and coatings used inside the weatherproofing system, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." C. Manufacturer's Instruction: Furnish manufacturer's printed material specifications and application instruction for each type of sprayed fireproofing. D. Certificates: 1. Furnish manufacturer's certification that materials meet or exceed specification requirements. 2. Furnish applicators certification that material has been completed as specified to meet fire resistance ratings,thickness requirements and application requirements. E. Job Mock-Up: I. Install typical sample section of approximately five square feet on representative substrate for Architect review and to establish requirements of fire ratings and finish texture. 2. Comply with project requirements as to thickness, density of application, and fire rating, to achieve required separation. 3. Examine installation within one hour of completion to inspect variance due to shrinkage, temperature, and humidity. 4. Where shrinkage and cracking are evident, adjust mixture and method of application as necessary to meet required installation and fire rating requirements. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original, unopened packages bearing name of manufacturer and product identification. B. Reject damaged packages found unsuitable for use and remove from job site. C. Store materials off ground,under cover, and away from damp surfaces. D. Keep materials dry at all times. 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS A. Protection: 1. Provide ventilation in area to receive sprayed fireproofing, introducing fresh air and exhausting air continuously during and 24 hours after application to maintain non-toxic, non-polluted, safe working area. 2. Provide temporary enclosures to prevent spray from contaminating air. 3. Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage by overspray, fall-off of sprayed fireproofing materials. 4. Provide fire extinguisher and post caution signs warning against smoking and open flame when working with flammable materials. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Fireproofing: Equal to Cafco's "Blaze-Shield H", as manufactured by Isolatek International Corp., and shall be formulated without asbestos. Install material to thickness required for fire separation ratings as indicated on the drawings, or ASTM E 605,whichever is thicker. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0781 00 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 APPLIED FIREPROOFING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Fireproofing at Parking Garage, Mechanical Room or elevator shaft: Equal to Cafco's "Blaze-Shield HP", for indirect exposure, as manufactured by Isolatek International Corp., and shall be formulated without asbestos. Install material to thickness required for fire separation ratings as indicated on the drawings, or ASTM E 605,whichever is thicker. C. Mixing Water: Clean, free of mineral or organic substances. 2.02 MIXES A. Mix spray fireproofing materials as recommended by manufacturer. 2.03 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. All work under this section shall conform to the requirements of the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., the National Board of Fire Underwriters and the local building code. Where requirements specified differ from the requirements of any authorities having juris- diction,the more stringent requirements shall apply. B. All fireproofing assemblies must be accepted by the Texas State Board of Insurance and by the Fire Prevention and Engineering Bureau of Texas Rating Bureau. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Fill voids and cracks in substrate, remove projections, and level offsets in locations where sprayed fireproofing is exposed to view as a finish material. B. Clean substrate of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, frost, or other matter which would affect bond of sprayed fireproofing. C. Verify that painted surfaces to receive sprayed fireproofing are compatible with fireproofing materials and bond requirements. D. If necessary, sand blast members to receive sprayed fireproofing to remove incompatible materials which would affect bond when scraping, brushing, or washing will not remove the materials. E. Assure that clips, hangers, supports, sleeves and other items required to penetrate the sprayed fireproofing are placed before installing fireproofing. F. Verify that ducts, piping, equipment, or other items which would interfere with application of fireproofing are not positioned until sprayed fireproofing work is complete. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Apply sprayed fireproofing in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation to comply with fire rating requirements. B. Apply sprayed fireproofing over substrate, building up to required thickness with as many passes or stages necessary to cover substrate with monolithic blanket of uniform density and texture. C. An air and substrate temperature of 40 degrees F. or above must be maintained for 24 hours before and after application of the fireproofing. D. Patch damage to this work caused by other trades before fireproofing is covered up, or if exposed,before final inspection. 3.03 CLEAN-UP A. After completion of the fireproofing work, equipment shall be removed and all exposed wall and floor areas shall be cleaned of deposits of sprayed fireproofing material. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0781 00 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 APPLIED FIREPROOFING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 END OF SECTION 07 8100 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0781 00 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 APPLIED FIREPROOFING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 07 84 13 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and related items required for the complete installation of firestopping at penetrations through rated partitions and floors. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 03 Section- Concrete Floor. 2. Division 07 Section-Fire-resistive Joints. 3. Division 09 Section-Drywall Partitions. 1.03 STANDARDS A. All work under this section shall conform to the requirements of the Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., the National Board of Fire Underwriters and the local building code. Where requirements specified differ from the requirements of any authorities having jurisdiction,the more stringent requirements shall apply. B. Firestopping system shall be a complete system of materials supplied by one manufacturer. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Construction Manager shall engage a single entity to assume full responsibility for installation of all fire penetration firestopping, fire resistive joints, and fire penetration assemblies throughout project, both for items specified herein, and items as specified in other referenced specification Sections. B. Qualifications of Installer: 1. Five years experience in performing installation of materials with similar quantities of fireproofing materials. 2. A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer. 3. A finn that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements." C. Requirements of regulatory agencies: 1. Building code requirements of the municipality for fire resistance ratings of areas to receive fireproofing materials. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0784 13 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Underwriters'Laboratories,Inc.: Classification marking. 3. Acceptance by ICBG, BOCA and SBCCI as described by National Evaluation Service Report, NER-332. D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following requirements: 1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced. E. Testing: 1. Fire resistant rating of assemblies-ASTM E-814. 2. Compound shall meet all requirements of UL 1479. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Installer's qualifications. B. Test Reports 1. Submit copies of fire test reports of fireproofing installation to substrate materials required. 2. Submit certified test reports of acceptable testing agencies which perform testing in accordance with ASTM E-119 and E-84. C. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 2. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." D. Manufacturer's Instruction: Furnish manufacturer's printed material specifications and installation instruction for each type of fireproofing. E. Certificates: 1. Furnish manufacturer's certification that materials meet or exceed specification requirements. 2. Furnish applicators certification that material has been completed as specified to meet fire resistance ratings and application requirements. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original, unopened packages bearing name of manufacturer and product identification. B. Reject damaged packages found unsuitable for use and remove from job site. C. Store materials off ground,under cover, and away from damp surfaces. D. Keep materials dry at all times. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0784 13 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Horizontal assemblies include floors, floor/ceiling assemblies, & ceiling membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies. 2. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 3. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall. B. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per UL 1479. 1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at 0.30-inch wg at both ambient and elevated temperatures. C. W-Rating: Provide penetration firestopping showing no evidence of water leakage when tested according to UL 1479. D. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450,respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84. E. VOC Content: Penetration firestopping sealants and sealant primers shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Safing Insulation: Forming material, minimum 3" unfaced safing insulation with a nominal density of 4 pcf, and bearing the UL Classification Marking shall be "Thermafiber" as manufactured by Owens Corning. B. Compound: Pliable, non-toxic, non-combustible, non-asbestos, low density, lightweight compound shall be "Firecode" as manufactured by USG Corp., "Flame Stop W as manufactured by Flame Stop Inc. or"Metacaulk" as manufactured by Rectorseal. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that all substrates to receive firestopping system are constructed according to the Construction Documents and acceptable to receive fire stop materials. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Safing Insulation: Cut safing insulation slightly wider than the opening. Compress and tightly fit min. 2 1/2" or 3" thickness of insulation with nominal density of 4 pcf completely around penetrant. B. Firestopping Compound: Trowel apply the compound from its container and work into the penetration opening. Apply compound to minimum 1/2" to 1" thickness on top of safing insulation. Ensure that compound is in contact with all surfaces and that entire opening is filled with safing and compound. Utilize appropriately rated product for specific rated partition application. END OF SECTION 07 84 13 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0784 13 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 07 92 00 - JOINT SEALANTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide sealant required to close joints that would allow moisture or air to enter structure between fixed materials, as shown on the drawings and as herein specified, including but not limited to: 1. Sealing of interior perimeter joints of window framing, door frames, and other openings in walls. 2. Sealing interior and exterior walls to floor or roof decking/construction for fire resistive or thermal,moisture or acoustical barrier. 3. Setting of thresholds in sealant. 4. Sealing of joints between countertops and wall surfaces for a sanitary joint. 5. Sealing of joints of every nature and description that would allow moisture or air penetration. 6. Sealing of joints indicated to be caulked or sealed whether specifically mentioned herein or not. 7. Sealing around all pipe, duct and vent penetrations. 8. Sealing at paving joints. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 04 Section- Unit Masonry Assemblies. 2. Division 06 Section- Sheathing 3. Division 06 Section- Interior Architectural Woodworking and Counter Tops 4. Division 07 Sections—Thermal and Moisture Resistant Barriers 5. Division 07 Section- Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 6. Division 07 Section-Metal Panels. 7. Division 07 Section—Roofing Systems 8. Division 07 Section-Expansion Control. 9. Division 08 Sections—Door Frame and Window systems 10. Division 08 Section-Aluminum Entrances and Storefront. 11. Division 08 Section-Aluminum Curtain Wall. 12. Division 09 Section- Ceramic Tiling. 13. Division 09 Section- Gypsum Board Assemblies. 14. Division 09 Section-Painting. 15. Division 21 Section-Fire Suppression. 16. Division 22 Section-Plumbing. 17. Division 23 Section-Mechanical. 18. Division 26 Section-Electrical. 19. Division 32 Section-Paving. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 07 92 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 JOINT SEALANTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1.03 JOB CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Sealant work not permitted when air temperature is below 40 degrees F. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product specifications, color range, handling/installation/curing instructions, and performance tested data sheets for each elastomeric product or joint backing material. B. LEED Submittals: 1. Product Data for Credit IEQ 4.1: For sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system, documentation including printed statement of VOC content. 2. "Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4" Subparagraph below applies to LEED for Schools. Laboratory Test Reports for Credit IEQ 4: For sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system, documentation indicating that products comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers. C. Samples: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. D. Submit samples of joint backing material. 1.05 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall submit, in writing, a warrant that all sealant work executed under this Section shall be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of two (2)years from date of acceptance of the Project, and he shall remedy any defects in the sealant work during the warranty period. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24): 1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Chemical Compatibility, General: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 1. Where new sealants will adjoin existing sealants to remain, confirm chemical compatibility of sealant type prior to preparing submittals. In the event of chemical incompatbility, suggest alternate compatible sealant products for those applications. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 079200 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 JOINT SEALANTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Primers: Non-staining type as recommended by sealant manufacturer for each working surface. Material shall not leave residue or stain on adjacent surfaces. Each joint must be primed prior to sealing. C. Sealant for Interior and Exterior Masonry Control Joints: 1 part ultra low modulus silicone sealant equivalent to "Spectrum 1" by Tremco, or "890 NST" by Pecora. Color to match adjacent surfaces. D. Materials for sealing top of wall to bottom of decking: 1. For use at non-fire-rated (thermal and/or acoustical) construction: [The following products are acceptable for thermal and air seal between top of wall and bottom of deck. At contractor's option, use one of the following products:] [Refer to Division 07, "Spray Foam Insulation" for closed cell foam insulation for this use.] <insert other option.> a. Closed cell 2-component spray applied polyurethane foam insulation and air barrier, Icynene ProSeal, or comparable product by another Manufacturer. b. Single component, gun applied, closed cell polyurethane insulating foam sealant for gaps up to 3": Great Stuff Pro, Gaps and Cracks Insulating Foam by Dow Chemical Company, or comparable product by another Manufacturer. c. Firmly pack gaps and voids above the stud track with Mineral Fiber Batt insulation (Refer to Division 07 or 09 for Thermal or Acoustical Insulation). Caulk gun or trowel apply, and trowel coat to form a continuous seal between top of sheathing and bottom of deck with USG "Acoustical Sealant", or comparable product by Tremco or Pecora. For thermal-only (non-acoustical) applications, apply sealant to exterior or unconditioned side of partition. For acoustical applications, apply sealant to both sides of the partition. d. Contractor shall confirm chemical compatibility of sealant used with adjacent air barrier system(s). e. Where top of wall sealant is used at perimeter wall construction, apply in manner to achieve a continuous air seal from top of air barrier system to bottom of deck, without gaps or voids. Confirm acceptable detail(s) with air barrier system Manufacturer. Refer to Division 07 "Air Barrier" Section(s)for air barrier materials. f. Where top of wall sealant will be exposed in finished interior space, apply in a manner to produce an aesthetic finished result, flush with the face of wall. Cut spray foam flush with face of wall and remove excess material. 2. For use at fire-rated construction: Refer to Division 07, Section"Joint Firestopping". E. Sealant for Re-glazing: Medium modulus silicone sealant shall be Tremeo's "Spectrem 2", or approved equal. Color as selected by Architect. F. Sealant for Exterior Concrete Paving and Sidewalk Joints: Two part urethane (self leveling) sealant equal to "MasterSeal SL-2" by Sonneborne/BASF Chemical Co., "Urexpan NR-200" by Pecora, or "THC-900" Tremco. Provide non-sag product at joints in vertical curbs, equal to "MasterSeal NP-2" by Sonneborne/BASF. G. Sealant at Fountain: Two part elastomeric polysulfide joint sealant equal to W.R. Meadows "DECK-O-SEAL ". H. Caulking for Interior Joints: One part acrylic latex sealant equivalent to "AC-20" by Pecora, "Tremflex 834" by Tremco, "Acrylic Latex" caulk by DAP, or"Sonolac"by Sonneborn. 1.Caulking for Countertop Joints: One-part clear silicone sealant, 860 by Pecora, or equal. J.Precompressed Expanding Foam Sealant: Shall be Gray "Willseal 600" as manufactured by "Tremco",Beachwood, Ohio or approved equal. K. Sealant for Gypsum Board joints for Acoustic Construction: USG "Acoustical Sealant" or equal by Tremco or Pecora. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 079200 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 JOINT SEALANTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 L. Sealant for Windows for Acoustic Construction: Closed-cell polyvinyl chloride foam sealant with pressure-sensitive adhesive on one side; Norton® V740 Multipurpose Pressure Sensitive Adhesive Sealant Foam manufactured by Saint-Gobain. M. Closed-cell tape sponge neoprene for Acoustic Construction: 1/4" x 1", Press-on Products (800-323-7467 or 630-628-2255),Part No.P-8200 or P-8100. N. Non-Hardening Sealant for Acoustic Construction 1. Non-hardening polyurethane type, ASTM C920, Type M, Class 25, Grade NS: Tremco "Dymeric 511" or approved equal. 2. Non-hardening polysulphide type, ASTM C920, one-part: Pecora "GC-9" or approved equal. 3. Non-hardening silicone type, ASTM C920, Type S, Class 25, Grade NS, one-part, low modulus type: GE "Silpruf', Dow Corning 790, Tremco "Spectrum 1", Pecora 864, or approved equal.. O. Joint Backing: ASTM C1330,Non-staining closed cell polyethylene foam rod oversized 30% to 50%, equal to "MasterSeal 920" by BASF. P. Foam Backer Rod for Acoustic Construction: ASTM C1330, Closed cell polyethylene,. Acceptable Manufacturers: ITP, Nomeco, or approved equal. (Available through Tom Brown, Inc. 800-446-2298) Q. Solvents and Cleaning Agents: Of a type specifically recommended by sealant manufacturer. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION AND INSPECTION A. Coordinate sealing requirements with all trades for complete fire resistive, thermal, moisture, asthetic or acoustical barriers and trim. B. Applicator shall examine surfaces receiving sealant or caulking for any defects or joint sizes which would not structurally perform or for any unusual conditions which would interfere with proper installation of sealant or caulking. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare joints in accordance with Manufactuer's instructions. B. Thoroughly clean all joints removing all foreign matter such as dust, oil, grease, dirt or other loose particles. Provide and apply non-staining primer as required by conditions and sealant manufacturer. C. When primer is dry, compress backup and insert into joint leaving 1/4" to surface open for joint sealing or leave open 1/2 of joint width,but not less that 1/4". D. Completely cut smooth and remove projection of existing gasket and/or sealant material at door and window framing to remain to achieve sound substrate for application. 3.03 APPLICATION A. It is the intent and purpose and interpretation of this specification that in all areas, joints sealed shall be rendered structurally sound and impervious to the passage of water, moisture and dust. B. Follow sealant manufacturer's instructions regarding mixing, surface application,priming and application procedure. C. Sealant shall be applied under pressure with a hand or power activated gun having a nozzle of proper size to entirely fill joint void and shall be forced into joints with sufficient pressure to FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 079200 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 JOINT SEALANTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 expel air and fill the joints solidly. All joint surfaces shall be neatly tooled to a smooth surface, free of wrinkles and result in a flush joint when dry. D. Apply sealants when the ambient temperature is between 40° and 100° F. E. All junctures between countertops, back splashes and walls shall be caulked with silicone sealant providing a sanitary tight joint. F. All junctures between piping and substrate of partitions, floors and ceiling shall be caulked. G. Precompressed expanding foam sealant shall be installed per manufacturer's requirements at all vertical expansion joints as noted on Drawings. H. Apply sealant bead at least 1/2 inch thick under each edge of threshold. Remove excess and neatly point. I.Apply sealant between exterior veneers and coping on outside face of exterior wall. J.Caulk perimeter of window frame, door frame or other items penetrating, intersecting or abutting walls, ceilings,floors, etc. K. Prime surface as required and apply sealant at all glazing, at metal to metal and glass to metal joints within the system. L. Apply bead of sealant at base of wall board. M. Furnish and install acoustical sealant at the following locations: 1. All penetrations of partition, wall, and floor construction by ductwork, conduit,piping, or structure. 2. All termination of partitions enclosing Noise Critical Spaces to abutting construction(e.g. partitions, structure, etc.) 3. Both sides of door frames to abutting construction where doors are scheduled to have acoustical seals. 4. Both sides of window frames to adjacent construction 5. Perimeter of and penetrations through sound isolating ceilings, roof systems, and floor systems. 6. Foam sealant at top of wall to underside of roof/floor deck, at partitions to deck that are indicated to be constructed to a STC rating. N. Backer Rod shall be used in all joints, product to be constructed of closed cell foam, or appropriate resilient material for sealant. Dimension shall be minimum 30% greater than joint width,unless otherwise indicated on details. O. Fill paving sealant full width of joint, and to within 1/8" of paving surface. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean adjacent surfaces free of sealant or soiling resulting from this work as work progresses. Use solvent or cleaning agent as recommended by sealant manufacturer. All finished work shall be left in a neat, clean condition. END OF SECTION 07 92 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 079200 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 JOINT SEALANTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 07 95 00 - EXPANSION CONTROL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections Include the Following: 1. Division 09 Section-Resilient Flooring. 2. Division 09 Section- Tiling. 3. Division 09 Section-Acoustical Ceilings. 4. Division 09 Section- Gypsum Board Assemblies. C. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: For each expansion control system specified, include details showing plans, elevations, sections, splices,blockout requirements, and attachments to other work, as needed to coordinate the work. Indicate locations where tile or terrazzo work may require replacement of existing expansion joint covers. Coordinate work as required with structural and architectural drawings for slab depressions or recesses needed. B. Samples: For each proposed expansion control system, provide sample for approval of color and finish specified. 1.03 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with other trades to determine proper installation, removal and reinstallation, or replacement of expansion joint covers. Ensure substrates are prepared to receive covers as required. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. General: Provide expansion control systems of design, basic profile, material, and operation indicated. Provide units with capability to accommodate variations in adjacent surfaces. 1. Furnish units in longest practicable lengths to minimize field splicing. Install with hairline mitered corners where expansion control systems change direction or abut other materials. 2. Include factory-fabricated closure materials and transition pieces, T-joints, corners, curbs, cross-connections, and other accessories as required to provide continuous expansion control. 2.02 INTERIOR EXPANSION CONTROL SYSTEMS A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated, as manufactured by Balco, Inc., or approved equal by one of the following: 1. Architectural Art Mfg., Inc.; Division of Pittcon Industries. 2. Construction Specialties,Inc. 3. JointMaster/InPro Corporation. 4. Nystrom, Inc. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 07 95 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 EXPANSION CONTROL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Source Limitations: Obtain expansion control systems from single source and from single manufacturer. C. Floor-to-Floor: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: a. (VCT or Linoleum)to Wood: Balco Inc., "GF-1S". b. Terrazzo to Linoleum, VCT to VCT, or Linoleum to Linoleum: Balco Inc., "NBA-1". c. At doorway thresholds into "Dance" & "Drama"rooms: Balco,Inc. "1100". 2. Design Criteria: a. Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings, or to match existing conditions. b. Type of Movement: Thermal, or to suit existing conditions. 3. Type: As shown on Drawings. a. Cover-Plate, Glide-Plate or Center Plate Design: Plain, or as shown on drawings. 1) Recess Depth: As required to accommodate adjacent flooring D. Wood Flooring: 1. At doorways, from Wood Floor to Concrete flush transitions: Provide flush transition equal to Balco 1420, with black filler. Coordinate with concrete slab edge and router wood flooring as required. 2. At doorway, from Wood Floor to rubber landing: Flat plate, low profile expansion joint cover,mounted to wood flooring, equal to Balco GF-2P. E. Wall-to-Wall: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: a. Gypsum Board or Plaster(Field): Balco lnc., "WD-1". b. Gypsum Board or Plaster(Corner): Balco Inc., "ACL-1". c. Tile(Field): Balco lnc., "6TW-1". 2. Design Criteria: a. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings, or to match existing conditions. b. Type of Movement: Thermal, or to suit existing conditions. 3. Type: Accordion, or Glide Plate, as indicated. a. Metal: Aluminum. 1) Finish: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standards. 2) Color: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standards. F. Ceiling-to-Ceiling: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Balco Inc., "AC-1". 2. Design Criteria: a. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings, or to match existing condition. b. Type of Movement: Thermal, or to suit existing conditions. 3. Type: Accordion. a. Metal: Aluminum. 1) Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. 2) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. G. Ceiling-to-Wall: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Balco Inc., "ACL-1". 2. Design Criteria: a. Nominal Joint Width: As indicated on Drawings, or to match existing condition. b. Type of Movement: Therinal, or to suit existing conditions. 3. Type: Accordion. a. Metal: Aluminum. 1) Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. 2) Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standards. 2.03 EXTERIOR EXPANSION CONTROL SYSTEMS FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 079500 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 EXPANSION CONTROL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated, as manufactured by Balco, Inc., or approved equal by one of the following: 1. Construction Specialties,Inc. 2. MM Systems,Inc. B. Source Limitations: Obtain expansion control systems from single source and from single manufacturer. C. Low Profile Metal Expansion Joint Cover: Balco CMX wall to wall and/or wall to corner for size of joints indicated. D. Pre-Compressed Foam System: Balco BCSW wall to wall and/or wall to corner for size of joints indicated. 2.04 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063-T5 for extrusions; ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M),Alloy 6061-T6 for sheet and plate. 1. Apply manufacturer's standard protective coating on aluminum surfaces to be placed in contact with cementitious materials. B. R. If SS,Brass or Bronze is desired coordinate with the manufacturer's representative PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to expansion control system manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Coordinate Dimensional control with Wood Flooring. Coordinate with other trades to route edge of wood flooring as required for flush installation. B. Coordinate and furnish anchorages, setting drawings, and instructions for installing expansion control systems. C. Cast-In Frames: Coordinate and furnish frames to be cast into concrete. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for storing, handling, and installing expansion control systems and materials unless more stringent requirements are indicated. B. Metal Frames: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install expansion control systems. 1. Install in true alignment and proper relationship to joints and adjoining finished surfaces measured from established lines and levels. 2. Adjust for differences between actual structural gap and nominal design gap due to ambient temperature at time of installation. Notify Architect where discrepancies occur that will affect proper expansion control system installation and performance. 3. Cut and fit ends to accommodate thermal expansion and contraction of metal without buckling of frames. 4. Repair or grout blockout as required for continuous frame support using nonmetallic, shrinkage-resistant grout. 5. Install frames in continuous contact with adjacent surfaces. a. Shimming is not permitted. 6. Locate anchors at interval recommended by manufacturer,but not less than 3 inches from each end and not more than 24 inches o.c. C. Seals in Metal Frames: Install elastomeric seals and membranes in frames to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install with minimum number of end joints. 1. Provide in continuous lengths for straight sections. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 079500 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 EXPANSION CONTROL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Seal transitions according to manufacturer's written instructions. Vulcanize or heat- weld-field-spliced joints as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Installation: Mechanically lock seals into frames or adhere to frames with adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape as recommended by manufacturer. D. Terminate exposed ends of expansion control systems with field- or factory-fabricated termination devices. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Do not remove protective covering until finish work in adjacent areas is complete. B. Protect the installation from damage by work of other Sections. END OF SECTION 07 95 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 079500 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 EXPANSION CONTROL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 08 11 13 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide hollow metal doors and frames as shown on the Drawings and as herein specified. 2. Fire Rated door assemblies. 3. Tornado or hurricane resistant door and frame shelter assemblies. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 04 Section-Masonry. 2. Division 06 Section-Rough Carpentry. 3. Division 07 Section-Flashing, Sheet Metal. 4. Division 08 Section-Finish Hardware. 5. Division 08 Section- Glazing. 6. Division 09 Section- Gypsum Board. 7. Division 09 Section-Painting. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal doors and frames through one source from a single manufacturer wherever possible. B. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, furnish SDI-Certified manufacturer products that comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8, latest edition, "Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames". 1. Exterior Doors shall be TDI certified and meet wind requirements indicated on drawings. C. Design Criteria: Doors and frames noted to have a specific hourly label, shall be Underwriter's Laboratories,Inc. labeled construction shall bear the required UL label. D. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to UL10C(neutral pressure at 40" above sill) or UL 10C. 1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies Construction: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, attach construction label certifying doors are built to standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire rated door assemblies except for size. 2. Temperature-Rise Limit: Where indicated and at vertical exit enclosures (stairwell openings) and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure. 3. Smoke Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA105. a. Smoke "S" Label: Doors to bear "S" label and include smoke and draft control gasketing applied to frame and on meeting stiles of pair doors. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 08 11 13 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA80 that are listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA257. Provide labeled glazing material. F. Pre-Installation Conference: Conduct conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 with attendance by representatives of Supplier, Door and Door Hardware Installer(s), Security System Installer, and Contractor to review proper methods and procedures for installing hollow metal doors and frames and to verify installation of electrical knockout boxes and conduit at frames with electrified or access control hardware. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, STC ratings, hardware reinforcements, profiles, anchors, insulation values, fire-resistance rating, and finishes. B. Product Schedule: For hollow-metal doors and frames, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final door hardware schedule. C. Manufacturer shall furnish a certificate to the Owner evidencing that materials delivered meet the labeled and/or fire resistive construction requirements. D. Shop drawings and details based on the Contract Documents shall be submitted to the Architect for review prior to fabrication of materials. Shop drawings shall indicate: 1. Elevations of each door design. 2. STC ratings where appropriate. 3. Insulation values for exterior doors and frames. 4. Hardware mounting heights 5. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 6. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 7. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 8. Details of anchorages,joints, field splices, and connections. 9. Details of accessories. 10. Details of moldings,removable stops, and glazing. 11. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems. E. Concurrent Review: Submit submittals under this Section together with all other door and door hardware submittals for concurrent review of door openings. F. Samples: Coordinate paint finish samples with all exterior metal finish samples including storefront system,metal roofing system, overhead coiling doors, four-fold doors and sectional doors. Provide finished painted samples on substrate indicated for review and approval prior to fabrication: 3 - 12"x 12" samples minimum. Resubmit as required to obtain approval. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. B. Warranty includes installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery of Material: Individually packaged in cartons, completely protecting frames. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 08 11 13 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions. C. Frames shall be stored under cover on wood sills that will prevent rust and damage. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. Do not use un-vented plastic. 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS A. Coordination 1. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication. 2. The Contractor shall provide door and frame manufacturer with an approved hardware schedule, templates and hand for all doors. Contractor shall advise door and frame manufacturer of any changes after information has been forwarded. 3. Contractor will be completely responsible for coordination of information between hardware, door and frame manufacturer. Contractor shall coordinate throat dimensions and clearance at thresholds and sill conditions with adjacent construction. Any materials not properly coordinated shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense. 4. Contractor shall coordinate frame preparation requirements with the access control installer prior to preparing submittals. 5. Coordinate reinforcing and preparation for hardware at doors with lites, including lite frames. Requirements of Texas Accessibility Standards for maximum height above floor of the bottom of the vision lite may likely require door hardware to be mounted slightly lower than standard height in order to avoid a conflict between hardware and door lite frames. Pay particular attention to exit device mounting. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications. B. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 metallic coating. C. Door Frame Anchorage Devices: ASTM A 653/A, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B, with minimum G60 metallic coating. Provide with minimum of 6 wall anchors and 2 adjustable base anchors, manufacturer's standard design. Provide UL anchors as required. Contractor is responsible to coordinate anchor types required with adjacent construction. 1. Use metal tee anchors at frames in CMU masonry unless otherwise noted. D. Exterior and Interior Door Frames: Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8, for physical performance level, and HMMA 867 for door construction, in depth and profiles indicated. Furnished with 2" faces (4" head at masonry) and 5/8" stops. Strike jambs provided with 3 factory installed rubber bumpers, and two per door leaf at head of pair door frames. Provide UL rating as required. Frames fabricated of quality 16 gauge annealed steel. Exterior frames to have A60 coating. Interior frames can be standard CRS. 1. Removable stops at exterior frames located at interior side of frames for security and waterproofing. 2. Removable stops at interior frames located at interior(room) side of interior frames. E. Flush Doors: ANSI/SDI A250.8, 1-3/4" Flush type door with no visible edge seams. Polyurethane core. Reinforcements provided for all hardware. Doors mortised for hardware. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 08 11 13 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Provide louvers and fire rating as required. Faces constructed of quality annealed steel as follows 1. Interior Doors: Faces constructed of quality annealed steel as follows: a. HM-Typical Interior, except where noted otherwise: Heavy Duty (Level 2), 18 gauge steel. Steel stiffened laminated core with fiberglass filler with no stiffener face welds,in compliance with HMMA 867 "Laminated Core". 1) Provide 22 gauge steel-stiffeners at 6 inches on-center internally welded at 5" on- center to integral core assembly,No stiffener face welding is permitted. 2) Provide Heavy Duty(Level 2), 18 gauge steel for interior doors at the Air Locks. 2. Exterior doors, and doors between conditioned and unconditioned or heated only spaces, shall have minimum R factor of 3.4 including insulated door, thermal-break frame and threshold, and flush closing channel at top rail. Foamed in place polyurethane and steel stiffened laminated core with no stiffener face welds, in compliance with HMMA 867 "Laminated Core". a. Extra Heavy Duty (Level 3), 16 gauge steel at exterior doors and doors opening to the apparatus bay. 3. Use other type(s) of steel stiffened cores may be used where required to achieve indicated R-values, STC ratings, and fire ratings, as approved by Architect. 4. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge(3/16")plate 1-1/4" x 9". 5. Hardware Reinforcements: Shop Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets. 6. Door louvers: Provide manufacturers standard flush louver. Refer to Division 08, Section "Wood Doors". F. Divided Lite Door: 16 Gauge, 1-3/4" x 5" tubular top and side stiles and 10" bottom rail with mitered, face-welded corners. Doors shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped to receive mortise hardware. Door shall be similar to Ceco "Imperial', or approved equal. Provide insulated metal panel or 1/4" tempered glass as shown on drawings. G. Door Mullion: Provide complete heavy duty mullion at each pair of hollow metal doors indicated in door types to receive center mullions, except where removable mullions are indicated in the hardware schedule. 1. Refer to Division 08, Section "Door Hardware" for doors to receive removable mullions. Provide filler blocks at removable mullions except where the frame profile provides support behind the full width of the mullion bracket at head conditions. H. Accessory Materials: Provide complete fasteners,miscellaneous materials and accessories as required for complete installation including but not necessarily limited to the following: 1. Grout mix shall provide a 4" maximum slump consistency, hand troweled in place. Grout mixed to a thin"pumpable" consistency shall not be used. 2. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames,not less than 0.016 inches thick. 2.02 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES FOR ICC-500 STORM SHELTERS A. Provide complete tornado or hurricane resistant door and frame shelter assemblies constructed to resist the design wind pressures for components and cladding and missile impact loads as described in ICC 500 - 2014, ICC/NSSA Standard for the Design and Construction of Storm Shelters. Only single opening and paired opening doors and their frames constructed to resist calculated design wind pressures and laboratory tested missile impacts are acceptable. 1. Door systems,both single doors and paired openings,tested and complying with ICC 500 -2014 and FEMA P-361 (2015), Design and Construction Guidance for Community Safe Rooms and supported by third party test results. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 08 11 13 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Sheets fabricated on exterior openings from commercial quality hot dipped zinc coated steel complying with ASTM A924 A60. Gauges to be in accordance with manufacturers tested assemblies. 3. Vertical Edges: Vertical edges to have the face sheets joined by a continuous weld extending the full height of the door. Welds are to be ground, filled and dressed smooth. Beveled Lock Edge, 1/8 inch in 2 inches. 4. Top Edge: Reinforce top of doors with a continuous steel channel extending the full width of the door and welded to the face sheet. Doors with an inverted top channel to include a steel closure channel, screw attached and welded in place with the web of the channel flush with the face sheets of the door. Plastic or composite channel fillers are not acceptable. 5. Hinge Reinforcement: Minimum 7 gauge(3/16")plate 1-1/4" x 9". B. Metal Frames: Subject to the same compliance standards and requirements as standard hollow metal frames, provide complete tornado or hurricane resistant door and frame assemblies, for both single doors and paired openings, tested and labeled as complying with ICC 500 -2014 and FEMA P-361 (2015) and supported by third party test results. 1. Fabricate frames from 14 gauge hot dipped zinc coated steel that complying with ASTM designations A924 A60. C. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following, or comparable products by another Manufacturer: 1. CECO Door Products(C)— StormPro, Series. 2. Curries Company(CU)- StormPro Series. 2.03 LITE OPENINGS AND GLAZING A. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints at fabricator's shop. Fixed and removable stops to allow multiple glazed lites each to be removed independently. Coordinate frame rabbet widths between fixed and removable stops with the type of glazing and installation indicated. B. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors and Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 20 gauge thick,fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed. C. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch high unless otherwise indicated. Provide fixed frame moldings and stops on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. D. Preformed Metal Frames for Light Openings: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-inch-thick, cold rolled steel sheet; with baked enamel or powder coated finish; and approved for use in doors of fire protection rating indicated. Match pre-finished door paint color where applicable. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Frames shall have all joints mitered, continuous full welded and ground smooth. No putty or filler permitted at joints. B. All door frames mortised for 1-1/2 pair 4-1/2 x 4-1/2 standard weight hinges. Frames of 48" width shall have 2 pair butts. (Re: Door Schedule and Hardware Schedule for Number and Location.) Frames mortised and reinforced for hinges, (7 ga. 1-1/4" x 10" min.), strikes, (12 gauge steel), and surface applied hardware, (12 ga. steel), as required. C. All door frames shall be prepared for installation of silencers. D. Hollow Metal Frames: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 08 11 13 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Welded Frames: Frames shall have all joints mitered, continuous full welded and ground smooth. No putty or filler permitted at joints Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. a. Welded frames are to be provided with two steel spreaders temporarily attached to the bottom of both jambs to serve as a brace during shipping and handling. Spreader bars are for bracing only and are not to be used to size the frame opening. 2. High Frequency Hinge Reinforcement: Provide high frequency hinge reinforcements at door openings 48-inches and wider with mortise butt type hinges at top hinge locations. 3. Continuous Hinge Reinforcement: Provide welded continuous 12 gauge straps for continuous hinges specified in hardware sets in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware". 4. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated for removable stops, provide security screws at exterior locations. 5. Mortar Guards: Provide guard boxes at back of hardware mortises in frames at all hinges and strike preps regardless of grouting requirements. 6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. b. Stud Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. 7. Door Silencers: Except on weatherstripped or gasketed doors, drill stops to receive door silencers. Silencers to be supplied by frame manufacturer regardless if specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware". 8. Bituminous Coating: Where frames are fully grouted with an approved Portland Cement based grout or mortar, coat inside of frame throat with a water based bituminous or asphaltic emulsion coating to a minimum thickness of 3 mils DFT, tested in accordance with UL IOC and applied to the frame under a 3rd party independent follow-up service procedure. E. Door Mullion: Provide complete heavy duty mullion at each pair of hollow metal doors except where removable mullions are indicated in the hardware schedule. 1. Refer to Division 08, Section "Door Hardware" for doors to receive removable mullions. Provide filler blocks at removable mullions except where the frame profile provides support behind the full width of the mullion bracket at head conditions. F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive template mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." 1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised and surface mounted door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI Al 15 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26 Sections. 5. Coordinate reinforcing and preparation for hardware at doors with lites including lite frames. Requirements of Texas Accessibility Standards for maximum height above floor of the bottom of the vision lite may likely require door hardware to be mounted slightly lower than standard height in order to avoid conflict between hardware and door lite frames. Pay particular attention to exit device mounting. 2.05 FINISH FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 08 11 13 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Prime Finishes: Doors and frames to be cleaned, and chemically treated to insure maximum finish paint adhesion. Surfaces of the door and frame exposed to view to receive a factory applied coat of rust inhibiting shop primer. B. Doors and Frames for exterior openings shall be galvanized before primer is applied using a hot-dip coating of zinc. C. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead and chromate free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; and compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings D. Field Painting: Refer to Division 09, Section"Painting". E. Steel Knock-Down Frames: 1. Manufacturer's standard baked on enamel over phosphate coated surface, color as selected by Architect. 2. Factory primed for field painting. Refer to Division 09, Section"Painting". PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. General Contractor to verify the accuracy of dimensions given to the steel door and frame manufacturer for existing openings or existing frames (strike height, hinge spacing, hinge back set, etc.). C. Check for coordination with electrical preparation, and other coordination items as identified in Part 1 of these specifications, and in the pre-installation conference. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove welded in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. Touch up factory-applied finishes where spreaders are removed. B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for square, level, twist, and plumb condition. C. Tolerances shall comply with SDI-117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames." D. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive non-template, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Anchor ceiling struts to construction above with fasteners to suit conditions. Brace frames as necessary until built into permanent construction. C. Exercise extreme care when installing door frames. All door frames which are installed out of plumb, distorted and not level or in a manner which does not permit proper installation of doors, must be removed and replaced with new frames in a manner satisfactory to the Architect. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 08 11 13 - 7 MAY 2, 2023 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Knock-down frames installed with tight miter joints at corners and meeting at corners without any noticeable lip between head and jamb pieces. D. Clearances: 1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. Allow maximum of 1/16" clearance at head and jamb. b. Allow maximum of 1/2" clearance at floors. c. Allow maximum of 1/4" clearance at thresholds. 2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. E. All exterior door frames, doors between apparatus bay and living quarters and doors installed in CMU wall openings shall be grouted solid. Close off openings to wall cavities as indicated in Drawings and as required. 1. Coat interior sides of frames to received grouting with a thin brush or spray coat of bituminous paint, to inhibit rusting and pitting. F. Field Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions. 3.04 ADJUSTING, CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable. 1. Refer to Division 01, "Substantial Completion Readiness Checklist" for additional list of final checks prior to requesting inspection. B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation. C. Prime-Coat and Painted Finish Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat, or painted finishes, and apply touchup of compatible air drying, rust-inhibitive primer,zinc rich primer(exterior and galvanized openings) or finish paint D. Protect metal doors and frames and their finishes from damage and detrimental soiling during the remainder of construction. 1. Repair and repaint hollow metal that is damaged or soiled, to eliminate evidence of damage, in a manner acceptable to Architect. Replace components that cannot be repaired. E. Clean doors and frames prior to inspection for substantial completion. Touch up paint finish as required. Clean with products that will not damage finishes. END OF SECTION 08 11 13 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 08 11 13 - 8 MAY 2, 2023 HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 08 14 16 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 2. Factory finishing of flush wood doors. 3. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies". 2. Division 05 Section "Light Gauge Metal Framing". 3. Division 08 Section "Metal Doors and Frames". 4. Division 08 Section "Door Hardware". 5. Division 08 Section "Glazing" for glass view panels in flush wood doors. 6. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies". T Division 09 Sections "Painting" for field finishing and touch-up of wood doors. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Concurrent Review: Submit all door-related submittals together for concurrent review. B. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include details of core and edge construction, STC acoustical rating, insulating R-value, hourly fire rating, louvers, and trim for openings Include factory-finishing specifications. C. Product Schedule: Door schedule indicating door location, type, size, fire protection rating, and swing. Coordinate with hollow-metal doors and frames schedule submittal, prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with final door hardware schedule. D. TX-CHPS Documentation Submittals: 1. EQ 7.0 and 7.1: Laboratory test reports for the following products and systems installed inside the weatherproofing system indicating that they meet the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health (CDPH) Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers, Version 1.1 (2010). The school classroom shall be used as the exposure modeling scenario for evaluating the acceptability of VOC emissions as described in the Standard Method, Tables 4-2 and 4-3. For wet applied products, additional content criteria are specified. a. Laboratory test reports for products containing composite wood or agrifiber products or wood glues,indicating compliance with requirements for low-emitting materials. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 08 14 16-1 MAY 2, 2023 FLUSH WOOD DOORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 5. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors. F. Samples for Initial Selection: 1. For factory-finished doors. 2. Manufacturer's samples or selectors for louvers, frames, and other prefinished materials as applicable. G. Samples for Verification: 1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 6 by 8 inches, for each material and finish. 2. Plastic laminate, 6 inches square, for each color, texture, and pattern selected. 3. Samples for frames for louvers and light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer. B. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252. 1. Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard construction requirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size. 2. Temperature-Rise Limit: Where indicated, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure. C. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on testing in accordance with UL 1784 and installed in compliance with NFPA 105. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site to comply with Division 01, Section"Project Management and Coordination". 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Deliver doors to building after wet trades have been completed and building is within normal occupancy humidity conditions. Doors shall be delivered in manufacturer's name and identifying symbol on covering. Doors shall be stored flat with protective coverings provided to protect surfaces. Doors shall not be dragged over one another. C. Mark each door on top or bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 08 14 16-2 MAY 2, 2023 FLUSH WOOD DOORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Comply with Manufacturer's environmental limitations. B. Coordination: 1. The Contractor shall provide door manufacturer with approved hardware schedules, templates and hand for all doors. Contractor shall advise door manufacturer of any changes after information has been forwarded. Contractor will be completely responsible for coordination between hardware, door and frame manufacturers. Any materials not properly coordinated shall be replaced by the Contractor at his own expense. 2. Door manufacturer shall be responsible for properly coordinating information received by him so that doors are properly finished,machined and ready to hang. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include,but are not limited to, the following: a. Warping(bow, cup, or twist)more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section. b. Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span. 2. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 3. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Exterior Doors: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. 4. Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation. 5. Warranty Period for Hollow-Core Interior Doors: One year from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Masonite Architectural 2. Curtis Corp. 3. Eggers Industries. 4. Graham; a Masonite company. 5. Haley Brothers, Inc. 6. VT Industries Inc. 2.02 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL A. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: As indicated. B. WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: 1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated. 2. Extra Heavy Duty: Community Room,public toilets,janitor's closets. C. Structural-Composite-Lumber-Core Doors: 1. Structural Composite Lumber: WDMA LS.10. a. Screw Withdrawal,Face: 7001bf. b. Screw Withdrawal, Edge: 4001bf. D. Fire-Protection-Rated Doors: Doors noted to have a specific hourly label, fabricated in accordance with Underwriters' Laboratories requirements for label indicated. Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 08 14 16-3 MAY 2, 2023 FLUSH WOOD DOORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges. E. Solid Core Doors: Structural Composite Lumber, 1 3/4" thick solid core Extra Heavy Duty Wood doors with hardwood edge type-E conforming to AWI Section 9 for Type SCL 5-ply standards. Doors shall be manufactured by the hot-press method, bonding faces, crossbands and core together in a single operation with Type 11 waterproof resin glue. 2.03 LOUVERS AND LIGHT FRAMES A. Wood Louvers: Door manufacturer's standard solid-wood louvers unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Species: Species compatible with door faces. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Air Louvers Inc. 2. Anemostat; a Mestek company. 3. Hiawatha Incorporated. 4. L&L Louvers, Inc. 5. LL Building Products,Inc.; a division of GAF Materials Corporation. 6. Louvers &Dampers, Inc.; a Mestek company. 7. <Insert manufacturer's name>. C. Metal Louvers: 1. Blade Type: Vision-proof,inverted V. 2. Metal and Finish: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, factory primed for paint finish. D. Louvers for Fire-Rated Doors: Metal louvers with fusible link and closing device, listed and labeled for use in doors with fire-protection rating of 1-1/2 hours and less. 1. Metal and Finish: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, factory primed for paint finish. E. Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads as follows unless otherwise indicated. 1. Wood Species: Species compatible with door faces. 2. Profile: Manufacturer's standard shape. 3. At wood-core doors with 20-minute fire-protection ratings, provide wood beads and metal glazing clips approved for such use. A. Wood-Veneered Beads for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard wood-veneered noncombustible beads snatching veneer species of door faces and approved use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated. Include concealed metal glazing clips where required for opening size and fire-protection rating indicated. B. Metal Frames for Light Openings in Fire-Rated Doors: Manufacturer's standard frame formed of 0.048-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet; factory primed for paint finish and approved for use in doors of fire-protection rating indicated. 2.04 FABRICATION A. Prefit and pre-machine wood doors at the factory. B. Comply with the tolerance requirements of NWMA for prefitting. Machine doors for hardware requiring cutting of doors. Comply with final hardware scheduled and door frame shop drawings, and with hardware templates and other essential information required to ensure proper fit of doors and hardware. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 08 14 16-4 MAY 2, 2023 FLUSH WOOD DOORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Take accurate field measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before proceeding with machining in the factory. D. Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces, and finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top edges of rabbeted doors same as door stiles. 1. Fabricate door and transom panels with full-width, solid-lumber meeting rails. Provide factory-installed spring bolts for concealed attachment into jambs of metal door frames. E. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors in factory. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated. 2. Provide flush edgings for wood doors receiving panic devices or other hardware where typical molding would conflict with hardware. Coordinate with door hardware. 3. Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable requirements in Division 08 Section"Glazing." 4. Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings. 2.05 FACTORY FINISHING A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied,before finishing. 1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be omitted on bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors. 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware." B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80. C. Clearance Tolerances for Factory Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge. 1. Provide 1/8 inch at heads,jambs, and between pairs of doors. 2. Allow maximum of 3/16" over threshold or saddle. 3. Allow maximum of 1/2" over decorative floor coverings. 4. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock and hinge edges. D. Clearance Tolerances for Fire-Rated Doors: Install in accordance with NFPA 80 for fire rated doors, and the following maximum clearances,whichever is more stringent: 1. 1/8"between door and frame. 2. 3/8"between door bottoms and decorative floor finish. 3. 1/8" between doors for pairs of doors. 4. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches at lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to extent permitted by labeling agency. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 08 14 16-5 MAY 2, 2023 FLUSH WOOD DOORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Operation: Re-hang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. Replace damaged material. B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that doors will not be damaged at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 08 14 16 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 08 14 16-6 MAY 2, 2023 FLUSH WOOD DOORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 08 31 13 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Provide all access doors and frames for walls and ceilings as indicated in Drawings and as required for access to equipment and by authorities having jurisdiction, whether or not locations for access doors and frames are specifically indicated in Drawings. 2. Floor access doors. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for blocking out openings for access doors and frames in concrete. 2. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies". 3. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for crawl space access ladders and miscellaneous steel reinforcement at new floor openings. 4. Division 06 "Rough Carpentry" for coordination of wood blocking. 5. Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories" for roof hatches. 6. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for gypsum board assemblies. 7. Division 09 Section "Acoustical Ceilings" for suspended acoustical tile ceilings. 8. Division 09 Section "Wood Ceiliings" for wood ceiling lay-in access panels. 9. Division 09 Section "Ceramic Tiling". 10. Division 23 Section "Air Duct Accessories" for heating and air-conditioning duct access doors. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated. Include construction details, fire ratings,materials,individual components and profiles, and finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of access doors and frames for each type of substrate. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. C. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans drawn to scale and coordinating penetrations and ceiling-mounted items with concealed framing, suspension systems, piping, ductwork, and other construction. Show the following: 1. Method of attaching door frames to surrounding construction. 2. Ceiling-mounted items including access doors and frames, lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, and special trim. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain access doors and frames of each type through one source from a single manufacturer. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0831 13 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per the following test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. NFPA 252 for vertical access doors and frames. 2. ASTM E 119 for horizontal access doors and frames. C. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard-size units, which may vary slightly from sizes indicated. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Verification: Coordinate with other trades to detennine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed plumbing, mechanical, electrical, or other concealed work. 1. Size panels as required by controls to be accessed. Provide adequate sizes to service equipment accessed by doors and panels, and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. For replacement of access doors in existing construction, field measure to match existing opening sizes. 1.06 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver products in manufacturers original packages, clearly marked with brand name and model number. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer shall guarantee against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one years miimum. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Access Doors: a. Acoustical Products, Inc. b. Acudor Products, Inc. c. Bilco d. Babcock Davis e. J. L. Industries,Inc. f. Karp Associates,Inc. g. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 2.02 WALL AND CEILING ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS A. Ceiling Access Door (where passage is required for service access) at ceilings: Flush style Metal Access panel with perforated galvanized metal frame flanges for drywall tape and bedding, concealed non corroding two point pin hinge, and cylinder lock & key, equal to Acudor Products, Inc., DW5040 1. Size: As indicated on drawings and as required for access, provide custom size if required size is not standard. 2. Fire rated to match adjacent construction when located in fire rated construction. 3. Acoustically rated(STC 64 minimum) access door with drywall inlay where indicted and where located in an acoustically rated drywall partition,Acudor ACF-2064 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 08 31 13 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from steel sheet. 1. Locations: Wall surfaces and gypsum board ceilings. install at all location where valves or controls are concealed within walls,whether shown on the drawings or not. 2. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch thick, 16 gauge sheet metal, set flush with exposed face flange of frame. 3. Size: 24" x 36" where intended for passage, and sizes as required for intended service purpose in other locations. 4. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch thick, 16 gauge sheet metal with nominal 1-inch-wide, surface-mounted trim. 5. Fire rated to match adjacent construction when located in fire rated construction. 6. Hinges: Continuous piano hinge. 7. Latch: Screwdriver-operated cam latch. 8. Finish: a. Satin stainless steel at tile,restrooms, and other wet locations. b. Shop primed steel for field applied painting in other wall locations. Color to match adjacent finish or per architect's direction.. 2.03 FLOOR ACCESS DOOR A. Single Leaf Steel Access Door 1. Furnish and install, where indicated on plans, a floor access door as manufactured by Bilco Company, "Type Q". Size shall be Y - 0" x Y - 0" floor opening. The floor access door shall be single leaf, and shall be pre-assembled from the manufacturer. 2. Performance characteristics: a. Cover: Shall be reinforced to support a minimum live load of 150 psf with a maximum deflection of 1/150th of the span. b. Operation of the cover shall be smooth and easy with controlled operation throughout the entire are of opening and closing. c. Operation of the cover shall not be affected by temperature. 3. Cover: Shall be 1/4" steel diamond pattern plate. 4. Frame: Shall be 1/4" steel angle with strap anchors welded to the exterior. 5. Hinges: Shall be specifically designed for horizontal installation and shall be bolted to the underside of cover. 6. Lifting mechanisms: Cam-action hinges shall pivot on torsion bars to provide, smooth, easy, and controlled cover operation throughout the entire arc of opening and to act as a check in retarding downward motion of the cover when closing. 7. A removable exterior turn/lift handle with a spring loaded ball detent shall be provided to open the cover. 8. Hardware: a. Hinges: Cast steel cam-action hinges which pivot on torsion bars shall be provided. b. Cover shall be equipped with a steel hold open arm that automatically locks the cover in the open position. c. Cover shall be fitted with the required number and size of torsion bars. d. A Type 316 stainless steel snap lock with fixed handle shall be mounted on the underside of the cover. Lock shall be keyed. e. Hardware: Shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 9. Finishes: Factory finish shall be alkyd based red oxide primed steel. Field paint per Division 9 Section "Painting" in color as selected by Architect. 10. Finishes — Factory applied powder coat finish, color selected by Architect from manufacturer standard color selection. 11. Finishes—Stainless Steel cover and trim PART 3 -EXECUTION FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0831 13 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas to receive door and frame to insure work of preceding trades is completed. Check surfaces to see that they are plumb in place, free from grease, oil or other debris which would affect proper installation. Application constitutes acceptance of substrate conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames. B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces. C. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material. D. Installation: All access panel locations in Noise Critical Spaces shall be installed only where indicated on drawings. Location of additional proposed access panels shall be submitted by Contractor for approval. E. Floor Access Door: 1. Coordinate floor slab cutting and patching, and required opening dimensions with other trades. 2. Coordinate floor access doors installation with crawl space access ladders attachment details. 3. Install according to floor access door manufacturer's instructions, with mechanical fasteners consistent with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. 4. Install floor access door with frame flange tight to floor slab along all sides. Install floor doors before adjacent flooring is installed. 3.03 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation. B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped,bowed, or otherwise damaged. END OF SECTION 08 31 13 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0831 13 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 08 33 23 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide overhead coiling door assemblies including brackets, guides, tracks, hardware, operators, motors and installation accessories. Include power to specified motor operators. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 05 Section- Support Structures. 2. Division 08 Section-Hardware. 3. Division 09 Section-Painting. 4. Division 28 Section- Card Reader. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Overhead Door (214) 233-6611 "620 Series" or equal by Dynaflair Corporation (813) 248-8100, Cornell Iron Works (717) 474-6773 or Cookson Co. (415) 826-4422. 1. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide doors, tracks, motors, and accessories from one manufacturer for each type of door. Provide secondary components from source acceptable to manufacturer of primary components. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with a minimum of five years experience in the fabrication and installation of security closures. C. Distributor / Installer Qualifications: Doors shall be provided and installed by an Overhead Door Ribbon Distributor with at least the 5 previous years of continuous service as a distributor with a proven record of successful in-service performance, or equivalent qualifications if doors are provided by another Manufacturer. Submit statement of qualifications from the Manufacturer." 1. Company specializing in performing Work of this section and approved by manufacturer, employing installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. 2. Maintenance Proximity: Not more than two hours' normal travel time from Installer's place of business to Project site. D. Design Criteria for standard exterior doors: 1. Wind Loading: Door installed and supported to withstand a wind loading condition of 20 lbs. per square foot with a maximum deflection of 1/120 of the opening width. 2. Cycle Life: Design doors of standard construction for normal use of up to 20 cycles per day,with minimum 50,000 cycle rated springs. 3. Insulated Door Slat Material Requirements: a. Flame Spread Index of 0 and a Smoke Developed Index of 10 as tested per ASTM E84. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 08 33 23 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 b. Minimum Installed System Sound Transmission Class (STC) rating of 21 as tested per ASTM E90. c. Minimum R-value of 7.5 (U-factor of 0.125) as calculated using the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. d. Insulation is CFC-free. 4. Air Leakage: Meets ASHRAE 90.1 & IECC 2012/2015 C402.4.3, Air leakage <1.00 efm/ft2. E. Design Criteria for storm and missile impact doors: 1. Wind Loading: Sustain a 240 psf wind pressure in accordance with ASTM E330; TDI Certified. 2. Large Missile Impact: Sustaing a large missile impact test in accordance with ASTM E1886 for FEMA 361 assemblies.: 3. Cycle Life: Design doors of standard construction for normal use of up to 20 cycles per day,with minimum 50,000 cycle rated springs. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and color range. B. Shop drawings: Include detailed plans, elevations, details of framing members, anchoring methods, required clearances, hardware, and accessories. Include relationship with adjacent construction, based on the specific construction indicated in the Construction Documents for this project. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Complete set of color chips representing manufacturer's full range of available colors. D. Samples for Verification: Samples on metal at least 6" long,representing actual color. E. Informational Submittals: 1. Manufacturer's Certificates: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements. 2. Qualifications. F. Closeout Submittals: 1. Operationg Manuals. 2. Maintenance schedule. 3. Warranties. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation. B. Protect materials from exposure to moisture. Do not deliver until after wet work is complete and dry. C. Store materials in a dry,warm,ventilated weathertight location. 1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. B. Coordination: Coordinate Work with other operations and installation of adjacent materials to avoid damage to installed materials. Coordinate power and access control requirements and their rough-in locations with other trades. 1.07 WARRANTY FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 08 33 23 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Coiling Doors Warranty: Manufacturer's limited door and operator system, except the counterbalance spring and finish, to be free from defects in materials and workmanship for 3 years or 20,000 cycles, whichever occurs first. B. Coiling Counter Door Warranty: Manufacturer's limited door warranty for 2 years for all parts and components. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Exterior Coiling Door: 1. Curtain: Prefinished, galvanized rolling door with polyurethane insulated (0.054 "U" value) and thermal breaks, galvanized 20 gauge interlocking flat faced steel slats 5/8" deep by 2-5/8" high with 24 gauge galvanized and primed back cover joint seals between sections, jamb seals on the ends and top seal against the header. Fit each slat with an endlock at each end to provide positive guide retention and ensure curtain alignment. Door as manufactured by Overhead Door Corp., "625 Series" Commercial Steel Doors, Model No. UFN1 with F265 "Stormtite Insulated Slats" or approved equal. 2. Finish: Corrosion resistant, Rust inhibitive, bonderized, baked-on prime coat and and a polyester top coat. Interior color shall be a manufacturers standard color. Exterior color shall be standard color as selected by the Architect. Finish with PowderGuard Premium or approved equal. 3. Guides: 2" galvanized steel guides attached to opening per manufacturer's standard recommendations. Vertical guide to provide weathertight closing with bracket. Horizontal tracks reinforced adequately to prevent deflection. Finish to match curtain. 4. Bottom Bar: Heavy duty extruded galvanized steel with weatherseals. Pneumatic sensing edge consisting of removable looped neoprene weather-stripping extending full length door bottom. 5. Hood: 24 Gauge galvanized steel and primed. Finished to match curtain. 6. Barrel: 6" Minimum diameter steel pipe barrel designed to carry curtain load with a maximum deflection not to exceed .03"per foot of width. 7. Counter Balance: Torsion-type springs, low stress, helical-wound spring wire rated for 50,000 cycles of use to accommodate easy operation. Spring fittings and drums of die cast high strength aluminum. All rotating parts shall have high quality ball bearings. 8. End Plates: Furnish steel end plates not less than 3/16" thick and bolted to support brackets or plates. 9. Operation: Manually operated chain drive. 10. Locking: Right hand five pin-tumblermechanism operational from inside. 11. Provide perimeter weather-stripping of doors such that under 25 mph winds, air leakage will reduce in accordance with ASTM E383-73. 12. All exposed fasteners, anchors, hardware or attachments shall be galvanized, cadmium- plated or stainless steel. 2.02 STORM RATED MOTORIZED OVERHEAD COILING DOORS A. Basis of Design Product: McKeon Three Hour fire rated Safespace 500F-PC, FEMA 361 certified and ICC 500 compliant Overhead Coiling Service Doors, and as follows: 1. Curtain: Manufacturer's standard steel interlocking G90 galvanized steel slats. Curtain shall be formed of slat profile sections of gauge as required to sustain the minimum required design wind pressure. Slat cross section shall not be less than 3" wide by 1-1/2" deep.. 2. Bottom Bar; Shall consist of a double structural steel angle assembly formed to fit and engage the curtain assembly. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 08 33 23 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. Guides Each guide assembly shall be fabricated of structural steel support angles and guide retaining angles of a sufficient depth to retain curtain in in the guides under the design wind pressure and impact forces specified. 1) Provide internally concealed UL Classified smoke seals located within each guide assembly. Externally mounted smoke seals shall not be acceptable. 4. Mounting Brackets: Fabricated of hot rolled 3/16" minimum steel plates, brackets shall be provided to house ends of the counterbalance barrel assembly. 5. Counterbalance Assembly: Coiling door shall be counterbalanced by means of adjustable steel helical torsion springs attached to shaft enclosed in pipe with required mounting blocks or rings for attachment of curtain. Grease sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings shall be attached to the spring barrel which shall be fabricated of hot formed structural quality carbon steel seamless pipe. 6. Hood: Shall be provided to entirely enclose coiled curtain and counterbalance barrel assembly. Hood shall be fabricated 22 gauge galvanized steel, designed and formed to match brackets. Top and bottom shall be bent and reinforced to provide for proper stiffness. 1. Provide internally concealed UL Classified smoke seals located within the hood assembly. Externally lintel mounted smoke seals shall not be acceptable. 7. Manual Override Operation: a. Chain Hoist Override. 8. Electric Motor Operator: Fire door shall be provided with a compact power unit designed and built by the door manufacturer. Operator shall be equipped with an adjustable screw- type limit switch to break the circuit at termination of travel. High efficiency planetary gearing running in an oil bath, shall be furnished together with a centrifugal governor, magnetic operated brake and a fail-safe magnetic release device, completely housed to protect against damage, dust and moisture. An efficient overload protection device,which will break the power circuit and protect against damage to the motor windings shall be integral with the unit. Operator is to be housed in a NEMA type 1 enclosure. a. Motor: Shall be intermediate duty, thermally protected, ball bearing type with a class A or better insulation. Horsepower of motor is to be 1/3hp minimum or of manufacturer's recommended size,which ever is greater. b. Starter: Shall be size "0" magnetic reversing starter, across the line type with mechanical and electrical interlocks, with 10 amp continuous rating and 24 volt control circuit. c. Reducer: Planetary gear type, 80%efficiency minimum. d. Brake: Magnetically activated, integral within the operator's housing. e. Control Station: Provide flush mount key switch control station marked open, close and stop. f. Hand Chain Override: Provide manual chain hoist override assembly to open the door in case of emergency. 9. Self-Closing Mechanism: The fire door is to be designed with a centrifugal governor as an integral part of the operator's construction. The automatic release mechanism shall be activated by a fusible link, smoke detector or fire alarm. When activated the door is released and begins to close due to gravitational force. The speed of the door is governed by a centrifugal governor, designed to match the normal operating speed of the door, at a rate of not greater than 9"per second or less than 6" per second. 10. Magnetic Release with 10 Second Time Delay: A fail-safe magnetic release device shall be built into the operator as an integral part of the release mechanism. When power is interrupted to the release mechanism by the smoke detector or fire alarin, the door shall begin to self-close. In the event of power failure the time delay shall prevent the fire door from closing for a period of 10 seconds. Once the 10 seconds have lapsed, the fire door shall self-close. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 083323 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 11. Obstruction Sensing Safety Edge: The fire door shall be designed with an obstruction sensing safety edge. In the event that the safety edge meets an obstruction during the normal closing operation, the door shall stop, reverse and return to the open position. In the event the safety edge meets an obstruction during the self-closing operation, the door shall come to rest on the obstruction and once the obstruction has been removed the fire door shall continue to the fully closed position. 12. Easy Trip Test Feature: The fire door shall be designed so that it may be trip tested simply by cutting power to the magnetic release device. By turning the power switch off, the door shall self-close. Once the fire door has satisfactorily closed, it shall be reset simply by restoring power back to the assembly and activating the control station to power the unit back to the open position. 13. Finish: Slats and hood galvanized in accordance with ASTM A 653 and receive rust- inhibitive, roll coating process, including 0.2 mils thick baked-on prime paint, and 0.6 mils thick baked-on polyester top coat. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Field measure openings prior to shop drawing submittal and fabrication. B. Verify opening sizes,tolerances and conditions are acceptable. C. Examine conditions of substrates, supports, and other conditions under which this work is to be performed. D. Coordinate and schedule work under this section with work of other sections so as not to delay job progress. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Coordinate and schedule work under this section with work of other sections so as not to delay job progress. C. Coiling door shall be mounted as indicated on drawings with guides braced in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for installation. Door, when installed, shall fit flush, tight and level to horizontal construction with side jambs properly plumbed and supported to meet design criteria. Provide all accessory brackets and shims as may be necessary for a complete installation. D. Use anchorage devices to securely fasten assembly to wall construction and building framing without distortion or stress. E. Securely and rigidly brace components suspended from structure. Secure guides to structural members only. F. Fit and align assembly including hardware; level and plumb,to provide smooth operation. G. Coordinate installation of electrical service and access control interface with other trades. Complete wiring from disconnect to unit components. H. Coordinate installation of sealants and backing materials at frame perimeter as specified in Division 07, Section "Joint Sealants". FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 08 33 23 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1.Install perimeter trim and closures. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Completed door shall have all mechanisms properly adjusted and lubricated. Unit set tight to wall to properly close off opening. B. Test for proper operation and adjust as necessary to provide proper operation without binding or distortion. C. Test Fire Rated door closing sequence when activated by the building's fire alarm system. Reset door after successful test. D. Adjust hardware and operating assemblies for smooth and noiseless operation. 3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Clean curtain and components using non-abrasive materials and methods recommended by manufacturer. B. Remove labels and visible markings. C. Protect installed products until completion of project. D. Touch-up,repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. 3.06 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Demonstrate and instruct Owner's personnel in proper operating procedures and maintenance schedule. END OF SECTION 08 33 23 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 083323 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 OVERHEAD COILING DOORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 08 35 11 - ELECTRIC OPERATED FOUR-FOLD DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 0131 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install insulated metal four-fold power operated doors and related work necessary for a complete installation as shown, specified and required for doors and controls. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies." 2. Division 05 Section "Structural Steel Framing." 3. Division 08 Section "Glazing." 4. Division 09 Section "Painting." 5. Division 26,for Electrical requirements, and coordination of power and controls. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Doors system designed to withstand external or internal wind loads of 20 psf, and also wind loading as required per local code requirements, whichever is greater. Maximum deflection shall not exceed 1/120 of the span. Steel frames designed in accordance with AISC "Steel Construction Manual". B. Door system designed to meet wind load requirements of -62 psf / +47 psf and be able to withstand sustained winds as indicated on drawings. C. Obtain doors, operators, hardware, and other accessories from a single manufacturer for sole sourced manufacturer warranty. D. Specified control units are to establish quality and performance criteria. Design and provide complete controls for four-fold doors and coiling grilles to operate together as described, whether or not specified control units can perform the described operation without modifications. General Contractor, Four-Fold Door manufacturers and installers, and the Electrical contractor shall fully coordinate requirements for these controls and shall provide a complete control system and related infrastructure: a. Interlocks for powered operation may be overridden by manual operation of four-fold doors and coiling grilles. 2. Four fold doors shall be controlled individually by 3-button controls at the following locations (refer to Electrical drawings): a. At the jamb adjacent to each opening. b. At both air locks. 3. Four-fold doors shall be capable of receiving control input to open [and close] from the station alerting system. 4. Four-fold doors shall be controlled individually by radio frequency controls, and as follows: a. Doors shall be controlled such that each bay works with the Fire Department's existing universal transmitters that are used for all of their Fire Stations. Contractor is responsible FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0835 11 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRIC OPERATED FOUR-FOLD DOORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 to coordinate requirements for this operation with the Fire Department, and to fully test each opening. Provide supplementary receivers where required to match required frequency and codes. b. Doors on the return side of pull-through apparatus bays shall be tested for clear reception to a minimum range of 20 feet from the exterior face of the building. In the event of failure to meet this requirement,provide supplementary receivers. 5. A Time-to-Close function shall be included that is programmable from 30 seconds to 15 minutes, in not less than 1-minute increments. The time-to-close function shall be temporarily disabled when the stop button is pressed from any of that door's 3-button controllers after the door is fully opened,until the next time a close button is pressed. 6. The control system shall be operable by internet connection, and by free downloadable application via hand-held device. The application shall indicate whether the position of the doors is fully closed or not. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for each type of product specified, including installation instructions and data substantiating that products comply with requirements. B. Submit detailed shop drawings of all work, including the location of each door. Clearly show and describe in detail, detailed door assemblies and adjacent construction, including elevations, sections and details of hardware, operating components, dimensions, finishes and relationship of door, frames,hardware and operating components to adjacent construction. C. Installer's qualifications. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Submit copies of operating and maintenance data, for inclusion in maintenance manuals. Include schedule of all routine maintenance required as stipulated by warranties. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Installation work shall only be carried out by the door manufacturer or by an approved installation company properly licensed or franchised by the Manufacturer for installation work. B. Pre-Installation Meetings: 1. Convene a pre-installation meeting one week prior to commencing Work of this Section. 2. Require attendance of parties directly affecting Work of this Section. 3. Review conditions of operations,procedures and coordination with related Work. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Comply with requirements of referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. Store delivered materials and equipment in dry locations with adequate ventilation and protected for dust and water. B. Handle materials carefully to prevent damage. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Door Manufacturer shall provide Owner a written guarantee, warranting the door against any defects of materials and/or workmanship for the new door for a period not less than two (2) years, with proper maintenance commencing from the date of a substantial completion of the project. Motors shall be guaranteed for a period of (1) one year. Manufacturer shall repair or replace defective materials during warranty period at no cost to Owner. B. Door Installer shall provide written guarantee, warranting the door installation against defects in installation of workmanship for a period of two years from the date of substantial completion. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 08 35 11 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRIC OPERATED FOUR-FOLD DOORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Installer shall make all repairs required due to faulty installation, as required to restore doors and controls to perfect operating condition and to repair damage caused by faulty installation, at no cost to Owner. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design: Design for four-fold doors are based on products as manufactured by Door Engineering and Manufacturing, LLC, 400 Cherry Street, Kasota, MN 56050, (800) 959-1352. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named products or approved comparable products by another Manufacturer. 2.02 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Structural Steel: ASTM A36/A36M. B. Steel Sheets: Steel sheets of commercial quality, complying with ASTM A366/A366M cold- rolled steel sheet, or A569/A569M hot-rolled steel sheet. C. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard components. D. Fasteners: Zinc-coated steel. 2.03 FOUR-FOLD DOORS A. Basis of Design: The drawings and specifications are based on 717701 Series", glazed four-fold doors, as manufactured by Door Engineering and Manufacturing, LLC. B. Construction: Door framing of minimum 11 gauge structural steel tube with minimum 14 gauge steel sheet on the exterior and interior faces. Sheeting shall be formed on the vertical edges with no visible welds on the interior or exterior panel faces. Door panels shall have no visible imperfections such as dimples or creases due to manufacturing processes or as a result of shipping. All frames and framing members shall be true to dimension and square in all directions, and no door shall be bowed, warped, or out of line, in the vertical or horizontal plane of the door opening by more than 1/8 inch in 20 feet. Exposed welds ground smooth and flush. Doors fully foam insulated. C. Surface Mounted Tube Frame: Supply pre-hung tube frame system constructed of TS6x4x0.25, designed to anchor to masonry wall construction or weld to steel structure. All hinges, track supports, and operator supports shall be factory attached. D. Door Finish: Factory applied manufacturer's standard exterior grade polyurethane coating, RAL: 7042 "Traffic Gray A." Scratches in finish as a result of shipping and handling will not be accepted. E. Operating Hardware: Hardware shall include guide tracks and brackets, trolleys, center guides, not less than three pairs of jamb and fold hinges per opening, and all bolts, nuts, fasteners, etc. as necessary for complete installation and operation. Jamb hinges shall be dual shear and have two thrust bearings and two needle bearings. Jamb hinges shall be gusseted. Fold hinges shall be dual shear with two thrust bearings. All bearings shall be completely concealed within the hinge barrel. All hinge pins shall be minimum 3/4" diameter hardened steel. F. Weather Stripping: Material shall be adjustable, readily replaceable and provide a substantially weather-tight installation. G. Vision Panels: Provide 1/4" clear tempered Sungate 500 glass by PPG Industries with low emissivity coating on surface#2, or comparable product. Size and shape as detailed in Drawings. H. Vision Panels: Provide 9/16" tinted, hurricane-resistant glazing, of size as shown on the Drawings. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0835 11 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRIC OPERATED FOUR-FOLD DOORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2.04 OPERATOR A. Basis of Design: Provide operators, door engineering and manufacturing as described in this paragraph, or approved equal by another manufacturer. B. Each Four-Fold door shall be operated by an overhead mounted electro-mechanical drive unit designed for high cycle operation. Operator consists of an electric motor, gear reducer, and rotating drive arm. The door shall be operated with connecting rods attached to the rotating drive arm on the operator and to control arms attached to the jamb door section and to the door lintel. The connecting rods shall be positive drive, keeping the door under firm control at all times. The connecting rods shall be fitted with spherical bearings and control arms shall be equipped with oil impregnated bronze bearings on polished shafts. C. Operator shall be instantly reversible, open and close rapidly and start and stop gradually. Operator shall be adjustable to allow door to fully clear the opening. Operator shall automatically lock the door in the closed position. Operator shall be equipped with disengaging mechanism to convert to freewheeling mode for manual operation. D. Electric motor shall be of sufficient size to operate doors under normal operating conditions at no more than 75 percent of rated capacity. The motor shall be wound for three phase 208/260/480 VAC, 60 Hertz operation. E. Electric Controls: Controls shall be furnished by the door manufacturer and shall be complete for each door and built in accordance with the latest NEMA standards. Control circuits shall not exceed a nominal 110 volts. 1. Controls shall include a programmable logic controller with digital message display. Controller shall include programmable close timers and programmable inputs/outputs. 2. Motor starters shall be magnetic reversing, factory wired with overload and under voltage protection and equipped with mechanical interlocks. All control components shall be enclosed in one enclosure with a wiring diagram placed on the inside of the cover. 3. Enclosures shall be NEMA 4 with disconnect switch. 4. Pushbuttons (interior) for each door shall have one momentary pressure three-button, push- button station marked "OPEN", "CLOSE" and "STOP". Push button enclosure shall be NEMA 4. 5. Limit switches shall be provided to stop the travel of the door in its fully open or fully closed position. Provide auxiliary limit switch to be used for HVAC or exhaust removal system. 6. Safety edges: Provide electric safety edges on leading edge of all doors to reverse door upon contact with obstruction. Provide wireless safety edge transmitters with low battery alarm. 7. Photo eyes: Provide interior and exterior thru-beam type photo eyes,NEMA 4 rated. a. outside of the door opening set at 18" A.F.G. for the transmitter and 48" A.F.G. for the receiver. The photo eye will disable the close cycle until the transmitted beam is clear and will reverse the door and return the door the full open position if the transmitted beam is interrupted during the close cycle. b. Safety Presence Sensor - Doors Safety Photo Eye - Doors shall have (1) set of through beam photo eyes on the c. shall have (1) presence sensor on the inside of the door opening installed at 16' (maximum) A.F.F. on the centerline of the door opening and 5' from the inside of the exterior wall. The sensor will disable the door close cycle until the sensor field is clear and will reverse the door and return the door to the full open position if the sensor field is intersected during the close cycle. The sensor must be installed so that the door movement does not intersect the sensor field. There must be a minimum of 2' clearance between the door in the full open position and a vehicle. d. Field verify sensor mounting locations and clearances with owner. 8. Safety Light Curtains: Provide exterior [and interior] wall mounted light curtains at each set four-fold door, NEMA 4 rated, Basis of Design product: Liftmaster Light Curtains, model FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0835 11 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRIC OPERATED FOUR-FOLD DOORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 LC-36A) ancillary entrapment protection devices. Light curtain must be compatible with door operation equipment and controls. a. Light Curtain Devices: A set of fixtures containing 8 optical sensors that form 22 total invisible beams, creating a cross-pattern or netting effect. The light curtain will detect obstructions in the path of the light beams. If an obstruction breaks any light beam while the door is closing, the operator will stop and reverse to the full open position. The invisible light beam must be unobstructed for door operation. 1) Operational Range—3 to 33feet 2) Coverage—36" height with lowest edge 12" AFF. 3) Primary monitoring device—As recommended by manufacturer. 4) Accessories — Manufacturer's Conduit Kit, Plug-In Power Supply, mounting hardware and brackets 9. Safety Presence Sensor - Doors shall have (1) presence sensor on the inside of the door opening installed at 16' (maximum) A.F.F. on the centerline of the door opening and 5' from the inside of the exterior wall. The sensor will disable the door close cycle until the sensor field is clear and will reverse the door and return the door to the full open position if the sensor field is intersected during the close cycle. The sensor must be installed so that the door movement does not intersect the sensor field. There must be a minimum of 2' clearance between the door in the full open position and a vehicle. a. Field verify sensor mounting locations and clearances with owner. 10. Radio controls: Provide one (1) radio receiver and two (2) two button remotes per door. Remotes to open and close doors with single button. 11. Wiring: Door manufacturer shall supply controls only. Contractor shall coordinate interlocking of controls with security grilles as described in Part 1-"Performance Requirements", and shall install controls and furnish and install conduits, relays, wiring, etc. as required for jobsite power and control wiring. 2.05 DOOR CONTROL SYSTEM A. Control Panel shall be UL 508-A in a NEMA TYPE 12 enclosure with a fusible disconnect, 208/240/480/120 control transformer with primary fusing. This system shall be variable speed driven, relay logic with a selector switch for manual or automatic operation of the door when required. Components shall be an integral part of the panel and mounted to enable replacement. All wiring shall be neatly grouped and placed in wire duct in a neat and workmanship like manner and wired to a coded terminal strip. B. Pushbutton Station - Doors shall have a NEMA TYPE 12 three unit "Open"-"Close"-"Stop" pushbutton station installed on the inside of the building. Location to be determined by the owner adjacent to each door, and master button for all four-fold doors at the North air lock vestibule. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install Four-Fold metal doors in strict accordance with the approved drawings by qualified door erection crews. All door openings shall be completely prepared by the Contractor prior to the installation of the doors. Permanent electric wiring shall be brought to the door opening before installation is started and shall be completed so as not to delay the inspection test. B. Install doors, guides, steel supports, operating hardware and electric controls. Provide required fastening devices,hangers,bolts, etc. 1. Install units to fit into jambs and head of frames and ensure smooth operation under all conditions of operation. C. Doors shall be set plumb, level, and square with all parts properly fastened and mounted. All moving parts shall be tested, adjusted and left in perfect operating condition. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0835 11 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRIC OPERATED FOUR-FOLD DOORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Inspection of the doors and a complete operating test will be made by the installer in the presence of the General Contractor and owner as soon as the erection is complete. Any defects noted shall be corrected. The General Contractor shall be responsible to protect the doors from any damage or rough handling for the remainder of the construction period until the building is turned over to the owner and final inspection is made. B. Clean surfaces and repaint abraded or damaged finished surfaces to match factory-applied finish. 3.03 DEMONSTRATION A. Test and operate doors and demonstrate the operation of same to satisfaction of Owner at time of acceptance of completed work. Train owner in user-programable and safety features of the doors. END OF SECTION 08 35 13 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0835 11 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRIC OPERATED FOUR-FOLD DOORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 08 41 13 - ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide storefront (including aluminum doors and hardware), framing complete with glazing as shown on the drawings and as herein specified. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 05 Section- "Metal Fabrications". 2. Division 06 Section- "Rough Carpentry". 3. Division 06 Section- "Quartz Countertops and Stools". 4. Division 07 Section- "Thermal Insulation". 5. Division 07 Section- "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim". 6. Division 07 Section- "Joint Sealants". 7. Division 07 Section- "Firestopping". 8. Division 08 Section- "Metal Windows",for manufactured window units. 9. Division 08 Section- "Door Hardware". 10. Division 08 Section- "Glazing". 11. Division 12 Section- "Window Treatments". 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Delegated Design: Design aluminum-framed systems, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated. B. General Performance: Aluminum-framed systems shall withstand the effects of the following performance requirements without exceeding performance criteria or failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction: 1. Movements of supporting structure indicated on Drawings including, but not limited to, story drift and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads. 2. Dimensional tolerances of building frame and other adjacent construction. 3. Failure includes the following: a. Deflection exceeding specified limits. b. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. c. Framing members transferring stresses, including those caused by thermal and structural movements to glazing. d. Glass breakage. e. Noise or vibration created by wind and by thermal and structural movements. f. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components. g. Sealant failure. h. Failure of operating units. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0841 13 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Structural Loads: 1. Wind Loads: As required by authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings. D. Deflection of Framing Members: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass plane shall not exceed L/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing liter to 3/4 inch, whichever is less. 2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to L/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is smaller. a. Operable Units: Provide a minimum 1/16 inch clearance between framing members and operable units. E. Structural-Test Performance: Provide aluminum-framed systems tested according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems do not evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, systems, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, and permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span. 3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity,but not fewer than 10 seconds. F. Air Infiltration: 1. Fixed Framing: Provide aluminum-framed systems with maximum air leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas of 0.06 cfin/sq. ft. of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 6.24 psf. 2. Entrance Doors: Maximum air leakage of 1.0 cfm/sq. ft. for pair of doors, and maximum of 0.5 cfm/sq. ft. for a single door, at a static air pressure differential of 6.24 psf. A. Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Provide aluminum-framed systems that do not evidence water Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F,material surfaces. 2. Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 deg F. B. Brake metal oil canning that may be caused by design wind loads. Additionally, thickness may be greater but shall not be less than minimum thicknesses as specified elsewhere in these specifications, or minimum thicknesses as indicated in Drawings. Contractor shall include necessary thicknesses in his bid.Brake Metal: Provide in thicknesses as required to prevent oil canning,including for exterior 1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum static-air-pressure difference of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure,but not less than 8 psf. D. Windborne-Debris Impact Resistance: Pass missile-impact and cyclic-pressure tests when tested according to ASTM E 1886 and testing information in ASTM E 1996 for Wind Zone 3. 1. Large-Missile Test: For glazed openings located within 30 feet of grade. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0841 13 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. Thermal Movements: Provide aluminum-framed systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change(range)in ambient and surface temperatures. F. Shop drawings and details based on the Contract Documents submitted to the Architect for review. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, and attachments to other work. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal,weather, and air barriers. G. Samples for initial Selection: Manufacturer's standard color selector sheets or factory applied selector plates. Website or print media other than Manufacturer's provided materials do not represent accurate color renditions and are not acceptable. H. Samples for verification: 1. Submit three samples of each required aluminum finish on aluminum plates or extrusions. LEntrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, door hardware, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware. Submit for concurrent review with other door and hardware submittals. 1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For Installer. B. Professional engineer's experience with providing delegated-design engineering services of the kind indicated, including documentation that engineer is licensed in the [jurisdiction] [state] in which Project is located. C. Energy Performance Certificates: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each aluminum- framed entrance and storefront. Compliant with local code requirements and as specified herein,whichever is more stringent. D. Product Test Reports: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or by a qualified testing agency. E. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.06 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to include in maintenance manuals. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator and Installer: Shall have a minimum of 5 years experience on projects of similar size and scope. Installer shall be approved by Manufacturer. B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals, to demonstrate typical construction and waterproofing details, and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. Build mockups at typical wall locations as located by Architect. Approved mockups may become part of the final work if undisturbed at Substantial Completion. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0841 13 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays. B. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened,undamaged containers with identification labels intact. C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions. Handle material and components to avoid damage. Protect curtain wall material against damage from elements, construction activities, and other hazards before, during and after curtain wall installation. 1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of structural supports for aluminum-framed systems by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings. 1.10 GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY A. Installer shall submit a written guarantee to the Owner, guaranteeing storefront system for a period of 2 years against leaks and defects in the system. B. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed systems that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Structural failures including,but not limited to, excessive deflection. 2. Noise or vibration caused by thermal movements. 3. Deterioration of metals,metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Water leakage through fixed glazing and framing areas. 5. Failure of operating components. 6. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Door manufacturer's warranty shall provide for a period of [2][5][10] years from date of Substantial Completion. All hardware installed by manufacturer shall be covered by warranty. D. Manufacturer's Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's standard limited warranty against fade, chalk, crack, check, peel, and failure of coatings to adhere to metal. Warranty duration as follows: 1. Anodic Finish: 5 years from date of delivery. 2. Fluropolymer Finish: 10 years from date of delivery. 1.11 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Entrance Door Hardware: 1. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of entrance door hardware. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis-of-Design Product: 2" x 4-1/2" storefront glazing system, thermally broken at exterior. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide TRIFAB VG451T system as manufactured by Kawneer Company, or comparable product by one of the following: 1. EFCO Corporation. 2. Oldcastle Building Envelope. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0841 13 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. CRL-US Aluminum. 4. YKK AP America. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. 1. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Bars, Rods,Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221. 3. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429. 4. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 3088 308M. 5. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: AWS A5.I O/A5.I OM. B. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer, complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. 1. Structural Shapes,Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 2. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. 3. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M. 2.03 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members and Brake Metal Fillers: Manufacturer's standard extruded-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads. 1. Construction: Thermally broken at exterior framing, non-thermal broken at building interior. 2. Glazing Plane: Center. B. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining,nonferrous shims for aligning system components. C. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and structural movements,wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, finished to match framing system, fabricated from stainless steel. D. Aluminum subsills: Provide Manufacturer's subsills where framing sits on slab, and other locations as required by Manufacturer. Manufacturer's subsill does not constitute a substitute for the continuous aluminum sill flashing with end dams as indicated in Drawings. E. Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts, complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M, F. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials. G. Framing System Gaskets and Sealants: Manufacturer's standard, recommended by manufacturer for joint type. 2.04 GLAZING SYSTEMS A. Glazing: As specified in Division 8 Section"Glazing." B. Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard compression types; replaceable, molded or extruded, of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0841 13 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Spacers and Setting Blocks: Manufacturer's standard elastomeric type. 2.05 ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS A. Thermally Broken Entrance Doors (Exterior Doors): Basis of Design — Kawneer 350 IR Insulpour Thermal Entrance doors for manual-swing operation. 1. Door Construction: Minimum of 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members, with glazing pockets sized for specified insulated glazing. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. 2. Door Design: Wide stile; 5-inch nominal width. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door. B. Entrance Doors (Interior Doors): Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual- swing operation. 1. Door Construction: Minimum of 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members, with glazing pockets sized for specified glazing. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods. 2. Door Design: Wide stile; 5-inch nominal width. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Square, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets. a. Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door. C. Entrance Door Hardware: Factory install entrance door hardware provided by Manufacturer to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes 1. Weather-stripping / gasketing: Manufacturer's standard replacement stripping of molded neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM D-2000. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable strip and mortised into door edge. 2. Strikes: Provide strike with black-plastic dust box for each latch or lock bolt; fabricated for aluminum framing. 3. At double doors specified to receive removeable mullions, provide filler blocks as required for complete support above removable mullion top brackets. 4. Refer to Division 08, Section"Door Hardware" for more information. 5. Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. 2.06 ACCESSORY MATERIALS A. Aluminum Trim: Provide brake metal trim in locations specifically shown in Drawings and other locations as required for complete installation. Thicknesses indicated in Drawings and specifications are minimum thicknesses regardless of minimum thickness to prevent oil canning. Provide greater thickness than indicated minimum thicknesses where required to prevent oil canning. Contractor is responsible to determine required thicknesses per delegated design requirements (refer to Part 1 of these specifications). B. Aluminum Sills: Where indicated in Drawings, (or where sill dimension is too small for solid surface, quartz), provide interior aluminum window sills with nominal 2" vertical return at inside face of wall, hemmed bottom edge, and hemmed and closed ends. Match finish of adjacent window. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0841 13 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Anchoring Devices: Provide plates, angles, steel frame bracing, wind bracing, spacers, clips and other devices necessary to support aluminum framing and glass. Design of connections shall be fabricator's responsibility. Submit shop drawing for approval. D. Joint Sealants: For installation at perimeter of aluminum-framed systems, as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Provide sealants for use inside of the weatherproofing system that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D(EPA Method 24). E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied, asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos; formulated for 30-mil thickness per coat. F. Security Screens: Refer to Division 08, Section"Security Screens". 2.07 FABRICATION A. Foran or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing. B. Weld in concealed locations to greatest extent possible to minimize distortion or discoloration of finish. Remove weld spatter and welding oxides from exposed surfaces by descaling or grinding. C. Framing Members, General: Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Profiles with solid back extrusions, or with filler plates, as required to receive membrane flashings at jamb flashings (locations where metal jamb flashing is not otherwise indicated). 3. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 4. Means to drain water passing joints, condensation within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. 5. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members. 6. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances. 7. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior. 8. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent possible. D. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops. E. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware. F. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. G. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes. H. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings. 2.08 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. Clear or Color Anodic Finish (interior): AA-M12C22A31/A32/A34, AAMA 611, Architectural Class I Clear Anodic Coating. Class II for interior storefront. 1. Color: Black anodized. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0841 13 - 7 MAY 2, 2023 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer's full range. C. (Exterior) Kynar 500 / Hylar 5000 finish / In-House Spray Applied Flouropolymer 4 Coat 70% PVDF conforming to AAMA 2605. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions. 1. Color: As selected by Architect from Manufacturer's full range of colors. D. Miscellaneous Steel Bracing(Concealed): One(1) shop coat of red oxide primer. E. Source Quality Control: Representative samples of color anodized finish shall meet or exceed following tests: ASTM B224, thickness of coating; and ASTM B117, neutral salt spray. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic deterioration. 6. Seal joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. C. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. D. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. E. Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades, and without warp or rack. F. Install glazing as specified in Division 8 Section "Glazing." G. Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points. 1. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible. H. Install perimeter joint sealants as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0841 13 - 8 MAY 2, 2023 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 I.Prepare windows for installation of security screen. 3.03 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Install aluminum-framed systems to comply with the following maximum erection tolerances: 1. Location and Plane: Limit variation from true location and plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/4 inch over total length. 2. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch. b. Where surfaces meet at corners,limit offset from true alignment to 1/32 inch. B. Diagonal Measurements: Limit difference between diagonal measurements to 1/8 inch. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following test on mockups and representative areas of glazed aluminum curtain walls. 1. Air Infiltration: ASTM E 783 at 1.5 times the rate specified for laboratory testing in "Performance Requirements" Article but not more than 0.09 cfm/sq. ft. at a static- airpressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. a. Mockups: Test mockups. b. Representative Areas: For each system type, perform a minimum of three tests in areas as directed by Architect. c. Failed Tests: Perform one additional test at location selected by Architect for each failed test. 2. Water Penetration: ASTM E 1105 at a minimum uniform and cyclic static-air-pressure differential of 0.67 times the static-air-pressure differential specified for laboratory testing in "Performance Requirements" Article,but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft., and shall not evidence water infiltration to the building interior; any water intrusion to the building interior is a test failure. a. Locations: Same areas as air infiltration tests. b. Failed Tests: Perform one additional test at location selected by Architect for each failed test. C. Structural-Sealant Adhesion: Test structural sealant according to recommendations in ASTM C 1401, Destructive Test Method A, "Hand Pull Tab(Destructive)," Appendix X2. 1. Test a minimum of five areas on each building facade as directed by Architect. 2. Repair installation areas damaged by testing. D. Glazed aluminum curtain walls will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections. 1. Submit reports for each inspection, describing problems observed and corrections made. E. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine if replaced or additional work complies with specified requirements. 3.05 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating entrance door hardware to function smoothly as recommended by manufacturer. 1. For entrance doors accessible to people with disabilities, adjust closers to provide a 3- second closer sweep period for doors to move from a 70-degree open position to 3 inches from the latch,measured to the leading door edge. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0841 13 - 9 MAY 2, 2023 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.06 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect aluminum framing and/or doors during construction by masking members with approved cardboard and paper as recommended by manufacturer. Take particular care in protecting openings and doors from damage during construction. B. Upon completion,remove trimmings and other debris. Replace broken, scratched, chipped or other damaged glazing. Remove excessive sealant, mastic and other marks from adjacent surfaces, and wash with clean water. Cleaning of glazing must be done in strict compliance with manufacturer's recommendations. C. Remove and replace glass that has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during the construction period. END OF SECTION 08 41 13 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0841 13 - 10 MAY 2, 2023 ALUMINUM ENTRANCES & STOREFRONT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 08 42 13 - WIND AND IMPACT RESISTANT ALUMINUM FRAMING SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Impact and wind resistant aluminum storefront framing and glazing assemblies. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section- "Storm Shelter Quality Assurance Plan". 2. Division 04 Section- "Unit Masonry Assemblies" 3. Division 05 Section- "Metal Fabrications". 4. Division 06 Section- "Rough Carpentry". 5. Division 07 Section- "Thermal Insulation". 6. Division 07 Section- "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim". 7. Division 07 Section- "Joint Sealants". 8. Division 08 Section- "Glazing". 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of framing and glazing including manufacturer recommended installation instructions. B. Delegated Design: For assembly indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including structural calculations signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, attachment to other work and glazing details for field-glazed units. D. Samples for initial selection: Manufacturer's standard color selector sheets or factory applied selector plates. Website or print media other than Manufacturer's provided materials do not represent accurate color renditions and are not acceptable. E. Samples for verification: 1. Submit three samples of each required aluminum finish on aluminum plates or extrusions. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Product Test Reports: For tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or by a qualified testing agency,indicating compliance with requirements. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT 421085 0842 13 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 WIND AND IMPACT RESISTANT ALUMINUM FRAMING SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Energy Performance Certificates: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each aluminum- framed entrance and storefront. Compliant with local code requirements and as specified herein,whichever is more stringent. C. Warranty: Sample of finish warranty. D. Special Inspection Report: As indicated in Drawings to comply with Storm Shelter Quality Assurance Plan. 1.05 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Maintenance data: For each type of framing and glazing to include in maintenance manuals. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays. B. Packing, Shipping, Handling, and Unloading: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened,undamaged containers with identification labels intact. C. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions. Handle material and components to avoid damage. Protect curtain wall material against damage from elements, construction activities, and other hazards before, during and after curtain wall installation. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Framing: Manufacturer's warranty against defects in material and workmanship under normal use for a period of 2 year from the date of invoice. B. Finish Warranty: Manufacturer's warranty against deterioration of factory finishes for the period of 10 years from the date of invoice. C. Glass Warranty: Manufacturer's warranty against defects in material and workmanship resulting in edge separation or delamination for a period of 5 years from the date of invoice. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 FRAMING A. Basis of Design: StormDefendTM SD-TH600 Aluminum FEMA Tornado Window Framing System by Protective Structures, Jasper, GA. Phone: (888) 521-8666; Email: info@protectivestructures.com; Website: www.protectivestructures.com. B. Description: 1. Factory fabricated framing constructed from either 6005-T5 or 6105-T5 extruded aluminum with integral weep design to allow water to vent to the exterior along horizontal members. 2. Dimensions: a. Head, Jamb, Sill, Mullion and Intermediate Horizontal Members: 2-1/2 inches by 6 inches 2.02 GLAZING A. Glazing Material: Impact-Resistant, Laminated Polycarbonate FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT 421085 0842 13 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 WIND AND IMPACT RESISTANT ALUMINUM FRAMING SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Wind and Impact Laminated Polycarbonate Units: TOR-GARD NBR2 (clear). 2.03 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA A. Indicated areas of this project have been designed for occupancy as a storm shelter. The Work identified in this Section is a component of the storm shelter as follows: 1. Type of Shelter: Tornado. B. Shelter Design Wind Speeds: As indicated on Drawings C. Debris Hazard 1. FEMA 361 Compliant: Pass missile-impact tests according to FEMA 361 / ICC 500- 2014 in accordance with: a. ASTM E1886 - Standard Test Method For Performance Of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors And Impact Protective Systems Impacted By Missiles and Exposed To Cyclic Pressure Differentials b. ASTM E1996 - Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors and Impact Protective Systems Impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes. 2. Tornado: Resists impact of a 15 pound 2 by 4 at 100 MPH D. Pressure Testing 1. FEMA 361 Compliant: Pass static pressure tests and cyclic tests according to FEMA 361/ICC 500-2014 in accordance with: a. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method For Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference b. ASTM E1886 - Standard Test Method For Performance Of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors And Impact Protective Systems Impacted By Missiles and Exposed To Cyclic Pressure Differentials 2.04 FABRICATION A. Tolerances: All joints and connections shall be tight, providing hairline joints and true alignment of adjacent members 2.05 FRAMING FINISH A. Factory-applied finish: 1. PVDF-Based Coating: Fluoropolymer finish containing minimum 70 percent PVDF resins, in accordance with AAMA 2605 "Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performance Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels" a. Coats: two, three or four coat system, as required for color selected. b. Color: as selected by Architect. 2.06 ACCESSORIES A. Anchors: Fully concealed in accordance with requirements of delegated design requirements. 1. Steel extension anchor plates as required by delegated design. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Verify field dimensions of opening prior to fabrication of windows. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT 421085 0842 13 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 WIND AND IMPACT RESISTANT ALUMINUM FRAMING SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Prepare openings to be in tolerance, plumb, level, provide for secure anchoring, and in accordance with approved shop drawings. C. Coordinate structural requirements to ensure proper attachment and support. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install windows in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and approved shop drawings. B. Provide required support and securely fasten and set windows plumb, square, and level without twist or bow. C. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum will contact dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with primer or applying sealant or tape, or by installing nonconductive spacers as recommended by manufacturer for this purpose. 2. Where aluminum will contact concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint. D. Install components to drain water passing joints, condensation occurring within framing members, and moisture migrating within the system to exterior. E. Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" to produce weathertight installation. F. Apply sealant per window and sealant manufacturer's recommendations at all specified areas as shown on shop drawings and detailed in installation instructions. Wipe off excess, and leave exposed sealant surfaces clean and smooth. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Windows shall be field tested in accordance with Division 01 requirements. 1. Owner will engage a testing agency to conduct testing. 2. Owner shall pay for successful tests, Contractor shall pay for additional testing required due to failure to pass tests. 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Leave windows clean and free of construction debris. Strictly adhere to the manufacturer's recommended cleaning and maintenance instructions. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect window glazing and frames from damage during subsequent construction activities. If damage occurs, remove and replace as required at no additional cost to the Owner to provide windows in their original,undamaged condition. END OF SECTION 08 42 13 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT 421085 0842 13 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 WIND AND IMPACT RESISTANT ALUMINUM FRAMING SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 08 45 13 - TRANSLUCENT WALL ASSEMBLIES - HVHZ PART 1—GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. Section includes requirements for translucent wall system as shown and specified herein. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Design, engineer,manufacture and installation of unitized double glazed insulated translucent curtain wall system. B. All anchors,brackets, and hardware attachments necessary to complete the specified structural assembly,weatherability, and water-tightness performance requirements. All flashing up to but not penetrating adjoining work are also required as part of the system and shall be included. C. Trained and factory authorized labor and supervision to complete the entire panel installation. 1.3 RELATED WORK ELSEWHERE A. Structural Steel, Section 05 12 00 B. Sheet Metal and Flashing, Section 07 62 00 C. Joint Sealant, Section 07 92 00 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The glazing panels must be evaluated and listed by recognized building code evaluation organization: International Council Evaluation Service Inc (ICC-ES). B. Materials and products shall be manufactured by a company continuously and regularly employed in the manufacturing, engineering, and designing, stocking and building of unitized translucent curtain walls for a period of at least ten(10)years. C. Erection shall be by a factory-approved installer who has been in the business of erecting similar material for at least five(5) consecutive years and can show evidence of satisfactory completion of projects of similar size, scope, and type. D. The manufacturer shall be responsible for the configuration and fabrication of the complete panel system,in accordance with the requirements of this specification. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings of translucent wall panel layout and details for all conditions shown on drawings. B. Manufacturer shall submit written guarantee accompanied by substantiating data, stating that the products to be furnished are in accordance with or exceed these specifications. C. Manufacturer shall submit full warranty terms and conditions for verification of compliance with the requirements of this specification. D. Submittal: For glazing assemblies indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria. Include analysis data signed and sealed by a professional engineer licensed in the state of the project's location FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 13 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 TRANSCLUCENT WALL ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. The manufacturer shall submit certified test reports made by an independent organization. Reports shall verify that the material will meet all performance requirements of this specification.Previously completed reports will be acceptable if they are indicative of the products used on this project. Test reports required are: 1. Self-Ignition Temperature(ASTM 1929). 2. Burning Extent(ASTM D-635). 3. Smoke Density(ASTM E-84). 4. Interior Flame Spread(ASTM E-84). 5. Color Difference (ASTM D-2244). 6. Tests on a weathered system after approximately 10 years of actual exposure in Florida field conditions. Test shall include: a. Uniform Static Air Pressure (ASTM E-330). b. Impact Loading(ASTM E-695). c. Cyclic Static Air Pressure and Missile Impact Level D (ASTM 1886&E- 1996). 7. Weather evaluation before and after exposure to 300°F for 25 minutes. Include light transmission and color change(ASTM E-1175 and ASTM D-2244,respectively). 8. Large missile Test-Impact resistance(SFBC PA 201-94). 9. Impact Loading(ASTM E-695). 10. Insulation U-Value for Center of Glazing(NFRC 100). 11. Insulation U-Value for System, glazing and aluminum framing(NFRC 100 and 700 Certification). 12. Visible Light Transmission(VT) (ASTM E-972 and E-1084). 13. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient(SHGC)based on tests or calculations which are based on tests per methodology and procedure given in the NFRC/Calorimeter Standard. 14. Maximum Air Infiltration Rate for fenestration assemblies of curtain walls, (NFRC 400 or ASTM E-283). 15. Water Penetration(ASTM E-331). 16. Load Bearing Ability(ASTM E-330). 17. Cyclic static air pressure and Missile Impact Level D for exterior windows and curtain walls (ASTM 1886 &E-1996). 18. Haze for glare measurement(ASTM D-1003). 19. ICC Evaluation Service Report(ICC-ESR)for compliance with IBC Building Code. 20. Sound Transmission Loss (STC)per ASTM E413 21. Environmental Product Declaration(EPD) for submitted product with Life Cycle Assessment(LCA),Product Category Rule ISO 21930,Independent verification (external) ISO 14025 22. Florida Product approval FL#17695 UniQuad-Unitized Wall System 23. TDI Certification Documentation 1.6 MAINTENANCE DATA A. The manufacturer shall provide recommended maintenance procedures, schedule of maintenance and materials required or recommended for maintenance. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 13 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 TRANSCLUCENT WALL ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Submit installer certificate signed by installer, certifying compliance with project qualification requirements. 1.7 WARRANTY A. Provide a single source translucent wall system manufacturer warranty against defective materials and fabrication. Submit manufacturer's written warranty agreeing to repair failures in materials within one (1)year from date of substantial completion. B. Provide the following single source curtain wall manufacturer glazing warranties. Third party warranties shall not be acceptable. All warranties shall be maintained without the requirement for periodic re-application of a UV-stabilizing exterior coat. The expected humidity of the enclosed space shall not affect warranty length or limitations. 1. Provide a lifetime warranty for both interior and exterior glazing covering: a. Delamination of the glazing from the internal structure. b. Fiberbloom; development of a rough exterior surface. 2. Provide a ten(10)warranty on the interior and exterior glazing panels covering: a. Change in light transmission of no more than 6%per ASTM D-1003. b. Color stability: interior glazing shall not change color more than 6 CIE Units DELTA E by ASTM D-2244. C. In addition, submit installer's written warranty agreeing to repair installation workmanship, defects and leaks within one year from date of substantial completion. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER A. Basis of design 1. The design and performance criteria of this job are based on the UniQuad—Translucent Wall System- as manufactured by Kingspan Light+Air I Architectural Daylighting a. Phone: (800) 759-6965; Website: www.kingsspanlightandainus B. Approved Manufacturers 1. Other manufacturers may bid this project provided they comply with all requirements of the specification and submit evidence of compliance with all performance criteria specified herein. This evidence must include proof of conformance and test reports per section 1.5. Any exceptions taken from this specification must be noted on the approval request. If no exceptions are noted and approval is given,product performance will be as specified. 2. Listing manufacturers names in this specification does not constitute approval of their products or relieve them of compliance with all the performance requirements contained herein. 2.2 TRANSLUCENT CURTAIN WALL PERFORMANCE AND APPEARANCE FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 13 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 TRANSCLUCENT WALL ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Glazing construction for weatherability and resistance to buckling and pressure 1. Translucent glazing must be constructed of polycarbonate with tight cell sizes not exceeding 0.18". Wide cells of size greater than 0.18"shall not be acceptable. 2. Glazing shall be factory sealed to restrict dirt ingress. 3. Glazing must be manufactured with a permanent, co-extruded ultra-violet protective layer. Post-applied coatings or films of dissimilar materials that need to be maintained are unacceptable. 4. The light transmission shall not decrease more than 6% as measured by ASTM D-1003 over 10 years, or after exposure to temperature of 300° for 25 minutes(thermal aging performance standard). 5. The weathering performance should be justified by successful testing of the glazing's performance after exposure to actual Florida weather conditions for approximately 10 years in comparison to a new glazing assembly. This performance must be demonstrated by providing independent lab test reports for the exposed and a new panel assembly for the following tests; test results must show that there is no deterioration in performance for the 10 year's exposed panels versus new: a. Uniform static air pressure per ASTM E-330 at negative load of-105 PSF and positive load of 130 PSF. b. Impact loading of 500 ft lbs.per ASTM E-695. c. Cyclic static air pressure at 65 PSF and impact lever D per ASTM 1886 and ASTM E-1996. 6. Glazing shall not become readily detached when exposed to temperatures of 300°F and 0°F for 25 minutes. 7. Thermal aging—the interior and exterior glazing shall not change color in excess of 0.75 Delta E per ASTM D-2244 and shall not darken more than 0.3 units Delta L per ASTM D-2244 and shall allow no cracking or crazing when exposed to 300°F for 25 minutes. B. Translucent glazing assemblies—Unitized Double Glazed 1. Design, engineer,manufacture, and installation of unitized double-glazed translucent wall system. An assembly of two independent insulated glazing panes in one integrated assembly, incorporated into a complete aluminum frame system that has been tested and warranted by the manufacturer as a single source system. Design shall provide for the replacement of the exterior glazing, independently of the interior glazing without exposing the building's interior or compromising the weather tightness or interfering with the normal working functions of the building. Single pane glazing systems are not acceptable. 2. Overall glazing assembly thickness shall be a minimum 2.75",with two glazing panes and concealed interlocking connector. Thickness of the exterior and interior glazing shall be minimum 8mm thick each. C. Thermal and Solar Performance 1. To ensure Energy Code compliance,product U-Values must be listed in the NFRC Product Directory and have a NFRC Certified Product Directory(CPD)number. a. Basis of Design CPD Number: CPI-M-3 /CPI-M-5 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 13 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 TRANSCLUCENT WALL ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Center of glazing U-Value per NFRC 100: Maxiinum .23. 3. System U-Value per NFRC 100 and 700 with a Mill finish: Maximum .28. 4. Each unitized glazing assembly shall be thermally broken. 5. Visible Light Transmission-Center of Glass (VT%) 0.10-0.33 Per ASTM E-972 and E-1084. 6. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient(SHGC) 0.22-0.35 per NFRC Calorimeter. 7. Haze measurement minimum of 90%per ASTM D-1003. 8. Standard exterior glazing color at"Clear"locations: Clear Matte 9. Standard interior glazing color at"Clear"locations: Clear Matte 10. Standard exterior glazing color at"White"locations: Ice White Matte 11. Standard interior glazing color at"White" locations: Ice White Matte D. Translucent Glazing Joint System 1. Water penetration: no water penetration of the glazing joint connection length at test pressure of 6.24 PSF per ASTM E-331. 2. Air Infiltration:pass requirements of NFRC 400 at 1.57 PSF and 6.24 PSF. 3. Free movement of the glazing shall be allowed to occur without damage to the weather tightness of the completed system. 4. The glazing joint shall comply with the deflection limitation of IBC Table 1604.3 for exterior walls with flexible finishes-L/120 per ASTM E-330. E. Impact Resistance 1. Minimum Impact resistance of 350 ft. lbs.per SFBC-PA 201-94. 2. Minimum Impact loading of 500 ft. lbs.per ASTM E-695. 3. Must comply with standard specification for performance of exterior windows or curtain walls when impacted by windborne debris at level D and after cyclic wind loading at the specified design load(ASTM E1996-02). 2.3 METAL FRAME STRUCTURE A. Design criteria shall be per structural notes page. B. The translucent wall light framing is designed to be self-supporting between the support constructions. The deflection of the glazing panel joint and system framing members in a direction normal to the plane of the glazing,when subjected to a uniform load deflection, shall not exceed L/120 for the unsupported span per IBC'fable 1604.3. All adjacent and support construction must support the transfer of all loads included horizontal and vertical, exerted by the system. Design or structural engineering services for the supporting structure or building components in not included in the curtain wall scope of this section C. All system aluminum framing exposed to the exterior shall be thermally broken. D. Water penetration: the curtain wall system shall allow no water penetration at a minimum differential static pressure of 6.24 PSF per AAMA 501 pressure difference recommendations and as demonstrated by prior testing of typical framing sample per ASTM E-331 E. Water test of meal frame structure shall be conducted according to procedures in AAMA 501.2. F. Maximum air infiltration rate for fenestration of the two glazing assemblies of curtain wall system shall be per NFRC 400. FIRE STATION NO.3;PRUJKT#21'085 13 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 TRANSCLUCENT WALL ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2.4 METAL MATERIALS A. Extruded aluminum shall be ANSI/ASTM B-221; 6063-T6 or 6005-T5. B. Flashing: 1. 5005 H34 Aluminum .040"thick 2. Sheet metal sill flashings are to be furnished shop formed to profile-when lengths exceed l Oft,provide in nominal l Oft lengths. Field trimming of the flashing and field forming the ends is necessary to suit as-built conditions. Sheet metal ends are to overlap at least 6in to 8in, set in a full bed of sealant and riveted if required. C. All fasteners for aluminum framing to be stainless steel or cadmium plated steel, excluding the final fasteners to the building. D. All exposed Aluminum shall be finished: 1. Painted finish as per performance requirement: 3 coat AAMA 2605 with a 10yr warranty. a. Paint color to be selected from Manufacture's standards. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. General contractor to verify when structural support is ready to receive all work in the section and to convene a pre-installation conference at least one week prior to commencing work of this section. Attendance required of the general contractor, curtain wall installer and all parties affecting and effected by the work of this section. B. All submitted opening sizes, dimensions and tolerances are to be field verified by the general contractor unless otherwise stipulated. C. Installer shall examine area of installation to verify readiness of site conditions. Notify the general contractor about any defects requiring correction. Do not work until conditions are satisfactory. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install components in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions an approved shop drawings. Use proper fasteners, caulking and hardware for material attachments as specified. B. Use methods of attachment to structure allowing sufficient adjustment to accommodate tolerances. C. Remove all protective coverings on panels immediately after installation. 3.3 CLEANING A. Follow manufacturer's instructions when washing down exposed panel surfaces using a solution of mild detergent in warin water that is applied with soft, cleaning wiping cloths. Always test a small area before applying to an entire area. B. Follow strict panel manufacturer guidelines when removing foreign substances from panel surfaces requiring mineral spirits or any solvents that are acceptable for use. Always test a small sample to validate compliance before applying to the entire glazing surface. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 13 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 TRANSCLUCENT WALL ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Installer shall leave glazing system clean at completion of installation. Final cleaning is by others upon completion of project,following manufacturer's cleaning instructions. END OF SECTION FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 13 - 7 MAY 2, 2023 TRANSCLUCENT WALL ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 08 51 00 - METAL WINDOWS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Encompasses the furnishing of all materials and equipment and performing of all labor required to complete the window work and replacement window work as indicated on the Drawings, as specified herein, or both. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 4 Section "Masonry." 2. Division 6 Section "Wood Blocking." 3. Division 8 Section "Security Screens." 4. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Wallboard." 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver windows to project site in undamaged condition. B. Store windows out of contact with ground. C. Keep windows under weathertight covering and protect against damage. 1.04 PROTECTION A. Handle to avoid injury to persons and to avoid damage to materials or to work in place. Satisfactorily repair or remove and replace work that has been damaged at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings: Complete detailing showing placement and erection plans; all member sizes, locations, anchorages, connections and methods of assembly. Contractor shall review and verify these shop drawings, then submit to Architect for approval. Review Architect comments on submittals prior to fabrication. B. Samples: Submit one complete unit of each type,in finish specified, for use in mockup panel. C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature for glass and sealant products. D. Certification: Submit manufacturer's certification and test reports that materials and systems meet specification requirements and design criteria. 1.06 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas that are to receive windows. Report unsatisfactory conditions. B. Do not start installation of windows until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0851 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 METAL WINDOWS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide Owner a written warranty, signed by an officer of manufacturing company providing windows, that shall warrant completed system to be free of leaks and defects in material and workmanship for a period of 5 years after acceptance. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: Aluminum windows of the types and sizes shown in the plans or as called for in this specification shall conform with all requirements of the ANSI/AAMA, 101-85, specification DH-A2-C35, and TDI certified testing. B. Specifications for Aluminum Windows ANSI A134.1 C. Air Infiltration Test: The window shall be subjected to an air infiltration test in accordance with ASTM E283. At a test pressure of 1.56 pounds per square foot(psf) there shall be less than .10 cfm/ft. infiltration. D. Water Resistant Test: The window shall be subject to a water resistance test in accordance with ASTM E331-70. There shall be no leakage as defined in the test method at a static pressure of 6.24 pounds per square foot(psf). E. Uniform Load Structural Test: The unit shall be subjected to a minimum load pressure of 30 pounds per square foot (both interior and exterior loads) for a period of 10 seconds, in accordance with ASTM E 330-70. F. All windows shall meet or exceed A.A.M.A. standards and A.N.S.1. standards. G. All glazing and glass shall be in accordance with the local building code or the federal glazing standards set forth in "Safety Standards for Architectural Glazing Materials" (16 CFG 1201)whichever is most stringent. H. Reference Standards: 1. ANSI A134.1 - Specifications for Aluminum Windows 2. FS L-S-12513 - Screening, Insect,Non-Metalic. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Alenco 1000, EFCO 620 or approved equivalent models of Milco, Capital Windows and Doors,All Seasons, or other approved equals. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Window Frames and Sash Members shall be of commercial quality 6063-T5 extruded aluminum in accordance with AAMA specifications, with commercial tolerances and shall have a minimum nominal wall thickness of .062" except frame sill which shall be .094" nominal thickness and fixed meeting rail shall be minimum .078". The perimeter of sash shall be completely weather-stripped. Balances shall allow full removal of sash from interior for cleaning and sash replacement. Balances shall be replaceable. Integral lift rail shall be the length of sash sill. Sizes of openings and existing conditions will vary. All windows shall be true 4 over 4 divided lite with muntins. Provide extension system for complete installation. The Contractor shall field verify all conditions and sizes prior to fabrication. Provide closed tubular framing to match profiles of typical window for arch openings. B. Glazing Material: Adequate provision shall be made for use of glazing compound. The glazing material shall be suited for use with the applicable material. Windows shall be factory glazed. Window units shall provide for reglazing from the interior with special tool with-out removal or dismantling of any portion of the window frame or sash. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0851 00 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 METAL WINDOWS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Glass: Glass installed in windows shall meet FS DD-G-451 C and not be less than"B" quality. Standard factory glazing shall be "DSB" 1/8" thick clear float glass minimum or as required by code. D. Panning System: Extruded aluminum casing of thickness not less than .078" to full cover sills. Panning system shall be of same finish as windows fabricated by window manufacturer. E. Back Bedding Materials: Bonding-type back bedding compounds shall meet ANSI-A-134.1 and ANSI-A-134.2. Back bedding compounds or glazing tapes meeting these specifications may be used singularly or in combination. F. Glazing Beads: Glazing beads or retainers of any compatible material may be used. Beads shall be of sufficient strength and fixation to retain the glass. G. Sash Locks: Manufacturer's bronze sweep locks compatible with applicable material and of similar finish. H. Weather-stripping: The operating sash shall be equipped with weather-stripping to insure a water tight condition when closed. Weather-stripping shall comply with AAMA 701.2. I.Sealant: Two part polyurethane equivalent to Dynatrol 11 by Pecora or Dymeric by Tremco. J.Insect Screens: Extruded aluminum frame with full 18 x 16 aluminum wire mesh and removable vinyl splines at all operable windows. Finish to match window frame. 2.03 FINISH A. Exposed surfaces of aluminum members shall have a baked enamel finish in color clean and free from surface blemishes. Color selected by Architect. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 ASSEMBLY A. All window units shall be furnished completely assembled with glazed panels, weather- stripping and hardware in place. B. All joints of frame and sash members shall be neatly fitted,mechanically joined, and secured. Frame parts and joints shall be made watertight with a trade-accepted non-hardening compound. C. All members shall be assembled in workman-like manner to utilize the strength of the sections and perform according to AAMA and ANSI specifications to assure neat weather- tight construction. Sash corners shall be keyed and mechanically screw jointed for squareness and rigidity. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Erection shall be by skilled mechanics. All windows shall be erected in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and the approved shop or erection drawings. Set windows at proper elevation&location;,plumb,level and in alignment. Properly brace frames to prevent distortion and misalignment. Protect ventilators and operating parts against accumulation of other building materials. B. Apply protective material where aluminum windows contact dissimilar metals, concrete or mortar. C. Sealants: Windows shall be caulked and sealed by installer to provide weather-tight installation around perimeter of window frame and wall opening. Color shall match window frame color. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0851 00 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 METAL WINDOWS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.03 CLEANING AND REPLACEMENT A. All glass and metal shall be thoroughly washed. Remove all paint, mortar, labels, etc. and replace with new any scratched,broken or otherwise defective glass or metal. END OF SECTION 08 5100 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0851 00 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 METAL WINDOWS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 CORPUS CHRISTI FIRE STATION NO. 3 221114.00 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX SECTION 087100 -DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following: 1. Swinging doors. 2. Other doors to the extent indicated. B. Door hardware includes,but is not necessarily limited to,the following: 1. Mechanical door hardware. 2. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections. C. Related Sections: 1. Division 08 Section"Hollow Metal Doors and Frames". 2. Division 08 Section"Interior Aluminum Doors and Frames". 3. Division 08 Section"Flush Wood Doors". 4. Division 08 Section"Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts". D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having Jurisdiction. 1. ANSI Al 17.1 -Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities. 2. ASTM El 886 - Test Method for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors and Shutters Impacted by Missiles and Exposed to Cyclic Pressure Differentials. 3. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure difference. 4. ASTM E1996- Standard specification for performance of exterior windows, curtain walls, doors and storm shutters impacted by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes. 5. ICC/IBC -International Building Code. 6. NFPA 70 -National Electrical Code. 7. NFPA 80 -Fire Doors and Windows. 8. NFPA 101 -Life Safety Code. 9. NFPA 105 -Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies. 10. TAS-201-94 -Impact Test Procedures. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 1 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 CORPUS CHRISTI FIRE STATION NO. 3 221114.00 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 11. TAS-202-94 - Criteria for Testing Impact and Non-Impact Resistant Building Envelope Components using Uniform Static Air Pressure. 12. TAS-203-94 - Criteria for Testing Products Subject to Cyclic Wind Pressure Loading. 13. State Building Codes, Local Amendments. E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry standards as applicable. Any undated reference to a standard shall be interpreted as referring to the latest edition of that standard: 1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards -A156 Series. 2. UL10C -Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational descriptions and finishes. B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness,hand, function, and finish of door hardware. 1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." 2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission. 3. Content: Include the following information: a. Type, style, function, size, label,hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. C. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. C. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Warranty information for each product. 4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 -2 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 CORPUS CHRISTI FIRE STATION NO. 3 221114.00 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX C. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a separate keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule in electronic format. Include keying system explanation, door numbers, key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner must approve submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders/cores. D. Informational Submittals: 1. Hurricane Resistant Openings: Exterior hurricane opening assemblies to be tested according to ASTM E330, ASTM E1886, ASTM E1996 standards, and certified by a qualified independent third party testing agency acceptable to authority having jurisdiction, with labeling indicating compliance with the wind load and design pressure level requirements specified for the Project. 2. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements, based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency. E. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Procedures. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service performance. B. Certified Products: Where specified, products must maintain a current listing in the Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association(BHMA) Certified Products Directory(CPD). C. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both standard and electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. D. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware Consultant(AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware and keying. E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this section from a single source unless otherwise indicated. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 3 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 CORPUS CHRISTI FIRE STATION NO. 3 221114.00 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's product line by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted. F. Hurricane Resistant Exterior Openings (State of Texas): Provide exterior hollow metal and door hardware assemblies approved by the Texas Department of Insurance, including anchorage, capable of withstanding wind load design pressures calculated for this project by a registered architect or engineer and are part of the construction documents per the Texas Department of Insurance, authorities having jurisdiction, and the International Building Code Design Loads Section 1609. 1. Each unit to bear third party permanent label in accordance with the Texas Department of Insurance requirements applicable to project. 2. Hurricane Resistance Test Performance: Provide hollow metal and door hardware approved assemblies that pass large missile-impact tests, as required by Texas Department of Insurance systems location above grade and cyclic-pressure tests according to testing requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. a. Impact Resistance: Hollow metal with approved door hardware assemblies must satisfy the Texas Department of Insurance's criteria for protection from windborne debris in both the Inland I zone and the Seaward zone. Assemblies must pass the large missile impact test (which equates to Missile Level D specified in ASTM E 1996-02). Assemblies may be installed at any height on the structure as long as the design pressure rating for the assemblies is not exceeded. G. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the referenced standards. H. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings." Keying conference to incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document: 1. Function of building,purpose of each area and degree of security required. 2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion. 3. Requirements for key control storage and software. 4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software. 5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys. L Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Meetings" with attendance by representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware. 1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as required. 2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other preparatory work performed by other trades. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 -4 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 CORPUS CHRISTI FIRE STATION NO. 3 221114.00 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled opening. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials. 5. Review the required inspecting,testing, commissioning, and demonstration procedures J. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to approved schedule. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware, software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization. B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package. C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials, software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the "Keying Conference". 1.6 COORDINATION A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements. B. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared, reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional in-field modifications. 1.7 WARRANTY A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner. Failures include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of the hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals,metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 5 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 CORPUS CHRISTI FIRE STATION NO. 3 221114.00 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX C. Warranty Period: Unless otherwise indicated, warranty shall be one year from date of Substantial Completion. 1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under. B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows: 1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing requirements. Manufacturers'names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule. C. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in Division 01, Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the architect, owner, and their designated consultants. 2.2 HANGING DEVICES A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles and other options as specified in the Door Hardware Sets. 1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity: a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches. b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches. C. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches. d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1 hinge for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches. 2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths sized for door thickness and clearances required: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 6 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 CORPUS CHRISTI FIRE STATION NO. 3 221114.00 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX a. Widths up to 3'0": 4-1/2" standard or heavy weight as specified. b. Sizes from 3'1"to 4'0": 5" standard or heavy weight as specified. 3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated,provide the following: a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight,non-ferrous,ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard weight. b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight. 4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following: a. Non-removable Pins: With the exception of electric through wire hinges, provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the all out-swinging lockable doors. 5. Manufacturers: a. Hager Companies (HA)-BB Series, 5 knuckle. b. McKinney(MK)- TA/T4A Series, 5 knuckle. B. Continuous Geared Hinges: ANSIBHMA A156.26 Grade 1-600 continuous geared hinge. with minimum 0.120-inch thick extruded 6063-T6 aluminum alloy hinge leaves and a minimum overall width of 4 inches. Hinges are non-handed, reversible and fabricated to template screw locations. Factory trim hinges to suit door height and prepare for electrical cut-outs. 1. Manufacturers:. a. Ives (IV). b. Pemko (PE). 2.3 DOOR OPERATING TRIM A. Door Push Plates and Pulls: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 door pushes and pull units of type and design specified in the Hardware Sets. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. 1. Push/Pull Plates: Minimum .050 inch thick, size as indicated in hardware sets, with beveled edges, secured with exposed screws unless otherwise indicated. 2. Door Pull and Push Bar Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door unless otherwise indicated. 3. Offset Pull Design: Size, shape, and material as indicated in the hardware sets. Minimum clearance of 2 1/2-inches from face of door and offset of 90 degrees unless otherwise indicated. 4. Pulls, where applicable, shall be provided with a 10"clearance from the finished floor on the push side to accommodate wheelchair accessibility. 5. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as indicated in Hardware Sets. 6. Manufacturers: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 7 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 CORPUS CHRISTI FIRE STATION NO. 3 221114.00 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX a. Ives (IV). b. Rockwood(RO). 2.4 CYLINDERS AND KEYING A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system policy. 1. Manufacturers: a. Match Existing,Field Verify. B. Cylinder Types: Original manufacturer cylinders able to supply the following cylinder formats and types: 1. Threaded mortise cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware application. 2. Rim cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring. 3. Bored or cylindrical lock cylinders with tailpieces as required to suit locks. 4. Tubular deadlocks and other auxiliary locks. 5. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder face to be flush and be free spinning with matching finishes. 6. Keyway: Match Facility Standard. C. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed. 1. Supplier shall conduct a "Keying Conference" to define and document keying system instructions and requirements. 2. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual key control number as directed by Owner. 3. New System: Key locks to a new key system as directed by the Owner. D. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys: 1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2) 2. Master Keys(per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5). 3. Construction Keys (where required): Ten(10). E. Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders. F. Key Registration List(Bitting List): 1. Provide keying transcript list to Owner's representative in the proper format for importing into key control software. 2. Provide transcript list in writing or electronic file as directed by the Owner. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 8 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 CORPUS CHRISTI FIRE STATION NO. 3 221114.00 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 2.5 KEY CONTROL 2.6 MECHANICAL LOCKS AND LATCHING DEVICES A. Mortise Locksets, Grade 1 (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.13, Series 1000, Operational Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed. Locksets are to be manufactured with a corrosion resistant steel case and be field-reversible for handing without disassembly of the lock body. 1. Heavy duty mortise locks shall have a ten-year warranty. 2. Where specified, provide status indicators with highly reflective color and wording for "locked/unlocked" or "vacant/occupied" with custom wording options if required. Indicator to be located above the cylinder with the inside thumb-turn not blocking the visibility of the indicator status. Indicator window size to be a minimum of 2.1" x 0.6" with a curved design allowing a 180-degree viewing angle with protective covering to prevent tampering. 3. Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing(SA) - 8200 Series. 2.7 LOCK AND LATCH STRIKES A. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows: 1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latchbolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing. 4. Double-lipped strikes: For locks at double acting doors. Furnish with retractable stop for rescue hardware applications. B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Strikes for Mortise Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.13. 2. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2. 3. Strikes for Auxiliary Deadlocks: BHMA A156.36. 4. Dustproof Strikes: BHMA A156.16. 2.8 CONVENTIONAL EXIT DEVICES A. General Requirements: All exit devices specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 9 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 CORPUS CHRISTI FIRE STATION NO. 3 221114.00 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 1. Exit devices shall have a five-year warranty. 2. At doors not requiring a fire rating,provide devices complying with NFPA 101 and listed and labeled for "Panic Hardware" according to UL305. Provide proper fasteners as required by manufacturer including sex nuts and bolts at openings specified in the Hardware Sets. 3. Where exit devices are required on fire rated doors, provide devices complying with NFPA 80 and with UL labeling indicating "Fire Exit Hardware". Provide devices with the proper fasteners for installation as tested and listed by UL. Consult manufacturer's catalog and template book for specific requirements. 4. Except on fire rated doors, provide exit devices with hex key dogging device to hold the pushbar and latch in a retracted position. Provide optional keyed cylinder dogging on devices where specified in Hardware Sets. 5. Devices must fit flat against the door face with no gap that permits unauthorized dogging of the push bar. The addition of filler strips is required in any case where the door light extends behind the device as in a full glass configuration. 6. Lever Operating Trim: Where exit devices require lever trim, furnish manufacturer's heavy duty escutcheon trim with threaded studs for thru-bolts. a. Lock Trim Design: As indicated in Hardware Sets, provide finishes and designs to match that of the specified locksets. b. Where function of exit device requires a cylinder, provide a cylinder (Rim or Mortise) as specified in Hardware Sets. 7. Vertical Rod Exit Devices: Where surface or concealed vertical rod exit devices are used at interior openings, provide as less bottom rod (LBR) unless otherwise indicated. Provide dust proof strikes where thermal pins are required to project into the floor. 8. Narrow Stile Applications: At doors constructed with narrow stiles, or as specified in Hardware Sets,provide devices designed for maximum 2"wide stiles. 9. Dummy Push Bar:Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar. 10. Rail Sizing: Provide exit device rails factory sized for proper door width application. 11. Through Bolt Installation: For exit devices and trim as indicated in Door Hardware Sets. 12. Hurricane and Tornado Resistance Compliance: Conventional exit devices are to be U.L. listed for windstorm assemblies where applicable. Provide the appropriate hurricane or tornado resistant products that have been independent third party tested, certified, and labeled to meet state and local windstorm building codes applicable to project. B. Conventional Push Rail Exit Devices (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.3, Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed panic and fire exit hardware devices furnished in the functions specified in the Hardware Sets. Exit device latch to be stainless steel, pullman type, with deadlock feature. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 10 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 CORPUS CHRISTI FIRE STATION NO. 3 221114.00 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 1. Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing(SA) - 80 Series. 2.9 DOOR CLOSERS A. All door closers specified herein shall meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. General: Door closers to be from one manufacturer, matching in design and style, with the same type door preparations and templates regardless of application or spring size. Closers to be non-handed with full sized covers. 2. Standards: Closers to comply with UL-10C for Positive Pressure Fire Test and be U.L. listed for use of fire rated doors. 3. Size of Units: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for sizing of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Where closers are indicated for doors required to be accessible to the Americans with Disabilities Act,provide units complying with ANSI ICC/A117.1. 4. Closer Arms: Provide heavy duty, forged steel closer arms unless otherwise indicated in Hardware Sets. 5. Closers shall not be installed on exterior or corridor side of doors; where possible install closers on door for optimum aesthetics. 6. Closer Accessories: Provide door closer accessories including custom templates, special mounting brackets, spacers and drop plates as required for proper installation. Provide through-bolt and security type fasteners as specified in the hardware sets. B. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Large Body Cast Iron): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed surface mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes I thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron body construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control. 1. Large body cast iron surface mounted door closers shall have a 30-year warranty. 2. Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing(SA) -281 Series. C. Door Closers, Surface Mounted (Heavy Duty): ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1 Certified Products Directory(CPD) listed surface mounted, heavy duty door closers with complete spring power adjustment, sizes 1 thru 6; and fully operational adjustable according to door size, frequency of use, and opening force. Closers to be rack and pinion type, one piece cast iron or aluminum alloy body construction, with adjustable backcheck and separate non-critical valves for closing sweep and latch speed control. Provide non-handed units standard. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 11 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 CORPUS CHRISTI FIRE STATION NO. 3 221114.00 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 1. Heavy duty surface mounted door closers shall have a 30-year warranty. 2. Manufacturers: a. Sargent Manufacturing(SA) - 351 Series. 2.10 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM A. Door Protective Trim 1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. 2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than door width(LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1"LDW on stop side of pairs of doors, and not more than V less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates. Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets. 3. Where plates are applied to fire rated doors with the top of the plate more than 16" above the bottom of the door, provide plates complying with NFPA 80. Consult manufacturer's catalog and template book for specific requirements for size and applications. 4. Protection Plates: ANSIBHMA A156.6 protection plates (kick, armor, or mop), fabricated from the following: a. Stainless Steel: 300 grade, 050-inch thick. 5. Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as specified in the Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes. 6. Manufacturers: a. Ives (IV). b. Rockwood(RO). 2.11 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 door stops and wall bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders. 1. Manufacturers: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 12 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 CORPUS CHRISTI FIRE STATION NO. 3 221114.00 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX a. Rockwood(RO). b. Trimco (TC). C. Overhead Door Stops and Holders: ANSI/BHMA A156.8, Grade 1 Certified Products Directory (CPD) listed overhead stops and holders to be surface or concealed types as indicated in Hardware Sets. Track, slide, arm and jamb bracket to be constructed of extruded bronze and shock absorber spring of heavy tempered steel. Provide non-handed design with mounting brackets as required for proper operation and function. 1. Manufacturers: a. Norton Rixson(RF). b. Sargent Manufacturing(SA). 2.12 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere where indicated. B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke control ratings indicated,based on testing according to UL 1784. 1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings. C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated,based on testing according to UL-IOC. 1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and NPFA 252, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated. E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer. F. Manufacturers: 1. National Guard Products (NG). 2. Pemko (PE). FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 13 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 CORPUS CHRISTI FIRE STATION NO. 3 221114.00 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 2.13 FABRICATION A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended. 2.14 FINISHES A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware finishes complying with ANSUBHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products. B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition, hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance. B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or conflicts have been resolved in writing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series. B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSUDHI Al 15-W series. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to specifications. 1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including: hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 14 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 CORPUS CHRISTI FIRE STATION NO. 3 221114.00 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations: 1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. DHI TDH-007-20: Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware. 3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI Al 17.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities." 4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted hardware is located. C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved. D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." E. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all hardware at the latest possible time frame. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation. C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of owner occupancy. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 15 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 CORPUS CHRISTI FIRE STATION NO. 3 221114.00 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 3.6 DEMONSTRATION A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical and electromechanical door hardware. 3.7 DOOR HARDWARE SETS A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect. They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule. Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate additional hardware required for proper application and functionality. 1. Quantities listed are for each pair of doors, or for each single door. 2. The supplier is responsible for handing and sizing all products. 3. Where multiple options for a piece of hardware are given in a single line item, the supplier shall provide the appropriate application for the opening. B. Manufacturer's Abbreviations: 1. MK-McKinney 2. PE-Pemko 3. SA- SARGENT 4. RO -Rockwood 5. RF -Rixson Hardware Sets Set: 1.0 Doors: 100 2 Continuous Hinge CFM SLF-HD 1 PE 1 CVR Exit,NL CPC DG1 AD8410 106 US32D SA 1 CVR Exit,EO CPC AD8410 EO US32D SA 2 Offset Pull RM3131-24 US32D RO 2 Door Closer w Stop 281 CPS EN SA 2 Drop Plate&Mounting Hardware as required EN SA 1 Threshold 2005AT x Width PE 1 Perimeter Seal by door/frame mfg FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 16 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 CORPUS CHRISTI FIRE STATION NO. 3 221114.00 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 2 Sweep 315CN x Width PE Notes: The specified hardware is for design intent only for TDI. Verify and supply all products in compliance with the door manufacturer's assembly in compliance with TDI. Set: 2.0 Doors: 118 1 Continuous Hinge CFM SLF-HD 1 PE 1 Rim Exit, ST CPC DG1 AD8504 US32D SA 1 Offset Pull RM3131-24 US32D RO 1 Door Closer w Stop 281 CPS EN SA 1 Drop Plate&Mounting Hardware as required EN SA 1 Threshold 2005AT x Width PE 1 Perimeter Seal by door/frame mfg 1 Sweep 315CN x Width PE Notes: The specified hardware is for design intent only for TDI. Verify and supply all products in compliance with the door manufacturer's assembly in compliance with TDI. Set: 4.0 Doors: 127 4 Hinge,Full Mortise TA2314 US32D MK 1 Storeroom Deadbolt Lock DGI 8251 LNMU US26D SA 1 Door Closer w Stop 281 CPS EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" High x LDW CSK US32D RO 1 Threshold 2005AT x Width PE 1 Gasketing 2891APK(Head&Jambs) PE 1 Rain Guard 346C x Width PE 1 Sweep 3452AV x Width PE Notes: The specified hardware is for design intent only for TDI. Verify and supply all products in compliance with the door manufacturer's assembly in compliance with TDI. Set: 5.0 Doors: 113C, 11413, 120J, 121 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 17 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 CORPUS CHRISTI FIRE STATION NO. 3 221114.00 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 4 Hinge,Full Mortise TA2314 US32D MK 1 Rim Exit, ST CPC DG1 HC 8804 ETMU US32D SA 1 Door Closer w Stop 281 CPS EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" High x LDW CSK US32D RO 1 Threshold 2005AT x Width PE 1 Gasketing 2891APK(Head&Jambs) PE 1 Rain Guard 346C x Width PE 1 Sweep 3452AV x Width PE Notes: The specified hardware is for design intent only for TDI. Verify and supply all products in compliance with the door manufacturer's assembly in compliance with TDI. Set: 6.0 Doors: 101 3 Hinge(heavy weight) T4A3786 US26D MK 1 Classroom Lock DG1 8237 LNMU US26D SA 1 Surface Closer 351 Reg/PA EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" High x LDW CSK US32D RO 1 Door Stop 406/409/446 as required US26D RO 1 Gasketing S88D (Head& Jambs) PE Set: 7.0 Doors: 114A 1 Continuous Hinge CFM SLF-HD 1 PE 2 Pull RM3101-24 US32D RO 1 Drop Plate&Mounting Hardware as required EN SA 1 Surface Closer 351 Reg/PA EN SA 1 Door Stop 406/409/446 as required US26D RO Set: 8.0 Doors: 102, 110A, 110B, 111, 116, 203, 204,205, 206, 207, 208, 209, 210, 211, 212, 215,216, 217 3 Hinge,Full Mortise TA2714 US26D MK 1 Privacy Lock V20 8265 LNMU US26D SA 1 Surface Closer 351 Reg/PA EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" High x LDW CSK US32D RO 1 Door Stop 406/409/446 as required US26D RO FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 18 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 CORPUS CHRISTI FIRE STATION NO. 3 221114.00 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 1 Gasketing S88D (Head& Jambs) PE Set: 9.0 Doors: 218 3 Hinge,Full Mortise TA2714 US26D MK 1 Privacy Lock V20 8265 LNMU US26D SA 1 Surf Overhead Stop 10-X36 689 RF 1 Surface Closer 351 Reg/PA EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" High x LDW CSK US32D RO 1 Gasketing S88D (Head& Jambs) PE Set: 10.0 NOT USED 3 Hinge,Full Mortise TA2714 US26D MK 1 Privacy Lock V20 8265 LNMU US26D SA 1 Door Stop 406/409/446 as required US26D RO 1 Gasketing S88D (Head&Jambs) PE Set: 11.0 Doors: 11OC.1, 110C.2 3 Hinge,Full Mortise TA2714 US26D MK 1 Privacy Lock V20 8265 LNMU US26D SA 1 Surface Closer w Stop 351 CPS EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" High x LDW CSK US32D RO 1 Gasketing S88D (Head& Jambs) PE Set: 12.0 Doors: 108, 112, 202, 213,219 3 Hinge,Full Mortise TA2714 US26D MK 1 Storeroom Lock DG1 8204 LNMU US26D SA 1 Surface Closer 351 Reg/PA EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" High x LDW CSK US32D RO 1 Door Stop 406/409/446 as required US26D RO 3 Silencer As req'd RO Set: 12.1 Doors: 214 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 19 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 CORPUS CHRISTI FIRE STATION NO. 3 221114.00 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 3 Hinge,Full Mortise TA2714 US26D MK 1 Storeroom Lock DG1 8204 LNMU US26D SA 1 Surface Closer 351 Reg/PA EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" High x LDW CSK US32D RO 1 Door Stop 406/409/446 as required US26D RO 1 Gasketing S88D (Head& Jambs) PE Set: 12.2 Doors: 226 3 Hinge,Full Mortise TA2714 US26D MK 1 Storeroom Lock DG 8204 LNMU US26D SA 1 Surface Closer w Stop 351 CPS EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" High x LDW CSK US32D RO 1 Gasketing S88D (Head & Jambs) PE Set: 13.0 Doors: 109A 3 Hinge,Full Mortise TA2714 US26D MK 1 Storeroom Lock DGI 8204 LNMU US26D SA 1 Conc Overhead Stop I-X36 630 RF 1 Drop Plate&Mounting Hardware as required EN SA 1 Surface Closer 351 Reg/PA EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" High x LDW CSK US32D RO 3 Silencer As req'd RO Set: 14.0 Doors: 101A, 222 3 Hinge,Full Mortise TA2714 US26D MK 1 Storeroom Lock DG1 8204 LNMU US26D SA 1 Door Stop 406/409/446 as required US26D RO 3 Silencer As req'd RO Set: 15.0 Doors: 110 3 Hinge,Full Mortise TA2714 US26D MK FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 -20 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 CORPUS CHRISTI FIRE STATION NO. 3 221114.00 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 1 Office Lock DG1 8205 LNMU US26D SA 1 Door Stop 406/409/446 as required US26D RO 3 Silencer As req'd RO Set: 15.1 Doors: 104 3 Hinge,Full Mortise TA2714 US26D MK 1 Office Lock DG1 8205 LNMU US26D SA 1 Surface Closer 351 Reg/PA EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" High x LDW CSK US32D RO 1 Door Stop 406/409/446 as required US26D RO 1 Gasketing S88D (Head& Jambs) PE 3 Silencer As req'd RO Set: 16.0 Doors: 106 3 Hinge,Full Mortise TA2714 US26D MK 1 Rim Exit, CL DG1 8813 ETMU US32D SA 1 Surface Closer 351 Reg/PA EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" High x LDW CSK US32D RO 1 Door Stop 406/409/446 as required US26D RO 3 Silencer As req'd RO Set: 17.0 Doors: 10313, 113B 1 Continuous Hinge CFM HD 1 PE 1 Rim Exit,PA 12 8815 ETMU US32D SA 1 Door Closer w Stop 281 CPS EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" High x LDW CSK US32D RO 1 Threshold 171A x Width PE 1 Gasketing S88D (Head& Jambs) PE 1 Sweep 315CN x Width PE Set: 18.0 Doors: 201,221 1 Continuous Hinge CFM—HDI PE FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 -21 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 CORPUS CHRISTI FIRE STATION NO. 3 221114.00 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 1 Rim Exit,PA 12 8815 ETMU US32D SA 1 Surface Closer 351 Reg/PA EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" High x LDW CSK US32D RO 1 Door Stop 406/409/446 as required US26D RO 1 Gasketing S88D (Head& Jambs) PE Set: 19.0 Doors: 124 3 Hinge,Full Mortise TA2714 US26D MK 1 Classroom Lock DG1 8237 LNMU US26D SA 1 Surface Closer 351 Reg/PA EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" High x LDW CSK US32D RO 1 Door Stop 406/409/446 as required US26D RO 3 Silencer As req'd RO Set: 20.0 Doors: 109B 3 Hinge,Full Mortise TA2714 US26D MK 1 Classroom Lock DGI 8237 LNMU US26D SA 1 Surface Closer w Stop 351 CPS EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" High x LDW CSK US32D RO 1 Gasketing S88D (Head& Jambs) PE Set: 21.0 Doors: 103A, 113A 1 Continuous Hinge CFM HDI PE 1 Passage Latch 8215 LNMU US26D SA 1 Surface Closer 351 Reg/PA EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" High x LDW CSK US32D RO 1 Door Stop 406/409/446 as required US26D RO 1 Gasketing S88D (Head& Jambs) PE Set: 22.0 Doors: 220 3 Hinge,Full Mortise TA2714 US26D MK 1 Passage Latch 8215 LNMU US26D SA FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 -22 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 CORPUS CHRISTI FIRE STATION NO. 3 221114.00 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX 1 Cone Overhead Stop 1-X36 630 RF 1 Drop Plate&Mounting Hardware as required EN SA 1 Surface Closer 351 Reg/PA EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" High x LDW CSK US32D RO 3 Silencer As req'd RO Set: 23.0 Doors: 123A, 123B 3 Hinge(heavy weight) T4A3786 US26D MK 1 Pull Plate BF 110 x 70C US32D RO 1 Push Plate 70E US32D RO 1 Surface Closer 351 Reg/PA EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" High x LDW CSK US32D RO 1 Door Stop 406/409/446 as required US26D RO 3 Silencer As req'd RO Set: 24.0 Doors: 125, 126 3 Hinge(heavy weight) T4A3786 US26D MK 1 Pull Plate BF 110 x 70C US32D RO 1 Push Plate 70E US32D RO 1 Surface Closer w Stop 351 CPS EN SA 1 Kick Plate K1050 10" High x LDW CSK US32D RO 3 Silencer As req'd RO Set: 25.0 Doors: 120E, 120F, 120G, 120H, 223, 233, 234,235, 236 1 Note All hardware By door mfr Notes: Coordinate cylinder requirements. Set: 26.0 Doors: 107A, 107B 1 Note All hardware By door mfr Notes: Coordinate cylinder requirements. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 -23 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 CORPUS CHRISTI FIRE STATION NO. 3 221114.00 CORPUS CHRISTI, TX END OF SECTION 087100 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 MAY 2, 2023 DOOR HARDWARE 087100 -24 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 08 80 00 - GLAZING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide all glass and glazing as shown on the drawings and as herein specified. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section Mockups 2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications." 3. Division 5 Section "Decorative Railings", for glazing in guard railing systems. 4. Division 8,All "Door" and "Window" Sections. 5. Division 8 Section "Aluminum Entrances and Storefront." 6. Division 8 Section "Fire Rated Framed Entrances and Storefronts". 7. Division 8 Section "Wind and Impact-Resistant Aluminum Framing Systems". 8. Division 8 Section "Aluminum Curtain Wall". 9. Division 8 Section "Fire Rated Glazed Curtainwall and Entrances". 10. Division 8 Section "Pass-Through Service Windows". 11. Division 8 Section "Bullet Resistant Glazing, Doors, and Frames". 12. Division 8 Section "All-Glass Entrances and Storefronts." 13. Division 8 Section "Revolving Door Entrances" for glass in revolving door entrances. 14. Division 8 Section "Structural-Sealant-Glazed Curtain Walls" for glazing sealants used in structural-sealant-glazed curtain walls. 15. Division 8 Section "Decorative Glass Glazing." 16. Division 8 Section "Mirrors." 17. Division 8 Section "Fire-Rated Glazing." 18. Division 8 Section "Security Glazing." 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications. B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036. C. Interspace: Space between lites of any insulating glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas. D. Deterioration of Coated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 08 80 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 GLAZING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. Deterioration of Insulating Glass: Failure of the hermetic seal under normal use that is attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. F. Deterioration of Laminated Glass: Defects developed from normal use that are attributed to the manufacturing process and not to causes other than glass breakage and practices for maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination material obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standards. 1.04 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section-Project Management and Coordination. 1. Attendees: General Contractor/Construction Manager, Architect, Owner's representative, Glazing installer, storefront and curtain wall supplier/installer. 2. Review submittal progress, approved submittals and compliance with energy requirements. 3. Review methods and procedures related to glazing installation, including manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 5. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation. B. General Contractor to record minutes and issue for review within 7 days for review and modifications by all attendees. 1.05 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. For sealants,indicating VOC content. B. Shop Drawings: 1. Review curtain wall and window shop drawings and submit acceptance of details as suitable for proposed glass products. C. Submit 12-inch square samples of each type of glass indicated except for clear monolithic glass products, and 12-inch long samples of each color required (except black) for each type of sealant or gasket exposed to view. D. Glazing Accessory Samples: For sealants, in 12-inch lengths. E. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. F. Delegated Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 1.06 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS: A. Qualification Data. For Installer,manufacturers of fabricated glass units, glass testing agency, and sealant testing agency. B. Product Certificates: Certificate of Compliance for all glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass 12 inches square all glass products. 1. Insulating Glass Certification: Submit data verifying compliance with IGCC, Class A level. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 088000 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 GLAZING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Compatibility and adhesion test reports from sealant manufacturer indicating that glazing materials were tested for compatibility and adhesion with glazing sealants and other glazing materials. 1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36-month period. D. Wind Pressure and Thermal Stress Analysis: Submit thermal stress analysis of glass where thermal stress may occur. E. Sample Warranties: For special warranties. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings: A qualified insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved by coated-glass manufacturer. a. Glass fabricator to have 10 years of experience and meet ANSI/ASQC Q9002 1994. 2. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed glazing similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project; whose work has resulted in glass installations with a record of successful in-service performance; and who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association Glazier Certified Glass Installer Program as Level 2 (Senior Glaziers). 3. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. B. All exterior glazing products and accessories and glazing products and accessories located in the apparatus bay shall be corrosion resistant to withstand the coastal salty air of this site. C. All exterior glazing and accessories shall be TDI certified. D. Coordination: Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances. E. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of the inspecting and testing agency,Insulating Glass Certification Council. F. Energy Code Compliance: Coordinate all exterior glazing with applicable framing systems to assure compliance with current applicable energy codes before product submittals. If revisions to specified products are required coordinate revised products with the architect and owner. G. Installation Criteria: FGJA"Glazing Manual", in addition to any other referenced standards. H. Single Source fabrication responsibility: Fabrication processes, including Low E and reflective coatings, insulating, laminating, silkscreen, and tempering, shall be fabricated by a single Fabricator. 1.Free Standing Mockups: In addition to samples required in Submittals paragraph, supply product and installation in the construction of mockups as specified and as detailed on the drawings. Build mockups using materials indicated for the completed work as detailed on the drawings to verify selections made under Submittals, to demonstrate typical construction and waterproofing details, and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and installation. Modify mock-up requirements below as applicable to project requirements. 1. Prior to product installation a field-constructed mock-up shall be provided under the provisions of Division 1 Section - Submittals, Product Data, Samples and Mock-ups, to FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 088000 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 GLAZING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 verify details & tie-ins, and to demonstrate the required quality of materials and installation. 2. Construct a typical exterior wall section, incorporating back-up wall, cladding, window and sill, insulation, flashing and any other critical junctions (roof, foundation, etc.) as detailed in Drawings at typical wall locations as located by Architect. 3. Locate mockups as directed by Architect. 4. Build mockups as indicated in Drawings. a. Show typical components, attachments to building structure, and methods of installation. 5. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting installation. 6. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 7. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 8. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. 9. Demolish and remove mockups when directed. J.Construction Samples: 1. Install glazing systems sample panels on the building as specified in Section 08 41 13 "Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts", Section 08 51 13 "Aluminum Windows" to match glazing systems required for Project, including glazing methods as approved on field mock-up panels for review and approval. 2. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved sample panels may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 1.08 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glass product, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants. 1. Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted. 2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates. 3. Test no fewer than eight Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 4. Schedule enough time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including the use of specially formulated primers. 1.09 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions and as needed to prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun or other causes. B. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written instructions for venting and sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 088000 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 GLAZING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by the glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost condensation, or other causes. 1. Do not install liquid glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Warranty for Insulating Units: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is obstruction of vision by dust,moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. 2. Reflective glass whose reflective coating cracks,peels or discolors shall be replaced at no charge (material only) for minimum ten(10)year period beginning on date of Substantial Completion. C. Laminated Glass Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning laminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation, delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed by referenced laminated-glass standard. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. D. Decorative Films: Provide a written 3-year warranty against defects in material and manufacture. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating. E. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Heat-Soaked Tempered Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace heat-soaked tempered glass units that spontaneously break due to nickel sulfide (NiS) inclusions at a rate exceeding 0.3 percent (3/1000) within specified warranty period. Coverage for any other cause is excluded. 1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. F. Plate Mirrors: Provide a written 5-year warranty against de-silvering and other visual defects, from the date of Substantial Completion. 1. Warranty covers deterioration due to normal conditions of use and not to handling, installing, and cleaning practices contrary to the glass manufacturer's published instructions. G. Glazing installer shall coordinate glass and glazing installation with framing systems and install glass and glazing in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, so that guarantee is maintained. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 088000 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 GLAZING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. General: Provide glazing systems capable of withstanding normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, and installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction. B. Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 01 40 00 "Quality Requirements,"to design glazing. C. Glass Design: Provide glass liter in the thickness and strengths (annealed or heat-treated) to meet or exceed the following criteria based on analysis of Project loads and in-service conditions. Glass thicknesses indicated are minimums and are for detailing only. Confirm glass thicknesses by analyzing Project loads and in-service conditions. Provide glass lites for various size openings in nominal thicknesses indicated, but not less than thicknesses complying with ASTM E1300 and in strengths (annealed or heat treated) required to meet or exceed the following criteria: 1. Specified Design Wind Loads: Determine design wind loads applicable to Project from basic wind speed indicated in miles per hour at 33 feet above grade, according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 6.4.2, "Analytic Procedure," based on mean roof heights above grade indicated on Drawings. 2. Minimum glass thickness of lites composed of annealed or heat-treated glass are selected so the worst-case probability of failure does not exceed the following: a. Eight(8) lites per 1000 for lites set vertically or not over 15 degrees off vertical and under wind action. b. One (1) lite per 1000 for liter set over 15 degrees off vertical and under action of wind or snow. c. Specified Design Wind Loads: As indicated on the Structural Drawings d. Specified Design Snow Loads: As indicated on the Structural Drawings, but not less than snow loads applicable to Project,required by ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 7, "Snow Loads. e. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6mm f. Thickness of Tinted and Heat-Absorbing glass: Provide the same thickness of each tint color indicated throughout Project. 3. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For the following types of glass supported on all four edges, provide thickness required that limits center deflection at design wind pressure to 1/50 times the short side length or 1 inch,whichever is less. a. For monolithic-glass lites heat treated to resist wind loads. b. For insulating glass. c. For laminated-glass liter. D. Thermal Movements: Provide glazing that allows for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures acting on glass framing members and glazing components. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change(Range): 120 deg F , ambient; 180 deg F,material surfaces. E. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below: 1. For monolithic-glass liter,properties are based on units with liter 1/4"thick. 2. For laminated-glass lites,properties are based on products of construction indicated. 3. For insulating-glass units,properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite. 4. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg . FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 088000 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 GLAZING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 5. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBNL WINDOW 6 computer program. 6. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300. 7. Solar Optical Properties: NFRC 300. F. Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201, Category 11, or Category IV Risk Factor as indicated in glass schedule. 1. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide safety glass permanently marked with certification label of Safety Glazing Certification Council (SGCC) or other certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass,thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies. G. Insulating glass products are to be permanently marked either on spacers or at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of inspecting and testing agency indicated below: 1. Insulating Glass Certification Council(IGCC). H. Windborne-Debris-Impact Resistance: Exterior glazing shall comply with protection testing requirements in ASTM E 1996 for tropical cyclone exposed with a wind speed of 110 mph (per current FM Global Standards/ASCE 7-05) when tested according to ASTM E 1886. Test specimens shall be no smaller in width and length than glazing indicated for use on Project and shall be installed in same manner as glazing indicated for use on Project. 1. Large-Missile Test: For glazing located within 33 feet of grade. 2. Small-Missile Test: For glazing located more than 33 feet above grade. 1.Security Glazing: Applicable standards: 1. Consumer Product Safety Standard 16 CFR 1201, Category 11 2. ANSI Z97.1, Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings 3. ASTM C1036,Flat Glass 4. ASTM C1172,Laminated Architectural Flat Glass 5. ASTM C1048,Heat-Treated Flat Glass 6. Fed. Spec. MIL-P-46144,Polycarbonate Plastic Sheet. 2.02 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, except where more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this section or in referenced standards. 1. GANA(Glass Association of North America)Publications a. GANA Glazing Manual b. Laminated Glazing Reference Manual c. Tempering Division- Engineering Standards Manual 2. AAMA (American Architectural Manufacturers Association) Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and AAMA TIR A7, "Sloped Glazing Guidelines." 3. IGMA (Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association) Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped Glazing." 4. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use." 5. Consumer Product Safety Standard 16 CFR 1201, Category 11 6. LSGA(Laminators Safety Glass Association Inc.)Publications. 7. Federal Spec. MIL-P-46144,Polycarbonate Sheet B. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies with performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated. 1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: 1/4". FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 088000 - 7 MAY 2, 2023 GLAZING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated throughout Project. C. Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat- strengthened float glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heat- strengthened float glass or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered float glass is indicated, provide fully tempered float glass. 2.03 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of Design Products: Basis of Design products are indicated in the Glass Schedule later in this section. Provide Basis of Design products, or equal products as approved by Architect. B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with Requirements, Manufacturers offering products acceptable for use on this project include, but are not necessarily limited to,the following: 1. Viracon, Inc. 2. AGC Glass North America. 3. Guardian Glass. 4. NSG Pilkington North America. 5. Saint-Gobain. 6. Vitro Architectural Glass (Formerly PPG ldeascapes). C. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method. D. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: For each product and installation method, obtain from single source from single manufacturer. E. Fabricators for Specialty Glass and Specialty Glass Units: As specified with individual glass type descriptions, or approved equal by another Manufacturer. 2.04 GLASS PRODUCTS A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated. B. Ultraclear Float Glass (if/where indicated): ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class I (clear), Quality- Q3; and with visible light transmission of not less than 91 percent. C. Tinted Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 2 (tinted), Quality-Q3. D. Heat-strengthened float glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat-strengthened glass), Type 1, Quality-Q3. 1. Class 1 (clear) or Class 2(tinted) as indicated. 2. Condition A(uncoated),unless otherwise indicated. 3. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. E. Fully tempered float glass: ASTM C 1048. Kind fully tempered(FT), Quality-Q3. 1. Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated. 2. Condition A(uncoated),unless otherwise indicated. F. Glass Mirrors: ASTM C 1503; manufactured using copper-free, low-lead mirror coating process. 1. Clear Glass: Mirror Select Quality. 2.05 INSULATED GLASS FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 088000 - 8 MAY 2, 2023 GLAZING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Insulating-Glass Units (IGU): Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified. 1. ASTM E773 Seal Durability of Sealed Insulating Glass Units 2. ASTM E774 Sealed Insulating Glass Units 3. Sealed insulating glass units to be double sealed with a primary seal of black (or gray) polyisobutylene and a secondary seal of black(or gray) silicone. 4. Lites shall be separated by an aluminum with 3 bent corners and 1 keyed- soldered corner, or 4 bent corners and a straight butyl injected zinc plated steel straight key joint, to provide a hermetically sealed and dehydrated air space. a. Aluminum Spacer Finish: Manufacturer's standard Color Anodic Finish: Black 5. Units shall be certified for compliance with seal classification "CBA" by the Insulating Glass Certification Council (IGCC) and tested in accordance with the above ASTM Test Methods. 6. Tinted glass units heat strengthened as recommended by manufacturer to protect against breakage due to thermal stress. 2.06 LAMINATED GLASS A. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation. 1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer, ionomeric polymer interlayer, or cast-in-place and cured-transparent-resin interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions. a. Windborne-Debris-Iinpact-Resistant Laminated Glass: Comply with requirements of laminated glass, except that interlayer may vary from type indicated above. 2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements. 3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated. 2.07 SAFETY FILM A. General Requirements: Clear Safety and Security window film mounted on glass substrates, to provide protection against safety and blast mitigation. Provide size matching glazing units (field verify) as indicated in drawings. 1. Source Limitations: Provide film of one type by a single manufacture throughout projection for consistent appearance. 2. Safety Film: Clear safety and Security glazing film, permanently adhered, commercial quality 3M Safety and Security Window Film S70, or approved equal by another manufacture. 2.08 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS A. General: Select glazing sealants, tapes, gaskets and other glazing materials of proven compatibility with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating glass units and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of installation and service, as demonstrated by testing and field experience. B. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85,plus or minus 5. C. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated. D. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking). FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 088000 - 9 MAY 2, 2023 GLAZING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire-protection rating indicated. 2.09 GLAZING SEALANTS A. Cleaners,Primers, and Sealers, General: Types shall be as recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer, and as specified in other Sections. 1. Structural Glazing Sealants: ASTM C1184, and as recommended by glazing system Manufacturer. 2. In event of conflicts, the most restrictive requirements acceptable to glazing system Manufacturers shall prevail. B. Sealant: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 1. Adhesive failure occurs when sealant pulls away from substrate cleanly, leaving no sealant material behind. 2. Cohesive failure occurs when sealant breaks or tears within itself but does not separate from each substrate because sealant-to-substrate bond strength exceeds sealant's internal strength. C. Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. D. Single-Component, Nonsag, Acid-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT, G, and A. 1. Basis of Design Product: Sealant as recommended by wind-impact-resistant window system Manufacturer. 2. Application: Wind-Impact-Resistant Glazing. 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MIRROR MOUNTING MATERIALS A. Mirror Mastic: An adhesive setting compound, asbestos-free, produced specifically for setting mirrors and certified by both mirror manufacturer and mastic manufacturer as compatible with glass coating and substrates on which mirrors will be installed. 1. Adhesive shall have a VOC content of not more than 70 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). B. Mounting Accessories: Brushed stainless steel (Type 302) mirror clips similar to KV277 at bottom and KV278 at top in number as required to accommodate size of mirror. 2.11 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements. 1. Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components. 2. Temperature Change: 180 deg F,material surfaces. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 08 80 00 - 10 MAY 2, 2023 GLAZING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Carefully inspect and verify all job site conditions and measurements. Field verify all existing conditions and dimensions which receive glazing. B. Examine areas and conditions under which Work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper or timely completion. 1. Verify prepared openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. 2. Verify that a functioning weep system is present. 3. Verify that the minimum required face and edge clearances are being followed. 4. Verify effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members. 5. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work. 6. Verify glazing channels are free of burrs,irregularities, and debris. 7. Verify glass is free of edge damage or face imperfections. 8. Inspect door and frames to determine that frames, sash, and stops are set true and straight. Sash rabbets and stops shall be clean and dry at time of glazing. C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Beginning installation constitutes acceptance of substrate/conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide glass manufacturer's recommended edge clearances when sizing glass. B. Remove protective coatings from surfaces to be glazed. C. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrates indicated under the project conditions. 1. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. 2. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates. 3. Clean glass and glazing surfaces to remove dust, oil, and contaminants, and wipe dry. D. Verify measurements of sash and openings at Project. 1. Dimensions shown or indicated are given only as a guide for estimating purposes, and actual size shall be determined by measurement of the actual openings. Accurately cut glass to fit openings with proper clearances and setting block height. E. Coordinate with and check Shop Drawings furnished by other suppliers of Work affecting this Section to avoid field installation problems. F. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in the completed Work. G. Before glazing metal sash, remove oil, lacquer, or other material to which the compound will not readily adhere or which will tend to delaminate from metal and cause a leak through the glazing seal. 3.03 GLAZING A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in "GANA Glazing Manual" and in other referenced glazing publications. B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance, FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 08 80 00 - 11 MAY 2, 2023 GLAZING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing. D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. E. Glazing to fit line in rabbet with all edges straight and true. Size substantially as shown on the drawings,however Contractor shall fill sash and openings as actually constructed whether more or less than sizes given. F. Material installed in a full bed of sealant,tooling finished surfaces smooth. G. Mirrors installed using mirror glazing angles, concealed clips and mirror setting mastic. Mastic applied on substrate in spot application, spacing and sizes as recommended by mirror manufacturer for use intended. 3.04 GLAZING INSTALLATION A. General: 1. Comply with glass fabricator's recommendations. 2. Install in accordance with glass and frame manufacturer's instructions. 3. Install plumb, level, square, true to line, and without warp or rack Provide all fasteners required for installation. 4. Except where curtain wall, window, entrance or glass manufacturer recommends otherwise, comply with Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) Sealant Manual and FGMA Glazing Manual. 5. Material installed in a full bed of sealant,tooling finished surfaces smooth. 6. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. 7. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw,bow, and similar characteristics. 8. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified. B. Glazing to fit line in rabbet with all edges straight and true. Size substantially as shown on the drawings,however Contractor shall fill sash and openings as actually constructed whether more or less than sizes given. C. Do not apply glazing materials at temperatures below manufacturer's recommendations or to damp or frosted surfaces. Apply glazing material according to the manufacturer's instructions using proper primers as required. D. Set glass using neoprene setting blocks and spacers to insure proper edge clearance and uniform beads of compound. Clearances shall conform to FGMA Glazing Manual requirements. Center glass in glazing rabbets. 1. Butt glazing requirements: Apply mildew resistant silicone sealant to flush depth of joint as indicated by sealant manufacturer. E. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches. 1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch- minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 08 80 00 - 12 MAY 2, 2023 GLAZING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 F. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications. G. Check openings to confirm proper clearance at perimeters and between glass and stops. 1. Clean surfaces of rabbet (including stops) and surface of glass which will come into contact with sealant. Use solvents and methods which insure clean, dry surfaces without film or foreign material when sealant is placed. H. Remove and replace glazing beads carefully to avoid marking or defacing any portion of frame, sash, or fastenings. 1. Set glass in full bed of glazing tape or sealant. Clean glazing material after stops are installed. Clean excess compound, etc. from glass after setting in conformance with glass manufacturer's recommendations. 2. If recommended prime surfaces prior to glazing. L Set glass with reams (waves) running horizontally. Set glass with factory attached labels in place. J.Setting Blocks: Place setting blocks at locations recommended by glass manufacturer, generally between 1/4 points and 6 inches from corner, except at glazed doors. I. At glazed doors, provide one block at sill, located 3 inches up from edge of glass at hinge side; one block at hinge side jamb, located 3 inches up from lower edge of glass; one block at head, located 3 inches from edge of glass at latch side of door; and, one block at jamb at lock side of door,located 3 inches down from edge of glass at top corner. 2. Use blocks of length required to properly support glass. Offset approximately I inch from shims. K. Glass Installation in Steel(Hollow Metal)Frames: 1. Glaze frames using pre-shimmed tape on both sides. Firmly glaze in place with joints sealed, free of rattles. 2. Set glass on setting blocks with a full bed of sealant or glazing tape. L. Glass Installation in Aluminum Frames: I. Glaze aluminum frames using preformed EPDM elastomeric glazing extrusion separately or in combination with sealant and pre-shimmed glazing tape in compliance with aluminum frame supplier's recommendations. 2. Set glass on setting blocks as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Apply tape and/or sealant to produce uniform sight line even with frame. 4. Set glass in gaskets with corners sealed. M. Glazing Sealant: Along entire bottom edge of light, and up at least 6 inches at each jamb, gun in continuous full bed of sealant to fill voids. I. Fill entire space, full width of pane, full depth of glass, with sufficient sealant to form heel along inside face and edge of glass. 2. At other edges (top and sides) gun in continuous heel bead of sealant along edges of glass perimeter to set stop against and into, acting as fill between glass and stop. 3. Immediately after setting glass, at entire perimeter of glass, gun in sealant between stop and glass so space above spacer is completely filled,without voids. 4. Place sealant flush with daylight edge of stops,with slight watershed at exterior. Provide straight, smooth surface meeting at opening corners with sharp intersection. 5. Leave no sealant on exposed surfaces of stops and glass. 3.05 TAPE GLAZING A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that,when compressed by glass,their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 08 80 00 - 13 MAY 2, 2023 GLAZING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills. D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed. F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant. G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.06 SEALANT GLAZING (WET) A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance. B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces. C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.07 MIRRORS INSTALLATION A. Mirrors installed using mirror glazing angles, concealed clips and mirror setting mastic. Mastic applied on substrate in spot application, spacing and sizes as recommended by mirror manufacturer for use intended. 1. General Contractor shall coordinate with electrician to provide mirrored plates for outlets and switches installed in areas of mirror wall at weight room. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Engage Manufacturer's representative to verify that installation of Ballistic and Storm- Impact-Resistant glazing is in conformance to the manufacturer's recommendations. Refer to requirements in related Sections. B. Correct deficiencies in or remove and replace components that inspections and test reports indicate do not comply with specified requirements. C. Water/Hose Testing: Refer to Division 01 requirements. 1. In event of failed testing, additional testing will be performed, at Contractor's expense, to determine compliance of corrected Work with specified requirements. 3.09 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces. 1. Clean excess sealant or compound from glass and framing members immediately after application,using solvents or cleaners recommended by manufacturers. B. Glazing shall be protected from damage, and from contact with contaminating or harmful substances, during construction. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 08 80 00 - 14 MAY 2, 2023 GLAZING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains. 1. If, despite protection measures, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replace glass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings. 2. Contractor shall assume all responsibility for breakage and shall replace cracked,broken, scratched or otherwise defective glazing. C. Glazing shall be carefully cleaned at time of final acceptance, removing all non-permanent labels, excess sealant, paint and other foreign substances. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. PART 4-GLASS SCHEDULE 4.01 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE. A. Clear Glass: Annealed float glass per ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3 (glazing select). 1. Minimum Thickness: 1/4" 2. Application: (at interior storefront system). B. Clear Glass: Fully tempered float glass per ASTM C 1036, Type I (transparent glass, flat), Class 1 (clear), Quality Q3 (glazing select), and heat-treated to comply with ASTM C 1048, Kind FT(fully tempered). 1. Minimum Thickness: 1/4". 2. Application: Where Safety glazing as required by code and as shown on the drawings. (at interior storefront system as indicated on drawings). 4.02 LAMINATED GLASS SCHEDULE A. Fire Rated Laminated Glass: 5/16" laminated, up to thickness as required for fire ratings as indicated in Drawings, ceramic fire glazing. 1. Basis of Design Product: TGP Firelite Plus. 2. Positive Pressure Test: UL l OC;pass. 3. Fire rating tested in accordance with ASTM E2010-01, UL 9 and UL l OB. 4. STC Rating: 38 dB. 5. Surface Finish: Standard. 6. Applications: interior fire rated windows located in fire rated walls as indicated on drawings. 4.03 INSULATING-LAMINATED-GLASS SCHEDULE A. Storm Impact Resistant Insulating-Laininated Glass, and (Tempered) Laminated Insulating Glazing Units,Low E,Level D: 1. Basis of Design: Solarscreen VNE 1-53#2 by Viracon. 2. Performance Requirements: a. Visible Transmittance: 47 percent. b. Winter U-value: 0.28. c. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.23. 3. Configuration: 1-5/16-inch glazing units as follows (at all outdoor storefront and window locations): a. Outboard Lite: 1/4-inch thick, heat-strengthened, clear glass with high-performance low-emissivity coating on No. 2 surface. Provide fully tempered where noted or required by code. 1) Low-E Coating: Basis of Design: Solarscreen VNE 53 by Viracon, Inc. b. Space: 1/2-inch argon-filled space;black painted stainless steel spacer. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 08 80 00 - 15 MAY 2, 2023 GLAZING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 c. Inboard Lite: Two 1/4-inch thick, heat-strengthened, clear glass plies; laminated with hurricane-resistant(large missle)PVB interlayer. 1) Interlayer: Basis of Design: StonnGuard by Viracon, Inc. 4. 9/16-inch glazing units as follows (at all Four-Fold Electric Operated Bay Doors): a. Outboard Lite: 1/4-inch thick, heat-strengthened, clear glass with high-performance low-emissivity coating on No. 2 surface. Provide fully tempered where noted or required by code. 1) Low-E Coating: Basis of Design: Solarscreen VNE 53 by Viracon,Inc. b. Space: argon-filled space as required;black painted stainless steel spacer. c. Inboard Lite: Two 1/4-inch thick, heat-strengthened, clear glass plies; laminated with hurricane-resistant(large missle)PVB interlayer. 1) Interlayer: Basis of Design: StormGuard by Viracon, Inc. 5. Thickness: 0.090-inch. END OF SECTION 08 80 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 08 80 00 - 16 MAY 2, 2023 GLAZING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 08 90 00 - LOUVERS & VENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Extent of louvers is indicated on drawing, including sizes and locations. Coordinate the size and locations with mechanical drawings and specifications. Provide complete attachments to substrates indicated. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 04 Section- "Unit Masonry Assemblies". 2. Division 05 Section - "Metal Fabrications", for masonry loose lintels and miscellaneous steel for louver attachment. 3. Division 05 Section- "Cold Formed Metal Framing". 4. Division 07 Section- "Air Barriers". 5. Division 07 Section- "Joint Sealants". 6. Division 07 Section- "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim". 7. Division 23 Mechanical,for ducts, dampers, and other adjacent construction. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Performance Requirements: Where louvers are indicated to comply with specific performance requirements,provide units whose performance ratings have been determined in compliance with Air Movement and Control Association(AMCA) Standard 500. B. Comply with SMACNA "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" recommendation for fabrication, construction details and installation procedures, except as otherwise indicated. C. Field Measurements: Verify size, location and placement of louver units prior to fabrication, wherever possible. D. Coordination with Wall Openings: Verify final louver size includes required free area for model specified before creating rough opening in exterior material. E. Shop Assembly: Coordinate field measurements and shop drawings with fabrication and shop assembly to minimize field adjustments, splicing, mechanical joints and field assembly of units. pre-assemble units in shop to greatest extent possible and disassemble as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for re-assembly and coordination. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for required products,including finishes. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for fabrication and erection of louver units and accessories. Include plans, elevations and details of sections and connections to adjoining work. Indicate materials, finishes, fasteners, joinery and other information to determine FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 08 90 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 LOUVERS &VENTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 compliance with specified requirements. Submit complete line of premium and standard color samples (12 colors minimum) for selection by Architect. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Louver: Provide 5-Year Warranty on Louver. B. Finnish: Provide 5-Year Warranty on Anodic finish. Provide 20-Year Warranty on PVDF coating. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Horizontal Blade Aluminum Louvers: 1. Typical louver, unless noted otherwise: Stationary 6" deep frame, 37-1/2 degree blade angle and 5-15/16" vertical spacing, equal to Ruskin ELF6375DX, minimum 57% free area. Thickness not less than 0.081" for frames and extruded aluminum blades (Alloy 6063-T5). Provide bird screen and metal mesh insect screen. 2. Size louvers to sizes noted in Drawings, or to required open areas noted in Mechanical drawings and specifications,whichever is greater. 3. Sill Flashing: Provide integral sill flashing or matching extended sill pan flashing that provides a 1-1/2" to 2" vertical turn down with drip edge at the exterior wall finish. 4. Aluminum Louver Finish: a. Baked Enamel Fluoropolymer: Primer shall be thenno-cured, 0.2 mil d.f.t. Finish shall be factory applied, high performance, fluorocarbon coating. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. B. Louver Screens: Provide frames consisting of U-shaped metal for permanently securing metal screen mesh. Locate screens on inside face of louvers. Secure screens to louver frames with machine screws, spaced at each corner and at 12" o.c.between. C. Fastenings: Fasteners for exterior applications may be hot-dip galvanized, stainless steel or aluminum. D. Anchors and Inserts: Use non-ferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work. 2.02 FABRICATION A. Provide louvers and accessories of design, materials, sizes, depth, arrangement, and metal thicknesses indicated, or if not indicated, as required for optimum performance with respect to airflow; water penetration; air leakage, where applicable (for adjustable units, if any); strength; durability; and uniform appearance. B. Fabricate frames including integral sills to suit adjacent construction with tolerances for installation including application of sealants in joints between louvers and adjoining work. C. Include supports, anchorage, and accessories required for complete assembly. D. Provide vertical mullions of type and at spacing recommended by manufacturer or 72" o.c., whichever is less. No intermediate. E. Join Frame members to one another and to stationary louver blades by spline screwed, except where indicated otherwise or where field bolted connections between frame members are made necessary by size of louvers. Maintain equal blade spacing including separation between blades and frames at head and sill to produce uniform appearance. PART 3 -EXECUTION FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 089000 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 LOUVERS &VENTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions and directions for installation of anchorage which are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Locate and place louver units plumb,level and in proper alignment with adjacent work. B. Use concealed anchorage wherever possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weathertight connection. C. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide reveals and openings for sealants and joint fillers, as indicated. D. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering and grinding operations require for fitting and jointing. Restore finishes so there is no evidence of corrective work. Return items which cannot be refinished in field to shop,make required alterations, and refinish entire unit, or provide new units, at Contractor's option. END OF SECTION 08 90 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 089000 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 LOUVERS &VENTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 09 21 00 - GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide gypsum drywall as shown on the drawings and as herein specified including but not limited to: Metal stud framing, suspended ceiling systems, gypsum drywall, and finishing systems. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Cold Formed Metal Framing." 2. Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry." 3. Division 6 Section "Wood Framing." 4. Division 6 Section "Architectural Woodwork", for coordination of metal frained cabinet supports. 5. Division 7 Section "Therinal Insulation." 6. Division 7 for additional requirements for fire stopping and sealants installed with gypsum board assemblies. 7. Division 9 Section "Metal Support Systems." 8. Division 9 Section "Acoustical Insulation." 9. Division 9 Section "Painting." 10. Division 9 Sections, for coordination of tiling, wall base materials, and other finishes applied to gypsum board assemblies. 11. Divisions 10 and 11, and other Sections as applicable, for coordination of accessories and equipment requiring blocking in walls. Submittals 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Gypsum wallboard. 2. Gypsum board, Type X. 3. Flexible gypsum board. 4. Gypsum ceiling board. 5. Foil-backed gypsum board. 6. Abuse-resistant gypsum board. 7. Impact-resistant gypsum board. 8. Mold-resistant gypsum board. 9. Gypsum board, Type C. 10. Glass-mat interior gypsum board. 11. Acoustically enhanced gypsum board. 12. Skim-coated gypsum board. 13. Exterior gypsum soffit board. 14. Glass-mat,water-resistant backing board. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0921 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 15. Cementitious backer units. 16. Water-resistant gypsum backing board. 17. Interior trim. 18. Exterior trim. 19. Aluminum trim. 20. Joint treatment materials. 21. Laminating adhesive. 22. Sound-attenuation blankets. 23. Acoustical sealant. 24. Textured finishes. B. Samples for Verification: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch-long length for each trim accessory indicated. 2. Textured Finishes: Textured panels, approximately 12" square for each interior paint color indicated. C. Shop Drawings: For air-barrier and water-resistant glass-mat gypsum sheathing assemblies. 1. Show locations and extent of sheathing, accessories, and assemblies specific to Project conditions. 2. Include details for sheathing joints and cracks, counterflashing strips,penetrations, inside and outside corners,terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining construction. D. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of air barrier. 1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS: A. Qualification Data: For Installer. including list of ABAA-certified installers and supervisors employed by Installer,who work on Project. B. Certificate: 1. Furnish certificate evidencing that material meets or exceeds specification and fire rating requirement. C. Research/Evaluation Reports: Evidence of cold-formed metal framing's compliance with building code in effect for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Evaluation reports certified under an independent third party inspection program administered by an agency accredited by IAS to ICC-ES AC98, IAS Accreditation Criteria for Inspection Agencies. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Metal Support Standard: ASTM C754. B. Metal Stud Standard: Fed Spec QQS-698 and QQS-775d, Class D. C. Gypsum Board Standard: GA 216 by Gypsum Association. D. Tolerances: 1/8" Offsets between planes of board faces and 1/4" in 8'-0" for plumb, level, warp and bow. E. Gypsum Board Finish Mockups: Before finishing gypsum board assemblies, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and qualities of materials and execution. 1. Install mockups for the following applications: a. Surfaces indicated to receive nontextured paint finishes. 2. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0921 00 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 4. Prior to product installation a field-constructed mock-up shall be provided under the provisions of Division 1 Section- Submittals,Product Data, Samples and Mock-ups. 5. Construct a typical exterior wall section, incorporating back-up wall, cladding, window and sill, insulation, flashing and any other critical junctions (roof, foundation, etc.) as detailed in Drawings. 6. Locate mockups as directed by Architect. 7. Build mockups as indicated in Drawings. a. Show typical components, attachments to building structure, and methods of installation. 8. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting installation. 9. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 10. Maintain approved mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work. 11. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless such deviations are specifically approved by Architect in writing. F. Demolish and remove mockups when directed. 1.06 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS 1. Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 01 Section - Project Management and Coordination. 2. Required attendees include: a. Owner's Representative b. General Contractor Superintendent c. Drywall Installation sub-contractor Superintendent d. Mechanical, electrical and plumbing systems superintendents e. Architect 3. Coordinate support framing and blocking requirements of all construction to be attached to gypsum board assemblies. 4. Coordinate ceiling suspension anchorage, sprayed fireproofing, ceiling access panel locations and ceiling mechanical electrical and other ceiling systems. 5. Status of action submittals. 6. General Contractor to maintain and distribute meeting minutes. 1.07 PERFORMANCE/DESIGN CRITERIA A. Acoustic Ratings: Construct assemblies to achieve acoustic ratings indicated on Drawings, assemblies tested to ASTM E90 and classified in accordance with ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. B. Deflection Limits: 1. Limit deflection of partitions to following limits,based on design load. a. Partitions to receive tile, plaster, adhered stone, or similar heavy finish materials: L/240. b. Other partitions: L/120. c. Comply with minimum stud gauges required elsewhere in these specifications, the most stringent requirement shall prevail. If partition height exceeds stud manufacturer's limiting height for applicable loading and deflection, install bracing above ceiling, decrease stud spacing, or increase stud gauge. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0921 00 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Limit deflection of ceilings to L/360. C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing,provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by, and displaying a classification label from, an independent testing agency acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. 1.Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Indicated by design designations from GA-600, "Fire Resistance Design Manual." 2. Construct assemblies to achieve fire resistance ratings indicated on Drawings, in accordance with applicable UL design numbers. 3. In the event that requirements of assembly numbers referenced conflict with other Contract Document requirements, conform to assembly requirements. 1.08 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials with manufacturer's label attached. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. Stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. Protect materials from dampness or wetting. Remove any damaged materials. B. Protect cold-formed metal framing from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling as required by AISI's "Code of Standard Practice". 1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations,whichever are more stringent. B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned. C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Steel Framing and Furring: a. Allied Building Products, Inc. b. AllSteel Products,Inc. c. Cemco. d. Clark-Dietrich Building Systems. e. Consolidated Fabricators Corp. f. MarinoWare; Div. of Ware Industries,Inc. g. MBA Building Supplies. h. Scafco Corp. i. United Metal Products,Inc. 2. Gypsum Board and Related Products: a. G-P Gypsum Corp. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0921 00 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 b. National Gypsum Company. c. United States Gypsum Co. (USG) B. Source Limitations: 1. Provide framing materials and accessories used on the project by one manufacturer throughout. 2.02 FRAMING MATERIALS AND ACCESSORIES A. Components, General: As follows: 1. Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 2. Steel Sheet Components: Complying with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal and with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating. 3. Exterior Applications: All exterior applications shall be type 316 stainless steel meeting ASTM A167. B. Steel Studs and Runners: Provide light gauge metal framing and accessories supplied by one manufacturer throughout. Provide standard gauges of galvanized steel channel studs at size and spacings indicated on drawings, and as follows: 1. Minimum 18 gauge studs where distance between horizontal bracing is greater than 12'- 0". 2. Minimum 16 gauge studs where distance between horizontal bracing is greater than 18'- 0". 3. Minimum 20 gauge studs where greater gauge is not otherwise required. 4. Depths: As indicated in Drawings. C. Tracks: ASTM C645. Standard with manufacturer for type and size stud utilized, same finish. Furnish all necessary miscellaneous accessories such as clips,brackets, etc. D. Deflection Track: Manufacturer's standard deep leg track. Utilize Firestop track at fire rated walls as tested in U. L. assemblies for head of wall joint. E. Stud Spacer bars: 7/8" x 7/8" x 50" long right angle bar pre-notched 12", 16", and 24" centers. (20 gauge.) F. Gypsum Board Ceiling Cold Rolled Main Runner Carrying Channels: 1-1/2", 16 gauge steel channels with minimum 1/2" wide flanges. G. Cold Rolled Furring Channels: 3/4", 16 gauge steel channels with minimum 1/2" wide flanges. H. Hat Shape Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8" x 1-1/4", minimum 22 gauge, galvanized steel hat shaped sections. I.Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2" deep steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: Hat shaped. 2. Provide J or C shaped track and channels with non-slotted web to frame around openings where required for fire rated construction and / or for screw attachment or support of windows. 16 gauge where required to prevent flame spread at cavity wall construction. J.Slide Clips: Provide minimum 600 pound lateral capacity design load thickness, or as shown on drawings. Provide prefabricated clips as manufactured by Clark Dietrich Framing Systems, or equal. Install as shown on drawings. K. Framed openings: Galvanized steel one piece header and jamb studs meeting or exceeding the requirements of ASTM C 754. L. Blocking and Backing Plates: Refer to Division 06, Section"Rough Carpentry". FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0921 00 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 M. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. 2.03 GYPSUM WALLBOARD PANELS A. General: Specifications based on materials and manufacturers listed are to set quality standard. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named products, or comparable products by another manufacturer. B. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. C. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396 unless otherwise indicated. 1. Type X: a. Thickness: 5/8". 1) 1/4" [over existing plaster walls] [and] [at multiple layer curved wall construction]. b. Long Edges: Tapered. c. Location: Typical where other wallboard type is not otherwise indicated. 2. Type C: a. Thickness: 5/8". b. Long Edges: Tapered. c. Location: Fire rated ceilings. 3. Moisture and Mold Resistant: With moisture and mold resistant core and paper surfaces, mold resistance ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. a. Thickness: 5/8". b. Long Edges: Tapered. c. Location: At restrooms, laundry, extractor, commercial kitchen areas, custodial, and similar wet and washable locations, except for backer board installed behind tile. 4. Shaft Wall: I" Shaft Liner,with Type-S screws, or as required for fire rated assembly. 2.04 EXTERIOR WALL SHEATHING: A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Not less than 1/2 inch, and not less than 3/4 inch at back side of parapet framing above roof. Additionally, comply with minimum thicknesses indicated in structural Drawings. 2.05 TILE BACKING PANELS A. Panel Size: Provide in maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and correspond with support system indicated. B. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI Al 18.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325. 1.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following or other approved equal: a. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard. b. United States Gypsum Co.; DUROCK Cement Board. 2. Thickness: As indicated. 2.06 TRIM ACCESSORIES A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbeads: Equal to USG Dur-A-Bead. Use at outside corners. b. Metal Edge Trim: Standard trim of galvanized steel with either knurled and perforated or expanded flanges and beaded for concealment of flange in joint FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0921 00 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 compound. Equal to USG 200 or 400 Series. Apply where board abuts or terminates at another material. 1) L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound; use at exposed panel edges. 2) J-Mold: Metal J-molds; exposed flange receives joint compound,use at all panel edges abutting dissimilar materials. c. Gypsum Control Joints: Metal V-shape control joints. Use where indicated and at changes in backup material and in partitions at 30'-0" o.c. maximum, and at large gypsum board ceiling areas at 20'-0" o.c. maximum. Also provide at both sides all interior and exterior window& door frames. 2.07 INTERIOR WALLBOARD JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475. B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Wallboard: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer. a. Use polymer-coated (alkali-resistant) mesh tape, 2" wide at interior applications, and 3" wide at exterior applications. C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Wallboard: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. I. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound, equal to USG Durabond 90. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound, equal to USG Durabond Joint Taping Compound. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound, equal to USG Ready Mixed Joint Topping. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat,use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 5. Skim Coat: For final coat of Level 5 finish,use drying-type, all-purpose compound. D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Cementitious Backer Units: As recommended by panel manufacturer. 2.08 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated into the work include the following: I. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: a. Pecora Corp.; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant. b. United States Gypsum Co.; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant. 2. Acoustical foam sealant may be used to fill voids to decking or other similar conditions above ceilings. B. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining, latex sealant, complying with ASTM C 834 that effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 2.09 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations. B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0921 00 - 7 MAY 2, 2023 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Laminating adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Laminating adhesive shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." C. Door frame Grout: Equal to USG Durabond 90 Joint Compound, Multi-Purpose. D. Sealer Gaskets: 5-12" x 3/8" closed cell foam and adhesive backed peel and stick membrane, equal to Protecto Wrap (800-759-9727) "Triple Guard Energy Sill Sealer." Provide at all exterior metal studs in contact with floor slab. E. Hanger Wire: ASTM A 641, 9 Gauge galvanized steel wire. F. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer. G. Insulation: 1. Thermal Insulation: Refer to Division 07, Section"Thermal Insulation". 2. Acoustical Insulation: Refer to Division 09, Section"Acoustical Insulation". 3. Fire Resistant Assemblies: Provide mineral fiber insulation according to the requirements of the fire rated assembly, except where greater thickness is indicated for partitions that also carry an acoustical rating. 2.10 TEXTURE FINISHES A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer. B. Aggregate Finish: Water-based, job-mixed, aggregated, drying-type texture finish for spray application. 1. Texture: Light spatter. C. Non-Aggregate Finish: Pre-mixed,vinyl texture finish for spray application. 1. Texture: Orange Peel. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION AND COORDINATION A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. C. Interface and Coordination with Other Work: 1. Coordinate installation of firestopping at penetrations through fire-resistive rated assemblies. 2. Coordinate installation of joint sealers specified in Division 7 Section at penetrations of non fire-resistive rated assemblies. 3. Coordinate support framing and blocking requirements of all construction to be attached to gypsum board assemblies. 4. At partitions indicated to receive thermal or acoustical batts,pack insulation into cavities while framing is being fabricated for stud packs, box headers, and other framing cavities that will be inaccessible upon erection of framing. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0921 00 - 8 MAY 2, 2023 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 5. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. a. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION-METAL FRAMING A. General Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. 2. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply to framing installation. 3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844 that apply to framing installation. 4. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 that apply to framing installation. B. Fire rated wall partitions installed to provide specified design criteria requirements. Partitions continuous from floor level to underside of structure and completely fire taped. C. Stud and Framing Installation: 1. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely fastened. 2. Steel studs cut to proper length, plumbed and aligned, continuous runner tracks attached to structure at intervals not to exceed stud spacing specified. Anchor all exterior studs and studs adjacent to window and door frames, partition intersections and corners to runner flanges. 3. Studs for partitions indicated to be fire rated or to include sound batts shall extend to deck,unless noted otherwise. 4. Where partitions abut ceiling or deck construction or vertical structural elements,provide slip or cushion type joint between partition and structure as recommended by stud manufacturer. 5. Install double studs at all jambs at all windows & doors. 6. Studs shall either extend to structure for anchorage/bracing, and or be braced with alternating kickers at 4'-0" on center maximum. 7. Install supplementary framing as necessary to support fixtures, equipment services, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction. Install, or coordinate installation of wood blocking by other trade as applicable, for all such construction. S. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies. 9. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. D. Z-Shaped Furring Members: 1. Erect furring vertically to hold insulation specified in Division 07, Section "Thermal Insulation" in place. Z-shaped furring members spaced to match stud spacing. 2. Erect furring horizontally <at insert locations / description to hold insulation specified in Division 07, Section "Thermal Insulation" in place. Z-shaped furring members spaced 24 inches maximum o.c. 3. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0921 00 - 9 MAY 2, 2023 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 4. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At 5. At window and door openings, provide C or J shaped perimeter furring or tracks where detailed in Drawings and where required for fastening window framing. 6. perimeter framing or tracks of solid profile without cut-outs, where detailed in Drawings and where required for flame spread prevention into cavity. Framing sized to fill space from face of sheathing to back side of loose lintel, masonry veneer, or other non- combustible finish material.At jambs and heads of openings in fire rated cavity walls, install 16 gauge C or J shaped E. Fastenings for Wall Supported Items: Provide and install 12 gauge wall reinforcing plates 6" high (minimum) x 1 stud space wide or 2 x 8 (minimum) x 1 stud space fire retardant wood blocking, unless specified otherwise at all stud wall areas receiving grab bars, toilet partitions, wall bumpers and other wall mounted accessories. Plates welded or screwed to studs. 3.03 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Main runner carrying channels attached to structure with hangar spacing as required to meet requirements of ASTM C 754, and other criteria as specified. Cross furring 3/4" channels attached to main runners 2. Deflection limited to 1/360 of span. 3. Maximum allowable spacing of main runners, 48" O.C.; and cross furring 24" maximum O.C. At openings which interrupt main runners or furring channels, reinforce grille with 3/4" channels wire tied to and parallel to main runner channels. 4. Maximum allowable spacing of hangers 48" O.C. 5. Install uplift bracing to structure at exterior locations, air lock vestibules, Apparatus Bay, and at other spaces subject to wind uplift or sudden changes in air pressure. 6. Install uplift bracing to structure at 8'-0" on center each way and/or is required by structural requirements. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards unless more stringent requirements are specified. 4. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0921 00 - 10 MAY 2, 2023 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 6. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 7. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 8. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 9. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts,pipes, or conduit. D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. 3.04 INSTALLATION—INTERIOR WALL BOARD PANEL ERECTION A. General: Comply with ASTM C840. B. Panel Installation: 1. Use wallboard and sheathing of maximum lengths to minimize joints. 2. Stagger end joints where they occur. 3. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions, and stagger joints between each layer of panel in multiple layer installations,by at least one framing member. a. Exception: Do not bridge panels over expansion joints. 4. Locate end joints as far as possible from center of wall or ceiling. 5. Do not place butt ends against tapered or grooved edges. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. 6. Support ends and edges of wallboard on framing or furring members. 7. No wallboard installed over piping, ducts, electric boxes or conduits until they have been installed,run and tested. 8. Attach wallboard and sheathing with screws spaced 12" O.C. and staggered along abutting vertical edges. 9. Exterior grooved sheathing installed horizontally with tongue up. 10. Partitions indicated sealed to deck shall be continuous except where interrupted by structure,mechanical or electrical construction. 11. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, conduits, and structural members. Cut panels to fit profile of penetrations and apply a bead of sealant 1/4" to 3/8" wide. 12. Tape and float only is acceptable behind lockers that have solid backs unless otherwise required for partition fire or acoustical ratings. 13. Rated partitions shall have wall board continuous both sides above ceiling to deck and fire taped and sealed. 14. Partitions shown to include sound batt but not to extend to deck shall have wall board continuous to deck above ceiling and taped on one side only. a. Exception: Partitions shown to have acoustical insulation placed over ceiling to either side of the partition wall. 15. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, including floors and deck. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch wide spaces at these locations. Trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels will be exposed in the completed work. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant 16. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining panels. C. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0921 00 - 11 MAY 2, 2023 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings. D. Wall Tile Substrate: ANSI A108.11 1. Install tile backer board as substrate for thin set ceramic tile. 2. Space 1/4" above fixture lips. 3. Seal ends, cut edges and penetrations of each piece with water resistant compound before installation. 4. Tape&mortar over all joints prior to tile installation. E. Accessory Installation: 1. Corner Beads: Install on external corners with suitable fasteners spaced 9" O.C. 2. Metal Trim: Install over face layer with fasteners spaced 9" O.C. where shown and where gypsum surfaces meet dissimilar materials. 3. Control Joint: Install control joints in locations where detailed, and the following, unless otherwise indicated: a. At changes in backup material. b. Vertically in partition walls at 30'-0"maximum on center. c. Horizontally in partition walls taller than [16'] <insert dimension>. Confirm elevations of such joints with Architect. d. In large ceilings 20'-0" maximum on center each way. 1) Also at perimeter of ceilings in [Apparatus Bay] <indicate locations>. e. At interior side of all exterior door and window frames. f. At both sides of all interior and exterior door and window frames. 4. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations [indicated in Drawings] <insert requirements>. F. Joint Treatment Application: 1. Joint treatment compounds and products, as specified under Materials, shall be mixed and applied in accordance with manufacturer's direction to completely conceal all joint 2. s and screw depressions and provide a smooth surface to receive finishes as scheduled. 3.05 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNIT INSTALLATION A. Install panels and treat joints according to ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. 3.06 INTERIOR WALLBOARD FINISH A. Apply gypsum board finish in accordance with ASTM C 840, manufacturer's published instructions and GA-214 Finish Levels. 1. Level 1: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound. Surface shall be free of excess joint compound. Tool marks and ridges are acceptable. a. Application: In plenum areas above ceilings, in attics, in mechanical rooms, and in other areas where the assembly is generally concealed and not normally open to view. Accessories not required unless otherwise indicated or required by fire rated or acoustical rated construction. 1) Where a fire resistance rating is required for the gypsum board assembly, details of construction shall be in accordance with reports of fire tests of assemblies that have met the fire rating requirement. 2) Where acoustical rating requires more stringent finish application, comply with acoustical partition construction requirements. 2. Level 2: Embed tape and apply separate first coat of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges and sand joints. Provide level 2 finish where panels are substrate for tile, behind plywood backer boards, in mechanical and electrical rooms and where FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0921 00 - 12 MAY 2, 2023 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 specifically indicated, unless a higher level of finish is required for fire-resistance-rated assemblies and sound-rated assemblies. 3. Level 4: Embed tape and apply separate first, fill, and finish coats of joint compound to tape, fasteners, and trim flanges, and apply skim coat of joint compound over entire surface, and sand smooth. Provide Level 4 finish typical, where panels are to receive painted finish unless specifically indicated otherwise. a. Texture for level 4 finish: Light orange peel texture, or other light texture as approved by Architect through sample and mockup review. 4. Level 5: All joints and interior angles shall have tape embedded in joint compound and three separate coats of joint compound applied over all joints, angles, fastener heads, and accessories. A thin skim coat of joint compound, or a material manufactured especially for this purpose, shall be applied to the entire surface. The surface shall be smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Finished work free of noticeable defects which include joint ridging, staved joints,board edges damaged or out of place,joint blisters, nail pops, pinholes in joint treatment or any other noticeable defects. Finished work true to line, perfectly smooth and ready for painting or wall covering. 5. Prepared surfaces shall be coated with a primer/sealer prior to the application of finish paint. Refer to specification Division 9 Section for painting. a. Application: For use where gloss semi-gloss, enamel, eggshell, or non-textured flat paints are specified or where severe lighting conditions occur. Generally in all areas except where noted otherwise. 3.07 APPLYING TEXTURE FINISHES A. Surface Preparation and Primer: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces receiving texture finishes. Apply primer to surfaces that are clean, dry, and smooth. B. Texture Finish Application: Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment,to produce a uniform texture free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns. C. Prevent texture finishes from coming into contact with surfaces not indicated to receive texture finish by covering them with masking agents, polyethylene film, or other means. If, despite these precautions, texture finishes contact these surfaces, immediately remove droppings and overspray to prevent damage according to texture-finish manufacturer's written recommendations. 3.08 [FIELD QUALITY CONTROL] A. Above-Ceiling Observation: Before Contractor installs gypsum board ceilings,Architect will conduct an above-ceiling observation and report deficiencies in the Work observed. Do not proceed with installation of gypsum board to ceiling support framing until deficiencies have been corrected. 1. Notify Architect seven days in advance of date and time when Project, or part of Project, will be ready for above-ceiling observation. 2. Before notifying Architect, complete the following in areas to receive gypsum board ceilings: a. Installation of 80 percent of lighting fixtures,powered for operation. b. Installation,insulation, and leak and pressure testing of water piping systems. c. Installation of air-duct systems. d. Installation of air devices. e. Installation of mechanical system control-air tubing. f. Installation of ceiling support framing. 3.09 PATCHING AND REPAIR FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0921 00 - 13 MAY 2, 2023 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Remove and replace gypsum board panels that become wet, moisture damaged, or exhibit evidence of mold. 3.10 CLEANING A. Contractor shall completely clean all areas affected by this work and shall leave no excess or scrap materials or bedding compound on the job site. END OF SECTION 09 2100 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0921 00 - 14 MAY 2, 2023 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 09 22 16 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems. B. Related Requirements: 1. Division 05 Section: "Cold-Formed Metal Framing" for exterior & interior load-bearing and exterior non-load-bearing wall studs; floor joists; roof rafters and ceiling joists; and roof trusses. 1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. 1.04 INFORMATION SUBMITTALS A. Evaluation Reports: For dimpled steel studs and runners, firestop tracks, as provided by International Code Council—Evaluation Service(ICC-ES). PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 DESCRIPTION A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency. B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. C. Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not less than 25 percent<Insert number>. 2.02 FRAMING SYSTEMS A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 Coating with equivalent corrosion resistance of ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40,hot-dip galvanized,unless otherwise indicated. B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0922 16 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Metal Framing: Provide light gauge metal framing and accessories supplied by one manufacturer throughout. Provide standard gauges of galvanized steel channel studs at size and spacings indicated on drawings, and as follows: a. Where distance between horizontal bracing is greater than 12'-0", 18 gauge minimum and as required by perforinance requirements for horizontal deflection. b. Where distance between horizontal bracing is greater than 18'-0", 16 gauge minimum and as required by performance requirements for horizontal deflection. c. Minimum 20 gauge studs where greater gauge is not otherwise required. d. Depths: As indicated in Drawings. C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated,provide the following: 1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing. 2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner. 3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following]: 1) Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 2) MBA Building Supplies; F1atSteel Deflection Track. 3) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD Series. 4) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT). 5) Telling Industries; Vertical Slip Track. D. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,the following]: a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System. b. Grace Construction Products; F1ameSafe F1owTrak System. c. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System. d. Hilti CFS-TTS firestop top track seal E. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings or minimum 0.018 inch where not indicated. F. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch-thick, galvanized steel. G. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings or minimum 0.018 inch where not indicated. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0922 16 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. H. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: hat shaped. 1.Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum uncoated-steel thickness of 0.033 inch. 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch-diameter wire. J.Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches, wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch, galvanized, minimum 20 gauge, and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated(typically 2"). 2.03 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire. B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter. C. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated. D. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053 inch and minimum 1/2-inch-wide flanges. 1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings or 1 ''/2"minimum where not indicated. E. Furring Channels (Furring Members): 1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep. 2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings or minimum 0.018 inch where not indicated. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 3. Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.015 inch. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep. a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings or minimum 0.018 inch where not indicated. 5. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep members designed to reduce sound transmission. a. Configuration: hat shaped. F. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. 2.04 AUXILIARY MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0922 16 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Sealer Gaskets: 5-12" x 3/8" closed cell foam and adhesive backed peel and stick membrane, equal to Protecto Wrap (800-759-9727) "Triple Guard Energy Sill Sealer." Provide at all exterior metal studs in contact with floor slab. C. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following: 1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type 1 (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick,in width to suit steel stud size. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction. B. Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials: 1. Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners (tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor plates are required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches o.c. 2. After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire- resistive materials below that required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fire-resistive materials from damage. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754, except comply with framing sizes and spacing indicated. 1. Gypsum Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 841 that apply to framing installation. 2. Portland Cement Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 1063 that apply to framing installation. 3. Gypsum Veneer Plaster Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 844 that apply to framing installation. 4. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation. B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories,furnishings, or similar construction. C. Install bracing at terininations in assemblies. D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0922 16 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.04 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES A. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall. B. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction. 1. Space studs as follows: a. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. b. Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. c. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. C. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section(for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure. 3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance- rated assembly indicated. 5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. 6. Curved Partitions: a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs. b. Begin and end each are with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches O.C. D. Direct Furring: 1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. E. Z-Furring Members: 1. Erect insulation (specified in Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation") vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 16 inches to coordinate with exterior studs o.c.. 2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c. 3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0922 16 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit. F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing. 3.05 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS A. Install suspension system components in sizes and spacings indicated on Drawings, but not less than those required by referenced installation standards for assembly types and other assembly components indicated. B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement. C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within [performance limits established by referenced installation standards] <Insert deflection limit>. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure and hanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 5. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 6. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 7. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 8. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts,pipes, or conduit. D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports. E. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track. F. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes. END OF SECTION 09 22 16 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0922 16 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 09 30 13 - CERAMIC TILING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Ceramic tile. 2. Provide/replace tile to match existing historical tiles. 3. Stone thresholds installed as part of tile installations. 4. Crack suppression membrane for thin-set and medium set the installations. 5. Waterproof membrane for thick-set tile installations. 6. Cementitious backer units installed as part of tile installations. 7. Metal edge strips installed as part of tile installations. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete". 2. Division 03 Section "Hydraulic Cement Underlayment". 3. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for additional quality standards for sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces. 4. Division 07 Section "Expansion Joint Covers" for expansion covers installed in tiling. 5. Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Panels" for coordination with access doors and panels installation. 6. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board Assemblies" for cementitious backer units. 7. Division 09 Section "Flooring" Sections for transition strips other than those specified in this Section. 8. Division 10 Section "Toilet Accessories", and other sections as applicable, for coordination of recessed items installed in tiled walls. 9. Division 22, for coordination with plumbing fixtures, shower base units, floor drains. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Module Size: Actual tile size (minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499) plus joint width indicated. B. Facial Dimension: Actual tile size(minor facial dimension as measured per ASTM C 499). C. Facial Dimension: Nominal tile size as defined in ANSI A137.1. 1.04 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. TCA / TCNA: Tile Council of North America, Inc., and the TCNA Handbook for ceramic, glass, and stone tile installations,most current versions. B. ANSI Al 08.01,Requirements for movement joints. C. Marble Institute of America(MIA): Dimension Stone Design Manual for Expansion Joints. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0930 13 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 CERAMIC TILING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 D. ASTM C1242, Standard guide for selection, design, and installation of dimension stone attachment systems. E. ASTM C1193, Standard guide for the use of joint sealants. F. ASTM C1472, Standard guide for calculating movement and other effects when establishing sealant joint width. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as tested per the DCOF AcuTest(ANSI A137.1): 1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.42. B. All sealants used in floor or traffic applications shall have a Shore A hardness not less than 35. 1.06 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished the surfaces. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile indicated. Submit complete line of grout color for selection by Architect. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection. D. Samples of existing-tile match: For color matching of existing tile, submit tile-matched samples of those original tiles that are part of the restorative work. Obtain Architects approval prior to ordering of all tiles for the project. E. Samples for Verification: 1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 2. Assembled samples with grouted joints for each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required, at least 12 inches square and mounted on rigid panel. Use grout of type and in color or colors approved for completed work. 3. Full-size units of each type of trim and accessory for each color and finish required. 4. Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths. 5. Metal edge strips in 6-inch lengths. 1.07 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and Installer. B. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer stating products are suitable for intended application. C. Qualification Data: For Installer. D. Material Test Reports: For each tile-setting and-grouting product and special-purpose tile. E. Letter from sealant manufacturer, stating suitability of products for each application indicated. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications of Installers: For cutting, installing and grouting of ceramic tile, use only thoroughly trained and experienced journeyman tile setters who are completely familiar with the requirements of this work, and the recommendations contained in the referenced FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0930 13 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 CERAMIC TILING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 standards, and who are CTI, CTEF, ACT, or TCNA 5-Star TCAA Trowel of Excellence certified. B. Codes and Standards: In addition to complying with all pertinent codes and regulations, comply with the following: 1. Grout and mortar setting shall comply with,ANSI A108.4 and ANSI A 108.5. 2. Manufacture all ceramic tile in accordance with Standard Grade Requirements of ANSI 137.1. 3. ANSI Al 18.10, Specifications for waterproof membranes 4. ANSI Al 18.12 Specifications for Crack Isolation Membranes 5. Install all ceramic tile in accordance with the recommendations contained in Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation of the Tile Council of North America, Inc.,latest edition. C. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain all tile of same type and color or finish from one source or producer. 1. Obtain tile from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area. D. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from a single manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer. Including self-leveling underlayments and waterproofing/anti-fracturing membranes. E. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section through one source from a single manufacturer for each product: 1. Stone thresholds. 2. Waterproofing. 3. Joint sealants. 4. Cementitious backer units. 5. Metal edge strips. F. Mockups: Build mockups to demonstrate aesthetic effects. 1. Build mockup of each type of floor tile installation. 2. Build mockup of each type of wall tile installation. 3. Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion. 4. View mockup under permanent lighting conditions. G. Where existing tile is to be color-matched,preserve as much existing tile as possible. H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Project Management and Coordination." 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirement in ANSI A137.1 for labeling sealed tile packages. B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination avoided. D. Store liquid latexes and emulsion adhesives in unopened containers and protected from freezing. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0930 13 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 CERAMIC TILING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. if coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile,remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile. 1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions. 1.11 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that are from same production runs as products installed, that match products installed, and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color,pattern, and size indicated. 2. Grout: Furnish quantity of grout equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, and color indicated. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. The following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: The design for each tile type is based on the product named. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide either the named product or an approved comparable product by another manufacturer. 2.02 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1, "Specifications for Ceramic Tile," for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements,unless otherwise indicated. 2. For facial dimensions of tile, comply with requirements relating to tile sizes specified in Part 1 "Definitions" Article. B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI standards referenced in"Setting and Grouting Materials" Article. C. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Where manufacturer's standard products are indicated for tile, grout, and other products requiring selection of colors, surface textures, patterns, and other appearance characteristics, provide specific products or materials complying with the specified product: D. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. E. Warpage: No more than one-tenth the length of the measured span of the tile can exhibit more than 25 percent of total allowable warpage. 2.03 TILE PRODUCTS A. Available Suppliers whose products may be incorporated into the work include but are not limited to the following: 1. As scheduled for new tile. B. Wall Porcelain Tile: Glazed porcelain ceramic tile. Size and type as indicated on drawings. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0930 13 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 CERAMIC TILING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Floor Tile: Porcelain tile. Size and type as indicated on drawings. D. Trim & Special Tile: Provide necessary caps, stops, coves, returns, trimmers, and other shapes as required for a complete installation. Items to be supplied by the same manufacturer supplying the tile. E. Cove Base: Porcelain tile. Base to match tile color to be selected for the floor. Size and type as indicated on the drawings. F. Ceramic Tile: Flat tile as scheduled on drawings. G. Cap Tile at half-height wall: Provide custom cap tile with rounded edges, to match adjacent glazed tile. 2.04 THRESHOLDS A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. 1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, aligning lower edge of bevel with adjacent floor finish. Limit height of bevel to 1/2 inch or less, and finish bevel to match face of threshold. B. Stone Thresholds: ASTM C 615 with honed finish. 1. Stone or Marble: In thicknesses as required for installation indicated in part 3 and as detailed in Drawings. Uniform, fine to medium-grained stone or marble in color as selected by Architect. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope. Align lower edge of bevels with adjacent floor finishes. a. Where a stone threshold is indicated for 3'x5' handicap accessible showers, provide threshold without any bevel and sized for flush installation. 2.05 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE FOR THIN-SET FLOOR TILE INSTALLATIONS A. Basis of Design Products: Design is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements;provide one of the named products, or an approved equal substitution. B. Fluid-Applied Membrane: Liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer. 1. Crack Isolation Membrane: ANSI Al 18.12: a. Custom Building Products;.Fracture-Free Crack Isolation Membrane. b. Laticrete; Blue 92 Anti-Fracture Membrane. c. MAPEI; Mapelastic Cl. 2.06 WATERPROOFING MEMBRANES FOR THICK-SET TILE INSTALLATIONS A. Basis of Design Products: Design is based on products indicated. Subject to compliance with requirements; provide one of the named products, or an approved equal substitution. B. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Product: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber and fabric reinforcement. 1. Waterproofing Membrane: ANSI A118.10: a. LATICRETE International,Inc.; Laticrete 9235 Waterproof Membrane. b. TEC—Hydraflex, Waterproofing Crack Isolation Membrane c. MAPEI; Mapelastic 400 Waterproof Membrane. 2.07 WATERPROOFING FOR THIN-SET TILE INSTALLATIONS A. General: Manufacturer's standard product that complies with ANSI Al18,10, selected from the following; B. Waterproofing Membrane(Concrete Slabs). FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0930 13 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 CERAMIC TILING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Flexible load-bearing, self-curing liquid rubber polymer and reinforcing fabric to form a seamless, heavy-duty waterproof membrane below a protective surface. Provide continuously under floor tile and behind wall tile: a. Laticrete; "9235". b. MAPEI; Mapelastic 400. 2. Provide reinforcing membranes at floor to vertical surfaces, throughout shower pan and wall lining to the full height of the wall tile, and for other conditions as recommended by Manufacturer for the waterproofing system indicated. 3. At curbless shower installations, extend membrane F-0" beyond shower enclosure. C. Waterproofing and Uncoupling Membrane(Wood or Plywood Deck). 1. Flexible polyethylene membrane with grid structure of square dovetail cavities, with anchoring fleece laminated to the underside. a. Schluter "Ditra", as manufactured by Schluter-Systems L.P., Plattsburgh, NY (800) 472-4588. b. Laticrete "Strata Mat", as manufactured by Laticrete International, Inc., Grand Prairie, TX (972) 641-3266. 2.08 WATERPROOFING SYSTEM FOR TILE SHOWER APPLICATIONS A. Waterproofing system: Provide complete shower waterproofing system for shower pan and wall waterproofing, consisting of 8 mil thick polyethylene membrane with bonded fleece on both sides. Membrane shall meet or exceed the requirements of "American National Standard Specifications for load bearing,bonded,waterproof membranes for thin-set ceramic tile and dimension stone installation A118.10", shall be listed by cUPC, and shall be evaluated by ICC-ES for compliance with local building code requirements. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide Schluter Kerdi system, or approved equal: 1. Waterproofing membrane: Schluter Kerdi. 2. Seaming membrane: Schluter Kerdi-BAND. 3. Waterproofing Accessories: Schluter Kerdi-SEAL mixing valve and pipe seals. 4. Provide pre-formed corner pieces at all intersections of planes, and as required for complete waterproofing system. 5. Provide sealants as recommended by Manufacturer for complete installation. 6. Kerdi-Board-SN for tiled soap and shower shelf: Size: 12"x12" soap and shampoo single shelf. 7. At curbless shower installation, extend membrane F-0" beyond shower enclosure. 2.09 SETTING MATERIALS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following, or approved equal: 1. Custom Building Products. 2. LATICRETE International Inc. 3. MAPEI Corporation. B. Portland Cement Thickset Mortar Installation Materials: ANSI A108.02. 1. Thickset Bed Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded-wire fabric, 2 by 2 inches by 0.062-inch diameter; comply with ASTM A 185/A 185M and ASTM A 82/A 82M, except for minimum wire size. C. Latex-Polymer Modified Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set) for Wall and Floor: ANSI Al 18.4, consisting of the following: 1. Prepackaged dry-mortar mix containing dry,redispersible, ethylene vinyl acetate additive to which only water must be added at Project site. Available products include the following: a. MAPEI; Ultraflex 2. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0930 13 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 CERAMIC TILING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 b. Custom Building Products; VersaBond Flex. c. Laticrete; 253 Gold, 2. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar,ISO 13007; C2TE,in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4. 3. For thin-set application of large format tiles,use LHT mortar. D. Dry-Set Mortar for Large and Heavy Tile (LHT) large format tile; Floors and Walls: Comply with requirements in ANSI A118.4. Provide product that is approved by manufacturer for application thickness of 3/32" to 1/2". 1. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site. a. MAPEI; Ultraflex LFT. b. Custom Building Products; Natural Stone and Large Tile Premium Mortar. c. Laticrete; 4-XLT. d. TEC; Ultimate 6 Plus LHT Mortar 2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin liquid-latex additive at Project site. a. MAPEI; Kerabond/Keralastic. b. Custom Building Products; Custom Blend/Custom Flex. c. Laticrete; 315 /333. d. MAPEI; Ultraflex LFT Rapid. e. Custom Building Products; MegaLite RS. f. Laticrete; 254 Rapid. 2.10 GROUT MATERIALS: A. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI At 18.7,in color as selected by Architect. 1. Polymer Type: Either ethylene vinyl acetate, in dry, re-dispersible form, prepackaged with other dry ingredients, or acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix. 2. Use sanded grouts for joints 1/8 inch and wider. Available Products: a. MAPEI; Keracolor S. b. Laticrete; 1500 Sanded Grout. c. Custom Building Products; Polyblend. 3. Use unsanded grout for joints less than 1/8 inch in width. Available Products: a. MAPEI; Keracolor U. b. Laticrete; 1600 Unsanded Grout. c. Custom Building Products; Polyblend Nonsanded. B. Ready-to-Use, Non-Staining Grout: Pre-Mixed Non-Staining Professional-grade, ready-to- use color consistent quartz aggregate grout, for use with grout joints 1/16" to 1 /2" (1,5 to 12 mm) and complying with ANSI A118.6,ANSI A118.7, and ISO 13007; CG2. 1. Available Products: a. MAPEI; Flexcolor CQ. b. Custom Building Products; Fusion Pro. c. Laticrete; Ready-to-Use Grout. d. TEC; 1nColor Advanced Performance Grout C. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3. 1. Provide product capable of withstanding continuous and interinittent exposure to temperatures of up to 140 and 212 deg F, respectively, and certified by manufacturer for intended use. 2. Available Products: a. MAPEI; Kerapoxy CQ. b. Custom Building Products; CEG Lite. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0930 13 - 7 MAY 2, 2023 CERAMIC TILING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 c. Laticrete; Spectralock Pro Premium. d. TEC; AccuColor EFX Epoxy Grout 2.11 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard chemically curing, elastomeric sealants of base polymer and characteristics indicated that comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants." B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed joints,unless otherwise indicated. C. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures. 1. Where Grout Manufacturer's sealants meet requirements throughout, use Grout Manufacturer's matching color sealants for sealant joints between tiles. Available Products: a. MAPEI; Keracaulk/Mapesil. b. Laticrete; Latasil. c. Custom Building Products; Polyblend/Commerical 100% Silicone Caulk. 2. Other Available Products may include: a. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786. b. GE Silicones, Sanitary 1700. c. Pecora Corporation;Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant. d. Tremco, Inc.; Tremsil 600 White. D. Multipart, Pourable Urethane Sealant for Use T: ASTM C 920; Type M; Grade P; Class 25; Uses T, M,A, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, O. 1. Available Products: a. MAPEI; Mapeflex P1 SL. b. Bostik; Chem-Calk 550. c. Mameco International,Inc.; Vulkem 245. d. Pecora Corporation; NR-200 Urexpan. e. Tremco,Inc.; THC-900. E. Joint Backers: Foam joint backer material to prevent sealant bond and form recommended joint cross sectional shape. Round or rectangular with rounded top, and in sizes as appropriate to joint sizes and conditions. 2.12 CEMENTITIOUS BACKER UNITS A. Provide 1/2" cementitious backer units at all walls to receive tile and on top of plywood subfloor/deck to receive waterproofing and tile All walls in wet areas complying with ANSI Al 18.9 in maximum lengths available to minimize end-to-end butt joints re: Division 09 Section"Gypsum Board Assemblies." 2.13 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement- based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated. B. Tile Lippage Control System: Tile installation system designed to minimize or eliminate tile lippage in floor and wall installation. Raimondi Lippage System or other system acceptable to large format ceramic tile Manufacturer for eliminating lippage in installation of their tile. Use in the following locations: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0930 13 - 8 MAY 2, 2023 CERAMIC TILING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. At all large forinat ceramic tiles,both in floor and wall installation applications. C. Metal Edge Strips: Metal edge strips with flange for embedding in tile setting material. Provide shapes as noted below, in sizes to match tile and setting-bed thickness and adjacent finish materials at transitions. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide metal strips as manufactured by Schluter. 1. Top edges of tile (that do not go to ceiling): "JOLLY" by Schluter. Finish: Clear anodized aluminum. 2. Tile Outside Corners: "JOLLY" by Schluter. Finish: Clear anodized aluminum. Include universal accessory pieces for inside and outside corners, and end caps. 3. Tile base to floor tile: "DILEX-AHK"by Schluter. a. Finish: [Stainless steel] [Clear anodized aluminum] <insert finish>. b. Provide connectors, end caps, and inside and outside corner kits. Where there is adjacent vertical tile trim, select corner kits to match the adjacent vertical trim. 4. Inside Corners shall be soft tile sealant joints to match grout color. 5. Sealant movement joints shall be soft tile sealant joints to match grout color. D. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers. A. Grout Sealer: Manufacturer's standard silicone product for sealing grout joints that does not change color, sheen, or appearance of grout. 1. Available Products: a. MAPEI Corporation; Ultracare Penetrating Tile, Stone, and Grout Sealer. b. Custom Building Products; Aquamix Penetrating Sealer. c. C-Cure;Penetrating Sealer 978. 2.14 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers'written instructions. B. Add materials,water, and additives in accurate proportions. C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment,mixer speeds, mixing containers,mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm; dry; clean; free of oil, waxy films, and curing compounds; and within flatness tolerances required by referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for installations indicated. 2. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed before installing tile. 3. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect. B. Contractor shall apply leveling coat or dry-set mortar over wall and floor surfaces which may vary more than 1-inch in 10 feet. Installation constitutes acceptance of the substrate. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0930 13 - 9 MAY 2, 2023 CERAMIC TILING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D. Where existing tile is to be color-matched, preserve as much of the existing original tile installation as possible. Remove only damaged, discolored or mismatched tile, or previous patches of inferior quality 3.02 PREPARATION A. Remove coatings, including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone,that are incompatible with tile-setting materials. B. Provide concrete substrates for tile floors, installed with adhesives or thin-set mortar that complies with flatness tolerances specified in referenced ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards. 1. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions with trowelable leveling and patching compound according to tile-setting material manufacturer's written instructions. Use product specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer. 2. Remove protrusions, bumps, and ridges by sanding or grinding. C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges selected during Sample submittals, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing. 3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. ANSI Tile Installation Standards: Comply with parts of ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that apply to types of setting and grouting materials and to methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. 1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a. Tile floors in wet areas. b. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. 2. Comply with ANSI standards for tolerances except as follows: a. Lippage: Lippage at floor tile shall not exceed 1/32"between adjacent tiles. B. TCNA Installation Guidelines: TCNA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation." Comply with TCNA installation methods indicated in ceramic tile installation schedules. C. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions, unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments. D. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile. E. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern, unless otherwise indicated. Align joints when adjoining tiles on floor,base, walls, and trim are same size. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Adjust to minimize tile cutting. Provide uniform joint widths,unless otherwise indicated. F. Expansion Joints: Locate expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints per approved shop drawings, and in compliance with TCNA handbook recommendations where indicated during installation of settings materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. Do not allow grout, setting materials, or other hard materials to restrict movement or bridge across at movement joints. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0930 13 - 10 MAY 2, 2023 CERAMIC TILING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Install sealant materials per manufacturer's installation instructions and industry standards. Clean and prime surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. Do not exceed temperature limitations, including where required shading of joints until after cured where joints are exposed to direct sunlight. 2. Locate joints at inside corners,in tile surfaces directly above joints in concrete substrates, and per reference standards. 3. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements of Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 4. Install movement joints with appropriate joint backer material. 5. Install movement joints per details in TCNA EJ171, except where pre-fabricated joint profiles are indicated. 6. Sealant profile shall be slightly concave. 7. In general, movement joints are recommended at 25' each direction at interior spaces. Tile work exposed to direct sunlight, heat or moisture should place movement joints at 12' maximum each direction. G. Grout tile to comply with requirements of the following tile installation standards: 1. For ceramic the grouts (sand-portland cement; dry-set, commercial portland cement; and latex-portland cement grouts), comply with ANSI A108.10. 2. For chemical-resistant epoxy grouts, comply with ANSI A108.6. H. Where indicated, install cementitious backer units and treat joints to comply with ANSI A108.11 and manufacturer's written instructions for type of application indicated. 3.04 ANTI-FRACTURE AND WATERPROOFING MEMBRANES INSTALLATION A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions to produce waterproof membrane of uniform thickness bonded securely to substrate. B. Install water proofing membrane under and behind floor tile and turned up 9" vertical behind wall tile at restrooms, kitchens, and other locations as indicated in Drawings. Also install waterproofing at floor drains, over tile backer board and moisture resilient board at wall base and plywood subfloor, and over other concrete floor substrates where indicated in Drawings. 1. At showers, install waterproofing system throughout the shower including behind wall tile, and extend waterproofing system behind adjacent tile at least 9" beyond the shower on all sides. C. Install Anti-Fracture membrane at all floor tile not otherwise indicated for waterproofing membrane installation. 1. Anti-fracture membrane shall not be installed as a substitute for movement joints or expansion joint covers across building movement joints. Comply with TCNA standards. D. Shower Waterproofing System Installation: Install in strict compliance with Manufacturer's current technical literature and installation instructions. Install complete waterproofing system over entire shower pan and walls and extend 9" behind adjacent tile beyond all edges of the shower. Install with special reinforcing shape pieces at intersections of planes and at plumbing penetrations per Manufacturer's installation instructions. E. Do not install tile over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to determine that it is watertight. 1. Stop up shower drains and flood shower pans to test waterproofing to be leak-free for minimum of 24 hours duration, or greater where required by authorities having jurisdiction,prior to tile installation. 3.05 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0930 13 - 11 MAY 2, 2023 CERAMIC TILING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. General: Install tile to comply with requirements in the Floor Tile Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCNA installation methods and ANSI A108 Series of tile installation standards. 1. For installations indicated below, follow procedures in ANSI A108 Series tile installation standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage. a. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. B. Joint Widths: Install tile on floors with the following joint widths: 1. Ceramic Tile: 1/8 inch. 2. Unless otherwise approved by Architect, accurately cut tile to install with joint widths between tile and floor drains, floor sinks, and similar items in floors, to the same joint widths as in the tile field. C. Floor Tile Pattern: As indicated in Drawings, or where not indicated in Drawings install in Stacked pattern. D. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds at restroom entries and where called for in Drawings; set in same type of setting bed as abutting field tile,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Set thresholds in latex-portland cement mortar for locations where mortar bed would otherwise be exposed above adjacent non-tile floor finish. 2. Install thresholds in compliance with Texas Accessibility Standards or local handicap accessibility code having jurisdiction. a. At doorways or transitions to adjacent flooring, install threshold with 1:2 beveled edges, set with top of threshold 1/8" to 1/4" above adjacent tile floor and not more than 1/2" total height above lowest adjacent flooring. Bottom of beveled edges should be flush to 1/16" above adjacent flooring surfaces unless otherwise detailed in Drawings. b. Where a stone threshold is indicated for 3'x3' handicap accessible showers, install threshold with 1:2 beveled edges, set between 3/8" to 1/2" vertical height above the lowest adjacent flooring. c. Where a stone threshold is indicated for 3'x5' handicap accessible showers, install non-beveled threshold flush with the shower floor tile or pan. Float the floor up between 1% min. to 2%max. as required to provide slope back to the shower drain. There shall be no curb at the flush transition. E. Metal Edge Strips: Provide at locations other than restrooms where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood, vinyl composition tile, or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile. Install with setting flanges embedded in the tile setting material. 1. Use full length pieces to the extent possible in order to minimize the number of joints. 2. Unless otherwise noted, install edge strips flush with faces of tile to within maximum lippage tolerances as specified for tile. 3. Backfill edge strips solidly with tile setting mortar behind cove bases, stair edges, ramp transitions, and similar metal tile trim accessories that have void spaces. F. Retain only if sealing grout as well as tile surface. See notes in grouts if this is sealing of cement-based grout for stain resistance,which is not the typically preferred application unless other factors such as chemical and heat resistance also apply. Grout sealer could potentially be,but often is not, a different product from the tile sealer, coordinate with Part 2. a. Also seal cementitious grout after grouting. 3.06 WALL TILE INSTALLATION A. Install types of tile designated for wall installations to comply with requirements in the Wall Tile Installation Schedule, including those referencing TCNA installation methods and ANSI setting-bed standards. B. Joint Widths: Install tile on walls with the following joint widths: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0930 13 - 12 MAY 2, 2023 CERAMIC TILING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Ceramic Tile: 1/8 inch. C. Wall Tile Pattern: As indicated in Drawings, or where not indicated in Drawings install in Vertical Stacked pattern. Verify with Architect prior to installation. D. Coved and Base Tile: Where special shaped coved or base tile is indicated, install special shaped tiles with the toe of the cove properly aligned with adjacent floor tile and the face of the tile properly aligned with adjacent wall tile to within tolerances indicated, to within the maximum tolerances specified for tile lippage at both surfaces. 1. At junctions of cove bae the with floor tile, ensure cove base is not recessed relative to adjacent floor tile in a manner that would trap water deeper than the allowed lippage. 2. Where cove base is available with outside corner pieces, provide and install outside corner pieces at all outside corners. Otherwise, neatly miter cove file at corners. 3. Install adjacent pieces at inside and outside corners to within the maximum lippage as specified. E. Metal Trim Strips: Install at all locations indicated or as required to conceal exposed edge of tile: 1. Use full length pieces to the extent possible in order to minimize the number of joints. 2. Unless otherwise noted, install edge strips flush with faces of tile to within maximum lippage tolerances as specified for tile. 3. Install all strips and transitions set in mortar beneath tile, and per manufacturer's instructions. 4. At top of tile wainscots and other exposed edges of wall tile, install caulk joint between metal trim and wall. Do not grout to wall. Coordinate color with Architect and adjacent finishes. 5. Metal Trim at Showers: Install according to Manufacturer's instructions and as follows: a. Unless otherwise detailed in Drawings, the open side of handicap accessible showers should be installed with metal trim edge creating a sloped lip 1/4" (minimum) to 1/2" (maximum) in total height, and compliant with ADA and Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS). Install trim at open side of shower flush with floor tile, and the low side of the trim flush with sloping tile inside the shower pan. b. Install adjustable rake trim at rake sides of shower, with face of trim flush with wall tile above. c. Install trim at low, slot drain side of shower with the top of trim aligned with the adjacent rake trim pieces. 3.07 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove epoxy and latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to the and grout manufacturer's written instructions, but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning. B. When recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed file walls and floors. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0930 13 - 13 MAY 2, 2023 CERAMIC TILING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral cleaner from tile surfaces. 3.08 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Tile Installation F112: Interior floor installation on concrete; LHT mortar on crack isolation or waterproofing membrane; TCNA F112. 1. Locations: At Large Tile. 2. LHT Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. 3. Grout: Polymer modified sanded grout. 4. Membrane: Use crack isolation membrane typical except use waterproofing membrane at restrooms,kitchen, and within 2' of floor drains. B. Tile Installation: Interior floor installation on concrete; thin-set mortar on crack isolation membrane; TCNA F125-Full. 1. Locations: Typical unless otherwise noted. 2. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. 3. Grout: Polymer modified sanded grout. 4. Membrane: Use crack isolation membrane typical except use waterproofing membrane at restrooms,kitchen, and within 2' of floor drains. C. Tile Installation F121: Interior floor installation on concrete; Cement mortar bed (thickset) on waterproof membrane; TCNA F 121. 1. Locations: At tile installation at recessed floor slabs and other areas with recesses in slab for slope to floor drains. 2. Thick-Set Portland Cement Mortar. 3. Grout: Polymer modified sanded grout. 3.09 WALL TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Tile Installation W244C: Interior wall installation over cementitious backer units; thin-set mortar; TCNA W244C. 1. Location: As indicated at locations other than showers. 2. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. 3. Grout: Polymer modified sanded grout. 3.10 SHOWER AND WALL INSTALLATIONS,METAL STUDS SCHEDULE: A. Tile Installation B422: Thin-set mortar on waterproof membrane over cementitious backer units/fiber cement underlayment with integrated bonding flange for bonded membranes; TCNA B422. 1. Location: Tile Showers. 2. Thick-Set Portland Cement Mortar at recessed floor conditions. 3. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-modified Portland hydraulic cement mortar. 4. Grout: Polymer modified sanded grout. END OF SECTION 09 30 13 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0930 13 - 14 MAY 2, 2023 CERAMIC TILING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 09 51 00 - ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide acoustical ceilings as shown on the drawings and as herein specified. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 09 Section-Non-Structural Metal Framing. 2. Division 09 Section - Gypsum Board Assemblies, for gypsum board ceilings support system. 3. Division 21 through 28 Mechanical and Electrical Sections, for coordination with devices installed in grid ceilings. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire Hazard Classification: Maximum flame spread, Class A (less than 25) as tested in accordance with ASTM E-84 and per Fed. Spec. SS-S-1 18a. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product specifications and installation instructions for each acoustical ceiling material required, and for each suspension system, including certified laboratory test reports and other data as required to show compliance with these specifications. B. Samples: Set of 4" x 4" square samples for each acoustical unit required, showing full range of exposed color and texture to be expected in completed work. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Contractor shall coordinate connection of lighting and electrical devices to grid. Where lighting fixtures are provided with integral clips, install lighting fixture with the clip attachments and not with screws through grid tees. 1.06 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide 3% full tiles, each type (minimum one box) each color, texture and style of ceiling tiles. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 CEILING TILE AND GRID A. Acoustical Panels: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0951 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Type ACT1: 24" x 24" x 5/8" mineral fiber tile made for a lay-in grid suspension system. Panel design is Armstrong"Dune", Color: White. Use fire rated ceiling tile and protected light fixtures in areas noted on plans. a. Use with Grid Type 1. B. Lay-in suspension system: Exposed steel members made for use with panel types specified. System supplied with all main runner tees, cross tees,wall angles, clips, connectors,fastening and hangar wires. Provide named product, or equal by System Conwed Corp., Donn Products, Chicago Metal, Flangeclamp Corp., or approved equal in finishes as specified below: 1. Grid Type 1: Grid to be 24" x 24" pattern with white finish. Armstrong's "Prelude ML" 15/16" exposed tee, or approved equal. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Uplift Bracing and Retention Clips: Provide uplift bracing and retention clips designed to prevent tiles from dislodging due to wind or air pressure changes at exterior grid, grid in airlock vestibules, and in similar locations subject to wind or sudden changes in air pressure. 1. Provide retention clips at all plank type tile as recommended by Manufacturer. a. Equal to Armstrong Universal Hold-Down clip for typical air pressure uplift locations unless otherwise recommended. b. Spring Retention Clip: Equal to Armstrong#414, for areas subject to ceiling impacts, large format tile or plank where universal clips are inadequate. B. Edge Treatment for cut edges of tegular and grooved edge ceiling tiles and planks: Manufacturer's recommended touch up paint. C. Metal Trim: Aluminum extrusion trim for use between acoustical ceiling to higher ceilings conditions, and as vertical trim at perimeter of ceiling clouds, to be Axiom Transitions, as manufactured by Armstrong, or approved equal. 1. Axiom Straight Transition Channel: 2" wide face with 3/4 inch horizontal legs, straight sections with special bosses formed for attachment to the Axiom tee-bar connection clip or hanging clip; commercial quality, extruded aluminum, factory-finished in to match lay-in system. 2. Axiom Splice Plates: Galvanized steel finish; formed to fit into special bosses and locked in place with 4 factory-installed screws. 3. Axiom Tee-Bar Connection Clip (AXTBC): Galvanized steel finished to match trim channel formed to fit into special bosses and locked in place by factory-installed screws and attached to Armstrong suspension system members. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Ceiling grids and acoustical panels completely installed in all areas indicated. Ceiling plenum shall be completely enclosed from adjoining conditioned space by structure, partitions, and/or acoustical panels. B. Suspension systems installed by direct suspension from structural systems in accordance with manufacturer's specification. Hanger wire shall support no greater than 16 square feet. Install additional hangars at ends of each suspension member, at each end of light fixtures, and 6 inches from vertical surfaces. Do not splay wires more than 5 inches in a 4 foot drop. Bottom of surfaces shall be flush and level. Miter corners where wall moldings intersect. C. Install grid with uplift bracing and retention clips where required. D. The plumbing and heating contractors shall not utilize hangers or framing of suspension system. The electrical contractor may utilize suspension system for lay-in fixture installation FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0951 00 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 but shall furnish two supplementary hangers per fixture for maintaining maximum load deflection. Electrical contractor shall not utilize tile as sole support for any ceiling-mounted electrical device. All ceiling-mounted electrical devices shall be supported with brackets attached to tees. E. Ceilings laid out as shown on the drawings, however, if not specifically shown, ceilings laid out from center of room in both directions so that cut tiles are equal at all edges. Place materials to have full bearing on suspension members. F. Where there are cut edges that will be visible in the finished work at tegular tile, or other tile with profile below the grid, touch up cut edges as recommended by Manufacturer with Manufacturer's recommended touch-up paint. Where cut edges are next to a wall and will not be visible, touch up paint is not required. Do not apply touch-up paint on the face of ceiling tile. 3.02 INSPECTION A. Following installation, soiled or discolored units cleaned to match adjacent perfect material. Any broken or damaged material which cannot be corrected by cleaning, removed and replaced with perfect material. END OF SECTION 09 51 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0951 00 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 09 65 13 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Resilient wall base materials and installation B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Section"Carpet." 2. Division 9 Section "Resilient Floorings" 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Materials delivered to job site in manufacturer's unopened containers with labels intact. B. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer,but not less than 50 deg F or more than 90 deg F. C. Store materials at minimum temperature of 70°F in all areas for at least 48 hours prior to installation 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F or more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation. B. After installation and until Substantial Completion,maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer,but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F. C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 inches long. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All materials shall be asbestos free,. best grade, with no second grade, off goods or remnants allowed. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0965 13 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Install resilient floor tiles in accordance with the recommended method of the "Tile Contractors Association of America Handbook". C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class 1,not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm. 1.07 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide the following, for each color and type installed, for future replacement: 1. Rubber Base: 10% of installed quantity. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Rubber Wall Base: Base 4" high x 1/8" thick, ASTM F 1861 Type TP (coextruded thermoplastic rubber) equal to that manufactured by Mannington, Tarkett, Roppe, Flexco or approved equal. Cove base (Style B) at vinyl flooring and straight base (StyleA) at carpeting. Color as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standards. B. Vinyl Wall Base: Base 4" high x 1/8" thick, ASTM F 1861, Type TV (vinyl, thermoplastic) equal to that manufactured by Mannington, Tarkett, Roppe, Flexco or approved equal. Cove base (Style B) at vinyl flooring and straight base (StyleA) at carpeting. Color as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standards. C. Adhesive: Type recommended by material manufacturer for each specific product and for its area of use. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections. Verify substrate conditions are acceptable for installing product in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products. 2. Any defects found during inspection must be corrected prior to installation; this includes any sanding, leveling, or surface repairs required. B. Material Inspection: In accordance with manufacturer's installing requirements, visually inspect materials prior to installing. Material with visual defects shall not be installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. C. Do not install resilient products until materials are the same temperature as space where they are to be installed. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0965 13 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed. D. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products. 3.03 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base. B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns,pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. 1. Base with puckers, bird months, or other visible delaminations from substrates or other imperfections are not acceptable. E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation. F. On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. G. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces. H. Job-Formed Corners: 1. Outside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches in length. a. Form without producing discoloration(whitening) at bends. 2. Inside Corners: Use straight pieces of maximum lengths possible and form with returns not less than 3 inches (76 mm) in length. a. Miter or cope corners to minimize open joints. 3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products. B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil. C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. D. Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.Remove and Legally dispose of protective covering at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 09 65 13 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0965 13 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 09 65 19 - LUXURY VINYL TILE PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Luxury Vinyl Tile (LVT)Flooring System. B. Related Documents: The Contract Documents, as defined in Division 1 Section- Summary of Work, apply to the Work of this Section. Additional requirements and information necessary to complete the Work of this Section may be found in other documents. C. Related Sections: Related work specified elsewhere includes but may not be limited to 1. Division 9 Section: Resilient Base. 1.03 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM F710,Preparing Concrete Floors to receive resilient flooring 2. ASTM 1914, Short term indention test 3. ASTM 2055, Size and squareness of resilient flooring 4. ASTM 2199, Dimensional stability and curing properties 5. ASTM F1700, Solid vinyl specification 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Division 1 Section- Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Data describing physical and performance characteristics; including sizes,patterns and colors including manufacturer's product sheet. C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles, and product components, including anchorage, accessories, finish colors,patterns and textures. D. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples for finishes, colors, and textures. E. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. 2. Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria, and physical requirements. 3. Manufacturer's Instructions: Manufacturer's installation instructions. F. Closeout Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: Operation and maintenance data for installed products in accordance with Division 1 Closeout Submittals (Maintenance Data and Operation Data) Section. FIRE FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0965 19-1 MO MAY 2, 2023 LUXURY VINYL TILE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Include methods for maintaining installed products, and precautions against cleaning materials and methods detrimental to finishes and performance. 2. Warranty: Warranty documents specified herein. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in perforining work of this Section with minimum 5 years documented experience. 1. Engage installer certified, as a"manufacturer's approved mechanic." 2. Certificate: When requested, submit certificate indicating qualification. B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Critical Radiant Flux in Accordance with ASTM E 648: More than 0.45 Watts per square centimeter. 2. Specific Optical Smoke Density in Accordance with ASTM E 662: Less than 450. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Division 1 Section-Product Requirements: Transport,Handle, Store, and Protect Products. B. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer's ordering instructions and lead time requirements to avoid construction delays. C. Deliver tiles and installation accessories to site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers each bearing names of product and manufacturer, project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. D. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer. 1. Material should be stored in areas that are fully enclosed, weathertight with the permanent HVAC system set at a uniform temperature of at least 68 degrees F (20 degrees C) for 72 hrs.prior to and during installation. 2. Store tiles on flat surfaces. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS OR SITE CONDITIONS A. Jobsite Requirements: 1. Environmental Requirements/Conditions: In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, areas to receive flooring shall be clean, fully enclosed, weather tight with the permanent HVAC set at a uniform temperature of at least 68 degrees F. The flooring material should be conditioned in the same manner. Maximum temperature should not exceed 100 degrees F after installation. 2. Temperature Requirements: Maintain air temperature in spaces where products will be installed for time period before, during, and after installation as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Temperature Conditions: 68 degrees F (20 degrees C) for 72 hours prior to, during and after installation. 4. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays. 1.08 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Finishing Operations: Install tile flooring after finishing operations, including painting and ceiling operations,have been completed. B. Concrete: Do not install tile flooring over concrete substrates until substrates have cured and are dry to bond with adhesive as determined by resilient flooring manufacturer's recommended bond, moisture test, and pH test. FIRE FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0965 19-2 MO MAY 2, 2023 LUXURY VINYL TILE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1.09 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Owner's acceptance, manufacturer's standard Warranty document executed by authorized company official. 1. Warranty Period: fifteen (15) Year Limited Warranty, commencing on Date of Substantial Completion. 1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Division 1 Section- Closeout Procedures and Training: Procedures for closeout submittals. B. Extra Materials: 1. Provide 3% (minimum one box) of extra floor tiles for each tile type,panel, and color. 2. Deliver to Owner extra materials from same production run as products installed. Package products with protective covering and identify with descriptive labels. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Luxury Vinyl Tile: Subject to compliance with project requirements, manufacturers offering specified items which may be incorporated in the Work include the following: 1. Basis of Design: ShawContract, Shaw Industries Group, Inc., 616 E. Walnut Avenue, Dalton, GA 30720 (800)257-7429,www.shawcontract.com. B. Division 1 Section - Product Requirements: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions: Permitted. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Luxury Vinyl Tile 1. ShawContract"Terrain 11" Style 0454V,ASTM F1700, Class B (Embossed) a. Size: 5.96 inch x 48 inch. b. Thickness: 0.098 in c. Wear Layer: 20 mil (.5 mm). d. Installation: Glue-down. e. Style and Color: 1) LVT-1: 00568 "Root". f. Static Load: ASTM F970— 1500 psi. g. Slip Resistant: ASTM D2047: greater than .6 wet; .6 dry. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Underlayment: As recommended by manufacturer. B. Adhesives: 5150-95, LokWorx Resilient, LokWorx + Resilient or 4151 Resilient Floor Adhesive required for installation, as approved by flooring manufacturer for specific material and substrates encountered. C. Subfloor Filler: Use of Portland-based patching compound modified with latex with a minimum 3,500 psi to smooth or level imperfections, as recommended by the manufacturer. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Division 1 Section-Execution: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. FIRE FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0965 19-3 MO MAY 2, 2023 LUXURY VINYL TILE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Verification of Conditions: Verify that field measurements, surfaces, substrates and conditions are as required and ready to receive Work and are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Report in writing to Architect prevailing conditions that will adversely affect satisfactory execution of the Work of this Section. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. D. By beginning Work, Contractor accepts conditions and assumes responsibility for correcting unsuitable conditions encountered at no additional cost to the Owner. E. Material Inspection: In accordance with manufacturer's installation requirements, visually inspect materials prior to installation. Material with visual defects shall not be installed and shall not be considered as a legitimate claim. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Adjacent Surfaces Protection: Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces from damage during product installation. B. Surface Preparation: I. General: Prepare floor substrate in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Floor Substrate: Prepare floor substrate to be smooth,rigid,flat, level,permanently dry, clean and free of foreign materials such as dust, paint, grease, oils, solvent, curing and hardening compounds, sealers, asphalt and old adhesive residue. 3. Concrete Floor Substrate: Concrete floor substrate shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3500 psi. Refer to Division 3 Concrete sections for patching and repairing crack materials, and leveling compounds with Portland cement based compounds. Do not use or install flooring over gypsum based leveling or patching materials 4. Reference Standard: Comply with ASTM F 710 Practice for Preparing Concrete Floors and Other Monolithic Floors to Receive Resilient Flooring. C. Concrete Moisture Test: 1. ASTM F1869-98 Standard Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission Rate of Concrete Sub floor Using Anhydrous Calcium Chloride: The moisture emission from the concrete shall not exceed 5.0 lbs. per 1000 sq. ft. in 24 hrs (verify using the calcium chloride test as per ASTM F 1869-98). A diagram of the area showing the location and results of each test shall be submitted to the Architect. If test results exceed limitations, the installation shall not proceed until the problem has been corrected. 2. ASTM F2170-02 Standard Test Method for Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using in situ Probes. The relative humidity measured from the center of the concrete slab should not exceed 75%. If the test results exceed the limitations,the installation must not proceed until the problem has been corrected. 3. The test area shall be conditioned with the permanent HVAC system set at a uniform temperature of at least 68 degrees F(20 degrees C)for 72 hrs prior to and during testing. D. Concrete pH Test: Perform pH tests on concrete floors regardless of the age or grade level. If the pH is greater than 10,it must be neutralized prior to beginning the installation. E. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. F. Vacuum clean substrate. 3.03 INSTALLATION-TILE FLOORING A. Install LVT flooring in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. 1. Installation environment should be conditioned to a constant temperature and humidity conditions. Site should have permanent windows and doors, fully enclosed, weather tight with FIRE FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0965 19-4 MO MAY 2, 2023 LUXURY VINYL TILE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 permanent HVAC system (not temporary) set at a uniform temperature of at least 65 degrees F (20 degrees C) for 72 hours prior to, during, and 72 hours after installation. B. Open number of floor tile cartons to provide quantity of flooring material required to cover each area; mix tile pieces to ensure shade variations do not occur within any one area. C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of floor materials before initial set. D. Set flooring in place,press with a 150 pound resilient flooring roller to attain full adhesion. E. Lay flooring from center marks established parallel to building walls. 1. Allow minimum 1/2 full size tile width at room or area perimeter. 2. Adjust tile layout as required to avoid use of units less than 1/2 tile. F. Terminate flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar. Where flooring continues through door opening, continue established pattern with no interruption. G. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges where flooring terminates. 1. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, cabinets, floor outlets, and other appurtenances to produce tight joints. H. Extend flooring into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. I.Adhere flooring to substrate without producing open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, or other surface imperfections in completed flooring installation. 1. Use adhesive applied to substrate in compliance with flooring manufacturer's recommendations, including those for trowel notching, adhesive mixing, and adhesive open and working times. J.Wait at least 5 days after installation before conducting wet cleaning. 3.04 INSTALLATION-BASE A. Install wall base in accordance with manufacturer's published instructions. B. Fit joints tight and vertical. Maintain minimum measurement of 18 inches between joints. C. Miter internal corners. At external corners, use premolded units. At exposed ends, use premolded units. 1. Install wall base on solid backing. Bond tight to wall and floor surfaces. D. Apply the base to the cabinet toe kicks. If necessary, use a hot air gun to make the base pliable enough to turn the corners of the toe kick. Minimize or eliminate base seams on the toe kick. If the cabinet butts into a wall, start the base where the wall and cabinet meet and continue around the exposed area of the toe kick. 3.05 SITE ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES A. Indoor Air Quality: 1. Temporary ventilation: As specified in Division 1 Section-Environmental Procedures. a. Ventilate products prior to installation. Remove from packaging and ventilate in a secure, dry, well-ventilated space free from strong contaminant sources and residues. Provide a temperature range of minimum 60 degrees F to maximum 90 degree F continuously for minimum 72 hours. Do not ventilate within limits of Work unless otherwise approved by Owner. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Division 1 Section- Quality Requirements: Field inspection. FIRE FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0965 19-5 MO MAY 2, 2023 LUXURY VINYL TILE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Manufacturer's Field Services: Upon Owner's request and with at least 2-3 week notice, provide manufacturer's field service consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visit for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Inspect flooring and base installation,pattern, layout, and attachment to substrate. 3.07 CLEANING A. Division 1 Section-Execution: Cleaning installed Work. B. Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace damaged installed products. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to owner's acceptance. Remove construction debris from project site and legally dispose of debris. 1. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaning methods recommended by tile floor manufacturer. 2. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by tile flooring manufacturer. 3. Damp mop tile flooring to remove black marks and soil. 3.08 PROTECTION A. Protection: Protect installed product and finish surfaces from damage during construction. Remove and legally dispose of protective covering at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 09 65 19 FIRE FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0965 19-6 MO MAY 2, 2023 LUXURY VINYL TILE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 09 65 68 - ATHLETIC RUBBER FLOORING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. Scope: 1. The complete installation of resilient athletic rubber sports flooring. 2. Accessories for installation,maintenance and repair. B. Related Specifications 1. Division 3 Section "Concrete." 2. Division 9 Section "Resilient Flooring" for rubber base. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Floor System Manufacturer Qualifications 1. Manufacturer shall be an established firm experienced in field and have been in business for a minimum of ten(10)years. 2. Manufacturer must be certified ISO 9001. B. Floor Contractor/Installer Qualifications 1. Flooring contractor shall be experienced in the flooring field. 2. Flooring contractor shall be factory-approved and have completed at least three projects of similar magnitude and complexity. C. Provide mock-up of 6' x 6' minimum, to be evaluated by Architect prior to proceeding. D. Manufacturer must be certified ISO 9001. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit samples of the actual sport surface in the standard colors. B. Submit three copies of each of the following: 1. Manufacturer's requirements for correct preparation, finishing and testing of substrate base material to receive premanufactured rubber sport surface. 2. Adhesive product data sheets an manufacturers certificates indicating approval for the proposed application. 3. Interior and exterior line paint data sheets and manufacturers certificates indicating approval for the proposed application. 4. Manufacturer's standard warranty. 5. Manufacturer's installation and maintenance instructions. C. Shop Drawings: provide shop drawings prepared for the specific project illustrating layouts, details, dimensions and other data. 1.05 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 09 65 68 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 ATHLETIC RUBBER FLOORING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Provide extra stock materials from original dye lots, for use in facility operations and maintenance (approximately 2% of the total floor surface for each color, surface texture and format of Manufactured Product). 1.06 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Delivery of Materials 1. Material shall not be delivered or installed until all masonry, painting, plastering, tile work, marble and terrazzo work are completed, and all overhead mechanical work, lighting, backstops, scoreboards are installed. Room temperature of at least 55 degrees Fahrenheit and moisture content of concrete slab of 3% or less. 2. Products Supplied must be delivered in Manufacturer's original, unopened and undamaged packaging with identification labels intact. B. Storage: 1. Area where materials are to be stored should be maintained at 55 degrees Fahrenheit and under 50%relative humidity by the General Contractor. 2. Products Supplied must be protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and must be safely stored on a clean, dry, flat surface. Store rolls of resilient athletic flooring upright; store tiles of resilient athletic flooring on a flat surface, carefully protecting corners and edges. 3. Avoid storing Manufactured Product for extended periods of time or additional material trimming may be required. 4. Do not install product damage during handling (i.e. dents/scratches, edge chipping, excessive warping, etc.). 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS A. Concrete subfloors, on or below grade, must be installed over a permanent effective vapor retarder, respecting current versions of the standard practice ASTM E1643 and the standard specification ASTM E1745. The vapor retarder must be placed directly underneath the concrete slab, above the granular fill, as per Manufacturer's instructions. The vapor retarder must have a perm rating of 0.1 or less and must have a minimum thickness of 10 mil(0.010in). B. No concrete sealers or curing compounds are applied or mixed with the subfloors (refer to Section 03 05 00—Common Work Results for Concrete of Division 3). C. Installation of the resilient athletic flooring to be carried out no sooner than the specified curing time of concrete subfloor (normal density concrete curing time is approximately 28 days for development of design strength). Refer to current version of ASTM F710. D. The subfloor surface must be free of any paint, wax, oil, grease, sealer, curing compound, solvent or any other contaminants that may inhibit bond. All contaminants must be removed from the surface via mechanical abatement. Use of abatement chemicals is not recommended. E. Concrete to have smooth, dense finish, and be highly compacted with a tolerance of 1/8" in a I Oft radius (3.2mm in 3.05m radius). Floor Flatness (FF) and Floor Levelness (FL) numbers are not recognized. F. Moisture and alkalinity tests must be performed on all concrete substrates, under in-service conditions. It is recommended to turn on the HVAC unit prior to performing moisture testing,in order to ensure stable testing conditions and accurate results. The concrete's surface pH should be between 7 and 10. Relative humidity of the concrete slab must not exceed 85%, in accordance with ASTM F2170 (in situ probes). Moisture vapor emissions from the concrete slab must not exceed the tolerance of the adhesive specified, in accordance with ASTM F1869 (anhydrous calcium chloride). FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 096568 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 ATHLETIC RUBBER FLOORING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 G. If installing over wood subfloors, ensure exterior grade plywood with at least one good side, such as: APA (Engineered Wood Association) Exterior grade plywood (A-A Exterior, A-B Exterior or AC Exterior) and CANPLY (Canadian Plywood Association) Exterior certified plywood(Canada: Grade G2S A-A or GIS A-C. USA: G2S A-A, A-B, B-B, or GIS A-C, B-C). There must be proper underfloor ventilation, plywood must be dry and should have a moisture content ranging between 6 and 12%, when measured with a quality wood moisture meter (electronic hygrometer). H. Maintain a stable room and subfloor temperature within the recommended range of 65oF to 86oF (18oC to 30oQ, 48 hours prior to installation, during the installation, and 48 hours after the installation. Recommended ambient humidity control level is between 35 to 55%. I. Installation of resilient athletic flooring will not commence until the building is enclosed and all other trades have completed their work. It is the General Contractor or Construction Manager's responsibility to maintain a secure and clean working area before, during and after the installation of the resilient athletic flooring. 1.08 WARRANTY A. The resilient athletic flooring is warranted to be free from manufacturing defects for a period of one (1)year from the date of shipment from the Manufacturer. B. The resilient athletic flooring shall be warranted against excessive wear under normal usage for a period of ten(10)years from the date of shipment from the Manufacturer. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 PREFABRICATED RUBBER SURFACE A. Basis-of-Design Product: Prefabricated rubber sport flooring to be EcoSurfaces Classic 3.2mm thickness, smooth embossed pattern, as manufactured by EcoSurfaces. Color as indicated on drawings. Prefabricated rubber surface to be calendared and vulcanized with a base of natural and synthetic rubber, stabilizing agents and pigmentation. Provide material in 4'-0" rolls. Resilient athletic wainscot base shall be same material. Turn athletic surface up wall as shown on drawings. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Trowel able Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated. B. Metal Edge Strips: Metal edge strips, in sizes to match rubber flooring thickness and adjacent finish materials at transitions. Subject to compliance with requirements,provide metal strips. 1. Rubber floor to Concrete,VCT, or other lower floor material: Ramp at door threshold in compliance with TAS 2012. Finish: Stainless steel. 2.03 ADHESIVE A. Rubber sport surface adhesive to be two part polyurethane or epoxy adhesive suitable for adherence of a goods to concrete substrate. Adhesive to be supplied by the surface manufacture. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Ensure that concrete subfloors, on or below grade, are installed over a permanent effective vapor retarder, respecting current versions of the standard practice ASTM E1643 and the FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 096568 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 ATHLETIC RUBBER FLOORING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 standard specification ASTM E1745. The vapor retarder must be placed directly underneath the concrete slab, above the granular fill, as per Manufacturer's instructions. The vapor retarder must have a perm rating of 0.1 or less and must have a minimum thickness of 10 mil(0.0101n). B. Installation of the resilient athletic flooring to be carried out no sooner than the specified curing time of concrete subfloor (normal density concrete curing time is approximately 28 days for development of design strength). Refer to current version of ASTM F710. C. Ensure that no concrete sealers or curing compounds have been applied to or mixed into the concrete (refer to Section 03 05 00—Common Work Results for Concrete of Division 3). D. Subfloor surface must be free of any paint,wax, oil, grease, sealer, curing compound, solvent or any other contaminants that may inhibit bond. All contaminants must be removed from the surface via mechanical abatement. Use of abatement chemicals is not recommended. E. Confirm concrete has smooth, dense finish, and is highly compacted with a tolerance of 1/8" in a loft radius (3.2mm in 3.05m radius). Floor Flatness (FF) and Floor Levelness (FL) numbers are not recognized. F. All inserts, penetrations and other construction items which affect the installation of the prefabricated rubber sport surface to be in place. G. Moisture and alkalinity tests must be performed on all concrete substrates, under in-service conditions. It is recommended to turn on the HVAC unit prior to performing moisture testing,in order to ensure stable testing conditions and accurate results. The concrete's surface pH should be between 7 and 10. Relative humidity of the concrete slab must not exceed 85%, in accordance with ASTM F2170 (in situ probes). Moisture vapor emissions from the concrete slab must not exceed the tolerance of the adhesive specified, in accordance with ASTM F1869 (anhydrous calcium chloride). H. If installing over wood subfloors, ensure exterior grade plywood with at least one good side, such as: APA (Engineered Wood Association) Exterior grade plywood (A-A Exterior, A-B Exterior or AC Exterior) and CANPLY (Canadian Plywood Association) Exterior certified plywood(Canada: Grade G2S A-A or GIS A-C. USA: G2S A-A, A-B, B-B, or G1S A-C, B-C). There must be proper underfloor ventilation, plywood must be dry and should have a moisture content ranging between 6 and 12%, when measured with a quality wood moisture meter (electronic hygrometer). L Maintain a stable room and subfloor temperature within the recommended range of 65oF to 86oF (18oC to 30oQ, 48 hours prior to installation, during the installation, and 48 hours after the installation. Recommended ambient humidity control level is between 35 to 55%. J. Installation of resilient athletic flooring will not commence until the building is enclosed and all other trades have completed their work. Ensure a secure and clean working area before, during and after the installation of the resilient athletic flooring. Rubber sports surface installer to approve field conditions. K. Deficiencies in substrate to be corrected prior to installation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install prefabricated rubber sports surface in accordance with the latest manufacturer's recommendations. Installation by a manufacturer certified contractor. B. Hold all seams in place with suitable weights for a minimum of 12 hours and precisely fit prior to adhesion. C. Product should be unrolled and allowed to relax before cutting and fitting, 12 to 24 hours. D. Mix two-component polyurethane adhesive according to manufacturer's instructions. Adhesive to be spread with an 1/8 or 1/6"notched trowel. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 096568 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 ATHLETIC RUBBER FLOORING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. Unroll product into freshly applied adhesive. End seams should be overlapped and double cut. Edge seams should be factory edge. Overlap seams 1/8° and compression fit. F. Roll the entire sport floor surface with a medium-size steel roller to remove entrapped air. G. Wipe away adhesive that oozes between seams with wood alcohol. H. Install rubber base, anchored to walls with base cement. I.Clean up all unused materials and debris and remove same from the premises. Dispose of empty containers in accordance with federal and local statutes. END OF SECTION 09 65 68 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 096568 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 ATHLETIC RUBBER FLOORING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 09 81 00 - ACOUSTICAL INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide sound insulation as shown on the drawings and as herein specified. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 07 Section "Thermal Insulation." 2. Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants", and Division 09 "Gypsum Board Assemblies", for acoustical sealants and other acoustical components used in partition wall assemblies. 3. Division 08 Section "Metal Frames",for acoustical treatment inside metal door frames. 4. Division 09 Section "Acoustical Room Components." 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E90 and classified according to ASTM E413 by an independent testing agency. B. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency 1. Batt Insulation: flame spread and smoke developed of 0. NFPA 101 Class A. 2. Other insulation types: As indicated. C. Low VOC: All batt insulation products shall be made with binder containing no added urea formaldehyde. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in manufacturer's original packages, clearly marked with brand name, type and R-Value. B. Store materials in area protected from weather, moisture and damage, remove any damaged materials from the site. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Samples of materials and complete product and technical description submitted for approval to the Architect prior to ordering materials. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0981 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Sound-Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I blankets without membrane facing produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from slag wool, or rock wool. Unfaced batt insulation, 3-1/2" thick,with an R-Value of 15. 1. STC-Rated Acoustical Assemblies: Comply with acoustical rating assembly requirements of partition, see drawings. 2. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. 3. Manufacturers: Acceptable manufacturers include Rockwool and Johns Manville B. Sound Insulation Blankets: BOD product — Sound Attenuation Batt by Owens Corning, without membrane facing,produced fiberglass strands. 1. STC-Rated Acoustical Assemblies: Comply with acoustical rating assembly requirements of partition, see drawin. 2. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Non-combustible un faced batts 10/10 when tested according to ASTM E84. 3. Provide resilient channels when indicated or required to meet required STC level. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Examine areas receiving insulation work to insure work of preceding trades is completed. Check surfaces to see that they are uniform in place, free from mortar droppings, grease, oil or other debris which would affect proper insulation. Application constitutes acceptance of substrate conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Insulation installed in accordance with current printed recommendations of insulation manufacturer. B. Install sound batts tightly to studs and to all penetrations. Install tightly fitted and continuously behind and around conduit, boxes, pipe, and other obstructions. Install in full length pieces in each stud cavity to the extent possible to minimize the number of joints at cut ends. Fit cut ends pressed together to ensure a continuous acoustical barrier. Where the stud depth is greater than the nominal batt thickness, cut ends in mats shall be overlapped at least two inches. END OF SECTION 09 8100 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 0981 00 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 09 84 00 - ACOUSTIC ROOM COMPONENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Acoustical Ceiling Baffles and Wall Panels, Acoustical Foam Panels and installation accessories. 1.03 REFERENCES A. ASTM International: 1. ASTM E84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. Ceilings and Interior Systems Construction Association(CISCA): 1. CISCA Code of Practices. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: 1. Provide acoustical assemblies designed and tested to provide surface burning characteristics (ASTM E84) as follows: a. Flamespread: 0. b. Smoke Developed: 0. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data and installation instructions. 1. Recommended procedures for normal cleaning and removal of stains including precautions in use of cleaning materials that may be detrimental to surfaces. B. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Test Reports: Upon request, submit certified test reports from recognized test laboratories. 2. Certificates: Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Utilize an installer having demonstrated experience on projects of similar size and complexity. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirement Section. B. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 09 84 00-1 MAY 2, 2023 ACOUSTIC ROOM COMPONENTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Prevent soiling,physical damage or wetting. 2. Store cartons open at each end to stabilize moisture content and temperature. 1.08 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements: 1. Maintain the following conditions in areas where acoustical materials are to be installed 24 hours before, during and after installation: a. Relative Humidity: 65 - 75%. b. Uniform Temperature: 55 -70 degrees F (13 -21 degrees Q. 1.09 MAINTENANCE A. Extra Materials: Provide 2% additional material for use by owner in building maintenance and repair. B. Provide new unopened cartons of extra materials, packaged with protective covering for storage, identified with appropriate labels. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACOUSTICAL PANEL SYSTEMS A. Manufacturer: Provide the following or equal: 1. Ceiling Baffles: Armstrong World Industries,Inc.,Lancaster,PA 17604; (877)276-7876. B. Acoustical Ceiling Baffle System: 1. Soundscapes Blades: a. Material: Fiberglass with DuraBrite scrim on face and sides and bottom. b. Thickness: 2 inches. c. Edge: Square edge, fabric wrapped. d. Width: 10 inches. e. Length: 94 inches. f. Color: As selected by Architect. g. Mounting Style: Attachment to Suspension System. Provide all fasteners and furring strips for a complete single source installation. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Provide accessories for ceiling baffles and suspension system as required. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Comply with the instructions and recommendations of the acoustical ceiling panel system manufacturer. B. Install materials in accordance with governing regulations, fire resistance rating requirements and industry standards applicable to work. 1. Comply with CISCA Code of Practices. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: 1. Examine surfaces scheduled to receive suspended or directly attached acoustical units for unevenness,irregularities and dampness that would affect quality and execution of work. 2. Do not proceed with installation of wall and ceiling panel system until unacceptable conditions are corrected. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 09 84 00-2 MAY 2, 2023 ACOUSTIC ROOM COMPONENTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General: Do not begin installation until materials sufficient to complete an entire room are received and prepared for installation. B. Measure each wall and ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid use of less-than-half width units at borders. C. Symmetrically locate panel layout in each space. Coordinate work with other trades so that lighting fixtures and other ceiling fixtures work with layout. D. Support suspension system from structure above, not from ductwork, metal deck, equipment or piping. E. Furnish hangers as required for supporting baffles from ceiling structure. F. Arrange acoustical units and orient directionally patterned units, if any, in manner shown on reflected ceiling plans. G. Securely affix wall panels by means of splines attached vertically to smooth wall or furring strips. Engage vertical kerfs on the edges of the wall panels with splines. Apply adhesive or use Velcro hook and loop fastening where necessary. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel, trim, moldings and suspension members to comply with manufacturer's instructions for cleaning. B. Touch up any minor finish damage. C. Remove and replace work that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect installed work from damage due to subsequent construction activity, including temperature and humidity limitations and dust control, so that the work will be without damage and deterioration at the time of acceptance by the Owner. END OF SECTION 09 84 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 09 84 00-3 MAY 2, 2023 ACOUSTIC ROOM COMPONENTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 09 91 00 - PAINTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Provide complete surface preparation, priming, field painting and sealing of exposed exterior and interior items and surfaces. 1. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coats specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. 2. Examine specifications for various other trades and their provisions regarding their painting. Surfaces that are left unfinished by other sections of specifications shall be painted or finished as a part of this section. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where these Specifications indicate that the surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If an item or a surface is not specifically mentioned, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces. If a color of finish is not indicated, Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron supports, and surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment that do not have a factory-applied final finish. C. Do not paint prefinished items and finished metal surfaces except where otherwise noted in Drawings or specifications. Do not paint concealed surfaces, operating parts, and labels. 1. Prefinished items include the following factory-finished components: a. Architectural woodwork. b. Acoustical wall panels. c. Toilet enclosures. d. Metal lockers. e. Elevator entrance doors and frames. f. Elevator equipment. g. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. h. Light fixtures. i. Zinc wall panels j. Prefinished wall,roof& soffit panels 2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Foundation spaces. b. Furred areas. c. Ceiling plenums. d. Pipe spaces. e. Duct shafts. f. Elevator shafts. 3. Finished metal surfaces include the following: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT 421085 0991 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 PAINTING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. c. Chromium plate. d. Copper and copper alloys. e. Bronze and brass. 4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. c. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. 5. Labels: Do not paint over UL, FMG, or other code-required labels or equipment name, identification,performance rating, or nomenclature plates. D. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section "Structural Steel" for shop priming structural steel. 2. Division 5 Section "Metal Fabrications" for shop priming ferrous metal. 3. Division 6 Section "Architectural Woodwork" for shop priming interior architectural woodwork. 4. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealers ". 5. Division 8 Section "Wood Doors ". 6. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames" for factory priming steel doors and frames. 7. Division 8 Section "Wood Window&Door Restoration". 8. Division 9 Section "Plaster". 9. Division 9 Section "Gypsum Board" for surface preparation of gypsum board. 10. Division 9 Section "Stage Flooring" for surface preparation of flooring. 11. Division 32 Section "Pavement Accessories" for traffic-marking paint. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-degree meter. 2. Eggshell refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 20 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 3. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 35 and 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 4. Full gloss refers to high-sheen finish with a gloss range more than 70 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each paint system indicated. Include block fillers and primers. 1. Material List: An inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material. B. Samples for Verification: For each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. 1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each Sample. Label each Sample for location and application. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT 421085 0991 00 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 PAINTING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. Submit 3 samples on the following substrates for Architect's review of color and texture only: a. Masonry: 6-by-10-inch samples of masonry, with mortar joint in the center, for each finish and color. (Field installation acceptable). b. Painted Gypsum Board: 8-inch-square samples for each color and material on hardboard. c. Stained or Natural Wood: 6-by-10-inch samples of natural- or stained-wood finish on representative Medium Red Oak surfaces. d. Ferrous Metal: 4-inch- square samples of flat metal and 8-inch-long Samples of solid metal for each color and finish. (Field installation acceptable). e. Plaster: 10-inch-square samples for each color. (Field installation acceptable). C. Qualification Data: For Applicator. D. The Contractor shall furnish the Owner with a booklet of actual samples of the colors used on the project at project completion. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in applying paints and coatings similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers and primers for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. C. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full-coat benchmark finish sample for each type of coating and substrate required. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved sample Submittals. 1. Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of coating and substrate. a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft. b. Small Areas and Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. c. Portion of all wood to be finished or restored, including windows, doors, frames, rails, etc. 2. Apply benchmark samples, according to requirements for the completed Work, after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface. a. After finishes are accepted,Architect will use the room or surface to evaluate coating systems of a similar nature. 3. Final approval of colors will be from benchmark samples. D. Wood Sealer: Shall meet Fed. Spec. TT-W-572B for water repellence. E. Materials shall be manufacturer's best grade of respective paint types. F. Gloss levels for paints required are as per the National Paint and Coatings Association. G. Prior to acid-etching of the concrete floor and application of the epoxy coating, an on-site conference of the applicator, contractor, Architect and manufacturer's representative shall review proper installation procedures. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original,unopened packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description(generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT 421085 0991 00 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 PAINTING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at an ambient temperature between 45 and 95 deg F. Maintain storage containers in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Apply waterborne paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 50 and 90 deg F. B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when temperatures of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air are between 45 and 95 deg F. C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. D. Provide adequate ventilation of spaces while applying primer and finish coats. E. All application of coatings shall be done under adequate illumination. 1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra paint materials from the same production run as the materials applied and in the quantities described below. Package with protective covering for storage and identify with labels describing contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner. 1. Quantity: Furnish Owner with an additional 3 percent, but not less than 1 gal. or 1 case, as appropriate, of each material and color applied. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in other Part 2 articles. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles. C. Manufacturers' Names: Shortened versions (shown in parentheses) of the following manufacturers'names are used in other Part 2 articles: 1. Benjamin Moore& Co. (Benjamin Moore). 2. Coronado Paint Company(Coronado). 3. ICI Dulux Paint Centers (ICI Dulux Paints). 4. Kelly-Moore Paint Co. (Kelly-Moore). 5. PPG Industries, Inc. (Pittsburgh Paints). 6. Sherwin-Williams Co. (Sherwin-Williams). 2.02 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT 421085 0991 00 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 PAINTING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, and finish-coat materials that are compatible with one another and with the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material of the various coating types specified that are factory formulated and recommended by manufacturer for application indicated. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. C. Colors: Match Architect's samples. D. Low-Emitting Materials: Interior paints and coatings shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers." 2.03 CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY BLOCK FILLERS A. Concrete Unit Masonry Block Filler: Factory-formulated high-performance latex block fillers. I. Benjamin Moore; Mooreraft Super Craft Latex Block Filler No. 285: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 8.1 axils. 2. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Latex Block Filler No. M88: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 8.1 mils. 3. Coronado; 946-11 Super Kote 5000 Commercial Latex Block Filler: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 8.4 mils. 4. ICI Dulux Paints; Bloxfil 4000-1000 Interior/Exterior Heavy Duty Acrylic Block Filler: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 7.0 to 14.5 mils. 5. Kelly-Moore; 521 Fill and Prime Acrylic Block Filler: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 10.0 mils. 6. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-7 SpeedHide Interior/Exterior Masonry Latex Block Filler: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 6.0 to 12.5 rails. 7. Sherwin-Williams; PrepRite Interior/Exterior Block Filler B25W25: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 8.0 mils. 2.04 EXTERIOR PRIMERS A. Exterior Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated rust-inhibitive metal primer for exterior application. I. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Alkyd Metal Primer No. M06: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. 2. Coronado; 35-147 Rust Scat Alkyd Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 4160-XXXX Devguard Multi-Purpose Tank & Structural Primer. Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. 4. Kelly-Moore; 1711 Kel-Guard Alkyd White Rust Inhibitive Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. 5. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-712 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils. 6. Sherwin-Williams; Pro-Cryl Universal Primer B66-310 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT 421085 0991 00 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 PAINTING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Exterior Galvanized Metal Primer: Factory-formulated galvanized metal primer for exterior application. 1. Sherwin-Williams; DTM Wash Primer B71Y1 Series: Applied at a wet film thickness of 6.4 mils and dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. C. Exterior Primer for existing ceramic coated sheet metal: Sherwin-Williams B51- 450 Interior/Exterior Multi-Purpose Latex "Adhesion Primer", or approved equal. Applied at a dry film thickness of 1.4 mils. 1. Adhesion Primer must be topcoated within 14 days of primer application. D. Exterior Primer for Wood without knots: Sherwin-Williams Exterior Latex Wood Primer B42W8041. Applied at dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. E. Exterior Primer for Wood containing knots: Sherwin-Williams Exterior Oil-Based Wood Primer Y24W8020. Applied at at dry film thickness of not less than 2.3 mils. F. Exterior Primer for Drywall: Sherwin-Williams B51- 450 Interior/Exterior Multi-Purpose Latex "Adhesion Primer", or approved equal. Applied at a dry film thickness of 1.4 mils. G. Exterior Architectural PVC, Plastic, or Fiberglass: Sherwin-Williams B51- 450 Interior/Exterior Multi-Purpose Latex "Adhesion Primer", or approved equal. Applied at a dry film thickness of 1.4 mils. 2.05 INTERIOR PRIMERS A. Interior Concrete Primer: Factory-formulated alkali-resistant acrylic-latex interior primer for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater& Primer Sealer No. 253: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 2. Coronado; 40-11 Super Kote 5000 Latex Primer-Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 3030-1200 Bond-Prep Interior/Exterior Waterborne Pigmented Bonding Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils. 4. Kelly-Moore; 971 Acry-Prime Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. 5. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2 SpeedHide Interior Quick-Drying Latex Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil. 6. Sherwin-Williams; Loxon Concrete & Masonry Primer B24W8300: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils. B. Interior Masonry Primer: 100% acrylic-emulsion conditioner for interior application only, to bond light chalk to the surface of existing brick&CMU. 1. Sherwin-Williams; Loxon Conditioner Masonry Primer A24-1100 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness per manufacturer's recommendation. 2. No substitutions C. Interior Gypsum Board Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater& Primer Sealer No. 253: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 2. Coronado; 40-11 Super Kote 5000 Latex Primer-Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1000-1200 Dulux Ultra Basecoat Interior Latex Wall Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 4. Kelly-Moore; 971 Acry-Prime Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT 421085 0991 00 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 PAINTING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 5. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2 SpeedHide Interior Quick-Drying Latex Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil. 6. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Wall Primer B28W2600 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. D. Interior Plaster Primer: Factory-formulated latex-based primer for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Enamel Undercoater & Primer Sealer No. 253: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 2. Coronado; 40-11 Super Kote 5000 Latex Primer-Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 3210-1200 Ultra-Hide Aquacrylic GRIPPER Stain Killer Primer Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils. 4. Kelly-Moore; 247 Chem-Guard Acrylic Masonry Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.9 mils. 5. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-2 SpeedHide Interior Quick-Drying Latex Sealer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil. 6. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Zero VOC Latex Wall Primer B28W2600 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. E. Interior Plaster Primer at inside plaster face of all exterior walls: Factory-formulated latex- based primer for interior application. 1. Sherwin-Williams; High Build Primer Latex Wall Primer B28W8601 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils. 2. No substitutions. F. Interior Wood Primer for Full-Gloss Alkyd-Enamel Finishes: Factory-formulated alkyd- or acrylic-latex-based interior wood primer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Alkyd Enamel Underbody and Primer Sealer No. 245: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 2. Coronado; 78-11 Super Kote 5000 Acrylic Enamel Undercoat: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1120-1200 Ultra-Hide Oil/Alkyd Interior Wood Undercoat: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. 4. Kelly-Moore; 985 Flo-Cote Alkyd Enamel Undercoater: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils. 5. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-6 SpeedHide Interior Quick-Drying Enamel Undercoater: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. 6. Sherwin-Williams; Premium Wall and Wood Interior Latex Primer B28W8111 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils. G. Interior Ferrous-Metal Primer: Factory-formulated quick-drying rust-inhibitive alkyd-based metal primer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Alkyd Metal Primer No. M06: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. 2. Coronado; 35-147 Rust Scat Alkyd Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 4160-6130 Devguard Multi-Purpose Tank & Structural Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. 4. Kelly-Moore; 1711 Kel-Guard Alkyd White Rust Inhibitive Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. 5. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-709 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 6. Sherwin-Williams; Pro-Cry] Universal Primer B66-310 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT 421085 0991 00 - 7 MAY 2, 2023 PAINTING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 H. Interior Zinc-Coated Metal Primer: Factory-formulated galvanized metal primer. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Metal Primer No. M04: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. 2. Coronado; 36-11 Rust Scat Acrylic Metal Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 4160-6130 Devguard Multi-Purpose Tank & Structural Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. 4. Kelly-Moore; 1722 Kel-Guard Acrylic Galvanized Iron Primer: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.8 mils. 5. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-709 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior Primer/Finish DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils. 6. Sherwin-Williams; Pro-Cryl Universal Primer B66-310 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils. 2.06 EXTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Exterior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel for Ferrous and Other Metals (Lintels, Trim, Partitions, and wainscot): Factory-formulated full-gloss waterborne acrylic-latex enamel for exterior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Gloss Enamel M28: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. 2. Coronado; 80 Line Rust Scat Acrylic Latex High Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 3028-XXXX Dulux Interior/Exterior Acrylic Gloss Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. 4. Kelly-Moore; 5780 DTM Acrylic Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils. 5. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-300 Series Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior High Performance Waterborne High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamels: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils. 6. Sherwin-Williams; Pro Industrial Acrylic Gloss B66-600 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils. B. Exterior Galvanized Metal Finish: Sherwin Williams Pro-Industrial Waterbased Acrolon 100 Gloss B65-720 Series. Two coats: 4.0-8.0 mils wet and 1.8-3.6 mils dry per coat. C. Exterior Wood, Cement, or Brick Flat Finish: Sherwin-Williams A-100 Exterior Latex Flat, A6-100 Series. Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. D. Exterior Wood, Cement, or Brick Satin Finish: Sherwin-Williams A-100 Exterior Latex Satin,A82-100 Series. Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. E. Exterior Textured Coating: Sherwin-Williams Ultra Crete Medium Textured Coating, A44WSIt. Applied at 50-80 sq. ft/gal. F. Exterior Metal Canopy Semi-Gloss Sherwin-Williams SprayLastic Exterior Semi-Gloss Waterborne Dryfall, B42WI7/B42T17. Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. G. Exterior Stained Wood Semi-Transparent: Sherwin-Williams WoodScapes Exterior Polyurethane Semi-Transparent Stain,A15T5. 2.07 INTERIOR FINISH COATS A. Interior, Latex, Flat: Pigmented, water-based paint for use on primed/sealed interior plaster and gypsum board, and on primed wood and metals. 1. Benjamin Moore; FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT 421085 0991 00 - 8 MAY 2, 2023 PAINTING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Sherwin-Williams; B. Interior Flat Acrylic Paint: Factory-formulated flat acrylic-emulsion latex paint for interior application: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Flat. Applied to a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. C. Interior Low-Luster Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated eggshell acrylic-latex interior enamel: Promar 200 Zero VOC Interior Eg-Shel. Applied to a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils. D. Interior Semi-Gloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated semigloss acrylic-latex enamel for interior application. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moorcraft Super Spec Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel No. 276: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils. 2. Coronado; 32-Line Super Kote 5000 Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 1406-XXXX Dulux Professional Acrylic Semi-Gloss Interior Wall & Trim Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 4. Kelly-Moore; 1649 Acrylic-Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils. 5. Pittsburgh Paints; 6-500 Series SpeedHide Interior Semi-Gloss Latex: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.0 mil. 6. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Zero VOC Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel B31-2600 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. E. Interior Full-Gloss Acrylic Enamel: Factory-formulated full-gloss acrylic-latex interior enamel. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Acrylic Gloss Enamel No. M28: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. 2. Coronado; 414 Line Super Kote 5000 Acrylic High Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.4 mils. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 3028-XXXX Dulux Interior/Exterior Acrylic Gloss Finish: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. 4. Kelly-Moore; 1680 Dura-Poxy Gloss Acrylic Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. 5. Pittsburgh Paints; 90-374 Pitt-Tech One Pack Interior/Exterior High Performance Waterborne High Gloss DTM Industrial Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils. 6. Sherwin-Williams; Solo 100% Acrylic Interior/Exterior Gloss: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils. F. Interior Full-Gloss Alkyd Enamel for Wood and Metal Surfaces: Factory-formulated full- gloss alkyd interior enamel. 1. Benjamin Moore; Moore's IMC Urethane Alkyd Enamel No. M22: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. 2. Coronado; 1223 Line Super Kote 5000 High Gloss Alkyd Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.7 mils. 3. ICI Dulux Paints; 4308-XXXX Devguard Alkyd Industrial Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.0 mils. 4. Kelly-Moore; 1630--Kel-Cote Interior Alkyd Semi-Gloss Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.2 mils. 5. Pittsburgh Paints; 7-814 Series Pittsburgh Paints Industrial Gloss-Oil Interior/Exterior Enamel: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 6. Sherwin-Williams; ProMar 200 Alkyd Gloss Enamel B35-200 Series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT 421085 0991 00 - 9 MAY 2, 2023 PAINTING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 G. Interior Full Gloss Epoxy: 1. Sherwin-Williams; Tile-Clad High Solids Epoxy B62Z series: Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 2.5 mils. H. Interior Precatalysed Water-Based Epoxy: 1. Sherwin-Williams; Pro Industrial Pre-Catalysed Water-based Epoxy K45-150 Series (Egg-shell): Applied at a dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils. 2. To be installed at (previously painted) interior existing brick and CMU surfaces; and interior plaster surfaces of exterior walls. l.lnterior DryFall, Water Based Flat, for Galvanized Steel Decking: Sherwin-Williams Pro Industrial Waterborne Acrylic Dryfall B42W81. 2.08 MISCELLANEOUS PAINT PRODUCTS A. Epoxy: Two component epoxy coating shall be Sherwin-William's "Tile-Clad High Solids Epoxy#1362Z Series, or approved equal. B. Semi-transparent water repellent wood preservative stain shall be Olympic's Semi- Transparent Oil Base Stain, or equal. C. Other materials such as linseed oil, turpentine and shellacs shall be pure and of highest quality. D. Acrylic Concrete Coating: Exterior concrete coating shall be "Thorocoat" 100% acrylic, textured coating as manufactured by Thoro System Products, Miami, Florida. Color as selected by Architect. E. Concrete Floor Sealer: Exposed concrete floor slabs with smooth troweled finish: One coat flood-applied, hardener/densifier. Chemical reactive silicate / siliconate formulation that enhances sheen level of troweled concrete and is designed to mainatin or increase sheen level over time with normal wear. Provide one of the following or approved equal product by another Manufacturer: a. Euclid Chemical Company; "Euco Diamond Hard",www.euclidchemical.com. b. CureCrete Chemical Company; "Ashford Formula",www.ashfordfonnula.com. c. Dayton Superior; "Sure-Hard Densifier J17",www.daytonchemical.com. d. L&M Construction Chemicals: "Seal Hard",www.Imme.com. F. Epoxy Coating: Interior concrete block to receive coating shall be filled using a modified epoxy masonry filler equal to Tnemec's No. 54-660 and receive epoxy-polyomide coating equal to Tnemec's Series 66 HiBuild Epoxoline. G. Exterior Concrete Block Protective Coating: One part, water based, cross linked copolymer coating shall be Rainguard Products Company's "Vandl-Guard Graffiti Resistant Coating", or approved equal. H. Concrete Block Sealer: Waterproofing clear penetrating sealer shall be "Rainguard Micro- Seal" as manufactured by Rainguard Products Co., or approved equal. Install at coverage rate determined adequate by manufacturer's representative. 1.Sealer Thinner: Sonneborne's "Reducer 990", or approved equal. J.Wood Sealer: Penetrating water-repelling sealer shall be Olympic, "Water Guard". K. Waterbased Epoxy: Catalyzed epoxy meeting requirements of ASTM D3730, equal to Sherwin Williams B67 Series. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT 421085 0991 00 - 10 MAY 2, 2023 PAINTING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for paint application. 1. Proceed with paint application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. B. Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials to ensure use of compatible primers. 1. Notify Architect about anticipated problems when using the materials specified over substrates primed by others. 3.02 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of the item, provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed using workers skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet,newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers, or remove and re-prime. 2. Cementitious and Masonry Materials: Prepare brick, concrete, concrete unit masonry, cement plaster, and mineral-fiber-reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. if hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use abrasive blast-cleaning methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. 3. Wood: Clean new or existing surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, and sandpaper, as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view down to consistent substrate for intended finish. Ensure smooth surface remains and remove all residual dust. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. Prime, stain, or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and back sides of wood, including cabinets, counters, trim, rails, doors, frames and windows. c. if transparent finish is required, backprime with spar varnish. d. Seal tops,bottoms, and cutouts of unprimed wood doors with a heavy coat of varnish or sealer immediately on delivery. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT 421085 0991 00 - 11 MAY 2, 2023 PAINTING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 4. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous-metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with SSPC's recommendations. a. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. b. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire- brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with same primer as the shop coat. 5. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. D. Material Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. E. Concrete floor surfaces to remain exposed shall be cleaned and properly acid etched per floor sealer manufacturer's instructions. Fill and patch holes, crevices, cracks, etc.. Remove any paint, soil, loose material and dust. Remove oil or grease with a hot TSP solution and rinse thoroughly. Floor to be completely dry prior to etching with muriatic acid and water solution. 3.03 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1. Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in the paint schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, grilles, convector covers, covers for finned-tube radiation, and similar components are in place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain system integrity and provide desired protection. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation of equipment,paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 8. Finish exterior doors on tops,bottoms, and side edges the same as exterior faces. 9. Finish interior of wall and base cabinets and similar field-finished casework to match exterior. 10. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until previous coat has cured as recommended by FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT 421085 0991 00 - 12 MAY 2, 2023 PAINTING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. Omit primer over metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. 3. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure that edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 4. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to pen-nit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, and does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and until application of another coat of paint does not cause undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet-back, or high-pile sheep's wool as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by manufacturer for material and texture required. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate to achieve dry film thickness indicated. Provide total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by manufacturer. E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work is limited to items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces. F. Mechanical items to be painted include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Uninsulated metal piping. 2. Uninsulated plastic piping. 3. Pipe hangers and supports. 4. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. 5. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets. 6. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having "all-service jacket" or other paintable jacket material. 7. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. 8. New rooftop gas piping. 9. All existing and new exterior conduit, gas, water and similar piping at face of exterior walls. G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Switchgear. 2. Panelboards. 3. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. 1.Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat, as recommended by manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn-through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT 421085 0991 00 - 13 MAY 2, 2023 PAINTING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 J.Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. K. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. 1. Provide satin finish for final coats. L. Stipple Enamel Finish: Roll and redistribute paint to an even and fine texture. Leave no evidence of rolling, such as laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks, or other surface imperfections. M. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 3.04 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday,remove empty cans,rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials from Project site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping without scratching or damaging adjacent finished surfaces. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Protect work of other trades, whether being painted or not, against damage from painting. Correct damage by cleaning,repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes. After completing painting operations,remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work. 1. After work of other trades is complete, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces prior to final inspection. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA-P1. 3.06 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required on shop-primed items. 1. Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer. a. Primer: Exterior ferrous-metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior full-gloss acrylic enamel for ferrous and other metals. B. Galvanized Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior galvanized metal surfaces: 1. Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a galvanized metal primer. a. Primer: Exterior galvanized metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Exterior galvanized metal finish. C. Wood Doors: Provide the following paint finish systems over wood surfaces: 1. Gloss Latex Finish: Two finish coats over a wood primer. a. Primer: latex wood primer. b. Finish Coats: gloss latex for wood surfaces. D. Cement Fiber Board: Provide the following paint finish systems over cement fiber board surfaces: 1. Latex Satin Finish: Two finish coats over primer. a. Primer: Loxon concrete primer. b. Finish Coats: latex satin finish. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT 421085 0991 00 - 14 MAY 2, 2023 PAINTING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.07 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. New Concrete Unit Masonry: Provide the following finish systems over new interior concrete masonry: 1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a block filler. a. Block Filler: Concrete unit masonry block filler. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. B. Existing Concrete Unit Masonry or Brick: Provide the following finish systems over existing (previously painted) interior concrete masonry or brick: 1. Egg shell Epoxy Finish: Two finish coats over primer/block filler. a. Primer/Block Filler: Acrylic-emulsion conditioner. b. Finish Coats: Pre-catalysed water-based epoxy. C. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: 1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: (typical) Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. 2. Full Gloss Epoxy Finish: (at Kitchen Food Prep, Dry Storage, receiving, and serving areas, and at locker rooms, shower rooms, and restrooms): Two finish coats over primer. a. Primer: Interior gypsuin board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior polyester epoxy. D. Plaster: Provide the following finish systems over new interior plaster surfaces: 1. Semigloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior plaster primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior semigloss acrylic enamel. 2. Full Gloss Epoxy Finish: (at Kitchen Food Prep, Dry Storage, receiving, and serving areas, and at locker rooms, shower rooms, and restrooms): Two finish coats over primer. a. Primer: Interior gypsum board primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior polyester epoxy. E. Existing Plaster: Provide the following finish systems over existing (previously painted) interior plaster surface of exterior walls: 1. Egg shell Epoxy Finish: Two finish coats over primer. a. Primer: High build latex wall primer. b. Finish Coats: Pre-catalysed water-based epoxy. F. Wood and Hardboard: Provide the following paint finish systems over interior wood surfaces: 1. Full-Gloss Alkyd-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a wood primer. a. Primer: Interior wood primer for full-gloss alkyd-enamel finishes. b. Finish Coats: Interior full-gloss alkyd enamel for wood and metal surfaces. G. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal: 1. Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior ferrous-metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior full-gloss acrylic enamel. H. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over interior zinc-coated metal surfaces: 1. Full-Gloss Acrylic-Enamel Finish: Two finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: Interior zinc-coated metal primer. b. Finish Coats: Interior full-gloss acrylic enamel. I.All-Service Jacket over Insulation: Provide the following finish system on cotton or canvas insulation covering: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT 421085 0991 00 - 15 MAY 2, 2023 PAINTING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Flat Acrylic Finish: Two finish coats. Add fungicidal agent to render fabric mildew proof. a. Finish Coats: Interior flat latex-emulsion size. J.Interior Concrete Floors: Provide the following: 1. 1st coat- Sealer/Reducer(400 SF/gal.) 2. 2nd coat- Sealer/Reducer(600 SF/gal.) a. Exposed Concrete Finished Floors. 3.08 INTERIOR STAIN AND NATURAL-FINISH WOODWORK SCHEDULE A. Natural-Finish Woodwork: Provide the following natural finishes over new interior woodwork not specified as shop finished: 1. Alkyd-Based Satin-Varnish Finish: Two finish coats of alkyd-based clear satin varnish over a sanding sealer. Provide wood filler on open-grain wood before applying first varnish coat. a. Sealer Coat: Clear sanding sealer. b. Finish Coats: Interior alkyd- or polyurethane-based clear satin varnish. END OF SECTION 09 9100 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT 421085 0991 00 - 16 MAY 2, 2023 PAINTING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 10 14 00 - SIGNAGE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Work includes all labor, materials, equipment and services necessary to furnish and install all signage as shown on the Drawings and as herein specified. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 -for Project Identification signage. 2. Division 05 - Section"Metal Fabrications", for vehicular sign posts. 3. Division 06 - Section"Rough Carpentry", for blocking in walls. 4. Division 09 - Section"Gypsum Board Assemblies". 5. Division 10 - Section "Fire Protection Specialties", for fire extinguisher / cabinets signage. 6. Division 14,for elevator signage and sign fixtures. 7. Division 26 -For lighting and electrical requirements for lit signage. 8. Division 32 - Section "Pavement Specialties", for fire lane, directional, and other pavement markings. 9. Division 32 - Section "Ornamental Fences and Gates", for safety signage for motorized gates. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings for all work for review prior to fabrication of materials. Shop drawings of individual letter signage shall indicate spacing. Shop drawings of all signage shall be drawn to scale, letter characters in type style specified and spacing shown exactly as sign is to be fabricated. B. Submit samples of all colors for selection by Architect and materials proposed for use prior to fabrication. C. Submit two product sample signs with pictogram,tactile characters, and Braille. D. Submit sign schedule location key plan for all signage. E. Sign schedule location key plan: Signage contractor shall submit a first draft sign schedule and location key plan for all signage in editable electronic format (excel preferred). Preliminary submittal shall indicate all proposed sign locations, types, and message copy. Architect will mark up the draft schedule and location plan. Make corrections and resubmit sign schedule and location plan until approved by Architect. 1. Signage contractor shall spell check all signage copy and inform Architect in the final sign schedule submittal to confirm suspected misspellings. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 10 14 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 SIGNAGE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Materials properly protected and packaged so that no damage occurs during transit. Materials when delivered,protected by the Contractor against damage or theft. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Signage shall meet government regulation for raised image signage and criteria of the Americans with Disabilities Act, and Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS). 1. Contractor shall be responsible for all TAS and local accessibility code signage requirements, regardless of whether they are specifically shown on the drawings or specified herein. Notify Architect of any conflicts or deficiencies. Any signage deficiencies noted by Authorities having Jurisdiction at the conclusion of the project shall be remedied by Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Fabricator's Special Warranty: Manufacturer / Fabricator agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include,but are not limited to, the following: 1. Deterioration of finishes beyond normal weathering. 2. Deterioration of printed images. 3. Separation or delamination of sheet materials and components. 4. Failure of mechanical fasteners or components. 5. Separation of signs from substrates due to improper substrate preparation or due to inadequate strength or quantity of fasteners or adhesives. a. If defect is exhibited in a significant number of locations to indicate a systemic issue, corrections to attachments shall be made holistically to the type(s) of signs exhibiting the defect. 6. Warranty excludes damage due to vandalism or abuse. 7. Warranty Period: One years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Signage Design, General: Information on Drawings and as specified herein establish the design intent only, showing requirements for respective aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of signage but not necessarily all fabrication details required for complete sign installations. I. Architect will provide a preliminary signage schedule, with all preliminary proposed copy. Signage contractor is responsible to translate into complete signage submittal package for Architect's review and comment, and Owner approval. 2. Architect or Owner will provide electronic graphic files in vector format acceptable to signage fabricator for use in preparing all printed graphic images. B. Font for Copy: Unless otherwise noted in Drawings or otherwise approved by Architect, provide Tw Cen MT font characters. 1. Where or if individual characters conflict with handicap accessible code requirements, replace individual characters with similar appearance characters compliant with code requirements, or replace with similar appearance compliant font, as approved by Architect. C. Accessibility Standards: Comply with accessibility standards indicated in References article. In the event of apparent conflict between Requirements and signage design indicated, notify Architect via submittal process and suggest corrections to design to maintain design intent and resolve the conflict. Coordinate with Architect to resolve conflicts in satisfactory manner. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 10 1400 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 SIGNAGE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Architect's review and approval of submittals is for general conformance with design intent and does not constitute review or approval of handicap accessible features. 2. Signage fabricator is solely responsible to fabricate signs requiring accessible features in compliance with the provisions of applicable handicap accessibility codes. In event that non-compliant signage is installed and verified by authorities having jurisdiction as non- compliant, fabricator shall replace identified non-compliant signage with compliant signage of similar design,without additional cost to Owner. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Materials, General: Materials and equipment as well as workmanship shall conform to the highest commercial standards available. Parts not identified specifically on Drawings shall be materials appropriate to job site conditions. All color changes made with sharp, clean even edges providing clear separation of sign copy. B. Aluminum Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated. C. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated. D. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, category as standard with manufacturer for each sign, Type UVF (UV filtering). E. Printable and Frosted Window Film: - 3M Scotch Series 7725SE special Effects Film, B-free window films JT5798M BF and JT5999M BF by Morgan Adhesives, 3M CRYSTAL Glass Finishes 314 Dusted Crystal, HD Clear high definition decorative film by HDClear and approved equal materials approved by printing vendor. F. Vinyl Film: UV-resistant vinyl film of nominal thickness indicated, with pressure-sensitive, permanent adhesive on back; die cut to form characters or images as indicated and suitable for exterior applications. G. Paints and Coatings for Sheet Materials: Inks, dyes, and paints that are recommended by manufacturer for optimum adherence to surface and are UV and water resistant for colors and exposure indicated. 2.03 MATERIALS-SPECIFIC A. Interior Room Identification Signage: Unframed, photopolymer, ADA and TAS-compliant raised character signs with Braille. System available with changeable message windows and exterior grade options where indicated. System equal to ASI Signage, ADA-Ready, "In- Touch" Sign System. Allow for number of room identification signs indicated on drawings. 1. Sign Size: As indicated in Drawings or minimum size to accommodate requirements on sign with largest message. 2. Sign Shape: Rectangular with square corners. 3. Sign Materials: a. Face: Photopolymer face,in matte (non-glare)finish. b. Backing plate: Acrylic c. Exterior-entry Rooms: Where room signage is required for exterior-entry rooms, provide UV-Resistant,Exterior-Grade signage. 4. Fabrication Options a. Tactile Graphics and Text: 1) Fabrication process: Provide tactile copy and grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch minimum from plaque first surface by manufacturer's photopolymer bonded process. Sign face of single material, tactile characters and Braille integral to photopolymer. Adhesive-fixed characters are not acceptable. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 10 1400 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 SIGNAGE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2) Provide lettering and graphics precisely formed, uniformly opaque to comply with relevant ADA / TAS regulations and requirements indicated for size, style, spacing, content, position, and colors. Tactile characters to be raised min. 1/32" from surface. Computerized translation of sign copy to be responsibility of the manufacturer. 3) Provide signs with ADA / TAS compliant pictograms at restroom and locker room signs. b. Pictograms: Pictograms shall comply with recognized standards and locally enforced accessibility codes. Integrate verbal text descriptors and Braille below each raised pictogram, outside of the pictogram field. 1) [In addition to male/female pictograms, provide a "wheelchair" international handicap accessibility symbol on the signage for all accessible restrooms, bathing /shower rooms, and dressing/locker rooms]. a) Where these rooms are non-accessible and there is not an adjacent accessible room, provide signs to direct to the nearest accessible room. Message "ACCESSIBLE RESTROOM (Shower, Locker Room, etc.) AVAILABLE AT<indicate location>", with direction arrow where applicable. These signs are visual only,without raised characters or Braille. c. Mounting Panel Options: 1) Size: Same size. 2) Thickness: 0.080 inch thick matte finished acrylic. d. Background Appearance Options: Solid color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard range. e. Tactile Lettering and Graphics Color Options: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. f. Letter style and color: Selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard letter styles and color charts. g. Letter size and layout position: 1" high room identification letters, unless otherwise approved by Architect. In no case shall size be less than that required by handicap accessibility standards. 5. Installation Method a. Manufacturers recommended adhesive, or high strength clear vinyl tape. b. Where attachment is to glass sidelights, provide high strength clear vinyl tape attachment, with solid color blank backplate on reverse side matching sign color and size. 6. Fabrication- General a. General: Comply with requirements indicated for materials, thicknesses, finishes, colors, designs, shapes, sizes, and details of construction. Sign fabricator is responsible to double check all requirements related to ADA and Texas Accessibility Standards requirements for accessible signs, in preparation of shop drawings and prior to sign fabrication. Signs fabricated that do not comply with these requirements shall be re-made in compliance with requirements at Fabricator's expense. b. Preassemble signs in the shop to the greatest extent possible to minimize field assembly. Disassemble signs only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and installation, in a location not exposed to view after final assembly. c. Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners to appear inconspicuous. d. Form panels to required size and shape. Comply with requirements indicated for design, dimensions,finish, color, and details of construction. e. Coordinate dimensions and attachment methods to produce message panels with closely fitting joints. Align edges and surfaces with one another in the relationship indicated. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 10 1400 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 SIGNAGE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 f. Exterior grade signs: Provide exterior grade signs where mounted outside of weather protective building enclosure. Locations: As indicated on drawings. B. Stair Exit Enclosure Identification Signage: At each vertical exit enclosure (stairs, ramps, or combination thereof) connecting more than 3 stories or levels, provide a sign within the exit enclosure at each level. Provide signs to match design of interior room signage signs. 1. Fire Department and Egress Signs: Provide these signs in compliance with handicap accessible code for visual signage. Raised characters and Braille are not required. Mount signs at 5'-0" above the landing level at each floor level, in a location not obstructed to view with doors in open or closed positions. a. Message shall include the following: 1) "STAIR#_" indicating the stair number. 2) Designation of floor levels: "LEVEL#". 3) Identification of Egress Level: "EXIT AT LEVEL #" or similar message indicating nearest egress level, with a directional arrow indicating if that egress level is above or below the current level. 4) Where the exit enclosure connects to a roof level,include"ROOF ACCESS". b. Size: Minimum 12"x18", or larger where required to fit message. c. Lettering Sizes: 1) Stair number: 1-1/2"tall. 2) Level Number: "LEVEL" 1-1/2" tall, and the floor number 5" tall. 3) All other Lettering: I" tall. d. Colors To match room identification signage. 2. Handicap Accessible Level Identification: Provide these signs with raised letters and Braille. Mount signs in handicap accessible position at each door into the exit enclosure. a. Message shall include the following: 1) "STAIR#_" indicating the stair number. 2) Designation of floor levels: "LEVEL#". b. Size and color of signs to match interior room identification signage. C. Tactile Exit Signs: Provide signs to match design of interior room signage tactile exit signs with raised letters and Braille at rooms and corridors that serve as exit passageways and exit discharges, as required by local code, including any space that can be interpreted as an Area of Refuge, Exit Stairway, Exit Ramp, Exit Passageway and Exit Discharge. Size signs as indicated on drawings in same size and font text as handicapped accessible room signage. Colors as selected by Architect. 1. Where there is room identification signage scheduled for the same door and the text and Braille message of the tactile exit sign will fit on the room identification signage below the room identification message,incorporate both signs into one sign. D. Occupancy Load Signage: Provide sign as indicated on drawings, depicting occupancy load. Colors as selected by Architect. Install at locations designated by Architect and as approved by Code Official. Signs shall be ADA compliant with raised characters and Braiile. Allow for one sign. 1. Sign Message: "MAXIMUM OCCUPANCY: ###". 2. Sign Message: "NOTICE: FOR YOUR SAFETY OCCUPANCY IS LIMITED TO ### PERSONS Deep Posted Under Penalty of Law". 3. Maximum occupant load number and sign message shall be approved by Fire Marshal/ Local Code Enforcement official having jurisdiction. Architect will provide suggested maximum occupancy numbers based on Code occupancy load calculations and/or upon egress capacity of the spaces. Contractor shall confirm local code enforcement approval of message and maximum occupancy prior to fabrication. Install at locations designated by Architect and as approved by Fire Marshal or applicable Code Enforcement Official. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 10 1400 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 SIGNAGE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. Miscellaneous Handicap Accessibility Signage: Provide matching design of interior roof identification signage mechanically mounted sign to match design of room identification signage,unless otherwise noted. Colors as selected by Architect. 1. Directional Signage to Accessible Entries: Provide one of the following at each entrance door where not all entries to the building are handicap accessible: a. Exterior Directional Signage: At non-accessible entrances, provide exterior grade sign plaque with message to direct to the nearest accessible entrance. 1) Mounting: Mechanically fasten to building wall near entry door. b. Accessibility Symbol: At each accessible entrance, provide an international symbol of accessibility pictogram as follows: 1) At glazed entry doors, provide 6" vinyl die-cut symbol, in color selected by Architect. Mount on glass adjacent to an accessible entry door, or where there is no sidelight,mount on door glass. 2. Signage for Public Use Buzzer System Message shall read "PUSH BUTTON FOR ASSISTANCE", or similar message indicating operation of buzzer system. System to be provided under separate contract / confirm applicable message with Owner's separate contract. Mount one sign adjacent to each public use buzzer button. a. Provide exterior grade signage where mounted at exterior locations. F. Directional Signs at Apparatus Bay Door Control Buttons: Provide '/4" thick acrylic sign plaques with visual message (no braille) indicating Bay Doors and Overhead Coiling Grille button controls. Signs of each type to be of equal size to accommodate largest message in 1" high letters. Background color as selected by Architect with white copy. Provide signs as follows: 1. (3) sets of (6) signs, one set for each of the banks of 3-button door controls. Signs arranged vertically to the left of buttons to indicate "Door" and "Grille" and arranged horizontally above the buttons indicating "Bay I", "Bay 2", "Bay 3". Another sign above the other signs reading "FRONT" or "REAR" to indicate which side of the bay the buttons control. Coordinate with Electrician to install door control buttons in proper sequence to match signage. 2. (2) each of signs located in Air Locks, mounted above or adjacent to red mushroom buttons, with the following message in 1" high letters: "PUSH TO OPEN FRONT BAY DOORS", or similar message as approved by Fire Department. G. Directional Signs for gas solenoid controls in Kitchen: Provide '/4" thick acrylic sign plaques with visual message (no braille) for gas solenoid button controls. Signs of each type to be of equal size to accommodate largest message in V high letters, unless otherwise instructed by Architect. Background color as selected by Architect with white copy. Provide signs as follows: 1. For Fire Alarm/ Hood override button: "HOOD /FIRE ALARM RESET BUTTON" or similar message acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. For Gas Range Station Alerting Reset Button: "1. TURN OFF ALL GAS AT RANGE 2. PUSH BUTTON TO RESET 3. PUSH RESTRIKE BUTTONS ON RANGE TO LIGHT PILOTS" 3. For Outdoor Gas Grill Alerting Reset Button: "GAS GRILL RESET BUTTON". H. Exterior Vehicular Traffic Signage: Provide Aluminum signs with 1" radius corners, shop painted and screw attached to posts set in concrete footing. Refer to Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for posts. Coordinate lengths of posts for mounting heights compliant with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide engineering grade signs unless otherwise required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Vehicular signs at street: Comply with all specifications and requirements of Texas Department of Transportation (TxDOT), or local authority having jurisdiction as applicable, for signs at streets, including but not limited to sign size, gauge, attachment, FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 10 1400 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 SIGNAGE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 pole types, and mounting heights. Unless otherwise noted, provide signs designed in accordance with TxDOT "Standard Highway Sign Designs for Texas" in sizes as follows, or larger where required according to TxDOT design standards for the locations and applications indicated: a. As indicated on drawings. 1. Aluminum Thickness: a. For signs up to 12"x18": Minimum of 18 gauge (.04)Aluminum b. For signs up to 30"00": Minimum of 16 gauge (.05)Aluminum c. Or thicker than above where required to match standards required by authorities having jurisdiction(street signs at municipal or TxDOT rights-of-way, etc.). 2. Remote Fire Department Connection (FDC), FACP, and Fire Riser Room Signs: To match standards of local authorities having jurisdiction. a. FDC Sign: If not otherwise specified by authorities having jurisdiction, provide approximately 8"x8" sign, with red background with white border and 3" high white "FDC" lettering, and 1-1/2" high street address number, mounted on post 3' above grade to bottom of sign. b. FACP Sign: If not otherwise specified by authorities having jurisdiction, provide approximately 6"x8" sign, with red background with white border and 4" high white "FACP" lettering, mounted at the exterior side of door where the FACP is located, in location as indicated by Architect and acceptable to Fire Marshal. c. Fire Riser Room Sign: If not otherwise specified by authorities having jurisdiction, provide approximately 8"x12" sign, with red background with white border and 2" high white "FIRE RISER ROOM" lettering mounted at exterior side of door to the fire riser room, in a location as indicated by Architect and acceptable to Fire Marshal. 3. Handicap Accessible Parking Signs: Refer to site plan and handicap signage detail on Drawings for parking signage at handicapped accessible spaces. Provide one sign per handicap accessible parking space, one van accessible parking space shall indicate van accessible. Comply with Texas Accessibility Standards requirements for sign types and mounting height. 1.Street Address at Glazed Main Entry Doors: Provide 6" vinyl die-cut, four-digit number in color selected by Architect to be applied to glass above exterior main entrance vestibule doors. J.Aluminum Sign Letters: All Sign letters shall be by a single manufacturer or fabricator and shall match in font, color, finish, and other visual characteristics, unless otherwise indicated. Letters and mounting shall be designed by manufacturer to withstand design loads. Type Style Tw Cen MT. 1. Aluminum Letters at Number "3", Fire Department Seal, and (2) "CORPUS CHRISTI FIRE DEPARTMENT" text (at North and East Elevations), Halo L.E.D. Back-Lit: Fabricated aluminum, cut metal letter, equal to ASI Modulex LF Series architectural letters. a. Material: Aluminum. b. Finish: Brushed finish on face and sides. c. Sizes: Number "3", Fire Department Seal, and (2) "CORPUS CHRISTI FIRE DEPARTMENT"text(at North and East Elevations) shall be sized and located as per drawings. d. Depth of Return: 3" deep. e. Type style: Tw Cen MT f. Mounting: Mount as per method "Projecting Stud Mount" with anchors and projected 3 inches from wall. g. LED Backlight color white. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 10 1400 - 7 MAY 2, 2023 SIGNAGE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Aluminum Numbers for Street Address: Fabricated aluminum, cut metal letters, equal to ASI Modulex LPS Series cut metal architectural letters. a. Material: Aluminum. b. Finish: Brushed finish on face and sides. c. Size: Numbers "1525", or final approved street number, shall be 8" high, located as indicated in Drawings. d. Type style: Tw Cen MT. e. Mounting: Flush Mount with high strength tape and silicone adhesive. K. Building Plaque: One, sized per drawings, Cast Aluminum Plaque, as manufactured by Southwell, O.M.C., A.R.K. Ramos, or approved equal. Each plaque is to be cast of aluminum and shall be free of pits and holes. Border and letters shall be raised, satin finish and background shall be oxidized, matte texture. Plaque shall be cleaned and lacquered. Border shall be "double line" and lettering shall be font type style as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's available fonts. Mounting to be lag bolts into solid wood blocking in metal stud wall. Architect shall provide layout and copy requirements for each sign, and Architect and Owner shall approve rubbing prior to casting. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION AND COORDINATION A. Coordinate mounting requirements for exterior substrates with other trades as required, including adequate strength and structural reinforcements where necessary. B. Coordinate with other trades as required for blocking in walls, electrical requirements, requirements for substrate preparation, and other requirements for signage installation as applicable. C. Examine installation areas to ensure that conditions are suitable for installation. D. Examine existing conditions for construction or obstructions that prohibit signage to be installed in typical locations per TAS standards. Where location for TAS compliant mounting location is unclear,request clarification from Architect. E. Examine signage for defects prior to installation. Do not install damaged signage. F. Prepare shop drawings and schedule production of dedication plaque with adequate time for review, approval and fabrication to ensure the plaque will be installed at substantial completion, or other date as may be required for dedication ceremony. 1. Where Owner is responsible for providing initial direction for design and layout, provide written notification to Owner not less than 4 months prior to scheduled substantial completion date that their direction is required, and copy Architect. 2. Submit initial shop drawings no later than 2 months, plus fabrication time, prior to scheduled substantial completion date, to ensure adequate time for Owner review and approval of dedication plaque. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Verify mounting locations and types prior to fabrication. Coordinate exact locations with Architect where signs cannot be installed in typical location per Texas Accessibility Standards. Confirm where backplates etc. are needed for application to glass or similar substrates. B. Fabricate signs according to approved shop drawings and sign schedule. C. Clean mounting locations of dirt, dust, grease or similar conditions that would prevent proper installation. This signage contractor responsible to properly clean substrates so that signage may be properly applied. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 10 1400 - 8 MAY 2, 2023 SIGNAGE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with suppliers' instructions, using mounting methods as specified and as recommended by sign manufacturer for best results. 1. Mount with adhesive or high strength tape. Mount secure and tight to substrates. 2. Mount with high strength double sided mounting tape, with backplates, at all signage applied to glass. B. All signage and materials installed level,plumb, and true in spacing. 3.04 CLEANING,PROTECTION,AND REPAIR A. Protect installed signage from damage and soiling due to construction operations. 1. Install interior wall signage after substrates to receive painted finish have been painted, or if painting must be scheduled after initial sign installation mask off or remove and reinstall signs. B. Remove adhesive, paint, or other spills and smears from sign surfaces, prior to inspection for substantial completion. Clean signs according to manufacturer's or fabricator's instructions. Do not use cleaners or methods that can damage sign surface or finish. C. Remove any protective coatings at times as recommended by manufacturer or fabricator. D. Repair scratches and other damage that might have occurred during installation or due to construction operations to satisfaction of the Architect. Evidence of repair should not be visible when viewed with unaided eye at a distance of 5 feet. Remove and replace damaged materials that cannot be repaired to the satisfaction of the Architect. END OF SECTION 10 14 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 10 1400 - 9 MAY 2, 2023 SIGNAGE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 10 26 13 - WALL AND CORNER PROTECTION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Work includes all labor, materials and services necessary to furnish and install all wall and corner guards as shown on drawings and as herein specified. 1.03 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to the work of this section. 2. Division 7 Section: Caulking& Sealants 3. Division 9 Section: Gypsum Wallboard 4. Division 9 Section:Ceramic Tiling, for Metal edge strips installed as corner guards or edge trimming. 5. Division 9 Section: Painting 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit product data,installation instructions and maintenance instructions.. B. Shop Drawings: Provide floor plan with proposed endwall guards, corner guard and wall guard locations as required by the contract documents for review. Show mounting heights and details. C. Sample Selections: Provide samples of manufacturer's standard color range. D. Verification Samples: Provide three 12" long minimum samples of each type, texture and color selected. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to compliance with project requirements, and Basis of Design product intent parameters, manufacturers that may offer specified items which may be incorporated in the Work include the following: 1. Pawling Corporation, 32 Nelson Hill Road, Wassaic, NY 12592, 800-431-3456, sales@pawling.com 2. Balco,2626 S. Sheridan, Wichita,Kansas 67217, 800-767-0082,balcousa.com 3. Construction Specialties(CS), Dallas 214-340-6400, Corp.800-233-8493, c-sgroup.com FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 1026 13 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 WALL AND CORNER PROTECTION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 4. Impro Corporation (IPC), 580 W18766 Apollo Drive, Muskego, WI 53150, 800-222- 5556, improcorp.com 5. Koroseal, 3875 Embassy Parkway,Fairlawn OH, 855-753-5474 B. Division 1 Section-Product Requirements: Product options and substitutions. Substitutions: Permitted. 2.02 WALL GUARDS A. Stainless Steel Wall Guards and Backsplashes: Type CRS Series by Pawling Corp. or approved equal. Acceptable manufacturer's that may produce similar products include Balco, Constriction Specialties (CS),inpro corporation(IPC) and koroseal. 1. Locations: As indicated on drawings, and at two (2) sides of all mop and utility sinks 72" a.f.f. 2. Class I fire-rated with flame spread shall be 24 of less in accordance with ASTM E84. 3. Snap-on-Covers shall be of 16 guage type 304 stainless steel with.44 satin finish. 4. Mounting Bracket: 16 guage stainless steel 5. Provide screws,bolts,brackets,factory installed flat stainless steel end caps as required. 2.03 CORNER GUARDS A. Surface-Mounted Stainless Steel Corner Guards: Shall be Type CG-51 as manufactured by Pawling Corp. Acceptable manufacturer's that may produce similar products include Balco, Constriction Specialties (CS), inpro corporation(IPC) and koroseal. 1. Flame spread shall be 25 or less in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Stainless steel extrusions 16 gauge with 1/8"radius. 3. Accessories: ADH-30 adhesive 4. Type: Stainless Steel: #430 (Standard Grade) stainless steel,#4 satin finish. 5. Height: Full-Wall Height at all locations noted on the drawings. 2.04 WALL END GUARDS A. Surface-Mounted Stainless Steel Wall End Guards: Shall be inpro's stainless steel end wall protector or approved equal.. Acceptable manufacturer's that may produce similar products include Balco, Constriction Specialties(CS), (IPC),koroseal and Pawling Corp.. 1. Flame spread shall be 25 or less in accordance with ASTM E84. 2. Stainless steel extrusions 16 gauge with 1/8" radius. 3. Accessories: ADH-30 adhesive 4. Type: Stainless Steel: 4430 (Standard Grade) stainless steel,94 satin finish. 5. Height: Full-Wall Height at all wing wall ends. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION A. Installation of corner guards shall be after painting is complete. If guard installation will precede painting, coordinate with painting trade as applicable to properly mask, protect, and clean corner guards to avoid damage to finishes. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install at heights indicated on the drawings. B. Install with top aligned as shown on drawings,unless otherwise directed by Architect. Where corner guard top elevation is not shown on drawings, corner guards shall be 42", with bottom edge mounted at top of wall base. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 1026 13 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 WALL AND CORNER PROTECTION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Install wall and corner guards plumb, level and rigidly secure in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Mounting retainer shall be set a maximum of 18" on centers. E. Retainers for flush-mounted corner guards shall be installed prior to application of drywall. F. Snap on extrusions shall be installed after painting or wall covering has been completed. 3.03 STAINLESS STEEL CORNER GUARD AND TRIM INSTALLATION A. Provide stainless steel trim and corner guards with the same edge design and finish throughout. B. Provide stainless steel corner guards of every type with countersunk screw attachment and tapered head screws such that screw heads are installed flush or nearly flush with face of corner guards. C. Install from top of base and full height typical unless noted otherwise. Install in minimum number of pieces possible, do not piece smaller or scrap sections. 1. At the trim/guard conditions install full height of stone tile. 3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Protect finishes during construction by masking members with approved cardboard and paper as recommended by manufacturer. B. Remove strippable plastic finish protection at time as recommended by Manufacturer. Do not allow plastic to melt onto surfaces. C. Clean all exposed surfaces as recommenced by the manufacturer. END OF SECTION 10 26 13 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 1026 13 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 WALL AND CORNER PROTECTION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 ASECTION 10 28 13 - TOILET ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide accessories as shown on the drawings and as herein specified. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section: Blocking in Stud Walls for Accessories 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Model numbers listed for toilet accessories are items manufactured by Bobrick Corporation unless otherwise noted. Items as made by the Bradley Corp., American Specialties Co. (ASI) Charles Parker Co. may be used provided materials meet performance and design requirements herein specified. B. All bathroom fixtures and accessories shall comply with all ADA federal, state and local Handicapped code requirements. C. Accessories fabricated from type 304 stainless steel alloy. 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver items in manufacturer's unopened protective cartons. Maintain covers on units until installation is complete. Remove protective covers at final clean-up of installation. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each toilet accessory. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Electric Hand Dryer: Manufacturer's 5-Year Limited Warranty. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ITEMS A. Paper Towel Dispensers: 1. Surface-mounted Typical unless otherwise noted: Cabinet type, 300 C-fold / 600 multifold towel capacity, equal to Georgia Pacific (GP)Model No. 56620 B. Toilet Tissue Dispenser: 1. Surface-mounted: Cabinet type satin stain steel double roll holder, equal to Bobrick No. B-2888. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 1028 13 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 TOILET ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Undersink Pipe Insulation: ADA compliant vinyl cover pipe insulation shall be TRUEBRO "Lav Guard 2", as manufactured by ISP Corp.,in standard color, or approved equal. D. Grab Bars: 1-1/2" diameter satin finish stainless steel grab bar sets with concealed fastenings. Bobrick Series B-6806. Lengths and mounting configurations shall comply with all state and local Handicapped Accessibility code requirements. E. Mop Racks: 1. Mop and Broom Holder Strip: Stainless steel, anti-slip, spring loaded mop holders; 24" long with 3 mop holder clips, equal to Bobrick B-223. Mounted at 48"-54" aff at all mop sinks, comply with ADA/TAS mounting heights in public spaces. F. Mirrors: 1. Framed Wall Mirrors: No. 1 quality 1/4" float plate glass selected for silvering, electro- copper plated by galvanic process, surface-mounted mirror with stainless steel channel and filler strip on 1/8" non-abrasive polyethylene padding equal to Bobrick No. B-165- 2436. 2. Unframed Plate Glass Mirrors: Refer to Division 08, Section"Glazing". G. Coat and Towel Hooks: 1. Double Robe Hook: One-piece construction with satin stainless steel finish, surface mounted, equal to Bobrick No. B-76727. H. Shower Curtains and Rods: White opaque 0.2 mm thick vinyl curtain equal to Bobrick B- 204-2 (84" H x 42" W), with stainless steel hooks B-204-1 on 1" dia. stainless steel rod and mounting brackets B-6107 Series curtain rod. I.Recessed Soap and Shampoo Shelf for Tile Showers: Refer to Division 09, Section "Ceramic Tiling." PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All handicapped bathroom fixtures and toilet accessories shall comply with all federal, state and local Handicapped code requirements and comply with TAS (Texas Accessibility Standards)mounting locations and heights. 3.02 INSPECTION A. Inspect blocking and plate inserts in framing to determine if material is in proper position for installation of accessories prior to wallboard surfacing being applied. Units securely attached to framing. Grab bars installed to withstand a 900 lb. loading condition; provide necessary concealed anchorage devices to meet load requirements. END OF SECTION 10 28 13 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 1028 13 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 TOILET ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 10 44 00 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK A. Definition: "Fire extinguisher" as used in this section refers to units which can be hand- carried as opposed to those which >are equipped with wheels or to fixed fire extinguishing systems. B. Types of products required include: 1. Fire extinguishers. 2. Fire extinguisher cabinets. 3. Fire extinguisher brackets. 4. Fire sprinkler valve and hose cabinets. 5. Fire Department Key Vaults (Knox boxes). 6. Wall signs for fire extinguishers. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 - Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls", for temporary fire department access locks. 2. Division 04 - Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies", for coordination of block-outs in masonry walls. 3. Division 06 - Section"Rough Carpentry", for coordination of blocking in walls. 4. Division 07 - Section"Joint Sealants". 5. Division 09 - Section"Gypsum Board Assemblies". 6. Division 21, for coordination with fire sprinkler system design. 7. Division 26,for coordination of pathway for Knox Box security system connection. 8. Division 28, for coordination of security system connection to Knox Box tamper switch. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain products in this section from one manufacturer. B. UL-Listed Products: Provide new portable fire extinguishers which are UL-listed and bear UL "Listing Mark" for type,rating, and classification of extinguisher indicated. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal shall include manufacturer's product literature,both pictorial and written. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 PORTABLE TYPE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS A. Manufacturers: Design is based on products as manufactured by Activar / J.L. Industries, Inc. or Larsen's Manufacturing Co. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named products, or approved equal by another manufacturer. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 10 44 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Multi-purpose Class ABC Fire Extinguishers: Provide all extinguisher cabinets with ABC type extinguishers unless otherwise noted. ABC Fire extinguishers shall be a multi-purpose dry chemical type, enameled metal containers with pressure indicating gauges,rated for Class A, B, and C fires. 1. At Fire Extinguisher Cabinets, provide 10 lb extinguishers, 4A-8013C rated, equal to the following: a. J. L. Industries Model Cosmic 10E, with MB846A bracket at bracket mounted locations. b. Larsen's Model MP10 with nozzle,with B-2 bracket at bracket mounted locations. 2. At small flammables liquid storage areas, provide 5 tb extinguishers mounted on brackets, 3A-40BC rated, equal to the following: a. J.L. Industries Model Cosmic 5E, with MB818 bracket at non-storage applications and standard bracket in storage rooms. b. Larsen's Model MP5-A with nozzle, with 821 bracket at non-storage applications, and standard bracket in storage rooms. 3. Where locations for specified extinguishers are not indicated in Drawings, confirm exact locations with Architect. C. Class K, Kitchen Fire Extinguishers: Provide (1) extinguisher on bracket mount at each kitchen area equal to J.L. Industries Saturn 15, or Larsen's WC 6L, wall-mounted, wet chemical type,K class rated, 1.8 gallon capacity fire extinguishers. 1. Bracket: J.L. Industries MB81OC, or equal. D. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: Provide semi-recessed, one-piece steel cabinet with stainless steel finish with rolled—edge trim. Semi-recessed cabinets shall not project more than 4" from face of wall, and overall depth sized to fit specified fire extinguishers. Provide recessed handle where 4" projection of the cabinet is required. Top of rough opening for unit shall be at 54"above finished floor surface, unless otherwise dictated by governing authority. Cabinets shall be J.L. Industries Cosmopolitan series, Larsen's Architectural series, or approved equal. 1. Semi-recessed at typical stud construction: Designed to recess into 3-5/8" stud wall construction(nominal 4" recessed). 2. Semi-recessed at typical double stud wall and CMU construction: 3. Finish: Stainless Steel. 4. Door Style: Vertical Duo (tall,narrow light). 5. Glazing: Clear Acrylic [Tempered safety glass] [laminated safety glass]. 6. Fire Rating: Provide cabinet in rated walls equal to rating for that wall. Rated cabinets shall have double walls with fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes. E. Fire Valve and Hose Cabinets: Provide where indicated in Drawings, at both sides of horizontal exits, and other locations as required by code and authorities having jurisdiction, except where standpipe connections are specifically indicated not to be located inside cabinets. Confirm exact locations in compliance with approved sprinkler system shop drawings and sprinkler system permit drawings as approved by authorities having jurisdiction. Cabinets shall match design, finishes, and manufacturer as approved for fire extinguisher cabinets. 1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed cabinets containing a valve and / or hose. Where wall thickness is inadequate for fully recessed cabinets, provide semi-recessed cabinets. 2. Sizes: As required by valves and hoses, and portable fire extinguishers where indicated. 3. Fire Hoses: Provide in sizes and lengths as required by code and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide with fire hose pin rack assembly. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 104400 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 4. Signage: Provide decal signage compliant with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, except where vision lights are acceptable alternative to signage. Orientation and color as selected by Architect from Manufacturer's standard types that are compatible with cabinet style indicated. F. Wall Signs: 1. Provide wall signs above fire extinguishers, equal to J.L. Industries 4"xl2" flush plastic fire extinguisher sign 925S. Mount bottom of sign at T-6" unless otherwise indicated. G. Fire Department Key Vault for Building access: Provide equal to Knox "Knox-Vault 4400 Series" single lock model, recessed mount with recessed mounting kit. Provide all hardware and accessories as required for complete, secure mounting and installation at wall construction indicated. 1. Finish: Black. 2. Provide with tamper alarm switch. H. Fire Department Key Vault at Gates, Grilles, and exterior site and parking lot access: Provide at each required access site point, equal to Knox "Knox Box 3200 Series" hinged door model. Surface mount to 5"x5" galvanized post, 5' tall and set 2' deep into 16" x 3' deep concrete footing,unless otherwise indicated in Drawings. 1. Finish: Black. 2. Interior switches: Provide at electrically operated gates, grilles, and similar access control devices,wired below grade back to control equipment. I.Anchors: Provide non-corrosive types as required by wall conditions. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install items included in this section in location and at mounting height indicated, or if not indicated, at heights to comply with applicable regulations of governing authorities as directed by local fire marshal. B. Securely fasten mounting brackets to structure, square and plumb, to comply with manufacturer's instructions. C. Fire Department Key Vault: At key vaults located on exterior building walls, wire tamper switch to building security system as shown in Drawings or specified elsewhere. Or where security system is not part of project scope or not indicated for key vault to be wired to security system, provide empty conduit with pull wire to above nearest accessible ceiling for future security system connection. D. Remove protective plastic sheets prior to Architect's inspection for substantial completion. END OF SECTION 10 44 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 104400 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 10 51 43 - TURNOUT GEAR LOCKERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Provide and install turnout gear lockers units as shown on the drawings and as herein specified. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 4, Section"Unit Masonry Assemblies". 2. Division 9, Section"Gypsum Board Assemblies". 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Deliver all products to job site in manufacturer's original, standard containers with seals unbroken and labels intact. Store in clean, dry area. Handle and protect materials and finishes to prevent damage. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature for all products specified. B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings for each run of lockers. Indicate attachments to substrates and coordination with project dimensions and conditions. 1.05 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's standard limited warranty. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Turnout Gear Lockers: Provide storage units equal to "Geargrid Wall Mount Lockers" as manufactured by Gear Grid, (888) 643-6694,www.geargrid.com, or approved equal. 1. Lockers: Wall-mount. a. Width: 20"nominal b. Depth 20" nominal c. Height 74"nominal(wall mounted). d. Frame: High strength ASTM A513 1-1/4" diameter x 16 gauge steel tubing e. Panel Construction: Sides and backs of high strength ASTM A510 cold drawn 1/4" diameter wire resistance welded in 3" square pattern. 1) Two full width shelves per unit, located at top and bottom, constructed of high strength 1/4" wire. 2) Number/Name Plates on top shelf. 20 gauge steel,to accept printed tags. f. Accessories: 1) Apparel Hooks: (3) .25" diameter wire hooks per locker. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 1051 43 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 TURNOUT GEAR LOCKERS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2) Top-side Storage: Provide top shelf over lockers matching panel construction, at all locker units. 3) Low Shelf. Provide an assitional low wire shelf allowing bag storage on bottom shelf and boots above(additional shelf located just below jacket hanging height). g. Mounting Brackets: 11 gauge steel B. Finish: All components excluding assembly and mounting hardware and stainless steel components to receive high grade durable powder coat enamel finish. 1. Gear Lockers Color: manufacturer's standard color(s) as selected by Architect. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT A. Examine units for damage. Do not install damaged units. B. Examine all surfaces receiving gear storage units for any defects that would impair installation and if any are found,make such corrections as necessary. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Assemble and install units using manufacturer's standard recommended methods. Use manufacturer's standard hardware for assembly and mount units securely to substrated indicated using hardware recommended by Manufacturer. B. Ensure lockers are installed above top of resilient base,unless noted otherwise. 3.03 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces. B. Protection: Installer shall advise General Contractor of final protection and maintenance conditions necessary to ensure that work will be without damage at time of acceptance. END OF SECTION 10 5143 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 1051 43 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 TURNOUT GEAR LOCKERS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 10 56 23 - STAINLESS STEEL SHELVING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Stainless steel wire shelving B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 4 "Concrete Masonry Units" 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Uniformity: Provide adjustable wire shelving components as produced by a single manufacturer with minimum 5 years' experience in manufacturing sanitary stainless steel shelving units,including necessary mounting accessories, fittings, and fastenings. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for stainless steel wire shelving. 1.05 JOB CONDITIONS A. Do not deliver shelving until building is enclosed and ready for installation. Protect from damage during delivery,handling, storage, and installation. 1.06 WARRANTIES A. Provide manufacturer's warranties on the shelving units for a period of one year from the date of substantial completion against all defects in materials and workmanship, excluding finish. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Louvered Shelving System: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products of one of the following: 1. Basis of Design: Basis of Design is "Louvered Shelving System" as manufactured by E- Z Shelving Systems Inc. with all attachments and supports for a complete shelving system with dimensions and configurations as indicated on the drawings and as described below. Subject to compliance with specifications, provide the named product or approved equal. a. Louvered, galvanized steel shelves; EZGSL, 16-gauge galvanized steel sheet complying with ASTM A653 with G-90 coating of 1-1/4 oz per sq ft. with oblong slotted shelves, no unsanitary hems, crevices, or folds and front and back flanges with return so that cut edges are not exposed. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT 421085 10 56 23 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 STAINLESS STEEL WIRE SHELVING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2.02 MATERIALS A. Slotted Shelving materials as described above. B. Fasteners: Type 304 Stainless Steel. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Construction: Fabricate shelves square, rigid, and without warp, and free of dents or distortion. Open area of shelves approximately 76%. Shelving wires welded together to form rigid, one-piece structure. Make all exposed metal edges safe to touch. 1. Finish: Electropolished type 304 stainless steel. 2.04 SHELVING UNITS A. Shelves: 1. Manufacturer's standard nominal 18" deep x 72"wide, single wall mounted shelf unit. B. Mounting Standards and Brackets: 1. Manufacturer's standard stainless steel mounting standards and brackets for size of shelves,number of shelves, load rating, and wall attachment type. 2. Mount above standing sink with drainboards in Decontamination room. Mount shelf 2" above top of spray unit hose for the sink below. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install wire shelving at locations shown in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for plumb,level,rigid, and secure installation. B. Space supports and fastenings as recommended by manufacturer. 3.02 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Verify that shelving is securely and rigidly attached. Make adjustments as necessary. END OF SECTION 10 56 23 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT 421085 105623 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 STAINLESS STEEL WIRE SHELVING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 10 73 16 - PREFABRICATED ALUMINUM CANOPIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, shall apply to work specified in this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Work in this section shall include design, fabrication and installation of complete, mechanically fastened, extruded aluminum protective cover system including foundations where not otherwise detailed in the Drawings. All work shall be in complete accordance with the drawings and this specification. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 04 Section "Unit Masonry" for coordination of support engineering with masonry walls supporting canopy system. 2. Division 05 Section: "Structural Steel", for steel brackets and supports at and inside building walls. 3. Division OS Section: "Cold-Formed Metal Framing", for cold forined support framing for canopy attachments. 4. Division 07 Section: "Metal Wall and Soffit Panels", and Division 09 Section "Metal Support Systems", for coordination with metal soffit panels installed to and supported by canopy system. 5. Division 07 Section: "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim". 6. Division 07 Section: "Joint Sealants". 7. Division 26 Section: "Electrical", for coordination of routing of conduit and installation of electrical devices at canopies. 1.03 REFERENCES A. The Aluminum Associate-Aluminum Design Manual 2010. B. American Welding Society-AWS D1.2/D1.2M: 2008. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Furnish complete shop drawings bearing the seal of a registered engineer showing the required live and wind loads of the project. Shop Drawings shall clearly illustrate all details, including, but not limited to: Plan views, drainage locations and details, building wall condition details, flashing details, canopy component sizing and thickness, fastener sizing, large scale assembly details, and finishes by component. General Contractor to verify all dimensions and elevations prior to submittal to Architect. Submittal shall be checked by manufacturer prior to fabrication. The site specific shop drawings and calculations shall bear the seal of a Structural Engineer licensed to work in the state of the project site. B. Submit samples for finish and color selections. Provide two samples of specified finish: minimum size: 2-1/2" x 4". C. Submit manufacturer's brochure and product data. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 1073 16 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 PREFABRICATED ALUMINUM CANOPIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Canopy Manufacturer shall have a minimum 10 years experience in designing and installing aluminum canopy systems. B. Installation shall be performed by aluminum canopy manufacturer to ensure a single source responsibility for the work. 1.06 ENGINEERING REQUIREMENTS A. Canopy shall be designed to comply with local building codes and the following, whichever is most stringent: 1. Canopies shall be capable of withstanding a 20-pound live load, & 110-mph wind loads, or as required by state and local building codes having jurisdiction. Structure shall be capable of sustaining hail, and support being walked on by maintenance personnel. 2. Canopies and canopy components shall be designed to withstand loads imposed by metal soffit framing and panels, and sign letters, installed to and supported by components of the canopy system, including associated wind loads to 110-mph. 3. Canopy fascias designed of adequate thickness to prevent oil canning. 4. [Canopy members to which [signage] [and] [metal panel soffits / framing] are attached shall be designed and reinforced to carry the additional loads imposed by the attached construction without deflection in excess of L/360, and without permanent deformation]. 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's 1-year Warranty against defects in material and workmanship, and 1- year Warranty on field installation. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: Basis of Design Manufacturer: Design is based on the products of AVAdeck. Subject to compliance with requirements, Pre-Frabricated Aluminum Canopies by the following, or other approved equal: 1. AVAdek, 9201 Winkler Drive, Houston, Texas 77017, 713-944-0988. 2. Other manufacturers must have a minimum of 10 years experience manufacturing extruded walkway canopies, have products that meet or exceed the specifications, and that serve the same function, performance, sizing, and appearance. Submit for approval in conformance with Division 1 sections regarding "Substitutions". 2.02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum system fabricated of alloy 6063 and/or 6061. Thickness of framework as determined by Manufacturer to suit loading conditions. Screws, miscellaneous fastening devices and internal components of non-corrosive materials. Provide shapes as shown on drawings and as required to provide complete sunscreen assembly. B. Aluminum Sheet: ASTM B209, alloy 6061-T6 or as otherwise recommended by metal producer for required finish and fabrication. C. 1/4'thick solid Polycarbonate, "Monogal" from Regal Plastics. Color and Type as Selected by Architect. D. Anchoring Devices: Provide plates, angles, wind bracing, spacers, clips and other devices necessary to provide complete sunscreen assembly capable of being supported from aluminum storefront framing. Of type, size and material required for loading and installation indicated. Use nonferrous metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 1073 16 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 PREFABRICATED ALUMINUM CANOPIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 installations and elsewhere as needed for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or expansion bolt devices for drilled in place anchors. Design of connections shall be fabricator's responsibility. Submit shop drawing for approval. Provide design requirements to storefront fabricator for provision of steel frame bracing within storefront as required by sunscreen loading. 1. Coordinate design of connections to steel structure with steel erector. E. Exposed Fasteners: Finished or painted to match sunscreen device framing unless otherwise indicated. F. Bituminous paint: Cold applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D1187. G. Perimeter Sealant: 2 part polyurethane sealant as made by Pecora, Inc., Sonneborn, or Tremco Mfg. Co.,unless otherwise required for compatibility with adjacent sealants (Refer to Division 09 Section "Joint Sealants"). Color to match aluminum sunscreen framing or adjacent finish material as directed by Architect. H. Clear Protective Coating: Complying with AAMA 602.2 for protecting finish during construction. 2.03 FABRICATION A. Provide fixed Sunshades and accessories of design, material, sizes, depth, arrangement, and thickness as indicated or as required for optimal performance with respect to strength; durability; and uniform appearance. B. Framing members and aluminum custom fabrications shall be completely fabricated at the factory for assembly and installation at the job site with provision for thermal movement for an ambient temperature range of 120°F and in accordance with Manufacturer's recommended procedures. 1. System shall be welded construction or mechanically fastened system that allows for individual replacement of damaged blades. C. Miscellaneous Steel Bracing(Concealed): 1 shop coat of red oxide primer. 2.04 HORIZONTAL,FIXED,EXTRUDED ALUMINUM SUNSCREEN DEVICES A. Horizontal, fixed, extruded-aluminum sun control assemblies complying with the following: 1. Blade: 6"Extruded, .125 inch min. aluminum airfoil blade. 2. Fascia: .0 Fascia, 125 inch min. aluminum 6" deep continuous fascia cap. Fascia retainer clip, on both sides of each outrigger. 3. Outrigger: 6" x 2" aluminum tube.sized per manufacturers engineering calculations for design loads. 4. Hardware to be designed and provided by sunshade manufacturer for attachment of sunshade to cold formed or steel tube structure. Hardware assembly to consist of mechanical fasteners, washers, collars, dissimilar material isolation separation. Attachment hardware system to allow for minor adjustments to accommodate for field tolerances. 2.05 ALUMINUM FINISHES A. General: Comply with NAAMM "Metal Finishes Manual" for architectural metal products for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces prior to shipment. 1. Finish sunscreen devices after assembly if welded. B. Finish: Finish and color selection of each component shall be Manufacturer's standard coating process, selected from the Manufacturer's standard color selections. 1. High Performance Fluoropolymer. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 1073 16 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 PREFABRICATED ALUMINUM CANOPIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Coordinate setting drawings, diagrams, templates, instructions, and directions for installation of anchorages that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry construction. Coordinate delivery of such items to project site. B. Examine openings to receive the work. Do not proceed until any unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 APPLICATION A. Locate and place sun control assemblies' level, plumb, and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. Properly locate and fasten anchoring devices and structural framing into supporting structure. B. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide stainless steel/neoprene washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a weather tight connection. C. Form closely fitted joints with exposed connections accurately located and secured. D. Repair finishes damaged by cutting, welding, soldering and grinding. Restore finishes so no evidence remains of corrective work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the factory,make required alterations, and refinish entire unit or provide new units. E. Dissimilar Materials: Isolate aluminum surfaces contacting or other ferrous metals using EC- 1202 tape or zinc chromate paint. Apply isolation materials to dissimilar surfaces. 1. Protect galvanized and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or similar materials. Take care not to paint surfaces that will be exposed in the finished work. F. Sealant: 1. Contact surfaces shall be dry, sound and free of dirt. Remove oil or grease with solvents and wipe dry. 2. Prime surfaces as required in strict accordance with sealant Manufacturer's recommendations. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of the work. B. Erection: Install framing true to line, plumb, level, square and in proper planes, free from sags, waves, buckles or other objectionable defects. Connecting joints shall be uniform, even,hairline joints. Securely fasten anchoring devices and structural steel bracing. C. Verify dimensions of supporting structure at the site by accurate field measurements so that the work will be accurately designed, fabricated and fitted to the structure. D. Anchor sunscreen devices to building structure as indicated on architectural and structural drawings, and according to approved shop drawings. E. Erection Tolerances: 1. Variation from level: +/- 1/8" maximum in any column to column space or 20'-0" runs, non-cumulative. 2. Offsets in end-to-end or edge-to-edge alignment of consecutive members 1/32". F. Cut and trim component parts during erection only with the approval of the manufacturer or fabricator, and in accordance with his recommendations. Restore finish completely. Remove FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 1073 16 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 PREFABRICATED ALUMINUM CANOPIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 and replace members where cutting and trimming has impaired the strength or appearance of the assembly as directed. G. Do not erect warped, bowed, deformed or otherwise damaged or defaced members. Remove and replace any members damaged in the erection process as directed. 3.04 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Remove strippable plastic finish protection at time as recommended by Manufacturer. Do not allow plastic to melt onto surfaces. B. Protect aluminum framing during construction by masking members with approved cardboard and paper as recommended by manufacturer. C. Upon completion,remove trimmings and other debris. Remove excessive sealant,mastic and other marks from adjacent surfaces, and wash with clean water. END OF SECTION 10 73 16 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 1073 16 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 PREFABRICATED ALUMINUM CANOPIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 10 75 00 - FLAGPOLES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide and erect flagpoles including all standard fittings as specified herein. Actual location of flagpoles as shown on Drawings or directed by Architect. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section: Concrete. 2. Division 26,Electrical, for grounding requirements. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for each type of flagpole required. B. Submit shop drawings of flagpoles and bases, showing general layout,jointing and complete anchoring and supporting systems. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturing Standards: Provide each flagpole as a complete unit produced by a single manufacturer,including fittings accessories,bases and anchorage devices. B. Design Criteria: Provide flagpoles and installations constructed to withstand 153 wind velocity minimum when flying flag of appropriate size. Use heavy pipe sizes if required for flagpoles type and height shown. C. Pole Construction: Construct pole and ship to site in one piece if possible. If more than one piece is necessary, provide snug-fitting, precision joints with self-aligning, internal splicing sleeve arrangement for weather-tight,hairline field joints. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Spiral wrap flagpoles with heavy Kraft paper or other protective wrapping and prepare for shipment in hard fiber tube or other protective container. B. Deliver flagpoles and accessories completely identified for installation procedure. Handle and store flagpoles to prevent damage or soiling. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 FLAGPOLES A. Manufacturers: Flagpole specifications are based upon flag poles and manufactured by Concord Industries, Inc., 4150A Kellway Circle, Addision TX 75001, 800-527-3902, FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 10 75 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 FLAGPOLES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 www.coneordindustries.com. Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named products or comparable products by another manufacturer. 1. Substitutions: Permitted. B. Equal to the following specifications for Concord Industries "Xtreme Series — XESR", with the following standards and options: 1. Flag Poles: Commercial ground set, one piece, cone tapered aluminum (6063-T6) flagpole. a. Number of poles: One. b. Exposed height: 30'-0". a. Outside Butt Diameter: 7" b. Wall Thickness: .188" c. Finish: Flagpole finish, deep luster, highly polished. 2. Base, spun aluminum flash collar. a. Equal to Concord#FC11. 3. Flag Arrangement: a. Single flag of size[s] indicated. b. Two flags per pole of sizes indicated. c. Flags: Provide the following flags, with rip stop nylon furnished with two non- corrosive grommets: 1) American flag with embroidered stars and sewn stripes: 5'x8'. 4. Halyards and Truck Assembly: External halyards, 410 white water-proof polypropylene, equipped with 2 chrome swivel snaps. a. Cleats— 9" aluminum. Tamperproof stainless head bolts. b. Truck- Cast aluminum with stainless steel ball bearings. C. Cleat Cover and Halyard Boxes: Key operated cylinder lock box of finish to match pole. 5. Halyards and Truck Assembly: Interial halyards with sized stainless steel concealed halyard assembly with internal swivel,mated to sized stainless steel cable heavy duty flag arrangement, chrome swivel snaps for flag arrangement indicated, a coated counterweight,beaded nylon ball over steel cable retainer ring and stainless steel links. a. Truck — Cast aluminum revolving, concealed halyard truck complete with stainless steel ball bearings and a stainless steel sheave. b. Winch — One gearless stainless steel direct drive winch internally mounted on a rotator plate system. Accessed behind a locking door fitted to a flush mounted, reinforced cast aluminum frame. The winch is operated with a removeable handle inserted through the access door. 6. Foundation sleeve - #16 gauge galvanized steel, with steel base plate and as detailed on the drawings. 7. Finial: #14 gauge aluminum ball with a flush seam and gold anodized finish. a. Manufacturer's standard flush seam ball in size to match pole butt diameter. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of lighting and electrical work with other trade as required. B. Coordinate adjacent new paving/surfacing installation to slope away from the base of the light pole(s). 3.02 INSTALLATION FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 107500 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 FLAGPOLES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Prior to installation, verify that pole equipment may all be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation; notify the Architect of any areas of discrepancy before proceeding with the installation. B. Install concrete foundations in accordance with manufacturers standards. C. Install poles according to Manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 10 75 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 107500 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 FLAGPOLES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 11 31 00 - RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish and install residential appliances as specified, and as shown on the drawings 2. Coordinate appliance dimensions and operating clearances with millwork. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Construction Waste Management" 2. Division 6 Section "Millwork" 3. Division 22 Section "Gas Connection" 4. Division 23 Section "Venting" 5. Division 26 Section "Electrical Connection" 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide residential equipment which complies with standards and bears certification labels as follows: 1. Provide residential equipment with U. L. labels. B. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to the following: Frigidaire Co.; General Electric Co.; Hotpoint Division, General Electric Co.; Tappan Division, Tappan Appliances, Whirlpool Corporation, Kenmore, Bosch, InSinkErator, Imperial,Manitowoc, Empire, and/or Ducane Products Co.. 1.04 PRODUCT STORAGE,DELIVERY AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to project site in manufacturer's undamaged protective containers after spaces to receive them have been fully closed. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's specifications and installation instructions for each type of appliance, including data indicating compliance with requirements. Submit operating and maintenance instructions for each item of residential equipment. B. Submit schedule of appliance,using same unit designations shown on drawings. C. Shop Drawings: For range exhaust hood. Include plans, elevations, sections, roughing-in dimensions,fabrication details,utility service requirements, and attachments to other work. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Submit manufacturer's standard written warranty for each item of residential equipment. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 11 31 00 - 1 JUNE 7, 2023 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1.07 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with other trades by providing requirements for proper installation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ITEMS TO BE PROVIDED A. Gas Ranges: 48" gas restaurant range with 6 burners, double oven, and griddle— 1. Model: Viking VGR5486GSS 2. Finish: Stainless Steel(SS) B. Range Hood: Ventilating type. 48" Hood. 1. Model: Viking#VWH54881 2. Finish: Stainless Steel(SS) 3. Vent Hood Blower: Viking VINV600 C. Garbage Disposal: 3/4 Horsepower Continuous Feed Disposer, GE Model No. GFC720T, or approved equal. D. Range Splash: 22 gauge, stainless steel splash with satin finish at range location of each unit. Splash shall completely cover wall area between cabinets and extend from 2" below range top to the underside of upper cabinets. E. (ALTERNATE 3) Ice Machine(EMS Storage): Hoshizaki Model KM-301BWJ F. (ALTERNATE 3) Under Counter Ice Cube Machine: 50 Ib Gourmet Ice Machine with Stainless Steel Door, Gravity Drain, with Residential Nugget Ice Shape, Scotsman Model No.SCCG50MA-1SU, or approved equal. G. (ALTERNATE 3)Microwave Oven: 2.0 Cu. Ft. Countertop Microwave Oven. 1. Model: GE#JES2051SNSS 2. Finish: Stainless Steel H. (ALTERNATE 3) Coffee Maker: 12 cup pourover coffee brewer with 2 warmers. 1. Model: Bunn#VP 17-2 2. Finish: Stainless Steel I. Outdoor Gas Grill: Provided and installed by Owner. J. (ALTERNATE 3)Washer: Top Load Washer 1. Model: Speed Queen-Model TC5003 WN K. (ALTERNATE 3)Dryer: Speed Queen Model DC 5003 WE L. (ALTERNATE 3)Refrigerator: 22 Cu. Ft. Refrigerator. 1. Model: GE Model GTS22KGNRSS 2. Ice Maker: GE Model IM41) 2.02 FINISH A. Provide manufacturer's standard as specified by Architect from manufacturers range of colors. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 COORDINATION A. Fully coordinate with other trades to verify correct and complete installation of electrical, plumbing, and mechanical connections as applicable for each appliance and for proper installation. Coordination includes,but is not limited to,the following: 1. Utility rough-ins, including type, sizing, connections, and required locations. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 11 31 00 - 2 JUNE 7, 2023 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Kitchen Kitchen Range Hood: Hood over Fire Station range is a Type I Commercial Hood, and is not installed under the work of this Section. Refer to Division 23. However, coordinate range installation requirements with the hood installation, as applicable, including location and orientation of gas connection to allow range to be pushed flush against the rear supply plenum panel. 3. Templates: Provide templates or other information as required for other trades to coordinate with approved equipment. Submit equipment and appliances submittal in time for review and approval as required to avoid impact to production schedules of other affected trades. 4. Millwork: Fully coordinate all dimensions required to avoid conflicts between door and drawers and cabinet handles at inside cabinet corners and similar conditions that might affect function or ability to fully open doors and drawers, either on the millwork or the appliance / equipment. Fully coordinate clear dimensions required for appliances and equipment mounted in or adjacent to millwork to fit neatly, with required clearances and tolerances, and without sight gaps. a. Perform all such coordination prior to preparation of millwork shop drawings. 5. Freestanding Equipment: Verify that clearances to as-constructed conditions are adequate to properly access and operate equipment. 6. Confirm exact location for coffee makers and their connections with Owner in field. B. Contractor shall not be due additional compensation to make modifications to rough-ins, millwork, clearances / dimensions, and similar conditions that may be required for satisfactory installation, that must be corrected due to Contractor's failure to coordinate between trades. 3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. General: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. B. Verify that accessory items required have been furnished. C. Locate and install items as indicated in Drawings and to conceal utility attachments to the maxiinum extent possible. D. Securely anchor units to supporting cabinetry or countertops with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are completely concealed. E. Built-in Equipment: Securely anchor units to supporting cabinets, countertops, or other adjacent construction as applicable, with concealed fasteners. Verify that clearances are adequate for proper functioning and rough openings are completely concealed. F. Freestanding Equipment: Place units in final locations after finishes have been completed in each area. G. Utilities: Refer to Divisions 22, 23 and 26 for plumbing, mechanical, and electrical requirements. 3.03 ADJUST AND CLEAN A. Test each item of equipment to verify proper operation. Make necessary adjustments. B. Verify that accessory items required have been furnished. C. Remove packing material from equipment items and leave units in clean condition, ready for operation. D. Comply with Division 01, "Construction Waste Management". FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 11 31 00 - 3 JUNE 7, 2023 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. Retain Manufacturers' installation instructions and owner manuals, including for any Owner- Provided equipment installed by Contractor, for incorporation into the Operations and Maintenance Manuals. F. Clean appliances and equipment prior to substantial completion, using materials and methods recommended by the Manufacturer of each item, and that will not damage items or finishes. END OF SECTION 11 3100 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 11 31 00 - 4 JUNE 7, 2023 RESIDENTIAL APPLIANCES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 12 24 01 - MANUAL ROLLER SHADES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation 1.02 SUMMARY A. This section includes integrated motor control options for the following: LManual Roller Solar Shades B. Related Sections include the following: 1.Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry" for window shade bracket support blocking or pocket assemblies. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Fire: Provide shade fabrics tested in accordance with: 1.1989 NFPA 701 small scale Vertical Burn Test and rated "PASS" 2.1996 NFPA 701 small scale Vertical Burn(telephone booth test) and rated"PASS" B. Anti-microbial: LASTM G-21-85 results for ATCC9642, ATCC9348 and ATCC9645 indicating "No Growth". 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Specification Conformance Document: Indicate whether the submitted equipment deviates from the specific requirements: 1.Address or itemize compliance, or detail the alternate means submitted and indicate specific methodology used for Architect review& approval. B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets with performance specifications demonstrating compliance with specified requirements, including: I.Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2.Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3.Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature and details for each product type specified. Details indicate materials, finishes, construction, and dimensions of individual components, profiles, and mounting requirements. 4.Submit test reports indicating compliance with fabric properties specified. C. Shop Drawings; include: 1.Provide head, jamb and sill details, and relevant dimensions for mounting requirements for each product type and mounting condition. 2.Provide shade schedule indicating room number, opening size(s), quantities and key to details. D. Selection Samples: For each finish product specified provide: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT#21085 122401 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 MANUAL ROLLER SHADES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1.Shade fabric swatches for verification purposes of fabric as indicated for color and texture specified. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: 1.The manufacturer, subsidiary, or licensed agent will be qualified to supply the products specified and to honor any claims against the product presented in accordance with the warranty. B. Installer Qualifications: Installer shall be qualified to install and commission the specified products by prior factory training, experience, demonstrated performance, and acceptance of any requirement of the manufacturer, subsidiary of the manufacturer, or licensed agent. C. Do not fabricate shades without obtaining field dimensions for each opening. Coordinate construction of surrounding conditions to allow for timely field dimension verification. D. Compliance with safety regulations including ANSI/WCMA A100.1 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Do not deliver items to the project until all plaster, painting and other wet work has been completed and is dry. B. Deliver shades to project in labeled protective packaging, uniquely labeled to identify each shade for each opening. Schedule delivery to prevent delays to completion of work but to minimize on-site storage time. C. Store materials in a dry, secure place. Protect from weather, surface contaminants, corrosion, construction traffic and all other potential damage. 1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain environmental conditions within recommended limits: I.Ambient operating temperature: 32-72 °F 2.Humidity: 0-90%,non-condensing. 3.Do not install products under environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits. 4.Products are intended for Indoor use only. B. Shade system shall not be installed until the building is operating at ambient temperature and humidity ranges that are consistent with those intended for eventual building occupancy & use. 1.08 COORDINATION A. Scheduling: I.Fabricate shades after obtaining field dimensions for each opening. 2.Coordinate construction of surrounding conditions to allow for timely field dimension verification. 3.Manufacturer's standard lead times apply. Reference submittal and schedule accordingly for project timeline. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Hardware and Shadecloth and all other components of manual shade system are Warranted for 25 years. B. In the event of a warranted product failure, the Shade Contractor will, at no cost to Owner, facilitate acquisition and delivery of all necessary components to the Owner. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT#21085 122401 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 MANUAL ROLLER SHADES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Basis of design: Quality, design, and desired function are based on Mecho / 5 by MechoSystems, Long Island City, NY (718)-729-2020. www.mechoshade.com B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Division 1. LAll proposed substitutions must be clearly delineated, and must be submitted in writing for approval by Architect a minimum of 10 working days prior to the bid date, and must be made available to all bidders. Proposed substitutes must be accompanied by a review of the specification noting compliance on a line-by-line basis. 2.02 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS A. Aesthetics 1.Symmetrical light gaps of no more than 0.75 inch typical or 0.625 inch minimum. 2.Shade mounting position can be adjusted while the shade is installed to ensure perfect shade centering. 2.03 SHADE BANDS A. Shade Bands: Construction of shade band includes the fabric, the enclosed hem weight, shade roller tube, and the attachment of the shade band to the roller tube. Sewn hems and open hem pockets are not acceptable. 1.Concealed Hembar: Shall be continuous extruded aluminum for entire width of shade band and with the following characteristics: a. Hembar shall be heat sealed on all sides. b. Open ends shall not be accepted. 2.Shade Band and Shade Roller Attachment: a. Use extruded aluminum shade roller tube of a diameter and wall thickness required to support shade fabric without excessive deflection. b. Provide for positive mechanical attachment of shade band to roller tube; shade band shall be made removable / replaceable with a "snap-on" snap-off' spline mounting, without having to remove shade roller from shade brackets. c. Mounting Spline shall not require use of adhesives, adhesive tapes, staples, and/or rivets. d. Any method of attaching shade band to roller tube that requires the use of. adhesive, adhesive tapes, staples, and/or rivets, does not meet the performance requirements of this specification and shall not be accepted. 2.04 ROLLER SHADE FABRICATION A. Fabricate shade cloth to hang flat without buckling or distortion. Fabricate with heat-sealed trimmed edges to hang straight without curling or raveling. Fabricate unguided shadecloth to roll true and straight without shifting sideways more than 1/8 inch (3.18 mm) in either direction per 8 feet(2438 mm) of shade height due to warp distortion or weave design. 2.05 ROLLER SHADE COMPONENTS A. Access and Material Requirements: 1.Provide shade hardware allowing for the removal of shade roller tube from brackets without removing hardware from opening and without requiring end or center supports to be removed. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT#21085 122401 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 MANUAL ROLLER SHADES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2.Provide shade hardware that allows for removal and re-mounting of the shade bands without having to remove the shade tube, drive or operating support brackets. B. Manual Operated Chain Drive Hardware and Brackets: 1.Provide for universal, regular and offset drive capacity, allowing drive chain to fall at front, rear or non-offset for all shade drive end brackets. Universal offset shall be adjustable for future change. 2.Provide hardware capable for installation of a removable fascia, for both regular and/or reverse roll,which shall be installed without exposed fastening devices of any kind. 3.Provide shade hardware system that allows for removable regular and/or reverse roll fascias to be mounted continuously across two or more shade bands without requiring exposed fasteners of any kind. 4.Provide shade hardware system that allows for operation of multiple shade bands (multi- banded shades) by a single chain operator, subject to manufacturer's design criteria. Connectors shall be offset to assure alignment from the first to the last shade band. 5.Provide shade hardware system that allows multi-banded manually operated shades to be capable of smooth operation when the axis is offset a maximum of 6 degrees on each side of the plane perpendicular to the radial line of the curve, for a 12 degrees total offset. 6.Provide positive mechanical engagement of drive mechanism to shade roller tube. Friction fit connectors for drive mechanism connection to shade roller tube are not acceptable. 7.Provide shade hardware constructed of minimum 1/8-inch(3.18 mm)thick plated steel or heavier as required to support 150 percent of the full weight of each shade. 8.Drive Bracket/Brake Assembly: a. MechoShade Drive Bracket model M5 shall be fully integrated with all MechoShade accessories, including, but not limited to: SnapLoc fascia, room darkening side / sill channels, center supports and connectors for multi-banded shades. b. M5 drive sprocket and brake assembly shall rotate and be supported on a welded 3/8 inch(9.525 mm) steel pin. c. The brake shall be an over running clutch design which disengages to 90 percent during the raising and lowering of a shade. The brake shall withstand a pull force of 50 lbs. (22 kg)in the stopped position. d. The braking mechanism shall be applied to an oil-impregnated hub on to which the brake system is mounted. The oil impregnated hub design includes an articulated brake assembly, which assures a smooth, non jerky operation in raising and lowering the shades. The assembly shall be permanently lubricated. Products that require externally applied lubrication and or not permanently lubricated are not acceptable. e. The entire M5 assembly shall be fully mounted on the steel support bracket, and fully independent of the shade tube assembly, which may be removed and reinstalled without effecting the roller shade limit adjustments. 9.Drive Chain: #10 qualified stainless steel chain rated to 90 lb. (41 kg)minimum breaking strength.Nickel plate chain shall not be accepted. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT#21085 122401 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 MANUAL ROLLER SHADES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2.06 ROLLER SHADE SCHEDULE A. Roller Shade Schedule: Refer to the Drawings for locations. 1.Manual operating, chain drive, sunscreen roller shades in all exterior windows of rooms and spaces shown on the Drawings. a. Shade pockets. 2.07 SHADECLOTH A. Visually Transparent Single-Fabric Shadecloth: EuroTwill® "6000" Series: 0.010 diameter (0.254 iron), Opaque, non-raveling vinyl/polyester yarn, fabric thickness 0.025 inches (0.635 mm). 1.Extra Dense Twill Weave"6000" series,2-3 percent open. 2.Color: 6006 "Silver Birch" 2.08 ROLLER SHADE ACCESSORIES A. Shade Pocket: For recessed mounting in acoustical tile or drywall ceilings as indicated on the drawings. I.Either extruded aluminum and or formed steel shade pocket, sized to accommodate roller shades, with exposed extruded aluminum closure mount, tile support and removable closure panel to provide access to shades. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Begin installation after substrates have been properly prepared. B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation. B. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by manufacturer for achieving the best result for the substrate under the project conditions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install shades in windows level and plumb to provide smooth operation. C. Install in accordance with manufacturer's product data and approved shop drawings. D. A factory-qualified technician shall perforin field measurement and installation. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust the level,projection, and shade centering directly from mounting bracket. B. Adjust fabric on tube if visibly telescoping. 3.05 CLEANING A. Touch up damaged finishes and repair minor damage in order to eliminate evidence of repair. Remove and replace work that cannot be satisfactorily repaired. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT#21085 122401 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 MANUAL ROLLER SHADES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Clean exposed surfaces, including metal and shade fabric, using non-abrasive materials and methods recommended by the shade fabric manufacturer. Remove and replace work that cannot be satisfactorily cleaned. 3.06 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate operation method and instruct owner's personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the window shade systems. B. Manufacturer's Instructions: I.Installation and Maintenance instructions to be included in product packaging. 2.24-Hour / 7-Day Factory Technical Support shall be available to aid with unforeseen installation difficulties. 3.07 PROTECTION A. Protect installed products until completion of project. B. Touch-up,repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion END OF SECTION 12 24 01 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 122401 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 MANUAL ROLLER SHADES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 14 24 21 - HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Work includes labor, equipment and services necessary to provide hydraulic passenger elevator for parking structure as shown on the drawings and as herein specified. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 26 Section: Electrical service with fused disconnect switches for elevator system,hoistway,pits and machinery rooms. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Acceptable Manufactures: Otis Elevator Company 11760 Hwy 1 Suite @600 Palm Beach Gardens, FL 33408 USA Phone: 281-906-8142. www.otis.com B. Installers Qualifications: 1. Manufacturer's representative or authorized agent of elevator equipment manufacturer. 2. Minimum of five years successful experience installing and maintaining elevators. Maintenance performed solely by Elevator Contractor and shall not be assigned or transferred to any agent or subcontractor. C. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: This work shall be done in strict accordance with the latest requirements of the following regulatory agencies: 1. National Electrical Code, &NFPA Codes. 2. American Standard Safety Code for Elevators, Dumb-waiters and Escalators, ANSI Al 7.1 latest edition. 3. Hoistway doors in accordance with Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., requirements for a 1-1/2 hour B label. 4. Any state and local codes which may govern the requirements of installation. D. Permits and Inspection: Contractor shall obtain and pay for necessary municipal or state inspections and permits and make such tests as required by such authorities. Tests are to be made in the presence of the authorized representative of such authorities. Contractor shall also register the elevator with State jurisdiction on behalf of the Owner and pay all registration fees. E. All operable components shall comply with the requirements of the ADA and T.A.S. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings: Contractor shall submit complete detailed shop drawings to the Architect for review prior to ordering of materials. Also include samples of exposed cab finishes and materials. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 14 24 21 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Operation Instructions: Provide maintenance manual to Owner's personnel including safety procedures, instructions on proper operation of all equipment, parts listing, recommended parts inventory,purchase source listing, copies of all certificates and permits. 1.05 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver all materials properly packaged and protected. Protect equipment and exposed finishes during transportation and erections against any damage and stains. B. Should the building or site not be prepared to receive the elevator equipment at the agreed upon date,the General Contractor will be responsible to provide a proper and suitable storage area on or off the premises. 1. Should the storage area be off-site and the equipment not yet delivered, then the elevator contractor, upon notification from the General Contractor, will divert the elevator equipment to the storage area. If the equipment has already been delivered to the site, then the General Contractor shall transport the elevator equipment to the storage area. The cost of elevator equipment taken to storage by either party, stoage and redeliver to the job site shall not be at the expense of the elevator contractor. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Contractor shall coordinate phasing of construction to accommodate installation of elevator. This shall include but not be limited to: providing a properly framed and enclosed legal hoistway, including guards during course of construction; construction of entrance partitions after doors and frames are in place; grouting of sills; installation of required inserts and all other accessory work as may be required. 1.07 TEMPORARY USE OF ELEVATORS A. If temporary use is required before final acceptance, elevator subcontractor shall provide such use subject to the following conditions: 1. Users shall furnish, if required, temporary car enclosures, guards or other protection for hoistway openings,main line switch with wiring, necessary power, signaling devices and lights in car. 2. Temporary acceptance form of elevator subcontractor signed before elevator is put in use. 3. User provides maintenance during period of temporary operation and shall return elevator to elevator subcontractor in same condition as when accepted for temporary service. 1.08 INITIAL MAINTENANCE AND WARRANTY A. Maintenance: For a period of 3 months following date of substantial completion,provide full maintenance of elevator work on a daily-surveillance basis. Correct operational faults and restore/replace defective/deteriorated components and finishes. Lubricate operational units and supply expendable materials as required for proper operations and maintenance. 24-hour call back service. B. Warranty: Provide special project warranty, signed by Contractor, Installer and Manufacturer, agreeing to replace/repair/restore defective materials and workmanship of elevator work during warranty period. "Defective" is hereby defined to include, but not by way of limitation, operation or control system failures, performances below required minimums, excessive wear, unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes, unsafe conditions, the need for excessive maintenance, abnormal noise or vibration, and similar unusual, unexpected and unsatisfactory conditions. 1. The warranty period is 12 months starting on date of substantial completion of elevator work. PART2-PRODUCTS FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 14 24 21 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2.01 MATERIALS-GENERAL A. Provide manufacturer's standard pre-engineered elevator systems which will comply with or fulfill these requirements or, at manufacturer's option, provide custom manufactured elevator systems which will fulfill requirements. Where components are not otherwise indicated, provide standard components, published by manufacturer as included in standard pre- engineered elevator systems, and as required for a complete system. B. Basis of Design: Otis Elevator Company 11760 Hwy 1 Suite @600 Palm Beach Gardens, FL 33408 USA Phone: 281-906-8142. www.otis.com 1. Type: Hydrofit: Machine Roomless Holeless hydraulic 2. Equipment Controm: Elevonic Control System. 3. Travel in feet: 14'-0". 4. Openings: 2 at Front, 0 at Rear. 5. Rated Capacity: 2100 lbs 6. Rated Speed: 125 fpm 7. Cab Height: 7' - 9" 8. Entrance Type and Width: Single Slide, 3; -0" 9. Entrance Height: 7' - 0" 10. Machine location: inside hoistway 11. Operation: Automatic. 12, Signals: Car lantern with audible tone, dual beam Saf-T-Ray Door Control, telephone compartment and trail cables. 13. Power supply: Per manufacturer's requirements. 14. Special provisions: Provide necessary handicap provisions in accordance with all code requirements. Ivey access only. 2.02 DETAILED CONSTRUCTION A. Machine Components 1. The hydraulic system shall be of compact design suitable for operation under the required pressure. The power component shall be mounted in the hydraulic-fluid storage tank. The control valve shall control flow for up and down directions hydraulically and shall include and integral check valve. A control section including control solenoids shall direct the main valve and control: up and down starting, acceleration, transition from full speed to leveling speed, up and down stops, pressure relief and manual lowering. All of these functions shall be fully adjustable for maximum smoothness and to meet contract conditions. System to be provided with a low-pressure switch and shut-off valve. The entire hydraulic system with hydraulic-fluid storage tank, power component and valves shall be located in the hoistway pit and be easily accessible for maintenance through and access door in the hoistway wall. 2. A microprocessor-based controller shall be provided, including necessary starting switches together will all relays, switches, solid-state components and hardware required for operation, including door operation, as described herein. A three (3) phase overload device shall be provided to protect the motor against overloading. The controller shall be located together with the hydraulic system in the hoistway pit and be easily accessible for maintenance through the same access door that is also used for the hydraulic system. 3. A manual lowering feature shall permit lowering the elevator at slow speed in the event of power failure or for adjusting purposes. 4. Pressure Switch. B. Hoistway Components 1. Plunger(s) and Cylinder(s): Each cylinder shall be constructed of steel pipe sufficient thickness and suitable fo the operating pressure. The top of each cylinder shall be equipped with a cylinder head with a drip ring to collect any oil seepage as well as an FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 14 24 21 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 internal guide ring and self-adjusting packing. Each plunger shall be constructed of selected steel tubing or pip of proper diameter machined true and smooth with a fine polished finish. Each plunger shall be provided with a stop ring electrically welded to it to prevent the plunger from leaving the cylinder. Each plunger and cylinder shall be installed plumb and shall operate freely with minimum friction. 2. Car Guide Rails: Tee-section steel rails with brackets and fasteners. 3. Polyurethane type butters shall be used. 4. Wiring: Wiring for hoistway electrical devices include in scope of the elevator system, hall panels,pit emergency stop switch, and traveling cable for the elevator car. C. Hoistway Entrances: 1. At each landing served, a complete entrance assembly furnished consisting of 1-1/2 hour UL metal doors with built-in hangar assembly, frames, extruded aluminum sills, fascia, toe guard, hangar cover, header, header track assembly and structural strut supports. Leading edge of doors provided with sight guards. 2. Finish of hoistway door and frames shall be stainless steel 3. Single speed, front opening 3'-0" x T-0" door. 4. 1/4" aluminum sill flush with floor surface. 5. Entrance Finish: Satin Stainless Steel D. Car Enclosure: 1. Provide for 1/8" LVT floor finish. 2. Finish of door,transom, front return and entrance column to be stainless steel 3. Flat stainless steel handrail provided on cab rear, satin finish. 4. LED perimeter lit ceiling in a real white (EWO)finish. 5. Door edge protective device. 6. Aluminum sills. E. Fixtures: 1. Car provided with manufacturer's standard flush mounted panel containing: bank of buttons corresponding to landings served; emergency call button; emergency stop button; door open button; telephone compartment; car light switch; car fan ventilating switch. Emergency call button connected to bell in hoistway. Landings shall be numbered 1 &2. Mount at height complying with T.A.S. 2. Hall Fixtures: Hall fixtures shall be provided with necessary push buttons and key switches for elevator operation. Integral Hall fixtures shall feature round staineless steel, mechanical buttons marked to correspond to the landings. Hall fixtures to be located in the entrance jamb. Therefore, separate wiring and installation of electrical boxes inside the wall for the hall buttons are not required. Buttons shall be vertically mounted fixtre. Fixture shall be Satin Stainless steel. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Prior to beginning installation work, this contractor shall examine job conditions to verify that no irregularities exist that would affect the proper installation of elevators and equipment. if any discrepancies are found, this contractor shall notify the Contractor so that corrective actions may be taken. Installation constitutes acceptance of job conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Elevators shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's shop drawings and written instructions and in accordance with ANSI A17.1 - latest edition. Install machine room equipment with clearances complying with ANSI Cl - latest edition. Items installed so that easy removal for maintenance and servicing can be made. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 14 24 21 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Provide all personnel, equipment and instruments required for inspection and testing. Any defects or non-conformance found shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. C. All finished surfaces such as door frames, doors, elevator cab interiors shall be properly protected and maintained until just prior to final acceptance. Prior to final acceptance, all protective materials must be removed and finished surfaces completely cleaned. D. Mount rotating and vibrating elevator equipment and components on vibration absorption mounts designed to effectively prevent transmission of noise and vibrations to structure. 3.03 ADJUSTMENT A. Elevator contractor shall adjust all operable mechanisms and safety devices so that cars stop within maximum tolerance of 1/4" of finished floor. Lubricate all equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Elevators must be properly adjusted to the Owner's satisfaction before final acceptance will be given. END OF SECTION 14 24 21 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 14 24 21 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 21 00 00 - FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. General Conditions: Refer to the General Conditions, the Supplementary General Conditions and the Special Conditions, all provisions of which apply to work under this section as if written in full herein. B. The scope of work described in these Specifications and/or indicated on the Drawings shall include (except where otherwise noted) the furnishing of all materials, equipment, appurtenances, accessories, connections, labor, etc. required and/or necessary to completely install, clean, inspect, adjust, test, balance and leave in safe and proper operating condition all systems. All work shall be accomplished by workmen skilled in the various trades involved. C. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary to each other and what is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. If a discrepancy exists between the Drawing and Specifications, the higher cost shall be included, and the Architect shall be notified of the discrepancy. 1.02 SYSTEMS A. Systems to be provided under the Fire Protection design section shall be as listed below. The connection point to the site utility service for the fire protection system shall be at 5'- 0" from the exterior of the building unless specifically otherwise noted. 1. Automatic Sprinkler Systems 2. Combination Standpipe/Automatic Sprinkler Risers 3. Automatic Dry Sprinkler Systems 4. Pre-action Sprinkler Systems 5. Fire Department Valve Cabinets 6. Painting of exposed piping 7. ESFR Sprinkler Systems 1.03 QUALIFICATION OF CONTRACTORS A. The Contractor for the fire protection installation shall be a certified fire protection contractor, licensed for the installation of automatic fire sprinkler systems and other fire protection equipment. 1.04 DESIGN STANDARDS A. Fire Protection systems shall be designed and installed in accordance with the requirements of the following codes, standards and design guides: FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 21 0000-1 May 2, 2023 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. The International Fire Prevention Code, 20xx Edition, with most current Amendments 2. The International Building Code, 20xx Edition, with most current Amendments 3. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA) Standards: a. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code-20xx Edition b. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems - 20xx Edition C. NFPA 14- Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems-20xx Edition d. NFPA 20-Installation of Centrifugal Fire Pumps- 20xx Edition e. NFPA 24-Installation of Private Fire Service Mains- 20xx Edition f. NFPA 25 - Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-based Fire Protection Systems- 20xx edition 4. Factory Mutual(FM)Approval Guide 5. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 6. Owner's Insurance Underwriter Requirements B. Design Criteria 1. Upon award of the Contract, a new flow test from the two (2)hydrants nearest the site service entry is to be performed by the Contractor to confirm the flow and pressure characteristics of the existing water service. The completed flow test data along with a utility service map of the area is to be forwarded to the Engineer for confirmation of the existing water service. 2. The entire facility will be protected by an automatic sprinkler system supplied by combination fire standpipe/automatic sprinkler systems located within the building stairwells. 3. Automatic sprinkler systems shall be designed to the available domestic water pressure available and shall be hydraulically calculated for the following design standards: a. NFPA 13 Systems Hazard Density Maximum Interior Classificatio GPM/Sq. Remote Head Hose Area/Usage n Ft. Area Spacing Stream Public Spaces, Lobbies, Light .10 1,500 sq. ft. 225 sq. ft. 100 gpm Corridors, Offices, Restaurants, Lounges, Meeting Rooms and Sleeping Rooms Mechanical Rooms, Ordinary .15 1,500 sq. ft. 130 sq. ft. 250 gpm Electrical Rooms, Elevator Group 1 Equipment Rooms, Maintenance/Storage Rooms, Kitchen/Food Service Areas and Laundry Ballrooms, exterior loading Ordinary .20 1,500 sq. ft. 130 sq. ft. 250 gpm docks see NFPA 13-A5.3.2 Group 2 Dry Pipe Systems: Ordinary .15 1,950 sq. ft. 130 sq. ft. 250 gpm Group 1 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 21 0000-2 May 2, 2023 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Porte Cochere and other spaces containing sprinkler piping that do not have alternate provisions to guarantee a 40°F temperature. 4. The fire protection systems shall not be designed to operate if the residual pressure of the existing water service falls to 20 psi or lower at design flow requirements. 5. The fire protection system design shall include a minimum of 10 psi safety factor to allow for future losses in the water service pressure characteristics. 6. The maximum allowable system velocities shall not exceed 20 fps unless alternate criteria are required by the Owner's Insurance Underwriter. 7. The Sleeping Rooms automatic sprinkler design criteria may be hydraulically calculated for the room design method as outlined in NFPA 13 if acceptable to the local governing authorities and the Owner's Insurance Underwriter. 8. Sleeping Rooms automatic shall be completely protected by automatic sprinklers. 9. Reasonable efforts shall be made to identify water supplies that could lead to microbial induced corrosion(MIC). When conditions are found that may result in MIC contamination of the fire protection piping, corrective measures shall be designed. C. Fire Protection System Alarms 1. The fire protection contractor shall coordinate location and function of all flow,air pressure, supervisory switches, and other dry contacts with the fire alarm contractor. 2. All control valves in the fire protection system shall be provided with supervisory switches wired for annunciation at the main FACP. 3. Automatic sprinkler system connections shall be provided with flow switches adjacent to the zone control valve wired for annunciation at the main FACP. 4. Automatic sprinklers will be provided in all elevator shafts and elevator machine rooms as required. The service to each of these spaces shall be provided with an individual control valve with a supervisory switch and a flow switch (with no retard built into it) located in an adjacent room and wired for annunciation at the main Fire Alarm Control Panel(FACP). 1.05 ORDINANCES,PERMITS AND DRAWING APPROVALS A. The Contractor shall file all requisite plans relating to this section of the specifications with the proper authorities, secure all permits and approvals and pay all resultant fees for work done under this section. B. All fire protection work shall comply with all laws, ordinances, rules, regulations and standards of the City, County, State and the Owner's Insurance Underwriter; all applicable sections of the National Fire Codes and the Codes and Standards of the National Fire Protection Association. C. If code or other requirements exceed the provisions shown on the Contract Documents,the Architect shall be notified in writing. Where requirements of the Contract Documents FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 21 0000-3 May 2, 2023 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 exceed Code requirements, work shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any work done contrary to these requirements shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 1.06 EQUIPMENT,MATERIALS,BID BASIS A. Manufacturers' names, model numbers, etc. as specified on the Drawings and herein are for the purpose of describing type, capacity, function and quality of equipment and materials required. B. Unless"approved equal"is specifically stated,bids shall be based on equipment named in the Specifications or on the Drawings as"base"products. C. "Equal product" and "approved equal" items listed shall conform to specified base items and shall be substantially equal in size, weight, construction quality and capacities. The alternate equipment and materials shall be submitted as full equivalent to the equipment and materials specified, with sufficient supportive documentation and technical literature to demonstrate quality,performance, and workmanship without doubt or question. D. The Contractor shall coordinate the installation of all fire protection equipment proposed for use in this project with all building trades (architectural, structural and electrical). Coordination shall be accomplished prior to,and shall be reflected in,the submittal of shop drawings for approval. Any modifications or revisions required by other trades as a result of the use of equipment other than the basis of design shall be made at no additional cost. 1.07 EXAMINATION OF EXISTING PREMISES A. Prior to the ordering or purchasing of any equipment or materials or the layout or installation of any work, the Contractor shall examine the premises and verify any and all of the existing conditions under which he will be obliged to operate, or that will in any manner affect the work under this Contract. No allowance will be made subsequently in this connection in behalf of the Contractor. 1.08 PAINTING A. All piping exposed to public sight such as standpipe and drain piping in stairwells, or exposed to exterior or moisture conditions such as piping in parking decks, shall be primed and painted with two coats of an enamel-based paint. The color shall be as directed by the Architect. B. Contractor shall touch-up to match original finish any equipment scratched in shipment or installation. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 21 0000-4 May 2, 2023 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1.09 TRANSPORTATION,DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all transportation, delivery, and storage required for all equipment and materials. Upon receipt of all equipment and materials,they shall be properly stored in their original shipping container to protect them from vandalism, theft, the elements, and other harm or damage. Any equipment or materials received in a damaged condition, or damaged after receipt, shall not be installed. Only new undamaged equipment in first-class operating condition shall be installed. B. All equipment and piping shall be protected to prevent entrance of foreign matter and debris by covering exposed openings during construction. C. The Contractor shall closely coordinate the ordering and delivery of all mechanical equipment with other trades to assure that equipment will be delivered in time to be installed in the building without requiring special or temporary access or building modifications. Certain equipment may have to be installed prior to the erection of the building walls or roofs. 1.10 GUARANTY A. All fire protection work described in the Contract Documents shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance. This guaranty shall apply to all equipment, materials and workmanship. During the guaranty period, all defects shall be corrected in an acceptable manner, consistent with the quality of materials and workmanship of original construction, at no expense to the Owner. 1.11 SHOP DRAWINGS A. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate the design with the work of all other disciplines so as to avoid conflicts. Where necessary piping shall be offset around ducts, structural members or other obstructions, while maintaining effective coverage, drains shall be provided per NFPA requirements. B. Review of the Drawings and hydraulic calculations by Jordan & Skala Engineers, Inc. (JSE) is for coordination with the design concept for the project, and for assurance that they have been prepared in a timely manner. JSE is entitled to rely on the technical sufficiency and timely delivery of these documents, as well as on the computations performed by the subcontractor. JSE shall not be required to review or verify those computations or designs for compliance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, building codes, and rules and regulations. C. All required submittals shall be transmitted electronically (e.g. pdfs, etc.) with the associated specification section and the item submitted clearly identified. The Contractor shall provide an itemized listing,which indicates the horsepower and voltage of each piece of equipment that requires electrical service. The itemized list is to be signed by the project managers of the Contractor, Electrical Contractor and General Contractor to ensure coordination of the electrical requirements for the project. Review of the equipment submittal will not begin until the electrical coordination document is provided. D. All fire protection drawing submittals shall be at 1/8" scale as a minimum. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 21 0000-5 May 2, 2023 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. Fire Protection shop drawings shall include all data required by NFPA Section 13. Shop drawing plans shall indicate all lights, grilles, soffits, alarms, speakers and other ceiling components, as well as hydraulic node points, to ensure coordination. Substitutions or alterations to the design included in the Contract Documents shall be clearly stated on the shop drawing submittal. The Contractor shall submit shop drawings to and secure approval of the Owner's Underwriter, local authority and/or state authorities prior to submission to the Engineer. The Contractor shall not commence work,purchase,or provide any materials to the job site without obtaining shop drawing approval. Shop drawings shall include copies of all hydraulic calculations providing design densities, where applicable. In addition, shop drawings submittals shall include printed catalog specifications and data sheets for all of the following as applicable: 1. Fire department valves 2. Sprinkler heads and accessories 3. Siamese Fire Department connection 4. Fire valve cabinets 5. Backflow preventer F. A letter signed by an officer of the Contractor's company shall be included in the submittal book that states the following items meet or exceed the requirements of the specifications: I. Pipe and fittings 2. Valves 3. Pipe supports 4. Pipe accessories 5. Pipe labels and valve tags 6. Flow switches 7. Tamper switches G. All design drawings and calculations prepared by the Contractor shall bear the seal of a registered professional or fire protection engineer or NICET Level IV certification licensed in the state of the project or equivalent fire sprinkler contractor's certificate seal. H. Included with submittals of fire protection equipment requiring electrical connections shall be a written statement confirming coordination of voltage requirements,bearing the names and signatures of the fire protection and electrical contractors. A photocopied reproduction of the below statement is acceptable. VOLTAGE COORDINATION STATEMENT This statement is to confirm that the voltages of the equipment provided under this specification have been coordinated with the electrical drawings, as well as with the electrical contractor. Fire Protection Contractor: Project Manager Name: Project Manager Signature/Date: FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 21 0000-6 May 2, 2023 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Electrical Contractor: Project Manager Name: Project Manager Signature/Date: I. Provide Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) or letter from manufacturer certifying the VOC content for each adhesive, sealant,paint and coating. J. VOC Content: Submit adhesive and sealants product information or MSDS showing VOC Content information for all applicable products specified under this section. All applicable products in this section must meet low VOC content as specified by LEED Specification Section 01 81 13 Sustainable Design Requirements. 1.12 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall maintain a record set of drawings indicating all changes in the work from that shown in the Contract Documents. Prior to final acceptance by the Owner, the Contractor shall assemble the complete set of as-built drawings that accurately reflects all changes to indicate actual final construction. All concealed piping shall be dimensionally located from at least two(2)column lines or major building structure elements. Drawings shall be a minimum of 1/8" scale. B. The original set of"as-built"drawings shall be scanned and transmitted to the Architect in CD or flash drive format along with the original"as-built" documents. 1.13 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Prior to final acceptance by the Owner, the Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of an Operations and Maintenance Manual, Bound, indexed, and titled in three-ring, loose-leaf binders and one flash drive. These manuals shall each contain the following: 1. Clear and concise instructions for operation,maintenance,adjustment,lubrication, wiring diagrams and trouble-shooting data for all mechanical equipment. This information shall be prepared by the manufacturer for particular size and model of equipment furnished. 2. Parts list of all parts for equipment,with catalog numbers and other data necessary for ordering of replacement parts. 3. Provide a competent manufacturer's service engineer for a minimum of two (2) days to instruct the operating personnel including the interpretation of all equipment diagrams. A diary of the training sessions shall be made by the instructing manufacturer's service engineer and witnessed by the Owner's representative and shall be included in the as-built submittal. 4. Copies of all approved equipment shop drawings, sprinkler layout drawings, hydraulic calculations and as-built plans shall be submitted with the Operation and Maintenance manual. 5. Index shall include type of equipment,manufacturer, and local representative with address and phone number. PART 2-PRODUCTS FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 21 0000-7 May 2, 2023 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2.01 FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM MATERIALS A. All materials, pipe, valves and equipment furnished under this section shall be new and approved by NFPA, Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL), Factory Mutual (FM) and American Water Works Association(AWWA) where applicable. B. The proposal submitted shall include all materials and equipment as specified or shown on the Drawings. Proposed substitutions with difference in price, if any, shall be listed separately on the bid form at the time of submittal. C. Required materials not covered by the detailed specifications shall be of a suitable class, grade and type and shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Where two or more units of the same class or type of equipment are required, these units shall be the products of a single manufacturer. 2.02 PIPE,JOINTS AND FITTINGS A. Underground Piping 1. Class 50 and 51 ductile iron pipe,bituminous coated outside,cement lined interior, ANSI A21.51 and A21.4 a. Push-on or mechanical joints with neoprene gasket, 250 psi rating, ANSI A21.11 b. Ductile iron mechanical joint fittings with neoprene gasket, bituminous coated outside, cement lined interior, 250 psi rating,ANSI A21.10 C. Ductile iron flanged joints for all piping in vaults,red rubber gaskets,250 psi rating, ANSI A21.15. Cadmium plated heavy hex machine bolts and nuts with bituminous coating field applied. 2. Class 150 polyvinyl chloride(PVC)DR 18 pressure pipe,NSF and Factory Mutual approved,AWWA C900 a. Push-on or mechanical joints with neoprene gasket, ASTM D3139 and ANSI A21.11 b. Ductile iron mechanical joint fittings with neoprene gasket, bituminous coated outside, cement lined interior, 250 psi rating,ANSI A21.10 C. Ductile iron flanged joints for all piping in vaults,red rubber gaskets, 250 psi rating, ANSI A21.15. Cadmium plated heavy hex machine bolts and nuts with bituminous coating field applied. 3. Underground piping and installation shall be in accordance with the Insurance Underwriter's requirements and NFPA-24 and shall be installed with a minimum of 2'-6" of cover. a. Trenching conditions for ductile iron pipe shall be Type 1 laying condition,ANSI A21.50. b. Trenching conditions for PVC pipe shall be Class C bedding, ASCE Manual#37, and manufacturer's recommendations. B. Aboveground Piping 1. Schedule 40 welded or seamless steel pipe, ASTM A53 and A135, and A795. In accordance with NFPA 13, piping with threaded joints 6" and smaller shall be FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 21 0000-8 May 2, 2023 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Schedule 40,piping 8" and larger may be Schedule 30 minimum. For welded or roll-grooved joints,wall thickness shall be Schedule 7 minimum for piping 4" and smaller, 0.134" for 6"pipe, and 0.188 for 8" and 10" pipe. Schedule 80 pipe shall be used when working pressures exceed 300 psi. a. Class 125 and 250 cast iron threaded fittings, ANSI B16.4 b. Class 150 and 300 malleable iron threaded fittings,ANSI B16.3 C. Class 125 and 250 cast iron flanged fittings, ANSI B16.1 d. Schedule 40, 150 psi,forged steel buttweld fittings, ANSI B16.9 e. Grooved mechanical couplings and fittings with EPDM center-leg gasket, ductile iron, 300 psi minimum rating ASTM A536, UL Listed, FM Approved 1) In applicable sizes, fittings shall be short-pattern,with flow equal to standard pattern fittings.Basis of Design:Victaulic FireLock or approved equal. 2) Installation-ReadyTM fittings for Schedule [40] [10] grooved end steel piping in fire protection applications sizes NPS 1-'/4 thru 2'/z.Fittings shall consist of a ductile iron housing conforming to ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12, with Installation-ReadyTM ends, [orange enamel coated] [red enamel coated] [galvanized]. Fittings complete with prelubricated Grade"E"EPDM Type `A' gasket; and ASTM A449 electroplated steel bolts and nuts. System shall be UL listed for a working pressure of 300 psi and FM approved for working pressure 365 psi. f. All cutting oils, thread sealants and other products must be compatible with the CPVC piping installed. 2. Schedule 10 minimum lightwall welded or seamless steel pipe with corrosion resistant coating, CRR Value of I minimum, ASTM A53 and A135 a. Grooved mechanical couplings and fittings with EPDM center-leg gasket, ductile iron, 300 psi minimum rating ASTM A536, UL Listed, FM Approved 1) In applicable sizes, fittings shall be short-pattern, with flow equal to standard pattern fittings. Basis of Design: Victaulic FireLock or approved equal. 2) Installation-ReadyTM fittings for Schedule [40] [10] grooved end steel piping in fire protection applications sizes NPS 1-'/4 thru 2'/Z. Fittings shall consist of a ductile iron housing conforming to ASTM A-536,Grade 65-45-12, with Installation-ReadyTM ends, [orange enamel coated] [red enamel coated] [galvanized]. Fittings complete with prelubricated Grade "E" EPDM Type `A' gasket; and ASTM A449 electroplated steel bolts and nuts. System shall be UL listed for a working pressure of 300 psi and FM approved for working pressure 365 psi. b. Lightwall, 150 psi,buttweld fittings,ANSI B16.9 3. Dry Systems a. Schedule 40 welded or seamless internally and externally galvanized steel pipe,ASTM A53 and A135. b. Schedule 10 minimum lightwall welded or seamless steel pipe with corrosion resistant coating, CRR Value of 1 minimum, ASTM A53 and A135 may be considered as a deductive alternate. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 21 0000-9 May 2, 2023 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Class 150 and 300 internally and externally galvanized malleable iron threaded fittings,ANSI B.16.3 d. Grooved mechanical couplings and fittings with EPDM flush gap or center-leg gasket,galvanized ductile iron, 800 psi minimum rating,ASTM A536,UL Listed,FM Approved e. Provide chromium plated zinc or other approved corrosion prohibitant at all non-galvanized pipe threads, bolts and other areas to maintain the integrity of the galvanized system. 1) In applicable sizes, fittings shall be short-pattern, with flow equal to standard pattern fittings. Basis of Design: Victaulic FireLock or approved equal. 2) Installation-ReadyTM fittings for Schedule [40] [10] grooved end steel piping in fire protection applications sizes NPS 1-1/4 thru 2'/z. Fittings shall consist of a ductile iron housing conforming to ASTM A-536,Grade 65-45-12, with Installation-ReadyTm ends, [orange enamel coated] [red enamel coated] [galvanized]. Fittings complete with prelubricated Grade "E" EPDM Type `A' gasket; and ASTM A449 electroplated steel bolts and nuts. System shall be UL listed for a working pressure of 300 psi and FM approved for working pressure 365 psi. 4. Flexible stainless-steel piping connection, UL Listed and FM Approved, I" NPS corrugated braided stainless-steel hose assembly,a bend radius to 2",UL Listed to 175 psi rating and FM Approved to 200 psi. a. Victaulic Vic-Flex Series or approved equal. C. All interior sprinkler piping shall meet the requirements of applicable sections of NFPA, and the Owner's Underwriter. All pipe, fittings,valves, and sprinkler system components shall be rated for working pressures as required by system design. D. Grooved Joint Couplings: Couplings consist of two ductile iron housing segments,pressure responsive elastomer gasket, and ASTM A449 compliant bolts and nuts. 1. Rigid Type: Housings cast with offsetting, angle-pattern, bolt pads to provide system rigidity and support and hanging in accordance with NFPA-13, fully installed at visual pad-to-pad offset contact.(Couplings that require exact gapping at specific torque ratings are not permitted.). Installation-Ready for complete installation without field disassembly.Basis of Design: Victaulic Style 009N and 107N or approved equal. 2. Flexible Type: For use in locations where vibration attenuation and stress relief are required: Basis of Design: Victaulic Installation-Ready Style 177 or Style 77 or approved equal. E. All pipe, supports and hanger assemblies shall be in accordance with NFPA-13 and shall be UL Listed or FM Approved. F. All sprinkler hangers and support rods installed in areas exposed to exterior conditions, including parking decks, are to be fully galvanized or painted with two coats of Adsil Microguard corrosion prohibitor. G. A remote inspector's test assembly is to be provided at the most remote point of each zone at the lower levels. The guest tower test assemblies are to discharge to the sprinkler drain risers adjacent to the standpipes. Coordinate required drain locations for the lower level FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 21 0000-10 May 2, 2023 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 test assemblies with the plumbing contractor prior to shop drawing submittals. Drains at grade level may be hard piped for discharge at the exterior subject to approval of the location during the submittal review. 2.03 VALVES AND ACCESSORIES A. Valves shall be installed where shown on the Drawings and elsewhere as required by codes or standards. All valves shall be UL Listed or FM Approved for fire protection service. All valves shall be provided with remote alarm tamper switches compatible with the Owner's central alarm system to monitor valve tampering. All switches and systems shall be Class B supervised. Provide 250 and 300 psi rated components at all locations as required by system pressure. 1. Gate Valves a. 2-1/2" and larger, Class 175 or 300, iron body, bronze mounted, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke, flanged or grooved ends, Stockham G- 634 or F-670,or Victaulic Series 771 rated to 250 psi listed for fire service b. 2" and smaller, Class 175, bronze body and trim, solid wedge, outside screw and yoke,threaded ends, Stockham B-133 C. Provide UL Listed pressure regulating valves at all locations required due to system pressure. Valves shall be Potter Roemer Series 4000 or approved equal. 2. Butterfly Valves a. 2"through 12",300-psi,grooved-end ductile iron body,electroless-nickel coated ductile iron disc,pressure responsive elastomer seat,with stainless steel stem. (Stem shall be offset from the disc centerline to provide complete 360-degree circumferential seating.) Weatherproof actuator housing with handwheel and supervisory switches. Valve shall be Victaulic Series 705. b. 4" and larger, Class 175, iron body, aluminum bronze disc, wafer or lug style, EPDM gasket, Stockham LG-52U C. 2" and smaller, Class 175,bronze body, stainless steel disc threaded ends, Milwaukee BB-FP 3. Check Valves a. 2-1/2" and larger, Class 125, iron body, bronze disc, flanged or threaded ends, Stockham G-931 and G-927 b. 2-1/2" and larger, Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, flanged ends, Milwaukee 1800 series, flanged, UL Listed for fire service C. 2" through 12", 250-psi, grooved-end ductile iron body, stainless steel spring and shaft for vertical or horizontal installation. Valves shall be Victaulic Series 717. d. 4" and larger, Mission fig. U-12 HMP, wafer body, UL Listed for fire service 4. Backflow Preventers a. Double check assembly shall be a complete assembly with two (2) independently operating check valves mounted in a common body, two (2)gate valves and four(4)test cocks,designed for horizontal installation. All valves shall be provided with tamper switches. The complete assembly shall be UL Listed, FM Approved, designed to specifications FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 21 00 00-1 1 May 2, 2023 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 and/or requirements of USC,CCCL,AWWA and ASSE and shall be sized for the full fire flow demand at a maximum of 6 psi pressure drop. 1) Double check backflow preventers shall be ASSE 1015 certified and equal to Ames Maxim M200,Watts Series 757,Zurn 350A or approved equal. 2) Double detector check backflow preventers shall be provided where required by local authorities, ASSE 1048 certified and equal to Ames Maxim M300, Watts Series 757DCDA, Zurn 350DA or approved equal. 5. Fire Department Valves a. Fire Department valve shall be 2-1/2" cast brass body, 300 lb. rating, female N.P.T.inlet,male hose thread outlet, complete with cap and chain, brass finish. Valve shall be Potter Roemer Fig. 4065 or approved equal. b. Provide UL Listed pressure regulating valves at all locations as required by system pressure. Valve shall be Potter Roemer 4000 Series or approved equal. 6. Floor Control Valve a. The floor control valve assembly shall be provided with a valve with supervisory switch. A check valve,pressure gauge,water flow switch and test connection with drain shall be provided downstream. The installation shall be per NFPA 13 requirements. b. Provide UL Listed pressure regulating valves at all locations as required by system pressure. Valve shall be Potter Roemer 4000 Series or approved equal. 7. Siamese Fire Department Connection a. Fire department connection shall be 2-way exposed Siamese type, 2-1/2" x 2-1/2" x 4" size, cast brass body,polished chrome finish for all exposed surfaces, cast brass escutcheon, and brass female hose inlets having individual clapper valves, plugs, and chains. Assembly shall be located with the center line of the hose inlets at 2'-6" above adjacent grade. Inlet threading shall be National Standard or same as municipal fire department, as required. Assembly shall be UL Listed,FM Approved. Wall Mounted: Potter Roemer 5710 series or approved equal. b. Free Standing: Potter Roemer 5760 series or approved equal. C. At the low point near each fire department connection, install a 90- degree elbow with drain connection to allow for localized system drainage. Basis of Design: Victaulic#10-DR. 8. Fire Valve Cabinet a. Cabinet shall be 20-gauge steel with polyester coating,recessed with flush full metal hinged door with cam catch and integral shelf for fire extinguisher. Cabinet shall be Potter-Roemer 1870 series or approved equal. 2.04 AUTOMATIC SPRINKLER SYSTEM MATERIALS A. The underground fire protection service shall be provided with thrust blocks and rods and clamps at the service entry. B. Automatic sprinklers shall be provided as follows: FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 21 00 00-1 2 May 2, 2023 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Sleeping Rooms a. Fully flat plate concealed pendent and sidewall sprinklers shall be provided in all areas with ceilings unless otherwise noted. Temperature rating of sprinklers shall be 155 - 165 degrees. Concealed cover plate to be white finish. Sprinkler to be Viking Freedom Residential series or equal with listed and/or approved concealed cover plate. 2. Sleeping Room Corridors a. Fully flat plate concealed pendent and sidewall sprinklers shall be provided in all areas with ceilings unless otherwise noted. Temperature rating of sprinklers shall be 155 - 165 degrees. Concealed cover plate to be white finish. Sprinkler to be Viking Freedom Residential series or equal 3. Public Spaces and Corridors with Gypsum Ceilings a. Fully flat plate concealed type sprinklers, glass element, or fusible link style, quick response sprinklers shall be provided in all areas with gypsum ceilings unless otherwise noted. Temperature rating of sprinklers shall be 155— 165 degrees. Concealed cover plate shall be factory painted to match the adjacent ceiling color; submit painted sample to the Architect for approval. Sprinkler to be Viking Mirage or equal concealed sprinkler or approved equal. 4. Public and Back-of-House Spaces with Lay-in Ceilings a. Small frame glass element, semi-recessed, quick response pendent sprinklers shall be provided in all areas with lay-in ceilings unless otherwise noted. Temperature rating of sprinklers shall be 155 — 165 degrees. Sprinkler and escutcheon to be white painted finish. Sprinkler to be Viking Microfast series or equal with listed and/or approved semi- recessed escutcheon. 5. Back-of-House Spaces and Unfinished Spaces with no Ceiling a. Quick response upright pendent sprinklers shall be provided in all areas with no ceiling. Temperature rating is to be 165 degrees unless conditions require higher temperature. Finish of sprinkler to be rough brass. Sprinkler to be Viking Microfast or equal. 6. Areas Exposed to Exterior Conditions a. Quick response upright sprinklers shall be provided in areas exposed to exterior conditions,supplied from the dry pipe system. All sprinklers shall have UL Listed ENT, polyester or Teflon corrosion protection. Temperature rating is to be 165 degrees unless conditions require higher temperature. Sprinkler to be Viking Microfast or equal. 7. Exterior Overhangs a. Quick response chrome plated dry horizontal sidewall or upright sprinklers are to be provided. Barrel length shall be a minimum of 12". Sprinkler and escutcheon shall have UL Listed ENT, polyester or Teflon corrosion protection at exterior overhangs and rough brass finish at elevator shafts. Sprinkler shall be Viking Microfast or equal. 8. Interstitial Spaces a. Combustible interstitial (concealed) spaces (i.e. between floors as well as low pitch attics that meet NFPA's definition of such spaces shall be protected by sprinklers designed for use in these areas per the manufacturer's data pages. All sprinklers shall be UL Listed specifically listed for use in Light Hazard combustible and non-combustible concealed FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 21 0000-13 May 2, 2023 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 spaces with extended coverage listings for spacing up to 16' x 16'. Sprinklers shall be listed for use with wet pipe systems using steel or any listed CPVC pipe, or dry pipe system using steel pipe. QR combustible concealed space sprinklers shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's guidelines. Sprinkler shall be Viking COIN quick response upright sprinklers (specific application) VK950. 9. Alternate acceptable manufacturers with equivalent sprinkler are Victaulic, Reliable, or Globe. 10. Sprinkler guards shall be installed on all sprinklers T-0" or less above floor. 11. Escutcheons and guards shall be listed, supplied, and approved for use with the sprinkler by the sprinkler manufacturer. 12. Provide sprinklers at the highest and lowest level of all stairwells. 13. Provide sprinklers in electrical rooms and elevator machine rooms unless specifically prohibited by local authorities;the sprinkler supply to each space shall be provided with a supervised valve and flow switch. Coordinate the intermediate temperature rating of the sprinkler head in all elevator machine rooms with the electrical contractor to ensure sprinkler operation will not occur prior to activation of the heat detector and the shunt trip circuit breaker. 14. Sidewall sprinklers shall be installed in all electrical rooms, electrical closets and elevator machine rooms where adequate coverage is provided. Upright sprinklers shall be installed in these spaces when coverage limitations of the sidewall sprinklers are exceeded. Piping shall not be installed above any electrical equipment,switchboard or panelboard. Piping shall offset around surface mounted light fixtures where possible,provide a minimum of 6"clearance below the bottom of the light fixtures at all locations. 15. The property is to be fully sprinklered throughout per the requirements of NFPA unless specifically noted otherwise. Elimination of sprinklers in electrical rooms, elevator shafts and elevator machine rooms shall be clearly indicated on the shop drawing submittal noting the exception applied for the deletion of sprinklers in these spaces. 16. The Contractor shall furnish and install a cabinet located in the fire service entry room with the quantity of each type of sprinklers and wrenches as required by NFPA 13: a. facilities with less than 300 sprinklers 6 minimum b. facilities with 300 to 1000 sprinklers 12 minimum C. facilities with over 1000 sprinklers 24 minimum 17. The Contractor shall provide and place suitable signs indicating the purpose of each control valve,test connection,main and auxiliary drain, etc., as required. 18. Provide 286 degrees intermediate temperature ENT or stainless steel pendent sprinklers in steam rooms and saunas. Sprinklers shall be Viking Microfast or equal. 19. Provide higher intermediate temperature rated sprinklers in all areas required due to service conditions and as required by NFPA 13. 20. Provide sprinklers at the top floor and on alternating floors below in all linen and trash chutes. 21. Provide sprinkler connections to all required food service hood suppression systems. 2.05 DRY SPRINKLER SYSTEMS FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 21 0000-14 May 2, 2023 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all specialty valves,pipe and equipment as required for the systems. The systems shall be complete with dry pipe valve, air compressor, accelerator, maintenance pressure compressor and associated trim and wired for interconnection to all required accessories,heat/smoke detectors,pressure switches,etc. as required. B. Pad-mounted storage tank/air compressors assemblies and riser-mounted air compressors shall be sized, furnished and installed as an integral part of the dry pipe sprinkler system and shall meet all requirements of NFPA. C. Should wet pipe systems in non-heated spaces be substituted for dry sprinkler systems as designed, the contractor is responsible for adding heat tracing, including all required electrical, insulation, supervision, etc. Substitutions or alterations to the original design shall be clearly stated on shop drawing submittals. 2.06 HEAT TRACING CABLE FOR FREEZE PROTECTION OF PIPING A. Provide pipe insulation with water proof covering and listed electric heat tracing cable on all fire protection standpipe, cross main, feed main and branch piping located within areas exposed to temperatures below 40° F and as indicated on the Contract Documents. B. Provide a complete UL Listed or FM Approved system of self-regulating heating cables, pipe insulation, controllers and components to maintain exposed fire protection piping at or above 40°F. C. Electric heat cable shall be installed linearly along the bottom of the pipe and allowance shall be made for all fittings, valves, pipe supports, etc. Cable shall be installed prior to insulation of the piping system. D. Electric cable shall be capable of maintaining a minimum water temperature of 40 degrees F at an ambient air temperature of 0 degrees F. E. The electric cable shall be the self-regulating type that responds to varying localized temperature conditions by varying the heat output along its length. This shall be accomplished by a self-regulating core which varies its resistance continuously with changes in temperature. A constant wattage heater is not acceptable. F. Provide single or multiple circuit digital controller as required by the project,connected to and monitored by the building BAS system. All enclosures shall be NEMA 4X. G. All heat tracing systems shall be supervised as required by NFPA 13. H. Provide a thermostat control, which de-energizes the heating cable when the ambient air temperature is above 40 degrees F (adjustable). While energized, the heat cable shall be entirely self-regulating. I. Provide all power connection hardware, splices, end seals, etc.,to accomplish installation. All hardware shall be by the same manufacturer as the cable. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 21 00 00-1 5 May 2, 2023 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 J. Electric heating cable and accessories shall be UL Listed. Electric heating cable shall conform to all requirements of Division 26. K. Electric heating cable shall be Raychem XL or Engineer approved equal. L. All piping shall be insulated with 1" thick fiberglass insulation with factory applied all- service jacket. Piping exposed to exterior conditions shall be provided with 0.016" minimum corrugated aluminum metal jacketing with bands on 3'-0" centers. M. Heating-cable circuit shall be protected by a ground-fault device for equipment protection. This requirement is in accordance with section 427-22 of the NEC-2005. N. All heating cable components shall be UL Listed, CSA Certified, or FM Approved for use as part of the system to provide pipe freeze protection. Component enclosures shall be rated NEMA 4X to prevent water ingress and corrosion. Installation shall not require the installing contractor to cut into the heating-cable core to expose the bus wires. Connection systems that require the installing contractor to strip the bus wires or that use crimps or terminal blocks, shall not be acceptable. 2.07 TESTS AND DRAINS A. The Contractor shall provide test connections as required and as indicated on the Drawings. Inspector's test connections shall be fitted with sight glasses and the discharge of the drain riser shall be terminated above an adjacent hub drain with an air gap fitting. All tests shall have approved sight test assemblies as required by NFPA. 2.08 ELECTRIC MOTORS AND RELAYS A. Design,type and ratings of electric motors shall comply with the National Electrical Code, NEMA and Underwriters Laboratories Inc. B. Unless otherwise noted, or required for special applications,motors shall be equipped with sealed ball bearings. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating and furnishing equipment of voltage shown on the electrical documents. D. Electric motors shall be NEMA Premium Efficiency open drip proof type. Motors shall meet NEMA MG Table 12-12 of EISA, 2010. Motors shall be selected with a minimum of 15% safety factor greater than the fan brake/horsepower (e.g. 4.75 BHP would require a nominal 7i/2 HP motor). The motor service factor shall not be used as part of the safety factor. All motors shall have thermal overload protection. Motors shall be capable of operating at+ 10% of the design voltage without voiding the manufacturer's warranty. E. Motors controlled by a variable frequency drive (VFD) shall be inverter duty motors designed according to the requirements of NEMA MG 1, Part 31, "Definite Purpose, Inverter Fed Motors"and shall be compatible with the particular manufacturer's drive that is used. 1. Shaft Grounding Rings - All motors controlled by variable frequency drives shall FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 21 00 00-1 6 May 2, 2023 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 be equipped with a maintenance free, conductive micro fiber, shaft grounding ring with a minimum of two rows of circumferential micro fibers to discharge damaging shaft voltages away from the bearings to ground. a. Motors up to 100HP shall be provided with one shaft grounding ring installed either on the drive end or non-drive end.Motors over 100HP shall be provided with an insulated bearing on the non-drive end and a shaft grounding ring on the drive end of the motor. Grounding rings shall be provided and installed by the motor manufacturer or contractor and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. b. Shaft grounding rings shall be AEGIS bearing protection ring by Electro Static Technology-ITW. 2. High Frequency Grounding Straps - All motors controlled by variable frequency drives shall be bonded from the motor foot to the system ground with a high frequency ground strap fabricated of flat braided,tinned copper with terminations to accommodate motor foot and system ground connection. a. Proper grounding of motor frame for all inverter-driven induction motors shall be in accordance with ABB Technical Guide No.5 and Allen Bradley Publication 1770-4.1 Application Data Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines b. High frequency bonding strap shall be AEGIS high frequency ground strap by Electro Static Technology-ITW. F. All motors to be mounted on equipment supplied under this section shall be as manufactured by General Electric,Westinghouse, or Louis Allis. 2.09 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. A marker showing the service and an arrow indicating the direction of flow shall be applied on the following equipment installed under this section of the Specifications: 1. All above ground fire protection standpipe and sprinkler piping 2. All above ground sprinkler drainage piping B. Piping identification shall be applied in areas of exposed construction and in areas with accessible or lay-in ceilings. The piping shall be labeled at each valve, wall and floor penetrations (both sides) and at connections to equipment. In addition, straight runs of piping shall be labeled at intervals not greater than 25 feet. C. Equipment and component parts thereof shall bear manufacturer's nameplate, giving manufacturer's name, size, type model number or serial number, and electrical characteristics, to facilitate maintenance and replacements. Nameplates of distributors or subcontractors are not acceptable. Electrical equipment shall be UL Listed as applicable. D. The letter size and background color shall conform to the Identification of Pipe System ANSI A-13-1. The vinyl plastic markers shall be as manufactured by Seton Name-Plate Company,W.H. Brady Company, or Westline Products. E. All valves shall have a 1-1/2" diameter laminate plastic tag, engraved, black and white marking and a brass hook for attaching to valve stem. Tags shall have letters as large as FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 21 0000-17 May 2, 2023 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 practical,the number of the valve and the service such as indicated on the"Legend." The numbers of service shall be consecutive. Tags shall be similar to Seton 2961. F. All valves on pumps shall be similar to the valve tags specified above,except they shall be 2-1/2" in diameter,black with white number 2" high for attaching to valve stem by means of brass hook or small solid link brass chain. Tags shall be similar to Seton 2961-25. G. These numbers shall correspond with numbers indicated for valves and controls on two printed detailed lists and locational diagrams. These printed lists and locational diagrams shall state the numbers and locations of each valve and control and the section which it controls. H. The printed lists shall be prepared by Wrico pencil lettering or typed and shall be framed under glass, and mounted as directed by the Owner. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The Drawings are diagrammatic and the final arrangement of the work shall suit field conditions, the characteristics of the materials used and coordination with all other disciplines and the building components and finishes. Verify all dimensions in the field. Access and clearances must be provided and maintained for the proper operation, maintenance service and repair of the work. B. No sprinklers are to be installed prior to the building being completely sealed in from external moisture and conditions. C. All standpipe, sprinkler and drain piping exposed to sight in stairwells is to be painted with two coats of an epoxy based paint, color to be selected by the Architect. D. All equipment and materials shall be installed according to manufacturer's recommendations and shall meet the requirements of NFPA and the Owner's Insurance Underwriter. E. All sprinklers in spaces visible to public view shall be located symmetrically in relation to ceiling design elements, lighting fixtures, speakers, diffusers, etc. All ceiling components are to be indicated on the submittal drawings as noted previously to ensure coordination with all ceiling elements and devices. Piping to sprinklers in these areas is to be provided with arm-overs or flexible sprinkler drops to allow for exact placement of sprinklers. F. Sprinklers shall be installed at the centerpoint of all 2' x 2' lay-in ceiling tiles, and at the centerpoint or F from the ends of 4'x 2' ceiling tiles. G. Do not install sprinklers that have been dropped, damaged, show a visible loss of fluid, or a cracked bulb. H. The sprinlder bulb protector shall be removable by hand,without tools or devices that may damage the bulb. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 21 0000-18 May 2, 2023 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 I. Where pipe is installed above suspended ceilings, it shall be located in the clear space above the suspended ceiling and the pendent sprinklers shall be located to clear the ceiling supporting grid system,the ceiling mounted fixtures,and air conditioning ducts and outlets. J. The Contractor shall install additional pendent sprinkler heads under all ductwork or other obstructions which are over 48" wide in accordance with NFPA-13 in areas of exposed construction. K. All sprinklers located in areas that are to be painted shall be protected prior to painting. L. Provide a pressure gauge at the top level of all standpipes. M. Where wet fire protection standpipe, cross main, feed main and branch piping are located within areas exposed to temperatures below 40° F, listed electric heat tracing and pipe insulation shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of Section 2.06 — Heat Tracing Cable for Freeze Protection of Piping. N. Grooved joints shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's latest published instructions. The gasket style and elastomeric material(grade) shall be verified as suitable for the intended service. Gaskets shall be molded and produced by the grooved coupling manufacturer. Grooved ends shall be clean and free from indentations,projections,and roll marks in the area from pipe end to groove. Grooved coupling manufacturer's factory trained field representative shall provide on-site training for contractor's field personnel in the proper use of grooving tools, application of groove, and installation of grooved piping products. Factory trained representative shall periodically visit the jobsite to ensure best practices in grooved product installation are being followed. Contractor shall remove and replace any improperly installed products. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Arrangements shall be made to have the openings, inserts, sleeves, blockouts, and such other incidentals set in place ahead of the construction work, where practical,to eliminate the need of cutting and patching. If coring becomes necessary for installation of the work, it shall be done under this section. All holes shall be neatly patched and finished to match the adjoining work in a manner approved by the Architect. All coring shall be performed in a manner not to weaken the structural parts and the manner and method shall be submitted to the Structural Engineer for approval. 3.03 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS A. The Contractor shall furnish and set pipe sleeves and inserts for all work under this section and shall be responsible for their proper and permanent location. In the event that failure to do so requires cutting and patching, the remedial work shall be the responsibility of the Contractor. B. All pipes passing through floors,walls or partitions shall be provided with sleeves having an internal diameter ]-1/2"(3/4"annular space)larger than the outside diameter of the pipe or insulation on covered lines, except as otherwise specified herein. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 21 00 00-1 9 May 2, 2023 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Sleeves for all pipes through walls, beams and partitions shall finish flush with the finish line of the walls,beams and partitions. D. Sleeves for all piping shall extend 1/2" above finish floor, (except where under partitions, the sleeves shall be flush with the bottom of the partition) and after the installation of pipe shall be packed and made watertight with fire stopping sealant to maintain separations and fire ratings. E. Where pipes pass under footings and through exterior walls, sleeves shall be of galvanized steel pipe and shall be not less than 4" larger than the pipe being sleeved. Sleeves shall be made watertight where passing through waterproofed surfaces, exterior wall, and floor slabs on grade. Waterproofing shall be done by means of a steel slip on welding flange, continuously welded at the center of the sleeve and shall be painted with one coat of bitumastic paint inside and outside. The space between sleeve and pipe shall be packed with oakum to within 2"of each face of the wall;(to within 2"of the top of sleeve at floors). The remaining space shall be packed and made watertight with a waterproof mastic. Mechanical expansion type rubber seals such as manufactured by Calpico Ind. and Thunderline Corporation are acceptable as alternate method of water proofing piping penetrations. F. Sleeves through floors or interior masonry walls shall be of galvanized steel pipe or wrought iron pipe size except where located in concealed pipe spaces where they may be of 22 gauge galvanized sheet steel if fire rating is maintained. G. Sleeves through interior masonry partitions shall be of 22-gauge galvanized sheet steel. H. Sleeves for piping to receive insulation shall be large enough to allow continuous insulation through sleeves. I. Spacing between or location of pipe sleeves in floor slabs, structural beams or structural walls shall be subject to the Structural Engineer's approval. J. Where pipes pass under load bearing footings they shall pass through a coated steel pipe sleeve as described above and extend past a 45 degree line out from the bottom of the load bearing structure. Concrete shall be used as backfill in the portions of trench within the 45 degree pressure line. K. Escutcheons shall be provided around all exposed pipe passing through walls, partitions, ceilings and floors in finished spaces. Escutcheons shall be of sufficient outside diameter to cover the sleeve opening and shall fit snugly around the insulated or bare pipe and to the wall,partition, floor or ceiling. 3.04 WORKMANSHIP A. All work shall be coordinated with the work to be performed or installed under other sections of these Specifications. B. All work shall be executed in a workmanlike manner by workmen skilled in this type of work and shall present a neat appearance when completed. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 21 0000-20 May 2, 2023 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Offsets shall be provided as required to avoid interference and conflicts with other work, to maximize headroom, or to improve the appearance of pipe runs. All pipe supports, structural members, hangers and other apparatus necessary to support firmly and substantially the various components of the systems shall be provided under this section. D. Nameplates, catalog numbers and rating identifications shall be securely attached to equipment with screws or rivets. Adhesives or cements will not be permitted. E. The subcontractor shall be responsible for the protection of the work from injury and shall protect all apparatus with suitable enclosures. 3.05 ERECTION AND INSTALLATION A. Installation and workmanship requirements are specified hereinafter. B. This subcontractor shall be responsible for the furnishing and installing of all support steel, hangers, rods, clamps, etc., to provide adequate support of all Fire Protection equipment specified herein. All support assemblies shall be UL Listed or FM Approved. 3.06 CLEANING OF SYSTEMS AND PREMISES A. At all times,keep the premises clear of undue accumulation of rubbish. B. On completion of the work,remove all rubbish and debris resulting from this Contract,and dispose of same. C. All equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned and left in a satisfactory condition for proper operation at project completion. All equipment shall be partially or fully re-painted as required to provide an appearance of new equipment. 3.07 TESTS A. Tests of all fire protection systems and equipment,underground and inside piping including alarm and detection devices shall be scheduled with one (1) week prior notification to a local representative of the Underwriter and the Architect. All tests and test procedures shall be in accordance with the applicable NFPA standards. After completion of all tests, the "Contractor's Materials and Test Certificate" shall be submitted to the Architect. B. The Contractor shall supply all materials, labor, utilities and power required for testing. Preliminary tests shall be performed to prove work is satisfactory prior to requesting a test inspection. Sectional tests shall be made before insulation or concealing any piping. C. Repair all defects disclosed by tests or, if required by the Architect,replace defective work with new systems and materials at no additional cost to the Owner. Repairs to piping systems shall be made with new material. No caulking of screwed joints, cracks or holes will be accepted. Make tests in stages to facilitate work of others. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for the repair and/or replacement cost installed and finishes damaged by leaks,tests and/or repair and replacement of his work at no additional expense to the Owner. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 21 0000-21 May 2, 2023 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. Prior to final acceptance by the Owner, submit the "Contractor's Material and Test Certificates"indicating system compliance with all applicable sections of NFPA. 3.08 SUBCONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warrant all equipment and the installation to function properly for a period of one year from date of final acceptance of the work. B. Defects becoming apparent within the warranty period shall be repaired by the Contractor. In addition, all damages to installed work and finishes resulting from such defects shall be the responsibility of this Contractor either to repair or replace to equal the existing installation. C. This warranty shall in no way obligate the Contractor to repair any and all damages resulting from accident or improper operation or care on the part of the Owner. END OF SECTION 2100 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 21 0000-22 May 2, 2023 FIRE PROTECTION GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 21 30 00 - ELECTRIC FIRE PUMP AND ACCESSORIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. General Conditions: Refer to the General Conditions, the Supplementary General Conditions and the Special Conditions, all provisions of which apply to work under this section as if written in full herein. B. The scope of work in these Specifications and/or indicated on the drawings describes the design requirements for the electric fire pump,jockey pump, controllers and all required piping and accessories. 1.02 SYSTEMS A. Systems and equipment to be provided under the Fire Protection design section shall be as listed below: 1. Fire Pump Assembly 2. Jockey Pump 3. Fire Pump Controller and Transfer Switch 4. Jockey Pump Controller 5. Flow Meter 6. Test Header 1.03 DESIGN STANDARDS A. Fire pump assemblies and installations shall be in accordance with the requirements of the following codes, standards and design guides: 1. National Fire Protection Associations(NFPA) Standards, Latest Edition: a. NFPA 20-Installation of Centrifugal Fire Pumps 2. Factory Mutual(FM)Approval Guide 3. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 4. Owner's Insurance Underwriter Requirements 5. "[Insert other criteria here]" PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 FIRE PUMP A. The Contractor shall provide and install a fire pump assembly designed and factory tested in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 20. The fire pump shall be UL Listed and FM Approved for fire pump service at the specified rating. The system manufacturer will assume unit responsibility for the proper operation of the entire system as specified herein. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 21 3000-1 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRIC FIRE PUMP AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. The fire pump shall be of the double suction horizontal split-case design and shall be UL Listed and FM Approved. At 150% of the rated capacity it shall develop at least 65% of its rated head and shall not exceed 140% of the rated head at zero capacity. C. Pump casing shall be cast iron with flanged suction and discharge connections. Flanges shall be equivalent to ANSI B16.1 flange ratings. Casing shall be split on the shaft centerline to allow access to rotating elements without disturbing drive or alignment. D. Casing and impeller wear rings shall be renewable bronze rings locked in position to prevent rotation. E. Bearings shall be steel, grease lubricated and shall have a minimum B-10 life of 20,000 hours. The bearing housing shall be designed to flush lubricant through, and provide continuous cleaning of, bearing surfaces. Bearings shall be removable without removing the rotating element or dismantling the pump. F. Pump shaft shall be steel. G. Shaft sleeves shall be renewable, bronze slip-fit over the shaft, shall extend full length through the seal box, and shall be locked in place. H. Impellers shall be enclosed bronze double suction type hydraulically and dynamically balanced. 1. Pump shaft seal shall be stuffing box design with split bronze glands. J. Pump and drive base shall be formed steel or cast iron with drain pan base. The pump shall be connected to the driving electric motor through a flexible coupling. Coupling shall have a formed sheet steel coupling guard,bolted to the base plate. K. Motor shall be open drip proof type with a 1.15 service factor. Motors shall comply with the provisions of NFPA 70,National Electric Code as described in NFPA 20. Horsepower rating shall be as required for FM Approval. L. The fire protection piping and fire pump shall be designed and sized to eliminate the requirement for a main relief valve. M. Pump shall be fitted with the following accessories: 1. Automatic casing air relief vent 2. Casing drain cocks 3. Discharge pressure gauge(0-300 psig) 4. Suction pressure gauge (30" Hg to 150 psig) 5. Name plate with capacity, head, impeller diameter, speed, model number, and serial number 6. Eccentric suction reducer(if required) 7. Concentric discharge increaser(if required) 8. Main relief valve and waste cone(if required) FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 21 3000-2 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRIC FIRE PUMP AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 9. UL Listed FM Approved flow meter 10. Fire pump test header complete with the quantity of valves as required by NFPA 20 N. Fire pump system shall be: 1. Allis Chalmers 2. Aurora Pump 3. Fairbanks Morse Pump Co. 4. Patterson Pump Co. 5. Peerless Pump 6. SyncroFlo, Inc. 7. Tigerflow 2.02 FIRE PUMP CONTROLLER A. The fire protection contractor shall be responsible for coordinating voltages of all fire protection equipment requiring electric motors, switches and relays, including control circuiting. B. The motor controller assembly shall be UL Listed and FM Approved for fire pump service and for service entrance. It shall be compatible with the motor horsepower and voltage. Cabinet shall be freestanding NEMA 12 rated with baked enamel finish. All internal components shall be accessible from the front. C. The controller assembly shall have an integral automatic transfer switch and shall be of the combination manual and automatic reduced voltage,electronic, soft-start type(25%of full voltage at starting). Transfer switch shall be 3-pole. D. The controller shall have across-the-line starting for fire pumps less than 50 FIR For pumps 50 HP and greater, starter shall be reduced voltage, electronic, soft-start type (25% of full voltage at starting). E. The controller assembly shall be designed to withstand the fault current for minimum short circuit capacity delivered to the controller and shall be clearly indicated on the controller submittal. Coordinate the required rating of the controller with the electrical specifications and drawings. F. Controller shall include the following: 1. All controller components, including circuit breaker and contactors shall be front mounted, front wired and front accessible for maintenance. 2. Controller shall include a motor rated combination isolating disconnect switch/circuit breaker, mechanically interlocked and operated with a single externally mounted handle. 3. Controller shall be supplied with a pressure switch with a range of 0-300 psi and have independent high and low-pressure settings. The pressure switch shall be mounted inside the controller. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 21 3000-3 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRIC FIRE PUMP AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 4. Controller shall have externally mounted individual,visible and audible indicators for power or power failure available, low pressure, pump operation, local start, phase failure,phase reversal, interlock on,pump running and run timer on. 5. The controller shall have externally mounted operators including start pushbutton, stop pushbutton and emergency run mechanism. The start pushbutton and emergency run mechanism shall be separate units and not combined. 6. The controller shall have a solid-state minimum running period timer set for one minute for each ten horsepower. The minimum run timer shall include a flange mounted timer running pilot light to indicate when the run timer is in the timing mode. 7. The controller shall have listed internal voltage surge protector G. Controller shall include the following remote alarm features for remote annunciation at the main fire alarm control panel: 1. Pump running light 2. Loss of phase/powerlight 3. Phase reversal light 4. Transfer switch normal 5. Transfer switch emergency H. The controller shall be completely assembled, wired, and factory tested by the system manufacturer. I. Fire Pump Controller shall be: 1. Cutler-Hammer 2. Firetrol 3. Hubbell Controls 4. Joslyn Clark 5. Master Controls 6. Tornatech 2.03 JOCKEY PUMP A. Jockey Pump shall be a vertical multi-stage centrifugal type, coupled to an open drip proof motor. B. Pump casing shall be cast iron with 200 psig minimum operating pressure. C. Pump shall be bronze fitted and supplied with a relief valve between the pump and check valve. D. Jockey pump shall be same manufacturer as the fire pump or by Grundfos Pump Corporation. 2.04 JOCKEY PUMP CONTROLLER A. Jockey pump controller shall be combined manual/automatic type assembled, wired, and tested at the factory. Assembly shall be UL Labeled and FM Approved. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 21 3000-4 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRIC FIRE PUMP AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Controller shall include the following: 1. One (1) externally operated fusible disconnect or circuit breaker switch 2. One (1) front mounted hand-off-auto select switch 3. One (1)running period timer to keep motor running for a predetermined time after each automatic start 4. One (1)pre-piped mercoid pressure switch C. Jockey pump controller shall be same manufacturer as fire pump controller. D. Cabinet shall be NEMA 12 rated with baked enamel finish. 2.05 FLOW METER A. Flow meter shall be UL Listed,FM Approved annubar type designed for mounting in pipe. Flow meter shall have a water flow capacity of 175%of pump rated capacity. Flow meter shall be provided with annubar flow sensor, valved high and low side connections, a flow indicator and interconnecting tubing. Flow meter element and indicator shall be sized for pump rated capacity. 2.06 TEST HEADER A. Test header shall be (three) (four) outlet, horizontal (flush mount) (free standing) outlet style complete with 2-1/2" fire department valves, caps and chains. All exposed surfaces shall be polished chrome plated. Hose connection shall comply with local fire department requirements. Assembly shall be located 2'-6" above finished grade to the centerline of the valve outlets. Test header shall be Potter Roemer 5860 series or approved equal. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Fire pump system shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 20 and as indicated on the drawings. B. Controllers shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 20. C. Flow meter shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Fire pump and jockey pump pressure control sensors shall be installed in accordance with NFPA 20. E. Sprinkler system pipe, fittings and valves shall be of the pressure rating required to eliminate the requirement for a main relief valve on the fire pump. F. Fire pump drip pan base shall be piped to floor drain. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 21 3000-5 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRIC FIRE PUMP AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 G. All equipment will be factory tested in accordance with the requirements of NFPA,UL and FM. Additionally, the entire system shall be hydrostatically tested fully assembled by the system manufacturer prior to shipment. H. Contractor shall coordinate all valve supervisory switches and controller dry contacts with the building Fire Alarm Contractor. 3.02 SUBMITTAL DATA A. The submittal data for the pumping system shall include, but not be limited to: pump curves, individual computer data sheets, system drawings, and complete description of control panel, with wiring diagram, sequencing data,instrumentation, and alarms. B. The pumping system shall be guaranteed in writing by the manufacturer for a period of one (1)year from final acceptance by the Owner. C. Start-Up-Service 1. The service of a factory trained representative shall be provided on the jobsite for a minimum of one (1) day to provide the manufacturer's certification and start-up of the fire pump assembly. A formal report is to be issued indicating any revisions required for certification of the assembly by the manufacturer. Instruction and training of the operator's personnel shall be provided following certification of the assembly. END OF SECTION 21 30 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 21 3000-6 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRIC FIRE PUMP AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 22 00 00 - PLUMBING GENERAL PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. General Conditions: Refer to the General Conditions, the Supplementary General Conditions and the Special Conditions, all provisions of which apply to work under this section as if written in full herein. B. The scope of work described in these Specifications and/or indicated on the Drawings shall include (except where otherwise noted) the furnishing of all materials, equipment, appurtenances, accessories, connections, labor, etc. required and/or necessary to completely install, clean, inspect, adjust, test, balance and leave in safe and proper operating condition all systems. All work shall be accomplished by workmen skilled in the various trades involved. C. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary to each other and what is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. If a discrepancy exists between the Drawing and Specifications, the higher cost shall be included, and the Engineer shall be notified of the discrepancy. D. All work performed under this specification shall be accomplished in accordance with the requirements and provisions of the following sections: 1. Section 01 91 00 Commissioning 1.02 STANDARDS A. All Plumbing systems shall conform to all ordinances and regulations of the City,County, State and/or other authorities having jurisdiction in accordance with the requirements of the following codes, standards and design guides. 1. The International Plumbing Code, 2018 Edition,with most current State of Texas Amendments 2. The International Building Code, 2018 Edition, with most current State of Texas Amendments 3. The International Gas Code, 2018 Edition, with most current State of Georgia Amendments 4. International Energy Conservation Code,2015 Edition,with most current State of Harris County Amendments 5. Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA) 6. ANSI/NSF 61,NSF 372,and NSF 61-G compliance is required for all components of the domestic potable water system. 7. American Society of Plumbing Engineers (ASPE)Data Books 8. Sovent Cast Iron Design Manual No. 802, latest edition 9. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA) Standards: a. NFPA 30-Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code b. NFPA 31 - Oil Burning Equipment C. NFPA 54-National Fuel Gas Code FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -1 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 d. NFPA 58 - Liquefied Petroleum Gases 10. Plumbing Drainage Institute (PD1) 11. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 12. National Sanitation Foundation(NSF) 13. Local and State Fire Marshal requirements 14. Local Building and Inspection Department requirements 15. Local Health Department requirements 16. ASHRAE 90.1-2013 B. If code or other requirements exceed the provisions shown on the Contract Documents,the Engineer shall be notified in writing. Where requirements of the Contract Documents exceed code requirements, work shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any work done contrary to these requirements shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 1.03 PERMITS A. The Contractor shall obtain all permits and inspections required for the installation of this work and pay all charges incident thereto. He shall deliver to the Architect all certificates of said inspection. 1.04 WORK INCLUDED A. Systems 1. The Plumbing Systems installed and work performed under this Division of the Specifications shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, the following as noted below. The connection point for all systems from the site utilities shall be as Y-0" from the exterior of the building unless specifically otherwise noted. a. Domestic cold,hot and hot water recirculation systems b. Sanitary, drainage,waste and vent systems C. Natural gas d. Primary and emergency storm drainage systems e. Grease waste and waste systems from food service areas f. Domestic water softening system g. Compressed air system 1.05 DRAWINGS A. The Drawings are diagrammatic and do not necessarily depict exact conditions. The indicated locations of equipment, ductwork, piping, etc. are approximate only. The Drawings are schematic in nature and are not to be scaled. Scales are shown for reference and approximation only. Refer to the architectural drawings for dimensional data of building components. B. The locations, arrangement and extent of equipment, devices, and other appurtenances related to the installation of work shown on the Drawings are approximate. The Contractor shall not scale drawings but shall refer to the architectural drawings for exact dimensions of building components. Should a conflict exist between the architectural and engineering FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -2 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 drawings regarding dimensions and scale, the Contractor shall notify the Architect of the discrepancy for resolution. C. Materials, equipment or labor not indicated but which can be reasonably inferred to be necessary for a complete installation shall be provided. Drawings and Specifications do not undertake to indicate every item of material, equipment, or labor required to produce a complete and properly operating installation. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Contractor shall prepare a minimum of two(2)instruction manuals,one of which shall be submitted to the Architect for the Engineer's review, describing installation, operation and maintenance of all Plumbing equipment. Manuals shall include copies of control schematics, sequences of operations, indicate the function and operations of all components, as well as the Contractor's name, address, and telephone number. Manuals shall also contain one copy of all manufacturers' drawings,pamphlets, data,parts lists and instructions manual for each piece of equipment. Upon approval, one copy shall be delivered to the Owner; one copy shall be kept by the Contractor. The pamphlets and drawings are to be neatly bound in a 3-ring binder(s). B. The Contractor shall give detailed instructions for a period of not less than two (2)days to the responsible personnel designated by the Owner in the operation and maintenance of all equipment furnished under this Contract. A letter containing the name of the person or persons to whom the instructions were given and the dates of instruction period shall be submitted to the Engineer in the as-built submittal. C. Prior to final acceptance by the Owner, the Contractor shall submit a complete as-built drawing submittal for the Engineer's review, three (3) sets of operating and maintenance manuals,spare parts lists,drawings,wiring diagrams,troubleshooting data,manufacturer's bulletins,and other pertinent data on all equipment furnished under this Contract. Each set shall be enclosed in a suitable hard cover binder. D. A complete set of reproducible as-built drawings shall be provided indicating the location of all piping dimensionally located from a minimum of two column lines or major building structures. Drawings shall be a minimum of 1/8" scale. E. Provide name, address and telephone numbers of the manufacturer's representative and service company for each piece of equipment installed in the as-built submittal package. F. Provide all loose keys for supply valves,wall hydrants and hose bibbs installed. G. Provide a full repair kit set(total relief valve kit,first check and second check kits)for each reduced pressure backflow preventer installed. 1.07 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall maintain a record set of drawings indicating all changes in the work from that shown in the Contract Documents. Prior to final acceptance by the Owner, the Contractor shall assemble the complete set of as-built drawings that accurately reflects all changes to indicate actual final construction. All concealed piping shall be dimensionally FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -3 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 located from at least two(2) column lines or major building structure elements. Drawings shall be a minimum of 1/8" scale. B. The original set of"as-built"drawings shall be scanned and transmitted to the Architect in electronic (pdf)format. 1.08 EQUIPMENT,MATERIAL BID BASIS A. Manufacturers' names, model numbers, etc. as specified on the Drawings and herein are for the purpose of describing type, capacity, function and quality of equipment and materials required. B. Unless"approved equal"is specifically stated, bids shall be based on equipment named in Specifications or on Drawings as "base" products. Proposed alternate equipment and materials may be submitted along with the "base"products,provided deductive pricing is included with the alternate. C. Alternate"approved equal"items listed shall conform to specified base items and shall be substantially equal in quality, size, weight, construction, capacities and performance. The alternate equipment and materials shall be submitted as full equivalent to the equipment and materials specified, with sufficient supportive documentation and technical literature to demonstrate quality, performance, and workmanship without doubt or question. The Engineer shall consider the use of the alternate equipment based on the supportive documentation and other information available to him and shall approve or disapprove any alternates. The decision of the Engineer shall in all cases be final. D. The Contractor shall coordinate the installation of all plumbing equipment proposed for use in this project with all building trades (architectural, structural, mechanical and electrical). Coordination shall be accomplished prior to, and shall be reflected in, the submittal of shop drawings for approval. Any modifications or revisions required by other trades as a result of the use of equipment other than the basis of design shall be made at no additional cost. When substitution of equipment is made, the Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of any item and engineering and construction revisions necessary in his or any other contract or trade that may be required to satisfy plans and specifications. 1.09 START-UP-SERVICE A. The service of a factory-trained representative shall be provided on the jobsite for a minimum of one (1) day to provide the manufacturer's certification and start-up of all major equipment and systems including booster pumps,water heaters, sewage ejectors,lift stations, fuel oil systems, etc. A formal report is to be issued indicating any revisions required for certification of the assembly by the manufacturer. Instruction and training of the operator's personnel shall be provided following certification of the assembly. 1.10 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall prepare, submit, and obtain Engineer's review of manufacturers' submittals on the following equipment and systems prior to ordering, purchasing, or installation of any equipment or materials. All required submittals shall be transmitted electronically (e.g. pdfs, etc.) with the associated specification section and the item FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -4 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 submitted clearly identified. Partial submittals will be returned without review. Submittals, as a minimum, shall include: 1. Plumbing fixtures, faucets and trim 2. Water heaters and storage tanks 3. Domestic water pressure booster system 4. Insulation 5. Floor drains and drainage accessories 6. Hydrants and hose bibbs 7. Mixing valves 8. Submersible pumps 9. Hot water return pumps 10. Backflow preventers 11. Grease/oil interceptors 12. Pipe and fittings 13. Grooved joint couplings 14. Valves 15. Pipe supports 16. Piping accessories 17. Pipe labels and valve tags B. All approvals required by any code or enforcement authority, insurance underwriter, etc. shall be obtained prior to equipment being submitted to the Engineer. C. Quality Assurance/Control Submittals: Submit the following: 1. Test Reports: Upon request, submit test reports from recognized testing laboratories. 2. Certificates: Submit the following: a. Manufacturer's certificate that products comply with specified requirements. b. Certificate indicating that the installer is authorized to install the manufacturer's products D. Review of submittals by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility for complying with all requirements of the Contract Documents. Furthermore, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate the requirements of all approved equipment with other trades and disciplines such as roof openings, wall openings, electrical characteristics, etc. E. All submittals shall be identified by the equipment mark or tag identification numbers shown on the Contract Drawings. Each individual submittal item shall be marked to show which specification section pertains to the item. F. Submittals shall clearly indicate selection of model numbers, sizes, dimensions, electrical characteristics, etc. of the proposed equipment. Any proposed deviations from specified equipment shall be clearly indicated on the submittal. G. Included with submittals of plumbing equipment requiring electrical connections shall be a written statement confirming coordination of voltage requirements, bearing the names FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -5 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 and signatures of the plumbing and electrical contractors. A photocopied reproduction of the below statement is acceptable. VOLTAGE COORDINATION STATEMENT This statement is to confirm that the voltages of the equipment provided under this specification have been coordinated with the Electrical Drawings, as well as with the electrical contractor. Plumbing Contractor: Project Manager Name: Project Manager Signature/Date: Electrical Contractor: Project Manager Name: Project Manager Signature/Date: H. Provide Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) or letter from manufacturer certifying the VOC content for each adhesive, sealant,paint and coating. I. VOC Content: Submit adhesive and sealants product information or MSDS showing VOC Content information for all applicable products specified under this section. All applicable products in this section must meet low VOC content as specified by LEED Specification Section O1 81 13 Sustainable Design Requirements. 1.11 COORDINATION OF TRADES A. The Contractor shall give full cooperation to other trades and shall furnish all information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with least possible interference or delay. B. Piping and other plumbing equipment shall not be installed without first coordinating the installation of same with other trades. The Contractor, at his own expense, shall relocate all uncoordinated piping and other plumbing equipment installed should they interfere with the proper installation and mounting of electrical, HVAC equipment, ceilings and other architectural or structural finishes. C. The Contractor shall coordinate the elevations of all piping and equipment above ceilings and in exposed areas with the work of all other disciplines prior to installation. D. In areas where more than one trade is required to use common openings in beams,joists, chases,shafts and sleeves for the passage of conduits,raceways,piping,ductwork and other materials, the Contractor must coordinate the positions of all piping and equipment to be furnished under this section so that all items including the materials and equipment of other trades may be accommodated within the space available. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -6 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. The Contractor shall confirm that work installed under this section does not interfere with the clearances required for finished columns, pilasters, partitions, walls or other architectural or structural elements as shown on the Contract Documents. F. Work that is installed under this Contract which interferes with the architectural design or building structure shall be removed and relocated as required at no additional cost to the Contract. G. All offsets, fittings, valves, devices and accessories which may be required are to be provided under this Contract. The Contractor shall examine the entire set of Contract Documents and carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting all his work and shall arrange such work accordingly for the complete satisfactory operation of all systems, providing such fittings, traps, valves, devices and accessories as may be required to meet such conditions. 1.12 WARRANTY A. All equipment furnished and installed under this Contract shall be provided with the manufacturer's standard warranty unless otherwise noted. B. The Contractor shall make good all defects in material, equipment, or workmanship disclosed within a period of one (1)year from date of building acceptance by the Owner. The phrase "make good" shall mean to furnish promptly, without charge, all work necessary to remedy the defects to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 1.13 COMMISSIONING A. This project requires commissioning per the requirements of the(city,code,and/or specific energy program). Commissioning shall be by applicable contractor and either the engineering firm of record or a 3rd party commissioning agent. Refer to the commissioning (specifications, plan, checklists, and/or additional on drawing notes) for additional information. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All equipment, materials, accessories, etc. used shall be new and of current production unless specified otherwise. Equipment not specified in the Contract Documents shall be suitable for the intended use and shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. B. All equipment,products and materials shall be free of defects and shall be constructed to operate in a safe manner without excessive noise,vibration,leakage, or wear. C. All equipment shall bear the inspection label of Underwriters Laboratories Inc. D. All equipment and material for similar applications or systems shall be provided from the same manufacturer unless noted otherwise. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -7 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. All grooved j oint couplings,fittings,valves,and specialties shall be the products of a single manufacturer. Grooving tools shall be of the same manufacturer as the grooved components. F. All castings used for coupling housings, fittings, and valve bodies shall be date stamped for quality assurance and traceability. G. Cast iron soil pipe and fittings shall bear the collective trademark of the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute. 2.02 ELECTRICAL WORK A. Except as otherwise specified or noted, electrical equipment used for plumbing systems shall be as specified herein. B. Motor controls, system controls, starters, disconnects,pilot lights, push buttons, etc. shall be furnished by the Contractor compatible with the apparatus that it operates. Electrical equipment shall be wired for the voltage, as shown on the Electrical Drawings. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating and furnishing equipment of voltage shown on the electrical documents. D. Electric motors shall be NEMA Premium Efficiency open drip proof type. Motors shall meet NEMA MG Table 12-12 of EISA, 2010. Motors shall be selected with a minimum of 15% safety factor greater than the fan brake/horsepower (e.g. 4.75 BHP would require a nominal 7%HP motor). The motor service factor shall not be used as part of the safety factor. All motors shall have thermal overload protection. Motors shall be capable of operating at+ 10% of the design voltage without voiding the manufacturer's warranty. E. Motors controlled by a variable frequency drive (VFD) shall be inverter duty motors designed according to the requirements of NEMA MG 1, Part 31, "Definite Purpose, Inverter Fed Motors"and shall be compatible with the particular manufacturer's drive that is used. 1. Shaft Grounding Rings - All motors controlled by variable frequency drives shall be equipped with a maintenance free,conductive micro fiber, shaft grounding ring with a minimum of two rows of circumferential micro fibers to discharge damaging shaft voltages away from the bearings to ground. a. Motors up to 100HP shall be provided with one shaft grounding ring installed either on the drive end or non-drive end.Motors over 100HP shall be provided with an insulated bearing on the non-drive end and a shaft grounding ring on the drive end of the motor. Grounding rings shall be provided and installed by the motor manufacturer or contractor and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. b. Shaft grounding rings shall be AEGIS bearing protection ring by Electro Static Technology-ITW. 2. High Frequency Grounding Straps - All motors controlled by variable frequency drives shall be bonded from the motor foot to the system ground with a high frequency ground strap fabricated of flat braided,tinned copper with terminations to accommodate motor foot and system ground connection. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -8 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 a. Proper grounding of motor frame for all inverter-driven induction motors shall be in accordance with ABB Technical Guide No.5 and Allen Bradley Publication 1770-4.1 Application Data Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines b. High frequency bonding strap shall be AEGIS high frequency ground strap by Electro Static Technology-ITW. F. Starters for motors 1/3 HP and smaller shall be manual type, and for 1/2 HP and larger, shall be magnetic type. Starters shall be minimum size 0, combination type (with disconnect and lockable handle)with molded case circuit breaker. Starters for motors with remote or automatic control shall be magnetic. Relays, interlocks and auxiliary contacts shall be provided as specified and required. G. Magnetic motor starters shall be across-the-line, full voltage, non-reversing type unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified herein. H. Motor controls shall be either "Hand-Off-Auto" switches or "On-Off' push buttons with one indicating light. "Hand-Off-Auto" switches shall be provided for automatically controlled apparatus. 1. Motor starters that are not an integral part of equipment shall be installed in conformance with Division 26 - Electrical Requirements. J. All"loose"disconnects and starters shall be installed by Division 26. K. Power wiring to disconnects, starters, and equipment shall be provided and installed by Division 26. All equipment requiring electrical power shall be provided with disconnect switches at each piece of equipment. Coordinate switch type (fused or non-fused) with equipment characteristics,manufacturer's recommendations and the electrical drawings. L. Provide all system controls and associated control and interlock wiring for complete and operable systems. 120 volt and higher wiring shall be MC cable or in conduit in accordance with local codes and the materials and installation requirements of Division 26-Electrical. M. All starters for 3-phase equipment shall have overload devices in each phase. N. All starters and variable frequency drives shall be labeled on the face of the device with a semi-rigid plastic laminate nameplate with 1" high white letters on a black background securely affixed to the equipment. The label shall indicate equipment served (equipment tag used on the Drawings). Labels shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. O. Wiring diagrams shall be furnished by the Contractor. P. Acceptable manufacturers shall be General Electric, Square D, Eaton, Siemens and Allen Bradley. 2.03 PIPING SYSTEMS A. General FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -9 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. The various piping systems are classified as follows, and materials of construction shall be as specified unless otherwise noted on the Drawings. 2. Piping, valves and equipment used in similar applications shall be provided from the same manufacturer unless noted otherwise. B. Domestic Cold-Water System, Underground, 3 Inches and Larger, Suitable for Working Pressure of 125 prig to 5'-0" Outside Building 1. Piping Systems a. Basis of Design 1) Ductile iron thickness Class 51 for 3-inch and 4-inch size thickness, Class 50 for 6 inches and larger,ANSI A21.51,ASTM A746 with bituminous coating outside and cement mortar lining inside. Ductile iron mechanical or push-on joints and fittings ANSI/AWWA C110/A21.10. b. Deductive Alternates 1) Mains where pressure is no greater than 100 psi: Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC), 160 psi water piping, ASTM D2241, SDR26 with mechanical or push-on joints with neoprene "O" rings, ASTM D3139. 2) Mains where pressure is greater than 100 psi: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), 200 psi water piping, AWWA C900, 200 psi, with mechanical or push-on joints with neoprene "O" rings, ASTM D3139. 2. All valves, fittings, and changes in direction or elevation shall have joints restrained in accordance with NFPA-24. 3. Trenching Conditions: Class BI bedding with 4" minimum thickness of clean granular fill. Recesses shall be provided at all pipe barrels to ensure no loads are transmitted at the joint connections. C. Domestic Water System Branch Piping, Underground, 2 Inches and Smaller, Suitable for a Working Pressure of 125 psig 1. Piping Systems a. Copper Type K, soft annealed, conforming to Federal Specification WWT-799. Joints and fittings are not permitted below floor slabs with copper Type K soft annealed pipe. b. Multi-layer CPVC over aluminum composite middle layer bendable piping, ASTM D2846, solvent cement joints and fittings, ASTM F493. Noveon F1owGuard Gold Bendable. C. PEX Piping: Uponor Ecoflex Potable PEX Piping (PEX-a), listed to ASTM F876 and F877, tubing surrounded by multi-layer, closed cell, PEX-foam insulation and a water resistant, corrugated HDPE jacket. D. Domestic Cold Water and Hot Water Systems Above Ground 1. Piping Systems a. Basis of Design 1) Polypropylene piping,Aquatherm Green pipe SDR 7.4 for cold& hot water systems 3"and smaller,or SDR 11 for hot water systems FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -10 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 4" and larger and all cold-water systems based on the required minimum pressure rating and use temperature, see chart below. Piping,fittings,and joints to comply with NSF 61-G,NSF 61,and NSF 372. Provide pipe wrap or insulation for piping in all plenum applications that meet the requirements of ASTM E84. When piping will be exposed to UV light for more than 30 days a factory UV protection must be provided per the manufacturer's recommendations. Fittings/Joints: Shall be aquatherm green pipe electro-fusion welded PP-R joints and fittings, ASTM F2389, NSF 61certified. SDR 7.4 Green Pipe SDR 11 Green Pipe Temperature Pipe Sizes Permissible working Permissible working pressure pressure (psi) (psi) 50 All Pipe Sizes)' 4fS, 220 80 All pipe sizes 340 180 100 All pipe,sizes ' 255 135' 120 All pipe sizes) 213 112 140 All pz"e sizes 180 93 160 All pipe sizes 120 - 180 All pipe sizes lob 2) Type "L"hard drawn copper tubing per ASTM B-88 and Federal Specification WWT-799. Piping, fittings, and joints to comply with NSF 61-G,NSF 61,and NSF 372. Fittings: Solder or brazed joint copper fittings per B16.18 or 16.22. Grooved copper fittings with full flow radius elbows; wrought copper to ASME B16.22 and ASTM B-75 or cast bronze to ASME B16.18 and ASTM B- 584, Victaulic CTS system, or Engineer approved equal. Copper pressed fittings with radius elbows, crimped connections and EPDM 0-rings, ASTM B-88, 200 psi rating, Ridgid Viega ProPress, ProPress XL or Elkhart Xpress systems. Ductile iron mechanical couplings with bolted connection for grooved piping, ASTM A-536, housings with offsetting angle-pattern bolt pads, with EPDM-HP copper tube size gaskets, rated working pressure 300 psi,installation-ready for direct stab installation without field disassembly. Basis of Design: Victaulic Style 607H. Joints: Soldered or brazed joints with lead-free brazing filler materials and compatible alloys. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -1 1 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Type L Drawn Type L Drawn Type L Drawn Copper Tubing Copper Tubing Copper Tubing Permissible Permissible Permissible working pressures working pressures working pressures Temperature Pipe Sizes using using using NO LEAD PRESS FITTINGS ROLL GROVE SOLDERED (psi) FITTINGS FITTINGS (psi) (psi) 100 1/2"-1"' 1,000 200 300 11/4"-2" 850 200 300 21/2"-4" 705 200 300 5"-8" 660 N/A 300 101''-12" 500 N/A 150 1/2"-1" 625 20'0 300 11/4"-2" 485 200 300 2V2,"-411 405 200 300 5"-8" 375 N/A 300 101142" 285 N/A 200 '/2„-1" 505 200 300 11/4"-2" 395 200 300 21/2,"-4" 325' 200' 300 5"-8" 1 305 1 N/A 300 10'"-12" 1 230 1 N/A 3) Schedule 10 T304L stainless steel pipe, ASTM A312 (300 psi at 140 degrees F), Schedule 40 T304L stainless steel pipe, ASTM A312 (600 psi at 140 degrees F). Piping, fittings, and joints to comply with NSF 61-G,NSF 61,and NSF 372. Fittings: Schedule 10S/40S rolled groove 304 stainless steel fittings. Joints: Ductile iron or 316 stainless steel rigid grooved couplings, EPDM gasket, 316 stainless steel nuts and bolts. Victaulic Style 89,Anvil Figure 7400 (300 psi for 10S), Victaulic Style 489, Anvil Figure 7401 (600 psi for 40S). a) Schedule 10S pipe shall be grooved using a Victaulic grooving tool equipped with RX roll sets, specifically designed for stainless steel pipe. 4) For pipe sizes 2" and smaller, the Vic-Press system for Schedule I OS pipe may be used in lieu of soldered copper. The system shall be rated to 500-psi CWP,with grade EPDM gaskets,UL classified in accordance with ANSI/NSF-61 for potable water service. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -12 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Tubing Tubing Tubing Permissible Permissible Permissible working pressures working pressures working pressures Temperature Pipe Sizes using using PRESS using ROLL NO LEAD FITTINGS GROVE SOLDERED (psi) FITTINGS FITTINGS (psi) (psi) 100 I/2"-1 3060 500 300 11/4"-2" 1460 500 300 21/2%4" 725 500 304 5"-8" 590 N/A 300 101'-12" 360 N/A 200 '/2"-1" 2550 500 j00 11/4"-2" 1241 500 300 2/z""-4"' 616 500 300 5"-8" 500 N/A 300 10114211 300 N/A b. Deductive Alternates 1) Hot and Cold-Water Systems: Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) Schedule 40, ASTM F-441 and D-2846 (100 psi at 180 degrees F). Piping,fittings,and joints to comply with NSF 61-G, NSF 61, and NSF 372. Fittings: Schedule 40 socket type CPVC, ASTM F-439 and F-441. Joints: Solvent cement and primer for CPVC piping, ASTM F-493. All metal thread connections to fixtures and fittings (tub spout, showerhead, etc.) shall be connected with a brass transition fitting. SDR 11 F1owGuard Gold CPVC Schedule 80 Permissible Corzan (for Pipe Sizes greater 2") Temperature working Permissible working pressure pressure (psi) (psi) Pipe '/211-21' Sizes (max size) 2Y211 311 411 611 811 73-80 400 420 310 324 286 250 100 325 344 303 262 229 205 120 260 273 240 208 182 162 140 200 210 185 160 140 125 164 160 168 148 128 112 100, 180 100 105 92 80 70 62 (max. temp) 200 1 1 1 84 1 74 1 64 1 56 1 50 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -13 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SDR 11 F1owGuard Schedule 80 Gold CPVC Permissible Corzan (for Pipe Sizes greater 2") Permissible working pressure Temperature working pressure (psi) (psi) Pipe 1/2"-2" Sizes (max size) 21/2" 3" 4" 6" 8" (max.temp) 1) For pipe sizes 3"and smaller: Hot and Cold-Water Systems within Living Units: Cross-linked polyethylene (PEX) plastic tubing, PEX-a grade,ASTM F-876;ASTM F-877(100 psi at 180 degrees F). Brass, copper or engineered lactic (EP) fittings, ASTM F- 1960. Piping, fittings, and joints to comply with NSF 61-G,NSF 61, and NSF 372. Fittings/Joints: Cold expansion fitting with PEX reinforcing rings,ASTM F-1960. a) All PEX tubing and fittings shall be from the same manufacturer. Fittings shall be third party certified to NSF-14, and ASTM-F1960 and shall comply to ASTM- F876 &ASTM-F877. b) All cold-water piping shall be blue in color. All hot water piping shall be red in color. All hot water return piping shall be white in color. C) Galvanized pipe and nipples are not acceptable for any portions of the domestic water system. d) Galvanized pipe and nipples are not acceptable for any portions of the domestic water system. e) Acceptable PEX manufacturers/systems: (1) Uponor Wirsbro Aquapex tubing with ProPEX fittings (2) Viega PEX tubing (3) Rehau PEX tubing and fittings f) All PEX tubing and fittings shall be from the same manufacturer. SDR 9 Temperature Pipe Sizes PEX piping Permissible working pressure (psi) 13-80' 3/8"=4"' 160 120 3/8"4" 130 180 3/ 14" 100 200 max tem 3/8"-4" 80 E. Sanitary, Waste and Vent and Storm Drain Systems, Below Ground to 5'-0" Outside Building FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -14 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Piping Systems a. Basis of Design 1) Schedule 40 solid wall DWV PVC pipe, ASTM D1785. Install per ASTM D2321. Fittings: Schedule 40 DWV PVC, socket type fittings, ASTM D2665. Joints: Solvent joints for PVC, ASTM D2564. (PVC piping is not acceptable for waste piping receiving discharge higher than 130 degrees F, cast iron piping is to be installed at the central plant, mechanical rooms and at all laundry and kitchen equipment discharges.) b. Single and double sanitary tee fittings are not allowed for the piping to any plumbing fixture; combination wye and eighth bend fittings shall be installed. C. Double combination fittings shall not be used for connections to horizontal drainage piping; single wye and eighth bend fittings shall be used for all connections. d. Foam core PVC piping is not acceptable for any drainage system. e. All cast iron pipe and fittings shall carry an NSF International listing. f. All piping and fittings shall be from the same manufacturer. F. Sanitary, Waste and Vent Systems and Storm Drainage Systems Above Ground 1. Piping Systems a. Basis of Design 1) No-hub cast iron soil pipe per CISPI 301 and ASTM A888. Fittings:No-hub cast iron fittings per CISPI 301 and ASTM A888. Joints: Joints for no-hub pipe and fittings shall be per CISPI 310, with stainless steel clamps and neoprene sleeve conforming to ASTM D 564. Heavy duty couplings are required on no-hub systems at the base of stack and vertical to horizontal offsets on all sanitary, waste and storm drainage systems. Heavy duty couplings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM Standard C-1540 and shall be type 304 stainless steel shielded couplings with bi-directional corrugations, with stainless steel worm gear clamps, 15 psi working pressure. Acceptable manufacturers: Husky SD 4000, Ideal or Mission. 2) Type DWV copper tube per ASTM B-306 and ANSI H-23.6. Fittings: DWV solder joint fittings per ANSI B16.29 or B16.23. Joints: All solder joints shall be made with a solder consisting of 95%tin and 5% antimony. 3) Single and double sanitary tee fittings are not allowed for the piping to any plumbing fixture; combination wye and eighth bend fittings shall be installed. 4) Double combination fittings shall not be used for connections to horizontal drainage piping; single wye and eighth bend fittings shall be used for all connections. 5) All cast iron pipe and fittings shall carry an NSF International listing. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -15 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 b. Single and double sanitary tee fittings are not allowed for the piping to any plumbing fixture; combination wye and eighth bend fittings shall be installed. C. Double combination fittings shall not be used for connections to horizontal drainage piping; single wye and eighth bend fittings shall be used for all connections. d. Foam core PVC piping is not acceptable for any drainage system. e. All cast iron pipe and fittings shall carry an NSF International listing. f. In all buildings,PVC sanitary stacks shall include an expansion coupling listed for building expansion and shrinkage of building materials. Coupling shall be solvent welded and capable of 3"-8" travel. Coupling shall be installed every 30'-0" of vertical stack. Acceptable manufacturers include IPEX. Pipe clamps shall be included and installed at top plate and sill plate above fitting. g. All piping and fittings shall be from same manufacturer. G. Pumped Discharge Piping 1. Piping Systems a. Type "L" hard drawn copper tubing per ASTM B-88 and Federal Specification WWT-799. Fittings: Grooved end, solder or brazed joint copper fittings per B16.18 or 16.22. Victaulic Installation-Ready Style 607H (300 psi). b. Hot and Cold-Water Systems: Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC) Schedule 40,ASTM F-441 and D-2846(100 psi at 180 degrees F). Piping, fittings, and joints to comply with NSF 61-G, NSF 61, and NSF 372. Fittings: Schedule 40 socket type CPVC,ASTM F-439 and F-441. Joints: Solvent cement and primer for CPVC piping,ASTM F-493. H. Compressed Air Piping 1. Piping Systems a. Schedule 40, ASTM A-53, galvanized steel pipe. Fittings: Galvanized malleable iron, class 150, threaded. Schedule 40 galvanized forged steel, threaded. Valves: Ball valves or gate valves, class 150,threaded ends. b. For pipe sizes 2" and smaller,the Vic-Press system for Schedule l OS pipe may be used in lieu of galvanized steel. The system shall be rated to 500- psi CWP,with grade HNBR or Nitrile gaskets. 2.04 VALVES,FLANGES AND UNIONS A. General 1. All systems under this section shall be provided with valves to permit complete and sectional control of the system. They shall be located to permit easy operation, replacement and repair. They shall be installed where shown on the Drawings, or as herein specified. Valves to comply with NSF 61-G, NSF 61, and NSF 372. Valves shall be as manufactured by one of the following companies: American, Anvil International, Apollo, FNW, Kennedy, Kitz, Milwaukee, Nibco, Powell, FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -16 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Stockham, Victaulic, Watts, or approved equal, and shall conform to description listed below. 2. All individual guestroom riser shut-off valves shall be located in the chase space adjacent to the vanity with access panels located tight to the underside of the countertop concealed from view unless specifically noted otherwise. Access panels serving the hot water recirculation balancing valves shall be located above ceiling in the guestroom closet unless otherwise noted. No access panels will be allowed in the public spaces with gypsum ceilings. 3. Control valves shall be provided for the domestic hot and cold-water supply to all risers and specific areas such as restrooms, fixture groups, equipment, hose bibbs and wall hydrants, food service areas and building separations. Valves shall be located in back-of-house or service areas with access panels or above lay-in ceilings. No access panels will be permitted in public spaces with gypsum ceilings. The tower riser control valves will be provided with an access panel concealed below the lowest guestroom vanity or above the ceiling in the closet in the lowest level unless specifically noted otherwise. B. Valve Description 1. Gate Valves a. 2-1/2" and larger, Victaulic Series 771V grooved ends (steel pipe), Stockham G-634, 175 lb. flanged OS&Y. b. 2" and smaller, Milwaukee UP149, low lead, 125 lb., sweat connection. 2-1/2"and larger,Victaulic MasterSeal(steel pipe)and Series 608(copper tubing);Milwaukee Fig. F-2885, 125 lb., flanged or Apollo 141 WD-SE-1 lead free Butterfly valve with 10 pos. lever handle. C. 8" and larger, Apollo 141WD-SE-2 lead free Butterfly valve with gear operator. d. 2-1/2" and smaller,Milwaukee BB-SC100, threaded. 2. Check Valves a. 2" and smaller, Milwaukee UP509, 200 lb.,threaded,low lead. b. 2" and larger, Victaulic Series 716, grooved ends. C. 2-1/2" and larger,Milwaukee Fig. F-2974, 125 lb. flanged. d. 2-1/2" and larger, Stockham G-939, 175 lb. flange. 3. Ball Valves a. 2" and smaller, Milwaukee UPBA 100. 4. Plug Valves(Natural) a. 1/2" and larger, Rockwell Nordstrom Fig. 142 or 143 lubricated plug valve,threaded or flanged as required,wrench operated. b. 1/2" through 2", two-piece full port brass ball valve, FM and AGA approved,Watts series FBV-3 or equal. 5. Balancing Valves (Hot Water Recirculation) a. Balancing valves shall be venturi orifice type,bronze or brass body globe type or with brass or chrome ball, a minimum of two differential pressure read-out ports,300 psi minimum working pressure. A compatible positive shutoff ball valve with memory stop is to be provided if not included with the balancing valve assembly. b. Balancing valves shall be Bell and Gossett circuit setter or engineer approved equal that is ANSI/NSF 61 and NSF/ANSI 372 compliant. C. Ball valves are not acceptable for balancing the hot water return system. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -17 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 d. Circuit solver balancing vales with integral ball valves shall be allowed in all recirculation systems 6. Backflow Preventers a. Backflow preventers shall be installed at all locations required by code and local authorities, at all connections to mechanical equipment, and elsewhere as shown on the Drawings. Backflow preventers shall be reduced pressure principle type and shall be a complete assembly including tight-closing shutoff valves before and after the device. The design shall include test cocks and a pressure-differential relief seating check valves. The device shall meet the requirements of and be certified by ASSE Standard 1013, AWWA Standard C-506, NSF 61-G, NSF 61, NSF 372, and USC Foundation for Cross-Connection Control. A strainer shall be located upstream of the device. Route relief outlet from cone receptor to an air gap fitting for discharge to sanitary sewer. b. Acceptable manufacturers are Ames Company, Apollo Valves, Hersey Products,Watts Regulator, and Zurn-Wilkins. 7. Class II turbine type water meters shall be installed downstream of the backflow preventer, on the domestic water supply to HVAC equipment make-up, irrigation supply, and pool/fountain supply to allow for a reduction in sewer rate charges. 8. Pressure Reducing Valves a. A duplex pressure reducing valve station shall be provided on all domestic water systems greater than 80 psi. b. Direct acting pressure reducing valves shall be used in residential, OEM, and commercial applications, where diameters smaller than 3" or less. Direct acting pressure reducing valves shall be Watts LF223S series or engineer approved equal. C. Pilot activated automatic control valves (ACV) shall be used in applications and installations that require more consistent pressure control over wide flow ranges. Projects utilizing central plants shall use ACV's. ACV shall be Watts LFF115 series or engineer approved equal. 9. Flanges a. All flanges shall be faced and drilled for not less than 125 pounds steam working pressure complete with necessary adapter and shall be of size and material of adjacent piping. All flanges shall be faced(raised or flat)to be compatible with connecting valves,equipment,etc. The connection of one raised face flange to a flat face flange shall not be permitted. 10. Unions and Joints a. Unions on drainage pipes on fixture side of traps may be slip or flanged joints with soft rubber washers or gaskets. Unions 2" and smaller on copper pipe shall be all brass with ground joint and shall be 250# copper to copper. Unions above 2" shall be flanged with gaskets. Provide union at water and gas connection to all equipment, except plumbing fixtures. 1) Unions and flanges for servicing and disconnect are not required in installations using grooved joint couplings. (The couplings shall serve as disconnect points.) b. Bathtub waste and overflow joints shall be soldered if required by local authorities to eliminate the requirement for an access panel to bathtub drain connection. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -18 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2.05 CLEANOUTS A. Cleanouts shall be provided where indicated on Drawings and elsewhere as required by code. 1. Cleanouts in pipelines shall consist of cast iron ferrule and heavy-duty cleanout plug with square head as scheduled on the Drawings. Where piping is concealed in floors or walls cleanouts shall be installed in or near surface of floor or walls and have countersunk plugs with covers. B. Cleanouts shall be provided at the base of the stack on all sanitary, waste and drainage stacks. Base of stack cleanouts on piping located within walls or partitions shall be cast iron cleanout tee with countersunk plug and chromium-plated round access cover, J.R. Smith figure 4530 or approved equal. C. Base of stack cleanouts on hotel,condominium student housing,multi-family projects,etc. shall have the stack located behind the water closet at the lowest level to allow for concealing the base of stack cleanout behind the tank of the water closet. D. Brass cleanouts shall be solid nut construction. E. Provide Owner with three(3)wrenches for removing flush cleanout plugs. 2.06 FLOOR DRAINS A. Setting Grades 1. The plumbing contractor shall obtain exact elevation of finished grade at the top of the drains prior to setting any drains. Drains installed in excess of 1/4" below the adjacent finished floor shall be removed and reset to the correct elevation. B. Drain Types 1. All floor drain outlets shall be of size noted on the Drawings. All drains shall be equal to the assembly specified. Acceptable manufacturers are as follows: Josam Co., Zurn Co., J.R. Smith Co., Wade, Watts, MIFAB, or approved equal. Drains shall be acid-resisting where indicated. 2. Floor or hub drains located within rooms considered to be a plenum are to be provided with a deep seal trap and trap guard. 3. Unless otherwise noted, acceptable manufacturers shall be Josam, Jay R. Smith, Mifab,Watts, and Zurn. C. Trap Guards 1. Drains not receiving a continuous discharge are to be provided with a Proset Trap Guard or as scheduled on plans FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -19 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 D. Roof Drains 1. nless otherwise noted, acceptable manufacturers shall be Josam, Sioux Chief,J.R. Smith,Mifab,Watts, and Zurn. 2.07 ACCESS PANELS A. Group valves together above suspended ceilings, walls, furred spaces to minimize the number of access panels, but with all valves freely accessible for maintenance. Locate all valves within F-0" of access point. B. Furnish access panels of proper size to service concealed valves and cleanouts. Panels shall be of the proper type for material in which they occur and are to be furnished by the Contractor but installed by the particular trade for the material within which the access panel is installed. C. Panels shall have flush doors with No.14 USCG steel door and trim No. 16 USCG steel frame, metal wings for keying into construction, concealed hinges, and screwdriver operated stainless steel cam lock. Panels shall be shop coated with one coat of zinc chromate primer. Valves above removable ceilings shall have tile clips by the Contractor for identification. D. Access panels are not allowed in gypsum ceilings in public spaces. 2.08 INSULATION A. The following shall be insulated: 1. All domestic cold-water piping subject to freezing. 2. All hot water and hot water return piping. 3. All horizontal storm drain piping and roof drain bodies. 4. All hot and cold-water piping exposed to areas subject to freezing, refer to "Heat Cable for Freeze Protection of Piping" under Part 2 of Section 22 00 00 for additional requirements. B. Domestic hot, cold, hot water recirculation, primary storm drainage, and waste drainage piping shall be insulated with 4 lb. density sectional fiberglass insulation with a thermal conductivity not to exceed 0.24 with white all service jacket and vapor barrier. All joints and seams shall be sealed vapor tight. All seams and staples shall then be covered with "All Service Jacket"three-inch wide tape. C. All interior horizontal storm drainage piping systems and roof drain bodies are to be insulated with blanket type glass fiber bonded with thermosetting resin with white vinyl vapor retarding facing,2" wide stapling/taping tab. D. Materials as specified in this section shall be manufactured by CertainTeed, Johns Manville,Knauf, Owens Corning or equal. Insulation thicknesses shall be as shown in the following table: FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -20 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Minimum Pi a Insulation Insulation Thickness for Pipe Sizes Fluid 1 in. 8 in. Temperature and 1-1/42-1/2 to 5 and and Piping System Types Ran e Less to 2 in. 4 in. 6 in. Large °C °F In. In. In. In. In. PLUMBING Domestic Water Ambient Ambient 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 — Domestic Hot Water and Hot Water Recirculation 43-71 110-160 1.0 1.0 1.5 1.5 — Above Grade Drains and Piping Receiving 4.5-15.5 40-60 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.5 — Condensate or Ice Machine Discharge Horizontal Storm Ambient Ambient 1.0 1.0 1.0 Drainage 2.09 HEAT TRACE CABLE FOR PROTECTION OF PIPING(FREEZING AND FOG) A. Provide electric heat tracing on all domestic water piping and sanitary traps exposed to areas subject to freezing. B. Provide heat tracing on all grease waste piping above and below ground. C. Provide a complete UL Listed, CSA Certified, or FM Approved system of heating cables, components, and controls to prevent pipes from freezing. D. Electric heat cable shall be installed linearly along the bottom of the pipe and allowance shall be made for all fittings, valves, pipe supports, etc. Cable shall be installed prior to insulation of the piping system. E. Electric cable shall be capable of maintaining a minimum water temperature of 40 degrees F at an ambient air temperature of 0 degrees F for freeze protection. F. Electric cable shall be capable of maintain a minimum water temperature of 110 degrees F for grease waste piping to keep grease from solidifying. G. The electric cable shall be the self-regulating type that responds to varying localized temperature conditions by varying the heat output along its length. This shall be accomplished by a self-regulating core, which varies its resistance continuously with changes in temperature. A constant wattage heater is unacceptable. H. Provide a thermostat control, which de-energizes the heating cable when the ambient air temperature is above 40 degrees F (adjustable). The heat cable shall be entirely self- regulating while energized in freeze protection applications. L Provide a thermostat control,which de-energizes the heating cable when the grease waste pipe temperature is above 120 degrees F(adjustable). The heat cable shall be entirely self- regulating while energized FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -21 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 J. Provide all power connection hardware, splices, end seals, etc.,to accomplish installation. All hardware shall be by the same manufacturer as the cable. K. Electric heating cable and accessories shall be UL Listed. Electric heating cable shall conform to all requirements of Division 26 -Electrical Requirements. L. Electric heating cable shall be Raychem XL-Trace or approved equal, 8 watts per foot. M. All piping shall be insulated with V thick fiberglass insulation. N. Heating-cable circuit shall be protected by a ground-fault device for equipment protection. This requirement is in accordance with section 427-22 of the NEC-2002. O. All heating cable components shall be UL Listed, CSA Certified, or FM Approved for use as part of the system to provide pipe freeze protection. Component enclosures shall be rated NEMA 4X to prevent water ingress and corrosion. Installation shall not require the installing contractor to cut into the heating-cable core to expose the bus wires. Connection systems that require the installing contractor to strip the bus wires or that use crimps or terminal blocks, shall not be acceptable. 2.10 PIPE SUPPORTS AND HANGERS A. All piping shall be supported by means of hanger rods and pipe hangers from roof or floor structure using supplementary steel and/or lagbolts. Water supply pipe connecting to pumps, equipment, fixtures or fixture supplies shall be made rigid at the connection point. 1. Piping shall be supported from (new) (existing) concrete construction with Anvil International Fig. 282 inserts or drilled expansion anchors. 2. Piping shall be supported from new steel construction with Anvil International Fig. 131 beam clamp,Fig. 61 beam clamp, Fig. 66 welded beam attachment or Fig. 60 washer plate with all-thread rod. 3. Piping and brackets shall be supported from hollow block construction using drilled masonry holes and cadmium plated toggle bolts. 4. Piping shall be supported from wood truss construction with plated lag screws or bolts,B-3227 and B-3228. 5. Pipe supports shall not be attached to floor or roof deck. 6. Acceptable manufacturers are: Anvil,B-Line and FNW. B. Unless otherwise noted, hangers and clamps shall be as listed below (all model numbers are B-Line Systems): 1. Cast iron/steel pipe-133 100 or 133109. 2. Insulated water pipe - B3100 or B3109 with B3151 placed over insulation protection saddle. 3. Uninsulated bare copper pipe -B3170 CTC plastic coated. 4. All supports and mounting hardware are to be galvanized, cadmium plated, or factory enamel painted. 5. All supports on insulated piping systems shall be sized to fit outside the insulation and shall be provided with insulation inserts and shields at each hanger or support point. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -22 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Branch piping to fixtures in chases shall be supported with plastic or copper clamp type supports: 1. B-Line Ruffin series. 2. Holdrite Systems. D. Maximum spacing between pipe hangers shall be: 1. Steel pipe a. 1-1/4" and smaller: 6'-0" b. 1-1/2"-2": 8'-0" C. 2-1/2" and larger: 10'-0" 2. Cast iron soil pipe: 2" and larger: 10'-0" 3. Copper tubing: a. 1/2"— 1-1/4": 5'-0" b. 1-1/2"-2": 8'-0" C. 2-1/2" and larger: 10'-0" 4. PVC/CPVC and all plastic pipe: a. 1-1/4" and smaller: 3'-0" b. 1-1/2" and larger: 4'-0" 5. Pex Piping a. Crosslinked Polyethylene PEX Pipe: Install hangers for PEX tubing in strict accordance with manufactures instructions. b. Horizontal PEX-a Piping Hangers: Install CTS hangers suitable for PEX- a piping in compliance with the Uponor Commercial Piping Pocket Guide (2017) and local codes, with the following maximum spacing: C. For IPC Jurisdictions: 3 inch (75mm) and below: Maximum span, 32 inches (0.81 m). d. For UPC Jurisdictions:1 inch (25 mm) and below: Maximum span, 32 inches (0.81 m). C. For UPC Jurisdictions: 1-1/4 inch(31 mm)and above:Maximum span,48 inches(1.2 m). f. Note: The above maximum hanger spacing requirements may be extended with the use of a continuous support channel such as Uponor PEX-a Pipe Support. 6. Horizontal PEX-a Piping with PEX-a Pipe Channel: Install hangers for PEX-a piping with horizontal support channel in accordance with local jurisdiction and manufacturer's recommendations,with the following maximum spacing: a. 1/2 inch(12.7 mm)and above: Maximum span, 8 feet(2.4 m). 7. Vertical PEX-a Piping: Support PEX-a piping with maximum spacing of 5 feet (L5 in). 8. PEX-a Riser Supports:Install CTS riser clamps at the base of each floor and at the top of every other floor for domestic hot-water systems. Install mid-story guides between each floor. Install CTS riser clamps at the base of each floor and at the top of every fourth floor for domestic cold-water systems.Install mid-story guides. E. At least one hanger shall occur within T-0" from where change in direction takes place. Where pipes extend down or up to other floors,pipe clamps shall be provided on each floor FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -23 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 to support vertical risers. Vertical piping drops shall be rigidly anchored to structure at the top and bottom offsets and at eight-foot increments along the vertical drop. F. Special approved hangers that require less installation space are to be used where required due to ceiling space limitations. G. All connections to pumps and other vibrating machinery shall be provided with stainless steel braided flexible hose connections. Connections to potable water systems shall meet ANSI/NSF 61 design standards. H. Expansive Soils. For areas with expansive/thrusting soils, pipe isolation underground piping shall incorporate plumbing void form system. System shall incorporate 1/2" polypropylene wall panels, 3/8" #3 rebar joining system. Piping will be supported by stainless steel clevis or roller type hanger using stainless steel all thread rod washers and nuts. See drawings for detail. Note: Cellular core is specifically not permitted for this application. 1. All installations shall be in accordance with ASTM F2536. 2. Pipe hangers shall be at 4'-0"centers maximum. 3. Pipe hangers shall be clamp on type hanger and shall match pipe size. 4. Hangers shall be made of hot dipped galvanized steel or stainless steel. 2.11 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS A. All vertical DWV piping stacks in buildings shall have expansion fittings to allow for building shrinkage compensation. The fitting shall be equal to IPEX piston style expansion joint HxH 21381-AWBC series. Expansion fitting shall be documented specifically for shrinkage of building materials and thermal expansion/contraction. 1. Wood framed buildings shall have a fitting in the first-floor ceiling space and every other floor thereafter. 2. Concrete buildings shall have a fitting in the first-floor ceiling space and every 8 floors thereafter. 3. All buildings stacks shall utilize riser pipe clamps at each floor. B. All water piping shall have expansion loops installed in the system for thermal expansion and contraction. Expansion/contraction shall be compensated for using Z-bends, U-bends, expansion joints,and/or flexible connectors. Installation size and location shall be dependent on piping system material used. Refer to manufacturer installation instructions and expansion detail on drawings. 2.12 WATER HEATERS—ELECTRIC A. Provide electric storage type water heaters as specified on the Drawings. B. Water heater shall carry a UL certification for 150 psi working pressure, an ASME temperature and pressure relief valve (T and P) sized for the heater, vacuum relief valve, immersion thermostat,glass lined tank,temperature gauge on outlet,and manual reset high limit control. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -24 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Provide a metal drain pan and 3" high concrete housekeeping pad at each water heater. Water heaters greater than 10 gallons shall be floor mounted. D. Provide a combination ball/relief valve on the domestic water supply sized as indicated on the Drawings, Watts series LFBRV or approved equal. E. Water heaters that are not supplied with integral heat traps and serving non-circulating systems shall be provided with heat traps on the supply and discharge piping associated with the equipment. A check valve and expansion tank can be utilized in lieu of the supply side heat trap. F. The water heater shall carry a five-year minimum limited warranty for tank leakage. G. Electric water heaters shall be as manufactured by: 1. A.O. Smith 2. Rheem 3. Bradford White 4. HTP 2.13 WATER HEATERS—GAS STORAGE TYPE A. Provide gas storage type water heaters as specified on the Drawings. B. Water heater shall carry an A.G.A. certification for 150 psi working pressure, an ASME temperature and pressure relief valve (T and P) sized for the heater, vacuum relief valve, immersion thermostat,glass lined tank,temperature gauge on outlet,and manual reset high limit control. C. Provide a 3" high concrete housekeeping pad at water heaters, pad is to be 3" larger than the footprint of the heater. Water heaters greater than 10 gallons shall be floor mounted. D. Provide a combination ball/relief valve on the domestic water supply sized as indicated on the Drawings, Watts series LFBRV or approved equal. E. Water heaters that are not supplied with integral heat traps and serving non-circulating systems shall be provided with heat traps on the supply and discharge piping associated with the equipment. A check valve and expansion tank can be utilized in lieu of the supply side heat trap. F. Gas-fired water heaters shall be as manufactured by: 1. A.O. Smith 2. PVI 3. Lochinvar 4. State 2.14 WATER HEATERS—GAS FIRED—INSTANTANEOUS FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -25 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Provide instantaneous gas water heaters and separate storage tanks as specified on the Drawings. B. Water heater shall have an ASME temperature and pressure relief valve (T and P), sized for the heater,vacuum relief valve,factory mounted circulating pump, temperature gauges on inlet and outlet, high limit control and low water cut-off. C. Water heaters are to be 96%minimum efficiency. D. Provide a 3" high concrete housekeeping pad at each water heater and storage tank assembly. Pad is to be 3" larger than the footprint of the equipment. E. Provide a check valve and expansion tank on the domestic water supply to each water heater system. F. For condensing heaters, a condensate neutralization kit shall be included and installed. G. The exact pipe sizing and arrangement between the water heaters and tanks shall be installed in compliance with the approved manufacturer's installation requirements. The contractor is to submit the proposed layout to the water heater manufacturer for confirmation of the water heater pump size and the minimum pipe sizing between the heater(s) and tank(s) and provide as required. H. Gas fired water heaters shall be as manufactured by: 1. A.O. Smith Circulating W.H. series 2. Intellihot 3. Lochinvar Armor series 4. Rinnai 2.15 FLASHING A. Vent pipes passing through roof shall be flashed watertight. B. The roof connections shall meet the approval of the manufacturer of the roofing materials and shall comply with the roof bond requirements. C. All vent piping shall be offset above ceilings or in attic space and as shown on the Drawings to penetrate roofs on the least visible sides of building. 2.16 FLOOR,WALL AND CEILING PLATES A. Furnish and install heavy gauge chromium plated steel wall and ceiling plates on all exposed pipes in finished areas where they pass through walls, ceilings, etc. Plates shall be of type that will remain permanently in position and where pipes are insulated they shall be of size necessary to cover insulated pipe. 2.17 GALVANIC PROTECTION FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -26 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Connections between dissimilar metal water pipe shall be made with dielectric unions or flange waterways so there will be no contact between the metals or with insulating bushings. Dielectric waterways shall have temperature and pressure rating equal to or greater than that specified for the connecting piping. Waterways shall have metal connections on both ends suited to match connecting piping.Dielectric waterways shall be internally lined with an insulator specifically designed to prevent current flow between dissimilar metals. Dielectric flanges shall meet the performance requirements described herein for dielectric waterways. Connecting joints between plastic and metallic pipe shall be made with transition fitting for the specific purpose. B. Insulate joints between dissimilar metals with suitable isolation gasket and bolts with fiber ferrules and washers and/or suitable armored insulation fittings by Clearflow, Crane,Capital, Mifab, or Epco, 2.18 WATER LEAK PROTECTION A. The contractor shall install an electronically actuated resettable shutoff valve on the cold water supply of the water heater. The electronically actuated valve shall be a full flow valve that closes upon detection of water at the water detector pad supplied with the valve. Lead Free* valves shall be constructed using Lead Free* materials. Lead Free* Water Detector Shutoff valves shall comply with state codes and standards, where applicable, requiring reduced lead content.A water detector pad shall be installed on the floor beneath the water heater or in a drain pan supplied by the contractor. The water detector pad shall be supplied with an integral cable with connector to connect to the valve control unit. The water detector pad shall be an electronic sensing device. The electronically actuated valve shall act to shut offboth the water supply and the power to the water heater simultaneously upon detection of water. A visual and audible indication of actuation shall be initiated and normally open contacts suitable for connection to remote monitored alarm actuation shall close. B. Shutoff detector and valve shall be Watts LFWDS series system or engineer approved equal. 2.19 PIPING SYSTEMS IDENTIFICATION A. A marker showing the service and an arrow indicating the direction of flow shall be applied on all of the following piping systems applicable to the project installed under this section of the Specifications: 1. Acid vent piping 2. Acid waste piping 3. Compressed air piping 4. Domestic hot, cold and hot water recirculation water piping 5. Fuel oil piping 6. Gas piping 7. Primary and emergency storm drainage piping 8. Sanitary, waste and vent piping 9. Softened water piping 10. Steam piping 11. Vacuum piping FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -27 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Piping identification shall be applied on all piping systems in areas of exposed construction and in areas with accessible or lay-in ceilings. The piping shall be labeled at each wall and floor penetration (both sides), and at connections to equipment. In addition, straight runs of piping shall be labeled at intervals not greater than 25 feet. C. The letter size and background color shall conform to the Identification of Pipe System ANSI A-13-1. The vinyl plastic markers shall be as manufactured by Seton Name-Plate Company,W. H. Brady Company, or Westline products. D. Each valve in the Plumbing and Fire Protection systems is to be provided with an individually numbered valve tag. E. Valve tags are to be brass or plastic laminate, 1-1/2" minimum diameter with brass chain and hook for securing to the valve. F. Valve tags will include a "P" or "FP" lettering designation to indicate the appropriate system. Numbering shall be consecutive for each service of either the Plumbing or Fire Protection systems. G. A printed list or schematic drawing shall be compiled for each system indicating the location and detailed description of the system or equipment served. H. One copy of each list shall be framed and mounted at the location designated by the Building Engineer. An additional copy of each list is to be included in the Operations and Maintenance Manual. 2.20 EQUIPMENT LABELING A. All equipment shall be labeled. This shall include all pumps,water heaters, storage tanks, and other similar equipment. B. Equipment labeling shall be one of the following,unless noted or specified otherwise. 1. Permanently attached plastic laminate signs with 1"high lettering. 2. Stencil painted identification,2"high letters,with standard fiberboard stencils and standard black(or other appropriate color) exterior stencil enamel. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All equipment and materials shall be completely installed, adjusted, and fully operational with all accessories and connections. B. Equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. shall fit into the spaces provided in the building and shall be installed at such times and in such a manner as to avoid damage and as required by the job progress. The Contractor shall coordinate work with other trades and locate work described herein to avoid interferences with structural, electrical and architectural work. Equipment,accessories and similar items requiring normal servicing or maintenance shall be accessible. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -28 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. The Engineer reserves the right to direct the removal of any item which, in his opinion, does not present an orderly and reasonably neat or workmanlike appearance. Such removal and replacement shall be done when directed by the Engineer and without additional cost to the Owner. D. Mounting heights,unless otherwise noted, are to the finished bottom of the device. E. All work shall be designed and installed to comply with the requirements for the seismic design category and use group for the area in which the building is constructed. 3.02 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING A. The Contractor shall perform all excavation to install the work herein specified and as indicated on the Drawings. During excavation,material for backfilling shall be piled back from the banks of the trench to avoid overloading and to prevent slides and cave-ins. All excavated materials not to be used for backfill shall be removed and disposed of by the Contractor. Grading shall be done to prevent surface water from flowing into trenches and others excavation and any water accumulating therein shall be removed by pumping. All excavation shall be made by open cut. No tunneling or boring shall be done except under pavement. B. The bottom of the trenches shall be graded to provide uniform bearing and support for conduits, cables, or duct bank on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length. Overdepths shall be backfilled with loose, granular,moist earth, and tamped in 12" layers. Remove unstable soil that is not capable of supporting equipment or installation and replace with specified material for a minimum of 12"below invert of equipment or installation. C. The trenches shall be backfilled with the excavated materials approved for backfilling,non- cohesive consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand and gravel or soft shale, free from large clods of earth and stones, deposited in 6" layers and tamped until the crown of the pipe is covered by a minimum of 6" of tamped earth. The backfill under and beside the pipe shall be compacted for pipe support. Backfill shall be brought up evenly on both sides of the pipe so that the pipe remains aligned. In instances where the manufacturer's installation instructions for materials are more restrictive than those prescribed by the code, the material shall be installed in accordance with the more restrictive requirement. The backfilling shall be carried on simultaneously on both sides of the trench so that injurious pressures do not occur. The compaction of the filled trench shall be at least equal to 95% of the maximum density as determined by the Standard Proctor Test. Settling the backfill with water will not be permitted. Reopen any trenches not meeting compaction requirements or where settlement occurs, refill, compact, and restore the surface to the grade and compaction indicated, mounded over and smoothed off. A metallic lined underground warning tape shall be provided 12" below finished grade. The tape shall be identified as to the type of line per ANSI standard nomenclature and color. D. Provide a layer of sand at least 6" deep under all plastic pipe installed in soil. Bell holes shall be excavated to ensure that the sewer pipe rests for its entire length upon a solid trench bottom. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -29 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. Perform excavation and backfilling work in accordance with applicable portions of the earthwork section. 3.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS A. During construction, all equipment shall be properly protected against damage, defacing and freezing with shipping cartons,plastic sheeting, shipping covers, etc. B. All open ends of piping and equipment shall be sealed with nipples and caps, plugs, test plugs until final connection to system is made. C. All equipment and piping shall be protected to prevent entrance of foreign matter and debris by covering exposed openings during construction. D. Handle and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's and supplier's recommendations and in manner to prevent damage to materials during storage and handling. Replace damaged materials. E. Equipment and materials shall not be installed until such time as the environmental conditions of the job site are suitable to protect the equipment or materials. Equipment or materials damaged or which are subjected to these elements are unacceptable and shall be removed from the premises and replaced. 3.04 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Work shall include all cutting, patching, masonry and carpentry required as part of the equipment installation when not provided by other sections of these specifications. B. All work shall be performed as specified under architectural specification section for cutting and patching. 3.05 CONCRETE WORK A. Construct curbs,pads,vaults and similar supports for equipment where required. B. Provide 3" thick housekeeping pads at floor mounted equipment a minimum of 3" larger than the entire area occupied by equipment. Dowel pads to structural slab. C. Perform concrete work in accordance with applicable portions of Concrete sections. Minimum compressive strength of concrete shall be same as specified for slabs on grade. 3.06 CLEANING A. At all times, the premises shall be kept reasonably clean and free of undue amounts of waste, trash and debris by periodic cleaning and removal. After completion, all foreign material, trash and other debris shall be removed from the job site. B. After all equipment has been installed, but prior to testing and balancing, all equipment, piping, etc. shall be thoroughly cleaned both inside and out. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -30 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. After testing and balancing of systems as specified and just prior to Owner review and acceptance, all systems shall be finally cleaned and shall be left ready for use. 3.07 PAINTING A. Painting, except as otherwise specified, will be done under another section of the specifications, but the Contractor shall leave all surfaces of work free of rust, dirt and grease. B. The Contractor shall touch-up to match original finish any equipment scratched in shipment or installation. Touch-up painting of plumbing equipment shall be part of the plumbing work. C. Provide one coat of rust preventive primer on all new structural steel supports and new ferrous surfaces which are not galvanized(this includes piping systems). Rust preventative painting shall be part of the plumbing work. D. All painting and coating shall match the original and shall conform to the requirements detailed in other sections of these specifications. Do not paint over nameplates on equipment, nonferrous hardware, accessories or trim. 3.08 EQUIPMENT SUPPORT A. Major equipment supports (framed structural openings, etc.) shall be furnished and installed by others as shown on the Drawings. The plumbing work shall include, the furnishings and installation of all miscellaneous equipment supports, structural members, rods, clamps and hangers required to provide adequate support of all equipment. B. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, all equipment, piping, and accessories shall be installed level, square, and plumb. C. All equipment,piping,etc.supported by structural joists shall be supported by the top chord only of such joists. Hangers shall not be attached to the bottom chord of any joists. 3.09 PIPE PENETRATIONS A. Sleeves shall be installed in all masonry or concrete walls, floors, roofs, etc. for pipe penetrations. Sleeves for pipe shall be Schedule 40 black steel. Sleeves shall be sized to provide a minimum of 1/4" clearance between the sleeve and pipe. B. The 1/4" minimum clearance shall be provided between the sleeve and the insulation on insulated piping systems. A gap of the insulation shall be omitted at each side of a rated wall penetration to allow for the required fire stopping. C. As far as possible, all pipe penetrations shall be provided for at the time of masonry or concrete construction. Where drilling is required, only core drills shall be used. Star drills shall not be used. D. All pipes penetrating walls or floors of any construction shall be installed with escutcheon plates on both sides of the penetration securely fastened to the wall or floor. In exposed FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -31 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 areas, escutcheon plates shall be chrome plated. All escutcheon plates shall be sized to completely conceal the penetration. E. Pipe penetrations through exterior walls shall be sealed watertight with expandable link type seals by Thunderline,Linkseal or Engineer approved equal. F. All pipe and duct penetrations of fire, smoke, or fire and smoke-rated assemblies shall be fire-stopped as required to retain the integrity of the UL rated assembly. Fire barrier products shall be as manufactured by Tremco, Hilti, 3M, Metacaulk,Nelson, or approved equal. 3.10 FLASHING A. All piping penetrating roofs shall be flashed in an approved manner, shall be watertight, and shall conform to the requirements detailed in other sections of these specifications. B. Flashing for piping shall be sheet lead of not less than 6 pounds per square foot, shall have a base not less than 2 square feet, and shall extend up over and into the open end of the pipe. All flashing shall be properly caulked and sealed. 3.11 PIPING SYSTEMS A. Water Piping- General 1. Pipe used in piping assembly must be clean of dirt and obstructions and shall have ends square and reamed before putting into the fittings. 2. All piping must be true and plumb with proper pitch for draining of the soldering. 3. All domestic water lines serving flush valve fixtures and washing machines shall be protected from water hammer by shock absorbers. Where shock absorbers are required they shall be as manufactured by Josam Mfg. Company, J. R. Smith, Sioux Chief Ind., Precision Plumbing or Zurn Mfg. Co. and shall conform to the Plumbing and Drainage Institute published requirements. 4. All connections to water heaters, tanks and equipment shall be made with unions or flanges. Insulated piping systems shall be installed to provide space for insulation. 5. Grooved joint shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's written recommendations. Grooved ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, or roll marks. The gasket shall be molded and produced by the coupling manufacturer of an elastomer suitable for the intended service. The coupling manufacturer's factory trained representative shall provide on-site training for the contractor's field personnel in the use of grooving tools and installation of product. The representative shall periodically visit the job site to ensure best practices in grooved product installation are being followed. (A distributor's representative is not considered qualified to conduct the training.) 6. When installing Aquatherm Green piping for all Potable and Non-Potable systems Contractor shall have received installation training from either the pipe/fitting manufacturer or designated representative before the project starts and shall furnish a copy of the "training documentation" within the project submittal for each installing individual showing current installation training. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -32 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 7. When installing CPVC for all Potable and Non-Potable systems Contractor shall have received installation training from either the pipe/fitting manufacturer or designated representative before the project starts and shall furnish a copy of the "training documentation"within the project submittal for each installing individual showing current installation training. 8. When installing Pex piping for all Potable and Non-Potable systems Contractor shall have received installation training from either the pipe/fitting manufacturer or designated representative before the project starts and shall furnish a copy of the "training documentation"within the project submittal for each installing individual showing current installation training. 9. When installing heavy duty couplings, install per manufacturer's installation instructions. All couplings shall be installed with a torque wrench and to the manufacturer's torque requirements. B. Sanitary Waste,Vent, Indirect Waste and Storm Drain Piping- General 1. Pipes shall be plumb and parallel to building walls, beams and columns unless otherwise indicated. All horizontal lines are to be evenly pitched and properly secured with iron or steel hangers, unless noted otherwise. A pitch of 1/4 inch per lineal foot shall be maintained on all soil, and waste lines, wherever possible. Where long runs of piping require less pitch due to space restrictions, a less pitch shall be allowed on main lines four (4) inches and over in size, but in no event should any pipeline have a slope less than 1/8 inch per foot. 2. All soil and waste pipes shall be extended out full size through the roof or connected to a common vent as shown on the Drawings. 3. Main vent stacks shall run parallel to the soil pipe stacks and shall connect to the vent continuation of the soil stack at least three(3)feet above the rim of the highest plumbing fixtures on the stack. Vent stacks shall also be connected at the base or horizontal offset of the soil stack through a Y and 1/8 bend or an upright Y fittings. Offsets in vent pipe shall be made with 45-degree fittings wherever possible. Horizontal vent lines shall pitch toward the waste line. 4. Threaded joints shall have American National taper screw thread with graphite and oil compound applied to the male threads. 5. Sanitary and vent stacks are to be run straight and plumb and all offsets shall be made at an angle of not less than 45 degrees. 6. All existing sanitary and vent systems re-used within the buildings shall be inspected and rodded or pressure flushed to restore the piping to full flow capacity. C. Mounting heights, unless otherwise noted, are to the centerline of the equipment and/or device. 3.12 TESTING OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. General 1. All piping systems shall be subjected, before being insulated or concealed, to testing with water or air as noted and shall hold tight at the pressure head stated for the time interval required without adding air or water. While any system is being tested required head or pressure shall be maintained until all joints are inspected. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -33 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. All tests shall be witnessed by the inspector having jurisdiction and the Owner's Representative, with a minimum 48-hour notice given these authorities. 3. All equipment,material,labor and testing mediums required for testing any of the various systems or any part thereof shall be furnished by the Contractor. 4. All connected equipment, accessories, etc. shall be isolated from piping systems prior to testing. B. Sanitary Piping Systems 1. Water test shall be applied to these drainage systems either in their entirety or in sections as required, after rough piping has been installed. If the system is tested in sections, each opening shall be tightly closed except the highest opening in the section under test. All sections shall be tested with a minimum of 10 feet of head. In testing successive sections, at least the upper 10 feet of the next section shall be tested so that no joint of piping in the building shall be submitted to a test of less than 10 feet of head. The water shall be kept in the system for at least 30 minutes before inspection starts; the system shall then be made tight at all points. 2. Any points of the drainage systems to be tested with air instead of water shall be made by attaching an air compressor testing apparatus to any suitable opening and after closing all other inlets or outlets, forcing air into the system until there is a minimum gauge pressure of 5 psi. This pressure shall be held without the introduction of additional air for a period of at least 30 minutes. 3. Exterior connections shall be tested as part of the interior systems. C. Interior Water Piping Systems 1. Upon completion of the entire water supply system or a section of it as required,it shall be tested prior to connection of fixtures and proved tight under a water/air pressure of 150 psi. Pressure shall hold for a period of one hour without introducing additional water/air. Water used for testing shall be from a potable source of supply. Defective joints or piping shall be replaced as required and all piping shall be retested. D. Exterior Water Piping System 1. All exterior domestic water piping shall be tested to 150 psi for a period of two hours. E. Compressed Air System 1. All compressed air piping shall be tested to 150 psi for a period of two hours. F. Defective Work 1. If inspection or tests show defects, such defective work or material shall be replaced and inspection and tests shall be repeated. All repairs to piping shall be made with new material. Caulking of screwed joints or holes is not acceptable. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -34 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 G. Additional Tests 1. Provide all additional tests such as smoke or pressure tests as required by the regulations or as directed by authorities malting the inspection. 2. Provide for any repeated test as directed by the Owner's Representative, to make all systems tight as required. 3. Visual inspections of joints,valves,etc. shall be made as directed by the Engineer. 3.13 DISINFECTION OF WATER SYSTEM—INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR A. Prior to project completion, all potable water piping systems shall be disinfected per local code requirements. B. Whenever the authority having jurisdiction does not specify disinfection procedures, the new water piping system shall be thoroughly disinfected with a solution containing not less than 50 parts per million of available chlorine. The chlorinating material shall be either liquid chlorine or sodium hydrochloride solution and shall be introduced into the system and drawn to all points in the system. The disinfection solution shall be allowed to remain in the system for a period of eight hours, during which period all valves and faucets shall be opened and closed several times. After disinfection,the solution shall be flushed from the system with clear water until the residual chlorine content is not greater than 0.2 parts per million. C. This work is to be supervised or perforined by an approved chemical testing laboratory and results sent to Engineer or his representative for verification. 3.14 DOMESTIC HOT WATER SYSTEM BALANCING A. The test and balance contractor shall provide testing, adjusting and balancing of the hot water system, once the system is fully installed and operational. Preliminary and final reports shall be prepared and issued to the General Contractor,Architect and Engineer. B. Preparation of the hot water system for balancing: 1. Confirm outlet temperature of the system at water heaters and/or storage tanks. 2. Verify recirculation pump operation and rotation. 3. Confirm/adjust setpoint of each individual riser balancing valve to flow a minimum of 0.5 gpm or as otherwise noted on the documents. C. The test and balance report shall indicate the following: 1. Pressure, temperature and flow in gpm at the discharge side of each balancing valve referencing the valve tag number. 2. Pressure, temperature and flow in gpm at the suction side of each recirculating PUMP. D. Copies of the final approved balancing report are to be included in the O and M manuals as noted in"Permits"under Part 1 of Section 22 00 00. 3.15 FIXTURE CONNECTIONS AND SUPPORTS FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -35 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Wall fixtures shall be hung by means of carrier type fixture supports as manufactured by J.R. Smith, Josam, Mifab, Wade or Zuiii. 3.16 SLEEVES A. Furnish and install pipe sleeves around all piping passing through masonry walls, floors, beams, etc. Sleeves shall be of such diameter as to allow pipe to pass through easily and permit expansion and contraction of pipe. Where pipes are insulated, the sleeves shall be of such diameter as to allow the insulated pipe to pass through easily. The sleeves shall be placed before the pouring of concrete and before construction of walls. Sleeves for vertical risers shall extend a minimum of 1" above the floor slab. Sleeves to outside walls below grade shall be caulked or provided with expansion type mechanical seals as required to make them waterproof. 3.17 INSTALLATION OF UNIONS A. Unions shall be located as shown on plans and as required by equipment so piping and equipment can be easily dismantled. Unions shall not be installed in any location where they are not readily accessible. 3.18 TRAPS A. All fixtures,drains, etc. shall be provided with traps,unless specifically shown or specified otherwise. Traps shall be set in an upright position, level and true, and shall be vented as shown and required. All exposed traps shall be provided with cleanout plugs. 3.19 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION A. Furnish and install cleanouts in soil and waste lines as required by Code and/or job conditions, as shown on the Drawings and as follows: At or near the end of each branch and main drainage line,horizontal lines at intervals as required by code. All cleanouts shall be readily accessible,with plugs easily removable for cleanout lines. Cleanouts at the base of vertical piping shall be held within 2'-0" from finished floor unless otherwise indicated. 3.20 FLASHING INSTALLATION A. All pipes passing through roofs shall be flashed in an approved manner. Flashing shall be watertight. B. Roof connections shall meet the approval of the manufacturer of roofing material and shall comply with roof bond requirements. 3.21 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIAL PROTECTION A. During construction all equipment shall be properly protected against damage, defacing and freezing with shipping cartons,plastic sheeting, shipping covers. B. All open ends of piping and equipment shall be sealed with nipples and caps, plugs, test plugs until connection to system is made. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -36 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.22 SPACE REQUIREMENTS A. Piping, apparatus and equipment shall fit into the space provided in the building or within the property and shall be installed at such time and in such manner as to avoid damage to the building structure or property as required by the job progress. Equipment, apparatus and accessories requiring normal servicing or maintenance shall be made easily accessible. END OF SECTION 22 00 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 00 00 -37 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 22 08 00 - COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section. B. The OPR and BOD documentation are included by reference for information only. C. Division 01 section "Sustainable Design Requirements" for additional LEED requirements. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This section includes commissioning process requirements for Plumbing systems, assemblies, and equipment. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for general commissioning process requirements. 1.03 DESCRIPTION A. Refer to Division 01 Section"General Commissioning Requirements" for the description of commissioning. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Division 01 Section"General Commissioning Requirements"for definitions. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 01 Section"General Commissioning Requirements"for CxA's role. 1. Refer to Division 01 Section "Submittals" for specific requirements. In addition, provide the following: a. Certificates of completion of installation,prestart, and startup activities. b. O&M manuals C. Test reports 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test Equipment Calibration Requirements: Contractors will comply with test manufacturer's calibration procedures and intervals. Recalibrate test instruments immediately after instruments have been repaired resulting from being dropped or damaged. Affix calibration tags to test instruments. Furnish calibration records to CxA upon request. 1.07 COORDINATION FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 08 00-1 MAY 2, 2023 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for requirements pertaining to coordination during the commissioning process. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 TEST EQUIPMENT A. All standard testing equipment required to perform startup, initial checkout and functional performance testing shall be provided by the contractor for the equipment being tested. For example, the plumbing contractor of Division 22 shall ultimately be responsible for all standard testing equipment for the plumbing system in Division 22, except for equipment specific to and used by TAB in their commissioning responsibilities. B. Special equipment, tools and instruments (specific to a piece of equipment and only available from vendor) required for testing shall be included in the base bid price to the Owner and left on site. C. Proprietary test equipment and software required by any equipment manufacturer for programming and/or start-up, whether specified or not, shall be provided by the manufacturer of the equipment. Manufacturer shall provide the test equipment, demonstrate its use, and assist in the commissioning process as needed. Proprietary test equipment(and software) shall become the property of the Owner upon completion of the commissioning process. D. All testing equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system performance with the tolerances specified in the Specifications. If not otherwise noted, the following minimum requirements apply: Temperature sensors and digital thermometers shall have a certified calibration within the past year to an accuracy of 0.5°F and a resolution of+ or - 0.1'F. Pressure sensors shall have an accuracy of+ or - 2.0% of the value range being measured (not full range of meter) and have been calibrated within the last year. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS A. With assistance from the installing contractors, the CxA will prepare Pre-Functional Checklists for all commissioned components, equipment, and systems B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Contractor will provide a copy of O&M literature within 45 days of each submittal acceptance for use during the commissioning process for all commissioned equipment and systems. 2. The CxA will review the O&M literature once for conformance to project requirements. 3. The CxA will receive a copy of the final approved O&M literature once corrections have been made by the contractor. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 08 00-2 MAY 2, 2023 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Demonstration and Training: 1. Contractor will provide demonstration and training as required by the specifications. 2. A training agenda for each training session must be submitted to the CxA one(1) week prior the training session. 3. The CxA shall be notified at least 72 hours in advance of scheduled tests. A copy of the test record shall be provided to the CxA, Owner, and Architect. 4. Engage a Factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specific equipment. 5. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping,trouble shooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment. 6. Review data in O&M Manuals. 3.02 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Perform commissioning tests at the direction of the CxA. B. Attend construction phase controls coordination meetings. C. Participate in plumbing systems, assemblies, equipment, and component maintenance orientation and inspection as directed by the CxA. D. Provide information requested by the CxA for final commissioning documentation. E. Include requirements for submittal data, operation and maintenance data, and training in each purchase order or sub-contract written. F. Prepare preliminary schedule for plumbing system orientations and inspections, operation and maintenance manual submissions, training sessions, equipment start-up, testing and balancing and task completion for owner. Distribute preliminary schedule to commissioning team members. G. Update schedule as required throughout the construction period. H. During the startup and initial checkout process, execute the related portions of the prefunctional checklists for all commissioned equipment. I. Assist the CxA in all verification and functional performance tests. J. Provide measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data, and provide data acquisition equipment to record data for the complete range of testing for the required test period. K. Gather operation and maintenance literature on all equipment, and assemble in binders as required by the specifications. Submit to OR(45) days after submittal acceptance. L. Coordinate with the CxA to provide a minimum of two (2) weeks advance notice so that verifying of equipment and system start-up and testing can begin. M. Participate in, and schedule vendors and contractors to participate in the training sessions. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 08 00-3 MAY 2, 2023 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 N. Provide written notification to the CM/GC and CxA that the following work has been completed in accordance with the contract documents, and that the equipment, systems, and sub-system are operating as required. 1. Plumbing equipment including domestic water heaters, pumps, plumbing fixtures, and all other equipment furnished under this Division. O. The equipment supplier shall document the performance of his equipment. P. Provide training of the Owner's operating staff using expert qualified personnel, as specified. Q. Equipment Suppliers 1. Provide all requested submittal data, including detailed start-up procedures and specific responsibilities of the Owner,to keep warranties in force. 2. Assist in equipment testing per agreements with contractors. 3. Provide information requested by CxA regarding equipment sequence of operation and testing procedures. R. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for additional contractor responsibilities. 3.03 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for Owner's responsibilities. 3.04 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for Design Professional's responsibilities. 3.05 CxA'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for CxA's responsibilities. 3.06 TESTING PREPARATION A. Certify in writing to the CxA that plumbing systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and started and are operating according to the Contract Documents. B. Certify in writing that testing procedures have been completed and that testing reports have been submitted, discrepancies corrected, and corrective work approved. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 08 00-4 MAY 2, 2023 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Set systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested (e.g., normal shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position, unoccupied cycle, emergency power, and alarm conditions). D. Inspect and verify the position of each device and interlock identified on checklists. E. Check safety cutouts, alarms, and interlocks with smoke control and life-safety systems during each mode of operation. F. Testing Instrumentation: Install measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data as directed by the CxA. 3.07 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to perform commissioning test at the direction of the CxA. B. Test all operating modes, interlocks, control responses, and responses to abnormal or emergency conditions. C. The CxA along with the plumbing contractor shall prepare testing plans,procedures, and checklists for plumbing systems, subsystems, and equipment. D. Tests will be performed using design conditions whenever possible. E. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the plumbing system, document the deficiency and report it to the Owner. After deficiencies are resolved,reschedule tests. 3.08 PLUMBING SYSTEMS, SUBSYSTEMS,AND EQUIPMENT TESTING PROCEDURES A. Equipment Testing and Acceptance Procedures: Testing requirements are specified in individual Division 22 sections. Provide submittals, test data, inspector record, and certifications to the CxA. B. Vibration and Sound Tests: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of vibration isolation and seismic controls. C. The work included in the commissioning process involves a complete and thorough evaluation of the operation and performance of all components, systems and sub-systems. The following equipment and systems shall be evaluated: 1. Refer to Commissioning Plan for scope of work. 3.09 DEFICIENCIES/NON-CONFORMANCE, COST OF RETESTING, FAILURE DUE TO MANUFACTURER DEFECT A. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for requirements pertaining to deficiencies/non-conformance, cost of retesting, or failure due to manufacturer defect. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 08 00-5 MAY 2, 2023 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.10 APPROVAL A. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for approval procedures. 3.11 DEFERRED TESTING A. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for requirements pertaining to deferred testing. 3.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall conform to Contract Documents requirements as stated in Division 01. B. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for the AE and CxA roles in the Operation and Maintenance Manual contribution, review and approval process. C. An updated as-built version of the control drawings and sequences of operation shall be included in the final controls O&M manual submittal. 3.13 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL A. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for requirements pertaining to training. B. Training shall start with classroom sessions, if necessary, followed by hands on training on each piece of equipment, which shall illustrate the various modes of operation, including startup, shutdown, fire/smoke alarm,power failure, etc. C. Plumbing Contractor. The mechanical contractor shall have the following training responsibilities: 1. Provide the CxA with a training plan two (2)weeks before the planned training. 2. Provide designated Owner personnel with comprehensive orientation and training in the understanding of the systems and the operation and maintenance of each piece of plumbing equipment. 3. Training shall start with classroom sessions, if necessary, followed by hands on training on each piece of equipment, which shall illustrate the various modes of operation, including startup, shutdown, fire/smoke alarm,power failure, etc. 4. During any demonstration, should the system fail to perform in accordance with the requirements of the O&M manual or sequence of operations, the system will be repaired or adjusted as necessary and the demonstration repeated. 5. The appropriate trade or manufacturer's representative shall provide the instructions on each major piece of equipment. This person may be the start-up technician for the piece of equipment,the installing contractor or manufacturer's representative. Practical building operating expertise as well as in-depth FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 08 00-6 MAY 2, 2023 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 knowledge of all modes of operation of the specific piece of equipment are required. More than one party may be required to execute the training. 6. The training sessions shall follow the outline in the Table of Contents of the operation and maintenance manual and illustrate whenever possible the use of the O&M manuals for reference. 7. Training shall include: a. Use the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction material included in the O&M manuals. b. Include a review of the written O&M instructions emphasizing safe and proper operating requirements, preventative maintenance, special tools needed and spare parts inventory suggestions. The training shall include start-up, operation in all modes possible, shut-down, seasonal changeover and any emergency procedures. C. Discuss warranties and guarantees. d. Cover common troubleshooting problems and solutions. e. Explain information included in the O&M manuals and the location of all plans and manuals in the facility. f. Discuss any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation. 8. Hands-on training shall include start-up, operation in all modes possible, including manual, shut-down and any emergency procedures and preventative maintenance for all pieces of equipment. 9. The plumbing contractor shall fully explain and demonstrate the operation, function and overrides of any local packaged controls. 10. Training shall occur after functional testing is complete, unless approved otherwise by the Owner. END OF SECTION 22 08 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 08 00-7 MAY 2, 2023 COMMISSIONING OF PLUMBING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 22 16 00 - NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SYSTEM A. Provide a complete system of natural gas piping from gas meter to all natural gas burning equipment and appliances. B. All gas equipment specified herein shall be suitable for use with natural gas system. 1.02 DESIGN STANDARDS A. The natural gas system shall be designed and installed in accordance with the requirements of the following codes and standards: 1. The International Gas Code, 2018 Edition, with most current State of Texas Amendments 2. NFPA 54-National Fuel Gas Code PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPE AND FITTINGS A. Underground Piping 1. Schedule 40 black steel pipe, ASTM A53 with polyethylene jacket, welded joints and standard weight black steel butt weld or socket weld fittings, ASTM A243 or press-connect fittings ANSI LC-4/CSA 6.32 (Viega MegaPressG). 2. Polyethylene pipe, ASTM 2513, with heat fusion joints and fittings, ASTM D2513. a. Tracer. A yellow insulated copper tracer wire or other approved conductor shall be installed adjacent to underground nonmetallic piping. Access shall be provided to the tracer wire or the tracer wire shall terminate above ground at each end of the nonmetallic piping. The tracer wire size shall not be less than 18 AWG and the insulation type shall be suitable for direct burial. B. Aboveground Piping 1. Schedule 40 black steel pipe, ASTM A53 with welded joints and standard weight black steel butt weld fittings,ASTM A234 or socket weld fittings,ASTM A105. 2. Schedule 40 black steel pipe, ASTM A53, with 150 pound steel slip-on welding flanges,ASTM A181,for connection to flanged valves and equipment. 3. Schedule 40 black steel pipe, ASTM A53, with screwed joints and 150 pound threaded malleable iron fittings, ASME B.16.3. 4. Schedule 40 black steel pipe, ASTM A53, with press-connect joints (Viega MegaPressG)ANSI LC-4/CSA 6.32. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 1600-1 MAY 2, 2023 NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 5. Where allowed by Authority Having Jurisdiction, corrugated stainless steel tubing (CSST) with energy dissipating polyethylene jacket conforming to ASTM-A240; brass flare type fittings, ASTM B16, 5 psi maximum system pressure. Polyethylene jacket shall not exceed 25/50 flame/smoke spread rating. Tracpipe Counterstrike CSST system only. 2.02 JOINTS A. Threaded joints shall be made with a pipe compound specifically listed as resistant to reaction with liquefied petroleum gas and shall be applied to male threads only. After cutting and prior to threading,pipe shall be reamed and shall have burrs removed. B. Welded joints shall be fusion welded in accordance with the American Standards Code for pressure pipe,ASME B31.1, Section 6. C. Flanged joints shall be faced true, provided with ring type gasket, and made square and tight. Flanges shall have raised or flat faces to mate with adjacent flanges of valves. D. Press-connect j oints(Viega MegaPressG)shall be listed to ANSI LC-4/CSA 6.32 and shall have HNBR sealing elements. 2.03 UNIONS A. Unions in steel piping shall be 150 pound socket welded carbon steel conforming to ASME B.16.11 or class 150 malleable iron threaded fittings conforming to ASME B.16.3. 2.04 VALVES A. Valves 3" in size and larger shall be semi-steel plug valves with cast iron body,lubricated cast iron plug, flanged ends, and wrench operated for 175 pound WOG. Valve shall be Rockwell Nordstrom Fig. 143 or equal. B. Valves 2-1/2" in size and smaller shall have bronze body and plug, socket welded ends, and square head for 125 WOG. Valve shall be Crane or Fig. 250 or equal. C. Full port ball valves 2" in size and smaller shall have brass body with chrome plated brass ball with threaded or socket welded ends, 600 psi WOG, FM approval, AGA approval. Valve shall be Watts series FBV-3C or equal. D. Lubricated plug valves shall be lubricated at the factory and sealant shall be suitable for natural gas. Provide two valve wrenches for each type of valve specified. E. Acceptable valve manufacturers are Rockwell Nordstrom, Crane, FNW, Stockham, Powell,Walworth, or Milwaukee. 2.05 PRESSURE REGULATING VALVES A. Pressure regulator shall be cast iron, ductile iron or stainless steel, corrosion-resistant spring-loaded type with internal pressure relief, 175 psi working pressure. Provide threaded ends for piping 2" and smaller, flanged ends for piping 2-1/2" and larger. All FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 1600-2 MAY 2, 2023 NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 regulators shall be equipped with and labeled for use with an approved vent-limiting device and shall not require a vent to the exterior. Acceptable manufacturers are Fischer Regulators, Jordan Valve,Maxitrol,Rockwell and Sensus. B. Low pressure regulators supplied from medium and high pressure gas systems shall be lock-up type high gas pressure regulators and shall be installed a minimum of ten feet upstream of the equipment inlet connection. C. Where low pressure line regulators have inlet pressures exceeding 2 psi, a downstream over-pressure protection device(OPD)shall be installed in accordance with ANSI Z21.80. D. Medium pressure regulators shall have a capped tee fitting (sediment trap) upstream from the regulator and a capped tee fitting installed not less than 10 pipe diameters downstream of the regulator. 2.06 PROTECTIVE COATING A. Underground steel service entry piping shall be furnished with factory applied plastic coating and field coating at joints conforming to AWWA Standard C-203. All valves, fittings,and joints in underground piping shall be field coated using a heat-applied coal tar enamel tape,using two coats of heavy mastic,using"Scotchwrap," "CT Tapecoat"or"X- Tru-Tape." Field coating shall extend over mill wrapping a minimum of 4 inches. Damaged coating shall be repaired as specified for valves,fittings, and joints. 2.07 CATHODIC PROTECTION A. All underground gas piping shall be cathodically protected. Provide a minimum of two 17-pound magnesium anodes containing 6% aluminum and 3% zinc alloy. Anodes shall be distributed equally along the pipe run, but spacing shall not exceed 100 feet between anodes. Each anode shall be attached to the pipe by the Caldwell or brazing process. The connecting wire shall be buried in backfill composed of 75% gypsum, 20%bentonite and 5% sodium sulphate. Wherever the underground gas piping rises above grade,provide an insulating dielectric fitting. 2.08 PIPE SUPPORTS &HANGERS A. All piping shall be supported by means of hanger rods and pipe hangers from roof or floor construction using supplementary steel and/or lagbolts. I. Piping shall be supported from new concrete construction with Anvil International Fig. 282 inserts. 2. Piping shall be supported from new steel construction with Anvil International Fig. 131 beam clamp,Fig. 61 beam clamp, Fig. 66 welded beam attachment or Fig. 60 washer plate with all-thread rod. 3. Piping and brackets shall be supported from hollow block construction using masonry drilled holes and toggle bolts. 4. Piping shall be supported from wood truss construction with plated lag screws or bolts,B-3227 and B-3228. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 1600-3 MAY 2, 2023 NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Unless otherwise noted, hangers and clamps shall be as listed below (all model numbers noted are B-Line Systems): 1. Gas pipe—B3100 or B3109. 2. All supports and mounting hardware are to be galvanized or cadmium plated. C. Maximum spacing between pipe hangers shall be: 1. 1/2": 6-0" 2. 3/4"-1": 8'-0" 3. 1-1/4" and larger: 10'-0" D. At least one hanger shall occur within two feet (2'-0") from where a change in direction takes place in the line. Where pipes extend down or up to other floors, pipe clamps shall be provided on each floor to support pipe. Equal manufacturers for hangers and clamps are B-Line Systems,Anvil International,Fee and Mason,PHD Manufacturing,or approved equal. E. Piping on roofs shall be supported every six feet on piping 1/2" size, eight feet on piping 3/4" — V size, and ten feet on piping 1-1/4" and larger, and at each change in direction, with manufactured adjustable height stainless steel pipe stands with integral pipe roller guides or clevis hanger for securing horizontal piping. Pipe stands shall be secured to the roof per the roofing manufacturer's installation requirements. Pipe stands shall be Miro Industries Model 4-RAH Series,Dura-Blok Rooftop Supports or ERICO CADDY Series. F. Pipe supports for rooftop gas piping may be painted fabricated steel pipe stands with integral pipe guides if approved by the roofing manufacturer. 2.09 EMERGENCY SOLENOID VALVE A. The main gas supply to kitchen equipment shall be provided with an automatic solenoid valve with manual reset lever. The valve shall be interconnected with the hood fire suppression system to shut down gas supply to all kitchen equipment. B. Where required by local codes or jurisdictions, main gas supplies to fireplaces, fire pits, BBQ grills,etc. shall be provided with an automatic solenoid valve with manual reset lever. The valve shall be energized to open, closed when de-energized with manual reset. The required voltage shall be coordinated with the electrical contractor. The valve shall carry a UL Listing. C. The valve shall be energized to open, closed when de-energized with manual reset. The required voltage shall be coordinated with the electrical contractor. The valve shall carry a UL Listing. D. The emergency shutoff valve is to be provided with manual shutoff valves and unions on each side and located in a surface mount steel cabinet with flush solid metal door. The cabinet is to be located as shown on the drawings with the top of cabinet flush with finished ceiling. The cabinet shall be Potter Roemer 1810 series or approved equal. E. Valves 3/4"-2-1/2" in size shall be ASCO 8044 series. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 1600-4 MAY 2, 2023 NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 F. Furnish and install gas timer valve Fire Magic Model 3090 or approved equal on all fireplaces, fire pits, gas grilles, and other recreational gas fired appliances in addition to main shut off valve. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All interior gas systems shall be bonded to the building's grounding system per the requirements of NEC Section 250. A written statement bearing the names and signatures of the plumbing and electrical contractors indicating compliance with the NEC grounding requirements is to be submitted prior to project close-out. B. A valved union shall be provided at each connection to a piece of equipment. Equipment provided with a flanged inlet shall have a flanged connection. C. All valves installed in horizontal lines shall be installed with the stems horizontal or above. D. All gas piping shall be graded at the maximum slope available to prevent traps. All horizontal lines shall slope to risers and from the risers to the meter or appliance. E. Drip legs, 6" long, shall be provided in gas piping at ends of horizontal runs, at the base of risers, and at connections to equipment. F. Provide pressure regulators at all required connections to equipment; regulators shall be provided at the pressure required by the equipment served. Extend all pressure regulator vents individually to the exterior per local code authority requirements. G. Branch piping shall be taken off the top or sides of horizontal lines,but not from the bottom. H. Changes in pipe size shall be made with reducing fittings. No bushings will be allowed. L No gas piping shall be placed underground inside the building. J. All gas supply connections to food service equipment are to be provided with an AGA rated flexible connector with quick disconnect coupling. The flexible connector shall be 5'-0" minimum length or longer as required to allow for removal of the food service equipment item. K. Underground Piping 1. General: a. Lay, align, anchor and test pipe and make-up joints. Perform excavating, cleaning, laying, jointing and backfilling as concurrently as possible to maintain uniforin installation. Replace or repair damaged materials to condition equal to new material. 2. Excavation and Backfilling: a. Care shall be taken not to excavate below depth necessary. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 1600-5 MAY 2, 2023 NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 b. Do not leave unjointed piping in trench overnight. Backfill trenches by filling and tamping in not more than 6" layers after pipes, tanks, or other structures have been installed,tested and approved. 3. Pipe Crossing: a. Lay lower pipe,backfill with crushed stone, gravel or concrete as directed and thoroughly compact to level of upper pipe. 3.02 PAINTING A. All interior and exterior ferrous metal gas piping, fittings and supports shall be primed and painted with two(2)coats of exterior grade enamel paint unless galvanized, stainless steel, or coated CSST piping is used. The paint color shall be submitted to the Architect for approval. 3.03 TESTING A. All piping is to be inspected and purged per the requirements of NFPA 54 and the local authorities' requirements. B. The entire gas piping system shall be tested with compressed air to 100 psi for a period of two (2)hours. C. Defective joints or piping shall be replaced as required and the system shall then be re- tested. END OF SECTION 22 16 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 1600-6 MAY 2, 2023 NATURAL GAS PIPING SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 22 40 00 - PLUMBING FIXTURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All work specified herein shall be accomplished in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 22 00 00- Plumbing General. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Receipt,unloading, handling,proper storage and protection from damage of all materials. B. Layout and coordination of work with other trades. C. The work under this section shall include all labor, materials, accessories, services, and equipment necessary to furnish and install the plumbing fixtures, trim and supports, complete as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All fixtures shall be white,unless otherwise indicated. B. All water closets shall have fully glazed trapways. C. All exposed trim to be heavy polished chrome plated brass, unless otherwise indicated. Chrome plated escutcheons are to be provided on all exposed fixture and food service equipment supplies and waste lines. D. Electric water coolers shall be ARI Certified and shall carry a UL Listing. Units shall use refrigerant which is approved for use without ozone depleting properties. All waterway components are to be certified as lead free. E. All sinks and lavatories for use by the disabled shall have manufactured insulation shields on all supplies and P-traps per ADA requirements unless the vanities are provided with ADA compliant shrouds. F. All exposed plumbing fixture items such as faucets and flush valves shall be provided with vandalproof trim. 2.02 CLEANOUTS A. Cleanouts on exposed piping in unfinished areas shall be heavy duty cast iron with countersunk plug. Cleanouts shall be Jay R. Smith Figure 4220 or approved equal. B. Cleanouts installed behind walls in finished areas shall be cast iron ferrule type for no- hub or service weight pipe with nickel bronze round frame and cover with securing screws. Cleanouts shall be Jay R. Smith Figure 4472T or approved equal. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 22 40 00-1 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING FIXTURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Cleanouts installed in concrete floors shall be cast iron type with gasket seal ABS plug round adjustable ductile iron cover with securing screw and Speedi-Set outlet connection. Cleanouts shall be Jay R. Smith Figure 4231L-M or approved equal. D. Cleanouts installed in tile floors shall be cast iron type with gasket seal ABS plug for easy removal, adjustable round nickel bronze top recessed for tile with securing screw and Speedi-Set outlet connection. Cleanouts shall be Jay R. Smith Figure 4151L or approved equal. E. Cleanouts installed in carpeted areas shall be cast iron type with gasket seal ABS plug, nickel bronze round frame and cover with carpet marker. Cleanouts shall be Jay R. Smith 4031-Y or approved equal. 2.03 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. The following is a list of acceptable manufacturers for the project: 1. Fixtures: American Standard,Kohler, Toto 2. Faucets: American Standard, Chicago Faucets, Kohler, Moen, Speakman, Symmons and Zurn 3. Stainless Steel Sinks: Elkay, Just,Kohler 4. Trim: American Standard,Brasscraft,Kohler, McGuire and Zum 5. Drains, Carriers and Hydrants: Josam, Mifab, Prier, Jay R. Smith, Wade and Zurn B. Plumbing fixtures shall be as scheduled on the plans. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All wall hung fixtures shall be supported on concealed chair carriers furnished complete with all necessary bolts, nuts, washers and gaskets unless noted otherwise. The adjustable nipple between the cast iron fitting and the closet bowl shall be threaded cast iron. Secure all floor pieces to floor slab. B. All exposed piping in connection with fixtures shall be chromium plated. Where supply and waste lines pass through walls, provide chromium plated escutcheons and firmly secure in place. C. Provide straight or angle supply valves on inlet supplies to all fixtures. D. Fixtures, trim and methods of piping and installation shall conform to local plumbing code. All fixture types shall be the product of one manufacturer. All fixtures shall be white unless otherwise noted. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 40 00-2 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING FIXTURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. Fixtures shall be cleaned, adjusted and left in proper working order before the project is turned over to the Owner. Flush and clean all faucet aerators prior to turn over. Adjust all faucet lever handles to be parallel to adjacent rear wall in the off position. F. The Contractor shall furnish and install protective guards as required to protect fixtures against damage by normal operations of other trades. Bathtubs shall be provided with tub liners at all times during construction. G. Caulk all floor and counter top mounted fixtures and behind all wall-hung plumbing fixtures with white, non-shrinking, silicone caulking eliminating all voids and cracks. H. Coordinate the mounting height of all fixtures with the Architect prior to installation. L The Contractor shall obtain exact information relative to finish grade of the top of the floor drains. All floor drains shall be set flush with finished floors. J. Cleanouts shall be provided where indicated on drawings and elsewhere as required by code. K. Where test tees are installed at the base of the stack or on the stack,they may be used as a cleanout. L. Provide the Owner with three (3) wrenches for removing flush cleanout plugs. END OF SECTION 22 40 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 22 40 00-3 MAY 2, 2023 PLUMBING FIXTURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 23 00 00 - HVAC GENERAL PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Refer to Division 1 - General Requirements and any and all Supplementary or Special Requirements, all of which apply to work described in Division 23 - HVAC as if written in full herein. B. The scope of work described in these Specifications and/or indicated on the Drawings shall include the furnishing of all materials,equipment,appurtenances,accessories,connections, labor, etc. required and/or necessary to completely install, clean, inspect, adjust, test, balance and leave in safe and proper operating condition all HVAC systems. All HVAC work shall be accomplished by workmen skilled in the various trades involved. C. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary to each other and what is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. If a discrepancy exists between the Drawings and Specifications, the higher implied cost shall be included in the bid, and the Architect shall be notified of the discrepancy in writing. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. All HVAC work shall conform to all ordinances and regulations of the City, County and State where the work will take place, including the requirements of all authorities having jurisdiction. The following codes, standards and references shall be observed as a minimum: 1. The 2018 International Codes 2. Harris County Amendments to the Code 3. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA) Standards and Guidelines 4. Local and State Fire Marshal requirements 5. Local Building and Inspection Department requirements 6. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc. (ASHRAE) a. Standard 90.1-2013 — Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings b. Standard 62.1-2010—Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality C. Standard 55-2010 — Thermal Environmental Conditions for Human Occupancy d. Other Standards and Guidelines as applicable 7. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association, Inc. (SMACNA)Manuals 8. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL) 9. Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA) B. If Code or other requirements exceed the provisions shown on the Contract Documents, the Engineer shall be notified in writing. Where requirements of the Contract Documents exceed Code requirements, work shall be furnished and installed in accordance with the FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 00 00-1 MAY 2, 2023 HVAC GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Contract Documents. Any work done contrary to these requirements shall be removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. 1.03 NOISE CRITERIA DESIGN GOALS A. Mechanical equipment,air distribution systems and devices shall be designed to not exceed the following noise criteria(NC)levels: 1. Public Space Areas: NC<35 2. Utility/All Other Areas: NC<40 3. Open Office areas: NC<40 1.04 MISCELLANEOUS DEFINITIONS A. Terms: The following definitions of terms supplement those of the Division 01- General Requirements and are applicable to Division 23 — Heating, Ventilation, and Air Conditioning(HVAC): 1. Contractor: As used herein the term shall mean "the person or entity referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Contractor shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Contractor with respect to all matters under this Contract. The term"Contractor" means the Contractor or the Contractor's authorized representative." 2. Furnish: As used herein shall mean"supply and deliver to Project site,unload and inspect for damage." 3. Install: As used herein the term shall mean "to place in position for service, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, apply, place, protect, clean, start up, and make ready for use." 4. Owner: As used herein the term shall mean"the person or entity identified as such and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner's approval or authorization. The term "Owner" means the Owner or the Owner's authorized representative." 5. Product: As used herein shall include materials, systems, and/or equipment, machinery, components, and fixtures forming the work result. Not materials or equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying, or erection and not incorporated into the work result. Products may be new,never before used, or re- used materials or equipment. 6. Provide: As used herein shall mean "furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use." 7. The Work: As used herein the term shall mean "the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment, and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor's obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. 8. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual,"experienced"means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature,size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 00 00-2 MAY 2, 2023 HVAC GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1.05 WORK INCLUDED The HVAC Systems installed and work performed under this Division of the Specifications shall include,but not necessarily be limited to: A. Airside Systems 1. Equipment: including fans, unitary air conditioners, air handling units, fan-coil units,make-up air units, dedicated outdoor air units, furnaces, split systems, etc. 2. Ductwork and Accessories: including sheet metal, duct-board, kitchen hood and dishwasher exhausts,flexible ductwork,fire and smoke dampers,access doors,etc. 3. Air Terminal Devices: including powered induction units, variable air volume valves, etc. 4. Air Distribution Devices: including louvers,registers,grilles, diffusers, etc. B. Refrigerant and Water Systems 1. Equipment: including pumps, air separators, expansion tanks, water chillers, cooling towers, filtration systems, chemical treatment, heat exchangers, boilers and space heating water heaters, feed-water systems, condensing units, etc. 2. Piping, Tubing and Accessories: including pipe, refrigerant tubing, valves, solenoids, thermal expansion valves, strainers, air vents, pipe and equipment drains, condensate drains, expansion devices, etc. C. Equipment,Ductwork and Piping Supports 1. Equipment Mounts: including roof curbs,concrete housekeeping pads,equipment rails,miscellaneous steel, etc. 2. Hangers and Support Devices: including inserts,hanger rods, strut channel,cross- bracing, anchor bolts,pipe anchors,restraints, etc. 3. Vibration Isolation and seismic restraint: including inertia bases, flexible couplings, expansion devices, snubbers, springs, waffle pads, seismic restraints, etc. D. Insulation 1. Ductwork Insulation: including exterior duct wrap, internal duct liner, fire wrap, etc. 2. Piping and Equipment Insulation: including preformed,board and wrap. E. Miscellaneous HVAC Equipment: Unit heaters,wall heaters,roof hoods,heat tracing,etc. F. Automatic Temperature Controls 1. Decentralized: including all thermostats, control dampers, control valves, programmable controllers, line and low-voltage wiring, smoke detectors,pressure sensors, gas sensors, control logic, etc. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 00 00-3 MAY 2, 2023 HVAC GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Building Automation System (BAS)/Facility Management System (FMS): same as above but networked to a central human-machine computer interface, including all software and programming, display graphics, etc. G. Labor and Equipment: including project management, supervision,tradesmen, lifts, fork- trucks, cranes, scaffolding, saws, wrenches, etc. H. Equipment and Valve Identification 1. Start-up and Commissioning J. Demonstration and Owner Training K. Testing,Adjusting and Balancing 1.06 ENGINEER'S DRAWINGS A. The locations, arrangement and extent of equipment, devices, ductwork,piping, and other appurtenances related to the installation of the HVAC work shown on the Drawings are approximate and define the intent of the design. The Contractor shall not scale Engineer's Drawings, but shall refer to the architectural drawings for exact dimensions of building components. Should a conflict exist between the architectural and engineering drawings regarding dimensions and scale, the Contractor shall notify the Architect of the discrepancy. B. Materials, equipment or labor not indicated but which can be reasonably inferred to be necessary for a complete installation shall be provided. Drawings and Specifications do not undertake to indicate every item of material, equipment, or labor required to produce a complete and properly operating installation. 1.07 EQUIPMENT,MATERIALS AND BID BASIS A. Manufacturers'names,model numbers,etc.cited on the Drawings and in the Specifications are for the purpose of describing type, capacity, function and quality of equipment and materials required. All project design and coordination between disciplines has been performed as if the named manufacturer and specific piece of equipment will be provided to the project by the Contractor. B. Alternate equipment and/or materials other than that named on the Drawings and in the Specifications may be proposed for use, but all equipment and materials shall conform entirely to the specified base items. Proposed alternate equipment shall be substantially equal in size, weight, construction and capacity. Alternate equipment and materials shall be submitted only as full equivalent to the equipment and materials specified, with sufficient supportive documentation and technical literature to demonstrate quality, performance, and workmanship without doubt or question. Requests for prior approval of alternate products shall be made at least ten(10) days prior to the bid date and as required by Division 1 -General Requirements. The Engineer shall consider the use of the alternate equipment based on the supportive documentation made available to him, and shall approve or disapprove any proposed alternates. Major exceptions to these specifications will be considered sufficient cause for rejection of the submittal. The decision of the Engineer shall, in all cases,be final. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 00 00-4 MAY 2, 2023 HVAC GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. The ten (10) day prior approval submittal shall include a Compliance Review of the Specifications and Addenda (if any). The Compliance Review shall be paragraph-by-paragraph review of the Specifications with the following information; "C", "D" or"E"marked in the margin of the original Specifications and any subsequent Addenda. 2. "C": Comply with no exceptions. 3. "D": Comply with no deviations. For each and every deviation, provide a numbered footnote with reasons for the proposed deviation and how the intent of the Specification can be satisfied. 4. "E": Exception, does not comply. For each and every exception, provide a numbered footnote with reasons and possible alternatives. 5. Manufacturer shall provide complete paragraph-by-paragraph compliance document detailing unit conformance to the specification. The Engineer will not review the proposal for equipment compliance. Unless a deviation or exception is specifically noted in the Compliance Review, it is assumed that the bidder is in complete compliance with the plans and specifications. Deviations or exceptions taken in cover letters, subsidiary documents, by omission or by contradiction do not release the bidder from being in complete compliance, unless the exception or deviation has been specifically noted in the Compliance Review. The bidder may submit the latest state-of-the-art components in lieu of specified components at no additional cost, where latest state-of-the-art components perform better than what is specified. All deviations from the specifications must be approved by the Architect/Engineer and the Owner. C. The Contractor shall coordinate the installation of all HVAC equipment proposed for use in this project with all building trades (architectural, structural, electrical, etc.). Coordination shall be accomplished prior to, and shall be reflected in, the equipment submittals for approval. When the Contractor requests substitution of alternate equipment, it is with the knowledge that he shall be responsible for any and all costs required by the substitution,including necessary engineering and construction revisions in his or any other contract or trade to satisfy the design intent shown on the Plans and described in the Specifications. D. All materials exposed within HVAC plenums shall have a flame-spread index of not more than 25 and a smoke-developed rating index of not more than 50 unless otherwise allowed by code. 1.08 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall prepare, submit and obtain Engineer's review of all manufacturers' data on the HVAC equipment and systems prior to ordering,purchasing or installing any equipment or materials. Shop drawings shall be submitted electronically in a portable document format(pdf). An acceptable alternate would be to submit six (6) hard copies of the complete submittal,five of which will be reviewed and returned. Submittals shall be as described in Division 01 - General Requirements. Prior to submitting to the engineer, the contractor shall review and subsequently place his approval stamp on the shop drawings. Submittals shall be transmitted simultaneously in a single .zip file or, in the case of hard copies,three-ring ring binders with the associated specification sections cited and the items FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 00 00-5 MAY 2, 2023 HVAC GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 submitted clearly identified. Submittals lacking the contractor's approval stamp and partial submittals will be returned without review. Submittals, as a minimum, shall include: 1. All HVAC items scheduled on the Drawings 2. Equipment arrangement, ductwork and piping drawings. Contractor drawings shall be prepared at a minimum scale of 1/8" — F-0". A scale of 1/4" — P-O" scale is preferred. Drawings shall be indicative of actual equipment purchased and shall show all offsets, transitions, fittings, dampers, valves, hanger locations, etc. Sections are required in spatially tight areas(e.g.kitchens,laundries,central plants, mechanical rooms, etc.) The following will guide the Contractor as to minimum drawing detail required: a. Clearly indicate top and bottom of duct and pipe elevations. All elevations shall be coordinated as to not conflict with structural,plumbing, electrical and architectural trades. b. Indicate all offsets (both vertical and horizontal). C. Indicate graphically all duct and pipe joints and their lengths. d. Submit duct and pipe-work fabrication schedule indicating duct size range with minimum duct material gauges, pipe schedule being used, duct and pipe connection joint types, section lengths, duct reinforcement type and spacing, etc. e. Indicate graphically all ductwork to be fabricated with internal duct liner. f Indicate all insulation for ductwork and piping. g. Indicate all dampers and valves as shown on design documents and called for in the specifications. h. Indicate all flexible connectors where required by specifications and notes. 3. Flexible ductwork,duct-board, insulation and linings 4. Ventilation controllers, dampers, louvers, air distribution devices, wall terminations (wall caps),roof terminations(roof caps,hoods,jacks, etc.) 5. Manufacturer's cut sheets of all piping and tubing materials 6. Where split systems are used in a "long line application," submit manufacturer's refrigerant line set routing drawings and engineered calculations supporting installed line lengths and recommended suction and liquid line sizes(deviations in the installed lengths and sizes shall be recorded on the as-built drawings and coordinated with the manufacturer to reconfirm that long line guidelines are being met). a. Identify and provide cut sheets of any and all accessories required to make the system complete, functional and reliable. b. Any split system with 75 feet of separation between the outdoor unit and the indoor unit requires that the contractor obtain a warranty approval letter from the equipment manufacturer certifying the long line length distances shown on the submitted shop drawings are acceptable. C. Refer to the EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS paragraph below. 7. Refrigerant type and charge(lbs.)for each item of equipment utilizing refrigerant. 8. AHRI Certificates 9. Valves, thermometers,pressure gauges 10. Thermal expansion/contraction piping system design including complete layout drawings indicating anchor loads,points, and method of structural support. 11. Roof curbs, equipment supports, hanger systems, vibration isolators, seismic restraints FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 00 00-6 MAY 2, 2023 HVAC GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 12. Control equipment, systems and diagrams 13. Test and balance reports B. All submittal approvals required by any code or enforcement authority, insurance underwriter, etc. shall be obtained prior to being submitted to the Engineer. C. Review of submittals by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with all requirements of the Contract Documents. Furthermore, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate the requirements(roof penetrations, wall penetrations, floor penetrations, curbs, electrical, etc.) of all approved equipment with the other trades and disciplines. D. All submittals shall be identified by the equipment mark or tag identification numbers shown on the Contract Drawings. Each individual submittal item shall be marked to show which specification section pertains to the item. E. The Contractor shall provide a written statement confirming coordination of voltage requirements for all HVAC equipment requiring an electrical connection. Statement shall bear the names and signatures of the HVAC and electrical contractors. A photocopied reproduction of the below statement is acceptable. VOLTAGE COORDINATION STATEMENT This statement is to confirm that the voltages of the equipment provided under this specification have been coordinated with the Electrical Drawings, as well as with the Electrical Contractor. HVAC Contractor: Project Manager Name: Project Manager Signature/Date: Electrical Contractor: Project Manager Name: Project Manager Signature/Date: 1.09 PERMITS A. The Contractor shall obtain all permits and inspections required for the installation of the HVAC work and pay all charges incident thereto. He shall deliver copies of all certificates of permit and inspection to the Architect. 1.10 COORDINATION OF TRADES A. The Contractor shall give full cooperation to other trades, and shall furnish all information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with the least possible interference or delay. B. Piping and other HVAC equipment shall not be installed without first coordinating the installation of same with other trades. The Contractor, at his own expense, shall relocate FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 00 00-7 MAY 2, 2023 HVAC GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 all uncoordinated ductwork, piping and other HVAC equipment installed should they interfere with the proper installation and mounting of electrical, plumbing equipment, ceilings and other architectural or structural finishes. C. The Contractor shall coordinate the elevations of all ductwork,piping and equipment above ceilings and in exposed areas with the work of all other disciplines prior to installation. D. In areas where more than one trade is required to use common openings in beams,joists, chases,shafts and sleeves for the passage of conduits,raceways,piping,ductwork and other materials, the Contractor must coordinate the positions of all piping and equipment to be furnished under this section so that all items including the materials and equipment of other trades may be accommodated within the space available. E. The HVAC Contractor shall confirm that his work does not interfere with the clearances required for finished columns,pilasters,partitions,walls or other architectural or structural elements as shown on the Contract Documents. F. Work that is installed under this Contract which interferes with the architectural design or building structure shall be removed and relocated as required at no additional cost to the Contract. G. Coordinate power and fire alarm requirements of all combination fire/smoke dampers and smoke dampers with the electrical contractor. H. The General Contractor shall coordinate service access paths for roof-mounted equipment requiring routine maintenance. Provide code compliant galvanized steel crossing structure (e.g. stairs with handrails, ladders, etc.) for any obstruction (ductwork, piping, etc.) that exceeds F-6" in height x 1'-6" in width. In addition,refer to Part 3 below- EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS. Details of such crossings shall be included with piping and ductwork layout and coordination drawings. L Roof curbs for equipment located in seismic or high wind areas will require the design (including attachments to the roof and equipment) to be certified by a licensed structural engineer. 1.11 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Contractor shall prepare a minimum of two(2)instruction manuals,one of which shall be submitted to the Architect for the Engineer's review. Manuals shall describe installation, operation and maintenance of all HVAC equipment and shall include copies of control schematics, sequences of operation, function and operations of all components, as well as the Contractor's name, address, and telephone number. Manuals shall also contain one copy of all manufacturers' drawings, pamphlets, data, parts lists, and instruction manual for each piece of equipment. Upon approval, one copy shall be delivered to the Owner; one copy shall be kept by the Contractor. The pamphlets and drawings are to be neatly bound in(a)3-ring binder(s).In addition to the hard copy,provide electronic files (PDF format) of the manuals. 1.12 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 00 00-8 MAY 2, 2023 HVAC GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. The Contractor shall maintain a record of all changes in the work from that shown in the Contract Documents. The record shall be by red-line mark-up on the most current set of Engineer's Drawings kept in the field office. After all work is completed, the Contractor shall prepare a set of"as-built" reproducible drawings of similar type and quality as the Engineer's Drawings.As an alternate to hard copy drawings,provide electronic files(PDF format) of the as-built conditions. As-built drawings shall accurately depict actual final arrangement of all HVAC items. As-built drawings shall be delivered to the Architect. 1.13 WARRANTY A. All equipment furnished and installed under this Contract shall be provided with the manufacturer's standard warranty unless otherwise noted. B. All reciprocating,rotary and scroll air conditioning compressors shall be provided with an extended 5-year parts warranty. C. The Contractor shall make good all defects in material, equipment, or workmanship disclosed within a period of one (1)year from date of building acceptance by the Owner. The phrase "make good" shall mean to furnish promptly, without charge, all work necessary to remedy the defects to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 1.14 COMMISSIONING A. This project requires commissioning per the requirements of the(city,code,and/or specific energy program). Commissioning shall be by applicable contractor and either the engineering firm of record or a 3rd party commissioning agent. Refer to the commissioning (specifications, plan, checklists, and/or additional on drawing notes) for additional information. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All equipment, materials, accessories, etc. used shall be new and of current production unless specified otherwise. Equipment not specified in the Engineer's Drawings shall be suitable for the intended use and shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. B. All equipment, products and materials shall be free of defects and shall be constructed to operate in a safe manner without excessive noise,vibration,leakage, or wear. C. All equipment shall bear the inspection Label of Underwriters Laboratories Inc. D. All equipment and material for similar applications or systems shall be provided from the same manufacturer unless noted otherwise. E. The VOC content of all products in this section shall not exceed the VOC limits established in Section 01 81 13 Sustainable Design Requirements. F. VOC Content: Submit adhesive and sealants product information or MSDS showing VOC Content information for all applicable products specified under this section. All applicable FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 00 00-9 MAY 2, 2023 HVAC GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 products in this section must meet low VOC content as specified by LEED Specification Section 01 81 13 Sustainable Design Requirements. 2.02 ELECTRICAL WORK A. Except as otherwise specified or noted, electrical equipment used for HVAC systems shall be as specified herein. B. Motor controls, system controls, starters, disconnects,pilot lights, push buttons, etc. shall be furnished by the HVAC Contractor compatible with the apparatus that it operates. Electrical equipment shall be wired for the voltage shown on the Electrical Drawings. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating and furnishing equipment of voltage shown on the electrical documents. D. Electric motors shall be NEMA Premium Efficiency open drip proof type. Motors shall meet NEMA MG 1 Table 12-12 of EISA, 2010. Motors shall be selected with a minimum of 15% safety factor greater than the fan brake/horsepower (e.g. 4.75 BHP would require a nominal 7�/z HP motor). The motor service factor shall not be used as part of the safety factor. All motors shall have thermal overload protection. Motors shall be capable of operating at + 10% of the design voltage without voiding the manufacturer's warranty. Motors that drive equipment that will run continuously shall be IEC 60034-1 continuous duty rated. E. Motors controlled by a variable frequency drive (VFD) shall be inverter duty motors designed according to the requirements of NEMA MG 1, Part 31, "Definite Purpose, Inverter Fed Motors"and shall be compatible with the particular manufacturer's drive that is used. 1. Shaft Grounding Rings - All motors controlled by variable frequency drives shall be equipped with a maintenance free, conductive micro fiber, shaft grounding ring with a minimum of two rows of circumferential micro fibers to discharge damaging shaft voltages away from the bearings to ground. a. Motors up to 100HP shall be provided with one shaft grounding ring installed either on the drive end or non-drive end.Motors over 100HP shall be provided with an insulated bearing on the non-drive end and a shaft grounding ring on the drive end of the motor. Grounding rings shall be provided and installed by the motor manufacturer or contractor and shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. b. Shaft grounding rings shall be AEGIS bearing protection ring by Electro Static Technology-ITW. 2. High Frequency Grounding Straps - All motors controlled by variable frequency drives shall be bonded from the motor foot to the system ground with a high frequency ground strap fabricated of flat braided, tinned copper with terminations to accommodate motor foot and system ground connection. a. Proper grounding of motor frame for all inverter-driven induction motors shall be in accordance with ABB Technical Guide No. 5 and Allen Bradley Publication 1770-4.1 Application Data Industrial Automation Wiring and Grounding Guidelines FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 00 00-10 MAY 2, 2023 HVAC GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 b. High frequency bonding strap shall be AEGIS high frequency ground strap by Electro Static Technology-ITW. F. Starters for motors '/3 HP and smaller shall be manual type, and for '/z HP and larger, shall be magnetic type. Starters shall be minimum size 0, combination type (with disconnect and lockable handle)with molded case circuit breaker. Starters for motors with remote or automatic control shall be magnetic. Relays, interlocks and auxiliary contacts shall be provided as specified and required. G. Magnetic motor starters shall be across-the-line, full voltage, non-reversing type unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings or specified herein. Starters for motors 75 HP and greater shall be solid state,reduced voltage type. H. Motor controls shall be either "Hand-Off-Auto" switches or "On-Off' push buttons with one indicating light. "Hand-Off-Auto" switches shall be provided for automatically controlled apparatus. 1. Motor starters that are not an integral part of HVAC equipment shall be installed in conformance with Division 26- Electrical Requirements. J. All"loose"disconnects and starters shall be installed by Division 26. K. Power wiring to disconnects, starters, and equipment shall be provided and installed by Division 26. All equipment requiring electrical power shall be provided with a disconnect switch at each piece of equipment. Coordinate switch type (fused or non-fused) with equipment characteristics,manufacturer's recommendations and the electrical drawings. L. Provide all system controls and associated control and interlock wiring for complete and operable systems. 120 volt and higher wiring shall be MC cable or in conduit in accordance with local codes and the materials and installation requirements of Division 26-Electrical. M. Coordinate power and fire alarm requirements of all combination fire/smoke dampers and smoke dampers with the electrical contractor. N. All starters and variable frequency drives shall be labeled on the face of the device with a semi-rigid plastic laminate nameplate with V high white letters on a black background securely affixed to the equipment. The label shall indicate equipment served (equipment tag used on the Drawings). Labels shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor. O. All starters for 3-phase equipment shall have overload devices in each phase. P. Wiring diagrams shall be furnished by the Contractor. Q. Coordinate with the electrical drawings for the required short circuit current rating of the panelboard serving the equipment. The equipment nameplate shall bear a rating of no less than the panelboard rating. R. Acceptable manufacturers shall be General Electric, Square D, Eaton, Siemens and Allen Bradley. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 00 00-1 1 MAY 2, 2023 HVAC GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2.03 AIR FILTERS A. All filters shall be U.L. 900 classified. B. Filters shall be pleated disposable type(MERV 6 minimum)unless specified otherwise. C. Install one set of new filters in air handling equipment during construction and install a new set prior to test and balance. Fan powered induction units shall have a temporary roll filter media installed at the plenum air inlet during construction. Remove temporary filter media prior to test and balance. Clean and vacuum all inlets prior to test and balance. D. Temporary roll filter media shall be provided at the inlets to all air handling equipment operated during construction. Remove temporary filter media prior to test and balance. Clean and vacuum all inlets prior to test and balance. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All equipment and materials shall be completely installed, adjusted, and fully operational with all accessories and connections. B. Equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. shall fit into the spaces provided in the building and shall be installed at such time and in such a manner as to avoid damage and as required by the job progress. In general, ductwork, piping, equipment, etc. shall be installed tight to structure above. The Contractor shall coordinate work with other trades and locate work described herein to avoid interferences with structural, electrical and architectural work. Shop drawings shall clearly indicate any conflicts with other trades. Equipment, accessories and similar items requiring normal servicing or maintenance shall be accessible. C. The Engineer reserves the right to direct the removal of any item which, in his opinion, does not present an orderly and reasonably neat or workmanlike appearance. Such removal and replacement shall be done when directed by the Engineer and without additional cost to the Owner. D. Listed mounting heights are to the finished bottom of the device unless otherwise noted. E. All work shall be designed and installed to comply with the requirements for the seismic design category and use group for the area in which the building is constructed. F. Expansion in piping systems shall be compensated for using u-bends, z-bends or expansion joints as indicated. U-bends (loops) and z-bends shall be complete with pipe guides and anchors.Expansion compensation in piping risers over 100 feet in length shall be made with engineered systems; either spring type isolators and central anchor system (by Mason Industries) or flexible hose expansion loops (Metraloop as manufactured by the Metraflex Company). Refer to specification Section 23 21 13 for additional requirements. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 00 00-12 MAY 2, 2023 HVAC GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.02 STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS A. During construction, all equipment shall be properly protected against damage, defacing and freezing with shipping cartons,plastic sheeting, shipping covers, etc. B. All open ends of piping and equipment shall be sealed with nipples and caps, plugs, and test plugs until final connection to system is made. C. All equipment,piping and ductwork shall be protected to prevent entrance of foreign matter and debris by covering exposed openings during construction. D. Handle and store materials in accordance with manufacturer's and supplier's recommendations and in a manner to prevent damage to materials during storage and handling. Replace damaged materials. E. Equipment and materials shall not be installed until such time as the environmental conditions of the job site are suitable to protect the equipment or materials. Equipment or materials damaged or which are subjected to these elements are unacceptable and shall be removed from the premises and replaced. 3.03 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. The work shall include all cutting and patching required as part of the HVAC installation. Refer to Division I - General Requirements. 3.04 CONCRETE WORK A. Construct curbs,pads and similar supports for equipment where required. B. Provide 4" (min.) thick housekeeping pads for all floor mounted equipment, extending 6" beyond the area occupied by the equipment. Dowel pads to structural slab. C. Perform concrete work in accordance with applicable portions of Division 3 - Concrete. Minimum compressive strength of concrete shall be same as specified for slabs on grade. D. Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces and anchors. Provide forms as necessary and place grout to completely fill equipment bases. 3.05 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION- COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are indicated. B. Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces,unless otherwise indicated. C. Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting,with minimum interference to other installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 00 00-13 MAY 2, 2023 HVAC GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 D. Install equipment to allow right-of-way for piping to be installed with the required slope. E. For roof and attic mounted equipment requiring routine maintenance, allow for an unobstructed path from the roof/attic service entry point to the equipment. The path area shall be a minimum of 6'-0" high by 3'-0" wide. F. Split system outdoor unit equipment has been shown indicating matched systems of the indoor unit with its associated outdoor unit. While the location of the outdoor units are approximate, the importance of unit locations relative to the refrigerant line set penetration through a wall or roof is critical for the project. Prior to ordering equipment, the contractor shall carefully coordinate the line set routing and requirements with the split system manufacturer to insure installation guidelines,especially for long line applications,are being followed. Refrigerant line sets shall be routed to reduce the system total equivalent length and minimize system capacity losses due to elbows,fittings,valves,etc.After the coordinated routing drawings have been approved and certified by the split system manufacturer, they shall be submitted for review along with the equipment and any required accessories. During installation, the contractor is responsible for keeping as-built refrigerant piping installation drawings noting any deviations to the proposed routing. Deviations that may affect proper system operation or performance shall be reviewed by the manufacturer immediately and corrective action implemented as required. 3.06 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Major equipment supports (structural steel frames, framed structural slab and wall openings, etc.) shall be furnished and installed by others; however, the HVAC work shall include furnishing and installation of all miscellaneous equipment supports, structural members, rods, clamps and hangers required to provide adequate support of all HVAC equipment. B. Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, all HVAC equipment, piping, and accessories shall be installed level, square, and plumb. C. All equipment,piping,etc. supported by structural bar joists shall be supported only by the top chord of the joists. Hangers shall not be attached to the bottom chord of any joists. 3.07 PIPE AND DUCTWORK PENETRATIONS A. Sleeves shall be installed in all masonry or concrete walls, floors, roofs, etc. for pipe and ductwork penetrations. Sleeves for pipe shall be schedule 40 black steel pipe. Refer to Section 23 21 13 — Piping and Accessories for additional information. Sleeves for ductwork shall be 20-gauge galvanized steel. Ductwork sleeves shall be sized to provide a minimum of clearance between the sleeve and duct. For insulated ducts,the clearance shall be between the sleeve and the insulation. B. As far as possible, all pipe and ductwork penetrations shall be provided for at the time of masonry or concrete construction. Where drilling is required,only core drills shall be used. Star drills shall not be used. C. All pipes penetrating walls or floors of any construction shall be installed with escutcheon plates on both sides of the penetration securely fastened to the wall or floor. In exposed FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 00 00-14 MAY 2, 2023 HVAC GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 areas, escutcheon plates shall be chrome plated. All escutcheon plates shall be sized to completely conceal the penetration. D. Ductwork penetrating walls or floors of any material shall be installed with closure plates on both sides of the penetration. E. Pipe penetrations through exterior walls shall be sealed weather-tight with a factory fabricated mechanical type rubber seal. Refer to Section 23 21 13 —Piping for additional information. F. All pipe and duct penetrations of fire, smoke, or fire and smoke-rated assemblies shall be fire-stopped as required to retain the integrity of the UL-rated assembly. Fire barrier products shall be as manufactured by Tremco, Hilti, 3M, Metacaulk, Nelson, STI or approved equal. Refer to Division 7 -Thermal and Moisture Protection. 3.08 FLASHING A. All piping and ductwork penetrating roofs shall be flashed in an approved manner,shall be watertight, and shall conform to the requirements detailed in Division 7 - Thermal and Moisture Protection. 3.09 EQUIPMENT LABELING A. All HVAC equipment shall be labeled. This shall include all central plant, air handling or air conditioning equipment, air tenninals, and other similar and miscellaneous equipment. B. Labels for air terminals or other devices shall be located for optimum visibility through access panel or removed ceiling tiles. C. Equipment labeling shall be one of the following,unless noted or specified otherwise: 1. Permanently attached plastic laminated signs with 1" high lettering 2. Stencil painted identification,2"high letters,with standard fiberboard stencils and standard black(or other appropriate color) exterior stencil enamel 3.10 VALVE TAGS A. Each valve in the HVAC system is to be provided with an individually numbered valve tag. B. Valve tags are to be brass or plastic laminate, 1'/2"minimum diameter with brass chain and hook for securing to the valve. C. Valve tags will include a designation to indicate the appropriate system. Numbering shall be consecutive for each service of the hot, chilled, steam, condensate return, or condenser water systems. D. A printed list or schematic drawing shall be compiled for each system indicating the location and detailed description of the system or equipment served. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 00 00-15 MAY 2, 2023 HVAC GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. One (1) copy of each list shall be framed and mounted at the location designated by the Building Engineer. An additional copy of each list is to be included in the Operations and Maintenance Manual. 3.11 CLEANING A. At all times, the premises shall be kept reasonably clean and free of undue amounts of waste, trash and debris by periodic cleaning and removal. After completion, all foreign material,trash and other debris shall be removed from the job site. B. After all equipment has been installed, but prior to testing and balancing, all equipment, piping, ductwork, etc. shall be thoroughly cleaned both inside and out. C. All water piping shall be chemically flushed and cleaned prior to circulating water through equipment. D. After cleaning, filters shall be installed where required and all systems shall be tested and balanced. E. After testing and balancing and just prior to Owner review and acceptance, all systems shall be finally cleaned and left ready for use. 3.12 PAINTING A. Painting will be done under Division 9-Painting except as otherwise noted,but the HVAC Contractor shall leave all surfaces of work free of rust, dirt and grease. B. The HVAC Contractor shall touch-up any equipment scratched in shipment or during installation to match the original finish. Touch-up painting of HVAC equipment shall be part of the HVAC work. C. Any visible ductwork through grilles,registers and diffusers shall be painted flat black. D. Provide one coat of rust preventive primer on all new structural steel supports and new ferrous surfaces not galvanized,including insulated and non-insulated HVAC piping. Rust preventive painting shall be part of the HVAC work. Rust preventive paint shall be "Rust Destroyer" by Advanced Protective Products, Inc., Fair Lawn, NJ, (800) RUST-007. Product shall have a 5-year warranty when applied directly over rust. Clean and prepare surface per manufacturer's recommendations. E. All painting and coating shall match the original finish and shall conform to the requirements detailed in Division 9-Finishes. F. Do not paint over equipment nameplates,nonferrous hardware, accessories or trim. 3.13 PRESSURE TESTING A. Unless otherwise specified herein, all HVAC piping shall be tested as required by Code to 1�/z tunes the rated system pressure or 100 psig, whichever is greater. Care shall be taken to isolate all equipment not suitable for this test pressure by installing pipe caps or blank flanges at the equipment connections. All valves and fittings shall be tested under pressure. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 00 00-16 MAY 2, 2023 HVAC GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.14 PERFORMANCE AND DEMONSTRATION TESTS A. All testing and demonstration of any and all HVAC systems required for acceptance by any authorities having jurisdiction shall be included as part of the HVAC work. This shall include the furnishing of any and all testing equipment, smoke generation devices,and any other required equipment or accessories, and all necessary labor required to perform any required tests or demonstrations. The Contractor shall coordinate and verify all devices, equipment and sequence of testing and/or events with such authorities having jurisdiction. The Contractor shall perform a minimum of two (2) satisfactory preliminary tests or demonstrations prior to any formal tests and/or demonstrations for any code authorities and shall give a minimum of five (5) days advance notice to the Engineer of any and all preliminary tests and/or demonstrations,indicating the date and time of such tests. B. For testing and demonstration of smoke control systems, the requirements in paragraph 3.14.A apply. In addition, coordinate with the owner/operator for witnessing of formal testing. 3.15 TRAINING A. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall conduct operation and training session(s) for the Owner's key operating personnel. These sessions shall be of sufficient length and duration to adequately explain the design intent and proper operating and maintenance techniques for all HVAC equipment and systems. After these sessions are completed,the Contractor shall provide a copy of a signed statement by the Owner that his personnel are thoroughly familiar with and capable of operating all HVAC equipment and systems. END OF SECTION 23 00 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 00 00-17 MAY 2, 2023 HVAC GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 23 05 93 - TESTING. ADJUSTING AND BALANCING (TAB) PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Refer to specification section 23 00 00 - HVAC General, all of which applies to work described in this section as if written in full herein. B. The work described by this section of the specifications consists of furnishing all materials, instruments, labor, and appurtenances to test, adjust and balance all of the HVAC systems furnished and installed under Division 23 of the specifications. C. The TAB agency shall be a subcontractor of the General Contractor and shall not report to or be paid by the HVAC Contractor. The HVAC subcontractor shall be responsible to cooperate with and provide for the balancing subcontractor any and all materials, services, labor, etc. to facilitate completion of the balancing work. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The TAB agency and its specialists shall be certified members of Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) or certified by the National Environmental Balance Bureau (NEBB) to perform TAB service for HVAC. The certification shall be maintained for the entire duration of duties specified herein. The TAB agency shall have been in business for at least the past five years and must be free of disciplinary action by either the AABC or the NEBB during that time. B. All TAB technicians performing actual TAB work shall be experienced and must have done satisfactory work on a minimum of 3 projects comparable in size and complexity of this project and must be certified so by the TAB agency in writing. C. The basic instrumentation shall be calibrated to accuracy requirements by its manufacturer, AABC or NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental Systems. Submit calibration history of the instruments to be used for test and balance purpose during the preliminary and final submittal phase. D. One or more of the applicable AABC,NEBB or SMACNA publications, supplemented by the ASHRAE Handbooks and requirements stated herein shall be the basis for planning, procedures, tolerances and reports. Final report shall cite the exact names of publications used as a basis or reference for the TAB work or reports. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Retain definition(s)remaining after this Section has been edited. B. AABC: Associated Air Balance Council. C. NEBB: National Environmental Balancing Bureau. D. TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 05 93-1 MAY 2, 2023 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. TABB: Testing,Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau. F. TAB Specialist: An entity engaged to perform TAB Work. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Provide plastic plugs to seal holes drilled in ductwork for test purposes. B. Provide for repair of insulation removed or damaged for TAB work to match installation. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 TAB PROCEDURES A. TAB shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the Standard under which the TAB agency is certified, either AABC or NEBB. B. During TAB all related system components shall be in full operation including the Automatic Temperature Controls system. Fan and pump rotation, motor loads and equipment vibration shall be checked and corrected as necessary before proceeding with TAB. Set controls and/or block off parts of distribution systems to simulate design operation of variable volume air or water systems for test and balance work. C. Adjustment of the temperature controls shall be coordinated by the TAB work specialist in conjunction with the Building Automation System/Automatic Temperature Control Company's Engineer. Both shall cooperate to simulate a complete cycle for every system in every mode of operation(automatic, economizer,fire emergency, etc.). D. Coordinate TAB procedures with any phased construction completion requirements for the project. Provide TAB reports for each phase of the project prior to partial final inspections of each phase of the project. E. Record dates and time of day of all tests, and ambient conditions(dry bulb and wet bulb). 3.02 AIR SYSTEMS TAB A. Systems shall be tested, adjusted and balanced so that air quantities and temperatures at outlets are as shown on the Contract Drawings and so that the distribution from supply outlets is uniform over the face of each outlet. B. Direct reading velocity meters may be used for comparative adjustment of individual outlets,but air quantities in ducts having velocities of 1,000 feet per minute or greater shall be measured by means of pitot tubes and inclined gauge manometers. Instrument test opening enclosures shall be provided as required at the direction of the TAB agency. C. Adjustments shall be made in such a manner that splitter and volume adjusters close to air outlets will have the least pressure drop consistent with volume requirements. Primary FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 05 93-2 MAY 2, 2023 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 balancing shall be obtained by adjustment of the dampers at branch duct take-offs. Adjustable fan drives shall be used for making final adjustments of total air quantities. Additional dampers or other air volume adjusters required to accomplish the balancing and adjusting shall be furnished and installed as part of the HVAC work. D. Artificially load air filters by partial blanking to produce air pressure drop of at least 90 percent of the design final pressure drop. E. Check and readjust factory set minimum and maximum air terminal unit flow rates if necessary. Balance air distribution on full cooling maximum. Reset room thermostats and check operation from maximum to minimum cooling, to the heating mode, and back to cooling. Record and report the heating coil leaving air temperature when in the maximum heating mode. F. Adjust fan speeds to provide design air flow. Adjust V-belt drives, including fixed pitch pulley requirements. G. After completion of the testing, adjusting and balancing of the air systems, provide electronic files(e.g.PDFs,etc.)of the complete test report showing the minimum following information which shall be submitted to the Engineer for review: 1. Systems inspection narrative on equipment and installation for conformance with design 2. Duct Air Leakage Test Report 3. Systems Readiness Report 4. TAB report covering flow balance and adjustments, performance tests, Required information: a. Location of each air outlet or inlet. This shall be presented in the form of a reduced size floor plan showing outlet number keyed to the outlet number in the report. b. Dimensions or size of each outlet or inlet C. Type and manufacturer of diffusers, grilles, registers. Indicate duty as supply,return, exhaust, etc. d. CFM of air as indicated on the Drawings for each outlet or inlet with corresponding velocity e. Velocity of air as measured and corresponding cfm at which system has been balanced and adjusted, for each outlet or inlet f. Velocity of air measured and corresponding cfm, after each complete system has been balanced and adjusted,for each main branch or zone duct at the supply fan,the return fan and the exhaust fan, as the case may be g. After each complete system has been balanced and adjusted, the total cfm at fan discharge, the total return air to the apparatus, the total outside air to the apparatus,the total outside air to the apparatus,static pressure at fan outlet, total static pressure for apparatus, fan speed, motor amperage for each phase and voltage 5. Narrative of uncorrected installation deficiencies noted during TAB and applicable explanatory comments on test results that differ from design requirements. H. For air conditioning systems with adaptive dehumidification cycle, test equipment in the conventional cooling mode, the dehumidification (hot gas) mode and the cooling with FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 05 93-3 MAY 2, 2023 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 enhanced dehumidification (warm liquid) mode and record leaving air temperatures (db/wb) for each mode. 1. The above testing, adjusting and balancing shall be performed for the first season of the year, cooling season or heating season, which occurs at the completion of the building. Additional balancing and adjusting which may be required for the season of the year next following shall be performed as part of the work under this specification. J. Ventilation air distribution systems (outdoor air and exhaust air) shall be balanced to achieve the airflow rates indicated on the drawings. These airflow rates shall be considered minimum rates. The measured air balance tolerance for both outdoor air and exhaust air rates shall be-0%to+10%. K. Include TAB for all kitchen exhaust hoods, fans, make-up air systems, etc. Measure and record airflow, static pressure, and air temperatures at hood exhaust inlets, hood make-up air outlets and hood conditioned air outlets (if applicable). 3.03 MARKING OF SETTINGS AND TEST PORTS A. Following the approval of the final TAB Report, the setting of all HVAC adjustment devices including valves, splitters and dampers shall be permanently marked by the TAB Specialist so that adjustment can be restored if disturbed at any time. Style and colors used for markings shall be coordinated with the General Contractor. B. The TAB Specialist shall permanently and legibly identify the location points of duct test ports. If the ductwork has exterior insulation, the identification shall be made on the exterior side of the insulation. All penetrations through ductwork and ductwork insulation shall be sealed to prevent air leaks and maintain integrity of vapor barrier. END OF SECTION 23 05 93 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 05 93-4 MAY 2, 2023 TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 23 07 00 - HVAC INSULATION PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All work specified herein shall be accomplished in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 23 00 00- HVAC General. B. The insulation shall be installed in a neat and worlananlike manner by trained personnel regularly engaged in the installation of insulation and approved by the insulation manufacturer. Insulation, adhesives, coverings and coatings shall be applied in strict accordance with its respective manufacturer's recommendations. Installer has been in business for no less than 5 years and has completed at least 10 installations of similar size projects. C. The contractor shall verify that test and inspection of the work to be insulated have been completed and approved before the insulation is applied. D. All insulation must meet applicable codes for Flame Spread and Smoke Developed ratings when tested in accordance with ASTM 84 and UL 723. E. VOC Content: Submit adhesive and sealants product information or MSDS showing VOC content information for all applicable products specified under this section. All applicable products in this section must meet low VOC content as specified by LEED Specification Section 01 81 16: Facility Environmental Requirements. All work performed under this specification shall be accomplished in accordance with the requirements and provisions of the following sections: 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. The work done under this section shall include all labor, materials, accessories, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install all insulation, complete, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Materials shall be the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of insulation products. Insulation materials shall be products that have been in use in commercial buildings for at least 2 years prior to bid opening. B. Surface Burning Characteristics: FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 07 00-1 MAY 2, 2023 HVAC INSULATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Insulation shall have a composite insulation,jacket, binders, and adhesive Flame- Spread rating of 25 or less and a Smoke-Developed rating of 50 or less and shall be so listed by UL. 2. Insulation and related materials shall have surface burning characteristics determined by test performed on identical products per ASTM E 84, NFPA 255, and UL 723,mounted and installed as per ASTM E 2231. 3. Adhesives, mastics, tapes, and other accessories shall have the same component ratings. 4. Materials shall be labeled indicating compliance with the above requirements. 5. All testing shall be performed by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Insulation, jacket materials, adhesives, mastics, tapes and cement material containers shall be labeled with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1.04 RELATED WORK A. Where pipes and ducts pass through fire walls, fire partitions, above grade floors, and fire rated chase walls,the penetration shall be protected and sealed with fire-stopping materials as specified in Section 23 00 00-HVAC General. B. Adequate provisions shall be made to protect the premises, equipment, and the work of other trades against droppings, adhesives and coatings used in the installation. C. Where indicated, painting of insulation jackets shall be as specified in Section 09 91 00 - Painting. D. Refer to Section 23 23 00 Refrigerant Piping for refrigerant piping insulation. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product information for insulation materials to the Architect in accordance with Division I and Section 23 00 00- HVAC General. B. Submit shop drawings and data to prove complete compliance with these specifications on products and methods of installation. Include materials used, thickness for each application, flame and smoke ratings, thermal conductivity, permeance, density for each product, and jackets(both factory and field applied). Indicate methods of applications. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Provide materials which are the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such products and that essentially duplicate items that have been in satisfactory use for at least 2 years prior to purchase. Insulation shall be CFC and HCFC free. B. Provide insulation that meets or exceed the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 07 00-2 MAY 2, 2023 HVAC INSULATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Insulation exterior shall be cleanable, grease resistant, non-flaking and non-peeling. Materials shall be compatible and shall not contribute to corrosion, soften, or otherwise attack surfaces to which applied in either wet or dry state. 2.02 PIPE INSULATION FOR STEAM AND WATER PIPING A. Materials as specified in this section shall be manufactured by Armstrong,Johns-Manville, Knauf, Pittsburgh-Corning, CertainTeed, Pabco, Dow Chemical, Owens Corning or approved equal. B. Insulation thicknesses shall be as shown in the following table: Minimum Pipe Insulation Insulation Thickness for Pipe Sizes 1 to less 1-1/2 4 to Fluid Operating Mean Less than to less less 8 in. Temperature Rating than 1-1/2 than than and Piping System Types Range Temp. 1 in. in. 4 in. 8 in. Larger °C °F OF In. In. In. In. In. (Cooling Systems) Condensate 4.4-15.6 40-60 75 0.5 0.5 1.0 1.0 1.0 * For chilled water piping located in attics and other unconditioned spaces (excluding return air plenums),increase the pipe insulation thickness by 1/2" for pipe sizes up through 8". Insulation for piping 10" and larger shall be 2- 1/2"thick. C. Unless noted otherwise, the abovementioned piping systems inside the building shall be insulated with a 5 lb/ft' (nominal) density sectional fiberglass insulation with a thermal conductivity(k factor)not to exceed 0.23BTU•in/hr•ft2.'F (0.033 W/m K),when tested in accordance with ASTM C 335 at 75 °F (24 °C). The jacket shall be fire retardant with a suitable vapor barrier. All joints and seams shall be sealed vapor tight. All joints and seams shall be lapped in place to form a continuous vapor barrier covering. All seams shall then be covered with "All Service Jacket" (ASJ) 3" wide tape. The tape shall match the jacket. The tape shall be squeegeed in place to provide complete adhesion of the tape to the jacket and to provide a continuous vapor barrier covering. Exterior water piping shall be heat traced. D. Piping installed outdoors shall be insulated with cellular glass insulation, Pittsburgh- Corning "Foamglas" or approved equal. Insulation thickness required to prevent condensation shall be determined by the manufacturer for worse case ambient conditions. 1. Install with all service jacket and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Where heat tracing is specified, oversize insulation to allow space for heat tape. E. Equipment shall be insulated in the same manner as specified for the associated piping. Suitable provisions shall be made for breaking flanges as may be required for maintenance. Hot water pumps do not get insulated unless specifically called for. The following FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 07 00-3 MAY 2, 2023 HVAC INSULATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 equipment,but not limited to,requires insulation: expansion tanks,air separators,chemical treatment"shot type"feeders, storage tanks, etc. F. Provide high density preformed pipe insulation inserts at all pipe hangers. Inserts shall be equal to Foamglas by Pittsburgh Corning or calcium silicate. Provide ribbed hanger saddles by Centerline, Buckaroos,Inc. or approved equal. G. All exposed insulated piping in mechanical rooms below 10'-0" AFF shall be protected by a corrugated aluminum jacket with bands 3'-0" on center. H. "Circuit setter"type balancing valves shall be insulated with polyisocyanurate or extruded polystyrene block insulation with matching PVC cover. Insulation shall by easily removable for service. Valve insulation shall be as manufactured by Extol or approved equal. I. Provide insulating tape over all piping specialties to prevent condensation such as drain valves, drain plugs, combination temperature/pressure test plugs, etc. 2.03 BLANKET TYPE INSULATION(DUCTWRAP) A. Description: I. Flexible, limited combustible, blanket type insulation composed of mineral or inorganic glass fibers bonded together with a thermosetting resin,meeting ASTM C 553, Type 1 and ASTM C 1290. 2. Vapor retarder jacket:Provide one of the following types of vapor retarder jackets: a. Foil-scrim-kraft (FSK), foil reinforced kraft (FRK), or polypropylene- scrim-kraft(PSK) with a 2" (50mm) (min.) stapling and taping flange on one edge. b. Conforming to ASTM C 1136 Type 11. 3. Surface Temperature Application Limits: Insulation shall be rated for use on surfaces operating at temperatures up to 250°F. 4. Ratings: Insulation Type: Type 1: Type 2: Type 2: Minimum R-Value, out of R-7.4 R-10.3 R-15.0 package*: (1.30) (1.81) (2.66) hr-ft'-'F/Btu(m2•'C/W) at 750F 24°C mean temperature Minimum R-Value,installed: R-6.0 R-8.0 R-12.0 hr•ft2•°F/Btu (m2•°C/W) at 75°F (1.06) (1.46) (2.16) 24°C mean temperature Minimum Density: 1.0 0.75 0.75 lb/ft3 (kg/M3 16 12 12 Thickness: 2 3 42/5 Inches mm 51 76 112 Maximum Labeled K-value at 75°F 0.27 0.29 0.29 (24°C) mean temperature: (0.039) (0.042) (0.042) Btu.•in/hr.•ft2*'F W/m.•°C FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 07 00-4 MAY 2, 2023 HVAC INSULATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 *Value may vary by manufacturer;minimum installed value must be met B. Insulate the following with Type 1 blanket insulation: I. All galvanized steel ductwork containing heated and/or cooled supply air, except: a. Exposed ductwork in finished conditioned spaces. b. Ductwork indicated to be internally lined or insulated with external insulation. 2. Concealed surfaces of ceiling diffusers exposed to non-return air plenums. 3. Return air ductwork exposed to attics or non-return air plenums. 4. Relief air ductwork and plenums from the exterior to 18"past the relief air damper assembly. 5. Return air, toilet exhaust, and general exhaust ductwork exhausting conditioned air and routed through interior spaces that are ventilated with outside air or exposed to outside air conditions. 6. Concealed outside air ductwork located within indirectly conditioned spaces (e.g. indoor soffits, furr-downs,vertical chases, etc.). 7. Ductwork and plenums located inside of the building (i.e. located within the exterior boundary or skin of the building thermal envelope) when containing or flowing, makeup air, garage ventilation intake or exhaust air ducts and plenums, when not indicated to be insulated with rigid fiberglass insulation. This applies to ducts and plenums whether exposed or concealed within chases when located on the interior side of the exterior skin of heated or cooled space. C. Insulate the following with Type 2 blanket insulation: I. Ductwork and plenums located outside of the exterior boundary or skin of the building thermal envelope when containing or flowing heated and/or cooled air when not indicated to be insulated with rigid fiberglass insulation. 2. Supply air ductwork located in unconditioned attic spaces and in indoor spaces that are ventilated with outside air or exposed to outside air conditions. 3. Concealed surfaces of ceiling diffusers exposed to attics. D. Subject to compliance with requirements, insulation shall be manufactured by: CertainTeed, Johns Manville, Knauf, Owens Corning, or approved equal. 2.04 DUCT LINER A. Refer to Section 23 3100—Ductwork and Accessories for duct liner requirements. 2.05 EXTERIOR SUPPLY AND RETURN AIR DUCTWORK A. Exterior supply and return air ductwork shall be constructed of galvanized sheet metal lined with 2" thick 3 lb/ft' duct liner board(R-8 min.) Johns-Manville Linacoustic R-300. All ductwork seams shall be externally sealed watertight with a 30-year silicone caulk and coated with a rust preventive coating over the entire duct surface. 1. As an alternative to insulated sheet metal, an outdoor duct system as manufactured by Thermaduct, LLC may be used. The system shall incorporate duct and fittings having an installed minimum R-value of 12. The system shall utilize non-fibrous FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 07 00-5 MAY 2, 2023 HVAC INSULATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 closed cell Kingspan KoolDuct fortified inner liner compliant to UL(C-UL) 181, Standard for Safety Listed,Class 1 system and SMACNA Class 1 leakage, or less. Submit product data and layout drawings during the submittal phase. 2.06 DUCTWORK WITHIN MECHANICAL ROOMS A. Ducts within mechanical rooms shall be insulated with V thick, 3 lb/ft' rigid fiberglass board with an R factor of not less than 5 (K= 0.235 at 75 degrees F mean temperature) with reinforced foil vapor barrier. Insulation shall be secured to ductwork with stick pins and speed washers. All joints and stick pin terminations shall be sealed with 3"wide strips of vapor barrier material and applied to form a continuous vapor seal. B. Apply V x V x 30 mils thick white PVC corner angles in accordance with ASTM D 1784, Class 16354-C at all insulation board corners. 2.07 EXTERIOR WEATHER PROTECTION A. Piping and/or breeching exposed to the weather and designated to be insulated shall be insulated in the same way it is insulated within the building for concealed areas. It shall then be weatherproofed with corrugated aluminum jacketing. It shall have 3/16" corrugations and shall be 0.016"thick with a factory attached moisture barrier continuously laminated across the full width of the jacketing. All pipe fittings, valves and specialties exposed to the weather shall be insulated and weatherproofed with aluminum jacketing. Childers Universe-E11 Jacs of the same metal as the jacketing shall be used. Jacketing shall have a 2" lap at all joints. Longitudinal laps shall be on the underneath side of horizontal runs and slightly offset from one another. The outside of the longitudinal lap shall also have a 1" hem turned under. All laps shall be made with weatherproof mastic. Wrap the jacketing tightly and smoothly and secure with aluminum or stainless steel bands. Bands shall not be more than 12" on center and a strap shall be placed at the circumferential laps. The lap shall have adequate mastic to make a tight joint. Excess mastic shall be removed from the outside to provide a neat and professional appearance. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Shop drawing submittals shall include a complete package of materials and methods intended for use as described in this section. B. All work shall be in strict accordance with applicable codes, ordinances and the manufacturer's recommendations. C. All work shall be performed in a professional workmanlike manner and standard trade practice. It shall be smooth in appearance and suitable for finish painting. D. All exterior piping shall be installed with a corrugated aluminum jacket with bands Y-0" on center. E. Provide insulating tape over all piping specialties to prevent condensation such as drain valves, drain plugs, combination temperature/pressure test plugs, etc. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 07 00-6 MAY 2, 2023 HVAC INSULATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 F. Fiberglass pipe insulation shall be applied to clean (free of rust) dry pipe prior to leak testing. Chilled and condenser water systems shall not be operated until the insulation is completely installed with a vapor barrier in place. Refer to Section 23 21 13 - Piping and Accessories for additional information. END OF SECTION 23 07 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 07 00-7 MAY 2, 2023 HVAC INSULATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 23 08 00 - COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section. B. The OPR and BOD documentation are included by reference for information only. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This section includes commissioning process requirements for HVAC&R systems, assemblies, and equipment. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for general commissioning process requirements. 1.03 DESCRIPTION A. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for the description of commissioning. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Division 01 Section"General Commissioning Requirements" for definitions. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 01 Section"General Commissioning Requirements"for CxA's role. B. Refer to Division 01 Section"Submittals"for specific requirements. C. In addition,provide the following: 1. Certificates of readiness 2. Certificates of completion of installation,prestart, and startup activities. 3. O&M manuals 4. Test reports 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test Equipment Calibration Requirements: Contractors will comply with test manufacturer's calibration procedures and intervals. Recalibrate test instruments immediately after instruments have been repaired resulting from being dropped or FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 08 00-1 MAY 2, 2023 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 damaged. Affix calibration tags to test instruments. Furnish calibration records to CxA upon request. 1.07 COORDINATION A. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for requirements pertaining to coordination during the commissioning process. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 TEST EQUIPMENT A. All standard testing equipment required to perform startup, initial checkout and functional performance testing shall be provided by the Contractor for the equipment being tested. For example, the mechanical contractor of Division 23 shall ultimately be responsible for all standard testing equipment for the HVAC&R system and controls system in Division 23, except for equipment specific to and used by TAB in their commissioning responsibilities. A sufficient quantity of two-way radios shall be provided by each subcontractor. B. Special equipment, tools and instruments (specific to a piece of equipment and only available from vendor) required for testing shall be included in the base bid price to the Owner and left on site. C. Proprietary test equipment and software required by any equipment manufacturer for programming and/or start-up, whether specified or not, shall be provided by the manufacturer of the equipment. Manufacturer shall provide the test equipment, demonstrate its use, and assist in the commissioning process as needed. Proprietary test equipment(and software) shall become the property of the Owner upon completion of the commissioning process. D. All testing equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system performance with the tolerances specified in the Specifications. If not otherwise noted, the following minimum requirements apply: Temperature sensors and digital thermometers shall have a certified calibration within the past year to an accuracy of 0.5°F and a resolution of+ or - 0.1°F. Pressure sensors shall have an accuracy of+ or - 2.0% of the value range being measured (not full range of meter) and have been calibrated within the last year. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS A. With assistance from the installing contractors, the CxA will prepare Pre-Functional Checklists for all commissioned components, equipment, and systems B. Operation and Maintenance Data: FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 08 00-2 MAY 2, 2023 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Contractor will provide a copy of O&M literature within 45 days of each submittal acceptance for use during the commissioning process for all commissioned equipment and systems. 2. The CxA will review the O&M literature once for conforinance to project requirements. 3. The CxA will receive a copy of the final approved O&M literature once corrections have been made by the Contractor. C. Demonstration and Training: 1. Contractor will provide demonstration and training as required by the specifications. 2. A training agenda for each training session must be submitted to the CxA one (1) week prior the training session. 3. The CxA shall be notified at least 72 hours in advance of scheduled tests. A copy of the test record shall be provided to the CxA, Owner, and Architect. 4. Engage a Factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specific equipment. 5. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping,trouble shooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment. 6. Review data in O&M Manuals. 3.02 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Mechanical, Controls and TAB Contractors. The commissioning responsibilities applicable to each of the mechanical, controls and TAB contractors of Division 23 are as follows (all references apply to commissioned equipment only): B. Perform commissioning tests at the direction of the CxA. C. Attend construction phase controls coordination meetings. D. Attend testing, adjusting, and balancing review and coordination meetings. E. Participate in HVAC&R systems, assemblies, equipment, and component maintenance orientation and inspection as directed by the CxA. F. Provide information requested by the CxA for final commissioning documentation. G. Include requirements for submittal data, operation and maintenance data, and training in each purchase order or sub-contract written. H. Prepare preliminary schedule for Mechanical system orientations and inspections, operation and maintenance manual submissions, training sessions, pipe and duct system testing, equipment start-up, testing and balancing and task completion for owner. Distribute preliminary schedule to commissioning team members. L Update schedule as required throughout the construction period. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 08 00-3 MAY 2, 2023 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 J. During the startup and initial checkout process, execute the related portions of the prefunctional checklists for all commissioned equipment. K. Provide measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data, and provide data acquisition equipment to record data for the complete range of testing for the required test period. L. Gather operation and maintenance literature on all equipment, and assemble in binders as required by the specifications. Submit to CxA(45) days after submittal acceptance. M. Notify the CxA a minimum of two (2) weeks in advance of the time for start of the testing and balancing work. Attend the initial testing and balancing meeting for review of the official testing and balancing procedures. N. Participate in, and schedule vendors and contractors to participate in the training sessions. O. Provide written notification to the CM/GC and CxA Authority that the following work has been completed in accordance with the contract documents, and that the equipment, systems, and sub-system are operating as required. 1. HVAC&R equipment including all fans, air handling units, ductwork, dampers, fan coil units, and all other equipment furnished under this Division. P. The equipment supplier shall document the perforinance of his equipment. Q. Test,Adjust and Balance Contractor 1. Attend initial commissioning coordination meeting scheduled by the Commissioning Authority. 2. Attend the testing and balancing review meeting scheduled by the CxA. Be prepared to discuss the procedures that shall be followed in testing, adjusting, and balancing the HVAC&R system. 3. At the completion of the testing and balancing work, and the submittal of the final testing and balancing report, notify the HVAC&R contractor and the CM/GC. R. Provide training of the Owner's operating staff using expert qualified personnel, as specified. S. Equipment Suppliers 1. Provide all requested submittal data, including detailed start-up procedures and specific responsibilities of the Owner, to keep warranties in force. 2. Assist in equipment testing per agreements with contractors. 3. Provide information requested by CxA regarding equipment sequence of operation and testing procedures. T. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for additional contractor responsibilities. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 08 00-4 MAY 2, 2023 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.03 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for Owner's responsibilities. 3.04 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for Design Professional's responsibilities. 3.05 CxA'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for CxA's responsibilities. 3.06 TESTING PREPARATION A. Certify in writing to the CxA that HVAC&R systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and started and are operating according to the Contract Documents. B. Certify in writing to the CxA that HVAC&R instrumentation and control systems have been completed and calibrated, that they are operating according to the Contract Documents, and that pretest set points have been recorded. C. Certify in writing that testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures have been completed and that testing, adjusting, and balancing reports have been submitted, discrepancies corrected, and corrective work approved. D. Place systems, subsystems, and equipment into operating mode to be tested (e.g., normal shutdown, normal auto position, normal manual position, unoccupied cycle, emergency power, and alarm conditions). E. Inspect and verify the position of each device and interlock identified on checklists. F. Check safety cutouts, alarms, and interlocks with smoke control and life-safety systems during each mode of operation. G. Testing Instrumentation: Install measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data as directed by the CxA. 3.07 TESTING,ADJUSTING AND BALANCING A. Prior to performance of Testing, Adjusting and Balancing work, provide copies of reports, sample forms, checklists, and certificates to the CxA. B. Notify the CxA a minimum of two (2)weeks in advance of testing and balancing Work. 3.08 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 08 00-5 MAY 2, 2023 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to perform commissioning test at the direction of the CxA. B. Scope of HVAC&R testing shall include entire HVAC&R installation, from central equipment for heat generation and refrigeration through distribution systems to each conditioned space. Testing shall include measuring capacities and effectiveness of operational and control functions. C. Test all operating modes, interlocks, control responses, and responses to abnormal or emergency conditions, and verify proper response of building automation system controllers and sensors. D. The CxA along with the HVAC&R contractor, Testing and Balancing Subcontractor, and HVAC&R Instrumentation and Control Subcontractor shall prepare detailed testing plans,procedures, and checklists for HVAC&R systems, subsystems, and equipment. E. Tests will be performed using design conditions whenever possible. F. Simulated conditions may need to be imposed using an artificial load when it is not practical to test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions, calibrate testing instruments. Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated conditions as directed by the CxA and document simulated conditions and methods of simulation. After tests, return settings to normal operating conditions. G. The CxA may direct that sensor values be altered with a signal generator when design or simulating conditions and altering set points are not practical. H. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the HVAC&R system, document the deficiency and report it to the Owner. After deficiencies are resolved,reschedule tests. 3.09 HVAC&R SYSTEMS, SUBSYSTEMS,AND EQUIPMENT TESTING PROCEDURES A. Equipment Testing and Acceptance Procedures: Testing requirements are specified in individual Division 23 sections. Provide submittals, test data, inspector record, and certifications to the CxA. B. Refrigeration System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of chillers, refrigerant compressors and condensers, heat pumps, and other refrigeration systems. The CxA with input from the HVAC contactor and CM/GC shall determine the sequence of testing and testing procedures for each equipment item and pipe section to be tested. C. HVAC&R Distribution System Testing: Provide technicians, instrumentation, tools, and equipment to test performance of air, steam, and hydronic distribution systems; special exhaust; and other distribution systems, including HVAC&R terminal equipment and unitary equipment. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 08 00-6 MAY 2, 2023 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 D. The work included in the commissioning process involves a complete and thorough evaluation of the operation and performance of all components, systems and sub-systems. The following equipment and systems shall be evaluated: 1. Refer to Commissioning Plan for scope of work. 3.10 DEFICIENCIES/NON-CONFORMANCE, COST OF RETESTING, FAILURE DUE TO MANUFACTURER DEFECT A. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for requirements pertaining to deficiencies/non-conformance, cost of retesting, or failure due to manufacturer defect. 3.11 APPROVAL A. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for approval procedures. 3.12 DEFERRED TESTING A. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for requirements pertaining to deferred testing. 3.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall conform to Contract Documents requirements as stated in Division 01. B. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for the AE and CxA roles in the Operation and Maintenance Manual contribution, review and approval process. C. An updated as-built version of the control drawings and sequences of operation shall be included in the final controls O&M manual submittal. 3.14 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL A. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for requirements pertaining to training. B. Mechanical Contractor. The mechanical contractor shall have the following training responsibilities: 1. Provide the CxA with a training plan two (2)weeks before the planned training. 2. Provide designated Owner personnel with comprehensive orientation and training in the understanding of the systems and the operation and maintenance of each piece of HVAC equipment including, but not limited to, all HVAC equipment (ex.pumps, chillers,heat rejection equipment, air conditioning units, air handling units, fans, etc.) FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 08 00-7 MAY 2, 2023 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. Training shall normally start with classroom sessions followed by hands-on training on each piece of equipment, which shall illustrate the various modes of operation, including startup, shutdown, fire/smoke alarm,power failure, etc. 4. During any demonstration, should the system fail to perform in accordance with the requirements of the O&M manual or sequence of operations, the system will be repaired or adjusted as necessary and the demonstration repeated. 5. The appropriate trade or manufacturer's representative shall provide the instructions on each major piece of equipment. This person may be the start-up technician for the piece of equipment, the installing contractor or manufacturer's representative. Practical building operating expertise as well as in-depth knowledge of all modes of operation of the specific piece of equipment are required. More than one party may be required to execute the training. 6. The training sessions shall follow the outline in the Table of Contents of the operation and maintenance manual and illustrate whenever possible the use of the O&M manuals for reference. 7. Training shall include: a. Use of the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction material included in the O&M manuals. b. A review of the written O&M instructions emphasizing safe and proper operating requirements, preventative maintenance, special tools needed and spare parts inventory suggestions. The training shall include start- up, operation in all modes possible, shut-down, seasonal changeover and any emergency procedures. C. Discussion of relevant health and safety issues and concerns. d. Discussion of warranties and guarantees. e. Common troubleshooting problems and solutions. f. Explanatory information included in the O&M manuals and the location of all plans and manuals in the facility. g. Discussion of any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation. h. The format and training agenda in The HVAC Commissioning Process, ASHRAE Guideline 1-2007, is recommended. 8. Hands-on training shall include start-up, operation in all modes possible, including manual, shut-down and any emergency procedures and preventative maintenance for all pieces of equipment. 9. The mechanical contractor shall fully explain and demonstrate the operation, function and overrides of any local packaged controls, not controlled by the central control system. 10. Training shall occur after functional testing is complete, unless approved otherwise by the Owner. C. TAB. The TAB contractor shall have the following training responsibilities: 1. TAB shall meet for with facility staff after completion of TAB and instruct them on the following: a. Go over the final TAB report, explaining the layout and meanings of each data type. b. Discuss any outstanding deficient items in control, ducting or design that may affect the proper delivery of air or water. C. Identify and discuss any duct runs, diffusers, coils, fans and pumps that are close to or are not meeting their design capacity. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 08 00-8 MAY 2, 2023 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 d. Discuss any temporary settings and steps to finalize them for any areas that are not finished. e. Other salient information that may be useful for facility operations, relative to TAB. END OF SECTION 23 08 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 08 00-9 MAY 2, 2023 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 23 23 00 - REFRIGERANT PIPING, INSULATION AND ACCESSORIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All work specified herein shall be accomplished in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 23 00 00- HVAC General. B. Refrigerant piping shall meet the requirements of the Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems (ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15-Latest Edition) and the Code for Pressure Piping (ANSI/ASME Standard B31.5-Latest Edition: Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components). C. Piping,valves, accessories and insulation installed indoors shall have a flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed index of 50 or less. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. The work under this section shall include all labor, materials, accessories, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install all refrigerant piping, insulating systems, and accessories, complete, as indicated and specified herein. B. Without limiting the generality thereof,the work in this section shall include the following items: 1. Direct expansion(DX) system piping(cooling only and heat pump) 2. Variable Refrigerant Flow/Variable Refrigerant Volume (VRF/VRV) system piping 3. Insulating the following systems: a. Refrigerant suction(low pressure gas)piping b. Refrigerant hot gas (discharge or high-pressure gas)piping. C. Refrigerant liquid piping for VRF/VRV and Heat Pump systems. d. Refrigerant liquid piping for ductless split systems 1.03 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Specification sections: 1. 23 8126 Split System Air Conditioners 2. 23 8127 Split Systems(Electric Cooling, Gas Heating) 3. 23 8128.13 Ductless Split System Heat Pumps 4. 23 81 29 Variable Refrigerant Flow HVAC Systems 1.04 RELATED REFERENCES A. Designation and Safety Classification of Refrigerants(ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 34-Latest Edition). 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 23 00-1 MAY 2, 2023 REFRIGERANT PIPING, INSULATION AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Installer Qualification: Only trained and experienced installers skilled in refrigeration pipe installation and brazing of copper tubing shall be used. B. Piping, valves and accessories shall be manufactured in the United States. Submit Certificate of Manufacture with shop drawings. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include pressure drop based on manufacturer's test data. B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube, and fitting sizes, valve arrangements and locations, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show interface and spatial relationships between piping and equipment. I. Refrigerant piping indicated on Drawings is schematic only. Size piping and design actual piping layout, including specialties, and pipe and tube sizes to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation difference between compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure proper operation and compliance with warranties of connected equipment. C. Piping materials including Certificate of Manufacture D. Insulation products, adhesives, coatings, etc. including Material Safety Data Sheets E. Field quality-control test reports F. Operation and maintenance data 1.07 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Store piping,insulation,valves and specialties in a clean and protected area. B. Piping, tubes, and coils shall be stored with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior and exterior remain clean prior to installation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 REFRIGERANT PIPING A. Piping shall be: I. Type "L"hard drawn seamless copper tube conforming to ASTM B88, or 2. Type "ACR" (Air Conditioning and Refrigeration) service copper tubing conforming to ASTM B280. a. Straight Lengths: ASTM B 75, UNS C12200, H55 Temper (Light Drawn), ACR Bending Quality; Cleaned, Eddy Current Tested, and Plugged per ASTM B 280. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 23 00-2 MAY 2, 2023 REFRIGERANT PIPING, INSULATION AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 b. Coiled: ASTM B 280,UNS C12200,060 Temper(Soft Annealed),ACR, cleaned and capped. Coils shall be dehydrated,purged with Nitrogen and tightly capped to insure cleanliness. Piping shall be engineered and constructed to support R-410A to 700 psi @ 250°F. 1) Acceptable manufacturers: a) Streamline/Mueller b) Reftekk, Inc. C) Linesets,Inc. d) ACR Green Proshield by Select Manufacturing,Inc. e) JMF Company B. Joints shall be brazed. Brazing filler metals shall comply with AWS A5.8. Mechanical press type joints are not allowed. 2.02 VALVES,FITTINGS AND SPECIALTIES A. Fittings shall be wrought copper conforming to ASME/ANSI Standard B 16. B. Valves, filter-driers and other accessories shall be suitable for refrigerant service. C. Field Swaged Brazing Cups: MSS-SP-73,ASME B 16.50 D. Field Bends (all angles): ASME B31.5 E. Full Port Refrigeration Service Valves: 1. Body: Forged brass uni-body style with brass cap including key end to remove core 2. Schrader service valve with cap 3. Core: Removable ball-type check valve with stainless-steel spring 4. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene 5. End Connections: Socket ends 6. Working Pressure Rating: 700 psig (factory tested) 7. Maximum Operating Temperature 300°F 8. Valves must be specifically rated for R-410A 9. Approved manufacturers: Diamondback,Parker, Mueller/Streamline 2.03 INSULATION A. Refrigerant piping shall be insulated as follows: 1. Operating temperatures up to 220°F: flexible elastomeric tubing insulation (PVC/NBR), AP/Armaflex Black LapSealT" pipe insulation as manufactured by Armacell, LLC or approved equal. All joints and seams shall be sealed weather- tight with Armaflex Black LapSeal" Tape. Black LapSeal" Tape shall also be used to secure the thermostat cable to the pipe insulation prior to applying the finish coat. The finish coat for flexible elastomeric insulation installed outdoors shall be two coats of a water-based latex paint designed for use over all forms of flexible elastomeric insulation. Finish coat shall provide a protective finish suitable to both indoor and outdoor applications, formulated for cold weather flexibility to resist FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 23 00-3 MAY 2, 2023 REFRIGERANT PIPING, INSULATION AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 cracking and weather-resistant to ultraviolet (UV) and ozone. Coating shall be Armaflex WB finish or equivalent product compatible with the insulation. a. Acceptable alternate products: 1) Aeroflex,USA,Inc. Aerocell with Protape and two coats of field applied Aerocel Aerocoat. 2) K-Flex TitanTM(no field applied protective coating required) 3. Operating temperature from 220°F to 257°F: Flexible Elastomeric Foam: EPDM - Closed cell expanded rubber. Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials for refrigeration pipe sizes 1/4" and greater. a. Outdoor Use: EPDM pre-split with lap seal and two coats of field applied UV and ozone resistant coating: 1) Aeroflex,USA,Inc.,EPDM Aerocel-SSPT with two coats of field applied Aerocel Aerocoat 2) Armacell, LLC, EPDM UT SolaFlex, pre-split with lap seal and with two coats of field applied Armaflex WB 3) K-Flex Titan"HT(no field applied protective coating required) b. Indoor Use: EPDM pre-split with lap seal: 1) Aeroflex,USA, Inc., EPDM SSPT 2) Armacell, LLC, EPDM UT SolaFlex,pre-split with lap seal 3) K-Flex Titan"HT C. Applied to Annealed Coiled Tubing(Line Sets): 1) EPDM continuous tube a) Streamline/Mueller b) Reftekk,Inc. C) Linesets,Inc. d) ACR Green Proshield by Select Manufacturing,Inc. e) JMF Company f) K-Flex Titan 4. Fittings, valves and specialties shall be insulated with factory formed sectional units of the materials listed above. 5. Insulation that is outdoors and not directly exposed to sunlight (i.e. piping is enclosed in a prefabricated duct system) does not require the UV protective coating. 6. Valves and specialties shall be provided with a factory insulation package fabricated from materials listed above. 7. Insulating systems above are to be considered as a minimum. Air conditioning system manufacturer's recommendations take precedence over the insulation materials listed above. B. Insulation thickness shall be as follows: ALL CODE VERSIONS 1. VRF/VRV Heat Pump and Heat Recovery Systems -Insulate all piping: (Note that some ductless split systems and multi-split systems may operate at these temperatures. Verify operating temperatures with the manufacturer) VRF/VRV Refri erant Piping Systems ACR TUBING OUTSIDE DIAMETER REFRIGERAN REFRIGERA INSULATI 1/4' 3/8' 1/2' 5/8' 3/4' 7/8' 1-1/8 1-3/8 1-5/8' T NT N INSULATION THICKNESS REQUIRED(INCHES) FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 23 00-4 MAY 2, 2023 REFRIGERANT PIPING, INSULATION AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 CONDITIO MEAN or TEMPERATt RATING PHASE RE TEMPERA RANGE URE (°F) (°F) HIGH 201-250 150 2- 2-1/2 2-1/2 2-1/2 2-1/2 2-1/2 2-1/2 2-1/2 2-1/2' PRESSURE 1- 1- 1- 1- 1- 1- 1- VAPOR 141-200 125 1�2„ 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 2" 1- 1- LIQUID 105-140 100 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" I" 1/2 1/2 1�2„ 11 1) 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 1/2 „ LOW 40-60 75 1/2 1/2 1 PRESSURE VAPOR BELOW 40 50 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 1" 1/2 1/2 1/2" NOTE: FOR PIPING SMALLER THAN 1-1/2 INCHES AND LOCATED IN PARTITIONS WITHIN CONDITIONED SPACES, REDUCTION OF THESE THICKNESSES BY 1 INCH SHALL BE PERMITTED, BUT NOT TO THICKNESSES BELOW 1 INCH. IECC 2012, 2015 and 2018 Commercial 1. Traditional Cooling Only Split Systems (TXV located at indoor unit) — Insulate suction piping only: a. All pipe sizes 1/2" insulation 2. Traditional Heat Pump Split Systems (TXV located at indoor unit) — Insulate suction piping only: a. <I-1/2"pipe V insulation b. 1-1/2"<4"pipe 1-1/2" insulation 3. Mini-Split Cooling Only (TXV located at outdoor unit)— Insulate all piping— V insulation 4. Mini-Split Heat Pump (TXV located at outdoor unit) — Insulate all piping — 1" insulation PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 23 00-5 MAY 2, 2023 REFRIGERANT PIPING, INSULATION AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Refrigerant piping shall be supported as shown on the Drawings and as required at intervals not over 8'-0" O.C. and at all turns and offsets. Hangers and pipe clamps shall be copper plated tubing hangers of adequate size to fit around tubing and insulation as required. Saddles shall be used under insulated tubing to protect insulation. Piping routed in excess of 6(six)lineal feet on the roof shall be supported by B-Line"Dura-Blok"rooftop supports or approved equal. B. Pressure testing of piping systems shall be in accordance with standard industry practice for the refrigerant used. C. Refrigerant piping shall be clean and free of outside contaminants at all times. Prior to start-up of any equipment or insulation installation, all piping shall be cleaned, tested, dehydrated and charged as recommended by the refrigerant compressor manufacturer. 1. Procedure: Joints and connections in refrigerant piping shall not be installed in partitions or walls or where inaccessible for testing, inspection and rework. Make provisions to prevent contact of dissimilar metals. During construction, cap all tubing to prevent moisture from entering. Keep in dry location. 2. Leak testing and recharging: Upon completion of installation of air conditioning equipment, test all refrigerant piping, components and accessories, including quick-connect refrigerant connectors for evaporator and condensing unit;test with a halide torch;prove tight by Contractor to assure a leak-tight refrigerant system. If leaks are detected at the time of installation or during warranty period, remove entire refrigerant charge from system, correct leaks, and retest system. After system is found to be leak free, evacuation shall be accomplished by use of a reliable gauge and a vacuum pump capable of pulling vacuum of at least one mm Hg absolute. Accomplish system evacuation in strict accordance with equipment manufacturer's printed instruction. System leak testing, evacuation, dehydration and charging with refrigerant shall comply with standard industry practice and local codes and ordinances. D. Refrigerant piping shall be run continuously, without joints, where possible. All joints in refrigerant piping shall be made accessible. Joints shall not be permitted in concrete slabs or below grade. E. Refrigerant circuit access ports located outdoors shall be fitted with locking-type tamper- resistant caps or shall be otherwise secured to prevent unauthorized access. F. All piping shall be run true to grade and shall be arranged to make the best possible appearance. Except where otherwise required by conditions of installation,all piping shall be symmetrical and parallel with lines of buildings or structure in which it is installed. All piping shall be run concealed except in mechanical room and where indicated otherwise. G. All piping and equipment shall be supported and guided. Anchors shall be provided to absorb or transmit thrust and eliminate vibration or pulsation. Hangers or supports shall be provided near each change of direction. Supports shall be so located or shall be of such type as not to unduly restrict the movement of the pipe due to lateral or longitudinal expansion. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 23 00-6 MAY 2, 2023 REFRIGERANT PIPING, INSULATION AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.02 PIPING APPLICATIONS A. Suction (low pressure gas), Hot Gas (high pressure gas) and Liquid Lines 5/8" OD and Smaller for Conventional Air-Conditioning,Heat Pump, and Heat Recovery Applications: Copper, Type ACR, 060 (soft annealed)-temper tubing and field bent fittings with brazed joints. B. Suction(low pressure gas), Hot Gas (high pressure gas), and Liquid Lines 2-1/8" OD and smaller for Conventional Air-Conditioning, Heat Pump, and Heat Recovery Applications: Straight Lengths, Copper, Type ACR Type L, H55 (light drawn)-temper tubing and field bent fittings with brazed joints. 3.03 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS A. Install service valves as specified or as required to isolate system components. 3.04 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems; route and size piping based on manufacturer's recommended line lengths and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings. B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15 (latest version). C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas. Concealed locations shall be free of pipe joints. D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise. E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal. F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance. G. Install piping free of sags and bends. H. Field bend changes in direction. I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than maximum allowable working pressure. J. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and fittings. K. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 23 00-7 MAY 2, 2023 REFRIGERANT PIPING, INSULATION AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 doors or panels as specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames" if valves or equipment requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces. L. Provide jacketed insulation in locations where exposed to mechanical injury. M. When brazing, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also, remove valve stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near expansion-valve bulb. N. Install piping with adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hangers or between pipes for insulation installation. O. Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for sleeves specified in Section 23 00 00 HVAC General. P. Install sleeve seals for piping penetrations of concrete walls and slabs. Comply with requirements for sleeve seals specified in Section 23 00 00 HVAC General. Q. Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements for escutcheons specified in Division 23 00 00 HVAC General. R. Provide proper compensation for pipe/tube expansion and contraction per equipment manufacturers recommendations. 3.05 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION A. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter"Pipe and Tube". 1. Use Type BcuP-5 (15%Ag, 80%Cu, 5%P),copper-phosphorus alloy pre-formed brazing rings for joining copper swage fittings and copper socket fittings with copper pipe. Do NOT use flux. 2. Use Type Bag-5 (45% Ag), cadmium-free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel. Use manufacturers recommended flux. B. Field Swaged Brazing Cups: Fabricate brazing cup on one tubing end for each coupling. Only 060 (soft annealed) and H55 (light drawn) may be swaged. Do NOT swage H58 (drawn general purpose). Use swaging tool designed to provide a minimum of 0.0015" brazing gap and a maximum of 0.005" brazing gap. Brazing cup depth for each tube size shall be as follows: 1/4" 3/8" 1/2" 1 5/8" 1 3/4" 1 7/8" 1 1-1/8" 1-3/8" 1-5/8" 2-1/8" 0.250" 0.280" 0.310" 1 0.390" 1 0.420" 1 0.460" 1 0.510" 0.560" 0.600" 0.700" C. Field Bends: Fabricate field bends with a center-line bend radius greater than or equal to 4 times the nominal OD of the pipe or tube. Tube shall be bent with a tubing bender sized for ACR OD tube sizes and shall not cause cracks or wrinkles in the tube or pipe. Do NOT use a conduit bender for bending ACR copper. The difference between maximum and minimum diameters for pipe bends should not exceed 8% of the nominal outside diameter FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 23 00-8 MAY 2, 2023 REFRIGERANT PIPING, INSULATION AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 of the pipe. Only 060 soft annealed-temper and H55 light drawn-temper shall be field bent. Do NOT field bend H58 drawn general purpose-temper copper tube. D. Brazing and joining procedure: 1. Tube ends shall be cut with a clean sharp tubing cutter. 2. Deburr the I.D. of the cut tube end with a clean deburring tool. 3. Visually inspect the interior of each tube for obstructions and debris before assembly. Protect the joint from contamination before brazing. 4. Method of pre-cleaning: Non-shedding abrasive pads (Scotch Bright) to remove all oxides in the brazing area followed by wiping with a clean lint-free white cloth. Do not groove the surfaces while cleaning. 5. Purge all tubing with oil free nitrogen while brazing and until cool to the touch. Use an oxygen analyzer to verify the absence of oxygen prior to brazing. The oxygen content shall be less than 1%before start of brazing. 6. Use a neutral to slightly reducing flame using oxy/acetylene or oxy/propane. 7. Use the proper torch tip based on tube size as recommended by the torch manufacturer. Use of Turbo-Torch or Rosebud is permitted. 8. Post Brazing Cleaning: Exterior of all completed joints shall be washed with a water-soaked rag or sponge, followed by brushing with a stainless-steel hand wire brush to remove any residue for inspection. 3.06 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Piping hangers and supports must accommodate expansion and contraction, vibration, dead load of piping and its contents, and seismic-bracing requirements. B. Install the following pipe attachments or combination thereof: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs. 2. Channel strut or angle iron trapeze for multiple horizontal runs 3. Galvanized steel saddle with attachment screw for channel strut applications 4. Rigid high compressive strength foam insulating pipe support at all clamps and support points. 5. Rigid high compressive strength foam pipe support at all riser clamps. 6. Do NOT attach hangers directly to pipe or tube. C. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. Up to 3/4" OD: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 2. Greater than 3/4" thru 1" OD: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 3. Greater than 1" thru 2-1/8" OD: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. D. Support multi-floor vertical runs every 10 feet and at least at each floor with riser clamps. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 23 00-9 MAY 2, 2023 REFRIGERANT PIPING, INSULATION AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.07 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI. 2. Test as follows or as recommended by the equipment manufacturer's installation instructions: a. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-41OA: 1) Suction(low pressure gas)Lines: 550 psig, or per equipment manufacturers recommendation. 2) Hot-Gas (high pressure gas) and Liquid Lines: 550 psig, or per equipment manufacturers recommendation. 3. Test refrigerant piping and specialties. Isolate compressor, condenser,evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test pressure. a. Fill system with 95/5 nitrogen/hydrogen to the required test pressure. b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of test. C. Test all joints and fittings with hydrogen leak detector, at test pressure. d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are achieved. 3.08 SYSTEM CHARGING A. Charge system using the following procedures and per equipment manufacturer's installation instructions. 1. Evacuate (triple evacuation procedure) entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to obtain a steady state vacuum of less than 500 micrometers. If vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging. Do NOT evacuate the system through a charging manifold. Use only suction rated hoses and core removal tools. 2. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig. 3. Charge system as recommended by equipment manufacturer. 3.09 OWNER REVIEW OF MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Review manufacturer's maintenance instructions with the owner's representative to make them aware of any reoccurring maintenance requirements such as recoating piping insulation,lubricating service valves, etc. END OF SECTION 23 23 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 23 00-10 MAY 2, 2023 REFRIGERANT PIPING, INSULATION AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 23 31 00 - DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. All work in this section shall be subject to the provisions of Section 23 00 00 - HVAC General. B. Furnish and install all material, labor, accessories, etc. shown on the drawings and as specified herein to completely install all ductwork systems. C. Ductwork systems shall be classified as follows: 1. Static pressure class +2 in. wg - from constant volume air handling unit, and terminal unit to supply diffusers; all return, outside air and exhaust ductwork. 2. Static pressure class+4 in. wg-from VAV air handling unit to terminal units. D. Refer to PART 3 —EXECUTION for duct sealing requirements. E. Ductwork shall be constructed according to the latest edition of SMACNA ductwork construction standards applicable to the type of ductwork, system pressures described above, and the system material construction. F. Duct sizes shown on the drawings are nominal inside clear. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Duct materials: a. Outdoor duct systems b. Flexible duct connectors C. Flexible ductwork 2. Dampers and accessories 3. Remote damper operators 4. Access doors 5. Flexible duct connectors 6. Duct liner 7. Emergency generator exhaust system 8. Sealants, mastics, adhesives and coatings B. For all fire dampers,combination fire and smoke dampers,and smoke dampers,submit UL approved installation instructions for each specific application. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTWORK FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2331 00-1 MAY 2, 2023 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Ductwork shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheets of the thickness listed in the SMACNA manuals for the pressures referenced above. B. Single-Wall Rectangular Ducts and Fittings: 1. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. 2. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate per SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," "Transverse (Girth) Joints," for static pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct- support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards- Metal and Flexible." a. Alternate Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ductmate Industries, Inc.; 25/35/45 Rectangular Flange System or comparable product by one of the following: 1) Nexus PDQ; a division of Shilco Holdings,Inc. 2) Ward Industries,Inc; a division of Hart& Cooley,Inc. 3) Prior Approved Equal b. Slide-on Flanges: 1) Description: Roll-fonned, add on, factory-fabricated, slide-on transverse flange. 2) Gauge and Shape: For duct constructed using prefabricated systems, refer to the manufacturer's guidelines for sheet gauge, intermediate reinforcement size and spacing, and proper joint reinforcement. 3) Manufacturers of prefabricated systems must provide duct construction and reinforcement guidelines along with independent testing for leakage, deflection, and seismic performance. 4) Independent leakage testing must be provided for systems operating at pressures of 10 in. wg (or greater) positive or negative. 5) Manufacturer's prefabricated systems printed assembly and installation procedures must be adhered to at all times. 6) Manufacturer's procedures must include fastener and cleat spacing along with details for all system variations including break-away and roofing connections. 7) All manufactured system components must be clearly embossed with manufacturer's name or markings. Substitution of manufacturer's system components is not permitted. C. Formed flanges will be accepted on ductwork 42 inches wide or less and subjected to 2 in. wg static positive pressure or less. 1) Fonned on Flanges: Construct as T-25 A/B flanges, of which construction guidelines are given in Figure 2-1 of the 2005 SMACNA "HVAC Duct Constructions Standards, Metal and Flexible." No other construction standards pertaining to formed on flanges will be accepted. 2) Formed on flanges must include the use of corners, securely crimped in place,bolts, cleat, and gasket FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2331 00-2 MAY 2, 2023 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate per SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," "Longitudinal Seams — Rectangular Ducts," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards—Metal and Flexible." 4. Snap-lock longitudinal duct seams are not allowed in public spaces unless secured with sheet metal fastening screws as recommended by SMACNA. 5. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and fabricate per SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static- pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards- Metal and Flexible." C. Single-Wall Round Ducts and Fittings 1. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct,"based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated. a. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1) Linx Industries 2) McGill AirFlow LLC 3) SEMCO LLC 4) Sheet Metal Connectors,Inc. 5) Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc. 6) Prior Approved Equal 2. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate per SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible." a. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 50 Inches in Diameter: Flanged. 1) Unexposed Duct 3 inches to 30 inches in diameter: Round duct connects with a one-piece interior slip coupling at least two gages heavier than duct wall,beaded at center and fastened to duct with screws. Seal joint with an approved sealant applied continuously around both ends of coupler prior to assembling and after fastening. 2) All Exposed Duct and Unexposed Duct 30 inches to 72 inches in diameter: Three-piece, gasket flanged-joint consisting of two internal flanges, with integral mastic sealant, and one external closure ring, for connecting the internal flanges and securing the closed cell neoprene gasketing in place. a) Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ductmate Industries, Inc.; Spiralmate or similar comparable product by one of the following: (1) Prior Approved Equal FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2331 00-3 MAY 2, 2023 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3) Ducts larger than 72 inches in diameter: Use companion angle flanged joints as defined in Figure 3-1 for the 2005 SMACNA Manual "HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible" Third Edition. Refer to manual for proper sizing and construction details. 4) Dust Collection Systems and Exposed Duct 3 inches to 14 inches in diameter:Use a one-piece,polyethylene lined gasket connector with integrated bolt for the closure system. a) Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ductmate Industries, Inc.; Quicksleeve or comparable product by one of the following: (1) Prior Approved Equal 3. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate per SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards-Metal and Flexible." a. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams. b. Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inches in width(major dimension) with butt-welded longitudinal seams. 4. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate per SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." D. Double-Wall Round Ducts and Fittings 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: a. Linx Industries b. McGill AirFlow LLC C. SEMCO LLC d. Sheet Metal Connectors, Inc. 2. Flat-Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width(major dimension) and diameter of the round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct (minor dimension) of the inner duct. 3. Outer Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"Chapter 3,"Round,Oval,and Flexible Duct,"based on static- pressure class unless otherwise indicated. a. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate per SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements,materials involved,duct-support intervals,and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2331 00-4 MAY 2, 2023 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1) Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 50 inches in Diameter: Flanged. a) All Exposed Duct and Unexposed Duct 30 inches to 72 inches in diameter: Three-piece, gasket flanged joint consisting of two internal flanges, with integral mastic sealant, and one external closure ring for connecting the internal flanges and securing the closed cell neoprene gasketing in place. b) Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ductmate Industries, Inc.; Spiralmate or comparable product by one of the following: (1) Prior Approved Equal b. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate per SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements,materials involved,duct-support intervals,and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible." 1) Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches in diameter with butt- welded longitudinal seams. 2) Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inches in width (major dimension)with butt-welded longitudinal seams. C. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate per SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static- pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct- support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -Metal and Flexible." 4. Inner Duct: Minimum 0.028-inch (24 gauge) perforated galvanized sheet steel having 3/32-inch diameter perforations,with an overall open area of 23 percent. 5. Interstitial Insulation: Fibrous-glass liner complying with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 9013; and with NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard". a. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x OF at 75°F mean temperature. b. Install spacers that position the inner duct at uniform distance from outer duct without compressing insulation. C. Coat insulation with antimicrobial coating. d. Cover insulation with polyester film complying with UL 181, Class 1. 6. Interstitial Insulation: Flexible elastomeric duct liner complying with ASTM C 534, Type II for sheet materials, and with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B. a. Maximum Thermal Conductivity: 0.25 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x OF at 75°F mean temperature. E. Rectangular sheet metal duct elbows shall be smooth radius type without turning vanes or square (or mitered) type with turning vanes. Sharp throat elbows (ASHRAE Fitting No. CR3-2) shall not be permitted. Round sheet metal duct elbows shall be smooth radius type without turning vanes, gored type or mitered type with turning vanes. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2331 00-5 MAY 2, 2023 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 F. Unless otherwise indicated,elbows shall have a centerline radius of not less than 1'/z times the width of the duct. Where space limitations necessitate use of short radius or square elbows,provide turning vanes. G. Exhaust ductwork shall be galvanized sheet metal(G 90 minimum)constructed to SMACNA standards and shall not be insulated unless noted otherwise. H. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections. I. Ductwork connecting kitchen exhaust hoods to exhaust fans shall be constructed of 16- gauge black steel with welded seams. All grease exhaust ductwork shall be constructed and installed according to requirements of local code authorities and NFPA 96 (latest edition) requirements. Slope duct down towards the hood at '/4' per linear foot up to 75 horizontal linear feet and at V per linear foot greater than 75 horizontal linear feet or per local code requirements. Access doors shall be provided as described below. J. Kitchen hood exhaust ductwork shall be insulated per NFPA 96 (latest edition) and local code requirements. Kitchen hood supply ductwork shall be insulated per specifications for HVAC supply ductwork. 2.02 FLEXIBLE DUCTWORK A. Flexible ducts shall be listed and labeled as UL Standard 181 Class 1 air duct. Air connectors are not allowed. B. Flexible ductwork shall comply with the following: 1. NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems" 2. NFPA 9013, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems" 3. SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless otherwise indicated. 4. Air Diffusion Council's"ADC Flexible Air Duct Test Code FD 72-R1". 5. ASTM E 96/E 96M, "Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials." C. Flexible ductwork shall be installed between main supply ducts and diffusers. Length shall be a maximum of 8'4" long, except in residential applications, where the length shall be as indicated. D. Flexible ductwork shall be Thermaflex M-KE R-6 (R value= 6.0 minimum or as required by local energy code)flexible air duct or approved equal. E. Flexible ductwork size shall be the same size as the diffuser neck it serves,unless indicated otherwise. F. Take-offs for sheet metal ductwork shall be made using a conical spin-in type fitting with manual balancing damper. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2331 00-6 MAY 2, 2023 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 G. Flexible duct connections to ceiling diffusers shall be installed without kinks or sags to provide unrestricted airflow. Provide Flex Flow Elbow supports by Thermaflex. H. Tapes and mastics used to seal metallic and flexible air ducts shall comply with UL 181B and shall be marked"181B-FX"for pressure-sensitive tape or"181B-M"for mastic. L Mechanical fasteners for use with flexible nonmetallic air ducts shall comply with ul 181b and shall be marked"181B-C". 2.03 FIRE DAMPERS A. Fire dampers shall be installed at all locations where ductwork or supply or return air openings penetrate any floor, wall or partition with a fire rating. B. All fire dampers shall be of the "Dynamic"type as classified in UL Standard 555. C. Fire dampers shall have a rating compatible with the floor,wall or partition, shall be tested to UL Standard 555 and be labeled for the intended installation(horizontal or vertical). D. Maximum pressure drop: 0.10 in.wg;provide ductwork transitions as required so as not to exceed maximum pressure drop. E. Fire Resistance Rating: 1'/2 hours unless noted otherwise indicated on drawings for 3 hours. F. Closure device: Each fire damper shall be equipped with a factory installed heat responsive device (fusible link) rated to close the damper when temperature at the damper reaches: 165°F G. Airflow Closure Rating: 1. Dynamic fire dampers shall be selected for the velocity and pressure rating of the intended installation. Refer to the plans and schedules for airflow rates(CFM)and pressures (in. wg). 2. Dampers shall have a minimum velocity rating of 2000 fpm at a pressure rating of 4 in. wg. 3. Dampers in systems operating above 2000 fpm or 4 in. wg shall be selected for a velocity rating of 4000 fpm at a pressure rating of 6 in. wg or a velocity rating of 6000 fpm at a pressure rating of 8 in. wg as required. H. Types: 1. Curtain: for use in systems up to 4000 fpm velocity; Style B or C with the blade stack out of the airstream (Style A with the blade stack in the airstream may be used behind registers and grilles or where space conditions do not permit the use of a Style B damper). a. Construction: 1) Frame: Galvanized steel (in gauges required by manufacturer's UL listing). 2) Blade design: interlocking galvanized steel FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2331 00-7 MAY 2, 2023 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3) Sleeves: Damper shall be supplied as a single assembly with a factory sleeve. 4) Retaining Angles:Damper shall be supplied with factory retaining angles sized to provide installation overlap in accordance with the manufacturer's UL listing. 5) Duct Transition Connection: breakaway type 2. Round: for use in systems up to 2000 fpm velocity. a. Construction: 1) Frame: Galvanized steel (in gauges required by manufacturer's UL listing). 2) Blade design: single galvanized steel blade(in gauge required by manufacturer's UL listing). 3) Retainer plate(s): supplied with damper. 4) Sleeves: Length as required per wall thickness. 5) Duct Transition Connection: breakaway type. 3. Multi-blade: a. Up to 2000 fpm velocity: Triple vee-groove type blade. b. 2000-4000 fpm velocity: Fabricated double skin airfoil type blade. C. Construction: 1) Frame: Galvanized steel with mitered and interlocking corners(in gauges required by manufacturer's UL listing). 2) Blade design: 16 ga. galvanized steel strengthened by three longitudinal 1"deep Vee grooves running the entire length of each blade. Each blade shall be symmetrical relative to its axle pivot point, presenting identical performance characteristics with air flowing in either direction through the damper. Provide symmetrical blades of varying size as required to completely fill the damper opening. 3) Sleeves: Damper shall be supplied as a single assembly with a factory sleeve. 4) Retaining Angles:Damper shall be supplied with factory retaining angles sized to provide installation overlap in accordance with the manufacturer's UL listing. 5) Duct Transition Connection: breakaway type I. All dampers shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's UL approved installation details. J. Where fire dampers are required in a fibrous glass ductboard system, provide sheet metal sleeve per manufacturer's UL installation instructions. Verify gage of sleeve and attachment angle with governing code authorities. Installation shall also conform to SMACNA Figure 5-9 "Fibrous Glass Duct Installation". 2.04 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS A. Fire/smoke dampers shall be installed at all locations where ductwork or supply or return air openings penetrate any floor, wall or partition with a fire and smoke rating, or where otherwise shown on the drawings. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2331 00-8 MAY 2, 2023 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Fire/smoke dampers shall be provided with actuators capable of closing the damper on activation of area smoke detectors, the fire alarm system and/or the Firefighter's Smoke Control Panel and shall be normally closed. Actuators shall be compatible with the activating smoke detectors or fire alarm system(coordinate with other trades). C. Unless otherwise indicated,smoke detectors integral to the combination fire/smoke damper shall be furnished and installed by the fire alarm contractor(coordinate with other trades). D. All combination fire/smoke dampers shall be of the "Dynamic" type as classified in UL Standards 555 and SSSS. E. Fire/smoke dampers shall have a rating compatible with the floor, wall or partition, shall be tested to UL Standards 555 and 555S and be labeled for the intended installation (horizontal or vertical). F. Maximum pressure drop: 0.10 in.wg;provide ductwork transitions as required so as not to exceed maximum pressure drop. G. Fire Resistance Rating: I'/z hours unless noted otherwise on drawings for 3 hours. H. Leakage Rating: Class 1 (maximum of 8 cfm/ft2 at 4 in. wg)unless noted otherwise. I. Elevated Temperature Rating: 350°F (177°C)for 30 minutes. J. Airflow Closure Rating: 1. Dynamic fire/smoke dampers shall be selected for the velocity and pressure rating of the intended installation. Refer to the plans and schedules for airflow rates (CFM) and pressures(in. wg). 2. Dampers shall have a minimum velocity rating of 2000 fpm at a pressure rating of 4 in. wg. 3. Dampers in systems operating above 2000 fpm or 4 in. wg shall be selected for a velocity rating of 4000 fpm at a pressure rating of 6 in. wg or a velocity rating of 6000 fpm at a pressure rating of 8 in. wg as required. K. Types: 1. Round: for use in systems up to 3000 fpm velocity. a. Construction: 1) Frame: Galvanized steel (in gauges required by manufacturer's UL listing). 2) Blade design: single galvanized steel blade (in gauge required by manufacturer's UL listing). 3) Retainer plate(s): supplied with damper. 4) Sleeves: Length as required per wall thickness. 5) Duct Transition Connection: breakaway type. 2. Multi-blade: a. Up to 2000 fpm velocity: Triple Vee-groove type blade. b. 2000-4000 fpm velocity: Fabricated double skin airfoil type blade. C. Construction: FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2331 00-9 MAY 2, 2023 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1) Frame: Galvanized steel with mitered and interlocking corners(in gauges required by manufacturer's UL listing). 2) Blade design: 16 ga. galvanized steel strengthened by three longitudinal l"deep Vee grooves running the entire length of each blade. Each blade shall be symmetrical relative to its axle pivot point, presenting identical performance characteristics with air flowing in either direction through the damper. Provide symmetrical blades of varying size as required to completely fill the damper opening. 3) Blade Stops: Each blade stop(at top and bottom of damper frame) shall occupy no more than 1/2"of the damper opening area to allow for maximum free area and to minimize pressure loss across the damper. 4) Seals: a) Blade Edge: Blade seals shall be extruded silicone rubber permanently bonded to the appropriate blade edges. b) Jamb: Flexible stainless-steel compression type. 5) Linkage: Concealed in jamb. 6) Axles: Minimum 1/2" diameter plated steel. 7) Bearings: Axle bearings shall be sintered bronze sleeve type rotating in polished extruded holes in the damper frame. 8) Sleeves: Damper shall be supplied as a single assembly with a factory sleeve. 9) Retaining Angles:Damper shall be supplied with factory retaining angles sized to provide installation overlap in accordance with the manufacturer's UL listing. 10) Duct Transition Connection: breakaway type L. Heat Responsive Device: Electric, controlled closure, quick detect heat-actuated device designed to prevent damage to ductwork and other HVAC system components. The device shall be a reusable/resettable link(RRL)with a temperature setting of 165°F (74°C). M. Damper Motors: Two-position meeting the following: 1. Comply with NEMA designation, temperature rating, service factor, enclosure type, efficiency requirements and the following: a. Motor Sizes: Minimum size as indicated. If not indicated, large enough so the driven load will not require motor to operate in service factor range above 1.0. b. Controllers, Electrical Devices, and Wiring: Comply with requirements for electrical devices and connections specified in Division 26 Sections. C. Permanent-Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Motors: With oil-immersed and sealed gear trains. d. Spring-Return Motors: Equip with an integral spiral-spring mechanism where indicated. Enclose entire spring mechanism in a removable housing designed for service or adjustments. Size for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf(17 N x m) and breakaway torque rating of 150 in. x lbf(17 N x m). FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2331 00-10 MAY 2, 2023 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 e. Outdoor Motors and Motors in Outdoor-Air Intakes: Equip with O-ring gaskets designed to make motors weatherproof. Equip motors with internal heaters to permit normal operation at minus 40°F (minus 40°C). f. Nonspring-Return Motors: For dampers larger than 25 sq. ft. (2.3 sq.m), size motor for running torque rating of 150 in. x lbf (17 N x m) and breakaway torque rating of 300 in. x lbf(34 N x m). g. Electrical Connection: 115 V, single phase, 60 Hz. N. Momentary Test Switch(for use in combination fire and smoke dampers that are not part of a smoke management system): factory mounted and wired assembly for testing and cycling the damper during start-up and maintenance. O. Accessories for active smoke management systems: L Open Closed Indicator(OCI): factory mounted and tested with two switches, one set to close when the damper blades are at their open position, and the other set to close when the damper blades are at their closed position. This will be wired to the Fire Fighter's Smoke Control Station to indicate true damper position. 2. Test Switch and Indicator Panel: 5"x 5"control panel with toggle switch,red LED (replaceable) indicator light to indicate closed damper position and a green LED (replaceable) indicator light to indicate open damper position. P. Combination Fire and Smoke Dampers shall have a single point wiring per UL requirements (except where two signals are required as with the Temperature Limited Override specified above). 2.05 CONTROL DAMPERS A. Automatic control dampers shall be installed as shown on the drawings and shall be controlled as described in the 23 09 00-Automatic Controls section of these specifications. B. Unless indicated otherwise, dampers shall be of the opposed blade type constructed of minimum 18-gauge galvanized steel and shall have rigidly constructed blades less than 6" wide and shall have duct mounting flanges. C. Dampers shall be the low leakage type with replaceable blade and jamb seals. Maximum pressure drop for dampers operating in systems exceeding 2000 fpm shall be 0.10 in. wg. D. Outside air supply and exhaust openings shall be provided with a Class 1 A motorized damper with a maximum leakage rate of 4 efm/ft' (20.3 L/s . m2) at 1.0 in. wg (249 Pa) when tested in accordance with AMCA 500D. 1. Gravity (non-motorized) dampers having a maximum leakage rate of 20 cfm/ft2 (101.6 L/s • m') at 1.0 in. wg (249 Pa) when tested in accordance with AMCA 500D may be used in any one of the following conditions: a. In buildings for exhaust and relief dampers. b. In buildings of less than three stories in height above grade. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2331 00-11 MAY 2, 2023 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. For ventilation air intakes and exhaust and relief dampers in buildings of any height in Climate Zones 1, 2 and 3. d. Where the design outdoor air intake or exhaust capacity does not exceed 300 cfin(141 L/s). Gravity(non-motorized)dampers for ventilation air intakes shall be protected from direct exposure to wind. 2. Dampers smaller than 24 inches (6 10 min) in either dimension shall be permitted to have a leakage rate of 40 cfm/ft2 (203.2 L/s • m2) at 1.0 in. wg (249 Pa) when tested in accordance with AMCA 500D. 2.06 REMOTE DAMPER OPERATORS A. Cable operated type: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with all requirements: Pottorff, Ventfabrics,Inc., Duro Dyne or Young Regulator Company. 2. Description: Cable system designed for remote manual damper adjustment. 3. Cable: Stainless steel with flexible steel casing. 4. Control: Concealed regulator kit with steel locking rack and pinion gear with hex head adjustment. Damper control is via push-pull lever action. 5. Wall-Box Mounting: Recessed. 6. Wall-Box Cover-Plate Material: Steel B. Electronic type: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with all requirements: Ventfabrics, Inc., Duro Dyne or Young Regulator Company. 2. Description: System designed for remote electronic damper adjustment. 3. Cable: plenum rated with 5 conductors 4. Control: 12V DC actuator, <0.5 watts 5. Wall mounting kit with recessed wall box and cover plate. 6. Ceiling mounting kit with recessed box and cover plate. 7. Controller: battery powered handheld with LCD damper position indicator (one per project). C. Install in strict conformance with manufacturer's installation instructions. 2.07 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTORS A. Install flexible duct connectors at connections of sheet metal duct to motor driven equipment, in ductwork crossing building expansion joints, or otherwise noted. Install per manufacturer's instructions, and support sheet metal ductwork so that no weight is supported by the flexible duct connector. B. Basis-of-Design Product unless noted otherwise below: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ductmate Industries, Inc.; PROflex or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Duro Dyne Inc. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2331 00-12 MAY 2, 2023 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Ventfabrics,Inc 3. Prior Approved Equal C. Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics compliant with NFPA 701. D. Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1 and have a maximum flame spread/smoke developed rating of 25/50. E. Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip 53/4-inches wide attached to two strips of 23/4-inch wide, 0.028-inch thick, galvanized sheet steel. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts. F. Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene. 1. Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq.yd. 2. Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200°F. G. Outdoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with weatherproof, synthetic rubber resistant to I V rays and ozone. 1. Minimum Weight: 24 oz./sq.yd. 2. Tensile Strength: 530 lbVinch in the warp and 440 lbf/inch in the filling. 3. Service Temperature: Minus 50 to plus 250°F. H. Thrust Limits: Combination coil spring and elastomeric insert with spring and insert in compression,and with a load stop. Include rod and angle-iron brackets for attaching to fan discharge and duct. 1. Frame: Steel, fabricated for connection to threaded rods and to allow for a maximum of 30 degrees of angular rod misalignment without binding or reducing isolation efficiency. 2. Outdoor Spring Diameter: Not less than 80 percent of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. 3. Minimum Additional Travel: 50 percent of the required deflection at rated load. 4. Lateral Stiffness: More than 80 percent of rated vertical stiffness. 5. Overload Capacity: Support 200 percent of rated load, fully compressed, without deformation or failure. 6. Elastomeric Element: Molded, oil-resistant rubber or neoprene. 7. Coil Spring: Factory set and field adjustable for a maximum of/4-inch movement at start and stop. 1. For systems operating at +4 in. wg, provide a molded rubber duct expansion joint. Construction shall consist of an elastomer tube and cover,reinforced with a woven fabric capable of accommodating duct system movement and vibration. Expansion joints shall be Flexicraft Industries, Rubber Duct Expansion Joint Model. 2.08 ACCESS DOORS A. Hinged, gasketed and latched Access Doors (AD) and/or panels shall be installed at each fire and smoke damper, each duct mounted smoke detector, each valve, at each duct FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2331 00-13 MAY 2, 2023 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 mounted balancing damper or any other mechanical equipment or device that requires accessibility. Doors and panels shall be sized (minimum 18" x 18", duct size allowing), and located to optimize access to dampers, detectors, and other equipment for service and replacement. Access Panels (AP) in walls, ceilings or other surfaces shall be coordinated with architectural finishes and selected by the architect. B. Access doors shall be designed for five times the pressure of the duct in which it is mounted. C. Access doors for fire dampers, combination fire/smoke dampers and smoke dampers in medium pressure (+4 in.wg and higher) duct systems shall be the implosion type designed to prevent excessive negative pressure downstream resulting in collapsed ductwork.At the contractor's option,the access door may be an integral feature of the damper assembly. D. Access doors for grease exhaust ducts shall be in accordance with NFPA 96(latest edition). Vertical grease ducts shall have an access door at each floor level in an inconspicuous location. E. Access doors for fire dampers, combination fire/smoke dampers and smoke dampers shall be permanently identified by a die-cut label with '/z" high red block letters on a white background. Label shall read FIRE DAMPER, COMBINATION FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER or SMOKE DAMPER. F. Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels per SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2 (7-2M), "Duct Access Doors and Panels," and 7-3, "Access Doors -Round Duct". 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ductmate Industries, Inc.; Access Doors or comparable product by one of the following: a. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek,Inc. b. Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart& Cooley,Inc. C. Prior Approved Equal 2. Door: a. Double wall,rectangular. b. Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct pressure class. C. Vision Panel: 1) Observation type doors shall be sandwich type provided at all fire and smoke dampers, humidifiers, in-duct smoke detectors, and UVC emitters. 2) Minimum 12"x12" with 8"x8" viewport, insulated or non- insulated. 3) For ducts smaller than 12-inches, 10"x6" shall be used with a 4"x 2-5/8" viewport with a single pane of safety glass. d. Hinges and Latches: 1"xl"butt or piano hinge with cam latches. e. Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class. 3. Frame: Galvanized sheet steel,with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets. 4. Number of Hinges and Locks: a. Access Doors Less Than 12 inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2331 00-14 MAY 2, 2023 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 b. Access Doors up to 18 inches Square: Continuous hinge and two sash locks. C. Access Doors up to 24 by 48 inches: Continuous hinge and two compression latches. d. Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 inches: Continuous hinge and two compression latches. G. Pressure Relief Access Door: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by the following: a. American Warming and Ventilating; a division of Mestek,Inc. b. Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc. C. Elgen Manufacturing d. Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc. e. Greenheck Fan Corporation f McGill AirFlow LLC g. Nailor Industries Inc. h. Pottorf i. Ventfabrics,Inc. j. Ward Industries,Inc.; a division of Hart& Cooley,Inc. k. Prior Approved Equal 2. Door and Frame Material: Galvanized sheet steel. 3. Door: Single or Double wall with insulation fill, as required,with metal thickness applicable for duct pressure class. 4. Operation: Open outward for positive-pressure ducts and inward for negative- pressure ducts. 5. Factory set at 3.0-to 8.0-in. wg. 6. Doors close when pressures are within set-point range. 7. Hinge: Continuous piano 8. Latches: Cam 9. Seal: Neoprene or foam rubber 10. Insulation Fill: 1" thick,fibrous-glass or polystyrene-foam board. H. Duct Access Panel Assemblies: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Ductmate Industries, Inc.; Ultimate Door or comparable product by one of the following: a. Flame Gard,Inc. b. Prior Approved Equal 2. UL 1978 listed by an NRTL 3. Panel and Frame: Minimum thickness 0.0528-inch carbon steel. 4. Fasteners: Carbon steel. Panel fasteners shall not penetrate duct wall. 5. Gasket: Comply with NFPA 96; grease-tight, high-temperature ceramic fiber, rated for minimum 2000°F. 6. Minimum Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg,positive or negative. 2.09 DUCT LINER FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2331 00-15 MAY 2, 2023 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Also refer to Section 23 07 00-HVAC Insulation. B. Supply air ductwork a minimum of 15 linear feet (or as indicated) downstream of low- pressure air handling equipment and terminal units shall be internally lined with 1/z"thick acoustical duct liner/insulation(minimum R-6 or greater where required by code),; Johns Manville Linacoustic RC or approved equal. 1. Duct liner shall be securely fastened to ductwork with stick pins, speed washers and adhesive. Leading edges of liner in medium pressure ductwork shall have a sheetmetal nosing. 2. Exposed edges and butt joints shall be "buttered"with duct sealer. C. Supply air ductwork a minimum of 50 linear feet (or as indicated) downstream of static pressure class +4 in. wg air handling equipment shall be internally lined with 11/2" thick acoustical duct liner/insulation, (minimum R-6 or greater where required by code) Johns Manville Linacoustic RC or approved equal. D. Return air ductwork, sound boots and transfer ducts shall have I" thick liner, Johns Manville Linacoustic RC or approved equal. 1. Refer to Section 23 07 00-HVAC INSULATION for return air ductwork requiring external insulation. E. Indoor exposed round, spiral or flat oval ductwork shall be lined with I" thick fiberglass duct liner/insulation (minimum R-4 or greater where required by code) Johns Manville Spiracoustic Plus or approved equal. F. Subject to compliance with requirements, duct liner products shall be manufactured by: CertainTeed, Johns Manville, Knauf, Owens Corning,or approved equal. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All ductwork shall be installed in accordance with applicable SMACNA Standards according to the pressure class described in PART I -GENERAL. B. Seal, inspect and test ductwork prior to insulating or concealing. Seal all ductwork and plenums to meet the following SMACNA duct seal class: 1. Class A: Seal all transverse joint, longitudinal seams, and duct wall penetrations. a. Pressure-sensitive tape shall not be used as the primary sealant, unless it has been certified to comply with UL 181 A or UL 181 B by an independent testing laboratory and the tape is used in accordance with that certification. b. All connections shall be sealed, including but not limited to spin-in fittings,taps,other branch connections,access doors,and duct connections to equipment. C. Sealing that would void product listings is not required. d. Spiral lock seams need not be sealed. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2331 00-16 MAY 2, 2023 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Tapes, sealants and mastics used to seal metallic and flexible air ducts and flexible air connectors shall comply with UL 181B and shall be marked "181B-FX" for pressure-sensitive tape or"181B-M"for mastic/sealant. 3. Mechanical fasteners for use with flexible nonmetallic air ducts shall comply with UL 181B and shall be marked"181B-C". C. Ductwork shall be supported as recommended by SMACNA Standards from structural members. Ductwork shall not be allowed to rest on ceilings, light fixtures or structural members. Ductwork supported from joists shall be supported from the top chord of all joists. D. All ductwork accessories shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. E. Ductwork that is designed to operate at static pressures in excess of 3 in. wg and all ductwork located outdoors shall be leak-tested in accordance with SMACNA Standards. Representative sections totaling no less than 25% of the total installed duct area for the designated pressure class shall be tested. All sections shall be selected by the building owner or the designated representative of the building owner. Positive pressure leakage testing is acceptable for negative pressure ductwork.The maximum permitted duct leakage shall be: Lmax = Cr P 0.65 where L,,,ax = maximum permitted leakage, cfm per 100 ft'of duct surface area CL = 4, duct leakage class, cfm per 100 ft'of duct surface area per inch of watero.61 P = test pressure, which shall be equal to the design duct pressure class rating, in. of water All ductwork seams shall be sealed with mastic to provide a system that is within the recommended SMACNA leakage limits. As an alternate, water-based spray-on hardcast products may be used provided they meet or exceed the project requirements. The ductwork test report shall be submitted in electronic(PDF)format to the Engineer prior to the Contractor's request for final payment. F. All ductwork shall be cleaned inside and out prior to system start up and shall be left in a neat and orderly manner. G. Duct sizes shown on drawings are inside clear dimensions. H. Unless otherwise approved,ducts shall be true to dimensions indicated,straight and smooth on the inside with neatly finished joints, securely anchored to the building in an approved manner, and installed to be completely free from vibration under all conditions of operation. Exact routing of ductwork will be dependent on location of framing members. Route ductwork to avoid cutting framing members. L Brace ducts not more than 60 inches on center. J. Make slip joints in the direction of air flow. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2331 00-17 MAY 2, 2023 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 K. Offset ducts around obstructions where possible. Where duct must encompass obstruction, area of duct shall remain constant. L. Duct tapers shall not exceed 1:4 ratio and transformations 30 degrees between air flow and diverging or converging air flow. M. Provide access doors for access to all equipment, dampers and motors concealed by sheet metal. N. Where applicable,provide seismic bracing and restraints for ductwork per ASCE 7-10 and the latest edition of the SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual. Also,refer to Section 23 05 48 Noise and Vibration Control. 3.02 BALANCING DAMPERS A. Install manual volume dampers where indicated on the drawings and where required to properly balance the air distribution system. B. Provide an opposed blade damper behind the face of each supply register which shall be adjustable through the face of the register with a screwdriver. C. Provide an opposed blade damper behind the face of return air registers, where indicated, which shall be adjustable through the face of the register with a screwdriver. D. Provide a butterfly damper in the neck of each ceiling diffuser unless noted otherwise. END OF SECTION 23 3100 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2331 00-18 MAY 2, 2023 DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 23 34 00 - UNITARY EXHAUST AND SUPPLY FANS AND VENTILATORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Refer to specification section 23 00 00 - HVAC General, all of which applies to work described in this section as if written in full herein. Special attention should be given to Section 2.02 ELECTRICAL WORK for specifics on motor and drive requirements. B. Furnish and install all unitary exhaust and supply fans and ventilators of the size, type, capacity and characteristics as shown on the equipment schedules and herein described. C. Base fan-performance ratings on actual project site altitude. D. Acceptable manufacturers include only those whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five(5)years. E. Electrical Standards: Provide electrical motors and products which have been listed and labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. and comply with NEMA Standards. F. Certification, Fan Performance: Fans shall be certified to bear the AMCA label for air and sound performance. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 CENTRIFUGAL AND AXIAL FANS AND VENTILATORS A. All units shall be rigidly constructed of materials suitable for the intended service and shall be installed with all accessories listed on the Drawings. B. All roof mounted units shall be installed on factory supplied 14-inch high (minimum) insulated roof curbs of the proper type, size and construction for proper mounting. Curbs shall account for all roof slopes and pitches so that the unit is installed level. Units shall be anchored to curbs by a minimum of two lag screws of adequate size on each side. Curbs shall be constructed of galvanized steel, except when the project is located within 5 miles of a sea coast they shall be of aluminum construction. C. Outdoor fans shall be completely weatherproof for outdoor installation and shall contain internal vibration isolation to assure smooth and quiet performance. D. Fan wheels and blades shall be constructed of aluminum and shall be statically and dynamically balanced at the factory. 2.02 CEILING-CENTRIFUGAL AND CABINET FANS A. Units shall be direct-drive type with back-draft damper, acoustically insulated cabinets and speed controller. 2.03 EXHAUST FANS SERVING KITCHEN HOODS FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 34 00-1 MAY 2, 2023 UNITARY EXHAUST, SUPPLY FANS AND VENTILATORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Grease handling exhaust fans shall carry a UL 762 Listing and shall be provided with all accessories/features required to meet that listing. B. Grease exhaust fans shall discharge a minimum of 42" above the finished roof. 2.04 EXHAUST FANS SERVING DISHWASHERS A. Dishwasher exhaust fans shall be all aluminum construction. 2.05 FANS USED IN SMOKE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS A. All fans that are part of a smoke management system shall carry a UL 793 Listing and shall be provided with all accessories/features required to meet that listing. B. All fans that are part of a smoke management system, including stair pressurization fans, shall be direct drive as a matter of first choice. C. Belt drive fans that are part of a smoke management system shall have 1.5 times the number of belts required for the design duty with the minimum number of belts being two (2). PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All units shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. B. Ceiling-centrifugal and cabinet fans shall be supported from structural members and shall not rest on the ceiling, on lights or on structural members. C. Units shall be interlocked and controlled as indicated on the Drawings. D. Ceiling-mounted units shall be installed with ceiling grilles flush with the ceiling. E. Curb-mounted fans shall be secured to the roof curb with lag screws in each hole in the fan curb cap. F. Electrical connection to the fan motor shall be made through the roof opening inside the roof curb. G. Replace fan and motor pulleys as required to achieve design airflow. END OF SECTION 23 34 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 34 00-2 MAY 2, 2023 UNITARY EXHAUST, SUPPLY FANS AND VENTILATORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 23 34 01 - HIGH VOLUME LOW SPEED CEILING FANS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All work specified herein shall be accomplished in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 23 00 00- HVAC General. B. Furnish and install High Volume Low Speed(HVLS)ceiling fans of the size,type,capacity and characteristics as shown on the equipment schedules and described herein. C. Equipment schedules and specifications are intended to establish a minimum level of quality and workmanship for the project. When other than the basis of design equipment is proposed, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with engineering and construction modifications necessary in his or any other trade that may be required to satisfy the Contract Documents. D. It is preferred that the HVLS fans are designed and manufactured in the USA. E. Refer to the drawings for basis of design manufacturer. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. Install and connect electrical wiring to fans and controllers in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions and the following: 1. USA:National Electrical Code,NFPA 70 - latest revision and local ordinances. 2. Underwriters Laboratories—UL 507 Standard for Electric Fans 3. Underwriters Laboratories—UL 508A Standard for Industrial Control Panels B. Motors shall meet NEMA MG Table 12-12 of EISA,2010. Motors shall be inverter duty rated. C. Installer Qualifications: Fans shall be installed by factory trained technicians. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Include performance data, operating characteristics, furnished specialties, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For multiple unit installation,include layout drawings showing proposed details for attachments to the structure and the following: 1. Design calculations signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. a. Design Calculations: Calculate requirements for seismic restraints. 2. Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 23 34 01-1 MAY 2, 2023 HIGH VOLUME LOW SPEED CEILING FANS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Storage and handling requirements D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals E. Warranty: Warranty documentation as specified in this Section 1.04 DELIVERY AND STORAGE A. Materials shall be shipped in the manufacturer's standard protective packaging to the designated location. B. The installing contractor shall be responsible for receiving, unloading and storage of materials. Storage shall be in a dry location free of dust and water and available for inspection and handling. Handle equipment carefully to prevent damage. Damaged items that cannot be restored to like new condition shall be replaced with new items at the contractor's expense. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate size,weight and locations with Architectural and Structural drawings. B. The fan shall be capable of receiving a stop command from the fire alarm panel, an ASD (Aspirating Smoke Detection) device, or any smoke, flame or heat detectors. C. The fans shall be as follows: 1. The fan shall meet the air velocity requirements of FM Global's 2.0 data sheet for ESFR sprinklers. 2. If required by the local fire marshal or included in the project requirements,the fan shall be wired into the building's fire suppression system so that the fan will automatically shut off within a maximum of 90 seconds after the fire sprinklers are activated. To facilitate this automatic shut-down, the fan shall include a Variable Frequency Drive(VFD)within the control panel. The low voltage wire and relay required to accomplish this shall be coordinated and to be supplied by the Fire Alarm installer. 3. Upon fire detection as described above, the fans shall coast to a stop as required by NFPA guidelines. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide a written warranty,from the manufacturer,agreeing to replace/repair, components of the HVLS fans which are defective in either material or workmanship within the warranty period. The warranty shall be honored providing the manufacturer's instructions for handling, storing, installing, protecting, and maintaining the infrared units have been adhered to during the warranty period. B. The manufacturer's warranty shall include: FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 23 34 01-2 MAY 2, 2023 HIGH VOLUME LOW SPEED CEILING FANS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Lifetime warranty on airfoils,hub, frame and mounting. 2. Twelve-year service life prorated limited warranty on all other components,which include but are not limited to: a. Motor b. Gear Reducer C. Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 CONSTRUCTION A. Airfoils: 1. The fan shall be equipped with six(6)NASA developed XL airfoils. The airfoils shall be constructed of anodized 6061 T4 precision extruded aluminum with fan diameters ranging from 8 to 20 feet in two(2)foot increments and one(1)24-foot diameter fan. The airfoils shall be connected to six (6) individual aluminum 6005 T6 struts by means of two(2) SAE Grade 5 hex bolts,two(2)flat washers and two (2)nylon lock nuts per airfoil. 2. Airfoil Finish(standard): Anodized. 3. Optional Airfoil Finish: Custom powder coated colors per Drylac RAL color chart. Submit color chart during submittal phase. B. Motor: 1. The fan shall be equipped with a premium efficiency TEFC induction type,inverter duty,3-phase motor.Motor winding shall meet NEMA MG 1 Part 30 and 31.Motor shall have CSA and CE markings. C. Gear Reducer: 1. The fan shall be equipped with a sealed permanently lubricated gear reducer with pressure relief valve. The gear reducer shall be an in-line two-stage helical type, precision finished for low noise and high performance. 2. Bearings shall be the heavy duty deep groove needle type. 3. Seals shall be the double lip high temperature type. 4. The hub shall be securely fastened to the output shaft of the gearbox assembly. D. Mounting and Frame: 1. The fan mounting system shall be equipped with hardware,no less than SAE Grade 5, to provide for safe operation and maintenance. 2. The fan shall be equipped with a universal mount consisting of an upper yoke, knuckle and lower yoke. 3. The frame shall have a black powder coating for appearance and resistance to corrosion. 4. The fan mounting system shall be designed for ease of securing the assembly to various types of structural components. Coordinate actual conditions with the architectural and structural drawings. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 34 01-3 MAY 2, 2023 HIGH VOLUME LOW SPEED CEILING FANS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. Safety System: 1. The fan assembly shall be secured to the structure with braided steel aircraft cables having end loops secured with swaged sleeve fittings. Quantity and diameter of cables shall be as recommended by the manufacturer and in no case, shall there be less than four(4) 3/8"diameter cables. 2. The hub safety system shall prevent the airfoils from separating from the hub with safety retainer links. F. Motor Control Panel: 1. The Motor Control Panel (MCP) shall be constructed in conformance with UL 508A Standard for Industrial Control Panels and the National Electrical Code. 2. The controls shall be housed in a NEMA 1 enclosure to prevent unwanted exposure and to exclude entry of unwanted contaminants. A lockable safety disconnect switch shall be included. 3. The MCP shall include a VFD. The VFD shall operate on carrier frequency of no less than 8 kHz in order to minimize sound. The VFD shall have a UL, CE and RoHS rating. The VFD shall be pre-programmed with dynamic acceleration and deceleration. 4. Motor cable shall be a Belden foil-shielded cable and no more than 25 feet in length. No motor cable substitutions are allowed. 5. The fan shall include a NEMA 4X Remote Switchbox for wall mounting and remote communication. The communication cable shall be a standard CATS (or higher)Ethernet cable;length as required and subject to the manufacturer's length restrictions. The Remote Switchbox shall include a forward, off, reverse and a speed control knob. 6. Building Automation System interface shall be BACnet. 7. The MCP shall be equipped with Fire Alarm panel integration contacts. 8. The Network Touch-Screen Controller shall include the following features: a. Live energy consumption monitor b. Live fault code monitor C. Live fan speed monitor d. Impact and solvent resistant e. NEMA 4X rated f. IP65 rated PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Do not begin installation until supporting structure and interior work have been safely and properly completed. B. Installation of miscellaneous structural supports (if required), electrical wiring, conduit, fuses, disconnect switches, etc. shall be installed by others. Coordinate with other trades prior to beginning work. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 23 34 01-4 MAY 2, 2023 HIGH VOLUME LOW SPEED CEILING FANS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. The installer shall examine the substrate and existing conditions where the fan is to be installed. Notify the Architect and Contractor in writing of any discrepancies found in the existing work or conditions detrimental to the safe, proper and timely completion of the work. Work shall not begin until all unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the installer. D. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify the Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. The HVLS systems shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Airfoil height shall be a minimum of 10 feet above the finished floor in accordance with OSHA guidelines. 3.03 PROTECTION A. During the course of the installation,protect the installed products until the completion of project. B. Touch-up,repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Test and adjust controls. C. Confirm proper motor rotation in forward and reverse run modes. D. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports. E. Leave equipment in a clean and safe working condition prior to turn over to the owner. 3.05 STARTUP/DEMONSTRATION/TRAINING A. Train the Owner's maintenance personnel on how to adjust, operate, and maintain the system. Refer to Division 01 Section Demonstration and Training for additional requirements. B. Training shall include an in-depth review of the manufacturer's installation, operating and maintenance instructions. C. The training session(s) shall be videotaped and presented to the owner's representative for future reference. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 23 34 01-5 MAY 2, 2023 HIGH VOLUME LOW SPEED CEILING FANS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 END OF SECTION 23 34 01 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 23 34 01-6 MAY 2, 2023 HIGH VOLUME LOW SPEED CEILING FANS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 23 37 00 - LOUVERS, GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. All work in this section shall be subject to the provisions of Section 23 00 00 - HVAC General. B. Furnish and install all louvers, grilles, registers and diffusers of the size, type, capacity, and characteristics as shown on the equipment schedules and specified herein. C. Equipment schedules and specifications are intended to establish a minimum level of quality and workmanship for the project. When other than the basis of design equipment is proposed, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with engineering and construction modifications necessary in his or any other trade that may be required to satisfy the Contract Documents. D. Refer to the drawings for basis of design manufacturer and acceptable alternates. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 LOUVERS A. Louver components (heads, jambs, sills, blades, etc.) shall be factory assembled by the manufacturer into a complete unit. Louver sizes too large for shipping shall be built-up from factory assembled louver sections to provide the overall sizes required. B. Louver design shall incorporate structural supports required to withstand a wind load of 20 lbs./square foot. C. All louver performance data submitted for approval shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for Air Performance and Water Penetration. D. All louvers shall have a factory applied finish coating as scheduled with the color selection made by the Architect at the time of shop drawing approval. Color charts shall be submitted with louver shop drawings. E. Screens: 1. General: Provide a screen at each exterior louver. 2. Frames: Same kind and form of metal as indicated for louver to which screens are attached. 3. Screening material: a. Bird Screen: Flattened, expanded aluminum, 3/4" by 0.050" (19 by 1.27 mm)thick b. Insect Screen: Aluminum, 16 x 18 square mesh, 0.011-inch wire FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 37 00-1 MAY 2, 2023 LOUVERS. GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2.02 SEVERE DUTY LOUVERS A. In hurricane prone regions (as defined by the International Building Code) and where scheduled, louvers shall be the severe duty type to protect intake and exhaust openings from wind-driven rain and wind-borne debris. B. Louvers shall be certified for project specific requirements (reference structural engineer's drawings) as follows: 1. Basic Wind Speed: a. IRC- 110 mph(3-second gust) b. IBC - Risk Category I: V,,,t 130 mph; Risk Category 11: Vit 139 mph; Risk Category III& IV: Vu,t 150 mph C. Severe duty louvers shall be AMCA certified in accordance with AMCA 540/550, Enhanced Level E,for water, air and wind-driven rain. D. Structural Performance: Severe duty louvers shall withstand the effects of gravity loads, wind loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated without permanent deformation of louver components,noise or metal fatigue caused by louver blade rattle or flutter, or permanent damage to fasteners and anchors. I. Wind-Load: 150 lbs./sq. ft. (7.182 kPa) maximum pressure acting inward or outward 2.03 GRILLES,REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS A. Units shall be of the type, size, and construction as scheduled or indicated. B. Unless otherwise noted or indicated, all air devices shall be supplied with a factory finish of manufacturer's standard white. C. Grilles, registers and diffusers shall be ordered with borders compatible with the ceiling system type in which they are installed. Refer to architectural drawings for type of ceiling and/or suspension system. D. Aluminum air devices shall be used for all areas subject to excessive moisture or humidity(e.g. showers,pools,bathrooms, etc.). PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 LOUVERS A. Louvers shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. The louver installation shall be made weatherproof by caulking and sealing at the frame and flanges in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 37 00-2 MAY 2, 2023 LOUVERS. GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Combination louver/dampers shall be installed with the required actuators and linkage mechanisms and shall be field adjusted for full opening/closure stroke. Louvers shall be interlocked as scheduled or indicated. 3.02 GRILLES,REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS A. All air devices located in ceiling tiles shall be centered or shall be on quarter points of 2 ft. x 2 ft.tiles. B. Where a line of sight allows the ductwork, wall, or ceiling structure to be seen behind any units, such ductwork, wall or ceiling structure shall be painted with nonflammable flat black paint to minimize visibility. C. All air devices not installed on T-bar ceiling grids shall be securely fastened to adjacent structures. D. Where air distribution devices are installed in inaccessible ceilings, provide the spin-in fitting without a volume damper. Provide an opposed blade damper in the neck of the air distribution device with access to the damper control through or at the face of the device. END OF SECTION 23 37 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 37 00-3 MAY 2, 2023 LOUVERS. GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 23 72 13 - 100% OA AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. All work in this section shall be subject to the provisions of Section 23 00 00 - HVAC General. B. Furnish and install factory assembled,piped and wired packaged 100% outside air energy recovery dehumidification units of the size, type, capacity and characteristics as shown on the equipment schedules and herein described. All units shall be by the same manufacturer. The manufacturer shall have available factory trained service engineers and an inventory of replacement parts within a 100-mile radius of the job site. C. Equipment schedules and specifications are intended to establish a minimum level of quality and workmanship for the project. When other than the basis of design equipment is proposed, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with engineering and construction modifications necessary in his or any other trade that may be required to satisfy the Contract Documents. D. Refer to the drawings for basis of design manufacturer, accessories, and acceptable alternates. E. Substitution Request: Manufacturers of alternate equipment must be approved to bid via addendum, in writing by the specifying Engineer, at least two (2) weeks prior to bid time in order for their bid to be accepted. Substitution request form from the Division 01 specifications shall be submitted to the Architect along with supporting data citing any deviations from the contract documents. Refer to paragraph C. above. F. The manufacturer must have been a manufacturer of packaged energy recovery equipment for at least five (5)years prior to bid time. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Submittal documents shall be prepared by the manufacturer in accordance with Division 01 requirements. B. Submittal package shall include the following as a minimum: 1. Data sheets for all system components 2. Fan selections with performance curves at site conditions 3. Energy recovery section data and performance 4. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations 5. Electrical characteristics 6. Wiring diagrams 7. Installation, Operation and Maintenance manual 8. AHRI Rating Certificates for actual equipment to be installed 9. Manufacturer's warranty 10. Sound-power level ratings FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 2372 13-1 MAY 2, 2023 100%OA AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 11. High wind rated curb and methods for securing to structure and securing the RTU to the curb C. Shop Drawings: Detailed equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions,weights, loadings,required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. Detail mounting, securing, and flashing of roof curb to roof structure. Indicate coordinating requirements with roof membrane system. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration." B. Energy Efficiency Ratio: Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1, "Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings except Low-Rise Residential Buildings." C. Energy recovery heat wheel performance shall be certified and listed in AHRI-1060 (I-P) Performance Rating of Air-to-Air Exchangers for Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment. D. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated components specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. Capacity ratings for air-to-air energy recovery equipment shall comply with AHRI 1060, "Perforinance Rating of Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers for Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment." 2. Capacity ratings for air coils shall comply with AHRI 410, "Forced-Circulation Air- Cooling and Air-Heating Coils." 3. The rooftop unit(s) shall be certified in accordance with UL Standard 1995 and ANSI Standard Z21.47. 4. The rooftop unit(s) shall be safety certified by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) (UL, ETL, intertek, QAI, etc.) and the nameplate shall carry the label of the certification agency. E. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code(NEC). F. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 (NEC), Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and marked for their intended use. G. Unit shall be approved for use in and outside High Velocity Hurricane Zones (HVHZ) by the Florida Building Code (FL# 15031), when using the required steel rooftop curb and attachment methods. Maximum allowable lateral wind pressure is +100psu-100psf. Maximum allowable uplift is +50psV-50psf. Positive and negative required design pressures calculated for use with this system shall be determined by others on a job specific basis, in accordance with the governing code. Site specific pressures shall be less than or equal to the listed positive or negative allowable lateral wind design pressure and allowable uplift values for the product. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 2372 13-2 MAY 2, 2023 100%OA AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 H. The manufacturer shall ensure replacement parts are available for a minimum of ten(10) years from the date of project turnover to the owner. 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver units as factory-assembled units with protective crating and covering as recommended by the manufacturer. B. Coordinate delivery of units in enough time to allow movement into building. C. Handle units to comply with manufacturer's written rigging and installation instructions for unloading and moving to final location. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations with structure. Roof specialties are specified in Division 07 sections. B. Coordinate with all trades prior to ordering equipment for required connections to utilities. 1.06 WARRANTY A. A written warranty shall be executed by the manufacturer and signed by the Contractor, agreeing to replace components that fail in materials or workmanship, within the specified warranty period, provided manufacturer's written instructions for installation, operation, and maintenance have been followed. 1. Warranty Period - Rooftop/Air Handling Unit: Manufacturer's standard, not less than one (1)year after date of startup. 2. Warranty Period - Compressors: Manufacturer's extended 5-year warranty, parts only. 3. Warranty Period— Gas-Fired Heat Exchangers: Manufacturer's non-prorated full parts replacement not less than 10-years from date of shipment. 4. Warranty Period — Total Energy Recovery Wheel: 5-year warranty, parts only commencing on date of start. The warranty is for all wheel cassette components except the drive motor,which shall be warranted by the motor manufacturer. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOFTOP UNITS A. Description: 1. Self-Contained: Factory-assembled and tested, designed for roof installation, and consisting of compressors, condensers, evaporator coils, condenser and evaporator fans, refrigeration components, temperature controls, gas-fired heating section, total energy recovery wheel with bypass damper, filters, and outside air hoods and dampers. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 2372 13-3 MAY 2, 2023 100%OA AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Construction: 1. Unit shall be completely factory-assembled, piped and wired and shipped in one section. 2. Unit shall be specifically designed for 100%outdoor air roof top application with a fully weatherproof cabinet. 3. All cabinet walls, access doors,roof and floor shall be a high performance 2-inch thick composite panel (foamed) constructed with G90 galvanized steel on both sides and a closed cell polyurethane foam interior core providing a rigid, impact- resistant surface. Foam shall have a minimum density of 2 pounds per cubic foot. All foam material shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D-1929 for a minimum flash ignition temperature of 610°F. All panels shall have a thermal break with no continuous metal path from the interior to the exterior of the cabinet. 4. Exterior finish shall be corrosion resistant polyurethane paint capable of withstanding at least 2,000 hours, with no visible corrosive effects, when tested in a salt spray and fog atmosphere in accordance with ASTM B 117-95 test procedure. 5. Unit-specific color-coded wiring diagrams shall match the unit color-coded wiring and will be provided in both point-to-point and ladder form. 6. Diagrams shall also be laminated in plastic and permanently affixed inside the control compartment. 7. Access to filters, heating section, and other items needing periodic inspection or maintenance shall be through insulated hinged access doors with quarter turn lockable latches. Door fastening screws are not acceptable. The blower access door shall be bolted closed. 8. Access doors shall have stainless steel hinges and full perimeter gasketing. 9. All openings through the base pan of the unit shall have upturned flanges of at least V? in height around the opening through the base pan. 10. Air side service access doors shall have rain break overhangs. 11. Unit shall have decals and tags to indicate unit lifting and rigging, service areas and caution areas. Installation and maintenance manuals shall be supplied with each unit. C. Supply&Exhaust Fans: 1. Fans shall be direct drive backward curved airfoil centrifugal,plenum type. Fans shall be all aluminum construction. Fans attached to 1,170 rpm motors shall be rated for a minimum of 1,200 RPM maximum speed. Direct drive fans shall be directly connected to and supported by the motor shaft. Motor bearings shall be rated for 200,000 hours service and shall have external lubrication connections. Fans and motors shall be dynamically balanced, and the entire fan assembly shall be mounted on rubber vibration isolators. D. Outside Air: 1. Unit shall be arranged to supply 100% outside air and discharge exhaust air to the outside. 2. The unit shall be provided with intake and discharge air rain hoods with washable aluminum mesh filters. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 2372 13-4 MAY 2, 2023 100%OA AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. A Class 1 motorized damper shall be installed on the outside air inlet. E. Air-Cooled Condenser: 1. The condensing section shall be equipped with vertical discharge axial flow direct drive fans directly connected to and supported by the motor shaft. 2. The condenser coils shall be sloped at least 30 degrees to protect the coils from damage. 3. Condenser coils shall be copper tubes with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the tubes or aluminum microchannel construction of parallel flow tubes mechanically brazed to enhanced fins. 4. Condenser coils to be sized for a minimum of 10°F of refrigerant sub-cooling. F. Filters: 1. Filters shall be 2-inch thick,pleated fiberglass, disposable type with an ASHRAE efficiency of 30% (MERV 8). G. Cooling and Dehumidification Coils: 1. Evaporator and hot gas reheat coils shall be copper tube with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the tubes. 2. Hot gas reheat coil shall be designed to produce 72F, 55% RH discharge air in dehumidification mode of operation. 3. Evaporator coils shall have galvanized steel end casings. 4. Evaporator coils shall have equalizing type vertical tube headers. 5. Evaporator coils shall be furnished with a thermostatic expansion valve. 6. Evaporator coils shall be furnished with a double sloped insulated drain pan for positive drainage of condensate; drain pan shall be constructed of 304 stainless steel. A float switch or water level detection device shall be factory installed to provide overflow protection. 7. A plugged drain fitting shall be provided on each side of the unit for field installation of the condensate trap. H. Refrigeration System: 1. Compressors shall be scroll type with internal thermal overload protection and mounted on the compressor manufacturer's recommended rubber vibration isolators. Each compressor shall have independent refrigerant circuits. 2. Compressors shall be mounted in an isolated compartment to permit operation of the unit without affecting air flow when the access door to the compartment is open. 3. Compressors shall be isolated from the base pan and supply air to avoid any transmission of noise from the compressor into the building. 4. System shall be equipped with thermostatic expansion valve type refrigerant flow control. 5. System shall be equipped with automatic reset low pressure and manual reset high pressure refrigerant controls. Unit shall be equipped with Schrader type service fittings on both the high side and low-pressure sides of the system. 6. Unit shall be equipped with refrigerant liquid line driers. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 2372 13-5 MAY 2, 2023 100%OA AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 7. Unit shall be fully factory-charged with refrigerant. 8. Hot gas bypass shall be provided on all refrigerant circuits. 9. Each compressor shall be individually staged for capacity control. 10. All circuits shall be equipped with liquid line sight glasses. 11. Unit shall be provided with a hot gas reheat coil and modulating hot gas reheat control valve piped to the lead refrigerant system. K. Controls: 1. Provide a factory-mounted and wired makeup air (MAU) unit controller. MUA programmable controller shall be internal to the rooftop unit and shall include a 7-day, 2 events per day scheduler, 14-day holiday schedule, optimal start and outputs for heating and cooling. The outside air temperature and the humidity sensors shall be factory-mounted. 2. The unit manufacturer shall provide the supply air temperature sensors for field installation by others. 3. The controller shall be BACnet compatible. 4. The controller shall accept inputs for up to two remote temperature sensors (located on the top two floors). Temperature readings shall be averaged. L. Energy Recovery Section: I. Unit shall be provided with a total energy recovery wheel with bypass. Wheel performance shall be certified and listed in AHRI-1060 (I-P) Performance Rating of Air-to-Air Exchangers for Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment. 2. The wheel shall be coated with a silica gel desiccant permanently bonded without the use of binders or adhesives. which may degrade desiccant performance. 3. The substrate shall be made of a light weight polymer and shall not degrade nor require additional coatings for application in coastal environments. 4. Coated wheel segments shall be washable with detergent or alkaline coil cleaner and water. 5. The silica gel desiccant shall not dissolve nor deliquesce in the presence of water or high humidity. 6. The wheel polymer layers shall be wound continuously with one structured layer in an ideal parallel plate geometry providing laminar flow at a minimum pressure drop. 7. The wheel shall incorporate the channel matrix design and an adjustable purge. 8. The polymer layers shall be captured in a stainless-steel wheel frame or aluminum and stainless-steel segment frames that provide a rigid and self- supporting matrix. 9. Energy recovery wheels greater than 25 inches in diameter shall be provided with removable wheel segments. 10. The wheel frame shall be a welded hub, spoke and rim assembly of stainless, plated and/or coated steel and shall be self-supporting without the wheel segments in place. 11. Wheel segments shall be removable without the use of tools to facilitate maintenance and cleaning. 12. Wheel bearings shall provide a L-10 life in excess of 400,000 hours. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 2372 13-6 MAY 2, 2023 100%OA AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 13. The wheel rim shall be continuous rolled stainless-steel and the wheel shall be connected to the shaft by means of taper locks. 14. All diameter and perimeter seals shall be provided as part of the cassette assembly and shall be factory set. 15. Drive belts of stretch urethane shall be provided for wheel rim drive without the need for external tensioners or adjustment. 16. The energy recovery section shall be a UL recognized component for electrical and fire safety. The wheel drive motor shall be UL recognized and mounted in the cassette frame and supplied with a service connector or junction box. M. Electrical Features: 1. Unit shall be provided with a factory-installed and wired internal disconnect. 2. Unit shall be provided with phase and brown-out protection to shut down all motors in the unit if the phases are more than 10% out of balance on voltage, or the voltage is more than 10%under design voltage or on phase reversal. 3. Unit shall be provided with a factory-installed and wired 115-volt, 15-amp ground fault service receptacle powered with a 1.5 kVA transformer. 2.02 ROOF CURBS A. Roof curbs shall be constructed of galvanized steel. Curbs are to be fully gasketed between the curb top and unit bottom with the curb providing full perimeter support, cross structure support and air seal for the unit. Curb gasketing shall be furnished within the control compartment of the rooftop unit to be mounted on the curb immediately before mounting of the rooftop unit. Provide fiberglass sound deadening pad between curb and RTU; Kinetics Noise Control "KIP-RT" or prior approved equal. Unit shall be mounted on a factory-furnished acoustical style solid bottom roof curb with scoop, fully lined with 1 inch of foil faced neoprene coated, fiberglass insulation and with a wood nailer strip. Line inside and bottom of curb with an acoustical barrier; Kinetics KNM- 10013 or prior approved equal. B. Rooftop units with down discharge and side curb supply air outlet shall be provided with an extended height curb. C. Units having extended height curb exceeding 30" from top of finished roof shall be provided with a service platform, ladder and guard rails at all service access points. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Unit shall be run tested at factory before shipping. B. Unit shall be shipped with a full charge of refrigerant. C. Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified, and except where a manufacturer's technical representative directs otherwise. Install unit where shown on the Drawings. Provide FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 2372 13-7 MAY 2, 2023 100%OA AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 clearances required by the manufacturer around sides of unit for proper airflow and service. D. Provide and install all water piping, drains and controls for proper operation of unit. E. Unit shall be installed level. F. Install new clean filters prior to start-up. 3.02 START-UP A. Clean unit thoroughly inside and out. B. Engage a factory authorized representative to perform start-up service. C. Do not start unit without new clean filters in place. D. Verify fan rotation and motor amperage. E. Prepare a written star-up report that records the results of tests and inspections. F. After test and balance has been completed, install new clean filters. 3.03 TRAINING A. The manufacturer's authorized representative shall provide on-site training for the Owner's maintenance personnel for a period of not less than four(4)hours as follows: 1. Instruct the Owner's designated operating personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment as well as the operation and maintenance of the controls for the various systems in the building. Informal or unwitnessed instructions, or instructions to non-designated personnel, will not be acceptable. Prior arrangements for instruction periods shall be made with the Owner two (2) weeks ahead of the actual training. 2. In depth review of the IOM manual shall be conducted. B. IOM manuals shall be supplied for each unit located in a metal pocket in the control access compartment. END OF SECTION 23 72 13 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 2372 13-8 MAY 2, 2023 100%OA AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 23 81 27 - SPLIT SYSTEM (ELECTRIC COOLING, GAS HEATING) PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. All work specified herein shall be accomplished in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 23 00 00- HVAC General. B. Furnish and install direct expansion air cooled split system with gas-fired furnace of the sizes and capacities shown on the equipment schedules. C. Condensing unit, cooling coil, and furnace shall be factory matched for compatibility and shall be rated in accordance with AHRI Standard 210/240. D. Equipment schedules and specifications are intended to establish a minimum level of quality and workmanship for the project. When other than the basis of design equipment is proposed, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with engineering and construction modifications necessary in his or any other trade that may be required to satisfy the Contract Documents. E. Refer to the drawings for basis of design manufacturer and acceptable alternates. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. For piping,valves,accessories and piping insulation refer to Section 23 23 00—Refrigerant Piping. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Each system shall be complete with an evaporator section consisting of a cooling coil, controls,blower and motor; a furnace section with gas-fired heat exchanger; a condensing unit with compressor(s), condenser coil, condenser fan and motor; and controls housed in a weatherproof cabinet, interconnecting refrigerant piping and a thermostat. Equipment shall be UL and/or CSA Listed, and/or AGA/GAMA certified. 2.02 OUTDOOR CONDENSING UNIT A. Outdoor units shall be complete, including cabinet, hermetic compressor, nonferrous condenser coil with guard, condenser fan and motor, refrigerant reservoir or receiver, charging valve, controls, refrigerant holding charge, heavy duty permanently lubricated motors with built-in thermal overload protection, locked rotor, over and under voltage protection,high pressure cutout with auto-reset,motor starters and contactors, compressor protection, crankcase heater, equipped with low ambient operation, transformer, filter/drier,vibration isolation, and other required components. B. Casings shall be constructed of zinc-coated steel, double phosphatized and finished with baked enamel for positive weatherproof protection. Removable panels shall provide access FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2381 71-1 MAY 2, 2023 SPLIT SYSTEM (ELECTRIC COOLING,GAS HEATING) DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 to all components from one side of the unit. Drain holes shall be provided in all units for elimination of rain. Compressor shall have a 5-year warranty. 2.03 INDOOR UNIT A. Furnace shall be complete including automatic gas controls with 100% shutoff electronic pilot ignition, aluminized steel burners, multi-speed direct drive centrifugal fans, permanently lubricated motors and bearings,motors with thermal overload protection,and 1"thick high velocity type filters. Cabinet shall be of heavy gauge cold rolled steel painted with baked-on enamel, lined with foil-covered fireproof fiberglass insulation. Access panels shall be at front side of unit. Return air shall be from either side or bottom of unit. B. Evaporator coils shall be constructed of precisely spaced ripple edged aluminuni fins machine fitted to copper tubes. Assembled in an "A" configuration. Provide flared shoulder tubing joints with silver soldering. Refrigerant lines to be equipped with flared fittings. Drain pan to be constructed of heavy gauge galvanized insulated drain pan with 3/4" drain connection minimum. Provide adapter base to simplify mounting of coil assembly to furnace. C. Provide two (2) sets of filters, one set to be used during construction and one set to be installed after completion of project. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Units shall be installed as shown on the Drawings and in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Condensing units shall be installed level and as detailed on the drawings. C. Units shall be installed to allow adequate service to all components. END OF SECTION 23 81 27 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2381 71-2 MAY 2, 2023 SPLIT SYSTEM (ELECTRIC COOLING,GAS HEATING) DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 23 81 29 - VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. All work specified in this section is subject to the provisions of Section 23 00 00 -HVAC General. B. This specification stipulates the requirements for the design, fabrication, and performance of air-cooled Variable Refrigerant Flow HVAC Systems. C. Furnish and install factory assembled components of the Variable Refrigerant Flow HVAC System(s) of the type and operational characteristics shown and as specified herein. All systems and controls shall be by the same manufacturer. D. Equipment schedules and specifications are intended to establish a minimum level of quality and workmanship for the project. When other than the basis of design equipment is proposed, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with engineering and construction modifications necessary in his or any other trade that may be required to satisfy the Contract Documents. E. The VRF system shall be installed by a licensed mechanical contractor trained by the VRF equipment manufacturer or certified manufacturer's agent. Refer to Section 1.02 Quality Assurance, Section 1.09 Bid Proposals, and Section 1.10 Submittals for requirements. F. Commissioning shall be performed by the manufacturer or certified manufacturer's agent. The test and balance agency and commissioning agent shall be engaged for all aspects of the commissioning process. G. The Variable Refrigerant Flow HVAC Systems shall be provided to meet the minimum capacities scheduled at the indicated design conditions, shall meet all constraints of construction and shall comply with all specification sections. H. System descriptions of Variable Refrigerant Flow(VRF)and Variable Refrigerant Volume (VRV) may be used interchangeably and refer to the same type of system. I. System component descriptions of Branch Selector(BS);Mode Control Unit(MCU),Heat Recovery Unit (HRU) and Branch Controller (BC/MCU) may be used interchangeably within this specification except within the controls sections below. 1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. For piping,valves,accessories and piping insulation refer to Section 23 23 00—Refrigerant Piping. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 81 29-1 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. The units shall be tested by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL), in accordance with ANSI/UL 1995 — Heating and Cooling Equipment and bear the Listed Mark. B. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (NEC). C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70(NEC),Article 100,by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and marked for their intended use. D. Fabricate and label refrigeration system to comply with ASHRAE 15- Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems. See Submittal paragraph below for Refrigerant Concentration Limit calculations. E. Energy Efficiency Ratio(EER)and/or Seasonal Energy Efficiency Ratio(SEER):Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1- Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings. F. Coefficient of Performance (COP) and/or Heating Seasonal Performance Factor (HSPF): Equal to or greater than prescribed by ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings. G. The units shall be manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9001 and ISO 14001 which is a set of standards applying to environmental protection set by the International Organization for Standardization(ISO). The system(s)shall be factory tested for safety and function. H. System(s) shall be rated and certified in accordance with AHRI Standard 1230 and meet minimum efficiencies scheduled. L Manufacturer shall have been engaged in the production of this type of equipment for a minimum of ten(10)years. J. Manufacturer shall have parts, equipment and materials stocked within the U.S. for immediate order. K. Manufacturer shall have factory certified service technicians available and within 50 miles of the project site. L. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. I. On-site installation personnel shall be trained and certified by a manufacturer's authorized representative. The installing contractor and installation personnel shall be experienced and have completed a minimum of five (5) previous projects similar in nature, size, and scope of this project. Submit training certificates and a project experience list with system description and contact information for the owner/operator. The mechanical contractor's installation price shall be based on FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 81 29-2 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 the system's installation requirements. The mechanical contractor bids with complete knowledge of the HVAC system requirements. M. The condensing unit(s) shall be factory charged with R-41 OA. N. Mechanical equipment for wind-born debris regions shall be designed in accordance with ASCE 7-2010 and installed to resist the wind pressures on the equipment and the supports. 1.04 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Refer to the drawings for basis of design manufacturer. Alternate manufacturers listed below may be considered for approval so long as the equipment meets or exceeds all the requirements of these Contract Documents. 1. Daikin 2. LG 3. Samsung B. The alternate equipment manufacturer shall provide,to the bidding mechanical contractor, a complete equipment data package seven (7) days prior to bid date. The package shall include, but not be limited to, equipment capacities at standard AHRI and design conditions, power requirements including MCA, RLA, MSC and MOP of each device, indoor units CFM/static pressures, fan curves, installation requirements, refrigerant type, controls,weight and physical dimensions. Nominal performance data is not acceptable. C. Provide manufacturer's drawings showing layout, schedules, details, piping distribution, valves, branch selector box locations, system risers, and controls diagrams. The drawings shall convey all requirements to successfully install the alternate equipment supplier's system and show no less information than the bid documents. D. The proposed alternate systems shall meet or exceed the energy ratings as listed in AHRI 1230. E. The mechanical contractor shall list the equipment supplier and submit the required data package with the bid detailing a complete comparison of the proposed alternate equipment to the specified equipment and the associated cost reduction of the alternate equipment. The contractor bids an alternate manufacturer with full knowledge that that manufacturer's product may not be acceptable or approved. F. When a substitution of equipment is made,the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with engineering and construction modifications necessary in his or any other trade that may be required to satisfy the Contract Documents. 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The VRF system shall be a heat recovery system with the capability of providing simultaneous cooling and heating to multiple zones or a heat pump system as scheduled. 1. The heat recovery system shall consist of one, two, or three (max.) outdoor heat pump units, branch selectors/heat recovery units (designed for minimum piping FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 81 29-3 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 and maximum design flexibility), a three-pipe refrigerant distribution system, multiple indoor units, and controls by the equipment manufacturer. a. The outdoor units shall be air-cooled direct expansion (DX) type with variable speed inverter driven compressors. The system shall have the capability to connect an indoor evaporator capacity of no less than 130% of the outdoor unit's total capacity. b. Every indoor unit or zone shall be independently capable of operating in either heating or cooling mode regardless of the mode of other indoor units. A dedicated hot gas pipe shall be required to ensure optimum heating operation performance. C. The system shall be capable of changing mode of individual indoor units or zones(cooling to heating or heating to cooling)within a maximum time of 5 minutes to ensure the indoor temperature can be properly maintained. d. A single heat recovery system shall support up to fifty-eight (58) indoor zones. e. Two-pipe,heat recovery systems requiring separation of the gas and liquid refrigerant and auxiliary electric heating coils for simultaneous heating and cooling or heating during defrost mode are not acceptable. f. Operation of the system shall permit either individual cooling or heating of each indoor unit simultaneously. Each indoor unit or group of indoor units shall be able to provide set temperature independently via a local remote controller, the manufacturer's control package, or a BACnet BAS interface if the building is being provided with a BAS system. g. Branch Selector/Heat Recovery Unit (BS/HRU) boxes shall be located where shown on the drawings. The branch selector boxes shall contain the refrigerant control piping and electronics to facilitate communications between the BS/HRU and main processor and between the BS/HRU and indoor units. The BS/HRU shall control the operational mode of the subordinate indoor units. h. If required by the manufacturer,provide insulated condensate drain piping from the BS/HRU to the nearest condensate drain. 2. The heat pump system shall consist of an outdoor unit, a two-pipe refrigerant distribution system, multiple indoor units, and controls by the equipment manufacturer. a. The outdoor unit shall be air-cooled direct expansion (DX) type with variable speed inverter driven compressors. The system shall have the capability to connect an indoor evaporator capacity of no less than 130% of the outdoor unit's total capacity. b. The indoor units shall operate in the same heating or cooling mode as all other indoor units connected to a single outdoor unit. C. A single heat pump system shall support up to fifty-two(52)indoor zones. B. The indoor units shall be connected to the outdoor unit utilizing the manufacturer specific piping joints, wye-branches and headers to ensure correct refrigerant flow and balancing. T-style joints are not acceptable. C. Furnish and install indoor units of the type and capacity shown on the equipment schedules. Units shall be rated in accordance with AHRI Standards. 1.06 OPERATING RANGE FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2381 29-4 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Heat pump system: 1. The operating range in cooling shall be 23°F to 115°F DB or wider. Provide low ambient operation/wind baffle kit as required for proper operation. 2. The operating range in heating shall be -4°F to 60°F WB or wider. Provide low ambient operation/wind baffle kit as required for proper operation. B. Heat Recovery system: 1. The operating range in cooling shall be 23°F to 115°F DB or wider. Provide low ambient operation/wind baffle kit as required for proper operation. 2. The operating range in heating shall be -4°F to 60°F DB / -4°F to 59°F WB or wider. Provide low ambient operation/wind baffle kit as required for proper operation. 3. Cooling based simultaneous cooling/heating operating range will be 14°F to 81°F DB or wider. 4. Heating based simultaneous cooling/heating operating range will be 14°F to 60°F DB or wider. C. Cooling mode indoor room temperature range will be 57°F to77°F WB or wider. D. Heating mode indoor room temperature range will be 59°F to 80°F DB or wider. 1.07 ADDITIONAL REQUIRED FEATURES A. Auto charging — Each system shall have a refrigerant auto-charging function. If Autocharging is not available, the manufacturer shall furnish refrigerant charge calculations for each system prior to startup. Included with the project close-out documentation, the installing contractor shall include the actual as-built line lengths with sizes so the manufacturer can rerun the program to determine the required charge. B. Defrost and Heating Mode—Each system shall maintain continuous heating during defrost operation. If a stage of defrost disables the heating for any period of time, all indoor units associated with the outdoor unit in defrost mode shall de-energize the fans for the duration of the defrost cycle. A defrost cycle shall not exceed five (5) minutes. C. Oil Return and Heating Mode—Each system shall maintain continuous heating during oil return operation. Reverse cycle (cooling mode) oil return during heating operation shall not be permitted. D. Independent Control— Each indoor unit shall use a dedicated electronic expansion valve for independent control. E. VFD Inverter Control— Each condensing unit shall use a high efficiency, variable speed "inverter" compressor coupled with inverter fan motors for optimized part load performance. Inverter controlled compressors shall modulate from 4% to 100%. On-off or digital compressor control is not permitted. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 81 29-5 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 F. Compressor capacity shall be modulated automatically to maintain constant suction and condensing pressures while varying the refrigerant volume for the needs of the cooling or heating loads. G. Indoor units shall use Proportional-Integral-Derivative (PID) control loops to control superheat to deliver a comfortable room temperature condition and optimize efficiency. Indoor units shall control to within a+/-one(1) degree F deadband. H. Connection Ratios — The outdoor unit shall have the ability to connect an indoor unit evaporator capacity of down to 50% and up to 130% of the outdoor unit capacity. I. Control Wiring—Contractor shall provide and install manufacturer's recommended control wire sizes and types for all systems and system components.Wiring located within a return air plenum shall be plenum rated or installed within conduit. All wiring, installation methods, and terminations shall comply with the NEC. J. Advanced Diagnostics — Systems shall include a self-diagnostic, auto-check function to detect a malfunction and display the type and location. K. Each outdoor unit shall incorporate contacts for electrical demand shedding. L. Each system shall be capable of integrating with open protocol BACnet and LonWorks building automation systems. 1.08 REFRIGERANT PIPING A. The system shall be capable of refrigerant piping up to 540 actual feet or 620 equivalent feet from the outdoor unit to the furthest indoor unit, a total combined liquid line length of 3,280 feet of piping between the outdoor unit and indoor units with 295 feet maximum vertical difference without any oil traps or the equivalent. Each system shall have a maximum of 49 feet vertical difference from the highest branch serving indoor units to the lowest branch serving indoor units and this vertical limit must be within the 295 feet vertical limit between the outdoor unit and the furthest or lowest indoor unit. Manufacturer's factory fabricated piping joints, wye-branches, and headers shall be used to ensure proper refrigerant balance and flow to provide for optimum system capacity and performance. T-style joints are not acceptable as they negatively impact proper refrigerant balance and flow. Where there is a conflict in the Contract Documents, notify the architect/engineer in writing immediately. B. Refer to Section 23 23 00—Refrigerant Piping for additional requirements. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver equipment with protective factory installed crating and covering. B. Store equipment in clean dry spaces to prevent damage and protect from weather, dirt, water and construction debris. Provide protective covers or plastic film over openings to prevent dust and debris from entering the unit or components. Remove all protective coverings prior to final connections or start-up and recycle all recyclable waste. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 81 29-6 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Handle equipment according to manufacturer's written rigging and installation instructions. 1.10 BID PROPOSALS A. Bidders shall provide a Compliance Review of the Specifications and Addenda (if applicable). The Compliance Review shall be a paragraph-by-paragraph review of the Specifications with the following information; "C", "D" or "E" marked in the margin of the original Specifications and any subsequent Addenda. 1. "C": Comply with no exceptions. 2. "D": Comply with deviations. For each and every deviation, provide a numbered footnote with reasons for the proposed deviation and how the intent of the Specification can be satisfied. 3. "E": Exception, do not comply. For each and every exception, provide a numbered footnote with reasons for non-compliance and possible alternatives. B. Each manufacturer shall provide the aforementioned Compliance Review; the engineer will not review bid proposals for system compliance. Failure to submit the complete Compliance Review may be cause for rejection of bid proposal. C. Unless a deviation or exception is specifically noted in the Compliance Review, it is assumed that the bidder is in complete compliance with the Contract Documents. Deviations or exceptions taken in cover letters, subsidiary documents, by omission or by contradiction do not release the bidder from being in complete compliance, unless the exception or deviation has been specifically noted in the Compliance Review. The bidder may submit the latest state-of-the-art components in lieu of specified components at no additional cost, where the latest state-of-the-art components perform better than what is specified. D. All deviations from the Contract Documents must be approved by the Architect/Engineer and Owner. E. Major exceptions to these specifications will be considered sufficient cause for rejection of bids. F. The manufacturer shall provide Refrigerant Concentration Limit (RCL) calculations for each system in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 15 - Safety Standard for Refrigeration Systems or a statement that the system(s)meet the exceptions noted in Standard 15. 1.11 SUBMITTALS A. Additional information shall be submitted, upon award, in a formal submittal as itemized below.Failure to submit this information with the bid may cause the bid to be rejected.The Vendor shall submit: 1. Product Data: Include refrigerant type and amount of charge in pounds, rated capacities of selected models, weights (shipping, installed and operating), operating characteristics and performances, furnished specialties, and accessories. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2381 29-7 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Equipment tags (that correspond to the tag used on the drawings) shall be clearly noted in the submittal. 2. Evidence of at least 5 successful installations similar in nature, size and scope of this project. Include owner/operator contact information. 3. Training course certificates of completion for qualified installers and supervisors. 4. Shop Drawings: Complete set of manufacturer's certified prints of assemblies, control panels, piping, valves,piping fittings and branches, flow diagrams, risers, sections, elevations, unit isolations, assembled unit dimensions and weights, access requirements, required clearances for maintenance and operation, and wiring diagrams. Submit hardcopies and/or electronic copies in accordance with the General Conditions for Engineer review and approval. a. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate between manufacturer installed and field-installed wiring. 5. Startup service reports 6. Restart sequence: Provide a description of the sequence for automatic restarting of the equipment after power is restored following a power interruption. 7. Operation and Maintenance Data: a. Furnish six (6) sets of written operating, maintenance, controls, and lubrication instructions for all installed systems and equipment. Instructions shall include copies of all designated approved shop drawings, manufacturer's descriptive data, control diagrams, wiring diagrams, and installation and operating instructions as specified. b. Submit the above instructions, charts, etc. to the Owner as a rough draft and after the required corrections are made, furnish four (4) sets in hardback binders, suitably indexed and identified. 8. Refrigerant Concentration Limit(RCL) calculations for each system 9. Refrigerant Detectors (where required) 1.12 WARRANTY A. The manufacturer shall warrant to the owner that products,system components,equipment, and manufacturer provided piping and accessories will be free from defects in material or workmanship. This warranty applies for a minimum of one (1)year from the date of final installation, or eighteen (18) months from the date of shipment. The contractor shall be responsible for completing all warranty documentation prior to acceptance of the installed systems.Repaired or replacement parts are warranted for the balance of the warranty period applicable to the original part. 1.13 EXTENDED WARRANTY A. For system components and compressor parts only, the manufacturer shall provide an extended warranty for a total of a five(5)year period. The effective date of this extended warranty shall be established as the date of startup. An installing contractor must provide the following items to the manufacturer in order to qualify for the extended warranty. Doing so will ensure that the contractor has installed the system according to the manufacturer recommendations. 1. The manufacturer's warranty Process/Checklist Sheet 2. Final "as built"VRF select report FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 81 29-8 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. Commissioning report from Technician Utility Tool (TUT) or the equivalent 4. Before and after digital photographs of test gauge for the pressure and vacuum tests 1.14 COORDINATION A. Coordinate with the electrical contractor to provide and install dedicated disconnect switches for each indoor unit, each BS/HRU, and each outdoor unit. Sizes shall be per the manufacturer's required maximum overcurrent protection sizing for each piece of equipment. The dedicated disconnects shall also be suitable for the installed location (indoor NEMA-1 or outdoor NEMA-3R). B. Coordinate with the electrical contractor to confirm all equipment voltage, phase and nameplate data prior to ordering and prior to installation. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 OUTDOOR UNIT (HEAT RECOVERY OR HEAT PUMP) A. General: 1. Outdoor units shall be factory assembled and pre-wired with all necessary electronic and refrigerant controls. The refrigeration circuit of the unit shall consist of scroll compressor(s),motors,fans, condenser coil, electronic expansion valves, solenoid valves, 4-way valve, distribution headers, capillaries, filters, shut off valves, oil separators, service ports and refrigerant regulator. Dual and triple frame outdoor units will be field piped with factory designed and supplied Y-branch kits to manifold them together into a single refrigerant circuit. 2. Liquid,hot gas,cold gas(suction lines)must be individually insulated between the outdoor unit and indoor units. 3. Unit control boards shall perform all functions required to effectively and efficiently operate the VRF system and communicate in a daisy chain configuration from outdoor unit to heat recovery and indoor units via a TIA-485 interface. 4. The outdoor unit can be wired and piped with access from the left, right, rear or bottom. 5. Each outdoor unit frame shall have a removable inspection panel no greater than 6 inches tall and 12 inches wide to allow access to service tool connection, DIP switches, auto addressing and error codes. 6. The system will automatically restart operation after a power failure and will include non-volatile memory which will not cause any settings to be lost, thus eliminating the need for reprogramming. 7. The outdoor unit shall be modular in design and shall allow for side-by-side installation with minimum spacing between units. 8. The following safety devices shall be included on the outdoor unit; high pressure sensor and switch, low pressure switch, control circuit fuses, crankcase heaters, fusible plug, overload relay, inverter overload protector, thermal protectors for compressor and fan motors, over current protection for the inverter and anti- recycling timers. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 81 29-9 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 9. To ensure the liquid refrigerant does not flash when supplying the indoor units,the circuit shall be provided with a sub-cooling feature. 10. The outdoor unit shall have a centrifugal oil separator for each compressor and controls to ensure sufficient oil supply is maintained for the compressor. 11. Heat pump outdoor unit shall be capable of heating operation at the temperature range limits specified above without additional low ambient controls or an auxiliary heat source. 12. Heat recovery outdoor unit shall be capable of heating operation at the temperature range limits specified above without additional low ambient controls or an auxiliary heat source. 13. Oil recovery cycle shall be automatic occurring 2 hours after start of operation and then every 8 hours of operation. Each system shall maintain continuous heating during oil return operation.Reverse cycle(cooling mode)oil return during heating operation shall not be permitted due to the potential reduction in space temperature. If alternative manufacturer's system is incapable of heating during oil return, optional electric heating coil shall be furnished. Contractor is responsible for any change to electrical requirements. 14. The system shall continue to provide heat to the indoor units while in the defrost mode. Reverse cycle defrost during heating operation shall not be permitted due to the potential reduction in space temperature. If alternative manufacturer's system is incapable of heating during defrost,an optional electric heating coil shall be furnished. Contractor is responsible for any change to electrical requirements. 15. Outdoor unit shall have a tested sound rating no higher than 64 dB(A)per outdoor unit frame tested per ISO 1996. 16. Each outdoor unit shall be run tested at the factory. B. Unit Cabinet/Frame: 1. The outdoor unit shall be completely weatherproof and corrosion resistant. The unit shall be constructed from galvanized steel panels coated with baked-on enamel paint. C. Fan: 1. The outdoor unit shall consist of one or more direct-drive propeller type fans with motors that have multiple speed operation via a DC (digitally commutating) inverter. The fan shall be factory set to deliver an external static pressure of 0.12 inches WG. A field setting switch shall allow the external static pressure to be increased to a maximum 0.32 inches WG to accommodate field applied discharge ductwork for indoor mounting of outdoor units. 2. The fan shall be a vertical discharge configuration. 3. The fan motor shall have inherent thermal protection and permanently lubricated bearings. 4. The fan motor shall be provided with a fan guard to prevent contact with moving parts. 5. Night setback control of the fan motor for low noise operation by way of automatically limiting the maximum speed shall be a standard feature. Operation sound level shall be selectable from 3 steps as shown below. Operation Sound(dB) Night Mode FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 81 29-10 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Sound Pressure Level (dB) Step 1 max. 55 Step 2 max. 50 Step 3 max. 45 D. Coil: 1. Coils shall be manufactured from rifled bore copper tubes mechanically bonded to aluminum louvered fins to ensure high efficiency performance. 2. The fins shall be covered with a hydrophilic film that is inherently self-cleaning with each rainfall. Manufacturers whose AHRI ratings do not reflect capacity reduction due to coatings are not acceptable. 3. The pipe plates shall be treated with powdered polyester resin for corrosion prevention. The thickness of the coating must be between 2.0 and 3.0 microns. 4. The coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard. E. Compressor: 1. The inverter scroll compressors shall be variable speed(PVM inverter) controlled which is capable of changing the speed to follow the variations in total cooling and heating load as determined by the suction gas pressure as measured in the outdoor unit. In addition, samplings of evaporator and condenser temperatures shall be made so that the high/low pressures detected are read every 20 seconds and calculated. With each reading, the compressor capacity (INV frequency or STD ON/OFF) shall be controlled to eliminate deviation from the target value. 2. The inverter driven compressor in each condensing unit shall be of highly efficient reluctance DC(digitally commutating),hermetically sealed scroll. 3. Neodymium magnets or manufacturer's equivalent shall be adopted in the rotor construction to yield a higher torque and efficiency in the compressor instead of the normal ferrite magnet type. At complete stop of the compressor, the neodymium magnets will position the rotor into the optimum position for a low torque start. 4. The frequency of the inverter compressor shall be variable from 20 to 120Hz and modulate in I Hz increments. 5. Each non-inverter compressor shall also be of the hermetically sealed scroll type. 6. Each compressor shall be equipped with a crankcase heater, high pressure safety switch, and internal thermal overload protector. 7. Oil separators shall be standard with the equipment along with an intelligent oil management system. 8. The compressor shall be spring mounted to avoid vibration transmission. 9. Units sized smaller than six (6) tons shall contain a minimum of one (1) compressor. Unit sized for six(6)tons and larger shall contain a minimum of two (2) compressors with a minimum of one (1) additional compressor for each additional four (4) tons of capacity. In the event of compressor failure, the remaining compressors shall continue to operate and provide heating or cooling as required at a proportionally reduced capacity. The microprocessor and associated controls shall be designed to specifically address this condition and initiate an alarm through the control network. 10. In the case of multiple condenser modules, conjoined operation hours of the compressors shall be balanced by means of the Duty Cycling Function, ensuring FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 81 29-11 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 sequential starting of each module at each start/stop cycle,completion of oil return, and completion of defrost. F. Electrical: 1. A separate power connection will be required for each indoor unit. 2. Transmission (control) wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be a maximum of 3,280 feet. G. Control Wiring: 1. Wiring shall comply with NEC Article 800 and these specifications. 2. The control voltage between the indoor, BS/HRU controllers and outdoor units shall be per the manufacturer's installation instructions; typically,low-voltage. 3. Unless directed otherwise in the manufacturer's installation instructions, use 18 AWG, 25pF/ft. Nom., 60.70/Mft impedance, braid or foil shielded, twisted pair wire for TIA-485 daisy chain communications wiring. Splicing of communication wiring shall not be permitted. 2.02 INDOOR AIR HANDLING UNITS A. General: 1. Indoor air handling units shall be wall hung, cassette type, ducted high static, ducted low static, vertical/horizontal, ceiling suspended, low-profile, or floor mounted type as indicated. Units shall be matched to and compatible with the outdoor units and operate with refrigerant R-410A equipped with an electronic expansion valve and direct-drive DC multispeed fan motor, for installation within a conditioned space. 2. When installed in a vertical configuration the unit shall have a top discharge and a bottom return unless scheduled or noted otherwise. 3. When installed in a horizontal configuration the unit shall have a horizontal discharge and a horizontal return duct connection. 4. Units shall be equipped with a means to reduce the evaporator fan speed once the thermostat is satisfied while limiting changes in room temperature by more than +/- 1 OF. 5. Indoor units shall be completely factory assembled and tested. The units shall be complete with factory wiring, piping, electronic proportional expansion valve, control circuit board, fan motor thermal protection, brazed refrigerant piping connections,self-diagnostics,auto-restart function,3-minute fused time delay,and a test run switch. 6. Indoor unit refrigerant circuit shall be filled with a dry nitrogen gas charge from the factory. 7. Return air shall be filtered by a factory supplied removable and washable filter with anti-fungal coating. 8. Condensate shall be drained via gravity, integral condensate pump, or external condensate pump. Power for the condensate pump shall match the indoor unit voltage and shall be powered by the same power circuit. Wall mounted units shall have an external condensate pump. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 81 29-12 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Cabinet: 1. The cabinet shall be constructed of galvanized steel with sound absorbing foil- faced insulation to reduce noise and control air leakage. 2. Installation location shall have adequate structural support,space for service access and clearance for air return and supply duct connections. C. Fan: 1. The fan shall be the manufacturer's standard direct-drive type with a statically and dynamically balanced wheel. 2. The fan motor shall be thermally protected. D. Coil: 1. Coils shall be of the direct expansion type manufactured from rifled bore copper tubes mechanically bonded to aluminum louvered fins to ensure high efficiency performance. 2. The refrigerant connections shall be the mechanical compression type with flared ends. 3. Condensate drain connection shall be a minimum of 3/4 inch inside diameter. 4. A thermistor shall be located on the liquid and gas lines. 5. Units shall be equipped with an electronic expansion valve. 6. Condensate overflow protection must be provided by way of an internal float switch or a float switch installed in the secondary drain outlet. The float switch shall be interlocked to shut down the unit. E. Electrical: 1. A separate power connection will be required for each indoor unit. 2. Generally, indoor units shall be powered from a 208/230 volt, 1- phase, 60Hz power source. Coordinate with the electrical drawings for additional requirements such as supplemental electric heaters,when specified. 3. Control wiring between the indoor and outdoor unit shall operate at a maximum of 3,280 feet. 4. Control wiring between the indoor unit and the wall mounted controller shall operate at a maximum distance of 1,640 feet; however the zone temperature sensor(s) shall be located within the zone served by the associated indoor unit. F. Control: 1. The unit shall have controls provided by the manufacturer to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. 2. The unit shall be compatible with connection to a BACnet network or interfacing with connection to a BAS system. 3. Individual indoor units shall be provided with a controller. The unit controller, at a minimum, shall have the follow features: a. Up to 16 indoor units controllable in one group b. Can be combined with a secondary controller for dual operation C. Backlit LCD display in English FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 81 29-13 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 d. Temperature sensor with configurable offset e. Display of Temperature and Setpoint in 1°F or°C increments f. Two display modes: Detailed and Simple g. Dual setpoints (individual cooling and heating setpoints) with minimum setpoint differential deadband h. Setpoint range limits for Cooling and Heating i. Independent cool/heat setback setpoints (unoccupied period) j. Auto changeover mode can automatically change to cool/heat mode at s etpoint+/-1°F k. Built in 7-day schedule with up to 5 actions per day with independent cool/heat or setback setpoints 1. Automatic adjustment for Daylight Savings Time (DST) in. 48-hour clock/calendar backup(in case of power failure) n. Constant monitoring of the system for malfunctions with an immediate display of fault location and condition o. Prohibit buttons on remote controller p. Limit selectable operation modes q. Display can be configured to hide setpoint when unit is OFF. Display shows OFF, instead of MODE when unit is off. Fan speed display can be configured to be hidden when unit is OFF. 2.03 BRANCH CONTROLLER(BC/MCU)BOX FOR VRF HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM A. General: The BC/MCU boxes are designed specifically for use with the manufacturer's VRV/VRF heat recovery system components. 1. Selector boxes shall be factory assembled, wired, and piped. 2. Selector boxes shall be run tested at the factory. 3. Selector boxes must be mounted indoors. 4. When simultaneously heating and cooling,the units in heating mode shall energize their subcooling electronic expansion valve (EEV) (if the system utilizes EEVs). B. Unit Components: 1. Cabinet shall be fabricated from galvanized steel plates. 2. The BC/MCU box shall consist of electronic expansion valves(EEVs) or solenoid valves that are serviceable and replaceable without opening the refrigeration system. 3. The cabinet shall contain a subcooling heat exchanger (if required for proper operation). 4. The cabinet shall have sound absorptive thermal insulation material made of flame and heat resistant foamed polyethylene. C. Condensate Removal: 1. The BC/MCU unit shall be provided with condensate removal capability if required by the manufacturer. D. Electrical: FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2381 29-14 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. 2. The unit shall be capable of operation within the limits of 187 volts to 255 volts. 3. The minimum circuit amps (MCA) shall be 0.1 and the maximum overcurrent protection amps (MOP) shall be 15. 4. The control voltage between the indoor and outdoor units shall be per the manufacturer. 2.04 BALL VALVES A. Refrigerant Isolation Ball Valves shall be provided to isolate BS/HRU units and indoor units. Refer to 3.01.F. B. Refer to Section 23 23 00—Refrigerant Piping for additional requirements. 2.05 VRV/VRF CONTROLS NETWORK A. The Controls Network is made up of local remote controllers, multi-zone controllers, advanced multi-zone controllers, and open protocol network devices that transmit information via the communication bus. The Controls Network shall also have the ability to be accessed via a networked PC or mobile device. The Controls Network supports operation monitoring, scheduling, alarm and error e-mail distribution, general user software, tenant billing, maintenance support, and integration with the Building Automation Systems (BAS) using open protocol via a BACnet interface. 2.06 INDOOR AIR HANDLING UNIT TOUCH SCREEN CONTROLLERS A. Unless indicated otherwise, each indoor unit shall be provided with the manufacturer's standard touch screen controller.The controller shall utilize an intuitive touchscreen multi- function LCD display and shall possess the following functionality: 1. Power on/off setting 2. Intuitive touch pad 3. Integral space temperature thermistor 4. Temperature set point control 5. Fahrenheit or Centigrade 6. Mode control settings(auto/cool/dry/fan/heat) 7. Fan control settings (auto/high/medium/low) 8. Sleep function(Quite Mode) 9. Filter timer 10. Access restriction settings 11. Occupied/unoccupied(manual function) 12. Vane position control(cassette units) 13. Integrated IR receiver 2.07 DAIKIN SPECIFIC ADVANCED MULTI-ZONE CONTROLLERS A. The Daikin AC VRV/VRF advanced multi-zone controllers are compatible with all VRV/VRF, SkyAir, and Daikin RA and FTXS indoor units with the use of the KRP92813132S RA Adapter. The advanced multi-zone controller wiring consists of a non- polar two-wire connection to the outdoor unit. The advanced multi-zone controllers may FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 81 29-15 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 be wall-mounted and can be adjusted to maintain the optimal operation of up to 64 connected indoor unit groups and 128 indoor units. Set point temperatures can be adjusted in increments of 1°F. In the case of where a system or unit error may occur, the VRF controller will display a two-digit error code along with the unit's address. B. DCM60IA71: INTELLIGENT TOUCH MANAGER(iTM) V.1.02 1. The intelligent Touch Manager (version 1.02) shall provide control for all VRF, SkyAir, and Daikin RA and FTXS indoor units with the use of the KRP92813132S RA Adapter. It shall be capable of controlling a maximum or 64 indoor unit groups and 128 indoor units connected to a maximum of 10 outdoor units. The intelligent Touch Manager shall support operations superseding that of the local remote controller,system configuration,daily/weekly scheduling,monitoring of operation status, and malfunction monitoring. 2. The controller wiring shall consist of a non-polar two-wire connection to the indoor unit at terminals F 1 F2(out-out) of the outdoor unit. The intelligent Touch Manager is wall mounted and can be adjusted to maintain the optimal operation of the connected indoor unit(s). 3. The intelligent Touch Manager can be used in conjunction with the BRCIE71 (Navigation Remote Controller), the BRC2A71 (Simplified Remote Controller), or the BRC4C82/7E83/7C812/7E818 (Wireless Remote Controller),BACnet, and Lonworks interfaces to control the same indoor unit groups. The remote controller shall require daisy chain wiring for grouping multiple indoor units (up to 16) together. Manual addressing is required of each remote controller group associated with the intelligent Touch Manager. DIII-NET address can be set for one (1) indoor unit or each indoor unit in the remote controller group. No more than two (2)remote controllers can be placed in the same group. 4. The intelligent Touch Manager shall be equipped with two RJ-45 Ethernet ports to support interconnection with a network PC via the Internet, Local Area Network (LAN), or connection with a non-networked PC after completed installation. 5. Web access functions shall be provided so that facility staff can securely log into each intelligent Touch Manager via the PC's web browser to support monitoring, scheduling, error email, and general user functions. Additional optional software functions of Power Proportional Distribution tenant billing and Energy Navigator shall also be available. The optional software shall require advanced purchase and can only be activated upon receipt of a license activation key from Daikin AC. a. Mounting: The intelligent Touch Manager shall be mounted on the wall or into the mounting fixtures included with the intelligent Touch Manager. b. Display Features: 1) The intelligent Touch Manager shall be approximately 11.42" x 9.57" x 1.97'in size with a backlit 10.4" LCD display. 2) Display information shall be selectable from English, French, Italian, Korean, Dutch, Portuguese, Chinese, Japanese, German, or Spanish. 3) Featured backlit LCD with auto off after 30 minutes (default) is adjustable between 1 to 60 minutes, or the choice of 3 different screen savers. 4) Area and Group configuration a) Area contains one(1) or more Area(s) or Group(s) FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 81 29-16 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 b) A Group may be an indoor unit, DI, DIO point that has a D111-NET address 5) An Area is a tiered group where management points (indoor unit, digital input/output and analog input groups) can be monitored and controlled by global settings. Up to 650 Areas can be created. Area hierarchy can have up to 10 tiered levels (ex. top level: 1 st floor West, 2nd level: offices, hallways, 3rd level: Office 101, 102, and 103, etc.). Area configuration shall classify levels of monitoring and control for each management point. a) Areas and Groups may be assigned names(ex.Office 101, Lobby,North Hallway, etc.) 6) The Controller shall display On/Off, Operation Mode, Setpoint, Space Temperature, Louver Position,Fan Speed for each Area or Group. 7) The Controller shall display Date (mm/dd/yyyy, yyyy/mm/dd, or dd/mm/yyyy format selectable) and day of the week along with the time of day(12hr or 24hr display selectable). 8) The Controller shall adjust for daylight savings time (DST) automatically. 9) Display of temperature information shall be configurable for Fahrenheit or Celsius. 10) Display information shall be updated every 3 seconds to show the latest status of the indoor unit groups. 11) System status icons shall display On/Off (color coded), Malfunction/Error (color coded), Forced Stop, Setback, Filter, Maintenance, and Screen Lock. 12) The controller shall display the temperature setpoint in one-degree increments with a range of 60°F—90°F (16°C—32°C). 13) The controller shall display the setup/setback setpoint temperature in one-degree increments with a range of 40°F — 95°F (5°C — 35°C). 14) Display shall reflect room temperature in one-degree increments with a range of 58°F—95°F (15°C—35°C). 15) The Menu List shall be used to configure options and display information for each Area or Group. 16) Error status shall be displayed in the event of system abnormality/error with one of three color coded icons placed over the indoor unit icon or lower task bar. a) System errors are generated when the intelligent Touch Manager system with other VRF controls systems combined or power proportional distribution calculation errors occur. The intelligent Touch Manager shall display the error with a red triangle placed on the lower task bar. b) Unit errors occurring within the VRF system shall be displayed with a yellow triangle placed over the indoor unit icon. C) Limit errors are based upon preconfigured analog input upper and lower limit settings and are generated when the limits have been met. When limit error is generated a yellow triangle will be placed over the unit icon. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2381 29-17 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 d) Communication errors between the intelligent Touch Manager and the indoor units shall be displayed with a blue triangle placed over the indoor unit icon. e) Error history shall be available for viewing up to 500,000 errors/abnormality events. 17) Floor plan layout a) Capable of displaying site floor plan as the background for visual navigation. b) Indoor unit,DIII-NET DI and DIO, and External DI,DO, and Ai icons with operational status can be placed on the floor layout. C) Up to 4 status points can be assigned to the indoor unit icon(room name,room temperature, setpoint, and mode) d) Digital input and output icons will display On/Off status e) Analog input icons will display analog value f) Up to 60 floor layout sections can be created C. Basic Operation: 1) Capable of controlling by Area(s) or Group(s) 2) Controller shall control the following group operations: a) On/Off b) Operation Mode(Cool, Heat, Fan, Dry, and Auto) C) Setpoint for current mode in the occupied period d) Controller shall be able to limit the user adjustable setpoint ranges individually for cooling and heating based upon the Area or Group configurations e) Relative Setup(Cooling) and Setback(Heating) setpoints in the unoccupied mode adjustable from 2°F - 120°F (- 17°C - 49°C). The high and low relative setback setpoints. Setup and Setback setpoints can be set inside or outside of the occupied setpoint range. The recovery differential shall be 40°F(default)and adjustable between 2°F — 100°F (-17°C - 38°C). Settings shall be applied based upon the Area or Group configurations. f) Fan Speed- Up to 3 speeds (dependent upon indoor unit type) g) Louver direction - 5 fixed positions or swing position (dependent upon indoor unit type) h) Remote controller permit/prohibit of On/Off, Mode, and Setpoint i) Lock out setting for intelligent Touch Manager display j) Indoor unit Group/Area assignment 3) Capable of providing battery backup power for the clock for at least 1 year when no AC power is applied. a) The battery can last at least 13 years when AC power is applied b) Settings stored in non-volatile memory d. Programmability: 1) Controller shall support weekly schedule settings. a) 7-day weekly pattern FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 81 29-18 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 b) The schedule shall have the capabilities of being enabled or disabled. C) 100 independent schedules configurable with up to 20 events settable for each day's schedule. Each scheduled event shall specify time and target Area or Group. Each scheduled event shall include On/Off, Operation Mode, Occupied Setpoint, Pre-Cool, Pre-Heat, Setback High, Setback Low, Remote Controller On/Off Prohibit, Remote Controller Mode Prohibit, Remote Controller Setpoint Prohibit, Timer Extension Setting, Fan Speed, and Setpoint Range Limit. Setpoint when unit is On(occupied) Configurable Setup (Cooling) and Setback (Heating) setpoints when unit is Off(unoccupied). Time setting in 1-minute increments. Timer Extension shall be used for a timed override (settable from 30— 180 minutes) to allow indoor unit operation during the unoccupied period. d) A maximum of 40 exception days can be scheduled on the yearly schedule (repeats yearly). Exception days shall be used to override specified days on the weekly schedule based upon irregular occupied/unoccupied conditions. Exception days can be configured on a set date(Jan 1)or floating date(1st Monday in September). 2) Controller shall support auto-changeover a) Auto-change shall provide Fixed, Operating, and Averaging changeover methods for both Heat Pump and Heat Recovery systems based upon the changeover group configuration. This will allow for the optimal room temperature to be maintained by automatically switching the indoor unit's mode between Cool and Heat in accordance with the room temperature and setpoint. When selecting the Auto-changeover method, the Differential should also be set (default value 4°F, adjustable between 0°F and 13°F). The (Thermal) Differential is the tolerance for the indoor unit's setpoint. When the difference between the representative room temperature and the representative indoor unit setpoint exceed the thermal differential, the operation mode is changed. When the mode is changed from Cool to Heat the setpoint will be decreased by the thermal differential set in the Auto Changeover configuration(e.g.If the mode is Cool with a 74°F setpoint and a changeover differential of 4°F,when switched from Cool to Heat the new setpoint for heating will be 70°F).When the mode is changed from Heat to Cool the setpoint will be increased by the thermal differential set in the Auto Changeover configuration(e.g. if the mode is Heat with a 72°F setpoint and a changeover differential of 4°F, when switched from Heat to Cool the new setpoint for cooling will be 76°F). FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 81 29-19 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 b) Fixed method: Changeover is evaluated by room temperature and setpoint of the representative indoor unit (first registered indoor unit in group) in the changeover group even when it is not operating(must be in Cool, Heat, or Auto mode) C) Operating method: Changeover is evaluated by searching for an indoor unit group that is operating in Cool, Heat, or Auto mode and uses the indoor unit room temperature and setpoint as the representative room temperature and setpoint. The order of the search is based upon the order each indoor unit group is assigned to the intelligent Touch Manager within the changeover group. If none of the indoor units in the group meet the above requirements the Fixed method of changeover will be applied d) Average method: Changeover is evaluated by the average of all indoor unit group's room temperatures and setpoints operating in Cool,Heat, or Auto mode in the changeover group list. If none of the indoor units in the group meet the above requirements the Fixed method of changeover will be applied. If the average room temperature < average setpoint, the indoor units will be placed in Heat mode. If the average room temperature>average setpoint,the indoor units will be placed in Cool mode e) Changeover shall change the operation mode of the indoor unit that is set as the Changeover Master. The Changeover Master indoor unit shall then change the operation mode of all indoor unit groups daisy chained to the same outdoor unit in the Heat Pump system or branch selector box in the Heat Recovery system. f) Changeover from heat to cool mode shall occur when the room temperature is greater than or equal to the heating setpoint,plus the setting of the thermal difference (0°F— 13°F)with a safety allowance if necessary is established g) Changeover from cool to heating mode shall occur when room temperature is less than or equal to the cooling setpoint, minus the setting of the thermal difference (0°F — 13°F)with a safety allowance if necessary is established h) 30-minute guard timer: Upon changeover, guard timer will prevent another changeover during this period. Guard timer is ignored by a change of setpoint manually from either intelligent Touch Manger or Remote Controller or by schedule. 3) Controller shall support Interlock: a) Interlock feature for use with 3rd party equipment(DOAS, dampers, occupancy sensing, etc.) to automatically control Groups or Areas corresponding to the change of the operation states or the On/Off states of any Group. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 81 29-20 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 b) WAGO I/O unit—DI, DO, Ai: On/Off based monitoring and control of equipment Manual or scheduled operation of equipment Operation based upon interlock with VRF indoor unit group(s) Monitor equipment error/alarm status C) Digital Input/Output (DEC 102A51-US2) unit or Digital Input(DEC 101A51-US2)unit On/Off based monitoring and control of equipment Manual or scheduled operation of equipment Operation based upon interlock with VRF indoor unit group(s) Monitor equipment error/alarm status. 4) Controller shall support forced shutdown of associated indoor unit groups. e. Web/Email Function 1) Each intelligent Touch Manager shall be capable of monitoring, operating, and scheduling a maximum of 64 indoor unit groups (up to 512 indoor unit groups with the addition of the iTM Plus Adapter) from a networked PC's web browser. It shall also be capable of creating general user access and sending detailed error emails to a customized distribution list(up to 10 email addresses). 2) All PCs shall be field supplied f. Power Proportional Distribution(PPD) Software: 1) Provide a tenant billing option capable of calculating VRF Controls Network equipment energy usage in kWh based on the energy consumption of the outdoor unit(s) divided among the associated indoor units. This software is used in conjunction with the intelligent Touch Manager and a Watt Hour Meter(WHM). A maximum of 3-Watt Hour Meters can be connected to the intelligent Touch Manager. Up to 4 additional Watt Hour Meters can be connected to each iTM Plus Adapter, and up to 7 iTM Plus Adapters can be connected to the intelligent Touch Manager. 2) The Power Proportional Distribution results data can be saved to a US13 flash drive,or on a PC with the use of the web access. Data is saved in the Comma Separated Values (CSV) format. Results can be stored up to 13 months in the intelligent Touch Manager. C. DCM601A72: iTM PLUS ADAPTER 1. The iTM Plus Adapter shall provide control for all VRV/VRF, SkyAir indoor units, and Daikin RA and FTXS indoor units with the use of the KRP92813132S RA Adapter. The adapter shall be capable of handling a maximum of 64 indoor unit groups and 128 indoor units connected to a maximum of 10 outdoor units. The iTM Plus Adapter is to be used in conjunction with intelligent Touch Manager. Up to 7 iTM Plus Adapters can be connected to a single intelligent Touch Manager. This combination will provide intelligent Touch Manager monitoring and control of up to 512 indoor unit groups, 1024 indoor units, and 80 outdoor units. The iTM Plus Adapter shall support operations superseding that of the local remote FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 81 29-21 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 controller,system configuration,daily/weekly scheduling,monitoring of operation status, and malfunction monitoring. 2. The controller wiring shall consist of a non-polar two-wire connection to the outdoor unit at terminals F1F2 (out-out). The iTM Plus Adapter is used in conjunction with the intelligent Touch Manager to maintain the optimal operation of the connected indoor unit(s). The iTM Plus Adapter is connected to the intelligent Touch Manager via a polarity sensitive 18-2 AWG stranded non- shielded wire(field supplied). 3. The iTM Plus Adapter can be used in conjunction with the BRC 1E71 (Navigation Remote Controller), the BRC2A71 (Simplified Remote Controller), or the 13RC4C82/7E83/7C8l2/7E8l8 (Wireless Remote Controller), BACnet and Lonworks interfaces to control the same indoor unit groups. No more than 2 remote controllers can be placed in the same group. The remote controller shall require daisy chain wiring for grouping multiple indoor units (up to 16) together. Manual addressing is required of each indoor unit group associated with the 1TM Plus Adapter. a. Mounting: The iTM Plus Adapter can be mounted on the wall or in a standard enclosure(field supplied). b. Features: The iTM Plus Adapter shall be approximately 6.30" x 5.87" x 2.41" in size. C. Basic Operation: Control of all associated indoor unit groups shall be done via the connected intelligent Touch Manager. d. Programmability: Programming of all associated indoor unit groups shall be done via the connected intelligent Touch Manager. 2.08 LG SPECIFIC ADVANCED MULTI-ZONE CONTROLLERS A. Controllers shall be manufactured by LG Electronics USA,Inc. B. Controllers shall have a minimum 4'/4"backlit LCD. C. Controllers shall have a time clock with 12-hour format. D. Controllers shall display temperature values in°F or°C. E. Controllers shall have continuous room temperature display. F. Controllers shall be capable of controlling a minimum of 16 indoor units in a control group. G. Controllers shall be compatible with a twin controller for master/slave control of a control group. H. Shall have 48-hour minimum power backup. L Basic Functions: 1. Configurable to control the air conditioning unit based on remote controller temperature sensor or air conditioning unit temperature sensor. 2. Controls the air conditioning unit or ventilator On/Off 3. Control Mode: FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 81 29-22 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 a. Auto/Cool/Dry/Heat/Fan Only for air conditioning unit b. Recovery/Bypass/Auto for ventilator unit 4. Controls the air conditioning unit Occupied/Unoccupied Mode 5. Controls the air conditioning unit occupied setpoints when occupied 6. Controls the air conditioning unit setback setpoints when unoccupied 7. Controls the air conditioning unit discharge vanes—Auto/Swing/Fixed 8. Lock function to prevent control from the remote controller 9. Function setting for the air conditioning unit plasma filter,electric heat,humidifier, elevation grille,ventilation kit, and auxiliary heat operation. 10. Displays error code during unit or system malfunction. J. Advanced Functions: 1. 7-day programmable schedule with a minimum of 5 events per day. Control of unit On/Off, Occupied/Unoccupied, Mode, setpoints, and fan speed shall be possible for each event. 2. Two setpoint autochangeover function. 3. Minimum difference between setpoints (0-10°F, adjustable) function. 4. Setback button for manually initiating function. 5. Timed Override button for initiating function. K. Central Controller—AC Smart Premium(PQCSW421EOA) 1. General Requirements: a. Manufactured by LG Electronics USA,Inc. b. Minimum 10.2" backlit WSVGA TFT LCD touch screen. C. Time clock with 12/24-hour format and calendar. d. 10/100 BASE-T Ethernet connection. e. Web access with user level access control. f. Powered by 24 VAC (field provided) g. Capable of controlling a minimum of 128 devices without need for an expansion device. h. Compatible with a twin controller for master/slave control of all units on the communications bus. i. Micro USB port for software updates, configuration backups, saving logged data, and uploading graphics. j. Minimum of two digital inputs and two digital outputs for remote system shutdown and device monitoring/control and interlocking. k. Operation and error history log. 2. Basic Functions: a. Controls the air conditioning unit or ventilator On/Off. b. Control Mode: 1) Auto/Cool/Dry/Heat/Fan Only for air conditioning unit 2) Recovery/Bypass/Auto for ventilator unit C. Controls the air conditioning unit discharge vanes—Auto/Swing/Fixed d. Lock function to prevent control from the remote controller e. Displays error code during unit or system malfunction. 3. Advanced Functions: a. 200 programmable schedule events with control of setpoint, On/Off, Mode,Fan Speed, Controller Lock, and Louver Swing. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 81 29-23 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 b. Two setpoint autochangeover function. C. Two setpoint setback function. d. Temperature Setpoint Range Limit. e. Air conditioning unit run time limit(unoccupied override). f. Software device interlocking for linking control of multiple devices. g. Manual control and scheduling of Digital Output Kit. h. Air conditioning unit Peak Control function to limit energy usage. i. Visual Floorplan Navigation. j. Unit and system error e-mail notification. k. Capable of displaying and e-mailing energy usage information from Power Distribution Indicator(PDI)unit(optional). 2.09 SAMSUNG SYSTEM NETWORK CONTROLS A. The Samsung VRF System Network Controls consists of individual controllers, system controllers, and integrated management system. The System Network Controls shall support operation monitoring, scheduling, error monitoring, power distribution, personal browsers, tenant billing, online maintenance support, and integration with the Building Automation System(BAS) using BACnet interfaces. B. VRF SYSTEM CONTROLLER+BACnet 1. The VRF System Controller+BACnet is an intelligent field panel that communicates with VRF Outdoor Unit(s),Indoor Unit(s)and other Samsung VRF controllers. Additionally, it shall include a BACnet IP (Internet Protocol) port to function as a communications gateway to other BACnet IP devicesThe VRF System Controller+BACnet shall connect to the associated indoor and outdoor units utilizing a dedicated control network. The controller utilizes the local area network(LAN)to provide a web page-based user interface available wherever the building's network access is available. The VRF System Controller+BACnet shall be housed in a protective enclosure suitable for wall-mounting in a mechanical or electrical equipment room. The VRF BACnet Gateway shall be capable of controlling up to 256 indoor units/EEVs support. 2. The VRF System Controller (SC) shall allow a building operator to view the system using a PC with a standard web browser, such as Windows Internet Explorer, Google Chrome or Mozilla Firefox. 3. The VRF SC shall include a user interface that includes control and monitoring of each indoor unit through a standard graphical display with convenient pop-up controller screen to adjust comfort settings for each zone. 4. The VRF SC shall be capable of controlling a maximum of 256 indoor units via a PC. A field supplied PC shall be included. The VRF SC shall support operation superseding that of the remote controllers, system configuration, 1- day/daily/weekly scheduling, monitoring of operation status, error email notification, online maintenance tool and malfunction monitoring. 5. The VRF SC shall have a basic set of operation controls which can be applied to an individual indoor unit, a group of indoor units (up to 256 indoor units), or all indoor units (collective batch operation). 6. The basic set of operation controls for the VRF SC shall include on/off, operation mode selection (auto, cool, heat, dry, and fan), temperature setting, fan speed setting, airflow direction setting, error email notification, and online maintenance. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 81 29-24 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 7. Since the VRF SC provides centralized control,it shall be able to enable or disable operation of local remote controllers via the PC. In terms of scheduling, the VRF SC shall allow the user to define 1-day,daily,and annual schedules with operations consisting of ON/OFF, mode selection, temperature setting, permit/prohibit of wireless/wired remote controllers. 8. The system shall detect and store alarms in an Alarm Log. The Alarm Log shall display critical data about the alarm, including the location of the device, and the time of occurrence. Alarms shall be routed by e-mail to stationary or mobile devices. Capacity to store up to 1024 alarm events on time specific basis shall be provided. 9. Database changes made by other users shall automatically be reflected in the VRF System Controller without the need for a central server. The system database shall be capable of archiving or backing up data for local or offsite storage. This is desirable in the event the date is ever needed for restoring the system. A built-in SD card slot provides for on-board but removable data backup storage. 10. A password shall protect the VRF control system from unauthorized access. Each operator is assigned a role. Roles are defined by access rights. Pre-defined roles shall be selected from the VRF System Controller interface. Operators shall have access only to those features which define their roles.Roles shall be customizable. An operator with administrative-level security shall access all information on the system and shall have the ability to alter passwords and create new security roles. Samsung VRF System Controller+BACnet Item Description Operation Display ON/OFF Start stop operation for a single group Each Each Group Group Operation Changes mode between Auto/Cool/Dry/Fan/Heat Each Each Mode Group Group Temperature Sets the temperature for a single group. Range of Each Each Setting temperature settings: Auto/Cool/Dry: 64°F-86°F Group Group (18°C-30°C), Heat: 61°F-86°F (16°C-30°C) Fan Speed Models with 3 air flow settings: High/Mid/Low Each Each Setting Group Group Air Flow Air flow 2-step direction(Swing/Stop). Direct settings Each Each Direction at a specific angle. Air flow operation varies Group Group Setting depending on the model. Web Server Remote control with the public IP address. No Each Each Function management software required—PC-independent Group Group management Accessible Wireless/wired remote controller restriction setting Each Each Level/Dynamic specifies the scope of control and monitoring unit on a Group Group User Security per-user basis; 3 accessible levels -Admin/Manager/ Management User Error When an error occurs on an outdoor unit,the affected Each Each unit and error code are displayed Group Group FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 81 29-25 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Samsung VRF System Controller+BACnet Item Description Operation Display Schedule Up to 256 schedule settings including weekly and daily Each Each Operation schedule setting Group Group External Full indoor unit control with simple contact input Each Each Contact (Emergency/Lock) State output(Operation/Error)for Channel Channel Interface synchronous control. 6 digital outputs/ 8 digital inputs Smart Central Control&monitoring zone edition. Wireless/wired Each Each Management remote control restriction. Temperature limit setting Group Group Operation mode restriction. Silent control setting User editable User can edit control logic with arithmetic/conditional Each Each control logic operators and parameters. Efficient energy saving Group Group realization based on various operation conditions. Data Backup/ Important data is safely stored in SD memory card. Each Each Useful History Records the operation history and error history Group Group Management Multi English, Korean, Chinese, Spanish, Italian,Portuguese, Language Dutch, Hungarian,Polish,Russian Indoor Unit BACnet Points List Instance Object Unit Text Text- Number Object ,hype Object Name Inactive Text-2 Text-3 -4 5 Text-I I Indoor Al AC_RoomTemp oC Temperature XX XXXXX 2 Set Temperature AV AC_Temp_Set_ oC XX XXXXX Setting lower AC—Cool—Limit 3 temperature AV Temp_xx_xxxx °C limit X Setting upper AC—Heat—Limit 4 temperature AV Temp_xx_xxxx °C limit X IDU power AC Baseline_k 5 usage after the Al — kWh basic date Wh_XX_Xxxxx IDU hour usage AC_Baseline _ 6 after the basic Al Minute_xx_xxx Minute date XX 7 Power value Al AC_Period—KW kWh within period hx _x _xxxxX FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 81 29-26 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Indoor Unit BACnet Points List Instance Object Unit Text Text- Number Object ,Type Object Name Inactive Text-2 Text-3 -4 5 Text-I 8 IDU hour usage Al AC—Period—Min Minute within period ute xx xxxxx 9 Power On/Off BV AC_Power_xx_ Off On XXXXX Applying lower AC—Cool—Limit 10 temperature BV False True limit setting _set xx_xxxxx Applying upper limit AC Heat Limit 11 BV — — False True temperature set xx xxxxx setting 12 Filter sign status BI AC_FilterSign_ False True XX XXXXX AC_FilterSign_ 13 Filter sign reset BO Reset xx xxxx False True X Operation mode AC_Operation _ 14 status xx MV Mode xxxx Auto Cool Heat Fan Dry X 15 Fan speed status MV AC_FanSpeed_ Auto Low Mid High XX XXXXX 16 Airflow MV AC_FanFlow_x None Vertica Horizon All direction status X XXXXX 1 17 Operation mode MV AC_Mode_Limi No Cool Heat Only limit status t xx xxxxx Limit Only Remote AC_Remocon_ Enable Disabl Conditiona 18 controller limit MV xx XXXXX RC e RC 1 RC status Integrated error code of both AC Error 19 indoor unit and Al xx_XXXX_X Refer to List of Error Codes outdoor unit 20 SPI setting BV AC_SPI_xx_xx False True xxx 21 Human Sensor BV AC MDS_xx_x False True setting XXXX FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2381 29-27 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Indoor Unit BACnet Points List Instance Object Unit Text Text- Number Object ,Type Object Name Inactive Text-2 Text-3 -4 5 Text-1 22 AC Indoor NC AC_Notify_xx_ When the error occurred, send event to list of Notify XXXXX destination in the recipient list. (Max:8) Outdoor Unit BACnet Point List Instance Object Unit Text Text- Number Object Type Object Name Inactive Text-2 Text-3 -4 5 Text-1 Outside ODU_Outside I Temperature Al Temp_xx_xxxx °C X Cool capacity ODU—Cool—Co 0:5-7°C/1:7-9°C/2:9-11°C/3:1012°C/ 2 AV mpensation_xx_ 3:1113°C/5:12-14°C/6:13-15°C/14: Auto compensation XXXXX control(from ODU) 0:25kg/cm2/1:26kg/cm2/ Heat capacity ODU_Heat_Co 2:27kg/cm2/3:28kg/cm2/ 3 AV mpensation_xx_ 4:29kg/cm /5:30kg/cm / compensation XXXXX 6:31kg/cm2/7:32kg/cm2/ 8:33kg/cm2/14:Auto control (from ODU) Setting upper AC—Heat—Limit 4 temperature BI Temp_xx_xxxx False True limit X 5 Compressor Al ODU_Comp_St Refer to the list of the integrated error codes Status atus xx xxxxx 6 Interface module NC IM_Notify_xx_ When the error occurred, send event to list of notify XXXX destination in the recipient list. (Max:8) C. VRF SYSTEM TOUCHSCREEN CONTROLLER 1. The VRF System Touchscrecn shall provide an intuitive, fast and convenient method of centrally operating a Samsung VRF system. The VRF System Touchscreen shall communicate with associated VRF components through a dedicated control network. It shall control many comfort and energy-saving settings, including temperature,fan speeds, and operating schedules for up to 128 indoor units, and up to 16 outdoor units. The unit shall be housed in an attractive enclosure suitable for wall-mounting in an office, corridor or utility room. 2. The System Touchscreen shall feature a 7" Color Capacitive Touch Screen. The User interface shall display operating equipment icons indicating mode status at a glance. All units within a zone shall be managed with one-button control. Unique zone description icons shall make it easy to recognize a zone. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 81 29-28 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. Control shall include, but not be limited to, the following: On/Off control, temperature set-point, mode settings Auto/Heat/Cool/Auto/Dry/Fan, air-direction adjustment, and local temperature set-point restrictions. 4. The System Touchscreen shall be capable of setting up to 10 unique schedules including exception day setting for holidays, and Daylight-Saving Time adjustment. 5. The System Touchscreen shall be capable of grouping indoor unit in common zones. There may be up to 12 zones. Zones may be individually named. 6. The System Touchscreen shall provide management of multiple indoor units as 1 unit (Group control). Additionally, the controller shall provide monitoring and control points for Interlocking of external equipment via 2 Binary Inputs and 1 Binary Output. 7. The System Touchscreen shall provide an alarm/error display, and alarm history. 8. Security shall be provided by a secure password. 9. The System Touchscreen shall connect via a R /R2 VRF communications link for monitoring and control of up to 128-total Indoor Units and MCUs, associated with up to 16-outdoor units. Alternately, the system shall connect via a F1/F2 VRF communications link for monitoring and control of up to 64-indoor units plus up to 16-MCUs, associated with 1-Outdoor Unit. 2.10 METERING A. Power Meter Interface Module (PIM) or equivalent 1. When used in conjunction with the VRF System Controller (SC)/Touch Manager/Central Controller(AC Smart Premium),the VRF PIM allows electricity power metering of VRF system components. 2. For multiple indoor units on one power circuit,individual unit power consumption shall be calculated based on use ratio operational data transmitted to the VRF SC/equivalent. (Moving forward called VRF SC.) Data shall be retrieved via the VRF SC. 3. Each PIM shall connect to 8 pulse type electricity meters. Meters shall be revenue grade, shall be field provided and included in this contract. One meter shall be used to monitor VRF outdoor unit or a VRF indoor system. Indoor systems need not be metered by the PIM if they are already on their own electric sub-meter. 4. Each VRF SC shall connect to up to 8 PIM modules for a maximum of 64 pulse- type electricity meters linked to one VRF SC. 5. Each PIM shall be capable of- a. £a. Pulse output electricity meter interface(up to 8 meters) b. 8 channel energy consumption display in real time C. System configuration with button manipulation d. LCD Display and meter configuration buttons e. Current communication state indication f. Remote access via VRF SC/equivalent. 6. For communication wiring between PIM modules, watt meters, and system controllers, use 18 AWG, 25pF/ft. Nom., 60.7Q/Mft. impedance, braid or foil shielded, twisted pair wire. Splicing of communication wiring shall not be permitted. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 81 29-29 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 7. Power requirements: 3.OA@ 12VDC provided by 120VAC power adapter module 8(include one per PIM).Maximum wiring length—from VRF SC to: 3280 ft. from Power Meter Interface module to electricity meter: 656 ft. 8. Minimum requirements for Connected Electrical Meter(s) — field provided by Electrical Contractor. a. Current flow on output: Current sinking b. Pulse rate: 1 — 1000 Wh/pulse(no decimal pulse rate allowed) C. Pulse width: 20-400 ms with +/- 5% tolerance (no decimal pulse rate allowed) d. Time interval between pulses: min. 3 ms e. Allowable current sinking: min. 15 mA f. Withstanding voltage: min. 15v DC g. Interface circuitry:Electronic isolation circuity recommended,no voltage output 9. The VRF Power Meter Interface Module (PIM) shall be housed in a protective enclosure suitable for wall mounting in a mechanical or electrical equipment room. 2.11 REFRIGERANT LEAK DETECTORS (Where Required) A. The refrigerant leak detector shall meet or exceed the following specifications: Monitor Housing: White (Pantone 11-0601 TG), corrosion resistant ABS Size(approx.): 6"Lx4.1"Wxl.75"D (150 x 105 x 45mm)including bezel Depth of bezel 0.39" (10 mm) Weight(approx.): 8 oz. (230 g) Temperature Range: 32 to+125 °F (0 to+50°C) Protection: NEMA 1 (IP 40) Wire Connection: Spring-loaded clamp terminals for power,relays &Modbus Supply Voltage: 100 to 240 VAC,max. 4 W Relay Rating: Two alarm relays SPDT IA at 125 and 250 VAC or IA at 30 VDC,resistive load Digital Output: Modbus RTU;multi-drop capability Approvals: UL/CSA/IEC/EN 61010-1, EN 50270:2015 RFI/EMC: CE marking electromagnetic compatibility(directive 2004/108/EC) LVD: Compliant to low voltage directive 2014/35/EU B. Sensor: 1. The sensor of the leak detector shall be based on the semiconductor principle. The microprocessor-controlled monitor shall be calibrated for a specific refrigerant with different measurement ranges and alarm set-points. 2. The sensor shall be capable of being calibrated for typical VRF/VRV system refrigerants; R-22,R32, R-404a,R-407c or R-410a. 3. Sensor signal shall be suitable to operate within an ambient temperature range of 32°F to+120 °F/0 to+50°C. 4. Sensor shall be capable of operating within ambient humidity conditions of 5 to 90%RH, non-condensing. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 81 29-30 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 5. Sensor module shall contain on-board data memory which contains sensor gas type, alarm set-points, and sensor electronics ID. Additionally, the sensor module must contain calibration data such as zero and sensitivity. Monitor must accept, recognize, and upload calibration data of a remotely calibrated sensor module(e.g. factory)without the need to repeat configuration and/or calibration. C. Monitor: 1. The monitor shall have an on-board audible alarm (buzzer) with a user-selectable option to disable it. The alarm shall be 80 dB at 12" (30 cm). 2. Monitor shall have status LEDs: green = normal operation, orange = fault- condition,red(blinking)—alarm condition. 3. Monitor shall be equipped with two relays: high/low alarm/fault, valve closure, local alarm devices, etc. The relays shall be user-configurable as normal or fail- safe operation. 4. Monitor shall allow for a non-intrusive, one-man calibration. 5. Non-intrusive access to the calibration function shall be given by a magnetic wand interacting with Hall Effect switches of the monitor. 6. Monitor to produce a Modbus RTU digital output corresponding to the actual gas concentration; 9600 to 19,200 Baud Rate, configurable. D. Detector Operation: 1. During maintenance, the monitor shall transmit a special signal to a central Modbus control system indicating that calibration or configuration is in progress. 2. For predictive maintenance,the monitor shall transmit a special warning signal to schedule maintenance rather than going into sudden fault. 3. If in fault, the buzzer shall sound,the LED will change to orange, the high alarm relay shall change state (configurable), and Modbus registers shall be set to communicate to the central control system. 4. The monitor shall operate in a standalone mode or, if required, be remotely accessible via the Building Automation System (BAS) to query all status information, perform test functions and calibration, as well as, configure the monitor by a Modbus Remote Terminal Unit. E. Manufacturers: 1. Basis of Design-Bacharach MVR-300 2. Alternate by MSA Chillgard PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. VRF equipment,wiring and controls shall be installed as shown on the drawings,specified herein and in strict accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Units shall be installed level and plumb. Roof mounted units shall be mounted as shown on the drawings. At a minimum, provide a premanufactured galvanized steel support system suitable for the application; Rectorseal Big Foot or approved equal. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 81 29-31 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Refrigerant line sets exposed to the weather shall be neatly routed and weather protected within a factory fabricated sheet metal duct system; Rectorseal Model RD or approved equal. Support the duct system on the roof with galvanized steel frame type supports with rubber/PVC feet; Rectorseal RPS Series or approved equal. Support spacing shall be per manufacturer's recommendations. D. Units shall be installed to allow adequate service to all components and valves. Refer to manufacturer's installation instructions for service and airflow clearance recommendations. E. The system shall be installed by a factory trained and certified contractor/dealer. The bidders shall be required to submit training certification proof with bid documents and submittals. The mechanical contractor's installation price shall be based on the system's installation requirements. The mechanical contractor bids with complete knowledge of the HVAC system requirements. Contractors shall provide training certificates during the submittal phase. Contactor's certification is subject to validation at any time on the job site during the course of construction. F. Install a full port refrigeration ball valve with Schrader valve at the BC/MCU connections for each indoor unit and at each indoor unit. Locate valves per VRF manufacturer's recommendations. Refer to Section 23 23 00 — Refrigerant Piping for additional requirements. G. Installing mechanical contractor shall be responsible for coordinating electric meter capabilities meet the minimum requirements specified above and are fully compatible with manufacturer provided Power Interface Modules (PIM). Electric Meters shall be provided by Electrical contractor. 3.02 INSTALLATION SITE VISITS A. The manufacturer's representative/vendor shall make periodic site visits during the installation of the systems to ensure that the systems are installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The individual visiting the site to perform inspections shall have a minimum 3 years of experience in the installation and service of VRF systems and shall be certified by the manufacturer as a trainer/instructor for installation,commissioning, service, and troubleshooting classes. If necessary, this individual may be an employee of the VRF system manufacturer. Certification documentation for the individual visiting the site shall be included in the VRF submittal. B. The manufacturer's representative/vendor shall provide a written report of any deficiencies found during the installation of the systems. All deficiencies noted by the manufacturer's representative/vendor shall be corrected by the contractor at no additional cost to the contract.The manufacturer's representative/vendor's report and the contractor's responses shall be submitted to the Architect within 2 weeks of the date of the report. The manufacturer's representative/vendor shall make site visits as follows: 1. Within the first week of piping installation. 2. Upon completion of the first floor of piping. 3. A minimum of once per month until the system is completely installed. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 81 29-32 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 4. All piping must be inspected by the manufacturer's representative/vendor prior to concealment. C. The contractor shall coordinate with the manufacturer's representative/vendor to provide adequate notice for when site visits are required. 3.03 STARTUP SERVICE A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. Service shall include a report that includes any and all requirements the manufacturer requires to support the extended warranty specified. Mechanical installer shall be fully responsible for supporting/coordinating delivery of the required reports to ensure the specified warranty is provided. Startup service shall include the following documentation at a minimum: 1. The manufacturer's warranty Process/Checklist Sheet. 2. Final "as built"VRF select report. 3. Commissioning report from Technician Utility Tool (TUT)/equivalent 4. Before and after pictures of test gauge for the pressure test and vacuum test. 5. Any and all other requirements the VRF manufacturer requires to attain the specified warranty. B. Verify that the systems are installed and connected according to manufacturer's written instructions and the Contract Documents. Where conflicts exist between the manufacturer's written instructions and the Contract Documents, the manufacturer's written instructions shall take precedence, except in the cases of code compliance issues. C. Verify that electrical wiring installation complies with the manufacturer's submittal and the installation requirements of Division 26 Sections. Where conflicts exist between the manufacturer's written instructions and the Division 26 Sections, the manufacturer's written instructions shall take precedence, except in the cases of code compliance issues. D. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions. E. After startup service and performance tests have been made,replace all air filters with new filters equivalent to the manufacturer's supplied filters. 3.04 COMMISSIONING A. Manufacturer shall provide a minimum of two (2) eight(8)hour days of technical support on-site to support the commissioning process. 3.05 SYSTEM OPERATION DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain system components, equipment, and controls (Minimum of one (1)four(4)hour day). B. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train the Owner's property management personnel on application software, access, tenant metering reports, FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 23 81 29-33 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 creating/modifying reports and logs,and processing notifications and alarms(Minimum of one (1) four(4)hour day). C. Contractor shall instruct the Owner's designated operating personnel in the proper operation and maintenance of the equipment as well as the operation and maintenance of the controls for the various systems in the building. Informal or unwitnessed instructions, or instructions to non-designated personnel, will not be acceptable. In addition to the instruction periods specified above, furnish classroom instructions for a minimum of one (1) eight(8) hour day. Prior arrangements for instruction periods shall be made with the Owner two(2) weeks prior to the actual training class. D. Document all training sessions and include attendance lists and complete contact information. END OF SECTION 23 81 29 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2381 29-34 MAY 2, 2023 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW HVAC SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 23 82 39 - ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All work specified herein shall be accomplished in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 23 00 00- HVAC General. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Receipt, unloading,handling,proper storage and protection from damage of all materials. B. Layout and coordination of work with other trades. C. The work under this section shall include all labor, materials, accessories, services, and equipment necessary to furnish and install electric unit heaters complete as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 UNIT HEATERS A. Unit shall be of the horizontal or vertical discharge fan-forced propeller type. B. Casing shall be constructed of heavy gauge die-formed, furniture grade steel, phosphate coated and finished in baked enamel. C. The heating element shall be aluminum-finned with a copper clad steel sheath. D. Fan shall be direct drive propeller type designed specifically for unit heater applications. E. The motor shall be totally enclosed, thermally protected, continuous duty type selected to match airflow requirements. F. Unit shall be provided with the manufacturer's standard mounting bracket for either ceiling or wall mounting as required. G. Unit shall be equipped with individually adjustable horizontal discharge louvers. H. Unit heaters shall be constructed in accordance with provisions of the National Electrical Code and shall be UL or ETL tested and listed to UL Standard 2021 — UL Standard for Safety Fixed and Location-Dedicated Electric Room Heaters. L Wiring shall be designed for a single source power connection with elements, motor and control circuits subdivided and fused to conform to the latest National Electrical Code, OSHA and Underwriters Laboratories Inc. standards. All three phase heaters shall have balanced phases. A factory wired non-fused disconnect switch shall be provided. Control circuit voltage shall not exceed 120 volts. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 23 82 39-1 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 J. Unit heater shall be equipped with an automatic reset linear thermal cut-out, a fan delay switch, and control circuit transformer. K. Thermostat shall be unit mounted or wall mounted as shown on the Drawings. L. Units shall be QMark,Markel, Trane, Modine, Indeeco, Berko or approved equal. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All units shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 23 82 39 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 23 82 39-2 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRIC UNIT HEATERS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 23 82 39.19 - ELECTRIC WALL HEATERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All work specified herein shall be accomplished in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 23 00 00- HVAC General. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. Receipt,unloading, handling,proper storage and protection from damage of all materials. B. Layout and coordination of work with other trades. C. The work under this section shall include all labor, materials, accessories, services, and equipment necessary to furnish and install wall heaters complete as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 WALL HEATERS A. Unit shall be completely factory assembled, wired, tested and shipped as a single assembly; capacity shall be as indicated on the Drawings. B. Unit heaters shall be constructed in accordance with provisions of the National Electrical Code and shall be UL or ETL tested and listed to UL Standard 2021 — UL Standard for Safety Fixed and Location-Dedicated Electric Room Heaters. C. Front grille shall be 16-gauge steel or aluminum finished in baked enamel or anodized with downflow discharge louvers. D. Element shall consist of helically coiled nickel chromium alloy resistance wire enclosed in corrosion resistant sheaths. E. Controls shall include fan delay switch, built-in thermostat, automatic reset thermal overload switch and a non-fused disconnect power switch. F. Unit shall be designed to either recess into the wall or for surface mounting as scheduled, and shall include all mounting accessories. G. Unit shall be Raywall, QMark,Markel,Berko,Indeeco or approved equal. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All units shall be installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 23 82 39.19-1 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRIC WALL HEATERS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 END OF SECTION 23 82 39.19 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 23 82 39.19-2 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRIC WALL HEATERS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 26 00 00 - ELECTRICAL GENERAL PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. General Conditions: Refer to the General Conditions, the Supplementary General Conditions and the Special Conditions, all provisions of which apply to work under this section as if written in full herein. B. The scope of work to be done under this section of the specifications shall include the furnishing of labor,material, equipment and tools required for the complete installation of systems for power, lighting, signals and all other work indicated on the drawings or as specified herein. A 100% operational building and electrical distribution system up to a connection point for Owner furnished equipment will be provided. C. The drawings and specifications are complementary to each other and what is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. 1.02 STANDARDS A. All work shall conform to all ordinances and regulations of the City, County, State and/or other authorities having jurisdiction in accordance with the requirements of the following codes, standards and design guides: 1. The 2017 edition of the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) with local Amendments 2. The 2015 edition of the International Building Code with local Amendments 3. The most recent edition of the Life Safety Code (NFPA 101) 4. 2015 IECC 5. Regulations of the local utility company with respect to metering and service entrance 6. Local city and county ordinances governing electrical work 7. Americans with Disabilities Act(Public Law 101-336) 1.03 PERMITS A. The Contractor shall obtain all permits and inspections required for the installation of this work and pay all charges incident thereto. He shall deliver to the Architect all certificates of said inspection. 1.04 WORK INCLUDED The electrical systems installed and work performed under this division of the specifications shall include, but not necessarily be limited to, those listed below. All materials and appliances, obviously a part of the electrical systems and necessary to its proper operation,but not specifically mentioned or shown on the drawings, shall be furnished and installed without additional charge. A. Power Distribution System FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 00 00-1 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRICAL GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. All lighting systems (indoor and outdoor, normal, emergency and exit) including all fixtures, lamps, plaster and/or tile frames, standards, switches, outlets, wiring, dimmers, contactors, time clocks,photocells, batteries,raceways and other components and fittings required for complete lighting systems C. Wiring, including power circuit connections for HVAC, plumbing and other mechanical equipment D. Grounding Systems E. Temporary service lighting and power system F. Low voltage system raceways and equipment mounting boards as indicated on the drawings G. Underground raceway excavation,backfill, and compaction H. Fire Alarm System I. Concrete work for duct banks,manholes, covering,lighting standard bases and equipment bases (where not assigned to General Contractor) J. Lightning Protection System K. Electrical Equipment Identification L. Supporting Devices for Electrical Components M. Work as required by electric and telecommunication utilities, as well as the coordination of additional work(i.e. work performed by the utility)with that of other trades N. Electrical Demolition 1.05 DRAWINGS A. Drawings are generally diagrammatic and show the arrangement and location of fixtures, equipment and conduit. The Contractor shall carefully investigate the structural and finish conditions affecting his work and arrange his work accordingly. Should conditions on the job make it necessary to rearrange conduit or equipment,the Contractor shall so advise the Engineer and secure approval before proceeding with such work. B. Where exact locations are required by equipment for stubbing-up and terminating conduit concealed in floor slabs, the Contractor shall request shop drawings, equipment location drawings,foundation drawings, and any other data required by him to locate the concealed conduit before the floor slab is poured. C. Materials, equipment or labor not indicated but which can be reasonably inferred to be necessary for a complete installation shall be provided. Drawings and specifications do not undertake to indicate every item of material, equipment, or labor required to produce a complete and properly operating installation. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 00 00-2 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRICAL GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 D. Locate pull boxes,panelboards,control pushbuttons,terminal cabinets,safety switches and such other apparatus as may require periodic maintenance, operation,or inspection, so that they are easily accessible. If such items are shown on the plans in locations which are found to be inaccessible, the Engineer must be advised of the situation before work is advanced to the point where extra costs will be involved. E. All additional circuit connections to panelboards must be preapproved by the Engineer. F. The location, arrangement and extent of equipment, devices, conduit, and other appurtenances related to the installation of electrical work shown on drawings are approximate. The Contractor shall not scale drawings, but shall refer to the architectural drawings for exact dimensions of building components. Should a conflict exist between the architectural and engineering drawings regarding dimensions and scale,the Contractor shall notify the Architect of the discrepancy. G. Verify the ceiling type,ceiling suspension systems,and clearance above hung ceilings prior to ordering lighting fixtures. Notify the Engineer of any discrepancies. H. Review all architectural drawings for door swings, cabinets, counters and built-in equipment. 1.06 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Contractor shall prepare a minimum of two(2)instruction manuals,one of which shall be submitted to the Architect for the Engineer's review, describing installation, operation and maintenance of all Electrical equipment. Manuals shall include copies of control schematics,sequences of operation,indicate the function and operations of all components, as well as the Contractor's name, address, and telephone number. Manuals shall also contain one copy of all manufacturer's drawings, pamphlets, data, parts lists, and instruction manual for each piece of equipment. Upon approval, one copy shall be delivered to the Owner; one copy shall be kept by the Contractor. The pamphlets and drawings are to be neatly bound in a 3-ring binder(s). 1.07 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall maintain a record of all changes in the work from that shown in the Contract Documents. After all work is completed,the Contractor shall prepare a set of"as- built" reproducible drawings of similar type and quality as the Contract Drawings that reflect all changes and that accurately show actual final construction, and deliver these drawings to the Architect. 1.08 EQUIPMENT,MATERIALS AND BID BASIS A. Manufacturers'names,model numbers,etc. as specified on the drawings and herein are for the purpose of describing type, capacity, function and quality of equipment and materials required. B. Unless"approved equal"is specifically stated,bids shall be based on equipment names in specifications or on drawings as"base"products. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 00 00-3 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRICAL GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. "Equal product" and "approved equal" items listed shall conform to specified base items and shall be substantially equal in size, weight, construction and capacities. The "equal" equipment and materials shall be submitted as full equivalent to the equipment and materials specified, with sufficient supportive documentation and technical literature to demonstrate quality, performance, and workmanship without doubt or question. Submittals for "equal" products shall be made at least ten (10) days prior to bid (refer to the General Conditions of these specifications). The Engineer shall consider the use of the "equal" equipment based on the supportive documentation available to him, and shall approve or disapprove any proposed alternates. The decision of the Engineer shall, in all cases,be final. D. The Contractor shall coordinate the installation of all electrical equipment proposed for use in this project with all building trades (architectural, structural, mechanical, etc.). Coordination shall be accomplished prior to,and shall be reflected in,the submittal of shop drawings for approval. When substitution of equipment is made, the Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of any item and engineering and construction revisions necessary in his or any other contract or trade that may be required to satisfy the plans and specifications. E. If substitutions are made in lieu of equipment specified,the manufacturer's literature shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. In the case of lighting fixtures, full IES photometric test reports for the fixture,lamp(s),and lenses shall be submitted for approval. 1.09 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor shall prepare, submit, and obtain Engineer's review of manufacturers' submittals on the following equipment and systems prior to ordering, purchasing, or installation of any equipment or materials. All required submittals shall be transmitted electronically (e.g. pdfs, etc.) with the associated specification section and the item submitted clearly identified. Partial submittals will be returned without review. 1. Submit a listing of all the materials indicated below, with the type of material, manufacturer and catalog or model number for each (where applicable): Package#1 Conductors Conduit Multiconductor Cables Wiring Devices and Plates Disconnect Switches 2. Submit complete shop drawings of the following when supplied by the electrical contractor: Package#2 Fuses and/or Circuit Breakers Transformers Surge Protective Devices Motor Control Centers with typical schematic of starters Panelboards and Cabinets Cable Tray and Tray Fittings Package#3 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 00 00-4 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRICAL GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Lighting Fixtures Occupancy Sensors Lighting Control Panels Time Switches Photocells Lighting Contactors Package#4 Generator Set Transfer Switch Package#5 Fire Alarm System Package#6 3. Submit test reports as required in section 3.07 -Electrical Testing. B. All shop drawing approvals required by any code or enforcement authority, insurance underwriter, etc. shall be obtained prior to being submitted to the Engineer. C. Review of shop drawings by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with all requirements of the Contract Documents. Furthermore, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate the requirements (roof penetrations, wall penetrations, floor penetrations, curbs, electrical, etc.) of all approved equipment with the other trades and disciplines at no additional cost. D. All shop drawings shall be identified by the equipment mark or tag identification numbers shown on the Contract Drawings. Each individual submittal item shall be marked to show which specification section pertains to the item. 1.10 RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS A. Prior to the ordering or purchasing of any equipment or materials or the layout or installation of any work, the Contractor shall examine the premises and verify any and all of the existing conditions under which he will be obliged to operate, or that will in any manner affect the work under this Contract. B. Work requiring interruption of electrical power which would adversely affect the normal operation of the other portions of the Owner's property, shall be done at a time other than normal working hours and scheduled in advance with the Owner. Normal working hours shall be considered eight a.m. to five p.m. Monday through Friday. Schedule all outages with the Owner prior to the shutdown. C. Prior to submitting bids on the project,visit the site of the work to become aware of existing conditions which may affect the cost of the project. D. Where work under this project requires extension, relocation, reconnection or modifications to existing equipment or systems,the existing equipment or systems shall be restored to their original and operating condition. E. Extend new homeruns or circuit extensions, where required. Disconnect and remove all equipment indicated to be demolished, including outlets, devices, raceways and conductors. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 00 00-5 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRICAL GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 F. Care shall be exercised in the removal and storage of equipment indicated to be relocated or removed and reused. Prior to placing back into service, equipment shall be cleaned, relamped, and marred or chipped paint surfaces touched-up. G. Provide all coring, cutting and patching to existing walls, floors, etc., required for the removal of existing work or the installation of new work. H. All equipment removed in the renovation area is to be removed from the site. No existing pipe or materials are to be removed and reused on the renovation. 1.11 COORDINATION OF TRADES A. The Contractor shall give full cooperation to other trades, and shall furnish all information necessary to permit the work of all trades to be installed satisfactorily and with least possible interference or delay. B. Work shall not be performed without first coordinating the installation of same with other trades. The Contractor, at his own expense, shall relocate all uncoordinated equipment installed should they interfere with the proper installation and mounting of mechanical equipment, ceilings and other architectural or structural finishes. C. The Contractor shall coordinate the elevations of all equipment above ceilings and in exposed areas with the work of all other disciplines prior to installation. D. In areas where more than one trade is required to use common openings in beams,joists, chases,shafts and sleeves for the passage of conduits,raceways,piping,ductwork and other materials, the Contractor must coordinate the positions of all piping and equipment to be furnished under this section so that all items including the materials and equipment of other trades may be accommodated within the space available. E. The Contractor shall confirm that work installed under this section does not interfere with the clearances required for finished columns, pilasters, partitions, walls or other architectural or structural elements as shown on the Contract Documents. F. Work that is installed under this Contract which interferes with the architectural design or building structure shall be removed and relocated as required at no additional cost to the Contract. 1.12 WARRANTY A. All equipment furnished and installed under this Contract shall be provided with the manufacturer's standard warranty unless otherwise noted. B. The Contractor shall make good all defects in material, equipment, or workmanship disclosed within a period of one (1)year from date of building acceptance by the Owner. The phrase "make good" shall mean to furnish promptly, without charge, all work necessary to remedy the defects to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 1.13 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 00 00-6 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRICAL GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. The Contractor shall provide a temporary service of the amperage and voltage required by the Project Manager. B. Sufficient wiring, outlets and lamps shall be installed to ensure proper lighting in accordance with OSHA, state and municipal codes. Refer to Division 1 specifications for requirements. 1.14 EQUIPMENT REQUIRING ELECTRICAL SERVICE A. Review all specification sections and drawings including mechanical,plumbing and other equipment drawings and other divisions of the specifications for equipment requiring electrical service. Provide service to and make connections to all such equipment requiring electrical service. B. Prior to installing material such as electrical equipment,devices,feeders,or branch circuits serving equipment of all other trades, the Contractor shall coordinate with the electrical requirements of the equipment to be installed. 1.15 MECHANICAL SYSTEMS COORDINATION A. All control wiring for mechanical systems shall be installed under Division 23. B. Motor controllers (starters) shall be furnished under Division 23 and installed under Division 26,unless specified otherwise. C. Power wiring to all motors and motor controllers and between motors and controllers shall be provided in Division 26. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All equipment, materials, accessories, etc. used shall be new and of current production unless specified otherwise. Equipment not specified in the Contract Documents shall be suitable for the intended use and shall be subject to approval by the Engineer. B. All equipment, products and materials shall be free of defects and shall be constructed to operate in a safe manner without excessive noise,vibration,leakage, or wear. C. All equipment shall bear the inspection label of Underwriters Laboratories Inc. D. All equipment and material for similar applications or systems shall be provided from the same manufacturer unless noted otherwise. E. The published standards and requirements of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association, the American National Standard Institute, the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers, and the American Society of Testing Materials, are made a part of these specifications and shall apply wherever applicable. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 00 00-7 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRICAL GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Equipment or devices specified in the individual sections to be identified shall be identified by machine cut stencil unless the equipment is identified by the manufacturer. Identification of flush mounted cabinets and panelboards shall be on the inside of the device. Surface mounted equipment shall be identified on the outside cover. Equipment operating on 208Y/120 volt system shall be identified with black labels with white inner core,480Y/277 volt equipment with red labels with white inner core. B. All switchboards and panelboards supplied by a feeder shall be stencil-labeled to indicate the equipment where the power supply originates. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Mounting heights, unless otherwise noted, are to be center line of the equipment and/or device except the mounting height of suspended light fixtures which is to the bottom of fixture. B. All work shall be designed and installed to comply with the requirements for the seismic design category and use group for the area in which the building is constructed. 3.02 EXCAVATION, TRENCHING& BACKFILLING A. Contractor shall call underground utilities locator company before digging. B. Barricades shall be provided around open holes and trenches. Temporary bridges shall be provided over trenches cut through major sidewalk routes. Major sidewalk routes shall not be closed to pedestrian traffic. C. Barriers shall be provided to protect landscaping adjacent to the excavation area. D. When rocks, concrete or other debris are encountered during excavation, remove completely. E. Where sidewalk sections must be removed for installation of underground ducts, remove the sidewalk sections completely from joint to joint. F. Where asphalt must be removed for installation of underground ducts, saw cut the asphalt in two, straight,parallel lines. G. Backfill excavations in 6-inch layers and mechanically compact to 98 percent compaction. H. Excavated materials may be used as backfill only if the backfill is sand or clean dirt that is free of rocks and debris over 3/4"in diameter. L In landscaped areas,backfill and mechanically compact to a depth of 6 inches below grade. J. Backfill the last 6 inches with clean topsoil. Reseed lawn areas. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 00 00-8 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRICAL GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 K. Restore concrete sidewalks and asphalt. L. The Contractor shall perform all excavation to install the work herein specified and as indicated on drawings. During excavation,material for backfilling shall be piled back from the banks of the trench to avoid overloading and to prevent slides and cave-ins. All excavated materials not to be used for backfill shall be removed and disposed of by the Contractor. Grading shall be done to prevent surface water from flowing into trenches and other excavation and any water accumulating therein shall be removed by pumping. All excavation shall be made by open cut. No tunneling shall be done except under pavement. M. The bottom of the trenches shall be graded to provide uniform bearing and support for conduits, cables, or duct bank on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length. Overdepths shall be backfilled with loose, granular, moist earth, and tamped. Remove unstable soil that is not capable of supporting equipment or installation and replace with specified material for a minimum of 12" below invert of equipment or installation. N. The trenches shall be backfilled with the excavated materials approved for backfilling, consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand and gravel or soft shale, free from large clods of earth and stones,deposited in 6"layers and tamped until the crown of the pipe is covered by a minimum of 6" of tamped earth. The backfill under and beside the pipe shall be compacted for pipe support. Backfill shall be brought up evenly on both sides of the pipe so that the pipe remains aligned. In instances where the manufacturer's installation instructions for materials are more restrictive than those prescribed by the code, the material shall be installed in accordance with the more restrictive requirement. The backfilling shall be carried on simultaneously on both sides of the trench so that injurious pressures do not occur. The compaction of the filled trench shall be at least equal to 98% of the maximum density as determined by the Standard Proctor Test. Settling the backfill with water will not be permitted. Reopen any trenches not meeting compaction requirements or where settlement occurs, refill, compact, and restore the surface to the grade and compaction indicated, mounded over and smoothed off. A metallic lined underground warning tape shall be provided 12" below finished grade. The tape shall be red for electrical lines and orange for telephone and shall be identified as to the type of line. O. Perform excavation and backfilling work in accordance with applicable portions of the earthwork section. 3.03 STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF MATERIALS A. Refer to the general requirements section of the specifications, Division 1, for storage, protection, and handling requirements. B. Inspect materials upon arrival at project and verify confoi nance to Contract Documents. Prevent unloading of unsatisfactory material. C. Store packaged materials in original undamaged condition with manufacturer's labels and seals intact. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 00 00-9 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRICAL GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 D. Containers which are broken, opened, watermarked, or otherwise damaged materials are unacceptable and shall be removed from premises. E. Equipment and materials shall not be installed until such time as the environmental conditions of the job site are suitable to protect the equipment or materials. Equipment or materials damaged or which are subjected to these elements are unacceptable and shall be removed from the premises and replaced. 3.04 CONCRETE WORK A. Construct curbs,pads,vaults and similar supports for electrical equipment where required. B. Provide 4" thickness housekeeping pads at floor mounted equipment, covering entire area occupied by equipment. Dowel pads to structural slab. C. Perform concrete work in accordance with applicable portions of Concrete sections. Minimum compressive strength of concrete shall be same as specified for slabs on grade. 3.05 PAINTING A. Except as otherwise specified, painting shall be accomplished under Painting Section. Surfaces shall be left clean of debris and free from oil and other substances which would prevent paint bond. B. Touch up finishes of factory painted apparatus where finish is marred during installation. C. Where galvanizing is broken during fabrication or installation, recoat exposed areas with cold galvanizing compound. D. Do not paint over nameplates on equipment, nonferrous hardware, accessories or trim. 3.06 WORKMANSHIP A. Install systems, materials and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components. 3.07 ELECTRICAL TESTING A. Furnish all labor, materials, instruments, supplies, and services and bear all costs for the accomplishment of the tests herein specified or requested at job site. Correct all defects appearing under test,and repeat the tests until no defects are disclosed,leave the equipment clean and ready for use. B. All grounds, crosses, shorts, etc., must be eliminated from the wiring. Test all lighting fixtures, together with switches and controls; test the operation of all motors, controllers, and other electrical equipment devices. C. The distribution boards and all feeders shall be Meggar tested. A copy of all test reports shall be given to the Engineer. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 00 00-10 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRICAL GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 D. The Contractor shall perforin any tests other than herein specified which may be required by the Engineer or the authority having jurisdiction. E. Perform the following tests after installation but before energizing the equipment. The following tests and procedures apply to all equipment and material that is to be tested under this Contract. 1. Transformers a. Visually inspect all components for damage, check bushings and insulators for cracks;transformer casing for evidence of leakage;pressure, temperature and liquid level gauges for proper indications. 2. Ground Resistance a. Visually inspect for specified ground connections. b. Perform ground resistance test at all connections to switchboards and panelboards. C. Use three point or fall of potential method. d. Verify single point connection(at the counterpoise)between the grounded and grounding systems. C. Additional ground rod is required if resistance is greater than 25 ohms. 3. Distribution Boards and Panelboards a. Visually inspect all components for damage. b. Check operation of circuit breakers/fusible switches. C. Conduct IR Scan of each panelboard while the building is loaded to ensure there are no hot spots or bad connections.If hot spots are found,contractor to make corrections and rescan panels to ensure corrective measures were effective 4. Ground Fault Systems a. Visually inspect for damage and improper connections. 5. Transfer and Other Relay Schemes a. Investigate intended function and verify correct operation. F. Lighting Control systems 1. Contractor shall provide manufacturer or 3rd Party testing and commissioning of the lighting control systems as required by IECC. 2. Contractor shall provide functional performance testing of all lighting control devices. Sample testing at 10%of devices is acceptable,but not less than 1 of each type of device. 3. Contractor shall provide an integrated system test of the complete lighting control system to demonstrate that it operates as a complete functional system as designed and compliant with IECC. G. The Engineer shall be notified immediately of any unfavorable test results or indication of faulty equipment. No piece of equipment shall be energized until the test data is evaluated and the equipment is proven acceptable. H. If the test and inspection data submitted should indicate deficiencies in the operation of the electrical apparatus or in the manufacturer thereof, the Contractor shall promptly implement the necessary adjustments, corrections, modifications and/or replacements necessary to meet the specified requirements. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 00 00-1 1 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRICAL GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.08 TRAINING A. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall conduct operation and training session(s) for the Owner's key personnel. These sessions shall be of sufficient length and duration to adequately explain the design intent and proper operating and maintenance techniques for all equipment and systems. After these sessions are completed, the Contractor shall provide a copy of a signed statement by the Owner that his personnel are thoroughly familiar with and capable of operating all equipment and systems. END OF SECTION 26 00 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 00 00-12 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRICAL GENERAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 26 05 19 - CONDUCTORS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All work specified herein shall be accomplished in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 26 00 00- Electrical General. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. The work under this section shall include all labor, materials, accessories, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install conductors, complete, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. Provide a complete system of wiring with all feeders and branch circuits as shown on the Drawings. The wiring system shall be complete to each and every outlet and apparatus shown on the Drawings which requires electrical connections. B. This section includes wires, cables, and connectors for power,lighting, signal, control and related systems rated 600 volts or less. 1.03 COLOR CODING A. Color coding shall be as follows: 120/208 Volt System 277/480 Volt System Phase A—Black Phase A- Brown Phase B—Red Phase B- Orange Phase C—Blue Phase C- Yellow Neutral—White Neutral- Gray Ground—Green Ground- Green (Verify color-coding with local code Authority and use local code requirements if and only if the above color code is not acceptable to local authority.) B. All wire shall be color coded throughout its entire length. Colored phase tape is not allowed. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Wire shall be Southwire, General Cable, Encore or approved equal. 2.02 CONDUCTORS FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2605 19-1 MAY 2, 2023 CONDUCTORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Conductor Material: Unless noted otherwise, conductors shall be copper, 99% conductivity except where specifically noted otherwise on Drawings. B. All wire and cable for feeders and branch circuits shall have copper conductors and shall be 600 volts, 90 degrees C, NEC type conductors with THHN/THWN-2/XHHW-2 insulation. C. Wire No. 8 AWG and larger shall have stranded conductors. Wire No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be solid conductor type. D. No conductor shall be smaller than No. 12 AWG unless otherwise specified or noted. E. Branch circuit wiring which supplies more than one fluorescent fixture through the wiring of other fixtures shall be high temperature wire approved for such use. F. Pulling lubricant is neither required nor allowed for Southwire/SIMpul1TM or Encore SuperSlick conductors. 2.03 METAL CLAD "MC" CABLE A. Where allowed by the authority having jurisdiction,the use of metal clad cable is permitted as described below and shall meet all the requirements of the following codes and standards: 1. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. 44, 83, 1479, 1569, 1581, 2556 2. National Fire Protection Association NFPA 70,Article 330 3. All local codes and municipal ordinances. B. The conductors of the metal clad cable shall comply with Articles 1.03 and 2.02 of this same section. C. Unless noted otherwise on drawings,MC cable shall be limited to branch circuits concealed in walls, above ceilings and within electrical rooms. For MC cable circuits powered from a surface-mounted panelboard,cable homeruns shall be installed to a metal wireway above the panelboard, and conductors (without armor) shall be routed within metal conduit(s) from wireway to panelboard. Ampacity adjustment factors are not necessary for conduit lengths of 24" or less. D. MC cable shall not be allowed for wiring to mechanical equipment. E. Unless noted otherwise, the metal clad cable shall be MC with either a galvanized steel jacket or aluminum interlocked armor,a UL 1569 binder tape,with either a green insulated grounding conductor or MCI-A type cable with interlocked armor that is listed and identified for grounding, and rated for a maximum of 600 volts. F. Refer to National Electrical Code Article 330 for uses not permitted. G. Cables installed in other than vertical runs through bored or punched holes in wood or metal framing members, or through notches in wooden framing members and protected by FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2605 19-2 MAY 2, 2023 CONDUCTORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 a steel plate at least 1/16 inches thick, shall be considered supported and secured where such support does not exceed six(6) feet intervals. H. Cables containing four or fewer conductors sized not larger than No. 10 AWG shall be secured within 12 inches of every box, cabinet, fitting or other cable termination. I. Metal clad cable (Type MC),where installed in wet and damp locations, shall be rated for the condition of use and by written authorization from the project Engineer. 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Wire Joints: T & B "Sta-Kon," Scotchlok Type "R,"Ideal No. 452 or 453, or Buchanan "B-Cap." B. Cable Connectors: Solderless Type O.Z. "circular clamp type" or T & B "lock-tite" appropriate for the particular application involved. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Lubricant: No grease, oil or lubricant other than powdered soapstone or approved pulling compound shall be used to facilitate the pulling of wires. Lubricant shall not be used for conductors with SIMpull"insulation. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Complete electrical systems shall be provided as shown on the Drawings and/or as specified herein. B. Wires shall be pulled without excessive strain to prevent damage to conductor or insulation. Provide pull boxes as required to facilitate pulling of wire. C. Prior to energizing, all service and feeder cables shall be tested with megohm meter to determine insulation resistance levels. Test report shall be submitted to the Engineer. D. Each raceway indicated by symbol on Drawings shall contain three(3)No. 12 AWG wires unless otherwise noted, scheduled or indicated. Hatch marks on raceway symbols indicate the number of conductors in a raceway when the number exceeds three (3). E. At each fixture or device outlet, a loop or end of wire not less than 6"long shall be left for connection to fixture or device. F. Splices, taps and connections shall be made up as follows: 1. Wire sizes No. 10 AWG and smaller with wire nuts. 2. Wire and cable of sizes No. 8 AWG and larger, with insulated mechanical or crimped connectors. G. Perform conductor tests as described in Section 26 00 00 -Electrical General. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2605 19-3 MAY 2, 2023 CONDUCTORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 END OF SECTION 26 05 19 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2605 19-4 MAY 2, 2023 CONDUCTORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 26 05 26 - GROUNDING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The work required under this section of the Specifications consists of furnishing, installation and connections of the building grounding system. Exterior branch circuit wiring and feeder conductors extended beyond the building are included. The building electrical system shall be 3-phase, 4-wire grounded wye system supplemented with equipment grounding system. Equipment grounding system shall be established with equipment grounding conductors; the use of metallic raceways for equipment grounding is not acceptable. 1.02 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Install a complete grounding system in accordance with the National Electrical Code. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide all materials under this section of the specifications. B. All materials shall be new,UL Listed, and bear a UL Label. C. Refer to Section 26 05 19- Conductors for conductor specification. 2.02 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Grounding electrode conductor shall be bare or green insulated copper conductor sized as indicated on the Drawings. B. Equipment grounding conductors shall be green insulated conductors sized as indicated on the Drawings. Where size is not indicated on the Drawings, conductor size shall be determined from the National Electrical Code table on sizes of equipment grounding conductors. C. Bonding jumpers shall be flexible copper bonding jumpers sized in accordance with the National Electrical Code tables for grounding electrode conductors. 2.03 PANELBOARDS, TRANSFORMERS,AND DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Provide each low voltage distribution and branch circuit panelboard with a copper equipment grounding bar brazed or riveted to the associated enclosures or cabinet and an insulated neutral bar. B. Provide a conductor termination grounding lug bonded to the enclosure of each equipment item. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 26 05 26-1 MAY 2, 2023 GROUNDING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2.04 DEVICES A. Each receptacle and switch device shall be furnished with a grounding screw connected to the metallic device frame. 2.05 GROUND RODS A. Ground rods shall be 3/4" x 10'-0" copper clad steel. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Ground all non-current carrying parts of the electrical system including raceways, equipment frames and enclosures, outlet boxes, junction boxes, and other conductive material in close proximity with electrical circuits. B. Service entrance and separately derived electrical systems, grounding electrode system 1. The grounded conductor(s) of the electrical service serving the premises wiring system shall be connected to the neutral bus bar in the service equipment which shall be grounded to the cold water system, the ground rod system, and other grounding electrodes specified herein or indicated on the Drawings. Grounding electrode conductors shall be installed rigid, nonmetallic conduit to point of ground connection, unless subject to physical damage in which case it shall be installed in galvanized rigid steel. 2. Make connection to main water line entering the building. Make connections ahead of any valve or fittings whose removal may interrupt ground continuity. 3. Bond together the following systems to form the grounding electrode system. All system connections shall be made to the electrodes as close as possible to the service entrance equipment and each connected at the service entrance equipment neutral bus. Do not connect electrode systems together except at neutral bus. a. Cold water piping system b. Ground rod system C. Rebar in concrete footing d. Structural steel metal building frame 4. Ground the neutral of all dry type transformers to either building steel or a common grounding electrode conductor connected to a service ground. Transformers shall be bonded to the nearest available point on the interior water piping system. In reinforced concrete structures building steel shall be considered to be reinforcing steel of vertical columns. 5. Grounding electrode connections to structural steel, reinforcing bars, ground rods, or where indicated on the Drawings shall be with chemical exothermic weld connection devices recommended for the particular connection type. Connections to piping shall be with UL Listed mechanical ground clamps. 6. Where there is more than one service to a building or interconnected buildings, services shall be connected by means of a grounding electrode conductor. 7. Bonding shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code. 8. Install ground rods where indicated on the Drawings with the top of the ground rods 12 inches below finished grade. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 26 05 26-2 MAY 2, 2023 GROUNDING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 9. Ground the neutral and frame of the emergency generator to building steel and the main electrical service ground rod system. In reinforced concrete structures building steel shall be considered to be reinforcing steel or vertical columns. Make connection to building steel with chemical weld type connector, in a location in unfinished space where the connection will not be subject to physical abuse. C. Equipment Grounding Conductor 1. Grounding conductors for branch circuits are not shown on the Drawings; however, grounding conductors shall be provided in all branch circuit raceways and cables. 2. Grounding conductors for feeders are typically indicated on the Drawings and the raceway is sized to accommodate grounding conductor shown. Where grounding conductor size is not indicated on the Drawings, conductor shall be in accordance with the equipment grounding conductor table of the National Electrical Code. D. Other Grounding Requirements I. Each telephone backboard shall be provided with a No. 6 grounding conductor. When backboard is located in vicinity of electrical service equipment, the "point of grounding" of this conductor shall be the main cold water service with connections made ahead of any valves or joints. Remote backboards shall use building steel as "point of ground." Terminate conductor by stapling to backboard. 2. At each building expansion joint flexible copper bonding jumpers shall be attached to building structure by chemical weld process. Install bonding jumpers in concealed locations that will not subject connections or jumpers to physical abuse. Install 100' on centers across expansion joints. 3.02 TESTING A. Upon completion of the ground rod installation, the Contractor shall test the installation in accordance with the "Electrical Testing" section of Section 26 00 00 - Electrical General. Grounding resistance reading shall be taken before connection is made to the building cold water piping system. Ground resistance readings shall not be taken within 48 hours of rainfall. END OF SECTION 26 05 26 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 26 05 26-3 MAY 2, 2023 GROUNDING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 26 05 30 - FIRESTOPPING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Applicable requirements of Division 26 shall be considered a part of this section and shall have the same force as if printed herein full. B. This document describes the products and execution requirements relating to Firestopping for Electrical Systems. C. Product specifications, general design considerations, and installation guidelines are provided in this document. Typical firestopping installation details will be provided on Drawings as an attachment to this document. If the bid documents are in conflict, the Drawings shall take precedence. The successful Contractor shall meet or exceed all requirements described in this document. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. The work included under this Specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation. The Contractor will provide and install all of the required material whether specifically addressed in the Specification or not. B. The work shall include,but not be limited to the following: 1. Furnish and install all Firestopping Materials. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED PRODUCTS A. Approved Firestopping manufacturer(s) 1. F1ameStopper Thru-Wall Fitting-Wiremold Company(Firestop Devices) 2. Tremco Inc. (Firestop Cast in Place Sleeves, Caulks, QuickComm Sleeves, QuickComm Units, Pillows, Putty Pads, Outlet Box Inserts, Silicone, Composite Sheets, Collars,Devices) 3. STI Firestop Products (Firestop Devices,Putties, Caulks, Sealants, etc.) 4. Hilti(Putties, Caulks, Sealants, etc.) 2.02 TYPES OF PRODUCTS A. Firestop Products 1. Intumescent Firestop Sealants and Caulks 2. Acrylic Firestop Sealant and Caulks 3. Silicone Firestop Sealants and Caulks 4. Cast in Place Devices FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 26 05 30-1 MAY 2, 2023 FIRESTOPPING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 5. Firestop Putty, Putty Pads 6. Outlet Box Inserts 7. QuickComm Sleeves 8. TREMstop Straps 9. Firestop Collars 10. Wrap Strips 11. Firestop Mortar 12. Firestop Pillows 13. Accessories: Forming/Damming Materials: Mineral Wool, Backer Rod or other type as per manufacturer recommendation. B. Firestop Devices L Thru-Wall Fitting(F1ameStopper by Wiremold) a. The firestop device box shall be constructed of 16-gauge G90 steel. b. The firestop device intumescent block shall be constructed of a graphite base material with expansion starting at 375 degrees F and an unrestrained expansion between 6 to 12 times. The intumescent block shall be held securely by the box in order to prevent tampering and damage during installation. C. The firestop device shall have doors which can be adjusted to prevent materials from penetrating the device if the device is empty or completely full. The doors shall be constructed of 16-gauge G90 steel with No. 10-32 screws use to adjust opening size. d. The firestop device shall be available for 2" and 4" trade size EMT conduit. e. The firestop device shall be available in safety yellow powder coat, custom colors and an unpainted galvanized finish. 2. Fire Rated Cable Pathway(STI EZ-PATH) a. Fire rated cable pathway device modules shall be comprised of steel raceway with intumescent foam pads allowing 0- 100% cable fill. 3. Tremco (QuickComm Unit) 24" x 12" or 34" x 18" a. Fire rated steel frame with an intumescent channel. UL Tested for large openings with 100% visual cable fill. UL Tested for Concrete Floors, Block Walls,Dry Walls and Hollow Core Floors. 4. Tremco (QuickComm Sleeve) a. Fire rated steel sleeve with an intumescent inner sleeve. UL Tested for Concrete Floors, Block Walls, Dry Walls, Hollow Core and Fluted Decks. 2.03 UL CLASSIFICATION A. Thru-Wall Fitting: The firestop device for use in through-penetration firestop systems shall have been examined and tested by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. to UL1479 (ASTM E 814 & ASTM E 84). B. Threaded, Smooth and Split-Sleeve Firestop Devices: Firestopping sealants and devices shall be used together as a firestop system. All firestop systems shall bear a UL Classification system number. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 26 05 30-2 MAY 2, 2023 FIRESTOPPING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. QuickComm Sleeve: Firestop Sleeve for use in through penetration Firestop systems. Shall be tested by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. or a recognized Testing Laboratory for through penetration fire stopping applications. D. QuickComm Unit: Intumescent Firestopping Unit for use in large openings for firestopping for cables,Fiber optic,Power Control, Telecommunications 1. Threaded Firestop System a. Block Wall- W-J-3049 b. Dry Wall- W-L-3138 2. Threaded Firestop System(Vertical) a. Slab-F-A-3010 3. Smooth Firestop System a. Block Wall-W-J-3048 b. Dry Wall-W-L-3137 4. Split-Sleeve Firestop System a. Block Wall-W-J-3047 b. Dry Wall-W-L-3136 5. Tremco QuickComm Sleeve a. Block Wall- C-AJ-0123, C-AJ-2580, C-AJ-3270 b. Dry Wall- WL-0025, WL-2418, WL-3318 C. Concrete Floor- C-AJ-0123, C-AJ-2580, C-AJ-3270 d. Fluted Deck- C-AJ-0123 e. Hollow Core- C-AJ-0123, C-AJ-2580, C-AJ-3318 6. Tremco QuickComm Unit a. Dry Wall- WL-3319, WL-4070 b. Concrete Floor- F-A-3035,F-A-4006 2.04 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Thru-Wall Fitting Firestop System 1. The device shall be classified for use in one-, two-, three-, and four-hour rated gypsum, concrete and block walls and provide an L rating of less than 5 cfm. The device shall also be tested by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. to UL2043 and determined to be suitable for use in air handling spaces. B. Threaded, Smooth and Split-Sleeve Firestop Systems I. Shall conform to both Flame (F) and Temperature (T)ratings as required by local building codes and as tested by nationally accepted test agencies per ASTM E814 and ASTM E 84 (UL 1479) fire tests in a configuration that is representative of field conditions. 2. The F rating must be a minimum of one (1) hour but not less than the fire resistance rating of the assembly being penetrated. T rating when required by code authority shall be based on measurement of the temperature rise on penetrating item(s). The fire test shall be conducted with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inches of water column. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 26 05 30-3 MAY 2, 2023 FIRESTOPPING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Firestopping materials and systems must be capable of closing or filling through- openings created by the burning or melting of combustible pipes, cable jacketing, or pipe insulation materials. D. Firestopping material shall be asbestos and lead free and shall not incorporate nor require the use of hazardous solvents. E. Firestopping sealants must be flexible, allowing for normal pipe movement. F. Firestopping materials shall not shrink upon drying as evidenced by cracking or pulling back from contact surfaces. G. Firestopping materials shall be moisture resistant, and may not dissolve in water after curing. H. Firestopping material shall be installed inside the cavity of the wall as shown by the annular space requirements in the UL Tested System. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 CONDITIONS REQUIRING FIRESTOPPING A. General 1. Provide firestopping for conditions specified whether or not firestopping is indicated, and if indicated, whether such material is designed as insulation, safing, or otherwise. B. Through-Penetrations 1. Firestopping shall be installed in all open penetrations and in the annular space in all penetrations in any bearing or non-bearing fire-rated barrier. C. Membrane-Penetrations 1. Where required by code, all membrane-penetrations in rated walls shall be protected with firestopping products that meet ASTM E 814 and ASTM E 84 Test requirements. D. Smoke-Stopping 1. As required by the other sections, smoke-stops shall be provided for through- penetrations, membrane-penetrations, and construction gaps with a material approved for the ASTM E 136 Standards. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions where firestops are to be installed and notify the Architect of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 26 05 30-4 MAY 2, 2023 FIRESTOPPING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Verify that environmental conditions are safe and suitable for installation of firestop products. C. Verify that all pipes, conduit, cable, and other items that penetrate fire-rated construction have been permanently installed prior to installation of firestops. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Through Penetration firestop submittals showing each UL Rated Assembly shall be located in the general Contractor's trailer for Inspection purposes. 2. Installation of firestops shall be performed by an applicator/installer qualified and trained by the manufacturer. Written documentation stating training done on the specific project shall be supplied to the General Contractor for inspection purposes. Installation shall be performed in strict accordance with manufacturer's detailed installation procedures. 3. Apply firestops in accordance with UL Tested Systems, fire resistance requirements, acceptable sample installations, and manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Unless specified and approved, all insulation used in conjunction with through- penetrants shall remain intact and undamaged and may not be removed. 5. Seal holes and penetrations to ensure an effective smoke seal. In areas of high traffic, protect firestopping materials from damage. If the opening is large, install firestopping materials capable of supporting the weight of a human. a. Insulation types specified in other sections shall not be installed in lieu of firestopping material specified herein. b. All combustible penetrants (e.g. non-metallic pipes or insulated metallic pipes) shall be firestopped using products and systems tested in a configuration representative of the field condition. B. Dam Construction 1. When required to properly contain firestopping materials within openings, damming or packing materials may be utilized. Combustible damming material must be removed after appropriate curing. Noncombustible damming materials may be left as a permanent component of the firestop system. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Preconstruction meeting shall take place to address firestopping systems to be installed. B. Prepare and install firestopping systems in accordance with UL Tested System and manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations. C. Follow safety procedures recommended in the Material Safety Data Sheets. D. Finish surfaces of firestopping that are to remain exposed in the completed work to a uniform and level condition. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 26 05 30-5 MAY 2, 2023 FIRESTOPPING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. All areas of work must be accessible until inspection by the applicable Code Authorities. F. Correct unacceptable firestops and provide additional inspection to verify compliance with this Specification. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove spilled and excess materials adjacent to firestopping without damaging adjacent surfaces. B. Leave finished work in a neat and clean condition with no evidence of spillovers or damage to adjacent surfaces. END OF SECTION 26 05 30 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 26 05 30-6 MAY 2, 2023 FIRESTOPPING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 26 05 33 - CONDUIT AND RACEWAYS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. This section covers the complete interior and exterior conduit system. B. All work specified herein shall be accomplished in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 26 00 00- Electrical General. 1.02 STANDARDS A. Industry Standards 1. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL)Publications No. 1: Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit No. 6: Standard for Rigid Metal Conduit No. 467: Standard for Grounding and Bonding Equipment No. 651: Standard for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit No. 797: Electrical Metallic Tubing- Steel No. 1242: Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit- Steel 2. American National Standards Institute(ANSI) C-80.1: Rigid Galvanized Conduit C-80.3: Electrical Metallic Tubing 1.03 WORK INCLUDED A. The work under this section shall include all labor, materials, accessories, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install conduits and raceways, complete, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Other manufacturers of equal quality and performance may be submitted to the Engineer for review. When substitution of equipment is made, the Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of any item and engineering and construction revisions necessary in his or any other contract or trade that may be required to satisfy plans and specifications. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Approved Manufacturers 1. Metallic Conduit Fittings a. Thomas and Betts b. Appleton C. RACO d. Crouse Hinds e. Steel City 2. Support Channel FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 05 33-1 MAY 2, 2023 CONDUIT AND RACEWAYS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 a. Unistrut b. Kindorf 3. Non-metallic Conduit Fittings a. Carlon b. Georgia Pipe Company 4. Rigid,IMC or Flexible Conduit a. Allied b. Republic C. Triangle d. Wheatland e. Youngstown f. Southwire 5. Flexible Conduit(PVC Conduit) a. Anaconda"Sealtite" b. Robroy C. Southwire 6. Electrical Metallic Tubing a. Steeltubes b. National C. Wheatland d. Allied e. Triangle f. Youngstown 7. Plastic PVC a. Carlon b. Georgia Pipe Company 8. Pull Box Manufacturer(s) a. Hoffman b. OZ Gedney C. Or Approved Equal 9. Approved Marker Tape Manufacturer(s) a. William Frick&Associates b. Or Approved Equal 10. Approved Maintenance Hole/Handhole Manufacturer(s) a. Old Castle b. Pencell (Handholes Only) C. Quazite(Handholes Only) d. Or Approved Equal 11. Approved Conduit Plug/Cap Manufacturer(s) a. Jack Moon b. Or Approved Equal 2.02 CONDUIT FITTINGS A. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT) couplings and connectors shall be steel. Malleable iron, pressure cast or die cast fittings are not permitted. B. Fittings and couplings shall be set-screw type and/or compression type per 3.01 13. Steel set screw type for 2.5" conduit and larger shall have 2 screws for connectors and 4 screws for couplings. All connectors shall be insulated throat type. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 05 33-2 MAY 2, 2023 CONDUIT AND RACEWAYS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Rigid steel and IMC couplings and connectors shall be standard threaded couplings, locknuts,bushings and elbows. All materials shall be steel. Erickson-type couplings may be used to complete a conduit run. 2.03 NON-METALLIC CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Non-metallic conduit shall be heavy wall, Schedule 40 PVC. B. Couplings and connectors for non-metallic conduit shall be of the same material and be the product of the same manufacturer of the conduit furnished. C. PVC conduit for concrete encasement shall be Type EB, UL Labeled for 90 degrees C cables. Fittings shall be Type EB, solvent type, and from the same manufacturer as the conduit. D. Concrete shall have a minimum strength of 2,500 psi at 28 days. 2.04 CONDUIT SUPPORT A. Individual conduit hangers shall be galvanized spring steel specifically designed for the purpose and sized appropriately for the conduit type and diameter. Support individual conduits 1-1/2" and smaller with 1/4" threaded steel rods and use 3/8" rods for 2" and larger. B. Conduit support channels shall be 14-gauge galvanized (or equivalent treatment) channel sized for the amount of conduit to be supported. Channel suspension shall be 3/8"threaded steel rods. Conduit straps shall be spring steel type compatible with channel. C. Conduit straps shall be single-hole cast metal type or two-hole galvanized metal type. Conduit clamps shall be spring steel type for use with exposed structural steel. 2.05 RIGID METALLIC CONDUIT, INTERMEDIATE METALLIC CONDUIT, AND ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING A. Rigid metallic conduit and intermediate metallic conduit shall be steel and standard thread. B. Electrical metallic tubing(EMT) shall be steel. 2.06 RIGID METALLIC, INTERMEDIATE METALLIC, AND FLEXIBLE CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Rigid metallic conduit and intermediate metallic conduit shall be steel and standard thread. B. Flexible conduit shall be steel or aluminum type classified for system grounding. C. Connectors for flexible conduit shall be insulated throat type rated as suitable for system ground continuity. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 05 33-3 MAY 2, 2023 CONDUIT AND RACEWAYS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 D. Flexible conduit used for other than connections to lighting fixtures shall not be less than 1/2"trade size. 3/8" flexible conduit may be used for connection to lighting fixtures when sized according to the National Electrical Code. E. Flexible conduit used in damp or wet locations shall be liquid tight. 2.07 PULL BOXES A. Pull boxes shall be constructed of galvanized steel with flat, removable covers fastened with plated steel screws. B. Pull boxes shall be equipped with keyhole screw slots in the cover to permit removal of the cover without extracting the screws. C. Pull boxes shall have provisions for grounding. 2.08 MAINTENANCE HOLES/HANDHOLES A. Maintenance Holes 1. Maintenance holes shall be pre-cast or cast-in-place concrete with a strength of 3,500 psi at 28 days, and steel reinforced. 2. Maintenance holes shall include a cast iron frame with cover, a hot dipped galvanized steel ladder, and hot dipped galvanized pulling eyes embedded in the concrete opposite each duct entrance and in the floor beneath the cover. 3. Maintenance holes shall be equipped with grounding busbar. 4. Maintenance holes shall be equipped with racking for cable storage. 5. Ground splices and connections at maintenance holes shall be exothermic welds, copper or bronze compression ground fittings, or bolted compression ring lugs. 6. The cover for electrical maintenance holes shall have the lettering, "POWER" or "ELECTRIC." 7. The cover for low voltage maintenance holes shall have the lettering, "COMMUNICATIONS." B. Handholes 1. Handholes shall be non-conductive and shall not require grounding for safety. Handholes shall be unaffected by freeze/thaw and resistant to sunlight and chemicals. Handholes shall be pre-cast polymer concrete, heavy duty rated and bottomless. 2. Handholes shall be equipped with racking for cable storage. 3. Electrical handholes shall have the word"POWER" or "ELECTRIC" molded in the cover by the manufacturer. The cover shall be attached with penta-head stainless steel bolts. 4. Low voltage handholes shall have the word "COMMUNICATIONS" molded in the cover by the manufacturer. The cover shall be attached with penta-head stainless steel bolts. 5. Handholes shall be able to withstand 10,000 lbs minimum. 6. See Drawings for handhole dimensions and locations. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 05 33-4 MAY 2, 2023 CONDUIT AND RACEWAYS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2.09 CONDUIT PLUGS/CAPS A. Conduit Plugs/Caps 1. Conduit plugs shall provide a watertight seal at exposed ends of conduits. 2. Conduit plugs shall be conduit size specific. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Minimum size for electrical conduits shall be 1/2" trade size. 2. Minimum size for low voltage conduits shall be 3/4" trade size. 3. Conceal all conduits, except in unfinished spaces such as equipment rooms or as indicated by symbol on the drawings. 4. Leave all empty conduits with a 200 pound test nylon cord pull line. 5. Flattened, dented, or deformed conduits are not permitted and shall be removed and replaced. 6. Fasten conduit support device to structure with wood screws on wood,toggle bolts on hollow masonry, anchors as specified on solid masonry or concrete, and machine bolts, clamps, or spring steel clips, on steel. 7. Protect conduits against dirt,plaster,and foreign debris with conduit caps or plugs, which shall remain in place until all masonry is complete. Protect conduit stub- ups during construction from damage; any damaged conduits shall not be used and are to be replaced. 8. All feeder conduits shall be cleared of any dirt, foreign debris, etc. 9. Install conduit with wiring,including homeruns as indicated on the drawings. Any change resulting in a savings in labor or materials is to be made only in accordance with a Contract change. Deviations shall be made only where necessary to avoid interferences and when approved by Engineer by written authorization. 10. Conduits which penetrate roof membranes shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and architectural specifications. 11. Seal all conduits entering building from below grade, all conduits entering refrigerated spaces i.e. freezers and coolers, and all conduits entering exterior mounted electrical equipment with insulating electrical putty to prevent entrance of moisture. 12. Separate raceway systems are to be installed for power systems and for control, signal and communications systems. Do not install control, signal or communications cables in the same raceways as branch circuit or feeders cables, unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. 13. Conduit fittings shall be set screw type for dty, indoor environments. Conduit fittings shall be gland and ring compression type for all conduit exposed to outdoor environments or wet locations. 14. Conduit shall be run parallel or at right angles to walls, ceilings, and structural members. 15. Support conduits at intervals not exceeding ten feet and within three feet of each outlet, junction box, fitting, panelboard, enclosure or cabinet. Support conduits from structural steel members with spring steel type or beam conduit clamps and FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 05 33-5 MAY 2, 2023 CONDUIT AND RACEWAYS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 to non-metallic structural members with one-hole conduit straps. For exposed conduits and where conduits must be suspended below structure, single conduit runs shall be supported from structure by hanger rod and conduit clamp assembly, and multiple conduits shall be supported by trapeze type support suspended from structure. Do not attach conduits to ceiling suspension system channels or suspension wires. 16. Attach feeder conduits larger than one inch trade diameter to or from structure on intervals not exceeding twelve feet with conduit beam clamps, one-hole conduit straps or trapeze type support. 17. Where conduits must pass through structural members obtain approval of Architect. 18. Install all conduits or sleeves penetrating or routed within rated fire walls or fire floors to maintain fire rating of wall or floor. Conduit shall not be installed in rated floors or walls if it compromises or violates the fire rating of floor or wall. Refer to architectural documents. 19. Provide expansion and deflection coupling where conduit passes over a building expansion joint. 20. Install nonferrous conduit or tubing for circuits operating above 60 Hz. Where aluminum raceways are installed for such circuits and pass through concrete, install in nonmetallic sleeve. 21. Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping. 22. Telephone and signal system raceways: 2" trade size and smaller: In addition to above requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two 90-degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where necessary to comply with these requirements. B. Uses Permitted 1. Conduits installed within concrete floor slabs shall be galvanized rigid steel(GRS), intermediate metal conduit(IMC),Schedule 40,heavy wall PVC,or electrical non- metallic tubing(ENT). 2. Conduit run exterior exposed: Galvanized rigid steel(GRS) or intermediate metal conduit(IMC). 3. Conduits in direct contact with earth shall be Schedule 40, heavy wall PVC. Elbows for underground conduits greater than 200' in length shall be galvanized rigid steel (GRS), or electrical metallic tubing (EMT) if elbows are concrete encased. Service entrance conduits installed exposed, or concealed in walls or above ceilings,shall be galvanized rigid steel(GRS) or intermediate metal conduit (IMC). Unless indicated otherwise, service entrance conduits shall be installed "outside" of the building as defined by the NEC. Provide concrete encasement where required or as indicated on drawings. 4. All other conduit, unless specified herein, not permitted in accordance with the NEC, or otherwise indicated on the drawings, shall be electrical metallic tubing (EMT). PVC conduit is not allowed in exposed or concealed areas,but only within concrete or below grade. Feeder or branch circuit conduits that emerge from a floor slab in an exposed location shall be galvanized rigid steel (GRS), electrical metallic tubing (EMT) or intermediate metal conduit (IMC). Where conduits emerge from a floor slab in a concealed location (a wall cavity or above ceiling), FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 05 33-6 MAY 2, 2023 CONDUIT AND RACEWAYS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 PVC elbows are permitted, provided that a conduit adaptor for steel conduit is installed at the nearest point at the slab. 5. Use flexible conduit for connections to motors, dry type transformers, electrical duct heaters, unit heaters, flush mounted lighting fixtures, and any vibrating equipment. a. Flexible conduit used for connection of motors, dry type transformers, electric duct heaters,unit heaters,and bus duct tap devices shall not exceed 36 inches in length. b. Flexible conduit from outlet box to flush mounted lighting fixture shall not exceed 6 feet in length. C. Maintain ground continuity through flexible conduit with green equipment grounding conductor; do not use flexible conduit for ground continuity. d. Flexible conduit installed within plenum spaces shall be limited to lengths not exceeding 4 feet. e. Liquid tight flexible conduit shall be used to connect equipment in exterior, damp or wet locations. C. Below Grade Raceway Installations 1. Install top of conduits 2 inches minimum below bottom of building slabs. D. Raceway Installations within Concrete 1. Conduit shall be run following the most direct route between points. 2. Conduit shall not be installed in concrete where the outside diameter is larger than 1/3 of the slab thickness. 3. Conduits shall not be installed within shear walls unless specifically indicated on the drawings. Conduit shall not be run directly below and parallel with load bearing walls. 4. Protect all conduits entering and leaving concrete floor slabs from physical damage during construction. 5. Provide expansion fittings in all conduits that pass through building expansion joints. 3.02 PULL BOXES A. Pull boxes shall be secured, independent of the conduit entries into the box. Pull boxes shall be secured to the building structure. In ceiling applications, pull boxes shall not be supported with ceiling wires. B. Conduits entering pull boxes shall connect to pull boxes using die-cast zinc connectors. C. Pull boxes shall be free from burrs, dirt and debris. 3.03 MAINTENANCE HOLES/HANDHOLES A. Maintenance holes/handholes shall be installed on a base of pea gravel at least 12 inches deep. B. Tops of maintenance holes/handholes shall be level with the existing grade. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 05 33-7 MAY 2, 2023 CONDUIT AND RACEWAYS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Ducts should enter as perpendicular to the wall surface as possible. D. Maintenance holes shall be grounded with four 3/4 inch diameter by 8 foot long ground rods, one driven inside of the maintenance hole at each corner. Connect the ground rods and any duct bank ground conductors together with a No. 4/0 AWG bare, stranded copper ground wire loop. A No. 2 AWG bare stranded copper pigtail from the ground wire loop shall be used to ground the maintenance hole cover frame, ladder support bracket, any metallic concrete inserts and metallic cable racks, and the shields of any cables that are spliced in the maintenance hole. 3.04 CONDUIT PLUGS/CAPS A. Protect conduits against dirt, plaster, and foreign debris with conduit plugs. Plugs shall remain in place until ready for use. B. Simplex, triplex or quadplex duct plugs shall be installed in conduits to house and seal cables. 3.05 ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS FOR INTERIOR LOW VOLTAGE CONDUITS A. Conduit runs shall not have more than two (2) 90-degree bends between pull points. B. Communications conduit system shall contain no condulets (also known as an LB). C. Rigid metal conduit(RMC)or intermediate metal conduit(IMC) shall be used for entrance conduits that exceed 50 feet into the building. D. Horizontal Conduits 1. Support horizontal conduits at intervals not exceeding ten feet and within three feet of each outlet,junction box, backboard, enclosure or cabinet. Support conduits from structural steel members with spring steel type or beam conduit clamps and to non-metallic structural members with one-hole conduit straps. For exposed conduits and where conduits must be suspended below structure, single conduit runs shall be supported from structure by hanger rod and conduit clamp assembly, and multiple conduits shall be supported by trapeze type support suspended from structure. Do not attach conduits to ceiling suspension system channels or suspension wires. 2. For runs that total more than 100 feet in length,insert pull boxes so that no segment between boxes exceeds the 100 feet limit. 3. Each horizontal home-run conduit can serve from one(1)to three(3)outlet boxes. For one (1) outlet box, a 3/4" conduit shall be used, minimum. For two (2) outlet boxes, a 1" conduit shall be used, minimum. For three (3) outlet boxes, a 1-1/4" conduit shall be used,minimum. 3.06 REQUIREMENTS FOR OUTSIDE PLANT LOW VOLTAGE CONDUITS A. Duct Banks FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 05 33-8 MAY 2, 2023 CONDUIT AND RACEWAYS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Duct banks shall be sloped downward toward maintenance holes/handholes and away from buildings a minimum of 6 inches per 100 feet. Duct banks shall not route water from maintenance holes/handholes into buildings.Duct banks shall not contain traps between maintenance holes/handholes where water may accumulate. 2. Where power and communications duct banks run in parallel, they shall be separated by a minimum of 12 inches. 3. Where duct banks enter maintenance holes or buildings, they shall be constructed as integral to the wall. 4. Duct bank shall extend to the inside surfaces of the walls, and the duct bank reinforcing shall be integrated with the wall reinforcing. 5. Bell ends shall be provided on ducts where the ducts enter maintenance holes or buildings. 6. Direct buried ducts and fittings shall have bend radii greater than the minimum bend radii of the cables enclosed,and shall not be smaller than the radii of standard manufactured elbows. 7. Direct buried ducts shall be installed parallel to or at right angles to building lines and site features, and as close to curbs and sidewalks as possible to avoid interferences with future landscaping. 8. Where direct buried PVC ducts cannot be buried deep enough to meet the NEC minimum cover requirements, rigid steel conduits shall be installed instead, or a concrete cover shall be poured over the ducts. 9. An orange detectable marker tape (for communications) shall be buried in the backfill approximately 12 inches above duct banks or direct buried cables for the entire length of the duct run. 10. A flexible mandrel and a stiff bristled brush shall be pulled through the ducts to clean them prior to cable pulling. 11. Ducts shall be identified in the maintenance holes and at both ends. B. Additional OSP Conduit Requirements 1. Install a#14 AWG tracer wire in one conduit for the entire length of each duct run. 2. Below Grade Conduit Installations a. Install top of conduits 24 inches minimum below finished grade or as indicated on Drawings. b. Install top of conduits 6 inches minimum below bottom of building slabs. 3. For runs that total more than 400 feet in length,insert handholes/maintenance holes so that no segment exceeds the 400 feet limit. END OF SECTION 26 05 33 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 05 33-9 MAY 2, 2023 CONDUIT AND RACEWAYS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 26 05 34 - OUTLET BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All work specified herein shall be accomplished in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 26 00 00- Electrical General. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. The work under this section shall include all labor, materials, accessories, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install outlet and junction boxes,complete,as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Equipment schedules and specifications are based on the one manufacturer listed in the schedule. Other manufacturers of equal quality and performance may be submitted to the Engineer for review. When substitution of equipment is made the Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of any item and engineered and construction revisions necessary in his or any other contract or trade that may be required to satisfy plans and specifications. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1. B. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD,with gasketed cover. C. Nonmetallic Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 2. D. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. E. Cast-Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover. F. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, with continuous hinge cover and flush latch. 1. Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Nonmetallic Enclosures: Plastic, finished inside with radio-frequency-resistant paint. G. Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to match panelboards. Include metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage and include accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 05 34-1 MAY 2, 2023 OUTLET BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Protection: Anchor boxes securely to formwork. Provide necessary protection to prevent entry of concrete. B. Sequencing, Scheduling: Locations of outlets shown on the Drawings are relative and approximate. Exact locations shall be determined on the job and the outlets accurately set according to the architectural drawings, dimensions, casework kneespace, building conditions, furniture positions and Architect's direction. The right is reserved to change the exact location(10'-0" or less) of any switch, ceiling outlet or other outlet in any room before it is permanently installed without increase in Contract cost. C. All outlet boxes and junction boxes shall be accessible. Any boxes in non-accessible areas (furred ceilings) shall be set flush with barrier surface at a location approved by the Architect. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Acceptable Manufacturers: National Electric Products Company, Thomas & Betts/Steel City,Appleton or Raco. 2.02 OUTLET BOXES A. Standard Outlet Boxes: Boxes and covers shall be galvanized steel not less than 1/16" thick and in every instance, of such form and dimensions as to be adapted to its specific use and location, kind of fixtures to be used and number, size and arrangement of conduits connecting thereto and particularly sized to accommodate the number and size of wires to be contained therein. B. Ceiling outlet boxes shall be 1-1/2" or 3-3/8" deep, 4" octagonal (or 4" square when required due to number of wires). Plaster rings or device covers need not be provided on ceiling boxes. Provide extension rings on ceiling boxes to accommodate number of conductors in box. C. Wall outlet boxes for toggle switches and convenience outlets shall be 1-1/2" or 2-1/8" deep, 4" or 4-11/16" square. Provide with single-device covers (or two-device covers where needed). Covers shall be raised type to compensate for thickness of plaster or gypsum board wall finish. D. Outlet boxes for telecommunication purposes(telephone,data,etc.)shall be 4"x 4"square, 2-1/8" deep. Provide with single device covers (or two-device covers where needed). Covers shall be raised type to compensate for thickness of plaster or gypsum board wall finish. E. Junction boxes shall be as specified for ceiling and wall outlet boxes. Provide flat covers on ceiling outlets to match ceiling finish. Provide blank device type coverplates on wall outlets, of same materials as specified for device coverplates in same room or area. F. Outlet boxes where exposed rigid conduit is used shall be cast ferrous alloy, galvanized or cast aluminum. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 05 34-2 MAY 2, 2023 OUTLET BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 G. Covers: Where outlet boxes are to be capped,blank coverplates shall be used. H. Barriers: Provide barriers between devices operating at different voltages or on separate systems such as normal, critical, or life safety. 2.03 FLOOR BOXES A. Product Description 1. Floor boxes for receptacles and telephone/data outlets shall be rectangular. Boxes shall include a non-metallic concrete cover to prohibit concrete or debris from entering the box during installation. 2. Floor boxes for use in slab on grade installations shall be non-metallic PVC and be suitable for use in slab on grade conditions. 3. Floor boxes for use in above grade installations shall be metallic and suitable for use in concrete slabs above grade. 4. Provide number of compartments as indicated on drawings. 5. Coverplates and flanges shall be brass. 6. Floor box device covers shall meet UL 514C requirements for scrubwater test standards. B. Manufacturer 1. Hubbell PFBRG Series (Non-Metallic) B243 Series (Metallic) 2. Walker/Wiremold 88OMP Series (Non-Metallic) 880S3 (Metallic) C. For poke-thru devices, refer to 2.04 D of Section 26 27 26 -Wiring Devices. 2.04 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Pull and Junction boxes are not completely indicated. They shall be sized and installed where required in accordance with the NEC. B. Pull and Junction boxes shall be the suitable NEMA type number to match the environmental conditions. C. Locations of concealed pull and junction boxes shall be indicated on the record as built drawings for Owner's record. 2.05 CABINETS,FITTINGS, BOXES: GENERAL A. Cabinets shall be in accordance with UL 50, "Electrical Cabinets and Boxes" and NEMA 250, Type 1. Electrical cabinets, boxes and fittings shall be as required for types, sizes, and NEMA enclosure classes. Where not indicated, provide units of types, sizes, and classes appropriate for the use and location. Provide all items complete with covers and accessories required for the intended use. Provide gaskets for units in damp or wet locations. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 05 34-3 MAY 2, 2023 OUTLET BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Construction shall be sheet steel, NEMA 1 class except as otherwise indicated. Cabinets shall consist of a box and a front consisting of a 1-piece frame and a hinged door. Arrange door to close against a rabbet placed all around the inside edge of the frame, with a uniformly close fit between door and frame. Provide concealed fasteners, not over 24" apart, to hold fronts to cabinet boxes and provide for adjustment. Provide flush or concealed door hinges not over 24"apart and not over 6" from top and bottom of door. For flush cabinets, make the front approximately 3/4" larger than the box all around. For surface mounted cabinets make from same height and width as box. Furnish metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage, and furnish accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment. C. Fasteners for general use shall be corrosion resistant screws and hardware including cadmium and zinc plated items. D. Fasteners for damp and wet locations shall be stainless steel screws and hardware. E. Exterior finish shall be gray baked enamel for items exposed in finished locations except as otherwise indicated. F. Painted interior finish,where indicated, shall be white baked enamel. G. Fittings for boxes, cabinets, and enclosures shall be in accordance with UL 5148 and shall be zinc plated steel for conduit hubs,bushings and box connectors. 2.06 UNDERGROUND PULL/JUNCTION BOXES A. Unless noted otherwise, underground enclosures shall be fiberglass, open-bottom and sloped-wall. Covers shall be polymer concrete. Boxes shall be installed in areas expected to experience only light incidental, non-deliberate vehicular traffic (including that from mowers). B. Enclosures shall meet the load requirements and three-point test procedures specified in the industry standard ANSI SCTE 77 2007. Enclosures shall meet the Tier 8 cover load test(for light traffic) of 12,000 lbs. over a 10" x 10"plate. C. Manufacturer's guidelines shall be followed for installation, including 6" gravel bed beneath box for stability and drainage. Concrete collar shall be poured around enclosure to protect the ring and top from impact due to soil erosion. D. Manufacturer 1. Highline Products 2. OZ-Gedney PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 05 34-4 MAY 2, 2023 OUTLET BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. The location of all wall outlets,including light fixtures,receptacles, switches,etc.,shall be checked to see that the outlet will clear any wall fixture, shelving, work tables, sinks, baseboard and fin type convectors,bulletin boards, etc.,that will be installed. B. Exact locations of outlet boxes shall be coordinated with other trades so that outlet will not be covered by ductwork,piping, etc. C. The approximate locations of outlets are indicated on the Drawings. The exact locations shall be determined at the building. The right is reserved to change, without additional cost,the exact location of any outlet, a maximum of 10' before it is permanently installed. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Architectural Placement: Outlets occurring in architectural features shall be accurately centered in same. Space wall switch outlets equidistant from door trims on the strike side of doors as actually installed so that coverplate clears trim. Orientation of outlet boxes (horizontal or vertical) shall be as indicated on architectural elevations. B. Install all outlet boxes in finished areas flush with wall or ceiling finish. Maintain 1/4" or less space between outlet box front and finish wall surface. C. All switches at same level shall be installed on one horizontal line as shown on the Drawings. D. Wall mounted controls, including temperature controls, in a room shall be grouped at the same location and at same mounting heights. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. At all concealed outlets for electric lights, switches, wall receptacles, etc., standard outlet boxes and plaster rings shall be provided. B. Outlet boxes shall be firmly anchored in place and shall be provided with approved fixture studs where required. Outlet boxes shall not depend on the coverplate to hold it secure to the wall. C. Boxes on opposite sides of walls or partitions: Where drawings show back-to-back wiring devices, the devices on opposite sides of the wall shall be offset a minimum of 6". Through-the-wall type boxes shall not be used. Where boxes will be located on opposite sides of walls or partitions located 24" or closer to each other, moldable putty pads shall be installed to completely cover the exterior surfaces of the box within the stud cavity with a ball of putty material used to plug the end of each conduit at its connection to the box. D. All holes cut through new or existing smoke or fire partitions shall be sealed. Sealant shall be 3M Brand Fire Barrier System or approved equal. Seals shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. E. All flush boxes in rated walls that are larger than 16 square inches in area shall be backed as follows: 1-hour wall- I layer of 5/8"gypsum board;2-hour rated wall-2 layers of 5/8" gypsum board. Gypsum shall be fire code and attached to outside surfaces ofbox(es). FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 05 34-5 MAY 2, 2023 OUTLET BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 F. Cast aluminum,threaded hub type boxes with gasketed weatherproof covers shall be used for wet locations where box is surface mounted. G. Location of floor boxes indicated is approximate. The Contractor shall refer to the final furniture layout or request field instructions for the exact location. Consult the Architect prior to installation. END OF SECTION 26 05 34 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 05 34-6 MAY 2, 2023 OUTLET BOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 26 05 35 - LOW VOLTAGE BACKBOARDS & ENCLOSURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Applicable requirements of Section 26 00 00 - Electrical General shall be considered a part of this section and shall have the same force as if printed herein full. B. This document describes the products and execution requirements relating to backboards. C. Product specifications, general design considerations, and installation guidelines are provided in this document. The successful vendor shall meet or exceed all requirements described in this document and/or on the Drawings. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. The work included under this specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation. The Contractor will provide and install all of the required material whether specifically addressed in the Specification or not. B. The work shall include,but not be limited to,the following: 1. Furnish and install all backboards. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED PRODUCTS A. Approved Equipment Backboard Manufacturer(s) 1. Hoover—3/4" Pyro-Guard 2. Standard 3/4" Plywood(treated with fire-retardant paint) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 BACKBOARDS A. Backboards shall be 3/4" void free plywood. Size of backboard shall be 4' x 8' unless noted differently on Drawings. Backboards shall be painted with two (2) coats of gray fire-retardant paint. END OF SECTION 26 05 35 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 26 05 35-1 MAY 2, 2023 LOW VOLTAGE BACKBOARDS AND ENCLOSURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 26 08 00 - COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section. B. The OPR and BOD documentation are included by reference for information only. 1.02 SUMMARY A. This section includes commissioning process requirements for electrical systems, assemblies, and equipment. B. Related Sections: 1. Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for general commissioning process requirements. 1.03 DESCRIPTION A. Refer to Division 01 Section"General Commissioning Requirements" for the description of commissioning. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Refer to Division 01 Section"General Commissioning Requirements"for definitions. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Division 01 Section"General Commissioning Requirements"for CxA's role. B. In addition,provide the following: 1. Certificates of readiness 2. Certificates of completion of installation,prestart, and startup activities. 3. O&M manuals 4. Test reports 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test Equipment Calibration Requirements: Contractors will comply with test manufacturer's calibration procedures and intervals. Recalibrate test instruments immediately after instruments have been repaired resulting from being dropped or damaged. Affix calibration tags to test instruments. Furnish calibration records to CxA upon request. 1.07 COORDINATION FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 26 08 00-1 MAY 2, 2023 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for requirements pertaining to coordination during the commissioning process. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 TEST EQUIPMENT A. All standard testing equipment required to perform startup, initial checkout and functional performance testing shall be provided by the Contractor for the equipment being tested. For example, the electrical contractor of Division 26 shall ultimately be responsible for all standard testing equipment for the electrical systems and controls systems in Division 26. B. Special equipment, tools and instruments (specific to a piece of equipment and only available from vendor) required for testing shall be included in the base bid price to the Owner and left on site. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL DOCUMENTATION REQUIREMENTS A. With assistance from the installing contractors, the CxA will prepare Pre-Functional Checklists for all commissioned components, equipment, and systems. B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Contractor will provide a copy of O&M literature within 45 days of each submittal acceptance for use during the commissioning process for all commissioned equipment and systems. 2. The CxA will review the O&M literature once for conformance to project requirements. 3. The CxA will receive a copy of the final approved O&M literature once corrections have been made by the Contractor. C. Demonstration and Training: 1. Contractor will provide demonstration and training as required by the specifications. 2. A training agenda for each training session must be submitted to the CxA one(1) week prior the training session. 3. The CxA shall be notified at least 72 hours in advance. A copy of the test record shall be provided to the CxA, Owner, and Architect. 4. Engage a Factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain specific equipment. 5. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and stopping,trouble shooting, servicing, and maintaining equipment. 6. Review data in O&M Manuals. 3.02 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 26 08 00-2 MAY 2, 2023 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Perform commissioning tests at the direction of the CxA. B. Attend construction phase controls coordination meetings. C. Participate in electrical systems, assemblies, equipment, and component maintenance orientation and inspection as directed by the CxA. D. Provide information requested by the CxA for final commissioning documentation. E. Include requirements for submittal data, operation and maintenance data, and training in each purchase order or sub-contract written. F. Prepare preliminary schedule for electrical system orientations and inspections, operation and maintenance manual submissions, training sessions, equipment start-up and task completion for owner. Distribute preliminary schedule to commissioning team members. G. During the startup and initial checkout process, execute the related portions of the prefunctional checklists for all commissioned equipment. H. Assist the CxA in all verification and functional performance tests. I. Provide measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data, and provide data acquisition equipment to record data for the complete range of testing for the required test period. J. Gather operation and maintenance literature on all equipment, and assemble in binders as required by the specifications. Submit to OR(45) days after submittal acceptance. K. Coordinate with the CxA to provide a minimum of two (2) weeks advance notice so that verifying of equipment and system start-up and testing can begin. L. Provide written notification to the CM/GC and CxA that the following work has been completed in accordance with the contract documents, and that the equipment, systems, and sub-system are operating as required. 1. Electrical equipment including interior lighting, exterior lighting, lighting controls, generator and all other equipment furnished under this Division. M. Provide training of the Owner's operating staff using expert qualified personnel, as specified. N. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for additional Contractor responsibilities. 3.03 OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for Owner's responsibilities. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 26 08 00-3 MAY 2, 2023 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.04 DESIGN PROFESSIONAL'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for Design Professional's responsibilities. 3.05 CxA'S RESPONSIBILITIES A. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for CxA's responsibilities. 3.06 TESTING PREPARATION A. Certify in writing to the CxA that electrical systems, subsystems, and equipment have been installed, calibrated, and started and are operating according to the Contract Documents. B. Certify in writing to the CxA that electrical instrumentation have been completed and calibrated, that they are operating according to the Contract Documents, and that pretest set points have been recorded. C. Certify in writing that testing procedures have been completed and that testing reports have been submitted, discrepancies corrected, and corrective work approved. D. Inspect and verify the position of each device identified on checklists. E. Check safety cutouts, alarms, and interlocks with smoke control and life-safety systems during each mode of operation. F. Testing Instrumentation: Install measuring instruments and logging devices to record test data as directed by the CxA. 3.07 GENERAL TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. Provide technicians, instrumentation, and tools to perform commissioning test at the direction of the CxA. B. The CxA along with the electrical contractor and other contracted subcontractors shall prepare testing plans,procedures, and checklists for electrical lighting. C. Tests will be performed using design conditions whenever possible. D. Simulated conditions may need to be imposed using an artificial load when it is not practical to test under design conditions. Before simulating conditions, calibrate testing instruments. Provide equipment to simulate loads. Set simulated conditions as directed by the CxA and document simulated conditions and methods of simulation. After tests, return settings to normal operating conditions. E. If tests cannot be completed because of a deficiency outside the scope of the electrical system, document the deficiency and report it to the Owner. After deficiencies are resolved,reschedule tests. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 26 08 00-4 MAY 2, 2023 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.08 ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS, SUBSYSTEMS, AND EQUIPMENT TESTING PROCEDURES A. Equipment Testing and Acceptance Procedures: Testing requirements are specified in individual Division 26 sections. Provide submittals, test data, inspector record and certifications to the CA. B. The work included in the commissioning process involves a complete and thorough evaluation of the operation and performance of all components, systems and sub-systems. The following equipment and systems shall be evaluated: 1. Refer to Commissioning Plan for scope of work. 3.09 DEFICIENCIES/NON-CONFORMANCE, COST OF RETESTING, FAILURE DUE TO MANUFACTURER DEFECT A. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for requirements pertaining to deficiencies/non-conformance, cost of retesting, or failure due to manufacturer defect. 3.10 APPROVAL A. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for approval procedures. 3.11 DEFERRED TESTING A. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for requirements pertaining to deferred testing. 3.12 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall conform to Contract Documents requirements as stated in Division 01. B. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for the AE and CxA roles in the Operation and Maintenance Manual contribution, review and approval process. C. An updated as-built version of the control drawings and sequences of operation shall be included in the final controls O&M manual submittal. 3.13 TRAINING OF OWNER PERSONNEL A. Refer to Division 01 Section "General Commissioning Requirements" for requirements pertaining to training. B. Electrical Contractor. The electrical contractor shall have the following training responsibilities: FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 26 08 00-5 MAY 2, 2023 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Provide the CxA with a training plan two (2) weeks before the planned training. 2. Provide designated Owner personnel with comprehensive training in the understanding of the systems and the operation and maintenance of each piece of commissioned electrical equipment or system. 3. Training shall start with classroom sessions, if necessary, followed by hands on training on each piece of equipment, which shall illustrate the various modes of operation, including startup, shutdown, fire/smoke alarm,power failure, etc. 4. During any demonstration, should the system fail to perform in accordance with the requirements of the O&M manual or sequence of operations, the system will be repaired or adjusted as necessary and the demonstration repeated. 5. The training sessions shall follow the outline in the Table of Contents of the operation and maintenance manual and illustrate whenever possible the use of the O&M manuals for reference. 6. Training shall include: a. Use the printed installation, operation and maintenance instruction material included in the O&M manuals. b. Include a review of the written O&M instructions emphasizing safe and proper operating requirements, preventative maintenance, special tools needed and spare parts inventory suggestions. The training shall include start-up, operation in all modes possible, shut-down, seasonal changeover and any emergency procedures. C. Discussion of relevant health and safety issues and concerns. d. Discuss warranties and guarantees. e. Cover common troubleshooting problems and solutions. £ Explain information included in the O&M manuals and the location of all plans and manuals in the facility. g. Discuss any peculiarities of equipment installation or operation. 7. Hands-on training shall include operation in all modes possible, including manual, shut-down and any emergency procedures and preventative maintenance of all pieces of equipment. 8. The electrical contractor shall fully explain and demonstrate the operation, function and overrides of any local packaged controls. 9. Training shall occur after functional testing is complete, unless approved otherwise by the Owner's. END OF SECTION 26 08 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 26 08 00-6 MAY 2, 2023 COMMISSIONING OF ELECTRICAL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 26 09 23 - OCCUPANCY SENSORS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 WORK INCLUDED A. The Contractor's work shall include all labor, materials, tools, appliances, control hardware, sensor, wire,junction boxes and equipment necessary for and incidental to the delivery,installation and furnishing of a completely operational occupancy sensor lighting control system, as described herein. B. The Contractor/supplier shall examine all general specification provisions and drawings for related electrical work required as work under Division 26. C. The Contractor shall coordinate all work described in this section with all other applicable plans and specifications, including but not limited to wiring, conduit, fixtures, HVAC systems and building management systems. 1.02 EQUIPMENT QUALIFICATION A. Products supplied shall be from a single manufacturer that has been continuously involved in the manufacturing of occupancy sensors for a minimum of five (5) years. Mixing of manufacturers shall not be allowed. B. All components shall be UL Listed, offer a 5-year warranty and meet all state and local applicable code requirements. C. Products shall be manufactured by an ISO 9002 certified manufacturing facility and shall have a defect rate of less than 1/3 of 1%. D. Wall switch products must be capable of withstanding the effects of inrush current. Submittals shall clearly indicate the method used. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The objective of this section is to ensure the proper installation of the occupancy sensor based lighting control system so that lighting is turned off automatically after reasonable time delay when a room or area is vacated by the last person to occupy said room or area. B. The occupancy sensor based lighting control shall accommodate all conditions of space utilization and all irregular work hours and habits. C. The Contractor shall warrant all equipment furnished in accordance to this specification to be undamaged,free of defects in materials and workmanship, and in conformance with the specifications. The supplier's obligation shall include repair or replacement, and testing without charge to the Owner,all or any parts of equipment which are found to be damaged, defective or non-conforming and returned to the supplier. The warranty shall commence upon the Owner's acceptance of the project. Warranty on labor shall be for a minimum period of one(1)year. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 09 23-1 MAY 2, 2023 OCCUPANCY SENSORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Manufacturer shall substantiate conformance to this specification by supplying the necessary documents, performance data and wiring diagrams. Any deviations to this specification must be clearly stated by letter and submitted. B. Submit a lighting plan clearly marked by manufacturer showing proper product, location and orientation of each sensor. C. Submit any interconnection diagrams per major subsystem showing proper wiring. D. Submit standard catalog literature which includes performance specifications indicating compliance to the specification. E. Catalog sheets must clearly state any load restrictions when used with electronic ballasts. 1.05 SYSTEM OPERATION A. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to make all proper adjustments to assure Owner's satisfaction with the occupancy system. 1.06 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The Watt Stopper, or Pre-Approved Equal: For pre-approval, provide all the information listed under section 1.04 A and 1.04 D a minimum of ten(10)working days prior to initial bid date. B. The listing of any manufacturer as "acceptable" does not imply automatic approval. It is the sole responsibility of the electrical contractor to ensure that any price quotations received and submittals made are for sensors which meet or exceed the specifications included herein. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. All devices shall be as indicated on drawings. All associated devices/equipment shall be compatible with the specified systems. B. Additional Watt Stopper product numbers. I. Ceiling sensors: CI-300,CI-305,CI-355,CX-100,CX-105,DT-200,DT-205,DT-300, DT-305, DT-355, UT-300, UT-305, UT-355, WPIR, WT-605, WT-600, WT-1105, WT-1100,WT-2205,WT-2200,WT-2250,WT-2255 2. Wall switch sensors: DSW-100, DSW-200, DSW-301, DSW-302, DW-100-24, DW- 311, PW-100, PW-100-24, PW-200, PW-301, PW-302, PW-311, UW-100, UW-100- 24,UW-200 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 09 23-2 MAY 2, 2023 OCCUPANCY SENSORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. Power and Auxiliary Packs: BZ-50, BZ-150, BZ-200, BZ-250, C120E-P, C277E-P, S 120/27-P 4. Outdoor sensors: EW-200,EW-205-24 5. Low Temperature: CB-100 6. Digital Time Switches: TS-400, TS-400-24 7. Automatic Control Switch: AS-100 C. Wall switch sensors shall be capable of detection of occupancy at desktop level up to 300 square feet, and gross motion up to 1000 square feet. D. Wall switch sensors shall accommodate loads from 0 to 800 watts at 120 volts; 0 to 1,200 watts at 277 volts and shall have 180 degrees coverage capability. E. Wall switch products shall utilize Zero Crossing Circuitry, which increases relay life, protects from the effects of inrush current, and increases sensor's longevity. F. Wall switch sensors shall have no leakage current to load, in manual or in Auto/Off mode for safety purposes and shall have voltage drop protection. G. Where specified, wall switch sensors shall provide a field selectable option to convert sensor operation from automatic-ON to manual-ON. H. Where specified, vandal resistant wall switch sensors shall utilize a hard lens with a minimum 1.0 mm thickness. Products utilizing a soft lens will not be considered. I. Passive infrared sensors shall utilize Pulse Count Processing and Digital Signature Analysis to respond only to those signals caused by human motion. J. Passive infrared sensors shall utilize mixed signal ASIC which provides high immunity to false triggering from RFI(hand-held radios)and EMI(electrical noise on the line),superior performance, and greater reliability. K. Passive infrared sensors shall have a multiple segmented Fresnel lens, in a multiple-tier configuration,with grooves-in to eliminate dust and residue build-up. L. Where specified, passive infrared and dual technology sensors shall offer daylighting footcandle adjustment control and be able to accommodate dual level lighting. M. Dual technology sensors shall be corner mounted to avoid detection outside the controlled area when doors are left open. N. Dual technology sensors shall consist of passive infrared and ultrasonic technologies for occupancy detection. Products that react to noise or ambient sound shall not be considered. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 09 23-3 MAY 2, 2023 OCCUPANCY SENSORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 O. Ultrasonic sensors shall utilize Advanced Signal Processing to adjust the detection threshold dynamically to compensate for constantly changing levels of activity and air flow throughout controlled space. P. Ultrasonic operating frequency shall be crystal controlled at 25 kHz within + 0.005% tolerance, 32 kHz within + 0.002% tolerance, or 40 kHz + 0.002% tolerance to assure reliable performance and eliminate sensor crosstalk. Sensors using multiple frequencies are not acceptable. Q. All sensors shall be capable of operating normally with electronic ballasts, PL lamp systems and rated motor loads. R. Coverage of sensors shall remain constant after sensitivity control has been set. No automatic reduction shall occur in coverage due to the cycling of air conditioner or heating fans. S. All sensors shall have readily accessible, user adjustable settings for time delay and sensitivity. Setting shall be located on the sensor(not the control unit)and shall be recessed to limit tampering. T. In the event of failure, a bypass manual override shall be provided on each sensor. When bypass is utilized,lighting shall remain on constantly or control shall divert to a wall switch until sensor is replaced. This control shall be recessed to prevent tampering. U. All sensors shall provide an LED as a visual means of indication at all times to verify that motion is being detected during both testing and normal operation. V. Where specified, sensor shall have an internal additional isolated relay with Normally Open,Normally Closed and Common outputs for use with HVAC control, Data Logging and other control options. Sensors utilizing separate components or specially modified units to achieve this function are not acceptable. W. All sensors shall have UL rated, 94V-0 plastic enclosures. X. Outdoor motion sensors shall have UL 773A ratings. EWF outdoor sensors shall additionally have UL 1571 ratings. Y. EW-100 outdoor sensors shall cover up to 35 feet, with a field of view of 180 degrees. EW-200 outdoor sensors shall cover up to 52.5 feet, with a field of view of 270 degrees. EN-100 outdoor sensors shall cover up to 35 feet,with a field of view of 90 degrees. EN- 200 outdoor sensors shall cover up to 100 feet, with a long range lens view. Z. EWF outdoor sensors shall include polycarbonate lamp holders that accept PAR 20 or 38 lamps up to 150W per lamp. AA. Outdoor sensors shall have an operating temperature range of -40 degrees F to +130 degrees F. BB. To ensure complete protection from weather elements and exposure, outdoor sensors shall be manufactured with precision double-shot tooling and contain internal silicon gaskets. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 09 23-4 MAY 2, 2023 OCCUPANCY SENSORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2.02 CIRCUIT CONTROL HARDWARE—CU A. Control Units: For ease of mounting, installation and future service, control unit(s) shall be able to externally mount through a 1/2"knock-out on a standard electrical enclosure and be an integrated, self-contained unit consisting internally of an isolated load switching control relay and a transformer to provide low-voltage power. Control unit shall provide power to minimum of two (2) sensors. B. Relay Contacts shall have rating of: 13A- 120 VAC Tungsten 20A- 120 VAC Ballast 20A-277 VAC Ballast C. Control wiring between sensors and controls units shall be Class II, 18-24 AWG, stranded UL Classified, PVC insulated or TEFLON jacketed cable suitable for use in plenums, where applicable. D. Minimum acceptable wire gauge from the circuit control hardware relays shall be #14 AWG. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to locate and aim sensory in the correct location required for complete and proper volumetric coverage within the range of coverage(s) of controlled areas per the manufacturer's recommendations. Rooms shall have 90 to 100% coverage to completely cover the controlled area to accommodate all occupancy habits of single or multiple occupants at any location within the room(s). The locations and quantities of sensors shown on the drawings are diagrammatic and indicate only the rooms which are to be provided with sensors. The Contractor shall provide additional sensors if required to properly and completely cover the respective room. B. It is the Contractor's responsibility to arrange a pre-installation meeting with the manufacturer's factory authorized representative, at the Owner's facility, to verify placement of sensors and installation criteria. C. Proper judgment must be exercised in executing the installation so as to ensure the best possible installation in the available space and to overcome local difficulties due to space limitations or interference of structural components. The Contractor shall also provide, at the Owner's facility, the training necessary to familiarize the Owner's personnel with the operation, use, adjustment, and problem solving diagnosis of the occupancy sensing devices and systems. 3.02 FACTORY COMMISSIONING FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 09 23-5 MAY 2, 2023 OCCUPANCY SENSORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Upon completion of the installation, the system shall be completely commissioned by the manufacturer's factory authorized technician who will verify all adjustments and sensor placement to ensure a trouble-free occupancy-based lighting control system. B. The electrical contractor shall provide both the manufacturer and the Electrical Engineer with ten (10) working days written notice of the scheduled commissioning date. Upon completion of the system fine tuning the factory authorized technician shall provide training to the Owner's personnel in the adjustment and maintenance of the sensors. END OF SECTION 26 09 23 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 09 23-6 MAY 2, 2023 OCCUPANCY SENSORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 26 24 16 - PANELBOARDS PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All work specified herein shall be accomplished in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 26 00 00- Electrical General. B. Provide the panelboards indicated on the Drawings complete with overcurrent protection devices and spaces. C. This section includes panelboards and distribution panelboards and associated auxiliary equipment rated 600 V or less as shown on the drawings. D. Refer to panel schedule and one-line power diagram on drawings for specific requirements of each panel. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. The work under this section shall include all labor, materials, accessories, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install panelboards, complete, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Equipment schedules and specifications are based on the one manufacturer listed in the schedule. Other manufacturers of equal quality and performance may be submitted to the Engineer for review. When substitution of equipment is made, the Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of any item and engineering and construction revisions necessary in his or any other contract or trade that may be required to satisfy plans and specifications. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Panels shall be factory assembled. B. Coordination: Coordinate installation with architectural and structural features,equipment installed under other sections of the Specifications and electrical equipment to ensure panel access and so that clearance minimums are provided. C. Components and installation shall be in accordance with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code,"NEMA PBI, "Panelboards"and UL67 and UL50. D. Panelboards and load centers shall be listed and identified for use with 75 degrees C rated conductors. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Refer to Section 26 00 00- Electrical General for submittal requirements. B. Manufacturers Product Data: FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2624 16-1 MAY 2, 2023 PANELBOARDS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Submit material Specifications and installation data for products specified under Part 2 -Products to include: a. Overcurrent protection devices b. Panelboards C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings to indicate information not fully described by the product data to indicate compliance with the Contract Drawings. 1. Include electrical characteristics and ratings for each panelboard with dimensions, mounting,bus material,voltage, ampere rating,mains,poles and wire connection, and any accessories. Indicate method of ground bus attachment to enclosure. 2. Include bussing diagram indicating each bussing overcurrent protection device position. 3. Provide a schedule indicating overcurrent protection device type, trip and size, poles, frame type,interrupting capacity. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Panelboard manufacturer shall be: 1. Siemens 2. Square D 3. ABB-GE 4. Cutler-Hammer 2.02 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All distribution boards, panels, and overcurrent protection devices shall be UL Listed and bear a UL Label. Where panel serves as service entrance equipment,panel shall bear a UL Label indicating suitability as service entrance equipment. B. Distribution boards and panels shall be of the dead front safety type. C. All distribution boards and panelboards shall be fully rated. D. Provide distribution boards and panels complete with factory assembled circuit breakers or fuses connected to the bus bars in the positions shown on the panel schedules. E. Provide all distribution boards and panelboards fully rated to the A.I.C. ratings noted on the schedules, but not less than 10,000 amperes for 120/208 volt panelboards and not less than 14,000 amperes for 277/480 volt panelboards. All devices in a panelboard shall be rated for the A.I.C. ratings shown for the panelboard. 2.03 BUSSING AND INTERIORS A. All bus bars shall be aluminum. Main lugs and main overcurrent protection devices shall be UL approved for copper or aluminum conductors and shall be of a size range for the conductors indicated on the drawings. Each distribution boards and panel shall contain a FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2624 16-2 MAY 2, 2023 PANELBOARDS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 full size grounding bus. All panelboards shall contain a full size insulated neutral bus unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. B. The neutral and ground bus shall have a sufficient number of lugs to singularly terminate each individual conductor requiring a connection. C. Where designated on panel schedule as "space," include all necessary bussing, device support and connections. Provide blank cover for each space. D. Where specified or indicated on the drawings,provide sub-feed lugs adjacent to the mains or feed-through lugs opposite end of mains and increase box heights to provide additional cable bending and termination space. Lugs to be the same size and capacity as mains and rated for aluminum or copper conductor terminations. 2.04 ENCLOSURES A. Panelboard width shall not be less than twenty inches unless indicated on the drawings(32" minimum for distribution panelboards). B. Provide concealed captive clamping devices, concealed hinges and chrome lock for all flush mounted panels. Key all panels throughout project alike. C. Where two section panels are required, both sections shall have fully rated bus, separate cabinets connected by conduit nipples. Interconnect sections with copper conductors with ampacity equal to rating of main bus. Route phase and neutral conductors together between panels. Provide separate trims for each section. D. Panelboard trims for surface mounted panelboards shall be continuously hinged on one side so that when opened,wiring gutters are completely exposed. E. Provide a label for each branch circuit, feeder, and main circuit breaker in distribution panels,permanently attached per the requirements of Section 26 00 00-Electrical General, 2.02A. F. Cabinets, flush or surface mounted as indicated. NEMA P13-1, Type 1 enclosure, except where the following enclosure requirements are indicated: 1. NEMA 250, Type 3R-Raintight. 2. NEMA 250, Type 3S -Raintight and dust tight. 3. NEMA 250, Type 4X - Corrosion-resistant stainless steel enclosure, watertight, dust tight, and resistant to oil and coolant seepage. This type shall be used in kitchen areas. 4. NEMA 250, Type 12 - Dust tight, drip proof, and resistant to oil and coolant seepage. G. Enclosure shall be fabricated with galvanized steel. Trims shall have electrostatic applied ANSI gray enamel finish and adjustable indicating trim clamps for securing trim to the enclosure. Screwed-on trims shall not be acceptable. Trim shall have an angle support along the bottom serving as a support between trim and enclosure for safe installation and removal of trim. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2624 16-3 MAY 2, 2023 PANELBOARDS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 H. Exterior Panels: Panelboards mounted outside of building shall be in NEMA type 3R enclosures. Panelboards shall have in addition to the standard specified items the following: 1. Piano hinge 2. Seams continuously welded 3. Rolled lip around door and cabinet 4. No knockouts or holes 5. Neoprene gaskets on inside of door 6. Stainless steel hardware 7. Drip hood at top above door 2.05 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Interrupting rating of all circuit breakers in panelboards shall have UL rating of not less than the RMS symmetrical amps indicated on the Drawings at system voltage. Series rated devices are acceptable with the following exceptions: devices used in distribution serving emergency, standby and multiple elevator loads (selective coordination). B. Circuit breakers shall be provided with trip rating and poles as indicated on the drawings or specified herein. C. Multi-pole breakers shall be common trip and common reset; tie handle connection between single pole breakers is not acceptable. D. Branch circuit breakers in lighting and appliance panels shall be quick-make, quick-break, thermal magnetic type bolted to the bus. Circuit breakers in distribution type panelboards shall be bolted to the bus. E. Provide the following special devices and accessories when indicated on the drawings or specified herein. 1. Ground fault interrupting circuit breakers (GFI)where indicated on the drawings. 2. Provide handle lock-on device (to prevent manually turning off device without removal) for all overcurrent devices where indicated on panelboard schedules, and for those protecting circuits serving fire alarm equipment, and for those dedicated for powering emergency battery-powered unit equipment. 3. Provide UL Listed"SWD"switching duty circuit breakers on the devices indicated on the drawings. 4. Provide shunt trip device for electrically tripping circuit breakers indicated on the drawings. 5. OvercutTent protective devices for fire alarm circuits shall have handles that are factory-marked in the color red. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2624 16-4 MAY 2, 2023 PANELBOARDS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Provide from each flush mounted panelboard four (4) 3/4" empty conduits stubbed out above ceiling line and capped. B. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1, "General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less" and manufacturer's written installation instructions. C. Mount panelboards with top circuit breaker not more than 6-6" above finished floor. D. Only one conductor installed under terminal of individual circuit breakers. Form and train conductors in panel enclosure neatly parallel and at right angles to sides of box. Un- insulated conductor shall not extend beyond one-eighth inch from terminal lug. E. Do not splice conductors in panels. Where required, install junction box adjacent to panel and splice or tap conductors in box. F. Mounting and Support 1. Mounting a. Enclosure shall be secured to structure by a minimum of four(4)fastening devices. Panelboards 600 amp and larger shall be secured by a minimum of eight(8) devices. A 1.5 inch minimum diameter round washer shall be used between head of screw or bolt and enclosure. b. Enclosures shall be mounted where indicated on the drawings or specified herein. Support from the structure with fastening device specified. C. Attach enclosure directly to masonry, concrete, or wood surfaces. d. Mounted enclosure on metal channel (strut), which is connected to structure with fastening device specified,for installation on steel structure or sheet rock walls. G. Maintain conductor phase color code requirements described in the conductors and cables section of the specifications. H. A typewritten branch circuit directory(based on as-built conditions) shall be provided for each panelboard and load center,permanently mounted on inside of door in a transparent, protective cover. Room number(s) or room name(s) shall be included in the circuit description in coordination with the final naming/numbering scheme for the project (e.g. "Office Receptacles" shall read"Office Receptacles—Rm. 202, 203"). I. Any circuit breaker provided with arc energy reducing maintenance switch shall be labeled "BREAKER IS PROVIDED WITH ARC ENERGY REDUCING MAINTENANCE SWITCH". Labeling shall be per the requirements of Section 26 00 00—Electrical General 2.02A. J. Install panelboard ground fault circuit interrupter devices in accordance with installation guidelines of NEMA 289, "Application Guide for Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters." K. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, in accordance with manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2624 16-5 MAY 2, 2023 PANELBOARDS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. L. Mounting of all panelboards and all hardware used for mounting shall be in accordance with the seismic criteria per the applicable building code. M. Fusible coordination panelboards shall be shipped without branch circuit fuses installed. Branch circuit fuses shall be shipped separately with the chassis. Where main fuses are specified 100A or greater, equipment shall be shipped with main fuses installed. END OF SECTION 26 24 16 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2624 16-6 MAY 2, 2023 PANELBOARDS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 26 27 26 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All work specified herein shall be accomplished in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 26 00 00- Electrical General. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. The work under this section shall include all labor, materials, accessories, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install wiring devices, complete, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Equipment schedules and specifications are based on the one manufacturer listed in the schedule. Other manufacturers of equal quality and performance may be submitted to the Engineer for review. The following manufacturers are allowed: 1. Hubbell 2. Pass & Seymour 3. Cooper 4. Leviton 5. Thomas &Betts/Steel City 6. Walker/Wiremold When substitution of equipment is made, the Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of any item and engineering and construction revisions necessary in his or any other contract or trade that may be required to satisfy plans and specifications. C. This section includes receptacles, connectors, switches, dimmers, timeclocks and coverplates. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Wiring devices shall comply with applicable sections of NEMA Standard WD-1, NFPA 70,Article 100. B. All special purpose receptacles shall be NEMA standard configuration. C. Comparative devices by acceptable manufacturers are equal. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 WIRING DEVICE DESCRIPTION AND MANUFACTURER—COMMON AREAS A. Single &Duplex Receptacles (20 Amp) 1. Single or duplex type receptacle as indicated. 125V/20/A/2P/3W/G rating - NEMA- 5-20R type. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 27 26-1 MAY 2, 2023 WIRING DEVICES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Face color shall be as specified by the architect. 3. Manufacturer a. Hubbell 5362 B. GFCI Duplex Receptacles 1. Duplex, feed-thru type ground fault current interrupter receptacle with test/reset buttons. 125V/20A/2P/3W/G rating-NEMA 5-20R type conforming to UL#498, UL#943 Class A and NEMA#WD1-4.02. 2. Manufacturer a. Hubbell GF20 Series C. Isolated Ground Single&Duplex Receptacles 1. Single or duplex type receptacles as indicated. 125V/20A/2P/3W/IG rating - NEMA 5-20R type ground internally isolated from receptacle frame and ground pigtail or terminal screw. 2. Manufacturer a. Hubbell IG5352 D. Clock/Flat Screen Receptacles 1. Single type receptacle with a recessed outlet clock hanger type mounting coverplate. 125V/15A/2P/3W/G-NEMA 5-15R type. 2. Manufacturer a. Hubbell RR151CH Series E. Maintained Contact Switches 1. Provide toggle operated switches SPST, DPST, 3-way or 4-way operation as indicated. 277V/20A rating,quiet type,maintained contact,and a green hexagonal ground screw or ground pigtail, and side wired. 2. Manufacturer a. Hubbell 1221 Series (Color to match receptacles). F. Momentary Contact Switches 1. Provide toggle or key operated switches as indicated with single circuit, 3-position center-off operation. 277V/20A rating, quiet type, momentary contact, spring loaded switch, and green hexagonal ground screw or ground pigtail,back and side wired. 2. Manufacturer a. Hubbell HBL 155* (Color to match receptacle). G. Maintained Contact Slider Type Switch(For Multi-Ganging with Dimmers) 1. Slide-operated switch (to match dimmer), single pole, 3-way or 4-way operation as indicated, 120/277V,20A rating. 2. Manufacturer a. Leviton Monet Series FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 27 26-2 MAY 2, 2023 WIRING DEVICES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 b. Lutron Nova T Series H. Slider Type Wall Box Dimmers 1. Slide operated AC solid state type dimmer with positive ON/OFF switching, integral surge protection, voltage stabilized output, RFI filtered and maximum lighting level adjustment. 120V/60Hz, unless noted otherwise, with lettering and/or nameplate as indicated. Dimmers shall have lowest profile available (wattage permitting). 2. Manufacturer Load Type Incandescen Dimmable 0_10V t/ CFL/LED Magnetic low Electronic low Fluorescent/ In Halogen screw base voltage voltage LED Lutron Nova T NT-600-XX NTCL-253P- NTLV-600- NTELV-600- NTSTV-DV- Series XX XX XX XX Leviton 6673-1OX 6672-1LX 6611-PX 6615-PDX SureSlide Series Leviton AW SMG- Renoir Series 7DW I. Illuminated Toggle Switches 1. Single pole, 3-way or 4-way, as indicated, conforining to UL#20,NEMA#WDI- 3.02 and F.S. #W-S-896E. 277V/20A rating, quiet type, maintained contact, and a green hexagonal ground screw or ground pigtail, back and side wired. Red colored toggle to glow when switch is on. 2. Manufacturer a. Hubbell HBL 1221PL J. Weather-Resistant Receptacles 1. All 15- and 20-amp receptacles installed in damp or wet locations shall be listed weather-resistant type. K. Tamper-Resistant Receptacles 1. All 125-volt, 15-and 20-amp receptacles in guest rooms,guest suites and childcare facilities shall be listed tamper-resistant receptacles. 2. All 15- and 20-ampere, 125- and 250-volt nonlocking-type receptacles in the areas indicated below shall be listed tamper-resistant receptacles. a. Business offices and corridors L. Special Duty Receptacles 1. Hospital grade receptacles shall be provided for all outlets in all patient rooms, in all nurse stations or other patient care areas. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 27 26-3 MAY 2, 2023 WIRING DEVICES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. All receptacles supplied from the essential electrical system shall be readily identifiable and have an illuminated face or an indicator light to indicate that there is power to the receptacle. a. Manufacturer 1) Hubbell820OREDLTRA 3. Safety type receptacles shall be provided in all pediatric and psychiatric units. 2.02 COVERPLATE DESCRIPTION AND MANUFACTURER—COVERPLATES A. Flush Mounted Interior Receptacle/Switch Coverplates 1. Single or multi-gang to match device type. Medium size (4-7/8" min.), standard depth, smooth finish with nylon material. 2. Color to match device color. 3. Coverplates in mechanical/electrical equipment rooms and high abuse areas shall be stainless steel,non-magnetic. 4. Coverplates flush mounted in exposed masonry construction shall be jumbo type. 5. Manufacturer a. Hubbell NPJ Series (nylon) b. Hubbell SS Series (stainless steel) B. Weatherproof Device Coverplates 1. Provide weatherproof"in use" cast aluminum lockable covers. Plastic covers are allowed on dwelling balconies. a. Hubbell WP Series b. Thomas &Betts Russell Stoll Series C. Multi-Outlet Raceway 1. Product Description a. Two-piece rectangular surface raceway of length as prescribed. Stainless steel type 304 housing complete with all bends, fittings, couplings, caps and mounting hardware. b. Single 15A/125V grounding outlets UL Labeled and full length ground wire. C. Outlets 18" on centers starting no less than 9" from end. d. Maximum of six outlets per circuit. Where two or more circuits are utilized the outlets shall be on alternate circuits. 2. Manufacturers a. Walker/Wiremold b. Hubbell 2.03 MISCELLANEOUS ITEMS A. Time Switches 1. Electronic Astronomical Schedule Type FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 27 26-4 MAY 2, 2023 WIRING DEVICES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 a. 365 day scheduling, solid state, skip-a-day feature, daylight saving changeover, leap year adjusted with capacitor backup, DPDT-120V/20A rated contacts,light sensor input. b. Acceptable Manufacturer 1) Tork DZS Series (channels as required) B. Photoelectric Control Switches 1. Product Description a. Raintight photoelectric self-contained control for switching. b. Die-cast housing with adjustable sensor. 2. Manufacturers a. AMF/Paragon b. Tork 2100 Series C. Lighting Contactor 1. Product Description a. Multi-pole contactor for switching branch circuit tungsten and ballast lighting and resistant heating loads. b. Number of poles as indicated (paralleling multiple contactors is acceptable),poles rated for 20 amperes @, 600V continuous duty. C. Mechanically held contactor with coil clearing contacts, operating coil voltage to match circuit characteristics. d. Housed in panelboard(if indicated). D. Poke-thru Floor Devices 1. Product Description a. Refer to drawings for specific features. b. Device shall meet UL 514A requirements for scrubwater test standards. 2. Manufacturer a. Hubbell b. Walker/Wiremold C. Thomas &Betts/Steel City PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. All dimmer circuits shall have dedicated neutrals. B. Install decorative plates on switch,receptacle, and blank outlets when indicated. C. Install devices and wall plates flush and level. D. Coordinate the exact location of wiring devices with other trades and architectural features. Do not locate devices on two different architectural finishes such as half on wall tile and half on painted surface,unless noted otherwise. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 27 26-5 MAY 2, 2023 WIRING DEVICES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. Provide plaster rings in areas requiring them due to construction. F. Where more than one device is indicated,arrange in gangs covered with one coverplate per manufacturer's instructions. G. Where dimmer(s) and switch(es) are shown adjacent to one another, switch(es) shall be a maintained contact switch matching dimmer style, so that a common,multi-gang faceplate can be used. H. Provide 6" long ground wire from grounding lug to all switches and receptacles to a screw type bonding device on the conduit or outlet box. END OF SECTION 26 27 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 26 27 26-6 MAY 2, 2023 WIRING DEVICES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 26 28 16 - DISCONNECT SWITCHES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All work specified herein shall be accomplished in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 26 00 00- Electrical General. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. The work under this section shall include all labor, materials, accessories, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install disconnect switches, up to 1200 amps, complete, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. Equipment schedules and specifications are based on the one manufacturer listed in the schedule. Other manufacturers of equal quality and performance may be submitted to the Engineer for review. When substitution of equipment is made, the Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of any item and engineering and construction revisions necessary in his or any other contract or trade that may be required to satisfy plans and specifications. C. This section includes fuses. D. This section includes individually mounted enclosed switches used for the following: 1. Service disconnecting means. 2. Feeder and branch-circuit protection. 3. Motor and equipment disconnecting means. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of switch and fuse accessory, and component indicated, include dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features,performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NEMA AB 1,NEMA KS 1 and UL 98. C. Comply with NFPA 70. D. Comply with NEMA FU 1. E. Source Limitations: Provide fuses from a single manufacturer. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 2628 16-1 MAY 2, 2023 DISSCONNECT SWITCHES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches and components with other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer of fusible and non-fusible switches shall be Cutler-Hammer, General Electric, Siemens or Square D Company. B. Manufacturer of fuses shall be Bussman, Gould Shawmutt or Littelfuse. 2.02 ENCLOSED SWITCHES A. All disconnect switches shall be heavy duty type and 600V rating with lockable handle. B. Enclosed,non-fusible switch: NEMA KS 1. C. Enclosed, fusible switch, 800A and smaller: NEMA KS 1 with clips to accommodate specified fuses and interlocked with cover in closed position. D. Furnish and install all safety type disconnecting switches indicated on the drawings, specified or required by the National and/or State Electrical Code. Switches shall be externally operable. If the size is not shown on the drawings, the subcontractor shall size the disconnect switch in accordance with name plate data of the equipment they serve. E. Coordinate with other trades that may provide unit mounted disconnect switches prior to submission of bids. F. Safety type disconnecting switches shall be heavy duty, 600 volt industrial type with quick-make, quick-break mechanism and interlocking cover which normally cannot be opened when the switch is in the "ON"position. Switches shall be single throw. Fusible switches shall be equipped with fuse clips to receive Bussman fuses. Switches shall have provision for padlocking in the open and closed positions. The operating handle shall be visible in either the on or off position. G. All fused disconnect switches mounted above 6-6" shall be hook stick operable. 2.03 INTERIOR A. Switch blades shall be operated by rotating shaft directly connected to the operating handle mechanism. Switch blades shall be clearly visible in the open position. All switches shall have clear shields over the incoming line lugs. Line shields shall be attached in such a way that switch blade covers or arc shields need not be removed for line installation. Line and load lugs shall be front removable and suitable for copper or aluminum, 60/75 degree wire through 200A sizes, 75 degrees C wire for 400-800A sizes. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 2628 16-2 MAY 2, 2023 DISSCONNECT SWITCHES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Current limiting type RKI dual element time delay fuses shall be furnished and installed as necessary; rating shall be shown on drawing. 2.04 ENCLOSURES A. All switches shall have NEMA type 1 general purpose enclosures unless indicated otherwise on the drawings. NEMA 3R covers shall be side hinged rather than top hinged. NEMA 1 and 3R switches through 200A sizes shall tangential knockouts for conduit line up against walls. NEMA 12 enclosures through 200A sizes shall be UL Listed for conversion to NEMA 3R usage by opening a factory provided drain hole. All types of enclosures shall have metal nameplates affixed to the cover to show the switch type and rating and clearly indicate "ON" and"OFF"direction of handle movement. Provide hubs on all NEMA 4,4X, or 3R type disconnects. B. Provide manufacturer's standard factory applied finish unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide phenolic engraved nameplate for disconnect switches. 2.05 CONTROL POLE A. Where required a direct action interlock or control pole shall be affixed to the switch base in such a manner as to operate positively and only with the opening and closing of the switch power poles. 2.06 CARTRIDGE FUSES A. Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuse; class and current rating indicated; voltage rating consistent with circuit voltage. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions. Install fuses of sizes and with characteristics appropriate for each piece of equipment. B. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Locate disconnect switches to provide working clearance and full accessibility as required by the National Electrical Code. B. Mounting and Support 1. Mounting FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 2628 16-3 MAY 2, 2023 DISSCONNECT SWITCHES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 a. Enclosure shall be secured to structure by a minimum of four (4) fastening devices. A 1.5-inch minimum diameter round washer shall be used between head of screw or bolt and enclosure. b. Enclosure shall be mounted where indicated on the drawings or specified herein. Support from the structure with fastening device specified. Mount with operating handle at 60" AFF, unless other height is indicated. C. Attach enclosure directly to masonry, concrete, or wood surfaces. d. Mounted enclosure on metal channel (strut), which is connected to structure with fastening device. e. Where enclosure is not indicated on a wall or structure, construct a metal channel (strut) free standing frame secured to floor, pad, or other appropriate building structure. C. Do not splice conductors in enclosure. Where required install junction box or wireway adjacent to enclosure and splice or tap conductors in box. Refer to number of conductors in a conduit limitation defined in the conductors and cables section of the Specifications and do not exceed. 3.03 CONNECTIONS A. Install equipment grounding connections for switches with ground continuity to main electrical ground bus. B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 3.04 CLEANING A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of enclosures. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. B. Touch up paint all scratched or marred surfaces with factory furnished touch up paint of the same color as the factory applied paint. END OF SECTION 26 28 16 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 2628 16-4 MAY 2, 2023 DISSCONNECT SWITCHES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 26 28 18 - ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. All work specified herein shall be accomplished in accordance with the applicable requirements of Section 26 00 00- Electrical General. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. The work required under this section of the Specifications consists of installation of enclosed circuit breakers up to 800 amps for use on systems 600 volts and below as indicated on the drawings. This Section includes individually mounted enclosed circuit breakers used for the following: 1. Service disconnecting means. 2. Feeder and branch-circuit protection. 3. Motor and equipment disconnecting means. B. The work under this section shall include all labor, materials, accessories, services and equipment necessary to furnish and install enclosed circuit breakers, complete, as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. C. Equipment schedules and specifications are based on the one manufacturer listed in the schedule. Other manufacturers of equal quality and performance may be submitted to the Engineer for review. When substitution of equipment is made, the Contractor shall be responsible for the costs of any item and engineering and construction revisions necessary in his or any other contract or trade that may be required to satisfy plans and specifications. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of circuit breaker accessory and component indicated, include dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features,performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NEMA AB 1, NEMA KS 1, UL 98, NEMA Standards Publication A131- 1975 and Federal Specifications W-C-37513 classifications. C. Comply with NFPA 70. 1.05 COORDINATION FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 2628 18-1 MAY 2, 2023 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Coordinate layout and installation of circuit breakers and components with other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturer of enclosed circuit breakers shall be Cutler-Hammer, General Electric, Siemens or Square D Company. 2.02 CIRCUIT BREAKERS A. Circuit breakers shall be bolt-on type. B. Molded-Case Circuit Breaker: NEMA AB 1, with interrupting capacity to meet available fault currents. 1. Thermal-Magnetic Circuit Breakers: Inverse time-current element for low-level overloads, and instantaneous magnetic trip element for short circuits. 2.03 ENCLOSURES A. NEMA 1 enclosures shall be fabricated from sheet steel with ANSI 49 gray baked enamel finish. Knockouts shall be provided in enclosures for circuit breakers through 225A frame sizes. Enclosures shall be provided with a means to padlock the circuit breaker in the OFF position. B. NEMA 3R enclosures shall be fabricated from galvanically treated steel with ANSI 49 gray baked enamel finish. Enclosures for circuit breaker through 225A frame sizes shall have provisions for interchangeable conduit hubs. Enclosures shall be provided with a means to padlock the plate-type cover closed. C. Provide manufacturer's factory applied finish unless otherwise indicated. D. Provide phenolic engraved nameplate for circuit breakers. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed circuit breakers for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Locate enclosed circuit breakers to provide working clearance and full accessibility as required by the National Electrical Code. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 26 28 18-2 MAY 2, 2023 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Mounting and Support 1. Mounting a. Enclosure shall be secured to structure by a minimum of four (4) fastening devices. A 1.5" minimum diameter round washer shall be used between head of screw or bolt and enclosure. b. Enclosures shall be mounted where indicated on the drawings or specified herein. Support from the structure with fastening device specified. Mount with operating handle at 60" AFF, unless other height is indicated. C. Attach enclosure directly to masonry, concrete, or wood surfaces. d. Mounted enclosure on metal channel (strut), which is connected to structure with fastening device. e. Where enclosure is not indicated on a wall or structure, construct a metal channel (strut) free standing frame secured to floor, pad, or other appropriate building structure. C. Do not splice conductors in enclosure. Where required install junction box or wireway adjacent to enclosure and splice or tap conductors in box. Refer to number of conductors in a conduit limitation defined in the conductors and cables section of the Specifications and do not exceed. 3.03 CONNECTIONS A. Install equipment grounding connections for circuit breakers with ground continuity to main electrical ground bus. B. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 48613. 3.04 CLEANING A. On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of enclosures. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish. B. Touch up paint all scratched or marred surfaces with factory furnished touch up paint of the same color as the factory applied paint. END OF SECTION 26 28 18 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 26 28 18-3 MAY 2, 2023 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 26 32 13 - EMERGENCY STANDBY GENERATOR SYSTEM AND SWITCHING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Provide an emergency standby power system for supply of power in the event of failure of normal supply, consisting of a liquid cooled engine, an AC alternator and system controls with all necessary accessories for a complete operating system, including but not limited to the items as specified hereinafter. System shall comply with NFPA 110 requirements, and the latest requirements of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency(EPA). B. Generator shall be rated as follows: indicated on drawings at 30%maximum voltage dip. C. Provide automatic operation from automatic transfer switch(es) described within this specification so that the system comes on line fully automatically, and after restoration of utility automatically retransfers load to normal power,shuts down the generator and returns to readiness for another operating cycle. 1.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. The emergency generator system shall conform to the requirements of the following: 1. NFPA 110—Emergency and Standby Power Systems 2. NFPA 30—Flammable and Combustible Liquids Code 3. NFPA 37 — Standard for Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines 1.03 MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS A. This system is designed based upon products of Cummins. Caterpillar, MTAWr etr-oit Diesel Gene ft-e and Kohler are considered to be approved equals provided they meet every portion of this written specification. The manufacturer must be regularly engaged in the production of engine-alternator sets and associated controls for a minimum of ten years, so there is one source of supply and responsibility. The complete engine generator set system shall be supplied by the manufacturer's authorized distributor only. B. When other than the basis of design equipment is proposed, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs associated with engineering and construction modifications necessary in his or any other trade that may be required to satisfy the Contract Documents. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 ENGINE A. The prime mover shall be a liquid cooled,gaseous fueled turbo-charged/after cooled engine of 4-cycle design. The engine shall be a single piece,cast block. Multiple blocks combined are not acceptable. The engine will utilize in-cylinder combustion technology,as required, to meet the applicable EPA NSPS rule for stationary reciprocating compression ignition engines. Additionally,the engine shall comply with the State Emission regulations at the FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2631 13-1 MAY 2, 2023 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 time of installation/commissioning. Actual engine emissions values must be in compliance with applicable EPA emissions standards per ISO 8178-D2 Emissions Cycle at specified ekW/bHP rating. Utilization of the "Transition Program for Equipment Manufacturers" (also known as "Flex Credits") to achieve EPA certification is not acceptable. The in- cylinder engine technology must not permit unfiltered exhaust gas to be introduced into the combustion cylinder. B. The engine is to be cooled with a unit-mounted radiator, fan, water pump, and closed coolant recovery system providing visual diagnostic means to determine if the system is operating with a normal engine coolant level. The radiator shall be designed for operation in 104 degrees Fahrenheit(40 degrees Celsius) ambient temperature. C. The intake air filter with replaceable element must be mounted on the unit. Full pressure lubrication shall be supplied by a positive displacement lube oil pump. The engine shall have a replaceable oil filter with internal bypass and replaceable elements. Engine coolant and oil drain extension must be provided to outside the mounting base for cleaner and more convenient engine servicing. A fan guard must be installed for personnel safety. D. The engine shall have a battery charging DC alternator with a transistorized voltage regulator. Remote 2-wire starting shall be by a solenoid shift, electric starter. E. Engine speed shall be governed by an electronic governor to maintain alternator frequency within 0.5% from no load to full load alternator output. Steady state regulation is to be+ or-0.25%. F. The engine fuel system shall be designed for operation on natural gas having a BTU content of 1000 BTU per cubic foot. A carburetor, secondary regulator,fuel lock-off solenoid and all piping must be installed at the point of manufacturing, terminating at a single pipe opening external to the mounting base. Pressure required is 7 - 16 inches water column, or .35-.50 psi when generator is operating at 100% load. For gensets above 150 kW, pressure required is 1.5 psi minimum, 5 psi maximum. G. Sensing elements to be located on the engine for low oil pressure shutdown,high coolant temperature (low coolant level shutdown), overspeed shutdown, overcrank shutdown. These sensors are to be connected to the control panel using a wiring harness with the following features: wire number labeling on each end of the wire run for easy identification, a molded rubber boot to cover the electrical connection on each sensor to prevent corrosion and all wiring to be run in flexible conduit for protection from the environment and any moving objects. H. The engine shall have an engine-mounted, thermostatically-controlled jacket water heater to aid in quick starting. It will be of adequate wattage as recommended by the engine manufacturer. The Contractor shall provide proper branch circuit from normal utility power source. 2.02 ALTERNATOR A. The alternator shall be a 4-pole revolving field type, for 3-phase, 60 Hz(voltage indicated on Drawings)with a brushless exciter. The stator shall be directly connected to the engine flywheel to ensure permanent alignment. The generator shall meet temperature rise FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2631 13-2 MAY 2, 2023 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 standards for UL 1446 Class H or better varnish. All leads must be extended into the AC connection panel. The alternator shall be protected by an automatic reset field circuit breaker, or over excitation sensing voltage regulator. B. Load acceptance shall be 100% of nameplate kW rating and meet the requirements of NFPA 110. The engine-generator set shall be so designed that instantaneous voltage dip upon application of nameplate kW/kVA shall not exceed 30% with recovery to stable operation within 10 seconds. Sustained voltage dip data is not acceptable. C. A solid state voltage regulator designed and built by the engine-generator set manufacturer must be used to control output voltage by varying the exciter magnetic field to provide + or - 1% regulation during stable load conditions. Should an extremely heavy load drop the output frequency, the regulator shall have a voltage drop of 4 volts/hertz to maximize motor starting capability. The frequency at which this drop operation begins must be adjustable, allowing the generator set to be properly matched to the load characteristics ensuring optimum system performance. D. The voltage regulator must contain a limiting circuit to prevent output voltage surges in excess of 110% of rated voltage during generator set operation. On a loss of the sensing signal, the voltage regulator must shutdown to prevent an overvoltage condition from occurring. A voltage regulator that can go into a full field condition is unacceptable. A rheostat shall provide a minimum of+or- 10%voltage adjustment from the rated value. E. A NEMA 1 panel that is an integral part of the generator set must be provided to allow the installer a convenient location in which to make electrical output connections. An isolated neutral lug must be included by the generator set manufacturer to ensure proper sizing. F. The electric plant shall be mounted with vibration isolators on a welded steel base which shall permit suitable mounting to any level surface. G. Terminal lugs shall be factory-installed for load-side feeder connections. 2.03 CONTROLS A. All engine alternator controls and instrumentation shall be designed, built, wired, tested and shock mounted in a NEMA 1 enclosure to the engine-generator set by the manufacturer. It shall contain panel lighting and a fused DC circuit to protect the controls. It shall provide true RMS sensing to ensure AC metering accuracy to within+/- I%of rated AC voltage (L-L and L-N) and current. B. The engine-generator set shall contain a complete engine start-stop control which starts the engine on closing contacts and stops the engine on opening contacts. A cyclic cranking limiter shall be provided to open the starting circuit after five attempts if the engine has not started within that time. Engine control modules must be solid state plug-in type for high reliability and easy service. The engine controls shall also include a 3-position selector switch with the following positions: RUN/AUTO/STOP. A red annunciator lamp shall be energized when the switch is not in auto. C. Safety shutdown monitoring system shall include solid state engine monitor with individual lights and one common external alarm contact indicating the following FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2631 13-3 MAY 2, 2023 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 conditions: Overcrank shutdown, Overspeed shutdown, High Coolant Temperature (Low Coolant Level shutdown), Low Oil Pressure shutdown. Monitoring system shall include lamp test switch or engine control switch for manual reset of tripped conditions. Engine RPM is to be monitored by an independent permanent magnet sensor. If there is a failure in this circuit, the engine must shut down immediately and illuminate an overspeed condition. D. Engine control panel instrumentation shall consist of an oil pressure gauge, coolant temperature gauge, DC ammeter and an engine run hour meter located on the unit control panel. Alternator instrumentation must include analog or digital meters to indicate output voltage, amperage, kW,kVA, PF and frequency. E. Provide the following items installed at the factory: 1. Pre-alarms for low coolant temperature, high water temperature and low oil pressure must be provided to anticipate possible problems before the system becomes inoperative. Yellow lights labeled on the control panel will illuminate should the associated parameter be exceeded. 2. Engine battery voltage is to be monitored to detect abnormal voltage levels. A light labeled on the control panel will illuminate should a low voltage condition be experienced. 3. One alarm horn to actuate upon engine fault shutdown. 4. Emergency stop button to immediately shut down the engine upon actuation. 2.04 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT A. The following equipment is to be installed at the engine-generator set manufacturer's facility: 1. Exhaust silencer(s) shall be provided of the size as recommended by the manufacturer and shall be critical grade. The silencer(s) shall have a flexible, seamless, stainless steel exhaust connection and rain cap. All components must be properly sized to assure operation without excessive back pressure when installed. 2. Provide an automatic dual rate battery charger manufactured by the engine- generator set supplier. The automatic equalizer system shall monitor and limit the charge current to 10 amps. The automatic battery charger shall be rated no less than 10 amps. The charger must have a maximum open circuit voltage of 35 volts and be protected against a reverse polarity connection. The battery charger is to be factory installed on the generator set. Due to line voltage drop concerns, a battery charger mounted in the transfer switch will be unacceptable. 3. A heavy duty, lead acid battery set shall be provided by the generator set manufacturer of adequate voltage and amperage capacity to start and operate the engine. Provide all intercell and connecting battery cables as required. 4. Weather Protective Sound Attenuated Enclosure: The engine-generator set shall be factory enclosed in a heavy gauge steel sound attenuated enclosure constructed with a 90 degrees radiator air discharge plenum, corner posts and powder coated baked finish. The enclosure is to have large, easily opened doors to allow access to the engine, alternator and control panel. Each door is to be fitted with stainless steel, lockable hardware with identical keys. Padlocks do not meet this specification. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2631 13-4 MAY 2, 2023 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. The following equipment is to be provided by the engine-generator set manufacturer and shipped loose with the unit with required control wiring furnished and installed by Contractor: I. Provide a recess mounted remote annunciator panel for wall mounting. The panel shall have an ALARM switch that when activated silences the audible alarm. A TEST switch must be included to verify the lights are functional. The following alarms shall be included for the remote annunciator: a. Overcrank b. Low Coolant/Water Temperature C. High Coolant/Water Temperature Pre-Alarm d. High Coolant/Water Temperature Shutdown e. Low Oil Pressure Pre-Alarm f. Low Oil Pressure Shutdown g. Overspeed h. Low Fuel Alarm i. Control Switch Not In Auto j. Provide a minimum of four(4) spare lights for other potential alarms. 2. Provide a manual breakglass station located on the weatherproof enclosure for shutdown of the generator. Station shall be appropriately labeled. PART 3-AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH 3.01 SCOPE A. Furnish and install each 4-pole automatic transfer switch with amperage, voltage, and withstand rating as shown on the plans. Each automatic transfer shall consist of a double throw power transfer switch mechanism and a microprocessor controller to provide automatic operation. All transfer switches and controllers shall be the products of the same manufacturer. 3.02 CODES AND STANDARDS A. Each automatic transfer switch and controls shall conform to the requirements of: I. UL 1008— Standard for Transfer Switch Equipment 2. IEC 947-6-1 Low-voltage Switchgear and Control gear;Multifunction equipment; Automatic Transfer Switching Equipment 3. NFPA 70—National Electrical Code 4. NFPA 110—Emergency and Standby Power Systems 5. IEEE Standard 446 — IEEE Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems for Commercial and Industrial Applications 6. NEMA Standard ICSIO-1993 (formerly ICS2-447) — AC Automatic Transfer Switches 7. UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment 3.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2631 13-5 MAY 2, 2023 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Each automatic transfer switch shall be based on ASCO 7000 Series. Other acceptable manufacturers shall be Russell. 3.04 MECHANICALLY HELD TRANSFER SWITCH A. Each transfer switch shall be electrically operated and mechanically held. The electrical operator shall be a momentarily energized, single-solenoid mechanism. Main operators which include overcurrent disconnect devices, linear motors or gears shall not be acceptable. The switch shall be mechanically interlocked to ensure only two possible positions, normal or emergency. B. Inspection of all contacts shall be possible from the front of the switch without disassembly of operating linkages and without disconnection of power conductors. Switches rated 600 amps and higher shall have front removable and replaceable contacts. All stationary and moveable contacts shall be replaceable without removing power conductors and/or bus bars. C. Designs utilizing components of molded-case circuit breakers, contactors, or parts thereof, which are not intended for continuous duty, repetitive switching or transfer between two active power sources are not acceptable. D. Each ATS shall be provided with fully rated overlapping neutral transfer contacts. The neutrals of the normal and emergency power sources shall be connected together only during the transfer and retransfer operation and remain connected together until power source contacts close on the source to which the transfer is being made. The overlapping neutral contacts shall not overlap for a period greater than 100 milliseconds. Neutral switching contacts which do not overlap are not acceptable. 3.05 MICROPROCESSOR CONTROLLER A. The controller's sensing and logic shall be provided by a single built-in microprocessor for maximum reliability, minimum maintenance, and the ability to communicate serially through an optional serial communication module. B. All customer connections shall be wired to a common terminal block to simplify field- wiring connections. C. The controller shall meet or exceed the requirements for Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC) as follows: 1. IEEE472 (ANSI C37.90A)Ring Wave Test 2. ENC55011 1991 Class A Conducted and Radiated Emission 3. EN61000-4-2 Electrostatic Discharge Immunity, Direct Contact&Air Discharge 4. EN61000-4-3 Radiated Electromagnetic Field Immunity 5. EN61000-4-4 Electrical Fast Transient Immunity 6. EN61000-4-5 Surge Immunity 7. ENV50141 HF Conducted Disturbances Immunity 3.06 ENCLOSURE FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2631 13-6 MAY 2, 2023 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Each ATS shall be furnished in a NEMA type 1 enclosure unless otherwise shown on the plans. 3.07 STANDARD FEATURES A. A three position momentary-type test switch shall be provided for the test/automatic/reset modes. The test position will simulate a normal source failure. The reset position shall bypass the time delays on either transfer to emergency or retransfer to normal. B. A set of DPDT gold-flashed contacts rated 10 amps, 32 VDC shall be provided for a low- voltage engine start signal. The start signal shall prevent dry cranking of the engine by requiring the generator set to reach proper output,and run for the duration of the cool down setting,regardless of whether the normal source restores before the load is transferred. C. Auxiliary contacts, rated 10 amps, 250 VAC shall be provided consisting of one contact, closed when the ATS is connected to the normal source and one contact closed,when the ATS is connected to the emergency source. D. LED indicating lights (16 mm industrial grade,type 12) shall be provided; one to indicate when the ATS is connected to the normal source(green)and one to indicate when the ATS is connected to the emergency source(red). E. LED indicating lights (16 mm industrial grade, type 12) shall be provided and energized by controller outputs. The lights shall provide true source availability of the normal and emergency sources, as determined by the voltage sensing trip and reset settings for each source. F. An inphase monitor shall be provided in the controller. The monitor shall control transfer so that motor load inrush currents do not exceed normal starting currents, and shall not require external control of power sources. The inphase monitor shall be specifically designed for and be the product of the ATS manufacturer. The inphase monitor shall be equal to ASCO Feature 27. G. Engine Exerciser: The controller shall provide an internal engine exerciser. The engine exerciser shall allow the user to program up to seven different exercise routines. For each routine, the user shall be able to: 1. Enable or disable the routine. 2. Enable or disable transfer of the load during routine. 3. Set the start time, -time of day -day of week -week of month(1 st,2nd, 3rd, 4th, alternate or every). 4. Set the duration of the run. At the end of the specified duration the switch shall transfer the load back to normal and run the generator for the specified cool down period. A 10-year life battery that supplies power to the real time clock in the event of a power loss will maintain all time and date information. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2631 13-7 MAY 2, 2023 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 H. System Status: The controller LCD display shall include a "System Status" screen which shall be readily accessible from any point in the menu by depressing the "ESC" key a maximum of two (2) times. This screen shall display a clear description of the active operating sequence and switch position. For example, Normal Failed Load on Normal TD Normal to Emerg 2minl5s Controllers that require multiple screens to determine system status or display "coded" system status messages, which must be explained by references in the operator's manual, are not permissible. I. Data Logging: The controller shall have the ability to log data and to maintain the last 99 events, even in the event of total power loss. The following events shall be time and date stamped and maintained in a non-volatile memory: 1. Event Logging a. Data and time and reason for transfer normal to emergency b. Data and time and reason for transfer emergency to normal C. Data and time and reason for engine start d. Data and time engine stopped e. Data and time emergency source available f. Data and time emergency source not available 2. Statistical Data a. Total number of transfers b. Total number of transfers due to source failure C. Total number of days controller is energized d. Total number of hours both normal and emergency sources are available 3.08 TRANSITION FEATURES A. Each transfer switch shall be open-transition type. 3.09 ACCESSORIES A. Provide two double throw contacts that operate when emergency source voltage is present at the switch terminals,ASCO accessory 18B. B. Provide two double throw contacts that operate when normal source voltage is present at the switch terminals,ASCO accessory 18G. C. Provide a selective load disconnect circuit (Elevator Contacts) that operates with an adjustable time delay from 1 second to 5 minutes before transfer of the ATS to emergency and resets I second to 5 minutes after the retransfer to normal, ASCO accessory 3IZ. 3.10 CONTROLLER DISPLAY AND KEYPAD FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2631 13-8 MAY 2, 2023 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. A 4-line, 20-character LCD display and keypad shall be an integral part of the controller for viewing all available data and setting desired operational parameters. Operational parameters shall also be available for viewing and limited control through the serial communications input port. The following parameters shall only be adjustable via DIP switches on the controller: 1. Nominal line voltage and frequency 2. Single or three phase sensing 3. Operating parameter protection 4. Transfer operating mode configuration (Open transition, Closed transition, or Delayed transition) All instructions and controller settings shall be easily accessible, readable and accomplished without the use of codes, calculations, or instruction manuals. 3.11 VOLTAGE, FREQUENCY AND PHASE ROTATION SENSING A. Voltage and frequency on both the normal and emergency sources (as noted below) shall be continuously monitored,with the following pickup,dropout,and trip setting capabilities (values shown as %of nominal unless otherwise specified): Parameter Sources Dropout/Trip Pickup/Reset Undervolta e N&E,30 70 to 98% 85 to 100% Overvolta e N&E,30 102 to 115% 2%below tri Underfre uenc N&E 85 to 98% 90 to 100% Overfrequency N&E 102 to 110% 2%below tri Voltage unbalance N&E 5 to 20% 1%below drop-out B. Repetitive accuracy of all settings shall be within 0.5%over an operating temperature range of-20 degrees C to 60 degrees C. C. Voltage and frequency settings shall be field adjustable in 1% increments either locally with the display and keypad or remotely via serial communications port access. D. The controller shall be capable (when activated by the keypad or through the serial port) of sensing the phase rotation of both the normal and emergency sources. The source shall be considered unacceptable if the phase rotation is not the preferred rotation selected(ABC or CBA). E. Source status screens shall be provided for both normal and emergency to provide digital readout of voltage on all 3 phases, frequency, and phase rotation. 3.12 TIME DELAYS A. An adjustable time delay of 0 to 6 seconds shall be provided to override momentary normal source outages and delay all transfer and engine starting signals. Capability shall be provided to extend this time delay to 60 minutes by providing an external 24 VDC power supply. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2631 13-9 MAY 2, 2023 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. A time delay shall be provided on transfer to emergency, adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes, for controlled timing of transfer of loads to emergency. C. Two time delay modes(which are independently adjustable)shall be provided on retransfer to normal. One time delay shall be for actual normal power failures and the other for the test mode function. The time delays shall be adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes. Time delay shall be automatically bypassed if the emergency source fails and the normal source is acceptable. D. A time delay shall be provided on shut down of engine generator for cool down,adjustable from 0 to 60 minutes. E. A time delay activated output signal shall also be provided to drive an external relay(s)for selective load disconnect control. The controller shall have the ability to activate an adjustable 0 to 5 minute time delay in any of the following modes: 1. Prior to transfer only 2. Prior to and after transfer 3. Normal to emergency only 4. Emergency to normal only 5. Normal to emergency and emergency to normal 6. All transfer conditions or only when both sources are available F. The controller shall also include the following built-in time delays for optional Closed Transition and Delayed Transition operation: 1. 1 to 5 minute time delay on failure to synchronize normal and emergency sources prior to closed transition transfer. 2. 0.1 to 9.99 second time delay on an extended parallel condition of both power sources during closed transition operation. 3. 0 to 5 minute time delay for the load disconnect position for delayed transition operation. G. All time delays shall be adjustable in 1 second increments, except the extended parallel time,which shall be adjustable in .01 second increments. H. All time delays shall be adjustable by using the LCD display and keypad or with a remote device connected to the serial communications port. 3.13 WITHSTAND AND CLOSING RATINGS A. Each ATS shall be rated to close on and withstand the available RMS symmetrical short circuit current at the ATS terminals with the type of overcurrent protection shown on the plans. B. Each ATS shall be UL Listed in accordance with UL 1008 and be labeled in accordance with that standard's 1.5 and 3-cycle long-time ratings. ATSs which are not tested and FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2631 1 3-1 0 MAY 2, 2023 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 labeled with 1.5 and 3-cycle (any breaker) ratings and have series or specific breaker ratings only are not acceptable. 3.14 SERVICE REPRESENTATION A. The ATS manufacturer shall maintain a national service organization of company- employed personnel located throughout the contiguous United States. The service center's personnel must be factory trained and must be on call 24 hours a day, 365 days a year. B. The manufacturer shall maintain records of each switch, by serial number, for a minimum of 20 years. C. The automatic transfer switch(es)shall be supplied by the generator set distributor in order to establish and maintain a single source of system responsibility and coordination. PART 4-MISCELLANEOUS 4.01 CONCRETE PAD A. Generators located outdoors shall be mounted on a steel reinforced concrete pad,raised 6" above grade, a minimum of 12" thick, or as recommended by the generator manufacturer. Pad shall extend a minimum of 12" beyond the extents of the generator on all four sides. Concrete pad shall be chamfered on all four edges. Pad shall be sloped to prevent the collection of water. 4.02 SERVICE PLATFORM A. For installations where the service door opening is greater than 30" above grade, provide aluminum stairs and work platform with handrails for accessing generator enclosure doors. Platform shall be a minimum of 42" wide. Decking shall be slip resistant perforated extruded aluminum self-mating deck. The legs shall be designed to support the stair and landing sections. 4.03 FACTORY TESTING A. Before shipment of the equipment,the engine-generator set shall be tested under rated 0.8 PF load for performance and proper functioning of control and interfacing circuits. A factory test report shall be made available upon request. Tests shall include: 1. Verifying all safety shutdowns are functioning properly. 2. Both no-load and full-load steady state voltage checks shall be tested and measured line to line and speed (frequency) checks. Line-to-line current at rated voltage shall also be tested and measured. 4.04 OWNER'S MANUALS A. Three (3) sets of Owner's manuals specific to the product supplied must accompany delivery of the equipment. General operating instruction,preventive maintenance, wiring diagrams, schematics and parts exploded views specific to this model must be included. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2631 1 3-1 1 MAY 2, 2023 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 4.05 INSTALLATION A. The Contractor shall install the complete electrical generating system including all fuel connections in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations as reviewed by the Engineer. B. The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner a manufacturer tank chart with inches-to-gallon conversions. The Contractor shall mount a laminated copy of the chart inside the generator module for use by the delivery operator. 4.06 SERVICE A. Supplier of the electric plant and associated items shall have permanent service and parts facilities in this trade area. These facilities shall comprise a permanent force of factory trained service personnel on 24-hour call,experienced in servicing this type of equipment, providing warranty and routine maintenance service to afford the Owner maximum protection. Delegation of this service responsibility for any of the equipment listed herein will not be considered fulfillment of these specifications. Service contracts shall also be available. 4.07 WARRANTY A. The standby electric generating system components, complete engine-generator set and automatic transfer switch shall be warranted by the manufacturer against defective materials and factory workmanship for a period of five years. Such defective parts shall be repaired or replaced at the manufacturer's option. In addition, all labor for the replacement of these parts for the engine-generator set and transfer switch will be covered for the first two years. The warranty period shall commence when the standby power system is first placed into service. Multiple warranties for individual components(engine, alternator, controls, etc.) will not be acceptable and must be covered by the engine manufacturer. Satisfactory warranty documents must be provided. Also, in the judgment of the specifying authority, the manufacturer supplying the warranty for the complete system must have the necessary financial strength and technical expertise with all components supplied to provide adequate parts, service and warranty support. 4.08 CHECKOUT & STARTUP A. The supplier of the electric generating plant and associated items covered herein shall provide factory trained technicians to check out the completed installation and to perform an initial startup inspection to include: 1. Ensuring the engine starts(both hot and cold)within the specified time. 2. Verification of engine parameters within specification. 3. Set no load frequency and voltage. 4. Test all automatic shutdowns of the engine-generator. 5. Perform a full load test of the electric plant, ensuring full load frequency and voltage are within specification by using building load supplemented with load banks. Test shall be per NFPAl10-2013 Section 7.13. 4.09 SUBMITTALS FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2631 1 3-1 2 MAY 2, 2023 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Provide complete sets of Engineering Submittals for approval prior to production release, showing all components,in addition to the engine,generator and automatic transfer switch. Submittals shall include complete system interconnection wiring diagrams and manufacturer's warranty form indicating compliance with these specifications. 4.10 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The emergency power system has been designed to the specified manufacturer's electrical and physical characteristics, including the equipment sizing, spacing, mounts, electrical wiring, ventilation equipment, fuel and exhaust components. Should any substitutions be made, the Contractor shall bear responsibility for the installation, coordination and operation of the system as well as any engineering and redesign costs which may result from such substitutions. Alternate equipment suppliers shall furnish equipment submittals 14 days prior to bid date for approval to bid. As part of the submittals, the substitute manufacturer shall supply as a minimum engine, alternator, control panel and automatic transfer switch wiring diagrams and schematics. A separate list of all printed circuit boards with part numbers and current pricing must also be included. END OF SECTION 26 32 13 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2631 1 3-1 3 MAY 2, 2023 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 26 41 13 - LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. The work covered by this section of the specifications consists of the design, labor, materials and items of service required for the completion of a functional and unobtrusive lightning protection system as approved by the Engineer, and in strict accordance with this section of the specifications and any applicable Contract Drawings. B. If any departure from the Contract Drawings or Submittal Drawings covered below are deemed necessary by the Contractor, details of such departures and reasons therefore shall be submitted as soon as practicable to the Engineer for approval. No such departures shall be made without the prior written approval of the Engineer. C. The following specifications and standards of the latest issue form a part of this specification: 1)Lightning Protection Institute Installation Code LPI 175; 2)UL Standard 96A; 3)ANSI C2-81; 4)NFPA 780. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The lightning protection system shall conform to the requirements of the Lightning Protection Institute and NFPA Standards for Lightning Protection Systems. The LPI System Certification shall be furnished and submitted to the Owner, Architect, and Engineer prior to Substantial Completion. B. The system to be furnished under this specification shall be UL Listed by an approved and fully certified manufacturer in good standing of the Lightning Protection Institute. All material specified for this work is manufactured by Thompson Lightning Protection, Inc., Hicks Lightning Protection, East Coast Lightning, Erico or equal. 1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Complete shop drawings shall include details and drawings showing the type, size and locations of all air terminals, bonding plates, down conductors, conductor fasteners, masonry anchors and ground rods shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior to start of work. B. Samples and pertinent catalog data shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval upon request. C. Drawings must bear the stamp of the certified master installer designer. D. Copy of certifications of designer must be submitted. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 STANDARD FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2641 13-1 MAY 2, 2023 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. All equipment used in this installation shall be UL inspected, approved and properly labeled. B. All equipment shall be new,the product of a single manufacturer as outlined above, and of a design and construction to suit the application where it is used in accordance with accepted industry standards and Code requirements. C. All materials shall conform to UL-96A Class 11 requirements. 2.02 EQUIPMENT A. All materials shall be the minimum size and weight in accordance with LPI and NFPA requirements. B. All vertical conductors shall be copper and roof-mounted horizontal conductors shall be copper or aluminum(conductors must be galvanically compatible with adjoining surfaces). C. Air terminals shall be copper or aluminum (selection to be galvanically compatible with adjoining surfaces), and shall project 10" minimum above the object to be protected. Locate and space according to LPI and NFPA requirements. Length and diameter of terminals shall be dependent upon material used and installation class. D. Air terminal bases shall have bolt pressure cable connections and shall be securely mounted with stainless steel screws or bolts. Bases on built-up tar and gravel roofs shall be secured properly and shall have a minimum surface contact area of 18.5 sq. inches. Crimp type connectors at bases are not acceptable. E. Ground rods shall be a minimum of 3/4" in diameter and 10'-0" long. Exothermic connections shall be used for below grade installations of rods and cables. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The installation shall be accomplished by an experienced installer who is a Certified Master Installer of the LPI manufacturer as listed above or his authorized LPI Certified Master Installer representative. B. All equipment shall be installed in a neat workmanlike manner in the most inconspicuous manner possible. C. Ground rods shall be installed 3'-0"from building foundation. Resistance to ground at each ground rod shall not exceed 5 ohms. D. The number of down conductors, size, type and location of grounds and building connections shall be as required by the standards of this specification. A complete cable system with related air terminals, splices, and bonds,etc., shall be used on the roof. Down conductors shall be installed in 1-1/4" PVC conduit concealed in or behind building walls FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2641 13-2 MAY 2, 2023 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 or columns. Down conductors shall be connected to ground rods not less than 18" below the bottom of the floor slab. E. Copper equipment shall not be connected to aluminum surfaces except by means of an LPI approved bimetal transition fitting. Lead coating is not to be accepted as a bimetal transition. I. Metals acceptable for use with copper: a. Nickel, brass,tin, lead, stainless steel, and morsel. 2. Metals acceptable for use with aluminum: a. Magnesium,zinc,galvanized steel, stainless steel,lead, and wrought iron. F. Bending radius of lightning protection conductors shall not be less than 8", nor shall any bend form an angle less than 90 degrees. G. Metal equipment, piping or other objects within 6' of a lightning conductor shall be connected to the lightning protection system. H. Underground and intermediate ground loop conductors shall be copper. 3.02 COORDINATION A. All roof mounted mechanical equipment shall be bonded to lightning protection grid. B. It shall be the responsibility of the lightning protection installer to interconnect with other building ground systems, including electrical, water and telephone systems and also to ensure that proper arresters have been installed on the power service. C. A ground loop encircling a structure . . . . D. Lightning protection installer shall obtain approval from the Architect and the roofing contractor regarding method of fastening conductors and air terminals to the roof,parapet and appurtenances prior to installation. 3.03 COMPLETION A. The lightning protection installer shall secure and deliver the LPI-IP Master Certificate or UL Master Label to the project manager, Engineer, and Architect for delivery to the Owner upon completion of the installation prior to Substantial Completion. This shall include a complete testing inspection(visual checks along with continuity testing to verify system effectiveness from roof to grade, and ground testing to validate the concealed underground electrodes function). The Contractor shall bear the cost of any repair/modification/additions to ensure the Lighting Protection System is complete, tested, certified, and fully functional." B. The Contractor shall also submit copies of as-built shop drawings along with the completed LPI Certified System Application. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2641 13-3 MAY 2, 2023 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Once Lightning Protection System has been verified, tested, and certified, the Owner is responsible for setting-up a Quality Assurance Program designed for maintenance of the Lightning Protection System. This includes a yearly visual inspection to look for loose fittings,improper anchoring,damage to exposed cables,replacement of removed hardware, or damage to surge protection devices. At five year intervals, have a"testing"inspection by bringing in a knowledgeable individual (inspector or installer) for a more thorough examination. END OF SECTION 26 41 13 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2641 13-4 MAY 2, 2023 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 26 43 13 - SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPD) PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. These specifications describe the electrical and mechanical requirements for a hybrid high- energy power conditioning filter incorporating surge protective devices and high- frequency electrical line noise filtering. The specified unit shall provide effective high- energy surge protection, surge current diversion, high-frequency attenuation, and line control in ANSI/IEEE C62.41.1-2002 environments connected on the load side of the facility's meter or main overcurrent device. The unit shall be connected in parallel with the facility's wiring system. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The requirements of the following standards shall become a part of this Specification by reference: 1. American National Standards Institute and Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (ANSI/IEEE C62.41.1-2002, C62.41.2-2002, and C62.45-2002) 2. Canadian Standards Association(CSA) 3. Federal Information Processing Standards Publication 94 (FIPS PUB 94) 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association(NEMA) 5. National Fire Protection Association(NFPA 70 (NEC), 75 and 78) 6. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL 1449 3rd Edition and 1283) The unit shall be UL and cUL 1449 3rd Edition Listed as a Surge Protective Device. B. Acceptable Manufacturers 1. Current Technology 2. Thor Systems 3. Emerson/ADT C. Testing: The unit shall be thoroughly factory-tested before shipment. Testing of each unit shall include, but shall not be limited to, quality assurance checks, MCOV and clamping voltage verification tests. D. Warranty: The manufacturer shall provide a minimum 5-year warranty from date of shipment against failure when installed in compliance with applicable national/local electrical codes and the manufacturer's installation, operation and maintenance instructions. E. Submittal Documentation: Documentation of unit's UL 1449 3rd Edition Voltage Protective Rating(VPR) shall be included as required product data submittal information. Manufacturer shall make available upon request certified documentation of applicable Location Category Testing in full compliance with ANSI/IEEE C62.41.1-2002, C62.41.2- 2002, and C62.45-2002 Guidelines. The manufacturer shall furnish an equipment manual with installation, operation, and maintenance instructions for the specified unit. Electrical FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2643 13-1 MAY 2, 2023 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPD) DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 and mechanical drawings shall be provided by the manufacturer which show unit dimensions, weights, mounting provisions, connection details and layout diagram of the unit. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL MATERIALS REQUIREMENT A. The unit shall provide all modes of protection: line to neutral, line to ground, and neutral to ground. B. High Frequency Tracking Filter: The unit shall include a UL 1283 high-frequency extended range tracking filter. The filter shall reduce fast rise-time,high-frequency,error producing transients and electrical line noise to harmless levels, thus eliminating disturbances which may lead to system upset. C. Unit Status Indicators: The unit shall include solid-state, long-life, externally mounted LED visual status indicators that indicate the status of MOV fusing. D. Transient Counter: Front cover mounted transient counter (LCD or LED) shall totalize surges for all modes. E. Nominal discharge current rating shall be I„20 kA. F. Minimum SPD fault current ratings shall be 100Kaic. PART 3-APPLICATIONS 3.01 SERVICE ENTRANCE/MAIN DISTRIBUTION APPLICATIONS A. The following table will indicate appropriate model numbers based on the electrical system ampacity. Surge current ratings are based on the Site Shield Risk Assessment Spreadsheet (TSI 067 3gSSH/r3). B. SPDs connected to service equipment shall be listed as a type 1 SPD per UL1449 3rd Edition and shall have integral disconnect switch,and shall be connected to bus on the load side of the main switch. SERVICE ENTRANCE/MAIN DISTRIBUTION APPLICATIONS Manufacturers' Models Electrical System Surge Protection Ampacity @ SPD Install kA Current FTh ASCO point Per Per Tech Mode Phase TG 300 56075 4000—6000A 300 600 TG 250 560 50 2000—3000A 250 500 TG 200 TSrc 200 56040 1200— 1600A 200 400 TG 150 TSrc 150 56032 600— 1000A 150 300 TG 100 TSrc 100 56025 125—400A 100 1 200 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2643 13-2 MAY 2, 2023 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPD) DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.02 PANELBOARDS AND BRANCH PANEL APPLICATIONS A. As indicated on the Drawings, provide a panelboard with externally mounted SPD with high-frequency filtering per requirements listed in this specification. Provide number of breakers, voltage/phases as indicated on the Drawings. SPD shall physically connect to the top or bottom of panelboard allowing for SPD to be repaired or replaced without opening the dead front of the panelboard. B. SPDs connected to Panelboards or Branch Panels shall be listed as a type 1 or type 2 SPD per UL1449 3rd Edition and shall be circuit breaker connected. C. The following table indicates appropriate model numbers based on the electrical system ampacity. Surge current ratings are based on Site Shield Risk Assessment Spreadsheet (attached#TSI 067 3gSSH/r3). SPDs connected to Panelboards and Branch Panels shall be listed as a type 1 or type 2 SPD per UL 1449 3rd Edition and shall be 30 Amp circuit breaker connected. PANELBOARDS AND BRANCH PANEL APPLICATIONS Manufacturer/Model Nos. Electrical System Surge Protection )Current Thor ASCO Ampacity @ SPD Install Per Per Tech S stems Point Mode Phase EGPE2 TSnc 150 440 P30 600A 150 300 150 EGPE2 TSnc 100 440 P20 125—400A 100 200 100 EGPE2 TSnc 050 440 P10 Up to 100A 50 100 60 PART 4-EXECUTION 4.01 INSTALLATION A. Install wiring connection to distribution system as indicated on the Drawings. Wiring length should be kept to an absolute minimum(3' or less) and be as straight as possible. B. Wire sizes to Service Entrance/Main Distribution SPD should be 4#6, 1#6 G- 1" conduit. C. Wire sizes to Panelboard and Branch Panel SPD should be as indicated 4#10, 1#I OG—3/4" conduit. END OF SECTION 26 43 13 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2643 13-3 MAY 2, 2023 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES (SPD) DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 26 51 00 - LIGHTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section specifies the lighting system requirements. B. All fixtures shall be current source,provided with lamps ready to use. 1.02 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE A. Refer to another division for the ceiling systems. B. Lighting system shall be coordinated with the ceilings. 1.03 SUBSTITUTIONSNALUE ENGINEERING/PRICING A. Substitution/value engineering requests shall be accompanied by complete manufacturer's data with model numbers, cut sheets with options indicated, and a full photometric report. For exterior lighting, a computer generated point-by-point calculation shall be provided. B. All substitution requests shall be submitted in completion to Engineer at least 10 days prior to bid date. C. Pricing for lighting fixtures shall be separate from pricing for lighting controls (occupancy sensors,relay controls, dimming). PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 BALLASTS A. All fluorescent lamp ballasts shall be low-loss, high power factor Class "P," with "A" sound rating and shall bear UL and CBM certifications. Ballast case temperature shall not exceed 90 degrees C. B. All fluorescent fixtures shall be equipped with program-start ballasts. Multi-lamp ballasts shall be parallel-wired. C. Fluorescent fixtures located in an outdoor environment shall be equipped with a minimum 0°F cold temperature ballast. D. Linear and compact fluorescent lamp ballasts shall be electronic by Advance, General Electric, Osram Sylvania, or Universal. E. Electronic driver for LED fixtures shall include the following: 1. Rated for a minimum 50,000 hours of life 2. Class A sound rating FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 2651 00-1 MAY 2, 2023 LIGHTING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. Total Harmonic Distortion: 15%or less 2.02 LAMPS A. Fluorescent lamps shall be energy saving type, 3,500 degrees K, CRI 75, of size and wattage as scheduled on the Drawings, unless noted otherwise on Light Fixture Schedule. They shall be General Electric or equal as manufactured by Sylvania or Philips unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. Lamps shall have a rated life of 20,000 hours minimum at three (3)hours per start. B. Incandescent lamps shall be of type, size and voltage as scheduled on the Drawings. Lamps shall be of the extended service type with a rated life of 2,500 hours. Reflector lamps (R and PAR) shall have a rated life of 2,000 hours for the standard type and 4,000 hours for the "Quartz" or "Krypton" types. Quartz lamps shall be clear with a rated life of 2,000 hours. 2.03 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Letter designations beside outlet symbols on Drawings correspond to letter designations in Lighting Fixture Schedule. B. Recessed incandescent fixtures, where used in an insulated ceiling, shall be equipped with thermal protection and shall bear the UL Label indicating the suitability for such use. C. Lens material for recessed fluorescent fixtures shall be 100% virgin acrylic, 0.125" thick in a square prism pattern similar to KSH-K-12 or as scheduled in Lighting Fixture Schedule. D. Site lighting poles shall meet or exceed the local wind loading requirements of authority having jurisdiction. E. Concrete pole bases shall be required for site lighting poles. F. Recessed lighting fixtures installed in the building thermal envelope (e.g. attic) shall be IC rated and labeled with enclosures that are sealed and gasketed to limit air leakage between conditioned and non-conditioned spaces. G. Recessed lighting fixtures that penetrate the membrane of a rated ceiling/floor assembly shall be either listed and labeled, or installed within an enclosure, so that the ceiling rating is maintained. Rated enclosures shall be by Fire Rated Product Specialties (FRPS) or approved equal. H. All linear fluorescent lighting fixtures (with double-ended lamps) shall have a factory- installed, concealed disconnecting means for each ballast. 2.04 LED LUMINAIRES A. UL or ETL Listed and labeled FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 2651 00-2 MAY 2, 2023 LIGHTING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Minimum 80CRI C. 5 Year warranty minimum D. Tested to LM-79, LM-80 and TM-21 standards E. Lumen Maintenance: 70%lumen output for 50k hours F. Power Factor: 0.9 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 LIGHTING FIXTURES A. Provide lighting fixtures at all locations indicated by distinctive symbols or notes on the Drawings. B. Lighting fixtures shall be secured to ceiling grid with clips or screws and two #12 steel wires mounted to opposite corners of light fixture secured to structure. C. Locations of lighting fixtures on the electrical drawings are approximate. Refer to Architectural reflected ceiling plan for actual locations of fixtures and mounting heights. D. Lighting fixtures installed in plaster and stucco ceiling shall have plaster frame and shall be of the flanged type. E. Fixtures recessed in concealed-spline tile and in gypsum board ceilings shall be flanged. F. Surface or recessed fixtures in or on plastered ceilings shall be supported from pieces of support channel spanning across the main supporting channels and shall not depend on the metal lath for support. G. Each recessed lighting fixture shall have a trim to match the type of ceiling(exposed grid, metal panel, etc.) in which it is being installed, except where noted otherwise on the plans. H. Each lighting fixture recessed in a concrete wall shall have a junction box or wiring compartment provided inside the fixture housing. Provide conduit access into the fixture concealed. END OF SECTION 26 51 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 2651 00-3 MAY 2, 2023 LIGHTING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 27 00 00 - COMMUNICATIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Applicable requirements of Division 01 General Requirements shall be considered a part of this section and shall have the same force as if printed herein full. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Specifications, Standards and Codes: All work shall be in accordance with the following: L The 2017 edition of the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) with local Amendments 2. The 2018 edition of the Life Safety Code (NFPA 101) 3. Building Industry Consulting Service International(BICSI) 4. Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) 5. American National Standards Institute(ANSI) 6. The National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) 7. The National Electrical Safety Code (ANSI C-2) 8. National Electrical Manufacturers Association(NEMA) 9. Telecommunications Industries Association(TIA) 10. Electronic Industries Association(EIA) 11. Institute of Electrical&Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 12. Underwriters Laboratories(UL) 13. American Standards Association(ASA) 14. Federal Communications Commission(FCC) 15. Occupational Safety and Health Administration(OSHA) 16. American Society of Testing Material (ASTM) 17. Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA) 18. Local city and county ordinances governing electrical work 19. In the event of conflicts, the more stringent provisions shall apply. 1.03 SCOPE A. The work to be performed under this section of the Specifications shall include all labor, material, equipment and tools required for the complete installation of the work indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. All materials, that are a part of the Communications Infrastructure and necessary to its proper operation, but not specifically mentioned and shown on the Drawings, shall be furnished and installed without additional charge. C. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary to each other and what is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. If a discrepancy exists between the Drawing and Specifications, the higher cost shall be included, and the engineer shall be notified of the discrepancy. 1.04 WORK INCLUDED FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 27 00 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 The Communications Infrastructure installed and work performed under this Division of the Specifications shall include but not necessarily be limited to the following: A. Firestopping B. Grounding and Bonding C. Communications Pathways,Underground Ducts and Raceways D. Identification and Labeling E. Commissioning F. Communications Entrance Protection G. Communications Cabinets,Racks and Enclosures H. Communications Termination Blocks and Patch Panels I. Cable Management and Ladder Racks J. Communications Rack Mounted Power Protection and Power Strips K. Structured Media Enclosures L. Voice/Data Cabling Infrastructure M. CATV Cabling Infrastructure N. Copper,Fiber Optic, and Coaxial Backbone Cabling O. Copper,Fiber Optic, and Coaxial Horizontal Cabling P. Communications Faceplates and Connectors Q. Communications Patch Cords and Station Cords R. Wireless Access Points S. Audio-Visual Systems T. Underground Raceway Excavation, Backfill and Compaction U. Concrete Work for Duct Banks, Maintenance Holes, Handholes, Vaults and Restoration 1.05 DEFINITIONS A. Terms: The following definitions of terms supplement those of the General Requirements and are applicable to Division 27 - Communications: FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 270000 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 I. Provide: As used herein shall mean "furnish, install and test (if applicable) complete." 2. Infrastructure: As used herein shall mean cable, conduit, raceway, cable tray or j-hooks with all required boxes, fittings, connectors, and accessories; completely installed. 3. Work: As used herein shall be understood to mean the materials completely installed, including the labor required. 1.06 DRAWINGS A. Drawings are generally diagrammatic and show the arrangement and location of pathways, outlets, support structures and equipment. The Contractor shall coordinate the structural and finish conditions affecting his work and arrange his work accordingly. Should conditions on the job make it necessary to make adjustments to pathways or materials, the Contractor shall so advise the Engineer and secure approval before proceeding with such work. B. Where exact locations are required by equipment for stubbing-up and terminating conduit concealed in floor slabs, the Contractor shall provide shop drawings, equipment location drawings, foundation drawings, and any other data required to locate the concealed conduit before the floor slab is poured. C. Materials, equipment or labor not indicated but which can be reasonably inferred to be necessary for a complete installation shall be provided. Drawings and Specifications do not undertake to indicate every item of material, equipment, or labor required to produce a complete and properly operating installation. D. The right is reserved to make reasonable changes in locations of equipment indicated on Drawings prior to rough-in without increase in contract cost. E. The Contractor shall not reduce the size or number of conduit runs indicated on the Drawings without the written approval of the Engineer. F. Any work installed contrary to Contract Drawings shall be subject to change as directed by the Engineer, and no extra compensation will be allowed for making these changes. G. The location of equipment, support structures, outlets, and similar devices shown on the Drawings are approximate only. Do not scale Drawings. Obtain layout dimensions for equipment from Architectural plans unless otherwise noted. H. Schematic diagrams shown on the Drawings indicate the required functions only. The technology of a particular manufacturer may be used to accomplish the functions indicated without exact adherence to the schematic Drawings shown. Additional labor and materials required for such deviations shall be furnished at the Contractor's expense. L Verify the ceiling type, ceiling suspension systems, and clearance above hung ceilings prior to ordering cabling and associated hardware. Notify the Engineer of any discrepancies. J. Review all architectural drawings for modular furniture. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 270000 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 K. Portions of these Drawings and Specifications are abbreviated and may include incomplete sentences. Omissions of words or phrases such as "the Contractor shall," "shall be," "as indicated on the Drawings," "in accordance with," "a," "the" and"all are intended" shall be supplied by inference. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals for the following systems: 1. Firestopping 2. Grounding and Bonding 3. Communications Pathways,Underground Ducts and Raceways 4. Identification and Labeling 5. Commissioning 6. Communications Entrance Protection 7. Communications Cabinets,Racks and Enclosures 8. Communications Termination Blocks and Patch Panels 9. Cable Management and Ladder Racks 10. Communications Rack Mounted Power Protection and Power Strips 11. Structured Media Enclosures 12, Voice/Data Cabling Infrastructure 13. CATV Cabling Infrastructure 14. Copper,Fiber Optic, and Coaxial Backbone Cabling 15. Copper,Fiber Optic, and Coaxial Horizontal Cabling 16. Communications Faceplates and Connectors 17. Communications Patch Cords and Station Cords 18. Wireless Access Points 19. Audio-Visual Systems 20. Underground Raceway Excavation, Backfill and Compaction 21. Concrete Work for Duct Banks, Maintenance Holes, Handholes, Vaults and Restoration B. Submit for approval, details of all materials, equipment and systems to be furnished. Work shall not proceed without the Owner and/or the Project Manager's approval of the submitted items. Three(3)copies of the following shall be submitted: 1. Submittals for individual systems and equipment assemblies that consist of more than one item or component shall be made for the system or assembly as a whole. Partial submittals will not be considered, reviewed or stored, and such submittals will not be returned except at the request and expense of the Contractor. 2. Contractor shall generate shop drawings. Modify reviewed and accepted shop drawings to include revisions based upon completion of work. Submit shop drawings with record drawings on hard copy. 3. Shop drawings shall include equipment racks, patch panels, termination blocks, connection details,rack mounting details and any other details not included in the construction drawings. C. Any materials and equipment listed that are not in accordance with Specification requirements maybe rejected. D. The approval of material, equipment, systems and shop drawings is a general approval subject to the Drawings, Specifications and verification of all measurements at the job. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 270000 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Approval does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of shop drawing errors. The Contractor shall carefully check and correct all shop drawings prior to submission for approval. E. Materials List: Submit a complete materials list indicating all equipment to be provided as part of this section. F. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples of finishes, colors, and textures as requested. G. Complete details of equipment mounting configuration. H. Manufacturing assembly and testing procedures and forms. 1. Installation testing and check out procedures and forms to be used by the Contractor and Architect and/or Consultant. J. The conduit plans, equipment plans, riser diagrams, block diagrams and details are to be submitted in the latest version of MicroStation or AutoCAD, and shall be submitted on a minimum of `D' size drawings. Documents submitted in any other manner including marked up sets of the bid documents shall receive immediate rejection and will not be reviewed. A complete set of as-built documents will be issued at the completion of the project inclusive of CAD files on CD. K. Submittals issued in a manner inconsistent with the requirements of these specifications shall receive immediate rejection and will not be reviewed. Submittals issued containing materials, products and/or equipment that is not listed or approved by addendum shall receive immediate rejection and will not be reviewed. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equipment and materials required for installation under these Specifications shall be the current model and new (less than one [1] year from the date of manufacture), unused and without blemish or defect. B. Equipment shall bear labels attesting to Underwriters Laboratories, where subject to label service. Manufacturers of equipment and materials pertinent to these items shall have been engaged in the manufacture of said equipment a minimum of three (3)years and, if so directed by the Owner,be able to furnish proof of their ability by submitting affidavits and descriptive data about their product including size and magnitude comparable to requirements specified herein. 1.09 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS A. The Contractor shall have total responsibility for the coordination and installation of the work shown and described in the Drawings and Specifications. The Contractor shall be a company specializing in the design, fabrication and installation of integrated communications systems. B. Communications Systems specified shall be installed under the direction of a qualified Contractor. Qualification requirements shall include submittal by the Contractor to the Architect of the following: FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 270000 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. List of previous projects of this scope, size and nature; including names and sizes of projects, description of work,time of completion and names of contact persons for reference. 2. Shall certify that they are manufacturer-authorized for work to be performed. C. Contractor must employ at least one (1) full-time Registered Communications Distribution Designer(RCDD). 1.10 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. The Contractor shall coordinate Communications work with that of other sections as required ensuring that the entire communications work will be carried out in an orderly, complete and coordinated fashion. 1.11 SITE INVESTIGATION A. Prior to submitting bids of the project, visit the site of the work to become aware of existing conditions that may affect the cost of the project. Where work under this project requires extension, relocation, reconnections or modifications to existing equipment or systems, the existing equipment or systems, shall be restored to their original condition before the completion of this project. 1.12 PERMITS A. Obtain all permits and inspections for the installation of this work and pay all charges incident thereto. Deliver to the Owner all certificates of said inspection issued by authorities having jurisdiction. 1.13 RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS A. All work that would adversely affect the normal operation of the other portions of the Owner's property shall be done at a time other than normal working hours. Normal working hours shall be considered 8 a.m. to 5 p.m. Monday through Friday. B. Prior to submitting bids on the project, visit the site of the work to become aware of existing conditions that may affect the cost of the project. C. Where work under this project requires extension, relocation, reconnections or modifications to existing equipment or systems, the existing equipment or systems shall be restored to their original and operating condition. Remove all equipment indicated to be demolished,including outlets, devices,raceways and support structures. D. Care shall be exercised in the removal and storage of equipment indicated to be relocated or removed and reused. Prior to placing back into service, equipment shall be cleaned and marred or chipped paint surfaces touched-up. E. Provide all coring, cutting and patching to existing walls, floors, etc., required for the removal of existing work or the installation of new work. 1.14 OPERATION& MAINTENANCE MANUALS FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 270000 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. The Contractor shall furnish three(3) sets of operational and maintenance manuals for all systems furnished. The manuals shall include component lists, instructions for care, operation instructions, instructions for ordering replacement equipment and personnel to contact for warranty work. 1.15 APPROVALS A. Deviations from this specification must be documented in writing to the Architect and Engineer at least twenty-one (21)business days prior to the bid date. B. Complete catalogue data, product specifications and technical information on alternative equipment must be provided including all associated cost savings or additions, including but not limited to equipment, equipment installation, power wiring and materials, programming, documentation and project management. 1.16 DELIVERY&HANDLING A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirements Section. B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. C. Storage and Protection: Store materials and equipment in an area protected from harmful weather conditions and at temperature conditions recommended by manufacturer. After initial installation, protect equipment from exposure to dust, dirt, paint and other contaminants. 1.17 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. B. Scheduling: Coordinate taking field measurements, fabrication schedule and deliveries with construction progress schedule to avoid construction delays. 1.18 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: All equipment and labor provided under this section is warranted for two (2) years from Substantial Completion or System Commissioning, whichever occurs first. B. During the warranty period, the Contractor shall perform quarterly preventative maintenance inspections on all installed equipment. C. Nothing in the above warranty shall apply to material which has been misused or abused as follows: neglect by the owner, defects or damage caused by work or failure of work by others, ordinary wear or normal equipment adjustment. D. Additionally, any unauthorized modifications, repairs or tampering shall constitute termination of the warranty. 1.19 TRAINING FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 270000 - 7 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. The Contractor shall provide four (4) hours of on-site training for operational purposes and forty(40)hours of training for maintenance purposes at the turnover of the project. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Where equipment is identified by manufacturer and catalog number, it shall be as the base of requirements for quality and performance. Where manufacturers for equipment are identified by name, the Contractor may submit for approval, similar equipment of other manufacturers as substitution. The Engineer's decision as to whether the submitted equipment is acceptable shall be final and binding. B. All changes necessary to accommodate the substituted equipment shall be made at the Contractor's expense, and shall be as approved by the Engineer. Detailed drawings indicating the required changes shall be submitted for approval at the time the substitution is requested. C. If substitutions are made in lieu of device specified; form, dimension, design and profile shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. D. Submit request for approval of substitute materials in writing to the Architect at least ten days prior to bid opening. 2.02 MATERIALS A. All materials used in this work shall be new and shall bear the inspection label of Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. or certification by other recognized laboratory. B. The published standards and requirements of the Telecommunications Industries Association (TIA), National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), the American National Standard Institute (ANSI), the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE), and the American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM), are made a part of these Specifications and shall apply wherever applicable. C. Materials and equipment furnished shall be of current production by manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such items, for which replacement parts are available. D. When more than one unit of the same class of equipment or material is required, such units shall be the products of a single manufacturer or partner manufacturers that offer a certified solution. E. Components of an assembled unit need not be products of the same manufacturer, but must offer a certified end-to-end solution. F. Manufacturers of equipment assemblies,which include components made by others, shall assume complete responsibility for the final assembled unit. G. Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for the intended service. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 270000 - 8 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION OF CONDITIONS A. Prior to the start of work,the Contractor shall carefully inspect the installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where installation may properly commence. Start of work indicates acceptance of conditions. B. Install equipment in accordance with applicable codes and regulations, and the referenced standards. C. In the event of a discrepancy, immediately notify the Project Manager. D. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions and discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.02 PROTECTION OF SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT A. Protect materials and equipment from damage during storage at the site and throughout the construction period. Equipment and materials shall be protected during shipment and storage against physical damage, dirt,theft,moisture, extreme temperature and rain. B. Damage from rain, dirt, sun and ground water shall be prevented by storing the equipment on elevated supports and covering the sides with securely fastened protective rigid or flexible waterproof coverings. C. During installation, equipment shall be protected against entry of foreign matter on the inside and be vacuum cleaned both inside and outside before testing, operating or painting. D. As determined by the Project Manager, damaged equipment shall be fully repaired or shall be removed and replaced with new equipment to fully comply with requirements of the Contract Documents. E. Damaged paint on equipment and materials shall be repainted with painting equipment and finished with the same quality of paint and workmanship as used by the manufacturer. 3.03 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT A. Equipment shall be installed in location and manner that will allow access for maintenance and inspection. B. Working spaces shall be not less than specified in the National Electrical Code(NEC) for voltages specified. C. Where the Project Manager determines that the Contractor has installed equipment not accessible for operation and maintenance, equipment shall be removed and reinstalled as directed by the Project Manager, at no additional cost to the Owner. "Accessible" is defined as being capable of being reached without the use of ladders or without climbing FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 270000 - 9 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 or crawling under or over obstacles such as motors, pumps, belt guards, transformers, piping and duct work. 3.04 CLEANING A. During construction, and prior to Owner acceptance of the building, remove from the premises and dispose of packing material and debris caused by communications work. B. Remove dust and debris from interiors and exteriors of electrical equipment. Clean accessible current carrying elements prior to being energized. C. General: Upon completion of the work, remove excess dust & debris, materials, equipment, apparatus, tools and similar items. Leave the premises clean, neat and orderly. 3.05 COMPLETION A. Results Expected: Systems shall be complete and operational and controls shall be set and calibrated. Testing, start-up and cleaning work shall be complete. B. Maintenance Materials: Special tools for proper operation and maintenance of the equipment provided under this Specification shall be delivered to the Owner. 3.06 TESTING AND VERIFICATION A. See specific Division 27 sections for testing parameters of sub-systems. B. The Contractor shall verify that requirements of this Specification are met. Verification shall be through a combination of analyses, inspections, demonstrations and tests, as described below. C. Verification by inspection includes examination of items and comparison of pertinent characteristics against the qualitative or quantitative standard set forth in the Specifications. Inspection may require moving or partially disassembling the item to accomplish the verification, included as part of the work at no additional cost to the Owner. D. The Contractor shall verify by demonstrations and/or tests that the requirements of this Specification have been met. The Contractor shall demonstrate that the communications systems, components and subsystems meet Specification requirements in the "as- installed" operating environment during the "System Operation Test." The Contractor shall measure and record temperature,humidity and other environmental parameters. E. The Contractor shall schedule and coordinate the final acceptance tests. The Contractor shall provide necessary instruments, labor and materials required for tests. Provide equipment manufacturer's technical representative and qualified technicians. F. The Contractor shall satisfy all items detailed in the final acceptance check-off list(punch list). The list shall be a complete representation of specified installation requirements. At the time of final acceptance punch list items shall be corrected until the system is found to be acceptable to the Owner and the Project Manager. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 27 00 00 - 10 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 END OF SECTION 27 00 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 27 00 00 - 11 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 27 05 10 - FIRESTOPPING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Applicable requirements of Division 27 - Communications shall be considered a part of this section and shall have the same force as if printed herein full. B. This document describes the products and execution requirements relating to Firestopping for Communications Systems. C. Product specifications, general design considerations, and installation guidelines are provided in this document. The successful vendor shall meet or exceed all requirements described in this document and on the drawings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data from manufacturer's specifications. 1.03 WORK INCLUDED A. The work included under this Specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation. The Contractor will provide and install all of the required material whether specifically addressed in the Specification or not. B. The work shall include,but not be limited to the following: I. Furnish and install all firestopping materials. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED PRODUCTS A. Approved Firestopping Manufacturer(s) I. Flamestopper Thru-Wall Fitting-Wiremold Company(Firestop Devices) 2. Unique Firestop Products (Firestop Devices) 3. STI Firestop Products (Firestop Devices,Putties, Caulks, Sealants, etc.) 4. Hilti(Putties, Caulks, Sealants, etc.) 2.02 TYPES OF PRODUCTS A. Sealants 1. Intumescent Firestop Sealants and Caulks 2. Latex Firestop Sealant 3. Acrylic Water-Based Sealant 4. Silicone Firestop Sealants and Caulks FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2705 10 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 FIRE STOPPING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 5. Firestop Putty 6. Firestop Collars 7. Wrap Strips 8. 2-Part Silicone Firestop Foam 9. Firestop Mortar 10. Firestop Pillows 11. Elastomeric Spray 12. Accessories: 13. Forming/Damming Materials: Mineral fiberboard or other type as per manufacturer recommendation B. Firestop Devices L Thru-Wall Fitting(Flamestopper by Wiremold) a. The firestop device box shall be constructed of 16 gage G90 steel. b. The firestop device intumescent block shall be constructed of a graphite base material with expansion starting at 375°F and an unrestrained expansion between 6 to 12 times. The intumescent block shall be held securely by the box in order to prevent tampering and damage during installation. C. The firestop device shall have doors which can be adjusted to prevent materials from penetrating the device if the device is empty or completely full. The doors shall be constructed of 16 gage G90 steel with No. 10-32 screws use to adjust opening size. d. The firestop device shall be available for 2" and 4" trade size EMT conduit. C. The firestop device shall be available in safety yellow powder coat, custom colors and an unpainted galvanized finish. 2. Threaded Firestop Device(Unique Firestop Products) a. Threaded steel sleeve device incorporating flat washers secured by threaded device shall be installed around cables. The device shall be available in 1, 2 and 4-inch sizes. Maximum diameter of the wall penetration for 1, 2 and 4-inch sizes shall be 1-1/4, 2-7/16 and 4-1/2 inches respectively. 3. Smooth Firestop Device(Unique Firestop Products) a. Smooth steel sleeve device incorporating flat washers secured by sliding compression couplers. The device shall be available in 1, 2 and 4-inch sizes. Maximum diameter of the wall penetration for 1, 2 and 4-inch sizes shall be 1-1/4, 2-7/16 and 4-1/2 inches respectively. 4. Split-Sleeve Firestop Device(Unique Firestop Products) a. Threaded steel sleeve halves incorporating split couplings and slotted washers to fit the specific diameter of the opening. The device shall be available in 1, 2 and 4-inch sizes. Maximum diameter of the wall penetration for 1, 2 and 4-inch sizes shall be 1-1/4, 2-7/16 and 4-1/2 inches respectively. 5. Fire Rated Cable Pathway(STI EZ-PATH) a. Fire rated cable pathway device modules shall be comprised of steel raceway with intumescent foam pads allowing 0-100 percent cable fill. 2.03 UL CLASSIFICATION A. Thru-Wall Fitting - The firestop device for use in through-penetration firestop systems shall have been examined and tested by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. to UL1479 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2705 10 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 FIRE STOPPING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 (ASTM E 814) and bear the U.S. and Canadian UL Classification Mark. B. Threaded, Smooth and Split-Sleeve Firestop Devices - Firestopping sealants and devices shall be used together as a firestop system. All firestop systems shall bear a UL Classification system number. UL Classification system numbers are as follows: 1. Threaded Firestop System a. Block Wall-W-J-3049 b. Dry Wall- W-L-3138 2. Threaded Firestop System(Vertical) a. Slab- F-A-3010 3. Smooth Firestop System a. Block Wall- W-J-3048 b. Dry Wall-W-L-3137 4. Split-Sleeve Firestop System a. Block Wall-W-J-3047 b. Dry Wall-W-L-3136 2.04 FIRESTOPPING SYSTEMS A. Thru-Wall Fitting Firestop System: 1. The device shall be classified for use in one-, two-, three, and four-hour rated gypsum, concrete and block walls and provide a maximum L rating of six cfm. The devices shall also been tested by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. to UL2043 and determined to be suitable for use in air handling spaces. B. Threaded, Smooth and Split-Sleeve Firestop Systems: 1. Shall conform to both Flame (F) and Temperature (T)ratings as required by local building codes and as tested by nationally accepted test agencies per ASTM E814 or UL 1479 fire tests in a configuration that is representative of field conditions. 2. The F rating must be a minimum of one (1) hour but not less than the fire resistance rating of the assembly being penetrated. T rating when required by code authority shall be based on measurement of the temperature rise on penetrating item(s). The fire test shall be conducted with a minimum positive pressure differential of 0.01 inches of water column. 3. For joints, must be tested to UL 2079 with movement capabilities equal to those of the anticipated conditions. C. Firestopping materials and systems must be capable of closing or filling through- openings created by 1) the burning or melting of combustible pipes, cable jacketing, or pipe insulation materials, or 2) deflection of sheet metal due to thermal expansion (electrical&mechanical duct work). D. Firestopping material shall be asbestos and lead free and shall not incorporate nor require the use of hazardous solvents. E. Firestopping sealants must be flexible, allowing for normal pipe movement. F. Firestopping materials shall not shrink upon drying as evidenced by cracking or pulling back from contact surfaces. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2705 10 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 FIRE STOPPING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 G. Firestopping materials shall be moisture resistant, and may not dissolve in water after curing. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 CONDITIONS REQUIRING FIRESTOPPING A. General 1. Provide tirestopping for conditions specified whether or not firestopping is indicated, and if indicated, whether such material is designed as insulation, safing, or otherwise. B. Through-Penetrations 1. Firestopping shall be installed in all open penetrations and in the annular space in all penetrations in any bearing or non-bearing fire-rated barrier. C. Membrane-Penetrations 1. Where required by code, all membrane-penetrations in rated walls shall be protected with tirestopping products that meet the requirements of third party time/temperature testing. D. Construction Joints/Gaps 1. Firestopping shall be provided between the edges of floor slabs and exterior walls,between the tops of walls and the underside of floors, in the control joint in masonry walls and floors and in expansion joints. E. Smoke-Stopping 1. As required by the other sections, smoke-stops shall be provided for through- penetrations, membrane-penetrations, and construction gaps with a material approved and tested for such application. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Examine the areas and conditions where firestops are to be installed and notify the Architect of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. B. Verify that environmental conditions are safe and suitable for installation of firestop products. C. Verify that all pipes, conduit, cable, and other items that penetrate fire-rated construction have been permanently installed prior to installation of firestops. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. General FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2705 10 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 FIRE STOPPING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Installation of firestops shall be performed by an applicator/installer qualified and trained by the manufacturer. Installation shall be performed in strict accordance with manufacturer's detailed installation procedures. 2. Apply firestops in accordance with fire test reports, fire resistance requirements, acceptable sample installations, and manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Unless specified and approved, all insulation used in conjunction with through- penetrants shall remain intact and undamaged and may not be removed. 4. Seal holes and penetrations to ensure an effective smoke seal. 5. In areas of high traffic, protect firestopping materials from damage. If the opening is large, install firestopping materials capable of supporting the weight of a human. 6. Insulation types specified in other sections shall not be installed in lieu of firestopping material specified herein. 7. All combustible penetrants (e.g. non-metallic pipes or insulated metallic pipes) shall be firestopped using products and systems tested in a configuration representative of the field condition. B. Dam Construction 1. When required to properly contain firestopping materials within openings, damming or packing materials may be utilized. Combustible damming material must be removed after appropriate curing. Noncombustible damming materials may be left as a permanent component of the firestop system. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Prepare and install firestopping systems in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions and recommendations. B. Follow safety procedures recommended in the Material Safety Data Sheets. C. Finish surfaces of firestopping that are to remain exposed in the completed work to a uniform and level condition. D. All areas of work must be accessible until inspection by the applicable Code Authorities. E. Correct unacceptable firestops and provide additional inspection to verify compliance with this Specification. 3.05 CLEANING A. Remove spilled and excess materials adjacent to firestopping without damaging adjacent surfaces. B. Leave finished work in a neat and clean condition with no evidence of spill-overs or damage to adjacent surfaces. 3.06 IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to Section 27 05 53 - Identification for Communications Systems for labeling details. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2705 10 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 FIRE STOPPING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 END OF SECTION 27 05 10 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2705 10 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 FIRE STOPPING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 27 05 26 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Applicable requirements of Division 27 - Communications shall be considered a part of this section and shall have the same force as if printed herein full. B. This document describes the products and execution requirements relating to Grounding and Bonding for Communications Systems. C. Product specifications, general design considerations, and installation guidelines are provided in this document. The successful vendor shall meet or exceed all requirements described in this document and on the drawings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data from manufacturer's specifications. 1.03 WORK INCLUDED A. The work included under this Specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation. The Contractor will provide and install all of the required material whether specifically addressed in the Specification or not. B. The work shall include,but not be limited to the following: 1. Furnish and install all grounding conductors. 2. Furnish and install all grounding lugs and hardware. 3. Furnish and install all grounding busbars. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED PRODUCTS A. Equipment Grounding Conductor Manufacturer(s) 1. Southwire 2. Or Approved Equal B. Grounding Lug Manufacturer(s) 1. Burndy 2. Thomas &Betts 3. Or Approved Equal FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2705 26 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Grounding Busbar Manufacturer(s) 1. Chatsworth Products, Inc. 2. Middle Atlantic 3. B-Line 4. Or Approved Equal 2.02 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Grounding Conductor 1. Construction shall be Type THHN copper conductors, insulated with heat and moisture resistant PVC over which a UL Listed jacket is applied. 2. Jacket color shall be green or black. Black jacketed cable shall be identified at each termination point with a wrap of green tape. 2.03 GROUNDING LUGS A. Grounding Lugs and Hardware 1. Grounding lugs shall be 2-hole and installed with a crimper that when properly executed the die of the crimper impresses the die # on the lug base. All lugs shall be sleeved with clear heat-shrink to allow for inspection of the crimp. Silicon bronze or stainless steel bolts and washers shall be used to install lugs to equipment. Exothermic welding is also allowed. 2.04 GROUNDING BUSBARS A. Grounding Busbar 1. The grounding busbar shall be made of 1/4" thick solid copper. 2. The grounding busbar shall be installed with minimum clearance, V offsets and 1-1/2" insulators. 3. The grounding busbar shall accommodate 2-hole compression lugs. 4. The grounding busbar shall meet or exceed ANSI/TIA-607-B requirements. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 GROUNDING A. The facility shall be equipped with a Communications Bonding Backbone (TBB). This backbone shall be used to ground all communications cable shields, equipment, racks, cabinets,raceways, and other associated hardware that has the potential to act as a current carrying conductor. The TBB shall be installed independent of the building's electrical and building ground and shall be designed in accordance with the recommendations contained in the ANSI/TIA-607-B Telecommunications Bonding and Ground Standard. B. The main entrance facility/equipment room in each building shall be equipped with a telecommunications main grounding busbar (TMGB). Each telecommunications room (TR) shall be provided with a telecommunications ground busbar (TGB). The TMGB shall be connected to the building electrical entrance grounding facility. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2705 26 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. All racks, metallic backboards, cable sheaths, metallic strength members, splice cases, cable trays, etc. entering or residing in the MC/1C/TC shall be grounded to the respective TGB or TMGB using a minimum #6 AWG stranded copper bonding conductor and compression lugs. D. All wires used for communications grounding purposes shall be identified with a green insulation. Non-insulated wires shall be identified at each termination point with a wrap or green tape. All cables and busbars shall be identified and labeled in accordance with the ANSI/TIA-606-A. E. See Section 27 05 43 - Underground Ducts and Raceways for Communications Systems for underground duct and raceway systems ground requirements. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to Section 27 05 53 - Identification for Communications Systems for labeling details. END OF SECTION 27 0526 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2705 26 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 27 05 28 - PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Applicable requirements of Division 27 - Communications shall be considered a part of this section and shall have the same force as if printed herein full. B. This document describes the products and execution requirements relating to Pathways for Communications Systems. C. Product specifications, general design considerations, and installation guidelines are provided in this document. The successful vendor shall meet or exceed all requirements described in this document and on the drawings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data from manufacturer's specifications. 1.03 WORK INCLUDED A. The work included under this specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation. The Contractor will provide and install all of the required material whether specifically addressed in the Specification or not. B. The work shall include,but not be limited to the following: I. Furnish and install complete conduit system. 2. Furnish and install all communications outlet boxes. 3. Furnish and install all pull boxes. 4. Furnish and install all cable hangers. 5. Furnish and install all tie wraps/Velcro straps. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED PRODUCTS A. Rigid/Intermediate Conduit Manufacturer(s) I. Allied 2. Triangle 3. Wheatland 4. Youngstown B. Non-Metallic (PVC) Manufacturer(s) I. Carlon 2. Georgia Pipe Company FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2705 28 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. Or Approved Equal C. Electrical Metallic Tubing(EMT)Manufacturer(s) 1. Allied 2. Triangle 3. Wheatland 4. Youngstown D. Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing(ENT)Manufacturer(s) 1. Carlon 2. Or Approved Equal E. EMT Fittings Manufacturer(s) 1. Thomas &Betts 2. Steel City 3. Or Approved Equal F. ENT Fittings Manufacturer(s) 1. Carlon 2. Or Approved Equal G. Innerduct/Inner-Conduit Channel Manufacturer(s) 1. Carlon 2. Endot Industries 3. MaxCell 4. Petroflex 5. Eastern H. Metallic Communications Outlet Box Manufacturer(s) 1. Steel City 2. Raco 3. Or Approved Equal 1. Non-Metallic Communications Outlet Box Manufacturer(s) 1. Thomas &Betts 2. Carlon 3. Or Approved Equal J. Pull Box Manufacturer(s) 1. Hoffman 2. OZ Gedney 3. Quazite 4. Or Approved Equal K. Approved Cable Hanger Manufacturer(s) FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2705 28 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. MonoSystems—The Hook Series 2. Erico Products—Caddy Series 3. B-Line 4. Or Approved Equal L. Approved Tie Wrap/Velcro Strap Manufacturer(s) 1. Thomas &Betts 2. Panduit 3. Or Approved Equal 2.02 CONDUIT A. Rigid and Intermediate Conduit 1. Rigid conduit, intermediate conduit, couplings, locknuts, bushings, elbows and connectors shall be standard thread. All materials shall be steel. Set screw or non-threaded fittings are not permitted. B. Non-Metallic (PVC) Conduit 1. Non-metallic conduit shall be heavy wall, Schedule 40 PVC. 2. Couplings and connectors for non-metallic conduit shall be of the same material and be the product of the same manufacturer of the conduit furnished. C. Electrical Metallic Tubing(EMT) 1. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT), couplings and connectors shall be steel. Malleable iron,pressure-cast or die-cast fittings are not permitted. 2. Fittings for 2" EMT and smaller shall be steel set screw type, except where otherwise noted. Fittings for 2.5" and larger shall be steel set screw type with two (2) screws for connectors and four (4) screws for couplings. All connectors shall be insulated throat type. D. Electrical Non-Metallic Tubing(ENT) 1. ENT shall be a pliable, non-metallic raceway manufactured of the same PVC material used for rigid non-metallic conduit. 2. Fittings and outlet boxes shall be designed for use with ENT and listed by Underwriters Laboratories. E. Conduit Support 1. Individual conduit hangers shall be galvanized spring steel specifically designed for the purpose and sized appropriately for the conduit type and diameter. Support individual conduits 1-1/2 inch and smaller with 1/4 inch threaded steel rods and use 3/8 inch rods for 2 inch and larger. 2. Conduit support channels shall be 14 gauge galvanized (or equivalent treatment) channel sized for the amount of conduit to be supported. Channel suspension shall be 3/8" threaded steel rods. Attach suspension rods to structure with swivel type connectors. Conduit straps shall be spring steel type compatible with channel. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2705 28 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. Conduit straps shall be single hole cast metal type or two hole galvanized metal type. Conduit clamps shall be spring steel type for use with exposed structural steel. F. Innerduct/Inner-Conduit Channel I. Innerduct shall be corrugated plastic equipped with pull-string or mule tape. 2. Inner-conduit channel (MaxCell) shall be 3-channel with each channel equipped with mule tape. 3. See Drawings for innerduct/inner-conduit channel (MaxCell) details. 2.03 METALLIC COMMUNICATIONS OUTLET BOXES A. Metallic outlet boxes and device covers shall be galvanized steel not less than 1/16" thick. B. The dimensions of the metallic outlet box shall be 4" x 4" square with a minimum depth of 2-1/8". C. Metallic outlet boxes shall be equipped with single device covers (or two-device covers where needed). Where installed in plaster, gypsum board, etc., covers shall be raised to compensate for the thickness of the wall finish. D. Where metallic outlet boxes are to be empty for future use, blank coverplates shall be used. 2.04 NON-METALLIC COMMUNICATIONS OUTLET BOXES A. The non-metallic outlet box shall be thermoplastic and be rated according to the space it occupies. B. The dimensions of the non-metallic outlet box shall be approximately 4" x 4" square with a minimum depth of 2-1/8". C. Non-metallic outlet boxes shall be equipped with single device covers. Covers shall be raised to compensate for the thickness of the wall finish. D. Where non-metallic outlet boxes are to be empty for future use, blank faceplates shall be used. 2.05 PULL BOXES A. Pull boxes shall be constructed of galvanized steel with flat, removable covers fastened with plated steel screws. B. Pull boxes shall be equipped with keyhole screw slots in the cover to permit removal of the cover without extracting the screws. C. Pull boxes shall have provisions for grounding. 2.06 CABLE HANGERS A. J-Hooks FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2705 28 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. J-hooks shall provide a bearing surface of sufficient width to comply with required bend radii of high-performance cables. J-hook shall be cULus Listed. 2. J-hooks shall have flared edges to prevent damage while installing cables. 3. J-hooks sized 1-5/16" and larger shall have a cable retainer strap to provide containment of cables within the hanger. The cable retainer strap shall be removable and reusable and be suitable for use in air handling spaces. B. Adjustable Non-Continuous Cable Support Sling 1. Constructed from steel and woven laminate; sling length can be adjusted to hold up to 425 4-pair balanced twisted pair cables; rated for indoor use in non- corrosive environments. Rated to support Category 5 and higher cable, or optical fiber cable. Cable support sling shall be cULus Listed. 2. Adjustable non-continuous cable support sling shall have a static load limit of 100 lbs. 3. Adjustable non-continuous cable support sling shall be suitable for use in air handling spaces. 2.07 TIE WRAPS AND VELCRO STRAPS A. Tie Wraps and Velcro Straps 1. Cables shall be fastened to support structures with tie wraps/Velcro straps. 2. Tie wraps/Velcro straps installed in air handling spaces must be plenum rated. a. Non-plenum Tie Wrap color shall be black. b. Plenum Tie Wrap color shall be red. C. Non-plenum Velcro strap color shall be black. d. Plenum Velcro strap color shall be red. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 PENETRATIONS A. Holes through concrete and masonry in new and existing structures shall be cut with a diamond core drill or concrete saw upon approval of the structural engineer of record for the base of building. Pneumatic hammer, impact electric, hand or manual hammer type drills shall not be allowed, except where permitted by the Project Manager as required by limited working space. X-ray all floor penetrations accordingly. B. Holes shall be located so as not to affect structural sections such as ribs or beams. C. Holes shall be laid out in advance. The Project Manager shall be advised prior to drilling through structural sections, for determination of proper layout. D. Structural Penetrations: Where conduits, wireways and other raceways pass through fire partitions, fire walls or walls and floors provide a code compliant effective barrier against the spread of fire, smoke and gases. E. All penetrations where conduit is not used shall be sleeved. F. No gaps or rough edges shall be allowed between wall and conduit/sleeve. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2705 28 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.02 CONDUIT SYSTEM A. Conceal all conduits, except in unfinished spaces such as equipment rooms or as indicated by symbol on the Drawings. B. Leave all empty conduits with a 200 pound test nylon cord pull line. C. Flattened, dented, or deformed conduits are not permitted and shall be removed and replaced. D. Fasten conduit support device to structure with wood screws on wood, toggle bolts on hollow masonry, anchors as specified on solid masonry or concrete, and machine bolts, clamps, or spring steel clips, on steel. E. Install conduit with wiring, including homeruns as indicated on the Drawings. Any change resulting in a savings in labor or materials is to be made only in accordance with a contract change. Deviations shall be made only where necessary to avoid interferences and when approved by Engineer by written authorization. F. Conduit shall be run parallel or at right angles to existing walls, ceilings, and structural members. G. Attach backbone conduits larger than one-inch trade diameter to or from structure on intervals not exceeding twelve feet with conduit beam clamps, one-hole conduit straps or trapeze type support. H. Where conduits must pass through structural members obtain approval of Architect. I. Install all conduits or sleeves penetrating or routed within rated firewalls or fire floors to maintain fire rating of wall or floor. Conduit shall not be installed in rated floors or walls if it compromises or violates the fire rating of floor or wall. Refer to architectural documents. J. Provide expansion and deflection coupling where conduit passes over a building expansion joint. K. Service entrance conduits and feeder conduits in direct contact with earth shall be schedule 40, heavy wall PVC. All service entrance conduit elbows shall be galvanized rigid steel. Service entrance conduits installed exposed or concealed in walls or above ceilings shall be galvanized rigid steel (G.R.S.) or intermediate metal conduit (IMC). Service entrance conduits shall be installed "outside" of the building as defined by the N.E.C. Provide concrete encasement where required or as indicated on Drawings. L. All other conduit, unless specified herein, shall be electrical metallic tubing (EMT) or electrical non-metallic tubing (ENT). PVC conduit is not allowed in exposed or concealed areas,but only within concrete. M. Conduit Installations Within Slab/Floor 1. Conduit shall be run following the most direct route between points. 2. Conduit shall not be installed in concrete where the outside diameter is larger than 1/3 of the slab thickness. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2705 28 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. Conduits shall not be installed within shear walls unless specifically indicated on the Drawings. Conduit shall not be run directly below and parallel with load bearing walls. 4. Protect each metallic conduit installed in concrete slab or conduits 1-1/2 inch and smaller passing through a concrete slab against corrosion where conduit enters and leaves concrete by wrapping conduit with vinyl all-weather electrical tape. 5. Protect all conduits entering and leaving concrete floor slabs from physical damage during construction. 6. Provide expansion fittings in all conduits where length or run exceeds 200 feet or where conduits pass through building expansion joints. 7. Install all conduits penetrating or routed within rated fire floors to maintain the fire rating of the floor. Conduit shall not be installed in rated floors or walls if it compromises or violates the fire rating of floor or wall. Refer to architectural documents. 8. Conduits installed within concrete floor slabs which are in direct contact with grade or which penetrate the building roof shall be galvanized rigid steel (G.R.S.),intermediate metal conduit(I.M.C.) or Schedule 40,heavy wall PVC. N. Communications cables shall not occupy conduits with power cables. O. Metallic conduits shall be grounded in accordance with ANSI/TIA-607-B. P. Conduit runs shall not have more than two (2) 90-degree bends between pull points. Q. Communications conduit system shall contain no condulets (also known as an LB). R. Rigid metal conduit (RMC) or intermediate metal conduit (IMC) shall be used for entrance conduits that exceed 50 feet into the building. S. Horizontal Conduits 1. Support horizontal conduits at intervals not exceeding ten feet and within three feet of each outlet, junction box, backboard, enclosure or cabinet. Support conduits from structural steel members with spring steel type or beam conduit clamps and to non-metallic structural members with one-hole conduit straps. For exposed conduits and where conduits must be suspended below structure, single conduit runs shall be supported from structure by hanger rod and conduit clamp assembly, and multiple conduits shall be supported by trapeze type support suspended from structure. Do not attach conduits to ceiling suspension system channels or suspension wires. 2. For runs that total more than 100 feet in length, insert pull boxes so that no segment between boxes exceeds the 100 feet limit. 3. Each horizontal home-run conduit can serve from one (1) to three (3) outlet boxes. For one (1) outlet box, a 3/4" conduit shall be used, minimum. For two (2) outlet boxes, a 1" conduit shall be used,minimum. For three (3) outlet boxes, a 1-1/4" conduit shall be used, minimum. 3.03 COMMUNICATIONS OUTLET BOXES A. Exact locations of the outlet boxes shall be coordinated with the electrical contractor and other trades. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2705 28 - 7 MAY 2, 2023 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. The approximate locations of the outlets are indicated on the Drawings. The exact locations shall be determined at the building. The right is reserved to change, without additional cost, the exact location of any outlet, a maximum of 10' before it is permanently installed. C. Orientation of outlet boxes (horizontal or vertical) shall be as indicated on the architectural elevations. D. Install all outlet boxes in finished areas flush with the wall. Maintain 1/4" or less space between outlet box front and finished wall surface. E. Outlet boxes shall be firmly anchored in place and shall not depend on the coverplate to hold it secure to the wall. F. Outlet boxes installed back-to-back in fire-rated walls shall be separated horizontally by a minimum of 24". 3.04 PULL BOXES A. Pull boxes shall be secured, independent of the conduit entries into the box. Pull boxes shall be secured to the building structure. In ceiling applications, pull boxes shall not be supported with ceiling wires. B. Conduits entering pull boxes shall connect to pull boxes using die-cast zinc connectors. C. Pull boxes shall be free from burrs, dirt and debris. D. Pull boxes shall be installed in accordance with ANSI/TIA-569-B. E. Pull boxes shall be grounded in accordance with ANSIMA-607-13. 3.05 CABLE HANGERS A. Installation and configuration shall conform to the requirements of ANSI/TIA-568-C.0, ANSI/TIA-568-C.1 &ANSI/TIA-569-B,NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code), applicable local codes, and to the manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Install cables using techniques, practices, and methods that are consistent with Category 5e or higher requirements and that supports Category 5e or higher performance of completed and linked signal paths, end to end. C. Install cables without damaging conductors, shield, or jacket. D. Do not bend cables, in handling or in installing, to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. E. Pull cables without exceeding cable manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions. Use pulling means that will not damage media. F. Do not exceed load ratings specified by manufacturer. G. Adjustable non-continuous support sling shall have a static load limit of 100 lbs. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2705 28 - 8 MAY 2, 2023 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 H. To avoid electromagnetic interference (EMI), pathways shall provide minimum clearances of four feet from motors or transformers, one foot from conduit and cables used for electrical power distribution, and five inches from fluorescent lighting. Pathways shall cross perpendicular to fluorescent lighting and electrical power cables or conduits. 3.06 TIE WRAPS AND VELCRO STRAPS A. Tie wraps/Velcro straps shall be installed around cables at intervals of 12" minimum. B. Tie wraps shall secure cables to cable trays using an"X"pattern. C. Do not over-cinch cables. 3.07 IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to Section 27 05 53 - Identification for Communications Systems for labeling details. END OF SECTION 27 05 28 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2705 28 - 9 MAY 2, 2023 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 27 05 43 - UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Applicable requirements of Division 27 - Communications shall be considered a part of this section and shall have the same force as if printed herein full. B. This document describes the products and execution requirements relating to Underground Ducts and Raceways for Communications Systems. C. Product specifications, general design considerations, and installation guidelines are provided in this document. The successful vendor shall meet or exceed all requirements described in this document and on the drawings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data from manufacturer's specifications. 1.03 WORK INCLUDED A. The work included under this specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation. The Contractor will provide and install all of the required material whether specifically addressed in the Specification or not. B. The work shall include,but not be limited to the following: 1. Furnish and install complete conduit system. 2. Furnish and install all maintenance holes/handholes. 3. Furnish and install all conduit plugs/caps. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED PRODUCTS A. Rigid/Intermediate Conduit Manufacturer(s) 1. Allied 2. Triangle 3. Wheatland 4. Youngstown B. PVC/HDPE Conduit Manufacturer(s) 1. Carlon 2. Georgia Pipe Company FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 27 05 43 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. FiberTel 4. Or Approved Equal C. Innerduct/Inner-Conduit Channel Manufacturer(s) 1. Carlon 2. Endot Industries 3. MaxCell 4. Petroflex D. Marker Tape Manufacturer(s) 1. William Frick&Associates 2. Or Approved Equal E. Approved Maintenance Hole/Handhole Manufacturer(s) 1. Quazite 2. Old Castle 3. Pencell 4. Or Approved Equal F. Approved Conduit Plug/Cap Manufacturer(s) 1. Jack Moon 2. Or Approved Equal 2.02 CONDUIT SYSTEM A. PVC conduit for concrete encasement shall be Type DB, UL Labeled for 90 degrees C cables. Fittings shall be Type DB, solvent type, and from the same manufacturer as the conduit. B. Concrete shall have a minimum strength of 2,500 psi at 28 days. C. PVC conduit for direct burial shall be Schedule 40, UL Labeled for 90 degrees C cables. Fittings shall be Schedule 40, solvent type, and from the same manufacturer as the conduit. D. Rigid and Intermediate Conduit 1. Rigid conduit, intermediate conduit, couplings, locknuts, bushings, elbows and connectors shall be standard thread. All materials shall be steel. Set screw or non-threaded fittings are not permitted. 2. Galvanized rigid steel conduit shall be hot dipped galvanized inside and outside, in 10 foot lengths and threaded on both ends. Fittings and bushings shall be threaded, cast or malleable iron, and hot dipped galvanized inside and outside. E. Non-Metallic Conduit 1. Non-metallic conduit shall be heavy wall, Schedule 40 PVC/HDPE. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 27 05 43 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Couplings and connectors for non-metallic conduit shall be of the same material and be the product of the same manufacturer of the conduit furnished. F. Conduit Support 1. Conduit straps shall be single-hole cast metal type or two hole galvanized metal type. Conduit clamps shall be spring steel type for use with exposed structural steel. G. Innerduct/Inner-Conduit Channel I. Innerduct shall be non-corrugated PVC equipped with mule tape. 2. Inner-conduit channel (MaxCell) shall be 3-channel with each channel equipped with mule tape. 3. See Drawings for innerduct/inner-conduit channel (MaxCell) details. H. Marker Tape I. Marker tape shall be detectable, orange for communications, and labeled to indicate the type of circuit buried below. 2.03 MAINTENANCE HOLES/HANDHOLES A. Maintenance Holes I. Maintenance holes shall be pre-cast or cast in place concrete with a strength of 3,500 psi at 28 days, and steel reinforced. 2. Maintenance holes shall include a cast iron frame with cover, a hot dipped galvanized steel ladder, and hot dipped galvanized pulling eyes embedded in the concrete opposite each duct entrance and in the floor beneath the cover. 3. Maintenance holes shall be equipped with grounding busbar. 4. Maintenance holes shall be equipped with racking for cable storage. 5. Ground splices and connections at maintenance holes shall be exothermic welds, copper or bronze compression ground fittings, or bolted compression ring lugs. 6. The cover for maintenance holes shall have the lettering, "COMMUNICATIONS." B. Handholes I. Handholes shall be non-conductive and shall not require grounding for safety. Handholes shall be unaffected by freeze/thaw and resistant to sunlight and chemicals. Handholes shall be pre-cast polymer concrete, heavy duty rated and bottomless. 2. Handholes shall be equipped with racking for cable storage. 3. Handholes shall have the word "COMMUNICATIONS" molded in the cover by the manufacturer. The cover shall be attached with penta-head stainless steel bolts. 4. Handholes shall be able to withstand 10,000 lbs minimum. 5. See Drawings for handhole dimensions and locations. 2.04 CONDUIT PLUGS/CAPS FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 27 05 43 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Conduit Plugs/Caps 1. Conduit plugs shall provide a watertight seal at expose ends of conduits. 2. Conduit plugs shall be conduit size specific. 3. Triplex and Quadplex duct plugs shall provide a watertight seal between the conduit and innerduct(s). 4. Simplex duct plugs shall provide a watertight seal between the innerduct and the cable that occupies it. 5. TDUX inflatable bladders shall be used to seal conduits equipped with MaxCell. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUIT SYSTEM A. Excavation and Backfill 1. Contractor shall call underground utilities locator company before digging. 2. Barricades shall be provided around open holes and trenches. Temporary bridges shall be provided over trenches cut through major sidewalk routes. Major sidewalk routes shall not be closed to pedestrian traffic. 3. Barriers shall be provided to protect landscaping adjacent to the excavation area. 4. When rocks, concrete or other debris are encountered during excavation, remove completely. 5. Where sidewalk sections must be removed for installation of underground ducts, remove the sidewalk sections completely from joint to joint. 6. Where asphalt must be removed for installation of underground ducts, saw cut the asphalt in two, straight,parallel lines. 7. Backfill excavations in 6-inch layers and mechanically compact to 98 percent compaction. 8. Excavated materials may be used as backfill only if the backfill is sand or clean dirt that is free of rocks and debris over 3/4" in diameter. 9. In landscaped areas, backfill and mechanically compact to a depth of 6 inches below grade. 10. Backfill the last 6 inches with clean topsoil. Reseed lawn areas. 11. Restore concrete sidewalks and asphalt. 12. The Contractor shall perform all excavation to install the electrical work herein specified and as indicated on Drawings. During excavation, material for backfilling shall be piled back from the banks of the trench to avoid overloading and to prevent slides and cave-ins. All excavated materials not to be used for backfill shall be removed and disposed of by the Contractor. Grading shall be done to prevent surface water from flowing into trenches and others excavation and any water accumulating therein shall be removed by pumping. All excavation shall be made by open cut. 13. The bottom of the trenches shall be graded to provide uniform bearing and support for conduits, cables, or duct bank on undisturbed soil at every point along its entire length. Overdepths shall be backfilled with loose, granular,moist earth, tamped. Remove unstable soil that is not capable of supporting equipment or installation and replace with specified material for a minimum of 12" below invert of equipment or installation. 14. The trenches shall be backfilled with the excavated materials approved for backfilling, consisting of earth, loam, sandy clay, sand and gravel or soft shale, free from large clods of earth and stones, deposited in 6" layers and rammed until FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 27 05 43 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 the installation has a cover of not less than the adjacent ground but not greater than 2" above existing ground. The backfilling shall be carried on simultaneously on both sides of the trench so that injurious pressures do not occur. The compaction of the filled trench shall be at least equal to 95% of the maximum density as determined by the Standard Proctor Test. Settling the backfill with water will not be permitted. Reopen any trenches not meeting compaction requirements or where settlement occurs,refill, compact, and restore the surface to the grade and compaction indicated, mounded over and smoothed off. B. Duct Banks 1. Duct banks shall be sloped downward toward maintenance holes/handholes and away from buildings a minimum of 6 inches per 100 feet. Duct banks shall not route water from maintenance holes handholes into buildings. Duct banks shall not contain traps between maintenance holes/handholes where water may accumulate. 2. Directional changes in duct banks shall be made with 20'minimum radius bends. Duct banks and direct buried ducts shall be supported on undisturbed soil or on piers extending down to undisturbed soil. 3. Where power and communications duct banks run in parallel, they shall be separated by a minimum of 12 inches. 4. Prior to concrete encasement, ducts, reinforcing steel and ground wires shall be secured with nonmetallic straps or cable ties to nonmetallic duct spacers at intervals not exceeding 8 feet. Duct spacers shall be sized for the ducts being held, and shall provide the minimum spacing between ducts required for concrete flow and by the NEC. Duct spacers shall be anchored to the ground using nonmetallic bands and stakes. 5. Duct banks shall have a minimum of 3 inches of concrete cover on all sides. 6. Where duct banks enter maintenance holes or buildings, they shall be constructed as integral to the wall. 7. Duct bank shall extend to the inside surfaces of the walls, and the duct bank reinforcing shall be integrated with the wall reinforcing. 8. Bell ends shall be provided on ducts where the ducts enter maintenance holes or buildings. 9. Direct buried ducts and fittings shall have bend radii greater than the minimum bend radii of the cables enclosed, and shall not be smaller than the radii of standard manufactured elbows. 10. Direct buried ducts shall be installed parallel to or at right angles to building lines and site features, and as close to curbs and sidewalks as possible to avoid interferences with future landscaping. 11. Where direct buried PVC ducts cannot be buried deep enough to meet the NEC minimum cover requirements, rigid steel conduits shall be installed instead, or a concrete cover shall be poured over the ducts. 12. An orange detectable marker tape (for communications) shall be buried in the backfill approximately 12 inches above duct banks or direct buried cables for the entire length of the duct run. 13. A flexible mandrel and a stiff bristled brush shall be pulled through the ducts to clean them prior to cable pulling. 14. Ducts shall be identified in the maintenance holes and at both ends. C. Additional OSP Conduit Requirements FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 27 05 43 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Leave all empty conduits with a 200-pound test nylon cord pull line. 2. Install a #14 AWG tracer wire in one conduit for the entire length of each duct run. 3. Flattened, dented, or deformed conduits are not permitted and shall be removed and replaced. 4. Install conduit, including homeruns as indicated on the Drawings. Any change resulting in a savings in labor or materials is to be made only in accordance with a contract change. Deviations shall be made only where necessary to avoid interferences and when approved by Engineer by written authorization. 5. Where conduits must pass through structural members obtain approval of Architect. 6. Install all conduits or sleeves penetrating or routed within rated firewalls or fire floors to maintain fire rating of wall or floor. Conduit shall not be installed in rated floors or walls if it compromises or violates the fire rating of floor or wall. Refer to architectural documents. 7. Provide expansion and deflection coupling where conduit passes over a building expansion joint. 8. Service entrance conduits and feeder conduits in direct contact with earth shall be schedule 40, heavy wall PVC/HDPE. All service entrance conduit elbows shall be galvanized rigid steel. Service entrance conduits installed exposed or concealed in walls or above ceilings shall be galvanized rigid steel (GRS) or intermediate metal conduit (IMC). Service entrance conduits shall be installed "outside" of the building as defined by the N.E.C. Provide concrete encasement where required or as indicated on Drawings. 9. Seal all conduits entering building to prevent entrance of moisture. 10. Conduit fittings shall be gland and ring compression type for all conduit exposed to outdoor environments. 11. Below Grade Conduit Installations a. Install top of conduits 24 inches minimum below finished grade and as indicated on Drawings. b. Install top of conduits 6 inches minimum below bottom of building slabs. C. Where transition is made from below grade PVC installation to a metallic conduit system above grade or slab. 12. Communications cables shall not occupy conduits with power cables. 13. All metallic conduits shall be grounded in accordance with J-STD-607-A. 14. For runs that total more than 400 feet in length, insert handholes/maintenance holes so that no segment exceeds the 400 feet limit. 15. Conduit runs shall not have more than two (2) 90-degree bends between pull points. 16. Communication conduit system shall contain no condulets (also known as an LB). 3.02 MAINTENANCE HOLES/HANDHOLES A. Maintenance holes/handholes shall be installed on a base of pea gravel at least 12 inches deep. B. Tops of maintenance holes/handholes shall be level with the existing grade. C. Ducts should enter as perpendicular to the wall surface as possible. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 27 05 43 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 D. Maintenance holes shall be grounded with four 3/4 inch diameter by 8 foot long ground rods, one driven inside of the maintenance hole at each comer. Connect the ground rods and any duct bank ground conductors together with a No. 4/0 AWG bare, stranded copper ground wire loop. A No. 2 AWG bare stranded copper pigtail from the ground wire loop shall be used to ground the maintenance hole cover frame, ladder support bracket, any metallic concrete inserts and metallic cable racks, and the shields of any cables that are spliced in the maintenance hole. 3.03 CONDUIT PLUGS/CAPS A. Protect conduits against dirt, plaster, and foreign debris with conduit plugs. Plugs shall remain in place until ready for use. B. Simplex, triplex or quadplex duct plugs shall be installed in conduits to house and seal cables. C. TDUX inflatable bladders shall be used to seal conduits equipped with MaxCell. 3.04 IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to Section 27 05 53 - Identification for Communications Systems for labeling details. END OF SECTION 27 05 43 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 27 05 43 - 7 MAY 2, 2023 UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 27 05 53 - IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Applicable requirements of Division 27 - Communications shall be considered a part of this section and shall have the same force as if printed herein full. B. This document describes the equipment and execution requirements relating to Identification for Communications Systems. C. Equipment specifications, general considerations, and guidelines are provided in this document. The successful vendor shall meet or exceed all requirements described in this document and on the drawings. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. The work included under this Specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete installation. The Contractor will provide and install all of the required material whether specifically addressed in the Specification or not. B. The work shall include,but not be limited to the following: 1. Perform all labeling. PART 2-LABELING 2.01 LABELING REQUIREMENTS A. Labeling shall be done in accordance with the recommendations made in the ANSI/TIA- 606-A document,manufacturer's recommendations and best industry practices. B. All spaces, pathways, outlets, cables, termination hardware, grounding system and equipment shall be labeled with machine-generated labels. C. All labels shall be clear with black text. D. All cables shall be labeled with machine generated,wrap around labels. E. A total of three (3) labels per horizontal cable are required at the following intervals: 6" from outlet; 18" from outlet; 12" from termination block/patch panel. F. Labeling scheme shall be alphanumeric. PART 3 -NOT USED END OF SECTION 27 05 53 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 27 05 53 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 IDENTIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 27 08 00 - COMMISSIONING OF COMMUNICATIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Applicable requirements of Division 27 - Communications shall be considered a part of this section and shall have the same force as if printed herein full. B. This document describes the equipment and execution requirements relating to Commissioning of Communications. C. Equipment specifications, general considerations, and guidelines are provided in this document. The successful vendor shall meet or exceed all requirements described in this document and on the drawings. 1.02 WORK INCLUDED A. The work included under this specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete installation. The Contractor will provide and install all of the required material whether specifically addressed in the Specification or not. B. The work shall include,but not be limited to the following: 1. Perform all copper cabling testing. 2. Perform all optical fiber cabling testing. 3. Perform all coaxial cabling testing. 4. Provide all documentation, as-builts,training and warranty. PART 2-TESTING 2.01 TESTING REQUIREMENTS A. General 1. All cables and termination hardware shall be 100% tested for defects in installation and to verify cabling system performance under installed conditions according to the requirements of ANSUTIA-568-C.0 and/or ANSI/TIA-568-C.1. All conductors/strands of each installed cable shall be verified prior to system acceptance. Any defect in the cabling system installation including but not limited to cable, connectors, feed through couplers, patch panels, and connector blocks shall be repaired or replaced in order to ensure 100% useable conductors/strands in all cables installed. B. Copper Testing 1. All twisted-pair copper cable links shall be tested for continuity, pair reversals, shorts, opens and performance as indicated below. Additional testing is required FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 27 08 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 COMMISSIONING OF COMMUNICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 to verify Category 6 performance. Horizontal balanced twisted pair cabling shall be tested using a level III test unit for Category 6 performance compliance. 2. Continuity- Each pair of each installed cable shall be tested using a test unit that shows opens, shorts,polarity and pair-reversals, crossed pairs and split pairs. The test shall be recorded as pass/fail as indicated by the test unit and referenced to the appropriate cable identification number and circuit or pair number. Any faults in the wiring shall be corrected and the cable re-tested prior to final acceptance. 3. Length- Each installed cable link shall be tested for installed length using a TDR type device. The cables shall be tested from patch panel to patch panel, block to block, patch panel to outlet or block to outlet as appropriate. The cable length shall conform to the maximum distances set forth in the ANSFTIA-568-C.2 Standard. Cable lengths shall be recorded, referencing the cable identification number and circuit or pair number. For multi-pair cables, the shortest pair length shall be recorded as the length for the cable. C. Fiber Testing 1. All fiber testing shall be performed on all fibers in the completed end-to-end system. There shall be no splices unless clearly defined in the RFP and/or Drawings. These tests also include continuity checking of each fiber. 2. Multimode a. Test the optical fiber cable bi-directionally with an OTDR and uni- directionally with a power meter/light source. Fiber must be tested at both 850nm and 1300nm. Maximum attenuation dB/Km @ 850nm/1300nm shall be 3.5/1.5. Maximum attenuation per connector pair shall be .75 dB. Attenuation testing shall be performed with a stable launch condition using a one-meter or two-meter jumper, wrapped around a mandrel sized according to fiber type, to attach the light source to the cable plant. Fiber jumper shall be wrapped around mandrel no less than five (5) times. The jumper-mandrel assembly shall remain connected to the light source after calibration and the power meter moved to the far end using a new jumper to take measurements. Test set- up and performance shall be conducted in accordance with ANSI/TIA- 568-C.3, and to the manufacturer's application guides. 3. Singlemode a. Test the optical fiber cable bi-directionally with an OTDR and uni- directionally with a power meter/light source. Fiber must be tested at both 1310nm and 1550nm. Maximum attenuation dB/Km @ 1310nm/1550nm shall be 0.5/0.5 for outside plant and 1.0/1.0 for inside plant. Maximum attenuation per connector pair shall be .75 dB. Attenuation testing shall be performed with a stable launch condition using one-meter or two-meter jumpers to attach the test equipment to the cable plant. The light source shall be left in place after calibration and the power meter moved to the far end to take measurements. Test set-up and perfonnance shall be conducted in accordance with ANSI/TIA-568- C.3, and to the manufacturer's application guides. 4. Approved optical fiber test equipment manufacturers are as follows: a. Power Meters&Light Sources Optical Wavelength Laboratories(OWL) Noyes Photonix FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 270800 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 COMMISSIONING OF COMMUNICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Fluke Agilent b. Optical Time Domain Reflectometers(OTDR) GN Nettest Agilent Fluke Anritsu Tektronix D. Coaxial Testing 1. Sweep testing of each reel of coaxial cable shall be performed over the 5 MHz through 1 GHz range by the cable manufacturer for transmission and structural return loss and be so certified in writing by the cable manufacturer. 2. Verification testing with a verification field test instrument will determine shorts, continuity,termination location and length of cable. 3. Approved* testers are as follows: a. Fluke CableIQ b. Test-Um Validator *A level IIe, III or IV certification tester may be used in lieu of approved tester. 4. Signal strength measurement shall be performed with a field strength meter. 5. Signal level at each outlet will be+5 dBmv, +3 dB. 6. Approved signal strength meters are as follows: a. Acterna Stealth 4040D, 5000 b. Acterna MicroStealth MS-1200, MS-1300, MS-1400 C. Acterna CLI-1450, CLI-1750 d. Sadelco DisplayMax 800 e. Sadelco DisplayMax Jr. 2000, 2500, 3000 f Promax Prolink E. Test Results 1. Test documentation shall be provided on disk as part of the as-built package. The disk shall be clearly marked on the outside front cover with the words "Project Test Documentation," the project name, and the date of completion (month and year). The results shall include a record of test frequencies, cable type, conductor pair(or strand) and cable(or outlet)I.D., measurement direction, reference setup, and crew member name(s). The test equipment name, manufacturer, model number, serial number, software version and last calibration date will also be provided at the end of the document. Unless the manufacturer specifies a more frequent calibration cycle, an annual calibration cycle is anticipated on all test equipment used for this installation. The test document shall detail the test method used and the specific settings of the equipment during the test as well as the software version being used in the field test equipment. 2. The field test equipment shall meet the requirements of ANSI/TIA-568-C.2 and/or ANSI/TIA-568-C.3. 3. Printouts generated for each cable by the wire (or fiber) test instrument shall be submitted as part of the documentation package. Alternately, the Contractor may furnish this information in electronic form (CD). These CDs shall contain the electronic equivalent of the test results as defined by the Specification and be of a format readable from Microsoft Word. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 270800 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 COMMISSIONING OF COMMUNICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 4. When repairs and re-tests are performed,the problem found and corrective action taken shall be noted, and both the failed and passed test data shall be documented. PART 3 -DOCUMENTATION,AS-BUILTS,TRAINING AND RECORDS 3.01 DOCUMENTATION &AS-BUILTS A. As-Built record documentation for communications work shall include: 1. Cable routing and identification 2. System function diagrams 3. Manufacturers' description literature for equipment 4. Connection and programming schedules as appropriate 5. Equipment material list including quantities 6. Spare parts list with quantities 7. Details not on original Contract Documents 8. Test results 9. Warranties 10. Release of liens B. The Contractor shall provide and maintain at the site a set of prints on which shall be accurately shown the actual installation of all work under this section, indicating any variation from contract drawings, including changes in pathways, sizes, locations and dimensions. All changes shall be clearly and completely indicated as the work progresses. C. Progress prints shall be available for inspection by the Owner or any of his representatives and may be used to determine the progress of communications infrastructure work. D. At the completion of the work, prepare a new set of as-built drawings, of the work as actually noted on the marked-up prints, including the dimensioned location of all pathways. E. Furnish as-built drawings and documentation to the Project Manager. As-built drawings shall be generated in AutoCAD 2006 or later. Submit as-built drawings electronically on CD and hard copy. 3.02 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL A. After completion of the work, the Contractor shall furnish and deliver to the Engineer three (3) copies of a complete Operations & Maintenance Manual. A system wiring diagram shall be furnished for each separate system. B. The manual shall be subdivided into separate sections with tab dividers to identify subsystems of the integrated system. Reference appropriate Specification sections. C. Provide the following additional information for each electronic system. Information shall be edited for this project where applicable. 1. Operations manuals for components and for systems as a whole FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 270800 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 COMMISSIONING OF COMMUNICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Maintenance manuals for components and for system as a whole 3. Point-to-point diagrams, cabling diagrams, construction details and cabling labeling details 4. List of spare parts, materials and suppliers of components. Provide name, address and telephone number for each supplier. 5. Emergency instructions for operational and maintenance requirements 6. Delivery time frame for replacement of component parts from suppliers 7. Recommended inspection schedule and procedures for components and for system as a whole 8. List of spare parts, materials and suppliers of components. Provide name, address and telephone number for each supplier. 9. Complete "reviewed" shop drawings and product data for components and system as a whole 10. Troubleshooting procedures for each system and for each major system component 3.03 TRAINING A. The Contractor shall be responsible for training of facility personnel. Training shall take place after occupancy and before acceptance and shall include programs for on-site operations and maintenance of technology and communications systems. Training shall be for not more than ten (10) people, shall be held at the Owner's site and shall be of sufficient duration and depth to ensure that the trained personnel can operate the installed systems and can perform usual and customary maintenance actions. 3.04 WARRANTY A. General 1. All equipment is to be new and warranted free of faulty workmanship and damage. 2. Replacement of defective equipment and materials and repair of faulty workmanship within 24 hours of notification, except emergency conditions (system failures), which must be placed back in service within eight(8) hours of notification, all at no cost to the Owner. 3. The minimum warranty provisions specified shall not diminish the terms of individual equipment manufacturer's warranties. B. Voice&Data Structured Cabling 1. Manufacturer(s) shall provide a minimum 15-year warranty for components used in the installed Voice & Data Structured Cabling System. Defective and/or improperly installed products shall be replaced and/or correctly installed at no cost to the Owner. C. Coaxial Cabling Infrastructure 1. Manufacturer(s) shall provide a minimum 1-year warranty for components used in the installed Coaxial Cabling Infrastructure. Defective and/or improperly installed products shall be replaced and/or correctly installed at no cost to the Owner. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 270800 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 COMMISSIONING OF COMMUNICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 D. Pathway& Support Infrastructure 1. Manufacturer(s) shall provide a minimum 1-year warranty for components used in the installed Pathway & Support Infrastructure. Defective and/or improperly installed products shall be replaced and/or correctly installed at no cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 27 08 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 270800 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 COMMISSIONING OF COMMUNICATIONS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 27 11 13 - COMMUNICATIONS ENTRANCE PROTECTION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Applicable requirements of Division 27 - Communications shall be considered a part of this section and shall have the same force as if printed herein full. B. This document describes the products and execution requirements relating to Communications Entrance Protection. C. Product specifications, general design considerations, and installation guidelines are provided in this document. The successful vendor shall meet or exceed all requirements described in this document and on the drawings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data from manufacturer's specifications. 1.03 WORK INCLUDED A. The work included under this specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation. The Contractor will provide and install all of the required material whether specifically addressed in the Specification or not. B. The work shall include,but not be limited to the following: 1. Furnish and install all building entrance protector terminals. 2. Furnish and install all bonding shield connectors. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED PRODUCTS A. Approved Building Entrance Protector Terminal Manufacturers 1. Circa 2. Marconi 3. Porta Systems B. Approved Bonding Shield Connector Manufacturers 1. 3M 2. Or Approved Equal 2.02 BUILDING ENTRANCE PROTECTOR TERMINALS A. Indoor Building Entrance Protector Terminal FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 27 11 13 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS ENTRANCE PROTECTION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. The indoor building entrance protector terminal shall be equipped with 110- connector inputs and outputs and shall accommodate industry standard 5-pin protection modules. 2. The indoor building entrance protector terminal shall protect up to 100-pairs and shall be equipped with an internal fuse link. 3. The indoor building entrance protector terminal shall be wall or frame mountable, and able to be stacked for future expansion. 4. The indoor building entrance protector terminal shall be equipped with external ground connectors that accept 6-14 AWG ground wire. B. Solid State Surge Protection Modules 1. The solid-state surge protector module shall be 5-pin and shall provide transient and power fault protection for standard telephone line applications. 2. The solid-state surge protector module shall be designed to provide a balanced configuration to protect against line-to-line metallic surges. 3. The solid-state surge protector module shall feature an external failsafe mechanism, which permanently grounds module under sustained high current conditions. 4. The solid-state surge protector module shall feature nanosecond response time and safe mode operation in adverse situations. 5. The solid-state surge protector module shall be UL & cUL Listed. 2.03 BONDING SHIELD CONNECTOR A. Shield Connector 1. The purpose of the bonding shield connector is to make a stable, low resistant electrical connection between the shield of a communications cable and a ground conductor. 2. The bonding shield connector shall be tin-plated tempered brass. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 BUILDING ENTRANCE PROTECTOR TERMINALS A. All copper circuits shall be provided with protection between each building with an entrance cable protector panel. All building-to-building circuits shall be routed through this protector. The protector shall be connected with a #6 AWG copper bonding conductor between the protector ground lug and the telecommunications room (TR) busbar. B. Building entrance protector shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations contained in the ANSI/TIA-607-B Telecommunications Bonding and Ground Standard. C. Building entrance protector panels shall be installed as per the requirements specified by the manufacturer's installation guidelines. 3.02 BONDING SHIELD CONNECTOR FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 27 11 13 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS ENTRANCE PROTECTION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Bonding shield connector shall be installed in accordance with the recommendations contained in the ANSI/TIA-607-B Standard. B. Bonding shield connector shall be installed as per the requirements specified by the manufacturer's installation guidelines. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to Section 27 05 53 - Identification for Communications Systems for labeling details. END OF SECTION 27 11 13 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 27 11 13 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS ENTRANCE PROTECTION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2711 13 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS ENTRANCE PROTECTION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 27 11 16 - COMMUNICATIONS CABINETS, RACKS AND ENCLOSURES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Applicable requirements of Division 27 - Communications shall be considered a part of this section and shall have the same force as if printed herein full. B. This document describes the products and execution requirements relating to Communications Cabinets,Racks and Enclosures. C. Product specifications, general design considerations, and installation guidelines are provided in this document. The successful vendor shall meet or exceed all requirements described in this document and on the drawings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data from manufacturer's specifications. 1.03 WORK INCLUDED A. The work included under this specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation. The Contractor will provide and install all of the required material whether specifically addressed in the Specification or not. B. The work shall include,but not be limited to the following: I. Furnish and install all equipment racks/cabinets/shelves. 2. Furnish and install all backboards. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED PRODUCTS A. Approved Equipment Rack/Cabinet/Shelf Manufacturer(s) 1. Chatsworth Products, Inc. 2. Middle Atlantic 3. Panduit 4. Or Approved Equal 2.02 EQUIPMENT RACKS/CABINETS/SHELVES A. Equipment Racks/Cabinets 1. The equipment rack shall be constructed of high strength, lightweight aluminum. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 27 11 16 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS CABINETS, RACKS AND ENCLOSURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. The vertical rails of the equipment rack shall be equipped with the EIA hole pattern. 3. Floor mounted Rack/Cabinet shall be: 7'H x 19"W x 29"D. 4. Wall mounted Rack/Cabinet shall be: 41.4"H x 19"W x 18"D. 5. Rack color shall be black. B. Single-Sided Equipment Shelves 1. The single-sided equipment shelf shall be constructed of high strength, lightweight aluminum. 2. The single-sided equipment shelf shall be a minimum depth of 15". 3. The single-sided equipment shelf shall support a minimum of 50lbs. 4. Single-Sided Equipment Shelf color shall be black. C. Double-Sided Equipment Shelves 1. The double-sided equipment shelf shall be constructed of high strength, lightweight aluminum. 2. The double-sided equipment shelf shall be a minimum depth of 26". 3. The double-sided equipment shelf shall support a minimum of 1501bs. 4. Double-Sided Equipment Shelf color shall be black. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EQUIPMENT RACKS/CABINETS/SHELVES A. Equipment racks shall be securely attached to the concrete floor using minimum 3/8" hardware or as required by local codes. B. Equipment cabinets shall be installed as per the requirements specified by the manufacturer's installation guidelines. C. Equipment racks/cabinets shall be placed with a minimum of 40-inch clearance from the walls from the front and rear of the rack or as indicated on Drawings. D. All equipment racks/cabinets shall be grounded to the telecommunications ground bus bar. E. Mounting screws not used for installing patch panels and other hardware shall be bagged and left with the rack upon completion of the installation. 3.02 BACKBOARDS A. Backboards shall be 3/4" void free plywood. Size of backboard shall be 4' x 8' unless noted differently on Drawings. Backboards shall be painted with two (2) coats of gray fire-retardant paint. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to Section 27 05 53 - Identification for Communications Systems for labeling details. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 27 11 16 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS CABINETS, RACKS AND ENCLOSURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 END OF SECTION 27 11 16 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 27 11 16 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS CABINETS, RACKS AND ENCLOSURES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 27 11 19 - COMMUNICATIONS TERMINATION BLOCKS AND PATCH PANELS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Applicable requirements of Division 27 - Communications shall be considered a part of this section and shall have the same force as if printed herein full. B. This document describes the products and execution requirements relating to Communications Termination Blocks and Patch Panels. C. Product specifications, general design considerations, and installation guidelines are provided in this document. The successful vendor shall meet or exceed all requirements described in this document and on the drawings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data from manufacturer's specifications. 1.03 WORK INCLUDED A. The work included under this specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation. The Contractor will provide and install all of the required material whether specifically addressed in the Specification or not. B. The work shall include,but not be limited to the following: 1. Furnish and install all patch panels. 2. Furnish and install all optical fiber panels/enclosures. 3. Furnish and install all termination blocks. 4. Furnish and install all PoE Switches PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED PRODUCTS A. Approved Patch Panel Manufacturer(s) L Leviton 2. Panduit 3. Middle Atlantic 4. Or Approved Equal B. Approved Optical Fiber Enclosure Manufacturer(s) 1. Leviton FIRE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 27 11 19 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS TERMINATION BLOCKS AND PATCH PANELS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Panduit 3. Middle Atlantic 4. Or Approved Equal C. Approved Termination Block Manufacturer(s) 1. Leviton 2. Panduit 3. Middle Atlantic 4. Or Approved Equal D. Approved PoE Switch Manufacturer(s) 1. Cisco—model C9300-48P-E 2.02 PATCH PANELS A. Category 6 Patch Panel 1. The Category 6 patch panel shall be compatible with 19" equipment racks, cabinets or wall mount brackets. 2. The Category 6 patch panel shall be equipped with 8-position modular ports and shall allow for termination using both T568A and T568B wiring schemes. 3. The Category 6 patch panel shall be equipped with front labeling space to facilitate port identification. 4. The connector module shall meet or exceed the Category 6 performance criteria per ANSI/TIA-568-C.2. 2.03 OPTICAL FIBER PANELS/ENCLOSURES A. Rack Mount Optical Fiber Panel/Enclosure 1. The rack mount optical fiber panel/enclosure shall be equipped with either a swing out mechanism or a sliding drawer to access fibers. 2. The rack mount optical fiber panel/enclosure shall be capable of terminating tight-buffered or loose tube optical fiber cable. 3. The rack mount optical fiber panel/enclosure shall provide for bend radius control throughout the panel as well as storage space for slack cabling. 4. The panel/enclosure shall meet or exceed the performance criteria per ANSI/TIA-568-C.3. 5. The rack mount optical fiber panel/enclosure shall be equipped with optical fiber adapter panels. a. The optical fiber adapter panels shall accommodate either multimode or singlemode terminated optical fiber. b. The optical fiber adapter panels shall be compatible with LC connectors. C. OM3 laser optimized adaptors shall be aqua in color and equipped with zirconia ceramic sleeves. d. Singlemode adaptors shall be blue or green in color and equipped with zirconia ceramic sleeves. B. Wall Mount Optical Fiber Panel/Enclosure FIRE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 27 11 19 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS TERMINATION BLOCKS AND PATCH PANELS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. The wall mount optical fiber panel/enclosure shall have a hinged door for access, with locking available for security. 2. The wall mount optical fiber panel/enclosure shall be capable of terminating tight-buffered or loose tube optical fiber cables and all popular connector types. 3. The wall mount optical fiber panel/enclosure shall provide for bend radius control throughout the panel as well as storage space for slack cabling. 4. The panel/enclosure shall meet or exceed the performance criteria per ANSI/TIA-568-C.3. 5. The wall mount optical fiber panel/enclosure shall be equipped with optical fiber adapter panels. a. The optical fiber adapter panels shall accommodate either multimode or singlemode terminated optical fiber. b. The optical fiber adapter panels shall be compatible with LC connectors. C. OM3 laser optimized adaptors shall be aqua in color and equipped with zirconia ceramic sleeves. d. Singlemode adaptors shall be blue or green in color and equipped with zirconia ceramic sleeves. 2.04 PoE Switches (as required) A. See section 27 2133 for exact specifications. 2.05 TERMINATION BLOCKS A. 110 Type Wiring Blocks/Cross-Connect Kits 1. The 110-type wiring blocks shall be available in 100- and/or 300-pair configurations. 2. The 110-type wiring block shall be Category 6. 3. The cross-connect kits shall include all the components required to complete a wall-mounted 110 cross-connect installation and be available in both 100- and/or 300-pair configuration. (Includes 110-blocks, connecting blocks and designation strips). 4. The termination block shall meet or exceed the performance criteria per ANSI/TIA-568-C.2. 5. Backbone blocks shall use 5-pair connecting blocks on each 25-pair row. 6. Horizontal blocks shall use 4-pair connecting blocks on each 25-pair row. B. 66-13locks 1. The 66-type wiring block shall be a 50-pair configuration. 2. The 66-type wiring block shall have a split clip system using bridge clips to connect incoming pairs to outgoing pairs. 3. The 66 block's labeling system shall use designation strips or covers to accommodate labels. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 PATCH PANELS FIRE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 27 11 19 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS TERMINATION BLOCKS AND PATCH PANELS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with the recommendations made in ANSUTIA-568-C.0 and/or ANSI/TIA-568-C.1, manufacturer's recommendations and best industry practice. B. Pair untwist at the termination shall not exceed 13 mm(0.5 inch). C. Bend radius of the cable in the termination area shall not exceed 4 times the outside diameter of the cable. D. Cables shall be neatly bundled and dressed to their respective patch panel. Each patch panel shall be fed by an individual bundle separated and dressed back to the point of cable entrance into the rack or frame. E. Each cable shall be clearly labeled on the cable jacket behind the patch panel at a location that can be viewed without removing the bundle support ties. Cables labeled within the bundle,where the label is obscured from view shall not be acceptable. 3.02 OPTICAL FIBER PANELS/ENCLOSURES A. Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with the recommendations made in ANSUTIA-568-C.0 and/or ANSUTIA-568-C.1, manufacturer's recommendations and best industry practices. B. Each cable shall be individually attached to the respective splice enclosure by mechanical means. The cables strength member shall be securely attached the cable strain relief bracket in the enclosure. C. Bend radius of the optic fiber cable in the panel/enclosure shall not exceed 10 times the outside diameter of the cable. D. Each fiber bundle shall be stripped upon entering the splice tray and the individual fibers routed in the splice tray. E. Each cable shall be clearly labeled at the entrance to the splice enclosure. Cables labeled within the bundle shall not be acceptable. F. A maximum of 12 strands of fiber shall be spliced in each tray. G. All spare strands shall be installed into spare splice trays. H. Fiber slack shall be neatly coiled within the fiber splice tray or enclosure. No slack loops shall be allowed external to the fiber panel. 3.03 TERMINATION BLOCKS A. Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with the recommendations made in ANSUTIA-568-C.0 and/or ANSUTIA-568-C.1, manufacturer's recommendations and best industry practice. B. Pair untwist at the termination shall not exceed 13 mm(0.5 inch). FIRE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2711 1 9 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS TERMINATION BLOCKS AND PATCH PANELS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Bend radius of the cable in the termination area shall not exceed 4 times the outside diameter of the cable. D. Cables shall be neatly bundled and dressed to their respective termination block. Each termination block shall be fed by an individual bundle separated and dressed back to the point of cable entrance into the rack or frame. E. Each cable shall be clearly labeled on the cable jacket within 12" of the termination block at a location that can be viewed without removing the bundle support ties. Cables labeled within the bundle,where the label is obscured from view shall not be acceptable. F. Wall mounted termination block fields shall be mounted on communications backboard. G. Wall mounted termination block fields shall be installed as per the requirements specified by the manufacturer's installation guidelines. 3.04 IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to Section 27 05 53 - Identification for Communications Systems for labeling details. END OF SECTION 27 11 19 FIRE STATION FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 27 11 19 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS TERMINATION BLOCKS AND PATCH PANELS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 27 11 23 - COMMUNICATIONS CABLE MANAGEMENT AND LADDER RACK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Applicable requirements of Division 27 - Communications shall be considered a part of this section and shall have the same force as if printed herein full. B. This document describes the products and execution requirements relating to Communications Cable Management and Ladder Rack. C. Product specifications, general design considerations, and installation guidelines are provided in this document. The successful vendor shall meet or exceed all requirements described in this document and on the drawings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data from manufacturer's specifications. 1.03 WORK INCLUDED A. The work included under this specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation. The Contractor will provide and install all of the required material whether specifically addressed in the Specification or not. B. The work shall include,but not be limited to the following: 1. Furnish and install all horizontal cable management. 2. Furnish and install all vertical cable management. 3. Furnish and install ladder rack system. 4. Furnish and install all tie wraps/Velcro straps. 5. Furnish and install all C-rings/D-rings. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED PRODUCTS A. Approved Horizontal Cable Management Manufacturer(s) 1. Chatsworth Products, Inc. 2. Middle Atlantic 3. Panduit 4. Or Approved Equal B. Approved Vertical Cable Management Manufacturer(s) FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 27 11 23 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS CABLE MANAGEMENT AND LADDER RACK DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Chatsworth Products, Inc. 2. Middle Atlantic 3. Panduit 4. Or Approved Equal C. Approved Ladder Rack System Manufacturer(s) 1. Chatsworth Products, Inc. 2. Middle Atlantic 3. Hoffman 4. Or Approved Equal D. Approved Tie Wrap/Velcro Strap Manufacturer(s) 1. Middle Atlantic 2. Panduit 3. Thomas &Betts 4. Or Approved Equal E. Approved C-Ring/D-ring Manufacturer(s) 1. Chatsworth Products,Inc. 2. Middle Atlantic 3. Panduit 4. Or Approved Equal 2.02 CABLE MANAGEMENT-HORIZONTAL A. Horizontal Cable Management 1. The horizontal wire manager shall be compatible with 19-inch equipment racks, cabinets or wall mount brackets. 2. The horizontal cable manager shall provide support for patch cords at the front of the panel. 3. The horizontal cable manager shall be 2 rack-units in height. 2.03 CABLE MANAGEMENT-VERTICAL A. Vertical Cable Management 1. The vertical cable manger shall be double-sided. 2. The vertical cable manager shall provide support for patch cords at the front of the rack and wire management at the rear of the rack. 3. The vertical cable manager shall be a minimum width of 6". 4. Vertical cable manager color shall be black. 2.04 LADDER RACKS A. Ladder Rack System 1. See Drawings for ladder rack system details. 2. The ladder rack system shall be securely mounted with hardware designed for FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 27 11 23 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS CABLE MANAGEMENT AND LADDER RACK DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 use in ladder rack systems. 3. End caps shall be installed on the exposed ends of the ladder racks, channel supports and bolts. Protective covers shall be installed on threaded rods that come in contact with cabling plant. 4. Ladder Rack System color shall be black. 2.05 TIE WRAPS AND VELCRO STRAPS A. Tie Wraps and Velcro Straps 1. Backbone cables shall be fastened to support structures with tie wraps/ Velcro straps. 2. Horizontal cables shall be fastened to support structures with Velcro straps. a. Tie Wrap color shall be black. b. Velcro Strap color shall be black. 2.06 C-RINGS/D-RINGS A. C-Rings/D-rings 1. C-rings/D-rings shall be used on backboards to support cables, patch cords and cross-connect wire. 2. C-rings/D-rings shall be made of high-strength, fire-retardant material with rounded edges to prevent damage to cable and wire insulation. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 CABLE MANAGEMENT-HORIZONTAL A. Horizontal cable managers shall be installed below patch panels in a 1:1 ratio (one horizontal cable manager per patch panel) and as indicated on Drawings. 3.02 CABLE MANAGEMENT-VERTICAL A. Vertical cable managers shall be installed on both sides of a single equipment rack. Where two (2) or more racks are positioned in a row, vertical cable managers shall be installed between each rack and each end of the row. 3.03 LADDER RACKS A. Ladder rack system shall be installed straight, level and perpendicular to walls and ceiling slabs. B. Ladder racks shall be supported at 5' intervals maximum. C. Provide all hardware, accessories, fasteners, anchors, threaded rods and support channels required to provide a complete ladder rack system. D. See Drawings for ladder rack system details. 3.04 TIE WRAPS AND VELCRO STRAPS FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 27 11 23 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS CABLE MANAGEMENT AND LADDER RACK DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Tie wrapsNelcro straps shall be installed around cables at intervals of 12"minimum. B. Tie wraps shall secure cables to ladder racks using an"X"pattern. C. Do not over-cinch cables. 3.05 C-RINGS/D-RINGS A. C-ring/D-rings shall be installed on 3/4" backboard, straight and level. 3.06 IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to Section 27 05 53 - Identification for Communications Systems for labeling details. END OF SECTION 27 11 23 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 27 11 23 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS CABLE MANAGEMENT AND LADDER RACK DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 27 11 26 - COMMUNICATIONS RACK MOUNTED POWER PROTECTION AND POWER STRIPS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Applicable requirements of Division 27 - Communications shall be considered a part of this section and shall have the same force as if printed herein full. B. This document describes the products and execution requirements relating to Communications Rack Mounted Power Protection and Power Strips. C. Product Specifications, general design considerations, and installation guidelines are provided in this document. The successful vendor shall meet or exceed all requirements described in this document and on the drawings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data from manufacturer's specifications. 1.03 WORK INCLUDED A. The work included under this specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation. The Contractor will provide and install all of the required material whether specifically addressed in the Specification or not. B. The work shall include,but not be limited to the following: 1. Furnish and install all power distribution units. 2. Furnish and install all rack mounted UPS. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED PRODUCTS A. Approved Power Distribution Unit Manufacturer(s) 1. Leviton 2. Middle Geist 3. Geist 4. Or Approved Equal B. Approved Rack Mounted UPS Manufacturer(s) 1. APC 2. Middle Atlantic 3. Tripp Lite FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 27 11 26 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS RACK MOUNTED POWER PROTECTION AND POWER STRIPS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 4. Or Approved Equal 2.02 POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS A. Power Distribution Unit 1. The power distribution unit shall be equipped with a minimum of twelve (12) 3- prong, 120 VAC outlets, 7'cord and an on/off switch. 2. The power distribution unit shall be equipped with surge protection with a 20 Amp current limit. 3. The power distribution unit shall be equipped with a bracket that enables it to be mounted on a 19"rack,cabinet or wall mount bracket without modification. 2.03 RACK MOUNTED UPS A. 1500VA Rack Mounted UPS (IDF Rooms) 1. The rack mounted UPS shall have an output power capacity of 1,440VA/980W. Input/output voltage shall be 120V. Power cord length shall be eight (8) feet, minimum. 2. The rack mounted UPS shall be equipped with six (6) NEMA 5-15R output connections. 3. The rack mounted UPS shall have a surge energy rating of 459 joules and have a typical backup time of 7.4 minutes at full load. 4. The rack mounted UPS shall be 2 rack-units in height and able to mount to a 19" rack or cabinet without modification. B. 3000VA Rack Mounted UPS (MDF Rooms and AN Rooms) 1. The rack mounted UPS shall have an output power capacity of 3,000VA/2,100W. Input/output voltage shall be 208V. Output voltage shall be 120V/208V. Power cord length shall be ten(10 feet, minimum. 2. The rack mounted UPS shall be equipped with twelve (12) NEMA 5-20R, two (2)NEMA L6-20R and one (1)NEMA L6-30R output connections. 3. The rack mounted UPS shall have a surge energy rating of 480 joules and have a typical backup time of 14.1 minutes at full load. 4. The rack mounted UPS shall be 5 rack-units in height and able to mount to a 19" rack or cabinet without modification. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 POWER DISTRIBUTION UNITS A. Power distribution units shall be installed as per the requirements specified by the manufacturer's installation guidelines. B. See Drawings for installation location on rack(s)/cabinet(s). 3.02 RACK MOUNTED UPS FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 27 11 26 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS RACK MOUNTED POWER PROTECTION AND POWER STRIPS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Rack mounted UPS shall be installed as per the requirements specified by the manufacturer's installation guidelines. B. See Drawings for installation location on rack(s)/cabinet(s). 3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to Section 27 05 53 - Identification for Communications Systems for labeling details. END OF SECTION 27 1126 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 27 11 26 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS RACK MOUNTED POWER PROTECTION AND POWER STRIPS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 27 15 13 - COMMUNICATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Applicable requirements of Division 27 - Communications shall be considered a part of this section and shall have the same force as if printed herein full. B. This document describes the products and execution requirements relating to Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling. C. Product specifications, general design considerations, and installation guidelines are provided in this document. The successful vendor shall meet or exceed all requirements described in this document and on the drawings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data from manufacturer's specifications. 1.03 WORK INCLUDED A. The work included under this specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation. The Contractor will provide and install all of the required material whether specifically addressed in the Specification or not. B. The work shall include,but not be limited to the following: 1. Furnish and install all horizontal copper cable. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED PRODUCTS A. Approved Horizontal Copper Cable Manufacturer(s) I. General Cable 2. OCC 3. Superior Essex 4. Or Approved Equal 2.02 HORIZONTAL COPPER CABLE A. 100 OHM Category 6 Balanced Twisted Pair Cable 1. The horizontal balanced twisted pair cable shall meet or exceed the Category 6 transmission characteristics per issue of ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.2. 2. Cable jacket shall be CMR or CMP rated(according to the space it occupies). 3. Jacket color shall be: FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 27 15 13 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 a. Gray for voice. b. Blue for data PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 HORIZONTAL CABLES A. Cable shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and best industry practices. B. A plastic or nylon pull cord with a minimum test rating of 90 Kg (200 lb.) shall be co- installed with all cable installed in any conduit. C. Cable raceways shall not be filled greater than the ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-B maximum fill for the particular raceway type. D. Cables shall be installed in continuous lengths from origin to destination (no splices) except for transition points, or consolidation points. E. Riser rated cable shall be installed in metallic conduit when installed in a plenum space. F. Where transition points or consolidation points are allowed, they shall be located in accessible locations and housed in an enclosure intended and suitable for the purpose. G. The cable's minimum bend radius and maximum pulling tension shall not be exceeded. Refer to manufacturer's requirements. H. If a J-hook or trapeze system is used to support cable bundles all horizontal cables shall be supported at a maximum of 48 to 60 inch (1.2 to 1.5 meter) intervals. At no point shall cable(s)rest on acoustic ceiling grids or panels. 1. Horizontal distribution cables shall be bundled in groups of no more than 50 cables. Cable bundle quantities in excess of 50 cables may cause deformation of the bottom cables within the bundle and degrade cable performance. J. Cable shall be installed above fire-sprinkler systems and shall not be attached to the system or any ancillary equipment or hardware. The cable system and support hardware shall be installed so that it does not obscure any valves, fire alarm conduit, boxes, or other control devices. K. Cables shall not be attached to ceiling grid or lighting fixture wires. Where support for horizontal cable is required, the Contractor shall install appropriate carriers to support the cabling. L. Any cable damaged or exceeding recommended installation parameters during installation shall be replaced by the Contractor prior to final acceptance at no cost to the Owner. M. Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with the recommendations made in the ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.2 document, manufacturer's recommendations and best industry practices. N. Leave a minimum of 12" of slack for twisted pair cables at the outlet. Cables shall be FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 27 15 13 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 coiled in the in-wall box, surface-mount box or modular furniture raceway if adequate space is present to house the cable coil without exceeding the manufacturers bend radius. In hollow-wall installations where box-eliminators are used, excess wire can be stored in the wall. Excess slack shall be loosely coiled and stored in the ceiling above each drop location when there is not enough space present in the outlet box to store slack cable. O. Cables shall be neatly bundled and dressed to their respective termination device. Each terminating device shall be fed by an individual bundle separated and dressed back to the point of cable entrance into the rack or frame. P. Each cable shall be clearly labeled on the cable jacket behind the termination device at a location that can be viewed without removing the bundle support ties. Cables labeled within the bundle,where the label is obscured from view shall not be acceptable. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to Section 27 05 53 - Identification for Communications Systems for labeling details. END OF SECTION 27 15 13 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 27 15 13 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 27 15 13 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS COPPER HORIZONTAL CABLING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 27 15 23 - COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER HORIZONTAL CABLING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Applicable requirements of Division 27 - Communications shall be considered a part of this section and shall have the same force as if printed herein full. B. This document describes the products and execution requirements relating to Communications Optical Fiber Horizontal Cabling. C. Product specifications, general design considerations, and installation guidelines are provided in this document. The successful vendor shall meet or exceed all requirements described in this document and on the drawings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data from manufacturer's specifications. 1.03 WORK INCLUDED A. The work included under this specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation. The Contractor will provide and install all of the required material whether specifically addressed in the specification or not. B. The work shall include,but not be limited to the following: 1. Furnish and install all horizontal optical fiber cable. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED PRODUCTS A. Approved Horizontal Optical Fiber Cable Manufacturer(s) 1. Berk-Tek 2. General Cable 3. OCC 4. Superior Essex 5. Or Approved Equal 2.02 HORIZONTAL OPTICAL FIBER CABLE A. Plenum - Indoor Distribution 850nm Laser-Optimized 50/125 Multimode Optical Fiber Non-Conductive, Tight Buffered Cable(OM3) FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 27 15 23 - 1 MAY 2 , 2023 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER HORIZONTAL CABLING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Generic Characteristics a. The indoor optical fiber cable shall be available with up to twelve 900- micron tight-buffered 250-micron fibers placed in a color-coded sub-unit bundle with aramid strength elements. b. The indoor optical fiber cable shall meet or exceed the performance criteria found in ANSI/TIA-568-C.3. C. The indoor optical fiber cable shall have sequential length marking printed on the cable jacket. d. Maximum attenuation dB/Km @ 850/1300 nm: 3.5/1.5 e. Minimum overfilled modal bandwidth: 1500 MHz-km @ 850 nm. f. Minimum overfilled modal bandwidth: 500 MHz-km @ 1300 nm. g. Minimum effective modal bandwidth: 2000 MHz-km @ 850nm h. Cable jacket shall be CMR or CMP rated (according to the space it occupies). PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 HORIZONTAL CABLES A. Cable shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and best industry practices. B. A plastic or nylon pull cord with a minimum test rating of 90 Kg (200 lb.) shall be co- installed with all cable installed in any conduit. C. Cable raceways shall not be filled greater than the ANSIMA-569-13 maximum fill for the particular raceway type. D. Cables shall be installed in continuous lengths from origin to destination (no splices) except for transition points, or consolidation points. E. Riser rated cable shall be installed in metallic conduit when installed in a plenum space. F. Where transition points or consolidation points are allowed, they shall be located in accessible locations and housed in an enclosure intended and suitable for the purpose. G. The cable's minimum bend radius and maximum pulling tension shall not be exceeded. Refer to manufacturer's requirements. H. If a J-hook or trapeze system is used to support cable bundles all horizontal cables shall be supported at a maximum of 48 to 60 inch (1.2 to 1.5 meter) intervals. At no point shall cable(s)rest on acoustic ceiling grids or panels. 1. Horizontal distribution cables shall be bundled in groups of no more than 50 cables. Cable bundle quantities in excess of 50 cables may cause deformation of the bottom cables within the bundle and degrade cable performance. J. Cable shall be installed above fire-sprinkler systems and shall not be attached to the system or any ancillary equipment or hardware. The cable system and support hardware shall be installed so that it does not obscure any valves, fire alarm conduit, boxes, or other control devices. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 27 15 23 - 2 MAY 2 , 2023 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER HORIZONTAL CABLING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 K. Cables shall not be attached to ceiling grid or lighting fixture wires. Where support for horizontal cable is required, the Contractor shall install appropriate carriers to support the cabling. L. Any cable damaged or exceeding recommended installation parameters during installation shall be replaced by the Contractor prior to final acceptance at no cost to the Owner. M. Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with the recommendations made in ANSI/TIA-568-C.0 and/or ANSI/TIA-568-C-1, manufacturer's recommendations and best industry practices. N. Leave a minimum of 36" of slack for optical fiber at the outlet. Cables shall be coiled in the in-wall box, surface-mount box or modular furniture raceway if adequate space is present to house the cable coil without exceeding the manufacturers bend radius. Excess slack shall be loosely coiled and stored in the ceiling above each drop location where there is not enough space present in the outlet box to store slack cable. O. Cables shall be neatly bundled and dressed to their respective termination device. Each terminating device shall be fed by an individual bundle separated and dressed back to the point of cable entrance into the rack or frame. P. Each cable shall be clearly labeled on the cable jacket behind the termination device at a location that can be viewed without removing the bundle support ties. Cables labeled within the bundle,where the label is obscured from view shall not be acceptable. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to Section 27 05 53 - Identification for Communications Systems for labeling details. END OF SECTION 27 15 23 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 27 15 23 - 3 MAY 2 , 2023 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER HORIZONTAL CABLING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 27 15 23 - 4 MAY 2 , 2023 COMMUNICATIONS OPTICAL FIBER HORIZONTAL CABLING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 27 15 33 - COMMUNICATIONS COAXIAL HORIZONTAL CABLING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Applicable requirements of Division 27 - Communications shall be considered a part of this section and shall have the same force as if printed herein full. B. This document describes the products and execution requirements relating to Communications Coaxial Horizontal Cabling. C. Product specifications, general design considerations, and installation guidelines are provided in this document. The successful vendor shall meet or exceed all requirements described in this document and on the drawings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data from manufacturer's specifications. 1.03 WORK INCLUDED A. The work included under this specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation. The Contractor will provide and install all of the required material whether specifically addressed in the Specification or not. B. The work shall include,but not be limited to the following: 1. Furnish and install all horizontal coaxial cable. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED PRODUCTS A. Approved Horizontal Coaxial Cable Manufacturer(s) 1. General Cable 2. CommScope 3. Belden 4. Or Approved Equal 2.02 HORIZONTAL COAXIAL CABLE A. Series 6 Coax 1. Series-6 coaxial cable shall be used for horizontal runs less than 150'. 2. Series-6 coaxial cable shall be 75-Ohm impedance with a nominal attenuation value of less than 29dB/100m at 1 GHz for CMP rated jacket and less than 22dB/100M at 1 GHz for CMR rated jacket. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 27 15 33 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS COAXIAL HORIZONTAL CABLING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. Cable construction shall be 18 AWG solid-copper or copper-clad steel center- conductor and foam FEP dielectric. Cables shall be provided with 60% / 40% quad shields with braid constructed of aluminum or tinned copper wire. 4. Cable jacket shall be CMR or CMP rated(according to the space it occupies). B. Series 11 Coax 1. Series-11 coaxial cable shall be used for horizontal runs that exceed 150'. 2. Series-11 coaxial cable shall be 75-Ohm impedance with a nominal attenuation value of less than 2ldB/100m at 1 GHz for CMP rated jacket and less than l5d13/100M at 1 GHz for CM rated jacket. 3. Cable construction shall be 14 AWG solid-copper or copper-clad steel center- conductor and foam FEP dielectric. Cables shall be provided with 60%/40% quad shields with braid constructed of aluminum or tinned copper wire. 4. Cable jacket shall be CMR or CMP rated(according to the space it occupies). PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 HORIZONTAL CABLES A. Cable shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and best industry practices. B. A plastic or nylon pull cord with a minimum test rating of 90 Kg (200 lb.) shall be co- installed with all cable installed in any conduit. C. Cable raceways shall not be filled greater than the ANSI/TIA-569-B maximum fill for the particular raceway type. D. Cables shall be installed in continuous lengths from origin to destination (no splices) except for transition points, or consolidation points. E. Riser rated cable shall be installed in metallic conduit when installed in a plenum space. F. Where transition points or consolidation points are allowed, they shall be located in accessible locations and housed in an enclosure intended and suitable for the purpose. G. The cable's minimum bend radius and maximum pulling tension shall not be exceeded. Refer to manufacturer's requirements. H. If a J-hook or trapeze system is used to support cable bundles all horizontal cables shall be supported at a maximum of 48 to 60 inch (1.2 to 1.5 meter) intervals. At no point shall cable(s)rest on acoustic ceiling grids or panels. I. Horizontal distribution cables shall be bundled in groups of no more than 50 cables. Cable bundle quantities in excess of 50 cables may cause deformation of the bottom cables within the bundle and degrade cable performance. J. Cable shall be installed above fire-sprinkler systems and shall not be attached to the system or any ancillary equipment or hardware. The cable system and support hardware shall be installed so that it does not obscure any valves, fire alarm conduit, boxes, or other control devices. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 27 1533 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS COAXIAL HORIZONTAL CABLING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 K. Cables shall not be attached to ceiling grid or lighting fixture wires. Where support for horizontal cable is required, the Contractor shall install appropriate carriers to support the cabling. L. Any cable damaged or exceeding recommended installation parameters during installation shall be replaced by the Contractor prior to final acceptance at no cost to the Owner. M. Cables shall be dressed and terminated in accordance with the recommendations made in ANSI/TIA-568-C.0 and/or ANSI/TIA-568-C.1, manufacturer's recommendations and best industry practices. N. Leave a minimum of 12" of slack for coax cables at the outlet. Cables shall be coiled in the in-wall box, surface-mount box or modular furniture raceway if adequate space is present to house the cable coil without exceeding the manufacturers bend radius. In hollow-wall installations where box-eliminators are used, excess wire can be stored in the wall. Excess slack shall be loosely coiled and stored in the ceiling above each drop location when there is not enough space present in the outlet box to store slack cable. O. Cables shall be neatly bundled and dressed to their respective termination device. Each terminating device shall be fed by an individual bundle separated and dressed back to the point of cable entrance into the rack or frame. P. Each cable shall be clearly labeled on the cable jacket behind the termination device at a location that can be viewed without removing the bundle support ties. Cables labeled within the bundle,where the label is obscured from view shall not be acceptable. 3.02 IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to Section 27 05 53 - Identification for Communications Systems for labeling details. END OF SECTION 27 15 33 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 27 1533 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS COAXIAL HORIZONTAL CABLING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 27 15 43 - COMMUNICATIONS FACEPLATES AND CONNECTORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Applicable requirements of Division 27 - Communications shall be considered a part of this section and shall have the same force as if printed herein full. B. This document describes the products and execution requirements relating to Communications Faceplates and Connectors. C. Product specifications, general design considerations, and installation guidelines are provided in this document. The successful vendor shall meet or exceed all requirements described in this document and on the drawings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data from manufacturer's specifications. 1.03 WORK INCLUDED A. The work included under this Specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation. The Contractor will provide and install all of the required material whether specifically addressed in the Specification or not. B. The work shall include,but not be limited to the following: I. Furnish and install all copper connectivity. 2. Furnish and install all optical fiber connectivity. 3. Furnish and install all coaxial connectivity. 4. Furnish and install all faceplates. 5. Furnish and install all surface mount boxes. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED PRODUCTS A. Approved Copper Connectivity Manufacturer(s) L Leviton 2. Panduit 3. CommScope 4. Or Approved Equal B. Approved Optical Fiber Connectivity Manufacturer(s) L Leviton 2. Panduit FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 27 15 43 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS FACEPLATES AND CONNECTORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. CommScope 4. Or Approved Equal C. Approved Coaxial Connectivity Manufacturer(s) 1. Cable Connectors a. Leviton b. Panduit C. CommScope d. Or Approved Equal 2. F-Connectors a. Leviton b. Panduit C. CommScope d. Or Approved Equal D. Approved Faceplate Manufacturer(s) 1. Leviton 2. Panduit 3. CommScope 4. Or Approved Equal E. Approved Surface Mount Box manufacturer(s) 1. Leviton 2. Panduit 3. CommScope 4. Or Approved Equal 2.02 COPPER CONNECTIVITY A. Voice/Data Jacks 1. Category 6, 8-Position, 8-Contact(8P8C)Modular Jack a. The connector module shall meet or exceed the Category 6 performance criteria per ANSI/TIA-568-C.2. b. The eight-position connector module shall accommodate six-position modular plug modular cords without damage to either the cord or the module. C. The connector module shall be designed for use at the work area (WA), communications room (TR) and/or equipment room (ER) without modification. d. The connector module shall be available in both the T568A and T568B wiring configurations within the same module. e. The connector module shall have an insulation displacement connection featuring insulation slicing of 22 to 24 AWG plastic-insulated solid copper conductors forming a gas-tight connection. f. Icons shall be used if offered from the manufacturer. g. Jack/Icon colors shall be: 1) Gray for voice 2) Blue for data FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 27 1543 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS FACEPLATES AND CONNECTORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2.03 FIBER CONNECTIVITY A. Laser Optimized Multimode Fiber Connectivity OM3 1. The optical fiber field-installable connector shall be LC, for installation onto multimode a laser optimized 50/125-micron fiber. 2. The optical fiber field-installable connector shall be compatible with 900-micron buffered fibers. 3. The optical fiber field-installable connector shall meet or exceed the performance criteria found in ANSI/TIA-568-C.3. 4. The optical fiber field-installable connector shall have a maximum Loss of 0 .5 dB. 5. The optical fiber adapter module that occupies the faceplate shall be equipped with zirconia sleeve. 6. Laser optimized connector color shall be aqua. 2.04 COAXIAL CONNECTIVITY A. Connectors shall be solderless, 75-Ohm impedance and be designed for the specific type of cable used. B. Series-6 connectors shall be one piece. Series-11 connectors shall use the cable's center conductor as the connector's center pin. C. All Series-6 and Series-11 connections shall be made with compression-type connectors. D. Screw-on connectors are not acceptable. E. The coaxial adapter module that occupies the faceplate shall be a 75-ohm, F-type connector. 2.05 FACEPLATES A. Faceplates 1. The faceplate housing the connector modules shall have no visible mounting screws. 2. Faceplates shall be midsize. 3. It shall be possible to install the connector modules in wall-mounted single- and dual-gang electrical boxes, utility poles and modular furniture (cubicle) access points using manufacturer-supplied faceplates and/or adapters. 4. The faceplate housing the connector modules shall have the option of being mounted on adapter boxes for surface mount installation. 5. The faceplate housing the connector modules shall have a labeling capability using built-in labeling windows, to facilitate outlet identification and ease network management. 6. The faceplate housing the connector modules shall provide flexibility in configuring multimedia workstation outlets that respond to present or future network needs such as audio,video, coaxial and optical fiber applications. 7. Color shall be same as electrical faceplates. Coordinate with Architect. 2.06 SURFACE MOUNT BOXES FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 27 1543 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS FACEPLATES AND CONNECTORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. The surface mount box shall accommodate connections of any type, UTP, optical fiber or coax. B. The surface mount box shall have internal storage space for slack cabling and a built-in spool for controlling cable bend radius. C. Color shall be same as electrical faceplates. Coordinate with Architect. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 COPPER CONNECTIVITY A. 8-position, 8-contact (8P8C) modular jacks shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation guides, and best industry practices. B. Pair untwist at the termination shall not exceed 13 mm(0.5 inch). C. Data jacks, unless otherwise noted in Drawings or fiber adapter modules are present, shall be located in the bottom position(s) of each faceplate. Data jacks in horizontally oriented faceplates shall occupy the right-most position(s). D. Voice jacks, unless otherwise noted in Drawings, shall occupy the top position(s) on the faceplate. Voice jacks in horizontally oriented faceplates shall occupy the left-most position(s). 3.02 OPTICAL FIBER CONNECTIVITY A. Optical fiber connectors shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation guides, and best industry practices. B. Fiber adapter modules, unless otherwise noted in Drawings, shall be located in the bottom position(s) of each faceplate. Fiber adapter modules in horizontally oriented faceplates shall occupy the right-most position(s). 3.03 COAXIAL CONNECTIVITY A. F-connectors shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and installation guides, and best industry practices. B. Cable preparation and connector application shall be done only with tools approved for use with the connector. 3.04 FACEPLATES A. Blank inserts shall be installed where ports are not used. B. The same orientation and positioning of jacks and connectors shall be utilized throughout the installation. C. Faceplates shall be installed straight and level. D. Faceplates shall be installed at heights as noted on the Drawings and same as electrical faceplates. Coordinate with electrical and Architect. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 27 1543 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS FACEPLATES AND CONNECTORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.05 SURFACE MOUNT BOXES A. Blank inserts shall be installed where ports are not used. B. The same orientation and positioning of jacks and connectors shall be utilized throughout the installation. C. Surface mount boxes shall be installed straight and level. D. Surface mount shall be installed at heights as noted on the Drawings. 3.06 IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to Section 27 05 53 - Identification for Communications Systems for labeling details. END OF SECTION 27 15 43 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 27 1543 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS FACEPLATES AND CONNECTORS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 27 16 19 - COMMUNICATIONS PATCH CORDS AND STATION CORDS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Applicable requirements of Division 27 - Communications shall be considered a part of this section and shall have the same force as if printed herein full. B. This document describes the products and execution requirements relating to Voice and Data Cross-Connect/Patching Equipment. C. Product specifications, general design considerations, and installation guidelines are provided in this document. The successful vendor shall meet or exceed all requirements described in this document and on the drawings. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data from manufacturer's specifications. 1.03 WORK INCLUDED A. The work included under this specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation. The Contractor will provide and install all of the required material whether specifically addressed in the Specification or not. B. The work shall include,but not be limited to the following: I. Furnish and install all copper patch cords/station cords. 2. Furnish and install fiber patch cords/station cords. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED PRODUCTS A. Approved Copper Patch Cord/Station Cord Manufacturer(s) 1. General Cable 2. OCC 3. Superior Essex 4. Or Approved Equal B. Approved Fiber Patch Cord/Station Cord Manufacturer(s) 5. General Cable 6. OCC 7. Superior Essex 8. Or Approved Equal FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 27 16 19 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS PATCH CORDS AND STATION CORDS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2.02 COPPER PATCH CORDS/STATION CORDS A. Category 6 Patch Cords/Station Cords I. The Category 6 patch cord/station cord shall be 4-pair, with 24 AWG solid or stranded copper conductors and 8-position modular plug. 2. The Category 6 modular cord cable shall be UL Listed as Type CMR. 3. The Category 6 patch cord/station cord shall meet or exceed the requirements of ANSI/TIA-568-C.2. a. The Category 6 patch cord/station cord color for voice shall be: Gray b. The Category 6 patch cord/station cord color for data shall be: Blue 2.03 FIBER PATCH CORDS/STATION CORDS A. Multimode Fiber Patch Cords/Station Cords 1. 50/125-Micron 850nm Laser Optimized Multimode Fiber Patch Cord/Station Cord(OM3) a. The 50/125-micron fiber used in the multimode fiber patch cord/station cord shall have a maximum attenuation of 3.5dB/km@ 850 nm and 1.5 dB/km @1300 nm. b. The 50/125-micron 850nm laser optimized multimode fiber patch cord/station cord shall meet or exceed the requirements of ANSI/TIA- 568-C.3. C. The optical fiber cord connector shall be LC. d. The multimode fiber patch cord assembly shall be dual zip jacketed. B. Singlemode Fiber Patch Cords 1. 8.3/125-micron singlemode fiber patch cord: a. The 8.3/125-micron fiber used in the singlemode fiber patch cord shall have a maximum attenuation of 1.0 dB/km @ 1310 nm and 1.0 dB/km @ 1550 nm. b. The optical fiber cord connector shall have a maximum insertion loss of 0.5 dB and a reflectance of-30 dB. C. The 8.3/125-micron singlemode fiber patch cord/station cord shall meet or exceed the requirements of ANSI/TIA-568-C.3. d. The optical fiber cord connector shall be LC. e. The singlemode fiber patch cord assembly shall be dual zip jacketed. f. Angle polish connectors shall be used for video distribution. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 COPPER PATCH CORDS/STATION CORDS A. Copper patch cords/station cords shall be installed as per the requirements specified by the manufacturer's installation guidelines. 3.02 FIBER PATCH CORDS/STATION CORDS FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 27 16 19 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS PATCH CORDS AND STATION CORDS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Fiber patch cords/station cords shall be installed as per the requirements specified by the manufacturer's installation guidelines. 3.03 IDENTIFICATION A. Refer to Section 27 05 53 - Identification for Communications Systems for labeling details. END OF SECTION 27 16 19 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 27 16 19 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS PATCH CORDS AND STATION CORDS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2716 1 9 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 COMMUNICATIONS PATCH CORDS AND STATION CORDS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 27 21 33 - WIRELESS ACCESS POINTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Applicable requirements of Division 27 - Communications shall be considered a part of this section and shall have the same force as if printed herein full. B. This document describes the products and execution requirements relating to Wireless Access Points requirements. C. Product specifications, general design considerations, and installation guidelines are provided in this document. The successful vendor shall meet or exceed all requirements described in this document and on the drawings. D. All equipment supplied shall be listed for the purpose for which it is used and installed in accordance with any instructions included in its listing. E. All cabling for Wireless Access Points shall be Category 6. All cabling routed in exposed areas shall be in conduit. F. See Section 27 15 13, "Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling,"for further detailed requirements for cabling materials and installations. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data from manufacturers' specifications. B. See Section 27 00 00 "Communications"for additional requirements. 1.03 WORK INCLUDED A. The work included under this specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation. The Contractor will provide and install all of the required material whether specifically addressed in the Specification or not. B. The work shall include,but not be limited to the following: 1. Furnish and install all wireless access points. 2. Furnish and install all PoE switches. 1.04 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Wireless Access Points (Indoor and Outdoor) 1. IEEE 802.11 ac Multi-user MIMO compliant. 2. Dual-band 2.4/5GHz support 3. 80MHz channelization FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2721 33 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 WIRELESS ACCESS POINTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 4. 256-QAM modulation support 5. 1733 Mbps PHY rates at 5GHz 6. Backward compatibility with legacy 802.11 clients 7. IEEE 802.3af/at Power over Ethernet compatibility 8. IEEE 802.11 ac Tx beamforming capability 9. Integrated NAT and DHCP support 10. Wall or ceiling mountable 11. WPA-PSK(AES) IEEE 802.1X RADIUS and AD capability B. PoE Switches 1. IEEE 802.3af Power over Ethernet compliant 2. 2.68Mbps throughput 3. 3.6Gbps switching capacity 4. Broadcast storm control capability 5. 20MB RAM minimum 6. Auto MDI/MDI-X capability 7. 95W minimum PoE budget 8. 19"rack-mountable 9. UL listed 10. RoHS compliant 1.05 RECORD DRAWINGS A. Provide a complete set of Wireless Access Point manufacturer's product data and shop drawings incorporating all addenda and field changes. B. Provide operating and maintenance manuals. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 PRODUCT/MATERIAL DESCRIPTION A. Wireless Access Points shall be IEEE 802.11 ac compliant, capable of dual-band operation at 2.4 and 5GHz. Each Wireless Access Point location shall be cabled with two (2) Category 6 cables for full IEEE 802.11 ac performance. B. Wireless Access Points shall have the following basic features and capabilities: I. 80MHz channelization 2. 256-QAM modulation support 3. 1733 Mbps PHY rates at 5GHz 4. Backward compatibility with legacy 802.11 clients 5. IEEE 802.3af/at Power over Ethernet compatibility 6. IEEE 802.11 ac Tx beamforming capability 7. Integrated NAT and DHCP support 8. Wall or ceiling mountable 9. WPA-PSK(AES) IEEE 802.1X RADIUS and AD capability C. Power for Wireless Access Points shall be via Power over Ethernet(PoE) compliant with the IEEE 802.3af standard. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2721 33 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 WIRELESS ACCESS POINTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 D. PoE Switches shall have IEEE 802.3af compliance, and be compatible with Category 6 cabling. E. PoE Switches shall have the following basic features and capabilities: 1. 2.68Mbps throughput 2. 3.6Gbps switching capacity 3. Broadcast storm control capability 4. 20MB RAM minimum 5. Auto MDI/MDI-X capability 6. 95W minimum PoE budget 7. 19"rack-mountable 8. UL listed 9. RoHS compliant 10. Telnet remote login capability 11. Non-blocking architecture 12. SNMP v 1 and v2 compatibility 13. Wirespeed performance 14. Rapid Spanning-Tree capability 15. WPA-PSK(AES)IEEE 802.1X RADIUS capability 16. VLAN tagging 17. Port mirroring 18. Link aggregation—LACP capability 19. SNTP capability 20. GVRP capability 2.02 APPROVED PRODUCTS A. Approved Wireless Access Point Manufacturer(s) 1. Cisco Meraki—MR Series 2. Or Approved Equal B. Approved PoE Switch Manufacturer(s) 1. Cisco—model C9300-48P-E PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 WIRELESS ACCESS POINTS A. Wireless access points and supporting equipment shall be installed as per the requirements specified by the manufacturers' installation guidelines and best industry practice. B. Provide all necessary interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a complete and operable system. C. Install control signal, communications, and data transmission line grounding as necessary to preclude ground loops, noise,and surges from adversely affecting system operation. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2721 33 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 WIRELESS ACCESS POINTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. All devices shall be tested for full operational compliance. 2. Testing of system shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 3.03 LABELING A. Label all cables at each end of each cable. Labels shall be machine generated, wrap- around type. B. Labeling system shall designate the cable's origin and destination on each end of each distribution/horizontal cable. 3.04 LABELING A. All outdoor Wireless Access Point cabling shall have surge protection devices installed at each end that complies with manufacturer recommendations. 3.05 WARRANTY A. All equipment, components, etc., shall be guaranteed free of defects and any faulty workmanship for a period of one year after final acceptance. B. The Contractor shall replace defective materials and repair faulty workmanship within 24 hours of discovery at no cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 27 21 33 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2721 33 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 WIRELESS ACCESS POINTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 274113 -MULTI-ZONE AUDIO-VISUAL SYSTEM PART 1—GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Applicable requirements of Division 27 - Communications shall be considered a part of this section and shall have the same force as if printed herein full. B. This document describes the products and execution requirements relating to Multi-Zone Audio-Visual requirements. C. Product specifications, general design considerations, and installation guidelines are provided in this document. The successful vendor shall meet or exceed all requirements described in this document and on the drawings. D. Coordinate with Architectural reflected-ceiling plans to confirm all ceiling types and to ensure proper mounting brackets are utilized (i.e. ceiling-mounted, pendant-mounted, beam-mounted, etc.) E. Digital signage/displays are not included within the JSE Low Voltage scope of work. Coordinate provision of proprietary hardware and software for these systems with the Owner's contracted vendor. JSE's Low Voltage scope include provision of Category 6 data connectivity only for these devices/locations. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data from manufacturers' specifications. 1.03 WORK INCLUDED A. The work included under this specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation. The Contractor will provide and install all of the required material whether specifically addressed in the Specification or not. B. Provide all required head end equipment (amplifiers, digital signal processors, zone controllers, local volume controls, audio sources, etc.) required for a fully functional system. Coordinate audio source preferences and requirements with the Owner prior to procurement and installation. C. The work shall include,but not be limited to the following: 1. Furnish and install all controllers. 2. Furnish and install all audio sources (FM tuners, XM/satellite tuners, Pandora/streaming service tuners, CD/MP3/media players, etc.). 3. Furnish and install all rack mount kits. 4. Furnish and install all power supplies. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2741 13 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 MULTI-ZONE AUDIO-VISUAL SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 5. Furnish and install all hubs/repeaters. 6. Furnish and install all touchpanels/keypads. 7. Furnish and install all 1R emitters. 8. Furnish and install all zone processors. 9. Furnish and install all power amplifiers. 10. Furnish and install all audio baluns. 11. Furnish and install all power conditioners. 12. Furnish and install all speakers and subwoofers. 13. Furnish and install all projectors. 14. Furnish and install all projector ceiling mounts. 15. Furnish and install all motorized projection screens. 16. Furnish and install all cables. 17. Furnish and install all racks. 18. Furnish and install all required television/display mounting brackets. 19. Furnish and install all projectors 20. Furnish and install all projection screens/boards PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED PRODUCTS A. Approved Controller Manufacturer(s) 1. Crestron 2. Extron 3. AMX B. Approved Audio Source Manufacturer(s) 1. Confirm preferences and requirements with Owner prior to installation: a. MOOD Media b. Crestron C. Extron d. AMX e. Or Approved Equal C. Approved Rack Mount Kit Manufacturer(s) 1. Crestron 2. Extron 3. AMX D. Approved Power Supply Manufacturer(s) 1. Crestron 2. Extron 3. AMX E. Approved Hub/Repeater Manufacturer(s) FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2741 13 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 MULTI-ZONE AUDIO-VISUAL SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Crestron 2. Extron 3. AMX F. Approved Touchpanel/Keypad Manufacturer(s) 1. Crestron 2. Extron 3. AMX G. Approved IR Emitter Manufacturer 1. Crestron 2. Extron 3. AMX H. Approved Zone Processor Manufacturer(s) 1. Crestron 2. Extron 3. AMX I. Approved Power Amplifier Manufacturer(s) 1. QSC J. Approved Audio Balun Manufacturer(s) 1. Crestron 2. Extron 3. AMX K. Approved Power Conditioner Manufacturer(s) 1. Furman L. Approved Speaker and Subwoofer Manufacturer(s) 1. Ceiling-Mounted Speakers a. JBL—Control Contractor Series b. Crestron C. Extron d. AMX 2. Wall-Mounted Speakers a. JBL—Control Contractor Series b. Crestron c. Extron d. AMX FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2741 13 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 MULTI-ZONE AUDIO-VISUAL SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. Pendant-Mounted Speakers a. JBL—Control Contractor Series b. Crestron c. Extron d. AMX 4. Beam-Mounted Speakers a. JBL—Control Contractor Series b. Crestron c. Extron d. AMX 5. Hidden/In-Wall Subwoofer a. Sonance—Invisible Series 6. Wall-Mounted or In-Millwork Subwoofer a. JBL—Professional Series b. Sonance—Professional Series M. Approved Projector Manufacturer(s) 1. Epson 2. Samsung 3. Sony N. Approved Projector Ceiling Mount Manufacturer(s) 1. Chief O. Approved Motorized Projection Screen Manufacturer(s) 1. Da-Lite P. Approved Speaker Cable Manufacturer(s) 1. Belden Q. Approved Control Cable Manufacturer(s) 1. Crestron 2. Extron 3. AMX R. Approved Mic/Line Cable Manufacturer(s) 1. Belden S. Equipment racks shall be provided per specifications section 27 11 16. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2741 13 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 MULTI-ZONE AUDIO-VISUAL SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 T. Coordinate provision and installation of television/display mounting brackets with the Interior Designer and Architect. if no specification is provided by others,brackets shall be Premier Mounts or approved equal. U. Approved Projector Manufacturer(s)— Short-Throw style, coordinate preferred model with Owner 1. Epson 2. Samsung 3. Viewsonic V. Approved Projection Screen/Board Manufacturer(s) 1. Da-Lite(Legrand AV)—IDEA Screen series PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 MULTI-ZONE AUDIO SYSTEM A. The multi-zone audio system shall be installed by a certified contractor as per the requirements specified by the manufacturers' installation guidelines and best industry practice. B. Provide all necessary head end equipment, audio sources, controls,interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a complete and operable system. C. Install control signal, communications, and data transmission line grounding as necessary to preclude ground loops,noise, and surges from adversely affecting system operation. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing 1. All devices shall be tested for full operational compliance. 2. Testing of system shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 3.03 LABELING A. Label all cables at each end of each cable. Labels shall be machine generated,wrap-around type. B. Labeling system shall designate the cable's origin and destination on each end of each distribution/horizontal cable. 3.04 WARRANTY A. All equipment, components, etc., shall be guaranteed free of defects and any faulty workmanship for a period of one year after final acceptance. B. The Contractor shall replace defective materials and repair faulty workmanship within 24 hours of discovery at no cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 27 41 13 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2741 13 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 MULTI-ZONE AUDIO-VISUAL SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 27 70 10 - SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. These specifications describe the electrical and mechanical requirements for a hybrid, high energy, suppression filter system that integrates Surge Protective Devices (SPDs) with high frequency electrical line noise filtering for high exposure applications. B. The specified unit(s) shall provide effective high energy transient voltage suppression, surge current diversion, and noise attenuation for all electrical modes of equipment connected downstream from a facility's meter or main over current device in high exposure ANSUIEEE C62.41 category C,B or A environments. C. The unit shall be designed and manufactured by a qualified manufacturer of surge suppression equipment. The qualified manufacturer shall have been engaged in the cormnercial design and manufacture of such products for a minimum of ten (10) years. These specifications are based on DITEK Surge Protective Devices (SPDs). For consideration, other manufacturers shall provide detailed compliance or exception statements to all provisions of this specification fifteen(15) days prior to bid. 1.02 STANDARDS A. The specified unit shall be designed, manufactured, tested and installed in compliance with the following standards: 1. ANSUIEEE C62.33 Standard Test Specifications for Varistor Protection Devices 2. ANSUIEEE C62.35 Standard Test Specifications for Avalanche Semiconductor Protection Devices 3. ANSI/IEEE C62.41.1 IEEE Guide on the Surge Environment in Low- Voltage (1000V and Less)AC Power Circuits 4. ANSUIEEE C62.42.2 IEEE Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less)AC Power Circuits 5. ANSIJEEE C62.45 IEEE Recommended Practice on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less)AC Power Circuits 6. UL-1283 Standard for Safety-Electromagnetic Interference Filters 7. UL-1449, Standard for Safety- Surge Protective Devices 8. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code 9. NFPA 75 Standard for the Protection of Electronic Computer Systems 10. NFPA 780 Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems 11, Military Standard(Mil Std)220A Federal Information Processing Standards Publication 94(FIPS PUB 94)CCITT 12. National Electrical Manufacturers Association;(NEMA LSI-1992 Guidelines) Low Voltage Surge Protective Devices 1.03 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Storage Temperature FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2770 10 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Storage temperature range shall be-40°to+85° C(40°to+185°F). 2. Internally mounted devices may be 0°to 40° C(320 to+104°F). B. Operating Temperature 1. Operating temperature range shall be -40°to+60° C(-40°to+140°F). 2. Internally mounted devices may be 0°to 40° C(32°to+104°F). C. Relative Humidity 1. Unit shall be operable within 0%to 95% non-condensing relative humidity. D. Operating Altitude 1. The unit shall be capable of operation in altitudes up to 12,000 feet (3,658 meters) above sea level. E. Audible Noise 1. The unit shall not generate any audible noise. F. Magnetic Fields 1. No appreciable magnetic fields shall be generated. Unit shall be capable of use directly in computer rooms in any location without danger to data storage systems or devices. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Surge Protective Devices (SPDs) are the equipment required for the suppression, within specified limits, of AC electrical circuits and electronic equipment from the effects of lightning induced voltages, external switching transients and internally generated switching transients. Individual suppressors shall be installed as indicated on drawings. 1.05 OPERATING VOLTAGE A. The nominal operating voltage and configuration shall be as indicated on the drawings. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 16=,Basic Electrical Requirements. B. Submit installation details for all suppressors demonstrating mechanical and electrical connections to equipment being protected. C. Submittals shall include,but are not limited to, the following data: 1. Complete data for each suppressor type indicating conductor sizes, circuit type, operating voltage, and all appropriate dimensions. 2. Dimensions for each suppressor type indicating mounting dimensions and required accessory hardware. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2770 10 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. Drawings shall be provided indicating suppressor mounting, lead configuration and mounting of remote diagnostic equipment and assemblies (where applicable). 4. List and detail all protection systems such as fuses, disconnecting and protective materials. 5. Listing to UL 1449, including voltage protection rating, nominal discharge current and short circuit current rating for each SPD specified. 6. Conformance to appropriate referenced standards and publications listed in section 1.02. 7. The submittal shall include a listed comparison and proof of compliance with each paragraph of these specifications. D. Submitted suppressors shall have specifications equal to or better than the characteristics specified herein. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Surge suppression, along with proper grounding and bonding, shall effectively protect within tested limits. This is protection against lightning transients, internal and external switching transients, and other surge transients throughout the useful life of the system. B. Any SPD which shows evidence of defects in materials or workmanship during the warranty period shall be replaced or repaired at the Manufacturer's discretion. C. Installation of an SPD in or on electrical or electronic systems shall in no way compromise or violate equipment listing,function or warranty of the distribution equipment. D. All SPDs shall be guaranteed by the installing contractor to be free of defects in material and worlunanship for a period of ten(10)years from the date of manufacture. 1.08 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in surge suppression equipment of the type herein specified with a minimum of ten(10)years documented experience. B. Installer: Installation shall be by a duly licensed and trained electrical contractor. 1.09 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work with electrical installations. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED PRODUCTS A. The intent of this specification is to allow manufacturers with similar equipment utilizing metal oxide varistor (MOV) technology to provide transient voltage surge suppression within the guidelines set forth herein. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2770 10 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. The SPD manufacturer shall offer factory service and replacement for all units, within warranty guidelines. The manufacturer shall provide this service within a reasonable time frame. C. Single source of supply. All AC power SPD's shall be manufactured by a single manufacturer. D. Surge Protection Manufacturer(s) 1. DITEK Corp 2. The following products are recommended for main distribution panel applications: a. D200 Series 3. The following products are recommended for distribution or sub-panels: a. D200 Series b. D100 Series C. D50 Series E. All electronics, voice/data, video surveillance, access control, or fire system suppressors shall be manufactured by a single manufacturer. Acceptable manufacturer: DITEK Corp., models as further identified herein for each individual system specification. Manufacturers listed herein have demonstrated that they can provide equipment that meets or exceeds all requirements, however other manufacturers demonstrating compliance of specifications contained herein will also be considered. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Main service and distribution equipment suppressors: AC voltage SPDs shall be high speed, high current devices designed to protect electrical systems and electronic equipment from transient over-voltage events. SPDs shall provide continuous protection, and automatically reset. The SPD shall utilize Thermally Protected Metal Oxide Varistor TP-MOVTM technology. The SPD shall be installed in parallel with the service main disconnect, distribution or branch panel main lugs as applicable. SPDs shall be connected to overcurrent protection sized as indicated in installation instructions, with an AIC rating equal to or greater than panel rating. The suppressor shall have status indicator light(s). Dry contacts with remote alarm capabilities, audible alarm, and a surge counter are optional equipment. 1. Electrical Service a. Voltage shall be as indicated on drawings. b. Frequency-- 50/60 Hz C. Phases -- shall be as indicated on drawings. d. Wiring configuration—shall be as indicated on drawings 2. IEEE 62.41 Location Categories unless otherwise indicated on drawings: Location Category Low Medium High Service Entrance/Outbuilding/Meter C CI C2 C3 Sub-Panel/Distribution Panel B B1 B2 B3 Outlets/Long Branch Circuits A Al A2 A3 3. Electrical Performance a. Response time < 50 nanoseconds FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2770 10 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 b. MCOV 125%minimum. 4. Minimum Surge Current: a. Service Entrance 00,000 Amps/Phase Minimum b. Distribution and Sub-panels 50,000 Amps/Phase Minimum 5. Suppression system protected modes shall be L-N, L-G, N-G, and L-L for Wye Systems L-L, and L-G for Delta systems. Ungrounded Delta Systems shall be L- L. 6. Power on indicators and failure detection: Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs) on the cover shall provide indication that the suppressor is properly activated and shall also indicate mode failure. If the suppressor fails, an isolated contact shall close. In addition, an audible alarm may be provided with manual reset, for those so equipped. B. Enclosures: Enclosures for main service suppressors shall be, at a minimum, NEMA 3R/12. C. Operation Status Indicator: Audible Remote Signaling and Visual Systems 1. Visual System a. Protection: Suppressor Functioning Normally—Green LED(s) on. b. Warning/Fault: Suppressor Failure—Green LED(s) off. C. Other visual indicators where approved. 2. Remote Signaling a. For units that are so equipped,relay with Auxiliary for Form C(dry)relay contacts: Two sets @ 1 Ampere, 120 volts each. 1 set N.O. and 1 set N.C. to operate upon failure of suppression module, blown fuse or tripped circuit breaker in suppressor module, AC power loss, or in disconnect switch for alarm connection to remote location. 3. Audible a. For units that are so equipped, the audible alarm shall activate upon a fault condition within the suppressor. An alarm silence/reset switch and push-to test switch shall be provided. D. Communication Lines: 1. The following standard for separately mounted telephone and signal line suppressors shall apply. All protectors shall be securely mounted at protected equipment location. All suppressors shall provide common (L-G) mode protection on all lines. Suppressors shall be tested in accordance with IEEE C62.36 as a minimum. Protective interfacing with the telephone wire pairs shall be listed to UL 497A. E. Network Data Protection: 1. Solid state, silicon avalanche diode components shall be the main protection technology utilized.Interfaces shall be RJ45, or 110 punch block connectors. The SPDs shall have a verified data transmission rate, without attenuation, of Category 6 speed minimum. The maximum clamp voltage of the SPD shall be no greater than 18 Volts on a 5 Volt circuit. F. Power Over Ethernet(PoE)/Voice over Internet Protocol(VoIP)Protection: FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2770 10 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Solid state, silicon avalanche diode components shall be the main protection technology utilized. RJ45 modular jacks shall be the connection method used. Connector pinouts shall conform to IEEE 802.3af for power distribution pairs and data transmission pairs. The maximum clamp voltage of the SPD on the power transmission pairs shall be no higher than 72 Volts. The maximum clamp voltage of the data transmission pairs shall be no higher than 72 Volts. The SPD shall have a verified data transmission rate, without attenuation, of Category 6 speed minimum. G. Data Line Protection: 1. Solid state, silicon avalanche diode circuitry for protection from over voltages on long cable runs employing standard RS-232, RS422, or RS485. Appropriate connectors shall be utilized to interface a remote station with a host CPU. H. Signal Line Protection: 1. Solid state, silicon avalanche diode, metal oxide varistor, and/or gas discharge tube technologies may be used. Hybrid circuitry for protection from over voltages on 2 or 4 wire signal lines such as balanced pair telephone, metallic pair telephone, buried and overhead field cable, remote radio equipment, and control systems. Unit shall be listed UL49713. I. Modular, Twisted Pair Protection: 1. Solid state, silicon avalanche diode or metal oxide varistor circuitry for protection from over voltages on twisted pair data or audio lines. Protectors shall clip mount on 66 punch down blocks furnished with grounding bar or studs and shall be totally enclosed. Units shall be securely mounted at terminal locations where shown and shall be grounded to the main building ground with a minimum No.12 stranded copper green insulated ground conductor kept as short as possible. Ground terminals shall be screw insertion lug type. No crimp, fork or ring type permitted. J. Coaxial Cable Protectors: 1. Solid state, silicon avalanche diode, metal oxide varistor and/or gas tube circuitry for non-interrupting over voltage protection of coaxial cable. Unit shall be provided with one female input connector and one female output connector. Securely mount adjacent to protection equipment and ground to equipment or local building ground. 2.03 SYSTEM EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATIONS A. Telephone and Intercom Systems 1. Suppressors shall be installed on the AC power at the point of service and shall meet the following criteria: a. UL 1449 Listed b. UL 1449 V.P.R. of 500 Volts or lower C. Diagnostic Indicator Light(s) d. Integrated ground terminating post(where case/chassis ground exists) e. Minimum Surge Current Capacity of 36,000 Amps (8 x 20 µSec) FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2770 10 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 f. Ten Year Limited Warranty g. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1) DITEK CORP. (800-753-2345) — DTK- 3GTP, or approved equal. 2. Suppressors shall be installed on incoming central office lines and shall meet the following criteria: a. UL 497A Listed b. Multi Stage protection design C. Auto-reset current protection with current limiting not to exceed 150mA per line d. Minimum Surge Current of 1,000 Amps per pair (8 x 20 µSec) 5.Ten Year Limited Warranty e. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1) DITEK CORP. (800-753-2345) — DTK-SL Series or approved equal. 3. Suppressors shall be installed on all telephone/intercom circuits that enter or leave separate buildings and shall meet the following criteria: a. UL 497A Listed(where applicable) b. UL 497B Listed(speakers or communication circuits) C. Multi Stage protection design d. Auto-reset over-current protection with current limiting not to exceed 150mA per line-UL 497A units C. Over-current protection not to exceed 5 Amps per pair-UL497B units f. Minimum Surge Current of 1000 Amps per pair(8 x 20 µSec) g. Ten Year Limited Warranty h. Acceptable Manufacturer: 1) DITEK CORP. (800-753-2345) a) DTK-SL Series b) DTK-2MHLP/2MHTP Series C) DTK-LVLP Series, or approved equal. B. Fire Alarm Systems—Engineering Documentation—Fire Alarm Surge Specification 1. Line Voltage Surge Protective Devices a. Line voltage surge protective devices (SPDs) shall be provided to suppress all voltage transients which might damage fire alarm panel components. The surge protection device shall wire in series to the power supply of the protected equipment. Line voltage surge protection device shall be installed directly adjacent to FACP. 2. Nominal 120 Volt Surge Protective Device a. SPDs for nominal 120 volt supply voltage shall be UL 1449 Third Edition listed or recognized with a minimum peak surge current of 54,000 amps. The SPD shall also meet IEEE C62.41 category B tests for surge capacity. The SPD shall feature multi- stage construction and be provided with dry contacts for monitoring and a long life indicator lamp for unit status of protected components. 3. Nominal 24 Volt Surge Protective Device a. SPDs for nominal 24 volt circuits shall be UL 497B listed and with a minimum surge rating of 20,000 amps. The SPD shall feature multi- stage construction and be self- resetting. Surge protective device shall be a base & plug style. The base assembly shall have screw terminals for fire alarm circuits. Base assembly shall accept a replaceable "plug in" surge protection module. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 277010 - 7 MAY 2, 2023 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 4. Alarm Dialer/Networking Surge Protective Device a. SPDs for alarm telephone dialer circuits shall be UL 497A listed. The SPD shall feature multi-stage construction and be self-resetting. Surge protective device shall be RJ connections or base &plug style. The base assembly shall have screw terminals for fire alarm dialer circuits. Base assembly shall accept a replaceable"plug in" surge protection module. 5. Acceptable Manufacturers a. All Surge Protective Devices (SPDs) shall be the standard product of a single manufacturer and be equal or better than one of the following: 1) For 120 Volt nominal line voltage, DITEK DTK-120SRD series- connected, Dry Contact for remote notification of sacrifice ,20A AC power SPD; 2) For 24 Volt nominal voltage, DITEK DTK-2MHLP24BWB series-connected, modular, 5A maximum current SPD. 3) For alarm telephone dialers, DITEK DTK-2MHTPWB series- connected, modular SPD or RJ31X style, DITEK DTK- MRJ3IXSCPWP 4) For Ethernet networked systems DITEK DTK-MRJ45C5, modular RJ45 style SPD. 5) For Wireless GSM, DITEK DTK-VSPN 6) For an all-inclusive surge solution using the above components, DTK-TSS1, DTK-TSS2, DTK-TSS3 and DTK-TSS4D. 7) Acceptable Manufacturer: DITEK CORP. (800-753-2345) C. Energy Management and Control Systems(EMCS) I. Suppressors shall be installed on the incoming AC EMCS Panel and shall meet the following criteria: a. Parallel connected b. Suppression between L-N, L-G,N-G and L-L C. Surge Current Capacity: 32,500 Amps (8 x 20 µSec) d. Ten Year Limited Warranty e. Acceptable Manufacturer: DITEK CORP. (800-753-2345) 1) DTK-120/240HW, or approved equal. D. Suppressors shall be installed on all EMCS LV circuits on points of entry and exit from separate buildings. Suppressors shall meet the following criteria: 1. UL 497B Listed 2. Multi-stage protection design. 3. Fail-short/fail-safe mode. 4. Minimum Surge Capacity: 2,000 Amps per pair(8x20 µSec) 5. System Voltage: 12 Vrms or 24Vrms 6. Ten Year Limited Warranty 7. Acceptable Manufacturer: DITEK CORP. (800-753-2345) a. DTK-2MHLP Series b. DTK-TSS3 C. DTK-LVLP Series, or approved equal. E. Security Systems (Intrusion Detection) 1. Suppressors shall be installed on AC at the point of service and shall meet the following criteria: FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2770 10 - 8 MAY 2, 2023 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 a. UL 1449 Listed b. UL 1449 V.P.R. of 500 Volts or lower C. Status Indicator Light(s) d. Center screw for terminating Class II transformers e. Minimum Surge Current Capacity of 32,000 Amps (8 x 20 µSec) f. Ten Year Limited Warranty g. Acceptable Manufacturer: DITEK CORP. (800-753-2345) 1) DTK-1F or approved equal. F. Suppressors shall be installed on all Telephone Communication Interface circuits and shall meet the following criteria: 1. UL 497A Listed 2. Multi Stage protection design 3. Surge Current Capacity: 9,000 Amps(8x20 µSec) 4. Clamp Voltage: 180VDC,+/- 10% 5. Auto reset current protection with current limiting not to exceed 150mA 6. Ten Year Limited Warranty 7. Acceptable Manufacturer: DITEK CORP. (800-753-2345) a. DTK- MKT3IXSCPWP, or approved equal. G. Suppressors shall be installed on all burglar alarm initiating circuits, and signaling circuits which enter or leave separate buildings. The following criteria shall be met: 1. UL 497B for data communications or annunciation (powered loops) 2. Fail-short/fail-safe mode. 3. Surge Current Capacity: 20,000 Amp(8x20 µSec) 4. Ten Year Limited Warranty 5. Acceptable Manufacturer: DITEK CORP. (800-753-2345) a. DTK-2MHLP B Series and DTK-MB 10 base 2.04 COMPUTER/DATA SYSTEMS A. Suppressors shall be installed on AC power at the point of service and shall meet the following criteria: 1. UL 1449 Listed 2. UL 1449 V.P.R. of 400 Volts or lower 3. Status Indicator LED(s) 4. 12 Amp circuit breaker(rack mount) or 15 Amp circuit breaker(wall or desktop) 5. Minimum Surge Current Capacity of 36,000 Amps (8 x 20 µSec) 6. Minimum of 6 foot cord 7. Ten Year Limited Warranty 8. Acceptable Manufacturer: DITEK CORP. (800-753-2345) a. DTK-8FF b. DTK-RMAC 12, or approved equal. B. Suppressors shall be installed on all computer/data circuits on points of entry and exit from separate buildings and shall meet the following criteria: 1. All pins must be protected 2. Must be Category 6 minimum, Gigabit Ethernet 3. Connection method: RJ45 (8-pin)or 110 Block. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2770 10 - 9 MAY 2, 2023 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 4. Surge Current Capacity: Minimum 30 Amps per pair(8x20 µSec) 5. Ten Year Limited Warranty 6. Acceptable Manufacturer: DITEK CORP. (800-753-2345) a. DTK-MRJ45C5 (single device) b. DTK-MRJPOE(single device) C. DTK-RM12C5RJ (12-port,RJ45, 1 U rack mount, or approved equal) d. DTK-RMI2POE(12-port,RJ45, IU rack mount, or approved equal) 2.05 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE A. Protectors shall be installed on coaxial cable systems on points of entry and exit from separate buildings. Suppressors shall be installed at each exterior camera location and shall include protection for 12 and/or 24 volt power, data signal and motor controls (for Pan, Tilt and Zoom systems). SPDs shall protect all modes herein mentioned and shall contain all modes in a single unit system. Protection for all systems mentioned above shall be incorporated at the head end equipment. Additionally a minimum 600VA battery back up shall be used to protect the DVR or VCR and monitor. Protectors shall meet the following criteria: 1. Head-End Power a. Battery Back Up b. Minimum Surge Current Capacity: 65,000 Amps(8x20µsec) C. Minimum of 2 NEMA 5-15R Receptacles (1 AC power only, 1 with UPS) d. All modes protected(L-N, L-G,N-G) e. EMI/RFI Filtering f. Maximum Continuous Current: 12 Amps g. Ten Year Limited Warranty h. Acceptable Manufacturer: DITEK CORP. (800-753-2345) 1) DTK-DRP 16 2) DTK-BU600PLUS, or approved equal. 2. Camera Power a. Minimum Surge Current Capacity: 2,000 Amps (8X20psec); 30 Amps per pair for IP Video/PoE cameras b. Screw Terminal Connection C. All protection modes L-G(all Lines) d. Ten Year Limited Warranty e. Acceptable Manufacturer: DITEK CORP. (800-753-2345) 1) DTK-DP4P Series(PTZ Cameras) 2) DTK-PVP Series (Fixed Cameras) 3) DTK-RMI2POE(12 port, IU rack mount Power over Ethernet) 4) DTK-MRJPOE (Single camera Power Over Ethernet), or approved equal. 3. Video and Data a. Minimum Surge Current Capacity 114 Amps per pair-Analog; 30 Amps per pair-lP Video/PoE Cameras b. `BNC"Connection(Coax);RJ45 IP Video/PoE Cameras C. Protection modes: L-G(Data), Center Pin-G, Shield-G(Coax) d. Minimum Band Pass 0-1 OMHz e. Ten Year Limited Warranty f. Acceptable Manufacturer: DITEK CORP. (800-753-2345) 1) DTK-DRP16(Head End) FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2770 10 - 10 MAY 2, 2023 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2) DTK-RM16NM(16 channel, I rack mount) 3) DTK-DP4P Series(PTZ Camera) 4) DTK-PVP Series (Fixed Camera) 5) DTK-iBNC28 (Coax video only) 6) DTK-PVPIP(Single camera video, data and power) 7) DTK-RM12C5RJ (12 port, I rack mount mount) 8) DTK-RMI2POE(12 port, IU rack mount Power over Ethernet) 9) DTK-MRJPOE (Single camera Power Over Ethernet), or approved Equal 2.06 CABLE TELEVISION SYSTEMS A. Suppressors shall be installed at the point of AC service to the head end equipment and meet the following criteria: 1. Minimum Surge Current Capacity: 27,000 Amps (8 x 20 µSec) 2. All mode protection: L-N, L-G,N-G 3. EMI/RFI Filtering 4. UL 1449 Listed 5. UL V.P.R. of 500 Volts or less 6. Diagnostic Indicator Light(s) 7. Ten Year Limited Warranty 8. Acceptable Manufacturer: DITEK CORP. (800-753-2345) a. DTK-IF b. DTK-8FF, or approved equal B. Suppressors shall be installed on all coaxial cable systems on points of entry and exit from separate buildings. Suppressors shall be installed at each exterior camera location and shall meet the following criteria: I. Impedance: Match the existing system being protected(75 Ohm). 2. Band pass: 0- 2GHz 3. Surge Current Capacity: At least 20 kA(8 x 20 µSec waveform) 4. Clamping Voltage: 75VDC Center Pin to shield 5. Response Time: Less than one nanosecond. 6. Acceptable Manufacturer: DITEK CORP. (800-753-2345) a. DTK-VSPA b. DTK-VSPA2 or approved equal. 2.07 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEMS A. Suppressors shall be installed on AC power at the point of service and shall meet the following criteria: I. UL1449 3rd Edition Listed 2. UL1449 V.P.R. of 500 Volts or lower 3. Status Indicator Light(s) 4. Minimum Surge Current Capacity: 144,000 Amps (8 x 20 µsec) 5. Maximum Continuous Current: 15 Amps 6. MCOV: 125VAC 7. Service Voltage: 110-120 VAC 8. Ten Year Limited Warranty 9. Acceptable Manufacturer: DITEK CORP. (800-753-2345) FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2770 10 - 11 MAY 2, 2023 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 a. DTK-8FF or approved equal. B. Suppressors shall be installed on the Burg/Fire Low Voltage circuit at both the point of entrance and exit of the building. Suppressors shall meet the following criteria: 1. UL 497B 2. Minimum Surge Current Capacity: 2,000 Amps per pair 3. Maximum Continuous Current: 5 Amps 4. MCOV: 33 Volts 5. Service Voltage: 24Volts 6. Ten Year Limited Warranty 7. Acceptable Manufacturer—DITEK CORP. (800-753-2345) a. DTK-2MHLP24BWB b. DTK-1LVLPLV or approved equal. C. Suppressors shall be installed on the communication circuit between the access controller and card reader at both the entrance and exit of the building. Suppressors shall meet the following criteria: 1. Conforms with UL497B standard (where applicable) 2. Clamp level for 12 and 24V power: 18VDC/38VDC 3. Clamp level for Data/LED: 6.8VDC 4. Service Voltage for Power: 12VDC/24VDC 5. Service Voltage for Data/LED: <5VDC 6. Clamp level—PoE Access Power: 72V 7. Clamp level—PoE Access Data: 72V 8. Service Voltage—PoE Access: 48V-54V 9. Service Voltage—PoE Data: 5V-24V 10. Ten Year Limited Warranty 11. Acceptable Manufacturer—DITEK CORP. (800-753-2345) a. DTK-4LVLPCR(use DTK-3LVLP-X for"Wiegand"type readers) b. DTK-4LVTEP (commercial telephone entry) C. DTK-4LVXR(residential telephone entry) d. DTK-MRJPOE (Power over Ethernet access control), or approved equal. 2.08 ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT A. Suppressors shall be installed at the point of AC service to the electronic equipment and meet the following criteria: 1. UL 1449 Listed 2. Must have 3 AC outlets capable of handling 15 Amps. 3. Minimum Surge Current Capacity: 36,000 Amps (8 x 20 µSec) 4. All mode protection: L-N,L-G,N-G 5. EMI/RFI Filtering 6. Diagnostic Indicator Light(s) 7. Ten Year Limited Warranty 8. Acceptable Manufacturer: DITEK CORP. (800-753-2345) a. DTK-3GTP or approved equal. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2770 10 - 12 MAY 2, 2023 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Main Service and Distribution Equipment Surge Suppressors 1. Suppressors shall be installed at Service Entrance switchboards and distribution equipment where shown as close as practical to equipment to be protected consistent with the available space. Where installation space permits and where no code restrictions apply, suppressors may be installed within protected equipment. Suppressors installed in this manner shall utilize the equipment ground bus as a medium for bonding of their ground terminals. Bolted connections with star washers shall be used to insure electrical and mechanical integrity of connections to the ground bus. Conductors from suppressors shall attach to main service bus in the entrance equipment on the load side of any electrical metering equipment. 2. Suppressors shall be installed according to manufacturer instructions provided with each device. Lead dress shall be consistent with recommended industry practices for the system on which these devices are installed. 3. All wiring between surge suppressors and protected equipment shall be considered protected and connected in accordance with the latest edition of the NEC. 4. A minimum of three inches of separation shall be provided between parallel runs of protected and unprotected wiring in control panels, terminal cabinets, terminal boards and other locations. In no case shall protected and unprotected wiring be bundled together or routed through the same conduit. B. Low Voltage and Comm/Data Equipment Surge Suppressors 1. Install SPD equipment according to manufacturer's recommendations. 2. All electronic equipment/systems utilizing cord, plug or hardwired connectors shall be bonded to the building electrical system ground, building frame or driven ground rod and shall be provided with a multi-stage suppression system. 3. Contractor must properly match SPD equipment to equipment being protected, including wire sizes, operating voltages, currents and number of conductors. 4. Contractor must coordinate with providers of all equipment being protected and provide SPD equipment which meets these specifications. 5. Suppressors shall be installed in a neat manner. All hardwired low-voltage circuit lead lengths (conductor/wire distance) shall be a minimum of 3 wire feet. Make certain that the referenced ground connections are of a lesser distance (conductor/wire length) than that of the suppressor to the protected equipment. 6. Equipment shall be installed following manufacturer's recommendations and guide- lines in compliance with NEC Article 280/250 for grounding and bonding; and NEC Article 110-9 and 110-10 for over-current protection. 7. Provide required enclosures (indoor or outdoor) for protectors adjacent to each electronic system. Supplier to provide cabinet large enough to include mounting protectors within system cabinet. C. Quality Control 1. Disconnect suppressor prior to testing of service entrance distribution equipment and panel boards. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2770 10 - 13 MAY 2, 2023 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Supply certified test reports for all tested parts, elements and/or systems or where required by the Owner to substantiate published ratings of claims. END OF SECTION 27 70 10 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 2770 10 - 14 MAY 2, 2023 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 28 00 00 - ELECTRONIC SECURITY PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Applicable requirements of Division 01 - General Requirements shall be considered a part of this section and shall have the same force as if printed herein full. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Specifications, Standards and Codes: All work shall be in accordance with the following: 1. The 2017 edition of the National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) with local Amendments 2. The 2018 edition of the Life Safety Code(NFPA 10 1) 3. Building Industry Consulting Service International (BICSI) 4. Telecommunications Distribution Methods Manual (TDMM) 5. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 6. The National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) 7. The National Electrical Safety Code (ANSI C-2) 8. National Electrical Manufacturers Association(NEMA) 9. Telecommunications Industries Association(TIA) 10. Electronic Industries Association(EIA) 11. Institute of Electrical&Electronics Engineers (IEEE) 12. Underwriters Laboratories(UL) 13. American Standards Association(ASA) 14. Federal Communications Commission(FCC) 15. Occupational Safety and Health Administration(OSHA) 16. American Society of Testing Material (ASTM) 17. Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA) 18. Local city and county ordinances governing electrical work 19. In the event of conflicts, the more stringent provisions shall apply. 1.03 SCOPE A. The work to be performed under this section of the Specifications shall include all labor, material, equipment and tools required for the complete installation of the work indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein. B. All materials, that are a part of the Electronic Security Infrastructure and necessary to its proper operation, but not specifically mentioned and shown on the Drawings, shall be furnished and installed without additional charge. C. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary to each other and what is called for by one shall be as binding as if called for by both. If a discrepancy exists between the Drawing and Specifications, the higher cost shall be included, and the engineer shall be notified of the discrepancy. 1.04 WORK INCLUDED FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 28 00 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRONIC SECURITY DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 The Electronic Security Infrastructure installed and work performed under this division of the Specifications shall include but not necessarily be limited to the following: A. Access Control B. Intrusion Detection C. Video Surveillance D. Conduits, Raceways,Racks, Cabinets and Equipment Mounting Boards E. Grounding and Bonding 1.05 DEFINITIONS A. Terms: The following definitions of terms supplement those of the General Requirements and are applicable to Division 27 - Communications: I. Provide: As used herein shall mean "furnish, install and test (if applicable) complete." 2. Infrastructure: As used herein shall mean cable, conduit, raceway, cable tray or j-hooks with all required boxes, fittings, connectors, and accessories; completely installed. 3. Work: As used herein shall be understood to mean the materials completely installed,including the labor required. 1.06 DRAWINGS A. Drawings are generally diagrammatic and show the arrangement and location of pathways, outlets, support structures and equipment. The Contractor shall coordinate the structural and finish conditions affecting his work and arrange his work accordingly. Should conditions on the job make it necessary to make adjustments to pathways or materials, the Contractor shall so advise the Engineer and secure approval before proceeding with such work. B. Where exact locations are required by equipment for stubbing-up and terminating conduit concealed in floor slabs, the Contractor shall provide shop drawings, equipment location drawings, foundation drawings, and any other data required to locate the concealed conduit before the floor slab is poured. C. Materials, equipment or labor not indicated but which can be reasonably inferred to be necessary for a complete installation shall be provided. Drawings and Specifications do not undertake to indicate every item of material, equipment, or labor required to produce a complete and properly operating installation. D. The right is reserved to make reasonable changes in locations of equipment indicated on Drawings prior to rough-in without increase in contract cost. E. The Contractor shall not reduce the size or number of conduit runs indicated on the Drawings without the written approval of the Engineer. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 280000 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRONIC SECURITY DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 F. Any work installed contrary to Contract Drawings shall be subject to change as directed by the Engineer, and no extra compensation will be allowed for making these changes. G. The location of equipment, support structures, outlets, and similar devices shown on the Drawings are approximate only. Do not scale Drawings. Obtain layout dimensions for equipment from Architectural plans unless otherwise noted. H. Schematic diagrams shown on the Drawings indicate the required functions only. The technology of a particular manufacturer may be used to accomplish the functions indicated without exact adherence to the schematic Drawings shown. Additional labor and materials required for such deviations shall be furnished at the Contractor's expense. 1. Verify the ceiling type, ceiling suspension systems, and clearance above hung ceilings prior to ordering cabling and associated hardware. Notify the Engineer of any discrepancies. J. Review all architectural drawings for modular furniture. K. Portions of these Drawings and Specifications are abbreviated and may include incomplete sentences. Omissions of words or phrases such as "the Contractor shall," "shall be," "as indicated on the Drawings," "in accordance with," "a," "the" and"all are intended" shall be supplied by inference. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals for the following systems: 1. Access Control 2. Intrusion Detection 3. Video Surveillance 4. Conduits, Raceways,Racks, Cabinets and Equipment Mounting Boards 5. Grounding and Bonding B. Submit for approval, details of all materials, equipment and systems to be furnished. Work shall not proceed without the Owner and/or the Project Manager's approval of the submitted items. Three(3)copies of the following shall be submitted: 1. Submittals for individual systems and equipment assemblies that consist of more than one item or component shall be made for the system or assembly as a whole. Partial submittals will not be considered, reviewed or stored, and such submittals will not be returned except at the request and expense of the Contractor. 2. Contractor shall generate shop drawings. Modify reviewed and accepted shop drawings to include revisions based upon completion of work. Submit shop drawings with record drawings on hard copy. 3. Shop drawings shall include equipment racks, patch panels, termination blocks, connection details,rack mounting details and any other details not included in the construction drawings. C. Any materials and equipment listed that are not in accordance with Specification requirements may be rejected. D. The approval of material, equipment, systems and shop drawings is a general approval subject to the Drawings, Specifications and verification of all measurements at the job. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 280000 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRONIC SECURITY DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Approval does not relieve the Contractor from the responsibility of shop drawing errors. The Contractor shall carefully check and correct all shop drawings prior to submission for approval. E. Materials List: Submit a complete materials list indicating all equipment to be provided as part of this section. F. Samples: Submit selection and verification samples of finishes, colors, and textures as requested. G. Complete details of equipment mounting configuration. H. Manufacturing assembly and testing procedures and forms. I. Installation testing and check out procedures and forms to be used by the Contractor and Architect and/or Consultant. J. The conduit plans, equipment plans, riser diagrams, block diagrams and details are to be submitted in the latest version of MicroStation or AutoCAD, and shall be submitted on a minimum of `D' size drawings. Documents submitted in any other manner including marked up sets of the bid documents shall receive immediate rejection and will not be reviewed. A complete set of as-built documents will be issued at the completion of the project inclusive of CAD files on CD. K. Submittals issued in a manner inconsistent with the requirements of these specifications shall receive immediate rejection and will not be reviewed. Submittals issued containing materials, products and/or equipment that is not listed or approved by addendum shall receive immediate rejection and will not be reviewed. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equipment and materials required for installation under these Specifications shall be the current model and new (less than one [1] year from the date of manufacture), unused and without blemish or defect. B. Equipment shall bear labels attesting to Underwriters Laboratories,where subject to label service. Manufacturers of equipment and materials pertinent to these items shall have been engaged in the manufacture of said equipment a minimum of three (3)years and, if so directed by the Owner, be able to furnish proof of their ability by submitting affidavits and descriptive data about their product including size and magnitude comparable to requirements specified herein. 1.09 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS A. The Contractor shall have total responsibility for the coordination and installation of the work shown and described in the Drawings and Specifications. The Contractor shall be a company specializing in the design, fabrication and installation of integrated communications systems. B. Electronic Security Systems specified shall be installed under the direction of a qualified Contractor. Qualification requirements shall include submittal by the Contractor to the Architect of the following: FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 280000 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRONIC SECURITY DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. List of previous projects of this scope, size and nature; including names and sizes of projects, description of work,time of completion and names of contact persons for reference. 2. Shall certify that they are manufacturer-authorized for work to be performed. C. Contractor must employ at least one (1) full-time Registered Communications Distribution Designer(RCDD). 1.10 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. The Contractor shall coordinate Electronic Security work with that of other sections as required ensuring that the entire communications work will be carried out in an orderly, complete and coordinated fashion. 1.11 SITE INVESTIGATION A. Prior to submitting bids of the project, visit the site of the work to become aware of existing conditions that may affect the cost of the project. Where work under this project requires extension, relocation, reconnections or modifications to existing equipment or systems, the existing equipment or systems, shall be restored to their original condition before the completion of this project. 1.12 PERMITS A. Obtain all permits and inspections for the installation of this work and pay all charges incident thereto. Deliver to the Owner all certificates of said inspection issued by authorities having jurisdiction. 1.13 RENOVATIONS AND ADDITIONS A. All work that would adversely affect the normal operation of the other portions of the Owner's property shall be done at a time other than normal working hours. Normal working hours shall be considered 8 a.m. to 5 p.m. Monday through Friday. B. Prior to submitting bids on the project, visit the site of the work to become aware of existing conditions that may affect the cost of the project. C. Where work under this project requires extension, relocation, reconnections or modifications to existing equipment or systems, the existing equipment or systems shall be restored to their original and operating condition. Remove all equipment indicated to be demolished,including outlets, devices,raceways and support structures. D. Care shall be exercised in the removal and storage of equipment indicated to be relocated or removed and reused. Prior to placing back into service, equipment shall be cleaned and marred or chipped paint surfaces touched-up. E. Provide all coring, cutting and patching to existing walls, floors, etc., required for the removal of existing work or the installation of new work. 1.14 OPERATION& MAINTENANCE MANUALS A. The Contractor shall furnish three (3) sets of operational and maintenance manuals for all systems furnished. The manuals shall include component lists, instructions for care, FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 280000 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRONIC SECURITY DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 operation instructions, instructions for ordering replacement equipment and personnel to contact for warranty work. 1.15 APPROVALS A. Deviations from this specification must be documented in writing to the Architect and Engineer at least twenty-one (21)business days prior to the bid date. B. Complete catalogue data, product specifications and technical information on alternative equipment must be provided including all associated cost savings or additions, including but not limited to equipment, equipment installation, power wiring and materials, programming, documentation and project management. 1.16 DELIVERY&HANDLING A. General: Comply with Division 1 Product Requirements Section. B. Delivery: Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. C. Storage and Protection: Store materials and equipment in an area protected from harmful weather conditions and at temperature conditions recommended by manufacturer. After initial installation, protect equipment from exposure to dust, dirt, paint and other contaminants. 1.17 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements/openings by field measurements before fabrication; show recorded measurements on shop drawings. B. Scheduling: Coordinate taking field measurements, fabrication schedule and deliveries with construction progress schedule to avoid construction delays. 1.18 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: All equipment and labor provided under this section is warranted for two (2) years from Substantial Completion or System Commissioning, whichever occurs first. B. During the warranty period, the Contractor shall perform quarterly preventative maintenance inspections on all installed equipment. C. Nothing in the above warranty shall apply to material which has been misused or abused as follows: neglect by the owner, defects or damage caused by work or failure of work by others, ordinary wear or normal equipment adjustment. D. Additionally, any unauthorized modifications, repairs or tampering shall constitute termination of the warranty. 1.19 TRAINING A. The Contractor shall provide four (4) hours of on-site training for operational purposes and forty(40)hours of training for maintenance purposes at the turnover of the project. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 280000 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRONIC SECURITY DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Where equipment is identified by manufacturer and catalog number, it shall be as the base of requirements for quality and performance. Where manufacturers for equipment are identified by name, the Contractor may submit for approval, similar equipment of other manufacturers as substitution. The Engineer's decision as to whether the submitted equipment is acceptable shall be final and binding. B. All changes necessary to accommodate the substituted equipment shall be made at the Contractor's expense, and shall be as approved by the Engineer. Detailed drawings indicating the required changes shall be submitted for approval at the time the substitution is requested. C. If substitutions are made in lieu of device specified; form, dimension, design and profile shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval. D. Submit request for approval of substitute materials in writing to the Architect at least ten days prior to bid opening. 2.02 MATERIALS A. All materials used in this work shall be new and shall bear the inspection label of Underwriters' Laboratories Inc. or certification by other recognized laboratory. B. The published standards and requirements of the Telecommunications Industries Association (TIA), National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA), the American National Standard Institute (ANSI), the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE), and the American Society of Testing Materials (ASTM), are made a part of these Specifications and shall apply wherever applicable. C. Materials and equipment furnished shall be of current production by manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacture of such items, for which replacement parts are available. D. When more than one unit of the same class of equipment or material is required, such units shall be the products of a single manufacturer or partner manufacturers that offer a certified solution. E. Components of an assembled unit need not be products of the same manufacturer, but must offer a certified end-to-end solution. F. Manufacturers of equipment assemblies,which include components made by others, shall assume complete responsibility for the final assembled unit. G. Components shall be compatible with each other and with the total assembly for the intended service. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION OF CONDITIONS FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 280000 - 7 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRONIC SECURITY DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Prior to the start of work, the Contractor shall carefully inspect the installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where installation may properly commence. Start of work indicates acceptance of conditions. B. Install equipment in accordance with applicable codes and regulations, and the referenced standards. C. In the event of a discrepancy,immediately notify the Project Manager. D. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions and discrepancies have been fully resolved. 3.02 PROTECTION OF SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT A. Protect materials and equipment from damage during storage at the site and throughout the construction period. Equipment and materials shall be protected during shipment and storage against physical damage, dirt,theft, moisture, extreme temperature and rain. B. Damage from rain, dirt, sun and ground water shall be prevented by storing the equipment on elevated supports and covering the sides with securely fastened protective rigid or flexible waterproof coverings. C. During installation, equipment shall be protected against entry of foreign matter on the inside and be vacuum cleaned both inside and outside before testing, operating or painting. D. As determined by the Project Manager, damaged equipment shall be fully repaired or shall be removed and replaced with new equipment to fully comply with requirements of the Contract Documents. E. Damaged paint on equipment and materials shall be repainted with painting equipment and finished with the same quality of paint and workmanship as used by the manufacturer. 3.03 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT A. Equipment shall be installed in location and manner that will allow access for maintenance and inspection. B. Working spaces shall be not less than specified in the National Electrical Code(NEC) for voltages specified. C. Where the Project Manager determines that the Contractor has installed equipment not accessible for operation and maintenance, equipment shall be removed and reinstalled as directed by the Project Manager, at no additional cost to the Owner. "Accessible" is defined as being capable of being reached without the use of ladders or without climbing or crawling under or over obstacles such as motors, pumps, belt guards, transformers, piping and duct work. 3.04 CLEANING FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 280000 - 8 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRONIC SECURITY DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. During construction, and prior to Owner acceptance of the building, remove from the premises and dispose of packing material and debris caused by communications work. B. Remove dust and debris from interiors and exteriors of electrical equipment. Clean accessible current carrying elements prior to being energized. C. General: Upon completion of the work, remove excess dust & debris, materials, equipment, apparatus, tools and similar items. Leave the premises clean, neat and orderly. 3.05 COMPLETION A. Results Expected: Systems shall be complete and operational and controls shall be set and calibrated. Testing, start-up and cleaning work shall be complete. B. Maintenance Materials: Special tools for proper operation and maintenance of the equipment provided under this Specification shall be delivered to the Owner. 3.06 TESTING AND VERIFICATION A. See specific Division 28 sections for testing parameters of sub-systems. B. The Contractor shall verify that requirements of this Specification are met. Verification shall be through a combination of analyses, inspections, demonstrations and tests, as described below. C. Verification by inspection includes examination of items and comparison of pertinent characteristics against the qualitative or quantitative standard set forth in the Specifications. Inspection may require moving or partially disassembling the item to accomplish the verification, included as part of the work at no additional cost to the Owner. D. The Contractor shall verify by demonstrations and/or tests that the requirements of this Specification have been met. The Contractor shall demonstrate that the communications systems, components and subsystems meet Specification requirements in the "as- installed" operating environment during the "System Operation Test." The Contractor shall measure and record temperature,humidity and other environmental parameters. E. The Contractor shall schedule and coordinate the final acceptance tests. The Contractor shall provide necessary instruments, labor and materials required for tests. Provide equipment manufacturer's technical representative and qualified technicians. F. The Contractor shall satisfy all items detailed in the final acceptance check-off list(punch list). The list shall be a complete representation of specified installation requirements. At the time of final acceptance punch list items shall be corrected until the system is found to be acceptable to the Owner and the Project Manager. END OF SECTION 28 00 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 280000 - 9 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRONIC SECURITY DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 28 00 00 - 10 MAY 2, 2023 ELECTRONIC SECURITY DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 28 07 00 - IP VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide CCTV equipment as specified herein and as shown on the schedules and drawings. Installing contractor shall receive, place, connect, and mount all equipment specified in this Section per the manufacturer's instructions. Installing contractor shall furnish all hardware, wire, connectors, and other necessary items as required for a complete and functional CCTV system. 1.02 REFERENCES A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 Specifications shall apply to all work of this section. B. Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form a part of this specification section to extent indicated. Standards listed are identified by issuing authority, authority abbreviation, designation number, title, or other designation established by issuing authority. Standards subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing authority abbreviation and standard designation. C. Underwriter's Laboratories(UL) 1. UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment 2. NEC National Electrical Code (latest edition) 1.03 WORK INCLUDED A. Included under this Section of the work shall be the furnishing, installation, connection, aiming and testing of the complete CCTV system including, but not limited to, cameras, housings, mounts, cables, monitors, network switches, network video recorders and storage equipment, and fiber optic systems. B. Major Sub-systems include: 1. Programmable Logic Controllers(PLCs). 2. Touch Screen Control Stations. 3. Access Control System C. The lenses provided for cameras shall be changed as required, at no cost, to provide the Owner with an acceptable field of view. D. Provide 10 spare interior IP fixed cameras. E. Provide I spare exterior IP fixed cameras. F. All cameras shall be 3 mega pixel minimum. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 28 07 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 IP VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. All exterior cameras monitoring parking areas or intended for License Plate Recognition(LPR) shall be 5 mega pixel minimum. 1.04 APPROVALS A. General 1. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the General Provisions of these specifications. B. Specific Requirements 1. Submit catalog cuts for all equipment and devices being furnished under this Section. 2. Submit a complete CCTV System riser diagram. Diagram shall include labeling of each camera and its corresponding head end equipment input, interconnecting wiring of all components including, but not limited to, digital controllers, network video recorders, camera power supplies, monitors, control keyboards, and PLC interface connections. 3. Submit plan drawings showing location, mounting and viewing angle of each camera. 1.05 DESCRIPTION A. The IP video surveillance system shall monitor spaces as shown on the drawings and function as shown on the CCTV functional schematic. B. All CCTV cameras shall be equipped with auto-iris lens. C. Video Switching/Control 1. Some consoles are equipped with two intercom call-up monitors for movement control. These are designated as shown on the drawings. The first monitor (ex. M1) shall view the side of the door from which the intercom call was initiated. The second monitor (ex. M2) shall view the opposite side of the door. Cameras on both sides of a door will be called up and display simultaneously upon acknowledging an intercom call. If a door has only one CCTV camera viewing it, the monitor displaying the side without a camera shall be blank. Activating an intercom by touching the intercom icon on the touch screen shall switch the associated cameras to these intercom call-up monitors. For conditions such as elevator lobbies,monitors shall display lobby video and cab video. D. The PLC shall be the basis of control for the integrated CCTV camera call-up. A serial interface shall be provided between the PLC and the CCTV system. E. The CCTV system shall be 100%IP based. F. All interior camera wiring shall be Category 6. Category 5E is not acceptable for video. 1. Coordinate required IP surveillance camera system cable color with Owner prior to procurement and installation. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 280700 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 IP VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 G. All exterior cameras located more than 300'-0" away from the nearest Telecom Room shall be fiber optic video transmission. H. All the pan tilt zoom cameras shall have programmable pre-set positions. L All cameras shall have digital motion detection built in the software. System recording shall be dormant for areas that have no activity. Real time recording shall occur upon motion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Except as otherwise specified herein or in the General Conditions, the equipment and materials of this Section shall be products of the following listed manufacturers, subject to compliance with the specification requirements and provided each manufacturer meets all requirements of the Quality Assurance Section of this specification. B. Cameras 1. CCTV cameras shall be U.L. listed and shall be the standard product of one manufacturer complying with not less than the specifications contained herein. Installation of each camera shall include mounting brackets and/or camera housings fully compatible with the camera provided. All interior and exterior cameras shall be high resolution color equal the models specified following. 2. Integrated Camera System,Fixed Dome, Surface Mounted a. Fully-Integrated Enclosure with Camera and Lens b. Rugged, High-Impact and Vandal Resistant,Puncture Proof Domes C. Tamper-Resistant Hardware d. 12 VDC or 24 VAC Operation e. Circuitry Protected f. Operating Temperature Range+14 to 131°F (-10 to 55° C). g. Manual Pan and Tilt Adjustments h. Available with Smoked or Clear Dome (1.5 f-stop Light Loss with Smoked Dome) i. NTSC/PAL or EIA/CCIR Camera Formats j. Varifocal Lens of 3.3 mm to 12 mm with Auto Iris Available with High Resolution Color Camera k. Camera options include 1/3-inch format CCD high resolution CCD color imager. 1. Exterior wall mounted locations shall include pendant housing and a wall mount. 3. PTZ High-Performance Integrated Dome Systems a. Auto Focus with Manual Override b. 22X Optical Zoom C. Equivalent 70-300mm zoom lens d. 79 Programmable Presets e. 8 Programmable tours, 32 steps available for each tour f. Color(NTSC/PAL) Camera with Auto Iris g. Auto Iris with Manual Override h. Variable Scan Speed(0.5-360 degrees/Second) i. "Auto Flip"Dome Rotation j. 360 Degrees Continuous Pan Rotation FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 280700 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 IP VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 k. Integral Multi-protocol Receiver/Driver 1. Shall be available with integral fiber transmission or UTP transmission options. in. Power-up Recovery Mode n. Built-in Power Line Surge and Lightning Protection C. All camera installations shall be securely attached to mounting surface. Use lead shields on solid masonry, toggle bolts for hollow masonry, and machine bolts for steel. All anchoring devices shall be rated to support not less than five times the total equipment weight. D. Cameras shall have automatic iris control and shall be for interior or exterior use under normal and low light conditions of illumination and shall be provided with a weatherproof or tamper-proof housing as specified. Camera shall be mounted as shown and shall include electronic components for automatic adjustment of iris to varying levels of illumination. E. Cameras other than those which are mini dome type shall be solid state type with auto iris lens, with vari-focal lens shall be field adjusted as directed by the Architect. Power supplies shall be internally protected. Camera light and sensitivity under low light conditions shall be with incandescent, infrared and high intensity discharge light sources. Cameras shall have line lock to avoid roll during switching operations. 1. The camera shall have high resolution color and have the following minimum specifications: a. Horizontal resolution—Color 540 lines b. Picture Elements—768 (H)x 494 (V) C. Minimum Illumination 0.5 lux, fl.2, 40 IRE,AGC on, 75%reflectance d. Signal-to-Noise Ratio 52 dB e. Vertical Phase Adjustable 0°±120° f. Video Output 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms g. Operating Temperature 14° to 122°F (-10° to 50°C) h. Line voltage- 24 VAC i. Power Consumption Less than 4 watts j. Shall be provided with a 3-9mm Auto Iris Vari-focal lens F. Camera Housings and Supports 1. All camera housings and support brackets shall be compatible with CCTV camera specified to be installed within housings and/or mounted on brackets. Housings shall be provided with all cable entrance facilities for camera control and shall be adaptable to mounting devices used with cameras. All camera housings and support brackets shall be securely attached to mounting surfaces. Escutcheon plates attached with security screws shall be used to conceal holes in walls or ceilings. 2. Exterior weatherproof, tamper-proof housings shall be constructed of aluminum and finished with a weatherproof, heat reflecting paint. Housing shall be internally insulated. Hinged cover shall be secured in place with tamper-proof bolts. Housings shall be supplied with a fan, heater, sun-shield and defroster glass. Control of blower and heater shall be automatic when camera power circuit is energized. 3. Interior tamper-proof housings for cameras shall be constructed of 18 gauge sheet steel, all joints welded, with all surfaces finished with rust inhibiting prime FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 280700 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 IP VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 coat and baked on vinyl finished coat. Access shall be through locked hinged continuous side panels. All locks shall be keyed alike for similar camera enclosures on this project. Knockouts shall be provided for entry of power control and video wiring. 4. Camera mounting brackets shall be heavy duty type and shall be suitable for outdoor use. Bracket shall be provided with locking, swivel, adjustable head for maximum tilt angle of 60 degrees. 5. Wall mounting brackets shall be suitable for camera and enclosures specified and shall be rated for support of not less than 150 lbs. Brackets with extension of 24" or larger shall be provided with support strut. G. Television Monitors 1. CCTV monitors shall be the standard products of one manufacturer and compatible with the total system specified herein and complying with these specifications. Monitors and cameras shall be provided by the same manufacturer. 2. CCTV monitors shall be color solid state TFT LCD flat panel type as indicated on the drawings and as specified herein. Monitor controls shall be on-off, brightness, contrast, vertical hold and horizontal hold. All monitors shall be U.L. listed. 3. Thirty-Two (32) inch monitors shall be mounted as shown on the drawings. Monitors shall comply with not less than the following specifications: a. Native Resolution 1920x10801 b. Pixel Pitch 0.681 x 0.681 mm C. Contrast Ratio 10,000:1 d. Viewing Angle 178°/178° e. Response Time 5 ms f. Power Consumption 375 W H. Video Decoder (as required) 1. The Video Decoder shall decode network data from a digital IP source into an analog output for display on any monitor with an S-Video, mini-D-sub VGA or coaxial input. 2. Rack mounting accessories shall be available to mount up to 8 decoders in a single, standard 19-inch rack space. A 2-unit rack mount for standard 19-inch racks shall also be available. A wall mount shall also be available. 3. Supports NTSC, PAL, EIA and CCIR video formats 4. Shall transmit up to 30 fps per channel NTSC. 5. Composite video resolution shall be 450 TV lines I. Multi-Channel Viewer 1. View up to 32 video streams from a single PC. 2. Shall have the ability to view up to 16 video images per monitor across up to 4 monitors on a single PC. 3. Ability to display up to 64 video streams on a single monitor. 4. Compatible with the network video decoders, NVRs, keypads, etc. throughout the system. J. Network Video Recording System (Long Term Recording and Playback) FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 280700 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 IP VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. The N VR(s), network video recorder(s), shall utilize the latest digital technology with recorder capabilities to display multiple cameras, record, archive and instantly retrieve images. All cameras within the facility shall be recorded simultaneously on the Network Video Recording System. The DVR(s) shall have the following characteristics: a. Simultaneous playback, recording and archiving of images from one to sixteen sources. b. Graphical Map feature supports realistic camera location C. Hybrid compression based on MPEG4 d. Museum Search(Smart Search)feature scans hours of video in minutes e. Archive segments of video to a CD-R/CD-RW/DVD with viewer for playback on a standard PC f. Maximum resolution of 480 TV lines @ 720 x 488 (576 TVL @ 864 x 586 PAL)pixel capture without loss of video quality g. 16 individual RS-422 ports for PTZ/Dome Control h. Four alarm recording options; Record last alarmed cameras images, record all alarmed camera images, allow last camera first priority or all alarmed camera images higher priority. i. Five levels of image quality for each camera. j. Automatic recording speed increase for alarm events. k. Instant retrieval recording with capability to instantly locate and playback recorded images through an alarm event, time index or on the fly search. 1. Advanced compression permitting high resolution 720 x 488 pixel digital image recording and noise-free playback. in. Time, date, recording mode, alarm number, camera number and power outages displayed on screen. n. On screen programming. o. Full-screen or multi-screen display with up to 16 split views. P. Automatic conditional refresh technology to update images prior to compression and storage. q. Event trigger option for pre-alarm and post-alarm playback. r. Windows operating environment with iconic on-screen display. S. Up to 16 camera inputs. t. DCT encoding and compression. U. Video transport over fiber. V. A quantity of Network Video Recorders shall be provided in order to simultaneously record all cameras throughout the facility. W. Shall furnish 30 days of recorded video at 7.5 frames per second and 4 CIF resolution(704 X 480). X. Shall be furnished with remote view software at no additional charge to the owner. K. Digital Video Network Equipment 1. The digital CCTV network shall be a stand-alone 1000 MB network furnished and installed by the ESC contractor. The owner's network may be, at the option of the owner, linked to the digital video network for accommodation of remote viewing PCs, but shall not be used as the primary means of transporting digital video. 2. Switches shall be 12, 24 or 48 port as applicable. 3. Each switch can operate as both a master controller and a forwarding processor. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 280700 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 IP VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 4. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) auto configuration of multiple switches through a.boot server. 5. Dynamic Trunking Protocol (DTP) to facilitate dynamic trunk configuration across all switch ports. 6. Protocol Independent Multicast (PIM) for IP multicast routing is supported, including PIM sparse mode (PIM-SM), PIM dense mode (PIM-DM), and PIM sparse-dense mode. The IP Services image is required. 7. Inter-VLAN 1P routing for full Layer 3 routing between 2 or more VLANs. 8. Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol (DVMRP) tunneling interconnects 2 multicast-enabled networks across non-multicast networks. 9. IEEE 802.1x allows dynamic,port-based security,providing user authentication. 10. IEEE 802.lx with VLAN assignment allows a dynamic VLAN assignment for a specific user regardless of where the user is connected. 11. IEEE 802.1x and port security are provided to authenticate the port and manage network access for all MAC addresses,including that of the client. 12. Port-based ACLS for Layer 2 interfaces allow security policies to be applied on individual switch ports. 13. VLAN trunks can be created from any port, using either standards-based 802.1Q tagging. 14. 4000 VLAN IDs are supported. 15. IGMP snooping provides fast client joins and leaves of multicast streams and limits bandwidth intensive video traffic to only the requesters. 16. Shall support Uni-cast routing protocol RIP v2. 17. Shall support Protocol Independent Multicast(PIM). 18. 32-Gbps switching fabric. 19. Ethernet switches shall be as manufactured by Cisco or HP. L. Equipment Racks 1. ESC Contractor shall provide one (1) - 19° LCD monitor at each DVR rack location to be able to view DVR/NVR/VMC/VI server(s) display. Monitor shall be rack mounted. 2. ESC Contractor shall provide combination keyboard/monitor shelf at each DVR location. 3. ESC Contractor shall provide a mounted KVM Switch and all required cables and power supplies when more than one DVR is installed in a rack location. KVM capacity shall support connection of all DVRs in a rack location. 4. All CCTV equipment is to be furnished with UPS backup per the UPS specification section. This is not including actual camera power. All 120 VAC camera circuits shall be connected to an emergency power circuit. 5. Top and bottom shall be 14-gauge steel,horizontal braces shall be 16-gauge steel welded to integral structural side panels of 16-gauge steel 6. Shall be fully enclosed and provided with front door, rear door, side panels and top panel with cooling fans. 7. Cooling fans shall be provided in a capacity to fully exhaust the heat dissipated by the equipment. 8. Rack shall come equipped with two pairs of 11-gauge steel rackrail with tapped 10-32 mounting holes in universal EIA spacing. 9. Contractor to provided 6 RU of blank space at the top to be enclosed using rack blank panels. 10. There shall be no spacing between components within the rack. 11. Equipment racks shall be Middle Atlantic Products or Atlas Soundolier. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 280700 - 7 MAY 2, 2023 IP VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 M. Camera Poles 1. The heavy duty pole is for exterior applications and is designed to be weatherproof against the outdoor environmental element effects of discoloration and as well shall be designed to meet or exceed the local requirements for wind load resistance. The installer shall be responsible for checking the local codes for compliance. 2. The poles staff shall be round and extruded from all new 6063 alloy aluminum tubing and heat-treated to produce a T6 temper. The pole shaft shall be 6" in diameter by 18 feet tall non-tapered and shall be of one-piece seamless construction. Shafts with seams welded or not will not be acceptable. 3. The pole shaft shall be continuously welded to a 12" base plate. The base plate shall be cast from A356 aluminum alloy and tempered to Aluminum Association T6 standards. 4. The anchor bolts shall be fabricated from structural quality,hot rolled carbon bar, having a minimum yield strength of 50,000 PSI. The anchor bolts shall be an "L"design and shall be galvanized. 5. An extruded handhole to provide for internal wiring shall be provided and shall have a cover with tamper-resistant security screws. 6. The unit shall be designed and manufactured to allow the conduit and wiring to be totally concealed and run within the unit. 7. The unit shall be finished in a standard dark bronze (DB)powder coating. Other finishes are available. 8. Concrete Mounting Base. 9. The pole shall mount to a round concrete base. The concrete base will be furnished under the General Construction Contract. 10. Poles shall be United Lighting Standards or approved equal. N. History Video Storage: 1. The camera system shall store all video for all cameras for a minimum of 90 days. Provide calculations for review. O. PoE Switches (as required) 1. See section 27 2133 for exact specifications. 2.02 APPROVED PRODUCTS A. Approved Cameras (Indoor/Outdoor, License Plate Recognition/PTZ)Manufacturer(s) 1. Blue Eye Sentinel—Eagle Eye Networks Series a. Model numbers vary by type; provide submittals for review of interior fixed cameras, interior ceiling-mounted 360° camera, exterior fixed cameras, and exterior fixed 180°/270° cameras as shown on the T-series drawings. B. Approved Network Video Recorder(NVR) Manufacturer(s) 1. Blue Eye Sentinel—Eagle Eye Networks Series FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 280700 - 8 MAY 2, 2023 IP VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 a. Provide 32-channel NVR, minimum. Exact size shall be such to serve all cameras shown on the T-series drawings, with room for expansion; coordinate with Owner prior to procurement and installation. See section 2.01,item J,for additional information. C. Approved Video Management System(VMS)Manufacturer(s) 1. Blue Eye Sentinel—Eagle Eye Networks Series D. Approved PoE Switch Manufacturer(s) 1. Cisco—model C9300-48P-E PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's product data; including product technical bulletins, product catalog, installation instructions, submittal sketches or drawings, and product carton instructions for installation. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify that related conditions, including equipment that has been previously installed under other sections, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. All devices connected to equipment specified in this section shall bear the UL, cUL, or CSA label and comply with all applicable National Electrical Code (NEC) standards. 3.03 PREPARATION A. The ESC contractor shall develop custom software as required to affect the functions of the system as dictated by the drawings and Specifications. B. The ESC contractor shall provide equipment cabinets for installation of the control equipment and cable terminations to the equipment. C. All equipment related to the system shall be factory tested before shipment. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Contractor shall furnish all equipment, labor, system setup, and other services necessary for the proper installation of the products/system as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's handling and installation instructions. C. Install in accordance with all local and pertaining codes and regulations. D. All equipment and systems shall be installed by the ESC. Subcontracting of equipment installation shall not be permitted. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 280700 - 9 MAY 2, 2023 IP VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. Equipment shall be ready to use condition at end of installation. F. Energize equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.05 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer. B. Touch up,repair, or replace damaged components before Substantial Completion. C. Remove temporary tags, coverings, and construction debris from interior and exterior surfaces of equipment. Remove construction debris from equipment area and dispose of debris. D. Clean integral air filters, heatsinks, grills, and fans before Substantial Completion and Commissioning Services. 3.06 WARRANTY A. The ESC shall provide a single source warranty for all supplied equipment specified in this section to be free of defects in material and workmanship for a period of two (2) year from the date of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 28 07 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 28 07 00 - 10 MAY 2, 2023 IP VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 28 13 00 - ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. Provide Card Access Control equipment as specified herein and as shown on the schedules and drawings. Installing contractor shall receive,place, connect, and mount all equipment specified in this Section per the manufacturer's instructions. Installing contractor shall furnish all hardware,wire,connectors,and other necessary items as required for a complete and functional Card Access Control system. B. Coordinate all access control system devices with the Owner's Door Hardware Consultant, Allegion. C. Related Sections 1. 27 00 00 Communications 2. 27 15 13 Communications Copper Horizontal Cabling 3. 28 00 00 Electronic Security 4. Division 08 door hardware specifications 1.02 REFERENCES A. The General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 Specifications shall apply to all work of this section. B. Standards listed by reference, including revisions by issuing authority, form a part of this specification section to extent indicated. Standards listed are identified by issuing authority, authority abbreviation, designation number, title, or other designation established by issuing authority. Standards subsequently referenced herein are referred to by issuing authority abbreviation and standard designation. C. Underwriter's Laboratories(UL) 1. UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment 2. NEC National Electrical Code (latest edition) 1.03 WORK INCLUDED A. The Electronic Security Contractor shall furnish labor, equipment, and materials for the Access Control system including but not limited to: 1. Wiring. 2. Equipment cabinets. 3. RFID reader data gathering panels, readers, system software, access control host computer, badging station and system software &programming. 4. Hardwired system running back to a centralized head end location in the MDF Room, with door controllers located as required per distance limitations per the manufacturer, and a primary monitoring station located in the manager's office FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 28 13 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 with capability to remotely monitor the system from alternate locations per the manufacturer and Owner. B. This Section consists of furnishing and installing a card access system as part of the Security Monitoring and Control System to include the following: 1. File Server 2. Remote Interfaces and Processors 3. Enrollment Terminal/Photo ID System 4. Administrative Terminal 5. RFID Card Readers 6. PoE Switches (as required) 7. Power Supplies 8. Logging Printer 9. RFID Fobs 10. System Wiring C. Coordinate all access control locations with Division 08 and the Door Hardware Consultant. 1.04 APPROVALS A. General 1. Submittals shall be made in accordance with the General Provisions of these specifications. B. Specific Requirements 1. Submit catalog cuts for all equipment and devices being furnished under this Section. 2. Submit a complete Access Control System riser diagram. Diagram shall include labeling of each reader and its corresponding head end equipment connection point and interconnecting wiring of all components. 3. Submit floor plan drawings showing location and mounting of each card reader. 1.05 DESCRIPTION A. The Access Control System shall provide a means to control and monitor access at specified doors throughout the facility. B. Each system shall consist of RFID-type Card/Fob sensor devices, status input devices, output control devices, control processor(s), interface modules, file server, remote terminals,printers, software and programming. C. Hardware and software to interface the Access Control System with the Touch Screen and/or Graphic Control Panel Systems. D. An enrollment terminal for programming the card access system security functions shall be provided for the system. No other terminal shall be capable of entering or modifying the card access system. The enrollment station shall be capable of having a color photo ID badging system as an integral component. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 28 1300 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. The software shall run on a Microsoft Windows (latest version) operating system. F. The contractor shall provide the latest version of operating system at the end of the project. At closeout and at the end of the warrantee period, the latest version of software shall be loaded onto the operating system.In addition,a backup copy of the software shall be turned over to the Owner. G. The software shall be user programmable.All source codes,passwords and any other codes shall be turned over to the Owner such that the Owner can have access to any and all parts of the software and any other components. The intent is for the Owner to have complete access to all components of the system he is purchasing without the need of a maintenance contract. Although an after warrantee maintenance contract may be considered by the Owner. See additional requirements herein and in the Security General specification sections. H. System shall be equipped for expansion to remote sites by the addition of an interface card and modem. I. The new system shall have a 6 TeraByte hard drive minimum. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Scope 1. This specification outlines the requirements for a single local controller up to a centrally controlled distributed processing and centrally programmed monitored access control system capable of running on an industry standard computer with the manufacturer's priority software. B. Computer Hardware Requirements 1. The computer shall be configured at a minimum in a following manner. 2. Furnish and commission a centrally located host computer and software as described following: a. IBM PC 100% compatible computer,Intel Core 17-3770 CPU at 3.4 MHz b. 64 GB of RAM C. 6 TB Hard Drive d. DVD+/- RW Optical Drive e. 25"LCD Color Display f. Printer port and line printer for event printing g. Two RS232 and one RS485 serial communication ports h. Microsoft compatible bus mouse i. Surge protector j. Uninterruptable Power Supply C. Computer Software Requirements 1. The computer shall include the following software: a. Windows 7 b. WINPAK Pro FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 28 1300 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Access Control System software D. Computer Software Features 1. The following features shall be provided for the computer: a. Programming of users and system configuration information across multiple systems. b. Password protected,multilevel operator programming capabilities C. Issue of commands to any controller from the computer,like momentarily unlocking a door. d. Storage to hard disk of all event transactions. e. Archive to floppy or tape of stored event transactions for long term storage. f. User customizable reports generated from stored event transactions. g. User, door and alarm input English text names appear on screen, printer and reports. h. Host operator action logging to disk. i. Customizable event and report print. j. The system shall provide for a minimum of 1,000 users. k. The system shall provide for a maximum of 10,000 users. E. Host Computer to Controller Communication Protocols 1. Communications between the computer and the controller shall be accomplished utilizing a standard 10/100 TCIP connection. F. Head End Components 1. Controller a. There shall be three primary types of controllers: access control, alarm monitoring and relay control. b. The controller board shall be microprocessor-based incorporating ROM, on board battery backup RAM and a clock calendar. The ROM shall be modularly upgradeable in the field for enhancements to systems features. All power connections to the controller board shall be protected by fuses. All wiring connections to the controller board shall be screw terminals. Each door connection shall consist of terminals for two readers,one 5 amp rated form c dry output relay for lock control and one input for monitoring and status switch, a request to exit device and tamper switch. There shall be status indicator lights for active relays as well as diagnostic indicator lights to aid in system trouble shooting. C. There shall be dedicated alarm output relays for external reporting of the following conditions: Alarm, Duress, Tamper, Trouble. d. The controller enclosure shall be a NEMA style metal cabinet designed for surface mounting. It shall have a tamper proof removable hinge door with a high security lock. e. The controller shall have an internal power supply that will accept 60 Hz 120V AC. The primary site of the power supply shall be protected with a fuse. The power supply shall provide 28V DC power to the controller board, internal battery charger, scrambling keypads (if applicable), selected card readers and reader interface boards. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 28 1300 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 G. Standby Battery 1. The controller shall have an internal standby battery that is capable of running the system during AC power interruption which shall be automatically recharged by a charging circuit incorporated into the controller board. This standby battery shall be capable of operating the system for 4 hours minimum. H. Expansion Options 1. A maximum of 5 expansion boards can be installed in each controller. An interface board is included with each controller. 2. Alarm Inputs: a. Each controller shall be capable of accepting up to 16 additional supervised alarm inputs in increments of 4 and/or 8. Alarm expansion boards shall be mounted in the controller cabinet and connect to the controller board by an expansion bus cable. 3. Relay Outputs: a. The two access control and one alarm monitoring controller shall be capable of accepting up to 32 additional relay outputs in increments of 8. The outputs shall be used for control applications other than standard door access such as elevator floor control, local door annunciator, HVAC interface etc. The relay expansion boards shall be mounted in the control room cabinet and connect to the controller board via an expansion bus cable. 4. Code Database: a. The controller shall be capable of expanding the code database up to a minimum of 50,000 users with the addition of a memory expansion board. The board shall be mounted in the controller cabinet connected to the controller board via an expansion bus cable. 5. Event Transaction Buffer: a. The controller shall be capable of expanding the event transaction buffer up to a maximum 3500 alarms with in each board. The board shall be mounted in the controller cabinet and connected to the controller board via an expansion bus cable. 6. Serial Communication Interface: a. The controller shall be capable of interfacing to a serial printer for event transaction printing or to a serial terminal for programming with the addition of a serial interface board. I. RFID Readers 1. The controller shall accept all of the reader technologies concurrently. a. RFID, Wiegand, etc. 2. The readers can be used for access control,alarm management and or/relay control and shall be capable of being used in combined operation with keypad and any other reader technology to operate as a dual technology reader where two valid IDs are required. 3. RFID Readers: a. The controller shall be capable of using RFID card readers that output a standard Wiegand data format. The readers can have a short or long read range and be unidirectional or bi-directional. b. Provide a slim line reader for builders store front doors with 2"jambs. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 28 1300 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 J. Power Supplies 1. Each access controlled door shall be provided with a power supply, meeting the following minimum performance requirements: a. Input: 115-120VAC,by Electrical b. Output: 12VDC or 24VDC C. Output Current: IA d. Battery Backup e. UL Class 2 Listed 2. Multiple controlled doors, in close proximity to one another, may connect to the same Power Supply dependent upon available outputs and manufacturer's recommended electrical specifications. 3. 115-120VAC circuits to Power Supplies shall be by the Electrical Contractor. K. PoE Switches (as required) 1. See section 27 21 33 for exact specifications. L. Access Control Features 1. The controller shall have the following access control features at a minimum: a. Restrict access by time of day, day of week, door or holiday. b. Momentary unlock of door. C. Relock of door by code, card or time zone. d. Door status monitoring shall allow for door forced monitoring, door open too long monitoring, door opened too long while door is unlocked, auto relock of door when open or closed. e. Request exit alarms and/or unlocks. f. Two person requirement per door. g. Passback control including use restriction based on status. h. Absentee rule limits. i. Temporary day limits. j. Occupancy counting minimum/maximum limits. k. Coordinate with the Owner for any other operating features required. M. Hot Redundant CPU& Software 1. Provide a complete redundant CPU equipped with all software and hardware necessary,hot and on line,ready to take over in case of failure of the primary CPU operating system. 2. Provide a second workstation with complete operating software. Coordinate location with the Owner. N. Fobs and Users: 1. Each User shall require only a single Fob for access control. 2. Where multiple systems are utilized on the property(i.e. conventional hard-wired access control in addition to battery-operated controlled doors), coordinate to ensure single Fob compatibility between systems. O. Pedestals FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 28 1300 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Provide mounting pedestals, per manufacturer recommendations, for all RFID Readers, Telephone Entry stations, and/or Video Intercom stations located at vehicle entry gates. 2. Pedestals shall be of steel construction. 3. Style of pedestal and number of arms/face plates shall be as noted in the Drawings and Details. 2.02 APPROVED PRODUCTS A. Approved System Head End/Monitoring Software Manufacturer(s) 1. Open Options 2. Software House 3. Lenel 4. Or Approved Equal B. Approved Credential Security Software Manufacturer(s) 1. Schlage CardTrax 2. Or Approved Equal C. Approved RFID Card/Fob Reader Manufacturer(s) 1. Schlage—model AD-300 2. HID 3. Or Approved Equal D. Approved Power Supply Manufacturer(s) 1. Schlage 2. Securitron 3. Altronix 4. Or Approved Equal E. Approved PoE Switch Manufacturer(s) 1. Cisco—model C9300-48P-E F. Approved RFID Cards/Fobs/Credentials Manufacturer(s) 1. Schlage— Smart series 2. HID 3. Or Approved Equal G. Wiring Manufacturer(s) 1. RS-485 (2-conductor, shielded,24 AWG) a. Belden b. Or Approved Equal 2. 12 VDC Cable(2-conductor,unshielded, 18 AWG) a. Belden FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 28 1300 -7 MAY 2, 2023 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 b. Or Approved Equal 3. Coordinate required access control system cable color with Owner prior to procurement and installation. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's product data; including product technical bulletins, product catalog, installation instructions, submittal sketches or drawings, and product carton instructions for installation. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Site Verification of Conditions: Verify that related conditions, including equipment that has been previously installed under other sections, are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. All devices connected to equipment specified in this section shall bear the UL, cUL, or CSA label and comply with all applicable National Electrical Code (NEC) standards. 3.03 PREPARATION A. The electronic security contractor shall develop custom software as required to affect the functions of the system as dictated by the drawings and Specifications. B. The electronic security contractor shall provide equipment cabinets for installation of the control equipment and cable terminations to the equipment. C. All equipment related to the system shall be factory tested before shipment. 3.04 INSTALLATION A. Contractor shall furnish all equipment, labor, system setup, and other services necessary for the proper installation of the products/system as indicated on the drawings and specified herein. B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's handling and installation instructions. C. Install in accordance with all local and pertaining codes and regulations. D. All equipment and systems shall be installed by the ESC. Subcontracting of equipment installation shall not be permitted. E. Equipment shall be ready to use condition at end of installation. F. Energize equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3.05 PROTECTION AND CLEANING A. Storage and Protection: Store materials protected from exposure to harmful environmental conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by the manufacturer. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 28 1300 - 8 MAY 2, 2023 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Touch up,repair, or replace damaged components before Substantial Completion. C. Remove temporary tags, coverings, and construction debris from interior and exterior surfaces of equipment. Remove construction debris from equipment area and dispose of debris. D. Clean integral air filters, heatsinks, grills, and fans before Substantial Completion and Commissioning Services. 3.06 WARRANTY A. The ESC shall provide a single source warranty for all supplied equipment specified in this section to be free of defects in material and worlmanship for a period of two(2)years from the date of substantial completion. END OF SECTION 28 13 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 28 1300 - 9 MAY 2, 2023 ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 28 16 00 - INTRUSION DETECTION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Applicable requirements of Division 28 - Electronic Security shall be considered a part of this section and shall have the same force as if printed herein full. B. This document describes the products and execution requirements relating to furnishing and installing Intrusion Detection System. C. All cables and related terminations, support and grounding hardware shall be furnished, installed, wired, tested, labeled, and documented by the Contractor as detailed in this document. D. Product specifications, general design considerations, and installation guidelines are provided in this document. The successful vendor shall meet or exceed all requirements for the system(s) described in this document and on the drawings. E. Refer to architectural section for the Windows and Glass Specifications. F. Intrusion Detection system shall be compatible and integrated with the components specified in Access Control System and Video Surveillance System. 1.02 SUBMITTALS A. Provide product data from manufacturer's specifications. 1.03 WORK INCLUDED A. The work included under this specification consists of furnishing all labor, equipment, materials, and supplies and performing all operations necessary to complete the installation of this system. The Contractor will provide and install all of the required material to form a complete system whether specifically addressed in the Specification or not. B. The work shall include,but not be limited to the following: 1. Furnish and install a complete intrusion detection system. 2. Furnish and install all motion detection devices. 3. Furnish and install all glass break detectors. 4. Furnish and install all duress devices. 5. Furnish and install all door and window contacts. 6. Furnish and install all horns. 7. Furnish any other material required to form a complete system. 8. Perform testing of all components. 9. Furnish test results of all cabling to the Owner on disk and paper format. 10. Provide Owner training and documentation. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 28 16 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 INTRUSION DETECTION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 11. Verify all AC power requirements for all systems and components. Confirm AC voltage and frequency of all systems and components match the facility power distribution system. Coordinate the above with Electrical Contractor. 12. Shop drawings shall include door schedule showing hardware pertaining to the security system as provided by the Contractor. 13. Shop drawings shall include window schedule showing hardware pertaining to the security system as provided by the Contractor. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 APPROVED PRODUCTS A. System Controller Manufacturer(s) 1. Bosch 2. Or Approved Equal B. Input Module Manufacturer(s) 1. Bosch 2. Or Approved Equal C. Output Module Manufacturer(s) 1. Bosch 2. Or Approved Equal D. Enclosures &Batteries Manufacturer(s) 1. Enclosure a. Bosch b. Or Approved Equal 2. Backup Batteries a. Bosch b. Or Approved Equal E. Access Control Monitoring Software Manufacturer(s) 1. Intrusion Detection Software a. Lenel b. Or Approved Equal F. Keypad Manufacturer(s) 1. Bosch 2. Or Approved Equal G. Motion Detector Manufacturer(s) 1. Honeywell 2. Or Approved Equal FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 28 1600 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 INTRUSION DETECTION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 H. Glass Break Device Manufacturer(s) 1. Honeywell 2. Or Approved Equal L Window/Door Contact Manufacturer(s) 1. Honeywell 2. Or Approved Equal J. Horn Manufacturer(s) 1. Honeywell 2. Or Approved Equal K. Duress Button Manufacturer(s) 1. United Security 2. Or Approved Equal L. Residential System Controller Manufacturer(s) 1. GE 2. Or Approved Equal M. Residential Keypad Manufacturer(s) 1. GE 2. Or Approved Equal N. Residential Transformer Manufacturer(s) 1. DSC 2. Or Approved Equal O. Residential Battery Manufacturer(s) 1. 12V, 7Ah Sealed Lead Acid 2. Or Approved Equal P. Wiring Manufacturer(s) 1. RS-485 (2-conductor, shielded,24 AWG) a. Non-Plenum—Belden b. Plenum—Belden C. Or Approved Equal 2. Device Cable(2-conductor, shielded,22 AWG) a. Non-Plenum—Belden b. Plenum—Belden C. Or Approved Equal 3. 12 VDC Cable(2-conductor,unshielded, 18 AWG) a. Non-Plenum—Belden FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 28 1600 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 INTRUSION DETECTION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 b. Plenum—Belden C. Or Approved Equal 4. 12 VDC Cable(2-conductor,unshielded, 16 AWG) a. Non-Plenum—Belden b. Plenum—Belden C. Or Approved Equal 5. Keypad &Motion Detector Cable (4-conductor, shielded, 18 AWG) a. Non-Plenum—Belden b. Plenum—Belden C. Or Approved Equal 6. RS-232 (2-conductor, shielded,24 AWG) a. Non-Plenum—Belden b. Plenum—Belden C. Or Approved Equal PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Install system components and appurtenances in accordance with the printed instructions. B. Provide all necessary interconnections, services, and adjustments required for a complete and operable system. C. Install control signal, communications, and data transmission line grounding as necessary to preclude ground loops, noise,and surges from adversely affecting system operation. 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing 1. All devices shall be tested for full operational compliance. 2. Testing of system shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 3. Communications Tests a. Controllers to manager server b. Manager server to client C. Remote dial-up support 4. Device Tests a. All system devices requiring power shall be tested. B. Inspection 1. Provide an on-sight, factory-trained technician to assist, advise or manage installing personnel. 2. All final connections shall be made under the direct supervision of the Systems Integrator. C. Field Service 1. Provide first line support for both the hardware and software properties of the selected system. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 28 1600 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 INTRUSION DETECTION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Provided second line support directly from the manufacturer for all components and computer hardware, and all operating and application software that comprise the complete system. 3. Determine and report all problems to the manufacturer's customer service departments. 4. Support shall be available to the integrator via the following methods: a. Phone inquiries b. Direct dial-in to the customer system for remote system troubleshooting by a qualified Field Service Engineer C. On-site visits if required, upon approval by the manufacturer's Customer Service Manager 3.03 LABELING A. Label all devices with machine generated labels. B. Label all cables at each end of each cable. Labels shall be machine generated, wrap- around type. C. Labeling system shall designate the cable's origin and destination on each end of each distribution/horizontal cable. 3.04 FINAL ACCEPTANCE A. Perform the following performance standards before final acceptance: 1. Operate all mechanical devices without down time for a period of 10 days. 2. Operate all electronic devices and equipment without downtime or programming problems for a period of 30 days. 3.05 WARRANTY A. All equipment, components, etc., shall be guaranteed free of defects and any faulty workmanship for a period of one year after final acceptance. B. The Contractor shall replace defective materials and repair faulty workmanship within 24 hours of discovery, except emergency conditions (system failures), which must be placed in service within six(6)hours after notification, all at no cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION 28 16 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21 085 28 1600 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 INTRUSION DETECTION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 28 31 11 - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Addressable PART 1-GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This section covers the complete installation of a new automatic fire alarm system, as well as necessary materials, labor, calibration, testing and training. B. The complete installation shall be in compliance with NFPA 70,72, 101 (Life Safety Code) and NEC Article 760. The installation shall also comply with state and local ordinances, as well as the Americans with Disabilities Act(Public Law 101-336). C. All equipment supplied shall be listed for the purpose and area in which it is used and installed in accordance with any instructions included in its listing. D. All equipment must be new and bear the UL(Underwriters Laboratories Inc.)Label. 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Fire alarm shop drawings shall contain the following: 1. Specification sheet(s)of technical data on each hardware component 2. Specification sheet(s) on wiring to be utilized 3. One-line schematic riser diagram made specifically for this job 4. Calculation for sizing batteries and power supplies 5. Sequence of operation for the entire system 6. Copy of vendor's NICET fire alarm certificate (level III or higher) 7. Verification of central supervising station(UL Certified) 8. Equipment and service warranty 9. Scaled floor plans showing fire alarm device locations and wire routing 1.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Products of the following manufacturers which comply with these specifications are acceptable: 1. Honeywell—Notifier/Gamewell-FCI 2. Siemens 3. E.S.T. 4. Johnson Controls- SimplexGrinnell 1.04 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Smoke detectors shall be covered with plastic wrapping if installed prior to the completion of painting, sanding and other work producing dust, etc. B. The fire alarm control panel(s) shall not be installed until its designated room has been completely painted and cleaned. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 28 31 1 1-1 MAY 2, 2023 FIRE ALARM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 CONTROL PANEL/SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. The fire alarm system shall be an electrically supervised, power limited, low voltage (24 VDC), non-coded, multiplexed, fully analog, addressable system. The fire alarm control panel shall be of modular design for ease of future system addition or modification(up to 20% additional capacity). B. The control panel shall provide system status via an 80-character liquid crystal display and shall also have the following features: 1. Power"ON"Light Emitting Diode(LED) 2. System Reset Switch 3. System Alarm LED 4. System Trouble LED 5. Alarm Silence Display 6. Trouble Silence Display 7. Control panel shall be lockable. 8. Normally open and normally closed sets of contacts for control of remote equipment/devices. C. Batteries shall be mounted in space provided in the fire alarm control panel. Control panel shall include automatic charging circuit to maintain battery/batteries in charged condition. Batteries may be lead acid or nicad; charging circuit shall match battery type. D. The battery/batteries shall have sufficient ampere-hour capacity to operate the system under normal supervisory conditions with A.C. power disconnected for 24 hours, and at the end of that period to operate all alarm notification appliances for 5 minutes. For calculation purposes, all audible devices shall be tapped at a minimum of one(1)watt. E. The system shall operate from one(1)20-ampere,single-phase, 3-wire 120 V.A.C. circuit. The circuit breaker shall be labeled"Fire Alarm Circuit Control." F. The fire alarm system shall respond to a fire emergency as follows: 1. Smoke damper control and automatic shutdown of HVAC air systems shall occur upon activation of respective duct smoke detector. 2. Automatic audible/visual notification (via horns/strobes) shall be provided upon activation of a flow switch,manual station, or area smoke detector. 3. Signal output to the UL Listed central station (for fire system reporting) shall be installed in accordance to the project specifications and drawings. Communicator shall be in the FACP located in Administrative Building and connecting the Maintenance Building. All remote building FACPs shall be connected to the communicator via fiber optic loop. Fiber shall be installed between buildings in underground conduit with tracer wire. a. Basic Performance: 1) The Communicator will communicate to GSM networks in the area including 2G, 3G and 4G. The multi-GSM platform technology automatically detects and chooses the best network in FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 28 31 1 1-2 MAY 2, 2023 FIRE ALARM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 the area based on signal strength and immediately self-adjusts for operation. 2) Supervision of communication path with be monitored and automatically tested per the NFPA requirements listed below based on local NFPA adoptions: NFPA72 2010 GSM Single Path(cellular only) 5 minutes NFPA72 2013 GSM Single Path(cellular only) 1 hour 3) Diagnostic LEDs: Signal strength and status indications. 4) All circuits shall be power-limited,per UL864 requirements. 5) In areas where the GSM network signal strength is poor or not allowed by the AHJ,a D.A.C.T.communication device(or similar UL Listed "fire" device) shall be provided in lieu of cellular communicator. Provide and install 3/4" conduit from the panel to the main telephone backboard. 4. Smoke door release(where applicable) shall occur generally throughout the entire facility. 5. Tamper switch operation shall cause a supervisory signal to indicate audibly and visually at the control panel. 6. The following conditions of emergency generator(s) shall be monitored by the fire alarm system: a. Generator running b. Generator fault C. Generator switch in non-automatic position 7. boosters and batteries of the Emergency Responder Radio Coverage System (where applicable). G. Supervision 1. Fire alarm pathways shall be Class B. 2. Pathway survivability for notification appliances shall be as follows: a. Pathways shall be protected from the point at which they exit the control unit until they enter the evacuation signaling zone they serve and shall meet survivability requirements Level 0 or 1. 3. Each independently supervised circuit shall include a discrete panel readout to indicate disarrangement conditions per circuit. 4. Power failures, opens, or grounds shall be audibly and visually indicated at the control panel and the remote annunciator(where applicable). A green"power on" LED shall be displayed continuously while incoming power is present. H. Underground Signaling Line Circuits 1. All underground signaling line circuits (SLC)routed exterior to building shall be fiber optic cabling. Cabling shall be installed in conduit with tracer wire. L Transient Voltage Surge Suppression 1. Approved manufacturer/model: DITEKDTK-TSSI. 2. Provide all necessary components to provide complete protection of the control panel, data, signal, and dialer circuits/connections. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 28 31 11-3 MAY 2, 2023 FIRE ALARM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3. Surge protection shall be provided for any copper NAC, IDC and SLC circuits which are installed underground outside of a building. 4. All underground pathways entering the building to be protected by surge protectors on both ends and properly grounded. 5. Modules shall be mounted in NEMA 12 steel enclosure adjacent to FACP. 2.02 FIELD DEVICES A. Manual Stations: Semi-flush,addressable,double action type. Station shall be constructed of high impact red polycarbonate. B. Area Smoke Detectors: Smoke detectors shall be of the analog, addressable,photoelectric type. A pulsed diode pilot lamp,visible from the floor, shall be provided to indicate alarm condition or component failure. Diode pilot lamp may be pulsed diode type for normal and steady for alarm trouble indication. Detectors shall be self-supervising for component failure as well as line failure. Detector failure or removal of detector shall initiate (zone) trouble signal. Detector shall be capable of monitoring 900 square feet of unobstructed area with spacing not to exceed 30 feet on center. Smoke detectors shall be ceiling mounted and shall be interconnected into alarm system to function in same manner as the manual station. Detectors shall report analog level of smoke/dirt to panel. C. Duct Smoke Detectors: Detectors shall be of the analog, addressable, photoelectric type. The unit shall consist of a detector and an air sampling assembly housed in a casting designed for duct mounting. The sampling tubes shall extend completely across the duct. Detectors shall report analog level of smoke/dirt to panel. Where detector LEDs are concealed, not easily observable, or greater than 10' above floor, detectors shall have remote LED alarm indicators in a nearby observable location for alarm identification. Each LED shall be labeled to identify location of duct smoke detector. D. Audible/Visual Devices: Audible/visual devices shall be horns with flashing visual appliances with the word "FIRE" written on the lens. The horns shall produce at least 15 dBa above ambient noise level. Audible and visual devices (including the combination device) shall utilize a 4" electrical backbox. Visual devices shall be multi-candela, field- selectable,with a constant flash rate of one(1)flash per second. The device color shall be white. E. Any audible device installed in a sleeping room, including living rooms, shall have a low- frequency sounder approved for fire protective service,and shall be listed to UL 464. The device shall be powered from a notification appliance circuit output and shall operate on nominal 12 or 24 volts (includes fire alarm panels with built in sync). All notification appliances shall be backward compatible. F. Any visual device in a sleeping area shall be minimum 110 candela,unless noted otherwise. G. Addressable relays shall be provided as required to accomplish all mechanical systems and other related control functions. H. Addressable input monitoring devices shall be provided as required to monitor existing water flow,tamper switch, and other devices. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 2831 11-4 MAY 2, 2023 FIRE ALARM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 I. Heat detectors shall be addressable, fixed temperature type rated at 135 degrees F, unless noted otherwise on drawings. J. Fire phone jacks shall mount on stainless steel single gang plates labeled in red "Fire Emergency Phone." K. 120V smoke alarms in each sleeping room and living room shall be interconnected to the fire alarm system via a monitor/control module. Refer to drawing detail for more information. L. Monitoring of remote fire protection valves on site (if applicable) shall be accomplished via fire alarm system connection. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall obtain approval from Owner as to the final and exact location of each control panel and remote annunciator prior to installation. B. All wiring shall be suitably protected from damage. Wiring shall be routed within conduit where installed in the following areas: 1. Underground 2. Damp and wet locations 3. Where exposed on interior walls 4. For all input and output signal wiring for smoke exhaust (including stairwell pressurization) equipment 5. Where concealed in a wall or inaccessible ceiling C. All wiring installed exposed within a plenum shall be UL Listed accordingly. Plenum rated cable shall be tied to the building structure at approximately 6'-0" on center using cable ties. D. Conduit sleeves with bushings shall be installed for fire alarm cabling that passes through walls and floor assemblies. Seal the opening around the conduit and the hole in the conduit with a UL Listed fire rated sealant as required. E. All detection and control wiring to mechanical smoke control systems shall be fully enclosed within continuous raceways. F. Provide necessary programming to accomplish the indicated system operation and control functions. G. All conduit,control wiring,power wiring,relays,and other equipment and devices required to form a complete and operational system shall be provided as part of this Contract. H. All wiring requirements for shielding certain conductors from others or routing in separate raceways shall be as recommended by the manufacturer. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 28 31 11-5 MAY 2, 2023 FIRE ALARM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. The Fire Alarm Contractor shall coordinate all electrical branch circuit identification requirements listed in NFPA 72, Chapter 10 with the Electrical Contractor. 3.02 WARRANTY A. Equipment, materials, workmanship and system performance incorporated into the work shall be guaranteed for a period of one(1)year from the time the Owner receives beneficial use of the fire alarm system and the acceptance tests herein specified have been satisfactorily completed. Any defects due to faulty materials, methods or installation or workmanship within this period shall be promptly repaired or replaced. B. Vendor shall provide pricing for system inspections for a period of four(4)additional years after the initial 12-month warranty as a bid alternate to the Owner. Provide inspections per NFPA 72 and NFPA 101. C. Spare Parts: Provide the following spare equipment items to the Owner upon project completion: 1. Addressable modules: 2 2. Smoke detectors: 2 3. Manual stations: 2 4. Duct mounted smoke detectors: 1 5. Audible/visual devices: 4 3.03 TESTING AND CERTIFICATION A. Testing and certification of the life safety system per NFPA 72 shall be as required by the Fire Marshal and Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for identifying the required testing, coordinate scheduling, and conducting the test necessary to achieve occupancy certification, and assurance of complete system operation. The Contractor shall submit proof of complete system operation signed by the Fire Marshal to Engineer and Owner. B. Contractor shall notify the Owner's representative in writing that the Owner is responsible for hiring a monitoring agency for remote supervision of the fire alarm system. END OF SECTION 28 31 11 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 28 31 11-6 MAY 2, 2023 FIRE ALARM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 31 10 00 CLEARING, GRUBBING AND STRIPPING PART GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary to complete the clearing, grubbing and stripping as indicated by the drawings and as specified herein and shall include removing and disposing of all trees, stumps, brush, roots, logs, vegetation, rubbish and other objectionable matter from the project area. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Art., TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. PART2 PRODUCTS—(NOT APPICABLE) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 CLEARING A. Clear the project site of all trees, stumps, brush, roots, logs, vegetation, rubbish, and objectionable material. 3.02 GRUBBING A. Grub all stumps and roots to a depth of two and one half feet below natural ground. 3.03 STRIPPING A. Stripping all area, which underlie compacted fill, of all humus, vegetation or other unsuitable materials encountered within the top 6 inches of soil. 3.04 DISPOSAL A. Remove all materials from the clearing, grubbing, and stripping operation from the site when no disposal area is shown on the drawings. Burning will be allowed when not in violation with local ordinances; however, Contractor shall be held responsible for any fires or accidents resulting from this operation. END OF SECTION 31 10 00 FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 1000 - 1 MAY 2,2023 CLEARING,GRUBBING AND STRIPPING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 31 12 00.13 REMOVING OF EXISTING CONCRETE PART GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This specification shall govern for all demolition work necessary to remove and dispose of existing concrete sidewalks required to complete this project. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Art. TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 INTENT A. It is the intent of this specification to remove all subsurface concrete structures, surface concrete slabs and sidewalks to provide a cleared site ready for new sidewalk construction and site grading. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PIERS/FOUNDATIONS A. The Contractor shall completely remove and haul off existing concrete sidewalks and fill excavation/cavities with existing material in 6" maximum compacted lifts to 95% standard proctor density up to sidewalk subgrade elevation. 3.02 CONCRETE A. Concrete flat work, masonry or other miscellaneous existing structure at or below the surface shall be removed,hauled off and disposed of by the Contractor. 3.03 PIPES AND UTILITIES A. All lines, pipes and utilities less than 12 inches in diameter may be abandoned in place provided they are at least 12 inches below proposed bottom of sidewalk elevation. All pipes, utilities, etc. abandoned in place shall be plugged or capped per City Code and the appropriate utility notified to insure that the service is terminated. 3.04 SITE GRADING A. See Section 3122 13 Site Grading END OF SECTION 31 12 00 FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 12 00.13 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 REMOVING OF EXISTING CONCRETE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 31 22 00 - EARTHWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Earthwork materials 2. Excavating and backfill 3. Preparing subgrade 4. Soil stabilization 5. Testing requirements B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Soil Report." 2. Division 01 Section "Testing." 3. Division 07 Section "Vapor Barrier". 4. Division 31 Section "Clearing." 5. Division 31 Section "Soil Stablization." 6. Division 32 Section "Asphalt Concrete Paving." 7. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving." 8. Division 33 Section "Utilities." 1.03 SCOPE A. Provide required earthwork relating to building structures and site improvements including excavation, fill,backfill and grading as shown on drawings and as herein specified. 1.04 SOIL REPORT A. A copy of the soil report and test boring results is bound herein. This report is for information only and is not guaranteed for accuracy of existing conditions by Owner or Architect. Should this section conflict with requirements stated in the soils report, the soils report shall be governing. Notify the Structural Engineer as to those conflicts. 1.05 SAMPLES A. Division 1 Section- Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. B. Submit samples of materials requiring laboratory testing in sufficient quantity necessary to adequately investigate soil. 1.06 JOB CONDITIONS A. Maintain all existing and newly established bench marks. Report discrepancies found to the Architect, who reserves the right to make minor adjustments necessary to accomplish the intent of the Contract Documents, at no additional cost to the Owner. Contractor solely responsible for all elevations, dimensions, and verifications of conditions. 1.07 PROTECTION A. Provide for surface drainage during the period of construction in a manner to avoid creating a nuisance to adjacent areas and to prevent water runoff into excavation. Provide pumping as FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 22 00 - 1 MONTH XX, 20XX EARTHWORK DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 required to keep excavated areas free of water during construction. Ponding of water during construction shall be prevented at all times. B. Provide adequate sheeting, shoring and bracing for excavations to prevent caving and to protect personnel. C. Protect all building walls, curbs, and slabs against discoloration or damage from work under this Section. D. Protection of existing landscape features indicated to remain as a portion of final landscaping. E. Protect above and below grade utilities to remain. 1.08 OBSTRUCTIONS A. Should utilities be encountered which interfere with the work, it is the Contractor's responsibility to notify the Owner and Architect. The Owner shall direct the Contractor to remove,relocate or cap off same. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 STOCK PILING A. Fill material required to be hauled in may be stockpiled at site until used, provided it is properly handled to prevent contamination with undesirable materials. Stock pile topsoil separate from excavated subsoil. 2.02 SURPLUS MATERIALS A. Remove excavated materials not suitable for use in fills and backfills on this project from site. Materials containing rubbish, debris or rocks shall be removed. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Fill: (at pavement) on site, inorganic soil free from vegetable matter, debris, and other deleterious matter capable of being compacted to 95% maximum density at optimum moisture content; ASTM D-698, or select fill. B. Select Fill: (within building lines and beneath paving areas) Homogenous and non- expansive, having a plasticity index between 4 and 12, and a liquid limit less than 50. Select fill shall contain no rock greater that 4" in maximum dimension. Submit lab analysis for approval, complete with lab analysis of fill. C. Topsoil: Clean,natural topsoil free of vegetation, debris, and other deleterious matter. Upper 6" of topsoil stripped from site may be used. D. Sand Cushion Under Slabs on Grade: Pit run sand graded in accord with ASTM C136, free of organic matter, clays or other binder materials. Submit samples for approval. E. Vapor Barrier: Division 07 Section. F. Lime: Hydrated lime conforming to applicable sections of ASTM C-207, Type N. Lime quantity tickets supplied to Owner's testing lab upon delivery of each load. G. Filter Fabric: Prefabricated drainage composite geotextile shall be Mirafi 140 Fabric at under-building drainage, or approved equal by JDR or Monsanto. 1. BOD Fabric shall be LowFlow by Polyguard. LowFlow is a 100% post-industrial recucled content geotextile that provides foundation waterproofing and drainage. Contact Polyguard at 3801 S. Business 45 P.O. Box 755, Ennis, Texas, 75119. 1-800-541-4994. www.polyguardproducts.com PART 3 -EXECUTION FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 2200 - 2 MONTH XX, 20XX EARTHWORK DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.01 EXCAVATION A. Strip objectionable materials from areas to be graded before grading operation begins. Excavate subsoil required for building foundation construction operations and other work. Excavations and rough grading shall be made to lines and grades shown and "feathered" into adjoining grades to insure a smooth transition. Maintain excavations so they drain and are kept free of excess water. Provide pumping as required. Fill over-excavated areas under structure-bearing surfaces in accord with directions of Owner. B. Any materials resulting from operations that are unsuitable for use or disposal at the site shall become the property of the Contractor and be removed from the site. C. Trenching for underground piping, electrical conduits, etc., shall be done by the trade installing the pipes, conduits, etc. Backfilling of trenches shall conform to the requirements for compacted select fill. D. Abandoned Utility Lines and Sewers: Plug in accordance with utility company and/or local requirements any abandoned lines or pipes encountered during excavation using concrete plugs at least 6" thick and at a minimum distance of 3'outside improved areas. E. Finish excavations within a tolerance of.05 foot above or 0.1 foot below required grades. 3.02 SUBGRADE PREPARATION AND FILLING A. Lay out work to insure that all finish grades of all paving have the proper slope to insure proper drainage. B. Establish new grades as necessary and verify all measurements and grades. Set all stakes, etc.,to insure an engineering degree of accuracy. C. Establish all grades and curbs of adjacent streets. D. Scarify exposed subgrade to a depth of 6" and re-compact to a minimum of 98% of standard proctor density (ASTM D-698) at its optimum moisture content to 4% above its optimum moisture content. E. Provide select fill material. Select fill material shall be placed in loose lifts of 6" to 8" thick and uniformly compacted to a minimum of 95% of standard proctor density (ASTM D-698) at minus 1%to plus 3% of its optimum moisture content. F. Additional fill may be clean, on-site clays free of debris, vegetation, and organic material. Clay fill shall be placed in 8" maximum loose lifts at+5% to -3% of optimum moisture and compacted to 95% of the standard proctor dry density (ASTM D-698). Moisture content shall be maintained until pavement or additional fill is placed. G. The cross-section of the finished subgrade shall be free from ridges or valleys and be within 0.05 of a foot above or below the theoretical section at any point on the cross-section. H. Finished subgrade that does not conform to the above requirement shall be bladed and thoroughly re-compacted to conform to the requirements. I.Clean surface or subgrade of all loose materials by brooming or other approved methods. 3.03 SOIL STABILIZATION A. Subgrade of all paving shall be lime stabilized. B. Insure that surfaces have been brought to approximate rough grades. C. Loosen and pulverize soil to a compacted depth of 6" beneath designated paving areas including a distance of 2 feet outside perimeter of paving. D. Mix soil and lime thoroughly by approved road mixer or other equipment until a homogeneous, friable mixture of soil and lime is obtained; free from all clods or lumps. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 2200 - 3 MONTH XX, 20XX EARTHWORK DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. Begin compaction of the mixture immediately after final mixing. Aerate or sprinkler material as necessary to provide optimum moisture. Begin compaction at the bottom and continue until entire depth of the mixture is uniformly compacted. F. A minimum of 7% hydrated lime (THD Item 264) (COG Item 4.6)should be used. Lime should be thoroughly mixed and blended with the top 6" of the subgrade (THD Item 260) and the mixture compacted to a minimum of 95% of ASTM D-698 at its optimum moisture content to 4% above its optimum moisture content. G. Rework as necessary to obtain the specified density if any portion fails to meet the density specified. H. Shape surface after mixture has been compacted to the required lines, grades and cross- sections and thoroughly roll with pneumatic or other suitable rollers sufficient light to prevent hair cracking. I.Prepare only sufficient amount of subgrade in advance of placing paving, walks, curbs, etc., to enable the work to proceed smoothly and effectively. 3.04 BACKFILLING A. Do not backfill against grade beams until after form work has been removed and concrete has set up. Backfill against grade beams so as to provide positive drainage away from the structure. B. Finished subgrade surfaces generally not more than 0.5 inches above or below established grades. Tolerance for areas within 10 feet of building and all areas to be paved not more than .25 inches above or below established grades. Provide roundings at top and bottom of banks and at other breaks in grade. Unless otherwise noted, subgrade evenly sloped to provide drainage away from building walls, slope 1/4 inch per foot. C. Compact backfill to 95% of maximum density at 2%below and 3% above optimum moisture content as determined by standard proctor test(ASTM D-698). D. Backfill over filter fabric in tot lots with washed river gravel of 1/4 to 3/4" size and overlay with additional layer of filter fabric prior to installation of wood mulch. 3.05 VAPOR BARRIER A. Place under all floor slabs on grade. Lap all joints 6" minimum and seal with compound recommended by manufacturer; seal around all openings through vapor barrier. 3.06 GRADING A. After site has been cleared of construction debris, grade the site to the contours and spot elevation. B. Ponding of water on the site will not be permitted. Finished grades shall not be more than 0.10 foot above or below established grade elevations. 3.07 PROTECTION, CLEAN-UP AND EXCESS MATERIAL A. Protect grades from construction and weather damage, washing, erosion and rutting, and repair such damage that occurs. B. Correct any settlement below established grades to prevent ponding of water. C. Remove excess stock pile materials, debris, waste and other materials from site and leave work in clean, finished condition for final acceptance. Contractor is responsible for disposal of debris and excess materials. 3.08 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 2200 - 4 MONTH XX, 20XX EARTHWORK DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. The Owner will employ and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to perform inspection and testing services specified in this section. B. Excavation: Observe the excavation process on a periodic basis, noting the exposed faces of the excavation. Immediately report any observed unsafe conditions. C. Filling and Backfilling: 1. The Contractor shall make available to the laboratory, adequate samples of each fill and backfill material from the proposed sources of supply not less than 10 days prior to the start of the work. 2. The Laboratory shall analyze the samples as required to provide a soil description and to determine compliance with the quality requirements. a. Test for liquid limit in accordance with ASTM D4318. b. Test for plastic limit of soils and plasticity index of soils in accordance with ASTM D424. c. Test for moisture density relations of soil in accordance with ASTM D698. 3. Furnish a report for each individual test and state whether sample conforms to the specified requirements or reasons for nonconformance. 4. Inspect and approve subgrade prior to placement of fill material. 5. Make in-place compaction tests for moisture content, moisture-density relationship, and density of fill materials. 6. Perform not less than two compaction tests for each 3,000 SF of surface for each layer of fill under the building and not less than two compaction tests for each 5,000 SF of surface for each layer of fill or undisturbed earth on areas of site to be covered by paving walks or traffic approaches. D. Footing Excavations: Inspect footing excavations to determine that the proper bearing stratum is obtained and that excavations are properly clean and dry before concrete is placed. END OF SECTION 3122 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 2200 - 5 MONTH XX, 20XX EARTHWORK DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 31 22 13 SITE GRADING PART 1— DESCRITION 1.01 SCOPE A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary to accomplish shaping and grading indicated on the drawings and specified herein and shall include maintaining surface drainage during construction, finish grading and all phases of the cleanup operation. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Art. TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. PART 2— PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall uniformly grade the entire project site to provide a pleasing appearance. PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 FINISHING SLOPES AND SURFACES A. The Contractor shall shape and grade the project site to conform to the proposed grade and/or sections shown on the drawings, and as directed by the Engineer. In any case, the Contractor shall grade the site to provide positive drainage away from buildings and towards roads and drainage facilities. The finished appearance shall be reasonably smooth and even (abrupt changes in slope shall not be used). The degree of finish for grading slopes shall be that ordinarily obtainable either from blade-grader operations, or by hand-shovel operations, as the Contractor may elect, subject to the approval of the Engineer. B. Adjust any existing or new valve boxes,manhole rims, etc. to new final grades and pour concrete pads as shown in details provided in drawings. 3.02 CLEAN-UP A. The Contractor shall keep the site and structures free from accumulations of waste materials, debris, etc. caused by the work or his employees. Upon completion of the project and before requesting final inspection,the site and his work shall be "broom clean" or its equivalent. END OF SECTION 3122 13 FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 22 13 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 SITE GRADING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 31 23 13.10 SITE AND PARKING LOT EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary to accomplish the site and parking lot excavation, subgrade preparation and backfill required to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Art. TS-1 in the Technical Special Provisions. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Comprehensive item for excavation and earthwork (dig up, move, use, remove, haul dispose) for all classes of material within site and parking lot area. Construct, shape, and finish all earthwork to specified line and grade. Compact earth subgrade where shown on plans, as cut section or embankment. Excess and waste becomes contractor's property unless otherwise specified. Contractor to furnish any borrow needed unless otherwise specified. Furnish and place topsoil where called for on plans. Excavate for side street transitions and non-concrete driveway adjustments. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 STRIPPING AND EXCAVATION a. Strip top 6" in all areas to underlie compacted fill, curbs,base or pavement,by removing all humus,vegetation, other unsuitable materials. b. Remove existing trees, shrubs, fences, curb, gutter, sidewalk, drives, paving and structures within graded area which interfere with new construction or finished grade. c. Stockpile topsoil for future use in top 3" to provide finish grades as shown on grading plan. d. Dispose of silt,muck, organic materials and debris. Do not use in project. 3.02 FILL See Subsection 31 23 23 Compacted Embankment for requirements. 3.03 SUBGRADE PREPARATION a. Cut or build embankment in compacted layers, finish to specified line and grade. b. if subgrade is to be lime-stabilized(see Section 3123 13.18). c. Maintain moisture and density until covered by base. d. Dig out soft or wet areas found at any time, replace with suitable material, recompact (especially utility trenches). 3.04 CURB BACKFILL AND TOP SOIL a. Compact earth behind curbs without delay after curb completion. b. Top 3" (where disturbed by construction or where unsatisfactory material is exposed by excavation) of finished earth grade shall be top soil excavated from the site. No excessive clods. FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 23 13.10 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 SITE AND PARKING LOT EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.05 EXCESS AND UNSUITABLE MATERIAL A. All excess and/or unsuitable excavated material shall be loaded and hauled off by the Contractor. END OF SECTION 3123 13.10 FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 23 13.10 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 SITE AND PARKING LOT EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 31 23 16.16 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL PART GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary to accomplish the structural excavation required to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Art TS-1 in the Technical Special Provisions. PART PRODUCTS A. Structural excavation shall include all material encountered including earth, asphalt, base material, concrete,masonry,rock,trees, stumps, and roots. 2.01 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION EXCEEDING 5 FEET IN DEPTH A. EXCAVATION SAFETY The Contractor's excavation safety procedures shall, in all respects, meet the current standards established by the U. S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration(OSHA) on excavation,trenching and shoring. B. RESPONSIBILITY Contractor has the sole and exclusive responsibility for the sufficiency of the trench excavation safety systems utilized. The Contractor shall specifically agree that neither the Owner nor the Engineer has such responsibility, and Contractor will not rely on the Owner or the Engineer or any of their representatives for inspection, design, supervision, construction or any other aspect of trench excavation safety protection. Contractor shall fully indemnify, safe and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, their employees and agents (hereinafter the Indemnities) against any and all liability, damage, loss, claims, demands and actions of any nature whatsoever on account of personal injuries (including, without limitation on the foregoing, workers' compensation and death claims), or property loss or damage of any kind whatsoever, which arise out of or are in any manner connected with, or are claimed to arise out of or be in any way connected with, the negligence of the Contractor in the inspection, design, engineering, supervision, construction, safety devices or other activity connected with the trench excavation safety protection under this Agreement. Contractor shall, at his own expense, investigate all such claims and demands, attend to their settlement or other disposition, defend all actions based thereon and pay all charges of attorneys and all other costs and expenses of any kind arising from any such liability, damage, loss, claims, demands, and actions. 2.02 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION 5 FEET OR LESS 1N DEPTH A. GENERAL The limit of excavation shall be such to allow for placing and removing forms, installing sheeting, shoring, bracing, etc. The Contractor shall pile excavated material in a manner that will not endanger the work and will avoid obstructing sidewalks and driveways. Gutters shall be kept clear. FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 23 16.16 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. VERTICAL SIDES When necessary to protect existing or proposed structures or other improvements, the Contractor shall maintain vertical sides of the excavation. The limit shall not exceed three feet outside the footing on a vertical plane parallel to the footing except where specifically approved otherwise by the Engineer. The Contractor shall provide and install any sheeting, shoring and bracing as necessary to provide a safe work area as required to protect workmen, structures, equipment, trees, etc. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design and adequacy of all sheeting, shoring, and bracing. The sheeting, shoring, and bracing shall be removed as the excavation is backfilled in such a manner as to prevent injurious caving. 2.03 SLOPING SIDES A. Where sufficient space is available, the Contractor shall be allowed to back slope the sides of the excavation. The back slope shall be such that the excavation shall be safe from caving. The type of material being excavated shall govern the back slope used. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining the back slope used, but in any case the back slope shall be no steeper than 1 foot horizontal to 1 foot vertical. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 DEWATERING A. The Contractor shall keep the excavation free from water by use of cofferdams, bailing, pumping, well point, or any combination as the particular situation may warrant. All dewatering devices shall be installed in such a manner as to provide clearance for construction, removal of forms, and inspection of exterior of form work. It is the intent of these specifications that the foundation be placed on a finn dry bed. The foundation bed shall be kept in a dewatered condition a sufficient period of time to insure the safety of the structure, but in no case shall dewatering be terminated sooner than 7 days after placing concrete. All dewatering methods and procedures are subject to the approval of the Engineer. The excavation shall be protected from excessive rainfall and drying. The excavation shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer before work on the structure is started. It is the intent of these specifications that the Contractor provide a relatively smooth, firm foundation bed for footings and slabs that bear directly on the undisturbed earth without additional cost to the Owner, regardless of the soil conditions encountered. The Engineer will be the judge as to whether these conditions have been met. The Contractor shall pile excavated material in a manner that will not endanger the work. 3.02 UNAUTHORIZED OVEREXCAVATION A. Excavation for slabs, footings, etc., that bear on earth shall not be carried below the elevation shown on the drawings. In the event the excavation is carried on below the indicated elevation, the Contractor shall bring the slab, footing, etc., to the required grade by filling with concrete having a minimum compressive strength of at least 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days (See Subsection 03 30 02). 3.03 BACKFILL MATERIAL a. General: Suitable material chosen from the excavation shall be used for backfill. The material chosen shall be free of large lumps or clods, which will not readily break down under FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 23 16.16 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 compaction. This material will be subject to approval by the Engineer. Backfill material shall be free of vegetation or other extraneous material. Excavated materials which are to be used for fill or backfill may be stockpiled on the site. Location of stockpiles shall be approved by the Engineer. Top soil should be stockpiled separately and used for finish grading around structure. b. Fiberglass Manholes and Wet Wells: Sand shall be used for backfill around manholes and/or wet wells for a distance of 2 feet from the outside surface and extending from the bottom of the excavation to the bottom of the top slab. Suitable material (as set out above) chosen from the excavation may be used for the remainder of the backfill. Location of stockpiles shall be approved by the Engineer. 3.04 SCHEDULE OF BACKFILLING a. Concrete and Masonry Structures: The Contractor shall begin backfilling of concrete structures no sooner than 7 days but no later than 14 days, after they are cast. The Contractor shall backfill brick and mortar structures after they have been in place at least 3 days. b. Fiberglass Manholes and Wet Wells: The Contractor may begin backfilling of manholes and/or wet wells as soon as the concrete has been allowed to cure and any forms are removed. 3.05 BACKFILL a. General: Backfill shall be placed in layers of not more than 9 inches (loose measure) and mechanically tamped to at least 95% Standard Proctor Density - A.S.T.M. Specification D-698. Flooding will not be perinitted. Backfill shall be placed in such a manner as to prevent any wedging action against the structure. b. Fiberglass Manholes and Wet Wells: Backfill shall be placed in layers of not more than 6 inches (loose measure) and mechanically tamped to at least 95% Standard Proctor Density. Flooding will not be permitted. Backfill shall be placed in such a manner as to prevent any wedging action against the structure. 3.06 EXCESS AND UNSITABLE MATERIAL A. All unsuitable excavated material shall be loaded and hauled from the project site by the Contractor. All excess suitable excavated material should be stockpiled on the plant site at a location identified by Owner's representative. END OF SECTION 31 23 16.16 FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 23 16.16 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 STRUCTURAL EXCAVATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 31 23 23 SITE EXCAVATION AND FILL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary for excavation and fill required to obtain the finished site grades shown on the drawings necessary to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Art. TS-1 in the Technical Special Provisions. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 EXCAVATION A. No excavated asphalt, base material, concrete,masonry, rock, trees, stumps and roots shall be used for fill unless authorized in writing by the Engineer. Only excavated material suitable for the purpose shall be used as fill. 2.02 BALANCE OF CUT AND FILL A. The excavation (of suitable material) and fill does not balance, the Contractor shall haul in or off material as is necessary to provide the grades shown on the drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall accomplish all site excavation as required to conform to the grades and sections shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall use suitable material taken from the site excavation, street excavation and excess ditch excavation to fill the site as required to conform to the grades and sections shown on the drawings. 3.02 TOPSOIL A. The Contractor shall schedule his operation so that the majority of the top soil excavated will be spread as the top layer of fill. 3.03 COMPACTION OF FILL A. See Section 3123 23 "Compacted Embankment". 3.04 SHAPING AND GRADING A. See Section 3122 13 "Site Grading". END OF SECTION 3123 23 FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 23 23 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 SITE EXCAVATION AND FILL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 31 23 23 COMPACTED EMBANKMENT PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary to place and compact all suitable materials obtained from street, storm sewer, channel and structural excavation for utilization in the construction of street or roadway embankments, dikes, levees, backfill of structures and retaining walls as required to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Art. TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. PART 2 -PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIAL A. Material used for embankinent shall be free from muck, trees, stumps, brush, roots, rubbish and in all ways be suitable for embankment. PART-3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Prior to placing any embankment,the surface of the ground, including plowed,loosened ground, or surface roughened by small washes or otherwise, shall be restored to approximately its original slope by blading or other methods and where indicated on plans or required by the Engineer the ground surface thus prepared shall be compacted by sprinkling and rolling. Where indicated on plans or directed by the Engineer, the surface of hillsides to receive embankment shall be loosened by scarifying or plowing to a depth of not less than 4 inches, or cut into steps before embankment materials are placed. The embankment shall then be placed in layers, as hereinafter specified, beginning at the low side in part width layers and increasing the widths as the embankment is raised. The materials which have been loosened shall be recompacted simultaneously with the embankment material placed at the same elevation. Where embankments are to be placed adjacent to or over existing roadbeds, the roadbed slopes shall be plowed or scarified to a depth of not less than 4 inches and the embankment built up in successive layers, as hereinafter specified, to the level of the old roadbed shall before its height is increased. Then, if directed, the top of the old roadbed shall be scarified and recompacted with the next layer of the new embankment. The total depth of the scarified and added material shall not exceed the permissible depth of layer. Trees, stumps, roots, vegetation, or other unsuitable materials shall not be placed in embankment. Embankments shall be constructed to the grades shown on the drawings. After completion, it shall be continuously maintained at its finished section and grade until the project is accepted. Except as otherwise specified, earth embankments shall be constructed in successive layers for the full width of the cross section and in such lengths as are suited to the sprinkling and compaction methods utilized. Prior to compaction,the layers shall not exceed 6 inches in depth. Layers of embankment may be formed by utilizing equipment which will spread the material as it is dumped, or they may be formed by being spread by blading or other acceptable methods from piles of windrows dumped from excavating or hauling equipment in such amounts that material is evenly distributed. Each layer of embankment shall be uniform as to material, density and moisture content before beginning compaction. Where non-uniform layers abut each other, each layer shall be feather-edged for at least 100 feet or the material shall be so mixed as to prevent abrupt changes in the soil. No FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 23 23 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 COMPACTED EMBANKMENT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 material placed in the embankment by dumping in a pile or windrow shall be incorporated in a layer in that position, but all such piles or windrows shall be broken and the embankment material mixed by blading, harrowing or similar methods to the end that a uniform material or uniform density is secured in each layer. Water required for sprinkling to bring the material to the moisture content necessary for maximum compaction shall be evenly applied, and it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to secure a uniform moisture content throughout the layer by such methods as may be necessary. In order to facilitate uniform wetting of the embankment material, the Contractor may apply water at the material source. Such procedure shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Each layer of embankment shall be compacted by approved power drawn rollers to the density specified. All earth cuts, full width or part width cuts in side hill, which are not required to be excavated below subgrade elevation for base and backfilled, shall be scarified to a uniform depth of at least 6" below grade, and the material shall be mixed and reshaped by blading and than sprinkled and rolled in accordance with the requirement outlined above for earth embankments and to the same density as that required for the adjacent embankment. 3.02 RETAINING WALLS, STORM SEWERS,AND BRIDGES A. Embankments or backfill placed adjacent to and over pipes, culverts, retaining walls, storm sewers and bridges shall be of suitable material and shall be placed in successive layers approximately parallel to the finished grade. Special care shall be taken to prevent any wedging action against the structure. For such distances along embanlments adjacent to structures where it is impractical to employ the compaction methods above specified, the embankment material shall be placed in layers not exceeding 6" depth of loose material, thoroughly mixed and wetted uniformly to the moisture content directed, and shall be compacted by approved methods, maintaining the required moisture content by additional sprinkling, if necessary, until each layer has been uniformly compacted to the density specified. Embankments placed around spill- through type abutments shall be constructed in 6" loose layers of uniform suitable material placed in such manner as to maintain approximately the same elevation on each side of the abutment, and all materials shall be mixed,wetted and compacted as specified above. 3.03 DENSITY A. For each layer of embankment,backfill and selected material, it is the intent of this specification to provide an apparent dry density of the minus 1/4 inch material of not less than 95 percent Standard Proctor Density as prescribed by A.A.S.H.O. Standard Method T-99, latest revision. It is also the intent of this specification that the sequence of work in constructing embankments or backfill shall be such that no compacted layer will be allowed to lose either the moisture or density specified. In case work on any partially completed embankment or backfill is suspended, the top 6 inches shall be brought to the moisture and density specified for subgrade, before placing the next layer of embankment or backfill. After each layer of earth embankment or select material is completed, tests as necessary will be made. See Special Conditions. If the material fails to meet the density specified, it shall be reworked as necessary to obtain that density. The moisture content and density shall be maintained so as to pass the above compaction test until the base material is placed. END OF SECTION 3123 23 FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 23 23 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 COMPACTED EMBANKMENT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 31 23 23.10 PIPE TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary to accomplish the pipe trench excavation for all piping required to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Section Art. TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. PART 2 PRODICTS 2.01 EXCAVATION A. Trench excavation shall include all material encountered including dirt, asphalt,base material, concrete,masonry,rock,trees, stumps and roots. Trench excavation will not be measured. 2.03 TRENCHES EXCEEDING 5 FEET IN DEPTH a. Trench Excavation Safety The Contractor's trench excavation safety procedures shall,in all respects,meet the current standards established by the U. S. Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health Administration(OSHA) on excavation,trenching and shoring. b. Responsibility Contractor has the sole and exclusive responsibility for the sufficiency of the trench excavation safety systems utilized. The Contractor shall specifically agree that neither the Owner nor the Engineer has such responsibility, and Contractor will not rely on the Owner or the Engineer or any of their representatives for inspection, design, supervision, construction or any other aspect of trench excavation safety protection. Contractor shall fully indemnify, safe and hold harmless Owner and Engineer, their employees and agents (hereinafter the Indemnities) against any and all liability, damage, loss, claims, demands and actions of any nature whatsoever on account of personal injuries (including, without limitation on the foregoing, workers' compensation and death claims), or property loss or damage of any kind whatsoever, which arise out of or are in any manner connected with, or are claimed to arise out of or be in any way connected with, the negligence of the Contractor in the inspection, design, engineering, supervision, construction, safety devices or other activity connected with the trench excavation safety protection under this Agreement. Contractor shall, at his own expense, investigate all such claims and demands, attend to their settlement or other disposition, defend all actions based thereon and pay all charges of attorneys and all other costs and expenses of any kind arising from any such liability, damage, loss, claims demands, and actions. 3.04 TRENCHES 5 FEET OR LESS IN DEPTH a. The Contractor shall maintain vertical sides of the trench. The minimum and maximum width of trench is set out on the Drawings. b. The Contractor shall provide and install any sheeting, shoring and bracing as necessary to provide a safe work area as required to protect workmen, structures, equipment, trees, etc. c. The Contractor shall be responsible for the design and adequacy of all shoring,bracing and sheeting. FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 23 23.10— 1 MAY 2, 2023 PIPE TRENCH EXCAVATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 d. The Contractor shall remove shoring,bracing and sheeting, as the excavation is backfilled, in such a manner as to prevent injurious caving. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall schedule the excavation of pipe trenches at such times and in such sequence as to present the least interference with other items of the work and the operation of the existing facilities. The Contractor shall pile excavated material in a manner that will not endanger the work, and will avoid obstructing sidewalks and driveways. Gutters shall be kept clear. 3.02 UNAUTHORIZED OVER-EXCAVATION A. If the Contractor should excavate below the proposed trench grade (without authorization of the Engineer) the Contractor shall correct the grade by filling in with sand and tamping thoroughly as directed by the Engineer. 3.03 TREES, STUMPS OR ROOTS A. Where trees, stumps or roots are encountered, they shall be removed and disposed of by the Contractor. Roots shall be cut off flush with the sides of the trench. 3.4 ROCKS,BOULDERS,EXISTING STRUCTURES,ETC. A. Where rocks, boulders, existing structures or other unsuitable soil conditions are encountered, they shall be removed by the Contractor to a depth of 12 inches below the grade line for the full width of the trench and refilled with sand and tamped thoroughly as directed by the Engineer. 3.05 MAINTENANCE OF FLOW IN SEWERS AND DRAINS A. The Contractor shall make adequate provision for maintaining the flow of sewers and drains encountered during construction. 3.06 DEWATERING A. The Contractor shall keep the pipe trench free from water by use of bailing, pumping, well points or any combination as the particular situation may warrant. It is the intent of these specifications to install pipe on a firm dry bed. All dewatering methods and procedures are subject to the approval of the Engineer. The cessation of the dewatering operation will be accomplished during a sufficient period of time to insure that there is no displacement of the pipe due to unequal hydrostatic pressure. 3.07 UNSTABLE TRENCH BOTTOM A. When the soil encountered at the established bedding grade is a quicksand, muck or similar unsuitable material, the Contractor shall proceed as follows: All unstable soil shall be removed to a depth of 2 feet below bottom of pipe for pipe 2 feet or more in diameter, and to a depth equal to the diameter of pipe for pipe less than 2 feet in diameter. Such excavation shall FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 23 23.10—2 MAY 2, 2023 PIPE TRENCH EXCAVATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 be carried at least one foot beyond the horizontal limits of the structure on all sides. All unstable soil so removed shall be replaced with suitable stable material, placed in uniform layers of suitable depth as directed by the Engineer, and each layer shall be wetted, if necessary, and compacted by tamping as required to provide a stable foundation for the structure. Soil which is considered to be of sufficient stability to sustain properly the adjacent sections of the roadway embankment will be considered a suitable foundation material for the pipe. 3.08 UNYIELDING TRENCH BOTTOM A. When the soil encountered at the established bedding grade is ledge rock, rocky or gravelly soil, hard pan or other unyielding material, such materials shall be removed prior to bedding the pipe. These materials shall be excavated for a minimum of 6 inches below the bottom of the pipe and shall be replaced with sand. 3.09 SHAPING TRENCH BOTTOM A. The bottom of the trench shall be shaped to support the bottom quadrant uniformly and for its entire length. Provide bell holes for couplings. The pipe shall be bedded in a foundation of stable material accurately shaped to fit the lower part of the pipe exterior. 3.10 SAND FOR ENCASEMENT,EMBEDMENT AND/OR HAUCHING A. When the drawings require sand for encasement,haunching and/or embedment,the material shall be screened, free of foreign material and be a finely divided sand as follows: Sand Specifications: Passing 7/8" Sieve:............................................................................. 100%by weight Passing No. 4 Sieve:........................................................................... 80%by weight Clay Lumps not to Exceed: ................................................................ 20%by weight Plasticity Index:.................................................................................. NP-10 max. 3.11 CRUSHED STONE FOR HAUNCHING AND/OR EMBEDMENT A. When the drawings require crushed stone for haunching and/or embedment, the material used shall be angular crushed stone, in the general size range of 3/4" to 1/16" which has good stability. Crushed stone shall be graded in accordance with Size #67 or #68 of AASHO M 43,ASTM D 448. 3.12 CONCRETE EMBEDMENT A. When concrete embedment is required on the drawings, the concrete shall conform to Section 03 30 02 "Normal Weight Aggregate Concrete". Concrete embedment shall be allowed to cure for at least 24 hours before placing initial backfill and at least 48 hours before placing final backfill unless approved otherwise by the Engineer. 3.13 BACKFILL MATERIAL a. General: Unless shown otherwise on the drawings, suitable material chosen from the excavation shall be used for backfill. The material chosen shall be free of large lumps, or clods, which will not readily break down under compaction. Backfill material shall be free of vegetation or other extraneous material. Material will be subject to approval by the FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 23 23.10—3 MAY 2, 2023 PIPE TRENCH EXCAVATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Engineer. In areas not under existing or proposed pavement, the last 6 inches of backfill shall be topsoil. b. Select Backfill Material: When "select" backfill material is shown on the drawings, it shall be granular in nature, free of large clods, and have a plasticity index(P.I.) of less than 15. 3.14 INITIAL BACKFILL Initial backfill is defined as that backfill from the bottom of the trench(or from the top of the haunching when shown on the drawings)to 1 foot above the top of the pipe. The Contractor shall place initial backfill in maximum 8-inch layers (loose measure) and mechanically compact it to a density between 90% and 95% of the maximum density as determined by ASTM D-698 with a moisture content near optimum. Backfill below the top of the pipe shall be placed and compacted along the sides of the pipe equally to prevent strain on or displacement of the pipe. 3.15 FINAL BACKFILL a. General: Final backfill is defined as that backfill from 1 foot above the top of the pipe to finished subgrade or ground line. See the drawings for locations where final backfill is mechanically tamped or water tamped. b. Mechanically Tamped: The Contractor shall place final backfill in maximum 8-inch layers (loose measure) and mechanically compact it to a density between 90% and 95% of the maximum density ASTM D-698 with a moisture content near optimum. c. Water Tamped: The Contractor shall place final backfill to a level of 18 inches below the surface of the ground. Backfill will be consolidated by jetting. When jetting, selected excavated material shall be placed in layers of not more than 6 to 8 feet in depth and jetted until all settlement ceases. Water jets shall be long enough to reach through the material being tamped. It is the intent of these specifications that water tamping shall continue until all cavities have been eliminated and the material is completely consolidated. After the jetting is completed to the satisfaction of the Engineer, the remaining 18 inches shall be placed in two equal layers and mechanically tamped to at least 90% Standard Proctor Density ASTM D-698. 3.16 EXCESS AND UNSUITABLE MATERIAL A. All unsuitable excavated material shall be loaded and hauled from the project site by the Contractor. All excess suitable excavated material should be stockpiled on the plant site at a location identified by Owner's representative. END OF SECTION 3123 23.10 FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 23 23.10—4 MAY 2, 2023 PIPE TRENCH EXCAVATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 31 25 00 - STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY A. This section will consist of the completion and implementation of a Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan(SWPPP). PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. The Contractor shall comply with all requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for preparation of and compliance with storm water pollution prevention including but not limited to the EPA, TCEQ, the City of where project is located, and all authorities having jurisdiction. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 EXECUTION A. The Contractor will be responsible for preparation of, execution and implementation of the SWPPP, including construction of all required erosion control features, reporting other EPA and completion of inspection forms. 1. SWPPP shall be prepared by licensed professional engineer in the State of Texas, or the state where the project is located, in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. END OF SECTION 3125 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 31 25 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 31 25 53 - SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: This section specifies soil erosion and sediment control work during construction, as shown. The work includes, but is not limited to, furnishing and installing straw bales or silt fence to form dikes or to form ditch, basin, and drop inlet erosion check; constructing earth perimeter dikes and overflow outlets; constructing crushed stone sediment traps and earth embankments; constructing sediment basins; constructing silt fences; placing riprap; and, furnishing and installing seed or sod for erosion control. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 31 Section: Earthwork 2. Division 31 Section: Excavation and Fill C. The work performed under this section shall comply with the Storm Water Pollution Plan for this Project and with the requirements and intent of the NPDES Storm Water Discharge Permit program. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The following Codes, Regulations, Reference Standards, and Specifications apply to work included in this section: B. Codes and regulation of the jurisdictional authorities, including the NPDES general pen-nit for storm water discharges associates with the construction activity. C. "REFERENCE CODES AND STANDARDS": 1. AASHTO: M-43 M182. 2. ASTM: A112,AI16,A584, C90, C140, C145,D4397. 3. USDA: Soil Conservation Service Publication: Standards and Specifications for Soil Erosion and Sediment Control in Developing Areas. 4. Sampling and testing concrete masonry units shall be in accordance with ASTM C140. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following for approval in accordance with Division 1 Section: "Submittal Procedures", and with the additional requirements as specified for each: B. Certification of each item listed in this section with the appropriate samples, manufacturer's specifications and catalogue information. C. Stone Water Pollution Prevention- Contractor Certification: 1. Prior to commencement of construction activities, the Contractor shall submit to the City where the project is located, or to the Authorities having Jurisdiction, a signed copy of the following certification statement, to be filed with the Stone Water Pollution Prevention Plan(SWPPP): 2. "I certify, under penalty of the law, that I understand the terms and conditions of the general National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) permit that authorizes the storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from the construction site, identified as part of this certification". FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 25 53 - 1 MONTH XX, 20XX SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 STRAW BALES A. Provide straw or hay bales approximately 36 inches long by 24 inches wide by 18 inches high; minimum 60 pounds,maximum 120 pounds each; bound with galvanized wire or nylon rope tied across stem lengths. 2.02 STAKES A. Provide nominal 2 inches by 2 inches wooden stakes with sharpened ends or minimum 1/2- inch diameter steel picket rebar. Stakes: approximately 3 feet in length. 2.03 CRUSHED STONE A. AASHTO M43: Size No. 2 or 24. 2.04 SEED AND SOD A. As specified in Division 32 Sections: "Landscape Seeding" and "Turf and Grasses". 2.05 APPROVED FILL A. Fill material for embankments, dikes, and erosion checks: as specified in Division 31 Sections: "Earthwork" and"Excavation and Fill". 2.06 TOPSOIL A. As specified in Division 32 Sections: "Landscape Seeding" and "Turf and Grasses". 2.07 JUTE MATTING(MESH) A. Provide jute matting of a uniform, plain weave with wrap, and weft yarns of approximately the same size. The physical requirements shall be: 1. Width: 45 inches to 48 inches,plus or minus one inch. 2. 78 warp ends per width. 3. 41 weft ends per yard. 4. Weight- 1.80 lbs. (average)per running yard. 2.08 SILT FENCE MATERIALS A. Silt Fence Fabric: 1. One of the following: a. Burlap: AASHTO M182. b. Polypropylene fabric: ASTM D4397. c. Nylon netting reinforced fabric. 2. Minimum bursting strength: 150 lbs. 3. Edges treated to prevent unraveling. 4. Furnished with 0-rings or clips to facilitate attachment to woven wire fabric. B. Woven Wire Fabric: ASTM Al 16, Class 3 Coating; or ASTM A584, Class II Coating. C. Posts: 1. Steel, T-section, minimum 4 feet 6 inches long, minimum of 1.3 lbs. per foot without anchor plate. 2. Anchor plate attached before coating. 3. Fabricated with lugs or other approved means to prevent vertical movement of the woven wire fabric. D. Coatings for Posts: 1. Factory Painted: FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 2553 - 2 MONTH XX, 20XX SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 a. Prime coat: As specified in Division 09 Section: "Painting" for steel. b. Final Coat: Aluminum paint. E. Tie Wire: Galvanized in accordance with ASTM Al 12. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 CONDITION OF SUBSTRATE A. Examine the areas and conditions under which soil erosion and sediment control work is to be completed. B. Stabilize fill and grade of areas to receive soil erosion and sediment control. Maintain positive drainage to sediment and erosion control devices during and after grading operations. 3.02 STRAW BALE DIKE INSTALLATION A. Place bales in a row with ends abutting one another. Embed each bale in soil a minimum of 4 inches. Place anchor bales with two stakes driven through bales and sunk a minimum 1-1/2 feet into stabilized earth. Angle the initial stake toward previously laid bale to force bales together. Drive stakes flush with top bales. Remove bale dikes when no longer useful for controlling drainage and water flow. 3.03 STRAW BALE EROSION CHECK INSTALLATION A. Ditch Erosion Checks: 1. Where ditches are cut into existing ground and side slopes, place ditch erosion checks, consisting of bales, across the ditch slope invert. Install at least two bales across the ditch invert. Install additional bales on the ditch slopes, as shown, or when directed. Stake two overlapping bales staked up each ditch side slope. Set overlaps tight to eliminate openings in the ditch erosion check. B. Basin and Drop Inlet Erosion Check: 1. Where basins and drop inlets are located in the ditch line and off the paved areas, install baled straw erosion checks as shown. Protect entrance structures with straw bales stalked upstream around drainage structure to ensure elimination add soil and silt from entering the underground drainage system. Stake one bale perpendicular to the flowline directly upstream from the inlet. Set two additional bales parallel to the flowline at each end of the bale. Stake all bales tightly against each other to eliminate any possible openings. Where shown, or when directed, embed the bales 4 inches into the ground around structures. C. When the buildup of soil and silt behind the baled soil erosion checks reaches a height of 12 inches or when the checks are no longer functioning efficiently, remove the accumulated material. Bales shall be replaced every three months to maintain effectiveness of the sediment control measure. D. Remove baled straw used for erosion checks when approved, or when the project is completed. E. In no cases shall bales be left in ditches and around drainage structures after all construction is finished. F. Curb Inlet Erosion Checks: 1. Protect entrance structure with straw bales paralleled with the gutter flowline to ensure elimination of soil and silt from entering the underground drainage system. G. Shoulder Drain Erosion Check: 1. Where ballast drains are installed before placement of ballast, the following shall be installed. Install straw bale erosion checks as shown. Protect entrance structure with FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 2553 - 3 MONTH XX, 20XX SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 straw bales staked around ballast drain to ensure elimination of soil and silt from entering the underground drainage system. All bales shall be tightly staked against each other to eliminate any possible openings. All straw bales around ballast drains shall be removed just prior to installation of ballast. 3.04 PERIMETER EARTH DIKE AND OVERFLOW OUTLET INSTALLATIONS A. Construct dikes with suitable backfill material, machine compacted, with positive drainage to outlets. Divert runoff from protected and stabilized upland areas to outlets with stabilized soil or grade stabilization behind outlets. Divert runoff from disturbed and exposed upland area to sediment traps or basins. Level to grad both earth dikes and overflow outlets once the sod area has stabilized. Remove stones, roots, and other extraneous materials larger than 2 inches any dimension. B. Construct overflow outlets in perimeter earth dikes of compacted crushed stone embedded a minimum of 4 inches into the earth dikes. Construct the crest of outlets approximately 6 to 8 inches below height of adjoining earth dike. C. Remove overflow outlets from the site once the soil area has properly stabilized. 3.05 SEDIMENT TRAP AND EMBANKNIENT INSTALLATIONS A. Construct sediment traps as shown on the drawings using crushed stone at outlets, existing backfill and soil materials for embankments, with stabilizing cores consisting of straw bales, concrete blocks, or timber. 1. Clear, grub, and grade areas under embankments and trap outlets prior to placing embankments. Clear pool areas. 2. Where used as core material for outlets and embankments, anchor straw bales in place with two stakes per bale. Drive stakes through bales and into stabilized soil a minimum of 1-1/2 feet. 3. Place and compact embankment material. 4. Place and compact crushed stone solidly over core at outlets. Crest of outlets shall be approximately 10 to 12 inches below height of adjoining embankment. 5. Unless otherwise shown, construct cut and fill slopes at 3:1, or flatter. 6. Place jute matting (mesh) over embankments as shown. Securely anchor matting with stakes or stays. 7. When sediment has accumulated to 1/2 the design depth of the trap or 1 foot, whichever is less,remove sediment and deposit such material in a previously approved area which is free of erosion. 8. Remove sediment traps and embankments once the soil area has been properly stabilized as determined by the Architect. B. Construct sediment basins in compliance with the "Standard and Specifications for Sediment Basin" as published by the U.S. Department of Agriculture Soil Conservation service in its volume "Standards and Specification for Soil Erosion and Sediment Control in Developing Area". 3.06 SODDING A. Perform sodding work when temperatures are 40 deg. F or higher. Do not place sod when ground surface is frozen or during extended drought. B. Loosen subgrade of areas to be sodded and apply topsoil mixture over the area. C. Lay sod within 20 hours from time of stripping. D. Peg sod on slopes as required to prevent slippage. Use 1 inch by 1 inch by 6 inch wooden pegs with one end sharpened. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 2553 - 4 MONTH XX, 20XX SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. Provide fertilizer and soil amendments as required to maintain healthy sodded areas. F. Sod areas to the limits indicated on drawings. G. Stabilize channel flow areas disturbed by the Contractor's operations with specified sod. Sod invert of ditches to 2 feet above invert. 3.07 SEEDING A. Place and prepare topsoil as specified in Division 32 Sections: "Landscape Seeding" and "Turf and Grasses". B. Place seed and fertilize as specified in Division 32 Sections: "Landscape Seeding" and "Turf and Grasses". 3.08 SILT FENCE A. Install steel posts on a minimum of 8 foot centers. Minimum embedment of 1 foot 6 inches. B. Minimum height of the silt fence to be 2 feet 6 inches with a 6 inch clearance between the top of the silt fence and the top of the posts. C. Install the steel posts on a slight angle towards the anticipated runoff surface. D. Trench in the toe of the silt fence so that the downslope faces of the trench is flat and perpendicular to the lie of flow. E. Minimum trench depth: 6 inches. F. Trench width: 3 to 4 inches. G. Attach welded wire fabric to the posts. H. Attach the silt fence fabric to the welded wire fabric and secure with a minimum of two wraps. I.Backfill over the silt fence fabric. J.When build up of soil, silt, or any other material behind the silt fence reaches a height of 6 inches or when the fence is no longer functioning efficiently, remove all accumulated material. The accumulated material shall be disposed of as set forth in Division 01 Section: "Construction Waste Management". 3.09 CONTROL AND DISPOSAL OF EXCESS MATERIAL, TRASH, DEBRIS, AND EFFLUENT A. Dispose of excess excavated material that is approved by the Architect as clean fill if an onsite soil disposal areas has been approved. If no such site is approved, dispose of material in accordance with the provisions of Division 01 Section: "Construction Waste Management". Small ainounts of material generated by excavation for fencing, etc. may be exempted from this provision. In all cases the provisions of Division 01 Section: "Construction Waste Management" apply to the onsite disposal of excavated material. B. Pick-up trash and place in containers. Empty containers on a regular schedule. Conduct handling and disposal to prevent contamination of the site and others areas. Do not dispose of in wetlands and do not burn on the Right-of Way (ROW). On completion, leave the disposal areas clean. C. Dispose of rubbish and debris as follows: 1. Transport all waste off the site and dispose of in a manner that complies with State, and local requirements. Secure a permit or license prior to transporting any material off the site. Submit copies of approval documents from appropriate Authorities to the Architect prior to use of the disposal sites. Do not burn waste materials on site. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 2553 - 5 MONTH XX, 20XX SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 D. Effluent: 1. The Contractor shall take all necessary measures to assure compliance with the requirements of the NPDES Storm Water Discharge Permit obtained for this Project, and with the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan developed for this Project. 3.10 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE A. Protect erosion and sediment control devices from damage. Repair and replace dikes, erosion checks, sediment traps, silt fences, overflow outlets, and other measures when damaged by construction, natural, and other physical causes. All soil erosion and sediment control device shall be repaired or replaced at the expense of the contractor and shall function as originally intended. B. Periodically (at least once every 7 days and after each rainfall event) inspect and maintain erosion and sediment control structures,until final stabilization is achieved. C. Maintain sod by watering, fertilizing, weeding, mowing, and trimming. Replace sod which has been eroded, damaged by construction activities, deteriorated, or diseased. D. All stockpiled soil shall be surrounded by a straw bale dike or silt fence to properly control sediment runoff. All material and labor required to install and maintain the erosion control at soil stockpiles shall be included in the Contract. E. Inspection services provided by the project City's representative do not relieve the Contractor's responsibility for inspection and maintenance of the erosion control measures, or his duty to comply with the Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan and the conditions of the NPDES General Permit. 3.11 ACCEPTANCE A. Soil erosion and sediment control devices will be acceptable, provided that they are in good condition and functioning as intended. B. Sodded areas will be acceptable,provided that all requirements, including maintenance, have been complied with, and a healthy,well-rooted, even-colored,viable sod is established. 3.12 STAGING AREAS A. At such time when the specific location of the staging areas are determined, silt fences, straw bale dikes, or equivalent sediment controls are required for all sideslope and downslope boundaries of the staging area or a detention basin providing storage for runoff from the staging area from a 10 year, 24-hour storm shall be provided. This erosion control plan shall be approved by the Architect and shall be in place prior to occupation of the staging areas. All relative material and labor to construct and maintain the staging area erosion control plan shall be subsidiary to the other items of work. Plan, schedule, and undertake work in a manner that will ensure protection and preservation of existing wetlands and water courses identified by the Corps of Engineers and the U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service 3.13 VEGETATIVE PRACTICES A. Temporary seeding, permanent seeding, mulching, or sod stabilization procedures, or their equivalent, must be initiated on all disturbed areas within 14 calendar days of last activity in that area. Temporary seeding, or sod and/or soil stabilization procedures will not be paid for directly, but will be considered subsidiary to the Contract. All permanent soil stabilization procedures shall be installed, measured, and paid for by the Contractor, and shall be in accordance with Division 32 Sections: "Landscape Seeding" and"Turf and Grasses". END OF SECTION 3125 53 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 2553 - 6 MONTH XX, 20XX SOIL EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 31 31 16 — TERMITE CONTROL PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Furnish and install a chemical barrier to afford the structure protection from termites and other common ground insects 1. Soil treatment for termite control. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01, Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls", for pest control requirements during and at conclusion of construction period. 2. Division 03, Section"Cast-In-Place Concrete" 3. Division 06, Section "Rough Carpentry", for wood preservative treatment by pressure process. 4. Division 07, Section"Vapor Barrier". 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with all applicable regulatory and environmental requirements. B. Installer Qualifications: A specialist who is licensed according to regulations of authorities having jurisdiction to apply termite control treatment and products in jurisdiction where Project is located and who employs workers trained and approved by manufacturer to install manufacturer's products. 1. Any chemicals toxic to animals and plant life should be applied with caution by an experienced person who is licensed in accordance with the regulatory agency of the State. C. Regulatory Requirements: Formulate and apply termiticides and termiticide devices according to the EPA-Registered Label. D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Action Submittals: Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components, and profiles for termite control products. 2. Include the EPA-Registered Label for termiticide products. B. Informational Submittals: 1. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer. 2. Product Certificates: For each type of termite control product. 3. Sample Warranties. C. Closeout Submittals: Soil Treatment Application Report: After application of termiticide is completed, submit report for Owner's records and inclusion in O&M Manuals. Include the following: FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 31 16 - 1 MONTH XX, 20XX TERMITE CONTROL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Date and time of application. 2. Moisture content of soil before application. 3. Termiticide brand name and manufacturer. 4. Quantity of undiluted termiticide used. 5. Dilutions,methods,volumes used, and rates of application. 6. Areas of application. 7. Water source for application. 1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: To ensure penetration, do not treat soil that is water saturated or frozen. Do not treat soil while precipitation is occurring. Comply with requirements of the EPA-Registered Label and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. B. Coordinate soil treatment application with excavating, filling, grading, and concreting operations. Treat soil under footings, grade beams, and ground-supported slabs before construction. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Soil Treatment Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by Applicator and Contractor, certifying that project has been registered with Manufacturer to meet the required Warranty criteria,provide termite control work for the duration of the Warranty, consisting of applied soil termiticide treatment, will prevent infestation of subterranean termites,including Formosan termites (Coptotermes formosanus). If subterranean termite activity or damage is discovered during warranty period, re-treat soil and repair or replace damage caused by termite infestation. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 SOIL TREATMENT A. Termiticide: Provide an EPA-Registered termiticide, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, in an aqueous solution formulated to prevent termite and cockroach infestation. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum termiticide concentration allowed for each specific use, according to product's EPA-Registered Label. 1. Pre-construction soil treatment Use a termiticide that is also effective against cockroaches, or else provide supplemental treatment with another EPA-approved insecticide that is effective against roaches. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the following: a. BASF Corporation,Agricultural Products; Termidor. b. Bayer Environmental Science; Premise. 3. Pest Control Contractors: Subject to compliance with requirements, acceptable applicators include but are not necessarily limited to: a. Terminix b. Orkin c. Myers d. Metrogard 4. Service Life of Treatment: Soil treatment termiticide that is effective for not less than five years against infestation of subterranean tennites. B. Materials shall be used,provided: 1. They are determined to meet five (5) year test conducted by the U.S. Forest Service, or the U.S. Department of Agriculture. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 31 16 - 2 MONTH XX, 20XX TERMITE CONTROL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Evidence is provided indicating any toxic effects to humans,plants or animal life. 3. Allowed by governing laws and/or ordinances. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 APPLICATION, GENERAL A. General: Comply with the most stringent requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and with manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label for products. 3.02 APPLYING SOIL TREATMENT A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for moisture content of soil per termiticide label requirements, interfaces with earthwork, slab and foundation work, landscaping, utility installation, and other conditions affecting performance of termite control. B. Proceed with application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. C. Soil Treatment Preparation: Remove foreign matter and impermeable soil materials that could decrease treatment effectiveness on areas to be treated. Loosen, rake, and level soil to be treated except previously compacted areas under slabs and footings. Termiticides may be applied before placing compacted fill under slabs if recommended in writing by termiticide manufacturer. 1. Fit filling hose connected to water source at the site with a backflow preventer, complying with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. D. Application: Mix soil treatment termiticide solution to a uniform consistency. Provide quantity required for application at the label volume and rate for the maximum specified concentration of termiticide, according to manufacturer's EPA-Registered Label, to the following so that a continuous horizontal and vertical termiticidal barrier or treated zone is established around and under building construction. Distribute treatment evenly. 1. Slabs-on-Grade and Basement Slabs: Underground-supported slab construction, including footings, building slabs, and attached slabs as an overall treatment. Treat soil materials before concrete footings and slabs are placed. 2. Foundations: Adjacent soil, including soil along the entire inside perimeter of foundation walls; along both sides of interior partition walls; around plumbing pipes and electric conduit penetrating the slab; around interior column footers, piers, and chimney bases; and along the entire outside perimeter, from grade to bottom of footing. Avoid soil washout around footings. 3. Masonry: Treat voids at masonry that rest on footings below grade. 4. Penetrations: At expansion joints, control joints, and areas where slabs will be penetrated. E. Avoid disturbance of treated soil after application. Keep off treated areas until completely dry. F. Post warning signs in areas of application. G. Protect termiticide solution, dispersed in treated soils and fills, from being diluted until ground-supported slabs are installed. Use waterproof barrier according to EPA-Registered Label instructions. H. Reapply soil treatment solution to areas disturbed by subsequent excavation, grading, landscaping, or other construction activities following application. END OF SECTION 31 31 16 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 31 16 - 3 MONTH XX, 20XX TERMITE CONTROL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 31 32 13.18 LIME STABILIZED SUBGRADE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary to provide the lime slurry treatment for the subgrade when required by the drawings. Application of dry lime shall not be allowed. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Art. TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. PART PRODUCT 2.01 HYDRATED LIME A. Hydrated lime shall be a standard brand conforming to the requirements of Item 264, Type A, of the Texas Highway Department Standard Specifications. 2.02 WATER A. Water shall be clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, salt, alkali, organic matter and other substances deleterious to the lime or lime-base mixture. 2.03 LIME SLURRY A. Lime slurry shall conform to the requirements of Item 264, Type B, Grade 2 of the Texas Highway Department Standard Specification. 2.04 EQUIPMENT A. Any combination of equipment may be used that will produce a uniform lime subgrade mixture, free from loose or segregated areas and of uniform density and moisture. 2.05 TAMPING ROLLERS A. Tamping rollers, sheeps foot type, shall consist of one or more units. Each unit shall consist of watertight cylindrical drum not less than 60-inches in length, surrounded by metal studs with tamping feet projecting not less than 7-inches from the surface of the drum and spaced not less than 6-inches nor more than 10-inches apart, measured diagonally from center to center. The tamping feet shall be an approved type suitable for compacting subgrade courses. Each unit shall be equipped with a suitable device for cleaning the tamping feet. B. The rolling units of multiple-type tamping rollers shall be pivoted on the main frame in a manner that will permit the units to adapt themselves to uneven ground surface and to rotate independently. When fully loaded, the rollers shall produce a pressure of at least 750 pounds per square inch on the combined areas of the tamping feet in contact with the ground. 2.06 THREE-WHEEL GENERAL PURPOSE ROLLERS A. Shall be self propelled, weighing not less than 10 tons and having a minimum compression of 300 pounds per inch width of rear wheel. The wheels of the rollers shall be equipped with adjustable scrapers. FIRE STAION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 32 13.18— 1 MAY 2, 2023 LIME STABILIZED SUBGRADE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2.07 PNEUMACTIC-TIRED ROLLERS A. Shall be single or double axle vibrating or non-inflated type, equipped with tires of equal size and diameter, uniformly inflated, so that the air pressure of the several tires shall not vary more than 5 pounds per square inch. Rollers may be self-propelled or towed by a suitably powered unit. The self-propelled roller, or the power unit and towed roller shall be considered a pneumatic-tired roller unit. a. Light Pneumatic-Tired Rollers shall have two axles on which are mounted not less than 9 pneumatic-tired wheels in such a manner that the rear group of tires will not follow in the tracks of the forward group. The axles shall be mounted in a rigid frame provided with a loading platform or body suitable for ballast loading. The roller shall develop a compression of not less than 225 pounds per inch width of the tire tread and shall be capable of being unloaded to loads up to 300 pounds per inch of nominal tire width. The rollers shall be weighed as directed. b. Heavy Pneumatic-Tired Rollers shall be of the vibratory or non-vibratory type with a minimum loading of 25,000 pounds per tire. The tires shall be suitable for inflation to not less than 90 p.s.i. The loading shall be distributed equally to all wheels. 2.08 TRACTORS A. Tractors shall be of the type suitable for compaction. 2.09 BLADE GRADERS A. Blade graders shall have a wheelbase of not less than 15 feet and a blade of not less than 10 feet and shall Be self-propelled. 2.10 SCARIFIERS A. Scarifiers shall have two rows and the teeth in each row shall not be more than 8-inches apart. The rows of teeth shall be staggered so that the teeth furrows will not be more than 4-inches apart. 2.11 LIME SLURRY EQUIPMENT A. The plan and equipment for the preparation and application of the lime slurry shall be approved prior to commencement of the work. Plant and equipment for the preparation of lime slurry shall be located as directed by the Engineer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. No slurry shall be applied except when the air temperature is at least 40°F in the shade and is rising. No slurry shall be applied to a subgrade that is frozen or contains frost. if the air temperature falls below 35°F in the shade, completed lime-treated areas shall be protected by approved methods against any detrimental effects or freezing. Un-compacted soil-lime mixtures that are wet by rain so that the average moisture content at the time of compaction exceeds the tolerance specified, shall be dried by aeration or other approved methods until the moisture content within the specified limits is obtained. FIRE STAION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 32 13.18—2 MAY 2, 2023 LIME STABILIZED SUBGRADE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.02 SCARIFTING AND PRELIMINARY MIXING A. Prior to the application of lime slurry the subgrade shall be scarified and thoroughly pulverized and mixed. 3.03 APPLICATIONS A. Lime slurry shall be applied only on that area where the mixing operations can be completed the same day. 3.04 SLURRY PLACING A. The lime slurry shall be placed by trucks equipped with approved distributors, and an agitator that will keep the lime and water in a consistent mixture. The distribution of lime at the rate specified shall be attained by successive passes over a measured section or area until the proper lime and moisture content has been secured. 3.05 RATE OF APPLICATION A. The rate of application of lime treatment of the natural subgrade shall be determined by the Eades and Grim pH Test procedure, but shall not exceed 7.0% by dry weight. The optimum moisture shall be maintained within 2%. 3.06 MIXING A. The mixing procedure shall be as hereinafter described: a. First Mixing: The material and lime shall be thoroughly mixed by approved road mixers or other approved equipment, and the mixing continued until, in the opinion of the Engineer, a homogeneous, friable mixture of material and lime is obtained, free from all clods or lumps. Materials containing plastic clays or other material that will not readily mix with lime shall be mixed as thoroughly as possible at the time of the lime application, brought to the proper moisture content and left to cure 72 hours or as directed by the Engineer. During the curing period,the material shall be kept moist as directed. b. Final Mixing: After the required curing time, the material shall be uniformly mixed by approved methods. If the soil binder-lime mixture contains clods, they shall be reduced in size by raking, blading disking, harrowing, scarifying or the use of other approved pulverization methods so that, when all nonslaking aggregates retained on the No. 4 sieve are removed, the remainder of the material shall meet the following requirements when tested in the field by laboratory sieves: Percent Minimum Passing 1" Sieve 100 Minimum Passing No. 4 Sieve 60 Old bituminous wearing surface shall be pulverized so that 100% will pass a 2" sieve. During the interval of time between applications and mixing, hydrated lime that has been exposed to the open air for a period of 6 hours or more or to excessive loss due to washing or blowing will not be accepted for payment. FIRE STAION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 32 13.18—3 MAY 2, 2023 LIME STABILIZED SUBGRADE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.07 COMPACTION A. Compaction shall be in layers (6" maximum-loose measure) to the uniform density as shown on the drawings. Compaction of the mixture shall begin immediately after final mixing and in no case later than 3 calendar days after final mixing, unless approval is obtained from the Engineer. The material shall be aerated or sprinkled as necessary to provide the optimum moisture. Compaction shall begin at the bottom ad shall continue until the entire depth of mixture is unifonnly compacted as hereinafter specified. B. If the total thickness of the material to be treated cannot be mixed in one operation, the previously mixed material shall be bladed to a windrow just beyond the area to be treated and the next layer mixed with lime as previously specified. The first layer of the treated material shall be compacted in such a manner that the treated material will not be mixed with the underlying material. After compaction and shaping the surface shall be kept wet until the paving is applied to seal the subgrade. 3.08 ALLOWABLE TOLERANCES a. Surface Test: After the subgrade is completely compacted to required density, the surface shall be tested for smoothness and accuracy of grade as herein above set out. If any portions are found to lack required smoothness or failing accuracy of grade or crown, such portions shall be scarified, reshaped, recompacted and otherwise manipulated until the required smoothness and accuracy is obtained. These tests shall be made by the Contractor under the supervision of the Engineer. b. Density: Field density tests will be taken in accordance with the provisions as set out in Section 01 35 00 of the Special Conditions. END OF SECTION 3132 13.18 FIRE STAION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 32 13.18—4 MAY 2, 2023 LIME STABILIZED SUBGRADE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 31 32 23 - WATER AND LIME PRESSURE INJECTION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Water and Lime mixture 2. Equipment 3. Installation procedures B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Geotechnical Report." 2. Division 01 Section "Testing." 3. Division 31 Section "Earthwork." 4. Division 31 Section "Drilled Piers." 1.03 SCOPE A. Provide lime-slurry pressure-injection stabilization to obtain a relatively uniform, moist, stable zone of soil beneath slab-on-grade. This work shall be performed after completion of grading and prior to the placement of select fill or drilled piers. B. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials to perforin pressure injection of water and lime slurry beneath the structure as described below. 1.04 STANDARDS A. Meet requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of Standards listed. 1. American Society for Testing and Materials 2. North Texas Council of Governments. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator: Minimum of two years of experience using pressure injection process. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Submit date on proposed methods and equipment for lime slurry pressure injection process. B. Submit invoices or delivery tickets to verify exact quantity of lime utilized. 1.07 JOB CONDITIONS A. Coordinate lime slurry injection with building pad earthwork. B. Do not inject materials when ambient temperature is 40°F and falling. 1.08 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. A full-time inspector, working under the supervision of a professional geotechnical engineer, will be retained by the Owner to check the specific gravity of the lime slurry, observe the injection operations, record quantities of materials used, coordinate testing of the injected area(s), and other duties as required. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 32 23 - 1 MONTH XX, 20XX WATER AND LIME PRESSURE INJECTION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. After a minimum curing time of 24 hours upon completion of the second water pass, the injected area will be tested as required to determine if additional injections with water are necessary. Tests will include moisture content, Atterberg limits, swell / absorption pressure, and other tests, as required, on samples obtained from soil borings drilled in representative injected areas. Test boring should be performed to depths of 10 feet at a spacing of one boring per every 7,400 square feet injected. Samples should be obtained at 1 foot intervals and tested in accordance with general practice for lime slurry treated soils. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Hydrated Lime: Applicable parts of ASTM C977. B. Water: Potable. C. Surfactant: Biodegradable,non-ionic detergent. 2.02 MIXES A. Proportion lime slurry at rate of 2-1/2 to 3 lbs. of hydrated lime per gallon of water. Continuously agitate. B. Specific Gravity Range: 1.15 to 1.18 at 68°F. C. Add surfactant to mix at rate of one undiluted gallon per 3,500 gallons of slurry or as recommended by the manufacturer. 2.03 EQUIPMENT A. Mixers: 1. Slurry Tank: Capacity required for initial mixing of minimum load of bulk lime and equipped with mechanical agitators. 2. Secondary Tank: Equipped for continuous mechanical agitation. B. Injection: 1. Pumps: Shall be capable of pumping at least 3,000 GPH at 50 - 200 psi to supply continuous flow of slurry at specified pressures. 2. Pressure Gauges: Calibrated to show pressure in pounds per square inch. 3. Hoses: Capable of functioning within specified pressures with minimum inside diameter of 1-1/2"to supply four injection nozzles and 1" for two injection nozzles. 4. Injection Nozzles: Galvanized schedule 40 steel pipe, minimum diameter 5/8" with hole pattern that will uniformly disperse lime slurry in a 360° radial pattern throughout entire depth. 5. Injection Equipment: Mobile unit capable of forcing injection pipes into soil with minimum lateral movement. Unit shall be rubber tire or track machine suitable for the purpose intended. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that building sub-grade has been cut and filled to the required depth below bottom of finished slab prior to starting pressure injection. B. Inspect sub-grade for defects that would prevent proper application of lime injection. 3.02 INSTALLATION FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 32 23 - 2 MONTH XX, 20XX WATER AND LIME PRESSURE INJECTION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Perform pressure injection prior to installation of building pad select fill and prior to installation of footings,piers,beams and underground piping. B. Continuously agitate slurry during injection. Maintain same specific gravity at slurry mixer tank and injection nozzles. Contractor shall provide hydrometer or other suitable measuring tools to accurately verify slurry mixes. C. Adjust injection pressures to dispense as large a volume of lime slurry as possible within a range of 50 to 200 psi. D. Space injection holes at 5' o.c. maximum in each direction and extend a minimum of 5' beyond building limits. Allowance should be made for 2" to 4" of swelling as a result of the injection process. E. Force injector pipes downward, in approximately 12" increments, injecting to refusal at each interval, for a total depth of 10 feet, or to material that cannot be penetrated by two injection rods mechanically pushed into the soil by an injection machine weighing a minimum of five tons. F. The average moisture content of the stabilized soils shall be a minimum of one half the liquid limit after injection, and will be verified by sampling and testing to a depth of 10 feet. G. Inject at each interval to "refusal" (i.e., until the maximum quantity of slurry has been injected into the soil and slurry is running freely at the surface, from areas where the surface soils have fractured), or until a maximum of 7 pounds of hydrated lime per square foot of treated areas has been installed,whichever comes first. H. The quantity of lime injected shall be closely monitored on a daily basis by the lime slurry contractor foreman and the geotechnical inspector in an effort to achieve a uniform distribution throughout the treated area. The total tons of lime to be injected shall be determined as follows: 1. Verify from certified delivery tickets or from quicklime Slaking Batch Reports which calculate the weight of hydrate produced based on weight and purity of the quicklime slaked. 2. If the total tons injected is less than the specified amount, re-inject the deficient amount of lime uniformly over the entire treated area or around the perimeter of the treated area starting on the uphill side. 3. The second pass of lime can be perfonned immediately after the first pass of lime, however,24 hours should lapse between the beginning of the water injection pass. I.Following completion of the lime injection work specified above, the entire building area and five feet outside the building limits shall be injected with water and surfactant in the same manner and to the same total depth as specified for the lime injection. J.Injections shall be made in approximately 12" - 18" intervals from the surface down to the specified depth, injecting to refusal at each interval. The total number of water injection passes and amount of water required will be determined by the soils engineer upon completion of laboratory testing. K. A minimum of 24 hours should be allowed between all injection passes and between the beginning of any additional testing. L. After waiting a minimum of 24 hours,the building pad area will be injected additional times. The injection holes on additional passes shall be orthogonally offset 2.5 feet from the previous injection pass. M. After treatment, mix free lime on surface into soil, then re-compact surface to a minimum of 95% of standard Proctor density at or above optimum moisture content as determined by ASTM D698. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 32 23 - 3 MONTH XX, 20XX WATER AND LIME PRESSURE INJECTION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 N. Continuous inspection of the injection procedures by a representative of the testing laboratory is required. END OF SECTION 31 32 23 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 31 3223 - 4 MONTH XX, 20XX WATER AND LIME PRESSURE INJECTION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 316329 - DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS AND SHAFTS 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Dry-installed drilled piers. 2. Slurry displacement-installed drilled piers. 3. Dry-installed or slurry displacement-installed drilled piers at Contractors choice. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product. B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture.Submit alternative design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather,test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments. 1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. C. Shop Drawings: For concrete reinforcement, detailing fabricating, bending, supporting, and placing. D. Material Certificates: From manufacturer,for the following: 1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Steel reinforcement and accessories. E. Material Test Reports: For each material below, by a qualified testing agency: 1. Aggregates: Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity. F. Field quality-control reports. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer that has specialized in drilled-pier work. B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1077, ASTM D 3740, and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated. C. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following: 1. AWS D1.1/D1.1 M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.4/D1.4M, "Structural Welding Code - Reinforcing Steel." FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 31 63 29 - 1 MAY, 2, 2023 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS &SHAFTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1.05 TRIAL DRILLED PIER A. Trial Drilled Pier: Construct trial drilled pier of diameter and depth and at location indicated or, if not indicated, of same diameter and depth as largest drilled piers, located at least three diameters clear of permanent drilled piers, to demonstrate Installer's construction methods, equipment, standards of workmanship, and tolerances. 1. Install reinforcement,fill with concrete,remove temporary casings,and terminate trial drilled pier 24 inches (600 mirm) below subgrade and leave in place. 2. Install permanent casings,excavate bell,excavate rock socket,and place slurry,as required for permanent drilled piers. 3. If Architect determines that trial drilled pier does not comply with requirements, excavate for and cast another until it is accepted. 1.06 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Existing Utilities: Locate existing underground utilities before excavating drilled piers. If utilities are to remain in place, provide protection from damage during drilled-pier operations. 1. Should uncharted or incorrectly charted piping or other utilities be encountered during excavation,adapt drilling procedure if necessary to prevent damage to utilities.Cooperate with Owner and utility companies in keeping services and facilities in operation without interruption. Repair damaged utilities to satisfaction of utility owner. B. Interruption of Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt any utility to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Owner no fewer than two days in advance of proposed interruption of utility. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of utility without Owner's written permission. C. Project-Site Information:A geotechnical report has been prepared for this Project and is available for information only. The opinions expressed in this report are those of geotechnical engineer and represent interpretations of subsoil conditions, tests, and results of analyses conducted by geotechnical engineer. Owner is not responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn from this data. 1. Make additional test borings and conduct other exploratory operations necessary for drilled piers. 2. The geotechnical report is referenced elsewhere in the Project Manual. D. Survey Work: Engage a qualified land surveyor or professional engineer to perform surveys, layouts, and measurements for drilled piers. Before excavating, lay out each drilled pier to lines and levels required. Record actual measurements of each drilled pier's location, shaft diameter, bottom and top elevations, deviations from specified tolerances, and other specified data. 1. Record and maintain information pertinent to each drilled pier and indicate on record Drawings. Cooperate with Owner's testing and inspecting agency to provide data for required reports. PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Drilled-Pier Standard: Comply with ACI 336.1 except as modified in this Section. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 31 63 29 - 2 MAY, 2, 2023 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS &SHAFTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2.02 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Girade 420), deformed. B. Low-Alloy-Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 706/A 706M, deformed. C. Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Bars: deformed bars, ASTM A 775/A 775M, epoxy coated, with less than 2 percent damaged coating in each 12-inch (300 mien) bar length. D. Joint Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Girade 420), plain. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs. 2.03 CONCRETE MATERIALS A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source, throughout Project: 1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150/C 150M,Type I. Supplement with the following: a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618. B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33/C 33M, graded, 3/4-inch- (119 mirn ) nominal maximum coarse-aggregate size. Provide aggregate from a single source. 1. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement. C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable. D. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that do not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride. 1. Water-Reducing Admixture:ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type A. 2. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 3. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M,Type G. 4. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II. E. Sand-Cement Grout: Portland cement, ASTM C 150/C 150M, Type II; clean natural sand, ASTM C 404; and water to result in grout with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 1000 psi (6.9 MPa), of consistency required for application. 2.04 STEEL CASINGS A. Steel Pipe Casings: ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C, or ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plate, with joints full-penetration welded according to AWS D1.1/D1.1 M. B. Corrugated-Steel Pipe Casings: ASTM A 929/A 929M,steel sheet,zinc coated. C. Liners: Comply with ACI 336.1. 2.05 CONCRETE MIXTURES A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data,or both, according to ACI 301 (ACII 3011 M). B. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight,of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 (A(DI 30.1 M) limits as if concrete were exposed to deicing chemicals. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 31 63 29 - 3 MAY, 2, 2023 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS &SHAFTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Limit water-soluble,chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.15 percent by weight of cement. D. Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows: 1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3500 psi (24.1 MY"a). 2. Minimum Slump: Capable of maintaining the following slump until completion of placement: a. 4 inches (I 00 irnrn) for dry, uncased, or permanent-cased drilling method. b. 6 inches (I 50 irnirxn) for temporary-casing drilling method. C. 7 inches (I7.5 rnirn) for slurry displacement method. 3. Air Content: Do not air entrain concrete. 2.06 REINFORCEMENT FABRICATION A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice." 2.07 CONCRETE MIXING A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information. 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. PART 3- EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, vibration, and other hazards created by drilled-pier operations. 3.02 EXCAVATION A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to bearing elevations regardless of character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. 1. Obstructions: Unclassified excavation may include removal of unanticipated boulders, concrete, masonry, or other subsurface obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time are authorized for removal of obstructions. 2. Obstructions: Unclassified excavated materials may include removal of unanticipated boulders, concrete, masonry, or other subsurface obstructions. Payment for removing obstructions that cannot be removed by conventional augers fitted with soil or rock teeth, drilling buckets,or underreaming tools attached to drilling equipment of size,power,torque, and downthrust necessary for the Work is according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. B. Classified Excavation: Excavation is classified as standard excavation, special excavation, and obstruction removal and includes excavation to bearing elevations as follows: 1. Standard excavation includes excavation accomplished with conventional augers fitted with soil or rock teeth, drilling buckets, or underreaming tools attached to drilling equipment of size, power,torque, and downthrust necessary for the Work. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 31 63 29 - 4 MAY, 2, 2023 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS &SHAFTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Special excavation includes excavation that requires special equipment or procedures where drilled-pier excavation equipment used in standard excavation, operating at maximum power,torque, and downthrust,cannot advance the shaft. a. Special excavation requires use of special rock augers, core barrels, air tools, blasting, or other methods of hand excavation. b. Earth seams, rock fragments, and voids included in rock excavation area are considered rock for full volume of shaft from initial contact with rock. 3. Obstructions: Payment for removing unanticipated boulders, concrete, masonry, or other subsurface obstructions that cannot be removed by conventional augers fitted with soil or rock teeth, drilling buckets, or underreaming tools attached to drilling equipment of size, power, torque, and downthrust necessary for the Work is according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. C. Prevent surface water from entering excavated shafts. Conduct water to site drainage facilities. D. Excavate shafts for drilled piers to indicated elevations. Remove loose material from bottom of excavation. 1. Excavate bottom of drilled piers to level plane within 1:12 tolerance. 2. Remove water from excavated shafts before concreting. 3. Excavate rock sockets of dimensions indicated. 4. Cut series of grooves about perimeter of shaft to height from bottom of shaft, vertical spacing, and dimensions indicated. E. Notify and allow testing and inspecting agency to test and inspect bottom of excavation. If unsuitable bearing stratum is encountered, make adjustments to drilled piers as determined by Architect. 1. Do not excavate shafts deeper than elevations indicated unless approved by Architect. 2. Payment for additional authorized excavation is according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. F. End-Bearing Drilled Piers: Probe with auger to a depth below bearing elevation,equal to diameter of the bearing area of drilled pier. Determine whether voids,clay seams,or solution channels exist. 1. Test first three drilled piers and one of every six drilled piers thereafter. 2. Fill augur-probe holes with grout. G. End-Bearing Drilled Piers: Probe with auger to a depth of 96 inches (2450 irnirn) below bottom elevation of shaft, and visually inspect and classify soil. Verify continuity and thickness of strata. 1. Test first three drilled piers and one of every six drilled piers thereafter. H. Excavate shafts for closely spaced drilled piers and for drilled piers occurring in fragile or sand strata only after adjacent drilled piers are filled with concrete and allowed to set. I. Slurry Displacement Method: Stabilize excavation with slurry maintained a minimum of 60 inches (11500 irnirn) above ground-water level and above unstable soil strata to prevent caving or sloughing of shaft. Maintain slurry properties before concreting. 1. Excavate and complete concreting of drilled pier on same day, or redrill, clean, and test slurry in excavation before concreting. J. Temporary Casings: Install watertight steel casings of sufficient length and thickness to prevent water seepage into shaft; to withstand compressive, displacement, and withdrawal stresses; and to maintain stability of shaft walls. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 31 63 29 - 5 MAY, 2, 2023 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS &SHAFTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Remove temporary casings, maintained in plumb position, during concrete placement and before initial set of concrete, or leave temporary casings in place. K. Bells:Excavate bells for drilled piers to shape,base thickness,and slope angle indicated. Excavate bottom of bells to level plane and remove loose material before placing concrete. 1. Shore bells in unstable soil conditions to prevent cave-in during excavation, inspection, and concreting. L. Tolerances: Construct drilled piers to remain within ACI 336.1 tolerances. 1. If location or out-of-plumb tolerances are exceeded, provide corrective construction. Submit corrective construction proposals to Architect for review before proceeding. 3.03 PERMANENT STEEL CASING INSTALLATION A. Install permanent steel casings of minimum wall thickness indicated and of diameter not less than diameter of drilled pier. 1. Install casings as excavation proceeds,to maintain sidewall stability. 2. Fabricate bottom edge of lowest casing section with cutting shoe capable of penetrating rock and achieving water seal. 3. Connect casing sections by continuous penetration welds to form watertight, continuous casing. 4. Remove and replace or repair casings that have been damaged during installation and that could impair strength or efficiency of drilled pier. 5. Fill annular void between casing and shaft wall with grout. B. Corrugated-Steel Casings: Provide corrugated-steel casings formed from zinc-coated steel sheet. 1. Corrugated casings may be delivered in sections or panels of convenient length and field connected according to manufacturer's written instructions. 3.04 STEEL REINFORCEMENT INSTALLATION A. Comply with recommendations in CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement. B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale,earth,and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete. C. Fabricate and install reinforcing cages symmetrically about axis of shafts in a single unit. D. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement during concreting. Maintain minimum cover over reinforcement. E. Use templates to set anchor bolts, leveling plates, and other accessories furnished in work of other Sections. Provide blocking and holding devices to maintain required position during final concrete placement. F. Protect exposed ends of extended reinforcement, dowels, or anchor bolts from mechanical damage and exposure to weather. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 31 63 29 - 6 MAY, 2, 2023 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS &SHAFTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.05 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. Place concrete in continuous operation and without segregation immediately after inspection and approval of shaft by either a qualified Special Inspector or testing agency. 1. Construct a construction joint if concrete placement is delayed more than one hour. Level top surface of concrete and insert joint dowel bars. Before placing remainder of concrete,clean surface laitance, roughen, and slush concrete with commercial bonding agent or with sand- cement grout mixed at ratio of 1:1. B. Dry Method: Place concrete to fall vertically down the center of drilled pier without striking sides of shaft or steel reinforcement. 1. Where concrete cannot be directed down shaft without striking reinforcement, place concrete with chutes, tremies, or pumps. 2. Vibrate top 60 inches (1 500 rnnn) of concrete. C. Slurry Displacement Method: Place concrete in slurry-filled shafts by tremie methods or pumping. Control placement operations to ensure that tremie or pump pipe is embedded no less than 60 inches(1500 irnirrrn) into concrete and that flow of concrete is continuous from bottom to top of drilled pier. D. Coordinate withdrawal of temporary casings with concrete placement to maintain at least a 60- inch (1 500 mirn) head of concrete above bottom of casing. 1. Vibrate top 60 inches (1.500 mirmn) of concrete after withdrawal of temporary casing. E. Screed concrete at cutoff elevation level and apply scoured, rough finish. Where cutoff elevation is above the ground elevation, form top section above grade and extend shaft to required elevation. F. Protect concrete work,according to ACI 301 (ACI 301 M),from frost,freezing,or low temperatures that could cause physical damage or reduced strength. 1. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other mineral-containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators. G. If hot-weather conditions exist that would seriously impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete according to ACI 301 (A0 301 M) to maintain delivered temperature of concrete at no more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). 1. Place concrete immediately on delivery. Keep exposed concrete surfaces and formed shaft extensions moist by fog sprays,wet burlap,or other effective means for a minimum of seven days. 3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections. B. Drilled-Pier Tests and Inspections: For each drilled pier, before concrete placement. 1. Soil Testing: Bottom elevations, bearing capacities, and lengths of drilled piers indicated have been estimated from available soil data. Actual elevations and drilled-pier lengths and bearing capacities are determined by testing and inspecting agency. Final evaluations and approval of data are determined by Architect. C. Concrete Tests and Inspections: ASTM C 172/C 172M except modified for slump to comply with ASTM C 94/C 94M. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 31 63 29 - 7 MAY, 2, 2023 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS &SHAFTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Slump:ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each compressive-strength test but no fewer than one test for each concrete load. 2. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4A deg C) and below and 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each set of compressive-strength specimens. 3. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31 M; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test unless otherwise indicated. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens unless field-cured test specimens are required. 4. Compressive-Strength Tests:ASTM C 39/C 39M; one set for each drilled pier but not more than one set for each truck load. Test one specimen at seven days,test two specimens at 28 days, and retain one specimen in reserve for later testing if required. 5. If frequency of testing provides fewer than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct tests from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used. 6. If strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete. 7. Strength of each concrete mixture is satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (14 MPa). 8. Report test results in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. List Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work,design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests in reports of compressive-strength tests. 9. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete. 10. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency to make additional tests of concrete if test results indicate that slump, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. a. Continuous coring of drilled piers may be required, at Contractor's expense, if temporary casings have not been withdrawn within specified time limits or if observations of placement operations indicate deficient concrete quality,presence of voids, segregation,or other possible defects. 11. Perform additional testing and inspecting,at Contractor's expense,to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements. 12. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate do not comply with the Contract Documents. D. An excavation,concrete, or a drilled pier will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections. E. Prepare test and inspection reports for each drilled pier as follows: 1. Actual top and bottom elevations. 2. Actual drilled-pier diameter at top, bottom, and bell. 3. Top of rock elevation. 4. Description of soil materials. 5. Description, location, and dimensions of obstructions. 6. Final top centerline location and deviations from requirements. 7. Variation of shaft from plumb. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 31 63 29 - 8 MAY, 2, 2023 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS &SHAFTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 8. Shaft excavating method. 9. Design and tested bearing capacity of bottom. 10. Depth of rock socket. 11. Levelness of bottom and adequacy of cleanout. 12. Properties of slurry and slurry test results at time of slurry placement and at time of concrete placement. 13. Ground-water conditions and water-infiltration rate, depth, and pumping. 14. Description, purpose, length,wall thickness,diameter,tip,and top and bottom elevations of temporary or permanent casings. Include anchorage and sealing methods used and condition and weather tightness of splices if any. 15. Description of soil or water movement, sidewall stability, loss of ground, and means of control. 16. Bell dimensions and variations from original design. 17. Date and time of starting and completing excavation. 18. Inspection report. 19. Condition of reinforcing steel and splices. 20. Position of reinforcing steel. 21. Concrete placing method, including elevation of consolidation and delays. 22. Elevation of concrete during removal of casings. 23. Locations of construction joints. 24. Concrete volume. 25. Concrete testing results. 26. Remarks, unusual conditions encountered, and deviations from requirements. 3.07 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owners property. END OF SECTION 316329 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT#21085 31 63 29 - 9 MAY, 2, 2023 DRILLED CONCRETE PIERS &SHAFTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 32 11 33.13 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary to construct the Portland cement concrete pavement required to complete the project. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE A. Concrete shall be specified in Subsection 03 30 02 "Normal Weight Aggregate Concrete", Class A (4400 psi @ 28 days), with the following exceptions. The slump range shall be maintained between 1" and 3". Air entrainment shall be 5% by volume and be maintained between 6% max. and 4%minimum. 2.02 REINFORCING STEEL AND DOWEL BARS A. Reinforcing steel shall be as specified in Section 03 20 01 "Concrete Reinforcement". 2.03 LOAD TRANSISSION DEVICES A. Smooth steel bar dowels,ASTM A615, Grade 40. The free end of the dowel bars shall be free of shearing burrs. The free end of each dowel bar shall be encased in an approved cap having an inside diameter of 1/16 inch greater than the diameter of the bar. The end of the cap shall be void to permit free movement of the bar for a distance of 150 percent of the width of the expansion joint used. 2.04 EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL A. Expansion joint material shall be 3/4 inch thick fiberboard or asphalt impregnated preformed filler conforming to the requirements of AASHTO M33 or M213; ASTM D994 or D1751 as specified, and shall be punched to admit dowels where called for in the plans. The filler for each joint shall be furnished in a single piece for the full depth and width required for the joint unless otherwise authorized by the engineer. When the use of more than one piece is authorized for a joint, the abutting ends shall be fastened securely and held accurately to shape by stapling or other positive fastening satisfactory to the engineer. 2.05 EXPANSION JOINT SEALING MATERIAL (New Concrete to New Concrete) A. Expansion joint seal shall be a continuous flexible, modified PVC cap seal, G-Seal #605 as manufactured by Greenstreak or equivalent. Cap seal is attached to the top of the expansion board. 2.06 EXPANSION JOINT SEALING MATERIAL (New Concrete to Existing Concrete) A. Where new concrete is poured against existing concrete, expansion joint material shall be mounted against existing and this joint sealed with polyurethane joint sealant. Joint sealant shall be Bostik FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 32 11 33 .13 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 950, or approved equal, polyurethane joint sealant and shall meet the requirements of ASTM C920-87, Type S or M, Grade P, Class 25 Uses T, M. A and O. Where grade is greater than a 3% slope,use Bostik 900 sealant. 2.07 CONTRACTION JOINT SEALING MATERIAL A. Contraction joint sealant shall be Bostik 950, or approved equal, polyurethane joint sealant and shall meet the requirements of ASTM C920-87, Type S or M, Grade P, Class 25 Uses T, M. A and O. Where grade is greater than a 3% slope,use Bostik 900 sealant. 2.08 EQUIPMENT A. Equipment shall conform to Item 360.4 'Equipment", of the Standard Specification for Construction of Highways, Streets and Bridges, 1993 Edition; of the Texas Department of Transportation. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION A. Excavation and Subgrade Preparation shall be as specified on the drawings, Section 32 11 13 and Section 31 20 00. The bottom of the excavation or top of the fill shall be known as the pavement subgrade and shall conform to the line, grade, and cross sections shown in the plans. All soft and yielding material and portions of the subgrade that will not compact readily when rolled or tamped shall be removed and replaced with suitable material. The subgrade shall be brought to a firm and unyielding condition by compacting it to density as specified at or slightly above standard optimum moisture. All utility trenches and structure excavations shall be backfilled to natural or finished grade with soils like those surrounding the trench as soon as conditions permit. All backfill shall be compacted with mechanical tampers in layers of not over 6 inches in compacted thickness. Concrete shall not be placed on a soft, spongy, frozen or otherwise unsuitable subgrade. The subgrade shall be moist when the concrete is placed. Before placing concrete, the subgrade shall be tested for conformity with the plan section per Subsection 32 12 33 of the specifications entitled "Flexible Base". If necessary, material shall be removed per Texas Highway Department Specification (1982) Item 360.5. If additional material is to be added, the subgrade shall be scarified, reshaped, recompacted and tested again to ensure that optimum moisture and density are obtained. The surface of the subgrade shall be kept wet at all times after testing and before placement of the concrete paving. 3.02 FORMS A. Form work shall be as specified in Section 03 10 01 "Concrete Formwork". The following additional data shall apply to concrete street construction. 1. General: Forms shall be of such cross section and strength and so secured as to resist the pressure of the concrete when placed and the impact and vibration of any equipment they support, without springing or settlement. The method of connection between sections shall be such that the joints shall not move in any direction. The maximum deviation of the top surface shall not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 ft. or the inside face not more than 1/4 inch in 10 ft. from a straight line. Flexible or curved forms of proper radius shall be used for curves of 100 ft. radius or less. FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 32 11 33 .13 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Setting Forms: The subgrade under the forms shall be compacted and cut to grade so that the form when set will be uniformly supported for its entire length at the specified elevation. All forms shall be cleaned and oiled each time they are used. 3. Grade and Alignment: The Contractor shall check and correct alignment and grade elevations of the forms immediately before placing the concrete. When any form has been disturbed or any grade has become unstable,the form shall be reset and rechecked. 4. Curbs and Gutters as Forms: In lieu of setting forms,the edge of a previously placed concrete gutter section may be used as a form. 3.03 REINFORCING STEEL A. Reinforcing Steel, load transfer devices, longitudinal joint dowels, and curb reinforcement shall be located and accomplished in accordance with the drawings. When not shown on the drawings, provide expansion joint at changes of direction and at a maximum 40 feet spacing. Concrete reinforcement shall be further specified in Section 03 20 01 "Concrete Reinforcement". 3.04 CONCRETE MIXING AND PLACING A. Concrete mixing shall be specified in Subsection 03 30 02 "Normal Weight Aggregate Concrete". Concrete placement shall be governed by Texas Highway Department of Transportation Specification(1993)Item 360.8 - Construction Joints. 3.05 SPREADING AND FINISHING A. Texas Highway Department of Transportation Specification(1993)Item 360.10 shall govern. 3.06 JOINTS A. General: Contraction joints, expansion joints, and all longitudinal joints shall be placed as indicated in the plans. Transverse joints shall extend continuously through the pavement and curb. B. Transverse Contraction Joints: Transverse contraction joints shall consist of planes of weakness created by forming or cutting grooves in the surface of the pavement. They shall be equal to at least 1/4 the depth of the slab. 1. Transverse slip contraction joints shall be formed by installing a parting strip to be left in place. 2. Formed grooves shall be made by depressing an approved tool or device into the plastic concrete. The tool or device shall remain in place until the concrete has attained its initial set and shall then be removed without disturbing adjacent concrete. 3. Sawed contraction joints shall be created by sawing grooves in the surface of the pavement with an approved concrete saw. After each joint is sawed, the saw cut and adjacent concrete surface shall be thoroughly cleaned. Sawing of the joints shall begin as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit sawing without excessive raveling, usually 4 to 16 hours. All joints shall be sawed before uncontrolled shrinkage cracking occurs, but in no case in excess of 16 hours. If necessary, the sawing operations shall be carried on both day and night, regardless of weather conditions. A standby saw shall be available in FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 32 11 33 .13 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 the event of breakdown. The sawing of any joint shall be omitted if a crack occurs at or near the joint location before the time of sawing. Sawing shall be discontinued if a crack develops ahead of the saw. In general, all joints shall be sawed in sequence. All contraction joints in lanes adjacent to previously constructed lanes shall be sawed before uncontrolled cracking occurs. If extreme conditions make it impracticable to prevent erratic cracking by early sawing, the contraction joint groove shall be formed before initial set of concrete as provided above. 4. Transverse formed contraction joints shall consist of a groove or cleft extending downward from and normal to the surface of the pavement. These joints shall be made while the concrete is plastic by an approved mechanically or manually operated device to the dimensions indicated by the plans. C. Transverse Construction Joints: Transverse construction joints shall be placed whenever the placing of concrete is suspended for more than 30 minutes. A butt joint with dowels or a thickened edge joint shall be used if the joint occurs at the location of a contraction joint. Keyed joints with tiebars shall be used if the joint occurs at any other location. D. Transverse Expansion Joints: Transverse expansion joints shall consist of a vertical expansion joint filler placed in a butt-type joint with or without dowel bars as shown in the plans. The expansion joint filler shall be continuous from form to form. Preformed joint filler shall be furnished in lengths equal to the pavement width or equal to the width of one lane. Damaged or repaired joint filler shall not be used unless approved by the engineer. The expansion joint filler shall be held in a vertical position. An approved installing bar or other device shall be used if necessary to ensure proper grade and alignment during placing and finishing of the concrete. Finished joints shall not deviate in horizontal alignment more than 1/4 inch from a straight line. 1f joint fillers are assembled in sections, there shall be no offsets between adjacent units. No plugs of concrete shall be permitted anywhere within the expansion space. E. Longitudinal Joints: Longitudinal joints shall consist of planes of weakness created by forming or cutting grooves in the surface of the pavement. They shall be equal to at least one-quarter the depth of the slab plus 1/2 inch. 1. Sawed longitudinal joints shall be created by sawing grooves in the surface of the pavement with an approved concrete saw. After each joint is sawed, the saw cut and adjacent concrete surface shall be thoroughly cleaned. Sawing of the joints shall begin as soon as the concrete has hardened sufficiently to permit sawing without excessive raveling, usually 4 to 16 hours. All joints shall be sawed before uncontrolled shrinkage cracking occurs, but in no case in excess of 16 hours. If necessary, the sawing operations shall be carried on both day and night,regardless of weather conditions. 2. Longitudinal groove joints are formed in the same manner as transverse formed groove joints(Subparagraph d of these specifications) 3. Longitudinal strip joints are formed in the same manner as transverse strip joints (Subparagraph "B" of these specifications). 4. Longitudinal construction joints shall be of the dimensions shown in the plans. Where a key is required, it shall be constructed by forming when the first lane adjacent to the joint is placed. These j oints shall be finished with an edger of the radius shown in the plans. When FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 32 11 33 .13 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 placing the second slab, concrete must not be left overhanging the lip formed in the first slab by the edging tool. F. Sealing Joints: Joints to be sealed shall be filled with joint-sealing material before the pavement is opened to traffic and as soon after completion of the curing period as is feasible. Just before sealing, each joint shall be thoroughly cleaned of all foreign material, including membrane curing compound, and joint faces shall be clean and surface-dry when seal is applied. Material for seal applied hot shall be stirred during heating to prevent localized over- heating. The sealing material shall be applied to each joint opening in accordance with the details shown in the plans or as directed by the engineer. The joint filling shall be done without spilling material on the exposed surfaces of the concrete. Any excess material on the surface of the concrete pavement shall be removed immediately and the pavement surface cleaned. The use of sand or similar material to cover the seal shall not be permitted. Joint sealing material shall not be placed when the air temperature in the shade is less than 50 deg. F.,unless approved by the engineer. 3.07 CURING A. Texas Highway Department of Transportation Specification(1993) Item 360.11 shall govern. 3.08 REMOVING FORMS A. Forms shall be carefully removed so that the pavement and/ or concrete is not damaged. All honey combed areas shall be pointed up with approved mortar. Forms shall remain in place a minimum of 8 hours after the concrete has been placed. 3.09 DETERMINATION OF ACCEPTABLE PAVEMENT THICKNESS A. To determine that the finished pavement is in conformity with the thickness and typical sections shown on the drawings or specified herein, the pavement will be core drilled; one core shall be taken for each 2500 square yards of pavement. Drill sites shall be chosen that will well represent each particular 2500 square yard unit. When the measurement of the core from any unit is not deficient more than 1/2 inch from the plan thickness, full payment will be made. When the measurement of the core is deficient more than 1/2 inch, two additional cores shall be drilled. If the average pavement thickness deficiency of the three cores is determined to be greater than 1/2 inch from the plan thickness, the engineer shall evaluate the deficiency and if, in the judgment of the Engineer an area should be removed and replaced, it shall be done at the Contractor's entire expense. The Contractor shall grout closed all core drill holes immediately upon completion of the test. 3.10 PROTECTION OF PAVEMENT AND OPENING TO TRAFFIC A. Protection of Pavement: Barricades shall be placed to prohibit all traffic on newly placed pavement for a minimum of 14 days or as specified below. 3.11 OPENING TO TRAFFIC A. The engineer shall decide when the pavement shall be opened to traffic. It shall not be opened to traffic until the field-cured concrete has attained a flexural strength of 500 P.S.I., or a compressive strength of 3,000 PSI. If such tests are not conducted, the pavement shall not be opened to traffic until 14 days after concrete placement. Before opening to construction traffic, FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 32 11 33 .13 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 the pavement shall be cleaned, backfill shall be placed and compacted behind curbs and against the edge of pavement, and joints shall be sealed. END OF SECTION 32 11 33.13 FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 32 11 33 .13 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 PORTLAND CEMENT CONCRETE PAVEMENT DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 32 13 13 - CONCRETE PAVING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide concrete paving including broom finished paving and walks, curbs and gutters. Restore paved areas opened or damaged in performance of the work required by the Contract Documents. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Laboratory Testing." 2. Division 3 Section "Concrete Formwork." 3. Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." 4. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." 5. Division 31 Section "Earthwork." 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Division 1 Section- Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. B. Concrete Design: Contractor shall be responsible for and shall pay for design of concrete mixes. An independent testing laboratory shall detennine design mixes of each type concrete based on specified strengths and materials in accordance with ACI 318-89. Submit 4 copies of each design mix for approval. C. Division 01 Section- Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. 1. Product Data: Submit product data for the following: a. Joint filler. b. Joint sealant. c. Concrete admixtures. d. Concrete curing compounds. 2. Assurance/Control Submittals: a. Concrete Mix Design: Submit three copies of each proposed mix design for each class of concrete in accordance with ACI 301, Sections 3.9 "Proportioning on the basis of previous field experience or trial mixture", or 3.10 "Proportioning based on empirical data". Submit separate mix design for concrete to be placed by pumping, in addition to the mix design for concrete to be placed directly from the truck chute. b. Include the following information in concrete mix design: 1) Proportions of cement,fine and coarse aggregate, and water. 2) Water-cement ratio,28-day compressive design strength, slump, and air content. 3) Type of cement and aggregate. 4) Aggregate gradation. 5) Type and dosage of admixtures. 6) Special requirements for pumping. 7) Range of ambient temperature and humidity for which design is valid. 8) Special characteristics of mix which require precautions in mixing, placing, or finishing techniques to achieve finished product specified. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 32 13 13 - 1 MONTH XX, 20XX CONCRETE PAVING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Perform work in accordance with ACI 301. B. Conform to ACI 305R when mixing and placing concrete during hot weather. C. Conform to ACI 306R when mixing and placing concrete during cold weather. D. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Conform to applicable requirements for paving work on public property. 2. Contractor shall maintain access for vehicular and pedestrian traffic as required for other construction activities. Utilize temporary striping, flagmen, barricades, warning signs, and warning lights as required. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Notify responsible trades of schedules of concrete pours so as to allow adequate time for installation of their work. 1.06 STANDARDS A. American Society for Testing Materials(ASTM). B. American Concrete Institute ACI-617 "Standard Specifications for Concrete Pavement and Bases". ACI-396 "Manual of Standard Practice for Detailing Reinforced Concrete". PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Portland Cement: ASTM C-150-78a, Type 1 or 111. B. Fine Aggregate: Natural sand,ASTM C-33-78. C. Coarse Aggregate: Hard, durable natural gravel or crushed rock meeting requirements of ASTM C-33-78. Maximum size and gradation in accordance with Size No. 67 or 467 in Table 11 of ASTM C-33. D. Grading: ASTM C-136. E. Water: Potable. F. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, grade 60 or as noted on drawings. G. Dowels and Sleeves: 3/4" plain round bars, with plastic sleeve at one end, 24 inches long, allowing one inch of movement. Refer to drawings. H. Forms: Nominal 2"thickness dimension fir, or steel paving forms. LPremolded Expansion Joint Filler: ASTM D-994, asphaltic. J.Dispersing Admixture: Cement-dispersing, water reducing compound complying with ASTM C-494 such as Pozzolith 100 series, as made by Master Builders. K. Curing Compound at Standard Paving: ASTM C-309,No. 40W by A. C. Horn Co., Kure-N- Seal by Sonneborn or Clear Bond by Guardian Chemical. L. Air Entraining: ASTM C-0260 by Master Builders or equal. M. No fly ash will be permitted. N. Color admixture: At locations indicated on drawings provide integrally colored concrete. Admixture shall be "Chromix"by L.M. Scofold Co., color as selected by Architect. O. Curing Compound at integrally colored concrete: color matched curing compound compatible with integral coloring product. Curing compound shall be "Color Wax" by L.M. Scofold or approved equal, color as selected by Architect. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 32 13 13 - 2 MONTH XX, 20XX CONCRETE PAVING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2.02 PROPORTIONING AND MIXING A. Proportions and Design: Concrete shall produce a mixture of adequate workability, free from segregation,honeycombing and bleeding, and shall be of following types: 1. Schedule of Types of Concrete: Type Min. All. Comp. Max. Size of Type Strength(28 days) Cement%Air Aggregates 1 3500 psi Gray P 5% 1-1/2" 2. Locations of Types of Concrete: Broom finish all paving. Sidewalks shall be 4" thick and paving shall be 6" thick at parking and 7" thick where subject to truck traffic as noted on drawings. 3. Admixture: Add specified cement-dispersing agent, color admix (where specified) and air-entraining agent to concrete mixes. B. Mixing: Ready mixed concrete in accordance with ASTM C-94-67. C. Slump: Shall not exceed 5" or less than 3"per ASTM C-143. D. Air Entrainment: Air content by volume as per ASTM C231 shall be 5% to 7% based on measurements made in concrete mixtures at point of discharge at job site. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION AND PREPARATION A. Inspect subgrade and report any discrepancies to Architect before proceeding. 3.02 FORMWORK A. Build forms to lines and grades detailed, of sufficient strength and rigidity so they will not deflect under pressure of wet concrete. Exercise extreme care in layout,bracing, and aligning forms. Formwork shall be straight, with no bulges in completed work greater than 1/8" in 10 feet. 3.03 REINFORCING A. Place reinforcing steel as detailed and in accordance with ACI 318-89. Place wire mesh to provide one full mesh lap at sides, minimum 8" at ends. Lap bars 36 bar Diameters. Metal chairs shall be used to hold reinforcing steel in the proper plane. Place dowels and sleeves at expansion joints at 24" O.C. maximum. Refer to drawings. 3.04 PLACING A. Concrete: Convey and place concrete so there is no separation of ingredients in accordance with applicable requirements of Chapter 10 ACI Standard Specifications for Concrete Pavements and Concrete Bases (ACI 617-Current Edition). Do not place concrete when temperature is below 40 degrees F. No calcium chloride shall be added to the concrete. Do not place concrete which exceeds 95 degrees F., and add a retarder, if required,to all concrete which is between 90 and 95 degrees F. Ice shall be used to control the maximum temperature. B. Construction Joints: Stoppage of concrete placing shall occur at expansion joint or other detailed contraction joints. Construct bulkheads to permit continuation of reinforcing steel. C. Expansion Joints: Place 1/2" asphaltic expansion joint material where paving abuts existing paving, structure, walls or fixed objects. Place at every 60 feet each way in paving, every 30 LF in curbs and walks and at other locations detailed. Provide 1/2" wide expansion joint filler between curbs and concrete paving. Provide removable tacked-on strips to provide a recess for joint sealing compound. 3/4" Dowels, 24" long shall be placed at 24" O.C. through FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 32 13 13 - 3 MONTH XX, 20XX CONCRETE PAVING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 expansion joints, sleeved one side, at all expansion joints except where joint abuts building, unless noted otherwise. D. Saw-Cut Contraction Joints: Saw-cut joints when concrete is hard enough not to be torn, raveled, or damaged by saw cutting equipment and no later than 10 hours after concrete placement. Trial cuts shall be made prior to execution. Use a power drive concrete saw. Saw blades shall make a clean, smooth cut, producing a groove 1/8" to 1/4" wide to depth required(1/4 slab depth). Locate contraction joints nominally at 12'-0" O.C., unless specified otherwise on Drawings. All joints shall receive sealant. 3.05 FINISHING A. Materials exposed to view free of surface defects such as poor joints, ridges, cracks, honeycombing, excessive laitance, stone pockets or other defects. Materials that are defective and cannot be satisfactorily repaired, removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. B. Concrete cured by use of curing compound applied after surfaces take initial set after finishing. Use color matched curing system as recommended by manufactrer of integral color at colored concrete. C. General Paving and standard Sidewalks: Finish surface to gritty texture with stiff bristle push broom using straight continuous strokes. Finish all edges smooth with 1/8" to 1/4" radius. D. Ramps: Sawcut tactile warning surface to pattern indicated on drawings. Grooved shall be arranged so as to not hold water. E. Vibrate, screed and float concrete to level and test the surface, which shall not vary over 1/4" in 10'when tested with a ten foot straight edge. F. Finish all vertical surfaces in a manner that leaves the exposed surfaces free of honeycombing and form marks. Any damaged surfaces shall be repaired and stone rubbed to match adjacent finished surfaces. 3.06 CURING A. Apply a white-pigmented type curing compound at a uniform rate of approximately 200 SF/Gallon, or as recommended by curing compound manufacturer as soon as the finishing operation has been completed and the concrete has lost its water sheen. The curing procedure must protect the concrete, including all exposed surfaces against loss of moisture and rapid temperature change for a period of not less than four days from the beginning of the curing operations and without damage to, or marking of the finished concrete surface. Traffic shall not be allowed on finished concrete of a minimum period of seven days. B. At colored concrete apply color matched curing system as recommended by the manufacturer. 3.07 CLEANING A. Concrete approaches, sidewalks, and related work shall be hosed down with water, scrubbed with fiber brushes, allowed to dry and be left broom clean and in condition acceptable to the Owner. END OF SECTION 32 13 13 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 32 13 13 - 4 MONTH XX, 20XX CONCRETE PAVING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 32 16 00.10 - REMOVING AND REPLACING SIDEWALKS PART1 — GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary to complete the removing and replacing of sidewalks as required to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Art., TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. PART 2— PRODUCTS PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 ETHOD OF CUTTING A. Exhibit A depicts which areas and panels are to be cut. Exact location shall be determined in the field by the Engineer. The cut shall be made as nearly vertical as possible along the existing expansion joints. 3.02 REMOVING CONCRETE SIDEWALKS A. Once the cutting has been completed, each panel shall be removed for proper inspection and disposed of by the contractor. Hand dig 18"to locate and expose tie backs and filter fabric, if present. 3.03 INSPECTION A. The Contractor shall inspect the existing sheet piling, bulkhead cap joint, tie back components, and filter fabric below each panel or area exposed when applicable. The Contractor shall mark the area and notify the Engineer or Owner if any of these items require maintenance,repair, or replacement. 3.04 FILL ACTIVITY A. Once all maintenance issues have been addressed within the exposed area, the Contractor shall replace and or fill the void beneath the sidewalk with sand equal to or better than the in-situ material. 3.05 REPLACING CONCRETE SIDEWALKS A. Replace with 2500 P.S.I. concrete, 4" thick,reinforced with 4 x 4#646 wire mesh matching existing dimensions. Finish the replaced section the same as that appearing on old sidewalk. Use an epoxy bonding agent, in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations, when bonding new concrete to old concrete. END OF SECTION 02 41 00.10 FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 32 16 00.10— 1 MAY 2, 2023 REMOVING AND REPLACING SIDEWALK DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 32 16 13.20 CONCRETE BLOCK CURB PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary to provide the concrete block curb required to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Art. TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. PART2 PRODUCT 2.01 REINFORCING STEEL AND DOWEL BARS A. Billet steel,ASTM A615 Grade 40. Provide location and quantities shown on the drawings. 2.02 CONCRETE A. Concrete shall be specified in Subsection 03 11 13 "Concrete Structures" and Subsection 03 30 02 "Normal Weight Aggregate Concrete," Class B -2500 PSI @ 28 days. 2.03 EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL A. Expansion joint material shall be redwood material. Redwood expansion joint material shall be 3/4",preshaped to the block curb dimensions and spaced to coincide with expansion joints in the concrete paving. The material shall be free of knots and splits and shall be fabricated with not more than two (2) separate pieces of material. 2.04 CURING COMPOUND A. Resin Base ASTM C309 Type 1,with light red tint of fugitive dye. 2.05 MORTAR TOPPING A. Cement: ASTM C-150, Type 1. B. Water: ASTM C-94. Potable water need not be tested. C. Sand: ASTM C-33 D. Mix: 1 part cement and 2 parts sand PART 3— EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION A. Excavation, preparation of subgrade and backfill shall be in conformance with the section of these specifications entitled"Street Excavation and Backfill". 3.02 SUBGRADE A. The subgrade under the block curb shall be prepared to the same specification as the concrete paving. When a density is not shown on the drawings, compaction shall be 95% Standard Proctor Density(AASHO T-99). 3.03 FORMS A. The forms shall be straight, durable and have a depth equal to the required concrete depth. The forms shall be securely staked to line and grade in such a manner that there shall be no movement when the concrete is placed. The subgrade shall be free of loose material and wet down before placing concrete. Concrete shall not be placed until forms have been approved by the Engineer. FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 32 16 13.20 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 CONCRETE BLOCK CURB DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.04 REINFORCING STEEL A. Reinforcing steel, expansion joints with dowels, load transfer devices and transverse marking shall be located and accomplished in accordance with the drawings. 3.05 CONCRETE PLACMENT A. The concrete shall be placed in such a manner so that segregation does not occur. 3.06 SHAPING A. The block curb shall be shaped to exactly match the plans. 3.07 MORTAR TOPPING A. The mortar topping shall be placed no longer than one hour after the initial set of the concrete. The mortar topping shall be smoothed with an approved "mule", all joints and edges shall be tooled,then the topping shall be lightly broomed with a hair broom. 3.08 CURING A. Immediately after the brooming has been completed, curing compound shall be evenly applied. The quantity applied shall be as directed by the Engineer. 3.09 REMOVAL OF FORMS A. Back forms shall be left in place for at least 24 hours. All honey comb shall be plastered before backfilling is accomplished. 3.10 BACKFILLING A. The block curb shall be carefully backfilled with material taken from the excavation. All excess material shall be hauled off the site by the Contractor unless directions to the contrary are shown on the plans. The area adjacent to the curb shall be uniformly graded to provide positive drainage towards the pavement. END OF SECTION 32 16 13.20 FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 32 16 13.20 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 CONCRETE BLOCK CURB DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 32 16 23 CONCRETE SIDEWALK AND CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary to provide the concrete sidewalk and/or concrete driveways required to complete the project. This specification is a Performance specification as defined in Art. TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 STEEL REINFORCING AND DOWEL BARS A. Billet Steel,ASTM A615 Grade 60. 1. Steel reinforcing: Provide 4" x 4" - W2.9 x W2.9 welded wire fabric or as shown on drawings. 2. Dowels: Provide 1/2" diameter smooth bars as follows: Width of Walk No. of Dowels Width of Drive No. of Dowels per Joint per Joint 2 ft. 2 8 ft. 6 3 ft. 2 10 ft. 7 4 ft. 3 12 ft. 8 5 ft. 4 16 ft. 11 6 ft. 5 18 ft. 12 20 ft. 13 24 t. 16 2.02 CONCRETE A. Concrete shall be Class A, 3000 PSI @ 28 days as specified in Subsection 03 30 02 Normal Weight Aggregate Concrete. 2.03EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL A. Expansion joint material shall be 3/4" wood fiber asphalt-impregnated expansion board. 2.03 PAVING CAP SEAL A. Paving cap seal shall be Greenstreak #610 or approved equal stapled or nailed to expansion board. 2.04 CURING COMPOUND A. Resin base ASTM C309 Type I,with light red tint of fugitive dye. FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 32 16 23 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 CONCRETE SIDEWALK AND CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION A. Excavation shall include all classes of material,including old concrete. 3.02 SUBGRADE A. Subgrade under the sidewalk and/or driveway shall be thoroughly compacted and shall be true to line and grade. The subgrade shall be free from soft spots and loose material. Compaction under concrete driveways shall be 95% Standard Proctor Density (ASTM D-698) unless shown otherwise on the drawings. 3.03 FORMS A. Forms shall be straight, durable and have a depth equal to the required concrete depth (Commercial size lumber may be used provided full depth of concrete is obtained). The forms shall be securely staked to line and grade in such a manner that there shall be no movement when the concrete is placed. The subgrade shall be wet down before placing concrete. The forms shall be cleaned and oiled before placing concrete. Concrete shall not be placed until forms have been approved by the Engineer. 3.04 REINFORCING STEEL A. Wire mesh shall be supported to insure that it is covered with a minimum of 1-1/2" of concrete. 3.05 EXPANSION JOINTS AND TRANSVERSE MARKINGS A. Expansion joints and transverse markings shall be square with the sidewalk and/or concrete driveway. Expansion joints with dowels and transverse marking shall be located and accomplished in accordance with the drawings. When not shown on the drawings, provide doweled expansion joints at changes of direction and at maximum 40 feet spacing and provide transverse markings (1/8 inch wide and 1/2 inch minimum depth) at maximum 10 feet spacing. 3.06 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. The concrete shall be placed in such a manner so that segregation does not occur. The concrete shall be thoroughly tamped with a"jitterbug" or other approved tool. 3.07 JOINTING AND TOOLING A. All joints and edges shall be tooled and the finished surface shall be lightly broomed(with a hair broom)to provide a non-skid surface. When directed by the Engineer, the Contractor shall apply an approved sand-cement mixture to the surface just before the final floating and troweling. 3.08 CURING A. Immediately after the brooming has been completed, curing compound shall be evenly applied. The quantity applied shall be as directed by the Engineer. FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 32 16 23 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 CONCRETE SIDEWALK AND CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.9 REMOVING FORMS A. Forms shall be carefully removed so that the sidewalk and/or concrete driveway is not damaged. All "honey comb" shall be plastered before backfilling is accomplished. 3.10 JOINING NEW AND OLD CONCRETE A. When joining new and old concrete, the old concrete shall be cut with a concrete saw for a depth of 1/2", then the remaining depth shall be neatly broke using an approved method, then the exposed edges shall be thoroughly cleaned and then painted with an epoxy bonding agent before placing the new concrete. The epoxy bonding agent shall be applied in strict conformance with manufacturer's recommendations. When expansion joints are provided utilize 3/4" wood fiber expansion board and Greenstreak #628 paving cap seal at interface with existing and new concrete. 3.11 BACKFILLING A. The concrete sidewalk and/or driveway shall be carefully backfilled with material taken from the excavation. The Contractor shall neatly spread all excess material as directed by the Engineer. The area adjacent to the sidewalk and/or driveway shall be uniformly graded to provide positive drainage towards the street. END OF SECTION 32 16 23 FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 32 16 23 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 CONCRETE SIDEWALK AND CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 32 16 33 CONCRETE DRIVEWAY PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary to provide the concrete driveway required to complete the project. This specification is a Performance specification as defined in,Art. TS-1 of the Technical Special Provision. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 REINFORCING STEEL A. Reinforcing bars shall be deformed as defined in ASTM Specifications. Reinforcing bars shall be Grade 40 as defined by the American Society for Testing and Materials. "Specifications for Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement" (A615 A616 or A617). 2.02 WELDED WIRE REINFORCING A. Welded wire reinforcing shall be 6" x 6"-#6 x 6# smooth wire fabric and shall conform to ASTM A185 "Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement". 2.03 STEEL DOWEL BARS A. Dowel bars shall be Billet Steel, ASTM A615 Grade 40 and shall be in accordance with the following schedule: No. of Dowels No. of Dowels Width of Drive Per Joint Width of Drive Per Joint 8 ft........................ 6 16 ft........................ 11 10 ft......................... 7 18 ft. ...................... 12 12 ft......................... 8 20 ft. ...................... 13 14 ft......................... 9 24 ft. ...................... 16 2.04 CONCRETE A. Concrete shall be six inches thick and have a minimum compressive strength of 2500 PSI @ 28 days. 2.05 EXPANSION JOINT MATERIAL A. Expansion joint material shall be straight and sound Redwood without holes or splits. 2.06 CURING COMPOUND A. Resin base ASTM C309 Type I,with light red tint of fugitive dye. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 32 16 33 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 CONCRETE DRIVEWAY DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Excavation shall include all classes of material,including old concrete. 3.02 SUBGRADE A. Subgrade under driveway shall be and shall be true to line and grade and shall be free from soft spots and loose material. Subgrade under driveway shall be thoroughly compacted to 95% Standard Proctor Density(ASTM D-698). 3.03 FORMS A. Forms shall be straight, durable and have a depth equal to the required concrete depth (Commercial size lumber may be used provided full depth of concrete is obtained). The forms shall be securely staked to line and grade in such a manner that there shall be no movement when the concrete is placed. The subgrade shall be wet down before placing concrete. The forms shall be cleaned and oiled before placing concrete. Concrete shall not be placed until forms have been approved by the Engineer. 3.04 WIRE MESH AND REINFORCING STEEL A. Wire mesh and reinforcing steel shall be properly supported to provide a minimum of 2" of cover at all locations. 3.05 EXPANSION JOINTS AND TRANSVERSE MARKINGS A. Expansion joints and transverse markings shall be square with the concrete driveway. Expansion joints with dowels and transverse marking shall be located and accomplished in accordance with the drawings. When not shown on the drawings,provide doweled expansion joints at changes of direction and at maximum 40 feet spacing and provide transverse markings (1/8 inch wide and 1/2 inch minimum depth) at maximum 10 feet spacing. 3.06 CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISH A. The concrete shall be placed in such a manner so that segregation does not occur. The concrete shall be thoroughly tamped with a "jitterbug", screeded, floated, steel troweled and then lightly broomed(with a hair broom) to provide a nonskid surface. 3.07 JOINING AND TOOLING A. All joints and edges shall be tooled and the finished surface. 3.08 CURING A. Immediately after the brooming has been completed, curing compound shall be evenly applied. The quantity applied shall be as directed by the Engineer. 3.09 REMOVING FORMS A. Forms shall be carefully removed so that the concrete driveway is not damaged. All "honeycomb" shall be plastered before backfilling is accomplished. FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 32 1633 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 CONCRETE DRIVEWAY DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.10 JOINING NEW AND OLD CONCRETE A. When joining new and old concrete, the old concrete shall be thoroughly cleaned, then painted with an epoxy bonding agent. The epoxy bonding agent shall be applied in strict conformance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.11 BACKFILLING A. The concrete driveway shall be carefully backfilled with material taken from the excavation. All excess material shall be hauled off the site by the Contractor. The area adjacent to the driveway shall be uniformly graded so as to provide positive drainage towards the street and or drainage facilities. END OF SECTION 32 16 33 FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 32 1633 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 CONCRETE DRIVEWAY DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 32 17 23 PAVEMENT MARKINGS PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary to provide all Pavement Marking required to complete the project. This specification shall be designated for roadway traffic marking only and is not applicable to pedestrian crosswalk marking. It is the intent of this specification that all pavement marking and all work be in accordance with the current edition of the Texas MUTCD. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 PAINT A. Set fast acrylic modified alkyd zone paint(white—TM5632 and yellow—TM 5633). B. All products as manufactured by Sherwin Williams, or approved equal. Apply in two (2) coats (7 mils dry film thickness) in accordance with specifications and manufacturer's printed procedures. PART 3 EXECUTION A. The Contractor shall layout all work from the base line furnished by the Engineer. The base line will be the center of the pavement and will be marked at 200'intervals. 3.01 WEATHER LIMITATIONS A. The painting shall be performed only when the existing surface is dry and clean, when the atmospheric temperature is above forty degrees Fahrenheit (400F), and when the weather is not excessively windy, dusty, or foggy. The suitability of the weather will be determined by the Owner's representative. 3.02 EQUIPMENT A. All equipment for the work shall be approved by the Owner's representative and shall include the apparatus necessary to properly clean the existing surface, and mechanical marking machine, and such auxiliary hand painting equipment as may be necessary to satisfactorily complete the job. B. The mechanical marker shall be an approved atomizing spray-type marking machine suitable for application of traffic paint. It shall produce an even and uniform film thickness at the required coverage and shall be designed so as to apply markings of uniform cross sections and clear-out edges without running of spattering and within the limits of straightness set forth herein. C. Suitable adjustments shall be provided on the sprayer(s) of a single machine or by furnishing additional equipment for paining the width required. 3.03 PREPARATION OF EXTISTING SURFACE A. Immediately before application of the paint, the existing surface shall be dry and entirely free from dirt, grease, oil, acids, laitance, or other foreign matter which would reduce the bond between the cost of paint and the pavement. The surface shall be thoroughly cleaned by sweeping and blow as required to remove all dirt, laitance, and loose materials. B. Areas which cannot be satisfactorily cleaned by brooming and blowing shall be scrubbed as directed with a water solution of trisodium phosphate (10% Na3Po4 by weight) or an approved FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 32 17 23 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 PAVEMENT MARKINGS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 equal solution. After scrubbing, the solution shall be rinsed off and the surface dried prior to painting. 3.04 LAYOUTS AND ALIGNMENTS A. Suitable layouts and lines of proposed striped shall be spotted in advance of the paint application. Control points shall be spaced at such intervals as will insure accurate location of all markings. B. The Contractor shall provide an experienced technician to supervise the location, alignment, layout, dimensions, and application of the paint. 3.05 APPLICATION A. Markings shall be applied at the locations and to the dimensions and spacing indicated on the plans or as specified. Paint shall not be applied until the layouts, indicated alignment, and the condition of the existing surface have been approved by the Owner's representative. B. The paint shall be mixed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions before application. The paint shall be thoroughly mixed and applied to the surface of the pavement with the marking machine as its original consistency without the addition of thinner. If the paint is applied by brush, the surface shall receive two (2) coats;the first(Ist) coat shall be thoroughly dry before the second(2,d) coat is applied. C. A period of three (3) weeks shall elapse between the placement of the bituminous surface course and the marking of the pavement. The paint shall not bleed excessively, curl, or discolor when applied to bituminous surfaces. D. In the application of straight stripes, any deviating of the edges exceeding one-half(1/2") in fifty feet (50') shall be obliterated and the marking corrected. The width of the markings shall be as designated within a tolerance of five percent (5%). All painting shall be performed to the satisfaction of the Owner's representative by competent and experienced equipment operators, laborers, and artisans in a neat and workmanlike manner. E. The Contractor shall furnish a certified report on the quality of materials ordered for the work. This report shall not be interpreted as a basis for final acceptance. The Owner's representative shall be notified upon arrival of shipment or inspecting and sampling of the materials. When required, all emptied containers shall be returned to the paint material storage or made available for tallying by the Owner's representative. The containers shall make an accurate accounting of the paint materials used in the accepted work. 3.06 PROTECTION A. After application of the paint, all markings shall be protected while the paint is drying. The fresh paint shall be protected from dainage of any kind. The Contractor shall be directly responsible and shall erect or place suitable warning signs, flags or barricades, protective screens, or coverings as required. All surfaces shall be protected from disfiguration by spatter, splashes, spillage, drippings of paint or materials. 3.07 DEFECTIVE WORKMANSHIP OR MATERIAL A. When any material not conforming to the requirement of the Specifications or Plans has been delivered to the Project or incorporated in the work or any work performed is of inferior quality, such material or work shall be corrected as directed by the Owner's representative, at the expense of the Contractor. END OF SECTION 32 17 23 FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 32 1723 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 PAVEMENT MARKINGS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 32 31 19 - DECORATIVE METAL FENCING AND GATES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Provide and install complete metal fencing and gates as shown in Drawings and as herein specified. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 3 Section "Concrete", concrete for footings. 2. Division 32 Section "Earthwork" for coordination with site grading. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Safety standard for vehicular gate operators: UL 325 B. Construction standard for automated vehicular gates: ASTM F2200 C. ASTM F2408—Ornamental Fences Employing Galvanized Steel Tubular Pickets. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Entrapment Area: An area that has any one dimension that is greater than 4 inches or less than 16 inches where a person or body part can become caught or trapped between an automated gate or component of the gate and any fixed stationary object. B. Protrusions: Any object less than 9 square inches of cross sectional area attached to the gate, with a surface that extends behind the extreme horizontal planes created by the gate structure members. 1. Exceptions for certain hardware are allowed by code and reference standards. Contractor shall comply with requirements as part of delegated design. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND DELEGATED DESIGN A. Contractor shall provide delegated design and installation to the requirements of this article. Where provisions are specifically detailed in the Drawings, design components to match the design or appearance as indicated in Drawings, but not to less than the requirements of this article or as required by governing regulations. The heaviest material or most restrictive requirements indicated shall govern. B. The manufactured fencing system shall be capable of meeting the vertical load, horizontal load, and infill performance requirement for commercial weight fences under ASTM F2408 C. Gate Operator Installer Qualifications: Where required by state law or other authority having jurisdiction,installer shall be a licensed automated vehicular gate operator installer. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 3231 19 - 1 JUNE 7, 2023 DECORATIVE METAL FENCING AND GATES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 D. Design, construct, and install automated gates to meet the requirements of UL 325, ASTM F2200, and to the requirements of local code enforcement having jurisdiction. Automated gate systems that do not meet the requirements of these systems shall not be allowed. 1. In the event of conflict between gate configurations indicated in the Drawings, and the requirements of codes and reference standards, inform Architect of all conflicts to confirm resolution. E. Delegated Design Criteria for motorized gates and operators: Design gates to meet reference standards, and the following: 1. Protrusions: Design and install gates without protrusions, except for hardware allowed to protrude as specifically permitted by code and reference standards. a. Vertical and Bottom Edges: Protrusions at leading and tailing edges of gates, and at bottom edge of gates, shall not exceed 1/2 inch and shall be smooth on all surfaces with no sharp edges. b. Protrusions outside of the vertical plane are permitted where protrusions are seven (7) feet or more above grade throughout the gate's range of operation. C. Gate locks, positive stops, and wheels are not considered to be protrusions on sliding gates. 2. Entrapment: Design and install gates and fencing such that there are no entrapment areas. Where entrapment areas are unavoidable due to configuration of the gate, provide entrapment protection devices. a. Provide protection devices compliant with UL 325. Provide non-contact sensors where possible. b. Loop detectors are not entrapment protection devices. Protection devices must be capable to detect presence of human beings in the entrapment area(s). 3. Reach-through Prevention: Openings in the gate shall be designed, guarded or screened from the bottom of the gate to the top of the gate (or to a minimum of 72 inches above grade where indicated in Drawings), to prevent a 2-1/4" sphere from passing through openings anywhere in the gate, and that portion of fencing that the gate covers in the open position. 4. Controls location: Card Readers, keypads, or similar control devices shall be located at least 6' from moving parts of the gate and in such a way that users cannot reach over, under, around, or through the gate to activate a control. 5. Fall-over Prevention for Sliding Gates: Design and install gates so that they cannot fall over more than 45 degrees from the vertical plane when detached from the supporting hardware. Provide catcher posts or brackets of adequate strength to resist fall over without bending or deflection of the posts or brackets. 6. Gate Roller Protection: All exposed rollers shall have guards or covers. 7. Positive Stops: Sliding gates shall have positive stops to limit travel to the designed fully open and fully closed positions, and shall project no more than that required to perform their intended function. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data, and installation instructions for fencing, gates,hardware, and accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For gate and operator. Include elevations, hardware details and installation details. Including: 1. All gate swings and range of travel 2. All underground runs of electrical lines and inductive vehicle obstruction loop locations 3. Size and locations of concrete mounting pads C. Installer qualifications. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 3231 19 - 2 JUNE 7, 2023 DECORATIVE METAL FENCING AND GATES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 D. Sample Warranties 1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Copies of actuated warranties. Contractor is responsible for submitting completed warranty documentation to manufacturer, and copies for Owner's warranty binder and O&M manuals. 1.08 HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Inspect materials upon receipt for damage. Reject damaged material. Store materials to ensure proper ventilation and drainage and protect against damage from weather, vandalism, and theft. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Fencing and gate Manufacturer's standard 20 year limited warranty on fence and gate finish. B. Gate Operators: Manufacturer's standard form 5-year warranty against defects in materials in which Manufacturer agrees to provide repair or replacement of defective parts or units without cost to Owner. Warranty excludes labor costs. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Barrette Outdoor Living; 2401 Corporate Blvd, Brooksville, FL 34604. Toll Free: (877) 258-6448. Phone: (352) 754-8555. Fax: (354) 544-8442. Email: info@alumi-guard.com. Web: www.alumi-guard.com B. Substitutions: Submit request for substitution according to Division 01 requirements. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Aluminum, General: Provide alloys and tempers with not less than the strength and durability properties of alloy and temper designated in paragraphs below for each aluminum form required. 1. Extrusions: ASTM B 221. a. Posts and Channels: Alloy 6005-T5. b. Pickets: Alloy 6063-T52. 2. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209,Alloy 6061-T6. 3. Castings: ASTM B 26, Alloy ADC12. B. Fasteners: Screws of ASTM A 276, 410 stainless steel with heads painted to match fencing color. C. Accessories: As required by conditions, post caps, wall brackets, scrolls, finials, and other miscellaneous hardware fabricated of aluminum. D. Concrete: Types specified in Division 03 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete." E. Concrete: ASTM C 94, Option A;minimum 3,000 psi strength at 28 days. 2.03 FENCING AND GATES A. Industrial Grade Fencing: 1. Aluminum Channel Sections: 1.5 inch tall by 1.5 inch wide; with top thickness 0.070 inch and .100 inch side wall thickness; according to ASTM F 2957, 2. Pickets: I inch square class according to ASTM F 2957. A. Style: 1. Picket Top: Victoria. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 3231 19 - 3 JUNE 7, 2023 DECORATIVE METAL FENCING AND GATES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Grade: Industrial. C. Channels: 3. D. Picket Spacing: 1. Standard: 3.875 inches. 2. Royale: a. Upper: 3.875 inches. b. Lower: 1.437 inches. 3.Puppy Picket: a. Upper: 3.875 inches. b. Lower 18 inches: 1.437 inches. E. Panel Length Inside Posts: 1. Nominal 72.125 inches OR Nominal 96.5 inches. F. Posts: 1. 2-1/2 inches square with 0.125 inch wall thickness. G. Fence Panel Height: As shown on drawings. H. Adornments: 1. Rings. 1. Ornamental Gates: Provide to match ornamental style specified. 1. Construction: Welded u-frame gates. 2. Height: As shown on drawings. 3. Opening Width: a. Single gate at 60 inches wide. 4. Adornments: Rings. 5. Hardware: a. Self-closing hinges. b. Gravity latch. C. Lever latch- single sided or double sided. d. Drop-rod for one leaf of double gates. e. Locking drop-rod for one leaf of double gates. f. Single hole lock box. g. Double hole lock box. h. Pool code compliant latch. J. Finish: SuperDurable Polyester Powder Coating: High performance polyester, medium glass, applied to over 2.0 mil thickness complying with AAMA 2604 with the following performance characteristics: 1. Meet or exceed 3,000 hour salt spray test according to ASTM B 117. 2. Meet or exceed a H-2H pencil hardness according to ASTM D 3363. 3. Meet or exceed a 513 rating on the ASTM D 3359 adhesion test. 4. Color: Black K. System shall include all components and hardware required for a complete assembly. 2.04 FENCE FABRICATION A. Punch channels (horizontal rails) to allow pickets to pass through the top of the rail. The number of channels vary with the style,height, and strength as determined by manufacturer. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 3231 19 - 4 JUNE 7, 2023 DECORATIVE METAL FENCING AND GATES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Fasten pickets to channels with specified screws on one side of the channel only. C. Routed posts to allow the channels to slide in and be attached with specified screws. Affix post caps to top of posts. D. Fabricate gates using same components as for fencing. Walk through gates shall have adjustable self-closing hinges and shall be self-latching. 2.05 SLIDING GATES: A. The manufacturer shall supply a total roll gate system of Ameristar® PassPort 119 Industrial Ornamental design series and Genesis style. The system shall include all components (i.e., pickets,rails, gate uprights,wheels and hardware)required. 1. Steel material for roll gate components (i.e. pickets, rails, diagonals and uprights), shall be commercial steel with a minimum yield strength of 45,000 psi(344 MPa). 2. Ornamental picket material shall be 1" square x 14 Ga. Tubing. Picket spacing shall be 4-3/4". Material for toprails, uprights and diagonals rails shall be 2" square x 12 Ga. Material for the bottom rail shall be 2" x 4" x 11 Ga. Posts shall be a minimum of 4" square x 11 Ga. 3. Pickets/pales shall be face welded to roll gate frame, except for Invincible or Gauntlet style gates over 18' long. Invincible or Gauntlet style gates over 18' long shall have pickets face-welded to 2" x 2" angle iron to form panels equal in length to the gate frame bay width. 4. The manufactured roll gates and bolt-on panels (if applicable) shall be subjected to the PermaCoat® thermal stratification coating process (high-temperature, in-line, multi- stage, multi-layer) including, as a minimum, a six-stage pre-treatment/wash (with zinc phosphate), an electrostatic spray application of an epoxy base, and a separate electrostatic spray application of a polyester finish. The base coat shall be a thermosetting epoxy powder coating (gray in color) with a minimum thickness of 2 mils (0.0508mm). The topcoat shall be a "no-mar" TGIC polyester powder coat finish with a minimum thickness of 2 mils (0.0508mm). The color shall be specify Black. 5. Completed gates shall be capable of supporting a 200 lb. load applied at midspan without permanent deformation. 6. Provide 2"x2"x 14 gauge galvanized steel core, black vinyl coated wire mesh or other manufacturer recommended product,attached on gate inside face with coated black metal wire mesh clips and stainless steel lath screws by Teks Metal Fasteners or equal, designed to cover the gate and the adjacent fence panels where the gates slides back into the open position to meet ASTM F2200. 2.06 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIAL A. Concrete: Normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete complying with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa), 3-inch (75-mm) slump, and 1-inch (25-mm) maximum aggregate size[or dry, packaged, normal-weight concrete mix complying with ASTM C 387/C 387M mixed with potable water according to manufacturer's written instructions]. B. Nonshrink Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M and specifically recommended by manufacturer for exterior applications. C. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded. 1. For aluminum, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be welded and as required for strength and compatibility in fabricated items. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 3231 19 - 5 JUNE 7, 2023 DECORATIVE METAL FENCING AND GATES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Verify grading adjacent to fence locations, and other requirements for installation, are complete. Coordinate power location and requirements for gate hardware with electrical contractor. Coordinate requirements for gate hardware installed by other trades with hardware installer. B. Lay out fence according to construction Drawings. C. Verify that gates operate smoothly and without obstructions under manual conditions prior to installation of gate operator. Do not proceed until gate is aligned and operates without binding. D. Gate Operator: Coordinate conduit runs and electrical connections with the work of Electrical and Access Control work by other trades, including with access control by separate contract where applicable. 3.02 FENCE AND GATE INSTALLATION A. General: Install per Manufacturer's written installation instructions. Attach hardware by means which will prevent unauthorized removal. Install gates plumb, level and secure for full opening without interference. Adjust hardware for smooth operation. B. Concrete Set Posts: Drill hole in firm, undisturbed or compacted soil. Holes shall have diameter 4 times greater than nominal outside dimension of post, and depths approximately 6" deeper than post bottom. Excavate deeper as required for adequate support in soft and loose soils, and for posts with heavy lateral loads. Set post bottom 36" below surface when in firm, undisturbed soil, or greater where recommended by fencing Manufacturer for post height. Place concrete around post in a continuous pour. Trowel finish around posts and slope to direct water away from posts on all sides 1. Gate Posts and Hardware: Set gate keepers into minimum 9" diameter x 18" deep concrete footings. Set stops, sleeves and other accessories into concrete paving or footings as applicable. 2. Type and quantity of gate hinges shall be based on the application; weight, height, and number of gate cycles. The manufacturers' gate drawings shall identify the necessary gate hardware required for the application. Gate hardware shall be provided by the manufacturer of the gate and shall be installed per manufacturer's recommendations. 3. Coordinate access controls and hardware with work of Division 28, Electronic Safety and Security. C. Surface mount (wall mount) posts with mounting plates where indicated. Fasten with lag bolts and shields. D. Check each post for vertical and top alignment, and maintain in position during placement and finishing operation. E. Fence panels shall be attached to posts according to manufacturer's installation instructions. F. Where fence materials must be cut in field, and where minor damage to finish can be repaired to Architect's satisfaction, touch up and seal paint finishes per manufacturer's instructions using manufacturer's recommended repair paint and sealer materials. G. Install gates per approved shop drawings and manufacturer's instructions. Install with all hardware as per approved shop drawings and as called for in the construction Drawings. Verify that gate is operating smoothly and without obstructions under manual conditions prior to installation of gate hardware. Do not proceed with hardware installation until gate is aligned and operates without binding. 3.03 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 3231 19 - 6 JUNE 7, 2023 DECORATIVE METAL FENCING AND GATES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Maximum Variations from Plumb: 1/4 inch in 10 feet. B. Maximum Offset from True Position: 1 inch. C. Minimum Distance from Property Line: 6 inches. 3.04 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING A. Verify all operable parts are properly lubricated and functioning. Check all mechanical connections for tightness and alignment. B. Prior to substantial completion, clean the fence as recommended by manufacturer. C. Remove post-hole excavation material, or if material is not detrimental to landscaping then scatter uniformly to grade prior to landscaping installation. D. Remove excess jobsite materials. E. Touch-up paint scratched surfaces using paint pens supplied by manufacturer that match fence color. Spray-paint touch-up and/or overspray is not covered under warranty. END OF SECTION 32 31 19 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 3231 19 -7 JUNE 7, 2023 DECORATIVE METAL FENCING AND GATES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 32 31 29 - WOOD FENCING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Extent of fence work is indicated on drawings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 32 Section- Chain Link Fencing 1.03 SUBMITTALS: A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data, and installation instructions for metal fencing,fabric and accessories. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. Dimensions indicated form pipe are outside dimensions. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Line Posts: Furnish 2" diameter posts for supporting frame at 8' O.C. maximum. B. Terminal Posts: 2-1/2" diameter galvanized pipe. C. Gate Posts: 2-1/2" diameter galvanized pipe. D. Post Tops: Provide weather-tight galvanized closure cap; one cap for each post. E. Pickets: 1" x 4" x 8' flat top cedar F. Rails: 2" x 4" cedar G. Post Brackets: Galvanized steel strap H. Hinges: Structurally capable of supporting gate leaf and allow opening and closing without binding. Non-lift-off type hinge design shall permit gate to swing 180° (3.14 rad). 1.Hardware Materials: Galvanized steel or malleable iron shapes to suit gate size. J.Hasp: Galvanized or stainless steel to receive padlock. K. Concrete: Provide concrete consisting of Portland cement, ASTM C 150, aggregates, ASTM C 33, and clean water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi using at least 4 sacks of cement per cu. yd., 1" maximum size aggregate, maximum 3" slump, and 2%to 4%entrained air. PART 3 -EXECUTION FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 32 31 29 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 WOOD FENCING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Excavation: Drill or hand excavate holes for posts to "10" diameter x 24" deep. B. Brace Assemblies: Install braces so posts are plumb when diagonal rod is under proper tension. C. Fasteners: Install nuts for post brackets and hardware bolts on side of fence opposite wood fencing. Peen ends of bolts or score threads to prevent removal of nuts. D. Attach wood pickets to rails using galvanized nails at 6 nails per picket. Align top of picket row to be parallel to grads. No gaps between pickets will be allowed. Bottom gap not to exceed 3" from grade. END OF SECTION 32 3129 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 32 31 29 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 WOOD FENCING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 32 35 13 - SCREENS AND LOUVERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. General Coordination Procedures, (Reference Specification Section 01 31 00) General Contractor shall coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation. 1.02 SUMMARY A. General: Furnish all labor, supervision, materials, tools, equipment, appliances and services necessary for the fabrication, delivery and installation of all miscellaneous metal items. All work shall be as shown or indicated on the drawings and as specified in this section. B. Scope of Work: 1. Screen wall and covering C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 5 Section—Cold-Formed Metal framing 2. Division 1 Section—Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal. 3. Division 6 Section-Rough Carpentry. 4. Division 7 Section— Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim. 5. Division 7 Section-Joint Sealants. 1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Design shall comply with TDI Standards 1.04 REFERENCES A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 1. ASTM E 84 Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 2. ASTM D 958 - Practice for Determining Temperatures of Standard ASTM Molds for Test Specimens of Plastics. 3. ASTM E2768-11 — Standard Test Method for Extended Duration Surface Burning Characteristics for Building Materials (30 min Tunnel Test). Results: Zero Flame Spread, Smoke Developed Index of 5. Meets criteria for Class A fire rating 4. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace at 750°C 5. ASTM C423 - Standard Test Method for Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method(NRC) 6. ASTM E1477 - Standard Test Method for Luminous Reflectance Factor of Acoustical Materials by Use of Integrating-Sphere Reflectometers (LRV) B. American Architectural Manufacturers Association(AAMA) 1. AAMA 2605 Voluntary Specification,Performance requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Perfonning Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 - 1 SCREENS AND LOUVERS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. AAMA 2604 - Voluntary Specification, Performance requirements and Test Procedures for High Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. 3. AAMA 2603 - Voluntary Specification, Performance requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. C. International Code Council Evaluation Service(ICC-ES) 1. ICC-ES Evaluation Report 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product data: submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheet. B. Submit duplicate 1-%" X 6 inch X 6 inch (41mm X 152mm X 150mm) samples of cladding material, of color and profile specified. C. Shop drawings to indicate dimensions, profiles, attachment methods, schedule of wall elevations,trim and closure pieces, soffits, fascia,metal furring, and related work. D. Certifications: Manufacturer's certifications that products comply with specified requirements, including laboratory reports showing compliance with specified tests and standards. E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.06 WARRANTY A. Provide a written guarantee, signed and issued in the name of the owner, covering the metal cladding/cladding material for 15 (fifteen)years from the date of Substantial Completion. B. The manufacturer's warranty is limited to replacement of defective material only, rather than installation of the same. Faulty installation shall be corrected by the installing contractor. The warranty required herein is the sole remedy against the manufacturer and there are no other implied warranties. In any event, the manufacturer shall not be liable for incidentals or consequential damages. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2® 1 ALUMINUM CLADDING AND COMPONENTS A. 1-%"X 6 inch(41mm X 152mm) Link&Lock Batten extruded aluminum 6063-T 1. Finish coating: powder coated finish 2. Color: Light National Walnut 3. Gloss: 30± 5. 4. Thickness: 1/16 inch(1.65mm)base metal thickness. 5. Profile: I-%"X 6 inch(41mm X 152mm)X 24 ft(7315.2inm)batten. 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Batten End Caps with matching powder-coated finish. B. Internal Stiffener. C. Attachment Clips: Mounting Clips and End Mounts that are shipped loose for field installation. 2.03 MANUFACTURERS FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 - 2 SCREENS AND LOUVERS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Longboard Architectural Products 4120- 1777 Clearbrook Rd.,Abbotsford,BC, Canada V2T 5X5 info cr)1on bg oard roducts.com, 1.800.604.0343 PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install battens in accordance with CGSB 93.5, and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install fins/louvers as indicated. C. Maintain joints in exterior cladding,true to line,tight fitting,hairline joints. D. Attach battens in a manner not restricting thermal movement. 3.02 CLEANING A. Upon completion of installation,remove surplus materials,rubbish,tools and equipment barriers. END OF SECTION 32 35 13 FIRE STATION NO. 3, PROJECT #21085 - 3 SCREENS AND LOUVERS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 32 84 00 - PLANTING IRRIGATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Furnish all labor, material, equipment, and services necessary to provide all landscape planting irrigation, complete in place, as shown and specified. 1. Installation of permanent automatic irrigation system. 2. Installation and removal of temporary irrigation system where required for establishment of plantings and turf. B. Related Work Specified in other Divisions: 1. Division 22 -Plumbing 2. Division 26 -Electrical power for controller(s) 3. Division 28 -Data connection for remotely monitored controller(s) 4. Division 32 -Paving coordination for irrigation sleeves 5. Division 32- Unit paver coordination for irrigation sleeves 6. Division 32 -Landscaping 7. Division 32 -Turf and Grasses 8. Division 33 - Utilities requirements for irrigation taps 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For all materials and components of irrigation system. B. Shop drawings for irrigation system shall be designed by a licensed irrigator according to the specified criteria, registered as required for the project location, and submitted to Architect for approval prior to submitting for regulatory approval or permitting. Where sleeves under new paving are part of the scope of work, irrigation shop drawings shall be submitted in time for Architect's review, prior to start of paving work. All irrigation plans shall contain the following information: 1. The irrigator's seal, signature, and date of signing 2. All major physical features and the boundaries of the areas to be irrigated 3. A North arrow 4. A legend 5. The scale used 6. The design pressure and static pressure 7. Water velocities for all piping 8. The calculated flow rate for each zone 9. A zone coverage map showing complete coverage of all landscape bed areas, and head- to-head coverage for all turf irrigation. 10. Location,type, and size of each: a. Water source, such as,but not limited to a water meter and point(s) of connection b. Backflow prevention device c. Valve, including but not limited to, isolation valves, master control valves, and zone control valves d. Pressure regulation component e. Main line and lateral piping f. Sleeving FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 32 84 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 PLANTING IRRIGATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 g. Water emission device, including, but not limited to spray heads, rotary sprinkler heads, quick-couplers,bubblers, drip emitters and tubing, or micro-sprays h. Controller i. Drip irrigation zone operation indicator j. Rain/Freeze sensor 1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Record and As-built Drawings: 1. The Contractor shall make neat and legible notations on as-built sheets reflecting changes in components, sizes, and installation locations from original drawings and specifications as the work proceeds. 2. The Contractor shall maintain a current as-built set of prints on-site and readily available for inspection. 3. Before final completion, Contractor shall transfer all information from as-built prints to a copy of the approved shop drawing submittal. Contractor shall use symbols and notation consistent with original shop drawings. a. Where as-built copy is neatly recorded and maintained in excellent physical condition, Architect, at their discretion, may allow the as-built copy to become the record set. 4. The Contractor shall dimension from two (2) permanent points of reference (corners of buildings, sidewalks,road intersections, etc.),the location of the following items: a. Connection to existing water lines b. Connection to existing electrical power c. Isolation valves d. Routing of irrigation lines (locate start and end points with dimensions along routing at maximum intervals of 100') e. Irrigation control valves f. Routing of control wiring g. All other related equipment as directed by Architect B. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. Index sheet stating Contractor's address and telephone number, list of equipment with name and addresses of local Manufacturer representatives. 2. Catalog and parts sheets on every material and equipment installed under this contract. 3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment. 4. Controller Schedules: (2) copies of laminated controller schedules, sized as appropriate to controller and number of zones. Charts to state zone number with brief description of the location, and installer's recommended watering duration and frequency per week for each zone after landscape plantings are established. (Example: Zone 1: South lawn -20 min. - twice per week). One copy to be posted at irrigation controller and a second copy provided to Owner with O&M's as backup copy. 5. Controller Zone Maps: (2) copies of laminated 8-1/2"x11" or 11"x17" zone maps (sized as appropriate to scale of irrigated site area) showing coverage boundaries of each zone and their associated valves. One copy to be posted at irrigation controller and a second copy provided to Owner with O&M's as backup copy. Zone maps shall either be color coded or with boxes neatly drawn around the heads of each zone, and clearly numbered to correspond to each zone matching the zones on the irrigation controller. C. Guarantee 1. Provide Guarantee for the irrigation system in accordance with the attached form. The Standard Form of Agreement and General Conditions of these specifications shall be filed with Owner or his representative,prior to acceptance of the irrigation system. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 328400 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 PLANTING IRRIGATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. The Guarantee form shall include the Contractor's letterhead, and contain the following information: GUARANTEE FOR AUTOMATIC IRRIGATION SYSTEM We hereby Guarantee that the automatic irrigation system has been installed in accordance with all applicable state and local laws, ordinances, rules, regulations, and orders. We have tested the system and certify that it has been installed according to the irrigation drawings and specifications and is free from defects in materials and workmanship. We agree to repair or replace any defects in materials or workmanship which may develop during the period of One Year from date of acceptance, and to also repair or replace any damage resulting from such warranty work at no additional cost to the Owner. We shall make such repairs or replacements within a reasonable time, as determined by the Owner, after receipt of written notice from the Owner. If we are unable to make such repairs and/or replacements within the given time frame, we authorize the Owner to proceed with repairs / replacements, to be made at our expense and shall pay all associated costs and charges upon demand. PROJECT: LOCATION: SIGNED: ADDRESS: PHONE: DATE OF ACCEPTANCE: 1.05 DELEGATED DESIGN A. Engage a licensed irrigator to design and permit a complete irrigation system to provide sufficient irrigation to maintain all plantings shown in the Landscaping plans in compliance with these specifications and the requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. System design must be approved by Architect prior to permitting, and by Authorities having jurisdiction before installation. The Contractor shall obtain and pay for any permits and observations as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. System shall be capable of applying 0.33 inches of water during a single watering cycle, between 11:00 pm- 6:00 am using available pressure without supplementary pump. a. All zones must be capable of operating during a single watering cycle. b. The licensed irrigator is responsible for determining existing water pressure. c. Velocities shall not exceed 5 F.P.S. 2. No different types of irrigation emitters (e.g. drip, spray, rotor, or bubbler) shall operate on the same zone. a. Nozzles for all spray and rotor heads shall have matched precipitation rates. b. Landscape beds shall be solely comprised of drip and bubbler irrigation. c. All new trees shall receive bubbler irrigation even if located within the coverage area of another zone in the Landscape Drawings. d. Where possible,micro irrigation may be utilized. 3. All utilities under hard(paved) surfaces shall be sleeved. a. Each pipe and wire bundle shall have a separate sleeve. b. Sleeves shall be twice the diameter of pipe served. c. Provide a spare sleeve at each location for future use. 4. System shall not interfere with new and existing utilities or other construction. 5. System layout shall be routed to avoid causing root damage to existing plantings or difficulty installing new plant material. 6. Irrigation design must account for minimum drift and reduction of water on street and paved surfaces. 7. Operation indicators shall be required for each drip irrigation zone. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 328400 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 PLANTING IRRIGATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer and Designer Qualifications: Licensed and approved as required by local authorities having jurisdiction. Installer with minimum 5 years continuous operation installing irrigation systems of comparable scale and complexity,under the current company and name. B. Manufacturer's Directions: Manufacturer's directions and detailed drawings shall be followed in all cases where the manufacturers of articles used in this contract furnish directions covering points not shown in the drawings and specifications. C. Ordinances, Codes and Regulations: All local, municipal, and state laws, rules and regulations governing any portion of this work are hereby incorporated into and made a part of these specifications. Their provisions shall be carried out by the Contractor. Requirements of these specifications shall not be construed to conflict with any of these rules, regulations, or requirements of the same. 1. When these specifications and drawings require materials, workmanship, or construction of a better quality, higher standard, or larger size than is required by the above rules and regulations,these specifications and drawings shall take precedence. 1.07 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Handling of PVC Pipe and Fittings: The Contractor is cautioned to exercise care in handling, loading, unloading, and storing of PVC pipe and fittings. Pipe that has been damaged will be discarded. Installed pipe found to be damaged shall be replaced with new piping. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. 1.08 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Equipment or material substitutions other than those listed on the drawings or specifications must include the following information for review: 1. Provide a statement indicating the reason for making the substitution. Use a separate page for each item to be substituted. 2. Provide descriptive catalog literature,performance charts and flow charts for each item to be substituted. 3. Provide the amount of cost savings if the substituted item is approved. B. Architect shall have sole authority in accepting or rejecting substituted items as approved equal. 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. As a part of this contract, the following shall be turned over to Owner at conclusion of the project: 1. Record and As-built Drawings 2. Operation and Maintenance Data 3. Guarantee 4. Two (2)keys for each automatic controller. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Provide materials from manufacturers as specified herein, or approved equal: 1. Heads, Control Valves, Drip Irrigation Components, Quick Couplers, Sensors & Controllers a. Rain Bird b. Hunter c. Toro FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 328400 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 PLANTING IRRIGATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2.02 MATERIALS A. Controller: Furnish low voltage controller capable of operating the required number of zone control valves for proposed irrigation system plus a minimum of six additional zone control valves to accommodate future expansion. 1. Operational Requirements: a. Capable of creating a minimum of four independent irrigation programs with no less than 4 start times per program. b. Programs scheduled by Calendar days, 1-31-day Interval or Odd/Even days with selective day exclusion. c. Each zone individually programmable in 1-minute increments with no less than a 6- hour maximum run time. d. Percentage based seasonal adjustability of zone run times. e. Optional irrigation delay following rain events (0— 14 days). f. Capable of remote control,programming, and monitoring via data connection. g. Manual operation allowed without modification of preset automatic operation settings. 2. Enclosure: Surface mounted, NEMA 250, molded plastic enclosure with locking cover and two matching keys a. Exterior: Type 4,weatherproof, include provision for grounding b. Interior: Type 12, drip-proof B. Wiring: UL 493, Type OF multiconductor, with solid-copper conductors; insulated cable; suitable for direct burial. 1. Feeder-Circuit Cables: No. 12 AWG minimum,between building and controllers. 2. Low-Voltage, Branch-Circuit Cables: No. 14 AWG minimum, between controllers and automatic control valves; color-coded different from feeder-circuit-cable jacket color; with jackets of different colors for multiple-cable installation in same trench. a. Common wire shall be coded white. All other wires are to be coded separately. C. Water Meter: As required to operate system, and as approved by authorities having jurisdiction. D. Isolation Valve: As required to operate system, and as approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Gate Valve 2. Ball Valve E. Anti-Siphon Device: As required to operate system, and as approved by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Reduced Pressure Zone Assembly F. Metal Pipe: 1. Red Brass Pipe: a. NPT threaded, 85 percent copper, Schedule 40 2. Copper Pipe: a. Type K G. Metal Fittings: 1. Red Brass Fittings: a. NPT threaded, 85 percent copper, Class 250 (medium pressure) 2. Copper Fittings: a. Type K H. PVC Pipe: Pipe shall be made from an NSF approved Type 1, Grade 11, PVC compound conforming to ASTM resin specification D2672. All piping must meet requirements as set forth in Federal Specification PS-22-70, with an appropriate standard dimension ratio FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 328400 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 PLANTING IRRIGATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 (S.D.R.). Pipe shall bear the manufacturer's name, nominal pipe size, schedule or class, pressure rating(PSI),NSF (National Sanitation Foundation) approval, and date of expiration. 1. PVC Pressure Main Lines: a. Pressure main line piping less than 2" in outside diameter shall be Schedule 40 PVC with solvent welded joints. b. Pressure main line piping 2" in outside diameter and greater shall be class 315 PVC with solvent welded joints. 2. PVC Non-Pressure Lateral Lines: a. Non-pressure lateral line piping shall be class 200 PVC with solvent welded joints. 3. Sleeves: a. Pipe shall be 2" minimum Schedule 40 PVC and extend 6 inches beyond edges of adjacent surfaces. I. PVC Fittings: All fittings shall be injection molded of an improved virgin PVC fitting compound and conform to ASTM D2464 and ASTM D2466. Fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, applicable I.P.S., schedule number and NSF seal of approval. 1. Main line fittings shall be Schedule 80 2. Lateral line fittings shall be Schedule 40(unless specified as otherwise on irrigation plan) 3. Slip PVC fittings shall be a"deep socket" bracketed type 4. All tees and ells shall be side gated J. Control Valves: Molded-plastic body, normally closed, diaphragm type with manual-flow adj ustment. K. Pressure Regulators: Brass or plastic housing, with corrosion-resistant internal parts; of size and capacity required for devices installed downstream from unit. L. Filter Units: Brass or plastic housing, with corrosion-resistant internal parts; of size and capacity required for devices installed downstream from unit. M. Valve Boxes: Boxes and covers shall be fabricated from a durable, plastic material resistant to the chemical action of soils and sunlight. Valve boxes shall be designed for installing flush with grade with an overlapping cover, and open bottom with cutouts to accommodate pipe installation. The cover and box shall be capable of sustaining a load of 1,500 pounds and adequately sized to provide service access for all valves in all cases. 1. Control valves: Minimum 10" circular 2. Drip control valve assembly: Minimum 12" x 17" (Nominal) 3. Drip flush valve and Air relief valve: Minimum 6" circular 4. Quick coupler valve boxes: Minimum 10" circular. 5. Valve box extensions shall be by the same manufacturer as the valve box. N. Pop-up Heads: All heads shall have bodies and matched precipitation rate nozzles constructed of UV resistant plastic and a minimum nominal pop-up height of 4 inches. The internal parts shall be corrosion resistant and include a stainless-steel retraction spring. All heads shall have an adjustable flow rate and be designed for uniform coverage over the entire spray area indicated at available water pressure. 1. Gear-Drive Rotary Heads 2. Spray Heads O. Drip Tubing: Tubing shall be linear low-density polyethylene and contain pressure- compensating, continuously self-cleaning emitters with internal check valves at a specified spacing. Emitters shall be welded to the inside wall of the tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly and have a built-in physical root barrier whereby the water exits the dripper from one location and the tubing from a second location. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 328400 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 PLANTING IRRIGATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 P. External Emitters: Pressure compensating emitters with varying discharge rates as recommended for optimal performance and approved by Architect in shop drawings. 1. Bubblers: All bubblers of the same size and type shall be from the same Manufacturer. Q. Miscellaneous Irrigation Specialties: 1. Air/Vacuum Relief Valves: Brass or plastic housing, with corrosion-resistant internal parts 2. Flush Valves: Brass or plastic housing,with corrosion-resistant internal parts 3. Rain/freeze sensors: Constructed of UV resistant materials by same manufacturer as controller 4. Soil moisture sensors: Constructed of corrosion resistant materials by same manufacturer as controller 5. Water Hammer Arresters: ASSE 1010 or PDI WH 201, with bellows or piston-type pressurized cushioning chamber and in sizes complying with PDI WH 201. 6. Pressure Gauges: ASME B40.1. Include dial gauge, with dial range of two times system operating pressure, and bottom outlet. 7. Quick Couplers: Factory-fabricated, bronze or brass,two-piece assembly. Include coupler water-seal valve; removable upper body with spring-loaded or weighted, rubber-covered cap; hose swivel with ASME B1.20.7, 3/4-11.5NH threads for garden hose on outlet; and operating key. S. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: The Contractor shall verify all site dimensions and grades in the field before starting work on the irrigation system. Contractor shall also identify any conflicts with utilities, plantings or other obstructions and notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to timely completion of work. Do not proceed until conditions are satisfactory. B. Excavation and Trenching: 1. Excavate earth, rock, or any combination thereof, and remove all foreign material and earth greater than 1-1/2" in diameter from trenches. Where existing paving is in the path of irrigation lines, include boring as required to install new irrigation system, unless otherwise noted in Drawings. Coordinate installation of sleeving embedded in concrete/masonry or routed under paved areas with all associated sub-contractors prior to paving work. a. PVC Pressure Main Lines: Provide minimum 4"width, 18" depth trench. b. PVC Non-Pressure Lateral Lines: Provide minimum 4"width, 12"depth trench. 2. Exercise care in excavating and working near utilities, plantings, or other obstructions. Contractor shall be responsible for damage caused by his operations. a. Trenching within drip line of existing trees shall be done by hand, by tunneling or boring, or by other methods as approved by Architect. b. Do not dig within root balls of newly planted trees or shrubs. c. Do not move or damage trees and shrubs. C. Pipe Installation: 1. Provide firm, uniform bearing for entire length of pipe to prevent uneven settlement, and pad trenches with dirt or sand where rocky. Lay pipe from side to side of trench bottom to allow for expansion and contraction. Do not wedge or block pipe. 2. Use excavated material to backfill trenches or select fill dirt or sand if existing soil is rocky or contains large clods. Hand-tamp and water-jet disturbed areas to prevent FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 328400 - 7 MAY 2, 2023 PLANTING IRRIGATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 settling. Hand rake trenches and adjoining areas to leave grade in as good or better condition prior to beginning installation. D. Pipe and Fittings Assembly: 1. Solvent Welded PVC Connection: Pipe shall have burrs removed from cut ends and be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, dust, and moisture prior to applying primer and solvent. Solvent-welding shall be performed according to manufacturer recommendations in conformance with ASTM D2564 and ASTM D2855. a. Pressure main lines installed with solvent-welded fittings shall utilize concrete thrust blocking at all directional changes along its routing. 2. Threaded PVC Connection: Where required, use threaded PVC fittings to which pipe may be welded. Manufacturer recommended non-lead, non-hardening, non-lubricating thread sealant shall be applied to male threads. Fittings shall be hand tightened, plus one full turn with a strap wrench. a. PVC to Metal Connection: All female fittings shall be of metal construction, and male fittings made of PVC. 3. Copper Pipe and Fitting Connection: Pipe ends shall have burrs removed and be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, dust, and moisture before buffing with sandpaper to remove pipe residue. Apply water-soluble flux to the pipe and fitting then sweat solder connection using solid core 97/3 copper-tin solder. a. Install dielectric fittings for dissimilar-metal pipe connections. 4. Red Brass Pipe and Fitting Connection: Clean pipe and fitting thoroughly then apply manufacturer recommended PTFE tape and/or non-lead, non-hardening thread sealant to male threads. Fittings shall be hand tightened,plus two full turns with a strap wrench. a. Install dielectric fittings for dissimilar-metal pipe connections. E. Water Emission Devices: Install after hydrostatic test is completed. Make appropriate adjustments in layout to accommodate actual field conditions. 1. Pop-up Heads: Install heads a minimum of 4 inches from any hard surface, on 6-inch minimum length swing joints. 2. Bubblers: Install bubblers inside the planting saucer for each plant as designated on the approved design drawings. 3. Drip Tubing and Emitters: Install tubing and emitters as indicated on the design drawings using fittings of the size and type recommended by the manufacturer. Install 6- inch metal wire staples 3 to 5 feet on center,with two staples installed over every change- of-direction fitting. a. Spacing of heads/emitters and inline drip tubing shall not exceed maximum indicated on the design drawings, or manufacturer's recommendations,whichever is less. F. Control Valves: 1. All control valves shall include an upstream isolation valve, and drip control valves shall also include downstream pressure regulators installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install a true and level plastic valve box over each control valve, sized as required for access with gravel at 4"depth and a 1"air gap between gravel and valve. a. Wire connections shall be made using waterproofing connectors according to manufacturer's recommendation. G. Wiring: 1. Wire shall be laid loosely in trench without stretching or stress on wiring and bundled and taped every 10' at the side of pipe in the trench. Wire connections shall be made according to manufacturer's recommendation using waterproofing connectors located inside 6"minimum valve box. a. Conduit is not required for OF wire, except under paved areas. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 328400 - 8 MAY 2, 2023 PLANTING IRRIGATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 H. Boxes: All boxes installed flush with grade, boxes installed without distortion so that covers fit snugly. Boxes installed where covers do not fit into the box, sit on grade, or rotate or come loose under foot traffic or mower wheels are not acceptable. I. Irrigation Controller: 1. Install according to manufacturer's recommendations in location chosen by Architect or shown on drawings. Connect to power supply using EMT conduit and water-tight fittings securely fastened to wall in an approved manner. a. Six spare wires shall be run to farthest valves at either end of system, for future expansion. b. Provide rain/freeze and moisture sensors located where acceptable to Architect and protected from vandalism. J. Miscellaneous Equipment: 1. Install all assemblies specified herein according to the respective detail drawings or specifications,using best standard practices. 2. Install devices such as rain and freeze sensors, flush valves, air/vacuum relief valves, and flow sensors as recommended by the manufacturer in locations acceptable to Architect. I Thrust blocks and concrete valve boxes may be required by Authorities having jurisdiction. Contractor shall coordinate. 3.02 TESTING A. General: Provide Owner's representative a 72-hour notice in advance of required testing and inspections, and final leak test. Partial backfill may be placed in trenches between fittings to insure stability of line under pressure. Leave fittings and couplings open to visual inspection for full period of test. Complete testing prior to backfilling. 1. PVC Pressure Main Lines: Test for a period of 12 to 14 hours under normal water pressure. If leaks occur, correct defective construction and repeat test until no leaks exist. 2. PVC Non-Pressure Lateral Lines: Test for a period of one hour under normal water pressure. If leaks occur, correct defective construction and repeat test until no leaks exist. 3.03 FINAL ADJUSTMENT A. Make final adjustments prior to inspection by Architect or Owner's representative. B. Completely flush system to remove debris from lines by removing nozzles from heads on ends of lines and turning on system. Replace nozzles and check system operation of each section to ensure no debris will obstruct proper operation. If any head fails to operate properly,repeat entire operation and re-flush. C. Valves: Check use of flow adjustment on top of each valve in each section of heads for operating pressure and balance to other sections. Automatic control valves or pressure regulating valves as applicable, are to be adjusted so that the irrigation heads, drip emitters and inline drip tubing operate at the pressure recommended by the manufacturer. D. Check all sprinklers for proper operation, coverage, and alignment of throw direction. Prevailing wind conditions or slopes may indicate that arc of angle / trajectory of spray should be other than as shown on approved drawings. Change nozzles as allowed to provide correct coverage without additional cost to Owner. 3.04 CLEANING A. During work,keep premises neat and orderly. Remove trash and debris daily from site. 1. If site is occupied by Owner, or for irrigation work installed after general site cleaning, maintain drives and paving areas free of dirt and debris from irrigation work on daily basis. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 328400 - 9 MAY 2, 2023 PLANTING IRRIGATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.05 REPAIRS A. Maintenance / Warranty Period Repairs: Contractor shall repair damages sustained to property or equipment. Repairs to Irrigation System must be completed by licensed City- approved irrigator. B. Temporary Repairs by Owner: The Owner reserves the right to make temporary repairs as necessary to keep sprinkler system equipment in operating condition. The exercise of this right by the Owner shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the terms of the Guarantee, as herein specified. 3.06 DEMONSTRATION A. Demonstrate system operation and instruct Owner's personnel in operation and general maintenance of system. Provide required keys and maintenance tools at time of Owner training. Provide as-built drawings, zone maps, and landscape installer's recommended watering schedule at or before time of Owner training. At conclusion of training, watering program shall be set for the most efficient application of water at the time in accordance with all state and municipal rules and regulations. 3.07 MAINTENANCE A. Provide maintenance of system, including cleaning / adjustment of heads, raising and lowering of heads, and re-programming of watering schedule, for one year after final acceptance, as part of installation scope. B. Address backfill settlement of trenches during one year corrective period. C. Drain and flush system at end of one year Guarantee period. D. At times as directed by Landscaping installer, adjust watering schedule programming during the maintenance period. Also adjust watering schedule during the maintenance period as required by authorities having jurisdiction for applicable watering restrictions. At end of maintenance period / final acceptance of landscaping, provide recommended continued watering schedule to Owner and set the watering schedule on the controller accordingly unless otherwise directed by Owner. 1. If otherwise required by current watering restrictions of authorities having jurisdiction, set second watering program to comply with the watering restrictions currently in force and set controls to use the compliant watering program. END OF SECTION 32 84 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 32 84 00 - 10 MAY 2, 2023 PLANTING IRRIGATION DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 32 90 00 - LANDSCAPING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: Provide complete landscaping shown on Drawings, and as herein specified. 1. Plants and Planting. 2. Planting Soils. 3. Fertilizer. 4. Tree Stabilization. 5. Tree Branch Pruning. 6. Landscape Edging. 7. Weed Block Membrane/Filter Fabric. 8. Mulch. 9. Landscape Bed Drainage. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 12 Section- Site Furnishings. 2. Division 31 - Earth moving for excavation, filling, and rough grading and for subsurface aggregate drainage and drainage backfill materials. 3. Division 32 Section-Landscape Irrigation. 4. Division 32 Section- Turf and Grasses. 1.03 DEFINITIONS A. Backfill: The earth used to replace or the act of replacing earth in an excavation. B. Balled and Burlapped Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they were grown, with ball size not less than sizes indicated and diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required; wrapped with burlap, tied, rigidly supported, and drum laced with twine with the root flare visible at the surface of the ball as recommended by ANSI Z60.1. C. Balled and Potted Stock: Plants dug with firm, natural balls of earth in which they are grown and placed, unbroken, in a container. Ball size is not less than sizes indicated and diameter and depth recommended by ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required. D. Bare-Root Stock: Plants with a well-branched, fibrous-root system developed by transplanting or root pruning, with soil or growing medium removed, and with not less than minimum root spread according to ANSI 260.1 for type and size of plant required. E. Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants grown in a container, with a well-established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for type and size of plant required. F. Duff Layer: The surface layer of native topsoil that is composed of mostly decayed leaves, twigs, and detritus. G. Fabric Bag-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted plants established and grown in- ground in a porous fabric bag with well-established root system reaching sides of fabric bag. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 32 90 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 LANDSCAPING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Fabric bag size is not less than diameter, depth, and volume required by ANSI 260.1 for type and size of plant. H. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil. I.Manufactured Topsoil: Soil produced off-site by homogeneously blending mineral soils or sand with stabilized organic soil amendments to produce topsoil or planting soil. J.Pests: Living organisms that occur where they are not desired, or that cause damage to plants, animals, or people. These include insects, mites, grubs, mollusks (snails and slugs), rodents (gophers,moles, and mice),unwanted plants (weeds), fungi,bacteria, and viruses. K. Planting Area: Areas to be planted. L. Planting Soil: Standardized topsoil; existing, native surface topsoil; existing, in-place surface soil; imported topsoil; or manufactured topsoil that is modified with soil amendments and perhaps fertilizers to produce a soil mixture best for plant growth. M. Subgrade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after excavation is complete, or the top surface of a fill or backfill before planting soil is placed. N. Subsoil: All soil beneath the topsoil layer of the soil profile, and typified by the lack of organic matter and soil organisms. O. Surface Soil: Soil that is present at the top layer of the existing soil profile at the Project site. In undisturbed areas, the surface soil is typically topsoil; but in disturbed areas such as urban environments,the surface soil can be subsoil. 1.04 REFERENCED STANDARDS: A. American Standard for Nursery Stock, approved October 27, 1980 by American National Standards Institute, Inc. B. Hortus Third, 1976- Cornell University 1.05 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated,including soils. 1. Plant Materials: Include quantities, sizes, quality, and sources for plant materials. 2. Pesticides and Herbicides: Include product label and manufacturer's application instructions specific to the Project. 3. Plant Photographs: Include color photographs in digital format of each required species and size of plant material as it will be furnished to the Project. Take photographs from an angle depicting true size and condition of the typical plant to be furnished. Include a scale rod or other measuring device in each photograph. Identify each photograph with the full scientific name of the plant,plant size, and name of the growing nursery. B. Samples for Verification: For each of the following: 1. Trees and Shrubs: Two samples of each variety and size delivered to the site for review. Maintain approved samples on-site as a standard for comparison. 2. Mulch: 1-quart volume of each organic mulch required; in sealed plastic bags labeled with composition of materials by percentage of weight and source of mulch. Each Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be furnished; provide an accurate representation of color,texture, and organic makeup. 3. Mineral Mulch: 2 lb of each mineral mulch required, in sealed plastic bags labeled with source of mulch. Sample shall be typical of the lot of material to be delivered and installed on the site; provide an accurate indication of color, texture, and makeup of the material. 4. Weed Control Barrier: 12 by 12 inches. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 329000 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 LANDSCAPING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 5. Edging Materials and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard samples or color selector, to verify color selected. 1.06 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Qualification Data: For qualified landscape Installer. Include list of similar projects completed by Installer demonstrating Installer's capabilities and experience. Include project names, addresses, and year completed, and include names and addresses of owners' contact persons. B. Maintenance Instructions: Recommended procedures to be established by Owner for maintenance of plants during a calendar year. Include in O&M manual. C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty. 1.07 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS A. Organize O&M materials with title sheet including name and contact information of landscape installer. 1. Provide list of plant materials used along with the following information: a. Common and scientific names. b. Explicit maintenance and care instructions after the Contractor's establishment and maintenance period, for each plant material installed except for annuals. Different species plants may use the same instructions where appropriate. 2. Warranty. B. Coordinate with irrigation installer,if other than landscape installer,to provide recommended watering schedule. (Refer to Division 32- Section "Landscape Irrigation".) 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide plant materials in compliance with applicable State and Federal laws relating to inspection for diseases and insect infestation at growing site. B. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape Installer whose work has resulted in successful establishment of plants. 1. Experience: Five years' experience in landscape installation in addition to requirements in Division 01 Section"Quality Requirements." 2. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time supervisor on Project site when work is in progress. 3. Pesticide Applicator: State licensed, commercial. C. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of plants indicated, complying with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1. D. Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1. Do not prune to obtain required sizes. 1. Trees and Shrubs: Measure with branches and trunks or canes in their normal position. Take height measurements from or near the top of the root flare for field-grown stock and container grown stock. Measure main body of tree or shrub for height and spread; do not measure branches or roots tip to tip. Take caliper measurements 6 inches above the root flare for trees up to 4-inch caliper size, and 12 inches above the root flare for larger sizes. 2. Other Plants: Measure with stems,petioles, and foliage in their normal position. E. Plant Material Observation: Architect may observe plant material either at place of growth or at site before planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, cultivar, size, and quality. Architect retains right to observe trees and shrubs further for size and condition of balls and root systems, pests, disease symptoms, injuries, and latent defects and to reject unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected trees or shrubs immediately from Project site. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 329000 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 LANDSCAPING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials. B. Preparation for Delivery: 1. Balled and Burlapped(B&B)Plants: Dig and prepare shipment in a manner that will not damage roots,branches, shape, and future development. 2. Container Grown Plants: Container shall be sufficiently rigid to hold ball shape and protect root mass during shipping. 3. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery. Provide protective covering of plants during shipping and delivery. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sun scald, drying, wind burn, sweating, whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Protect during delivery to prevent damage to root ball or desiccation of leaves. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. 4. Do not drop plants during delivery and handling. C. Bulk Materials: 1. Do not dump or store bulk materials near structures, utilities, walkways and pavements, or on existing turf areas or plants. 2. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of bulk materials, discharge of soil-bearing water runoff, and airborne dust reaching adjacent properties, water conveyance systems, or walkways. 3. Accompany each delivery of bulk fertilizers and soil amendments with appropriate certificates. D. Delivery: Deliver plants after preparations for planting have been completed, and install immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set plants and trees in their appropriate aspect (sun, filtered sun, or shade), protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist. 1. Packaged materials delivered in original, unopened containers showing weight, certified analysis, name and address of manufacturer, and indication of conformance with state and federal laws if applicable. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at site. 2. Notify Architect of delivery schedule 48 hours in advance so plant material may be observed upon arrival at job site. 3. Do not deliver more plant materials than can be planted in one day unless adequate storage and watering facilities are available on job site. 4. Set balled stock on ground and cover ball with soil, peat moss, sawdust, or other acceptable material. If balled trees and shrubs cannot be planted within 24 hours after delivery to site,protect root balls by heeling in with saw dust or other approved material. 5. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting. 6. Water root systems of plants stored on-site deeply and thoroughly with a fine-mist spray. Water as often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist, but not overly-wet condition. 7. Remove rejected plant material immediately from site. E. Handling: Handle planting stock by root ball. Do not lift, move, adjust to plumb, or otherwise manipulate trees and plants by trunk or stems. 1.10 JOB CONDITIONS: A. Field Measurements: Verify actual grade elevations, service and utility locations, irrigation system components, and dimensions of plantings and construction contiguous with new plantings by field measurements before proceeding with planting work. B. Planting Restrictions: Perform actual planting only when weather and soil conditions are suitable in accordance with locally accepted practice for species indicated. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 329000 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 LANDSCAPING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit planting to be performed when beneficial and optimum results may be obtained. Apply products during favorable weather conditions according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements. D. Protections: 1. Do not move any equipment over existing or newly placed structures without approval of Architect and General Contractor. Provide necessary protections such as board-roading as required. 2. Do not allow equipment and materials movement, or storage, in landscape areas or over root systems. E. Coordination: 1. Coordinate dimensions of limestone benches with hardscaping dimensions. 2. Coordination with Turf Areas (Lawns): Plant trees, shrubs, and other plants after finish grades are established and before planting turf areas unless otherwise indicated. When planting trees, shrubs, and other plants after planting turf areas or in existing turf areas, protect turf and promptly repair damage caused by planting operations. 3. Determine locations of underground utilities and perform work in a manner which will avoid possible damage. Hand excavate,if required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities. Maintain grade stakes and utility marking set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by parties concerned. 4. Coordinate rough and landscape grading, soil preparation, irrigation, and other related units of Work specified in other Sections to ensure that plant material can be supported and installed as indicated. 5. Coordinate watering schedules during installation and until Final Acceptance. Provide deep root watering to keep root balls moist on newly installed trees at a minimum of once every two weeks during summer months or as weather conditions indicate. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace plantings and accessories that fail in materials,workmanship, or growth within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include,but are not limited to,the following: a. Death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from abuse, lack of adequate maintenance, or neglect by Owner, or incidents that are beyond Contractor's control. b. Structural failures including plantings falling or blowing over. c. Faulty performance of tree stabilization and edgings. d. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. 2. Warranty Period: 1 year from Date of Completion of all Planting for the project. 3. Include the following remedial actions as a minimum: a. Immediately remove dead plants and replace unless required to plant in the succeeding planting season. b. Replace plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy condition at end of warranty period. c. A limit of one replacement of each plant will be required except for losses or replacements due to failure to comply with requirements. d. Provide extended warranty for period equal to original warranty period, for replaced plant material, due to failure to comply with requirements. 4. Contractor shall replace plants and trees with same kind and size as originally planted and dispose of dead material at no cost to Owner. Trees should be replaced at start of next planting or digging season. In such cases, remove dead trees immediately. Protect FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 329000 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 LANDSCAPING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 irrigation system and other piping conduit or other work during replacement. Repair any damage immediately. 1.12 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Initial Maintenance Service for Trees and Shrubs: Provide maintenance by skilled employees of landscape Installer. Maintain as required in Part 3 of these specifications. Begin maintenance immediately after plants are installed and continue until plantings are acceptably healthy and well established but for not less than maintenance period below. 1. Maintenance Period: 12 months from date of planting completion. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 PLANT MATERIAL A. General: Plants shall be equal to well-formed No. 1 grade or better nursery stock in accordance with requirements of applicable standards and as noted herein subject to Architect's approval. Furnish nursery-grown plants true to genus, species, variety, cultivar, stem form, shearing, and other features indicated in Plant Schedule or Plant Legend shown on Drawings and complying with ANSI Z60.1; and with healthy root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully branched, healthy, vigorous stock, densely foliated when in leaf and free of disease, pests, eggs, larvae, and defects such as knots, sun scald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement. 1. Trees with damaged, crooked, or multiple leaders; tight vertical branches where bark is squeezed between two branches or between branch and trunk ("included bark"); crossing trunks; cut-off limbs more than 3/4 inch in diameter; or with stem girdling roots will be rejected. 2. Collected Stock: Do not use plants harvested from the wild, from native stands, from an established landscape planting, or not grown in a nursery unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide plants of sizes, grades, and ball or container sizes complying with ANSI Z60.1 for types and form of plants required. Plants of a larger size may be used if acceptable to Architect, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or balls. Listed plant heights are from tops of root balls to nominal tops of plants. 4. Do not prune prior to delivery. B. Vigor: Plants shall be sound, healthy and vigorous, well branched and densely foliated when in leaf. They shall be free of disease, insect pests, eggs, or larvae. They shall have healthy, well-developed root systems. Plants shall be free from physical damage or adverse conditions which would prevent thriving growth. 1. Plants shall have normal, well-developed branches and vigorous, fibrous root systems, conforming to the specifications of the last edition of ANSI Z60.1, Standards for Nursery Stock published by the American Association of Nurserymen,Inc. (A.A.N.) C. Container Stock: Verify that all container stock has been grown in the containers in which delivered for at least six (6) months, but not over two (2) years. Samples must prove to be free of kinked, circling or girdling roots and with no evidence of a pot-bound condition. Do not install container plants that have cracked or broken balls of earth when taken from container. Field grown plants recently transplanted into containers will not be accepted. D. Root-Ball Depth: Furnish trees and shrubs with root balls measured from top of root ball, which shall begin at root flare according to ANSI Z60.1. Root flare shall be visible before planting. E. Ornamental and Shade Trees: No. 1 grade nursery stock healthy, vigorous, full-branched, well-shaped,trunk diameter, and height requirements as specified: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 329000 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 LANDSCAPING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Insure balls are firm, neat, slightly tapered, and well burlapped. Reject trees with loose or broken balls at time of planting 2. Trees will be individually approved or rejected by the Owner's Representative on site. 3. Root balls: Minimum 10-inches in diameter for each 1-inch caliper, measured 6-inches above root ball. 4. Trees: Free of physical damage such as scrapes, bark abrasions, or split or broken branches. Contractor shall prune trees as directed by the Owner's Representative, at no additional fee. 5. Provide trees with full rounded crowns, meeting height and spread standards after pruning. No flat sided trees or trees with open areas on any side will be acceptable. Trees shall be consistently superior in form and branching, and typical of the growth habit of their species unless otherwise specified. F. Shrubs, groundcovers, perennials and annuals: Nursery grown, healthy, vigorous, of normal habit of growth for species, free from disease, insect eggs, and larvae. Specified sizes are before pruning and measured with branches in normal position. Plants to be well rooted and established in the container. 2.02 INORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Iron Sulfate: Granulated ferrous sulfate containing a minimum of 20 percent iron and 10 percent sulfur. B. Sand: Clean,washed,natural or manufactured, and free of toxic materials. C. Diatomaceous Earth: Calcined, 90 percent silica, with approximately 140 percent water absorption capacity by weight. D. Zeolites: Mineral clinoptilolite with at least 60 percent water absorption by weight. 2.03 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Compost: Well-composted, stable, and weed-free organic matter, pH range of 5.5 to 8; moisture content 35 to 55 percent by weight; 100 percent passing through 3/4-inch sieve; soluble salt content of 5 to 10 decisiemens/m; not exceeding 0.5 percent inert contaminants and free of substances toxic to plantings; and as follows: 1. Organic Matter Content: 50 to 60 percent of dry weight. 2. Feedstock: Agricultural, food, or industrial residuals; biosolids; yard trimmings; or source-separated or compostable mixed solid waste. B. Muck Peat: Partially decomposed moss peat, native peat, or reed-sedge peat, finely divided or of granular texture, with a pH range of 6 to 7.5, and having a water-absorbing capacity of 1100 to 2000 percent. 2.04 FERTILIZERS A. Fertilizers, General: Incorporate at rates and composition as recommended for planting beds by manufacturer and plant nursery for local conditions and plant species indicated. 1. Where such recommendations are not available, determine by soil testing. B. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea formaldehyde,phosphorous, and potassium. C. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted complete fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-insoluble nitrogen,phosphorus, and potassium. D. Chelated Iron: Commercial-grade FeEDDHA for dicots and woody plants, and commercial- grade FeDTPA for ornamental grasses and monocots. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 329000 - 7 MAY 2, 2023 LANDSCAPING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2.05 PLANTING SOILS A. Planting Soil: 1. Planting Soil for planting beds and trees: Living Earth Technologies planting mix "Professional Bedding Soil", or other comparable planting soil as approved by Architect. B. Native Topsoil: Existing, native surface topsoil formed under natural conditions with the duff layer retained during excavation process and stockpiled on-site. Verify suitability of native surface topsoil to produce viable planting soil. Clean soil of roots,plants, sod, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. 1. Supplement with imported topsoil of similar quality when native quantities of satisfactory material are insufficient. C. Planting Mixes: Mix existing, native surface topsoil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the following quantities to produce final planting soil: 1. At trees, incorporate fertilizer into native topsoil at recommended rate and fill excavation to 6"-8" from grade. 2. At tree planting and landscape beds, mix planting soil and topsoil in equal quantities by volume. Incorporate fertilizer into planting mix at recommended rate. Apply at depth of 6"-8"layer of mixed soil. 2.06 MULCHES A. Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and shrubs, consisting of one of the following: 1. Shredded Wood Mulch: Shredded Native Hardwood. a. Size Range: Fine Shredded. b. Color: Tan. 2.07 WEED-CONTROL BARRIERS A. Nonwoven Geotextile Filter Fabric: Polypropylene or polyester fabric, 3 oz./sq. yd. minimum, composed of fibers formed into a stable network so that fibers retain their relative position. Fabric shall be inert to biological degradation and resist naturally-encountered chemicals, alkalis, and acids. 1. For beds not utilizing ground cover, provide Henry Company "HE183" yellow glass fabric, or equal. 2. For beds utilizing ground cover,provide "Mirafi 140 N" filter fabric, or equal. 3. Provide with staples, spikes and accessories of types as recommended by fabric Manufacturer for complete installation for applications indicated. 2.08 PESTICIDES A. General: Pesticide registered and approved by EPA, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and of type recommended by manufacturer for each specific problem and as required for Project conditions and application. Do not use restricted pesticides unless authorized in writing by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Pre-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling the germination or growth of weeds within planted areas at the soil level directly below the mulch layer. C. Post-Emergent Herbicide (Selective and Non-Selective): Effective for controlling weed growth that has already germinated. 2.09 TREE STABILIZATION MATERIALS A. Root-Ball Stabilization Materials: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 329000 - 8 MAY 2, 2023 LANDSCAPING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Upright Stakes and Horizontal Hold-Down: Rough-sawn, sound, new softwood, free of knots, holes, cross grain, and other defects, 2-by-2-inch nominal by length indicated; stakes pointed at one end. 2. Wood Screws: 2-1/2" drywall screws,unfinished. B. Stakes and Guys: 1. Upright and Guy Stakes: Metal tee posts,min. 4-foot height above grade. 2. Flexible Ties: Wide rubber or elastic bands or straps of length required to reach stakes or turnbuckles. 3. Guys and Tie Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1, galvanized-steel wire, two-strand, twisted, 0.106 inch in diameter. a. Guy Cables at trees 5" and larger in caliper: Five-strand, 3/16-inch- diameter, galvanized-steel cable, with zinc-coated [turnbuckles] [compression springs], a minimum of 3 inches long,with two 3/8-inch galvanized eyebolts. 4. Tree-Tie Webbing: UV-resistant polypropylene or nylon webbing with brass grommets. 2.10 LANDSCAPE EDGINGS A. Aluminum Edging: Standard-profile extruded-aluminum edging, ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063- T6, fabricated in standard lengths with interlocking sections with loops stamped from face of sections to receive stakes. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Cury-Rite,Inc. b. Permaloc Corporation. c. Russell,J. D. Company(The). d. Sure-Loc Edging Corporation. 2. Edging Size: 1/8 inch wide by 4 inches deep. 3. Stakes: Aluminum, ASTM B 221, Alloy 6061-T6, approximately 1-1/2 inches wide by 12 inches long. 4. Finish: Manufacturer's standard Black paint. 2.11 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS A. Wood Pressure-Preservative Treatment: AWPA C2, with waterborne preservative for soil and freshwater use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and containing no arsenic; including ammoniacal copper arsenate, ammoniacal copper zinc arsenate, and chromated copper arsenate. B. Root Barriers: Black, molded, modular panels manufactured with 50 percent recycled polyethylene plastic with ultraviolet inhibitors, 85 mils thick,with vertical root deflecting ribs protruding 3/4 inch out from panel, and each panel 18 inches wide. C. Antidesiccant: Water-insoluble emulsion, permeable moisture retarder, film forming, for trees and shrubs. Deliver in original, sealed, and fully labeled containers and mix according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Burlap: Non-synthetic,biodegradable. E. Tree Wrapping Material: Do not use. F. Tree Paint: Waterproofed, asphalt based paint with antiseptic properties, manufactured for use on tree wounds, use only at pruning of existing trees, for branches 4" diameter and greater. G. Planter Drainage Gravel: Washed, sound crushed stone or gravel complying with ASTM D 448 for Size No. 8. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 329000 - 9 MAY 2, 2023 LANDSCAPING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 H. Landscape bed drainage materials: 1. PVC Pipe and fittings: Schedule 40. 2. Plastic Landscape Drains / Inlets: 6" round plastic catch basin and grate, or other larger sizes where required for adequate drainage and approved by Architect. 3. Free Draining Aggregate: As specified in Division 33 "Storm Water Utilities and evenly graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel or crushed stone and natural sand with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2" sieve and 0-5 percent passing a No. 50 sieve where no specification is provided in Division 33. 2.12 MACHINERY AND EQUIPMENT A. Pruning and grinding tools shall be maintained in safe working condition; cutting edges shall be kept sharp to make clean cuts at all times. B. Pesticide and herbicide application equipment maintained in safe working condition; clean and operational to provide even application at recommended rates. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 LANDSCAPE BED DRAINAGE REQUIREMENTS A. Discrepancies: Submit in writing, all discrepancies in the Drawings or Specifications, obstructions on the site, or prior work done by others, which Contractor feels precludes maintaining proper drainage; include description of all work required for correction or relief of said discrepancies. B. Prior to placement of concrete, the landscape installer and General Contractor shall jointly review drawings including landscaping, paving, and grading, and shall identify all locations that require landscape bed drainage and coordinate landscape bed drainage requirements and piping to be installed through or under sidewalks and site paving. C. Coordination of drainage of landscape beds is a requirement of the work of this Section. Where not specifically indicated in Drawings, installation of the following drainage provisions is also a part of the scope of this Section. 1. The following locations require landscape bed drainage: a. Where indicated in Drawings. b. Where landscape beds are bounded on all sides by building construction, sidewalks, site paving, or similar impervious cosntruction; and finish grade does not allow the landscape area to drain across adjacent paving without further drainage accommodation. 2. The following provisions shall be made for drainage: a. Where specific drainage provisions are indicated in Drawings, provide drainage for those landscaping beds in configuration and sizes indicated. b. Where not specifically indicated in Drawings,provide the following: 1) Where bounded on down-slope side of the landscape bed by sidewalk, drainage may be provided by installing 1" PVC drain pipes cast into the sidewalk at 10' intervals. At landscape bed side,wrap and tie filter fabric on the end of pipe with and bury end of pipe in free draining gravel, below mulch level. On downslope side of sidewalk, daylight end of pipe just at finish grade. 2) Where the above drainage provision is not feasible, install plastic landscape drainage inlets at 20' on center and within 10' of sides of beds. Install inlets with 2" PVC to daylight through nearest concrete curb to drive aisle; or where approved by Civil Engineer, to tie into nearest other[ surface or] subsurface stone drainage. a) Where there is not sufficient fall to such locations, coordinate with Architect for alternate daylight termination for landscape bed drain pipes. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 32 90 00 - 10 MAY 2, 2023 LANDSCAPING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 b) Set inlets at finish grade of planting soil and slope landscape beds slightly to drain inlets. 3. Where drainage is not detailed in Drawings, Contractor is responsible to design and install landscape bed drainage, and this is part of the landscape installer's base scope of services. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Examine grade or subgrade upon which work is to be performed. Verify grade elevations, that grading is sufficiently smooth, and that bed areas are left the appropriate number of inches low to receive indicated planting soil. Observe conditions under which work is to be performed. B. Examine areas to receive plants for compliance with requirements and conditions affecting installation and performance. 1. Verify that no foreign or deleterious material or liquid such as paint, paint washout, concrete slurry, concrete layers or chunks, cement, plaster, oils, gasoline, diesel fuel, paint thinner, turpentine, tar,roofing compound, or acid has been deposited in soil within a planting area. 2. Do not mix or place soils and soil amendments in frozen,wet, or muddy conditions. 3. Suspend soil spreading, grading, and tilling operations during periods of excessive soil moisture until the moisture content reaches acceptable levels to attain the required results. 4. Uniformly moisten excessively dry soil that is not workable and which is too dusty. C. if contamination by foreign or deleterious material or liquid is present in soil within a planting area, remove the soil and contamination as directed by Architect and replace with new planting soil. D. Notify General Contractor of any unsatisfactory conditions. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.03 SITE PREPARATION A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities and turf areas and existing plants from damage caused by planting operations. B. Install erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. C. All lumps, clods, and debris over 2-inches in diameter shall be broken up to smaller size or removed from the Work site. Do not proceed with work until all grading and related work is completed in a satisfactory manner so that the landscape installation can proceed. 3.04 PLANTING BED PREPARATION A. Loosen subgrade of planting areas to a minimum depth of 8 inches. Remove stones larger than 1-1/2 inches in any dimension and sticks,roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and legally dispose of them off Owner's property. Smooth out subgrade ready to receive planting mix. B. Apply planting mix soil, fertilizer, and necessary soil amendments on surface, and thoroughly blend planting soil. Do not spread soil if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. 1. Add commercial fertilizer, at a rate of four pounds per 100 SF of bed area and mix thoroughly. a. Fertilizer type(s) as recommended for plant types indicated, and according to locally accepted industry practices. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 32 90 00 - 11 MAY 2, 2023 LANDSCAPING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 b. Delay mixing fertilizer with planting mix soil if planting will not proceed within a few days. 2. Spread prepared planting soil mix to a depth of 8 inches but not less than required to meet finish grades after natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen, muddy, or excessively wet. C. For Azalea beds, modify procedure above to provide twelve inches deep of the following soil mix: 1. 4 parts peat(hyphum or sphagnum only). 2. 1 part sharp sand. 3. Fertilizer as above. D. Finish Grading: Grade planting areas to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. 1. Before planting, obtain Architect's acceptance of finish grading; restore planting areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading. E. Wet soil mix as required to optimum moisture content for planting operations. F. Install weed-control filter fabric according to manufacturer's written instructions. Completely cover area to be mulched, overlapping edges a minimum of 6 inches and secure seams and edges with galvanized landscaping fabric pins or staples. 3.05 PLANTING IN PLANTERS A. Coordinate planting operations with irrigation installation. B. Place a layer of drainage gravel at least 4 inches thick in bottom of planter. Cover bottom with filter fabric and wrap filter fabric 4 inches up on all sides. Duct tape along the entire top edge of the filter fabric, to secure the filter fabric against the sides during the soil-filling process. C. Fill planter with lightweight on-structure planting soil. Place soil in lightly compacted layers to an elevation of 2-1/2 inches below top of planter. Water thoroughly to settle and to verify planter is draining properly. Add planting soil on top of settled soil to within: 1. 2-1/2 inches below top of planter, for installation indicated for mulch. (Planters shall receive organic mulch unless specifically indicated otherwise). 2. 1-1/2 inches below top of planter,for planters indicated not to be mulched. D. Plant as indicated in other articles. E. Install 2" mulch layer unless otherwise indicated. 3.06 SHRUB AND GROUNDCOVER PLANTING A. Place plants in position on bed areas before containers or wrapping have been removed. B. Obtain approval from Architect of plant positions prior to planting. Provide not less than 3 days notice of time planting layout will be ready for review. 1. The Architect reserves the right to require to interchange or shift locations of plants prior to planting. C. Plant in locations and spacings indicated. Cut filter fabric in "x" shape cuts and remove portion of fabric where required for stems. Excavate the shrub or groundcover pit to depth of root ball and 2 times diameter of root ball, setting plants with tops of balls even with tops of beds, and compact soil carefully around each plant ball. Use planting soil mix for backfill. Work soil around roots to eliminate air pockets and leave a slight saucer indentation around plants to hold water. D. Water thoroughly after planting,taking care not to cover plant crowns with wet soil. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 32 90 00 - 12 MAY 2, 2023 LANDSCAPING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 E. Carefully prune plants to remove dead or broken branches and hand-rake bed areas to smooth even surfaces. F. Apply specified mulch. 3.07 PLANTING AREA MULCHING A. Mulch backfilled surfaces of planting areas and other areas indicated. 1. Organic Mulch: Apply 4-inch average thickness of organic mulch where indicated over whole surface of planting area, and finish level with adjacent finish grades, or 1/4" below adjacent concrete or pavers. 2. Mineral Mulch: Apply to thickness shown in Drawings, or where not shown to 2-inch thickness (4-inch maximum thickness), of mineral mulch extending over whole surface of planting area, and finish level with adjacent finish grades where bounded by concrete or pavers, or 1/4"below top of adjacent metal edging. 3. Do not place mulch within 3 inches of trunks or stems. 3.08 EXCAVATION FOR TREES AND SHRUBS A. Planting Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular planting pits with sides sloping inward at a 45- degree angle. Excavations with vertical sides are not acceptable. Trim perimeter of bottom leaving center area of bottom raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage away from center. Do not further disturb base. Ensure that root ball will sit on undisturbed base soil to prevent settling. Scarify sides of planting pit smeared or smoothed during excavation. 1. Excavate at least two times as wide as ball diameter. 2. Do not excavate deeper than depth of the root ball, measured from the root flare to the bottom of the root ball. 3. 1f area under the plant was initially dug too deep, add soil to raise it to the correct level and thoroughly tamp the added soil to prevent settling. 4. Maintain required angles of repose of adjacent materials. Do not excavate subgrades of adjacent paving, structures,hardscapes, or other new or existing improvements. 5. Maintain supervision of excavations during working hours. 6. Keep excavations covered or otherwise protected when unattended by Installer's personnel. B. Topsoil removed from excavations may be used in planting soil mix as defined in part 2. Do not incorporate subsoils into planting soil mix. C. Obstructions: Notify Architect if unexpected rock or obstructions detrimental to trees or shrubs are encountered in excavations. D. Drainage: Notify Architect if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected water seepage or retention in tree or shrub planting pits. 3.09 TREE PLANTING A. Stake location of trees for approval by Architect prior to excavating tree pits. B. Tree Planting: 1. Percolation test: After approval of tree locations, excavate pit and perform percolation test. The pit should be the same depth as the height of the root ball or slightly less so that the root ball sits no more than one inch above surrounding grade. The pit should be dug pits 12-inches or more greater in diameter than root balls. Fill excavated pits with water and wait until next day. If the water level has not dropped at least six inches within 12 to 24 hours, then install tree drainage system as detailed and specified. If the water level drops more than six inches, a tree drainage system may not be required. An Owner's Representative must be present to monitor and record the results of the percolation test. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 32 90 00 - 13 MAY 2, 2023 LANDSCAPING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Receive approval from Owner's Representative for extent and layout of proposed tree drainage system. 2. Install tree drainage system as specified if needed. 3. Till soil to 12-inch depth within 10-foot radius of tree. 4. Remove soil and trim any girdling roots at the base of the tree trunk to expose the tree's natural root flare prior to installation in the tree pit. Remove injured roots by cutting cleanly; do not break. 5. Excavate the tree pit to allow for top of tree root ball at the root flare to be 1-inch above the finished grade. 6. Backfill to depths of root balls with planting media consisting of 4 parts native soil to 1 part compost. Coordinate required depth in areas of paver installation. Carefully settle by watering to prevent air pockets. All backfilling shall be done in maximum of 9-inch layers and watered in thoroughly. Backfill to 1" below adjacent grade, in preparation for top dressing. 7. If rock, concrete, or other below grade obstruction is encountered: a. Architect may select alternative location if possible. b. Rock shall be removed to a minimum of 6-inches below the plant if an alternative location cannot be selected. C. When planting on slopes, set the plant so the root flare on the uphill side is flush with the surrounding soil on the slope; the edge of the root ball on the downhill side will be above the surrounding soil. Apply enough soil to cover the downhill side of the root ball, and to blend into adjacent grades at slope no greater than 3 units horizontal to 1 unit vertical unless specifically approved otherwise by Architect. D. Complete tree stabilization as detailed immediately after trees are planted. E. Top Dressing: After planting has been completed and approved, top dress bed areas and tree root balls first with 2-inches compost to settle to a depth of 1-inch, and forin compost into tree watering ring. Then fill inside of watering ring with indicated mulch to a minimum 2- inches depth. 1. Delay this operation until near final acceptance, or else repair aesthetic deficiencies just prior to Architect's inspection. 2. Hold compost and mulch back 4 to 6 inches to expose the flare of the tree trunk at the root ball. 3.10 TREE STABILIZATION A. Stabilize trees immediately after planting. B. Install root-ball stabilization as follows for all trees 3" and greater in caliper unless otherwise indicated. 1. Stabilize trees 3" and greater in caliper with four (4) 2x2 x minimum 4' long, new untreated wood stakes, with minimum 18" of tapered end. Install root ball stabilization stakes adjacent to the root ball and extending below the base of the root ball to a depth that firmly anchors the tree and root ball to the unexcavated soil. Remove excess of stake length above grade as required so that root ball stabilization stakes will be concealed by mulch layer. Attach two 2x2 untreated wood cross members to the four stakes with 2- 1/2" long drywall screws per standard City of Plano details. The cross members shall be oriented parallel to the prevailing wind at the project site and shall be shall be four feet long or extend to a minimum of 8" beyond the excavation of the tree into the undisturbed edge of the tree pit. 2. Stake trees of less than 2-inch caliper only as required to prevent wind tip out. C. Install trunk stabilization (staking) as follows unless otherwise indicated: Stake all trees not stabilized by root ball stabilization unless otherwise indicated. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 32 90 00 - 14 MAY 2, 2023 LANDSCAPING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake trees of 2- through 5-inch caliper. Stake trees of less than 2-inch caliper only as required to prevent wind tip out. Use a minimum of two stakes for trees of 2-1/2 inch caliper and below and minimum of 3 stakes for larger trees. Space stakes equally around trees. Stakes shall be of length required to penetrate at least 18 inches below bottom of backfilled excavation and to extend to at least 3 feet above grade or to one-third of trunk height,whichever is higher. Set vertical stakes and space to avoid penetrating root balls or root masses. a. At trees with top-heavy canopies,use metal tee posts in lieu of wood posts. 2. Support trees by one of the following methods. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree. a. Using bands of flexible ties at contact points with tree trunk. b. Using two strands of tie wire, connected to the brass grommets of tree-tie webbing at contact points with tree trunk. 3.11 TURFSTONE INSTALLATION A. Install concrete turtstone per details on drawings. Plant honeysuckle in voids of turfstone and backfill with bed preparation as specified in 3.2 above. 3.12 EDGING INSTALLATION A. Install metal edging per Manufacturer's installation instructions, in locations indicated and to separate grass areas from ground cover and landscape bed areas. Set edging as indicated in true lines as designed with top of edging 1-inch above finish grade. 3.13 TREE AND SHRUB PRUNING A. Newly planted materials pruning: Unless directed by Owner's Representative, do not cut tree leaders, and remove only injured or dead branches and do not prune for shape. Any pruning shall be in accordance with horticultural best practices. If after pruning, the tree or shrub become misshapen or changed in appearance,the plant will be rejected. 1. Additionally prune, thin, and shape trees and shrubs only if so directed by Architect or Owner's Representative. B. Maintain cutting tools in sharp condition at all times as required to make clean cuts. Cuts should be made slightly out of vertical plane and at angles so as to shed rain and avoid collecting water. Tie off and lower branches to ground in controlled manner. Do not allow cross traffic of any kind during pruning operations below work areas where branches may fall;provide designated spotter,temporary barriers and warning signs as required. C. Do not apply pruning paint to wounds of newly planted trees and shrubs, or to smaller wounds of existing trees to be pruned. Apply pruning paint to wounds 4" diameter and larger as directed by Architect. 3.14 MAINTENANCE BY CONTRACTOR A. The Contractor is responsible for maintenance of all trees, shrubs, ground cover and turf, including all necessary watering, cultivating, weeding and spraying until substantial completion of the entire project. Plant materials shall be kept in a healthy and vigorous condition with all bed areas kept neat. B. Water will be available on site at no expense to the Contractor. Hose and other watering equipment required for maintenance by Contractor shall be furnished by Contractor at his expense. Additional water will be available as sprinkler system becomes operational, but this in no way relieves the Contractor of maintenance of plant material until acceptance by the Owner. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 32 90 00 - 15 MAY 2, 2023 LANDSCAPING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 C. Grass areas shall be mowed at regular intervals to maintain a maximum height of two inches. Do not cut more than 1/3 of grass blade at any one mowing. Remove clippings after mowing. 3.15 MAINTENANCE AND ESTABLISHMENT A. General: Maintain plantings by pruning, cultivating, watering, weeding, fertilizing, mulching, restoring planting saucers, adjusting and repairing tree-stabilization devices, resetting to proper grades or vertical position, and performing other operations as required to establish healthy, viable plantings. Spray or treat as required to keep trees and shrubs free of insects and disease. 1. Trees and plants shall be routinely inspected for distress due to pests, lack of water or flooding, and other natural causes, and for distress or damage caused by construction activities. Notify General Contractor immediately at first sign of distress due to the construction activities of other trades. B. Fill in soil subsidence that may occur because of settling or other processes. Replace mulch materials damaged or lost due to subsidence. C. Watering: 1. Trees and large shrubs: Deep root water all existing trees in protected areas and newly transplanted trees once every two weeks during the summer and once a month during the winter, during the duration of the project and until Final Acceptance. Adjust watering due to the amount of rainfall. However, unless it has rained at least '/Z-inch since the last watering, continue to deep root water. 2. Other Plants: Water plants routinely as required for establishment and to maintain plants in vigorous condition. Where watering will be by irrigation system coordinate with irrigation installer, if other thand landscape installer, to adjust watering schedules as required. D. Protected Existing Trees and New Trees: Maintain existing protected trees until acceptance of plantings and after construction activity that may affect existing trees is completed. Maintain new trees until end of establishment and maintenance period,whichever is later. 1. Any fire ant mounds around or on top of a tree root zone shall be treated immediately and the mound removed physically. Do not allow the mound to build on the tree trunk as this will cover the tree root flare and possibly cause injury or death. Ensure that any chemical application to the fire ant mound is safe for application atop tree root zones. 2. Trees: Pruning will be carried out by experienced pruning personnel. a. Receive approval in the field for extent of pruning from Owner's Representative. b. Sterilize pruning tools between individual plants, especially in the genus Quercus. Paint all wounds greater than 4" diameter on plants of the genus Quercus with wound paint as soon as possible. Paint deliberate wounds (pruning) within 1 hour. Clean cut and paint accidental wounds (storm or equipment damage, or vandalism) as soon as they are observed. c. Raise limbs to an acceptable height as approved by the Architect. Raise limbs to seven foot height for trees located within 10-feet of vehicular paving or sidewalk. d. Remove dead wood,broken branches,mistletoe and suckers from trees as needed. E. Herbicides and Pesticides: Apply treatments as required to keep plant materials, planted areas, and soils free of pests and pathogens or disease. Establish plantings in continuous weed-free condition until acceptance of planting. Use of herbicidies should be limited to use only when weeds are pervasive throughout a landscape bed; hand weed to the maximum amount feasible. Allow for a minimum of 2 applications of selective herbicide, and one application of pre-emergent herbicide. Apply pesticides as required to treat for specific pest activity observed before substantial damage to plant material. However, limit application of pesticides to the minimum necessary to ensure plant health. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 32 90 00 - 16 MAY 2, 2023 LANDSCAPING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1. Regard all herbicides and pesticides as hazardous to health and dangerous to the environment; chemicals should be handled with extreme caution and only by experienced personnel. Read and follow all label directions and apply in manner to comply with local, state and federal guidelines and manufacturer's instructions. Limit public access to any area recently treated. 2. Coordinate applications with Owner's operations and others in proximity to the Work. Contractor shall obtain prior approval from the Architect before applying herbicides and pesticides. a. Due to potentially toxic materials, do not schedule application of herbicides or pesticides at Owner-occupired site without first notifying Owner and receiving Owner's written approval to apply at the time indicated. 3. The Contractor shall be held solely responsible for plant loss due to the application of herbicides. Any loss of plant material shall be replaced at Contractor's sole expense and all plant replacements shall be of the same species and size of the existing plant materials. F. Fertilizing: Apply additional fertilizer during the establishment and maintenance periods, as deemed by Contractor to be beneficial to promote health and establishment of plantings. Fertilizers shall be of type and composition as determined by Contractor to establish plants in vigorous condition, and to address nutrient deficiencies observed by Contractor during his routine inspections. 3.16 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION A. During planting, keep adjacent paving and construction clean and work area in an orderly condition. Do not obstruct access to occupied buildings. Clean paving and adjacent areas at end of each day's operations. B. Protect plants from damage due to landscape operations and operations of other contractors and trades. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. Treat,repair, or replace damaged plantings. C. After installation and before Substantial Completion,remove nursery tags, nursery stakes, tie tape, labels, wire,burlap, and other debris from plant material, planting areas, and the Project site. 3.17 DISPOSAL A. Remove surplus soil and waste material including excess subsoil, unsuitable soil, trash, and debris and legally dispose of thein off Owner's property. END OF SECTION 32 90 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 32 90 00 - 17 MAY 2, 2023 LANDSCAPING DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 33 05 05.10 INSTALLATION OF WATER PIPE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary for the installation of all pipe required to complete the potable water lines. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Art. TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. PART PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE A. Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 2500 p.s.i. at 28 days and shall be in accordance with Subsection 03 30 02 "Normal Weight Aggregate Concrete" 2.02 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE: See Subsection')') 05 31.16. 2.03 DUCTILE IRON PIPE: See Subsection 33 05 19. 2.04 GATE VALVES FOR WATERLINES: See Subsection 33 14 19. 2.05 FIRE HYDRANTS: See Subsection 33 14 19.13. 2.06 SEPARATION OF WATER AND SEWER LINES A. Location of Waterlines: a. The following rules apply to installations of waterlines, wastewater mains or laterals, and other conveyances/appurtenances identified as potential sources of contamination. Furthermore, all ratings specified shall be defined by ASTM or AWWA standards unless stated otherwise. New mains, service lines, or laterals are those that are installed where no main, service line, or lateral previously existed, or where existing mains, service lines, or laterals are replaced with pipes of different size or material. (1) When new potable water distribution lines are constructed, they shall be installed no closer than nine feet in all directions to wastewater collection facilities. All separation distances shall be measured from the outside surface of each of the respective pieces. (2) Potable water distribution lines and wastewater mains or laterals that form parallel utility lines shall be installed in separate trenches. (3) No physical connection shall be made between drinking water supply and a sewer line. Any appurtenance shall be designed and constructed so as to prevent any possibility of sewage entering the drinking water system. (4) Where the nine-foot separation distance cannot be achieved, the following criteria shall apply. (A)New waterline installation—parallel lines. (i) Where a new potable waterline parallel an existing, non-pressure or pressure rated wastewater main or lateral and the licensed professional engineer licensed in the State of Texas is able to determine that the existing wastewater main or lateral is not leaking, the new potable waterline shall be located at least two feet above the existing wastewater main or lateral, measured vertically, and at least four feet away, measured horizontally, from FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 33 05 05.10 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 INSTALLATION OF WATER PIPE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 the existing wastewater main or lateral. Every effort shall be exerted not to disturb the bedding and backfill of the existing wastewater main or lateral. (ii) Where a new potable waterline parallels an existing pressure rated wastewater main or lateral and it cannot be determined by the licensed professional engineer if the existing line is leaking, the existing wastewater main or lateral shall be replaced with at least 150 psi pressure rated pipe. The new potable waterline shall be located at least two feet above the new wastewater line, measured vertically, and at least four feet away, measured horizontally, from the replaced wastewater main or lateral. (iii)Where a new potable waterline parallels a new wastewater main, the wastewater main or lateral shall be constructed of at least 150 psi pressure rated pipe. The new potable waterline shall be located at least two feet above the wastewater main or lateral, measured vertically, and at least four feet away,measured horizontally, from the wastewater main or lateral. (B) New waterline installation—crossing lines. (i) Where a new potable waterline crosses an existing, non-pressure rated wastewater main or lateral, one segment of the waterline pipe shall be centered over the wastewater main or lateral such that the joints of the waterline pipe are equidistant and at least nine feet horizontally from the centerline of the wastewater main or lateral. The potable waterline shall be at least two feet above the wastewater main or lateral. Whenever possible, the crossing shall be centered between the joints of the wastewater main or lateral, if the existing wastewater main or lateral is disturbed or shows signs of leaking, it shall be replaced for at least nine feet in both directions (18 feet total)with at least 150 psi pressure rated pipe. (ii) Where a new potable waterline crosses an existing,pressure rated wastewater main or lateral, one segment of the waterline pipe shall be centered over the wastewater main or lateral such that the joints of the waterline pipe are equidistant and at least nine feet horizontally from the centerline of the wastewater main or lateral. The potable waterline shall be at least six inches above the wastewater main or lateral. Whenever possible, the crossing shall be centered between the joints of the wastewater main or lateral. If the existing wastewater main or lateral shows signs of leaking, it shall be replaced for at least nine feet in both directions (18 feet total) with at least 150 psi pressure rated pipe. (iii)Where a new potable waterline crossed a new, non-pressure rated wastewater main or lateral and the standard pipe segment length of the wastewater main or lateral is at least 18 feet, one segment of the waterline pipe shall be centered over the wastewater main or lateral such that the joints of the waterline pipe are equidistant and at least nine feet horizontally from the centerline of the wastewater main or lateral. The potable waterline shall be at least two feet above the wastewater main or lateral. Whenever possible, the crossing shall be centered between the joints of the wastewater main or lateral. The wastewater pipe shall be a minimum pipe stiffness of 115 psi at 5.0% deflection. The wastewater main or lateral shall be embedded in cement stabilized sand (see clause (vi) of this subparagraph) for the total length of one pipe segment plus 12 inches beyond the joint on each end. (iv)Where a new potable waterline crosses a new, non-pressure rated wastewater main or lateral and a standard length of the wastewater pipe is less than 18 feet in length, the potable water pipe segment shall be centered over the wastewater line. The materials and method of installation shall conform with one of the following option. FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 33 05 05.10 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 INSTALLATION OF WATER PIPE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 (I) Within nine feet horizontally of either side of the waterline, the wastewater pipe and joints shall be constructed with pipe material having a minimum pressure rating of at least 150 psi. An absolute minimum vertical separation distance of two feet shall be provided. The wastewater main or lateral shall be located below the waterline. (II) All sections of wastewater main or lateral within nine feet horizontally of the waterline shall be encased in an 18-foot (or longer) section of pipe. Flexible encasing pipe shall have a minimum pipe stiffness of 115 psi at 5.0% deflection. The encasing pipe shall be centered on the waterline and shall be at least two nominal pipe diameters larger than the wastewater main or lateral. The space around the carrier pipe shall be supported at five-foot (or less) intervals with spacers or be filled to the springline with washed sand. Each end of the casing shall be sealed with watertight non-shrink cement grout or a manufactured watertight seal. An absolute minimum separation distance of six inches between the encasement pipe and the waterline shall be provided. The wastewater line shall be located below the waterline. (11I) When a new waterline crosses under a wastewater main or lateral, the waterline shall be encased as described for wastewater mains or laterals in subclause (11) of this clause or constructed of ductile iron or steel pipe with mechanical or welded joints as appropriate. An absolute minimum separation distance of one foot between the waterline and the wastewater main or lateral shall be provided. Both the waterline and wastewater main or lateral must pass a pressure and leakage test as specified in AW WA C600 standards. (v) Where a new potable waterline crosses a new, pressure rated wastewater main or lateral, one segment of the waterline pipe shall be centered over the wastewater line such that the joints of the waterline pipe are equidistant and at least nine feet horizontally from the center line of the wastewater main or lateral. The potable waterline shall be at least six inches above the wastewater main or lateral. Whenever possible, the crossing shall be centered between the joints of the wastewater main or lateral. The wastewater pipe shall have a minimum pressure rating of at least 150 psi. The wastewater main or lateral shall be embedded in cement stabilized sand (see clause (vi) of this subparagraph) for the total length of one pipe segment plus 12 inches beyond the joint of each end. (vi)Where cement stabilized sand bedding is required, the cement stabilized sand shall have a minimum of 10% cement per cubic yard of cement stabilized sand mixture,based on loose dry weight volume (at least 2.5 bags of cement per cubic yard of mixture). The cement stabilized sand bedding shall be a minimum of six inches above and four inches below the wastewater main or lateral. The use of brown coloring in cement stabilized sand for wastewater main or lateral bedding is recommended for the identification of pressure rated wastewater mains during future construction. (5) Waterline and wastewater main or lateral manhole or cleanout separation. The separation distance from a potable waterline to a wastewater main or lateral manhole or cleanout shall be a minimum of nine feet. Where the nine foot separation distance cannot be achieved, the potable waterline shall be encased in a joint of at least 150 FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 33 05 05.10 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 INSTALLATION OF WATER PIPE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 psi pressure class pipe at least 18 feet long and two nominal sizes larger than the new conveyance. The space around the carrier pipe shall be supported at five foot intervals with spacers or be filled to the spring line with washed sand. The encasement pipe shall be centered on the crossing and both ends sealed with cement grout or manufactured sealant. (6) Location of fire hydrants. Five hydrants shall not be installed within nine feet vertically or horizontally of any wastewater main, wastewater lateral, or wastewater service line regardless of construction. (7) Location of potable or raw water supply or suction lines. Suction mains to pumping equipment shall not cross wastewater mains, wastewater lateral or wastewater service lines. Raw water supply lines shall not be installed within five feet of any tile or concrete wastewater main,wastewater lateral, or wastewater service line. (8) Proximity of septic tank drain fields. Waterlines shall not be installed closer than ten feet to septic tank drain fields. B. Sanitary Precautions and Disinfection: a. Sanitary precautions, flushing, disinfection procedures, and microbiological sampling as prescribed in AWWA standards for disinfecting water mains shall be followed in laying waterlines. (1) Pipe shall not be laid in water or placed where it can be flooded with water or sewage during its storage or installation. (2) Special precautions must be taken when waterlines are laid under any flowing or intennittent stream or semi permanent body of water such as marsh, bay, or estuary. In these cases, the water main shall be installed in a separate watertight pipe encasement and valves must be provided on each side of the crossing with facilities to allow the underwater portion of the system to be isolated and tested to determine that there are no leaks in the underwater line. Alternately, and with the permission of the executive director,the watertight pipe encasement may be omitted. (3) New mains shall be thoroughly disinfected in accordance with AWWA Standard C651 and then flushed and sampled before being placed in service. Samples shall be collected for microbiological analysis to check the effectiveness of the disinfection procedure. Sampling shall be repeated if contamination persists. A minimum of one sample for each 1,000 feet of completed waterline will be required or at the next available sampling point beyond 1,000 feet as designated by the design engineer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. All water system materials and construction shall comply with State Health, TCEQ and City of Corpus Christi Water Distribution System Standards in addition to these specifications. City standards shall govern if a conflict occurs. 3.02 HANDLING OF MATERIAL A. Handling and Care: Pipe and other materials shall be unloaded at the point of delivery, hauled to and distributed at the project site by the Contractor. They shall at all times be handled with care and in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Whether moved by hand, skidways or hoists, material shall not be dropped or bumped against other material or objects already on the ground. Care shall be taken not to scratch the surface of P.V.C. pipe. Excessive scratching shall be considered cause for rejection of P.V.C. pipe. FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 33 05 05.10 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 INSTALLATION OF WATER PIPE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Distribution at Site of Work: Material may be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be used in construction provided it is to be incorporated into the work within 10 days. The Contractor shall distribute the material in such a manner so as not to cause the public any undue inconvenience. The interior of all pipe and accessories shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter at all times. C. Storing Material: Any material delivered to the project site that is not to be incorporated into the work within 10 days shall be stored on suitable blocks or platfonns off the ground. Stacking of materials shall be done in such a manner that the material is not damaged. 3.03 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE A. General: All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades. Fittings, valves and hydrants shall be at the required locations and with joints centered, spigots home and all valve and hydrant stems plumb. B. Deviation with Engineer's Consent: No deviation shall be made from the required line or grade except with the written consent of the Engineer. C. Depth of cover: Depth of cover shall be measured from the established street grade or the surface of the permanent improvement to the top of the pipe barrel. Unless otherwise shown on the construction plans, it is the intent of these specifications that waterlines shall have minimum cover as follows: Under proposed or existing pavement 42 inches Under proposed non-pavement 36 inches Under Natural ground 36 inches If the established grades violate any of the before stated conditions notify the Engineer immediately so that remedial instructions can be given the Contractor. Maximum covers below proposed grade shall be 48". D. Vertical deflections at Utility and underground drainage crossings: When vertical deflections are required at utility crossings that require the water line depth to exceed the required 48" maximum cover, they shall be installed with the installation of four (4) ductile iron bends with locking joints and retainer glands. All pipe between bends shall be ductile iron. 3.04 PIPE TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL: See Subsection 3123 16.13. 3.05 SAND AND ENCASEMENT A. All pipe and fittings which are not enclosed in concrete valve vault or laid in encasement pipe, shall be completely encased with a minimum of eight (8") inches of sand. This encasement includes the bottom, sides and top of pipe and fittings including bells, so that all portions will be encased with a minimum of eight inches of sand to insulate the pipe from the natural ground and from the backfill. The sand shall be a finely divided sand as follows: FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 33 05 05.10 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 INSTALLATION OF WATER PIPE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Sand Specifications: Passing 7/8" Sieve: 100%by weight Passing No. 4 Sieve: 80%by weight Clay Lumps not to Exceed: 20%by weight Plasticity Index: NP-10 max. Sand shall be screened and free of foreign material. Sand shall be placed in a manner that will not injure the polyethylene wrapping and shall be compacted under, around the sides, and over the pipe in a manner that will reduce settlement to a minimum and as approved by the Water Superintendent. 3.06 TRENCH EXCAVATION SAFETY: See Subsection 3123 16.13. 3.07 LOWERING PIPE AND ACCESSORIES INTO TRENCH A. General: Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and efficient execution of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants, and accessories shall be carefully lowered into the trench by means of derrick, ropes or other suitable equipment in such manner as to prevent damage. Under no circumstances shall pipe or accessories be dropped or dumped into the trench. The Contractor shall not lay any pipe in the trench until the bedding and condition of the trench has been approved by the Engineer. The trench shall be free of water and maintained in that condition until pipe has been laid and the joints completed. B. Inspection of Pipe and Accessories: The pipe and accessories shall be inspected for defects prior to lowering into trench. Any defective, damaged or unsound pipe shall be replaced. C. Pipe Kept Clean: All foreign matter or dirt shall be removed from the interior of pipe before lowering into the trench. Pipe shall be kept clean by means approved by the Engineer during and after laying. Contractor shall not leave any trench unmanned until trench is covered, or until barricades are placed and pipe is at least temporarily plugged to prevent varmints from entering. 3.08 JOINTING PIPE A. Joints shall be made up in strict conformance with manufacturer's recommendations, including the use of any primer or lubricant. 3.09 CONCRETE THRUST BLOCKING A. Concrete thrust blocking shall be provided at the ends of all lines and changes in direction including tees and incomplete crosses and blow-offs. Thrust blocking shall be poured against undisturbed soil solid between ground and the fitting to be anchored. Thrust blocks shall be of sufficient size to keep the pipe in place when subjected to test pressure. The blocking shall be placed so that the pipe and fitting joints will be accessible for repair. FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 33 05 05.10 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 INSTALLATION OF WATER PIPE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.10 METAL HARNESS A. Metal harness or tie rods and clamps shall be used to prevent movement when soil conditions will not withstand thrust blocking. Steel rods and clamps shall be galvanized or otherwise rust proofed or coated with hot coal tar enamel then wrapped with two layers of polyethylene wrapping. 3.11 STERILIZING WATER PIPE A. Waterline shall be disinfected prior to use in accordance with the current standard AWWA C651-92. After sterilization period is completed, Contractor will flush lines and thoroughly clean. The City will take a bacteriological sample test 2 hours after refilling. If sample does not pass State Health Department purification standards, then repeat above procedure. The entire sterilization process shall be coordinated with and under the supervision of the City Water Construction Superintendent. 3.12 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PRESSURE SYSTEM: See Section 03 05 05.31. 3.13 WATER CONNECTIONS A. City of Corpus Christi: All connections to the water mains will be made by the contractor under supervision of City Water Division. The Contractor shall supply all required materials, labor and match grade of the existing water line. END OF SECTION 33 05 05.10 FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 33 05 05.10 - 7 MAY 2, 2023 INSTALLATION OF WATER PIPE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 33 05 05.11 - INSTALLATION OF PVC SEWER PIPE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary for the installation of all sanitary sewer pipe (gravity flow) required to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Art. TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE A. Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 2000 p.s.i. at 28 days and shall be in accordance with Subsection 03 30 02 "Normal Weight Aggregate Concrete". 2.02 PIPE SDR 26 PVC Pressure Rated Pipe: See Subsection 33 05 31.29, SDR 26 and SDR 35 PVC Sewer Pipe: See Subsection 33 31 11. (SDR 35 pipe shall not be used when ditch exceeds 6' in depth) 2.03 WATER AND SANITARY SEWER SEPARATION A. Location of Waterlines a. The following rules apply to installations of waterlines, wastewater mains or laterals, and other conveyances/appurtenances identified as potential sources of contamination. Furthermore, all ratings specified shall be defined by ASTM or AWWA standards unless stated otherwise. New mains, service lines, or laterals are those that are installed where no main, service line, or lateral previously existed, or where existing mains, service lines, or laterals are replaced with pipes of different size or material. (1) When new potable water distribution lines are constructed, they shall be installed no closer than nine feet in all directions to wastewater collection facilities. All separation distances shall be measured from the outside surface of each of the respective pieces. (2) Potable water distribution lines and wastewater mains or laterals that form parallel utility lines shall be installed in separate trenches. (3) No physical connection shall be made between drinking water supply and a sewer line. Any appurtenance shall be designed and constructed so as to prevent any possibility of sewage entering the drinking water system. (4) Where the nine-foot separation distance cannot be achieved, the following criteria shall apply. (A)New waterline installation—parallel lines. (i) Where a new potable waterline parallel an existing, non-pressure or pressure rated wastewater main or lateral and the licensed professional engineer licensed in the State of Texas is able to determine that the existing wastewater main or lateral is not leaking, the new potable waterline shall be located at least two feet above the existing wastewater main or lateral, measured vertically, and at least four feet away, measured horizontally, from the existing wastewater main or lateral. Every effort shall be exerted not to disturb the bedding and backfill of the existing wastewater main or lateral. FIRE STATION NO. 3. PROJECT #21085 33 05 05.11 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 INSTALLATION OF PVC SEWER PIPE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 (ii) Where a new potable waterline parallels an existing pressure rated wastewater main or lateral and it cannot be determined by the licensed professional engineer if the existing line is leaking, the existing wastewater main or lateral shall be replaced with at least 150 psi pressure rated pipe. The new potable waterline shall be located at least two feet above the new wastewater line, measured vertically, and at least four feet away, measured horizontally, from the replaced wastewater main or lateral. (iii)Where a new potable waterline parallels a new wastewater main, the wastewater main or lateral shall be constructed of at least 150 psi pressure rated pipe. The new potable waterline shall be located at least two feet above the wastewater main or lateral, measured vertically, and at least four feet away,measured horizontally, from the wastewater main or lateral. (B) New waterline installation—crossing lines. (i) Where a new potable waterline crosses an existing, non-pressure rated wastewater main or lateral, one segment of the waterline pipe shall be centered over the wastewater main or lateral such that the joints of the waterline pipe are equidistant and at least nine feet horizontally from the centerline of the wastewater main or lateral. The potable waterline shall be at least two feet above the wastewater main or lateral. Whenever possible, the crossing shall be centered between the joints of the wastewater main or lateral. if the existing wastewater main or lateral is disturbed or shows signs of leaking, it shall be replaced for at least nine feet in both directions (18 feet total)with at least 150 psi pressure rated pipe. (ii) Where a new potable waterline crosses an existing,pressure rated wastewater main or lateral, one segment of the waterline pipe shall be centered over the wastewater main or lateral such that the joints of the waterline pipe are equidistant and at least nine feet horizontally from the centerline of the wastewater main or lateral. The potable waterline shall be at least six inches above the wastewater main or lateral. Whenever possible, the crossing shall be centered between the joints of the wastewater main or lateral. If the existing wastewater main or lateral shows signs of leaking, it shall be replaced for at least nine feet in both directions (18 feet total) with at least 150 psi pressure rated pipe. (iii)Where a new potable waterline crossed a new, non-pressure rated wastewater main or lateral and the standard pipe segment length of the wastewater main or lateral is at least 18 feet, one segment of the waterline pipe shall be centered over the wastewater main or lateral such that the joints of the waterline pipe are equidistant and at least nine feet horizontally from the centerline of the wastewater main or lateral. The potable waterline shall be at least two feet above the wastewater main or lateral. Whenever possible, the crossing shall be centered between the joints of the wastewater main or lateral. The wastewater pipe shall be a minimum pipe stiffness of 115 psi at 5.0% deflection. The wastewater main or lateral shall be embedded in cement stabilized sand (see clause (vi) of this subparagraph) for the total length of one pipe segment plus 12 inches beyond the joint on each end. (iv)Where a new potable waterline crosses a new, non-pressure rated wastewater main or lateral and a standard length of the wastewater pipe is less than 18 feet in length, the potable water pipe segment shall be centered over the wastewater line. The materials and method of installation shall conform with one of the following option. FIRE STATION NO. 3. PROJECT #21085 33 05 05.11 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 INSTALLATION OF PVC SEWER PIPE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 (I) Within nine feet horizontally of either side of the waterline, the wastewater pipe and joints shall be constructed with pipe material having a minimum pressure rating of at least 150 psi. An absolute minimum vertical separation distance of two feet shall be provided. The wastewater main or lateral shall be located below the waterline. (II) All sections of wastewater main or lateral within nine feet horizontally of the waterline shall be encased in an 18-foot (or longer) section of pipe. Flexible encasing pipe shall have a minimum pipe stiffness of 115 psi at 5.0% deflection. The encasing pipe shall be centered on the waterline and shall be at least two nominal pipe diameters larger than the wastewater main or lateral. The space around the carrier pipe shall be supported at five-foot (or less) intervals with spacers or be filled to the springline with washed sand. Each end of the casing shall be sealed with watertight non-shrink cement grout or a manufactured watertight seal. An absolute minimum separation distance of six inches between the encasement pipe and the waterline shall be provided. The wastewater line shall be located below the waterline. (III) When a new waterline crosses under a wastewater main or lateral, the waterline shall be encased as described for wastewater mains or laterals in subclause (11) of this clause or constructed of ductile iron or steel pipe with mechanical or welded joints as appropriate. An absolute minimum separation distance of one foot between the waterline and the wastewater main or lateral shall be provided. Both the waterline and wastewater main or lateral must pass a pressure and leakage test as specified in AW WA C600 standards. (v) Where a new potable waterline crosses a new, pressure rated wastewater main or lateral, one segment of the waterline pipe shall be centered over the wastewater line such that the joints of the waterline pipe are equidistant and at least nine feet horizontally from the center tine of the wastewater main or lateral. The potable waterline shall be at least six inches above the wastewater main or lateral. Whenever possible, the crossing shall be centered between the joints of the wastewater main or lateral. The wastewater pipe shall have a minimum pressure rating of at least 150 psi. The wastewater main or lateral shall be embedded in cement stabilized sand (see clause (vi) of this subparagraph) for the total length of one pipe segment plus 12 inches beyond the joint of each end. (vi)Where cement stabilized sand bedding is required, the cement stabilized sand shall have a minimum of 10% cement per cubic yard of cement stabilized sand mixture,based on loose dry weight volume (at least 2.5 bags of cement per cubic yard of mixture). The cement stabilized sand bedding shall be a minimum of six inches above and four inches below the wastewater main or lateral. The use of brown coloring in cement stabilized sand for wastewater main or lateral bedding is recommended for the identification of pressure rated wastewater mains during future construction. (5) Waterline and wastewater main or lateral manhole or cleanout separation. The separation distance from a potable waterline to a wastewater main or lateral manhole or cleanout shall be a minimum of nine feet. Where the nine foot separation distance cannot be achieved, the potable waterline shall be encased in a joint of at least 150 FIRE STATION NO. 3. PROJECT #21085 33 05 05.11 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 INSTALLATION OF PVC SEWER PIPE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 psi pressure class pipe at least 18 feet long and two nominal sizes larger than the new conveyance. The space around the carrier pipe shall be supported at five foot intervals with spacers or be filled to the spring line with washed sand. The encasement pipe shall be centered on the crossing and both ends sealed with cement grout or manufactured sealant. (6) Location of fire hydrants. Five hydrants shall not be installed within nine feet vertically or horizontally of any wastewater main, wastewater lateral, or wastewater service line regardless of construction. (7) Location of potable or raw water supply or suction lines. Suction mains to pumping equipment shall not cross wastewater mains, wastewater lateral or wastewater service lines. Raw water supply lines shall not be installed within five feet of any tile or concrete wastewater main,wastewater lateral, or wastewater service line. (8) Proximity of septic tank drain fields. Waterlines shall not be installed closer than ten feet to septic tank drain fields. 2.04 SANITARY PRECAUTION AND DISINFECTION A. Sanitary precautions, flushing, disinfection procedures, and microbiological sampling as prescribed in AWWA standards for disinfecting water mains shall be followed in laying waterlines. (1) Pipe shall not be laid in water or placed where it can be flooded with water or sewage during its storage or installation. (2) Special precautions must be taken when waterlines are laid under any flowing or intennittent stream or semi permanent body of water such as marsh, bay, or estuary. In these cases, the water main shall be installed in a separate watertight pipe encasement and valves must be provided on each side of the crossing with facilities to allow the underwater portion of the system to be isolated and tested to determine that there are no leaks in the underwater line. Alternately, and with the permission of the executive director,the watertight pipe encasement may be omitted. (3) New mains shall be thoroughly disinfected in accordance with AWWA Standard C651 and then flushed and sampled before being placed in service. Samples shall be collected for microbiological analysis to check the effectiveness of the disinfection procedure. Sampling shall be repeated if contamination persists. A minimum of one sample for each 1,000 feet of completed waterline will be required or at the next available sampling point beyond 1,000 feet as designated by the design engineer. 2.05 ALLOWABLE TRENCH WIDTH A. The width of the trench from the bottom of the pipe to 12" above the pipe shall conform to the following: Table I Allowable Trench Width Nominal Minimum Trench Maximum Trench Pipe Size Width-Inches Width-Inches 4 18 30 6 18 30 8 24 30 10 30 36 12 30 36 2.06 HORIZONTAL PIPE CURVATURE FIRE STATION NO. 3. PROJECT #21085 33 05 05.11 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 INSTALLATION OF PVC SEWER PIPE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Design Criteria Requirements When it is not possible for gravity sewers to be laid in straight alignment then the pipe shall be installed to meet the following horizontal curvature requirements. 2.07 HORIZONTAL PIPE CURVATURE A. Pipe deflection for curvature shall be based upon pipe flexure. Joint deflection shall not be used. The minimum radius of curvature shall be 500'for pipe up to 12" in diameter. 2.08 MANHOLES A. Manholes spacing shall not be more than 300 feet. 2.09 TRENCH EXCAVATION A. Excavation shall be parallel to the curvature of the pipe. Placement of the pipe shall be in the center of the trench and properly bedded. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 HANDLING OF MATERIALS a. Handling and Care: Pipe and other material shall be unloaded at the point of delivery, hauled to and distributed at the project site by the Contractor. They shall at all times be handled with care and in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Whether moved by hand, skidway or hoist, material shall not be dropped or bumped against other material or objects already on the ground. b. Distribution at Site of Work: Material may be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be used in the construction, provided it is to be incorporated into the work within 10 days. The Contractor shall distribute the material in such a manner so as not to cause the public any undue inconvenience. c. Storing Material: Any material delivered to the project site that is not to be incorporated into the work within 10 days shall be stored on suitable blocks or platforms off the ground. Stacking of material shall be done in such a manner that the material is not damaged. Particular care shall be taken to keep the preformed joint material on the spigot end of the pipe from becoming dented or damaged. 3.02 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE a. General: All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades. b. Deviations With Engineer's Consent: No deviation shall be made from the required line or grade except with the written consent of the Engineer. c. Batter Boards: The Contractor shall furnish and place in position as directed by the Engineer all the necessary batter boards for controlling the work. The batter boards shall be of such size timber as the Engineer directs and shall be substantially supported. The boards and all location stakes must be protected from damage or change of location. The Contractor FIRE STATION NO. 3. PROJECT #21085 33 05 05.11 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 INSTALLATION OF PVC SEWER PIPE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 shall also furnish good sound twilled lines for use in giving lines and grades, and the necessary plummets and graduated poles of a form approved by the Engineer. d. Laser Equipment: The Contractor may use laser equipment to maintain proper grade for laying pipe in lieu of batter boards as described above. 3.03 PIPE TRENCH EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL See Subsection 3123 16.13 3.04 TRENCH EXCAVATION SAFETY See Subsection 3123 16.13 3.05 LOWERING PIPE INTO TRENCH a. General: Proper implements, tools and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and efficient execution of the work. All pipes shall be carefully lowered into the trench by means of derrick, ropes, or other suitable equipment in such manner as to prevent damage. Under no circumstances shall pipe be dropped or dumped into the trench. The Contractor shall not lay any pipe into the trench until the bedding and condition of the trench has been approved by the Engineer. The trench shall be free of water and maintained in that condition until the pipe has been laid and the joints have been completed. b. Inspection of Pipe: The pipe shall be inspected for defects prior to lowering into trench. Any defective or unsound pipe shall be removed and replaced. c. Pipe Kept Clean: All foreign matter or dirt shall be removed from the interior of pipe before lowering into trench. Pipe shall be kept clean by means approved by the Engineer during and after laying. 3.06 BEDDING AND HAUNCHING FOR PVC SEWER PIPE PVC sewer pipe shall have a minimum cover of 4'. As a minimum bedding and haunching shall conform to the following: TABLE II MINIMUM BEDDING AND HAUNCHING Height of Cover(Feet) Bedding and Method of 4 6 8 1 1 1 1 1 2 Haunching Compaction for 0 2 4 6 8 0 Material Bedding& Haunchin Crushed Stone Crushed Rock To Spring Line Compacted with of Pipe a 3/4" to 1/16" Vibratory Plate Graded in Tamper-Bedding Accord. With to Size#67 Start a Min. of or 68 AASHTO 4" M43 Below Pipe. Or ASTM D448. FIRE STATION NO. 3. PROJECT #21085 33 05 05.11 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 INSTALLATION OF PVC SEWER PIPE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Sand to Spring Sand Compacted Line of with Pipe Passing A Vibratory 7/8" - Plate 100%,Passing Tamper. No. 4 - 80% Bedding to Clay Start a Min. of Lumps Not to 4" Exceed Below Pipe 20%P.I. NP-10 Max. Excavated Excavated Material Material Used for Hand Tamped to Haunching Spring Line of P.I. NP-15 Max. Pipe L.L. Bottom of Ditch Max. 35 Passing Shaped to 200< Provide 50% 90°< of Contact Note: Bedding is material from the bottom of the pipe to the bottom of the trench. Haunching is material from the bottom of the pipe to the spring line of the pipe. 3.07 LAYING PIPE A. Unless otherwise authorized by the Engineer, the laying of pipe on the prepared bedding shall be started at the outlet end with the spigot end pointing downstream and shall proceed toward the inlet end with the abutting sections properly matched, true to the required lines and grades. The pipe shall be fitted and matched so that when laid on the bed it shall form a smooth uniform conduit. 3.08 JOINTING POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE A. The bell and spigot mating surfaces shall be wiped free of dirt or other foreign matter. A lubricant recommended by the coupling manufacturer shall be applied to the bell and spigot mating surfaces just before they are joined together. The spigot end shall then be centered on grade into the bell end of the pipe previously laid and shall be shoved home to compress the joint and to assure a tight fit between the inner surfaces. When the pipe being thusly installed, bell holes shall be excavated in the bedding material. When the joint has been made, the bell hole shall be carefully filled with bedding material to provide for adequate support of the pipe. 3.09 STOPPERS OR BULKHEADS A. The Contractor shall furnish and install suitable stoppers at the dead end of all pipes, wyes, tees, etc. Stoppers shall be water tight. At the end of each day or when temporary stopping of construction for more than 4 hours, a tight fitting bulkhead shall be placed across the open end of all pipe. Bulkheads do not need to be water tight. FIRE STATION NO. 3. PROJECT #21085 33 05 05.11 - 7 MAY 2, 2023 INSTALLATION OF PVC SEWER PIPE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.10 TESTING COMPLETED SANITARY SEWER LINES 3.11 CONTRACTOR TESTING A. The Contractor shall provide all equipment, materials, (including water, if required) and do all work necessary to conduct the following tests: a. Test for the deflection of flexible pipe. b. Test for infiltration when pipe is below the ground water table. C. Test for exfiltration or air testing when pipe is above the ground water table. B. The tests shall be accomplished by the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer's or Owner's authorized representative. Tests results shall be signed by the Contractor's authorized representative who accomplished the testing and the Engineer's or Owner's authorized representative who witnessed the testing. Before final payment will be made to the Contractor 3 copies of all test results shall be furnished to the Engineer. 3.12 DEFLECTION TESTING a. General: Deflection tests shall be performed on all flexible pipes. For pipelines with inside diameters less than 27 inches, a rigid mandrel shall be used to measure deflection. For pipe lines with an inside diameter 27 inches and greater, a method approved by the Engineer shall be used to test for vertical deflections. Other methods shall provide a precision of 0.2% deflection. The test shall be conducted after the final backfill has been in place at least 30 days. No pipe shall exceed a deflection of 5.0%. If a pipe should fail to pass the deflection test, the problem shall be corrected, and a second test shall be conducted after the final backfill has been in place an additional 30 days. The tests shall be performed without mechanical pulling devices. b. Mandrel Sizing: The rigid mandrel shall have an outside diameter (O.D.) equal to 95% of the inside diameter (I.D.) of the pipe. The inside diameter of the pipe, for the purpose of determining the outside diameter of the mandrel, shall be the average outside diameter minus two minimum wall thicknesses for O.D. controlled pipe and the average inside diameter for I.D. controlled pipe, all dimensions shall be per appropriate standard. Statistical or other `tolerance packages' shall not be considered in mandrel sizing. c. Mandrel Design: The rigid mandrel shall be constructed of a metal or a `rigid plastic material that can withstand 200 psi without being deformed. The mandrel shall have nine or more "runners" or "legs" as long as the total number of legs is an odd number. The barrel section of the mandrel shall have a length of at least 75% of the inside diameter of the pipe. A proving ring shall be provided and used for each size mandrel in use. d. Method Options: Adjustable or flexible mandrels are prohibited. A television inspection is not a substitute for the deflection test. A deflectometer may be approved for use on a case-by- case basis. Mandrels with removable legs or runners may be accepted on a case-by-case basis. 3.13 TELEVISING THE LINE A. The Owner or the City reserves the right to "televise" the entire length of gravity sewer line installed to insure that the line is clear of debris and free from visible defects, loose joints, improperly seated gaskets, or excessive deviations from grade. Excessive deviation from FIRE STATION NO. 3. PROJECT #21085 33 05 05.11 - 8 MAY 2, 2023 INSTALLATION OF PVC SEWER PIPE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 grade will be judged during this inspection as any misalignment which causes water to stand two (2) inches deep or more at any point inside the pipe. if repairs are required, affected areas shall be retelevised at Contractor's expense to determine final acceptability. 3.14 INFILTRATION OR EXFILTRATION TESTS A. When pipes are installed below the ground water level an infiltration test shall be used in lieu of the exfiltration test. The total exfiltration as determined by a hydrostatic head test, shall not exceed 50 gallons per inch diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours at a minimum test head of two feet above the crown of the pipe at the upstream manhole. For pipes installed with a horizontal curvature the exfiltration shall not exceed 10 gallons per inch diameter of pipe per mile for 24 hours. The total infiltration, as determined by a hydrostatic head test, shall not exceed 50 gallons per inch diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours at a minimum test head of two feet above the crown of the pipe at the upstream manhole, or at least two feet above existing ground water level, whichever is greater. For construction within the 25-year flood plain, the infiltration or exfiltration shall not exceed ten gallons per inch diameter per mile of pipe per 24 hours at the same minimum test head. If the quantity of infiltration or exfiltration exceeds the maximum quantity specified, remedial action shall be undertaken in order to reduce the infiltration or exfiltration to an amount within the limits specified. 3.15 LOW PRESSURE AIR TEST A. The procedure for the low pressure air test shall conform to the procedures described in ASTM C-828, ASTM C-924, ASTM F-1417 or other appropriate procedures, except for testing times. The test times shall be as outlined in this section. For sections of pipe less than 36-inch average inside diameter, the following procedure shall apply unless the pipe is to be joint tested. The pipe shall be pressurized to 3.5 psi greater than the pressure exerted by ground water above the pipe. Once the pressure is stabilized, the minimum time allowable for the pressure to drop from 3.5 pounds per square inch gauge to 2.5 pounds per square inch gauge shall be computed from the following equation: ALLOWABLE TIME FORMULA Time(Seconds) =0.085 (D) (K)M T=time for pressure to drop 1.0 pound per square inch gauge in seconds K=0.000419(D)(L) but not less than 1.0 D=average inside diameter of pipe(inches) L=length of line of same pipe size being tested,in feet Q=rate of loss, 0.0015 cubic feet per minute per square foot internal surface shall be used Since a K value of less than 1.0 shall not be used,there are minimum testing times for each pipe diameter as follows: Pipe Minimum Length for Time for Diameter Time Minimum Time Longer Length (inches) (seconds) (feet) (seconds) 6 340 398 0.855(L) 8 454 298 1.520(L) 10 567 239 2.374(L) 12 680 199 3.419(L) 15 850 159 5.342(L) FIRE STATION NO. 3. PROJECT #21085 33 05 05.11 - 9 MAY 2, 2023 INSTALLATION OF PVC SEWER PIPE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 18 1020 133 7.693(L) 21 1190 114 10.471(L) 24 1360 100 13.676(L) 27 1530 88 17.309(L) 30 1700 80 21.369(L) 33 1870 72 25.856(L) B. The test may be stopped if no pressure loss has occurred during the first 25% of the calculated testing time. If any pressure loss or leakage has occurred during the first 25% of the testing period, then the test shall continue for the entire test duration as outlined in this subparagraph or until failure. Lines with a 27-inch average inside diameter and larger may be air tested at each joint. Pipe greater than 36-inch diameter must be tested for leakage at each joint. If the joint test is used, a visual inspection of the joint shall be performed immediately after testing. The pipe is to be pressurized to 3.5 psi greater than the pressure exerted by ground water above the pipe. Once the pressure has stabilized, the minimum time allowable for the pressure to drop from 3.5 pounds per square inch gauge to 2.5 pounds per square inch gauge shall be ten seconds. END OF SECTION 33 05 05.11 FIRE STATION NO. 3. PROJECT #21085 33 05 05.11 - 10 MAY 2, 2023 INSTALLATION OF PVC SEWER PIPE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 33 05 05.31 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PRESSURE SYSTEM PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary for hydrostatically testing the completed pressure system. The Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary and accomplish all testing under this specification. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Art. TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. PART 2 PRODUCTS (not applicable) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 WATER FOR TESTING A. All water for testing will be furnished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall make complete and satisfactory arrangements with the City's Water Department and make all necessary connections at his own expense. 3.02 TEST PROCEDURES A. After the pipe has been laid and partially backfilled, it shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure test. Before applying the specified test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe. If necessary, the Contractor shall provide taps at points of highest elevation to bleed off pockets of air. Any taps made shall be provided with a corporation stop or tightly plugged when the line is full of water. The line may be tested in valved sections. 3.03 CONDITIONS FOR TESTING A. A hydrostatic test shall be performed on the proposed water distribution system when all of the following conditions have been met. a. All valves are accessible and open, b. All fire hydrants are properly set (i.e. plumb, at the right height, and the correct horizontal placement), C. The area above the water main has been graded five feet on either side of the center line of the water main and for the entire length of the line; d. The owner signs an agreement to the effect that approval of the system is conditional upon completion of any items found deficient on a second inspection which will be conducted upon completion of the total project. Completion of the total project shall be as defined by the Water Superintendent. 3.04 TEST PRESSURE,DURATION AND LEAKAGE A. All pipes shall be subjected to two hydrostatic tests. The first hydrostatic test shall be a two hour test at a pressure of 150 P.S.I. The allowable leakage during this portion of the test shall be the sum of the leakage allowances used in the system as shown on the attached City of Corpus Christi Water Division Leakage Allowable Sheet. The second hydrostatic test shall be made no less than 48 hours after the successful completion of the first hydrostatic test. The second hydrostatic test will be for 24 hours at City pressure. There will be a zero leakage FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 33 05 05.31- 1 MAY 2, 2023 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PRESSURE SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 allowance during this test. During the test, all exposed pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants, and joins shall be carefully examined. If found to be leaking, they shall be corrected immediately by the contractor. If the leaking is due to cracked or defective material,the defective material shall be removed and replaced by the contractor with sound material. The test then shall be repeated until the pipeline is accepted. A $100 base fee will be paid by the contractor to the City for each retest that is required. No pipe installation will be accepted until the above conditions have been met. END OF SECTION 33 05 05.31 FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 33 05 05.31- 2 MAY 2, 2023 HYDROSTATIC TESTING OF PRESSURE SYSTEM DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 33 05 19 - DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS (WATER LINES) PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary for furnishing all ductile iron pipe and fittings required to complete the potable water lines. This specification is a design specification as defined in Art. TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCTILE IRON PIPE A. All ductile iron pipe shall conform to A.N.S.I. A21.50. 2.02 LINING A. The interior of the pipe and fittings shall be lined with enameled cement mortar, standard thickness as specified in A.N.S.I. A21.4-85/AWWA C-104. 2.03 PIPE Pipe shall have a minimum wall thickness as follows: 6" Diameter 0.25 inch (Class 350) 8" Diameter 0.27 inch (Class 350) 10" Diameter 0.29 inch (Class 350) 12" Diameter 0.31 inch (Class 350) 14" Diameter 0.33 inch (Class 300) 16" Diameter 0.34 inch (Class 300) 18" Diameter 0.35 inch (Class 300) 20" Diameter 0.36 inch (Class 300) 24" Diameter 0.38 inch (Class 250) 2.04 FITTINGS A. General a. Fittings shall be ductile iron and shall conform to A.N.S.I. A21.10 and A.W.W.A. C- 110 and C-153,Latest Edition. B. Ductile Iron Fittings a. 6" thru 24": Pressure Class 350. 2.05 JOINTS A. General Joints for fittings shall be mechanical joint. Joints for pipe shall be push on joints. FIRE STATION NO. 3. PROJECT #21085 3305 19 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS (WATER LINE) DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Mechanical Joints Joints shall conform to A.N.S.I A21.11. Mechanical joints shall be furnished complete with joint material, rubber, bolts, nuts, glands, and gaskets. Gaskets material shall be synthetic rubber, odor free and containing no natural rubber. C. Push-On Joints Push-on joints shall conform to A.N.S.I. A21.11. Push-on joints shall be complete with lubricant and gasket material. Gasket material shall be synthetic rubber, odor free and containing no natural rubber. D. Certification The manufacturer shall furnish a copy of the manufacturer's affidavit of compliance with specifications and a certified copy of an analysis of the material in each gasket showing the type of synthetic rubber and that no natural rubber is present. Certification shall accompany each order delivered. 2.06 EXTERIOR COATING A. Pipe and fittings shall have a bituminous coating approximately 1 mil. thick as specified in AWWA C-105. Where called for on the drawings, ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be wrapped in polyethylene. The polyethylene material shall have an 8 mil. thickness and may be either clear or black. The wrapping shall be lapped in such a manner that all surfaces or pipe and fittings shall have a minimum 6" lap. END OF SECTION 33 05 19 FIRE STATION NO. 3. PROJECT #21085 3305 19 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS (WATER LINE) DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 33 05 31.16 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE AND FITTINGS (C900 & C905) PART 1 DESCRIPTION 1.01 SCOPE A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary for furnishing all polyvinyl chloride pipe required to complete the project. This specification is a design specification, and the performance of the completed work is the responsibility of the Contractor. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 4" THRU 12" P.V.C. PIPE A. General: 4" thru 12" P.V.C. pipe shall meet the requirements of AWWA C-900, "Polyvinyl Chloride Pressure Pipe 4" Thru 12" for Water". 4" through 12" Water Line Pipe shall be Class 150 and meet the requirements of DR 18. The pipe and gaskets shall be approved by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. of the American Insurance Association, Factory Mutual and by the National Sanitary Foundation. Pipe shall conform to cast iron pipe outside diameters. All pipes shall be suitable for use as pressure conduit and be furnished with an integral bell containing a locked-in ring and spigot joint for the conveyance of water. Provisions must be made for expansion and contraction at each joint. The bell shall consist of an integral wall section with a locked-in, solid cross section elastomeric ring, which meets the requirements of ASTM F-477. The bell section shall be designed to be at least as hydrostatically strong as the pipe wall and meet the requirements of AWWA C-900. A complete set of joint material shall be furnished with each joint of pipe. The manufacturer shall furnish a copy of the manufacturer's affidavit of compliance with specifications and a certified copy of an analysis of the material in each gasket showing the type of synthetic rubber and that no natural rubber is present. Certification shall accompany each order delivered. 2.02 PIPIE STIFFNESS A. The pipe stiffness using F/-/EY(for Class 150 and Dr. 18) shall be 435 psi. 2.03 QUICK BURST TEST A. Randomly selected samples tested in accordance with ASTM D-1599 shall withstand, without failure, 755 psi. (at 73°F)when applied in 60- 70 seconds. 2.04 DROP IMPACY TEST A. Pipe shall withstand,without failure at 73 degree F, an impact of a falling missile, Type C (per ASTM D-2444 and shall show no visible evidence of shattering or splitting) as follows: 6"and 8" - 100 FT/LB 10" and 12" - 120 FT/LB FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT#21085 33 05 31.16- 1 MAY 2, 2023 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR WATER LINES(C-900 AND C-905) DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2.05 STANDARD LAYING LENGTHS AND PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Standard laying lengths shall be 20 feet (± 1") for 6" through 12" pipe. At least 85% of the total footage of pipe shall be furnished in standard lengths. The remaining 15% may be furnished in random lengths not less than 10 feet long. Each standard and random length of pipe shall be tested to 600 psi. for a minimum of 5 seconds. The integral bell shall be tested with the pipe. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 14" THRU 24" P.V.C. PIPE A. General: 14" thru 24" P.V.C. pipe shall meet the requirements of AWWA C-905, "Polyvinyl Chloride Water Transmission Pipe 14" Thru 36". 14" through 24' Water Line Pipe shall be Class 165 and meet the requirements of DR 25. The pipe and gaskets shall be approved by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. of the American Insurance Association, Factory Mutual and by the National Sanitation Foundation. Pipe shall conform to cast iron pipe outside diameters. All pipe shall be suitable for use as pressure conduit and be furnished with an integral bell containing a bonded-in, solid ring and spigot joint for the conveyance of water. Provisions must be made for expansion and contraction at each joint. The bell shall consist of an integral wall section with a bonded-in, solid cross section elastomeric ring which meets the requirements of ASTM F-477. The bell section shall be designed to be at least as hydrostatically strong as the pipe wall and meet the requirements of C-905. A complete set of joint material shall be furnished with each joint of pipe. The manufacturer shall furnish a copy of the manufacturer's affidavit of compliance with specifications and a certified copy of an analysis of the material in each gasket showing the type of synthetic rubber and that no natural rubber is present. Certification shall accompany each order delivered. 3.02 STANDARD LAYING LENGTHS AND PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS A. Standard laying lengths shall be 20 feet(+ 1")for all sizes. At least 85% of the total footage of pipe shall be furnished in standard lengths. The remaining 15%may be furnished in random lengths not less than 10 feet long. Each standard and random length of pipe shall be tested to 330 psi. for a minimum of 5 seconds. The integral bell shall be tested with the pipe. 3.03 FITTINGS A. All fittings 6" and larger as listed in A.W.W.A. specification C-110 and C-153 shall be compact ductile iron and in accordance with A.W.W.A. Specifications C-104, C-110, C-111, and C-153, latest editions. 3.04 CAST IRON FITTINGS A. 6" thru 12": Pressure Class 250 and Iron Strength Class 25. B. 14": Pressure Class 150 and Iron Strength Class 25. C. 16"thru 24": Pressure Class 150 and Iron Strength Class 30. FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT#21085 33 05 31.16-2 MAY 2, 2023 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR WATER LINES(C-900 AND C-905) DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.05 DUCTILE IRON FITTINGS A. 6" thru 24": Pressure Class 350. 3.06 JOINTS A. Fittings shall be furnished with mechanical joints. 3.07 WRAPPING FITTINGS A. All fittings shall be wrapped with polyethylene in accordance with A.W.W.A. Specification C-105, latest edition. 3.08 MARKING A. Each length of pipe shall be marked to indicate Pressure Class, DR, UL and AWWA C-900 approval. END OF SECTION 33 05 31.16 FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT#21085 33 05 31.16-3 MAY 2, 2023 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR WATER LINES(C-900 AND C-905) DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 33 05 39.41 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE PART1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This specification shall govern for furnishing all reinforced concrete pipe and jointing material required to complete the project. PART2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall furnish concrete pipe that conforms to A.S.T.M. Specification C-76. All pipe shall be Class III Wall B unless specifically shown otherwise. All pipe shall be machine- made by a process which will provide for uniform placement of the concrete in the for and compaction by mechanical devices which will assure a dense concrete. Pipe must have met its 28 day strength requirement prior to being delivered to the job site. Pipe shall be the standard sizes. The internal diameter of 12 inch to 24 inch pipe shall not vary more than ± 1.5 percent from the nominal diameter. The wall thickness shall not be less than that shown in the design by more than 5 percent of 3/16 inch, whichever is the greater. A wall thickness in excess of that required by the design shall not be cause for rejection. 2.02 MARKING A. Each section of pipe shall be clearly marked to indicate the class of pipe, date of manufacture and the name or mark of manufacturer. 2.03 REJECTION OF PIPE A. All rejected pipe shall be plainly marked by the Engineer and shall be replaced by the Contractor with pipe which meets the requirements of these specifications. Such rejected pipe shall be removed immediately from the site of work. Pipe shall be subject to rejection on account of failure to conform to any of the specification requirements. Individual sections of pipe may be rejected because of any of the following: a. Fractures or cracks passing through the shell, except for a single end crack that does not exceed the depth of the joint. b. Defects that indicate imperfect proportioning,mixing and molding. c. Surface defects indicating honeycombed or open texture. Damaged ends, where such damage would prevent making a satisfactory joint (broken or badly cracked tongue or groove) d. Careless dumping of pipe from truck. The Engineer shall be judge of aforesaid items. 2.04 REPAIRS A. Pipe may be repaired if necessary, because of occasional imperfections in manufacture or accidental injury during handling and will be acceptable if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the repairs are sound and properly finished and cured and the repaired pipe conforms to the requirements of these specifications. FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 33 05 39.41 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2.05 JOINTING MATERIAL A. The Contractor shall furnish a single gasket of preformed plastic. Gasket shall meet all requirements of Federal Specification SS-S-210A, "Sealing Compound, Preforined Plastic for Pipe Joints", Type I, rope-form and shall meet the following requirements: a. Adhesion and Hydrostatic Pressure: The sealing compound shall not leak at the joints (while being tested at 10 psi)for a period of 24 hours. b. Sag or Flow Resistance: (Vertical and overhead 1" wide joints.) No sagging shall be detected(while being tested at 135°F)for a period of 5 days. C. Chemical Resistance: No visible deterioration of the sealing compound (when immersed separately in solution of acid alkalies and saturated hydrogen sulfide) for a period of 30 days. The sealing compound shall be produced from blends of refined hydrocarbon resins and plasticizing compounds reinforced with inert mineral filler, and shall contain no solvents, irritating fumes or obnoxious odors. The compound shall not depend on oxidizing, evaporating, or chemical action for its adhesive or cohesive strength. It shall be supplied in extruded rope-form of suitable cross-section and of such sizes as to seal the joint space when the pipes are laid. The sealing compound shall be protected by a suitable removable two-piece wrapper. The two-piece wrapper shall be so designed that one-half may be removed longitudinally without disturbing the other half to facilitate the application of the sealing compound. The flexible plastic gasket shall also meet the requirements as stated in the following table. COMPOSITION TEST METHOD MIN. MAX. Bitumen(Petroleum Plastic Content) ASTM D 4 50 70 Ash-Inert Mineral Matter AASHO T 111 30 50 Volatile Matter ASTM D 6 --- 2.0 PROPERTY Specific Gravity @ 77°F ASTM D 71 1.20 1.30 * Ductility @ 77°F (cm) ASTM D 113 5.0 ---- * Softening Point ASTM D 36 320°F ---- * Penetration 77°F(150 GMS) 5 see ASTM D 217 50 120 * Due to the nature of the material, each sample to be tested must be manually kneaded, in lieu of heating and pouring, into various molds suggested by ASTM Standards to reduce the void content and improve testing accuracy and reproducibility. Joint material shall be supplied for use on pipe in the following sizes which is the minimum that will be required. Primer Cut Lengths Pipe Size Per 100 Joints Per Joint 12" 1.5 Gals. 1-1/2 pcs. 1" x T-5" 15" 1.9 Gals. 2 pcs. V x 2'5" 18" 2.7 Gals. 1-1/2 pcs. 1-1/2" x 3'-5" 21" 3.8 Gals. 2 pcs. 1-1/2" x 3'5" 24" 6.2 Gals. 2 pcs. 1-1/2" x Y-5" 30" 8.5 Gals. 2-1/2 pcs. 1-1/2" x 3'-5" FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 33 05 39.41 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 36" 9.5 Gals. 3 pcs. 1-3/4" x Y-5" 42" 12.0 Gals. 3-1/2 pcs. 1-3/4" x 3'-5" 48" 15.0 Gals. 4 pcs. 1-3/4" x Y-5" 54" 20.0 Gals. 4-1/2 pcs. 1-3/4" x 3'-5" 60" 25.0 Gals. 5 pcs. 1-3/4" x Y-5" END OF SECTION 33 05 39.41 FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 33 05 39.41 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 REINFORCED CONCRETE PIPE DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 33 05 76 SANITARY SEWER MANHOLES (FIBERGLASS) PART GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary to construct all sanitary sewer manholes (fiberglass) required to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Art. TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 DIAMETER A. Manholes shall have an inside diameter of either 48" or 1.5 times the nominal pipe diameter of the largest pipe, whichever gives the larger diameter. A concentric manway reducer over the straight wall section shall have an inside diameter of 23". 2.02 WALL THICKNESS A. The minimum wall thickness of the fiberglass manholes shall be 1/2". 2.03 CONCRETE A. Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days and shall be in accordance with Subsection 03 30 02 Normal Weight Aggregate Concrete. 2.04 REINFORCING STEEL A. Reinforcing steel shall be new billet steel conforming to ASTM A-615. Also see Section 03 20 01 Concrete Reinforcement. 2.05 FIBERGLASS STRUCTURE A. Fiberglass manholes shall be in accordance with ASTM D-3753 "Glass Fiber-Reinforced Polyester Manholes". Manholes shall be a one-piece unit manufactured by Owens/Corning or approved equal. 2.06 PERFORMANCR PRODUCTION EQUIPMENT A. (without gel coat added) as an allowed manufacturer along with Owens/Corning. 2.07 SEALS A. Manholes pipe seals shall be made of corrosion resistant plastic. It shall eliminate leaks ground pipe entering manhole wall and shall permit pipe movement without loss of seal integrity. Pipe seals (waterstops) shall be as manufactured by Fernco of Davidson, Michigan, or approved equal. Caulk for interior seal between fiberglass manhole and concrete base shall be Epo-Flex epoxy (gun grade consistency) as manufactured by Dewey Supply of Corpus Christi, or approved equal. Caulk for exterior seal between fiberglass manhole and concrete shall be Ram- FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT#21085 330576- 1 MAY 2, 2023 SANITARY SEWER MANHOLES(Fiberglass) DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Nek flexible plastic gasket material as manufactured by K. T. Snyder Company of Houston, or approved equal. 2.08 MANHOLE RING AND COVER A. Manhole rings and covers shall be the round, roadway type, with solid cover and bottom flange. They shall be grey iron castings boldly filleted at angles and the arises shall be sharp and perfect. The castings shall be true to pattern, form and dimensions, free from cracks, sponginess, blow holes or other pouring faults affecting their strength and value for the service intended. Surfaces of the castings shall be free from burnt-on sand and shall be reasonably smooth. Runners, risers, fins and other cast-on pieces shall be removed from the surfaces. Provide 22-1/2" inside diameter x 5 inch high flange. Manhole ring and cover shall be designed for H-20 loading with machined joints (but for ring and covers in Texas Dept. of Highways R. O. W., cover must weigh 175 lbs.). 2.09 DEFECTS NOT PERMITTED IN FIBERGLASS STRUCTURE A. Interior Surfaces: a. Crazing b. Delamination c. Exposed fibers d. Blisters over 1/2 inch in diameter e. Pits and voids directly under surface that can be broken by finger pressure, over 5 per square foot f. Wrinkles over 1/8 inch B. Exterior Surfaces: a. Delamination b. Exposed fibers c. Blisters over 1/2 inch in diameter d. Sharp projections: the surface shall be relatively smooth as to allow handling of manholes without the need for gloves or special protection. 2.10 REPAIRS TO FIBERGLASS STRUCTURE A. Repairs shall not be permitted unless the required manhole meets all requirements of an undamaged manhole and its components. 2.11 MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION OF FIBERGLASS STRUCTURES A. All manholes shall be marked on the inside. The markings shall be permanent and include: a. Manufacturer Identification(Name) b. Manufacturing Serial No. (Number to appear in report for identification) PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 EXCAVATION: See Subsection 3123 00 3.02 TRENCH EXCAVATION SAFTEY: See Subsection 31 23 00. FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT#21085 330576-2 MAY 2, 2023 SANITARY SEWER MANHOLES(Fiberglass) DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.03 MANHOLE PREPARATION A. Cutout shall be equal to the outside diameter of pipe to pass through it, plus 1/2 inch. Cuts are to be made using electric or gasoline-powered circular saw with masonry blade. Do not use axe or other impact-type tools. 3.04 HANDLING A. Do not drop or impact the manholes. Manholes shall be chocked if stored horizontally. If manholes must be moved by rolling, the ground traversed shall be smooth and free of rocks, debris, etc. When lifting manholes in horizontal position, use two slings with spreader bar. For lifting in vertical position, 3 lift lugs may be provided(recommended by manufacturer) at top of manhole. Only a pliable strap or rope should contact manhole; do not use chains or steel cables. 3.05 HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT A. If necessary,position bricks or blocks in excavation to adjust manholes to correct elevation. 3.06 CONCRETE A. Pour concrete in excavation to depth specified on Drawings. Concrete shall extend at least 4" above all brick or block height adjustments. 3.07 INSTALLATION A. Lower manhole into wet concrete until it rests at proper elevation, and a minimum of 6" into concrete; then move manhole to plumb. 3.08 BACKFILL MATERIAL: See Subsection 3123 00 Structural Excavation and Backfill. 3.09 SCHEDULE OF BACKFILLING: See Subsection 3123 00 Structural Excavation and Backfill. 3.10 BACKFILL: See Subsection 3123 00 Structural Excavation and Backfill. 3.11 TESTING FOR LEAKAGE A. Manholes shall be tested for leakage separately and independently of the wastewater lines by hydrostatic exfiltration testing, vacuum testing, or other methods acceptable to the TNRCC. If a manhole fails a leakage test, the manhole must be made water tight and retested. The maximum leakage for hydrostatic testing shall be 0.025 gallons per foot diameter per foot of manhole depth per hour. Alternative test methods must ensure compliance with the above allowable leakage. Hydrostatic exfiltration testing shall be performed as follows: All wastewater lines coming into the manhole shall be sealed with an internal pipe plug, then the manhole shall be filled with water and maintained full for at least one hour. The Contractor shall provide water, labor and materials for testing. 3.12 CERTIFICATION A. The Contractor shall submit a written certification before acceptance. This shall consist of a copy of manufacturer's test report or a statement by the supplier, accompanied by a copy of the test results, that the man- hole has been sampled, tested and inspected in accordance with the FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT#21085 330576-3 MAY 2, 2023 SANITARY SEWER MANHOLES(Fiberglass) DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 provisions of ASTM D-3753 and meets all requirements. Each certification so furnished shall be signed by an authorized agent of the supplier or manufacturer. 3.13 MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION A. Each manhole shall be marked with the following information: a. Manufacturer's name or trademark b. Manufacturing special number c. Total length and nominal diameter END OF SECTION 33 05 76 FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT#21085 330576-4 MAY 2, 2023 SANITARY SEWER MANHOLES(Fiberglass) DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 33 06 00 - UTILITY SERVICES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.02 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Furnish all labor, materials, services, equipment and appliances required in conjunction with or properly incidental to the furnishing and installation of site drainage system complete as indicated on the Drawings and as specified herein,including: a. Layout of drainage and utility lines b. Excavation for trenching, de-watering and backfilling c. Reinforced concrete drainage structures and related covers, grates and frames d. Connection of drainage piping to existing drainage line e. Lateral drainage lines to locations indicated on Drawings for connection to roof drainage piping f. Water distribution system g. Sanitary sewer system h. Gas distribution system i. Removal of excess excavated material off-site j. Provide trench safety design as required for fire hydrant work. 2. Systems shall start at a point approximately 5 feet beyond the exterior walls of the building and extend to termination unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Information Available to Bidders - Geotechnical Report." 2. Division 22 Section "Connection to Building Systems." 3. Division 32 Section "Excavating, filling, grading of site." 1.03 QUALITY STANDARDS A. Meet requirements and recommendations of applicable portions of the Standards listed. 1. Applicable publications of local governing authority 2. American Society for Testing and Materials,ASTM. 3. Texas Highway Department Standard Specifications for Construction of Highways, Streets, and Bridges, 1972, THD. 4. Texas Trench Excavation Law. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Division 1 Section- Submittal Procedures: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Submit copies of manufacturer's literature showing details of fabrication and installation of valves, vaults, clean-out boots, fire hydrants, flush hydrants, concrete pipe, joint materials, covers, grates and frames. C. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's data showing details of precast concrete structures related with site drainage. D. Certification: Furnish Owner a certification from pipe manufacturer stating that pipe conforms to Specification requirements. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 33 06 00 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 UTILITY SERVICES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 1.05 TESTING A. Listed herein a minimum testing requirements. Cost for making these tests will be paid for by the Contractor. B. Backfill: One laboratory test, TEX 114-E, for soil density shall be made for each type of soil used as backfill material. When a test has been made previously on similar soil, a duplicate test will not be necessary. C. Reinforcing Steel: Furnish the Architect a certification from the steel fabricator or manufacturer stating that reinforcing steel conforms to Specification requirements. D. Portland Cement Concrete: Contractor may use mix design currently being used which meets Specification requirements. In lieu of this, provide samples of materials proposed for use in Portland Cement concrete. Testing laboratory will determine that cement and aggregates meet requirements of these Specifications. Laboratory shall then prepare mix design which conforms to Specifications. New mix design will be required if materials are changed or if concrete does not meet strength or workability requirements. E. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE PIPES FOR STORM SEWER SYSTEM A. Reinforced-ATSM C76 Class lll Joints - 1. Pipe of 12" diameter and over - Tongue and groove with neoprene or other approved gasket. 2. Fittings and specials- Gasket type joints as required for pipe being connected. 2.02 CONCRETE STRUCTURES A. Portland Cement: Shall be of a standard brand and shall conform to the latest ASTM designation C150, Type 1. B. Aggregates for concrete: Fine or coarse aggregate and shall meet the requirements of THD, Item 421. C. Concrete: Composed of Portland Cement, coarse aggregate, fine aggregate, water, mineral filler and/or admixtures, if permitted by the Architect. Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength at 28 days of not less than 3000 psi and shall have a maximum water- cement ratio of 7.0 gallons per sack, minimum cement content of 5.0 sacks per cubic yard, and a slump from two (2) to three (3) inches. Measuring materials, batching, and mixing shall conform to ASTM Designation C94. D. Reinforcing Steel: Conforming to ASTM Designation A615 of grade 40 or 60. E. Cast Iron Rings, Covers, and Grates: Shall be true to pattern in form and dimensions, free from pouring faults, sponginess, cracks, blow holes, and other defects in positions affecting their strength and value for the service intended. Angles shall be filleted and arises shall be sharp and true. Surfaces shall be machined where indicated or where otherwise necessary to secure true, flat surfaces. Covers and grates shall fit properly into frames, and seat uniformly and solidly. 1. Castings: Conforming to the following ASTM Designation: Gray-Iron Castings A48 Class 50 Malleable Castings A47 35018 Ductile Iron Castings A395 60-45-15 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 330600 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 UTILITY SERVICES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 2. Trench Drain: Neenah Foundry Co. Type R-4990-C (Type A, B, or C Grate openings) with Type L Frame, or approved equal. F. Inlets: Precast concrete inlets as indicated on the Drawings or approved equal. G. H. 2.03 CAST IRON PIPE A. U.L. approved and accepted by State Fire Insurance Commission without penalty. Manufactured in accordance with Federal Specification WW-P-42, AWWA C1-6-53 (ASA A21.6) or AWWDA C108-53 (ASA A21.8), Class 150. Centrifugal cast pipe shall have metal thickness based on tensile strength of 18,000 pounds per square inch and modulus of rupture of 40,000 pounds per square inch. It shall be designed for five foot cover, trench condition B. For any variation in the above physical strength values, there shall be a corresponding variation in metal thickness based on the ASA approved formula in Manual for Computation of Strength and Thickness of Cast Iron Pipe (A21.1- 1939). 1. Joints: One of the following types: a. Push-On: AWWA C111 rubber gaskets and lubricant. b. Mechanical: AWWA C111 ductile iron or gray-iron glands, high strength bolts and nuts and rubber gaskets. 2. Gasket: a. American-Fastite Joint b. Lone Star-Bell-Tite Joint c. U.S.-Tyton d. or approved equal. 3. Fittings: AWWA C100-08 or C110-53 (ASA A21.10) bell and spigot type Class D, or AWWA C111-53 (ASA A21.11)mechanical joint type. 4. Lining: Outside tar coated, inside cement lined and sealed in conformance with AWWA C104-53 (ASA A21.4) except that cement lining may be half thickness in conformance with Federal Specification WW-P-421. 5. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B32,Alloys Sn 95, Sn 94, ORE. 2.04 STEEL PIPE A. Standard line pipe with plain ends, beveled for welding in random lengths, with welded fittings such as tube turns of same thickness as the pipe,unless otherwise required. 1. Flanges for connecting to valves - Forges steel welding neck designed for 150 PSI pressure,unless indicated otherwise. 2. Gaskets - 1/16"thick a. American Standard b. Rainbow c. or approved equal. 3. Tees for connecting service lines to main: a. For new empty mains: Mueller Brass Co., H-17701 and 17500 or approved equal butt-welded type. b. For existing mains in use: Mueller Brass Co.,H-17570 or approved equal. C. 2.05 PVC PIPING AND FITTING ASSEMBLY A. Piping and Fittings: PVC plastic pipe AWWA C900, class 150 or 200 for water piping and provide with bell end and ASTM F 447 elastomeric seal gasket and plain end for PVC elastomeric gasket fittings. ASTM D 3034, SDR 35 for sewer piping. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 330600 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 UTILITY SERVICES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. C. Solvent: ASTM D 2564, use type and procedures recommended by pipe manufacturer to make solvent-welded joints. Thoroughly clean pipe and fitting of dirt, dust, and moisture before applying solvent. D. PVC to Metal Connection: Work metal connection first. Use a non-hardening pipe dope such as Permatex No. 2 on threaded PVC to metal joints. Use only light wrench pressure. E. Threaded PVC Connection: Where required,use threaded PVC adapters into which pipe may be welded. F. Plastic Underground Warning Tapes: Polyethylene plastic tape, 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick, solid green in color with continuously-printed caption in black letters "CAUTION - SEWER LINE BURIED BELOW." 2.06 FIRE HYDRANTS A. Conforming to AWWA Standard C 502-54 dry barrel type traffic mode with 5" minimum diameter valve opening. Mueller Brass Co. -A-24123, or approved equal. 2.07 TAPPING SLEEVE AND VALVE A. Suitable for tapping cast iron water main under pressure and having a mechanical end joint. Kennedy Valve Company- 950X, or approved equal. 2.08 GATE VALVES A. Water distribution - Designed for 150 pounds per square inch minimum working pressure. End design to conform to piping design. Clear waterway through valve shall equal nominal diameter of the valve. Valve shall have a 2" square operating nut turning counter clockwise to open with direction indicated by an arrow cast in the metal. 1. Sizes less than 2" - Of brass conforming to Dereal Specifications WW-V-54, Type 1, Class B. 2. Sizes 2" to 4" - Having cast iron body, brass-mounted, conforming to Fed Spec WW-X- 58, Class A or AWWA standard C500, double disk type,non-rising stem. 3. Sizes 4" and larger for fire protection-Nonrising Stem,UL 262,FM approved,iron body and bonnet with flange for indicator post,bronze seating material, inside screw, 175-psig (1200 1cPa) working pressure, mechanical joint ends. Provide with flanged ends for pit installation. B. Gas system-Cast iron wading type with cover marked"G" or "GAS" C. Gas Distribution- Double disc type with parallel seat, non-rising stem, bronze mounted, with flanged end, designed for 176 pounds per square inch minimum working pressure. Mueller Brass Co. -A-2483-6, or approved equal. 2.09 STOP COCKS A. Cast iron body, designed for 125 pounds per square inch working pressure. Mueller Lub O SEAL,H-11170 and H-11175, or approved equal. 2.10 VALVE BOXES A. Water system - Of cast iron complete with lock-type cover operated by a special wrench and having the word "WATER" cast in the cover. Boxes shall be of the extension type with screw or slide-type adjustment and with flared base. Metal shall be 3/16" miniinum thickness. 2.11 CLEAN OUT BOOTS FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT#21085 330600 - 4 MAY 2, 2023 UTILITY SERVICES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Cast-iron ferrule and countersunk brass cleanout plug,with round cast iron access frame and heavy duty, secured, scoriated cast iron cover shall be Trinity Valley 1684, or approved equal. 2.12 BACKFILL MATERIAL: A. Borrow: Reused excavated or equal borrow material; low expansiveness, uniform in grade, free from organic materials, capable of being compacted to 95 percent maximum density at optimum moisture content;ASTM D-698. 1. Sand: Natural river or bank sand; free of silt, clay, loam, friable or soluble materials, and organic matter; graded in accord with ASTM C136. B. Bedding: 1. Washed gravel, 1/4" to 1-1/2" in size. 2. Screened pit run gravel passing 1-1/2" sieve and retained on 1/4" sieve. 3. Pea gravel passing 5/8" sieve and retained. 4. 5. PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, tools, materials and incidentals required to complete the work. B. The Contractor shall lay out all work included herein and shall determine the elevations of existing piping at all tap locations and furnish that data to the Owner for review of flow capacity. 3.02 EXCAVATION: A. The Contractor shall excavate all materials encountered regardless of the difficulties encountered. The ditch shall be no greater in width or depth than is necessary to permit construction in accordance with the plans and specifications. The maximum width of trench at top of pipe without sheeting, shoring and bracing shall be the external diameter of the pipe plus eight inches. B. The Contractor shall determine the need for sheeting and bracing to safeguard the workmen. When sheeting and bracing are necessary the trench or excavation shall be dug to such width that proper allowance is made for the space occupied by the sheeting. All sheeting, shoring and bracing shall have sufficient strength and rigidity to withstand the pressure exerted and protect all persons or property from injury or damage. Sheeting, shoring and bracing shall not be left in place, but shall be removed in such a manner as not to endanger or damage new or existing structures. All holes or voids left by the removal of sheeting shall be backfilled. C. Soft, Spongy or otherwise unstable material which will not provide a firm foundation for the pipe shall be removed and replaced with suitable material from the excavation or other sources approved by the Architect and shall be compacted as provided for in the Specifications. When unstable conditions are not corrected by the above means, the Contractor will be required to use rock, gravel, concrete or timber foundations. The type of foundation shall be determined by the Architect. There will be no extra compensation for this work. 3.03 BEDDING: FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 330600 - 5 MAY 2, 2023 UTILITY SERVICES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Trenches for pipe shall be excavated to a minimum depth of three inches below the grade of the outside of the pipe. Trenches shall then be filled up to and around the pipe exterior for at least 15 percent of its overall height with one of the following materials: B. Other type of bedding shall be provided when designated on the Drawings. C. 3.04 BACKFILL: A. After the pipe has been installed, selected material from the excavation at a moisture content with which the required density can be obtained shall be placed equally along both sides of the pipe in layers not exceeding six inches loose depth. Care shall be taken to insure thorough compaction of the fill under the haunches of the pipe. Each layer shall be thoroughly compacted by hand or pneumatic tampers until the till has reached an elevation 12" above the top of the pipe. The remainder of the backfill shall be placed in layers not exceeding 10" loose depth and shall be compacted by an approved method which will obtain the density of the adjacent undisturbed soil. Backfill for utilities under pavements and curbs and gutters shall be compacted in 6" layers to a density not less than 95 percent of maximum density at optimum moisture content of Standard Proctor Density. Water jetting will not be permitted. 1. Structures: Place backfill, as far as possible, as the work progresses, evenly on all sides of the structure. Remove forms, shoring, sheeting, bracing, etc., before starting to backfill and do not backfill against concrete until directed, which in general shall be at least 7 days after placement. Take care to prevent any wedging action of backfill against structure. 3.05 STORM SEWER SYSTEM A. No pipe shall be laid until it has been inspected and approved. All pipe shall be laid and jointed in the dry. The pipe shall be laid up-grade beginning at the lower end of the line. Pipe shall be laid accurately to line and grade. When the entire pipe has been checked for line and grade, the body of the pipe shall be back-filled with enough earth or concrete on both sides to hold the pipe firmly in position. B. Wye Connections: The connection of one pipe to another may be accomplished with a precast wye or by means of pipe-to-pipe connection. A pipe-to-pipe connection shall be made by cutting a hole in the larger pipe slightly larger than the outside diameter of the pipe to be connected. The smaller pipe to be connected shall not project into the larger pipe. A concrete collar not less than 6" thick and 6" wide shall be placed around the smaller pipe on the exterior surface of the larger pipe. C. End-to-end Connections: Whenever a smaller pipe is jointed end-to-end to a larger pipe, the inside tops of the two pipes shall be matched. The void between the pipes shall be filled with cemented brick work or where this is not possible the void shall be filled with concrete or mortar. In either case, a concrete collar not less than 6" thick and 6" wide shall be placed over the joint. D. E. F. 3.06 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEM A. Pipe: As required per City specification. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 330600 - 6 MAY 2, 2023 UTILITY SERVICES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 B. Location: Where specific dimension is not shown, sewer shall be located at least 10' horizontally from any water supply or service line. Crossing above water lines: Construct gravity sewers which pass over water lines of Cast Iron Pipe for a distance of 9' each side of the crossing. No joint shall occur within 3' each side of the crossing. C. Laying Pipe: Shape the bottom of the trench to give substantial uniforin circumferential support to the lower fourth of the pipe. Lay pipe proceeding upgrade with the spigot ends of the bell and spigot pipe and the tongue ends of tongue and groove pipe pointing in the direction of flow. Lay each section true to line and grade in such a manner as to form a close concentric joint with the adjoining pipe and to prevent sudden offsets of the flow lines. As the work progresses, clear the interior of the pipe of all dirt and superfluous material. Where cleaning after laying is difficult due to small pipe size, keep a suitable swab or drag in the pipe and pull it forward past each joint immediately after the jointing is complete. When work is not in progress, plug the ends closing them by another approved method. If maximum width of the trench at the top of the pipe exceeds the specified dimension for any reason other than by direction, provide at no additional cost such concrete cradling, pipe encasement or other bedding as may be required to satisfactorily support the added load of backfill. D. Infiltration: Leakage into the sewer shall not exceed 500 gallons per inch of nominal diameter per day per mile of pipe for any section between successive manholes. If the infiltration rate does not appear to be acceptable, measure the amount of leakage with a suitable weir or other device as directed. If the measured rate of infiltration exceeds the acceptable maximum,make correction in the system until it becomes acceptable. E. Manholes: Construct manholes of precast concrete sections or of brick. Covers and frames shall be of cast iron. Invert channels shall be smooth and semi-circular in shape, conforming to the inside of the adjacent sewer section. Make changes in direction of flow with a smooth curve of as large a radius as the manhole size will permit. Changes in size and grade of the channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Form the invert channels directly in the concrete of the manhole base or by use of a half tile laid in concrete, or by laying full-section sewer pipe through the manhole and breaking out the top half after surrounding concrete has hardened. The floor of the manhole outside the channels shall be smooth and shall slope toward the channels not less than 1" per foot nor more than 2" per foot. Free drop inside the manhole shall not exceed 2'-6" measured from the invert of the inlet pipe to the top of the floor of the manhole outside the channels. Construct drop manholes whenever the free drop would otherwise be greater than 2'-6". In all manholes, provide steps of cast iron. Width of steps shall not be less than 10", set them approximately 15" apart and with alternate steps off- set 6". Rungs of 7/8" diameter wrought iron, galvanized after fabrication,may be substituted for steps and may be installed without offset if the crossbar is not less than 14" long. Rungs shall be formed so that crossbar is sufficiently below plane of side bar to prevent foot from slipping off. Provide not less than 6-1/2" of toe room at each rung, measured from inside face of the crossbar. F. Clean-outs and Stacks: Use pipe of the same material as the mainline and of 6" diameter unless shown otherwise. Provide removable standard pipe plugs. G. Testing: Sewer mains will be checked to determine any displacement of the pipe after trench has been backfilled 2' above the pipe and compacted. Testing shall be with a light flashed between manholes or manhole location. If poor alignment or displacement or other defects are discovered,they shall be corrected as directed. 3.07 WATER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 330600 - 7 MAY 2, 2023 UTILITY SERVICES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 A. Pipe Material and Preparation: Use PVC pipe. Before lowering pipe into trench, clean the interior of all foreign matter, inspect the pipe for defects. Defective, damaged or unsound pipe must be removed from the site. B. Laying Pipe: The full length of each pipe section shall rest solidly upon the pipe bed with recesses excavated to accommodate bells and joints. Keep pipe interior clean and dry during laying operations. When work is not in progress, plug the ends or close them by another approved method. Do not lay pipe with bells facing in direction of laying. Do not lay pipe closer than 10' to a sewer. At cross-overs with sewers, no joint in the water line shall be closer than 9' from the cross-over point. Where possible, lay water lines 6' above sewers at cross-overs. Provide valves, plugs or caps, as required, where pipe ends are left for future connections. Deflections from a straight line or grade as required by vertical or horizontal curves of off-sets shall not exceed 6/1)inches per lineal foot of pipe,between the center lines, extended, of any 2 connecting pipes. D represents the nominal pipe diameter in inches. If alignment requires deflection in excess of this limitation, use special bends or a sufficient number of shorter lengths of pipe to provide angular deflections within the limits. C. Cutting Pipe: Use an approved type of mechanical cutter. Use wheel cutters when practical. D. Pipe Joints: Install Mechanical Joints according to joint manufacturer's recommendations. Center the spigot in the bell,push the pipe in position and bring it into required alignment. E. Valves: Where feasible, locate valves outside the area of roads and streets. Set valves plumb. Unless shown otherwise,provide a valve box over each outside gate valve. Box shall be of such length as will be adapted, without full extension, to the depth of cover required over the pipe at its location. Center the box on the valve. Carefully tamp earth fill around the box to a distance of 4' on all sides or to the undisturbed trench face if less than 4'. F. Fire Hydrants: Set the hydrant plumb and at such elevation that the connecting pipe will not have less cover than the distributing mains. Provide a concrete slab for the hydrant as required. Secure the hydrant to prevent it from blowing off the line with a concrete thrust block set between the back of the hydrant, opposite the pipe connections, and the vertical face of the trench. If the character of the soil is such that the hydrant cannot be wedged in this manner,provide bridle rods and rod collars of not less than 3/4" stock and protect them with a coating of acid resisting paint. Place at least 5 cubic feet of broken stone around the hydrant base to insure drainage. Thoroughly compact the backfill around hydrants to grade. G. Flush Hydrants: Install where required so as to be flush with finished edge. H. Meter and Meter Vault: Valves and fittings in meter vault shall be bolted flange type with ring gaskets. L Meter Vault: Per City Specifications. J.Anchorage of Fittings: Anchor tees, bends and plugs in mains with thrust blocks formed of 2,500 p.s.i. 28 day strength concrete. K. Sterilization: Sterilize each unit of completed distribution system, using chlorine, before it is accepted for domestic operation. If possible, flush the lines thoroughly before introduction of chlorinating material. The amount of chlorine shall be such as to provide a dosage of at least 50 parts per million. The chlorinating material shall be introduced into the system by an approved method. It shall remain in the system for a contact period of at least 24 hours and until the pressure test required below is complete. During this time valves in the system shall be opened and closed several times. After the contact period, flush the system with clean water until the residual chlorine content is depleted or not greater than 0.5 part million. Then take Bacteria samples as directed and submit them to the State Health Department Laboratory for analysis. Final results of the test shall indicate no chlorine bacteria present in the samples. Water mains shall meet State Health Department requirements before acceptance. FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 330600 - 8 MAY 2, 2023 UTILITY SERVICES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 L. Testing: During sterilization contact period, test the system. Piping shall have been laid, joints completed and trench partially backfilled but leaving the joints exposed for examination. Unless otherwise required, expel air in the line and subject it to a hydrostatic pressure test of 50 pounds per square inch in excess of the anticipated static pressure at the points of reading when the system is pit in operation. Maintain the pressure for one hour. Exposed pipe,joints, fittings, valves and accessories shall be inspected. Tighten or remake defective joints. Replace defective material and repeat the test until results are satisfactory. Conduct open trench tests for 2 hours and covered trench tests for 24 hours. Provide all plugs, valves, pumps, equipment and labor necessary for conducting the tests. Assume responsibility for damage and/or contamination to existing connecting supply mains. M. Special Requirements: Where conditions prevent the actual visible inspection of each joint or when the joints are made of a material other than lead such that leakage diminishes as the material in the joints ages,provide a calibrated gauge and meter to determine the quantity of water lost by leakage under normal operating pressure. To be accepted, any leakage (evaluated on a pressure basis of 150 pounds per square inch) must be less than 100 U.S. gallons per 24 hours per mile of pipe, per inch nominal diameter or pipe for pipe in 12 foot lengths, 75 gallons for pipe in 16 foot lengths, and varies proportionately for other pipe lengths. In calculating leakage, make allowance for added joints in the pipeline above the normal for unit lengths of pipe. Should any test of combined sections of pipeline disclose leakage greater than the acceptable limit, make repairs until the leakage is reduced to, at most,the acceptable limits. 3.08 CLEAN UP A. Upon completion of the work covered by this Section, the Contractor shall clean up all work areas by removing all debris, surplus materials, and equipment from the site. The ground surface shall be restored to its original condition as nearly as possible. 3.09 PROTECTION A. Properly protect existing utility lines shown on the Drawings from damage due to these operations. If damage occurs, satisfactorily repair it at no additional cost. If damage occurs to an unknown line, give immediate notification. END OF SECTION 33 06 00 FIRE STATION NO. 3; PROJECT #21085 330600 - 9 MAY 2, 2023 UTILITY SERVICES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 33 14 19.13 - FIRE HYDRANTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary to provide all fire hydrants required to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Art. TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 CONCRETE A. Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 2000 p.s.i. at 28 days and shall be in accordance with Subsection 03 30 02 "Normal Weight Aggregate Concrete". 2.02 FIRE HYDRANTS A. The fire hydrants shall conform to AWWA C-502, latest revision thereof, except for changes, additions and supplementary details specifically outlined herein: a. Hydrants shall be of the traffic model type equipped with a safety flange or collar on both the hydrant barrel and stem. b. Tyne of Shutoff- The shut off shall be of the compression type only. c. Inlet Connection - The inlet shall be AWWA C-111 (latest revision thereof) mechanical joint for six (6")inch, Class 50 ductile iron pipe. A complete set of joint material shall be furnished with each hydrant. d. Delivery Classifications - Each hydrant shall have two hose nozzles and one pumper nozzle. Nozzle shall be threaded into the hydrant. e. Bury Length- The hydrants shall be furnished in the bury length as specified. f. Diameter (Nominal Inside) of Hose and Pumper Nozzles - The hose nozzles shall be two and one-half (2-1/2") inches inside diameter and the pumper nozzle shall be four(4")inches inside diameter. g. Hose and Pumper Nozzle Threads - The hose nozzles shall have two and one-half (2-1/2) inch National Standard Thread(7-1/2 threads per inch). The pumper nozzle shall have six (6) threads per inch with an outside diameter of 4.658 inches, pitch diameter of 4.543 inches, and a root diameter of 4.406 inches. h. Harnessing Lugs-None required. i. Nozzle Cap Gaskets- Required. j. Drain Opening - Drain opening is required. Tapping of the drain opening for pipe threads is not required. k. The Valve Seat Ring - The valve seat ring shall not be made an integral part of the shoe. The valve seat ring shall be bronze and shall thread into a bronze drain ring. 1. Nozzle Cap Chains-Hydrants shall be furnished with nozzle cap chains. in. Direction to Open- The hydrants shall open left(counter clockwise). n. Color of Finish Above Ground Line - That portion of the hydrant above the ground line shall be painted chrome yellow. o. Shape and Size of Operating and Cap Nuts - The operating and cap nuts shall be tapered pentagon one and one-fourth (1-1/4") inch point to face at base and one and one-eight(1-1/8")inch point to face at top of nut. FIRE STATION NO. 3. PROJECT #21085 33 14 19.13 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 FIRE HYDRANTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 p. Size of Fire Hydra - The main valve opening shall not be less than five and one- fourth(5-1/4")inches inside diameter. q. Valve Facing - The main valve facing of the hydrant shall be rubber with 90± one (1) durometer hardness. When the main valve lower washer and stem nut are not an integral casting then the bottom stem threads shall be protected with ductile and/or bronze cap nut and a stainless steel and/or bronze lock nut. r. Barrel Sections - The hydrant shall be made in two or more barrel sections with flanges connecting the barrel to the elbow and to the packing plate. s. Breakable Coupling- Hydrants shall be equipped with a breakable coupling on both the barrel section and the stem. The couplings shall be so designed that in case of traffic collision, the barrel and stem collar will break before any other part of the hydrant breaks. These couplings shall be at least two (2) inches above the finished grade line. t. Hydrant Adjustment - The hydrant shall be designed as to permit its extension without excavating after the hydrant is completely installed. u. Breakable Collars, Barrel and Stem - Weakened steel or weakened cast iron bolts that are used in the breakable barrel couplings will not be acceptable. v. Operating Stem- Stems that have operating threads located in the waterway shall be made of manganese bronze, everdure, or other high quality non-corrodible metal. Stems that do not have operating threads located in the waterway must be sealed by a packing gland or"O" ring seal located between the stem threads and the waterway. Iron or steel stems shall be constructed with a bronze sleeve extending through the packing "O" ring seal area. The sleeve shall be of sufficient length to be in the packing or "O" ring seal in both open and closed positions of the main valve. The sleeve shall be secured to the steel stem so as to prevent water leakage between the two when subjected to 300 pounds hydrostatic test pressure. w. Drain Valve Mechanism - Drain valves operating through springs or gravity are not acceptable. x. Operating Stem Nut - The operating stem nut shall be designed to prevent seepage, rain, or sleet and the accumulation of dust between the operating nut and the hydrant top. The operating stem nut shall be made of bronze. Y. Packing Gland or "O" Ring Seal- Fire hydrants having the threaded part of the stem at the hydrant top shall be equipped with a packing gland or an "O" ring seal immediately below the threaded section of the stem. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL A. Fire hydrants shall be located in accordance with the lines and grades shown on the drawings. Fire hydrants shall stand plumb and hose nozzle shall be parallel to curb and street with the pumper nozzle facing the street. 3.02 LOCATION A. It is the intent of these specifications that the fire hydrant barrel shall be set so that no portion of the pumper or hose nozzle cap will be less than 12-inches nor more than 18- inches from the back of the curb and the bury line on the barrel shall be level with the top of the curb. It is also intended that no portion of the hydrant or nozzle cap shall be within 6-inches of the sidewalk. If the established lines and grades violate any of the above stated conditions, notify the Engineer immediately so that remedial instructions can be given to the Contractor. FIRE STATION NO. 3. PROJECT #21085 33 14 19.13 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 FIRE HYDRANTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.03 CONNECTION TO MAIN A. Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a six (6") inch branch line controlled by an independent six (6") inch gate valve, open left. All pipe from the main tee to the fire hydrant shall be Class 150 - 6 inch cast iron pipe, swivel or anchor fittings shall be used to connect the fire hydrant gate valve to the waterline. 3.04 THRUST BLOCKING A. The bowl of each hydrant shall be securely braced against undisturbed earth at the end of the trench with concrete thrust blocking. 3.05 DRAINAGE PIT A. A drainage pit 2 feet in diameter and 2 feet in depth shall be excavated below each hydrant and filled compactly with coarse sand, under and around the bowl of the hydrant and to a level 6-inches above the waste opening. No hydrant drainage pit shall be connected to a sewer. 3.06 WASHING AND STERILIZING FITTINGS A. Valves, hydrants and fittings shall be stored on timbers and kept clean. Where soil or other substances have come in contact with the water surfaces of the fittings, the interior shall be washed and sterilized with an approved sterilizing agent. 3.07 CERTIFICATION A. The manufacturer shall upon request furnish two (2) certified sets of prints showing complete details and dimensions of the hydrant. The manufacturer shall upon request furnish one (1) certified copy of the physical tests of all metals used in the manufacture of the fire hydrant that is normally manufactured and that will meet these specifications. The manufacturer shall upon request furnish a certified letter of compliance stating that their fire hydrant meets these specifications. END OF SECTION 33 14 19.13 FIRE STATION NO. 3. PROJECT #21085 33 14 19.13 - 3 MAY 2, 2023 FIRE HYDRANTS DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 33 14 18 - BACKFLOW PREVENTER PART 1 —DESCRIPTION 1.01 SCOPE A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary to furnish and install the backflow preventers as required to complete the project. This specification is a performance specification as defined in Art. TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. 1.02 GENERAL A. The backflow preventer shall be of the double check, antisiphon type and shall be designed for a minimum of 150 p.s.i. water working pressure service. It shall also include a drip cup mounted below the valve to catch water dripping from the unit during valve operation. PART 2—PRODUCTS 2.01 BODY A. Body shall be aluminum bronze-A.S.T.M. B148-9C. 2.02 INTERNAL PARTS A. Internal metal parts shall be stainless steel. 2.03 CHECK VALVE SEATS A. Check valve seats shall be rubber. PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 BACKFLOW A. Backflow preventer unit shall include double check valve and back siphon unit, two gate valves, and a strainer. Drip cup shall be piped with pvc pipe to a suitable discharge location. 3.02 INSTALLATION AND TESTING A. Backflow device shall be installed and tested by a licensed plumber. Testing shall meet TCEQ requirements and the TCEQ's Backflow Prevention Assembly Test and Maintenance Report form shall be completed and provided to the Owner. 3.03 OPERATION A. Backflow preventer unit shall meet latest editions and requirements of ASSE 1013 and AW WA C506. FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT#21085 33 14 1 8 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 BACKFLOW PREVENTER DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 3.04 PRESSURE DROP A. Backflow preventer unit shall cause a maximum of I I p.s.i. pressure drop at a flow rate of 35 G.P.M. END OF SECTION 33 14 18 FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT#21085 33 14 1 8 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 BACKFLOW PREVENTER DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 33 14 19.1 - GATE VALVES FOR PORTABLE WATER LINES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary to provide all gate valves for potable water lines required to complete this project. This specification is a performance specifications as defined in Art. TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GATE VALVES A. All valves 4" and larger shall meet the following requirements. Gate valves shall be of an acceptable manufacture and shall conform to A.W.W.A. Standard Specification C-500,latest revision thereof, except for changes or additions as follows: a. The gate valves shall be double disc with parallel or tapered seats and non-rising stems. b. Valve ends shall be flanged or mechanical joint type or a combination of these as indicated or specified. A complete set of joint materials shall be furnished with each valve, except for flanges. c. Valves 16" and larger shall be furnished for horizontal installation. d Stem seals shall be the O-Ring type or stuffing box type on valves through 12". Valves 16" and larger shall be equipped with stuffing boxes. e. Valves shall open left (counter clockwise). Valves 20" and larger shall have the main valve stem furnished with a combination hand wheel and operating nut. f Tapping valves to be used with tapping saddles shall have one end mechanical joint. g. The minimum number of turns to open as applied to the operating nut for valves through 12" shall be as set out in A.W.W.A. C-500, latest revision thereof, and for valves 16" and larger as follows: 16 inch- 96 turns to open 20 inch- 128 turns to open 24 inch- 152 turns to open 30 inch- 186 turns to open 36 inch-222 turns to open h. All gears shall be oil filled, extended type gear cases. i. Valves shall be furnished without position indicator. j. Bypass valves shall be installed on valves 20" in diameter and larger. k. All valves 16 inches in diameter and above shall be equipped with bevel gears. 1. The manufacturer shall upon request furnish two (2) certified sets of prints showing complete details and dimensions and materials used. The manufacturer shall also upon request furnish a certified letter of compliance stating that their valve meets these specifications. Also, the manufacturer shall upon request furnish one (1) certified copy of the physical tests of all metals used in the manufacture of the valve. 2.02 RESILIENT SEATED GATE VALVES A. Resilient-seated gate valves may be used instead of gate valves in sizes 3" thru 12". All valves shall meet the following requirements. Resilient seated valves shall be of an acceptable manufacture and shall conform to A.W.W.A. Standard Specification C-509, latest edition, except for changes or additions as follows: FIRE STATION NO. 3. PROJECT #21085 33 14 19 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 GATE VALVES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 a. The resilient-seated gate valves shall have non-rising stems. b. Valve ends shall be flanged or mechanical joint type or a combination of these as indicated or specified. A complete set of joint materials shall be furnished with each valve, except for flanges. c. Stem seals shall be the o-ring type or stuffing box type. d. Valves shall open left(counter clockwise). e. Tapping valves to be used with tapping saddles shall have one end mechanical joint. f. The manufacture shall upon request furnish two (2) certified sets of prints showing complete details, dimensions and materials used. The manufacturer shall also upon request furnish a certified letter of compliance stating that their valve meets these specifications. Also, the manufacturer shall upon request furnish one (1) certified copy of the physical tests of all metals used in the manufacture of the valve. 2.03 GATE VALVES 4" AND SMALLER A. Valve shall be bronze body screw type gate valve (200 p.s.i. working pressure). Furnish 2 suitable operating wrenches. 2.04 VALVE BOXES A. Each gate valve shall be provided with an adjustable, cast iron, road-type valve box with a minimum opening of 5 inches. Valve boxes shall be complete with base, extensions, top section and cover. The base shall be of the proper size and shape to fit the valve on which the base is installed. The word "WATER" shall be cast into the cover. The extension pipe of the valve box shall be P.V.C. (DR 18) pipe. Valve boxes shall be CLOW, Series F2000, Mueller H-10380 or approved equal. In Corpus Christi valve boxes shall be City of Corpus Christi pattern. END OF SECTION 33 14 19.1 FIRE STATION NO. 3. PROJECT #21085 33 14 19 - 2 MAY 2, 2023 GATE VALVES DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SECTION 33 31 11 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR SEWER LINES (SDR 26) PART1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. This specification shall govern for all work necessary for furnishing all polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings required to complete the PVC sewer pipe for site utilities. This specification is a design specification as defined in Art. TS-1 of the Technical Special Provisions. PART 2—PRODUCTS (NOT APPICABLE) PART 3—EXECUTION 3.01 MATERIAL A. Pipe and fittings shall be manufactured from clean, virgin, Type I, Grade I polyvinyl chloride compound, conforming to ASTM Specification D-1784. 3.02 PIPE A. 4" Thru 15" Diameter Pipe: Pipe shall be SDR 26 and conform to ASTM Specification D3034. 3.03 PIPE STIFFNESS A. Minimum pipe stiffness at 5% deflection shall be in accordance with the schedule shown below Pipe Diameter Pipe Stiffness Inches kPa p.S.l. 4 790 115 6 Thru 15 790 115 Minimum pipe stiffness at 5% deflection shall be calculated in accordance with ASTM Specification D-2411. 3.04 FITTINGS A. Fittings and accessories shall be manufactured of the same material as specified for pipe, shall be at least SDR 26 and shall have joint configurations identical to that of the pipe. 3.05 JOINTS A. Joints for pipe and fittings shall be compression rubber gasket joints conforming to the material and performance of ASTM Specification D-3212. The pipe joint shall consist of a bell that is an integral part of the pipe wall with compression rubber rings. The joint shall be capable of withstanding an internal hydrostatic pressure of 25 p.s.i. for one (1)hour without any leakage. 3.06 MARKING A. Pipe shall be marked to show nominal pipe size, type of PVC, SDR number, ASTM designated number and manufacturer's name and code. END OF SECTION 33 31 11 FIRE STATION No. 3, PROJECT #21085 3331 11 - 1 MAY 2, 2023 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE PIPE AND FITTINGS FOR SEWER LINES (SDR26) DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Mr. Ray Holliday, AIA, ASLA, LI Brown Reynolds Watford Architects, Inc 175 Century Square Drive, Suite 350 College Station, Texas 77840 June 28, 2022 ((«rrrrrrrrc % / o/!a % iiiiii iiini 000 j tae;, GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEERING STUDY Corpus Christi Fire Station No. 3 1401 Morgan Avenue Corpus Christi, Texas Gessner Engineering Job No. 21-0997 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 June 28,2022 Mr. Ray Holliday,AIA,ASLA, LI Brown Reynolds Watford Architects, Inc GE N IER 175 Century Square Drive,Suite 350 College Station,Texas 77840 Re:Geotechnical Engineering Study Corpus Christi Fire Station No.3 1401 Morgan Avenue Corpus Christi,Texas Gessner Engineering Job No.21-0997 Dear Mr. Holliday: This report conveys our geotechnical engineering study conducted for the proposed Corpus Christi Fire Station No. 3 to be located in Corpus Christi, Texas. The following report contains our design recommendations and considerations based on our understanding of the information provided to us. The purpose of this study was to drill borings within the project site, to perform laboratory testing to classify and characterize subsurface conditions, and to prepare an engineering report presenting foundation design and construction recommendations for the proposed building,as well as pavement design and construction recommendations. We trust that this report is responsive to your project needs. Please contact us if you have any questions or if we can be of further assistance. We are happy to be of service to you on this phase of the project and look forward to the opportunity to provide additional services for geotechnical engineering, structural engineering, civil engineering, land surveying,and construction materials testing as the project progresses. Sincerely, GESSNER ENGINEERING, LLC F-7451 June 28,2022 dw ted F`�� Katie K.Ward, E.I.T. i c�'��: •'•"•r- :r9f 00 ; MICHAEL C. FUCINARI j .......................... Michael C. Fucinari, P.E. I�f„aO•• 127084 ••• ��rl Copies Submitted: `FS,S�CENS�•��?i Mr. Ray Holliday,AIA,ASLA, LI %% /QNA E .. CIIIAII. uiaui .III 111111110114 MAI'ur:ur1ui ui..SuIFIESmuiuwG 0111:1011111:101 91INUICA11 urur1ii.)VIAPIrRAL 9.SIRVIr:vuiui4 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 / IN / CONTENTS.................................................................................................................................................................3 INTRODUCTION........................................................................................................................................................5 PROJECTDESCRIPTION..........................................................................................................................................5 SCOPEOF SERVICES...............................................................................................................................................5 SITE INVESTIGATION PROCEDURES....................................................................................................................6 LABORATORYTESTING ..........................................................................................................................................7 SITECONDITIONS....................................................................................................................................................9 SiteGeology................................................................................................................................................9 SurfaceConditions.....................................................................................................................................9 SeismicConsiderations............................................................................................................................9 SubsurfaceConditions............................................................................................................................10 GroundwaterConditions........................................................................................................................10 ENGINEERING RECOMMENDATIONS................................................................................................................12 General Foundation Considerations............................................................................................................12 Expansive Soil-Related Movements............................................................................................................12 FoundationOptions........................................................................................................................................13 StructuralSlab-on-Voids................................................................................................................................13 DeepFoundations...........................................................................................................................................14 Drilled,Underreamed Piers....................................................................................................................14 Drilled,Straight Shaft Piers.....................................................................................................................15 Pier Shaft Potential Uplift Forces..........................................................................................................16 AllowableUplift Resistance...................................................................................................................16 TemporaryCasing............................................................................................................................................17 Earthwork..........................................................................................................................................................17 FoundationEarthwork.............................................................................................................................18 GeneralFill.................................................................................................................................................18 SiteFill........................................................................................................................................................18 Drainage............................................................................................................................................................18 PavementRecommendations.......................................................................................................................19 SubgradeConditions...............................................................................................................................19 DesignInformation...................................................................................................................................19 RigidPavement.........................................................................................................................................19 PortlandCement Concrete.....................................................................................................................21 GarbageDumpsters.................................................................................................................................21 Sidewalks...................................................................................................................................................21 FlexiblePavement....................................................................................................................................22 FlexibleBase Course...............................................................................................................................22 Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course......................................................................................................22 AdditionalConsiderations .....................................................................................................................23 PavementEarthwork................................................................................................................................23 SelectFill....................................................................................................................................................24 Pavement Drainage Considerations....................................................................................................24 OtherIssues......................................................................................................................................................24 ConstructionMaterials Testing....................................................................................................................25 GeneralComments..........................................................................................................................................25 Limitations........................................................................................................................................................26 APPENDIX.................................................................................................................................................................27 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 introd a 111111 o In S °° °° °°° of eIb 111111 s This report describes the procedures utilized The Texas Section of the American Society of during this study and presents the results of Civil Engineers defines an engineered our geotechnical engineering investigation foundation as one that includes a for the proposed Corpus Christi Fire Station geotechnical engineering investigation. To No.3. Gessner Engineering was authorized to act as this first phase of an engineered provide the subsurface investigation and foundation, our scope of work for this project report for this project by Mr. Ray Holliday on consisted of: April 21,2022. 1. Drilling 5 test borings at the selected locations within the project site to evaluate �Rro l ct the subsurface arrangement of strata and iiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiillillillillillillilliillillillillillillillillillillilillillillillillillillilliillillillillillillilliillillillillillillillilillillilillillillillillillillilliillillillillillillilliillillillillillillillilillillilillillillillillillillilliillillillillillillilliillillillillillillillilillillilillillillillillillillilliillillillillillillilliillillillillillillillilillillilillillillillillillillilliillillillillillillilliillillillillillillilliI groundwater conditions. The project consists of the proposed 2 Performing geotechnical laboratory tests construction of a fire station at the site located on recovered samples to evaluate the at 1401 Morgan Avenue in Corpus Christi, physical and engineering properties of the Texas, in Nueces County. It is understood that the proposed two-story building will have a strata observed. gross area of approximately 23,178 square feet 3. Engineering analysis to develop (sf). This project also includes ancillary recommendations with respect to: driveway and parking area pavements. • Site, subgrade, and fill preparation The following recommendations are based on Foundation design and construction assumed slab loads of approximately 200 pounds per square foot (psf) and Pavement design and construction concentrated loads of approximately 15,000 pounds.Gessner Engineering shall be notified if greater loads are anticipated. Engineering recommendations are provided on the basis of existing conditions at the time of drilling and a file containing a site plan entitled, "CC FS 3 Site Plan_2022-0519.pdf," provided in an email on May 19, 2022, by Ms. Heather White with Brown Reynolds Watford Architects, Inc. livill COINIS.urur R,JCI.ul10114 ur'ur:ur ui III SuIFIE 111111 Gur:0 011: 11.911411C 11 S 111111111M 1111RAL 9.uurRvur:Yuiui 0 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 i o r/ is r r � ,/ / i ✓ r r a , r rr ri�alJ r ri�alJ rii i i , � r r i t riga r rill// r i it r r r r Subsurface conditions at the site were achieved. If all 50 blows fall within the first 6 evaluated by drilling 5 borings at the locations inches (seating blows), then refusal (Ref.) for shown on the ProjectLayoutin the Appendix. 6 inches or less will be denoted on the Logs of These locations are approximate and Borings This blow count, or SPT "N" value, is distances were measured using a hand-held used to evaluate the engineering properties of GPS locator. On June 11,2022,the borings for the stratum. Correlations between the the building were drilled to a depth of unconfined compressive strength and the"N" approximately 25 feet below the existing value for the in situ soils have been developed ground surface and the borings for the to estimate the bearing capacity of the soils. pavements were drilled to a depth of approximately 6 feet below the existing All samples were removed from samplers in ground surface using a truck-mounted drill rig. the field, visually classified, and sealed in sample containers to preserve their in situ The Logs of Borings, presenting the moisture contents. subsurface soil descriptions,type of sampling used, laboratory results, and additional field Throughout the report,the soils are referred to data, are presented in the Appendix. The in terms used to describe their consistency. Symbols and Terms, which defines the terms The term consistency refers to the degree of and descriptive symbols used on the logs, is adhesion between the soil particles and to the also provided in the Appendix. resistance offered against forces that tend to deform or rupture the soil aggregate. Samples were taken continuously for the first Consistency of clays and other cohesive soils 10 feet in 2 foot increments. Below 10 feet, is usually described as very soft,soft,firm,stiff, samples were taken at 5 foot intervals to the very stiff, and hard. Additional consistency termination of the boring. terms used on cohesive soils are plastic,lean, and fat. As a soil approaches the Samples of soil were obtained by means of a characteristics of a clay soil, the greater the Split-Spoon with Standard Penetration Test variety of states of consistency in which it may (SPT). This test consists of measuring the be found. The physical properties of a plastic number of blows required for a free-falling soil change depending upon the moisture hammer to drive a standard Split-Spoon content of the soil. The degree of plasticity is sampler 12 inches into the subsurface material sometimes expressed by the terms fat and after being seated 6 inches. The test is lean. Lean clay is only slightly plastic;whereas terminated after 50 blows regardless of fat clay has a high plasticity. whether 12 inches of penetration has been III III. COINS III"'l ll'AUUc:'I'llIIOI1IW MAIIII"Illlllilllllllll III SlllIFIEIS"111111 G 0:10 F1111 "11.91114MCA II S F111Gall.PCF111.PRAIII. SUIRVIri 11111Y10 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 i / ... . i / r i Samples obtained during the field program pressure from load, evaporation, or suction were visually classified in the laboratory by a from gravity or vegetation. The specific geotechnical engineer or their representative. chemical makeup of the various clays causes A testing program was conducted on selected them to have a stronger or weaker ability to samples in accordance with the ASTM bond with water. Standard Test Procedures, as directed by the geotechnical engineer, to aid in classification In order to relate moisture content and soil and evaluation of engineering properties consistency, Atterberg limit tests were required for analysis. performed on the samples in accordance with ASTM D 4318. The Atterberg limit test is The laboratory testing program for this project comprised of 2 separate tests: plastic limit and included sieve analyses, moisture contents, liquid limit. The plastic limit test determines and Atterberg limits. the moisture content of the soil in its dry state while the liquid limit test determines the Sieve analyses were performed by passing the moisture content as the soil nears a liquid sample through a series of sieves to classify state. the soil based on their particle size.This allows a determination of the type of soils, , distribution of the particle sizes and the interaction between the particles.Sieves used �1�� "' for this test include a series of screens of various sizes to determine the amount of various particle sizes in a sample. ' Moisture content tests were performed in accordance with ASTM D 2216 by placing a sample into an oven with a constant temperature and comparing the mass before The plastic limit is described as the moisture oven drying to the mass after oven drying. content of the soil where it transitions between Changes in the moisture content have an brittle and plastic behavior. This point is effect on the behavior of plastic soils. determined by rolling the samples in threads Variations in the moisture content from the 1/8 inch (3 mm) in diameter to the point at state observed during investigation to the which they begin to crack and/or crumble. moisture content from the state observed during construction can result in expansive The liquid limit describes the moisture content soil-related movements. If the moisture of the soil where it transitions between plastic content of the soil increases after and liquid behavior. In conducting this test, construction, for example,the soil can induce the sample is placed in the Casagrande cup, uplift forces on the structure it is supporting. or liquid limit device.A standard grooving tool is used to create a gap in the center of the The structure of clay consists of a random sample 0.53 inches (13.5 mm) in width. The arrangement of flat plates. Edges of the cup is then dropped repeatedly onto the hard particles are positively charged, and the face rubber base at a rate of 120 blows per minute. is negatively charged. Negative charges on The liquid limit is the moisture content at the face of the clays bond with positive water which the groove closes at 25 blows. ions in the soil, causing a volumetric change resulting in expansion of the soils. This water may be released with the application of limilll. COIIIAII IIII"'l ll'AUUc:'I'llIIOI1IW MAIIII"Illlllilllllllll III SlllIFIEIS"111111 G 0:10 F11111191114MCA II S F111Gall.PCF111.PRAIII. SUIRVIri 11111Y10 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 When the liquid limit is unattainable as defined in Tex-104-E, the PI may be determined in accordance with Tex-107-E (BLS). The bar linear shrinkage (BLS) test determines shrinkage of soils by placing soil in a sample mold at a moisture content slightly above the liquid limit, oven drying it overnight, and measuring the dry length. The difference between the dry and the wet lengths is representative of the potential linear shrinkage of that soil strata. Linear shrinkage results (in percent) may be multiplied by a factor of 1.6 to determine the PI. Liquid Limit Device Results of the laboratory tests are presented The plasticity index (PI) is the difference on the Logs of Borings in the Appendix and are discussed in the following sections. between the liquid limit and the plastic limit Samples will be retained in our laboratory for and provides a description of the moisture 30 days after submittal of this report. states a soil can experience. The PI is an indicator of the potential for expansion or contraction of the soil. Yk 1' i i' r' 1" IIIIAIII. COINS III"'IIRUUCF111I II'MA F111:11111111A III S'III"IIIIIVw"YV"IIII1146 0111:10 11111:101 91114111CAII.. SIII"IIG#IILP "'lll"IILYIII'R JII.. SUIII'R1b111111iT 1111111110 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 it iii/r i i Site Geology deep foundation elements of the previous structures may still remain on site. Major soil formations provide information with Therefore, we recommend that further regards to the depth and magnitude of the investigative efforts be performed by the conditions, as well as anticipated features of contractor at the time of construction to the soils in this area. While it is valid as a better understand the extents of buried general reference, it does not provide data debris within the footprint of the building accurate enough to replace site specific and pavements. engineering analysis. Due to the historical use of the site,there may The site is mapped as being underlain by the be a number of buried structures and utilities Beaumont Formation (Qb)as indicated on the throughout the area; it is also possible that Geologic Atlas of Texas, Corpus Christi Sheet abandoned foundations, structures, and as published by the University of Texas at utilities are present and not encountered Austin. The Beaumont Formation consists of during field operations. The presence of mostly clay, silt, sand, and gravel. The buried structures (old foundations, Beaumont Formation includes mainly stream pavements, brick, debris, trash, abandoned channel, point bar, natural levee, and utilities, etc.) should be anticipated during backswamp deposits,and to a lesser extent,it construction. If these conditions are includes coastal marsh, mud flat, Iagoonal, encountered during foundation construction, lake, clay dune, and sand dune deposits. The contact Gessner Engineering for additional Beaumont Formation includes massive recommendations prior to proceeding with accumulations of calcium carbonate and construction. concretions of iron oxide and iron-manganese oxides in the zone of weathering. Seismic Considerations In addition, the Deweyville Formation (sand, Based upon a review of Section silt, clay, and gravel) is also mapped nearby. 1613 Earthquake Loads Site Ground Motion of Although not specifically mapped at the site, the 2015 International Building Code, the this formation may be encountered at following information has been summarized construction. for seismic considerations associated with this site. Surface Conditions Site Class Definition (Chapter 20 of Based on online imagery, the topography is ASCE 7): Class D. Based on the soil relatively flat across the proposed project site. borings conducted for this At the time of drilling, ground cover for the investigation,the upper 100 feet of soil proposed site consisted of grass and weeds_ may be characterized as stiff soil. It should be noted that the top Risk-Targeted Maximum Considered approximately 4 to 6 feet of material Earthquake Ground Motion Response encountered in the borings appears to be Accelerations for the Conterminous a fill material that was placed either during United States of 0.2-Second Spectral construction of or after the demolition of Response Acceleration (5%Of Critical Damping) (Figure 1613.3.1(1)): the previous structures. Construction SS—0.065 g. Note that the value taken debris was encountered below the ground from Figure 1613.3.1(1) is based on surface on the eastern side of the project site in Borings 131-11-2, BH Site Class B and is adjusted per-3, and PH-2. Site .3. Gessner Engineering believes that the Ilimill COINS III"'l lll4k,jc:'I'llIIOI1IW MAIIII"Illlllilllllllll III SlllIFIEIS"111111 G 0:10 1'111 "11.91114MCA II S I'uGall.PCI'll.uurR ul. SUIRVIri 11111Y10 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Risk-Targeted Maximum Considered Subsurface Conditions Earthquake Ground Motion Response Accelerations for the Conterminous Subsurface stratigraphy at this site can be United States of 1-Second Spectral described as clay or sandy clay overlying silty Response Acceleration (5%Of Critical sand. Each stratum has been designated by Damping) (Figure 1613.3.1(2)): grouping soils that possess similar physical S1=0.021 g. Note that the value taken and engineering characteristics. The Logs of from Figure 1613.3.1(2) is based on Boringsshould be consulted for more specific Site Class B and is adjusted per stratigraphic information. 1613.3.3. Lines designating the interfaces between • Values of Site Coefficient (Table strata on the logs represent approximate 1613.3.3(1)): Fa =1.6 boundaries, and transitions between strata may be gradual. • Values of Site Coefficient (Table 1613.3.3(2)): F„ =2.4 These soils generally exhibit high to very high potential for volumetric change due to • Where g is the acceleration due to moisture variations, as indicated by the gravity. measured PI for each sample, which are presented on the Logs of Borings in the Maximum Considered Earthquake Spectral Appendix. The in situ moisture contents that Response Accelerations are as follows: correspond to the plastic limits found in each boring indicate that the soils were generally 0.2 sec, adjusted based on equation wet at the time of sampling.Moisture contents 16-37:SMS=0.103 g are compared to plastic limits to evaluate the conditions within the plastic state for the 1 sec, adjusted based on equation 16-38: particular soil, as opposed to absolute values SM1=0.050 g of moisture content. Design Spectral Response Acceleration Groundwater Conditions Parameters are as follows: 0.2 sec, based on equation 16-39: The borings were dry augered to their completed depth in an attempt to observe SDS=0.069 g groundwater conditions. Groundwater seepage was observed in Borings BH-1 1 sec, based on equation 16-40: through BH-3 at the time of the drilling and upon drilling completion at depths ranging SD1=0.033 g between approximately 16 to 18.5 feet below the existing ground surface. Due to the limited Based on the parameters listed above,Tables depth of exploration, Borings PH-1 and PH-2 1613.3.5(1) and 1613.3.5(2), and calculations remained dry during drilling operations. It performed using the United States Geological should be noted that groundwater at the site Survey (USGS) website, the Seismic Design may occur in the form of may water Category for both short period and 1 second traveling along pervious seams or layers response accelerations is A. As part of the within the soils. The frequency of such assumptions required to complete the groundwater is expected to increase during calculations, a Risk Category of IV was and soon after periods of wet weather. The selected. direction of flow of subsurface moisture is ui ui. Cuiaui .urur Rs :11110114 MA11111:11111111A III S 111FIE'S 1111114 G 0111:1011111:101 911WIC11 SIF1111111XIIIAPIRAL 9SIRVIur:Yuiui4 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 unknown and many times will differ from the An extensive groundwater study is beyond the surface topography. Caution should be taken scope of this report. Should construction when constructing in wet seasons and all activities require further evaluation of water accumulated during construction shall groundwater volumes, seasonal fluctuations, be removed prior to concrete placement. and direction, contact Gessner Engineering. ui)AIII COINISIIIrur kuc:m.ul10114 ur'ur:ur ui III SuIFIES111IN mm ur:u ur111:0191IUICA11. SIFIrRRM111r PRA M.uurRMEY11111114„ DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 General Foundation Considerations Review of the borings and test data indicates that the factors discussed below may affect foundation design and construction at this site. The soils encountered in our borings are highly plastic and exhibit expansive soil-related movement properties. Structures constructed on-grade may experience differential movements due to volumetric changes of the underlying and surrounding soils. Movement of expansive soils is caused by fluctuations in the moisture content of soil particles. Because homogeneous expansive clay soils have relatively low permeability compared to granular soils, fluctuations in the moisture content of the soils might normally be expected to occur over a long period. However, permeability is increased with geotechnical phenomena such as ground faults, surface fractures due to desiccation of clays, and decomposition of tree roots that cause fissures and cracks that become widely disseminated over time. Due to the repeated wetting, swelling, drying, and shrinking of the clay as it weathers, the fissures often fill with silt and sand,and create pathways for water that can exacerbate the infiltration process. Water can also easily move through naturally occurring sand strata, sand seams, and micro-cracks in clay soil caused by previous shrinkage. High negative pressures, also known as suction, in clay soils with low water content also increase the tendency for water to be absorbed into the clay. Environmental factors other than climatic conditions can also affect expansive soils. Soil shrinkage may be caused by water extraction by trees and other vegetation,a process known as transpiration. Swelling can be a result of water infiltration into the soil from lawn irrigation systems, broken water pipes,flooded and leaking utility trenches, poor drainage, or leaking swimming pools; or it can be a result of slow moisture replenishment and equalization after the removal of a tree. The combined effect and variability of all of these possibilities make it difficult to accurately predict expansive soil ground movements. Foundation movements are considered problematic only if they result in negative phenomena that detrimentally affect the performance or appearance of a building. The negative phenomena are considered to be structural if the load carrying capacity of the superstructure or foundation elements are affected, or are considered to be cosmetic if only the appearance of the exterior cladding or interior wall,floor,or ceiling finishes are affected. Foundation movements can also affect the serviceability of a building,such as the opening or closing of doors.This type of movement typically occurs because of differential movements between various parts of a building. Differential movements often lead to high internal stresses in building components and subsequent cracking and separating of exterior cladding systems such as brick, cement-board panels,or in the interior finishes such as gypsum drywall panels, wood paneling, and flooring. Expansive Soil-Related Movements Gessner Engineering has calculated the potential vertical rise (PVR) of the soils at this site using the Texas Department of Transportation Method Tex-124-E. Movement may be either heave or settlement depending on the changes in the moisture content. The PVR at this site is calculated to be approximately 3.25 inches, assuming an active zone of 10 feet. Due to assumptions and CIM111. A IIINISTIIIIllklcl,llllolllwI MAIII"IIIGlil111111lI III.S IIIFIIIIIi i T'11IIII M GIIIG11:0III'Ill'',CII91114111 CAII.. "IIIFIRU C IIII"UVIIIIIALURVIIIIII'IIIIIhNG DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 generalities required for the calculation of the potential vertical movement,it should only be taken as an approximation. It should be noted that moisture variations in the subgrade soils due to poor drainage,perched water in pervious layers,leakage of utilities,etc.could induce volumetric changes resulting in movements that are in excess of those estimated by the PVR procedure. Foundation Options The following recommendations are based on the data obtained from our field and laboratory studies, our past experience with geotechnical conditions similar to those at this site, and our engineering design analyses. Due to the presence of highly expansive clay fill material near the surface of the borings and the presence of debris at deeper depths, the site may experience an unknown level of differential movement; therefore, the structural slab-on-voids foundation system is the primary recommendation for this site because of its minimal risk for differential movement. Due to the expansive nature of the soils on this site, a secondary option is not provided. It is the opinion of Gessner Engineering that the amount of site preparation required to enable a slab-on-grade foundation system to perform adequately would be equivalent or in excess of the cost of a slab-on- voids foundation system. Structural Slab-on-Voids A structural slab isolates the foundation from the soils through the use of void forms, a crawl space, or another method. These foundations are typically employed when the amount of site preparation required to reduce the PVR value to acceptable levels for a slab-on-grade foundation system would be equivalent or in excess of the cost of a slab-on-void system or when a structure is sensitive to movement.The principle behind structural elevated foundation systems is to found the structure on deep,stable soils or rock that is unlikely to be affected by seasonal changes to the shallow soils.The deep founding elements are typically piles or piers. The floor system is constructed above the shallow soils.This isolation from the surficial soils prevents damages caused by periodic shrinkage and heave of expansive clays. grµiris dosigned to `lab desiV,ned to span spa„pan between purrs between beams t)eil8ad 47iei's or "aid ft”on,irtltirKl r br fow dab Void forms InI aceif below grade Ilan 'IS(Fa, r'etaine,s not V4howoti for CZity) III III. COIIIaISIII"'llRUC:'F111I IIWV MA"'lll"IIIIIIiIII'1'III III.S1III"IIIIIIiS"1'111III'U"m 0111::10F111:101"'II 'a91I1INUIIC IL.. SIII"III'bUAIIC111I"UUIIIRA *aW.Vlll'R IIIIIIiT 11111114 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 The minimum amount of soil separation between the shallow foundation elements and the subgrade shall be 8 inches.Shallow soils at site have sufficient cohesion to remain stable during excavation of earth formed grade beams. Grade beam width and depth should be properly evaluated by the structural engineer and designed to span from pier to pier. It is also recommended that a vapor barrier be placed between the supporting soils and the concrete floor slab in accordance with ASTM E 1745-11,ASTM E 1643-11,and ACI 302.2R-06. Piers shall be designed in accordance with the Deep Foundationssection of this report. Forthe long-term effectiveness of void systems,earth retainers shall be employed to protect the void. Where an interior crawl space is provided or the interior soils and fill have sufficient cohesion to remain open, perimeter earth retainers may be used. Earth retainers shall be placed with a secure overlap against a formed concrete surface and keyed into firm soil to provide adequate support at the top and bottom of the retainer against lateral earth pressure. In full slab-on-void systems, it is recommended that earth retainers be installed on both sides of beams and excavations. This installation protects against interior collapses where soils have been disturbed by construction activities. The retainers may be placed in a manner similar to that for exterior earth retainers as described previously, or may be set prior to the pour. Should the earth retainers be set prior to the pour, they shall be either keyed into the soil below to provide support at top and bottom or be designed and supported to cantilever over the void. Cantilevered earth retainers typically require a more rigid earth retainer and extend up the grade beam a minimum distance of twice the void depth. In foundations with crawl spaces, adequate ventilation and drainage in accordance with code requirements should be provided to minimize moisture accumulation within the crawl space. Care should be taken in all foundation systems to provide adequate drainage around the structure and prevent ponding of runoff adjacent to the foundation. In addition, systems that extend from the building into the shallow soils such as plumbing should be designed to accommodate the movement of the shallow soils. Where utilities extend beyond the interior voids into natural soil or fill at the exterior face of the structure, flexible connections should be used. Gessner Engineering recommends the use of proprietary utility void systems to create a protected void that maintains the required clearance below the structure. Subgrade for the structural slab foundation system shall be prepared in accordance with the foundation portion of the soil preparation section of this report. Deep Foundations Based on the current available project information and the soils data obtained, drilled piers or other deep foundation elements are anticipated for this foundation. The foundation shall be supported on drilled, underreamed piers or drilled,straight-shaft piers.The bell to shaft diameter ratio for drilled,underreamed piers shall not exceed 3 to 1. Founding soils at this site should provide sufficient cohesion to be able to remain stable during the augering of the shaft and the reaming of the bells. Drilled, Underreamed Piers Drilled, underreamed piers shall be supported in brown,gray,and tan clay at a minimum depth of 22 feet below the existing ground surface and shall be designed as end bearing units using a maximum allowable bearing pressure of 6,350 psf for net dead plus sustained live load and 9,525 psf for net total load.These bearing pressures were evaluated using calculated factors of safety of 3 and 2, respectively. Piers shall not be spaced closer than 3 times the bell diameter, center-on- center,without decreasing pier capacity. III III. COINS III"'1111 UUc:'11110114U "'llI"Illlilll'1'llI TILS II1'11:1S1'111114U"m 01111:101III'1111:101^91INUIIC IL. WIFIRUCITU IRAL 9SIRMCi 11111P4 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 At the time of construction,deeper piers than anticipated may be required to allow construction of the underream beneath sand seams or silty soils. For bid purposes, the owner should anticipate that deeper piers will be required in some areas. If sand seams are encountered at the base of proposed piers, piers may be extended past the sand seam into competent clay. Consequently, contractors bidding on the job should include unit costs for various depths of additional pier embedment. Drilled,Straight Shaft Piers Drilled straight-shaft piers shall bear at a minimum depth of 23 feet below the existing ground surface in brown,gray, and tan clay and shall be designed for an allowable side shear resistance capacity extending below a depth of 10 feet as recommended in the following table.The allowable side shear resistance was evaluated using a calculated factor of safety of at least 2. Riot Depth Below the Allowable Skirl Pier Bearing r Existing Ground Surface Stratum,, Resistance (feet) (psf) Surface—10 Clay - 10-13 Clay 425 13-23 Clay;Sandy Clay 225 Table 1:Allowable Skin Resistance for Straight-Shaft Piers Drilled,straight-shaft piers bearing at a minimum depth of 23 feet below the existing ground surface may also be proportioned using a maximum allowable end bearing pressure of 6,350 psf for net dead plus sustained live load and 9,525 psf for net total load. These bearing pressures were evaluated using calculated factors of safety of 3 and 2 for net dead plus sustained live load and net total load, respectively. If end bearing capacity is included in the pier capacity for structural design, the side shear resistance should be neglected along the portion of the shaft located one shaft diameter from the bottom of the pier. Piers shall not be spaced closer than 3 times the pier diameter,center-on-center,without decreasing the pier capacity. It is recommended that piers be reinforced with minimum area of reinforcement of 0.5 percent of the pier cross sectional area to resist tensile forces on the pier from expansion of the clays in contact with it. For stiffened slab-on-grade foundation systems founded on drilled piers,pier reinforcement shall be isolated from the grade beams utilizing slip covers or other acceptable methods. Piers shall be designed to resist uplift from the expansive soils. For bid purposes, the owner should anticipate that deeper piers will be required in some areas. Consequently, contractors bidding on the job should include unit costs for various depths of additional pier embedment. Unit costs should include those for both greater and lesser depth in soil. Water encountered during pier drilling shall be removed prior to the concrete pour.If water is unable to be removed,concrete should be placed using the tremie method. Piers must be poured the same day they are drilled; pier shafts shall notbe left open overnight. Piers that are unable to be poured on the same day as they are drilled shall be backfilled overnight. III III. COINS III"'1111 UUc:'11110114U "'llI"Illlilll'1'llI TILS II1'11:1S1'111114U"m 01111:101III'1111:101^91INUIIC IL. WIFIRUCIII PIRAL 9SIRMCi 11111P4 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Pier Shaft Potential Uplift Forces The pier shafts will be subject to potential uplift forces if the surrounding expansive soils within the active zone are subjected to alternate drying and wetting conditions. The maximum potential uplift force acting on the shaft may be estimated by: Formula 1:PierShaft Potential Uplift Force F,,=11.6 x TT x D Where: F,= uplift force in kips;and D=diameter of the shaft in feet. Allowable Uplift Resistance Drilled, Underreamed Piers Resistance to uplift forces exerted on the drilled piers will be provided by the sustained axial compressive force (dead load) plus the allowable uplift resistance provided by the soil, per FHWA NHI-10-016 Section C.42.The resistance provided by the soil depends on bearing capacity of soils located above the pier underream(bell)and below the active zone.A factor of safety of 3 was applied to this calculation. The allowable uplift resistance for underreamed piers founded at the depth recommended on the previous page may be estimated using the formula below. Formula 2.•Pier Shaft A//owable Resistance TC Db 11 Rel =4(Bb— BZ)(4.578— 3.43Js,,� Bb Where: R,,=uplift resistance in kips Bb=diameter of the underream in feet B=diameter of the shaft in feet Db=depth of pier less the top 10 feet su=0.75 ksf ob NOTE:Value for-is capped at 2.5 10, ACTIVE ZONE FOUNDING STRATA D, —y B CIII)AIIII.. C0111I4I S"'III"'III'm4Rpc:'1111I0I114MA"'III"IIIIIiIII'1'IIIAIII.SIII"III'aliS"1111III4G 01II'ii0"'III"III1:101h^NIIh IIFAIL. S1III1I14R)CIII"1YII1'IAIU M.VIII'4VIIIIIIiTR'llll11A DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Strai4ht-Shaft Piers Resistance to uplift forces exerted on the piers will be provided by the sustained compressive axial force (dead load) plus the allowable uplift resistance provided by the soil. The resistance provided by the soil depends on the shear strength of the soils adjacent to the pier shaft and below the depth of the active zone.The allowable uplift resistance provided by the soils at this site for straight-shaft piers may be estimated using 2/3 of the axial compressive side shear resistance for the portion of the shaft extending below a depth of 10 feet.The allowable uplift resistance values for varying depths are presented in the following table.These values were evaluated using a factor of safety of 2. PlerDeptf Ulowtpier Bearing he Allow,Able Uplift Existing Ground' Resistance surface Meet) traturn Cpsf) Surface-10 Clay - 10-13 Clay 275 13-23 Clay;Sandy Clay 150 Table 2.•Allowable Uplift Resistance forStraight-Shaft Piers Temporary Casing Groundwater seepage was observed in the test borings at the time of our subsurface exploration. Thus, groundwater seepage and/or side sloughing is expected to be encountered at the time of construction,depending on climatic conditions prevalent at the time of construction.Therefore, it is recommended that the bid documents require the foundation contractor to specify unit costs for different lengths of casing that may be required. Earthwork During earthwork, best practices shall be applied to limit erosion and pollution by sedimentation.At all times, the contractor shall work to maintain natural drainage and prevent the accumulation of runoff. To achieve the required moisture content,the following recommendations are included as an aid to contractors.Where subgrade or layer of soil material requires moisture before compaction,uniformly apply water to surface of subgrade. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, soil material that is too wet to permit compaction to specified density.Soil material that has been removed because it is too wet to achieve compaction may be stockpiled or spread and allowed to dry. Assist drying by discing, harrowing,or pulverizing until moisture content is reduced to a satisfactory value.Alternate methods to achieve the end result of specified moisture content and compaction may also be used. Four different methods may be utilized to successfully compact the soil.They include the processes of static weight, kneading action, impact,or vibration.Soil must be compacted using a compactor in accordance with the ASTM standards. A compactor is required to compact the soil to such a large degree. Track equipment such as bull dozers apply pressure across a large surface area and are therefore limited in their capabilities compared to a compactor. If the fill is not compacted properly, the fill material and structures constructed on it are subject to settlement. III III. COINS III"'lll'UUc:'11110114U "'III'1111111111111 IILS"'lllIFIES1111NG 01111:101III'1111:101^91INUIIC IL. WIFIRUCIII PIRAL MPIRMCi 11111P4 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Foundation Earthwork IllllmI IIII.� "' . The following earthwork recommendations are provided for the design Stiiir' tuiirdll 111 ll yin uii ' parameters as described previously in the report. o Oveirexclavate 6 iiirnclhes of For a structural slab-on-voids foundation system at this site, It Is p � ;.��irrr�ll -�a��m��w 'd�� recommended that a minimum of 6 inches of existing material be overexcavated and general fill be compacted in place as needed to form ge i n nii'M 'f`GIIII as unceded a level building pad. The building pad shall extend a minimum of 5 feet from the edge of the building footprint in all directions. Fill shall slope away at an angle that allows for proper drainage(see Drainage section). Construction areas should be stripped of all vegetation, loose topsoil, surficial concrete, etc. Roots of trees within the proposed building footprint should be excavated and removed from the construction area. Once final subgrade elevation has been achieved, exposed soil subgrade areas shall be proof rolled with a 15 ton roller (minimum) or equivalent equipment as approved by the engineer to detect weak zones. Weak areas detected during the proof rolling process, as well as zones containing debris and/or organics and voids resulting from removal of tree roots,etc.,should be removed and replaced with soils exhibiting similar classification, moisture content, and density as the adjacent in situ soils. Finally,the minimum amount of fill shall be placed to evenly build up the pad. Fill amounts may be increased to raise the building pad to the desired finished floor elevation or to decrease the movement potential of the site. General Fill General fill to be used beneath a structural slab-on-voids shall have a PI no greater than 30 and shall be free of debris and organics. All general fill should be placed on prepared surfaces in lifts not to exceed 8 inches loose measure, with compacted thickness not to exceed 6 inches. General fill should be compacted to at least 92 percent of the Standard Proctor (ASTM D 698) density at a moisture content ranging within 2 percent of optimum moisture content. Site Fill For site areas not below pavements or ground-supported structures, general fill may be used to achieve the desired grade. All surficial backfill material within 5 feet of the foundation perimeter for the top foot of soil may be installed as a clay cap on fill materials to prevent migration of surface water beneath the structure. This material shall be placed as noted above and shall have a PI in excess of 30. Fill shall be free of debris and organics and shall be placed in accordance with the Drainage section of this report. Drainage The performance of the foundation system for the proposed building will not only be dependent upon the quality of construction, but also upon the stability of the moisture content of the near surface soils.Therefore,Gessner Engineering recommends that site drainage be developed so that ponding of surface runoff near the structure does not occur.Accumulation of water near the structure foundation may cause moisture variations in the soils adjacent to the foundation,thus increasing the potential for structural distress. Ilivill C0111,11IS"'III"'l ll111110114 MAIII"III'ailll11111AUIII.1III"I111EIS,111I1146 0111:10 1'111:101 91114111CAII I'uGap.PC I'p.PRAIII. SUIRVICi 11111Y10 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Slope adjacent to foundations is addressed in Section 1804.4 of the 2018 International Building Code, which requires a 5 percent slope in the first 10 feet. Where sites do not allow this, the code allows drainage structures to accommodate the runoff. It should be noted that this requirement conflicts with accessibility standards,which would govern at entrances and other travel paths. Pavement Recommendations Recommendations for both rigid and flexible pavements are presented in this report. The Owner and/or design team may select either pavement type depending on the performance criteria established for the project. In general, flexible pavement systems have a lower initial construction cost as compared to rigid pavements. However, maintenance requirements over the life of the pavement are typically much greater for flexible pavements. This typically requires regularly scheduled observation and repair, as well as overlays and/or other pavement rehabilitation at approximately one-half to two-thirds of the design life. Rigid pavements are generally more durable and require less maintenance after construction. For either pavement type, drainage conditions will have an impact on long-term performance, particularly where permeable base materials are utilized in the pavement section. Pavement design should be in accordance with the Pavement Drainage Considerations section of this report. Subgrade Conditions Gessner Engineering assumes that the subgrade in pavement areas will consist of the recompacted on-site materials, placed and compacted as recommended in the Pavement Earthwork section of this report. Based on our experience with similar subgrade soils, a California Bearing Ratio (CBR) value of 3.0 has been assigned for use in pavement thickness design analyses. Design Information Rigid pavement recommendations were prepared assuming traffic categories B for light-duty and C for heavy-duty pavements.An average daily truck traffic(ADTT)of 25 and 100 were assigned for light and heavy-duty pavements, respectively. Flexible pavement recommendations were prepared assuming a 20-year design life and Equivalent Single Axle Loads (ESAL's) of 50,000 for light-duty pavements (parking areas)and 100,000 for heavy-duty pavements(main drives,fire lanes). The Project Civil Engineer should review anticipated traffic loading and frequencies to verify that the assumed traffic loading and frequency is appropriate for the intended use of the facility. Rigid Pavement It is recommended that rigid pavements be considered in areas of channelized traffic, particularly in areas where truck or bus traffic is planned, and particularly where such traffic will make frequent turns,such as garbage dumpsters as described in the Garbage Dumpsterssection of this report. ui ui. Cuiaui III RUC 11110114 MA I'111:11111111A III S urur:S m'uiu G 0111:1011111:101 91IUICA11. WIFIrRUC IFUIR a 9SIRMEY11i1114 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 For the concrete parking lots, sidewalks and drives,frequent control joints should be used to direct shrinkage cracking with a maximum joint spacing as shown in the table below. It should be noted that the pavement thicknesses listed are minimum recommendations only and are not based on a pavement system design. Expansion joints shall be placed at anticipated stress points and dowels shall be placed across these joints. The concrete section may be reinforced and designed in accordance with ACI standard practices or may be designed as a jointed system in accordance with ACI 330R-08. Subgrade stabilization shall comply with the Lime Treatmentsection of this report,with thickness as described in the following table. Lime Existing Select Fill Stetai1ized Control Concrete Thickness Anticipated Joint Uption Material to be Pad Structure Thickness of PVR Maximum Number Overexcavated Thickness (inches) Exposed (inches) Spacing (incites) � (inches) S�ilxgrade (feet) (inches) 1 48.0 4.0 44.0 6.0 2.00 Sidewalks 2 48.0 4.0 44.0 - 2.25 Sidewalk 3 24.0 4.0 20.0 8.0 2.50 Width 4 - 4.0 - - 3.25 1 48.0 6.0 42.0 6.0 2.00 Light-Duty 2 48.0 6.0 42.0 - 2.25 15.0 Pavements 3 24.0 6.0 18.0 8.0 2.50 1 48.0 6.5 41.5 6.0 2.00 Heavy-Duty Pavements 2 48.0 7.0 41.0 - 2.25 15.0 3 24.0 6.5 17.5 8.0 2.50 Table 3:Rigid Pavement System Recommendations It is recommended that the concrete pavements be reinforced with bar mats. Concrete reinforcing should be placed approximately 1/3 the slab thickness below the surface of the slab, but not less than 2 inches. In thinner slabs,the reinforcement should be centered in the slab. Reinforcing should not extend across expansion joints. All control joints should be formed or sawed to a depth of at least 1/4 the thickness of the concrete slab.Sawing of control joints should begin as soon as the cutting can be performed without raveling of the concrete. Control joints may be hand formed or formed by using a premolded filler. It is recommended that all longitudinal and transverse construction joints be dowelled to promote load transfer. Expansion joints are needed to separate the concrete slab from fixed objects such as drop inlets, light standards and buildings. No expansion or construction joints should be located in a swale or drainage collection locations. cIliviIIIc lllallISIIII"'III'Rpc:'I"III IIWV "'III"Illlllilllllllll III S'III"IlllllS"YIY"II111INGm G1l1lll10"'III"III'a1c'II^9I1411CA11.. c"III"III'1Ill.M"'III"IILYIII'R JII.. c Ylll'vIIIIIIiT llllll'W'ry DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Based on Formula 3-3 in the ACI 330R-08 Guide for the Design and Construction of Concrete Parking Lots, the minimum area of steel required for a reinforced section shall be computed by the drag formula: Formula 3.-Drag Formula A — (LCfwh) 24f, Where: A=area of steel reinforcement(int/ft) L=distance between joints(ft) C,=Coefficient of subgrade resistance(use 1.5) w=density of concrete (Ib/ft3) h=slab thickness (in) f5=allowable tensile stress in steel reinforcement(psi) If possible, the pavement should develop a minimum slope of 0.015 feet/feet to provide surface drainage. Reinforced concrete pavement should cure a minimum of 3 and 7 days before allowing automobile and truck traffic, respectively. Portland Cement Concrete Portland cement concrete should have a maximum slump of 5 inches and should have a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 4,000 psi. Air entrainment is recommended and should meet the recommendations as outlined in ACI-330R-08, Table 4.1. A liquid membrane-forming curing compound should be applied as soon as practical after broom finishing the concrete surface. The curing compound will help reduce the loss of water from the concrete.The reduction in the rapid loss in water will help reduce shrinkage cracking of the concrete. The Mr of concrete is a measure of the flexural strength 500 psi at 28 days was used in the analysis and is typical of local concrete production. Garbage Dumpsters Where flexible pavements are constructed at any site, it is recommended that reinforced concrete pads be provided in front of and beneath trash receptacles. Dumpster trucks, if any, should be parked on the rigid pavement when trash receptacles are lifted. It is suggested that such pads also be provided in drives where the dumpster trucks make turns with small radii to access the receptacles. Concrete pads at this site should be a minimum of 6 inches thick and reinforced with conventional steel reinforcing bars. Sidewalks Concrete sidewalks are planned throughout the facility for pedestrian traffic. It is recommended that subgrade stabilization be extended beneath sidewalks to reduce movement that would interfere with required ADA specifications. Reference the concrete section above and subgrade section below for details. III III. COINS III"'IIRUC:'11110114U "'llI"Illlilll'1'llI III S11111FI'S1'IIIII4G 01111:101III'1111:101^91INUIIC IL. U,U'UI'11CRUCIII'UUIICRAL ,*SACK IIIIiT 111111140 000uSignEnvelope m: ppoaps s8ox6o32p4o6 Flexible Pavement Flexible pavement sections recommended for this site are 85listed |nthe table below: Flexible Stabilized Existing, Asphaltic Select Fill Base Thickness Anticipated Option Material to be CohOettO I I Pad, ttrI Course, 1 11 of PVR Thickneiss Exposed (Inches') (inches) (inches) (inches) Pavements Pavements 3 24.0 2.0 8.0 14.0 8.0 2.5:0:::] Table 4.,FlgVDlePawem6Mt Sy5tem ReCommendaflJD5 Flexible Base Course Flexible base course should be crushed limestone conforming t0TOOT Standard Specifications, Item Z47,Type A,Grades 1O[Z. Base course should beplaced inlifts with amaximum thickness Of8 inches and compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum density at a moisture content within the range of percentage points below to Z percentage points above the optimum 0ViSiu[e content 8Sdetermined byTex-113-E. Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course Asphaltic concrete 3Urt@Ce course should conform t0TOOT Standard 3peC|f|Cat|0nS. Item 34O. Type D. Asphaltic concrete ShOU|d be COnnp3Ct9d to a nn|n|nnUnn 0f92 percent of the nnax|nnUnn theoretical specific gravity (Rice) of the mixture determined according to Test Method Tex-227-F. Pavement specimens, which shall be either cores Orsections Ofasphaltic pavement, will b8tested according tOTest Method Tex-207-F. The nuclear-density gauge 0rother methods that correlate satisfactorily with results obtained from project roadvv8yspeC|nnenSnn8yb8U3edvvh8n@pprovedby the Engineer.Unless otherwise shown on the plans,the Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining the required roadway specimens at their expense and in a manner and at locations selected by the Engineer. Lime Treatment SUbg[Gde treatment is [eCO008Dded to improve the 8ubg[8de 08te[i8| beneath pavements. The type Of8ubg[8detreatment tOstabilize soils ODthe site depends ODthe type 0fsoil located under pavements. The site is characterized primarily byexpansive clay ODthe surface. Therefore, it is recommended that lime may b8used tOstabilize the expansive clayey material 8tthis site.T0provide @ SUit8b|8, weather-resistant vvO[hiDg 3U[fGCe for C0O5t[UCtiOD activity and add G 5t[UCtU[8| component tOthe pavement section, the upper Gto 8 inches 0fthe plastic 3Ubg[adeclays may b8 clivill COINS III 111111110114 MA 11111:11111111A III m111FIE'm1111114 G 0111:1mm�0m114nCA11 mIFm111WIFamAL mmmv�Y111111140 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 treated with hydrated lime. It should be noted that stabilization recommendations are based on current grades. Should the site grading modify the surficial soils, variations from anticipated stabilization may be required. If used, Lime treatment of the subgrade soils should be in accordance with the TOOT Standard Specifications, Item 260. A sufficient quantity of hydrated lime should be mixed with the subgrade soils to reduce the soil-lime mixture PI to 18 or less. For estimating purposes, it is recommended that 5 percent lime by weight be assumed for treatment. For construction purposes, it is recommended that the optimum lime content of the subgrade soils be determined by laboratory testing. Lime-treated subgrade soils should be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum density at a moisture content within the range of optimum moisture content to 3 percentage points above the optimum moisture content as determined by Tex-114-E. It is recommended to perform laboratory testing to determine the concentration of soluble sulfates in the subgrade soils to investigate the potential for a recently reported adverse reaction to lime in certain sulfate-containing soils. The adverse reaction, referred to as sulfate-induced heave, has been known to cause cohesive subgrade soils to swell in short periods of time,resulting in pavement heaving and possible failure. It is important that proper perimeter drainage be provided so that infiltration of surface water from unpaved areas surrounding the pavement is minimized,or if this is not possible,curbs should extend through the base and into the subgrade. A crack sealant compatible to both asphalt and concrete should be provided at concrete-asphalt interfaces.We should note that post-construction subgrade movements and cracking of asphaltic pavements is not uncommon for subgrade conditions such as those observed at this site. Additional Considerations It is important that proper perimeter drainage be provided so that infiltration of surface water from unpaved areas surrounding the pavement is minimized,or if this is not possible,curbs should extend through the base and into the subgrade. A crack sealant compatible to both asphalt and concrete should be provided at concrete-asphalt interfaces. It should be noted that post-construction subgrade movements and cracking of asphaltic pavements is not uncommon for subgrade conditions such as those observed at this site. Pavement Earthwork In pavement areas, the surface soils should be stripped a minimum of 6 inches or as needed to remove roots and organics. This undercut should extend a minimum of 24 inches horizontally beyond all paving limits. The exposed subgrade should be proof rolled as described in the foundation earthwork section and any weak yielding material should be replaced with select fill. The exposed subgrade should be scarified to a 6-inch depth and recompacted to a minimum of 95%of the maximum density as determined by the modified moisture/density relation (ASTM D 1557) at-2 to+2 percent of the optimum moisture content. (As an alternative,compaction to at least 98 percent of the ASTM D 698 maximum dry density may be considered). The prepared subgrade should also be proof rolled to confirm proper preparation and uniformity. ui ui. COINISIIIrur kuc:m.ul10114 ur'ur:ur ui III SuIFIES111IN mm 111::01'111:0191IUICA11. SIFIrRRM111r PRA 9.uurRMEY11111114„ DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 If required,fill used beneath pavement shall have a PI between 8 and 30. Any fill beneath pavement shall be compacted to a minimum of 95 percent of the maximum density as determined by the modified moisture/density relation (ASTM D 1557) at -2 to +2 percent of the optimum moisture content. (As an alternative, compaction to at least 98 percent of the ASTM D 698 maximum dry density may be considered).The top portion of fill shall be chemically stabilized as recommended in the Lime Treatmentsection of this report. Select Fill Select fill to be utilized beneath the pavements should consist of a low plasticity soil with a PI between 8 and 18, a maximum gravel content (percentage retained on No. 4 sieve) of 40 percent, and rocks no larger than 2 inches in their largest dimension; or a crushed limestone base material meeting the requirements of the Texas Department of Transportation(TxDOT)2014 Standard Specifications Item 247, Type A, Grade 3. Alternatively, a low-plasticity granular fill material that does not meet these specifications may be utilized only if approved by Gessner Engineering. All select fill should be placed on prepared surfaces in lifts not to exceed 8 inches loose measure,with compacted thickness not to exceed 6 inches.Select fill should be compacted to at least 95 percent of the Standard Proctor (ASTM D 698) density at a moisture content ranging within 2 percent of optimum moisture content for depths of 3 feet or less. If fill in excess of 3 feet is required,all select fill deeper than 3 feet shall be compacted to 98 percent of Standard Proctor(ASTM D 698). Pavement Drainage Considerations As with any soil-supported structure, the satisfactory performance of a pavement system is contingent on the provision of adequate surface and subsurface drainage. Insufficient drainage that allows saturation of the pavement subgrade and/or the supporting granular pavement materials will reduce the performance and service life of the pavement systems. Surface and subsurface drainage considerations crucial to the performance of pavements at this site include (but are not limited to)the following: 1) Any known natural or man-made subsurface seepage at the site that may occur at sufficiently shallow depths as to influence moisture contents within the subgrade should be intercepted by drainage ditches or below grade French drains. 2) Final site grading should eliminate isolated depressions adjacent to curbs which may allow surface water to pond and infiltrate into the underlying soils. Curbs, if used, should completely penetrate subgrade materials and should be installed to sufficient depth to reduce infiltration of water beneath the curbs. 3) Pavement surfaces should be maintained to help minimize surface ponding and to provide rapid sealing of any developing cracks. These measures will help reduce infiltration of surface water downward through the pavement section. Other Issues Large trees adjacent to foundations should be avoided, as they can affect soil moisture contents significantly by creating concentrations of dry soils around the trees. If trees adjacent to a foundation cannot be avoided, property owners should maintain the drip line of the trees, which is typically consistent with the root system and can help keep the root system from causing foundation issues. ui ui. COINISIIIrur kuc:m.ul10114 ur'ur:ur ui III SuIFIESmuiu umm 111::01'111:01911 ICA11. SIFIrRRM111r PRA 9.uurRMEY11111114„ DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Maintenance of the entire landscape is a good practice for maintaining consistent moisture contents and minimizing foundation movement. Proper landscape maintenance uses vegetation as a natural moisture content indicator,as both over and under watering will result in distress of the plants. Any elements that can affect the moisture content of the soils supporting a foundation,such as pools or plumbing, pose a risk to foundations.Care should be taken to prevent and quickly repair any leaks to minimize foundation damage. Care should be taken when constructing adjacent to slopes to prevent bearing capacity failure due to nearby slope failure. For slopes steeper than 1 to 1, Section 1808.7.2 of the 2018 International Building Code recommends a minimum set back from slopes of 15 feet or one-half the height of the slope. Construction Materials Testing The performance of foundation systems and pavements is dependent upon the quality of construction.Compaction testing of fill material and concrete strength tests are required by the 2018 International Building Code. Therefore, it is recommended that Gessner Engineering monitor foundation installation to identify the properfounding strata and depths and to help evaluate building pad and foundation construction.We would be pleased to develop a plan for foundation monitoring to be incorporated in the overall quality control program. For more information, please contact Gessner Engineering's dedicated dispatch number for materials testing at 979-325-TEST(8378). General Comments Foundation excavations should be observed by the Geotechnical Engineer or their representative prior to placement of reinforcing steel and concrete.This is necessary to observe that the founding soils at the bottom of the excavations are similar to those encountered in our borings and that excessive loose materials and water are not present in the excavations. If soft pockets of soil are encountered in the foundation excavations, they should be overexcavated and replaced with a compacted non-expansive fill material or lean concrete up to the design foundation bearing elevations.Gessner Engineering would be pleased to provide foundation design review,foundation inspection prior to the concrete pour,and construction materials testing. The analysis and recommendations presented in this report are based upon the data obtained from the borings performed at the indicated locations and from other information discussed in this report. This report does not reflect variations that may occur between borings,across the site or due to the modifying effects of weather.The nature and extent of such variations may not become evident until during or after construction. If variations appear, Gessner Engineering should be immediately notified so that further evaluation and supplemental recommendations can be provided. It should be noted that the top approximately 4 to 6 feet of material encountered in the borings appears to be a fill material that was placed either during construction of or after the demolition of the previous structures. Construction debris was encountered below the ground surface on the eastern side of the project site in Borings 1311-11-2, BH-3, and PH-2. Gessner Engineering believes that the deep foundation elements of the previous structures may still remain on site. Therefore, we recommend that further investigative efforts be performed by the contractor at the time of construction to better understand the extents of buried debris within the footprint of the building and pavements. ui ui. COINISIIIrur kuc:m.ul10114 ur'ur:ur ui III SuIFIES111IN mm ur:u 11111:101 91IUICA11. SIFIrRUC111r PRA 9.uurRVEY11111114„ DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 Limitations The scope of services for this project does not include, either specifically or by implication, any environmental or biological (e.g., mold, fungi, and bacteria) assessment of the site or identification or prevention of pollutants, hazardous materials, or conditions. If the owner is concerned about the potential for such contamination or pollution,other studies should be undertaken. For any excavation construction activities at this site, all Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) guidelines and directives should be followed by the Contractor during construction to ensure a safe working environment. In regards to worker safety, OSHA Safety and Health Standards require the protection of workers from excavation instability in trench situations. This report has been prepared for the use of Mr. Ray Holliday, AIA, ASLA, LI with Brown Reynolds Watford Architects, Inc and their design representatives for the specific application to the project discussed and has been prepared in accordance with generally accepted geotechnical engineering practices.This report was written and recommendations were made based on the soil data collected on June 11, 2022. If construction is delayed or the proposed area experiences severe weather conditions, please contact the geotechnical engineer prior to construction. No warranties, either expressed or implied, are intended or made. In the event that changes in the nature, design, or location of the project as outlined in this report are planned,the conclusions and recommendations contained in this report shall not be considered valid unless Gessner Engineering reviews the changes and either verifies or modifies the conclusions of this report in writing. ui ui. Cuiaui .urur kuc:m.ul10114 ur'ur:ur ui III SuIFIES111IN mm 111::01'111:0191IUICA11. SIFIrRUC111r PRA 9.uurRVEY11111114„ DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 r IN i4Sym�bdls and v/ (1%1112��Iossary, of Gedlogica��l rr / rr / rr . / i i a , dllb fiii IIII uii : tibba ID° efj Ykr Im U�r n a � u �w ll u 1 u y l 1 r i m 1 Jai t I✓ !� m �, y J �a , r� ' r III I uI. COINS Ill"'I ll'AUUc:'I'llIIOI1IW MAIIII"Illlllilllllllll Ill.w"'I1C111lIlS"VIIIIIIIN"m 0111:10 Kuri "11.91114MCA II S IIIIIGall.PC 111 ll.PurR ul. SUIRVIriTh'uluYld DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 ii rcJ rc Hancock i�ti��I��I� p d .�`R f d.°w.k t tf 5"t, i gufoal T', r Morgan Aw� San n IA ,d E? _ 271770231, � :�. I N� u4�lu, 26 w r Y �4. "qtr Mf P,r^ III IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII will II IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII GESSNER IIIIIIt uu=!7,7�illillillillillillillill�illillillillillilI�°Mimi ISI mi..I� ' I ,,,, I,;,;;, ' (, p uu°I I Iii muuuuuuuuuuuuuumluuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuumluuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuluuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuluuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuumluuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuumluuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuumilmuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuumuuuuuuuilVuuuuuumim IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 i i ,c1r 1 , s, J„ Biu m i „ Borings Approximate Loation' BH-1 27.77823, -97.40646 BH-2 27.77817, -97.40629 r° BH-3 27.77809, -97.40601 PH-1 27.77787, -97.40624 PH-2 27.77824, -97.40583 will IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII GESSNER � uuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuI N uuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuu,uuiuuuu uuuu;uuuuuuuuuuu'uuu1 uuuuuuuuuuu(uuuu,uuuuuuuuuouuu uuuuuu omm7=777� uuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuum DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 I+ w I �It r i "%��. ��'��• �, r ' ni/j/%� / i/r � r,ii r/�i/iii///%%/p�, ri/�/��// i� y, r r;r � ,,1(„ � �!//�/,� ,��//��%iiia/iJff%�%/'w✓�1��%�%,/: �f l ��r�1/ � fo / M , fj °% I „ r.F�111�� Milli� �� ilii m� IIIIIIIIII III ISI I ani ISI i �°u�l�im i i�ISI i imi GESSNER o N ' I N ,,,, I,;,;;, ' 1 �wwmuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuu ouuuuuuuuuuuuuumiumluuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuumuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuumluuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuumluuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuulluuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuulluuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuulluuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuumluuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuumluuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuumiiuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuumuuuuuuuiiVuuuuuumim uuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuuum DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SSNIER. LOG OF BORING NO: BH-1 PAGE 1 OF 1 CLIENT: Brown Reynolds Watford Architects,Inc. BOREHOLE LOCATION: 27.77823,-97.40646 PROJECT: Corpus Christi Fire Station No.3 GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: 39 feet 1401 Morgan Avenue BOREHOLE TERMINATION DEPTH: 25 feet Corpus Christi,Texas INITIAL GROUNDWATER DEPTH: 17.5 feet PROJECT NO: 21-0997 FINAL GROUNDWATER DEPTH: 16 feet DATE: 6/11/2022 GROUND COVER: Grass and Weeds DRILLER: EnviroCore "ALL DEPTHS,ELEVATIONS,AND LOCATIONS ARE APPROXIMATE IX 1-_ z z LU LU z 0 W d H z >_ W o:3 ix_ ~ W W Q Q 2 W U Q 0H Ux D� � Z� ZN�. Na a 0.0 J Q U >g p W Z u 0. z L N U_ MATERIAL DESCRIPTION wQ•- � �� a �Q� dJ aZ OZ : a N.. 0(L �v> LU m a �O 0 Z j0 J N 0 a LL v v FILL:CLAY,Stiff to Very Stiff,Brown 5/9/9 6.9 NOTE:During drilling operations,debris and/or trace gravel were encountered in the boring from 0 to 4 feet. 5/5/7 57 40 20.6 94 CH 5 4/5/5 19.1 6/9/10 51 31 18.4 92 CH CLAY,Very Stiff,Tan 6/8/8 20.7 10 CLAY,Sandy,Firm,Gray and Tan 3/4/4 25 12 18.8 59 CL 15 4/3/4 20.4 20 SAND,Silty,Medium Dense,Gray and Tan 5/8/11 1 24.5 13 SM 25 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SSNIER. LOG OF BORING NO: BH-2 PAGE 1 OF 1 CLIENT: Brown Reynolds Watford Architects,Inc. BOREHOLE LOCATION: 27.77817,-97.40629 PROJECT: Corpus Christi Fire Station No.3 GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: 39 feet 1401 Morgan Avenue BOREHOLE TERMINATION DEPTH: 25 feet Corpus Christi,Texas INITIAL GROUNDWATER DEPTH: 18 feet PROJECT NO: 21-0997 FINAL GROUNDWATER DEPTH: 16.5 feet DATE: 6/11/2022 GROUND COVER: Grass and Weeds DRILLER: EnviroCore "ALL DEPTHS,ELEVATIONS,AND LOCATIONS ARE APPROXIMATE IX 1-_ z z LU LU z 0 W d H z >_ W o:3 ix_ ~ W W Q Q 2 W U Q 0H Ux D� � Z� ZN�. Na a 0.0 J Q U >g p W Z u 0. z L N U_ MATERIAL DESCRIPTION wQ•- � �� a �Q� dJ aZ OZ : a N.. 0(L �v> LU m a �O 0 Z j0 J N 0 a LL v v FILL:CLAY,Firm,Brown,with sand 3/3/2 15.1 NOTE:During drilling operations,debris and/or trace gravel were encountered in the boring from 0 to 2 feet. 3/3/3 25.5 5 2/4/4 54 36 26.3 84 CH CLAY,Firm to Stiff,Gray and Tan,with sand 4/6/9 22.5 4/6/8 23.2 10 CLAY,Firm,Brown,Gray,and Tan,with sand 23.8 with debris from 13 to 18 feet 15 2/2/4 35 20 22.1 71 CL 20 SAND,Silty,Medium Dense,Gray and Tan 4/7/10 29.2 25 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SSNIER. LOG OF BORING NO: BH-3 PAGE 1 OF 1 CLIENT: Brown Reynolds Watford Architects,Inc. BOREHOLE LOCATION: 27.77809,-97.40601 PROJECT: Corpus Christi Fire Station No.3 GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: 39 feet 1401 Morgan Avenue BOREHOLE TERMINATION DEPTH: 25 feet Corpus Christi,Texas INITIAL GROUNDWATER DEPTH: 18.5 feet PROJECT NO: 21-0997 FINAL GROUNDWATER DEPTH: 17 feet DATE: 6/11/2022 GROUND COVER: Grass and Weeds DRILLER: EnviroCore "ALL DEPTHS,ELEVATIONS,AND LOCATIONS ARE APPROXIMATE IX 1-_ z z LU LU z 0 W d H z >_ W o:3 ix_ ~ W W Q Q 2 W U Q 0H Ux D� � Z� ZN�. Na a 0.0 J Q U >g p W Z u 0. z L N U_ MATERIAL DESCRIPTION wQ•- � �� a �Q� dJ aZ OZ : a N.. 0(L �v> LU m a �O 0 Z j0 J N 0 a LL v v FILL:CLAY,Stiff to Very Stiff,Brown 7/6/5 7.4 NOTE:During drilling operations,debris and/or trace gravel were encountered in the boring from 0 to 2 feet. 7/8/8 52 35 18.7 86 CH 5 6/6/9 20.2 CLAY,Stiff to Very Stiff,Gray and Tan NOTE:During drilling operations,debris and/or trace gravel were 6/9/10 20.3 encountered in the boring from 6 to 8 feet. 3/5/8 60 42 20.7 96 CH 10 4/6/8 16.0 15 9/10/13 15.6 20 SAND,Silty,Medium Dense,Tan 5/6/12 1 20.8 34 SM 25 DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SSNIER. LOG OF BORING NO: PH-1 PAGE 1 OF 1 CLIENT: Brown Reynolds Watford Architects,Inc. BOREHOLE LOCATION: 27.77787,-97.40624 PROJECT: Corpus Christi Fire Station No.3 GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: 38 feet 1401 Morgan Avenue BOREHOLE TERMINATION DEPTH: 6 feet Corpus Christi,Texas INITIAL GROUNDWATER DEPTH: Not Encountered PROJECT NO: 21-0997 FINAL GROUNDWATER DEPTH: Dry at Completion DATE: 6/11/2022 GROUND COVER: Grass and Weeds DRILLER: EnviroCore "ALL DEPTHS,ELEVATIONS,AND LOCATIONS ARE APPROXIMATE IX 1-_ z z LU LU z 0 W d H z >_ W o:3 ix_ ~ W W Q Q 2 W U Q 0H Ux D� � Z� ZN�. Na a 0.0 J Q U >g p W Z u 0. z L N LL MATERIAL DESCRIPTION Q.. � J a �O� dJ aZ OZ : a N.. 0(L �v> LU m a �O 0 Z j0 J N 0 a LL v v FILL:CLAY,Firm to Very Stiff,Brown,with sand 4/3/3 7.1 with roots from 0 to 2 feet NOTE:During drilling operations,debris and/or trace gravel were 4/8/9 16.0 encountered in the boring from 2 to 4 feet- 5 8/7/9 47 31 36.6 77 CL DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 SSNIER. LOG OF BORING NO: PH-2 PAGE 1 OF 1 CLIENT: Brown Reynolds Watford Architects,Inc. BOREHOLE LOCATION: 27.77824,-97.40583 PROJECT: Corpus Christi Fire Station No.3 GROUND SURFACE ELEVATION: 39 feet 1401 Morgan Avenue BOREHOLE TERMINATION DEPTH: 6 feet Corpus Christi,Texas INITIAL GROUNDWATER DEPTH: Not Encountered PROJECT NO: 21-0997 FINAL GROUNDWATER DEPTH: Dry at Completion DATE: 6/11/2022 GROUND COVER: Grass and Weeds DRILLER: EnviroCore "ALL DEPTHS,ELEVATIONS,AND LOCATIONS ARE APPROXIMATE IX 1-_ z z LU LU z 0 W d H z >_ W o:3 ix_ ~ W W Q Q 2 W U Q 0H Ux D� � Z� ZN�. Na a 0.0 J Q U >g p W Z u 0. z L N LL MATERIAL DESCRIPTION Q.. � J a �O� dJ aZ OZ : a N.. 0(L �v> LU m a �O 0 Z j0 J N 0 a LL v v FILL:CLAY,Stiff to Hard,Brown,with sand 5/6/6 8.7 NOTE:During drilling operations,debris and/or trace gravel were encountered in the boring from 0 to 4 feet. 9/10/17 54 36 15.3 82 CH 5 17/16/22 18.4 oncuGignEnvelope ID: rr83rc oA6o32r4o0 SYMBOLS AND TERMS USED ON BORING OGS SOIL SYMBOLS AND DESCRIPTION SAMPLER TYPES 77771 HIGH PLASTICITY o/o, SAND o/o, an*vsL *arxmz ax*Ls uMsarows SPLIT TEXAS CONE oxsLo, ouw ouw nxwu spoow pswsrnoMsrEx ruas M El E] El B] E X I LOW PLASTICITY uAmnv oLxvsv SILTY CLAYEY a/or nu oowonsrE nxwonrows nxMpLELonr AUGER ROCK CORE om, omx uAwo nxwu GROUNDWATER SYMBOLS AND DESCRIPTION ZZ GROUNDWATER ENCOUNTERED DURING DRILLING T GROUNDWATER DEPTH UPON DRILLING COMPLETION TERMS DESCRIBING CONSISTENCY OHCONDITION COARSE GRAINED SOILS(Major Portion Retained on No.200 Sieve): Includes(1)dean gravels and sands and (z) silty or clayey gravels and sands. Condition is rated according /o relative density,asdetermined bylaboratory tests. Standard Penetration, w-Value,b| Relative Density 0-4 Very Loose 4-10 Loose 18-30 Medium Dense 30'50 Dense 'so Very Dense FINE GRAINED SOILS(Major Portion Passing No.20O5ie,e): Includes(z)inorganic and organic silts and clays;(2)gravelly,sandy,or silty clays;and(3)clayey silts. Consistency is rated according to shearing strength,as indicated by penetrometer readings or by unconfined compression tests. Standard Penetration, Pocket Penetrometer N-Value,m Reading Consistency Cohesive Stre 0-2 O'O.zs Very Soft less than n.zzs 2'4 o.zs'os Soft 0z25to0.25 4'8 os'z.o Firm 0.25to0.50 *zs 1.8a8 Stiff 0.50to1.00 15-30 2.8-4.8 Very Stiff 1.00m2.00 ,ao ,4.0 Hard z.00and higher Note: Slickensided and fissured clays may have lower unconfined compressive strengths than shown above due mplanes mweakness v,cracks mthe soil. EXPANSION POTENTIAL OFCOHESIVE SOILS ROCK QUALITY DESIGNATION Plasticity Index Degree ovExpansive Potential e esC=Recovery 0-5 Nonplastic The percentage of intact rock This is the total s'zo Low retrieved from abore hole.All percentage nvmaterial zoao Moderate pieces ofintact rock core equal recovered from arun. 20-40 High /oo,greater than 4inches long '40 Very High are summed and divided bythe total length ofthe core run. TERMS CHARACTERIZING SOIL STRUCTURE Sncxensmeu having inclined planes nvweakness that are slick and glossy inappearance Fissured containing shrinkage cracks,frequently filled with fine sand or silt;usually more or less vertical Laminated composed ofthin layers ofvarying color and texture mte,ueuueu composed ofalternate layers ofdifferent soil types Calcareous containing appreciable quantities nxcalcium carbonate Well graded having wide range in grain sizes and substantial amounts of all intermediate particle sizes Poorly graded predominantly of one grain size,or having a range of sizes with some intermediate size missing Flocculated pertaining mcohesive silts that exhibit aloose knit o,nakeystructure DocuSign Envelope ID: FF83FEBA-4943-4940-9465-E8DA6D32F4D6 GLOSSARY OF GEOLOGIC TERMS Aphanitic - dense, homogeneous rock with constituents so fine that they cannot be seen by the naked eye Argillaceous -containing, made of,or resembling clay;clayey Bentonitic - an absorbent aluminum silicate clay formed from volcanic ash and used in various adhesives, cements,and ceramic fillers Carbonaceous -consisting of,containing, relating to,or yielding carbon Chert -a siliceous rock of chalcedonic or opaline silica occurring in limestone Conchoidal - of, relating to, or being a surface characterized by smooth, shell-like convexities and concavities,as on fractured obsidian Crossbedded -intersecting layers of distinct soil deposits Fluviatile -produced by the action of a river or stream Fossiliferous -containingfossils Friable -readily crumbled, brittle Glauconitic - a greenish mineral of the mica group, a hydrous silicate of potassium, iron, aluminum, or magnesium found in greensandand used as a fertilizer and water softener Gypsiferous - containing gypsum; a widespread colorless, white, or yellowish mineral, used in the manufacture of various plaster products,and fertilizers Igneous -rocks formed by solidification from a molten state;pyrogenic Inclusion -a solid,liquid, or gaseous foreign body enclosed in a mineral or rock. Indurated -hardened soil that has been changed by extreme climate Laminated -a soil deposit divided into thin layers Lateritic - pertaining to red residual soil in humid tropical and subtropical regions that is leached of soluble minerals, aluminum hydroxides, and silica but still contains concentrations of iron oxides and iron hydroxides. Lenticular -lens-shaped grains of soil or rock Lignitic - pertaining to soft, brownish-black coal in which the alteration of vegetable matter has proceeded further than in peat but not as far as in bituminous coal; also called brown coal Marl -a loose and crumbling earthy deposit consisting mainly of calcite or dolomite; used as a fertilizer for soils deficient in lime Metamorphic - rocks changed in structure or composition as a result of metamorphism caused by chemical reaction or heat and pressure Micaceous - containing mica; any of a group of chemically and physically related aluminum silicate minerals, common in igneous and metamorphic rocks, characteristically splitting into flexible sheets used in insulation and electrical equipment Montmorillonitic-clays that are comprised mostly of montmorillonite; one of the three types of clay soil grains(illite, kaolinite,and montmorillonite) Morphology - refers to the geological characteristics, configuration, and evolution of rocks and landforms Porous -admitting the passage of gas or liquid through pores or interstices Pyrite - a brass-colored mineral occurring widely and used as an iron ore and in producing sulfur dioxide for sulfuric acid;also called fool'sgold Scarp -a long steep slope or cliff at the edge of a plateau or ridge; usually formed by erosion Siliceous - containing, resembling, relating to, or consisting of silica; a white or colorless crystalline compound occurring abundantly as quartz, sand, flint, agate, and many other minerals and used to manufacture a wide variety of materials, especially glass and concrete Surficial -of, relating to,or occurring on or near the surface of the earth Tuffaceous - comprising rocks made of compacted volcanic ash varying in size from fine sand to coarse gravel;also called tufa ° o>i ica aaawn"i�roaa,H Sb"X31 ��iio« RNs a3no� �a � ua As a3r�3H� � _ v MHi d as"Mead /1S1�1H� S/7oN0� �� ,(1/:7 0 z P DNI .0 aaoaiv,m smoN.3a N;noaa ao„<n,sa,or,+,ar,mmeo ccoc©iu�ia�ao� E'ON NO11tl1S 31111 vzoe/U9 "a2ffi%%'a'a��3�aaa"aBa3 _<<___��___�__ d 4ddaaadaaaaaaa w wwwwp P za - za �aa�_ 33 _=oa - - �a - _ _ - LL3a _0'.2 u ___ ___ a mmo��3�� _�uh LLmm LL m .x x x x x x.x x x x xx w zddaca¢mmw rcrcrcc m www LLm LLh¢mLLh¢n m _�yaa¢m z m m =5 a - - - ----- ---_ _ _ ao- -- - ow- -- --- F z 0 88 -- - _ ------- x t m oa o y o a ==oo�w=�mhm LLp h aLLy h8�awwmmmmm Lu 0 M • y0 yn� O L z z Z ^ r 3 3 yNn CW O O ♦n �► a z q s, 5 W ct a- et UJ a N =s (L LM LA. r � O >✓J U � / T s a 7 c � a a Qo w a � d w F zorrires a3aw�Nisa3�� SbX31 - r ae 9NMtl 1S/ H0 S/7,Y00 to zoaho/so o 3 a 'U p °> � ro 111Ntl�aOWasC51 DNI si:3lluDar aaoii eso a�axaoa� ��■A y xmivm soi°xunumoae 0BL 3Atly 01 E��Pfi/•�1 E'ON NOILVIS Hid rvaiaia�saa Noinn3a soa/Us V C Z m 0 H Z V Q W ~ Z V � LU a � C N LU V W a O W Z Ix a 3 O Cl) 3 z z W c _ O moo DC W QW � Jnm W Z �~ Z o W 8 _ a� �n m OZ m Y . Z.- Z„a C9 t/>t' 2 O a �'"x (7 a Z ZS �W Wa o ZW W rm da� �� '^ o to Q�� Z92 WF= Wim^ aOF �a CL. v>du Z�Wm o Qa N.,�� Q�zM ce WW OZOc mH�n N`moi$ O:Non O W.; „�W W3a� _ 'z '^ a V LLr Ov mPOV c rOV M V ama �l�xr d> W W Q F Z V ¢ W z W Z V Z W W ~ W U Z ¢ d m Z z V �_ 7 V V - 3 a > rZ WWcJ � Z ¢ V N W C W d W W d z D O /O/ z o /i% m e� 3 z 0 ^ X o ¢ �r m r Q ¢ ur m a sa W N V Z, ga W .0m o Lo fl LM N Z c4 O V mvo ° /;il � ' �. "' 6 bow � � • �� g�J o �/i�rldil�l�4 j,ly� a a0 - m 00 e- I W �r Il r% z x r��z� awxx �oaa �'` �ozizono sa3 SbX-71 y »o 1aona3aa3.sdm M ar a x r 1 S/ H S/7,YOO to �w si�iix�ar aaoai h. anal7-lowas si ENO IS eso��iva�axaoa� oarvmsavoxAsx xmoaa p 'ON � rvaiaia�saa Noinn3a 0 �0 0 § a -_ o MH a �. H O LL _ C Hz o �o2p w_„r_o�=oo..A:v .w�=oars .h ��:..� 3nVh�Ewo�rt� F=,.o ter„,, ,moo 3-ap C5IF mnoo r.LLad W- NN § §$ .a fl ..s a s s s � ❑ a a - °- Woo 3 eg SSE3� s i 2' S �2 S H=o�=m�,a=a�-a=oV O 6 S a � F �oc i5 i5�ui5cco_� � 3 Em _�L�o♦_ao�eLL m<m.o`9x�x».a�� onmmn�v.n�x wx a� �o.�.��.,xa.�.. �.-mc am mxhe__„� n_x__ ay.�x�mi5=_mPaw_mmox 55 a.�m.�.�� x N Q a % oa'86 s�000s &000 - -P a88ra P Pa&&&"88 S,£ r - o.o oa0000 oo_ o 0 0«.... ... o 0 0 0000 00»00000 00� o0 s> »00000� oos 00000000 oa s s$e8000»00600 000 ar: 4 zx r��z� a3awxx�>3�oaa �'` e�ozizono sa3 SbX-71 v, ar a xMr 1 S/ H S/7,YOO to anal7-lowas si eso>°�iva�axaoa� \�/ 1S HONNOp rvaiaia�saa Noinn3a UR aar 0 Z zz� Q 3 ab 5 6 u >z H H OA A A A A A W k c k w a Z= H. a v -s o� e _ � MJ �_ Qs a z U 9C Kz w = 0 V N j C t.�000 - W :zzzzz-- N 3 a N W z (,1 5 H z W W O .'2J - C z X Q > Z > F - Z v (J LL W 4 d _J dr O 3 V Z V ri m F Z CC d. O� O 5 H z ' p - V a � 111 z1t1 LL _ d _ W o z co 8z V F ^ z m e-� � V o mQ V 3.. HE 0 2 r 1 ma le 4 � r o M w . i ! r ....... -.... .... a . .r f' rc i y � i m " N ro' 'L z \ N ti J eu y z w W yCD O J L4J J O O ' ` J V ,�/ Qy s w �o Q s �_ r d a C d O ❑❑❑ LLM w O ❑❑ I r, N > Q sa3» SbX-71 ax r 1S/ H S/7,YOO to >w si»iix>ar aaoai h. anal7-lowas si eso��iva�axaoa> oarvmsavoxAsx xmoaap E'ON NOI1tl15Hid � rvaiaia�saa Noinn3a 0 LU ilk m 0 Z 'Q g� V N l �Imiu� i I II I I e: ........... � � ." i �—•— ---,�—r i I c o, � . o aw I I v i i 7 an 1 i f u _-.- Y� r� ®� � ,I gip_„� i / i m \ x r \ i \ -------------- Q Z I a J R W a=� I J e• / m � ❑ / r �I Wrc I p rl� o� N i i zx r��z� aEawxx E,��oaa �'` E�EzizEno sa3» SbX-71 ax r 1S/ H0 S/7,Y00 to l/0 c�` � zoaho/so o� ro of 3 >w I—ADar aaoEi h. n�°� rrm '^^«"^ analNv�aowaswi eso a�axaoa> oarvmsavoxAsx xmoaa p E'ON NOI1tl153N1i � rvaiaia�saa7T77NoinnEa 0 LUm 0 Q t € E ff F Y.= F Ytj ti _ ' f E uuau GdEd�w uu_��wu dr dE dEE � w€� E z da e ` E r $ 9^ E 9 9E 9 5 jE z 8. E m G' u .7 6 0.✓ A . Y It N d - tE oU dd •� 3 O y' O z — 4 uZE W a 4 \ X-71 & _: a : s�O « gc 7 w . „ \} G \ \ _ 3 ,a�__. 0 m 0 z « ` k y \ LU - LU - -- --- � \ ^ \ O \ U- \ ; \ ! 5bX31 ...... .a«s.i«Ada........,.aea«noe y o IIE&vo $nddoi rG ilio u µ• o,,.M:o,o«,3d«mona� eo>ec*.•�•Nv�nowds�i mp � CON NOIIVI5 NQUINDSIQ Nasinsa m p Z o' -.E Q wl ol� H Lli m W u`;z w n F d No 0: LN URBAN W ! V a Q LL tit N p w F N ml I� a o � m and Y z oY y 'a y 3Q, ,r M 6` x, ol Al , \ 4U•,ya..F r�E E o ` „E„�'E % �: ��/w��y�'N��pi�il��%/��I�`�Y M/� oz E o Z. ri E Z O� C � E z «e�I�z� a3sw«Nv,�,oaa �'` e�ozizono DNI si1vw>aeoaaoav � ol f'ON NOILVIS H Naiala�saa NOInn3a zoa/U9 - r 0 ` 0 0 n n n b i f Yo c W ElElE O V ee r9a I uI u Z i e a cle Q Z,I w _ — � V i j �I y Zw aoiva3N3,. SIL Q OR, JQ -SaEs a p N��gV -- } 04 of 17 / iol � SSR M i c 1 1 � U1i sO o W 1 Q W � N 2 W V N �s emQ�-c z «e��z� a3swww,>3toaa �'` e�ozizono >w si�iw>ae aaoai � ��''�� ^•<•.^•• anaaNe�eowas si � oa,.M«,o«,aa«moap E'ON NOI1tl153N1i � rvaiaia�saa Noinn3a obU9 0 W Z 0 5 8 N L 5 Wo v=ems _tee i. € i W a z a W ~ II o a TI Z- 0— r Z a Q J � � W a Z C4 z � a � snna aan W .e z z v z N Q a Z °0 W 'xvw nw,a s J —L m 4TrT .e_ 6 N O O iL �r m �a Q cc N N �^ z W N www 4 ISI w W- ��i l.0 W - V a- a 0 J z co F 2 0 Z M O Z as f 4 a LL r =dam 0 y H a ^^ W (V W F ZZ ~ W J W �£ CC f W � � G nnaaasaas : W q Q ' � 4 Z ar oo` J cL F Z 4 s a W W F d f W Q W Z V4 W 0 — ~ Q 4 0 0Z 0 ^ ix f a W o n w \ w ..0 wt .erts .oiuv.o o V — Z i G Q= LL r N zx r�I�z� a3awxry�>3roaa �'` e�ozizo/so xa .sa3�� SbX�l y�»o 1a N�a3ad>saxe\ - _ zoaho/so -_ - - rn of 3 >w si»ilx>ar aaoai h. n�°��rrm �^«"�� analrav�aowaswi � eso��iva�axaoa� oarvmsavoxAsx xmoaap zo E'ON NOI1tl153N1i rvaiala�saa7T77Nolnn3a oa/U9 m ~3 W - ?� Z g H �gwzR. Is W ix HE W �N¢rcp ao�ou�i_�i°o wor3yo� a NSA j d i/ Mcg \1� b � .w .r r \ Q= Q I � 0`9 Sa Qa o ll M Ln a ISI , ~ ZI 01 s N o N 1 ' o J li II LL- I I SII w3rv3o \ Z y J. Ol�N��v0. Z ISI ��F"a..li•!,: / C3 I 'iJY i. r ' _ IIIIIIIII III TIT � �o, ��_ �� VIIIA III-11I II—I I I—TT I � - IIII I i HON —= Q D W a w, e Z ow°� III�III�IIII�" .o.o J" eoJLL IIIIII�I_ _ N sa3 SbX-71 y »o 1a mervaivaaai - d - xxMr 1S/ H0 S/7,Y00 to DNI I—ADara aaoai n�� ~ ^«^ analNv�aowaswi eso��ivaaa.ao� oarvmsavoxAsx xmoaap E'ON NOI1tl153N1i � rvaiaia�saa Noinn3a 0 m 0 V Z 9 Q — W a W O o °O waa -Y, I / I Wi al Q'I - - - ll s SQ'wo z z O t�4 G I oO i �7 a"'n""a`°a" SVX31 S310N IVH�V3�J f l o I151HHJ snd6oj �o k-L/j a „ o na.Hese ° 3 a / Sava �V�1A 'JNI3�PPNION3 p roma xa aas�aro snaa°� m `g (� w G; �saL ae°a°,eMa°,°.3aNM°as Nvnan o,..Maa,o..,d�Maae3n3d�n�a°waa, E*ON NNOIltl15381i N01111IDS11 "I ON 1-1 NO11111— I'll V Z G 0 m m = P w m w w �o ww• y V " _� = a °m c� � ° _ �j o a e = cm3 F < a.. °;= Z A F ° ons " sw os sNw= P, ab °sm a Q,S�=� wo �� a„= Pi's _� wb �� mamw�wm _ ` aF= - �w w �m Q� _ § y _ _ a °� Q o° s ��"€ smw€ = Ppwp _ €doss„a€ am a =e =o=nm�e o -zs boa - ;o C9 =w � 6eo� w wa m �� _ �w m �mg aids °°o sm� pw=p _I_ ow s= Ewa w �w w O6� _ g ” pawsbW°� aa g p sis €5°m � �Nms �e " € _ 561§16M.0 a� b e�ow> � w =gyp s a Ewen wPm�= _ Amo `� �� m p �� -.82. Ns�€ ma =° waQ - m; swp w= w e �w =�. mgygym° of = ° ° n��WW= "N ms �y �” nom=N =aw w ep w� �� gmea °e _� € m � w Fm � _mom s 6 � � €pas' ;'< aw� w Lu o sm a � ,3 "sw ' �° €Fa°ism "� zam, s = a Mm T ��a'w s =gy=m wa=s w %p==Tm° �°= wamw= o€� a w saw a mbF a �' 8� SseIj €� w° ew`4ow g �� o� Fp nog n �_�` �o� sego eg gs sus um—m w '�w €a o aw• SFa�<� o m "y=n � ww "%�'m = wo�8wiya cn a ow .daS� PeC �w Es=w>�F�= m= mYo's'o J=�na5m � �� 8 m=w fio_NB�� LL n m ° s R " _ " ww m= w €U WE <wmg3w Somas =zsmsm� awm =gs _ z w�� a° ax HLL �°w p� o - _� d= -'� w�S =swm" �_ wmm $Sy� �=5 0 �_ =x _ _€ w m _- wbs - = pF- opoa<p amp =°d�= "aw `'a §mF < 6 � �' -- � � � € w z °boy -�mww w� �_ ��<_ �= 3 m m Ns s Z € 3�� wm� €a8 s ooh<= � p �=atom 3' �p<G1 ZWg�� =3 ' � F Jos iN� � so= o" _p�= v W. g� �=��oP°° O €o >tS5 " o w �� " s� �o nom- s°g � � U 3wpwew� �_€ m<g�< w ww €� �°awm °� =9 1 a =�=w°=wi ==n o swag°wgxg ¢ amo -b��aa�mmam= nm w= wa�H3� �� sm�aa�-a�w' ¢ s°€m3os ba �w° sw a=< _-- o pUo °-gip s c� o=°8<Jo=`per =& �wa�� 4 §' <~ bN � c5�w9aw�=eww=° � E,Swa wa8w�8¢00 e °m ms mo m�P m sm� a ftffi as� s� ado s�� o€� i am 3a«€<m<mma €€w o sa° m°�atsomats= m °a ° n m m n m W_ ohm e g omw ° -oP ow 3=m _b € g� wso ¢° 5 Nwm o$ w >s g< =m " msm �weww a ag m s m EB m=s ° P NS ° 6m m sus �� gPdu- PN a =€°o= = m=m 9 w 5a �oFo g € " ° 5 °y jo F8 �5m E H m�� 6°5 w°mei§p° w " `8 �� X22. tm W. o° ° Bim s¢� w - _ " =w- �` mois � 3wp °„g” est �wwg sg _ z ".° w-� se�m�w ego e�" ° a21w, am = _ € w Fa ;h ew;= w �'°°� Pw <w 9Po�€°m ow < g =o a eo s o n Jw yaw of° _ €° ,w §d w 3w = �w 29 8° <LL3a � 8 4 °a mks ap waw a _8� < ep 8-'apw g`=€"js 6Ew tom � w ' a" wed G °gym - 3 wmo m� � g s a� € e=gym �� a a w a _ w m �° p w b'= 3� g = "two= € g a 3�Q wpm FF mom ea w o Pao =-qp .88 z nJ�mu &sNs 6 °m ��m pm x� 6 °k�r'� oo - $ne Zpmm �=s myx' w� g =m s�om w a o<LL �� a =wm o.o §€w nsa �w o a g�m-9= �m°o� �� wn o`�� ° m�=a ei= mp a P asaos _ emw =<>� °=w a�= baa=n _e wP"s swwsws° �„ y 0 3 � g6s S-grams eN=w$m go�p = =sn_° w �--maE3E"e"n fig= � p=w"aa aw< �mmmmsm am = w w° w= wn F- , z.N6� - xam = =«w �5w a,mwooa=-a=pwgw= pw"a>°m 19mwaaes= w PoPm =� m p �, w wsmaJ° o! EP �F? 8�� s=a=°_= a € owga � w m ms$Hp €a � o € mv�=°= ew= 5 msw=�=w� -_< Wk ,n a€o G a S -me gid;== =osa `o="`°� �Swg< g= �s== 3wwm=� ° = w ¢ w'�-x �a<� :� "� - �s �w< �=mw °m= �`� �5ow=°"ps Zp=wa="ww< w€€ =gym°~ swm - N a€= �_ ° w � PNa= =„w ;m� g�°w�ao�"p-� Ja `p€<€pw°=°am w=�,w=3= ww w oz�°'ag"Pz�omimm "pew obPg Ew : opw- �'��m_a<w=== XI a=� L3°ate" _ ==a o w q �nw°mwm �. P='= a m= 3�w 8 >°mm �gp� �gg6&YJw&' < -koa w€so'm owwo" 8� w =s �aFs��g era spm�sEw a� w PWNmp � m°Jp�w w€ = o3gp. 3 3 vw J mph �_ rap w J apm w8 s=3J ° °www° aY wz�a C� ��a� S�wE58i�w583 �°w°k' ¢ 3O6ww € �motf�$GsC`su wgSF wa w n waw=oag� Vis- g gcCpms��iws-s�LL�°mg m"81. agwwn� a°gwrwws�a-°=s= m°ma<=msai<�aPs€a°a�w=� �maP<aaa€<�»"< <�€zs."� m«" m<oaa =m i w>a< =a3€€w"gym= <mam<�< <�<� g w w mmm P A op �� € P s o a �„ m e<w = 8 w o m m 9 HZ 4 o��aa�= �a W g A, QBNa w � � a moa s=- -- 9g , e exp a '' m a o - o �" o �o= mF g o= ff �'mT-�a ami m ��= s m� > o8z �dg Y= 6" P8 �ffi _ 'Sywa r zUwow'o'- "_6:.,Z �= 4 y ro"� how GaA. �8€ a�aa ¢ w <b €_ _= €=s§ "e�P o e§� w w os�� 3anaso o w w»@� w § N@ a � m a ff a'm3 cc " HSH- m v F°� "°�” m� €w°nom W Pwa"€ �j a� ole §W §.€ � b� m o �w' 8 w �P<mffi s Amy=w €= Q s S s Pggg3= ?- §8�n<w°gam € $2N=o� ° < . e� 'ba oamgw° o e6 � �� < wm _zx8o O 9 =�Ea° s�z SJR z m8-��€ �:¢p6m a o � E �= a a. yes 24-'2:== Q ��< m�S=��°w= r � § 6ff ng wms o � °-m°w ¢ =mo�Bb= w�.6 !2 c� ; =m=Sz€g W w5 m § 63 $4 €Sb kti ora � �° h N „ gw= bw° S<ew o Z.w�m� a�= ap °5 €`z J " o° 68wwG�w" ¢ 3 8�u J oda g�Zd a z� a `cps ¢ "=a �ygw ��g<me J m <�a=� aIE 3�s J s=PaP� E IH W-w wear e 3 �a<� °o� oa "a� ; m ° ! ¢ ssna w § �N w �P w 5n 6m:ooa mN"SsoN Q d ab e s 8 0 z w a o G =�w " =w G° U o �a =� oszw pmp= B=`a §i�§ $8s=a€ �7 IY € `_'s k�� 8 w 1°- m' fviio w fij 5r U "'spzo 3na4�ha4> og a8Sffismm"=m�� F i y� E ��7 8,nNaa°aaM SVX31 vIN 3—M3HOS n a s°3 3 m,,,etl �JNLLS31 8 Sl09WAS 11VI30 ON3031 ° o NMvaa 1151dHJ snd6oi �o lis P n µ a v /r Sava NAM-%1l7 UNItJ33NION3 C xa aaNaro snaaoo of`g (� G; N ll3LHJatl aaOfltl.n 5°lONA3tl N-11 1 ro3na 3Atl Ntloa..5451 ° oZ 1N91aAdOJ ° cc � o„vx.sa�oN.ax N.xoxe E'ONNNOIltl153if1iN N0111111 N01111-11 ON as a NO11111— I'll =0 \J V Z G 0 m Z 'Q V Z H H _ k W H lem IM E 8 1 S S R A 5 I If♦ O El 0 B c sf 5 Id ir 59 rn LLJ 12 R in 0 Z I., J y a > a a g \Wok rn a< a< aw��ao Nva fi F i y� E �7 ab:nN� �oadm SVX31 �,� NVId NOI1noma n a 8a3 3 m,,,etl 8 A3ALM 0IHdVHD0d01 1151dHJ snd6oi �o klisDS,HH a v Aa Nmi NAM-%1l7 `JNItJEli�NION3 p xa aaNaro snaao� of`g (� G; >N Sll3LHJa aaOfl ONA3a NmOae ®'xd 1 Oe.bN S110-11 N1ro3na 3Atl NtlOaOW SE N p o oZ J+lug aAdOJ `o c E'ONNNOIltl15 3811 0 NO a NO11111— I'll ON N-1111 8 01 d� Z 5> Q / 1 > W g coo O _ o �o � 6% !hm I Q o s o 'p, > pR �� og i J Y r � r w N plFp / �-lu u o = s m z � gg 9 °> ° °> b _. � � 0�oe�o°e 26 0�01�'3 ✓ PC ro I \ � O> II \ S NM1} � m -31 In aIV o s a s Q g `'"sps Ega $ a a="= 8 Z F Hg� o �" �a= -.4p a g a _ " o N g is flp CD lo S e $ nnnnn i€3w $�a3 � n�" B5�"= @ " �1=�,B 4,1 = 3gg 4 € q a s" z� T gg �7 .............n L a°aaM SVX31 " Ntl�d NOISN�NIO fl o I15ldHO snd6oi �o klis M.I. av / 3ava sL aL ae°a°,LeMa°,°.3a M°as NAM-% UNNoItnNaIOnN3 roma xa aa9aro snaao� a `g (� w G; -3313 o,..Maa,o..,d�Maae E*ON 3n 3 dan�aDwa o czoz�L meaea '"" NOo N01111IDS11 "I ON 1-1 NO11111— I'll V Z /' 0 m I / Z ob V a s� DS�� DSb LL 9 v�S m r l£ .L n r i-'I IISS.. 97 Z-a r C� ,L'll w I �w I \ ass ;Ya6 fig € s o Em :� aha _ m E PAR K s of el s=`� �—S m` w a � ' su a=,= a gi=n s." � a < �m a $ =oos�z gm y eE`gu� �°61� ffk oMo ow =2= gE d� j �a 'ass" o' .s �a WOO, Mmi'" 1 ' eaiasaid _ _ �7 .............,n 3°aa M SVX31 Ntlld 1N01' �JNIAtld f l o I15ldHO snd6oi �o klis M.I. o 11.1— ° 3 a / Sava �V�1A UNItJEji�NION3 p roma xa aas�aro snaao� `g (� w G; �s aL ae°a°,eMa°,°.3a M°as Nvnan . 4 o,..Maa,o..,a�Maae E*O3n3d�n�aowa o czoz�meaea '"" *ON NO o N01111IDS11 "I ON 1-1 NO11111— I'll V Z /' 0 m i / Z / Q / � G W o w � I o I I � � z 8-S�8�8 �Z pits w W Map m b ap 3 $ B gg3w d� 2= ¢ fg �?3ft.gt� :8w�98 0 oo> a3a °aaM SGX31 NV-ld 'JNIOdHE) of IlSI(YHO S/7&&00 1O i(1/i g/, a V rt si�nroavaaoai 3 XAX=e `DNI1133NI'JN3 C 3 Ra§. za aas�aro snaaoo m o C� w G; 0 oco�iu°iaM oar ° ec oaivx.smoxxan Hrnone E'ON NORM! N Nasin3a \J oe/un JeAoF w x ocd5 x � a \ �o z M a W LL l`GJ 9 J 5 h � � x r � N \ oa �v M i vvvv- vv A9 �G GO 77 g0 o G I I o � �v ,� vvvv vvvv vv 0 F aQz m o 0 o l 3' 0 u �o \ "o O� -50 Ld s w F��B �mW6S6Sao�$o� ---psi � 8aa 66 `��Ikk Y�kB BE g �7 a,n 3oa,M SVX31dVW V3kfV 39VNVHO fl o � sa3 3 ams, ed , 11S1dHJ snd6oi �o k-L/j a P n o _ a / aw3ava ■V�1P7 UNIHIINIO 3 p roma xa aas�aro snaao� P `g (� w G; �s a aeaao,eMaa,o.3a Moan Nvnan , o,..yaa,o..,a�Maae E'ON 3n aowa o czoz�meaea '"" NNOIlOID tl15381i❑ • 11 ON—- -\e Ce 0P LU I G �o Q l o � o m � a o z i sit it-. .�• �' a ■ J ■ . ♦' a I 0 I j o I oo/ds `9c> °J x a � � o) I c' �o I Jo £off e_ w<� x■■ �� x_ :x e, d NMI . � �^ym L�i apt C>=�g� 1 � 1 i a NP! !Q m�� . g K. o= 8Q:� � aim b cc, �tl�c �? r Tm a e'a�y�als ='m ss°slo gg m i m ov R 6xk -99a6sa n;Y 4 a ® _ a 5 S`p`a• pin N $ ¢� s"tires j o his .0- 3 5Y11 11 sao i YHill 1-1001 1 91 MIN limp! ee � on f em�4 o �7 as/aL ae°a°,eMa°,°N.s3aaN3 MMS°3avaas Po pm9;' °g" :�m,u pSVX31 NLl Ma Ntl�d IJromIaLLxa aI......a.°aaI151HHJ snd600 �o k-L/j o DS,HH na.1— NAM-% UNItEj�NION3 as�aro snaao� o°°If o3`g -3313 Nvnan o,..Maa,o..,a�Maae E*ON 3n 3 d�n�aowa o czoz�meaea '"" NOo N..—II I'll I ON N-1111 °� ✓o Z e � o> �� S LFA ✓ ✓p �C o m W T a. �� °° LL.as .. �ti o•. °O� °' b O 1 F o �a � V ✓O Y o i3 8g oo I o r n 3 N a Z d o O n m N •m d IE o o � > y > ow \ m ✓> •L• —• FS wv�i Ell gdsg 8� �•—• •—•� Wk' o< Eas se�3 Ed`s z $J P CD LdLd z { B9@9@ �a aka n R 23 ° oo>ii�zz aaevmNi>3waam �� - SVX31 �'�� (dddMS) NVId OUMA3Hd NOLUIIIOd H31VM MO1S ° o Nmeaa Pop; s m,u I151dHJ snd600 �o lio P n µ a v / 31va 1A1M111l7 `JNItJEli�NIIDN3 C '"�R`'@ xa aaNaro snaaoo of`g (� G; N Sll3LHJavaaOflvm S°l°NA38 Nm°88 1 tl ro3na3Atl N.....SE ° oZ�1N9 aAdOJ ° cc � o„vx.sa�oN.ax N.xoxe E'ONNNOIltl153if1i N p _ o N Nasn3a \J V / Z � � p Z �a o Ia . I a � I , I 1' . U � I I a� bG�ygh< ,$$6@�3 db 11 ohm xm n s 9oAoW6dh 3k6'3FF€��sWi.��R��pbzha v�R�b n�h � 11l�i;��a•g Wb¢W�64 x & full! 61M, 11 0 ' altoI I I ll not a, s p 0®6&bb�haiE4 a s e 1113$�1 ....n..a.°aa. SVX31 111" M.I. S d0 0 S3ION dddMS 0000 fl o �;'�°g" 11SIdlHO snd600 �o kllo ,=a � cna n,Hcaa a / Sava �V�1A UNItJEl�NION3 p roma xa aas�aro snaao� ^' `g (� w G; �s a ae°a°,eM=°,°.3a M°afi Nvnan o,..Maa,o..,dNMaae 3n NOliVaowa `o E E'ONNNOIltl15 3811 0 NOIIIIIDSII "I ONas aNO11111— I'll ON N-1111 sao avas 6�laa Jr6uj/o)uaua7audaQ ao S710N NVId Z SVX31 N(.)IlN_7n1Nd NpLLM10d dd.IVM HHO,JS IISINHO snddo3 {a ,1113 sn4iao r.,niwoo.jo jo) w -- -H Hosl�x No�aa a ,� Ada oN Nas�aa Z ------- ........ ......... ..................... ........ ......... - ----- -_. Q I Z a� � Awa o` m FLU �<a -H �� LL f.o �oIR tom � a waw o < �aV <o. ( N. iF �F �< < �.i 3� z ja �Frc W. ao« ,€n a 62LL.r�r z < Foo r I <oZ � No t9 3 0� h Z v F �? Iz 6N I W. rcQ wQ .16 �i B $ o 1 W-MW - < F� .. Ha y�,. ..� �5 pI o z= o fi U; I �< 6 5o a 1p z I- mo qffi �7 ....n..a.°aa. SVX31 111" M.I. E d0 Z) SMON dddMS 0000 fl o �;'�°g" 1151HHJ snd6oi �o k-L/j a � cna n,Hcaa a / Sava �V�1A UNIl p roma xa aas�aro snaao� NORV �s a ae°a°,eM=°,°.3a M°afi Nvnan o,..Maa,o..,d�Maae 3n aowa E'ONNNOIltl15 3811 0 1- NOl- I'll ........ (Olds) SLNIAAOO ONV ONf1SSf Z SVX31 SIIna'Jd IV1NJWN0aI//NJ �JJ1VM n?JOl Q IIS18H3 SndNOJ to /113 i�r Ha s mioo ro n�c� N Q 11-30 ,. 3— 1 oN Nos1— Noaaa�a ,e 3��a off No��n3a Z Z H W a O t i� F 6u s fi J x IBJ X F y( E �7 SVX31 (£ d0 £) S310N dddMS 0000 f l o usldHO snddod io ,111 M-0 c na n,Hcaa a / Sava �V�1A UNItJEl�NION3 p roma xa aas�aro snaao� `g (� w G; NMaae 3n 3�d�n�a°wa� o `o E E'ONNNOIltl15 3811 0 ON 1a 1 -!-s s eu!)a u!euj/o 7u,upodao S IIVi3U Ck1VONVISS VX-31 Z IIS18H� Sflddoo Jo .11l� NNILN m NnlJsf ja1VM w =�n` Np .l. Q Z Q rc uF > r n� V a O git 0 „m k GQ 1 I I LU a m �' l op w oc �N V 4 t� w 7 E \\1 1 2 - J C1 S 'ONES I lava mw o P P _ � J a, d�3 5 <ms a MH RI sl�� y �LL ti off„ w 4< 'tea son, �p T Hl d RNA �Q QC ✓13 .. Q t �� C� s I Og , s N m t �'��rf 2 � dr � COy iJr"1 4; z 0 0 m p N o � W� • Y � Y-�G u�'�V� �3®a�aq i Z q„� s� a s a F c q�� - 0 � qg�;, q s , x q ) g panPRO `I FMill h 011 L G q 0, g ff I„ W J s C d S ? p 4 z m v m y( E ° oo>ii�zz aaevmNa>3waa,m �� 7 SVX31 ��' �� S1M130 UUVWV1S ONIAVd M3H3N00 0000 ° /I51dHJ snd6oi �o lis g/ ;=a P n µm a v / Sava IV.I'r1 UNIH33NION3 p a xaaaN-11Naro snaaoo of`g (� G; N LHJatl aaOfltl.n S4lONA38 N88 1 ro3n3Atl NtlOaOW SE ° aZ 1N918AdOJ ° cc � o„vx.sa�oN.ax N.xoxe E*ON NNON01111-11 "I ON Iltl153if1i 1-1 NO11111— I'll IN=N0111111 \J V STV130 QaVCINV1S Z SVX31 1N3W3AVd 313aONOD g 0 US18HO Snd803 /d A113 S n�Sr)da°o JO u0 o y �a�� s b W Q Z _ W � a 8- z U o W W N a s Z n dawn ° 4 �e z i Q � oa Oil Vg ON m� w z w w o / N n n W x z H z 'u n w n sa W n 2 N� s s A " a a Caw o tie LLI cc A C Cti x v ZZ ® tOi g W d vN %u �7 a"'n""a`°a" SVX31 S7tl130 JNIAtld 313b9N0� f l o I151HHJ snd6oj �o k-L/j a P n µ? 0 3 UNItJEIi�NION3 C roma xa as—,naa- �saL aeaao,eMaa,o"3aN-11 E'ONNNOIltl15 3811 0 as a V Z G 0 m Z 'Q V Z 9 P s n W 14 p s Y End sga �q� B .4 34 p?' Ns� i Bg ; 48 g"a � Ewipfl �q . ........ a3�: g3&�i3 I yy �2 mj d Wil lj�6��8 � 2=�a �� e %I; M �Si„ NO,I �4 o m WB��3j� � gail a 1 N4 Rod�a 516 9 6 log f Y y( E �7 B,nNaa,°aaM SVX31 INI siryna aavawis 1151HHJ snd6oj �o lls ;=a P n µ a v / Sava IV—I'I-I `JNItJEIi�NION3 p g. °" xa aaNaro snaaoo of`g (� G; N Sll3LHJatl aaOfltl.n S4lONA38 Nm088 11 ro3na 3Atl NtlOaOW SE ° oZ 1N9 aAdOJ ° cc � o„vx.sa�oN"ax N.xoxe E'ONNNOIltl153if1iN01111-11 "I ON 1-1 \J V 411V1 Cl MMINYLS SVX31 N-IHM-1(IIK aNH IIS18HD Sllddoo to ,113 usml+o eneauo�o u,o 0 0 �a No,aa�� Aa aatla oN NNs,�a �a oN NNsl,�a Z J o Q o w x T 5 � W o T• Q o u g Q G... a `d4 � _ g x m as 3 dfr 01 a, U a W w wAl- swru � ......e �a � r a T, r a Q K s a.0 W 10, s - S p -6 LL�. W g,a r� u l D ,. z O >z ,.<q� p < W , /sl �� LI Ir w r r � �i r f. w r \ ) W a p Z m H r-I rn PVJ mi O L 3- — Qr; J I Naw N u V m G W �1 a' Z J W yl v Fw a r W�{ 5 m -O � 3 \\ N Z y w L o_ n, n� QO z „ ; e x - J W ... °� Y• L Z LLIa z J I D 5" Z J \ Q a Ouw LLI F �w k ZZ -g o 1 a J O ° MItl UJ W V QO ; e z o I. — .e-.I W " W s Z M Z G Ul Jo h �rR a N' m h t H O w W uj m3 7 O �.. W ...... o W 6 w GS h O ! ( M � h z � m yf Z W�p- W C m� i� o Z pp_ O �> f a •. 8..., C1 - Q W J ¢o . W wel JIs� s m o R m L. x s� w o v W � G r\ G* 6 I and •..N IV Z . Q 64i �oopo -........ V N s (lo so sloe) ° oo>lilzz 1-1I—ONam SVX31 (E d0 L) n a 8a3 3 m,,,etl SlIV13a auvowis AVM3NHa 0000 ° usldHO snddoo �o k-L/j a � w a / Savo �V�1A UNItJEli�NION3 � r' ro�ga xa'laslaro snaaon (� w G; N Sll3LHJatl°aOfltlm S°loNA38 Nmo88 t oro Oaibx.LmOxaae rv.xOxe 3n 3Atl NtlOYOW 5451 .,, a ° LoZ J+1x9 aAdOJ E*ON NNOIltl15 3811 0 N011111-1 ON 1-1 NO11111— I'll IN=N0111111 s .nsa5-6u,uaaui6uj�o �uewl�odap i a°s Z SVX3l S�IV130 OaVONV1S IVM3AR30 IIS18HO s7dNoj Jo Aio asiauo,n,.aa<r7 e<r aue Q Z Q g H _ C 3�a W 00 LL z e s Y o 1 ' a`, p _ rc�pi o m ziko. a ' K �B w sxo� z8Nt 9,,w w.:4—PH, -..E- -1 1 EwWavn () rrvm st u3 o»n, (� rrvma�us _ s31nvA ova i za r � p aoa p p am aoaa sv � ` t w 8Wm on I m (aa aA' w� m 0 a j U s � I u � s c �a =5 5 a - � m o p o a F e oo>!ilzz aaaamrv,�waa,m �� n�a aa3„,3 SVX31 ,om' S7tl134 4Htl4Ntl1S AU) 000 �' 11SI�IHO snd6oi �o klls � � a v r na n,Hiva .u�'w UNItJEli�NION3 p roma xa aas�aro snaao� of`g (� G; aL aeaao,eMaa,o.3fi Mofifi Nonan o,..Maa,o..,d�Maae3n 3�d�n�aowa zo=�a��aaao� E*ON NNOIltl15 3811 0 1-1 NO11111— I'll IN=N0111111 e s .naaS 6u�iaau�6�3\o auaua7.odaQ io z Z SVX31 SWAG C16Va NV1S l,VM3AI6a IISI8H3 snddOS Jo A113 us18u3"d—Jo euO ` 0 a� Z Q Z H H w LU m r W R a p W Ix w �2 LL LL 24 s Qr Pt 14, in � VQ 0 4 c z w - - rz —14 a� "R z r n W ° _ p d s� V �ag N3 Wnl� 4 yK, n w a !rc rc a z I� rcuu m ° oo>,i,zz aaevmNa>3waam �� SVX31 '�� M d0 £) n a s°3 3 m,,,etl SlIViM OHVWVIS AVM3AQi0 0000 ° e Nmeaa Pomp; s m,u IlSIdHO snddod �o lls P n µ? a v / Sava IV.I'r1 `JNItJEli�NION3 p i@ xa aaNaro snaaoo of`g (� w G; N Sll3LHJatl aaOfltlm S°lONA38 Nm088 1 4 73na 3Atl NtlOaOW SE ° oZ 1N9 aAdOJ ° cc � o„vx.sa�oN.ax N.xoxe E*ON NNOIltl153if1i 1-1 NO11111— I'll IN=N0111111 \J g —S 6u!—ulbuq/o )u3w)lod36 c eo c z SVX31 SlIF/130 (RIVONdlS ),VM3AIaC] usia�ao snaaoo jo uio IISINHD sndd0i to Alli � � m s Q Z Q Z CH _ d Ew gmp' m�m6x a km 0� yo aV3aa 3aVa�)' .e, 3oNVN � o 3 3aos s a � ° W ° tw w' ava R 17 V o ZVJ pvaao awao) B'o a x � � m jns C v � u 3a9 3aV � rc � 89 o m \"o i g 4 a v 0 am + 3a m � e a SVX31S7tl313a auvaNvis baivm 0000 f l o 1151HHO snd6oj �o klis ,=a P n µ? 0 3 a / Sava �V�1rA UNItJEli�NIIDN3 p roma xa aastaro snaao� `g (� G; .s.a„..aeaao,eMaa,o"3a Mori n aan o,..Maa,o.",d�Maae 3n... ..aowa... zo=�a��aaao� ON N-1111 `o c ' E'ONNNOIltl15 3811 0 as a .,. m. �6, F. sly € w. ..,. O �d m sly it J C J C a „1 £ law J 1 ne ¢ I 1 ` a 1((1 6 � � .,� � a i�� p�r ��_ ss�_� �a Rr�W� ve� d p a s 1, E i d + d6 rt m a a I � � s t Ill � G lot.yl � s � ii S � a;, � � '" sr M: 0 ee� pill I IIy P Y l 1 nd h ff sa, &r ka I tl sr� s " 4�0 A�J a c 4 r gg I 3 t i 'ii HIM 7 s ��aYM 711I� 81�1� �e 8 d WON dn� � �a�a2 d�,�rg�gln C g � .ar s�s,�n d<;�� 41r i t Y Saa Ir � o- 9 "fi I ar rrt£ P y r �r9 o` w s ow r f C 111 pty C r EIfa NMI,s r air x $ 8 A �K �a ° '"re'aIi� N � e9 t ii , g ti n 5 a P a K i; W'— ° ulrt "$€$ X' r y a g a sft a ar�Y� r�a p �(4 a6$ " 7f SkR S T� p 7 F G h r q 4 t d i '�� r ry v ' ar a c ' ° t ............. M s vx31 s�rolaa d�vnn 1151dHJ sndsoi �o klis M.I. _ n m 0 3 a / Sava �V�1A NORV UNItJEl�NION3 p roma xa aas�aro snaao� �s aL aeaao,eMaa,o.3a Moan Nonan . o,..Maa,o..,d�Maae 3n aowa zo=�a��aaao� `o c E'ONNNOIltl15 3811 0 a V Z G 0 m Z 'Q V Z H CH G W a Ix O EA 0 0� 3Z 4a 00 - - - o> Y a d m U cn kJ H dZ In>- O H H _ I w IQ LLJH �U J � H y ��mm - Z -vI IMF— m a o — � z o t t t N m W U Q LL - = S ° 8V1n""a`°a" SVX31 °'LS7tl130 .1JJ791SS3�tl f l o I151dHJ snd6oi �o k-L/j a P ,p na n,Hcaa ° 3 w a / Sava �V�1A UNItJEl�NION3 p roma xa aas�aro snaao� NORV �s a aeaa°,eM=a,°".3a"M°as Nonan o,..Maa,o..,d�Maae 3na°wa E'ONNNOIltl15 3811 0 as a V Z a6' �ak A6a� who ;�s'ij i; m R. Mia= €aw o �3" <p pe<= ww Q IN ��v� -- I g 2A VP— �3 I "ya51 zo �z wmw ��j i dpl Ix BE — � \ \ o 1 0 £ a a b6K 7 -21 � � a Ej J = a - o�- e A V-n 3145 m2 — Q �$ —�i. _ 2zNE ^^gJgJ pFN.,a ��w6mVoa�E��, ry �.a o¢E p a as Na min in m Z 3435 g UCI yri$( E saoin�oS 6uuoaui6u3 jo ;uaw7uodop ............. 3ew� S 4X31 d� Aar— 3 S3 ilsidyo snddoo JO .11/5 � rp kt,,, 6 g r o Aa _ — — saa s�dao pIW 9z avaao ivA t ou M NA3tlNMO B anvrvv�aowszsi N a p . eeo�uau�ana o foxauaN—D-.,,,,-.,, (r�„`Tz"� 'ON NOI1tl1S 32114 ' ............................... ..[==== 0 m 0 Z Q c!) Z p y t 1, t i f { f fr{ yy l �. 5 i -, y ✓,f 1 i e2 fr f W � ' tr F J , , i oc f ( y y fr. fr 1 ,1; a 1 i Y Y.: y [ l E f.. fj t ) i A f c 1 i C, h 1 1 F y f - Y O y;i ! F R F # i e b y 1 ! _ p y , e ) 1 1 Y e t11, ro , z. fr i s x211 it ' F t: v 1 ':n t f " ( - y y i f f gt 6' t N, F p 'i f ,S K i F y '. � A."� fr t, Iy ( f f " ( ( G Y i 1 i. 1 i t Sl+i; A dd C i..fr y It 2 N YF11 F by Y - ""2 ( K ll f f " " � ,, A Y r y t y i yFW 1 t lw r lz Yi l RSr , , t Yff y y- �' 1 - L � y ,'Y .y y 1 y [ fr� i+� Y it A i,ryr 9' t tyy / f 1 `F� ' i ( l 11 -l f t ,'9 N, 5 ..t 1 y .t Yf [ l L F 1 �y. fr Y F 0 F. t �W (, E F f ii 12 fr - 9 i 11 }N y i. i i el -Y t d 1 1 �F - �1 t ;t t>i 1 t E y { �J- i y i f 1 Y Y f Y 1 y 1 1 y - 3 y _ 1 ry$11 4 i 3 Y Y W y tl t 5 W : N `A: 11 i f f f yf f d t �' ,1 g - ��l ,f. f �,:� fr yl i i 1 1 } y y { f i i .... ` fti fr , t +:d 1 a 4 ff y ',l i d' ,1$,Y! r .e ,-,, .,,,.v yi ,f E„ u�� ,.'�,.,,..ra o u 4f:,.,CS v,. .,�.�C.� ,. F.(,f, ib,Ey 1!„ 4f,n d..mdl 11 i f g i y i �' 'a P �t i t t '. l 1 'Y y 1 F y c ! y r s y't J d ', i t y £ C i A 3� 1 t Y 1 i F F F"f 1 t E 4 3 �, i i iv i F t 3 i 11 IX ° Y y' [ y y i 9 i i 4 F - F i i 1 f fr y �' 5 }" i t Y i i y iyi i f... F- p i 1 t Y. f /Nfr, Y j- § t is h 9 - t E J J t 1 `� 1 fry.. f } 1. ! d d f i F G i i Z 1 if q _y fr i u f �. it F - 1 -F i F _� : 1 y f l Ah f ( 1 d F �1 [ , Y 3 f i y 5y: fr}11 � i ('.y 1 ,. .,., Y. i Yi y11 , f f - F �i F YtY Y,- y 'cif 7y :Y i f 1F; 11 � 11 ':7f asa �rc „� if ,.fl 11 .. 9,2i Y !. / `, F 4 Yey t r dn. f ., ... ,: a r y''' i 1 1C., 1 - l 1( �t � d i jd y' 3F.f 1 N fr _ y y: 1 y d 1 { h'. F f f 3 fr f �, Y o y„ o �� ,,,.LL f N ..�„ l} i .,,.,, 5 e.,. y 1 o A C 1 h yF i, Y ; �y.. 11 I �4.. .., ? 1 1 I 'y'� ,5 Y `, 3 y ( -.i yNl yt t 1 - . ( Y d ( d f U F '.i 8 `�,i / l y t y 1 i f q ''.f yf .... ,,,,,z o.GY.Qnva «a,,,..,,. ,,,, 1 f f tl t l y 11 I0. A r r v � Yt ro t ^ ' F F y .c y ) t F / 't i A t 1( i q 9 l,� i y. 11 fy '� _ ( Fy Y 2 1�t9� i .[ A 1 i , , d 3 y A'. 3 A .}3 r.r ..} i , � , �,�,11 I 11�..,,, - ffl, fr d!< pi.; - - N 9 Y fr F :F f.,a�. .� d ifs I'll I I'l !......,�a,,,,,� ,, w..ns„ i,,,r., 1 ... a , s 1; j saainuas 6uuaaui6u3�o auaw7.rodap o eeo fa ,nroae o aew SVX31 0} a 3 SS3 a /1SldHo -ndyoo JO .l1/n a i ode .1.1 3 EZ06 1-1-03 .�d�3ow° i.. a ar,f ou.M uadxM � o fovea uaxasao � E'ON NOIltl1S 3NId � ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ........ ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... aaNss» cane/Uv ... ... m Z 'Q V Z } 1 fr }fr N G ( d ,G f J {L O N ( � cs Iv A ! H E t - fr ! _e G ( s G f � wqf l f t Yfy J P i r d, 1 R 1r y j� `t G } fr K / d 1 cs Vy i 2�l2t2 R!R!R'2 !2! 1 Y F. C �,.. , vx wf fr N W f F Ff ----------------------------- f f } ld 5 G } saain�as 6uuaaui6u3 jo auaw7uodap .... ........ Sew. S dX31 o a 3 383NSS39 z ilsi�y� sn_—d8—oA o f� clio Aa aov ou M „„tl„MO Q anvrvv�aowszsi N a d eeo�uau�ana o IDN—N—D (r` E'ONNOUVISM11.4 0 m Q w a { o> LL F a'ti rtes t fr! C f x # ✓ t� _—. --� _ ------------------------------ C-3> _. a. ....... . r frl' A L I a 4 CS, Y s 1; 1`, saain�as 6uuaaui6u3 jo auaw7uodap sFo« ............. axwx S dX31 3 383NSS39 ilsi�y� snd�oo J� clio o Aa _ . z -.,,v A ou x „„tl„MO Q anv xv�aow szsi N a d ees��au�ana o coxa uaxssao (r�„`Tz"� E'ON NOI1tl1S M11.4 NDlid—SAU N-1 m LU � 0 u1 � w f1 � aJ a O LL U CID L�f i o l g t ... r ---------------------------- j a saain�as 6uuaaui6u3 jo auaw7uodap ............. 3rwx S dX31 3 383NSS39 ilsi�y� snd�oo J� clio Ae _ . z -.,iv A oux „„tl„MOQ anvxv�aowszsi N a d ees��au�ana o foxy raxss3o (r�„`Tz"� E'ON NOUVIS M11.4 0 ? Z 7 ,^ E ( \ I v — , / LU ryry wU a. 4 LL _ O r' V Is yl�I f I I I I 1 �} w I II � I I Ran ry F, as J Jo f? III J kn 19: j a r saainuas 6uuaaui6u3�o auaw7.rodap o 0 is ,nroae o aew� SVX31 a 3 SS3 a /1SldHj -ndyoo JO .l1/n a a ar,, ou.MadxMy E o ; nAa�r � 3 ,h 'ON NOIltl � o Iowa uaxasao � E1S 3NId � ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ........ ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... ......... aaNss» caoUUv ... ... a %=v Q � t9 LU r � o w LL r �id f .. . ................ JI ..... ' .. `nom.+..n.........+.ins.+r.in.nr.in...r.�n.n..... .+.in�.t .in...� U urn o r� " . 1 r 0 Y 1 a r saain�as 6uuaaui6u3 jo auaw7uodap ............. axwx S dX31 3 383NSS39 ilsi�y� J� clio Aa sn _ . z -.,,v A ou x „„tl„MO Q anv xv�aow szsi N a d ees�uau�ana o coxa uaxssao (r�„`Tz"� E'ON NOUVIS M11d LU LL IN li W s � 1 3 } _ N t f t , �u i s o_o o 1 5 } saain�as 6uu00ui6u3 jo auaw7uodap ............. Sew. S 4X31 dN.- 3 S3 ilsi,yy.? snd�oo JO /(1io z :—V-.,d �� t ou.M oda .3 d�d�aow s s a d o lH �hd o ox3n3Hs�o n E'ON NOI1tl1S 32114 ' 0 Q m f � � h I� w a. O LL U f, e I. 7-7 x 4ix xev, i wx „i n n I 1 1 Yr I I c „N__ .... .- 7,.XT, ------f,7777 L [LiLlJ �a J 5 } saain�as 6uuaaui6u3 jo auaw7uodap ............ w w, a M axwx SdX31 a 3 3 3 S3 ilsidy.? snddoo JO /(1i0 z 'ON NO aao ivA ou x „„tl„MO Q anvxv�aowszsi N a d ees�uau�ana o coxa uaxssao3NI—3-1-VEI1tl1S M11.4 0 m 0 3— NOlid—SAU N N-1 Z LU �> O LL LY r �o 4 1 -- ------- -- — 04 C r, G j saain�as 6uuaaui6u3 jo auaw7uodap ............ axwx S dX31 a 3 3 3 S3 ilsidy.� snddoo JO /(1io o Fa z aao ivA ou x „„tl„MO Q anvxv�aowszsi N a d ees��au�ana o coxa uaxssaoE'ON NOUVIS M11d 0 m 0 Z e% Q Z 4 ” 3— NDlid—SAU N N-1— e --- f LL M W CL LL C f f C C E flF 1 ,AS � 3 ce c rggg l' i ” A 4 iS( ! �• f J J ” ------------- __ , -41 V f �\" � Flo — 1 _ ------------------------- 5 } « ............ :. , � , ,_ . ........ _._ . . &�2 ] N }` 2;e� s d o w , /0 < 2 ! [ 7 -3 ! _ \ . § \,..__ •_ ,w . u, _ ` _ : ; _ _��_��, � . . � � /_: \ y�- . a___ \ \ \) ~ r g ■ 3- NOlid-SAU N N-1 0 2 « 0 z R E � ■ LU a. ■ 0 LL � 9 \ � } ° ! } saainuas 6uuaaui6u3�o auaw7.rodap a w, a M axwx ININVIA sr --V a 3 3 SS3 ilsi�y� snd�oo �� clio p k,,,l .va ,daddda zINIaao ivA t ou x NA3tlNMO B anvxv�aowszsi N a d ees�uautana o coxauaxssao (r�„`Tz"� E'ONNOI1tl1S32114 0 m 0 t� Q ...,p .. V wlLL a O I 7777 --------------- j— 77 l I la l LL �r a. , � n J I i r y fill. (,i1 P i t � , b § l` ! f J " X• ". u u 4 t a I > w s � 1 r j ------ ---- . a ; saain�as 6uuaaui6u3 jo auaw7uodap ............ w, a M 3xwx SdX31 a 3 3 3 S3 ilsidy.� snddoo JO /(1io3NI—3-1-V o v zaao ivA ou x „„tl„MO Q anvxv�aowszsi N a d ees�uau�ana o y ua foxxss3o (r�„`Tz"� E'ON NOUVIS M11.4 0 m 0 Z ,Q V Z LU 1 LL w , 4 Z � � ro s w, ro a fr1 Y oo-• L71 1 �J r , x a � e l ll AIr w ? C) T 1 Z i a j Y 9 h l� 1t5 u ry-i N `. 1 r, N „ a I p � k r m w h 1 fr�. t D z fd z .\ P�, x r s w k s rj 6 FE e 1 1 a ,a saa/n�a5 6uuaau/6u��o �uacu��odap i !bbe-IL M39Wf1N ll3foad MMB OS6F6[OI-i5ldH.-M 3 U eweHHa��tlH�6,e3Hwe�d S7X31 �,Ie,3aNa�deNeo� - a _ d3NSS39 11S12/Ho Snd lOj 3o (1/� a coc/co/so diva = = roeecx 3 � ieiN oaows�i y JN Sll3llHJMd aMOf1dM SalONA3M NmOM9 F�' pfivm xAan Nmoee 3Wtl p m p O ELOLUIHO MAd a I9ry3 a3N563'J <. E'ON NOI1tl153N1i - a naa W, 0 m Z 'Q V Z H CH L W d Zj �6 p o 3 k - `r rvrwi M�N r0 3K ,f tLL - I v�a { LI � 3 — c u u a , J e 3 a ui a r saa/n�a5 6uuaau/6u��o �uacu��odap �66a-IZ M39Wf1N ll3foad MMB OS6F6[OI--Ul`[5bM3 U Sllvi3a 13315 Ilt— o - ewo s 3awaia S7X31 y o A9N.. d3NSS39 11S12/Ho Snd lOj 3o - a coc/co/so a�iva = = roe¢cx 3 � i9iN oaows�i y JN Sll3llHJMd aMOf1dM SalONA3M NmOM9 1�' pfivm xAan Nmoxe p m p O ELOLUIHO MAd 9 �9ry3 a3N553'J <. E'ONNOI1tl153N1i - a naa W, 0 m Z 'Q V Z H CH L W d LL --- --- 4 f ¢ lL LI 'Xil UFR y � J a = � G �/J wy�y' s z _ ram K` 3 k e yN' o � � LL z ooaa a a - -J SGz- saain�as 6uuaaui6u3 jo auaw7uodap dw w, .. M 3ew� SdX31 3 S3 ilsidy.� snddoo JO /(-1/0 wvaJa z 'ON NO o�roavaaoaivA ourM NA3tlNMOQ xlanvrvv�aowazs NIS a d o�u�iH�aha o ox3n3Hs�o EI1tl1S 32114 ' 0 m 3— NOlid—SAU N N-1 0 Z ,Q V Z ' a O i 1 U T o w ; Y C .P Y , LL r t E 5 , 3 a v a p w N I l � w y w z n i y, , J a f 3 J h 3 g saain�as 6uuaaui6u3 jo auaw7uodap ............ w w, a M axwx SdX31 a 3 3 3 S3 ilsidy.� snddoo JO /(1io o, wda, a z3NI—3-1-Vaao ivA ou x „„tl„MO Q anvxv�aowszsi N a d ees�uau�ana a uaxssao 'ON NOUVIS M11.4ocox 0 m a 0 Z r a C � C Z f 3— NOlid—SAU N N-1 w r a � � p C^ LL o� w a w �� w r e, a d�� J ILI � a m w a � t �m v U .. ...... �y U rJ- Ca w C 4 w w � a w w z x w � 1 w g s J7, w --------------------------- .R 1, .•, � � ' a saain�as 6uuaaui6u3 jo auaw7uodap ............. axwx S dX31 a 3 383NSS39 83S39ilsidyj snddoo JO /(1i0 zaao ivA ou x „„tl„MO Q anvxv�aowszsi N a d ees�uau�ana o a ua coxxssao (r�„`Tz"� E'ON NOUVIS M11.4 3— NOlidl-SAU N N-1 0 m 0 Z ,Q V Z ........ t 'r W d oc ?; a LL 21 2 �e 3 5 G Iit f;pi t { h , 1 r 11 r. r E' a r , N w w. a L A u na ---------------- ------------------------- ------------------------ : s ww, k r�; G `e F i S a T f t_ } saain�as 6uuaaui6u3 jo auaw7uodap M ............. 3xwx S 4X31 M a 3 3 83 S39 ilsidy.? snddoo JO .11/5 z 3NI—3-1-V oox aao ivA t ou x NA3tlNMO B anvxv�aowszsi N a 3x3xs�oTz/ E'ON NOIltl1S 32114 ' 0 m 3— NOlid—SAU N N-1 0 Z ,Q V Z W a 1, T T I M, ::: rooa.1 11 u 11 b.a oc O LL ,ov Yr X .c.pbr Yr;Yr;r,x v,YP r;v�r;o1 x ..c.vS, c...J .b.. .p c M 4 } 5 f y (i [;� - ''v arab ar.'an la van rn,'ix Yid Y�1a,�ra.a,a,9a raa 7„r Ed7�,n.a,an U;,an v5,�,d5�4aza, hi�Vxs�! f t 3 t g I J i 4; if 1. Y f F r Y L::go, 4 A s p Y( r 8 7e r T . I r m m l L t e Y C u w r EIXII \ .° _ 3 ,a�__. IN „ . o � . \ \ i - - ` o } 2 ( \±\} \ © 2 §§ §§§ ) ) §§ § � � a \\ p \\ \ \ \ \ \ win § \ ` \\( %} sa3 SbX-71 SN e 1S/ H S dYO� l� l/S Is DNI 101ADaeoaaoa/ �•<•.^•• anaaNe�eowas s � 01 f'ON NOILVIS Hid rvaiaia�saa Noinn3a Z 0 m Z e'v �a�=,aao££ Cg `2, _ Z W J I O Y »o 0 0 0«000 _ _ _ _ _____ Q Q TIT Q Q 7'? � Q Q Q Q W Q m U 0 a a 7 I Co- LL. I - II - - - - - - L, mi U i I> 0 a a a7 _ Z. - - - 4 �I na V �i 0 a= V W' n S O a o �O j�J 'O O xi w I ' m a Ix•.. < R u - wyv ^lwJ� „ r•.o 0 I LL I - m a "s - - z 02 I o� S - - - Ll a>`,\ W f ----------- o a Z O 0 a n' a - V I I I I N� I lu I I I J i ' W _ Z z - O -- — - - - - � W- i m I I• I ri I w I o - - - - - -� LL.m I¢ 0 - I I ©� rco d „ - --- X04 W O _ I V o F r H O Y Z Q o Z Z Z ¢ Q Q 0p (9p oC. �oima,o = ae Ileo � Qa7 n n a e Z W Q Z W a Z Z a - a N .'� ❑ 0000 000 _ 0` o�� oo`° sa3 SbX-71 r ae S N e 1 S/ H S/7,YOO to >w si�iw>ae oaoai �'' �� •<•.^•• anaa7-low's s o,,.M«,o«,3a«moa p E'ON NOI L"IS H rvaiaia�saa Noinn3a 3 3 3 0 LU F 7- zl c� I I d F LL Vo \I LL, �N I $_ I� I =I - a I a vv Q 0 w Z I - _ _ o �I a Qyo £rt x W m 1 x. IEp - z zf W � �'— — — F� �g 0000 L-I�v, L - - - -� I I I I I x vFv Z d co �- - - - - - - - - - - - - - --- 0 o ac 11 \ a x� za? �\ w W m- / I I - - - L\Ix 1 Z I d Q r I a � I I ma I I Iv LL a I a LL�S } .LLQ s0 OI a a I Z J Q� I V rt ®z I I I I I {n N- � � n sa3a SbX-71 y »o 1a �a os 3Naaoo,i,sa - _ M ae SN e 1S/ H S dYO� l� l/S Is a �w si�iie�ae oaoai �'' �� •<•.^•• anaa7-low's sI o,,.M[«,o«,3a«moa p E'ON NOI L"IS H rvaiaia�saa Noinn3a 0 m 0 0 �° 2Q Z G W �l J L 0.W LL a. I I I � I ED �J �- I Im I- I Illi = I I. I^ w I e I III I I - - m I I I I I <f I I I I I I p l z ' a - - - - - - I I rn r °mr°-- I Z a I c CWC C 0 0 0 I I LL I F 9 I N os[ fit. e I I I I I I ,pN I I 0 on sa3 SbX-71 y »o 1a o5N3waaoo,alloo3s — _ v, ae 9NMtl 1S/ H0 S/7,W00 to l/0 ow si�iieoae oaoai �,, 'a�� •<•.^•• anaa7-low's s o,,.M«,o«,3a«moap E'ON NOI1tl15Hid � rvaiaia�saa Noinn3a 0 m W 'ss Z l/[Y��) l/wY�) l/vY�) `/1Y�) W m ° Y a Q a O I ,III o.._ ....... .a....... .....E a........a......Le... . s.., ..�,a, Ih � F X, —� 7; To — — — — — — -- 1'1L---LLJI 1�— —I� — — — — — —� z t ti z — — — — — — —� Ell c.oIF z CW o p I I $I I fiI II - -� o Z 9 I V 11 el-06W 4 s a3 S bX-71 y »o 1a a aNe Hd,a ooa - _ SN e 1S/ H S dYO� l� l/S Is a �w si�iie�ae aaoai �'' �� •<•.^•• anaa7-low's s o,,.M«,o«,3a«moa p E'ON NOI L"IS H rvaiaia�saa Noinn3a I G 0 a € 3 4 Z FEE # 8 3 V ee a.r mammrcm.�.mEdd� o_ �x. r_aaa..m v o I I I I I I I I I I I s ON 0 O Gc W ac Q- _ F _ W IL 0 _ F ��000 2s � o�oo�oaoo lov W I d a V _ 3 ' I 1 .o, i. --- ----------------------- ---- --------- Za3 J3nuev.z W_ a I LL I I I I I O II Q m I I I I I QW i Q m U ❑ .,.w LL C7�4 = b V /77 4 0 0 0 p p p J O" N M �: a N �wr 00 sa3 SbX-71 SN e 1S/ H S/7,YOO to �w si�iie�ae aaoai �'' �� •<•.^•• anaa7-low's s o,,.M«,o«,3a«moa p E'ON NOI1tl1S H rvaiaia�saa Noinn3a s 0 0000000000 a Z 3... Yo> oo�oo 000> >_< <,00 oo�a�"0000 a�a <000ao oo�oo 0 o�o,ry HH a W O.. J 1 Q LL r Qn W r. A r W a W- 4 O II a----- oil _ 4 1` al Q= N a W W d"a��oo ¢Q8 Z -- J 30 a - Y 10 D 1-1 7 r N -— _ Q m N o W.. ------------------------------ oll Q Q res 3 r W 1 W Q.o -�I - O•O �Iry sa3 SbX-71 ae, s Me lsisv SndYoO so lis �w si�iie�ae aaoai �,, 'a�� •<•.^•• anaa7-low's s o,.M«,o«A3a«moa p E'ON NOI L"IS H rvaiaia�saa Noinn3a - N Y o 03000 0 0000> a2 �„000�a�.0000 a � a� H t i � W V a c O r I LL W W I Q Q I Z a Z o OEM a= a= (-m) r o W 0 b oa= opo Z o ar� a= O Zo o ® O N I � oo O� &4- - - - = Q I I 100 Q - W o I 0 J - aFE 'o 5� J a= a _ Z �o 011 U Z �6 34 OI I a0000 0 0 o= � I o- r W 0 Z c a= Z Q' all N i z x r��z� xwxx �oaa �'` �ozizono sa3x SbX-71 oivnaaaaaaixa ax r 1S/ HO S17,Y00 to l/0 a DNI I—ADII aaoa� M ae �~rN �•<,.„ �� analNv°aowases� 0 3 c7 eso aaaxao� oarvmsavoxAsx xmoaap 01 f'ON NOILVIS Hid rvaiaia�saa Noinn3a ar Yeo s c 0 Z 3 e d Q u Fu u `s Ell MMH� G W CL o� I�I t D o - - 1 DD � � OO Z DO IF > �v W e Q m �o a - x m W= a a Yh Yh I I s _ I ss m �m a I � r I H J Z — Z lJ Q I F F W � W o0 W^ � r zxa��z� xwxx� �oaa �'` �ozizono 903 3 $bX-71 y »o 1a oianaaaaaaixa r ax r 1S/ H S/7,YOO to Q �wysi»ix�ar aaoa� M analrvoaowas si of 3 c7 eso��ivaaaxaoa� oarvmsavoxAsx xmoaa p E'ON NOI1tl1S H rvaiaia�saa Noinn3a —51 Z 38» s H W a �F O Il vy Psi Y m1 cZ o. Icti �o m� -g O Q - a 2 0 ~ w - �q p _ Z - - o- ' W Xm Q _ O M M,�, Ymoll oil = d o0 N oo e O Ia N Y Lo W v — — Y W W o a< O _ O N- - W I W m Y 4 �. e�ozizono SbX-71 y�»o 1a 3odNos�Na,«s - _ M ae SN e 1S/ H S dYO� l� l/S Is anaa7-low's si o,,.M«,o«,3a«moa p E'ON NOI L"IS H rvaiaia�saa Noinn3a 0 m 0 Y a a U U U U m U U W a a U U • • U m a L a � m Q L W W U Z m Z U a d a L U U U O U N U m Z� a Z Q Z Q Lb Z U LL N (:I U W C a a � a a � a a r LL m r LL m • • r W m r W Q M V a U w LL m Q w LL r LL r LL m W O W O V 2. a V 2 Q O m U • • °� C V? O C V? w r l w r l ? a n V Q Z a n 3� 3, U a o � W O U W w Z U Z ��° a a e a a a � m � r Z N U m w I E- M LL 3 W � o m a Q M Z V LL I`HOI I-. Q IM u iL Q U m � • O U Z 3\ ✓!HH\� a Q a a V N I'Q a m Q a a O I(� Q V M a m J m m z m U Q a a LL 0 W `s Q � a � v �- m ImLL Q r W No,Z V0W W b(O�O� U' um ao U w r Z- r a iy � Irk m �. e�ozizono SbX-71 y�»o 1a 3odNos�Na,«s — a — v, aeiM« s NMe 1 S/ H S/7,YOO to anaa7-low's si o,,.M«,o«,3a«moa p E'ON NOI L"IS H rvaiaia�saa Noinn3a 0 m 0 Z Vf � OM Z W oL LU a O LL ❑ W z II II Q 4 00 e ❑ 0❑ LU N a W W Q 4 Q W W Qo } 4 �. e�ozizono sa3 SbX-71 y »o 1a o.o3soHa,«e SN e 1S/ H S/7,YOO to anaa7-low's si o,,.M«,o«,3a«moa p E'ON NOI L"IS H rvaiaia�saa Noinn3a /1 r (� � � J ZLLev ,�gm�� _ad ddxn mv� Z Yo»000�oo o» o 00 0 000 0 00 0 ...2 CH G LU _ p= LL _£ �03 �I Y w�m F ---.-Ea. a � d a w mw i z 0� 7;-u" 511 y — Z n x O _ i H Z H C — m- �. e�ozizono sa3 SbX-71 y »o 1a o.o3soHa,«e SN e 1S/ H S dYO� l� l/S Is a anaa7-low's si o,,.M«,o«,3a«moa p E'ON NOI L"IS H rvaiaia�saa Noinn3a M-1 h 3w E a 0 C Mw Z 4 Yo»^oo.^o> �.. G W a m � I U I ^ age - e Ie ^ a I�� gel I a I w - F — — — —ti - <9> o OE 2 - 1 bm £ .o — — r r Z Q — Z m m- �o � � Cl) �. e�ozizono zoe z sw N,3 oaa sa3 SbX-71 y »o 1arN o.o3soHa,«e 9NMtl lsisv SndYoO so anaa7-low's si o,,.M«,o«,3a«moa p E'ON NOI L"IS H rvaiaia�saa Noinn3a A A� j�o C Hu =, �. — p o� Z Yo»oo .... » ... y, LU G -� QQpg 0 U I i l� _ W " s Y Y _ _ - - - rn o=o. �y - �� _ �o �- - _r .� o-- - Z o-a� o-- - - �- - a �- - - =E E- 6- . -o- lik ��o s lopog - w MLI s z U _ — -----�— � p _ W di oo Q b � o_ C4 �. e�ozizono z «ez� sw«N„,oaa SbX-71 y�»o 1a rNon3s„dH - _ SN e 1S/ H S dYO� l� l/S Is a DNI 101ADaeooaoai �•<•.^•• anaaNe�eowas s � 01 f'ON NOILVIS Hid rvaiaia�saa Noinn3a CID H. m Z H o C .1 -------- - H LL Z eo .. g? 5 d .rte VIII Z Yoh z »o0 000 0000 <<0000,o< 1 11<< - =11 Z IG J O W V d � o4oOcO�'o0��00�0000 ~ J o 3 0\ O N H IT Q a a a Qa - � za WCIW M izi `L O O z x � g � VIII IIII � w LL - ---� o 0 � n foo v WNW J 3 W VIII T ! m � III III IIS i � IIII hull—li- �,h Y - rr I; l z - - - - - - - IIII�I I -I� i u Q x Q a 'o 3 �- Ln Z U Z � K . Om Z L.-. . ......-� .ITS W cC - - - - - - - - - - - - 0 3 �> %o �. e�ozizono SbX-71 y�»o 1a rNon3s„dH - _ r ae S N e 1 S/ H S/7,YOO to �w si�iie�ae oaoai �'' �� •<•.^•• anaa7-low's s o,,.M«,o«,3a«moa p E'ON NOI L"IS H rvaiaia�saa Noinn3a CID 48 '^ Z Q Z Y.... < <o ....... 'o 0 0 ...... =.o 000 000 0 0. __ Q III III—III- H H m III=1 Vl III III III- W Z W ”.�paoo-,..000=-' �� .`.I IIII IIIII IIII III Q � � i :. IIIII IIII L- 2 a a Y Z — Z y N wFo of - TII ~ W N_ Z I p A - —I 4....,.. + V Ii1 Q,n m } N H Q G Q _z II IIIIII 1111 J I IIIII — pro N i 33= x c� -III W III IIIII II III I 0 I I lll=i � 3 Q c W V � IIS 33 x r =.� o o - - - - - - - - - - - - - _III jj W �. e�ozizono zoe z sw N,3 oaa SbX-71 y�»o 1arN rNon3s„dH – _ M SN e 1S/ H S/7,YOO to anaa7-low's s o,,.M«,o«,3a«moa p E'ON NOI L"IS 3NIi rvaiaia�saa Noinn3a 0 8 W 0 8 s W w �� spa � „ W i Z 4o m6G?7rv-a:Na2sd�: �g,oAZ , G m YJ m a al W _ 1 � I ao 3 ca x �- <IIIt�1_IITI1t1111� O III IIIIIIIIIIIE z �- - - - - - -T z 0 411 N. N v � � 1111111 Ili w v 3 ,., Jo 9 0e —Ill J 1-9 o MMU a 0000000000 0� � Q m — L - Q a r^ z O I iij — F I I V W 3 h s a3 $bX-71 - v, ar nv, .xxMr /1S/clH,7 S/7,YOO to Qzoaho/so o� ro of 3 >w si>3llu>ar aaoai n�°� rrm ^«^ anal7-lowas si eso��iva�axaoa� oarvmsavoxAsx xmoaa p E'ON NOI1tl1S H rvaiaia�saa Noinn3a Rh S '^ Z Z w ., o6oFl n O Z Yaoo�e =o 0 000 00 o��000 00 lana oo�oaa000«000 oe oo - 000s - a.,mmv _a F QV– w11 mUU 10 N a Ix i- - O LL. illlln —ITS ir� I� ullll F Hq w p � Z y^ 'XIIII VIII Z •. '�. O =e==ra= IIIIII IIIIII W= My= _ o � r Q r W p — Z — °_ 11111 IIII 111 111 l l IIII l l 111 IIII 111111�I L':'' III—III III III — V - = III III = III II III p i�,� IIT VIII—IJ p — O O Z = Z .. Q �s- IIII IIII ll P H W II W II limi 11 111111 e 151 ee IIII u 4�49s o�o o LLo n O F o VI W III= m .. 5'o - III III VIII � I III III �o III IIII i I I IIII IIII III II IIIIIIIIIIIIIII III II I Ali I III � 11=11 p � I II- � I lull lull IIIIIIII J Z I II II tHill a' J - -- � IIIIIIIIII-JI O $ 1, / u ,. 111111 O LL ii —III III—III= =III 111 =1I I III= b — I I u I + a I J lJ p _– ~ ~ fes_ W W Z p p O ? } z III O _ — O will -- —11111 V4 W10 II sy 11 • 111111 III �. e:ozizono zo. z sw«N„oaa SbX-71 y�»o 1a sNoi,�3sasNd,aao,d�3,3aaie.s - _ SN e 1S/ H S/7,YOO to �w si�iie�ae aaoai �'' �� •<•.^•• anaa7-low's s o,,.M«,o«,3a«moap E'ON NOI1tl15Hid � rvaiaia�saa Noinn3a W 3 Z t N IIIo j Z 1111111 a H LU � \\�^JJ W = N— � W\ O — O LL i r Av f W VI ' minor x� Q fi a m a o J N F O O O a4 � aa4 >, >4 >. W W 5 W w ._ z LL:..l.. _ Q Q Q I I I � O Q O d i a.e z m ii 11 iic N nxn Q as z Q Z N U F� z OC OC J J u O 2 > N CID N a r M �o W x��s z W 1 W ow ~ > W W W. Ln J f" _ G iJ W � ; Q 5j Q O F Q � a �o OFo W N W 4 n 3 1A �. e�ozizono zoe z sw«N„oaa SbX-71 y�»o 1a sNoi,�3sasNd,aao,d�3,3aaie.s — _ SN e 1S/ H S/7,YOO to �w si�iie�ae aaoai �'' �� •<•.^•• anaa7-low's s o,,.M«,o«,3a«moap E'ON NOI1tl15Hid � rvaiaia�saa Noinn3a H 5 $C M.,- g� rc L oz Q Z��pm��.'�m�ses oodjd o� �oo 0 64d a a��_�^5' 2 -� � ❑ III I �`a l C I J �IIIIII IIIIII III IIII�—i� Z LU m o — — — — — — — — — 0 Z _ Il 00 1 as ll o _ y o � _ >Lei o W C7 Q V D El Z o W W W W- m v z W W W W- M = O I I I I I I I I I == V a `III III VIIIIIVIIIIIIVIIIIIIIIIII a F ozz o2 aa� = o > a W77II W 0 --- --- rK Z z T F- O O g W W o y ----------- �o -.. y .. y . 4 x°3 SbX-71 y »o 1a °ss3aA,3,«°3«>saooa E — _ ad i mw 1S/ H0 S/7,Y00 to l/0 a >wi>sADII aaoai °N oa p 'ON NOI1tl153N1i � Naiaia�saa Noinn3a sj k ass Q 0 oD '^ H 5 _ - 5 Q V VE.^ x 66 66 ... 00 00 _ o.... _»..... o 2`¢y'SE Q =- W o% of a a W F O � � W a o � o Q O\ O o= O; M o� w�egg�w- a o Q W Q W 0 J � �4 W 0 ¢ _ _ Q. 4 _ - Q F Ooll ! w sssss-_sass sssasas ss seas as saaaaaaaa a _aaa as _sas assassaa \�aa O 031. ss ag $$x aasag l:� Z.. 83 .ddda g.::9] aaasaas "gag O w _ _ F iki2i?22`a ad2 - iii f u W W n maa aammaa<x wwm?`<`<`an �wLLww `artrtrtrtrt«artaaa`a a�aaaaa`au� Cm Q In O o 000 0� N oW =0 W O" a �a N � a • W C a LL z a O q J aainaaxasrn � aainaax�a ar � �! 0 V a \ Q Q r — W co o= LLx in w o w a � n m p o a„�oaxaaar w ---- --------- m W W o • • N v w W o a3,aax,arn 00 g= g S”. LM �. e�ozizono zoe z sw N„3oaa s a3 S bX-71 y »o 1a o aooa 1S/ H0 S17,Y00 to l/0 DNI I—ADae aaoai °N:oa o,,.M«,o«,3a«moap E'ON NOI1tl153N1i � Naiaia�saa Noinn3a g s N' E Q O. ... om �C G W CL Ix a � - r W a o r W F Z e O a LL o x W v � GC O O” r O 0- N— W 4Q'n m � a �q 0 O G- N, �9 N O 0` a W J mm J 7 V V O o o- O, Cl) OF 0- F W �C C U air � O" O- - Q r W L m U a �9 O Q_ 4 ua Ag age g 5'bX-71 ylj�ly Sgdu ntlMN tl1aN 41NOagga015 _ ad i mw 1S/ HO 7,Y00 to S/ Q >NiyI—ADar aaoai .g Nmv eso a�axdoa> ogrvmsavoxAsg xmoagv, p E'ON NOI1tl153N1i � Naiaia�saa Noinn3a ?3 m _ - - D g< wy & Q W Z {i G W e a . ry � p o OLL. V • Q S S o0 LL ' S H _ Z S •S • cc, S S S �• C O Y Y \ O 3 Z & O S Vca O q J ca„S J 1 Z g s 2 r e.z .a LL Z p • • Z ©$ = F o • • Z m o W„ „a LL h ___-- 2 Q o N • • Q mt O • LL o m Z Q ^a r o Q m m g a r o 00 ~ O Z Z oC V o • • C o z LL o d„ _ �.. . Co•P Z Q•\ a z..e ..e..e .e..z N ,p t, w Z LL Z Q • • $ g H w V LL a • Q W 0 w ce J M ,.a • • r H O ❑� 0 3 w= 2 " — Z S•S • � _— O r- _ OLL tea' S 31 ~ O V � 2— �o • •� F LLr- • �! W Q Oa W Z\ 3 z= 3 • � o0 bX-71 y »o 1a °re s3aA. Datil - _ v 1S/ H0 S17,Y00 to l/0 ad i Nw a DNI si;ADII aaoai °N:oa o,,.M«,o«,3a«moap E'ON N0I1tl153N1i � Naiaia�saa Noinn3a W $ 9 Q Z 8 g 22ca Lu W z • O Y -- � 0 - - '� - - - V o a N o r � W J W W � m r 3 1 � W � 4 = 3 m Oq 3 N Z Z Z ii _ Q q O- — .tY- r 4 Z_ r O _ ....s 3lp ^ cc _ In n DI F a z o J W p N o o O� = 3 a on Z\ =e Nf w r 13 z r11 1 z N 3 + U o 0 0200.. o00 � E u� - .. m J In Q Q W W ' Q Z 09 r co Ln co o L] J Amo c r> 0 Xe oo Q - Q ^ JC IpZ O W p4 r N N c %0 W J3 a z Q p w a no 3 0 UUUUU - 09 3 Z\ - LL N_o N h N sa3 SbX-71 1S/ H0 S17,Y00 to >w s—rie>ae aaoar �•<•.^•• anaaNe�eowas s 01 f'ON NOILVIS Hid rvaiaia�saa Noinn3a 0 Idl m M'N' uW <�oy e£ N xm.K S W El 7A n. F w� zip, w z r - ..w.. _ —�-1 - x MR Z ' i", no o, Y u Z O ce rO 0 r� l� _ cp a V ❑ xm.o o _" a xvx.o.r za= 3 Q O ~�N Z V V Z F——— � i w Z � � I �w xw.x[ p LJI r o VIII ii iiia iiiiiiiiiitl W 5 m J waw z= x n z iiiir yrs Z $ W - V _ I _ LL Q W j Z co — — 4, ,I,f, Q x 3 Z Z 4 V Z - w w r--Vt }, �= L---- /3 s,YO « gc 7 , . ow sts i \} G \ \ _ 3 ,a�__. 0 m 0 z : ® ; § e - � ------ � ._, . a - lz O - \ XM \ » \ 3 } H � , _ - / . � . . .. & « � s ! : sa3 $bX-71 y >io 1a oivnaaaaasiw - _ M ae x x r 1 S/ H S/7,YOO lO l/� Qzoaho/so o� ro � 3 �w si�siix�ar aaoai h. anal7-lowas si eso��iva�axaoa� oarvmsavoxAsx xmoaa p E'ON NOI L"IS H rvaiaia�saa Noinn3a 5 0 � S. 2- O Zmmz 4�4a 43agdo»o:: W Yooeo o, „0 0000 0 o-oa _ __ _ _ ... o _ z a z ad a O 00 _ OZ wN LL O Q Q a W O > > J N a J ^ J W ^ rr W C W N W W 1 q 0 r a 00 Ow sm"_ ZN= U Yo oe V -- Y ? p= ? 0= z O x F ~ Q N � > a o ZC Z ^ 0 Z O O `L a ~ W O Z 0 a Z, Wa ao > m R m rJ ^ c, W W p - W Z .., �o � m WQ` 2O w m OZ o W N -- a Y= ^ W hV 0 N Q F W - m 1 CC0 - W f _O C N 77 Z 1- 0 Z W Z ^ W Qa 0 3 O � n , oZ J � aoa0 ce 2d FJ J 2 a ZYP W _T � O N � m .. F D d'o 'i 0 OZ_ Z ^ 000$ Z m� �P_4 _e Q\ f gu� � dy^ 0 a sN LLI Za Z F O a p O ^ 0 W 0 FF V F w Q Q Q D Q W > Z Z > 4� > N W J W c^ W dw -L W y W C W F 0O W -� O! O. W � W 21 0 O _ - z moo o! a� Z 71, ^ W U- A m I W r W O- ��. ? �n- 00 M 00 N F Q � W N z ^ 3 z 0 ^ Zoe s ap ° ^ a J > Z Z O u>i O Z °CQD YQ WU4 OZ P J ^ <ry .. W0C Dii W ar O O� W ^ H i Z Q m- 4 X-71 s,YO « gc 7 7-low sts i \} G \ .° _ 3 , __ \ a� . z... yƒg3gJ§§9Amq§JWW§y8§; 2 §§§§( j §) j} } §j) \§j§ii ; l ; §§ ) ) \ \\) � a � O z \\) \ LL. 00 2a o0 § � ® § � § 2 : � § �@ � ■ § }, s K §: K k: z © ^ 2 0 § ;} § k § § \ zz _ § 2 ® § § \ ( ) § 0 �. ■ _ $} 2 §} ■± \ � \ Z. J: - § ( (ƒ d\ § 3: C4 2 �( ~ 0 § z ,� : 2 § r- Z ` � § k - � ` # o 2 § ( , B \ + 7 � ( \ ac § ; Z0 . § §r o ® ^ -} ( § § ) ,! § 2- Kk Za\ � ; 2 § ( 1 ) § � _ } \ 77 \ ) 0 - - © 7 § z §t o � R § \ � ■ 0Z, �oo ,e => 2\ ( ( \ 3 zxr�;�z� a3xwxx�>3�oaa �'` e�ozizono ua ♦e a3�J S bX-71 y}al j�ly Si tl�o raOMn W _ e ae x N r 1 S/ H S/7,YOO to l/� Qzoaho/so o� ro of 3 �w si�iix�ar aaoai h. analNvoaowas si eso��iva�axaoa� oarvmsavoxAsx xmoaa p E'ON NOI L"IS H rvaiaia�saa Noinn3a 0 RM en Z a o J W Q Q QLU O O O ly s J 30 30 30 oil 0-881 O M 00 n Z e a n Zp n N ooV Q U � J W W N 11 \\\ O 'ji g• 3, _ = O L f<jno 0---JFC C N r P a o� 0� 00080 ; w Y j O - O QQ� 3 r o = � Z- W Q J Z J c a m J ae' a Y 0 Ln N W ul- G a p F " 3 O 3 �= 30 • o IN - o � H I I Y W 7— e CC F W C = a 0 U N Ha< W Y W W o o ee.. Z= a� 3, N Oe� O 3` in l a' N a Ln r HO 0 1lot W zn t7 w o�z W 0 Q Nr z 0 LL Y J 0 3 ~ W m owe De O ZQ _- <° — �- Z u o y N ii e a e"off J ii yy c o �pC4 M .o CV i «a .sa3�� SbX�l y�»o 1a N��oN,3>a3,>3,�3aaoo,i,sai� - _ ae ,�„ ASN e /1S/clH,7 S/7dcY0� l� ill/S � a >w si�iw>ae aaoai � ��''�� •<•.`^•• anaaNe�eowas si � o,,.M«,o«,3a«moap E'ON NOI1tl153N1i � rvaiaia�saa Noinn3a zoa/U9 s a _ oz p G p v § n Z y ��e._°�, �_m<�daLL� rvm,��<em��< Z � W LLQ El0® �V ❑ ® � W a a s V_ r d rP d 1:1 ® Z Z - -- --'-- _, O O / Z Z \\ Q Q a J. J \ Z W= W \ G V f V`f LnIn 1` W 1 W \ ® J Z / V09 Z o a W � ~ W I F Q. / Q 41J wo - LL Z o = ® N o �R o �w ° W W 0 Z o z o W W 4 V- V- CV M w1 \ .° _ 3 ,aNOI__. . � : o ; = m ( � � � ; o 2 _ _ - « Z [ - - 2 0 § z , . , , ; < , _ , . , , a ) \ Ell-IM ` ` « : 3 = _ _ « a O � - : � 2 ] m � » � ( � e � � 0 \ \ ; )\ �§ na3 SbX-71 y »o 1a oo,iisai - _ 1S/ H0 S/7,Y00 to l/0 a LOL/LO/SO �� n�h�`��,e'rN ro 'LLNv�aowasCS� of 3 ' >w si;ADIIo aaoai 3111 on,rm smoxA3nxmone r¢t dna N p eso>°�iva�axao� ,� ° f'ON NOILVIS Hid rvaiaia�saa Noinn3a 0 m 6 V 3 3 763° d3� a� Z W :LlQooQ_ O IL jFa IF I � ti , si I G, ---------- ----- ------ I I 1 Z a N _ Yf �. N tAL r F o a- # me 0 A r CN V V s 4 na3 SbX-71 y »o 1a �axsN noo,°Noo35 – _ 1S/ H0 S/7,Y00 to l/0 a LOL/LO/SO �� n�h�`��,e'rN ro 'LLNv°aowasCS� of 3 ' >w si;3lluoar aaoai 3111 on,rm smoxA3nxmone r¢t ana N p o eso a�axaoa� E'ON NOILVIS 3HIi rvaiaia�sa° Noinn3a 0 m Z"° r - .- s �- W O Il ENO o LLI> m ��x e LL— / , s0 0 ` v v v �s \ Z a \ d \ \ Z LL / OC \ Q / \ Q \ LL \ Q Z W m All QQom; §a ° Opp° i X-71^ s,Y0 « gc 7 DNI I- 01 .. \ .° _ 3 ,aNOI__. 0 - o z :_ « §\g 2 §§\ % � � LU § 2 \ M \ \ [ § wo )! ( ; §E ! \m § :,,. C4 sa3 SbX-71 y »o 1a �<3a«,Na«g,H3varo3aoo,,sa - _ SN e 1S/ H0 S/7,Y00 to DNI s—ADIIoaaoai �•<•.^•• anaaNe�eowas s � 01 f'ON NOILVIS Hid rvaiaia�saa Noinn3a 0 LUm 0 Z CL Ix O ------------ 00 3 F O W� t5 a �iosw sni�ns a I I Z a ----------------- a ® ix of a 3n,a3a d - o LL --------------- I I I � I r a3arvai 3nws3n anvna oscs I � SII I a I _ � W p z : MMM" i ' o� ia TI-n ------3.-o— �--------------- JJJJJJJ4.'y a� e.sooasa 3« �m VwH C 4 sa3 SbX-71 y »o 1a �a3annnanas,Nawa«o3aoo,ia«o»s — _ r ae S N e 1 S/ H S/7,YOO to >w si�iw>ae aaoai �'' �� •<•.^•• anaa7-low's s o,,.M«,o«,3a«moap E'ON NOI1tl15Hid � rvaiaia�saa Noinn3a 0 LUm 0 Z CL Ix r------------------------------------------------------------------------, Il III v ® - - - tE OSIo� a£ zo I /� i n3enn.,n�c 3rvl� \ Z \ a \ LL Z W I / C I / C I i l W II Q \[Liz Q I II I z n Z H a o a o � ar,oANiccv io aul� (�II 4 � J J �N53�ll1�a�NaNJ3W or az a3aHnN,3roaaM 5VX31 a o a � zozidv aida vaa„au3 bi rs a„op,or �� 4 �s� rorez xa uaaxJ s anon >N•ssJ3llHJad aaoasdN,smoN.3a NMoas u■ �y�� anv Hvono scsi o m oszoc�moaAaooy`�� N o E"ON NOI1tl15 311Ii N Nasinaa mz/ds Z �— —� W L I` LJDJ008 0 w amvooti _ � s IT I 111 I I I I ddd I I 1 4 I I � � j T IT � 4 v� ��8,,,, '�'"] 3 • ----o o.. .cc o _ ----- .,.,,,....... p _a8aa+++A ��axYS mmmmmmmmm <.<.•• ....> >..�<��vo ��o��.,.,ww wwwuw�ww., ,,,,-�� _�.•_� >>>>.��__________ .,__ - - 3 o..... a.a.mn i.3roaa m cs S b•X�1 "p �' saiory�vnu o oshls as<a ,,aa�e/3 oio�sa�op,or _ f .os�xi i.onxos noo 3 2 w nA3n nmone anv Nv�nowsesi p o o eeoc,iw�a.ao� E�"y��"]7 s`a E'ON NOI1tl15 3111i ry rvasin3a aw 0 m Q Z HR LU 3 s, R cc s c rKo s _r n F On •� xax c„a�cx - - ` wxc�.. ryLL., av, Na n c = ew_ z�- >_wuamva<r�za��._<¢»o_o w s zoz_a�_ _v a -.x `n��= n •, WE Z FC 3 G ,z sP HN o tl 0 9 uS u9 -F 5s. 5 65 -45 SE uca E 66 s 6n Mm s R P Hi 5. H a 0 2 -� - c NY, 3lg S' 3 2 i S o €< ....... ...... i>3roa. MM">vnu o s :s�Mea /150vo snd'loo 10 ,(1/0 j P � ozhls as<a ,,aau e/3 oio�sa oop�or _ � f .os�z•i.oax>s noo 3 � � >�s/>all�>avaao,/ �� '� o, n�3nnmone3nvNv�nowses� „ p a 4C MN NOI1tl15 3ali H Hasin3a Y 0 � m ♦\I G ,m oe � d s ba u O o Man imp HIM O _ rc 5 g 5 Yz` 8 PH m ; 5. Ono _Gaal »8 8 O 3_. �_ E oil HI 20 _ bib JUO BAUM O J F Q z W P c F k o O O �w � K > a _ o..... a.a.mn i>3roaam saanaau>s—Hcs o ozhls as<a ,,aau e/3 mis a oop,-r _ f .os�z•i.oax>s noo 3 s,>all>avaao„ � � o, n 3nnmone3 N VIS E'ON NOI1tl15 3111i H Hasin3a - 0 - o ren, o w N LuW IL HU IT _ � F W Q S T E E E E E E E E E E E ~ U 7 a u u # u a u u u # u Q _ � D5W U4'_ u) = U ¢ 0 aY Z W $ W K w ofz wz Z Sz ae of > ....... .....N....... S�.X3r ��1, 531f143HJ5]tlnH r e s�Me 11Sl�H0 S/7d&00 Jo /(1/0 'goa sos/�/o >,aa�er3 oioAsop,or _ 4 I � f� .o .i.v—sn,— sn3n]adaaor Ezoz rw�a.d � � '`\ s 3nvNv�now:z:i p o 6'ON NOI1v15 3811 N Nasin3a zoz/�/s 0 all u.p�/iuullaiM!;pl�yy m 3 E W a y O — js.. _ 1 W i I a 1 � 1 l 1 Z 3 ul _�r10 14 J - _______ 0 Z 3 z w w w s_ __ _.._ ---------- .- LL - s —2 5 r �4 3n - 3 __ H. „� o..... a.a.mn i>3roaam cs Sb•X�1 �� ' sa eiaa>vnu o ozhls as<a ,,aau e/3 mis a oop,-r _ f .os�z•i.oax>s noo 3 s,>all>avaao„ � � o, n 3nnmoneses „ p a E'ON NONNIS1tl15 3111i asin3aNOISIMN cl o 0 m a w > o w Z < \1 o x W w w oa d - a O LL w H Z mnsraarrnv Z K F- O w a s � �. o „seF 3 -� � U PE HE 4u � Q Q K w Hu ill O _ +- Yw W W m � _ _ > x � D o � o C7 y Q w 0 O w' W Y O O O O a ._ a Q _ nn w H AL 2 o 0 aR. d ° 'w 701 (7 z z s=X s U) z w w Ti H o..... a.a.mn i>3roaam cs Sb•X�1 •� �' sa viaa>vnu o ozhls as<a ,,aau e/3 mis a oop,-r _ f .os�z•i.oax>s noo 3 s,>all>avaao„ � � o, n 3nnmoneses „ p a E'ON NONNIS1tl15 3111i asln3aNOISIMN H 0 � m U v r x H cn Q O o O 0- p= LL W 3 � V W 1 1 H = W W2Z W f= J Z¢ � W a � Z Ir - 3 j W a JO n J H NAH, i W U o 8 Y U N \ a n SJ � _ J ` o _ = m W , � Q u U ` J er= ice= w p;af 1 Z W W 29 D Y W 3 � - 0 Q i.s O g 0 ,0', 4MNse�.R�` \ =a`s = O m y O F d ....... ............. .. CS S'ON�ZZVIS 3111d LU Hu 'i ,qj t .2 T uo o i rveaa roma sa a nvaano>anu >o .ii. a3aHn,ns�3r�w> - �r, a,Mead 11 S&HS Od�voj JO (I/j o a � zoziU9 dada s,aa�sue papas a�owor _ 4 ��'^'�,r i .osnxa uvaxo s noo G >N•sllaau>av aaoaivm smoN.3a rv,moaa � � anv rvvonow scsi � m o a ccoe iu�aaa -rr� E'ON NOIltl15 3111i w NQIIIIIDSIIv Nasinaa coz/Us � 0 0 U K Z O 'Q V Z Q O W IL Ix O z , m x e J i Q i " .... o �T � z u i J w w m O „ o i Nva eoo,a allo>as nvnano>rne >o .iiz a3aHn.ns�3r�w> - vr, s— 11 S&HS Od�voj f o (I/j o a � zoziU9 as s,aa�sue oiors a�owor _ 4 1 ,r i .osnxa uvaxo s anon G >N•sllallu>av szoz�maaea � �;z�'" anv rvvono scsi � m o a NOIltl35 3111i NQIIIIIDSIIv Nasinaa zoz/Us o � z Z � Q rr u Z c~c 'o G W IL Ix O �c t t r k .................. c� o c� o o a 1 V Q y y1 N 1 1 W W 'm W > A � h ,K, �xu ii 3 o i oma New eoora sea iv lava>vnu >o .ii. a3aHn,nsn3r�w> - �r, s,Me LZSl&HO OdZVOJ fo (IIJ o a � zoziU9 sa s,aaa sue papas a aowor _ 4 ,r i .osnxa uvaxo s noo G >N•sllallu>av szoz siva aea ;�'" envevoaowscsi m o a NOIltl15 3111i � NQIIIIIDSIIv Nasinaa coz/Us o 0 cDW 9 � w o s g3 Z fr � �£ sq YJ IL - a O Ii o gip - _ _ -- �b _ ,I^ u , C � �o o � o _e - b bo o - _ e _ m � d m n b mob= m w 9 a4 y� � bm m � m w W � C` a o i aee aav room saa ry iava>vnu >o .ii. a3aHn,i>Aen3JNJ - �r, 11 S&HS Od�vo,7 JO (I/j o a � zoziU9 sa s,aa�sue oiors a nowor _ 4 ,r i .osnxa uvaxo s anon G >N•sllallu>av szoz�maaea ;�'" E'ON NOIlvtl'Is 3111d m o � NQIIIIIDSII v Nasinaa coz/Us €w 0 Us CcD9 a a ., s ° > 5 a > - �- - - - Y _ � gr 2 Z €� M - oU— F pq. -,- W IL Q LL L , m o G �D m w y 1� C w �c n A-1 w. J e I„FO z 3 b + b 4 = 9 00 o Wm W4 a o i - -me New1.." DI,wiava>rne >. Mil ............... SI/X31 rq �. - M v, s,Me LZSl&HO YOdZVOJ Jo (IIJ o a � zoziU9 3� s,aa�sue plphs a nowor _ � ,r i .os.xa uvaxo s noo G >r,'sllalfu>av szoz�m�e.a ;�'" anv rvvonow scsi m o NOIltl15 3111i � NQIIIIIDSII N Naslnax coz/Us M� 'LLQ o m ' 3 o a � v 8 � w W N i IL Ix o O J { Tr g 3 3 WF oz Eo Q Ur uV r L — ,. I O U I l � Fw— U o-" �v .• — U (� v Q w Z w V s O va e N T � � S Id s s ao u m 18mmr ° _ EI m _ b o, a N v y \xary }4 3 o i nee aae noon alloxs rnaeaa>vne >o .ii. a3aHn,i>Aen3JNJ - ? LZSl&HO Od�voj JO (I/j o a � zoziU9 sa s,aa�sue oiors a nowor _ 4 ,r i .osnxa uvaxo s anon G >N•sllallu>av szoz�maaea ;�'" E'ON NOIlvtl'Is 3111d m o � NQIIIIIDSII v Nasinaa coz/Us J o P W IL m a O _ o o — ar �T X/ WX b r, e Z = G N J � ,N }4 3 so��,A�oS 5b.u&ou.,,5u_7'o �Uow;jod�g 0 'o ....... ............. .. S VX31 -1 1 4 1—1 11SAYHO S/7c/lyoj JO '(1/0 —06]wis T -P,-r Ron 74 S'ON NOIIVIS 3111d —77 11 All ............... ........... ............... ............... ................ ............ LU ............ 0 LL. .......... ............... .......... 0 ------- -- --- ------------ 77----8 ............... ............... ................ ........... ............... ............ .............. ............... ............... ............... ............... ............... sooin�oS 6uuaom6u3'o �uow;jodap o..az a3"H.N.3.oa<M SVX31 a ,, ............................ .a 33Hs s,oew,s s3,.a3H>s..... o o n �Me /1SAYHS S/7d2/o.� !O ,ll/7 y ilaaua6]wisT,-P,-f Ron __ ,f o �axJS °I a >N sll3ll H>aa aa0ii LCOLC1N9 aAdja\�� w Mone s6[3ntl NtloaOW SLsI „ a p E'ON NOUVIS 3ali asin3a m w 9LL= = z p W c: O jU- s - § ni o - �. a 4 Mp q L H NIIH AM Ell— b s _ 2 2 MEH GMM IP- 8 § Y _ M fr - _ p - pA' _ i � I �H a saa/n�as 6uyaaui6u-3 jo i uq—dag Oz - f SlIe1349N9wflld 511'X31 _ 11.178HO S/d2/OO 1O /(1/0 � eoet�t9 .s N 3tl —0, >N•sllalfu�av ceoc�maaea � � rsn NOanv lltlls 31111 w NQIIIIIDSIIN Nasinaa wa/ 0 m G �•r+i Y G b�f�Y Q c E W IL F p --+ - LLJ f I O4 E O fn p = m 4y f Z E n is r j W a �p"h a O aB.0 o a 12 o, w p i E� Oa aim EF hEr H w Y Y Q p of 4 a f > o _ e 9 v - w 0 � W W T W a�aane Z L3-T Y o -- g w U s O nZ x F � a s //J W d Z O _ � Q d K - a Q ZUl Q ro W U W 3 C[ > y LL h k 6L > J � W nwt W � Q p W O W Elm QZ � - IWi (n H08, x (n 11J a' 7 U Y w Z a3 Illl Q z a'Q z z M, } 3 so��,A�oS 5b.u&ou.,,5u_7 o �Uow;jod�g 0 'o ....... ............. .. S VX3-1 1 4 1—1 1ZS1,YHJ S/7c/lyoj Jo 1(1/0 —06]wis T -P,-r Ron 74 S'ON NOIIVIS 3111d N.1111—K N NOISIAIN 2 0 LU LL. �-c 0 CD k�l 0 (D 0 H, 0 < < PitC) 0 - 2Z < 0 ljll� 2- 0 > ELI so��,A�oS 5b.u&ou.,,5u_7 o �Uow;jod�g 0 'o ....... ............. .. S VX3-1 1 4 111,1 1ZS1,YHJ S/7c/lyoj Jo 1(1/0 —06]wis T -P,-r Ron 74 S'ON NOUVIS 3111d N.1— N NOISIAIN RIM, �Ri MI 11 HER,- co MIMMIN EDE LU LL. IS < > -E- 0 F 3 vi, I t 0 < > 0 0 so��,A�oS 5b.u&ou.,,5u_7'o �Uow;jod�g 0 d 'o ....... ............. .. S VX31 11SAYHO S/7c/lyoj JO '(1/0 Ron 74 S'ON NOIIVIS 3111d NOIIIIIDSII N.1111—K N NOISIAIN 2 R" �Mt LU ............ .... ....... f j 77 ................ < < 00 0 sooin�oS 6uu&om6u_7'o �uow;jodap ....... ..„m.N....oa<M SVX31 lair 3 /1SAYHo S/d2/oo !O ,ll/o ��Voz/z/s A9 N 3tl .uaau ei3 NIpNS 8 uop�of n >N sll3ll x>aa aa0ii LLDLC1x9 aAd � �' w Mone Ss6[3ntl NtloxOW SLsI „ a p 'ON NOIIVIS 3811 asin3a 4 A 5a d n m 'Z� 5 � " z� g 8S a � � Q S � � M1 ? S _ x'eY kk`s'98"5d5HML -- - - - - - - - - _ W d 71 t _ w l o� e ews, I� e O _ N m K a saa/n�as 6uyaauf6u_3 jo i uq—dag o naaNv seg Nefa aom�sa� �.> a � . a3aH.i,.> w> 511'X31 /1SIYHJ S/d2/OO 1O /(1/0 zozfU9 s uMe —0,oior�a uop,�oil >N•si»llu>av ccoeeiu�aaa � t�d�.y'a"%y rs�3nv s°J p m o NOIIVIS 31111 w NQIIIIIDSIIv Nasinsa zoz/Us 1 3 �9 er3ue ME HM s9 ��ia �s - o G - W IL a to O I e = d z �em—t Igg ............... ......... - g .... ........ ................... < ' I �060606060///6O/C�060�0�0606060�060606�OB0� I I I I I X060606060///6O/1060�0�0606060�060606�OB0� i.... �.. I r 9 �0606060�06060�0�0606060�060606�OB0� o �, � YN/1�06060606060606060606060606060606060606060BOB0� � do, �w n Z Of.. .. O O K � y sooin�oS 6uu&om6u_7'o a �uow;jodap D.lz a3"H.N.31oa<m SVX31 aNe3sem Ne,daoo,aallo3s o n �Me /1SAYHS S/7d2/oj !O ,l1/7 Nz,3nx ad Da„dm m N.3a Nm ilaau a,3 a a.S a uap,a Rod _ > S> > o LCDLCix9 aAd �-■ ;f E'OD N N3 Od.IN�1tlxv�Jx n1O5 3ali asin3a G m 8 0 a C� W d LL m „w,,,z ,o//„ .......... { 1 J � s e I , I i f w 0 r � z w 3 Of 0 0 o o .m U w A N y d sooin�oS 6uu&om6u_7'o �uow;jodap ....... a3„H.N.31oa<M SVX31 M Ne,daoo,aaNOJ3s o lair 3 /1SAYHo S/d2/oo !O ,ll/o Voz/z/s A9 N 3tl .uaau ei3 NIpNS 8 uop�of Ron >N sll3ll x>aa aa0ii LLDLC1x9 aAd � �' w Mone s6[3ntl NtloxOW SLsI „ a p S'ON NOI1v15 3811 asin3a G m n Q � - Z � G W d LL 1 i t r r w a z a -. O O O .m U w A N y d sooin�oS 6uu&om6u_7'o a �uow;jodap D.Iz a3"H.N.31oa<m SVX31 �, aN>se Ne,daoo,apNo„s o NMe /1SAYHS S/7d2/o.� !O /(1/0 Nz,3nx adDa„dm m N.3aNm ilaaua,3aa Sauap,a Rod _ > S> > o LCDLCix9 aAd �-■ ;f E'OD N N3 Od.IN�ItlxV�Jx nIOS 3ali asin3a G m s3 0 pa,= A CC y W d O LL J r w, aa,As�„ i I t Q Q U Q a -. O O O .m U w A N y d so��,A�oS 5b.u&ou.,,5u_7 o �Uow;jod�g 0 'o ....... ............. .. S VX31 -1 1 4 1—1 11SAYHO S/7c/lyoj JO 1(1/0 —06]wis T -P,-r Ron S'ON NOIIVIS 3111d N.1111—K N NOISIAIN 2 LU CD 0 0 , Ef saom�ag 6uuaaui6u��o qua rua�odap o0o zc aaawnN llaroaa maa iNanaNv aisem wvaona ansa w J�J �aaaa�3HJ SYX31 .� _ o ww AaNmvaa °°„ /1S/�/H,� S/Jd�lO� l� .(1/� oilnzi�i9 �� aa��u3 pipas a o..1 =_ XL lig— J ll3llHJad aaOflvm ShcONA3a NMOa9 � �a"w_- tBC 3� SLo51 y y Q JN S EZOZ C�1H0 aAdOJ .,J ° E'ON NOI1tl15 3811 NouaiaJsaa NouaiaJsaa cN Noisv�aa asr ezoz/c/9 m 4=� r � Z z � W a O U. F LA �'.; —z� 4 _ � e CD �— ____ -=f------- oil = _ F.. ,> �A n� _ o Lo Z H 5 3 saom�ag 6uuaaui6u��o qua rua�odap .. za eaawnN r>3roaa maa a3iem. nva_va ansa w �J SYX31 _ o ww AENmvaa �� /1S/�/H,� S/Jd�lO0 l� .(1/0 J ll3llHJad aaOflvm ShZcONA3a NMOaJ9 y Q JN S EOZ C�1H0 aAdOJ ° E'ON NOI1tl15 3811 ' NouaiaJsaa NouaiaJsaa cN Noisv�aa LU 3sr eeoi/c/9 m a 7 1 l r- � l w a = w U \i w V � saom�ag 6uuaaui6u��o qua rua�odap .. a eaawnN llaroaa maa a s aNv seo wvaov a aasaa w �J �aaar�3HJ SYX31 _ o ww AaNmvaa �� /1S/�/H,� S/Jd�lO0 l� .(1/0 J ll3llHJad aaOflvm ShZcONA3a NMOaJ9 � z a"w_- tBC 3� SLo51 y y Q JN S EOZ C�1H0 aAdO ° E'ON NOI1tl15 3811 NouaiaJsaa NouaiaJsaa cN Noisv�aa asr eeoc/c/a •,3 m Zvi 'pN Wy��w �3c�s.F Fa�e�sase e=r p'� = G p a K aK H LU LU - a oc O U. �1 z 4 0 w a — saa/n�as 6uyaaui6u-3 jo i uq—dag o,la H N,31oadM s Sb'X31 „»,3 Nd,d3lls a, 8 3r 3w 11S/2/HJ S/Jd 10.7 1a (1/7 o P Ncoc/t/v As N;nv au Bu3 olp�,8 uoP,of Pj�� v rvtl�now uF u■ kkk�� >N'sll3ll HJnv OZ�1H�aAd s,a � �y'�'.r e8A 3n i NOI1tl1S 3111i w NQIIIIIDSIIN Nasinaa zoz/Us Q J tHz o d - 5 d A U.E 4 c� W IL �- I I a -- ” O II _ - r v e 1 d I Q �..... ....... w?o W W H N H X C7 0 oe �„ O J O U . W , _.!2ac�.7 w ^. w ch w O w III r �� s r ' '"� � sooin�aS 6uuaam6u_7�o �uoi ;Jodap s o..az a3.H.N\.3\oa. SdX31 .4.3.3,4.>S,os.....ra,e,a,J3,3 o o d .s�Me /1S/2/HO S/)d2/0.� !o ,ll/ y W Oz/L/s 3\ .�aau e\3 pIphSB uop�of�� __ � �f ro LL9ax>s of a � >N sll3ll H>aa aa0ii LLOL_,1N9aAd 74 s6[3ntl NtloaOW SLsI „ a p E'ON NOI1v15 3111i N Hasin3a oP Ug p� _. LU s a/ CL m �IHI m � 0 0 8 8 z z 0 LID p w I _ � ¢ 3 O� n o an T t,�ra _y., a �� ww„w wwc.a.aeciw w sLM1 �� y a ZE I W z S 5� S iH o�ug F �5 b=,A OH 44 r< o - t � s a 3 e Ea 5 i WHP1 a Z-5p_�xxii�� saa/n�as 6uyaaui6u-3 jo i uq—dag o,la H N,>31oadM s Sb'X31 a3H>sa ene,3a,e�a,»,3 s 3r»w> 11S18HJ S/C/IYO7 JO .(1/0 coc/t/v ♦e I,3tl vaau Bu3 olp�,8 uoP,of Pj�� A.I�-p� 4 k�� S r0 I1Ntl�n0 n a >N'Sll3ll H>nv ELOL a1H`7 aAd � �'�'*� e8t 3AY so� � m p NOIltl15 31111 w N Nasinaa wa/ m O Z fr O II\ TT LU a < k a a an = 0 o Ii ofa 92 a 0 w - p o K C7 w z z Of ( �, S m > Wu EE ON W y b � E 0 3 u J 0 M's 3 S � oGo_ `c w k _ m k J \ IIII LII w S — W w III- m §a - gar:jos w II m w � 0O O w O H Q Om 4 U I (7 / Z c� apw .a w K a „ee w saa/n�as 6uyaaui6u_3 jo i uq—dag o,laz H N,>31oadM s Sb'X31 s 3r»w> 11S18HJ S/d2/OO JO /(1/0 coc/t/v ♦e I,3tl vaau Bu3 olp�,8 uoP,of oil 4 ]�'-f ro urvtl�no n a >N'Sll3ll H>nv LLOL�IH`7 bAd � �aNHy�- e8t 3AY so� „ a m p i NOUVIS 31111 w N Nasinaa zoz/Us t - 0 1 Z 3 gaa ��aa Q �¢o MW F; a a a a 2 O ` J. d1 W 2 _ e r_ N 3S3,fiE E'c,2 MIM. JSa i—MLWM 3 Z IQY � 4N E` 5 E -,Ks ss3 MOM B - - - 4 €4 9 K a i L., Q6 = Hill I 3 Y' 5r 5 2 f d W� c Z g - s U - 2 8 - _ E �e 2 0 e ca z R - 3R s�a5 m Q �s- i °1 1 10 3 saa/n�as 6uyaaui6u��o �uauyaoda� _ o,laz H 1,>31oadM s Sb'X31 Mo<aoo, sa a 3r»w> 11S18HJ Sl?&,YO0 1a .(1/0 � �� o P coc/t/v ♦e lunvaa au Bu3 olp�,8 uoP,of __ � �f ro 1 u4a�now F >N'Sll3ll H>av i 1H aAE s,a CMN NNMISn w v Nasinsa wz aU €_ 3 � & § Ohl 13 it _ Y _g e 1 - O 5 ? J w i p L 3 k _ OZ W IL Ix O S �, CC �.� 40 ® I ffi o � o w be P w q a w a� � a - = w w saa/n�as 6uyaaui6u_3 jo i uq—dag ....... ................ Sb'X31 Ne,da3Mo<aoo,allo»s a 3r»w> 11S/2/HJ S/Jd10j 1a (1/7 o P �i N H coc/t/v ♦a N;nv Bu3 au olp�,8 uoP�of oil == � Fa S ro 1 urvtl�now F as a w c Siva sla NOIltl15 3111111li w NQIIIIIDSIIN Nasinsa zoz/Us :s Q 4 -= A Y 8 C W IL a O � v add' M �— � of o r QJ w T , �K Z v rieria uiu��f. N � Q � a of O � h so��,A�oS 5b.u&qu.,,5u_7�o �uo�;Jod�g ....... ............. .. S VX31 0 1IS1,YHJ S/?C/IYOJ JO 1(1/0 S'ON NOIIVIS 3111d LU ..............; Of 0 ............... saa/n�as 6uyaaui6u_3 jo i uq—dag o, a ry „>3 oad M s Sb'X31 a 3r»w> 11S/2/HJ S/Jd10j 1a (1/7 o P �i v coc/t/9 ♦e�,3tl vaau Bu3 olpA,F uoP, oil a a w c va of NOIltl15 3111111li w NQIIIIIDSIIry Nasinaa zoz/Us a m �v' 3 — �oo W IL a O aas Q� 1 ¢re u L j m z a w a ' O a r T > - w a /b, saa/n�as 6uyaaui6u_3 jo i uq—dag o.la Hl„>31oadMH Sb'X31 �i N,3>a3,»,3aaoo,,sa a 3r»H> 11S/2/H� S/Jd10.7 1a (1/7 o P coc/t/v ♦e lunvaa au Bu3 olpH,8 uoP,of oil __ f ro 1 uN axJ 5 >N'Sll3ll H>av Z,y 1H�aAd s,a � �` e8�3AY vonow sCs� „ a m p i NOI1tl1S 31111 w NQIIIIIDSIIH Nasinsa zoz/Us _ m 3 $ � r ' t E - W IL Ix O looa om a ® � om s y � m m m oe oa w ;04 , eva. w � r O z r xS W J LL p p O Q �a cZ7 ��w zLp PR a z a , cs ® z w � w `- saa/n�as 6uyaaui6u_3 jo i uq—dag ....... ....V.N,>3...... Sb'X31 a3,»,3nnoo,a o»s s 3r»w> /1SIYHJ S/d2/OO JO '(1/� H coc/t/v ♦e II 3tl vaau Bu3 olp�,8 uoPsof oil 4 f ro urvtl�no n F >N'Sll3ll H>nv LLOL�IH`7 aAd � �� e8t 3AY so� „ a m p i NOIIVIS 31111 w NQIIIIIDSIIN Nasinaa zoz/Us - g a a � s W IL - � a O mom om d aw �w o� � JA o vp e��g w mmo 9 ° . 4 OZN / N K W J LL ..ZOO b a�� a aaS2 w o w zwow � n Z N v W s �i J � 'I,ry 3 saa/n�as 6uyaaui6u��o �uauyaoda� _ or iat �aH��,a»ioadMs Sb'X31 8 3i»w> 11S18HJ Sl?&,YOJ 1a /(1/0 will P coc/t/v As iunv au Bu3 olp�,8 uoP�of F�S ro ............... 1 u...... F u■ kkk�� >N'sll3ll HJbv OZ�1H�aAd sia sCs. i '��\ E'ON NOIltl15 3bli w N Nasinaa L-- oz/Us 0 w a Z 6HEQ z < mancLL .,.. YJ IL Ix O [ fill t �- ', ° : � . .19 r , pow a� ' ,w z v 0o I w m w C saa/n�as 6uyaaui6u_3 jo i uq—dag o,la H N>31oadM s Sb'X31 00,allo»s s 3r»w> 11S18HJ S/C/IYOJ JO /(1/0 H coc/t/v ♦e I,3tl vaau Bu3 olp�,8 uoP,of oil 4 f ro urvtl�no n F >N'Sll3ll H>nv LLOL�IH`7 aAd � �� e8t 3AY so� „ a m p NQIIIIIDSII i NOIIVIS 3bli w N Nasinaa zoz/Us 0 'a W 6 H Q z � Fc,_tau YJ IL a O b j z a, , . f of I' I i � f i I i r j i y n a � of w N v W m J y 3 saa/n�as 6uyaaui6u_3 jo i uq—dag Sb'X31 oo, sa s 3r»w> 11S18HJ S/C/IYO7 JO /(1/0 P �i zoz/Uv Ae 1,3tl SlaaU 6u3 plph.,8 UOPIo�oil AAA� 4 �f ro urvvono a - � >N'Sll3ll H>bv LLOL�1H�aAd � �� e8t 3AY so� „ a m p i NOIIVIS 31111 w NQIIIIIDSIIv Nasinsa zoz/Us o O �oB6, aG 9 LL.: o*4V$ (D<WEIoR[Roo a W IL IW A 0 � w -20 x w � pd J y a F 1, r} I F i j I 1 I f m A .. z J v W � a 'I, \ke u }4 3 saa/n�as 6uyaaui6u-3 jo i uq—dag o,laz H N>31oadM s Sb'X31 Nd,d N,3,e oo,allo»s s 3r»w> /1S18HJ S/d2/OO JO '(1/0 H coc/t/v ♦e I,3tl vaau Bu3 olp�,8 uoP,of Pj�� A.I�-p� 4 k�� S r0 I1Ntl�n0 n F >N'Sll3ll H>nv ELOL a1H`7 bAd � �'�'*� e8t 3AY so� � m p NOIltl15 31111 w NQIIIIIDSIIN Nasinaa wa/ z o V 8 m Z 8 W IL � w pd o , 0 0 o n o o q o o� o _J �o a z w N c J II \ ry }4 3 so��,A�oS 5b.u&qu.,,5u_7�o �uo�;Jod�g d ....... ............. .. S VX31 JO (-1119 sncllyoj JO 1(1/0 IIS14YHO R �zi "ON NOIIVIS 3111d ................ ................. 'cQ7,, .............. 0 V .............. LU LL. .................. ............... ............... 41 EF------ If ................ ........... .............. ............... ............. .......... ............... ............. ............... ............ ............... ............... CL ............... F- 0 ............ oobi naL a,wnN—roaaM wma�ai caioNamrvaeai SVX31 a 3X»H n I1SI21H5 Sl7dNO5 jo ,1115 0 z o Siva .. _.,...,,- _•._• of 3 a fZOL/L/s yaawBu3 JIJ�S8 u9paJf�� eobat Xl'IlANH]slldNo] _ C '>N'sll3LH>dv4dOf1vM S4lONA3tl O NMOtle warm soioHA3.Nmoxe 3mtl NtlANOW SLsi y a m p ELOL'�1H'NI'l> '^ f'ON NOI1tl15 37111 Noliala>saa oN Naslrea rwlialaosaa "CN Nolslnas RH ME MH 01Hxxa w w �y ~O O V oH G z O £ m r 2 0 w oWo € d _ € 8-1 $ ❑�.�p 5� �w a w m �p o cW7 W U LL U W Z W W C7❑ Q' O 2 to W uJ O t~i1 O a - > W _�D�D�►,�> ►, e.� 0 Od O X 4 8 Q ❑ s9 Q D O w p �3 w wOO � Y � - Y U O g O t'.Jp --h CL, ED ot3 U s 04 �asnox EF = _ w UQ Q °ao o� o J� E ooi; J Qzo 0 O L d _Wo FU W F -7 < =m z❑ = a s 0�= p p 0 ��; a�3 i<c m = p QY Q 0 a; CD U— q _ QQ 1w.`: CD m� rvWoo _ LL K F UW wiz- _ ti CD P R � � Q UO? w „M a HEw a>wm y g �S —sl Ma <'nvpzzp1 e ,w oobiiaL ,wnN—ro,, SVX31 wo 3r3r ner3a maiv�Nowwo> n 3X»H n nNMeaJ 1SI?H� S d Od o ,illi o fZOL/L/S yaaw Bu3 010$B u9paJf�� eobnt Xl'IlANH]slldNo] C � '>N'Sll3LH>dv 4dOf1vM S4lONA3tl NMOtle warm soionA3n nmone 3mY NYmNOW SL5i y a m p O ELOL'�1H'JItlAdO> '^ E'ON NOI1tl15 37111 Nouaia>saa oN Nasirea rwuaiaosaa oN N.11-1 m o w< � Q< _ p 3 0� 111 0 0 �o oO _ z w p wap a w c W J o ® ILL �TCVIT 42 .w= Z o C'z 0= E2-° 3 9P=' w F ❑ w w w O 2 w � w o O � oO O o�. U H 3r d' 'am O a w wo w sa �� LL� = w ❑ � o z d0 � o N Z I = o I „ IE-w O 0 0 ❑ o � � �N I O� s q I' � I oo bi nzL a,wnN—roaaM wo>3rai nei3a a>Nen ananr SVX31 n 3X»H n o4��r �nNMeaJ """, I1SI?JH� S/7d2/Od �o Alli o z o Siva .. _.,...,,- _•._• of 3 a fZOL/L/S yaawBu3 JIJ�S8u9paJf�� eobnt Xl'IlA NH]slldNo] C � '>N'Sll3L H>dv 4dOf1vM S4lONA3tl NMOtle warm soioHA3n nmone 3mY NYmNOW SL5i y a m p O ELOL'�1H'JItlAdO> '^ E'ON NOI1tl15 37111 Nouaia>saa oN Nasirea rwuaiaosaa oN Noisinaa �= m G W � a _ Q � r o 0 om Z LLO w ❑ w W o W ti Nn ❑ w w rn K y w o0 0 v z w W a ❑ ` X Zy wQ G 5 _ < c X F 5 a lo .___________ � U --paw Q O - Ow 3 oo>iIizL a,wnN—roaaM - 1m3r3r nvi3a roaiNo>113— SVX31 n 3X» n o4��r �nNMeaJ """, I1SI?JH� S/7d2/Od �o Alli o e - a z o Siva .. _.,,..,,- _•._• 03 a fZOL/L/S yaawBu3 JIJ�S8 u9paJf�� eobnt Xl'I19NN]slldNo] C � '>N'Sll3LHJd'v 4]Of1vM S4lONA3tl NMOtle warm soionA3n nmone 3mY NYmNOW SL5i y a m p O ELOL'�1H'JItlAdO> '^ E'ON NOI1tl15 37111 Noliala>saaoN Naslrea rwlialaosaa 'oN Nolslnan � w m r_ ¢ E� _ - U Q a Z 3 r4p _N ELL M. p 0 4 u H H4 Y W U Z iF s w yL g gay x w (DI Y - w LU O W O H y zp 2 z o �w � ❑ O _ z z w w U6 �w Z a aoO�6 NV Hl 65 mOp000p �® a�� m q � w W p W Z � m� a � U 3 p .. u3 ja °Oz I a I I LL I L _J r----� r----� r----� r----� r----� r----� r----� r----� r , to I to I� II IN to lol I= lol to I81 to lol I L____J L____J L____J L____J L____J L_ Illr T I I I I I I I �wa I w Z g l W z d I pl J i M J I pl J I$I w j = F'w 'ww s.� W I% Id IH IJ I5 INI �. LLX� LLI U w J L----J L____J L----J L____J L____J L___________J LJ Ui Q^ oo bi iaL a,wnN Hero,,m wmaiai cr via,1-110 anv SVX31 n 3X»H n I1SI?JHj S/7d2/Od jo Alli o _ a z o Siva .. _.,...,,- _•._• of 3 a fZOL/L/S yaawBu3 JIJ�S8u9paJf�� eobnt Xl'IlA NH]slldNo] C � '>N'Sll3L H>dv 4dOf1vM S4lONA3tl NMOtle warm soioHA3n nmone 3mY NYmNOW SL5i y a m p O ELOL'�1H'JItlAdO> '^ E'ON NOI1tl15 37111 Nouaia>saa oN Nasirea rwuaiaosaa oN N.11-1 _ m £ Z a_ oLLW�B :.a oar w LU F � r or0 tii a w`s _ El O O p( z W c� --- nod Q Q z W O w ° o �LL �g 9f]DD 3 so��,A�oS 5b.u&qu.,,5u_7�o �uo�;Jod�g ....... ............. .. S VX31 0 IIS14YHO S/?C/IYOJ JO 1(1/0 Ron 74 S'ON NOIIVIS 3111d LU LL. Y"L b� ---------------- ...............9"" sooin�oS 6uuaam6u_7�o �uoi ;Jodap o..az ...H.N......M SVX31 s sa3r 3 /1S14YHO S/)dl/oo JO ,ll/o aoz/z/s A9 N 3tl .,raau ei3 plphS 8 uop�of Ronj�f rD 119axJ 5 �' >N Sll3lln>aaaao�l ELOL,1n�a.a �� '..,�� o, n�3nnmonn 08L3nvNv�nowsLsl „ p a ��•' sn\" E'ON NOI1v15 3811 N Hasin3a LU 0 s _ Z � a � a k _ LL �o a � MEMO J w � _ o o - . nQ } 0 `.::.� 8e9 -.. M y 1 O _ 0 _ L I r � a ob =� w W � a W m 4